LL
ELLUM OULU ILE La
Uy
OORIEA LULL ALUM TLIO?
7 ary
a ei )
rake
a) an rept
y
FORTY-THIRD
ANNUAL REPORT OF THE
>. BUREAU OF
AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
TO THE SECRETARY OF THE
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
1925-1926
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON
1928
ADDITIONAL COPIES
OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE PROCURED FROM
THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS
U.S.GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D. C.
AT
$2.75 PER COPY
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION,
BuREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY,
Washington, D. C., September 15, 1926.
Srr: I have the honor to submit herewith the Forty-third
Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 1926.
With appreciation of your aid in the work under my
charge, I am
Very respectfully, yours,
J. WALTER FEWKEs,
Chief.
Dr. CHARLES D. WALCOTT,
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
iit
7
ae
sok vpolonitd slapen vibe We ols to dio
JATVIMeY AAT FO Hepa
orarank AAlaOsnnidG
oan el yap, 20,
DEAL TL wlakdna
frislasrhont aie AL eorpoeh
ASU Een babe aye |
“un brn Ait Ont ai nes UO. Ye sie eons
ena aaeten Weo ti
wa) . ia | ae
Orne OL eat ee
“Oust feeds) alt 16 gules
CONTENTS
REPORT OF THE CHIEF
BS VS GE FILA Ul GEES CIC Ll CS ete ae ee ee
MDECLAIETESCAT CH Cx ey xem eee ee pie aha Nae ea Be
Hditorialnworks and pupa ONS ses = == a= ae we ae ee ee eee
Mhustrations=_—- = 2 ps a a os oe eS Se et Le ae SS a LenS 2
hibranyee eee Se eee fe aS
@ollections===-=-—= —-+-- = ee ee ee ae ee ee
IPRODeR tee ae ee ae eee eae seems Bos Ee ee ee ae a
Miscellancouss2— 25-26) o es ee ean =— Os ee aN See
ACCOMPANYING PAPERS
The Osage Tribe: Two Versions of the Child-naming Rite, by Francis La
RCS CHC awe = eae i a ete ae oe a eae ene ee eae eae eee eee
Wawenock Myth Texts from Maine, by Frank G. Speck__-------------
Native Tribes and Dialects of Connecticut, a Mohegan-Pequot Diary,
bypiiran ke Gens pecksae. seme ase a ee ne eee ee Pee ee
Picuris Children’s Stories, by John P. Harrington and Helen H. Roberts_
Troquoian Cosmology—Second Part, by J. N. B. Hewitt__-_-_-_-_-_---
Indexsae sas 2 eee ee eos
23
165
199
289
449
821
STVATZOSU
is at WO LORS
41S. DAPECAI MOOI
al atinkr 7 ot, wath sqitinan AAT Penh? te winter owt |: pale em 2
ini 2
ant mira 2? diver’, u 1 rly, ect ated'T dvelé A500 ’
Put unt ip teaporieh 2 Sienesuan > hu! staal tite sod? ovlhakt bf
avr - dough daw al :
bh _¥i ioid tt we "7 bin woh (iern es | oh wel eotyat? a'pahlieo Pies ee
he : : iwalE UY bade bjoontt—ypolamecn)
pwr ee 2 ees _avtink
mae
REPORT OF THE CHIEF
FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT
OF THE
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
J. WALTER Frewxes, Chief
The operations of the Bureau of American Ethnology
during the fiscal year ended June 30, 1926, were conducted
in accordance with the act of Congress approved April 22,
1925, making appropriations for sundry civil expenses of the
Government, which act contains the following item:
American ethnology: For continuing ethnological researches among
the American Indians and the natives of Hawaii, including the exca-
vation and preservation of archewologic remains, under the direction
of the Smithsonian Institution, including necessary employees and
the purchase of necessary books and periodicals, $57,160.
In pursuance of the requirements for the excavation and
preservation of ruins contained in the above item, consid-
erable work has been done in the region near Flagstaff,
Ariz. Arizona shows many evidences of a prehistoric abo-
riginal population and is a State particularly favorable to the
study of prehistoric ruins. Thus far very few ruins have
been excavated in northern Arizona and very scanty material
has been obtained for a study of the objects illustrating the
former culture of this region.
Research in this line was inaugurated by the bureau in
1907 at Casa Grande and has been continued in successive
years at the Mesa Verde National Park, Colo. Formerly
walls of ruins were destroyed in the search for small speci-
mens, such as pottery, and thus work of great archeological
value was lost. In such a case the institution represented
by an archeologist who willfully destroys walls to obtain
pottery or other artifacts becomes little more than an organ-
1
2 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
ized pothunter. The method adopted by some institutions
of burying the walls after objects have been extracted from
the rooms, while intended as a means of preservation, is not
satisfactory. The Bureau of American Ethnology, however,
when the walls are not so mutilated that they can not be
repaired, has endeavored to preserve them for future students.
SYSTEMATIC RESEARCHES
The chief of the bureau has headed an expedition to
determine the western extension of the pueblo area in Ari-
zona, where comparatively little attention had been given
to the character of the sedentary life of the Indians in pre-
historic times. This includes the region west of the Little
Colorado River which is archeologically a terra incognita.
The site chosen by the chief to be excavated is situated
about 6 miles from Flagstaff on the National Old Trails
Highway. The work was begun on May 27 and was
unfinished at the close of the fiscal year.
As a result of this excavation there has emerged from the
ground near Elden Mountain a rectangular building meas-
uring 145 by 125 feet, containing nearly 40 rooms and a
large kiva, from a study of which a good idea can be obtained
of the aboriginal architecture of this neighborhood. The
building was a compact community house, in places two
stories high, whose upper walls, judging from the amount of
stones found in the rooms, were formerly 4 or 5 feet higher
than at present. No walls were visible when the work began,
but the earth has been removed and they now rise to a height
of from 4 to 10 feet.
The rooms are comparatively large and compactly united
without any visible outside entrances, being formerly entered
by ladders and a hatchway in the roof. No windows or
lateral doorways are visible in the walls now standing. In
order to protect this large building from the elements its
walls have been repaired where necessary and their tops
covered with Portland cement to prevent erosion.
The most striking result of the work has been the accu-
mulation of a large collection of characteristic pottery from
the two cemeteries which were discovered a short distance
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 3
from the northern and eastern walls and which extended over
a considerable area, but never very distant from the pueblo
itself. A number of skeletons were found, some of which
were nearly perfect, but many were more or less fragmentary.
Several of these skeletons have been brought back for the
study of specialists. They appear to have artificially
deformed skulls. There was no common orientation, al-
though a majority were interred with heads to the east.
The distinction of the kinds of pottery would naturally be
reserved for a more complete report, which will appear later.
As a rule, however, the number of varieties was rather limited
and there were very few intrusions from outside, all of which
goes to show the ancient character of the ruin and the isola-
tion of its people from others in the southwest. The typical
specimens of pottery may be grouped under a few charac-
teristic types. Perhaps the most abundant is colored dull
red on the exterior with glossy black interior. The exterior
surface is corrugated or smooth. From its abundance this
type may be known as the Flagstaff ware. It is never
decorated with painted designs. A more striking type is
white with black decorations, mainly geometrical figures,
which is widely distributed in Arizona. There occur also a
few specimens of red ware with black interiors, which bear
indubitable evidence of having been derived from the settle-
ments on the banks of the Little Colorado or near Tuba City.
The forms of the Elden Pueblo pottery are food bowls,
ladles, dippers, vases, mugs, and ollas. Several very charac-
teristic pieces of the black and white ware are effigy forms.
There occur remarkable bracelets made of clam shell (Pectwn-
culus) with incised ornamentation from the Pacific coast,
and there are ornamented bone objects, which may be
mentioned among the rare specimens. Turquoise beads and
shells, which when strung formed strands of a necklace
several feet in length, were sifted out of the soil found near
the necks of skeletons. There were undoubted examples of
shells set with turquoise mosaics, but they were more or less
damaged by long presence in the ground. Stone implements
were excavated more commonly in the rooms of the building,
4 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
and there were several different forms of paint grinders which
enrich the collection. There is nowhere a larger or better
collection from Arizona than that excavated from Elden
Pueblo.
One of the most significant discoveries at Elden Pueblo
was a room called the kiva, or ceremonial chamber, about
midway in the length of the ruin on its east side. The kiva
has thus far not been described from the Flagstaff area and
its existence has been denied in the ruins of this area.
The kiva of Elden Pueblo is very large and rectangular in
form with round corners. It is partly subterranean and has
a banquette extending wholly around the wall of the room.
It also has a ventilator opening externally in the east wall,
peculiarities which occur in the ruins at Marsh Pass and else-
where in northern Arizona. It thus appears that the leg-
end of the modern Hopi that certain of the Hopi clans for-
merly lived on the San Juan and its tributaries is not fanciful,
but that what they recount of the southern migration of
these clans before they settled on their present mesas is sup-
ported by archeological evidences in architecture as well as
ceramics.
Several Hopi visitors retold their legends, published by the
chief many years ago, that the ruins under Mount Elden were
settlements of the Hopi in their ancient migrations, and as
far as it goes the archeology of Elden Pueblo supports these
legends, which are sometimes very vague, differing some-
what in minor particulars. These legends differ in the names
of the Hopi clans that lived at Elden Pueblo, but the Snake,
Badger, and Patki are all mentioned as former inhabitants.
The particular claim of this pueblo for popular consider-
ation is that it is easily accessible and not far from the city
of Flagstaff. It bids fair to be visited in the future by many
tourists who now pass through northern Arizona to visit its
attractions, such as the Grand Canyon and the great bridges,
and to attend the ceremonial survivals of the ancient religious
rites of the Hopi. The number of visitors to Elden Pueblo
during its excavation was very large and consisted not only
of a large number of residents of Flagstaff but also of tourists
from distant States.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 5
Before commencing the archeological work, the chief, as-
sisted by Mr. John P. Harrington, ethnologist, cooperated
with Mr. J. O. Prescott, of the Starr Piano Co., Richmond,
Ind., in the recording of some Hopi songs. Through the
kindness of the Office of Indian Affairs, four of the older Hopi
were brought from Walpi to the Grand Canyon, where 11
katcina songs were recorded. It was particularly fitting
that the records were made at the Grand Canyon, as it holds
such a prominent position in Hopi mythology.
The chief was also assisted in the archeological work by
Mr. Harrington and by Mr. Anthony W. Wilding, stenog-
rapher. Their assistance was invaluable and did much to
make the field work a success.
During the past year the bureau has had in the field a
larger number of investigators than in any previous year
during the last decade. Field work has been done in var-
ious parts of our country, from Alaska to Florida, and while
the line of research has in some instances been more or less
limited in its nature, the total results have brought into the
office much new data regarding the Indian life and a larger
number of specimens illustrative of it than has resulted
from field work in comparatively recent years.
It is recognized by the chief that the time that can be
devoted to rescuing data regarding the life and habits of
the American Indians is more or less restricted—that is,
Indian culture is rapidly fading away and is doomed in a
short time to utter extinction. While this is true of ethno-
logical data it is not necessarily true’ of archeological material.
In fact, the antiquities of our country belonging to the past
of the Indian are yearly attracting more and more attention,
and in order to keep pace with this interest the bureau has
taken up in its field work a considerable proportion of
archeological problems.
At the beginning of the fiscal year Mr. J. N. B. Hewitt,
ethnologist, took up anew the work of transliterating,
amending, and translating the Chippewa text of The Myth
of the Daymaker, by Mr. George Gabaoosa, and also that
of an Ottawa version of a portion of the Nanabozho cycle
of myths by John L. Miscogeon.
6 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
In October Mr. Hewitt began the work of reclassifying
and recataloguing the linguistic, historical, and other ethno-
logical manuscripts in the archives of the bureau. In this
work he was assisted by Miss Mae W. Tucker. The card
index consists of 2,924 items, with approximately 6,150
cross-reference cards.
During the fiscal year Dr. John R. Swanton, ethnologist,
made final additions to his papers on the ‘‘Social Organiza-
tion and Social Usages of the Indians of the Creek Confed-
eracy,”’ “Religious Beliefs and Medical Practices of the
Creek Indians,” and “ Aboriginal Culture of the Southeast. ”’
These papers are now going through the press. He has also
finished the scientific editing of a paper on the “Trails of
the Southeast,’’ by William E. Myer, which, with those just
mentioned, is to appear in the Forty-second Annual Report.
With the help of Miss Mae W. Tucker, stenographer,
Doctor Swanton made a considerable advance in compiling a
card catalogue of the words of the Timucua language pre-
viously extracted from missionary publications of the Spanish
fathers, Pareja and Movilla.
Doctor Swanton also continued his investigations bearing
on the aboriginal trail system of North America.
Dr. Truman Michelson, ethnologist, continued — his
researches among the Algonquian Indians of Iowa, concen-
trating on the gens festivals of the Fox Indians, especially
those of the Thunder and Bear gentes. He also revised in
the field the list of Fox stems incorporated in the Fortieth
Annual Report of the’ bureau. In August he went to
Odanah, Wis., to gain further first-hand information on
the Ojibwa Indians, and enough material was secured to
show decided dialectic differences from the western Ojibwa
dialects. The social organization of the Ojibwa is relatively
simple as compared with that of the Foxes, and the various
gentes lack rituals peculiar to themselves, in sharp contrast
with Fox customs. At Baraga and L’Anse, Mich., Doctor
Michelson located one Stockbridge (Mahican) family in the
vicinity, but unfortunately none spoke their native language.
The Ojibwa dialect, though not identical with that spoken
at Odanah, is closely allied to it. He also made a pre-
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT G
liminary survey of the Ojibwa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi,
finding that the various languages still persist and that their
ethnology is better preserved than might be expected.
Doctor Michelson returned to Washington on September
19, when he prepared for publication by the bureau two
papers on sacred packs of the Fox Indians and their appur-
tenant gens festivals, one called A‘peniwiini* belong-
ing to the Thunder gens; the other, Sagima'kwiiwa, belong-
ing to the Bear gens. Doctor Michelson also completed
typewriting the English translation and Indian text of a
Fox sacred pack belonging to the Thunder gens formerly
in possession of Pyatwaya. A fuller text than this on
Pyatwaya’s pack, written in the current syllabary, was
restored phonetically, as was the Indian text on the Thunder
Dance of the Bear gens, a complete version having been
obtained.
Mr. J. P. Harrington, ethnologist, was engaged during
the fiseal year in the important work of rescuing what can
still be learned of the vanishing culture of the Mission Indians
of California. Work was continued at ruined village sites
of the Santa Ines, Ojai, and Simi Valleys, and at several of
these sites extensive excavations were made, revealing an
earlier and later coast Indian culture. Pictographs were
discovered and photographed, and also many rocks who
were “first people” and petrified and figure in Indian legends
still extant. Spirit footprints on the rocks, both of moc-
casined and bare feet, made by these “first people’’ when the
earth was still soft and muddy, were found at several places
and photographed. At San Marcos the bowlders on a hill-
side represent the warriors of a mythic battle; some are
standing with the blood from wounds running down their
sides, seen as stains on the rock. A curious medicine rock
was also visited, the size of a man and standing erect and sur-
rounded at least at the present time by a bunch of opuntia
cactus which keeps the curious at a respectful distance. At
Rincon were photographed a couple of tall bowlders which
stand 6 feet apart. To have good luck in hunting, so that
one would be able to jump successfully among the rocks in
8 BUREAU ‘OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
the mountains, it was the custom for Indian boys to spring
from one to the other of these bowlders. They also were
called ‘‘medicine.’’
Mr. Harrington also discovered at Rincon the ruins of
a medicine house formerly used by the island wizards for
secret ceremonies. An enormous bowlder is supported on
several rocks forming a natural cave, still smudged on the
interior by the smoke of ancient fires. In front of this
chamber on the east is a circular corral or parapet 18 feet
in diameter and rising to a height of 3 feet. From the top
of this stone wall rafters had formerly extended to the roof
of the cave chamber, and on these thatch had been placed.
It is believed by the Indians that if a person comes upon
this place by mistake, thunder, lightning, and rain will
immediately result.
The construction of a Mission Indian house by one of the
few survivors who still know how to make them was next
attempted under the direction of Mr. Harrington, and an
excellent series of photographs was obtained, showing the
house in all the successive stages of building. The jacal is
slightly elliptical in shape with the door, less than 4 feet
high, at one end. Door leaves, both of woven tules and of
jarilla, were constructed. The diameter of the structure
is 13 feet and it is only 7 feet high, with an unduly ample
smokehole at the top.
Postholes a step apart and the same distance in depth
were dug with a short bar of willow, the earth being scooped
out with the hand. Tall and slender willow poles were
selected with the greatest care from a place where the
growth was thick. These poles were burnt down. Eight
of them were first erected in the postholes, forming a Greek
cross. Opposite pairs of poles were then arched and lashed
together with yucca tyings. Only after the complete frame-
work of uprights had been constructed were the “‘latas”’
or horizontals lashed on at intervals of a foot apart. On
these a thick thatching of deerbrush was sewed, the bottom
layer being stem down but all the higher layers tip down,
the inverted leaves better shedding the water. The sew-
ing was done with yucca shreds, using a great needle of wood
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 9
ealled ‘‘raton’”’ in Spanish, which is poked through the
thatch; the sewing was performed by two Indian workers,
one outside and one inside.
An expedition to the Cafiada de las Uvas proved rich in
discovery along several different lines. At several of the sites
the old hut circles could still be traced on the surface of the
ground and proved that our recently constructed house was
about normal size. The old fireplaces in the center were also
discovered.
Special attention was given by Mr. Harrington to the site
of the old rancheria of Misyahu. This place resembles a
giant citadel when viewed from down canyon. A great rocky
hill was completely covered with wigwams, 12 to even 20 feet
in diameter. At the base of the cliff a strong flowing spring
bursts forth from an otherwise dry arroyo, 75 feet below the
Indian city. It was discovered that the Misyahu cemetery
has unfortunately been washed away by the freshets of the
arroyo. Chorty village was located, also Sikutip, a mile
distant. Four large springs with pictographs traced on their
rocky walls were located in the vicinity of Choriy. At
Sikutip the Indian huts were formerly clustered at the south-
west border of the cienega.
In May Mr. Harrington proceeded to Flagstaff, Ariz., where
he assisted in bringing four Hopi singers to the Grand Canyon
for the purpose of recording their songs. At Flagstaff,
Mr. Harrington also assisted the chief in the excavation of the
Elden Pueblo ruin.
During the fiscal year Dr. Francis La Flesche, ethnologist,
was engaged in classifying the personal names of the full-
blood members of the Osage tribe according to their places in
the various gentes that comprise the tribe. Each name refers,
cryptically, to the origin story of the gens to which it belongs.
Thus, the name Star-radiant is itself meaningless until some
one who is versed in the tribal rites explains that it refers to
the story of the people who, when they came from the blue
sky to earth, came suddenly upon a stranger whose dignified
appearance and bearing immediately struck them with awe
and reverence. When the people asked ‘“‘ Who art thou”’ the
19078°—28
2
10 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
stranger replied, “I am Star-radiant who has brought for you
from the starry regions, Peace and Brotherly Love.” This
and other star names belong to the Wa-tse-tzi (People of the
Stars) gens, in whose keeping are the House of Refuge and the
Fireplace of Peace. The meaning of the name Pi-si (acorn)
is also obscure until it is explained that it points to the story
of the people of the Tsi-zhu gens and subgentes, who when
they came from the sky to the earth, alighted upon seven red
oak trees. The alighting of the people on the tops of the
trees sent down showers of acorns, and a voice spoke, saying,
“Your little ones shall be as numerous as the acorns that fall
from these trees.’”’ About 1,991 gentile names have been
recorded, covering 83 pages. The translations of the names
are yet to be made.
Doctor La Flesche also spent three weeks’ time assisting
Mr. DeLancey Gill, illustrator, in classifying negatives of
photographs of Ponea, Omaha, and Osage Indians.
A vocabulary of the Osage language has also been started
by Doctor La Flesche and Dr. John R. Swanton. So far some
3,000 or more words have been recorded with translations.
SPECIAL RESEARCHES
The research in Indian music by Miss Frances Densmore
during this fiscal year has been marked by the collecting and
developing of extensive material among the Menominee of
Wisconsin, and the completion of the book on Papago music
which is now ready for publication. The proof of the book
on “The Music of the Tule Indians of Panama” was read,
and the text of ‘‘Pawnee Music” (apart from analyses) was
retyped, putting it in final form.
The titles of the manuscripts furnished to the bureau dur-
ing the fiscal year are as follows: “‘Songs connected with
ceremonial games and adoption dances of the Menominee
Indians,” ‘Menominee songs connected with hunting bun-
dles, war bundles, and the moccasin game,” ‘‘ Menominee
songs connected with a boy’s fast, also dream songs, love
songs, and flute melodies,’ ‘‘Dream dance songs of the
Menominee Indians,” ‘‘Songs used in the treatment of the
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT lt
sick by Menominee Indians,” and ‘‘Menominee war songs
and other songs.”’
The Menominee Indians have been in contact with civili-
zation for many years, but retain their old customs to a
remarkable degree. Miss Densmore attended a meeting of
their medicine lodge (corresponding to the Chippewa grand
medicine), at which two persons were initiated. She wit-
nessed the ceremony for about four hours, listening to the
songs, and presented tobacco, which was received in a cere-
monial manner. She was also present at a gathering where
a lacrosse game was played ‘“‘in fulfillment of a dream,” and
witnessed the similar playing of a ‘“‘dice and bowl” game by
a woman who had dreamed of the “four spirit women in the
east’”’ and been instructed by them to play the game once
each year.
The songs of the dream dance received extended considera-
tion, the dance having been witnessed in 1910.
Among the interesting war songs were those connected
with the enlistment and service of Menominee in the Civil
War, with the songs of the charms (‘‘fetiches’’) by which
they believed that they were protected. Songs of the war-
fare against Black Hawk were obtained, and one very old
war song with the words ‘“‘The Queen (of England) wants us
to fight against her enemies.”
Mr. Gerard Fowke, special archeologist, was engaged for
three months, February to April, in making a survey and
explorations of a group of aboriginal remains near Marks-
ville, La. The works consisted of 3 inclosures, 20 mounds,
8 lodge sites, and several village sites, extending a distance
of 2 miles along the bluff overlooking Old River and in the
bottom land bordering that water course. Eight of the
mounds are of the flat-topped, domiciliary type; the others
are conical or dome-shaped, usually classed as burial mounds.
Six of the last were fully excavated. Two of them contained
evidence of many interments; two were house sites indicating
at least three periods of construction; the remaining two
yielded nothing that would show the reason for their build-
ing. All were singularly barren of contents. Only traces of
bones were found in the graves. The manner of construc-
12 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
tion of these mounds and the methods of burial were of a
character which differentiates them from any other that have
so far been reported to the bureau. They do not seem to
belong with those to the east of the Mississippi, or with
those which are so numerous to the westward.
A full report, with map and illustrations, has been
prepared.
During the months of April, May, and June, Mr. H. W.
Krieger, curator of ethnology of the National Museum, was
detailed to engage in field work for the Bureau of American
Ethnology. He was authorized by the chief of the bureau
to proceed to Walla Walla, Wash., and vicinity for the pur-
pose of studying the archeology of the upper Columbia
River Valley, thence to proceed to southeastern Alaska to
undertake the restoration of Old Kasaan, a national monu-
ment on Prince of Wales Island
A careful inspection was made of the various collections
of archeological material gathered by members of the Colum-
bia River Archeological Society at Walla Walla, Wenatchee,
Quincy, and other points in the State of Washington.
Accompanied by Mr. H. T. Harding, a local archeologist,
who had spent over 20 years in archeological investigations
along the upper Columbia, a reconnaissance was undertaken
from The Dalles, in Oregon, to Wenatchee, Wash., for the
purpose of plotting a map of the known archeological sites
and selecting likely stations for excavation. The old Indian
camp site at Wahluke Ferry, located at the extreme southern
extent of the big bend of the Columbia, was selected as the
most promising. There were no traces of previous disturb-
ance by curio hunters. The ruins of the old Indian camp
site and the cemetery near by yielded several hundred
objects, most of which had been placed in the group burials
as ceremonial offerings accompanying the cremation form ot
burial. No objects were found in the more deeply placed
graves where no cremation practices had been observed.
The restoration of the national monument of old Kasaan,
southeast Alaska, has long been the ambition of the chief ot
the bureau, but conditions at this unique old Haida village
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 13
were found to be very discouraging. Rainfall reaches a
total of 235 days annually at the town of Ketchikan on Revil-
lagigedo Island near by, and the process of rotting and dis-
integration is practically continuous throughout the year.
Many of the fine old carvings on the totem poles and memo-
rial columns still standing are either partially or entirely
obliterated, while every house in the village has either fallen
into decay or was burned in the recent fire which destroyed
the major portion of the village. The house (“big doings’’)
and the totem pole erected by the former Haida chief Skay-al
are among the objects consumed in this fire.
Several of the house sites at Old Kasaan, Tongass, Village
Island, and Cape Fox village were excavated in an attempt
to determine the relative age of the settlements of extreme
southeastern Alaska. But few objects were obtained which
might indicate a culture older than the Hudson Bay Co.
post at Fort Simpson, British Columbia, or the Russian
settlement at Sitka, Alaska, on the north. The few poles
worthy of restoration at Old Kasaan were scraped and rotted
wood was removed. The tall alder brush was cut from the
immediate vicinity of the poles. Information relative to
house, totem, and place names was obtained from a few
survivors of the old village still living either at Wrangell,
Ketchikan, or the recently established Indian village of
New Kasaan, about 40 miles from the old abandoned village.
Upon returning to the United States, the task of complet-
ing the map of archeological sites on the upper Columbia
River to the Canadian border was completed. Excavation
was undertaken at eight different stations along the river
between Wenatchee, Wash., and the mouth of the Okanagan
River.
Mr. Henry B. Collins, jr., assistant curator of ethnology
of the National Museum, was detailed by the bureau to carry
on archeological work in southern Louisiana and Mississipp1,
a region in which searcely any work of this nature had pre-
viously been done. A reconnaissance of the field was begun
in April, first in southern Mississippi, where a number of
mounds were examined, and then along the low-lying Gulf
14 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
coast of Louisiana. Many earth mounds and shell heaps
were found throughout this latter region, indicating the exist-
ence there in prehistoric times of an advanced culture of
fairly uniform type. Particular attention was given to the
21 mounds on Pecan Island in the lower part of Vermillion
Parish. This part of Louisiana was occupied in historic times
by the Attacapa, a cannibalistic tribe of comparatively low
culture. The builders of the Pecan Island mounds, however,
were apparently not Attacapa, but an earlier and more
advanced people, who made an excellent type of pottery and
who were skilled workers in stone, shell, and bone. The pres-
ence in these Pecan Island mounds of native copper and
galena, as well as slate and other kinds of stone not native to
the section, indicates that at a very early date the Indians
of lower Louisiana had trade relations with other tribes to
the north and east. In addition to the cultural material col-
lected, a number of undeformed skulls were obtained from
Pecan Island and these will be of particular value, since
skeletal material from Louisiana is scarce.
Upon completion of the work in Louisiana in the latter
part of June, Mr. Collins proceeded to eastern Mississippi
and located the sites of several of the historic Choctaw vil-
lages and secured physical measurements on 72 living Choc-
taw in the vicinity of Philadelphia, Miss. The latter phase
of the work was in continuation of similar studies on the
Choctaw begun in the summer of 1925, and was made pos-
sible by an appropriation from the American Association for
the Advancement of Science.
Dr. J. W. Gidley, assistant curator of vertebrate paleon-
tology in the National Museum, was detailed to the bureau
for a continuation of work begun in the summer in conjunc-
tion with Amherst College, in exploring the fossil beds in the
vicinity of Melbourne and Vero, Fla., for fossil bones and pos-
sible human remains. Mr. C. Wythe Cook, of the United
States Geological Survey, aided Doctor Gidley in a deter-
mination of the geologic formation of the bed. Most of the
work of this expedition was to verify the geological obser-
vations of the previous expedition and to obtain if possible
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 1135)
more evidence on the subject. More than 100 specimens
of fossil bones were added to the collection and some new
forms were represented, the most important of which were
fossil remains of a large extinct jaguar and teeth of an extinct
species of Termarctos, a genus of bear living now in South
America and having never been found before in North
America. Several Indian mounds were visited and ex-
amined, a survey was taken of the Grant mound, 14 miles
south of Melbourne, and a plot made of the general struc-
ture of the shell heap, burial mound, and connecting ridges.
Doctor Gidley also visited some mounds near Sarasota that
had been reported to the bureau, but found that they had
been dug into by curio hunters. He also examined the
region at Lake Thonotosassa, 14 miles northeast of Tampa.
Here he secured a few Indian artifacts that had been picked
up by Mr. Samuel Conant. Mr. Conant also guided Doctor
Gidley to an ancient workshop, which covers several acres and
seemed to be a favorable location for future investigation.
Dr. Ales Hrdli¢ka, curator of physical anthropology in
the National Museum, was detailed to the bureau and sent to
Alaska in May for the purpose of studying the archeology of
Seward Island in the vicinity of Nome. As he did not reach
the site of his work until the close of the fiscal year, a consid-
eration of the results of his expedition is reserved until next
year.
EDITORIAL WORK AND PUBLICATIONS
The editing of the publications of the bureau was continued
through the year by Mr. Stanley Searles, editor, assisted
by Mrs. Frances 8. Nichols, editorial assistant. The status
of the publications is presented in the following summary.
PUBLICATION ISSUED
Fortieth Annual Report—Accompanying papers: The Mythical Ori-
gin of the White Buffalo Dance of the Fox Indians; The Autobi-
ography of a Fox Indian Woman; Notes on Fox Mortuary Cus-
toms and Beliefs; Notes on the Fox Society Known as ‘‘Those
Who Worship the Little Spotted Buffalo;”’ The Traditional Origin
of the Fox Society Known as “The Singing Around Rite,” by Tru-
man Michelson. 664 pp., 1 pl., 1 fig.
16 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
PUBLICATIONS IN PRESS OR IN PREPARATION
Forty-first Annual Report—Accompanying papers: Coiled Basketry
in British Columbia and Surrounding Region (Boas, assisted by
Haeberlin, Roberts, and Teit); Two Prehistoric Villages in Middle
Tennessee (Myer).
Forty-second Annual Report—Accompanying papers: Social Organ-
ization and Social Usages of the Indians of the Creek Confederacy ;
Religious Beliefs and Medical Practices of the Creek Indians;
Aboriginal Culture of the Southeast (Swanton); Indian Trails of
the Southeast (Myer).
Bulletin 82.—Archeological Observations North of the Rio Colorado
(Judd).
Bulletin 83.—Burials of the Algonquian, Siouan, and Caddoan Tribes
West of the Mississippi (Bushnell).
Bulletin 84.—Vocabulary of the Kiowa Language (Harrington).
DISTRIBUTION OF PUBLICATIONS
The distribution of the publications of the bureau has
been continued under the immediate charge of Miss Helen
Munroe, assisted by Miss Emma B. Powers. Publications
were distributed as follows:
Report volumes and separateses = oe 2.6 esses ees a= eee 5, 729
Bulletinsrandtsepanstess a2. =a a= = ee ee ae eer 6, 582
Contributions to North American Ethnology -------------- 33)
Introductions? 44488-46)-U* sew ayes Ae ae eee 12
Mascelllaneousspublicationsae == as ee = ee ee 637 -
Totaleps ts 2t sits shes. Replies ees eee 12, 993
As compared with the fiscal year ended June 30, 1925,
there was an increase of 5,639 publications distributed. This
was partly due to the fact that more publications were
issued by the bureau than in the previous year and partly
to the increase in demand for the works.
Five addresses were added to the mailing list during the
year and 37 taken from the list, making a net decrease of 32.
The list now stands at 1,738 in addition to members of the
staff of the institution and its branches.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT AW
ILLUSTRATIONS
Mr. DeLancey Gill, illustrator, continued the preparation
of the illustrations of the bureau. A summary of the work
follows:
Negatives of ethnologic and archeologic subjects_----------- 34
Negative films from field exposures_____-__-_------------- 15
Rortrammerativesyonundianse 2s 2 6 eee es hte ee 5
hotopraphie: prince ts seitt = Suiys 22s Ea Ose ee weet 466
Drawings prepared for book illustrations________________-~- 41
Illustrations prepared for engraving (Bureau of American
LDH eUAXe) Koy ear2))| ee ae ee tees SE nee ee See a 567
Illustrations prepared for engraving (other Smithsonian
TMS CUGUGT ORY DUO SUS) pee pe ee ee ee ee 681
1B overR GTS” [OOO IRS We a See eee a ee eee 635
Edition prints of colored plates examined at Government
Hrimitin o4@ fice ye sae ee et wee ees ET pe Sele seeks 17, 000
On the Ist of February, 1926, the services of a photographer
were discontinued and the work was taken over by the
photographer of the Smithsonian Institution in cooperation
with the Bureau of American Ethnology.
LIBRARY
The reference library has continued under the immediate
care of Miss Ella Leary, librarian, assisted by Mr. Thomas
Blackwell. During the year 560 volumes were accessioned,
and 200 pamphlets were received and catalogued; also 2,992
serials, chiefly the publications of learned societies, were
received and recorded. Of these, 155 were acquired by
purchase, 207 by binding of periodicals, and the remainder
through gift and exchange. The library now contains 26,661
volumes, 15,712 pamphlets, and several thousand unbound
periodicals. During the year there were sent to the bindery
207 volumes. In addition to the use of its own library,
which is becoming more and more valuable through exchange
and by limited purchase, it was found necessary to draw on
the Library of Congress for the loan of about 200 volumes.
The purchase of books and periodicals has been restricted
to such as relate to the bureau’s researches. Although
maintained primarily as a reference library for the bureau
18 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
staff, its value is becoming better known to students not
connected with the Smithsonian Institution, who make
frequent use of it. During the year the library was used
also by officers of the executive departments and the Library
of Congress. The library is greatly indebted to many
private individuals for numerous donations of publications.
Mention may be made of a collection given by Mrs. Safford,
consisting of 50 books and one manuscript belonging to
her husband, the late Dr. W. E. Safford.
During the year the cataloguing has been carried on as
new accessions were acquired and good progress was made
in cataloguing ethnologic and related articles in the earlier
serials.
The library, among other respresentative libraries, is
cooperating with the Library of Congress in checking up
the ‘‘Union List of Serials of the United States and Canada,”
compiled by the H. W. Wilson Co. This necessitates the
checking up of our entire collection of periodicals. Con-
siderable time has been given to this work.
COLLECTIONS
88232. Two plaster casts made by Mr. Egberts of an amulet sent
to the bureau for identification by W. W. C. Dunlop,
Codrington College, Barbados, B. W. I.
90380. Two chert rejects, 4 potsherds, and 1 small arrow point
found in a gravel pit about one-half mile west of the Grand
River, near Prior, Okla., and presented to the bureau by
Grant Foreman.
90604. Archeological and skeletal material collected by H. B.
Collins, Jr., at various localities in Mississippi during 1925.
(78 specimens. )
90652. Collection of 44 archeological specimens from graves at
Vantage Ferry, Wash., purchased by the bureau from
Earle O. Roberts.
90813. Collection of 8 stone and shell implements found by Charles
T. Earle on the beach at Shaw’s Point, Fla., and presented
by him to the bureau.
91825. Collection of about 19 lots of human skeletal material col-
lected in Florida by Dr. J. W. Gidley.
92317. Archeological specimens collected in Louisiana by Gerard
Fowke. (108 specimens.)
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 19
PROPERTY
Furniture and office equipment were purchased to the
amount of $750.
MISCELLANEOUS
Clerical.—The correspondence and other clerical work of
the office has been conducted by Miss May 8. Clark, clerk
to the chief. Mr. Anthony W. Wilding, stenographer, was
engaged in taking dictation from the chief and in attending
to various duties incident to the work in the main office.
On May 15 he accompanied the chief to the field, acting
as general assistant. Miss Mae W. Tucker, stenographer,
was engaged in assisting Dr. John R. Swanton in compiling
a Timucua dictionary and in assisting Mr. Hewitt in reclas-
sifying and recataloguing the manuscripts in the bureau
archives. Mrs. Frances 8. Nichols assisted the editor.
Personnel.—Mr. James E. Connor, who received a tem-
porary appointment as minor clerk February 4, to assist in
the cataloguing of the archives of the bureau, was dropped
from the rolls June 15, there being no further need for his
services.
Mr. Gerard Fowke was given a temporary appointment
as special archeologist in the bureau from February 9 to
June 30.
Mr. Albert E. Sweeney, photographer, resigned January
31.
Respectfully submitted.
J. WALTER FEWKES,
Chief.
Dr. CuarLes D. WatcotTt,
Secretary, Smithsonian Institution.
p “a eit: tnt wa Gh bh
eas the feo ai a 4 a
TEM, ead ieisien ae
ars ood vA lle
wees freien tae ai
Wes 5 aay tf ako La ae
Riewienat on ees
eaten ior, mee a aiivgolubig ath
ail wet hood aakasl ont acted at owtl atl nif ee
COLLECTIONS aeieeenie
Tirana, shi yeiOn ret a. certrky ewe glial, brumblalon!
wt rapier sabe eet nits he perelao liars Caiaitege en,
ph Oe
aioe wah sieve tet oath cs
7 ~ sald ‘diwtibeceatt
«sama nar ol . Loew Mw hh @
AA's { TT a) ee ee
a 9m TOA CT wet tn a
aph uve ab F
. i oa ea \ypihge heen
ait bin pai) icVtd ted Vive tins
i jf Nhe Ort Are stork ip yl
i ott hiay “tubal sida adil
} ; 1
ACCOMPANYING PAPERS
21
ft
THE OSAGE TRIBE
TWO VERSIONS OF THE CHILD-NAMING RITE
BY
FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
MHtHT SpAeO ST
“STA OWA CLI) cer 90 eons awe
Pcie
NLC om & | Ad sto A
CONTENTS
Introd uciionees nanan eae ae ne ee See eee nee
Clnid arian gar GU as eee er ee eae Re ne eae
Bintienames Of cneyhum a1 CNSas= ae see = = en eee ee ee
suhetntsiathT ee sOnS== === sees = Se ae 2a oe ee ee eee
he tirstunree Galph tersmee eee =e See ee en ee ee
SAV BTA CS mee ee eae ee ee en ee ee pee ane
Child-namingiritualiof-the bumar gens. = see ee ees
Ceremony, of decorating the: Xo'-kas— 22-22 se
ON O88 Wit Cl- Oo ae sein = a 5 en Soe See = eee ogee
Wa’-tse-tsi and the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gentes__ ________________
sie Ra‘ nen approachivo nthe whOuse) aa sa = sos = en ee oe
eRe RW A= these CELE O 0 ype eee aa
Zha’-zhe Ki-to™ Wi’-gi-e (name taking) -___________-_------_-___-
Old-agesWillcpl-e2 Se fae eee ee oe oe ee ae eee ee
Wis-pi-cxolsthem\Va-tSe-tsll Cense ee sae ee ne ee ee
Wit 1-ev Ol ches bOWADCOD le == ames == see man ne eee ee ee ae ee
HarthonamessanGe wil. -Pl-cs es sa = ae eee ee ee eee ee ee ee
Wi’-gi-e of the Wa’-tse-gi-tsi (Wa-tse’-mo?-i") ____________________
Specialanstructious coiwthe;mothersss== as = see ae eee
Origine Wil-ci-e.ofsthem lho -xexpensem a= aes ee ere ee
Child-naming ritual of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens________ __________
Certain gentes called to take part in the ceremony_____- __________
Wa-zho’-i-ga-the (Life symbol) Wi’-gi-e_-_________________________
The Xo’-ka ceremonially conducted to the child’s house____________
A life symbol sent to each of the officiating gentes_____-____-____-
Gentes recite their wi’-gi-es simultaneously_______________________
The child is passed from gens to gens to be blessed________________
First child-naming wi’-gi-e of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens___________-
‘Mheirentileshairecutvomenldren sees a= == aes ees Sees
Hair cut of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens___---------------------
Paraphrase of the wi’-gi-e of the Red Eagle gens______-___-__--__--
Wi'-gi-e of the Ni’-ka Wa-ko®-da-gi and the Tho’-xe gentes______-_-
Honduesstonepersonaleagdornment == a= = ere es ee ee
Ear perforating -__-__--_-_- eae
[Kaf=no2sWit-pi-eui ne O53 oe uae sees ee = oe ee ee =
stsha/—pe. Wa-tho2 andswi-pi-eran Osages. == 9222s ee ee ee
Wha echeKi=to™ Wi'=pl-enm Osapes= === = = ee eee eee
Zero =BWi-Pi-ciin: Osages- se ae eee ean. - os eee ae ee oe ee eee
Wistezhori-ga-LhesWis-cl-exlnsOSapene amen. - = 5 =) een nee ee
Thavezheviki-toz Wil -gi-eunOsages eae. -— Se eee ee eee ee
Wa-zho!-i-ga-the.Wil-pi-einc Osage -=- == ee ee
Native names sot Osage full bloods# 222 = =- = ae ee ne ee eee eae
Names)of the gentes and subgentes.-==-sa===2 =o 222-2 ao
Ws/-tse-tsl or) PO" ka Wa-shta-ge- — 22 eee nan ee ee ee
iavel-ni-ka-shi-Cias a see ea os ee ee ee ee ee
19078°—28——_3
26 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Native names of Osage full bloods—Continued. Page
Ho’ Teni-ka-shisea..s 2! 20 nF ee 130
Ho?’ =ga U=ta-no2-dsi 52 ess eee os ce ee eee ee eee 132
Wa-0a'=be. 2 84-22 S20 See ae ee eee eee 133
[pgthoo!-g8). 2. 5-22 a5 = eee ee ee ee en ee 135
Ho»'-ga Gthe=zhe. = 2. 8055.2 2a) ae ee 136
Hoga (U-thusha-ge:._ 2 See tee eee eee 139
O!sp08us 222 e oe eee oe ee cou ae oe oe ee eee 141
I sba=tse sss 85s sete eset arses es oer nas aes eee ees. ONE 142
Tsi'-ghur Wasn0® $2252 222552235 52252 sss eS eee 144
Cis!-dse-a-¢thet2 *s "525 25s sersdoen. = 7 Fs2 Se ee ee ae 146
Tsi’=zhu Wasshta-testss25 32s 2ascosrrer sess eee ee 146
Tse-do'=casl™=dsets= 258252 29 sss sess a7 == eee ee 152
‘Tse: Dhon-ka 52 *sSs8s> 2222 Sens os sass See ee Ses ee eee 153
Mien’ so 22-2. sericeccecessore eo ell) to Teg ais 153
Ho>’, I-niska-shi-pas= <2 552 rss 8e Ue Pe eee 155
Ni‘-ka"Wa-kot-da-gits A2s= -2s 55552 ===> esheets Sas Sees ore 157
Tholexe-ssse eons rs Sa Uae 8 Bee ei Os ee 8 160
Pwd ee
OIA MH
ILLUSTRATIONS
PLATES
. Wa-xthi’-zhi (I=-gtho»’-ga (Puma) gens) __._._...._....-..---.---
Sho®’/-ge-mor-i" (Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens)____________-----------
Shell gorget and downy plume (Life symbols) _________-_---_-_-_--
. Wa-sho’-she (Ho*’-ga A-hiu-to" (Eagle) gens) __________________-__-
Wa-tse’-mo"-i2 (Wa-ga’-be (Black Bear) gens)_-_____-_____-_-____-
. a, War standard (Symbolizes the white swan). b, Tse’-wa-the root
GNelumborlutes) susedforsftoode ss eee aa a ee ee
Xu-tha’-wa-to"-i2 (Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens)_____-------------------
ULADS LOrsby LO PACA ULV CS aera eats eee ae tee eye ee eae eee
Moun Osarerchildrena mas se. == eee Se ee ee ee ee Le
. Child’s hair cut of the Tho-xe and Ni’-ka Wa-ko®-da-gi gentes_____
. Men, showing hair cut of adult Osages___-----------_.-----------
a Bone ean pertoravorsiandiexpanders= ss sese= se = == aaa ee
TEXT FIGURES
. Diagram showing places of gentes in the lodge_______-___--________-
Symbolicirobesprepared forichildrens-- = == 25-22 oe ee
. Chart of constellation Wa’-ba-ha (Ursa Major)______-_______________
a Chartioh fastha-pthi2, nbree Meer (in Orion)|----- -= 2 sese ee ee
Totemic cut of. the|\Omaha boys’ hair. -__=-.---_==_-___2= 2
. Symbolic hair cut of the Ho®’-ga gens__________-- SE ee rae
. Symbolic hair cut of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens________________--
. Hair cut of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® and the Wa-ga’-be (Black Bear) gentes_
27
Page
30
30
44
44
54
54
84
84
92
92
92
92
36
54
74
74
87
89
89
92
<
Sesee ax Srcery
Eteesstz
re i err oh
Paes
ee So
‘in Faw, =
2s...
oP ee Vettes oo cp
“= ane te = we
aes Le. — vice Guat teaW ji
eabamory (eet Analll) etapa Wiel) tnd Hagens
+e
THE OSAGE TRIBE: TWO VERSIONS OF THE
CHILD-NAMING RITE
By Francis La FiescuHE
INTRODUCTION
The two versions of the Osage Child-naming Rite recorded in
this volume were obtained with considerable difficulty, owing to the
reluctance of the people to speak of the sacred rites that were for-
mulated by the Ni’-ka Xu-be, Holy Men, of long ago. This un-
willingness to speak of the tribal rites, excepting in the prescribed
ceremonial way, arose from a sense of reverence for things sacred and
from the belief that within the rites, and in the articles dedicated
to religious use, there resides a mystic power which could punish, by
supernatural means, the persons who speak irreverently of the rites
and put to profane use the symbolic articles.
In the early part of the life of the Osage, according to tradition,
the people kept together for protection and moved about without
tribal or gentile organizations, a condition which they termed ‘“ga-
ni’-tha,’’ which may be freely translated as, without law or order.
It was in those days that a group of men fell into the habit of
gathering together, from time to time, to exchange ideas concerning
the actions of the sun, moon, and stars which they observed move
within the sky with marvelous precision, each in its own given path.
They also noticed, in the course of their observations, that the
travelers in the upper world move from one side of the sky to the
other without making any disturbances in their relative positions,
and that with these great movements four changes take place in the
vegetal life of the earth which they agreed was effected by the actions
of some of the heavenly travelers. These seasonal changes they
named Be, Do-ge’, To", and Ba’-the (Spring, Summer, Autumn and
Winter).
The delving into the mysteries of the universe by this group of
men, which was carried on for a long period of time, was primarily
for the purpose of finding, if possible, the place from which comes
all life.
The seasonal changes upon the earth which appear to accompany
the movements of the sun and other cosmic bodies suggested to these
men the existence between sky and earth of a procreative relation-
ship, an idea which fixed itself firmly in their minds. It fitted their
29
30 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH, ANN. 43
notion that the earth was related to and influenced by all of the great
bodies that move around within the sky. However, they were not
satisfied that these celestial bodies move without the guidance of
some governing power, and they continued their search and their
discussions. Then, in course of time, there crept into the minds of
these men, who became known as the “Little Old Men,” the thought
that a silent, invisible creative power pervades the sun, moon and
stars and the earth, gives to them life, and keeps them eternally in
motion and perfect order. This creative power which to their minds
was the source of life they named Wa-ko"’-da, Mysterious Power,
and sometimes E-a’-wa-wo" a-ka, The Causer of Our Being.
These ideas are given expression in that part of the child-naming
rite where the initiated members of two gentes are first called to enter
the house in which the ceremonies are to take place. One of these
gentes, the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge, Peaceful Tsi’-zhu, represents the
sky with its sun, moon, and stars, and the other, the Wa/-tse-tsi
Wa-shta-ge, Peaceful Wa’-tse-tsi, represents the earth with its
waters and dry land. The house itself then becomes a symbol of
the sky which encompasses the sun, moon, stars, and the earth.
Thus the house, the two gentes and all the others who enter it to take
part in the rite become, collectively, a symbol of the universe wherein
life manifests itself by taking on an infinite variety of bodily forms.
The whole ceremony is an expression of a longing desire that Wa-
ko®’-da who dwells in the universe will favor the little one who is
to be named with a long life and am endless line of descendants.
The men who recorded the two versions of the Osage child-naming
rite were typical full-blood Indians, neither of them spoke the English
language, and nothing in all that they have given suggests foreign
influence. Wa-xthi’-zhi (pl. 1) was a man of an inquiring mind.
He did not hesitate to ask of his initiators the meaning of the parts of
the rituals which he did not fully understand. He learned much
from his father, who was well versed in the ancient tribal rites.
Sho?’-ge-mo*-i (pl. 2) did not have these advantages, but he had
a retentive mind and what he committed to memory of the rites was
sufficient to him. He did not insist upon being informed as to the
meaning of the parts of the rites that were obscure to him.
T am indebted to Mr. Vince Dillon, of Fairfax, Okla., for permitting
me to use a photograph he had made of two little Osages showing
symbolic hair cut of one of them. Also to Joe Sho"’-ge-mo™-i" for
the loan of a photograph of his two daughters. Joe is the son of
Sho"’-ge-mo"-i", who recorded the second version of the child-naming
ceremony.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 1
WA-XTHI’-ZHI (18-GTHO*’-GA (PUMA) GENS)
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 2
SHO*’-GE-MO*-I8 (TSI’-ZHU WA-SHTA-GE GENS)
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 31
CHILD-NAMING RITUALS
To a self-respecting Osage husband and wife, the ceremonial naming
ef their first three sons and their first three daughters is of the utmost
importance. The couple regard the performing of the ceremony as
a sacred duty to their children which must never be neglected.
Each of these sons and daughters must be named according to the
rites prescribed by the ancient No"’-ho"-zhi"-ga. Until the cere-
monial naming the child has no place in the gentile organization,
and it is not even regarded as a person.
Every one of these three sons and three daughters has a special
kinship term which can be used only by the father, the mother, and
the nearest relatives. These special kinship terms, as observed in
their sequence, are as follows:
Sons Daughters
I*-gtho’. Mi’-no®.
Ksho*’-ga. Wi’-he.
Ka’-zhi"-ga. Ci’-ge or A-gi’-ga.
All the sons born after the third one are Ka’-zhi®-ga, and all the
daughters born after the third one, Ci-ge or A-ci?’-ga.
To each of the first six children belongs a distinctive gentile per-
sonal name, spoken of as: i"-gtho™ zha-zhe (1"-gtho™ name),
mi’-no™ zha-zhe (Mi’-no™ name), etc. These names must always be
ceremonially conferred upon the newly born child. All the other
sons and daughters are named without any formality because the
ceremony performed for the Ka’-zhit-ga and the Ci’-ge serves for
the other children that may follow. These destinctive gentile
names may be designated as gentile birth names.
BIRTH NAMES OF THE PUMA GENS
The gentile birth names of the Puma gens, as given by Wa-xthi’-zhi,
are as follows:
Tue First THree Sons
1. Mi’-wa-ga-xe, Child-of-the-sun. This name is commemora-
tive of the talk that took place between the “Little Ones” and the
Sun when they went to him to ask for aid as they were about to come
to the earth, their future home. In asking for aid, the ‘Little Ones”
addressed the Sun as grandfather, and the Sun, in reply, said to
them: “It is true that you are my children.” Hence the name,
Mi’-wa-ga-xe, Child-of-the-sun. The name is mentioned in the
Naming Ritual of the Puma gens. (See p. 41, lines 24 to 27.)
2. I’-e-gka-wa-the, Giver-of-speech. The Sun also gave to the
“Little Ones” the power of expressing their thoughts by speech,
and the skill in arranging their words so that they can be clearly
understood. When a person speaks intelligently he is spoken of
yA THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
as i’-e-wa-¢ka, a clear speaker. The children are given the name
I’-e-gka-wa-the as a recognition of this great gift from the Sun.
The name is mentioned in the Naming Ritual of the Puma gens.
(See p. 41, line 34.)
The story of the introduction of this name, as told by the Black
Bear gens in their Ni’-ki Ritual, differs from the Puma version of the
story. (See p. 228, 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., lines 238 to
304.)
3. Mo”’-ga-xe, Arrow-maker. At the same time that the Sun
gave to the ‘Little Ones”’ the gift of speech he gave to them a fin-
ished arrow so that when they came to dwell upon the earth they
could make arrows like it and use them for defending themselves
against enemies and for killing animals to use for food. The name
is mentioned in the Puma Naming Ritual. (See p. 42, line 44.)
Tue First Turee Daucurers
1. Mo"’-ca-tse-xi, Sacred Arrowshaft. The name Mo?’-ca-tse-xi
refers to the ray of light which was given by the Sun to the “Little
Ones”’ for use as an arrowshaft. This shaft had the quality of un-
erring precision which excited the wonder of the “Little Ones.” It
was to them a mysterious arrowshaft. The name is mentioned in
the Naming Ritual of the Puma gens. (See p. 41, line 29.)
2. Mo*-zho"’-op-she-wi", Woman-who-travels-over-the-earth.
This name refers to the ever recurring westward movement of the
moon over the earth. The name is mentioned in the Naming Ritual
of the Puma gens. (See p. 41, line 39.)
3. No®’-mi-tse-xi, Beloved-child-of-the-sun. This name is men-
tioned in the Naming Ritual of the Puma gens. (See p. 42, line 49.)
Another name follows that of the third son in the ritual, 1*-shta’-
sha-be, Dark-eyes, andis a Ka’-zhi"-ganame. Thename is mentioned
in the Naming Ritual of the Puma gens. (See p. 42, line 54.)
The name E-no"™-gi-tha-bi, The Favorite, follows that of the third
daughter, and is a Ci’-ge name. This name is not mentioned in the
ritual. Wa-xthi’-zhi said the fourth daughter is the favored one
because if the first three should fail to bring forth children the parents
would cherish the hope that their fourth daughter will give them
grandchildren.
Sxy Names
The distinctive birth names of the Puma gens, mentioned above,
are spoken of as sky names, to distinguish them from the common
gentile names. These birth names are said to have originated in the
sky when the “Little Ones’? were about to descend to the earth to
take upon themselves bodily form. Some of these names refer to
important events that came to pass before the descent from the sky
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 3333
to the earth. Earth names were also used by both the Puma and the
Black Bear gentes. These names will be referred to later.
Every Osage gens has its own version of the tribal Child-naming
Ritual. The versions belonging to the ["-gtho"’-ga (Puma) gens of
the Ho”-ga great division and that belonging to the Tsi’-zhu great
division have been secured and are given below in detail.
CHILD-NAMING RITUAL OF THE PUMA GENS
(W A-XTHI’-zHI1)
When a man of the Puma gens is prepared for the ceremonial
naming of his newly born son he sends for the Sho’-ka (official mes-
senger) of his gens. On the arrival of the Sho’-ka the father puts
before him his customary fee of a blanket or blue cloth and a little
pipe which he must carry as his official badge. The father of the
child then orders the Sho’-ka to go and call the No®’-ho®-zhi-ga of
the Puma, the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge, and the Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge
gentes. The Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge is the Peace gens of the Tsi’-zhu
great tribal division, and the Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge the Peace gens
of the Ho’’-ga great tribal division. Prominence was given, in this
ceremony, to these two gentes because they are the favored people of
the sun and the unclouded sky, the most sacred of the cosmic forces.
Through these two favored gentes the blessings of peace and long life
are invoked for the child to be named and formally given its place in
the tribal unit.
The No*’-ho?-zhi"-ga of these three gentes assemble in the evening
at the house of the father who, in a formal speech, makes known to
them the purpose of the summons. Then the heads of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge and the Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge gentes direct the Sho’-ka
to go and call the No"’-ho"-zhi"-ga of the following gentes to assemble
at the house of the father on the next morning:
Ho”’-ga A-hiu-to", Wa-ca’-be-to" and the O’-po", of the Ho’-ga
subdivision; Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge, Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga, Wa-zha’-zhe
Cka and the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision;
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge, Tsi’-zhu Wa-no", Mi-k’i"” Wa-no" and the
Tho’-xe of the Tsi’-zhu great division.
The Sho’-ka, as he goes on this errand, does not neglect the little
pipe, his official badge.
Ki’/-NoN—Cerremony oF DercoraTING THE XO/-KA
Before sunrise of the following day the No"’-ho®-zhi"-ga of the Puma
gens assemble at the house of the member who had been appointed by
the father to act as Xo’-ka in the ceremony. When all the members
had taken their places the A’-ki-ho" Xo’-ka (master of ceremonies)
recites the wi’-gi-e relating to the symbolic articles with which the
34 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Xo’-ka is to be decorated. The wi’-gi-e is accompanied by certain
ceremonial acts performed by an assistant. The first section of the
wi’-gi-e relates to the red dawn, the beginning of the life of day.
The assistant, who has put red paint on the palms of his hands,
spreads them out toward the dawn that is reddening the eastern sky.
When the A’-ki-ho® Xo’-ka reaches the fourth line the assistant paints
red the face of the Xo’-ka. Then, as the A’-ki-ho™ Xo’-ka goes on
to the second section the assistant takes up a white, downy feather
(pl. 3, 6), taken from the under covert of an eagle’s tail, and holds it
poised over the Xo’-ka’s head. When the twelfth line of the wi’-gi-e
is reached the assistant quickly fastens the feather to the scalplock
of the Xo’-ka. This feather symbolizes one of the two white shafts
of light that may be seen at either side of the sun as it rises through
the fading color of the dawn. Each of these two shafts symbolizes
a never-ending life. The one at the right belongs to the Ho"’-ga
great division and the one at the left to the Tsi’-zhu great division.
At the beginning of the third section of the wi’-gi-e the assistant rubs
in the palms of his hands a bit of buffalo fat, then holds his outspread
hands poised over the Xo’-ka’s head. When the twentieth line is
reached he anoints the Xo’-ka’s hair with the oil, an act by which
is expressed the wish that the child whom the Xo’-ka represents
shall always be abundantly supplied with food of all kinds.
At the fourth section of the wi’-gi-e the assistant takes up a neck-
lace of beads, or a narrow woven band, to which is attached a shell
corget (pl. 3, a@) and holds it in readiness. When the twenty-sixth
line is reached he puts the necklace upon the neck of the Xo’-ka so
that the gorget hangs upon his breast. This gorget typifies the Sun,
whose life endures forever.
Ki’-no'N Wi’-Gci-£
(FREE TRANSLATION)
1
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The people spake to one another, saying: With what shall the
little ones decorate their faces, as they travel the path of life?
3. With the symbol of the god who never fails to appear at the
beginning of day,
4. The little ones shall decorate their faces, as they travel the path
of life.
When they decorate their faces with this symbol,
They shall be difficult to overcome by death, as they travel the
path of life, O, younger brothers.
Oo
(=r)
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 35
2
7. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
8. They spake to one another, saying: What shall they use as a
plume?
9. There is a god who never fails to appear at the beginning of day
(the sun),
10. At whose right side
11. There stands a plume-like shaft,
12. Which the little ones shall use as a plume,
13. And they shall become difficult to overcome by death.
14. When the little ones use this plume,
15. They shall have a plume that will forever stand, as they travel
the path of life.
3
16. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
17. They spake to one another, saying: With what shall the little
ones anoint their hair?
18. The young male buffalo
19. Has fat adhering to the muscle on the right side of his spine.
20. The little ones shall use the oil of this fat to anoint their hair.
1. When they use this fat
2. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life, O, younger brothers.
4
23. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
24. They spake to one another, saying: What neck ornament shall
they put upon him? (the Xo’-ka).
25. The mussel who sitteth upon the earth
26. They shall always put upon him, O, younger brothers.
27. The God of Day who sitteth in the heavens,
28. He shall bring to us,
29. They shall put upon him the sun as a neck ornament, O, younger
brothers.
30. When they make of him (the sun) the means by which to reach
old age,
31. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
Wa’-TSE-TSI AND THE TsI’-zHU WaA-SHTA-GE GENTES
As the ceremony of decorating the Xo’-ka goes on, the No*’-ho?-
zhi®-ga members of the Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge gens, followed by
those of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens, go to the house of the father
of the child to be named, and enter to take their places, those of
36 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
the Wa’-tse-tsi at the east end on the south side and those of the
Tsi’-zhu at the east end on the north side. (Fig. 1.) The house
then becomes the home of these two gentes for the time being and
for the purposes of the ceremony. The Wa’-tse-tsi is the Peace
gens of the Ho"’-ga great tribal division, its life symbol is the water
portion of the earth. The hereditary chief of the Ho" -ga division
was chosen from this gens. The Tsi’-zhu is the Peace gens of the
Tsi’-zhu great division. Its life symbol is the clear blue sky. The
hereditary chief of the Tsi’-zhu great division was chosen from this
gens.
Tst Ta’-pe (ApPpRoAcH TO THE Hovsp)
The purpose of the Ki’-no" ceremony is to prepare the Xo’-ka
who represents the child to be named to approach in the prescribed
manner the house wherein sit the No®’-ho™-zhi"-ga of the Wa/-tse-tsi
and the Tsi’-zhu gentes, the first representing the life-giving power
of water and the latter the life-giving power of the sun whose abode
is in the great blue sky. The Xo’-ka is to come to the sacred house
as a suppliant for a full and complete life, uninterrupted by diseases
eecaceee
Fic. 1.—Diagram showing places of gentes inthe lodge. 1. Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge;
2. Wa-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge; 3. Tsi’zhu Wa-no®; 4. Ho»’-ga A-hiu-to®; 5, Mi-k’is’
Wa-no®; 6. Wa-ca’-be; 7. Tho’-xe; 8. O’po; 9. Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga; 10. Wa-zha’-
zhe ¢ka; 11. Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga; 12. I=-gthoo’-ga; 13. Sho’-ka
or accidents, and for an endless line of descendants. The cere-
monial approach of the Xo/-ka to the sacred house is called Tsi
Ta’-pe (Tsi, house; Ta’-pe, approach), as to a place of refuge.
At the close of the Ki’-no™ ceremony the Xo/-ka wraps about his
body a buffalo robe, hair outside, and thus clothed in his sacerdotal
attire he goes out of his own house to make his processional approach
to the sacred house, following his Sho’-ka who precedes him in the
march. After the manner of all suppliants who approach Wa-ko"’-da,
the Xo’-ka carries with him a little pipe with which to make a smoke
offering to that mysterious power that controls all life. The Xo’-ka
and the Sho’-ka, on their solemn approach to the House of Mystery,
keep a certain distance apart. When they have gone some 40 or 50
paces they make a pause and the Xo’-ka sings the following song,
after which he recites the first section of the wi’-gi-e called Wa’-ci-
thu-ge Wi’-gi-e (Footstep Wi’-gi-e). The song precedes each of the
four sections of the wi’-gi-e:
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 37
—
ore WhO
OD eee
12.
. Toward which the little ones shall take their footsteps.
. When the little ones take their footsteps toward the Male Star,
5. They shall always live to see old age, O, younger brothers, they
16.
ie
18.
19°
20.
Foorstrer SONG AND WI’-GI-B
Wa-tse wi® u-tha-ki-o® stse,
Wa-tse wi? u-tha-ki-o" stse he
Wa-tse wi" u-tha-ki-o" stse,
E the he wi-ta do® u-tha-ki-o® stse he,
Wa-tse wi® u-tha-ki-o® stse.
WI’-GI-E
1
Toward what shall the little ones take their footsteps? they
asked of one another.
It is the Male Star (the sun) who sitteth in the heavens,
Toward which the little ones shall take their footsteps
When the little ones take their footsteps toward the Male Star,
They shall always live to see old age, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
2
Toward what shall the little ones take their footsteps? they
asked of one another.
It is the Female Star (the moon) who sitteth in the heavens,
Toward which the little ones shall take their footsteps.
When the little ones take their footsteps toward the Female Star,
They shall always live to see old age, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
3
. Toward what shall the little ones take their footsteps? they
asked of one another.
It is the Male Star (the sun) who sitteth in the heavens,
said to one another.
4
Toward what shall the little ones take their footsteps? they said
to one another.
It is the Female Star (the moon) who sitteth in the heavens,
Toward which the little ones shall take their footsteps.
When the little ones take their footsteps toward the Female Star,
They shall always live to see old age, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
The words of the processional song:
Into a star you have cast yourself,
Into my star you have cast yourself, ete.
38 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
are addressed to the child upon whom is to be conferred his personal,
gentile name, and who is to be given his place in the Puma gens into
which he was born. The star referred to in the song is the sun, the
greatest life symbol of the Puma gens.
In the first section of the “‘Footstep Wi’-gi-e,”” which the Xo’-ka
recites as he makes his processional approach to the House of Mys-
tery, the sun is referred to as the ‘‘Male Star.’’ The first line of the
wi’-gi-e, ‘Toward what shall the little ones take their footsteps,”
implies that much thought was given by the ancient No”-ho"-zhi®-ga
to the question as to the places where prayers for aid for the attain-
ment of long life should be directed. The lines that follow imply
that the No"’-ho"-zhi*-ga had finally arrived at the belief that if the
“Little Ones”’ go with their prayers to the “Male Star,”’ the sun, they
would find the way by which they could reach old age. The authors
of these peculiar rites in speaking of long life did not only mean the
attainment of old age by the child but they also meant the continuity
of its life by procreation.
In the second section of the wi’-gi-e the moon is referred to as the
“Female Star.” The same form that is used for the sun is also used
for the moon. The pairing of these two great cosmic bodies in this
wi’-gi-e suggests a procreative relationship between the two. The
last two sections of the wi’-gi-e are repetitions of the first two. These
repetitions are made in order to complete the mystic number four.
The moon, referred to in the second section as the female star, is the
life symbol of the Wa-ca’-be, or the Black Bear gens.
When he Xo’-ka have finished reciting the first section of the Foot-
step Wi’-gi-e, which speaks of the approach of the little ones to the
sun, he and the Sho’-ka continue their march. Again they pause and
the Xo’-ka recites the second section which tells of the approach of
the little ones toward the moon seeking for long life. The fourth
pause brings them to the door of the House of Mystery, which they
enter, followed by the A’-ki-ho" Xo’-ka and the No®-ho®-zhi"-ga of
the Puma gens who are to give their child a place in the visible
universe. They take their place at the east end of the lodge where sit
the father and mother with the child. The No®’-ho®-zhi*-ga who had
been called to take part in the ceremony also enter and take their
fixed places, those belonging to the Ho"’-ga great division at the south
side and those of the Tsi’-zhu great division at the north side of the
lodge. (Fig. 1.)
Tuer Wa-THE’-THE CEREMONY
When all the No"’-ho™-zhi*-ga have become settled in their places,
according to gentes, the A’-ki-ho" Xo’-ka proceeds with the cere-
monial acts called Wa-the’-the, which, translated literally, means,
The Sending; that is, the sending of a fee of a blanket or other article
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 39
of value to each head of the gentes taking part in the child-naming
ceremony. It is understood by these ceremonial acts that the mem-
bers of the gens to whose head is sent a fee are requested to recite the
wi’-gi-e relating to the Life Symbol of their gens. Each article is
received from the hands of the A’-ki-ho" Xo’-ka by the Sho’-ka who
delivers it to the head of the gens for whom it is sent.
Wa-xthi’-zhi, who gives this child-naming ritual of his gens, the
Puma, when acting as A’-ki-ho" Xo’-ka, sends the fees in the following
order:
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge: Fee, with a red downy eagle feather, sym-
bolizing the sun. The members of the gens will recite their wi’-gi-e
relating to the life-giving power of the sun. (See 36th Ann. Rept.
Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 124, lines 1 to 177.)
Wa-ca’-be: Fee; will recite the Zha’-zhe Ki-to™ Wi’-gi-e, Name
Wi'-gi-e of the gens. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 228,
lines 238 to 304.) The Wa-ca’-be and the I*-gtho®’-ga gentes are
closely related and one acts as Sho’-ka for the other in their cere-
monies of initiation into the mysteries of the tribal rites.
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no": Fee; will recite their wi’-gi-e relating to the life-
giving power of the sun, their life symbol. (See 36th Ann. Rept.
Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 118, lines 1 to 36.)
Ho’-ga A-hiu-to®: Fee; will recite wi’-gi-e relating to the mottled
eagle, the ‘‘stainless”’ bird that led the people down from the sky
to the earth. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 162, lines
177 to 311.)
Mi-k’i?’ Wa-no": Fee; the members of this gens will recite their
wi’-gi-e relating to the moon and all the stars and to their power to
aid the “little ones” to reach old age. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur.
Amer. Ethn., p. 122, lines 1 to 44.)
O’-po": Fee; the members of the gens will recite the Wa-dsu-ta
I-hi-tho*-be Wi’-gi-e which tells of the various places of the earth
where the little ones may find the animals on which to live. (See
36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 112, lines 1 to 109.)
Tho’-xe: Fee; some grains of maize are also sent. The members
of this gens will recite the wi’-gi-e relating to the bringing of the
maize to the people by a buffalo bull, and to his offer to aid the
little ones to reach old age. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p- 280, lines 83 to 110; also p. 134, lines 1 to 162.)
Wa/’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge: Fee, with cedar fronds. Members of
this gens will recite their wi’-gi-e relating to the red cedar, an ever-
green tree which has power to resist death, and to its offer to aid the
little ones to reach old age. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p. 95, lines 1 to 34.)
Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga: Fee, with a kettle of water. The members
of this gens will recite their wi’-gi-e relating to the everflowing water
40 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
which has power to help the little ones to reach old age. These are
the Fish people. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 98,
lines 1 to 35.)
Wa-zha’-zhe cka: Fee, with a mussel shell. The mussel is the
life symbol of this gens. The members of the gens will recite their
wi’-gi-e relating to the power of the mussel to resist death, and to
its consent to aid the little ones to reach old age. The Wa-zha’-zhe
cka are a water people. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p. 94, lines 1 to 29.)
Ta I-ni-ka-shi-ga, the Deer People: Only a fee is sent to them.
The members will recite their Wa-dsu’-ta I-hi-tho™-be Wi’-gi-e,
which tells of the various places of the earth where the deer will
reveal themselves to the little ones to give them help to reach old
age. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 97, lines 44 to 103.)
When the Sho’-ka had delivered the last fee every No*’-ho®-zhi"-ga
who knows his wi’-gi-e begins to recite it in a loud voice. None of the
wi’-gi-es are alike and none of the members of a gens recite in unison,
consequently there would be a volume of sounds most bewildering
to the uninitiated.
ZuHA’-zHE Ki-tToN W1’-G1-E
The wi’-gi-e recited by the members of the I"-gtho"’-ga gens at
this time is called Zha’-zhe Ki-to® Wi’-gi-e, freely translated, the
Name Wi’-gi-e. It isin three parts. The first, which includes sections
1 to 8, is called Zha’-zhe Ki-to", the taking of names; the second,
which includes sections 9 and 10, is called U’-no" U-tha-ge, the
telling of the means by which to reach old age; the third, which
includes sections 11 and 12, is called U’-no™-bthe U-gi-dse, the story
of the search for the life-giving foods.
NAME-TAKING WI ’-GI-B
(FREE TRANSLATION)
1
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Ho"’-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
4. The little ones have become persons,
5. Should not the little ones go below to become a people? they
said to one another.
6. Then, at that very time,
7. They said: There are four great gods
8. To whom we shall appeal for aid.
9. Verily at that time,
10. They spake to the god of day (the sun) saying:
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 41
Hike
12.
13.
14.
15.
www
ie
wo bw bo
“ID 1
Coa
O, my grandfather,
Our little ones have become persons,
Should they not go below (to the earth) to become a people?
At that very time
The god of day replied: You say the little ones should go below
to become a people,
When the little ones go below to become a people,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path
of life.
2
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. They said: The little ones shall go below to become a people.
Then again they spake to the god of day, saying: The little ones
have no names, O, grandfather.
The god of day replied: O, little ones,
You say your little ones have no names,
Your little ones shall be named after me,
Mi’-wa-ga-xe, Child-of-the-sun,
. The little ones shall take, as they travel the path of life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path
of life.
34
. What shall the little ones take for a personal name? it has been
said,
. Mo®-ci’-tse-xi, Sacred-arrowshaft,
. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path
of life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path
of life.
4
. What shall the little ones take for a personal name?
I’-e-cka-wa-the, Giver-of-clear-speech
5. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path
of life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path
of life.
5
. What shall the little ones take for a personal name?
. Mo®-zho"’-op-she-wi?, Woman-who-travels-over-the-earth,
. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path
of life.
19078°—28 4
42
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
1. When they take this for a personal name,
2. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path
of life.
6
. What shall they take for a personal name?
. Mo”’-ga-xe, Arrow-maker,
5. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path
of life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
a
. What shall the little ones take for a personal name?
. No?’-mi-tse-xi, Beloved-child-of-the-sun,
. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path of
life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
8
. What shall the little ones take for a personal name?
. I*-shta’-sha-be, Dark-eyes,
. The little ones shall take for a name, as they travel the path of
life.
. When they take this for a personal name,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
9
Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
9. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. They went forth with hurrying footsteps,
. To the soft stone that sitteth upon the earth.
. Verily, at that time,
4. They spake to him, saying: O, my grandfather,
5. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. The soft stone replied: O, little ones,
7. You say your little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
9. Verily, at that time and place,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 43
70.
LS) SA OS
“IQ Ot
~J ~]
Ge
ies)
o
CO CO CO
WON re
He spake further, saying: When the little ones become ill and
fretful, .
. They shall cling to me as one who can produce the heat by which
they can be purified.
10
Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
They spake to one another, saying: Give heed, my younger
brothers,
You will go forth to make further search,
Then, even as these words were spoken, they hastened
To the friable stone,
And, standing close to him,
Spake, saying: O, grandfather, the little ones have nothing of
which to make their bodies.
. The friable stone replied: O, my little ones,
. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. When they make of me their bodies,
. They shall cling to me as one who can produce the heat by which
their bodies can be purified.
16h
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
5. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing which they can use for food at all
times,
. You will go and search for such food as they can use for all time.
. A younger brother hastened
9. To the very center of a lake,
. Where lay the root of the tse’-wa-the (Nelumbo lutea).
. He hastened home with the root,
. And spake, saying: O, elder brothers, how will this serve for
food?
. The elder brothers hastened to try the taste of the root,
. Like milk the juice squirted in their mouths,
5. And they said to one another: O, younger brothers,
96.
. When the little ones make use of this plant as food,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
This will serve as food for the little ones.
life.
44 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
12
99. There lacks one more, O, younger brothers, they said to one
another.
100. You will go forth and make further search.
101. Even as these words were spoken,
102. One hastened to the farther borders of the lake,
103. Where sat the do (Apios apios).
104. Close to it he stood,
105. Then he hastened home, carrying the plant with him.
106. Standing before his brothers, he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
107. How will this serve for food?
108. They replied: O, younger brother,
109. That is the very object for which you have been searching.
110. The elder brothers hastened to try the taste of the root,
111. Like milk the juice squirted in their mouths.
112. Then they spake, saying: The little ones shall use this plant
for food.
113. When the little ones use this plant for food,
114. They shall always live to see old age.
115. It shall make their limbs to stretch in growth, as they travel
the path of life.
When Wa-xthi’-zhi made up his mind to give a description of the
Child-naming Ritual of his own gens, the Puma, he did not hesitate
to recite the wi’-gi-es and to tell of the ceremonial forms that ac-
company the entire ritual. But when asked to recite the wi’-gi-es
of the 11 gentes who were summoned to take part in the ceremony of
conferring a name upon a Puma child he declined to give them,
although he knew all of them, for the reason that they were not his
to give. He had not obtained from any of these gentes the right to
transfer them to strangers or to members of other gentes.
Itso happened that when Wa-xthi’-zhi was describing the Child-nam-
ing Ritual of his own gens, which he had a perfect right to do, Wa-sho’-
she (pl. 4), a member of the Ho"’-ga A-hiu-to™ gens, was present.
This man, when asked if he would be willing to give the U’-no®
Wi'-gi-e (Old-age Wi’-gi-e) of his gens for a fee, promptly replied that
he would. He had obtained by purchase from his father the wi’-gi-e
and so had acquired the right to transfer it to anybody, but the trans-
fer must always be made for a fee. The fee was provided and Wa-
sho’-she sat down and recorded the Old-age Wi’-gi-e of his own gens,
the Ho"’-ga A-hiu-to". This name refers to the “Stainless Bird,’ the
mottled eagle, who conducted the Ho®’-ga people to earth from mid-
heaven. (See 86th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 162, lines 177
to 199.)
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 3
SHELL GORGET AND DOWNY PLUME (LIFE SYMBOLS)
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 4
WA-SHO’-SHE (HO*’-GA A-HIU-TO’ (EAGLE) GENS)
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 45
The first seven lines of the wi’-gi-e refer back to the time when
“the Ho*’-ga who possess seven fireplaces’ chose for one of their
life symbols the ‘Stainless Bird,’’ the mottled eagle. The people
who are here spoken of as the Ho"’-ga having seven fireplaces are
those who compose the seven gentile groups that represent the land
portion of the earth in the two great tribal divisions symbolizing
the cosmos. These seven gentile groups (seven fireplaces) are, as
given by Black-dog. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp.
52-53.)
Wa-ca’-be-to", They-who-own-the-black-bear.
I"-gtho™-ga, Puma.
O-po®, Elk.
Mo?-i?-ka-ga-xe, Makers-of-the-earth.
Ho" -ga gthe-zhe, The-mottled-sacred-one.
Xu-tha’, Eagle (the adult golden eagle).
. Ho®’-ga zhit-ga, The-little-sacred-one.
When the ‘‘Ho®’-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces”? went
to the “Stainless Bird’’ and said to him (lines 5, 6, and 7): ‘‘The
little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,’ meaning
that they have no symbol for the long life which they crave, he
replied in the words as given in the wi’-gi-e, from line 10 to the end:
—
oo 29
oe
’
Oxp-AcE Wi’-GI-£
FREE TRANSLATION
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
The Ho”’-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
Spake to one another, saying: Lo, we have nothing of which to
make our bodies.
wWrore
4. Then, at that very time,
5. They spake to the bird that has no stains (evil disposition),
6. Saying: O, grandfather,
7. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
8. Then, at that very time,
9. The bird that has no stains (evil disposition)
10. Spake, saying: When the little ones make of me their bodies,
11. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
12. Again the bird spake:
13. Behold my toes that are gathered together in folds,
14. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
15. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
16. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Behold, also, the wrinkles upon my shins,
8. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
21. The bird that has no stain
. Again spake, saying: Behold the wrinkles upon my knees,
. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
26. Behold the flaccid muscles of my inner thigh,
27. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
. Behold the muscles of my breast, gathered together as in a fold,
. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
. Behold the flaccid muscles of my arms,
. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
36.
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
life.
. Behold the bend of my shoulders,
39.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see their shoulders bent with age, as
Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
they travel the path of life.
. Behold the flaccid muscles of my throat,
. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
. They shall always live to see old age, as they travel the path of
life.
. Behold the folds in the corners of my eyelids,
. Which I have made to be the signs of my old age.
48.
. They shall always live to see the corners of their eyelids folded
When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
with age, as they travel the path of life.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 47
50. Behold my eyelids that are gathered into folds,
1. Which I have made to be the signs of my old age.
52. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
53. They shall always live to see their eyelids gathered into folds
with age, as they travel the path of life.
54. Behold the hair on the crown of my head, now grown thin,
55. Which I have made to be the sign of my old age.
56. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
57. They shall always live to see the hair on the crown of their heads
grown thin with age, as they travel the path of life.
Wi'-GiI-E oF THE WaA’-TSE-TSI GENS
At the close of the recital of the wi’-gi-es by all the No”’-ho"-zhi"-ga,
the Sho’-ka places before the head of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens a
bowl of water into which had been put fronds of the red cedar. The
red cedar and the water are the life symbols of the Wa’-tse-tsi, the
people who came to earth from the stars. The following is an
epitome of their wi’-gi-e:
I am a person who is fit for use as a symbol,
Behold the female red cedar,
Verily, I am a person who has made of that tree his body.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall always live to see old age.
Behold the male red cedar,
The little ones shall always use this tree as a symbol.
When the little ones use it for a symbol,
They shall always live to see old age.
Behold these waters,
That we shall make to be companions to the tree.
When the little ones make use of these waters
As the means of reaching old age,
They shall always live to see old age.
—(See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 95.)
Wi’-ci-E oF THE Bow PEOPLE
The E-no™” Mi"-dse-to", a people who belong to the same great
tribal division as the Wa’-tse-tsi, use a similar wi’-gi-e, which is as
follows:
I am a person who is fitted for use as a symbol.
Verily, in the midst of the rushing waters
Abides my being.
Verily, I am a person who has made of the waters his body.
Behold the right side of the river,
Of which I have made the right side of my body.
When the little ones make of me their bodies
And use the right side of the river
To make their bodies,
The right side of their bodies shall be free from all causes of death.
48 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Behold the left side of the river,
Of which I have made the left side of my body.
When the little ones also make of it the left side of their bodies,
The left side of their bodies shall always be free from all causes of death.
Behold the channel of the river,
Of which I have made the hollow of my body.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
The hollow of their bodies shall always be free from all causes of death.
A bowl of shelled corn, the life symbol of the Tho’-xe gens, was
also placed before the head of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens. (For
the Maize Wi’-gi-e of the Tho’-xe gens, see 36th Ann. Rept. Bur.
Amer. Ethn., p. 135, lines 57 to 113; also p. 277, lines 83 to 110.)
When the bowls of water and cedar fronds and shelled corn are
placed before the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge, the Sho’-ka puts in his arms
the child to be blessed and named. The head of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens then passes the tips of the fingers of his right hand over
the bowl of water and cedar fronds, and the bowl of the life-giving
corn, then touches with the tips of his fingers the lips, head, arms
and body of the child. The two bowls and the child are then passed
on to the head of the Wa’-tse-tsi Wa-shta-ge gens, who goes through
the same motions with the child. The child and the two bowls are
then passed on to the heads of each of the other gentes who
make the same motions over the child as were made by the heads
of the first two gentes.
These ceremonial acts performed by the heads of the gentes
officiating, by which the child is brought into touch with the ever-
flowing waters, the red cedar, an everlasting tree, and the life-giving
corn, are supplicatory acts by which the aid of Wa-ko®’-da is sought
for the child who is to go forth to take part in the great life activities.
Not only is the attainment of old age desired for the child but also
the continuity of its life by a never-ending line of descendants.
At the close of these ceremonial acts a sacred gentile name is con-
ferred upon the child without further ceremony. If, however, there
are two or more names to choose from, as is the case in some of the
gentes, the mother of the child has the privilege of making a choice
from two or three names. This privilege is given by the Xo’-ka,
who offers to the mother two small sticks prepared for this purpose,
each of which represents a name mentioned in the origin ritual of
the gens naming the child. The mother usually chooses the stick
representing the name which to her has the greater religious sig-
nificance and is the most euphonious.
EartH Names anv W1’-GI-ES
It was stated (see p. 33) that earth names as well as sky names
were used by both the I*-gtho™-ga and the Wa-¢a’-be gentes as dis-
tinetive birth names for their children.
A. FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 49
In the course of a conversation concerning the gentile names,
classed as sky and earth names, Wa-xthi’-zhi, of the Puma gens,
remarked that: When the Ho"’-ga people were coming from the sky
to the earth they chose two persons (gentes) to act as official mes-
sengers. One of these persons was called Ho*-ga Wa’-tse-gi-tsi,
The-sacred-one-from-the-stars, and the other Ho"’-ga Wa-tse-ga-wa,
The-sacred-radiant-star. These messengers were expected to find
some way of dispersing the waters that submerged the earth and
of exposing the ground beneath so as to make it habitable for all
living creatures.
Wa’-tse-gi-tsi and Wa’-tse-ga-wa, the two messengers, found on the
still waters the water spider, the water beetle, the white leech, and
the dark leech, of whom they asked for aid which they could not give,
but promised to help the people to reach old age. (See 36th Ann.
Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 163, lines 200 to 273.) The two mes-
sengers went on and they met O’-po"-to™-ga, the Great Elk, and
appealed to him for aid. The Great Elk threw himself upon the
waters four times and splashed about until the ground was exposed
and ready to receive men and animals. He then called to the four
corners of the earth for the life-giving winds to come. Next he threw
himself upon the ground and rolled about; then, as he arose, the
hairs of his body clung to the soil and became the grasses of the
earth. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 165-167, lines
274 to 354.)
The two messengers then led the people over the dry land of the
earth, when suddenly Ho’’-ga Wa’-tse-gi-tsi, The-one-from-the-stars,
came upon I["-gtho"’-ga, the Puma. The messenger then changed
his name from Wa’-tse-gi-tsi to I*"-gtho’-ga. In like manner the
Ho"-ga Wa’-tse-ga-wa, the Radiant Star, came upon Wa-¢a’-be, the
Black Bear. The Radiant Star then changed his name from Wa’-tse-
ga-wa to Wa-ga’-be, the Black Bear.
These were the first earth names of the two related gentes, the
I*-gtho"’-ga and the Wa-g¢a’-be. Wa-xthi’-zhi mentioned several
other personal earth names of these two gentes but he suggested that
the parts of the rituals given by himself and Wa-tse’-mo"-i" (pl. 5), in
which are mentioned the earth names, be referred to as authoritative,
and so the following paraphrases of those parts of the rituals are
here given.
EARTH NAME WI’-GI-ES
(Wa-xTHt’-zH1)
The people spake to one another, saying: The little ones have nothing to use as a
symbol of courage.
Then, at that very time,
The Ho®’-ga Wa/-tse-ga-wa (Ho®’-ga-radiant-star),
Went forth with hurried footsteps
50 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
To the I"-gtho"’-ga do-ga, (male puma),
With whom he stood face to face and spake,
Saying: The little ones have nothing to use as a symbol of courage, O, grand-
father.
The Male puma replied: I am a person whom the little ones may use as a symbol
of courage.
The brothers spake in low tones,
Saying: He is a puma, O, younger brothers,
Let us take personal names from him;
I»-gtho®’-ga-to®-ga, the Great-puma,
Shall be our name, O, younger brothers;
I»-gtho’-ga-zhi»-ga, the Young-puma,
Shall be our names, as we travel the path of life.
The Ho*’-ga Wa/-tse-ga-wa, Radiant-star,
Went forth with hurried footsteps,
To the Wa-ga’-be, the Black-bear that is without blemish,
Who stood as in a flame of fire.
The Radiant-star spake to him, saying: The little ones have nothing to use as a
symbol of their courage.
Wa-g¢a’-be replied: I am a person whom the little ones may use as a symbol of
their courage.
The brothers spake to one another, saying: He is a black bear!
He is very dark in color!
Let us take from him personal names.
Sha’-be-tsi-gthe, the Dark-one,
Shall be our name henceforth, as we travel the path of life.
You have found the Dark-one, O, younger brothers,
Sha’-be-i-the, Finder-of-the-dark-one,
Shall be our name, henceforth, as we travel the path of life.
Look you, O, younger brothers, they said to one another,
The little ones have nothing to use as a symbol of courage.
Then they went forth in a body to an open prairie,
Where sat Mi’-xa-¢ka, the Great-white-swan.
Face to face they stood with him and spake,
Saying: The little ones have nothing to use as a symbol of courage, O, grand-
father.
The brothers spake in low tones, saying: O, younger brothers,
We shall take from him personal names.
How white he is! the younger ones exclaimed,
He is a bird,
A white swan.
Mi’-xa-gka, the White-swan,
Shall be our name, O, younger brothers.
How white he is! they again exclaimed,
Wa-zhi®’-¢ka, the White-bird, shall also
Be our name, O, younger brothers.
—(56th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 194-195, lines 1063 to
111'5:)
Earth names mentioned in the origin wi’-gi-e given by Wa-tse’-
mo"-1".
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 51
Wr-Gi-5 oF THE WA’TSE-GI-TSI
HE-WHO-CAME-FROM-THE-STARS
What said they? it has been said, in this house,
The people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
We are a people who give no mercy to the foe.
Then they spake to the one (gens) who had made of the Puma his body,
Saying: O, younger brother.
Hardly were these words spoken when the Puma hastened forth.
After a time the people said: There are signs that our brother is returning.
Then some of the brothers ran to meet him.
To their inquiry the Puma replied: O, elder brothers,
Yonder stands a man,
Verily, a man whose appearance inspires fear,
A man who is like us in form.
The people spake, saying: O, younger brother,
We are a people who show no mercy to the foe.
Whoever this man may be,
We shall send him to the abode of spirits,
We shall make him to lie low.
Then toward the man they hastened:
They made one ceremonial pause.
At the fourth pause,
The Puma exclaimed: There he stands!
It is well, the people replied,
We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
Then, at that very time,
The stranger spake, saying:
I am a sacred man, O, elder brothers.
The Puma spake, saying:
He speaks clearly our language!
Iam Ho*’-ga Wa’-tse-gi-tsi, a sacred person come from the stars, the stranger
continued.
Tam Zhi®-ga’-ga-hi-ge,! The-young-chief;
Tam Wa’-tse-ga-hi-ge, The-star-chief;
Tam Wa’-tse-ga-wa, The-star-radiant;
Iam Wa’-tse-mo2-i", The-traveling-star.
That pleases us! the people exclaimed.
Zhi*-ga’-ga-hi-ge, The-young-chief, the stranger went on,
Shall be your name, as you travel the path of life;
Wa’-tse-ga-wa, The-star-radiant,
Shall also be your name, as you travel the path of life.
I have done much to make you contented and happy.
We are pleased! the people exclaimed,
We shall henceforth put away all anger and hatred,
We shall accept the names thus offered us.
Zhi®-ga'-ga-hi-ge, The-young-chief,
Shall be our name,
Wa’-tse-ga-wa, The-star-radiant,
1 The name Zhin-ga’-ga-hi-ge is still used in the Ta-pa’ gens of the Omaha, a cognate tribe.
52 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Shall be our name.
I’-e-gka-wa-the, He-speaks-clearly,
We shall also take as a name in his honor,
Pa/-thi»-ho-ga, The-sacred-stranger,
We shall also take as a name in his honor.
Mi’-xa-¢ka, the white swan from whom personal names were taken,
as mentioned in the following wi’-gi-e given by Wa-tse’-mo?-i", is a
warrior symbol. The black color on its feet and on the tip of its
nose typifies the fire that knows no mercy. The standards (crooks),
which were carried by an Osage war party (pl. 6, a), typify the neck
of the white swan.
MI/-XA-GKA, THE WHITE SWAN
The people spake to one another, saying:
We have nothing of which to make a symbol (war standard).
They spake to the Puma (gens), saying:
Go thou and make search (for materials).
Even as these words were spoken the Puma went forth to search.
In time he hastened homeward,
And, standing before the elder brothers, he spake, saying:
O, elder brothers, what appears to be an animal,
Is in yonder place.
Make haste! the people said to one another,
We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
Verily, we are a people who give no mercy to the foe.
They made one ceremonial pause,
The fourth pause brought them close to the place.
Then the Puma spake, saying: There he stands! O, elder brothers.
An elder brother pointed with his index finger at the bird,
And it fell to the ground in death, its feathers strewing the earth.
They gathered around the fallen bird and stood.
Then one spake, saying: It is a swan! O, elder brothers,
A white swan!
Even from its white plumage
We shall take personal names,
Mi’-xa-¢ka, White-swan,
Wa-zhi"’-ga-cka, White-bird,
And Mor’-sho®-¢ka, White-feathers,
The little ones shall be named, as they travel the path of life.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 228-231, lines 238
to 358.)
The earth names given by Wa-xthi’-zhi, of the I"-gtho"’-ga (Puma)
gens, in his wi’-gi-es are as follows:
1. [*-gtho"’-ga-to"-ga, the Great-puma.
In*-gtho"’-ga-zhi"-ga, the Young-puma.
Sha’-be-tsi-gthe, the Dark-one.
Sha’-be-i-the, Finder-of-the-dark-one.
Mi’-xa-cka, the White-swan.
Wa-zhi®’-cka, the White-bird.
Ook wh
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 53
The earth names given by Wa-tse’-mo"-i" of the Wa-¢a’-be (Black
Bear) gens in his wi’-gi-es:
L. Wa’-tse-gi-tsi, He-who-came-from-the-stars.
Zhi*-ga’-ga-hi-ge, Young-chief.
. Wa’-tse-ga-hi-ge, Star-chief.
Wa-tse’-ga-wa, Star-radiant.
Wa-tse’-mo"-i, Traveling-star.
I’-e-cka-wa-the, He-speaks-clearly.
Pa’-thi"-ho"-ga, The-sacred-stranger.
. Mi’-xa-cka, White-swan.
. Wa-zhi’’-ga-cka, White-bird.
10. Mo®-sho"-cka, White-feather.
The following earth names, not specifically mentioned by Wa-
xthi’-zhi, also appear in the wi’-gi-es recorded by himself and by
Wa-tse’-mo"-i". These names are also regarded as sacred and are
ceremonially bestowed upon the children of the Puma and Black
Bear gentes:
CHNAM Rwy
WA-XTHI’-ZHI
1. Mo?’-hi®-ci-i-ba-btho-ga, Round-handled-knife. (36th Ann.
Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 206, line 1399.)
2. Mo®’-hi®-ho"-ga, Sacred-knife. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 207, line 1424.)
3. Mo®-hi"-zhu-dse, Red-knife. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 208, line 1439.)
4. The fourth name given by Wa-xthi’-zhi (No*-be’-wa-ko"-da,
Mysterious-hand) does not appear in any of the wi’-gi-es given
either by himself or by Wa-tse’-mo*-i". However, the Mysterious-
hand is spoken of by both of these men in their conversations con-
cerning the rites, and is referred to in some of the wi’-gi-es. (See
36th Ann. Rept., p. 230, lines 323 to 340.) The story of the Mys-
terious-hand, as told colloquially, is that when the people came from
the sky to the earth they had no weapons, but they killed animals by
moistening the index finger of the right hand with saliva and point-
ing it at them. This name is also bestowed ceremonially.
WA-TSE’-MON-1N
1. Mi"’-tse-xi, Sacred-robe. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p. 235, line 510.)
2. No" -ka-dsi-wi", Spine-woman. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 235, line 512.)
3. Tse’-pa’-ga-xe, Buffalo-head-maker. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur.
Amer. Ethn., p. 235, line 518.)
4. Mo"’-hi"-zhu-dse, Red-knife. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 237, line 573.)
5. Mo”-hi®-ho"-ga, Sacred-knife. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 237, line 576.)
54 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
SpreciaL INSTRUCTIONS TO THE MoTHER
At the close of the ceremony of blessing the child by the various
gentes officiating, the Sho’-ka conducts the mother to a seat pre-
pared for her in front of the Xo’-ka, who gives her special instruc-
tions in the ceremonies to be observed by her to complete the child-
naming rite. Between the two is spread a buffalo robe which had
been decorated with certain symbolic designs. (Fig. 2.) This
formal talk to the mother is called “Ki’-no" U-tha-ge,” Telling of
the Symbolic Painting. Extra fees are required for the special
instruction, which, with the help of friends and relatives, the mother
is enabled to pay.
If the mother is skilled with her awl and thread in ornamental
work she would decorate with porcupine quills the symbolic robe
to be used in this special ceremony;
if not skilled, she would content herself
with painting the symbolic designs on
the robe.
When the robe has been spread
before the Xo’-ka he begins to talk,
as follows:
Wi-tsi-ni-e’, My daughter-in-law, I
see you have brought with you a rebe
which you have dressed and decorated
for the comfort of your little one. It
is a sacred robe which should be put
to use with proper ceremony. This
ceremony you will observe for a period
of four days, during which you will
paint red the parting of your hair.
Tt will be a sign that you appeal for a long and fruitful life for your-
self and child, to the god of day whose path lies over the middle of
the earth.
You have reddened the head and the forelegs of the robe. The
head and forelegs of the robe typify that part of the earth whence
rises the god of day to take his westward journey. Red is the color
of the day when it is young, the time when you will rise and go forth
to prepare food for the little one whose tender life is wholly dependent
upon your efforts. A narrow line runs from the head of the robe
along the middle of the back to the tail. This line typifies the path
of the god of day who ever travels from east to west. Midway of
the path is a round spot which represents the god of day when it
has reached the middle of heaven. Here he marks the time when
you will turn your thoughts from other things to the feeding of the
little one so that the nourishing of its life may be continuous. The
god of day continues his journey and in time reaches the edge of
the earth, behind which he finally disappears. The hind legs and
Fic. 2.—Symbolic robe prepared for children
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 5
WA-TSE’-MO*-I* (WA-CA’-BE (BLACK BEAR) GENS)
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 6
a b
a, WAR STANDARD (SYMBOLIZES THE WHITE SWAN)
b, TSE’-WA-THE ROOT (NELUMBO LUTEA), USED FOR FOOD
A
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 55
a)
the tail of the robe are reddened to typify the glow that warns us
of the ending of the day when your thoughts will again turn to the
care of the little one. When you put these symbolic marks upon
this sacred robe your thoughts reached out in appeal to Wa-ko’-da
for yourself and child.
As the shadow of night spreads over the land you will take your
little one in your arms, draw this robe over you, then rest in sleep.
The robe which you draw over yourself and child typifies the
heaven, whence comes all life, and the act is an appeal to heaven for
protection.
The procuring of food for the little one should always be done
with a feeling of gratitude toward the Mysterious Power that brings
forth life in all forms. There is a plant which is dedicated to use
as a sacred food in the bringing up of the little ones, known as tse’-
wa-the (Nelwmbo lutea) (pl. 6, 6). (86th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 183, lines 910 to 923.) You will at times go to the lake
to gather the roots of this plant for use in feeding your little one.
When about to go to the lake you will paint red the parting of
your hair, as a sign of your gratitude to the god of day who passes
over your head and over the plant you go to seek, shedding his life-
giving power upon you as he goes upon his journey.
When you come to the edge of the lake you will look about for a
staff to support you as you work in the water. You will choose the
willow for your staff, for it is a tree that clings persistently to life.
By this act you will make an appeal to the great Life-giving Power
for a long and fruitful life for yourself and the little one. With the
willow staff in your hands you will step into the water and take up
from the soft earth beneath a root of the sacred plant, the tse’-wa-the.
You will find clinging to the root some of the soft earth from which
the plant draws nourishment and strength. Take this bit of soil and
touch your forehead and body with it, an act which will be as a sign
that you appeal to the earth wherein there is Life-giving Power.
When you have performed this act return the root to the earth
beneath the water, with the wish that the plant shall forever be
plentiful. Then gather enough of the roots to satisfy the little one
and yourself.
The maize is another sacred life-giving plant. You raise this
plant from year to year. When you prepare the ground for plant-
ing the seed you will take one grain and put it in a hill, you will
press down upon it the soil with your foot, and say: ‘‘My father-in-
law bade me do this, as an expression of my faith that the sky and
the earth will yield to me not only one ear of maize but one animal
as well, or even one herd of animals.” In the next hill you will put
two grains, in the next three, the next four, the next five, the next
six, and in the seventh seven, always repeating the words at each
planting.
56 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
The ceremony closes with the end of the special instructions given
to the mother of the child blessed and named, and as each member
of the gentes who had taken part in the rite rises to go he makes
some pleasant remarks to the father and the mother.
When the mother goes to her field to plant the seeds of the maize
she remembers the instructions and follows them in every detail.
As the maize matures and the ears are still green and tender the
mother cuts the stalks from the hills she had ceremonially made,
leaving the ears on the stalks. She ties the stalks in bundles, and,
with the aid of friends, carries them home to her house. She then
prepares a feast to which she invites the man who had acted as
Xo’-ka at the ceremonial naming of her child. He in turn invites
some of his friends who had acted as Xo’-ka in child-naming cere-
monies to come and share in the feast prepared for him.
If among the invited guests there happens to be a member of the
Tho’-xe gens, learned in the rituals, he is requested by the honored
guest to recite the maize wi’-gi-e of his gens.
A paraphrase is here given of the wi’-gi-e which the Tho’-xe recite
to give pleasure to the host and to the guests. The mythical story
points to mid-heaven as the region of the conception of life forms,
and as the starting point of the Osage people in their journey to
earth, the region of actual birth into bodily existence.
OriIGIn W1’-GI-E oF THE THO’-xE GENS
The people spake to one another, saying: Lo, the little ones are not a people,
Let search be made by the younger brothers for a place where the little ones may
become a people.
Even as these words were being spoken, a younger brother
Hastened to the first division of heaven,
Close to which he came and paused,
When, returning to the elder brothers, he spake, saying:
Verily, nothing of importance has come to my notice.
Make further search, O, younger brothers, the people said,
The little ones are not a people.
Then, a younger brother,
Even as these words were being spoken,
Hastened to the second division of heaven, where he paused,
When, as the god of darkness cast a shadow upon the heavens,
He returned to the eldest brothers and stood.
They looked up and spake, saying: How has it fared with you? It wasnot your
wont to suffer so, O, younger brother.
He replied: I have been to the second division of heaven.
It is not possible for the little ones to become a people there.
O, Younger brother,
We bid you make further search, the people said.
Even as these words were being spoken,
One hastened to the third division of heaven,
He drew near and paused.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 57
The younger brother,
As the god of darkness cast a shadow upon the heavens,
Returned to the elder brothers and stood.
The elder brothers spake: How has it fared with you? It was not your wont to
suffer so.
The younger brother replied: It is impossible!
O, younger brother, the people said,
We bid you make further search.
Then a younger brother
Hastened to the
Fourth division of heaven.
Close to it he came and paused.
Then the Man of Mystery, the god of the clouds,
Drew near and stood before him.
The younger brother turned to the elder brothers and said: Here stands a man!
A fear-inspiring man!
His name, I verily believe, is Fear-inspiring.
The people spake to him, saying: O, grandfather!
The Man of Mystery replied: I am a person of whom your little ones may make
their bodies.
When they make of me their bodies,
They shall cause themselves to be deathless.
Little-hawk
They shall take for their personal name,
Then shall they always live to see old age.
Hawk-maiden, also,
Is a name that is mine.
That name also
Your little ones shall take to be their name,
Then shall they always live to see old age.
O, younger brother! the people said,
And the younger brother went in haste
To the Tho’-xe (the Buffalo-bull),
Close to whom he stood and spake, saying:
O, grandfather!
Then to the elder brothers he said: Here stands a man!
A fear-inspiring man!
The Tho’-xe spake: I am a person of whom the little ones may make their bodies.
Whereupon he threw himself to the ground,
Then up sprang the blazing star,
From the earth where it stood in all its beauty, pleasing to look upon.
Tho’-xe spake, saying: Of this plant also the little ones may make their bodies.
The people tasted the root of the plant,
And exclaimed: It is bitter to the taste!
Tho’-xe spake, saying: This plant shall be medicine to the little ones.
When they use it as medicine,
Their arms shall lengthen in growth,
And they shall live to see old age.
19078°—28——_5
58 THE OSAGE TRIBE
Again Tho’-xe threw himself upon the ground,
And the poppy mallow
(ETH. ANN. 43
Sprang from the earth and stood resplendent in its reddened blossoms.
Of this plant also Tho’-xe said,
The little ones shall make their bodies.
When they use it as medicine,
Their arms shall lengthen in growth.
The root is astringent,
And, referring thereto, your little ones shall take the name Astringent.
When the little ones make of this plant their bodies,
They shall always live to see old age.
Tho’-xe (the Buffalo-bull),
Threw himself to the ground,
And a red ear of maize
He tossed in the air,
As he exclaimed: The little ones shall make of this their bodies!
Then shall they always live to see old age.
Again Tho’-xe threw himself to the ground,
And a blue ear of maize,
Together with a blue squash,
He tossed in the air as he said,
These plants, also,
Shall be food for the little ones,
Then shall they live to see old age.
A third time he threw himself to the ground,
And a white ear of maize,
Together with a white squash he tossed in the air,
As he exclaimed: These plants also shall be food for the little ones!
Then shall they be difficult for death to overcome them,
And they shall always live to see old age.
A fourth time he threw himself to the ground,
And a speckled ear of maize,
Together with a speckled squash,
He tossed in the air as he exclaimed:
What creature is there that would be without a mate!
And he wedded together the maize and the squash,
Then exclaimed: These also shall be food for the little ones!
And they shall be difficult for death to overcome them.
The feasting of the No*’-ho"-zhi"-ga upon the fruits of the seeds
of the maize planted by the mother with religious care in the seven
sacred hills completes the rite of the naming of her child, by which
its right to a place in its gens is formally recognized; the child has a
place, not only in its gens, but also in the sky and the earth which the
two great tribal divisions, the Ho®’-ga and the Tsi’-zhu, represent.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 59
CHILD-NAMING RITUAL OF THE TSI’-ZHU WA-SHTA-GE
GENS
(SHo%’-Gr-mo’-1%)
The Child-naming ritual of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens of the
Osage tribe, here recorded, was given by Sho"’-ge-mo"-i", a member
of the Ba’-po subgens of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens. The name
Ba’-po (Popper in English), Sho"’-ge-mo*-i" explained, is the name
of the elder tree, the trunk of which boys, from time reaching beyond
memory, used for making poppers. The name refers to a mythical
story and to a ceremonial office. The mythical story is as follows:
When the people of the Tsi’-zhu great division descended from the
sky to make the earth their home they came down as eagles, and they
alighted on a great red oak tree. The shock of their alighting
caused the acorns to drop from the tree in great profusion, which
was taken as a prophecy that the Tsi’-zhu would become a numerous
people. One eagle was crowded off the tree, but as he dropped down
he alighted upon a blossoming elder tree. This eagle was a peace
bird and his alighting on the ba’-po tree made it to become a peace
symbol. The Ba’-po subgens was given the office of furnishing a
pipestem for the peace pipe in the keeping of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens, and the Ba’-po made the stem of an elder sapling a
symbol of peace.
When Sho®’-ge-mo"-i" is called by a member of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens to act as Xo’-ka (instructor) in the ceremonial
naming of his child he goes to the house of the father without any
formality. Usually the call is made when the sun is traveling down-
ward (afternoon); when he receives the message he promptly responds
to the call. On his arrival at the house the father, in a formal speech,
informs him that his summons was for the purpose of asking him to
conduct the ceremonies to be performed at the naming of his child.
When Sho*’-ge-mo?-i" gives his consent to officiate at the ceremony
the fees for the men who are to take part are placed before him.
These he examines to make sure that there are enough articles to go
around, and to see if the man had also provided a pipe for the Sho’-ka
or Official Messenger.
Certain Gentes CALLED TO TAKE Part IN THE CEREMONY
Being satisfied that the man had supplied all the necessary articles,
he places in the hands of the father the ceremonial pipe and bids
him go after the Sho’-ka of the gens. The father returns with the
messenger who was already invested with the little pipe, the badge
of his authority. When the two men had taken their seats Sho’’-
ge-mo"-i" directs the Sho’-ka to go and call the heads of the following
gentes, with their No*’-ho"-zhi*-ga members, to come to the house
60 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH: ANN. 43
of the father, at sunrise the next morning, to take part in the cere-
monies of naming his child:
1. Wa’-tse-tsi, of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision, to recite their
wi’-gi-e relating to their life symbol, the red cedar. (36th Ann.
Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 95, lines 1 to 34.)
2. No®’-po"-da, Deer gens, of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision, to
recite their wi’-gi-e relating to one of their life symbols, the water.
(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 98, lines 1 to 25.)
3. I’-ba-tse Ta-dse, Wind People, of the Ho"-ga subdivision,
to recite their wi’-gi-e relating to one of their life symbols, the maize.
4. Tho’-xe, Buffalo-bull gens of the Tsi-zhu great division, to
recite their wi’-gi-e relating to the maize. Tho’-xe is the gens that
gave to the people the maize and the squashes. (36th Ann. Rept.
Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 279, lines 54 to 110.) The Tho’-xe authorized
the I’-ba-tse and certain other gentes to use the Maize ritual in their
child-naming ceremonies.
5. Cit’-dse-a-gthe, Wolf gens of the Tsi’-zhu great division, to
recite their wi’-gi-e relating to their life symbol, the sun. The Dog-
star is also one of their life symbols. (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn., p. 118, lines 1 to 36.)
Wa-zHO’-I-GA-THE (Lir—E SymBoxu) W1’-GI-5
The Sho’-ka returns to the house of the father and reports that he
has given notice to all the gentes named to attend the ceremony.
Then Sho"’-ge-mo?-i" proceeds to recite the Wa-zho’-i-ga-the Wi’-
gi-e of his gens, a name which means, The Taking of Bodies; that is,
The Taking of Life Symbols. The reciting of this wi’-gi-e is for the
benefit of the father and the child.
THE TAKING OF LIFE SYMBOLS.
FREE TRANSLATION
1
1. The people spake to one another, saying: Lo, the little ones
have nothing of which to make their bodies,
2. Take heed, O, younger brothers, and see what can be done.
3. Then to the youngest of the brothers they spake, saying:
4. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies, O,
younger brother.
5. Hardly were these words spoken,
6. When the young messenger stood before the God of Day (the
sun), to whom he spake, saying:
7. O, my grandfather!
8. The God of Day replied: My grandchild!
9. The messenger spake: The little ones have nothing of which to
make their bodies, O, grandfather.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 61
10.
“Im Cr
The God of Day spake: I am a person of whom the little ones
may well make their, bodies,
. Tam a god who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who is able to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of life.
9
2
. Again the people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
. Take heed and see what can be done,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. They spake to the youngest of the brothers, saying:
. O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Hardly were these words spoken
. When the young messenger stood before the Goddess of Night
(the moon),
. To whom he spake, saying: O, my grandmother!
29. The Goddess of Night replied: My grandchild!
. The messenger spake: The little ones have nothing of which to
make their bodies.
. Then spake the Goddess of Night: I am a person of whom the
little ones may well make their bodies,
. Iam a goddess who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who is able to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of
life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one of them who can stand in my way to prevent
my going.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
3. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to stand in their way, as they travel the path
of life.
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall bring themselves to see old age, as they traves
the path of life.
. I have brought myself to the days that are calm and peaceful.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall bring themselves to the calm and peaceful days,
as they travel the path of life.
3
. Again the people spake, saying: Lo, the little ones have nothing
of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done, O, younger brothers.
. Then they spake to the youngest of tne brothers,
. Saying: O, younger brother!
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. He stood before the Male Star (Morning Star) who sitteth in
the heavens,
. And spake to him, saying: O, grandfather!
. The Male Star replied: My grandchild!
. The messenger spake: The little ones have nothing of which to
make their bodies.
. The Male Star replied: I am a person of whom the little ones
may well make their bodies.
. Iam a god who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who is able to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of
life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going,
. When the little ones make of me their bodies.
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to stand in their way to prevent their going.
. Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to see old age, as
they travel the path of life.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 63
. They shall also live to see the days that are calm and peaceful.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and peaceful
days, as they travel the path of life.
4
. The people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Then they spake to the youngest of the brothers,
. Saying: O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger stood before the Female Star (Evening Star)
who sitteth in the heavens,
. And spake to her, saying: O, my grandmother!
. The Female Star replied: My grandchild!
. The messenger spake: The little ones have nothing of which to
make their bodies.
. The Female Star replied: I am a person of whom the little ones
may well make their bodies.
. Iam a god who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to stand in their way to stop their going.
. Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to see old age, as
they travel the path of life.
. I have been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
5
. The people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers
. They spake, saying: O, younger brother,
148.
THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger stood before the Litter (Ursa Major), who stands
in the heavens,
. To whom he spake, saying, O, grandfather!
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. The Litter replied: I am a person of whom the little ones may
well make their bodies.
. Tam a god who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who is able to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to stand in their way to prevent their going.
. Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to see old age.
. Ihave been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
6
. The people spake, saying: The little ones have nothing of which
to make their bodies,
. Give heed, younger brothers, and see what can be done.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers,
. They spake, saying: O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger stood before Deer-head (Pleiades), who sitteth
in the heavens,
. To whom he spake, saying: O, my grandmother!
. She replied: My grandchild!
. The messenger spake: The little ones have nothing of which to
make their bodies.
Deer-head replied: I am a person of whom the little ones may
well make their bodies,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 65
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
Zale
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
Welhe
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
IT am a god who has power to resist death.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
Even among the gods
There is not one who is able to see my path.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even the gods
Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of
life.
Even among the gods
There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even the gods
Shall not be able to stand in their way to prevent their going.
Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall be able to bring themselves to see old age.
I have been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
¢
The people spake, saying: The little ones have nothing of
which to make their bodies,
Give heed, O, younger brothers, and see what can be done.
Then to the youngest of the brothers,
They spake, saying: O, younger brother,
The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
Take heed and see what can be done.
Even as these words were being spoken,
The messenger stood before Three-deer (Orion’s belt), who
stands in the heavens,
To whom he spake, saying: O, grandfather!
The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
Three-deer replied: I am a person of whom the little ones may
well make their bodies,
I am a god who has power to resist death.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
Even among the gods
There is not one who is able to see my path.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
66
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
U)ite
192.
193.
194.
195.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
ond wb wv
ee
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Even the gods
Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of
life.
Even among the gods
There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even the gods
Shall not be able to stand in their way to prevent their going.
Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall have the power to bring themselves to see old
age.
I have been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
8
. The people spake, saying: The little ones have nothing of
which to make their bodies, O, younger brothers,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers
. They spake, saying: O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger stood before Double-star (Theta and Iota in
Orion) who sitteth in the heavens,
. To whom he spake, saying: O, grandmother!
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Double-star replied: I am a person of whom the little ones may
well make their bodies.
. I am a god who has power to resist death.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They also shall have power to resist death, as they travel the
path of life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who is able to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even the gods
. Shall not be able to see their path, as they travel the path of
life.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who can stand in my way to prevent my going.
9. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
LA FLESCHE) CHILD-NAMING RITE 67
220. Even the gods
221. Shall not be able to stand in their way to prevent their going.
222. Moreover, I have been able to bring myself to see old age.
223. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
224. They also shall be able to bring themselves to see old age.
225. I have been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
226. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
227. They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
At the close of the wi’-gi-e Sho"-ge-mo"-i® and the Sho’-ka are
invited by the family to join them in the evening meal, after which
the two men go home.
Tue Xo’-KA CEREMONIALLY CONDUCTED TO THE CuHILD’s House
Before sunrise the next morning the Sho’-ka, carrying his little
pipe, the badge of his office, goes to Sho"’-ge-mo"-i"’s house to con-
duct him to the house of the child to be named. Upon receiving the
formal message from the Sho’-ka, Sho"’-ge-mo-i" takes his paint
pouch from a bag containing his personal belongings and puts some
red paint on the inner surface of his hands. Then as the eastern
clouds take from the rising sun a crimson tinge, he lifts his hands,
palms outward, toward them and the sun itself. After a silent pause
he withdraws his hands and reddens his face with the paint on them,
as though with the color of the sun, and his messengers, the reddened
clouds. When he has put upon his face the sacred color he takes
from a package in which he keeps his ornamental feathers a red
downy eagle feather which he fastens to his scalplock so that the
red feather, the life symbol of his gens, stands firm and upright. In
the days when buffalo were plentiful the No*-ho®-zhi"-ga who is to
act as Xo’-ka at the child-naming ceremony wore a buffalo robe
with the hair outside, but since the extinction of that animal he
substituted for the robe a woven blanket obtained from traders.
Having thus decorated himself with red paint and the red feather,
symbols of the sky, and the substitute of the buffalo robe, an earth
symbol, Sho®’-ge-mo®-i", now actual Xo’-ka, goes forth to the house
of the child to be named, following the Sho’-ka, who leads the way.
It was explained by the old man that the manner of approach of his
gens, the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge, to the house of the child was very
simple, that it did not have the elaborate ceremonial forms described
by Wa-xthi’-zhi that were followed by his gens, the Puma, and the
other war gentes of the Ho®’-ga great division.
Arriving at the house, the Sho’-ka enters without pause and leads
the Xo’-ka to his place at the left of the father, who sits with his wife
and child at the east end of the house. When the Xo’-ka has taken
his seat the No"-ho"-zhi"-ga of his gens, the Tsi-zhu Wa-shta-ge,
68 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN, 43
enter and take their places back of the Xo’-ka and the parents and
sit in a row occupying the entire width of the house. Then the
No” -ho*-zhi"-ga of the other gentes who are to take part in the cere-
mony enter, those of the Ho*’-ga great division taking their accus-
tomed places at the south side and those of the Tsi’-zhu great division
at the north side of the house. _ (Fig. 1.) Except for the blankets of
various colors, the No*’-ho®-zhi"-ga were decorated alike, their
faces painted red, the color of the sun and the dawn, and a red
downy feather fastened to the scalplock of each one.
A Lire Symspou Sent to Eacu oF THE OFFICIATING GENTES
When all the No"’-ho®-zhi"-ga had settled down in their places, and
had exchanged with each other the usual social greetings, Sho®’-ge-
mo"™-i" opens the proceedings with a formal statement, setting forth
the purpose of the gathering and adding some pertinent remarks con-
cerning the ancient rite of naming the children and their formal
recognition as members of the tribe. He then goes on to the cere-
mony of distributing the fees and the symbolic articles to be used in
the rite. The distribution was made in the following order:
1. To the Wa’-tse-tsi, Star gens of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision
of the Ho*’-ga great division, he sent, by the Sho’-ka, cedar fronds
with fee. The cedar is a life symbol of the Wa’-tse-tsi gens.
2. To the Tho’-xe, Buffalo-bull gens, of the Tsi’-zhu great division,
a bowl of shelled corn with fee. The maize is one of the life symbols
of the Tho’-xe.
3. To the No"-po"-da, Deer gens of the Wa-zha’-zhe subidivion
of the Ho’’-ga great division, a bowl of water with fee. Water is one
of the life symbols of the No®’-po™-da.
4. To the Ci*’-dse-a-gthe, Wolf-tail gens, of the Tsi’-zhu great
division, fee only. The sunisone of the life symbols of this gens.
The Dog-star is also one of its symbols.
5. I’-ba-tse Ta-dse, Wind gens of the Ho"’-ga subdivision of the
Ho"’-ga great division, a bowl of shelled corn. The Tho’-xe author-
ized the I’-ba-tse to use the maize ritual. This gens also has the
office of performing the ceremonies by which the souls of warriors
slain in battle are sent direct to the spirit land.
MeMBERS OF THE OFfriciATING GenTES RecireE THEIR Wr’-GI-Es
SIMULTANEOUSLY
When the Sho’-ka, the Ceremonial Messenger, had made the last
delivery of the symbolic articles and fees to the gentes above named,
each No"’-ho®-zhi®-ga begins to recite the wi’-gi-e of his gens relating to
its life symbol, such as the cedar fronds, the corn or water. As each
No?’-ho"-zhi®-ga recites the wi’-gi-e of his gens, old Sho™’-ge-mo™-i?
recites the Name Wi’-gi-e of his own gens, the Tsi-zhu Wa-shta-ge,
which is as follows:
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 69
—
bo bd bv
Ce OS)
bo bw bw
“ID or
HSS MN AAR we
THE NAME WI’-GI-E
FREE TRANSLATION
1
. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers they spake,
. Saying: O, younger brother,
The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
You will give heed and see what can be done.
Even as these words were being spoken
To the first division of heaven,
The messenger verily descended,
Where the little ones had not yet become a people.
2
. Again the people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers they spake,
. Saying: O, younger brother,
. You will give heed and see what can be done.
. To the second division of heaven the messenger descended,
. When he cried out:
. It can not be, it is impossible:
. The little ones have not yet become a people.
3
. Again the people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
3. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
Take heed and see what can be done.
5. Then to the youngest of the brothers they spake,
. Saying: O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. You will give heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger descended to the third division of heaven,
. Where the little ones had not yet become a people.
4
2. Verily, at that time and place,
. The people spake, saying: O, younger brothers, the little ones
have nothing of which to make their bodies,
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Take heed and see what can be done.
. Then to the youngest of the brothers they spake,
. Saying: O, younger brother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
. You will give heed and see what can be done.
. Even as these words were being spoken,
. The messenger descended to the fourth division of heaven,
. Where lay the bird (the female eagle) that has no stains (evil
disposition).
. Verily, a person who is ever present upon her nest.
. Upon the center of the earth, that sat in all her greatness,’
. There stood a person (the male eagle).
. From him we shall take the name, Mo*-zho™, Earth,
. Verily, he is a person who travels far and wide, above the earth.
. We shall take from him the name, Mo®-zho"’-ga-sho", Travels-
above-the-earth.
’ Verily, he is a person whose home is upon the center of the earth.
. We will take from him the name, Mo®-zho"’-u-cko"-gka, Center-
of-the-earth.
5
. The little ones are now a people.
. We shall also take the name, Xi-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle-
woman,
2. Also the name, Hi®’-i-ki"-da-bi, Feathers-fought-over,
. Hit’-ga-mo"-ge, Feathers-scattered-by-the-winds, shall also be
our name,
. As also, No"-be’-ci, Yellow-hands.
. And Wa-zhi"’-ga-hi", Feathers-of-the-bird, shall be our name.
6
. Verily, at that time and place,
. The eagle spake, saying: Behold the hollow of my foot,
. Which I have made to be the sign of old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They shall live to see the sign of old age in the hollow of their
foot.
. The wrinkles upon my shin,
. L have made to be the sign of old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. They shall live to see wrinkles upon their shin.
? The words of this line are figurative and mean the earth when she displays her greatness by her blos-
soming flowers and her ripening fruit.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 71
65. The folds of the skin on my knee,
66. I have made to be the sign of old age.
67. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
68. They shall live to see the skin of their knee gathered in folds.
69. The stripes on the feathers of my thigh,
70. I have made to be the sign of old age.
71. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
72. They shall live to see the sign of old age upon their thigh.
73. The stripes upon my breast,
74. I have made to be the sign of old age.
75. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
76. They shall live to see the sign of old age on their breast.
77. The stripes upon the corners of my mouth,
78. I have made to be the sign of old age.
79. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
80. They shall live to see the sign of old age in the corners of their
mouth.
81. The stripes upon my forehead,
82. I have made to be the sign of old age.
83. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
84. They shall live to see the sign of old age on their forehead.
85. The folds of my eyelids,
86. I have made to be the sign of old age.
87. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
88. They shall live to see the sign of old age on their eyelids.
89. I have been able to bring myself to old age.
90. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
91. They also shall be able to bring themselves to old age.
92. I have been able to bring myself to the calm and peaceful days.
93. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
94. They also shall be able to bring themselves to the calm and
peaceful days, as they travel the path of life.
Tue CuILp 1s PASSED FROM GENS TO GENS TO BE BLESSED
At the close of the simultaneous recital of the wi’-gi-es by the
No*’-ho"-zhi®-ga of the six gentes, namely, the Wa’-tse-tsi, Tho’-xe,
No” -po"-da, (i®’-dse-a-gthe, I’-ba-tse, and the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge,
the Sho’-ka carries the infant to the head of the Wa’-tse-tsi gens, who
takes it in his arms, then, dipping the tips of the fingers into a wooden
vessel, in which had been put sacred water and red cedar fronds, he
gently touches with his moistened fingertips the lips, head, arms, and
body of the little one. This ceremonial act is an appeal to Wa-ko"’-
da to grant to the little one health and strength so that it may grow
to maturity and old age without interruption by disease.
72 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 43
The child is next taken by the Sho’-ka to the head of the No®’-
po"-da gens, who blesses it in the same manner with the symbolic
water and cedar fronds.
Then the little one is taken to the head of the I’-ba-tse gens, who
touches the lips, head, arms and body of the child with pounded corn,
besides the sacred water and cedar fronds. The touching of the
child with the life-giving corn is an act of appeal to Wa-ko"’-da that
the child be not permitted to suffer for want of food during its life,
so that it may reach maturity and old age without difficulty. The
gentile symbol of the I’-ba-tse gens is the wind but it was authorized
by the Tho’-xe gens to use the corn ritual in its child-naming ritual.
The Sho’-ka takes the little one from the I’-ba-tse to the head of
the Tho’-xe, Buffalo-bull, gens. In the mythical story of the origin
of the maize it was Tho’-xe, Buffalo-bull, who gave to the people
the maize and the squash. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
pp. 279-281, lines 54 to 110.) The head of the Tho’-xe gens takes
the little one in his arms and blesses it with the sacred water and cedar
fronds as did the Wa’-tse-tsi, then, mixing some of his own pounded
corn with that of the I’-ba-tse, he blesses the child with the sacred
corn, the life symbol of his own gens. The ceremonial act of the
Tho’-xe is an expression of the wish that the life-giving corn will aid
the new member of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens to successfully
reach maturity and old age.
The next to take the child in his arms and bless it with the sym-
bolic water, cedar fronds and corn is the head of the @i?’-dse-a-gthe,
Wolf, gens. His ceremonial acts do not differ from those of the
Tho’-xe.
The Sho’-ka then brings the little one to its own gens, the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge, the People of Peace. The head of the gens takes the
little one in his arms and blesses it in the same manner in which the
Tho’-xe blessed it. This is the gens to whom the sick are brought
that they might taste of the sacred food prepared by them and be
strengthened. From this healing power the members of the gens
like to take the name, Wa-stse’-e-do", Good-doctor.
When each of these gentes had blessed the child in turn the Sho’-ka
brings the mother to the Xo’-ka, who places in her hands two little
sticks, each of which represents a sacred name of the gens of which
the little one has now become a member. The Xo/-ka bids her
take one of the names represented by the sticks. The mother
usually takes for her child the name that is most euphonious and which
she thinks has the greater religious significance. The selection of a
name for the new member of the gens closes the ceremony.
During the month of April, 1916, Sho®’-ge-mo"-i" was summoned
to the house of Wa-xthi’-zhi to name his grandson, whose father is
a member of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens. Sho"’-ge-mo"-i"
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 73
promptly responded to the call but Wa-xthi’-zhi became uncertain
as to whether or not the ceremonial naming of a child according to
the ancient tribal rites would come under the prohibition of the new
religion which he had accepted against the practice of the ancient
Osage ceremonies. The full ceremony was omitted, but the old man
was asked to offer to the mother the choice of two sacred names:
Mo*-zho"’, Earth (see p. 70, line 45), and Wa-stse’-e-do", Good-
doctor. The mother, a member of the I"-gtho"’-ga (Puma) gens,
chose for her son, a member of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens, the
name Wa-stse’-e-do®. Although the full child-naming ceremony
was omitted, Wa-xthi’-zhi gave as fees to Sho"’-ge-mo"-i" a horse,
a blanket, and other articles of value, amounting to about one hundred
and fifty dollars.
The first wi’-gi-e recited in the child-naming ritual given by Sho’’-
ge-mo"-i" (pp. 60 to 67) is entitled Wa-zho’-i-ga-the Wi’-gi-e,
literally, The Taking of Bodies, and freely translated, The Taking
of Life Symbols. In this wi’-gi-e eight gods, in the forms of certain
cosmic bodies, are adopted as Life Symbols. Sex is attributed to
these gods and goddesses and they are addressed as ‘‘grandfather”’
and ‘‘erandmother’’ because of their great age and mysterious
character. The wi’-gi-e is an expression by the ancient No®’-ho®-
zhi"-ga of their longing desire for a tribal life that will be as lasting
as that of the gods and goddesses who forever travel in the heavens.
These gods and goddesses are paired in this wi’-gi-e as follows:
Wa-ko"’-da Ho"™-ba do", God of Day (the Sun), grandfather,
Wa-ko"’-da Ho" do", Goddess of Night (the Moon), grandmother.
Wa’-tse-do-ga, Male Star (the Morning star), grandfather,
Wa’-tse Mi-ga, Female Star (the Evening star), grandmother.
Wa’-ba-ha, Litter (the Dipper), grandfather,
Ta-pa’, Deer-head (the Pleiades), grandmother.
ge Ss Se Oa
Ta Tha’-bthi®, Three-deer (the three great stars that form
Orion’s Belt), grandfather,
. Mi-ka-k’e u-ki-tha-c’i" (Stars-strung-together) (theta and iota in
Orion), grandmother.
Xu’-tha-wa-to"-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® (Elder Tsi’-zhu), a war
gens of the Tsi’-zhu great tribal division, was asked for the Child-
naming Ritual of his gens, he being referred to as one versed in the
rituals of the Tsi’-zhu war gentes, but he declined to give it in full.
With some reluctance he consented to recite the first wi’-gi-e of his
ritual which corresponds to and bears the same title as the one given
by Sho"’-ge-mo®-i", a No®’-ho"-zhi"-ga of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens. (See pp. 60 to 67.)
19078°—28, 6
(0/0)
74 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
In the Sho"’-ge-mo"-i" wi’-gi-e (The Taking of Life Symbols), the
people of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens implored four gods and four
goddesses of the sky for permission to take from them ‘“bodies”’ for
araeoal ty Lo onlintets is their little ones. The peo-
PotAnis kJ Deh eee . * ple of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no?,
‘ in the wi’-gi-e recorded by
. 4 Xu-thu’-wa-to"-i", entreat-
sie ed six gods and four god-
f desses of the sky for per-
¢ mission to take ‘bodies’
from them for their little
‘ ones. The following is the
: order in which the Tsi’-zhu
+ Wa-no" people approached
Fic. 3.—Chart of constellation Wa’-ba-ha (Ursa Major) these ten sky deities, the
order in which they paired them according to sex, and the terms of
relationship they used in addressing them:
1. Wa-ko"’-da Ho”’-ba do", the God of Day (the Sun), grandfather,
2. Wa-ko"’-da Ho" do®, the
Goddessof Night (the Moon), ‘
grandmother. i of
3. Mi-ka’-k’e Ho"’-ba"do?, e
the Day-star (Morning star),
grandfather,
4. Mi-ka’-k’e Ho” do?, the a
Night-star (Evening star),
grandmother.
5. Wa’-ba-ha, Litter, the
Dipper (Great Bear), (fig. 3), =
grandfather,
6. Mi-ka’-k’e u-ki-tha-¢’ i", No2<
Double-star, grandmother.
7. Ta-pa’, Deer-head, Ple- O
iades, grandfather,
8. Ta Tha’-bthi, Three- _ CaP ehag coe
deer, the three great stars in NO-1.74 7H4" Anetta te AST
gif NO.2. //-KA- kK’ E U-HI-THA-TS/% =
enon s belt (fig. 4), grand- STARS-STRUNG-TOGETHER.
mother.
Fic. 4.—Chart of Ta Tha’-bthi=, Three Deer (in Orion)
9. Mi-ka’-k’e Zhu-dse, Red-star, the Pole star, grandfather,
10. Sho™-ge A-ga-k’e e-go", Dog-star, Sirius, grandfather.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE UD
The two wi’-gi-es do not agree as to the sexes of two of the sky
deities. In the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge wi’-gi-e, Ta-pa’ (Pleiades) is
addressed as grandmother and in that of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" as
grandfather. Ta-tha’-bthi®, Three-deer, is addressed as grandfather
in the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge wi’-gi-e and in that of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-no" as grandmother.
The difference between the two wi’-gi-es in this respect was
spoken of to Sho"’-ge-mo®-i" and he said: ‘‘We notice such mistakes
in the tribal rites but controversy over them is always avoided by the
No’-ho"-zhi"-ga. Xu-tha’-wa-to™-i" recited his wi’-gi-e correctly,
and we recite ours as it was handed down to us. The Tsi’-zhu
Wa-no", being a war people, mention in their wi’-gi-e their two war
gods, the Red-star and the Dog-star; they address both as grand-
father. We (the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge) are a peace people, therefore
we do not mention those two gods in our child-naming ritual.”
First CuHinp-NAMING W1’-GI-E OF THE TsI’/-zHU Wa-NON GENS
The following is the first wi’-gi-e in the Child-naming Ritual of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no", war gens, of the Tsi’-zhu great tribal division, as
recited by Xu-tha’-wa-to"-i".
TAKING OF LIFE SYMBOLS
1
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi’-zhu, a people who have seven fireplaces, spake to one
another,
3. Saying: O, younger brothers,
4. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
5. Then, at that very time they spake
6. To the Sho’-ka Wa-ba-xi (the Chief Messenger),
7. Saying: O, younger brother,
8. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
9. Take heed and see what can be done.
10. Then, at that very time,
11. The Chief Messenger
12. Hastened to the
13. God of Day (the Sun), who sitteth in the heavens,
14. And returned with him to the people.
15. They spake to the God of Day, saying: O, grandfather,
16. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
17. Then, at that very time,
18. The God of Day quickly replied: It is well you sent for me.
19. Of all the groups of gods,
20. I am a god by myself.
21. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Even among the gods,
There is not one who has power to see my path.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path, in life’s
journey.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path, in life’s
journey.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to pre-
vent their going.
. Tam not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
2
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to the
. Goddess of Night (the Moon), who sitteth in the heavens,
3. And returned with her to the people.
. They spake to her, saying: O, grandmother,
5. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
46.
. The Goddess of Night replied: It is well you sent for me.
48.
49.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
5. Even among the gods
56.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
59.
. Even among the gods
Then, at that very time,
Of all the groups of gods,
Tam a god by myself.
There is not one who has power to cross my path.
There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE adh
61.
What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
1 9
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
. Tam not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
3
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to the
. Star of Day (the Morning Star), who sitteth in the heavens,
. And returned with him to the people.
. They spake to the Star of Day, saying: O, grandfather,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. The Star of Day replied: It is well you sent for me.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. Of all the groups of gods,
. Tam a god by myself.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand. in their way to
prevent their going.
5. I am not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
4
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to the
. Star of Night (the Evening Star), who sitteth in the heavens,
. And returned with her to the people.
. They spake to her, saying: O, grandmother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. The Star of Night replied: It is well you sent for me.
. Of all the groups of gods
. Tam a god by myself.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path, in their
life’s journey.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path, in their
life’s journey.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to prevent
their going. “4
0. I am not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
5
22. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to the
. Litter (Great Bear), who stands in the midst of the heavens,
. And returned with him to the people.
. They spake to Litter, saying: O, grandfather,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. The Litter replied: It is well you sent for me.
. Of all the groups of gods,
. Lam a god by myself.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 79
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
ow
cee cece cee cee oe
om coc ct uo
SIO Or Noe
Or on
(oe)
Even among the gods
There is not one who has power to see my path.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even among the gods
There is not one who shall be able to see their path, in their
life’s journey.
Even among the gods
There is not one who has power to cross my path.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even among the gods
There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
Even among the gods
What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my going?
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
Even among the gods
There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
I am not the only god,
Take heed and make further search.
6
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to
. Ta-pa’, Deer-head (Pleiades), who stands in the heavens,
. And returned with her to the people.
. They spake to her, saying: O, grandmother,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. Deer-head replied: It is well you sent for me.
. Of all the groups of gods
. Lam a god by myself.
. Even among the gods
3. There is not one who has power to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
5. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
7. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
9. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
. Iam not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
7
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to
2. Ta Tha’-bthi", Three-deer (Orion’s belt), who sitteth in the
heavens,
. And returned with him to the people.
. They spake to him, saying: O, grandfather,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. Three-deer replied: Of all the groups of gods,
. Lam a god by myself.
9. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to see my path.
2. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
3. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
9. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
202. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
5. I am not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
8
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
8. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to
. Mi-ka’-k’e U-ki-tha-¢’i", Double-star (theta and iota in Orion),
who sitteth in the heavens,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 81
bo bw bb bo
bo
Oe
“1D Ore
bo bw bb tb
j=)
IW Ww bb bd bo
Ore Whe
bdo bw bd bo
oon eo
NnNmNnNmnNnnNnNnwhd wb
. And returned with her to the people.
. They spake to her, saying: O, grandmother,
3. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. Double-star replied: It is well you sent for me.
. Of all the groups of gods
. Lam a god by myself.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
3. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
2. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
. Iam not the only god,
. Take heed and make further search.
9
5. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to
. Mi-ka’-k’e Zhu-dse, Red-star (Pole star), who sitteth in the
heavens,
. And returned with him to the people.
. They spake to him, saying: O, grandfather,
1. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Red-star replied: It is well you sent for me.
. Of all the groups of gods
. Lam a god by myself.
. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to see my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to see their path.
to bh bh bb
Or or ca
bo
or Or Or Or Or
NOD Or Re WD Re
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who has power to cross my path.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to cross their path.
. Even among the gods
. What one is there who can stand in my way to prevent my
going?
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. Even among the gods
. There is not one who shall be able to stand in their way to
prevent their going.
. Iam not the only god,
262. Take heed and make further search.
10
. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
. The Chief Messenger
. Hastened to
. The side of the heavens
. Where lay Sho”’-ge, the Dog (Sirius), as though suspended in
the sky,
. And returned with him to the people.
. They spake to him, saying: O grandfather,
. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
. Then, at that very time,
. The Dog replied: The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
. Behold my toes, that are gathered closely together,
. TL have not folded them together without a purpose. ~
. I have made them to be a sign of old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. When they become aged men,
. In their toes, closely folded together,
. They shall see the sign of old age.
. Behold the folds of skin on my ankle.
. Ihave not put them there without a purpose.
. I have made them to be a sign of old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
. When they become aged men,
. In the skin of their ankles, gathered in folds,
. They shall see the sign of old age.
. Behold the flaccid muscles of my thigh.
. They have not become flaccid without a purpose.
. I have made them to be a sign of old age.
. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 83
291.
292.
293.
294.
295.
296.
297.
298.
299.
300.
301.
302.
303.
304.
305.
306.
307.
308.
309.
310.
dll.
312.
313.
314.
315.
316.
317.
318.
319.
320.
321.
322.
323.
324.
325.
326.
327.
328.
329.
When they become aged men,
They shall see in the flaccid muscles of their thighs the sign of old
age.
Behold my shoulders, that are drawn close together.
They are not drawn together without a purpose.
I have made them to be a sign of old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
When they become aged men,
They shall see in their shoulders drawn together the sign of old
age.
Behold the flaccid muscles of my throat.
They have not become flaccid without a purpose.
I have made them to be a sign of old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
When they become aged men,
They shall see in the flaccid muscles of their throat the sign of
old age.
Behold the folds of the corners of my mouth.
They are not put there without a purpose.
I have made them to be a sign of old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
When they become aged men,
They shall see in the corners of their mouth the sign of old age.
Behold the folds in the corners of my eyes.
They are not put there without a purpose.
I have made them to be a sign of old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
When they become aged men,
They shall see in the corners of their eyes the sign of old age.
Behold the tip of my nose.
It is not placed there without a purpose.
I have placed it there for chasing away other gods.
I use it for keeping other gods from entering my house.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall use it to chase away other gods, as they travel the
path of life.
Behold the hair on the crown of my head grown thin.
It has not grown thin without a purpose.
I have made it to be a sign of old age.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
When they become aged men,
They shall see in their whitened hair
The sign of old age, as they travel the path of life.
84 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
330. There comes a time
331. When a calm and peaceful day comes upon me,
332. So there shall come upon the little ones a calm and peaceful day,
as they travel the path of life.
The most important wi’-gi-es (recited parts of a ritual) used in
the child-naming rituals are those which relate to the life symbols of a
gens, such as the sun, the moon, the morning and evening stars,
night and day, deer, elk, bear, etc., which are called wa-zho’-i-ga-the,
objects of which bodies are made; and those which relate to the
personal, sacred names adopted by a gens to be used by its members
for their children. The wi’-gi-e relating to the life symbols are
usually recited at the beginning of the ceremony. (See wi’-gi-e of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens, p. 60.) The name wi’-gi-es, called Zha’/-zhe
Ki-to" (Zha’-zhe, name; Ki-to", the taking of), are recited when all
the No"-ho"-zhi"-ga who were invited to take part in the ceremony
of the conferring of a name uponachild have assembled. The life-
symbol and the name-taking wi’-gi-es are paraphrases of the mythical
stories of the origin of the people of a gens. These mythical origin
stories are called Ni’-ki-e, freely translated, Sayings of the Ancient
Men.
Xu-tha’-wa-to"-i" (pl. 7), of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens of the
Tsi’-zhu great tribal division, recorded the life symbol wi’-gi-e of his
gens (see pp. 75-84) but he declined to give the wi’-gi-e of the sacred
gens names. However, these names appear in the Wi’-gi-e To®-ga,
Great Wi’-gi-e (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 254-269),
which are here given in their order, as follows:
1. ’I"-gka’, White Rock. In the origin story of this gens the
people came down from the sky, as eagles, to the earth and alighted
upon seven trees. Thence:
36. They moved onward over the earth.
32. They came to the top of a rocky cliff,
38. Close to it they came and paused,
40. ‘They spake to one another, saying: White Rock
41. We shall make to be a personal name for ourselves.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 255.)
2. Mo”’-hit Wa-ko"’-da, Mysterious Knife. From the White
Rock the people went forth to wander over the earth. They thought
to make for themselves a knife for ceremonial use. The Sho’/-ka
went again and again to find the right kind of stone of which to make
the knife. He brought home the red flint, the blue flint, the flint
streaked with yellow, the black flint and the white flint, one after
the other, each of which was rejected as being unfit for use by the
little ones as a knife. Finally he brought home a round-handled
REAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 7
XU-THA’-WA-TO®-I* (TSI'-ZHU WA-NO® GENS)
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE
STRAPS FOR TYING CAPTIVES
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 85
knife which was accepted as suitable for the purpose. Then followed
the idea of the people of making a magical war club for ceremonial
use. The Sho’-ka went in search for the right kind of: tree out of
which to make it. He brought to the elder brothers the hickory
tree, the thick-barked hickory tree, the red oak tree, the red wood
tree, the dark wood tree, each of which was rejected as being unsuit-
able for use as a club. Then he brought to them the willow tree, a
tree that never dies. This the elder brothers accepted as eminently
fitted for use as a club, and: ;
268. Their round-handled-knife
269. They quickly took from its resting place,
271. And spake, saying: It is a fear-inspiring knife,
272. Verily, it is a mysterious knife.
273. Mysterious-knife
274. The little ones shall take as their personal name.
276. They lifted the round-handled knife
277. And quickly stabbed with it the body of the willow tree.
278. Then from its wound its life-blood streamed forth.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 261.)
3. We’-thi®-ca-gi, Strong-strap. With the mysterious knife the
people shaped out of the ‘tree-that-never-dies” a mystic club.
Taking with them the knife and the club they went in search of a
buffalo and found one. On coming in sight of the animal they
brandished the magic weapon four times in the air and the buffalo
fell lifeless to the ground:
511. The skin of the (left) hind leg
512. They cut into a narrow strip,
514. And said: Verily the skin stretches not,
515. We shall make use of it as we travel the path of life.
517. Verily, it is a strong strap,
519. We shall consecrate it for ceremonial use,
520. Therefore Strong-strap
521. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 267-268.)
4. We’-thi™-ga-xe, Strap-maker. By the cutting of the first
strap out of the skin of the left hind leg of the magically killed buffalo
the people of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens created for themselves the
office of making the straps (pl. 8) for the warriors for the tying of
captives when any are taken. As they continued to cut out the
strap they said:
523. Strap-maker, also,
524. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 268.)
86 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
5. We’-thi®-zhi®-ga, Slender-strap. The strap they made out of
the skin of the left hind leg of the animal was long and slender, and
when they had finished it,
526. They said: Slender-strap, also,
527. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
549. The skin of the left side
550. They cut in a circle,
552. And.seven slender straps
553. They made of it for the Tsi-zhu who possesses seven fireplaces,
554. One for each fireplace,
556. And they said: We shall consecrate these straps for ceremonial
use.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 268-269.)
These seven straps cut from the left side of the buffalo were to
serve as types for similar straps to be ceremonially made for each
of the other gentes of the tribe when about to go to war, to use in
tying captives.
6. He-thi’-shi-zhe, Curved-horn. As the people saw the horns of
the buffalo they exclaimed:
558. Behold the left horn,
559. We shall consecrate it for ceremonial use,
561. Therefore Curved-horn, also,
562. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 269.)
7. He-thi’-zha-ge, Outspread-horns. The people noticed that the
horns of the buffalo stood wide apart and outspread and so they ex-
claimed:
564. Outspread-horns, also,
565. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
566. And they said, again: Behold the left horn,
568. We consecrete it for ceremonial use.
—(36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 269.)
Personal names relating to any of the life symbols of a gens serve
to keep the members informed of their place in the gentile and tribal
organization. For example: Men who were given such names as
Ho-co™, White-fish; To’-ho-ho-e, Blue-fish; and Ho’-ki-e-ci, Wrig-
gling-fish, know that they are members of the Ho’-i-ni-ka-shi-ga,
Fish-people, gens whose life symbol is the Fish, and that the place of
their gens is in the Wa-zha’-zhe, the first of the two subdivisions of the
Ho"’-ga great tribal division which symbolizes the earth. The Wa-
zha’-zhe subdivision typifies the water portion of the earth.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 87
Those who were given such names as O’-po"-to"-ga, Great-elk;
Mo"’-thi®-ka-ga-xe, Maker-of-the-land; and Mo"-zho™-ga-xe, Maker-
of-the-earth, know that they are members of the Elk gens whose
life symbol is the male elk (36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p. 165, lines 274 to 354) and that the place of their gens is with the
Ho"-ga, the second of the two subdivisions of the Ho’’-ga great
tribal division which symbolizes the earth. The Ho*’-ga subdivision
typifies the land portion of the earth.
Men who bear the names Pi-ci’, Acorn; U-bu’-dse, Profusion;
and No®-bu’-dse, Profusion (by the treading of the eagles on the
branches of the red oak tree) know that they are members of the
Tsi/-zhu Wa-shta-ge (Peacemaker) gens, that the life symbol of
their gens is the red oak tree, the emblem of fruitfulness, and that
Syd Sod SOSA 8 Ad
RGA SL Sid SA SRI
Fic. 5.—Totemic cut of the Omaha boys’ hair. No. 1is typical of the head and tail of the elk. No.2sym-
bolizes the head, tail, and horns of the buffalo. No. 2a—the children of this subgens and those of the
Ni-ni’-ba-to® subgens of other gentes have their hair cut alike; the locks on each side of the bared crown
indicate the horns of the buffalo. No. 3 represents the line of the buffalo’s back as seen against the sky.
No. 4b stands for the head of the bear. No. 4c figures the head, tail, and body of small birds. No. 4d,
the bare head, represents the shell of the turtle; and the tufts, the head, feet, and tail of the animal. No.
4e pictures the head, wings, and tail of the eagle. No. 5 symbolizes the four points of the compass con-
nected by cross lines; the central tuft points to the zenith. No. 6 represents the shaggy side of the wolf.
No. 7 indicates the horns and tail of the buffalo. No. 8 stands for the head and tail of the deer. No. 9
shows the head, tail, and knobs of the growing horn of the buffalo calf. No. 10 symbolizes reptile teeth.
The children of this gens sometimes have the hair shaved off so as to represent the hairless body of snakes.
the place of their gens in the tribal organization is with the Tsi’-zhu,
the second of the two great tribal divisions which symbolizes the
sky, including the sun, moon and stars that move tnerein. (See
36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 281, lines 111 to 120.)
Tue Gentite Hatr Cur or CHILDREN
Another custom, akin to the taking of personal gentile names, was
originated by the ancient No*’-ho®-zhi"-ga, that of the adoption by
each of the various gentes of the tribe of a particular style of hair
cut for the young children to typify one of the life symbols of the
gens. (Fig. 5.) The style adopted by the Ho"-ga gens of the
Ho" -ga tribal subdivision for their children was that of cutting
nearly all the hair of the head close to the skin, leaving an unbroken
88 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
fringe along the entire edge. (Fig. 6.) The story of its adoption
is best told in the wi’-gi-e of the gens, a paraphrase of which is here
given:
THE WI’-GI-E
The Ho*’-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to one another,
Saying: O, younger brothers,
The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
Then to the Ho®’-ga A-hiu-to™ (Winged Ho®’-ga) they spake,
Saying: O, elder brother! and stood in mute appeal.
In quick response the Winged Ho»’-ga set forth in haste
To a deep and miry marsh,
To the Little Rock who sitteth firmly upon the earth.
Close to the Little Rock he stood and spake,
Saying: O, Grandfather!
Our little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
The Little Rock spake in quick response:
I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
Thereupon the Winged Ho*’-ga hastened back to his brothers to whom he spake,
Saying: O, younger brothers, a Little Rock sits yonder.
Then, with heads bent thitherward,
The younger brothers set forth in haste
To the Little Rock who sitteth firmly upon the earth, in the marsh.
Around him they gathered, close to him they stood as they spake
To the Little Rock sitting with algae floating about him, like locks of hair blow-
ing in the wind. (Fig. 6.)
O, Grandfather! they said to him,
Our little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
The Little Rock made reply:
I am a person who is difficult to be overcome by death.
When your little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
Behold the locks that float about the edges of my head.
When the little ones reach old age,
Their locks shall float about the edges of their heads.
The little ones shall always live to see their locks grown scant with age.
The younger brothers spake, saying: Close to the God of Day who sitteth in
the heavens,
We shall place the Little Rock.®
When our little ones make of the Little Rock their bodies,
Of the God of Day also
Our little ones shall make their bodies.
The four days,
The four great divisions of the days (the four stages of life),
The little ones shall always reach and enter,
They shall always live to see old age.
This style of hair cut is called ko"’-ha-u-thi-stse (ko"’-ha, along
the edge; u-thi-stse, a line left uncut), meaning an unbroken line of
hair left uncut along the entire edge.
3 The Little Rock of the marsh is spoken of as the Gentle Rock because it is a special life symbol of the
people for whom there must always be peace and happiness. As a memorial of the finding of the Little
Rock of the marsh the members of the Ho®’-ga gens in cutting the hair of their little ones leave a fringe
around the entire edge.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 89
At a festival being held at the Indian village near the town of
Pawhuska, old Saucy-calf called the writer’s attention to a little boy
who was playing hide-and-seek with other youngsters and said:
“Look at the way his hair is cut (fig. 6); that is the Ho"’-ga A-hiu-to"
hair cut. That style is called ko™’-ha-u-thi-
stse. Xu-tha’-pa, Eagle-head, better known
as Ben Wheeler, a young man who sat near
us, looked up and said: ‘‘That’s my little boy;
I cut my children’s hair like that.’’ Saucy-calf
then explained that the act of the parents in
cutting the hair of the child in that pre-
scribed fashion was an implied petition to
Wa-ko"-da to permit the little one to live to
see old age without obstruction of any kind.
Hater Cut or THe Ts1’-zHu Wa-sHTA-GE GENS
The people of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge Fic. 6.—Symbolic hair cut of
(Peacemaker) gens, who occupied the most
the Ho»’-ga gens
important and honored place in the great tribal division represent-
ing the sky and all that it contains, adopted the ko®’-ha-u-thi-stse
style of hair cut for their little ones, which varied slightly from the
Fic. 7.—Symbolic hair cut of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens
styles used by the Ho"-
ga. In the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge symbolic hair cut
the line of hair left uncut
along the edge is divided
into little locks to typify
the petals of the cone-
flower, which is the sacred
flower of the gens (fig. 7).
Sho -ge-mo?-i", in
speaking of the symbolic
hair cut of the children of
his gens, the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge, told the fol-
lowing mythical story of
its origin:
In the beginning the
Tsi’-zhu people came
down, in the form of
eagles, from the upper to the lower world. As they came in sight of
the earth they beheld a large red oak tree.
and alighted upon its topmost branches.
19078°—28——_7
They soared down to it
The shock of their weight
90 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
sent to the ground a shower of acorns which scattered around the
foot of the tree, whereupon they said: We shall make of this tree
our life symbol; our little ones shall multiply in numbers like the
seeds of the oak that fall to the earth in countless numbers. The
sagles that crowded upon the top branches of the oak became a
people whose thoughts dwelt upon war, but two of the eagles found
no resting place on the outspreading branches of the great oak and
were obliged to drop to the earth. One alighted on a larger elder tree
and his people became known as Ba’-po, people of the elder tree.
The other eagle alighted upon the ground in the midst of a patch of
little yellow flowers which his people made to be their life symbol
and their emblem of peace. The people cut the hair of their children
in such fashion as to make their heads resemble the little yellow
flower, the emblem of peace. (Fig. 7.) This yellow flower is
called Ba-shta’, Hair-cut. It is the Ratibida columnaris.
A paraphrase of the wi’-gi-e of the Xu-tha’-zhu-dse, Red Eagle,
gens in which the ‘little yellow flower,” the emblem of peace, is
mentioned, is here given.
PARAPHRASE OF THE W1’-GI-E OF THE RED EaGite GENS
PEACEFUL DAY IS MY NAME
Verily, my abode is in the days that are calm and peaceful.
When the little ones make of me their bodies (their life),
They shall become a people of the days that are ever serene.
From each of the great gods,
I verily remove all traces of anger and violence.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall have power to remove from the gods
All anger and the desire for destruction.
From the god of the lower world (the earth);
From the god of light who standeth in the midst of heaven;
From the god of the upper world (the over-arching sky),
I have power to remove all anger and violence.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They also shall have power to remove from the gods all anger.
When the little ones of the Wa-zha’-zhe (subdivision),
And those of the Ho®/-ga (subdivision),
Make of me their bodies,
They shall have power to remove from all lands,
All anger, hatred and violence.
NO-ANGER IS ALSO MY NAME
Iam a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
My abode is in the midst of the earth’s warm, quivering air.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall become a people of the earth’s quivering air.
Verily, in the days that are gentle and peaceful,
I make my abode.
When the little ones make of me their bodies,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 91
They shall become a people of the days that are gentle and peaceful.
Of a little yellow flower
I have made my body.
The little Ba-shta’, that stands amidst the winds,
T have made to be my body.
When the little ones make of the Ba-shta’ their bodies,
They shall ever live together without anger, without hatred.
To"-wo"™1’-hi-zhi*-ga, Little To"-wo™-i’-hi, in speaking to Miss
Fletcher in 1898 of the Osage gentile system, said that there are
five subgentes in the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens, namely:
1. Tsi’-u-cko™-cka, House in the center, meaning the Sanctuary
in the keeping of this gens which, figuratively, stands in the center
of the earth.
2. Ba’-po, Elder, or, People of the elder trees.
3. Mo*’-ca-hi, Arrow-tree, or, People of the arrow tree.
4. Zho™-go™, White-tree (Sycamore), or, People of the white
tree.
5. Sho’-ka, Messengers, or, People from whom a ceremonial
messenger is chosen for the gens. Sometimes this gens is called
Tsi’-u-thu-ha-ge, Last group of houses.
It is from the people of the Tsi’-u-cko"-cka that the hereditary
chief of the Tsi’-zhu great tribal division must always be chosen.
The Ba’-po subgens has the office of making the stem for the cere-
monial peace pipe of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge. The stem must
always be made of the Ba’-po, the elder tree. The people of the
Arrow-tree and the Sycamore gentes have lost the significance of
their life symbols. All of these five subgentes use the cone-flower
symbolic hair cut.
There is something pathetic in the passing away of these ancient
rites and customs which the Osage Indians had treasured from the
earliest times of their tribal existence. Joe Sho®’-ge-mo°-i*, like his
father, had respect and reverence for the religious thoughts of his
ancestors which they had expressed in symbols and rituals with cere-
monial forms and handed down. Joe had two little daughters
(pl. 9, a) upon whom he bestowed a large share of his affections. He
not only gave to each of them a sacred name of his gens, but, from
year to year, as they approached womanhood, he cut their hair to
typify the sacred flower of peace and happiness, an act which
implied a supplication to Wa-ko"’-da to bless each little one with a
long and fruitful life. At the last symbolic hair cut the children had
reached school age and they willingly went to the house of learning.
The white children with whom they mingled hooted and jeered at
them for their strange hair cut and made them unhappy. When
they came home they told their father of their unkind treatment at
the school. The fond father quietly took a pair of shears and cut
away from each little head the symbolic locks.
92 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Little To"-wo"-i-hi also stated that there was another style of
symbolic hair cut called gi®’-dse-a-gthe, tails worn on the head,
which belongs to the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no?, the principal war gens of the
Tsi’-zhu great tribal division, which he described as: All of the
hair of the head cut close but leaving uncut a row of three locks,
equidistant apart, beginning at the crown of the head and ending
near the edge of the hair at the back of the head. (Fig. 8.) This
style of hair cut symbolizes all animals of the dog family, including
the gray wolf, the coyote, and the domestic dog. It also symbolizes
a star called Sho’’-ge a-ga-k’e e-go", Dog that lies suspended in the
sky (Sirius).
The Dog Star is mentioned in the Child-naming Wi’-gi-e of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens, bearing the title Wa-zho’-i-ga-the Wi’-gi-e,
Taking of Life Symbols, given by Xu-tha’-wa-to™-in. (See p. 82, sec.
10 of the wi’-gi-e.)
Little To™-wo"’-i-hi said that the Wa-ga-be-to", Black Bear gens
of the Ho’’-ga great division, had a similar style of hair cut as that
of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens. Wa-xthi’-zhi said
that the Puma gens also had the same style of hair
cut.
The symbolic hair cut of the Ni’-ka Wa-ko™-da-gi
gens, Men of Mystery, is: hair of the head all cut
close excepting a lock left uncut on the crown of the
head (pl. 10, a) and a lock at the back of the head
~ near the edge, which does not show in the picture.
lyfe ; The life symbol of this gens is the hawk and the
bic. &—Hairentorthe B&ir cut represents this raptorial bird which was
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no» and adopted by all of the gentes of both the Ho"’-ga
the Wa-a’-be (Black nd the Tsi’-zhu great tribal divisions as an emblem
Bear) gentes a .
of courage for their warriors.
The name of the boy whose picture shows the hair cut of his gens is
Gthe-do"’-c¢ka, White-hawk (Gthe-do", hawk; ¢ka, white). It is the
name that belongs to the second son in a family of this gens. His
father’s name is No®/-ka-to-ho, Blue-back (No”’-ka, back; to-ho,
blue), a name referring to the blue-backed hawk. White-hawk’s
mother is Xi-tha’-do®-wi", Good-eagle-woman, daughter of Sho’-ge-
mo"-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
The style of symbolic hair cut adopted by the Tho’-xe gens is of
the Cit’-dse A-gthe class and is described as, hair on entire head cut
close excepting a little tuft left uncut just over the middle of the
forehead, and a fringe running across the crown of the head from one
ear to the other as shown in the picture (pl. 10, 6); two tufts, one on
either side of the head back of the fringe, and a tuft just above the
nape of the neck, which do not show in the picture. This style of cut
represents the buffalo bull, the principal life symbol of the gens.
N3YqTIHO ADVvSO YNnO4A
q D
6 BLV1d LYOd3ayY TIWNANNYV GYIHL-ALdOd ADOIONHLA NVOIYSWY 4O NV3YNs
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 10
CHILD’S HAIR CUT OF THE THO-XE AND NI’-KA
WA-KO*%-DA-GI GENTES
Sa9vso LINGV AO LND YIVH ONIMOHS ‘NAW
IL 3LV1d LYOd3SyY TVANNYV GYIHL-ALYOSs ADOTONHLA NVOIYSWY JO Nvayng
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 12
BONE EAR PERFORATORS AND EXPANDERS
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 93
The two gentes, the Ni’-ka Wa-ko"-da-gi and the Tho/-xe, are
closely related, being joint custodians of the rites pertaining to y.ar.
(See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 64-65.) The symbolic
hawks, each of which formed the central figure in the ceremonies of
the war rites, were regarded as being in the special care of the Ni/-ka
Wa-ko"-da-gi, while all of the thirteen o-do™, military honors, to be
won by each warrior of the tribe in order to secure ceremonial rank,
belonged to the Tho’-xe. The war honor must be won in a fight by a
war party carrying a hawk, the tribal emblem of courage. The places
of these two gentes are on the Tsi’-zhu side of the two great tribal
divisions, but they are not of the seven fireplaces of that great division.
In the Tsi’-zhu Wi’-gi-e recited by Mo®-zho®-a’-ki-da (36th Ann.
Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 277-285), relating to the mythical story
of the descent of the people from the upper to the lower world, these
two gentes are mentioned. A paraphrase of this part is here given:
PARAPHRASE OF W1’-GI-E RELATING TO THE Ni’-KA Wa-kKO‘%-DA-GI
AND THE THO’-XE GENTES
The Messenger
Then hastened down
To the fourth division of the heavens,
Close to it he stood and paused
And lo, Ni’-ka Wa-ko®-da-gi, Man of Mysteries,
Appeared before him.
The Messenger turned and said to his followers: Here stands a man,
Verily, one who inspires fear.
I truly believe his name is, Fear-inspiring.
The Man of Mysteries spake, saying: Iam a person of whom your little ones may
well make their bodies.
When your little ones make of me their bodies,
They shall be free from all causes of death.
They shall take the name Little-hawk,
To use as their personal name,
Then shall they be able to live to see old age.
Woman-hawk
Is also a name that I have.
Your little ones shall use it as their personal name,
Then shall they be able to live to old age.
The Messenger quickly passed on
To Tho’-xe, who appeared in the form of a buffalo bull.
Close to him the Messenger stood and spake,
Saying: O, Grandfather!
Then, turning toward his followers, he said: Here stands a man,
Verily, a man who inspires fear.
Then Tho’-xe spake, saying: I am a person of whom your little ones may well
make their bodies.
Thereupon he threw himself upon the earth,
And the blazing star, a purple flower,
Sprang up from the soil and stood, pleasing to the sense of sight.
And Tho’-xe spake, saying: This plant shall be medicine for your little ones,
94 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
It shall make their limbs to lengthen in growth,
And they shall be able to live to see old age.
Again Tho’-xe threw himself upon the earth
And the poppy mallow
Sprang from the soil and stood, beautiful, in its red blossoms.
Then Tho’-xe spake, saying: Of this plant also,
Your little ones shall make their bodies,
They shall use it as medicine
And it shall make their limbs to lengthen in growth.
It is astringent to the taste,
Therefore you shall name your little ones Astringent.
When the little ones make of this plant their bodies,
They shall be able to live to see old age.
At the time this work was begun the greater portion of the Osage
people had practically ceased to observe the ancient custom of
cutting the hair of their children in the prescribed symbolic fashion,
and those who continued the practice were reluctant to speak of it
on account of its sacred and mysterious character. For this reason
it was not possible to make an exhaustive study of the hair cut of
the various gentes of the tribe. In the days when the rite was
generally and strictly observed the girl, when she had attained the
age of ten, was permitted to let her hair grow long, and the boy was
allowed to wear his hair in the same style as that of all the grown
men; that is, all the hair of the head cut close excepting a crest
beginning at the middle of the crown and terminating with a long
braided tail called he-ga’-xa, horn, that hangs down the back of the
head and on the shoulder. (Pl. 11.) The braided tail is called
“a’-cku”’ by the Omaha and the Ponca Indians.
The Ponca and the Omaha, who were at one time a part of the
Osage tribe, also had the same tribal custom of ceremonially cutting
the hair of the children. The ritual used in the ceremony is a sup-
plication to Wa-ko®’-da to favor the child with a long and fruitful life.
In the course of her ethnological work among the Omahas in the
years 1881-83, Miss Alice C. Fletcher undertook to gather infor-
mation about the symbolic hair cut of the children of that tribe.
At first she made slow progress because the Indians were unwilling
to speak of matters that form a part of the tribal rites. One day, at
the house of Xo/-ga, the members of the family and some visitors
were speaking of Miss Fletcher’s difficulty in gathering information
about the hair cut, when the old man caught his little boy and,
holding him fast between his knees, proceeded to cut his hair. The
little fellow fought manfully but in a short time he stood with his
head closely sheared, with locks left uncut here and there. The
father swung the boy to his back and as he started to go he said:
“That white woman is my friend and I am going to help her.”” He
carried the child to Miss Fletcher and as he put him down before
her he said, ‘‘That’s the hair cut of our gens. (See fig. 5, No. 2.)
——
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 95
It is the picture of a bison; you can’t see it [the bison] but we can.
You may make a sketch of it and write about it as much as you like.”
The lady looked for a moment in silence at the locks and the little
shorn head, then, with a hearty laugh and a handclap, she snatched
up paper and pencil to make a sketch of the locks and the shorn
head, to the delight of all the Indians present. Thereafter she had
no trouble in getting information about the hair cut of all the gentes.
FonpDNESS OF PERSONAL ADORNMENT
Like their relatives, the Omaha and the Ponea, the Osage people
have a fondness for personal adornment. Much paint is used in
decorating the face and body. Most of the lines and figures drawn
upon the face and body are symbolic, as, for instance, a woman paints
the parting of her hair almost daily. The red line symbolizes the
path of the sun which forever passes over the earth and gives to it
vitality. It is a sign of supplication for the continuity of life by
procreation. Or, a man of the Life-giver gens paints his face all
yellow with a narrow black line running diagonally across his face
from one corner of his forehead down to the lower jaw on the oppo-
site side. This is the life sign ceremonially put upon a captive when
the word is passed by the Life-giver gens that the captive shall be
permitted to live. A downy feather worn upright on the crown of
the head by a man symbolizes the sun which brings life to the earth
in material form. The white shell gorget which a man wears as a
pendant on his necklace is also a symbol of the life-giving sun.
Ear PERFORATING
Down to recent times the Osage men have been sacrificing the
shapeliness of their external ears to the gratification of their fondness
for adornment. In ordinary times, and particularly on festal days,
the Osage men weighted their ears with strings of wampum or other
ornaments made of bone or shells and silver earbobs which were
introduced by traders. The weight of the earrings and the crowding
of the holes in the ears with the rings enlarge the perforations to an
extraordinary size. (Pl. 11.) The holes, which are bored along the
rim of the pinna, were made by the same men who performed the
ceremony connected with the perforating. These men provided them-
selves with perforating instruments made of sharpened bone, wooden
expanders, and little blocks of wood against which the ear is pressed
when performing the operation. (Pl. 12.) Fora long time Wa’-thu-
xa-ge and Tsi’-zhu-zhi"-ga held this office. The former died a few
years ago. Both of these men were members of the Peace gens of the
Tsi’-zhu great tribal division. An Osage was asked why the ears
of the children were bored and he replied that the children whose
ears were bored were apt to be better behaved than those whose
ears were not perforated.
96
SEs Co)
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
KI’-NO® WI’-GI-E
iL
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Da’-do® ki-no® gi-the mo"-thi® ta ba do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da tse-ga xtsi e-tho"-be hi no" no” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ga’ ki-no” gi-the mo"-thi® bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
kki’-no" gi-the mo®-thi® bi do” shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ts’e wa-tse-xi ki-the mo?-thi® ta bi a, wi-go"-ga, e-ki-a bi a, a
bi® da, tsi ga.
2
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Da’-do" wa-gthe gi-the mo™-thi" ta ba do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa-ko"-da tse-ga xtsi e-tho"-be hi no" bi a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Thi’ u-ba-he i-sdu-ge dsi a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-gthe to” e-go" to" no" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ga’wa-gthe gi-the mo*-thi" bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga wa-gthe gi-the mo®-thi" bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-gthe gi-xi-tha zhi ki-the mo®-thi" ta bi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
3
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. Da’-do" we-cda-the mo®-thi" ta ba do™ a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa/’-dsu-ta shi"-to-zhi"-ga kshe no" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. No’-ka o?-he i-sdu-ge dsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ga’ we-cda-the mo™-thi" ta bi a’, wi-go®-ga, e-ki-a bi a, a bi? da,
tsi ga,
We-cda-the mo?-thi® bi do” shki a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi® ta bi a’, wi-go"-ga, e-ki-a bi a,a
bi" da, tsi ga.
3. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
4. Da’-do"® wa-no®-p’i® to® kshi-the mo®-thi® ta ba do™ a’, a bi™
da, tsi ga,
Tsiu’-ge thi®-kshe no" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ wa-no?-p’i® to” kshi-the mo®-thi® ta bi a’,wi-co"-ga, e’-ki-a
bi a’, bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’/-ko"-da Ho®-ba do® thi®-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. I’-tha-thu-ce tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. No™-p’i® to® kshi-the ta bi a’, wi-co™-ga, e-ki-a bi a,’ a bi"
da, tsi ga,
U’-no® tha bi do® shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi a’, wi-cgo"-ga, e’-ki-a, bi
a, a bi? da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 97
or WN Re
TSI TA’-PE WA-THO*
Wa-tse wi" u-tha-ki-o"-stse,
Waz-tse wi" u-tha-ki-o"-stse he,
Wa-tse wi" u-tha-ki-o"-stse,
E the he wi-ta do” u-tha-ki-o"-stse he,
Wa-tse wi" u-tha-ki-o"-stse.
WI’-GI-E
1
Da’-do® wa-ci-thi-ce mo*-thi® ta ba do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa/’-tse do-ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ga’ wa-ci-thu-ce mo™-thi® bi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
ci-thu-¢ g
Wa’-ci-thu-ce mo®-thi" bi do” a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
U’-no® a bii-the ki-the mo™-thi® ta bi a’, wi-go"-ge, e’-ki-a bi
go -g
a, a bi® da, tsi ga.
2,
Da’-do™ wa-ci-thu-ce mo™-thi" ta ba do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-tse mi-ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ga’ wa-ci-thu-ce mo®-thi® bi a’, a bi" da tsi ga,
Wa/’-ci-thu-ge mo"-thi® bi do" a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi® ta bi a’, wi-co™-ga, e-ki-a
bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
3
. Da’-do" wa-ci-thu-ce mo™-thi" ta ba do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-tse do-ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ wa-ci-thu-ce mo®-thi® bi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-gi-thu-ge mo®-thi" bi do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo?-thi® ta bi a’, wi-co™-ga, e-ki-a, bi
a, a bi" da, tsi ga.
4
. Da’-do" wa-ci-thu-ce mo"-thi" ta ba do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-tse mi-ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ wa-ci-thu-ge mo™-thi® bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ci-thu-ce mo®-thi™ bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo™-thi" ta bi a’, wi-co"-ga, e’-ki-a,
—
2
bi a, a bi da, tsi ga.
ZHA’-ZHE KI-TO’ WI’-GI-E
il
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ho"’-ga u-dse-the pe-tho™-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
. Ha’! wi-go"-ga, e-ki-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
98
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Zhi®’-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a’, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba tho®-ta zhi a’, wi-co"-ga,
e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa/’-ko?-da gtho"-the do-ba’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
Gi’/-ka tse a, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-a, bi a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa/’-ko"-da ho®-ba do” thi®-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a’, wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a bi a’, a bi®™ da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba tho™-ta zhi a’, wi-tsi-go-e’,
j aa 5 ie
e-gi-a, bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e’-she do" a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga bi do™ a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi"-ga’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga.
2
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e’-she do™ a’, a bi® da,
tsl ga,
. Zhi®’-ea zha-zhe ki-to™ tse thi®-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a,
bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ha’! zhi®-ga e’-tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zha-zhe ki-to® tse thi"-ge e-she do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zha-zhe ki-to™ ba-tho"™ ta-mi kshe i" da’, a bi? da,
tsi ga,
. Mi’-wa-ga-xe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi®-ga, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi™
da, tsi ga,
. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi® bi do" shki a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. U’-no? a bi i-the ki-the mo?-thi® ta bi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
3
. Da/-do® zha-zhe ki-to® ga no® shki a, hi? a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Mo”’-ci-tse-xi shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zha’-zhe ki-to™ mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi®-ga’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zha’-zhe ki-to™ mo®-thi® bi do® shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
2. U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi®-ga, a bi® da,
tsl ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 99
4
33. Da’-do® zha-zhe ki-to" ga no” shki a, hi® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
34. I’-e-cka-wa-the shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
35. Zha’-zhe ki-to™ mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi®-ga’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
36. Zha’-zhe ki-to™ mo®-thi" bi do" shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
37. U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo™-thi® ta bi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
5
38. Da’-do" zha-zhe ki-to® ga no" shki a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
39. Mo”’-zho?-op-she-wi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
40. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi" ta bi a’, zhi®-ga’, a bi da, tsi ga,
41. Zha’-zhe ki-to" mo®-thi® bi do® shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
42. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi" ta bi" da’, a bi™ da, tsi ga.
6
43. Da’-do" zha-zhe ki-to" ga no” shki a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
44. Mo*’-ga-xe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
45. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo*-thi" ta bi a’, zhi"-ga’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
46. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi® bi do" shki a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
47, U’-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi® ta bi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
7
48. Da’-do® zha-zhe ki-to™ ga no" shki a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
49. No*’-mi-tse-xi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
50. Zha’-zhe ki-to™ mo®-thi® ta bi a’, zhi®-ga’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
51. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi" bi do” shki a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
52. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi® ta bi" da, a bi" da, tsi ga.
8
53. Da’-do® zha-zhe ki-to® ga no®-shki a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
54. 1"’-shta-sha-be shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. Zha’-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi® ta bi a, zhi"-ga’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
6. Zha/-zhe ki-to® mo®-thi® bi do® shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
7. U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi? da’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
9
58. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
59. Ha’! wi-co®-ga, e-ki-e no™-zhi" bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
60. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho™-tse thi"-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga,
e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
61. Thu-e’ xtsi gi-thu-ga ba do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
62. ’I®’-xe shto®-ga thi®-kshe no" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
63. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
64. Ha’! wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
65. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho®-tse thi"-ge’ a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e’,
e-ki-a bi a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
100
66.
88.
89.
92.
95.
97.
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Ha’! zhi"-ga, e-tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi™’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho™-tse thi"-ge’ e-she do" a’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha ba tho" ta mi kshi" da, a bi® da tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi?’-ga u-hu-shi-ga bi do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. U’-hu-shi-ge i-da-gi-ge o®-ki-gtha-thi" mo™-thi® ta bi a’, zhi-ga,
a bi™ da, tsi ga.
10
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. No” wi-co"-ga, e-ki-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O/-to"-be tha-the tse a, wi-co™-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do" a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
. 71" sho-sho-dse thi®-kshe no" a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi hi no®-zhi®-e do® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho®-tse thi"-ge’ a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e’,
e-gi-a bi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Ha’! zhi®-ga e’-tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho™-tse thi®ge’ e-she do" a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha ba tho" ta mi kshi" da’, a bi" da, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. U’-hu-shi-ga i-da-ci-ge o°-ki-gtha-thi® mo”-thi® ta bi a’, zhi"-ga,
a bi" da, tsi ga.
11
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Ha’! wi-co"-ga, e-ki-a bi a’, a bit da, tsi ga,
5. Zhit’-ga no*™-bthe tha ba tho™-tse thi™-ge’ a-tha, wi-go"-ga,
e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-to®-be tha-the tse a, wi-co®-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Thu-e’ xtsi gi-thu-ce the do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Dse’ u-cko?-cka dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
° Tse’-wa-the kshe no" a’, a bi? da tsi ga
* ? ’ tohat)
. E’-dsi-xtsi a-thi" gi-e do? a’, a bi® da tsl ga
7) +) (eh)
The ho”, wi-zhi®-the, e-a-gthi no®-zhi® a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
3. I/-k’ u-tse a-tsi-a-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ba’-ce-ni e-go" tha-dsu-zhe gtha bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-co"-ga, e-ki-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga no"-bthe tha ba tho" tse a-ka’, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’,
a bi da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga no®-bthe tha bi do® a’, bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi -the ki-the mo®-thi® ta bi a’, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-a, bi
a, a bi? da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 101
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
rata ke
112.
113.
114.
115.
ger el ge oa
=)
=)
12
Shi’ wi" thi"-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-a bi a’, bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to"-be tha-the tse a’, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Dse’ go-da ko®-ha dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Do’ thi®-kshe no" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
E’-dsi xtsi hi no®-zhi"-e do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a-thi" gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-zhi"-the, e’ a-gthi no"-zhi" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
The ho™, wi-zhi"-the, e’ a-gthi no"=zhi" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-co"-ga, e’-gi-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
She’ e-shno” u-tha-dse tha-thi"-she a’, wi-go"-ga, e-gi-a bi a’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
I’-k’u-tse a-tsi-a-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ba’-ce-ni e-go" tha-dsu-zhe gtha bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga no™-bthe the mo®-thi" ta bi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga no"-bthe the mo®-thi® bi do” a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
U’-no® a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi" ta bi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
A’-dsu-ta 1-ga-ci-ge ki-the mo"-thi" ta bi"da, a bi" da, tsi ga.
U’-NO® WI’-GI-E
1
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ho"-ga u-dse-the pe-tho"-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do® a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
Zhu’-i-ga tha bi wa-thi"-ga bi a tha, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-zhi"-ga wa-tha-xthi thi"-ge thi"-kshe no” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ha! wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi wa-thi"-ga bi a-tha, e’-gi-a bi a, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-zhi"-ga wa-tha-xthi thi"-ge thi"-kshe no” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi™’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi e-to™-ha i-the ki-the mo®-thi" ta bi a-tha, e’-tsi-the
a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa-zhi®-ga wa-tha-xthi thi"-ge thit-kshe no” a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ci/-pa-hi thi-gtu-the ga tse shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a-gi-the a-thi"-he a-tha, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga u-no® o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi e-to"-ha i-the ki-the mo*-thi" ta i tse a-tha, e’ tsi-the
a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
102 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
17. No” -xpe-hi ba-¢’i"-tha ga tse shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
18. U’-no® a-gi-the a-thi" he a-tha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
19. Zhi®’-ga u-no® 0®-tha bi do™ a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
20. U’-no" a bi e-to"-ha i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha, e’ tsi-the
a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
21. Wa’-zhi®-ga wa-tha-xthi thi-ge thi"-kshe no” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
22. Shi’-no"-dse ba-c’i®-tha ga tse shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
23. U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi"-he a tha, e’tsi-the a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
24. Zhi*’-ga u-no® o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
25. U’-no" a bi e-to"-ha i-the ki-the mo®-thi" tai tse a-tha, e’tsi-the
a, a bi? da, tsi ga.
oY
Tse’-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thi"-kshe shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi"-he a-tha, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga u-no® o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no® a bi e-to"-ha i-the ki-the mo*-thi" ta i tse a-tha, e’tsi-the
a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
www p
SOS SI
wo
(=)
. Mo"’-ge thi-ctu-the ga tse shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a-gi-the a-thi® he a-tha, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
32. Zhi"’-ga u-no® o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U/-no" a bi e-to"-ha i-the ki-the mo®-thi" tai tse a-tha, e’tsi-the
a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
w
a
oo
oo
w
>
. A’-zhu-ga-wa ga thi®-kshe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a-gi-the a-thi" he a-tha, e’tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
36. Zhi®’-ga u-no" o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no® a bi e-to®-ha i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha e tsi-the
a, a bi" da, tsi ga.
w
on
oo
J
ivy)
(o/)
_ A’-ba-t’u-xa ga thi®-kshe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi® he a-tha, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga u-no® o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
_ A’-ba-t’u-xa e-go" a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha, e tsi-the
a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
ee — CO
= © ©
42. Du’-dse u-ga-wa ga thi®-kshe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
43. U’-no® a-gi-the a-thi®-he a-tha, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
44, Zhi*’-ga u-no® o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
45. U’-no® a bi e-to"-ha ki-the i-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha, e’tsi-the
a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
46. I"’-shta-the-dse bi-xo" ga thi®-kshe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
47. U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi®-he a-tha, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
48. Zhi"’-ga u-no® 0°-tha bi do a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
49. I*’-shta-the-dse bi-xo" a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tse e’tsi-the
a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 103
ocr cr
wWnre ©
or tr or Ot
IID OP
i)
CMrIHRs
. [*’-shta-ha bi-xo" ga tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi"-he a-tha, e’tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi™’-ga u-no™ o°-tha bi do” a’, bi® da, tsi ga.
[*’-shta-ha bi-xo" a bii-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha, e tsi-the
a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
Ta’-xpi hi" ga-dse ga thi"-kshe shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a-gi-the a-thi" he a-tha, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi'’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ta-xpi hi" ga-dse a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tse a-tha, e tsi-the
a, a bi? da, tsi ga.
WA-ZHO’-I-GA-THE WI’-GI-E
1
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga-the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-co™ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
Ho’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi®-ha, wi-co®-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"™-ge a-tha, wi-co"™-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’,
a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ho™-ba do” thi®-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi'-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-tsu-shpa e’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi™’-ga zhu-i-ga-the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho® ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi" da, a
bit da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"™-da ts’e wa-tse-xi wi-no” bthi® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo?-thi® ta i tsi" da, a bi® da’, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
T5e
Be’u-zho"-ge o°-tho® kshi-tha mo®-zhi a-thi® he i® da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
2
. Ha’! wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-to™-be ga-xa ba thi" ha’, wi-go™-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-co"™-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
104
bt wp bv
em CO bo
wWwwhd Wd bd bd tv
DNA
re OO
WWW WwW W
D> oP W LO
ww w
oon
ee
ac
ee
mw bo
ee
NII on
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN, 43
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a tha, wi-co"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
Ho’-to™-be ga-xa thi ha, wi-go™-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ga’xtsi hi-tha 1 do” a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ho? do” thi"-kshe a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
I’-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-tsu-shpa tho", e’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho® ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi® da’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
2. Wa’-ko"-da ts’e wa-tse-xi bthi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
3. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo?-thi" ta 1 tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-’shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be 0°-tho"-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi" he i" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do" a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho®-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi mo?-thi® ta i tsi® da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be o®-wo"-no"™-zhi® mo?-zhi z-thi® he i" da’, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o™-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho®-ge be u-no®-zhi" ba zhi ki-the mo*-thi" ta i tsi™ da’,
a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thin he i? da’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga
Ho"’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi a-ki-the a thit he i" da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga o™-tha bi do” a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
Ho"-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi™ da’, a bin
da, tsi ga.
3
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-to™-be ga-xa ba thi" ha’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 105
5. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
}. U’-to™-be ga-xa thi" ha, wi-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-tse do-ga thi®-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-tsi-go-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ha’! wi-tsu-shpa, e’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
2. Zhi®-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi® da’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Wa-ko®-da ts’e wa-tse-xi wi-no”™ bthi" i" da, a bi® da, tsi ga,
4. Zhi™’-ga zhu-i-ga 0-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo?-thi" ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
3. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho®-ge be o?-tho"-kshi-tha mo®-zhi a-thi" he i" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi mo™-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be o®-wo?-no"-zhi® mo®*-zhi a-thi® he i" da’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
3. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
4. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be u-no"-zhi" ba zhi mo®-thi® ta 1 tsi" da’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
U’-no? a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i® da, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi" tai tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ho"’-ba tha-gthi® shki i-the a-ki-the a-thi" he i" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho"’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi™ ta i tsi? da’, a bi?
da, tsi ga.
4
Ha’! wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi™
da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, wi-go"-ga, e-ki-e, a-ka’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
5. Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
19078°—28——8
106
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
fo) 5 fo) ?
bi" da, tsi ga,
. O'-to"-be ga-xa thi ha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha 1-do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-tse mi-ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. I’-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ha’! wi-tsu-shpa, e’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga shu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, i-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi®-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi® da, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da ts’e wa-tse-xi wi-no" bthi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e wa’-tse-xi ki-the mo™-thi" ta i tsi? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa-ko"’-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be 0°-wo"-no®-zhi" mo?-zhi a-thi™ he i" da,’ a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga‘o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U-zho"-ge be u-no™-zhi" ba zhi mo?-thi" ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi shki u-hi ki-the mo™-thi? ta i tsi" da’, a bi® da, tsi
ga,
Ho’-ba tha-gthi" shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® hi™ da, a bi® da
tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. . . . ° . . . .
. Ho'’-ba tha-gthi® skhi u-hi ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
5
. Ha’! wi-go"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’ ki-e a-ka’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-co"™-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-to™-be ga-xa thi" ha, wi-co™-ga, e’gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ga’xtsi hi-tha 1 do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ba-ha to" no" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi® da, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ts’e wa-tse-xi bthi® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 107
120.
12
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
i Ww)
“I
—
bo
oO
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o?-tha bi do™ a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo®-thi® ta 1 tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be 0?-tho™-kshi-tha mo®-zhi a-thi™ he i" da’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
Zhi’ -ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do? a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
U’-sho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi mo™-thi" ta i tsi" da’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko® da e-shki do? a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
U’-zho®-ge be 0°-wo?-no®-zhi® mo®-zhi a-thi® he i" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga 0"-tha bi do" a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be u-no"-zhi" ba zhi mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga
U’-no® a bi shki i-the a-ki-the a-thi" he i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi" tai tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ho'™-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi a -ki-the a-thi" he i" da, a bi" da,
tsi ga.
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ho"-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo"-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
6
Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
Ho’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka, a bi" da, tsi
ga,
Ka’ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
Ga’xtsi hi-tha i do? a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ta’-pa thi"-kshe no” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
I’-ko-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ha’! wi-tsu-shpa tho®, e’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ts’e wa-tse-xi bthi® da’, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi ki-the mo*-thi" ta 1 tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
Wa’-ko" da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
108
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
SUG
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
Melee
178.
W795
180.
181.
182.
183.
THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
U’-zho"-ge be o"-tho"-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi® he i? da, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be 1-kshi-tha be zhi mo?-thi" ta i tsi® da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga.
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be o"-wo?-no*-zhi" mo”-zhi a-thi" he i" da’, a bi? da,
tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi? da, si tga,
U’-zho"-ge be u-no"-zhi" ba zhi mo®-thi" ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
U’-no" a bi shki i-the a-ki-the a-thi™ he i® da’, a bi? da, tsi ga
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
U’-no” a bi shki i-the ki-the mo*-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
Ho" -ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi™ he i? da’, a bi? da,
tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ho" -ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
7
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a
bi” da, tsi ga,
O’-to™-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, wi-co™-ga, e-ki-e, a-ka’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to"-be ga-xa thi" ha, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Ta’ tha-bthi® to" no? a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi® da’, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ts’e wa-tse-xi bhi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ge be o°-tho"-kshi-tha mo®-zhi a thi? he i® da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 109
184.
185.
186.
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
U’-zho"-ga be i-kshi tha ba zhi mo™-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho™-ge be u-wo"-no"-zhi" mo™-zhi a-thi® he i® da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho™-ge be u-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi® da’
a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi™ he i® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi? da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Ho®’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i? da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do? a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ho"’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi? da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
8
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi®
g g s go '-s
da, tsi ga,
. O’-to™-be ga-xa thi" ha’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. W1'-co®-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. O'-to"-be ga-xa thi" ha’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Mi’-ka-k’e u-ki-tha-¢’1" thi"-kshe no” a’,a bi" da, tsi ga,
. I’-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba tho" ta ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshi" da’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ts’e wa-tse-xi bthi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ts’e’ wa-tse-xi mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be o°-tho*-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi® he i® da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
noe
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
17. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
18. U’-zho"-ge be 0°-wo"-no®-zhi" mo*-zhi a-thi® he i® da’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko™-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-zho™-ge be u-no™-zhi® ba zhi mo?-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. U’-no” a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"™’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no” a bi shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi da, tsi
ga
. Ho"’-ba tha-gthi" shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ho"’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi® da’, a
bi® da, tsi ga.
ZHA’-ZHE KI-TO’ WI’-GI-E
1
Ha! wi-co"-ge- e’-ki-e a-ka’-a bi” da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha’, wi-co"-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
W1’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a-tha, wi-co™-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to"-be ga-xa thi" ha’, wi-co"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Mo”’-xe u-ga-ki-ba wi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
E/-dsi xtsi hi no®-zhi® to” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi?’-ga ni-ka-shi-ga zhi a-ka i" da’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
2
. Ha’ !wi-co™-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi?-ge a-tha, wi-co™-ga, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha’, wi-co™-ga, e-’ki-e a-ka’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O/-to®-ba ga-xa thi" ha, wi-co"-ga- e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Mo?’-xe u-ca-ki-ba we-tho®-ba kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE Hak
19.
20.
21.
32.
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi™-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-ki-e, a-ka’, a
52
E’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
He’ go" tho™-ta zhi 1" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi®’-ga ni-ki-shi-ga zhi a-ka 1" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
3
Ha! wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-co"-ga, e-ki-e a-ka’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. O’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ka’ ha-ge to" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-co"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, wi-go"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a
bit da, tsi ga,
O’-to™-be ga-xa thi" ha, wi-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Mo”’-xe u-ca-ki-ba we-tha-bthi® kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga ni-ka-shi-ga zhi a-ka i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
a
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
bit da, tsi ga,
. O’-to"-be gé-xa thi" ha’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ka’-e ha-ge to” a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, wi-cgo"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. O’-to™-be ga-xa thi" ha, wi-go"-ga, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ga’ xtsi hi-tha i do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mo*’-xe u-ga-ki-ba we-do-ba kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-zhi"-ga wa-tha-xthi thi"-ge kshe no" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Tsi’-he u-gi-zho" xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mo”’-zho® u-to™-ga xtsi thi"-kshe dsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ni’-ka-shi-ga to" i? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Mo®’-zho® shki zha-zhe 0°-ki-to" ta i tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
46.
. Mo”’-zho" ga-sho" shki zha-zhe o°-ki-to" tai tsi" da,’ a bi? da,
Mo”’-zho® ga-sho® xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga to” i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
tsi ga,
. Mo”’-zho" u-cko"-cka xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga to"i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mo®’-zho® u-cko®-cka shki zha-zhe o®-ki-to™ tai tsi" da,’ a bi?
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
51.
. Hit’-i-ki®-da-bi shki zha-zhe o°-ki-to” ta i tsi® da’, a bi" da,
Xi-tha-da wi" shki zha-zhe o®-ki-to™ tai tsi" da, a bi" da, tsi ga,
tsi ga,
84.
THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
. Hi®’-ga-mo®-ge shki zha-zhe o®-ki-to® tai tsi® da’, a bi® da, tsi
fo) Lo} bf ’
ga,
. No®’-be-ci shki zha-zhe 0°-ki-to™ tai tsi" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-zhi®-ga-hi® shki zha-zhe o®-ki-to™ ta i tsi" da’, a bi®™ da,
tsi ga.
5
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Ci’-pa-hi xthu-k’a ga tse a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. U’-no” pa-xe i” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o*-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ci’-pa-hi xthu-k’a a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a
bi® da, tsi ga.
. No®’-xpe-hi ha ba-¢’i"-tha ga ge shki a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no™ pa-xe i” da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. No®’-xpe-hi ha ba-¢’1"-tha a bi shki i-the ki-the mo?-thi" ta i
tsi" da, a bi" da, tsi ga.
. Shi’-tho"-dse ba-xo" ga tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Shi’-tho®-dse ba-xo® a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi" tai tsi" da’, a
bit da, tsi ga.
. I’-tsi-hi" ga-gthe-ge ga ge a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no™ pa-xe i” da’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
2. I’-tsi-ga-gthe-ce a bi shki i-the ki the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a
bi? da, tsi ga.
. Mo?’-ge hi" ga-gthe-ce ga ge shki a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" pa-xe i” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, bi® da, tsi ga,
. Mo’’-ge ga-gthe-¢ge a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’,
a bin da, tsi ga.
. I’-the-dse hi" ga-gthe-ce ga ge a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no” pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. I’-the-dse ga-gthe-¢e a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi? da’,
a bi" da, tsi ga.
. Pe’ hi" ga-gthe-ce ga ge a’, bi® da, tsi ga,
. U’-no™ pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
83. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
Pe’ ga-gthe-ce a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE iiss
85.
86.
87.
88.
I*’-shta-ha bi-xo" ga ge a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
U’-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zhu-i-ga o-tha bi do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
T"’-shta-ha bi-xo" a bi shki i-the ki-the mo?-thi® ta i tsi" da’, a
bi® da, tsi ga.
9. U’-no" a bi shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i" da, a bi? da’, tsi ga,
. Zhi®-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. U’-no" a bi shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi? da, tsi ga.
. Ho’-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thi® he i® da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zhu-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ho™-ba tha-gthi® shki u-hi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi? da’, a bi" da,
tsl ga.
WA-ZHO’-I-GA-THE WI’-GI-E
1
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Tsi’-shu u-dse-the pe-tho"-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a’, a bi™ da,
tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e’-ki-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga-the thi®-ge i" da, e’-ki-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wi’-co"-ga, e’-gi-a bi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga-the thi®-ge i" da, e’-gi-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-to®-be ga-xa thi® ha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
2. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
.. Wa’-ko?-da Ho®-ba do® thi®-kshe a’, bin da, tsi ga,
. Zho’-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. Wi’-tsi-go-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’,a bi" da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. She’ sho” e tho, e-tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’no® wa-ko®-da bthi® i? da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o®-the ta i tsi" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be 0®-tho"-kshi tha mo?-zhi a-thi® he no” a-tha’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
O’-zho®-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the tai tsi" da e’ tsi-the a’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o®-gi-thi-ta mo®-zhi a-thi" he no” i" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o™-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do® a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O/-zho®-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the mo®-thi" ta i tsi™ da, e’
tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be 0"-wo"-no*-zhi" tse a, hi® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o™-tha bi do” a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be o-no®-zhi" ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da wi/no® bthi® mo”-zhi i” da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-to™-be ga-xa ba thi” ha, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
2
9. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to" a’, a bi? da, tsi a,
. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da Ho" do” thi®-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
3. Zho’-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. I’-ko-e e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. K’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. She’ sho" e tho, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
9. Wi’-no® wa-ko"-da bthi" i” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o®-tho®-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi® he no? i” da’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zho-i-ga o™-tha bi do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho*-ge be o®-gi-thi-ta mo®-zhi a-thi" he no" i" da’, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do® a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the tai tsi? da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga.
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 115
~jI ~I
“J
“J
papers iS
“J
I~
© OO
[e<)
—
10/0)
SS)
. Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
84.
[o/)
ew
Nua J
oO oOo
“I
1. O’-zho®-ge be 0®-wo"-no"-zhi" tse a, hi? a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga 0°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi? da, tsi ga,
5. Wa’-ko®-da wi no® bthi® mo®-zhi i® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to®-be ga-xa thi" ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
3
. E’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do? a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Mi’-ka-k’e Ho®-ba do® thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zho-’gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi'-tsi-go-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
She’ sho" e tho e’ tsi-the a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o?-the tai tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga
to) fo) ? ’ t= ree J
Wa/’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga
KI-p ) )
. Wi’no® wa-ko"-da bthi® i" da’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho i-ga o-the ta i tsi® da, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga’,
80.
. O'-zho®-ge be o°-tho®-kshi-tha mo"™-zhi a thi® he no™ da’, a
Wa/’-ko®-da e’-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho®-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga.
. Wa’-ko®-da e-shki do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O'-zho"-ge be o?-gi-thi-ta mo*-zhi a-thi® he no™ i? da’, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi*’-ga zho-i-ga o?-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be a gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o®-wo-no"™-zhi® tse a, hi" a’, bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da e’-shki do? a’, bi da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da wi no® bthi® mo®-zhi i® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-to®-be ga-xa thi" ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
4
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do” a’, e bi® da, tsi ga,
. Mi’-ka-k’e Ho® do” thi®-kshe no® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zho’-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. I’-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. She’ sho" e no?®, e’tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’ no® wa-ko®-da bthi® i® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-zho®-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’,
e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-zho®-ge be o°-gi-thi-ta mo™-zhi a-thi® he no™ i" da’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
2. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-zho®-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da’,
e’ tsi-the-the a’, a’bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ho’-zho"-ge be 0"-wo?-no*-zhi® tse a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o-no*-zhi® ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga.
. Wa’-ko®-da wi no® bthi® mo?-zhi i? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
5
2. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa/-ba-ha to? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zho’-gthe gi-e do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-a bi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zho-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
She’ sho” e tho, e’tsi-the a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko®-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi’'no® wa-ko®-da bthi® i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o°-the ta i tsi" da, e’tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 1LIL%%
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
USYfe
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
Wa’-ko™-da e-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o®-tho"-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi® he no® i® da’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the mo*-thi® ta i tsi® da, e’
tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"™-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho®-ge be o°-gi-thi-ta mo™-zhi a-thi® he no" i? da’, a bi® da,
tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"™-da e-shki do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"™-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o"-wo"-no™-zhi" tse a, hi® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi’’-ga zho-1-ga o"-tha bi do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho®-ge be o-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko™-da wi’no” bthi® mo®-zhi i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to™-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
6
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to” a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ta’-pa to" no" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
Zho’-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
I’-ko-e, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
She’ sho" e the, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wi’no" wa-ko"-da bthi® i? da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho™-ge be o®-tho®-kshi-tha mo*-zhi a-thi" he no" i® da’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi™’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa/’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi? da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o®-gi-thi-ta mo™-zhi a-thi® he no® i® da’, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
Zhi*’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
0. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
71. O’-zho™-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi” da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be 0°-wo"-no"-zhi" tse a, hi" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do™ a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do” a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o?-no*-zhi" ba zhi ki-the ta 1 tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da wi no® bthi® mo"-zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-to™-be ga-xa thi” ha, e’-tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
vi
. He-dsi xtsi a, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi to" a’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ta’ Tha-bthi® thi"-kshe no” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zho’-gthe gi-e do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi no® wa-ko?-da bthi” i? da, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o®-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O/-zho®-ge be o®-tho"-kshi-tha mo®-zhi a-thi? he no" i" da’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko™-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da. tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be o*-gi-thi-ta mo®-zhi a-thi" he no® i" da’, a bi" da,
tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’-tsi-the a’,
patra
a bi" da, tsi ga.
. Wa/’-ko"-da e’-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O/-zho"-ge be o®-wo?-no"-zhi® tse a, hi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O/-zho"-ge be o-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the tai tsi da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da wi no® bthi® mo®-zhi" i® da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
O’-to"-be ga-xa thi" ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 119
bd bo
j=)
bo
Nw
bd wh bw bd
w WwW bd bo
Nor oO ioe)
i)
ow
eo
. Zhi’’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do® a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
8
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba-xi ti? a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
9. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mi’-ka-k’e u-ki-tha-¢’i" thi"-kshe no" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zho’-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
2. I-ko-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. She’ sho" e the, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wi’no" wa-ko"-da bthi" 1” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko®-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be o®-tho"-kshi-tha mo®-zhi a-thi® he no® i? da’, a
bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi"da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o®-gi-thi-ta mo"-zhi a-thi® he no® i" da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be a™-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta 1 tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa/’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-zho"-ge be o"-wo"-no"-zhi" tse a, hi" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be o-no®-zhi® ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’- ko"-da wi no” bthi® mo-*zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
234.
O’-to"-be ga-xa ba thi® ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
9
35. He-’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba xi to" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mi’-ka-k’e zhu-dse thi?-kshe no® a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
Zho’-gthe gi-e do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga the thi®-ge a-tha, e’-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. She’ sho" e tho, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da ho-wa-ki-pa-tse a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN, 43
. Wi/no® wa-ko"-da bthi" i" da,’ a bi? da, tsi ga,
5. Zhi"’-ga zhu-i-ga o"-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’, bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O'-zho"-ge be o®-tho"-kshi-tha mo"-zhi a-thi" he no®™ i® da’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko?-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho®-ge be 1-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’, a
bi® da, tsi ga,
1. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o*-gi-thi-ta mo™-zhi a-thi® he no® i® da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do" a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be a-gi-thi-ta ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi™ da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e’-shki do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be 0®-wo"-no"-zhi" tse a, hi" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga 0°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da e-shki do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-zho"-ge be o-no"-zhi" ba zhi ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi” da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-ko"-da wi no” bthi" mo™-zhi i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O’-to*-be ga-xa ba thi" ha, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga.
10
3. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Sho’-ka wa-ba xi to” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Thu-e’ xtsi the-e do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Mo”’-xe a-tha-k’a-be dsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Sho?’-ge a-ga-k’e e’-go" kshe no" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi zho-gthe gi-e do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
9. Wi’-tsi-go-e’, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga the thi"-ge a-tha, e-gi-e a-ka’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. He’-dsi xtsi a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga o"-the ta i tsi" da, e tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. (i’-pa-hi thi-ctu-be ga tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-thi"-e-g¢ka she mo" mo?*-zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O’-no™ pa-xe i" da’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Zhi’’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
. Ni’-ka no" hi do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ci/-pa-hi thi-gtu-be e’no® bi no" a/, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. I’-the ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 2a
280.
281.
282.
283.
284.
285.
286.
287.
288.
289.
290.
291.
292.
293.
294.
. O/-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ni’-ka no” hi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. ["-kshe-dse u-bi-go"-dse a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta 1 tsi" da,
Hi’-ko" ba-xo" ga ge a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-thi?-e-cka she-mo" mo*-zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O/-no" pa-xe i” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga 0°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ni’-ka no® hi do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Hi’-ko" ba xo” e’ no® bi no® a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
I’-the ki-the ta i tsi® da, e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
Tse’-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thi?-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Wa’-thi?-e-cka she-mo" mo*™-zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
O’-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
Zhi"’-ga zho-i-ga 0°-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Ni’-ka no® hi do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
Tse’-wa-tse u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi" ta i tsi" da, e tsi
the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
I*’-kshe-dse u-bi-co"-dse ga thi-kshe a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
Wa’-thi®-e-cka she-mo® mo™-zhi i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
e tsi-the a, a bi™ da, tsi ga.
. Do’-dse u-ga-wa ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-thit-e-cka she-mo" mo™-zhi 1" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. O/-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da tsi ga,
. Zhit’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Ni’-ka no" hi do? a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Do’-dse u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the
g
a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
. I’-the-dse ba-¢’i"-tha ga tse a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-thi?-e-cka she-mo" mo?- zhi i? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O'-no® pa-xe i" da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’ga zho-i-ga o°-tha bi do” a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Ni’-ka no® hi do® a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. I’-the-dse ba-c’i?-tha a bi i-the ki-the mo™-thi" ta i tsi" da,
e’ tsi-the a’, a bi" da, tsi ga.
. [*/-shta-the-dse-bi-xo" ga tse a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
. Wa’-thi?-e-cka she-mo® mo?-zhi i? da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. O/-no" pa-xe 1” da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. Zhi®’-ga zho-i-ga o®-tha bi do” a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
5. Ni’-ka no® hi do" a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
. 1"’-shta-the-dse bi-xo" a bi i-the ki-the mo®-thi® ta i tsi® da,
e’ tsi-the a’, a bi® da, tsi ga.
19078°—28. 9
122 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
317. Pa’pa-ci ga-tse a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
318. Wa’-thi"-e-gka she-mo" mo?-zhi i" da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
319. Wa’-ko"-da i-ga-dsi-¢e pa-xe i" da’, a bi da, tsi ga,
320. Wa’-ko*-da u-tsi-the thi"-ge a-wa-kshi-the no™ i® da’, a bi®
da, tsi ga,
321. Zhi®’-ga sho-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
322. Wa’-ko"-da i-ba-ci a-thi? mo™-thi" ta i tsi" da, e’ tsi-the a’,
a bi da, tsi ga.
323. Ta/-xpi hi? ga-ga-dse ga thi"-kshe a’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
24. Wa’-thi®-e-gka she-mo" mo®-zhi" 1” da’, a bi® da, tsi ga,
325. O’-no” pa-xe i” da’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
26. Zhi’-ga zho-i-ga o?-tha bi do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
327. Ni’-ka no" hi do" a’, a bi™ da, tsi ga,
328. Pa’cka u-gtho” e-go" e’ no” bi no” a’, a bi” da, tsi ga,
329. I’-the ki-the mo*™-thi" ta i tsi® da,’ a bi" da, tsi ga.
330. Wo shki do” a’, a bi? da, tsi ga,
331. Ho®’-ba tha-gthi® wi? shki 0°-hi no™ i” da’, a bi" da, tsi ga,
332. Zhi”’-ga ho™-ba tha-gthi® wi® shki i-the ki-the mo®-thi" ta i
tsi" da, e tsi-the a, a bi" da, tsi ga.
NATIVE NAMES OF OSAGE FULL BLOODS (AS FAR AS
COULD BE ASCERTAINED), USED BY EACH GENS OF
THE TRIBE
NAMES OF THE GENTES AND SUBGENTES
The following are the names of the gentes and subgentes of the
two great tribal divisions, in their fixed, sequential order, as given
by Sho®’-to™-ca-be, Black-dog, to Miss Alice C. Fletcher, in 1896.
The name Sho’-ka is the title of a subgens from which the principal
gens chooses a man or woman to act as official messenger at the
performance of a tribal rite. The official messenger also bears the
title.
FIXED ORDER OF THE GENTES AND SUBGENTES
GmENTES OF THE HON’-Ga GREAT DrvisIon
WA-ZHA’-ZHE SUBDIVISION
1. Wa-zha’-zhe-cka; White Wa-zha’-zhe. Refers to the life symbol
of the gens, the fresh water mussel, with its shell. The Sun also
is a life symbol of this gens.
I*-gtho"’-ga Ni Mo™-tse; Puma-in-the-Water. Sho’-ka.
. Ke’-k’i"; Carrier-of-the-Turtle.
Ba’-k’a Zho-i-ga-the; Cotton-tree People. Sho’-ka.
3. Mi-ke’-the-stse-dse; Cat-tail (Typha latifolia).
Ka’-xe-wa-hu-ca; Youngest brother. Sho’-ka.
to
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 123
4.
cr
sJ
bo
Or
“I
bo
Wa’-tse-tsi; Star-that-came-to-Earth.
Xu-tha’ Pa-co" Zho-i-ga-the; Bald Eagle People. Sho’-ka.
O-cu’-ga-xe; They-who-make-the-way-Clear.
Mo?-sho-dse-mo"-i2; Travelers-in-the-Mist. Sho’-ka.
. Ta-tha’-xi®; Deer’s-Lungs, or Ta-ci"’-dse-gka; White-tailed-Deer.
Wa-dsu’-ta-zhi?-ga; Small-Animals. Sho’-ka.
Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga; Fish-People.
E-no” Mi®-dse-to"; Sole-owner-of-the-Bow. Refers to the
office of the gens of making the ceremonial bow and arrows that
symbolize night and day.
. Ho"’-ga U-ta-no®-dsi; The-Isolated-Ho”’-ga. The Earth.
Mo?-hi®-ci; Flint-Arrow-Point. Sho’-ka.
HON’-GA SUBDIVISION
. Wa-¢ga’-be-to®; Owners-of-the-Black-Bear.
Wa-¢a’-be-cka; The-White-Bear. Sho’-ka.
I"-¢tho”’-ga; Puma.
Hi®-wa’-xa-ga; Thorny-hair, Porcupine. Sho’-ka.
O’-po®; Elk.
Ta He Sha-be; Dark-horned Deer. Sho’-ka.
Mo”’-i?-ka-ga-xe; Maker-of-the-Earth.
Ho"-ga Gthe-zhe; The-Mottled-Sacred-One (the immature golden
eagle).
. Xu-tha; Eagle (the adult golden eagle).
. Ho®’-ga Zhi®-ga; The Little-Sacred-One.
1’-ba-tse Ta-dse; The-Gathering-of-the-Winds. Sho’-kka.
GENTES OF THE Ts!’/-zHU GREAT DivISION
. Tsi’-zhu Wa-no®; Elder Tsi-zhu, or Wa-ko"’-da No*-pa-bi; The-
God-Who-is-Feared-by-All. Refers to the life symbol of the
gens, the Sun.
Wa-ba’-xi; The-Awakeners. Refers to the office of this sub-
gens of urging the messengers to prompt action. Sho’-ka.
. Cit’-dse A-gthe; Wearers-of-Symbolic-Locks.
Sho"’-ge Zho-i-ga-the; Dog-People. Refers to the life symbol
of this subgens, the dog-star. The name Sho”’-ge includes
coyotes, gray wolves, and all other kinds of dogs. Sho’-ka.
. Pe’-to® To"-ga Zho-i-ga-the; Great-Crane-People.
(Not sub-gens) Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge; The-Gentle-Tsi-zhu.
Refers to the office of the gens of Peace-maker.
. Tse-do’-ga I*-dse; Buffalo-Bull-Face-People. Closely related to
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no".
Tse-a’-ko®; corruption of Tse-tho"-ka; Buffalo-back. Sho/’-ka.
Mi-k’i"’ Wa-no®; Elder Carriers-of-the-Sun-and-Moon. Refers to
the life symbols of the gens, all the heavenly bodies.
124 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
6. Ho” Zho-i-ga-the; Night-People. Refers to the life symbol of the
gens, the Night.
Ta-pa’ Zho-i-ga-the; Deer-head or Pleiades People. Sho’-ka.
7. Tsi’-zhu U-thu-ha-ge; The-Last-Tsi’-zhu, or the last in the sequen-
tial order of the Tsi’-zhu gentes.
Tue Tst’ Ha-sur (THosE-WuHo-W freE-Last-To-Comg)
A. Ni/-ka Wa-ko*-da-gi; Men of Mystery, or Thunder People.
Xo"’-dse Wa-tse. Meaning uncertain; itis said that it prob-
ably refers to the office of keepers of all the Wa-tse, or war
honors. Sho/’-ka.
B. Tho/-xe; Buffalo-bull (archaic name for the buffalo bull). These
two gentes are joint keepers of the Hawk War-symbols.
Wa’-TSE-TSI OR PON’-KA WaA-SHTA-GE
Names ceremonially bestowed on each of the first three sons and
on each of the first three daughters born to a Wa’-tse-tsi man and
his wife. As given by No”’-xe-cka-zhi, a member of the gens:
BOYS
1. I™-gtho™ name, Wa-ci’-cta. Meaning uncertain.
2. Ksho"’-ga name, Wa’-tse-mo?-i", Star-that-travels.
3. Ka’-zhi*-ga name, Ni-ga’-to-xe, Water-splasher.
GIRLS
1. Mi/-na name, Ho?-be’-do-ka, Wet-moccasins.
2. Wi’-he name, Wa-to"-i-ca-e, meaning uncertain, or Mi’-ga-sho"-e,
Sun-that-travels.
3. A-cit’-ga name, Gia’-co"-ba, meaning uncertain.
OTHER NAMES
Mate
Ga-cka’, meaning uncertain. Son of Xu-tha’-da-wi", Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge and Po"’-ka-zhi"-ga, Po"-ka Wa-shta-ge.
Ga-cka, meaning uncertain. Son of Tho™-dse-to™-ga, Wa’-tse-tsi,
and Xu-tha’-da-wi", Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge.
Gi-thi-ko"-bi, One-for-whom-they-make-way. (In the Tha’-ta-da
gens of the Omaha tribe.) Husband of Mo”’-ci-tse-xi, Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge.
Gtha-i-gtho"-thi™-ge, meaning uncertain. Son of Tho"-dse-to™-ga,
Wa/’-tse-tsi and Xu-tha’-da-wi", Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge.
Gthe-do"’-wa-ko®-tha, Attacking-hawk. (Tho’-xe name.) Refers
to the aggressive character of the bird. Son of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa
and Ho®-be’-do-ka, Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 5:
Hi’-tho-ka-thi", Bare-legs. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha.)
Also Ku-zhi’-wa-tse, Strikes-in-a-far-off-country. (In the I"-shta’-
con-da gens of the Omaha.)
Hi’-tho-ka-thi" or Long-bow.
Ka-ci’, meaning uncertain.
Ko’-zhi-ci-gthe, Tracks-far-away. Husband of Xu-tha-’da-wi", Ts1-’
zhu Wa-shta-ge.
Ksho"’-ga. Not name but a special kinship term for the second born
son. Should have been named A’-be-zhi"-ga, Slender-leaf, of the
cat-tail.
Ku’-zhi-ci-gthe. Husband of Zho-btha-cka-wi" of the Ho*’-ga.
U-ta-no"-dsi gens.
Mo"-i"-ka-mo®-i", Walks-on-the-earth. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi®
of the Ci"’-dse-a-gthe gens.
Mo*-ko"’-thi", Possessor-of-medicine. (Not a Ni’-ki-e name.)
Ni’-ka-ctu-e, Gathering-of-men. Son of Tho"’-dse-to"-ga and Xu-
tha-da-wi".
Ni’-ka-wa-zhi"-to"-ga, Man-of-great-courage. Refers to the war-
like character of this gens. Husband of Wa-xthe-’tho™-ba of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no” gens.
Po™-ka-wa-da-i*-ga, Playful-Po"-ka. Husband of Wa-xthe’-tho”-ba
of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens.
Tho’’-dse-to"-ga, Big-heart. Also Wa-zhi"’-wa-xa, Greatest-in-
courage. Refers to the warlike character of this gens. Husband
of Xu’-tha-da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa, He-who-met-the-Tsi’-zhu. Refers to the first meet-
ing of the Tsi’-zhu and the Wa-zha’-zhe gentes. Husband of Ho®-
be’-do-ka of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa (same as above). Husband of Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no” gens.
U-dse’-ta-wa-xa, Winner-of-the-race-against-the-U-dse-ta. (Not a
Ni’-ki-e name.) Refers to a race between two bands in which a
member of the Wa’-tse-tsi gens won.
U-thu’-ga-e, meaning uncertain. (Not Ni’-ki-e.)
Wa-ci’-cta, meaning uncertain. Son of Po" -ka-wa-da-i"-ga and
Wa-xthe’-tho™-ha, Tsi’-zhu Wa-no? gens.
Wa’-ci-gta, Son of Wa-shka’-dse and No®™-mi-tse-xi, Wa-ca’-be gens.
Wa-shka’-dse, meaning uncertain. Husband of No®’-mi-tse-xi of the
Wa-ca’-be gens.
Wa-stse’-e-do", Good-doctor. (Wa-xthi’-zhi thinks that the boy’s
right name is Wa’-tse-mo™-1".) Son of Po®’-ka-wa-da-i1"-ga and
Wa-xthe-’tho™-ba, Tsi’-zhu Wa-no” gens.
Wa’-tse-a-xe, Cries-for-a-star. Son of U-thu’-ga-e.
Wa’-tse-ga-hi-ge, Star-chief. Refers to the selection of the chief of
the Ho®’-ga Great Division, from the Wa’-tse-tsi gens.
126 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Wa’-tse-mo"-i", The-traveling-star. Husband of Wa’-ko™-ca-mo®-in
of the Ta’ [-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Wa’-tse-mo"-in. Son of Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Wa’-tse-mo"-i". Son of Ko’-zhi-ci-gthe and Xu-tha-’da-wi", Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa’-tse-mo™-i". Son of Hi’-tho-ka-thi®. (Long-bow.)
Wa-tse-to"™-ga, Big-star.
Wa-zhi"’-wa-xa, Greatest-in-courage. Refers to the warlike charac-
ter of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision. Husband of Mo®-zho™-dsi-i-ta
of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-zhi"’-wa-xa. Son of Mo®-ko®’-a-thi".
Xu-tha’-xtsi, Real-eagle. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Husband of Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
FEMALE
Co"-ci’-gthe, Footprints-in-the-woods. Refers to the deer. Wife of
Ho”’-ba-hiu of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Gia’-co"-ba, meaning uncertain. Wife of U-ho"’-ge-u-zho" of the
Ci"’-dse-a-gthe gens.
Gia’-go"-ba. Wife of Ka’-wa-ci of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Gia-go"-ba. Daughter of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa and Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Gia-go"-ba. Mother of Mi’-ho™-ga, Xu-tha’-wa-ko™-da and Sha’-ge-
wa-bi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens.
Gia’-go"-ba. Daughter of Ko’-zhi-gi-gthe and Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Gia’-co™-ba. Daughter of Wa-shka’-dse and No®’-mi-tse-xi.
Gia’-co"-ba. Wife of Tho-xe-zhi*-ga of the Tho’-xe gens.
Ho*-be’-do-ka, Wet-moccasins. Daughter of Wa-zhi"’-wa-xa and
Mo*-zho"’-dsi®-i-ta of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho™-be’-do-ka. Daughter of U-thu’-ga-e.
Ho"™-be-’do-ka. Daughter of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa and Wa-xthe’-tho®-
be, of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no? gens.
Ho"’-be-do-ka. Mother of Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da, Gia’-go"-ba and
Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Ho"-be’-do-ka. Daughter of Mo®-ko®’-a-thi®.
Ho"-be’-do-ka. Wife of Mo"-zho®-a’-ki-da of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Ho?-be’-do-ka. Wife of Ha-xi®-u’-mi-zhe of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Ho™-be’-do-ka. Daughter of Wa’-tse-a-xe and Pa’-mo*-shi-wa-
gtho" of the O’-po® gens.
Ho"-be’-do-ka. Daughter of Ko/’-zhi-ci-gthe and Xu-tha’-da-wi®
of the Tsi-’zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 127
Ho*-be’-do-ka. Daughter of Wa-shka’-dse and No®-’mi-tse-xi of
the Wa’-cga’-be gens.
Mi’-ga-sho"-i", Sun-that-travels. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Daughter of Po"’-ka-wa-da-i?-ga and Wa-xthe’-
tho"-ba of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens.
Mi’-ga-sho"™-1". Wife of Mo®’-zhi’-¢ka-k’1-ga-xthi of the Wa-¢a’-be
gens.
Mi’-ga-sho"-i. Wife of Gthe-do"’-¢cka of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko™-da-gi
gens.
Mi’-tha-gthi", Good-sun. Daughter of Mo®-i"’-ka-mo™-i? and Xu-
tha’-da-wi" of the (i?’-dse-a-gthe gens.
Po™-ka-wi®, Po-ka-woman. (This woman held the office of
Wa-dse’-pa-i", Official Crier.)
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo?-i", meaning uncertain. Daughter of U-thu’-ga-e.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo"-i". Mother of Tho’-ta-a-ca, Xo’-ta-wi" and Xo”’-
dse-mo®-i" of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo*-i". Wife of Tse’-ce-to"-ga of the Tho’-xe gens.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo®-i®. Daughter of Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo*-i". Wife of Mi’-she-tsi-e of the Ho*’-ga gens.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo*-i". Wife of Wa-ni’-e-to" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo"-in. Daughter of Wa/-tse-a-xe and Pa’-mo®-shi-
wa-etho".
Wa’-ko"-ca-mon-i*. Daughter of Ko’-zhi-ci-gthe and Xu-tha’-da-
wi".
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo®-i®. Daughter of Tho"’-dse-to*-ga and Xu-tha’-da-
wi".
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo"-i". Daughter of Wa-shka’-dse and No®’-mi-tse-x1.
Wa-to*’-i-ca-e, meaning uncertain. Wife of Mo"’-ga-xe of the
I"-otho"’-ga gens.
Wa-to"’-i-ga-e. Wife of O-pa’-sho-e of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Wa-to”’-i-ga-e. Wife of I’-to®-mo™-i" of the Mi-k’i™ gens.
Wa-to"’-i-ga-e. Daughter of Po?-ka-wa-da-i"-ga and Wa-xthe’-
tho®-ba.
Wa-to"’-i-ga-e. Wife of No®’-po-e of the Ho’’-ga U-ta-no"-dsi gens.
Wa-to"’-i-ga-e. Daughter of Wa’-tse-ga-hi-ge.
Wa-to?’-i-ca-e. Wife of Ka’-wa-xo-dse of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Wa-to"™-i-ca-e. Daughter of Wa-shka’-dse and No"’-mi-tse-xi.
Wi’-he. Not name but a special kinship term for the second daugh-
ter in a family. Daughter of Wa’-tse-ga-hi-ge.
Xu-tha’-da-wi" Good-eagle-woman. Daughter of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa
and Ho®’-be-do-ka of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
128 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Ta’ I-NI-KA-SHI-GA
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and the
first three daughters in a family of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga, or Deer
gens, as given by Tsi-zhe’-wa-the, a member of the gens.
BOYS
I"-gtho™ name, Wa-zha’-zhe-ho"-ga, Sacred Wa-zha’-zhe.
Ksho"-ga, To’-ho-ho-e, Blue-fish.
Ka-zhi"-ga, Ho-ki-gthi-ci, Wriggling-fish.
oo to
GIRLS
Mi’-na name, Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi, Wa-zha’-zhe-sacred-sun.
Wi-he’ name, Ho*’-be-do-ka, Wet-moccasins.
1 bs an i aided
Ci’-ge name, Zho"-ci’-gthe, Footprints-in-the-woods.
i
OTHER NAMES
Mae
A’-ki-da-zhi"-ga, Little-soldier. The title of a subordinate officer
chosen from this gens to enforce the orders of the two hereditary
chiefs. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi® of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Chi-zhe-wa-the, meaning uncertain. Husband of Ni’-ka-shi-tsi-e of
the Ho™ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Co"-dse’-ko"-ha, Edge-of-the-forest. Refers to the habit of the deer
in feeding along the edge of the forest. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-
wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
E-no"’-mi"-dse-to", Sole-owner-of-the-bow. Name of the gens from
whom a member is selected to make the bow and arrows symbolic
of night and day, to be used at a tribal ceremony. Son of To’-ho-
ho-e.
E-no”’-mi"-dse-to™. Son of Ho’-ki-e-ci and Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho™ga
gens.
E-no"’-mi"-dse-to". Son of Ta-he’-ga-xe and Wa-hiu’-co"-e of the
I’-ba-tse gens.
Ga-hi’-ge-no"-zhi", Standing-chief. Refers to the permanency of the
position of the chief chosen to represent the Ho"’-ga great division.
Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ga-hi’-ge-tha-gthi", Good-chief. Refers to the duty of the chief
to promote peace among men. Son of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho"
I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ga-hi’-ge-zhi"-ga, Young-chief. (The name appears in the i*-ke’-
ga-be gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Ho-go"’, White-fish. Son of A’-k’a-wi® of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Ho’-ki-a-ci, Wriggling-fish. Son of To’-ho-ho-e.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 129
Ho’-ki-a-ci, Wriggling-fish. Son of Ta-he’-ga-xe and Wa-hiu’-go"-e
of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Ho’-ki-a-ci, also Ko’-zhi-mo-i", Wanders-far-away. Husband of
Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Ho-xo’, Fish-scales. Son of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Ho-xo’-e, Fish-scales. Son of To’-ho-ho-e.
Mo?-kchi’-xa-bi, For-whom-arrows-are-made. Refers to the arrows
used in the ceremony of opening the deer-hunting season. Son
of Ga-hi’-ge-no"-zhi" and Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens.
No®-zhi®’-wa-the, Causes-them-to-stand. Father of Wa-zha’-zhe-
mi-tse-x1.
O-ho®’-bi, One-who-is-cooked. Refers to the use of the deer for
food. Son of Do?’-ba-bi of the Ho"’-ga U-ta-no™-dsi gens.
Ta-ci®’-e, Deer’s tail.
Ta-he’-ga-xe, Deer-with-branching-horns. (The name appears in
the I®-shta’-co"-de gens of the Omaha tribe.) Husband of Wa-
hiu-co"-e of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Ta-zhe’-ga, Deer’s-leg.
Thi-hi’-bi, Scared-up. Refers to the flight of the deer from the
hunter. Husband of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho™ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
To’-ho-ho-e, Blue-fish.
To’-ho-ho-e. Son of Ho’-ki-e-¢gi and Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Tse-do’-ha, Buffalo-hide (a Tho’-xe name); also Wa-zha’-no?-pa-i,
meaning uncertain.
Wa-k’o"’-tsi-e, One-who-triumphs. Refers to the warlike character
of the Wa-zha’-zhe subdivision. Husband of Hi®’-i-ki-a-bi of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-zha’-e-no"-pa-i", meaning uncertain. Son of Ta-zhe’-ga.
Wa-zha’-e-no"-pa-i". Son of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Wa-zha’/-ho"-ga, Sacred-Wa-zha-zhe. Son of To’-ho-ho-e.
Wa-zha’-ho"-ga. Husband of Mi’-gthe-do™-wi?.
Wa-zha’-ho"-ga. Son of Wa-zha’-ho"-ga and Mi’-gthe-do"-wi".
Wa-zha-zhe, meaning uncertain. Name of the tribal subdivision
representing the water portion of the earth. Son of Mi’-tse-xi
of the Ho"’-ga gens.
FEMALE
_Con-¢i’-gthe, Footprints-in-the-woods. Refers to the footprints of
deer in the woods. Wife of To"’-wo"-ga-xe of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Co"-ci’-gthe. Wife of Tse-wa’-hiu of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Co®-ci’-gthe. Daughter of Chi-zhe-wa-the and Ni’-ka-shi-tsi-e of the
Ho™ J-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Gthe-do”’-wi"-zhi"-ga, Young-hawk-woman. Wife of Gi-wa’-xthi-
zhe of the Ho®’-ga U-ta-no"-dsi gens.
130 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
Ho*-be’-do-ka, Wet-moccasins. Wife of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa of the
Po’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho"-be’-do-ka. Wife of I"-gtho"’-ga-zhi"-ga of the Wa-ca’-be gens.
Ho"™-be’-do-ka. Wife of We-to’-ha-i"-ge of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-ei
gens.
Ho®-be’-do-ka. Daughter of Ga-hi’-ge-no™-zhi" and Xu-tha’-da-wi?
of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho®-be’-do-ka. Wife of Ho®’-ba-hiu of the Ho™ J-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ho®-be’-do-ka. Daughter of To’-ho-ho-e.
Ni’-a-bi, Permitted-to-live. Refers to the fawn the hunter allows to
escape.
Ni’-do"-be, Sees-water. Daughter of To’-ho-ho-e.
Pa-hiu’-gthe-ge, Spotted-hair. Mother of Andrew O-pah of the
O’-po® gens.
Pa’-xpi-co™-dse, Stunted-oaks. Refers to the habit of the deer in
frequenting stunted oak bushes.
Pa’-xpi-go"-dse. Wife of Xu-tha’-to®-ga of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Pa’-xpi-co™-dse. Wife of Tse-¢it’-dse of the Tho’-xe gens.
Pa’-xpi-co"-dse. Wife of To’-thi-xthi-xtho-dse of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-ko"’-ca-mo"-i", meaning uncertain. Wife of Wa’-tse-mo?-i" of
the Po"-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-to"’-i-ca-e, meaning uncertain. Wife of Mo™ga’-shu-e of the
Tho’-xe gens.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi, Wa-zha’-zhe-sacred-sun. Daughter of No®-
zhi’-wa -the.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-x1. Wife of Pa-ci’-do-ba of the Tho’-xe gens.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-x1. Wife of Ba’-ciu-to"-ga, a Kaw Indian.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi. Wife of No®-be’-ci of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-
ge gens.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Wa-k’o"-tsi-e and Hi/-i-ki?-
da-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-zha-zhe-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Chi-zhe’-wa-the and Ni’-ka-shi-
tsi-e of the Ho" I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Ga-hi/-ge-no"-zhi" and Xu-
tha’-da-wi® of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Ho’ I-n1-Ka-suHI-Ga (Fisa PEOPLE)
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and
daughters in a Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga family.
SONS
. I"-gtho"’. Name, Wa-zha’-ho-ga, Sacred Wa-zha’-zhe.
. Ksho"’-ga. Name, To’-ho-ho, Blue-fish.
. Ka’-zhi"-ga. Name, Ho-xo’-e, Fish scales.
whee
eee
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE Loi
DAUGHTERS
1. Mi’-na. Name, Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi, Wa-zha’-zhe Sacred-sun.
2. Wi’-he. Name, Ho®-be’-do-ka, Wet-moccasins.
3. Ci’/-ge. Name, Wa-zha’-mi-tse-xi, Wa-zha’-zhe Sacred-sun.
OTHER NAMES
MALE
Chi-zhe’-wa-the, Rustles-the-leaves. Refers to the rustling of the
leaves by a deer as he feeds in the woods.
E-no*’-mi®-dse-to®, Sole-owner-of-the-bow. Refers to the office of
this gens of making the ceremonial bow for use in a tribal ceremony.
Ga-hi’-ge-ne"-zhi", Standing-chief.
Ga-hi’-ge-tha-gthi", Handsome-chief.
Ga-hi’-ge-to®-ga, Big-chiet.
Ga-hi’-ge-zhi"-ga, Little-chief. (In the I"-ke’-ga-be gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
Ga-hi-’ge-xtsi, Real-chief. (In the [*-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
He’-gka-mo®-i", White-horn-walks. Refers to the buck deer with
white horns.
Ho-btha’-¢ka-zhi"-ga, Little-flat-fish.
Ho-¢ka’, White-fish.
Ho-co™, Braided-fish. Refers to the braidlike appearance of the
scales of a fish.
Ho-ga’-xa, fish-fins.
Ho’-ki-e-ci, Splashing-fish. Refers to the splashing of the water by
a fish as he plays.
Ho-pa’, Fish-head.
Ho-wa’-hi, Fish-bone.
Ho-xi?’-ha, Fish-skin.
I*-shta’-pe-dse, Fire-eyes. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha
tribe.) ‘
Ko’-zhi-mo®-i2, Travels-in-distant-lands.
Mi-ka’-xa-ge, Crying-raccoon. (In the Ta-pa’ gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
Mi*’-dse-ni-e, Fences-with-the-bow.
Ni’-u-ba-shu-dse, Muddies-the-water. Refers to the mud stirred up
by the fish as they move about in the bottom of a stream.
Ta-he’-ga-xe, Antlered-deer. (In the I*-shta’-go"-da gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
Ta-he’-xa-ga, Rough-horned-deer.
Tse-do’-ha, Buffalo-skin. (A name belonging to the Tho’-xe gens.)
132 THE OSAGE TRIBE [eTH. ANN. 43
FEMALE
Co*-ci’-gthe, Here-are-the-footprints. Refers to the footprints of the
deer.
Mi’-gthe-do™-wi", Hawk-woman.
No’’-ka-gka, White-back. Refers to the whitish color of the deer at
certain seasons.
No"-ta’-cka, White-ears. Refers to the white hair on the ears of the
deer.
Pa-hiu’-gthe-zhe, Spotted-hair. Refers to the spots on the fawn.
Pa’-xpe-co"-dse, Frequenter-of-bushes.
Wa-ko”’-ci, Small animal.
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba. (Meaning uncertain.)
Ho’’-aa U-pa-no*®-psr
Names of the first three sons and the first three daughters.
SONS
I"-etho”. Ta-dse’-k’u-e, Soughing-of-the-wind.
Ksho"’-ga. Ta-dse’-to", Owner-of-the-wind. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be
gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Ho’’-ga U-ta-no"-dsi, The-solitary-Ho"’-ga.
Ka’-zhi*-ga. Ho"’-ga-tsi-no™-zhi", Standing-house-of-the-Ho™-ga.
Ho" -ga-to"-ga, Great-Ho’’-ga.
Tsi/-wa-ko"-da-gi, Mystery-house.
Tsi/-wa-the-she, Tears-down-the-house. Refers to the tearing
down of the house of mystery after a ceremony.
DAUGHTERS
Mi’-na. Mi’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favored.
Wi-he’. Xiu-tha’-do™-wi", Sees-the-eagle.
Ci’-ge. Mi’-tse-xi-Ho"-ga, Mi’-na-ho"-ga-the-favored.
OTHER NAMES
Maur
Gi-wa’-xthi-zhi, Not-stingy. Husband of Gthe-do®’-wi"-zhin-ga of
the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ho"-ga-to™-ga, Great-Ho™-ga. Also Ho’-mo"-da-ko", Light-on-
the-earth-at-night. Husband of Pa’-zhi-hi of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Ko-ce-ho™-ga, Resembling-the-Ho”-ga. (In the Mo’-thi"-ka-ga-
xe gens of the Omaha.) Husband of Bo®-giu’-da of the Tho’-
xe gens.
Mo"’-xe-a-gthe, Reaches-the-sky. Refers to the wind. Husband of
Wa-ko"’da-hi-tho"-be of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
IA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 133
No"-po’-e, Flames-at-every-step. Refers to the white spot on the
throat of the black bear that is a symbol of fire. Husband of
Wa-to”’-i-ga-e of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ta-dse’-k’o-e, Soughing-of-the-wind. Refers to the wind, the life
symbol of the gens.
Ta-dse’-to", Owner-of-the-wind. (In the I"-ke’-ga-be gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Son of Ko?’-ce-ho"-ga and Bo®-giu’-da.
Ho*-’ga-wa-da-i"-ga, Playful-Ho®’-ga.
T’-hu-tha-bi, From-whom-permission-is-obtained. Refers to the au-
thority vested in this gens to give the order to go to the buffalo
chase. (Also used by the Omaha.)
Mo”-hi"-ci, Fire. Refers to the fire drawn from the stone. Or
Arrow-head.
U-pa’-shi-e, Counsellor.
Wa-no"’-pa-zhi, Not-afraid. (Also used by the Omaha.)
Wa-zhi"-u-tsi, Courageous.
FEMALE
A’-hiu-do-ba, Four-wings.
Do"-ba-bi, Seen-by-all. Daughter of Ko?’-ce-ho™-ga and Bo?-
giu’-da of the Tho’-xe gens.
Do*-do"-ba, Seen-from-time-to-time. Daughter of Ho®’-ga-to®-ga
and Pa’-zhi-hi of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Do"’-do"-ba, Mother of O-ho®’-bi of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Mi’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite. Daughter of Ho"’-ga-to"-ga and
Pa’-zhi-hi.
Mi’-tse-xi-ho"-ga, Mi’-na-the-sacred-one. Daughter of Ko"’-ce-
ho®-ga and Bo®-giu’-da.
Mi’-tse-xi-ho"-ga, Mi’-na-the-sacred-one. Wife of O/-ki-ca of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa’-tse-wi", Star-woman. Daughter of Ho"’-ga-to"-ga and Pa/-
zhi-hi.
Zho”’-btha-"¢ka-wi", Flat-wood-woman. Wife of I?-shta’-gthe-ce
of therWa-ca’-be gens.
Zho"’-btha-¢ka-wi", Daughter of Ho®’-ga-to"-ga and Pa/-zhi-hi.
HO’’-GA SUBDIVISION
Wa-ca’-BE
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and the
first three daughters in a family of the Wa-¢a’-be or Black Bear gens
as given by Wa-tse’-mo*-1".
SONS
1. I"-gtho™. Zhi®-ga’-ga-hi-ge, Little-chief. (In the Ta-pa’ gens
of the Omaha tribe.)
2. Ksho”’-ga. Gthe-do?’-xo-dse, Gray-hawk. (In the Tha’-ta-da
gens of the Omaha tribe.)
134 THE OSAGE TRIBE [eTH. ANN. 43
3. Ka-ge’. Mo-hi"-wa-ko®-da, Mysterious-knife. Refers to the
scalping-knife in the keeping of the Black Bear gens.
DAUGHTERS
1. Mi’-na. M)i’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite.
2. Wi’-he. Mi’-ho™i".
3. Gi’-ge or A-ci"’-ga. Go’-ba-kshe, Flashing-eyes. Refers to
the flashing eyes of the black bear.
OTHER NAMES
MALE
I’-ba-zhu-ase, Red-handle. Refers to the red-handled knife that is
in the keeping of this gens for ceremonial use.
I"-gtho"’-ga-zhi"-ga, Little-puma. Husband of Ho®-be’-do-ka of the
Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
I"-shta’-mo"-¢ge, Flashing-eyes. Refers to the flashing eyes of the
black bear. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Mi-k’i? gens.
Mo”’-hi"-zhu-dse, Red-knife. Refers to the red-handled ceremonial
knife. Son of Mo®’-zhi-¢ka-k’i?-ga-xthi and Mi’-ga-sho?-1?.
Mo" -thiu-xe, Ground-cleared-of-grass. Refers to the bare ground
around the house of the bear. Son of Wa-tse’-mo®-i" and Mo®-
co"-ho™-i".
Mo”’-zhi-gka-k’i"-ga-xthi, Slayer - of - the -warrior-with-white-quiver
(war name). Husband of Mi’-ga-sho"-i" of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Mo*-zho"’-dsi-ci-gthe, Tracks-on-the-prairies. Refers to the bear
tracks seen on the prairies.
Ni’-ka-wa-da-i"-ga, Playful-man. Also Mo?’-hi?-wa-ko"-da, Mys-
terious-knife. Refers to the ceremonial knife in the keeping of
this gens.
Wa’-tse-ga-wa, Radiant-star. Son of Wa-tse’-mo?-i? and Mo"-co®-
ho™-1". 7
Wa-tse’-mo?-i", He-who-wins-war-honors (war name). Also Wa-
shi’’-ha. Refers to the fat on the skin of the bear. Husband of
Mi’-co™-ho"-i" of the O’-po® gens.
Zhi*-ga’-ga-hi-ge, Young-chief. Son of I’-ba-zhu-dse.
FEMALE
Go'’-ba-kshe, The-light. Refers to the light in the eyes of the bear.
Go"’-ba-kshe. Daughter of Wa-tse’-mo"-i" and Mi’-¢o™-ho™-i".
Mi’-co®-e’, White-sun. Wife of Wa-to"’-i?-ki-the of the Tho’-xe
gens.
Mi’-ho™i" (meaning uncertain). Daughter of I*-gtho"’-ga-zhi"-ga
and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Mi’-ho™-i". Daughter of Ni’-ka-wa-da-i"-ga.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 135
Mi’-ho"-i?. Daughter of Wa-tse’-mo”-i" and Mi’-¢o"-ho™-i".
Mi’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite. Daughter of Mo®’-zhi-cka-k’i"-ga-
xthi and Mi’-ga-sho™-i".
No*’-mi-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite. Daughter of Ni’-ka-wa-da-i"-
ga.
Wa-ca’-be-wa-k’o, Black-bear-woman. Daughter of I*-gtho"’-ga-
zhi"-ga.
IS-GrHo’’-Ga
Names of the first three sons and first three daughters.
SONS
I™-ctho™”. Mi’-wa-ga-xe, Child-of-the-sun.
Ksho*’-ga._ I’-e-cka-wa-the, Giver-of-speech.
3. Ka’-zhi®-ga. Mo*’-ga-xe, Arrow-maker.
iS)
DAUGHTERS
1. Mi’-no®. Mo” -ci-tse-xi, Sacred-arrow-shaft.
Wi’-he. Mo*-zho®-op-she-wi", Woman -who -travels- over - the-
earth.
3. Ci’-ge. No*’-mi-tse-xi, Beloved-child-of-the-sun.
to
OTHER NAMES
MALeE
I*-shta’-sha-be, Dark-eyes. In the Tse-ci?’-dse gens of the Omaha
tribe.
Mi-wa’-ga-xe, Child-of-the-sun. Also, Hi®-wa’-xa-ga, Rough-hair.
Husband of Mi-’tse-xi of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Mo?”’-ga-xe, Arrow-maker. Husband of Wa-to?-i’-ca-e of the Po™’-ka
Wa-shta-ge gens. (Also Pa’-xe-ga, Brown-nose. Refers to the
brown nose of the black bear.)
Mo”’-ga-xe. Son of Wa-xthi’-zhi and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
Mo” -hi"-wa-ko"-da, Mysterious-knife. Son of Wa-thu’-ts’a-ga-zhi
and Mi’-tse-xi.
No®-be’-wa-ko"-da, Mysterious hand. Mythical name, refers to the
use of the index finger for killing animals before weapons were
known. Also refers to the ceremony performed by a member of
the Wa-ca’-be gens when blessing a newborn child with the rays
of the sun. Son of Wa-thu’-ts’a-ga-zhi and Mi’-tse-xi.
To®’-dse-a-shi" (meaning obscure).
Wa-thu’-ts’a-ga-zhi, Never-fails (war name). The grandfather of
the man who last bore this name never failed in his war exploits
so the people gave him the name. Husband of Mi’-tse-xi of the
Ho*’-ga gens.
136 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Wa-xthi’-zhi, Generous (war name). A man of this gens was given
the name because he always shared with the people the spoils he
took in his war exploits. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi® of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
FEMALE
Mi’-ho"-i". (Meaning obscure.) Mother of Xo’-ka of the Ni’-ka-
wa-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Mo?’-ci-tse-xi, Sacred-arrowshaft. Daughter of Wa-xthi’-zhi and
Xu-tha’-da-wi".
Mo”’-¢i-tse-xi. Mother of I’"’-sho"-ba of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens.
No®’-mi-tse-xi, Only-sacred-sun. Refers to the sun, a life symbol
of this gens. Daughter of Wa-xthi’-zhi and Xu-tha’-da-wi?.
No”’-mi-tse-xi. Wife of Wa-shka’-dse of the Po’’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Wa’-tse-wi", Star-woman. Wife of Xi-tha-u’-ga-sho" of the Ho?’-ga
gens.
Ho’’-ca GrHE-zHE
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and the
first three daughters in a family of the Ho"’-ga Gthe-zhe, Mottled
eagle, gens, as given by Mi’-she-tsi-the
SONS
1. I"-gtho"’. Mi-she-tsi-the, Yonder-the-sun-passes. Also Ho"’-ga-
a-shi", same as Ho"’-ga-u-ga-sho", The Ho®’-ga Messenger.
2. Ksho"’-ga. Ho"’-ga-a-gthi", Good-eagle. Refers to the eagle
that is friendly to the people.
3. Ka’-zhi"-ga. A’-hiu-cka, White-wings.
DAUGHTERS
eel
. Mi’-na. Mi’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite.
. Wi’-he. Mi’-¢o?-i", White-sun.
3. A-ci"’-ga. Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi, Eagle-sacred-sun. Also Xu-tha’-
dsi-wi", Eagle-woman.
bo
OTHER NAMES
MALE
A’-hiu-cka, White-wings.
A’-hiu-cka. Husband of I’-ni-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
A’-hiu-k’u-we, Holes-in-the-wings. Son of Wa-no’-she-zhi"-ga and
Mo?’-¢i-tse-xi.
Ho"’-ga-a-shi", The-Ho"’-ga-messenger.
Ho®’-ga-a-shi®. Eugene Blaine.
Ho’-ga-a-shi*, Also Ta-shka’-wa.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 3h
Ho" -ga-tha-gthi", Good-eagle.
Ho’’-ga-tha-gthi®, Son of Wa-no"’-she-zhi"-ga and Ho"’-ga-mi-tse-x1.
Ho"’-ga-tha-gthi". Son of Xu-tha’-pa and Tse’-mi-tse-xi.
Ho"’-ga-zhi"-ga, Young-Ho’’-ga. Son of Wa-no?’-she-zhi"-ga and
Ho”’-ga-mi-tse-x1.
Kshi’-zhi, Never-reached-home. Husband of Ni’-ka of the Mi-k’1"
gens.
Lookout, John. Husband of I’-ga-mo"-ge of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Lookout, William. Son of John Lookout and I’-ga-mo*-ge.
Mi’-she-tsi-the. Son of Mo®’-¢i-tse-xi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Mi’-she-tsi-the. Also No®-xu’-dse-thi"-ge, No-ears. Husband of
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo"-i" of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Mi’-she-tsi-the. Husband of Wa-zha’-xa-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Mo"-shi’-ta-mo®-i", One-who-travels-above. Refers to the eagle.
Husband of Mo®’-¢i-tse-xi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
O-ba’-ho®-mo*-i?, Walking-within. Husband of Pa’-zhi-hi of the
Ho” -ga gens.
Sha’-ge-cka, White-talons. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
Sha’-ge-pa-hi, Sharp-talons. Son of Xu-tha’-pa and Tse’-mi-tse-xi.
Tha’-bthi®-wa-xthi, Slayer-of-three (War name.)
Tse-hi®’-tha-ge, Wearer-of-buffalo-hair-head-band. (Not gentile
name.)
Wa-go"’-tha, meaning obscure. Also Wa-tse’-gi-do"-a-bi, One-
whose-trophies-are-seen (war name). Son of Wa-no"’-she-zhi"-ga
and Mo”’-ci-tse-x1.
Wa-ko"’-tha-to"-ga, Great-attacker. Husband of Mi’-tse-xi of the
O’-po" gens.
Wa-no"-she-zhi?-ga, Little-soldier. (In the I"-shta’-co"-da gens of
the Omaha tribe.) Husband of Mo®’-ci-tse-xi of the Wa-¢a’-be
gens.
Wa-no"’-she-zhi"-ga. Husband of Ho?’-ga-mi-tse-xi of the I’-ba-tse
gens.
Wa-sho’-she, Valorous. Husband of Mo®’-ci-tse-xi of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-sho’-she. Judge Lawrence.
Wa-xo"’-xo", Twinkles. Refers to the spaces in the wings of the eagle
through which the sunlight twinkles as the bird flies. Son of
Wa-no"’-she-zhi*-ga and Mo®’-ci-tse-x1.
Wa-xo"”-xo". James Blaine, jr.
Wa-zhi®’-pa, Bird-head. Son of Xu-tha’-to"-ga and Pa’-xpi-co"-dse.
Wa-zhi’’-pa. Son of Wa-no"’-she-zhi"-ga and Ho®’-ga-mi-tse-xi.
19078°—28——10
138 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Xu-tha’-pa, Eagle-head. Husband of Tse’-mi-tse-xi of the Tse-tho”’-
ka gens.
Xu-tha’-to"-ga, Big-eagle. Husband of Pa’-xpi-co"™-dse of the Ta’
J-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Xi-tha-u’-ga-sho", Eagle-that-travels. Husband of Wa/-tse-wi" of
the [*-¢tho"’-ga gens.
Zhi®-ga-’wa-ga. (Meaning obscure.) Also Co"’-to™-ga-be, Black-
dog. Husband of Gthe-do"’-mi-tse-xi of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko?-da-gi
gens.
FEMALE
Lookout, Nora. Daughter of Wa-no®’-she-zhi"-ga and Mo"’-ci-tse-xi.
Mi’-ce-wi®. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Naranjo, a Pueblo Indian
of Santa Clara, N. Mex.
Mi’-co"-e, White-sun. Wife of Pa-ci’-do-ba of the Tho’-xe gens.
Mi’-co”-i", White-sun.
Mi’-co™i". Wife of Isi-xi’-tha-ba-zhi of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens.
Mi’-tse-xi, Sacred-sun. (In the I*-ke-ca-be gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Daughter of Mi’-she-tsi-the.
Mi’-tse-xi. (Daughter of Zhi®-ga’-wa-ca.) Wife of Hi?-wa’-xa-ga
of the I"-gtho"’-ga gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Daughter of Wa-no?’-she-zhi"-ga and Ho"’-ga mi-tse-xi.
Mi’-tse-xi. Daughter of Xu-tha’-pa and Tse’-mi-tse-x1.
Mi’-tse-xi. Wife of Ho’-ki-e-ci of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Mother of Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi, Ho-xo’ and Wa-zha’-
zhe of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Mother of Wa-zha’-no"-pa-i" of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Daughter of Wa-no"’-she-zhi-ga and Mo”’-ci-tse-xi.
Mi’-tse-xi. Wife of Wa-thu’-ts’a-ga-zhi of the I"-ghto"’-ga gens.
No"™-k’on-ce-wi®. (Meaning obscure.) Kate Whitehorn.
Pa’-zhi-hi. Reddish-head. Refers to the reddish color of the head
of the eagle. Mary Cox.
Pa’-zhi-hi. Grace Entokah.
Pa’-zhi-hi. Prudie Martin.
Pa’-zhi-hi. Daughter of Mi’-she-tsi-e and Wa’-ko"-cga-mo*-i".
Pa’-zhi-hi. Wife of O-ba’-ho"-mo"-i" (Ni-ka’-¢a-e).
Pa’-zhi-hi. Daughter of Xu-tha’-to"-ga and Pa’-xpi-¢o"-dse.
Pa’-zhi-hi. Wife of Ho"-mo"-da-ko® of the Ho"-ga U-ta-no™-dsi
gens.
Xu’-tha-dsi-wi", Eagle-woman. Wife of Tsi-zhu-zhi"-ga of the Tsi’-
zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi, Eagle-sacred-sun. Daughter of Mi’-she-tsi-the.
Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Wa-sho’-she and Mo?’-c¢i-tse-x1.
Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi. Wife of No"-ba’-mo"-thi® of the Tho’-xe gens.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 139
Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi. Wife of Wa/’-thu-xa-ge of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-
shta-ge.
Xu-tha’-wi?, Eagle-woman. Daughter of Mi’-she-tsi-e and Wa’-
ko"-ca-mo?-1".
Xu’-tha-wit. Wife of No®’-dse-u-mo™-i" of the Ho’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Ho®’-ca U-THU-HA-GE
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and the
first three daughters in a family of the Ho"’-ga U-thu-ha-ge (Last
in the Ho®’-ga order) gens as given by Wa’-no"-she-zhi"-ga.
SONS
T'etho”’. Xu-tha’-ha-hi-ge, Eagle-chief.
Ksho"’-ga. Tse’-ga-mo"-i", Goes-in-new-plumage. Refers to the
young eagle.
Ka’-zhi"-ga. I"’-be-cka, White-tail. Refers to the tail of the
mature golden eagle whose white tail feathers are tipped with
black.
DAUGHTERS
Mi’-na. Mi-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite.
Wi’-he. Mji’-co?-e, White-sun.
Ci’-ge. Mi’-tse-xi-o"-ba. (Meaning obscure.)
OTHER NAMES
Mate
A-hi"’-u-k’u-dse, Holes-in-the-wings. Refers to the spaces in the
wings of the eagle.
Cka’-gthe, White-plumes. Refers to the three downy feathers
taken from under the tail of the eagle and worn as life symbols by
priests.
He-ba’-ku-ge, Blunt-horns. Name given in compliment to this gens
by the Tho’-xe gens.
Hiu’-¢a-da-zhi"-ga, Young-hiu’-¢a-da. Refers to the eagle’s leg
attached to the hanging strap of the wa-xo’-be or shrine.
Ho*’-ga, The-consecrated-one. Name of the gens.
Ho"’-ga-gthe-zhe, Mottled-eagle. Refers to the immature golden
eagle that is dark in plumage. This bird is regarded as sacred
by many of the Indian tribes.
Ho"’-ga-to"-ga, Great-eagle.
Ho*’-ga-tsi-e-da, House-of-the-Ho"’-ga. Refers to the House of
Mystery that is in the keeping of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Kshi’-zhi-wa-ga-xe, Causes them to fail to reach home. Refers to
the attack of the eagle on its prey.
140 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Mo”’-ce, Metal. Wa-no"-she-zhi"-ga could not explain the meaning
of this name.
Mo?’-da-i-he. (Meaning obscure.)
Mo"-i"’-zhi, Does-not-walk. Refers to the eagle.
Mo?’-shi-ha-mo*-i", One-who-moves-above. Refers to the eagle.
(In the I"-shta’-¢o"-da gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Mo?-shi’-ta-mo?-1", Moves-on-high. Refers to the eagle.
Mo?’-sho"-ho"-ga, Sacred-plume. Refers to the eagle plumes worn
by priests.
No®-be’-ci, Yellow-hands. Refers to the yellow feet of the eagle.
Pa-hiu’-ga-zho", Hairy-head. Name given by the Tho’-xe gens to
the Ho"’-ga U-thu-ha-ge gens.
Sha’-ge-cka, White-talons. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
Sha’-ge-pa-hi, Sharp-talons. Refers to the sharp talons of the eagle.
Sho?’-to"-ca-be, Black-dog. Thu-ts’a’-ga-bi.
Thu-ts’a’-ga-bi, Hard-to-catch. Refers to the wariness of the eagle.
Tsi-do’-ba, Four-lodges. A valor name. A war party attacked four
lodges and killed all the inhabitants. The commander was given
the name by the people.
U-ga’-ci"-dse, Breeze. Refers to the wind stirred by the eagle when
flying.
U-ga’-sho", The wanderer. Refers to the office of messenger of this
gens.
U-thi"’-ge-no™-zhi", Stands-holding. Refers to the hold of the eagle
on its prey.
U-thi’-sho"-mo"-i", Moves-in-a-circle. Refers to the soaring of the
eagle. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Wa-ko"’-tha-to™-ga, Great-attacker. Refers to the attack of the
eagle on its prey.
Wa-sho’-she, Brave. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Wa-xo"’-xo", The-shining-one. Refers to the shining of the wings
of the eagle.
Wa-zhi"’-i-ci-wa-the, Hated-bird. Refers to the fear of the eagle
by other birds.
Wa-zhi"’-pa, Bird-head. Refers to the head of the eagle.
Wa-zhi"’-zhi-e, Red-bird. (Red eagle.)
Xi-tha-u’-ga-sho", The-traveling-eagle. Refers to the tireless soar-
ing of the eagle.
Xo"-xo™-mo"-1", Shines-as-he-moves. Refers to the reflection of
the sun on the outspread wings of the eagle.
Xu-tha’-ni-ka, Eagle-man. (In the Ta’-pa gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
Xu-tha’-pa, Eagle-head.
Xu-tha’-sha-be, Dark-colored-eagle.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 141
Xu-tha’-to"-ga, Big-eagle.
Xu-tha’-ts’a-ge, Aged-eagle. The eagle is a symbol of old age.
(In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Xu-tha’-wa-shu-she, Brave-eagle.
Zhi®-ga’-wa-ca. (Meaning obscure.)
Zho’’-no"-cu-ge, Bends-the-tree-top. Refers to the bending of the
treetop by the weight of the eagle as he alights.
FEMALE
Hi"’-ga-mo"-ge, Feathers-blown-by-the-wind. Refers to the drop-
ping of the downy feathers as the eagle rises to fly.
Mi’-co"-e, White-sun.
No”’-ko"-ce-wi®. (Meaning obscure.)
Pa’-ci-hi, Brown-head. Refers to the brown head of the eagle.
Xu-tha’-mi, Eagle-woman.
Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi, Sacred-eagle-woman.
Xu-tha-tsa-wi", Eagle-woman.
O’/-poN (ELK) GENS
MALE
He’-co"-ho", White-horns. Son of Mo?’-ge-ca-be and Xu-tha’-da-
wi".
Ho"-mo"-cga. (Meaning obscure.)
Ho"’-mo*-ca. Son of Ki/-mo?-ho® and Tho’-ta-a-ca.
Ho"’-mo*-cga, also Mi-xo’-zhit-ga. (Not Ni’-ki-e.) Husband of
Mo"’-ci-tse-xi of the Tsi/-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho™-mo"-ca. Son of Ho®’-mo"-ga and Mo?’-ci-tse-xi.
I’-e-gka-wa-the, Giver-of-speech. (A name of the I?-gtho"’-ga
gens.)
Ki’-mo"-ho", Against-the-wind. Refers to the habit of the elk of
facing the wind when feeding. (In the We’-zhi"-shte gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Husband of Tho’-ta-a-ca of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko?-
da-gi gens.
Mo"’-ge-ca-be, Black-breast. Refers to the black hair on the
breast of the elk. (In the We’-zhi"-shte gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Mi-k’1™ gens.
Moi” -ka-zhi"-ga, Little-clay. Refers to the four different colored
clays given by the crawfish to the people for ceremonial use.
(See section 25 of the Ni’-ki-e ritual, 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn.) Son of Ki-mo®-ho® and Tho’-ta-a-ca.
Mo*-zho"’-ga-xe, Earth-maker. From the mythical story of the elk
separating the waters from the earth, making it habitable for the
people. (See pp. 165 to 169, 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.)
Son of IXi’-mo"-ho® and Tho’-ta-a-ga.
O-pa’, Andrew. Son of Pa-hiu’-gthe-zhe of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
142 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETE. ANN. 43
FEMALE
Gtho"-zho’’-ba. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Xo’-ka of the Ni’-ka-
wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Ho"’’-ga-wi", Eagle-woman.
Ho®’-ga-wi". Daughter of Mo®’-ge-ga-be and Xu-tha’-da-wi?.
Ho*’-ga-wi". Daughter of Ki’-mo"-ho® and Tho’-ta-a-ga.
Ho" -ga-wi". Wife of No®-pe-wa-the of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens.
Ho®-’ga-wi®. Wife of Mo®’-ge-no®-p’i® of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Mo"’-co"-ho-i". (Meaning obscure.) Daughter of Ho*’-mo*-ga
and Mo"’-ci-tse-x1.
Mo"-co"-ho"-i". Wife of Wa-tse-’mo™-i" of the Wa-ga’-be gens.
Mo'’-ca-ho"-e. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Edward Bigheart of
the Po™-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Mi’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite. Wife of Wa-ko*’-tha-to™-ga.
Pa’-mo*-shi-wa-gtho*. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Wa’-tse-a-xe of
the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tho’-ha-wa. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Pi’-zhi-to"-ga of the
Tho’-xe gens.
I’-Ba-Ttse (WrnpD) GrEns
MALE
A’-k’a, South-wind. Refers to the wind, the life symbol of the
gens. Son of Ka’-wa-xo-dse and Wa-to”’-i-ca-e.
A’-k’a-hiu-e, Wind-is-from-the-south. Son of Ka’-wa-gi and Gia’-
co™-ba.
Ga-hi’-gtho"-i2-ge. (Meaning obscure.) Son of Ho”’-ga.
Hi"-sha’-a-xthi, Slayer-of-a-Caddo. Also Zhi®-ga’-ga-hi-ge, Young-
chief. This name may be used by permission to honor a child.
Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Ts1’-zhu Wa-no?.
Ho"’-ga, The-sacred-one. A special name for the dark-plumaged
immature golden eagle, the life symbol of this gens. Ho*’-ga is
also the name of the subdivision of the tribe representing the dry
land of the earth. Son of Ka’-wa-gi.
Ho’-ga. Son of Ho’’-ga.
Ho®’-ga. (Alfred McKinley.)
I’-bi-co"-dse. (Meaning obscure.)
Ka’-wa-gi, Yellow-horse. (Not Ni’-ki-e.) Husband of Gia’-go™-ba
of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ka/-wa-xo-dse, Roan-horse. (Not Ni’-ki-e.) Also Ge’-ge-mo™i", Trots-
as-he-travels. Refers to the restless movements of the elk. The
I’-ba-tse is a subgens of the Elk and has the right to take names
relating to that animal. Husband of Wa-to®-i’-ga-e of the Po®’-ka
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Sho?’-ge-tsi-e, Dog-passing-by.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 143
Ta’-dse-hiu-e, The-coming-wind. Son of Ka’-wa-xo-dse and Wa-
to™-1'-ca-e.
Tha-ciu’-e, Whistle. Refers to the whistle which this gens was per-
mitted to consecrate and use as a wa-xo’-be in honor of a member
who had won an important victory in battle. The name is not
classed as Ni’-ki-e, that is, it was not one that was accepted as a
gentile name by common consent of the No®’-ho®-zhi"-ga. The
whistle wa-xo’-be is now in the United States National Museum
(No. 276133). Husband of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho®’ J-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Tha-ciu’-e. Son of Ka’-wa-xo-dse and Wa-to"’-i-ca-e of the Po”’-ka
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-gthe-zhe, Speckled-eagle. The speckled eagle is an imma-
ture golden eagle whose tail feathers are speckled. The bird is one
of the life symbols of this gens. Son of Hi?-sha’-a-xthi and
Xu-tha-’da-wi".
Xu-tha’-gthe-zhe. Son of Wa-¢a’-be-wi" of the Ho” I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Xu-tha’-k’i", Eagle-carrier. (Don Dickinson.)
FEMALE
A’-k’a-mi-tse-xi, South-wind-Mi-na-the-favored. Daughter of Ka’-
wa-xo-dse and Wa-to"-i’-ca-e.
A’-k’a-wi", South-wind-woman. (In the Ho"’-ga gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Daughter of Hi®-sha’-a-xthi and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
A’-k’a-wi". Wife of Ta-he’-ga-xe of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ho®’-ga-mi-tse-xi, Ho®’-ga-Mi-na-the-favored. Daughter of Ka’-wa-
ci and Gia’-co"-ba.
Ho"’-ga-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of Ka’-wa-¢i and Gia’-co"-ba.
Ho"’-ga-mi-tse-x1. Daughter of Hi®-sha’-a-xthi and Xu-tha’-da-wi?.
Ho”’-ga-mi-tse-xi. (Ethel Brant.)
Ho"’-ga-mi-tse-x1. Wife of Wa-no®’-she-zhi"-ga of the Ho”’-va gens.
Ho" -ga-wi®, Eagle-woman.
Ho"-ga-wi®. Wife of Xu-tha’-zhu-dse of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
I”’-be-zho"-ka, Forked-tail-kite.
I"’-be-zho"-ka. Wife of Ni’-wa-the of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
I*’-be-zho®-ka-wi", Forked-tail-kite-woman. Daughter of Ho®’-ga.
[°’-be-zho"-ka-wi®. Wife of Ga-hi’-ge-to" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
I*’-be-zho™-ka-wi®. (Sylvia Wood.)
Wa-hiu’-co"-i", White-bones-woman. Refers, probably, to the story
that at the beginning this gens controlled the winds, and by their
use destroyed all animals, leaving their bones to whiten on the
ground around the village.
Wa-hiu’-co™-i". Daughter of Ka’-wa-xo-dse and Wa-to?-i’-ca-e.
Wa-hiu-co®-i®. Wife of Ta-he-ga-xe of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
144 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
TSI’-ZHU DIVISION
Tsi/-zHu Wa-NoN GENS
MALE
Co"-dse-u’-gthi", Dweller-in-upland-forest. (Not Ni’-ki-e.) Also
We’-thi*-ga-xe, Maker-of-straps. Refers to the office of this gens
of ceremonially making the captive straps for the warriors of a war
party. Husband of Mo?-zho™-dsi-i-ta of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Ga-hi’-ga-zhi, Not-a-chief. A chief could not be chosen from this
gens because its office has to do with war. Son of Mi’-tse-xi-ho™-ga,
wife of O-ki’-¢a.
Ho’-ca-zhi"-e, Young-strong-voice. (Married to a white woman.)
Ho?’-ga-ha-bi, He-who-is-called-Ho"™-ga.
Ho"’-ga-ha-bi. Also Wa-xthi’, Stingy.
Ho"”-ga-ha-bi. Son of Pa’-zhi-hi of the Ho"’-ga gens.
[’"’-do-ka-wa-da-i?-ga, Playful-wet-stone.
Mo’-hi®-cpe-we-tsi", Battle-ax.
Mo?-i"’-ka-u-ga-hni. (Meaning obscure.) Son of O’-tha-ha-mo?-i"
and Mo”’-ci-tse-x1.
Ni’-ka-i-ci-wa-the, Hated-man. Refers to the aggressive character of
this gens. Husband of Ki’-o of the Tho’-xe gens.
No"-ba’-k’iu-e. (Meaning obscure.) Son of O’-tha-ha-mo?-i" and
Mo?-ci-tse-xi.
No?-xtho"’-zhe, Tramples-the-grass. Refers to the discovery of the
tracks of buffalo by an official runner. Son of I’"’-do-ka-wa-da-
i"-ga.
O-ca’-ki-e. (Meaning obscure.)
O/’-tha-ha-mo"-i", The-follower. Husband of Mo?’-¢i-tse-xi of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Pa’-thi®-wa-we-xta, Annoyer-of-the-enemy. (Warname.) Husband
of Gthe-do"-mi-tse-xi of the Ni-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Sha’-ge-wa-bi", Bloody-hands. Refers to the butchering of the
buffalo, parts of which were dedicated to ceremonial use in the war
rites. (See pp. 264 to 582, 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.)
Son of Gia’- co™-ba of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-wa’-hiu, Buffalo-bones. Husband of Co™-gi’-gthe of the Ta’
J-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Wa-do®. (Meaning obscure.)
Wa’-i-no®-zhi", Stands-over-them. (In the I*-gthe’-zhi-de gens of
the Omaha tribe.)
Wa-stse’-e-do", Good-doctor. Son of O’-tha-ha-mo®-i" and Mo” -¢i-
tse-xi.
Wa’-tse-go"-tha. (Meaning obscure.) Wa-xthi’-zhi says that the
real name of this man is Mi’-ga-xe, Sun-maker.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 145
Wa-zha’-a-ki-pa, Met-the-Wa-zha’-zhe. Refers to the first meeting
of the Tsi’-zhu division with the Wa-zha’-zhe.
We’-tsi", War-club. Refers to the ceremonial war-club made by
this gens. (See 36th Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., pp. 442-445.)
Son of [®’-do-ka-wa-da-i"-ga.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da, Mysterious-eagle. Son of Gia’-co"-ba of the
Po’’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da. Son of Tse-wa’-hiu and Go?-¢i’-gthe.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da. Husband of Mo"’-ci-tse-xi of the Wa-c¢a’-be
gens.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da. Son of O’-tha-ha-mo™-i? and Mo*’-ci-tse-xi.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da. Son of Xu-tha’-wa-to®-i" and Hi®’-i-ki-a-bi
Xu-tha’-wa-to"-1", Eagle-plainly-seen.
Zhi®-ga’-wa-da-i"-ga, Little-playful-one.
FEMALE
Do-ra Strike-ax. Daughter of Zhi®-ga’-wa-da-i"-ga.
Lucy Ho"’-ga-ha-bi. Daughter of Ho®’-ga-ha-bi or Wa-xthi’.
Mi’-gthe-do®-wi®, Sun-hawk-woman. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of
the Omaha tribe.)
Mi’-gthe-do"-wi". Daughter of Tse-wa’-hiu and Co"-ci’-gthe.
Mi’-gthe-do*-wit. Daughter of Zhi"-ga’-wa-da-1"-ga.
Mi’-gthe-do*-wi®. Daughter of O’-tha-ha-mo"-i7 and Mo”’-ci-tse-x1.
Mi’-ho®-ga, Sacred-sun. (Also used by the Omaha tribe.) Daughter
of Gia-go"-ba of the Po’’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Mi’-ho"-ga. Wife of Do’-ba-mo®-i" of the Tho’-xe gens.
Grace Miller. Daughter of Ho’-¢a-zhi*-e.
Mo”’-btho®-ba, Corn-hill.
Mo”-btho"-ba. Wife of Mi-ka’-k’e-zhi"-ga of the Mi-k’1" gens.
Mo”’-btho"-ba. Daughter of Xu-tha’-wa-to™-1" and Hi"’-i-ki-a-bi.
Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge, Woman-chief. (Not Ni’-ki-e.) Daughter of Zhi"-
ga’-wa-da-i"-ga.
Wa’-ko"-ca-mo™i". (Meaning obscure.) Daughter of Co?-dse-u’-
gthi® and Mo™-zho"’-dsi-i-ta.
Wa-ko”’-da-hi-tho"-be, God-who-appears. Refers to the rising sun.
Wa-ko"’-da-hi-tho™-be. Wife of Mo*’-xe-a-gthe of the Ho’-ga
U-ta-no*-dsi gens.
Wa-ko"’-da-hi-tho"-be. Wife of Wa-thi’-gtho"-thi"-ge of the Tsi’-
zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-ko"’-da-hi-tho"-be. Wife of Mi-hi-the of the Mi-k’i™ gens.
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba, Two-standards. Wife of Mi-k’i"’-wa-da-i"-ga of
the Mi-k’1" gens.
Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba. Wife of Ni’-ka-wa-zhi®-to"-ga of the Po"’-ka
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba. Wife of Tsi’-zhu-a-ki-pa of the Po?’-ka Wa-
shta-ge gens.
146 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba. Wife of Po®’-ka-wa-da-i"-ga of the Po"’-ka Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Wa-xthe’-tho®-ba. Daughter of Tse-wa’-hiu and Co®-¢i’-gthe.
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba. (Annie Kinney.)
Wa-xthe’-tho®-ba. Daughter of Ho®’-ga-ga-bi or Wa-xthi’.
Wa-xthe-tho™-ba. Daughter of G’-tha-ha-mo™-i" and Mo”’-ci-tse-xi.
Wa-xthe’-xtho-xtho-wi", Standard-woman.
Wa-zha’-mi-tse-xi, Wa-zha’-zhe-Mi-na-the-favorite. Daughter of
Xu-tha’-wa-to®-i".
Wa-zha’-zhe-wi®, Wa-zha-zhe-woman. Daughter of Ni’-ka-i-ci-wa-
the and Ki’-o.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®, Good-eagle-woman. Wife of Wa-ce’-to™-zhi?-ga of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Hi®-sha’-a-xthi or Zhi"-ga’-ga-hi-ge of the
I’-ba-tse gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Pa’-zhi-hi of the Ho*’-ga gens.
C1'’-psE-A-GTHE (WEARERS-OF-LOCKS)
MALE
Mo"-i"’-ka-u-ga-hni. (Meaning obscure.) Son of U-ho"’-ge-u-zho"
and Gia’-co?-ba.
Ni-o"’-ba-giu-e. (Meaning obscure.) Son of U-ho"’-ge-u-zho" and
Gia’-co"-ba.
U-ho"’-ge-u-zho", Lies-at-the-end. Also Sho"’-ge-thi-hi, Dog-scarer.
Refers to the dog, one of the life symbols of the gens.
Wa-hiu’-tha-zhu, Bone-gnawer. Refers to the habit of the dog.
Son of U-ho®’-ge-u-zho” and Gia’-¢o"-ba.
Wa-ko?’-da-no*-pa-i", The-god-who-is-feared. Refers to the con-
stellation, Canis Major, the life symbol of this gens.
FEMALE
Wa-xthe’-tho®-ba, Two-standards.
Xu-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle-woman. Daughter of U-ho?’-ge-u-zho"
and Gia-co"-ba.
Xu-tha’-da-wit. Wife of Mo-i?’-ka-mo"-i" of the Po"-ka Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Tsi’-zHU WaA-SHTA-GE
Special kinship terms and names of the first three sons and the
first three daughters in a family of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens, as
given by Btho’-ga-hi-ge.
SONS
1. I*-gtho"’. Wa-tsi’-da. (Meaning obscure.)
2. Ksho"’-ga. Ni’-wa-the, Life-giver. Refers to the office of the
gens to give the word that a captive shall live and not be killed.
3. Ka’-zhi®-ga. Mo®/-cga-no™-pa-i. (Meaning obscure.)
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 147
DAUGHTERS
1. Mi’-na. Xi-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle.
2. Wi’-he. Mo?’-ci-tse-xi, Sacred-arrowshaft.
3. A-ci®’-ga. Mo™zho"’-dsi-i-ta. (Meaning obscure.)
OTHER NAMES
MALE
A’-hiu-zhi"-ga, Little-wings. Husband of E-no*’-do"-a-bi of the
Ho™ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
A’-hiu-zhi®-ea. Son of O-tho’-xa-wa-the and Xu-tha’-da-wi?.
Btho’-ga-hi-ge, Chief-of-all. Refers to the sacred character of the
position of the hereditary chief chosen from this gens to represent
the Tsi’-zhu tribal division. Husband of Wa’-dsi-u-hi-zhi of the
Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Ga-hi’-ge-to”, Standing-chief. Refers to the position of the heredi-
tary chief of the Tsi’-zhu tribal division.
Ga-hi’-ge-to™. Son of Mi-da’-i"-ga and Do’-a-bi.
Ga-hi’-ge-to". Son of Pi-ci’ and Co*-¢i’-gthe.
Ga-hi’-ge-to"-ga, Big-chief. Refers to the high position of the
hereditary chief of the Tsi’-zhu tribal division. Husband of
I*’-be-zho"-ka-wi" of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Gthe-do’’-mo"-ce, Iron-hawk. Husband of Mi’-tse-xi of the Ho™
T-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Gthe-do®’-zhi"-ga, Little-hawk. Son of Gthe-do®’-wi" of the Ni’-ka-
wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Gthe-mo’’-zhi®-ga. (Meaning obscure.) Young Claremore. Hus-
band of Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba of the Mi-k’i"” gens.
Ha-xi"-u’-mi-zhe. (Not a gentile name.) Husband of Ho*-be’-
do-ka of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho”-ba-tha-gthi", Peaceful-day. Refers to the office of the gens as
Peacemaker. (Used in the I"-shta’-co"-da gens of the Omaha
tribe as a woman’s name.) Son of Mo”’-ce-no®-p’1".
Ho-wa’-ca-e. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Ni’-ka-a-¢a of the
Tho’-xe gens.
Ka’-xe-tho"-ba, Two-crows. The significance of this name is lost.
(In the Ho®’-ga gens of the Omaha tribe refers to the feathers of
two crows used in making the staff of authority in the buffalo
hunt.)
Mi-da’-i"-ga, Playful-sun. Refers to the sun as one of the symbols
of this gens. Husband of Mo"’-¢i-tse-xi of the Mi-k’i" gens.
Mi-da’-i"-ga. Husband of Do*’-a-bi of the Tho’-xe gens.
Mo*’-ca-no"-pa-i®, Dreaded-arrow-shaft. Son of Pa-ho"-gthe-ga-
xthi.
Mo”’-ce-no®-p’i", Iron-necklace.
148 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Mo"’-ce-no®-p’i", Also Tsi’-zhu-wa-da-i"-ga, Playful Tsi-zhu.
Husband of Ho®’-ga-wi" of the O’-po” gens.
Mo" -ha-u-gthi", Sits-under-a-bank. Husband of Mi®-chu’-xa-ge
of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Mo?-zho®-a’-ki-da, Watches-over-the-land. Husband of Ho?-be’-
do-ka of the Po™’-ka-wa-shta-ge gens.
Mo?-sho®-a/-shi"-e, Travels-over-the-land. Son of Ga-hi’-ge-to® and
I’’-be zho®-ka-wi?.
Mo?-to’-e. The-earth.
Ni-’wa-the, Giver-of-life. Refers to the authority of this gens to
permit captives to live.
Ni’-wa-the. Son of Mo®-zho®-a’-ki-da and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Ni/-wa-the. Son of Gthe-mo”’-zhin-ga and Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba.
Ni/-wa-the. Husband of I*’-be-zho"-ka of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Ni/-wa-the. Son of O-tho’-xa-wa-the and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
No"-be’-ci, Yellow-hands. Refers to the yellow feet of the eagle,
one of the life symbols of this gens. Son of Btho-ga-hi-ge.
No®-be’-ci. Son of Mo®-zho®-a’-ki-da and Ho™-be’-do-ka.
No®-be’-ci. Son of Ha-xi®-u’-mi-zhe and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
O-ki’-ca. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Mi’-tse-xi-ho™-ga of the
Ho?’-ga U-ta-no®-dsi gens.
O-pa’-sho-e. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Wa-to?-i’-ga-e of the
Po"-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
O-tho’-xa-wa-the. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Xu-tha’-da-
wi" of the Mi-k’1" gens.
Pa’-ba-wa-xo", Head-cutter. Refers to the custom of cutting off
the heads of the enemy. Son of O-pa’-sho-e and Wa-to"i’-ga-e.
Pa-’ba-wa-xo". Son of Ni-ka’-shi-e of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Pa’-ba-wa-xo". Son of Mo?’-ce-no"-p’i".
Pa’-ba-wa-xo". Son of Pi-ci’ and Co"-ci’-gthe.
Pa’-ba-wa-xo". Son of Mo*-zho?-a’-ki-da and Ho-be’-do-ka.
Pa’-ha-wa-xo". Son of Wa-ce’-to-zhi"-ga. (Louis Pryor.)
Pa’-ba-wa-xo". Son of Gthe-do’’-mo®-ce and Mi’-tse-xi.
Pa-hiu’-cka, White-hair. (In the Ho®’-ga gens of the Omaha tribe
and refers to the sacred white buffalo.) Husband of Mi’-do?-a
bi of the Mi-k’i" gens.
Pi’-ci, Acorn-of-the-red-oak. Refers to the mythical story of the
eagle causing the acorns to drop down in showers as he alighted
on a red oak when he came down from the sky. Husband of
Co®-ci’-gthe of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Sho®’-ge-mo?-i", Walking-dog. (War name.) This man belonged to
the Ba’-po subgens of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens. This subgens
had the office of making the stem for the peace pipe. The stem
was made from the eldér tree, which was called ba-po, popper,
because boys made popguns out of this tree. Ba’-po-zhi"-ga,
Little-ba-po, is one of the child names of this gens. Husband of
Wa-tse’-wi? of the Mi-k’1™ gens.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 149
Tho"-ba’-zhi. (Meaning obscure.) Son of Tho®’-dse-wa-hi.
Tho®’-dse-wa-hi, Bone-heart.
To"’-wo?-ga-xe, Village-maker. (In Mo?-i"-ka-ga-xe gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Husband of Co*-ci’-gthe of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
To®-wo’-i-hi, Arrives-at-the-village. Son of Ni’-wa-the.
To®-wo"-i-hi. Husband of Tse-co"-wi" of the Tho’-xe gens.
To’-thi-xtho-dse, Potato-peeler. Husband of Pa’-xpi-co™-dse of the
Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ts’e-mo”-i", Walks-in-death. Son of Wa-thi’-gtho"-thi™-ge.
Tsi’-zhu-ga-hi-ge, Tsi-zhu-chief. Son of Wa-ce’-to®-zhi"-ga and
Xu-tha-da-wi'.
Tsi’-zhu"-ho"-ga, Sacred-Tsi-zhu. Refers to the sacred character of
the office of the gens. Husband of Gthe-do’-co"-wi" of the
Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
Tsi’-zhu-zhi®-ga, Young-Tsi-zhu. Husband of Tse’-mi-tse-xi of the
Tho’-xe gens.
Tsi’-zhu-zhi*-ga. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Wa-ce’-to™-zhi-"ga. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Xu-tha’-da-
wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no? gens.
Wa-ce’-to™-zhi*-ga. (Louis Pryor.)
Wa-ko"’-da-i-e, One-who-saw-wa-ko"-da. Son of Wa-thi’-gtho?-
thi®-ge.
Wa-ko”’-da-i-e. Son of Pi-¢i’ and Co?-ci’-gthe.
Wa-ko"-da-i-e. Son of Mo?-zho-a’-ki-da and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Wa-ko"™-da-i-e. Son of Mi-da’-i"-ga and Do®’-a-bi.
Wa-ko’’-da-i-e. Son of O-tho’-xa-wa-the and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
Wa-ni’-e-to", Giver-of-life. Refers to the office of this gens as a
peace-maker. Son of Mi-da-’i®-ga and Mo”’-ci-tse-xi.
Wa-ni’-e-to". Son of Gthe-do"’-wi? of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens.
Wa-ni’-e-to®. Son of Ha-xi?-u’-mi-zhe and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Wa-ni’-e-to". Husband of Wa’-ko"-ca-mo™-i" of the Po®’-ka Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Wa-stse’-e-do", Good-doctor. Refers to the practice of the people
of bringing their sick to some member of this gens to be fed cere-
monially so that they may get well. Son of Pa-ho"’-gthe-ga-xthi
and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
Wa-stse’-e-do". Son of A-hiu’-zhi®-e and E-no®’-do?-a-bi.
Wa-stse’-e-do". Son of Btho’-ga-hi-ge.
Wa-stse’-e-do". Husband of Wa-xthe’-tho™ba of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-no®” gens.
Wa-stse’-e-do™. Son of Tsi’-zhu-ho"-ga.
Waz-stse’-e-do®. Son of Mo®-zho®-a’-ki-da and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Wa-stse’-e-do". Son of No®-be’-gi and Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi.
150 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 43
Waz-stse’-e-do®. Son of Ha-xi?-u’-mi-zhe and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Wa-stse’-e-do". Son of To’-thi-xtho-dse and Pa’-xpi-co™-dse.
Wa-stse’-e-do™. Son of Mo®’-ce-no®-p’i? and Ho®’-ga-wi?.
Wa-thi’-gtho"-thi™-ge, No-mind. (Not Ni-ki-e.) (In Mo?’-thi?-
ka-ga-xe gens of the Omaha tribe.) Also Ha’-ba-zhu-dse, Red-
corn, a name which refers to a life symbol of the gens. Husband
of Wa-ko"’-da-hi-tho™-be of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Wa/’-thu-xa-ge, Clutches-them-till-they-cry. Refers to the attack of
the eagle on its prey. Husband of Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi of the
Ho"’-ga gens.
Wa-zhi’-ga-cga-be, Black-bird. (In the Mo?-i®’-ka-ga-xe gens of
the Omaha tribe.) Husband of Do”’-a-bi of the Tho’-xe gens.
Wa-zhi"’-ga-hi", Bird-feathers. Refers to the eagle, one of the life
symbols of the gens. Son of Sho®’-ge-mo™-i".
Xu-tha’-ts’a-ge, Aged-eagle. Refers to the eagle as a symbol of
long life. Son of Tsi-zhu-ho?-ga and Gthe-do™-c¢co"-wi?.
Xu-tha’-ts’a-ge. Son of Gthe-do®’-wi" of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens.
Xu-tha’-zhu-dse, Red eagle. Refers to the life symbol of the gens.
Xu-tha’-zhu-dse. Son of Pi-ci’ and Con-¢i’-gthe.
Xu-tha’-zhu-dse. Husband of Ho"’-ga-wi" of the I’-ba-tse gens.
FEMALE
Mary Cox. Daughter of A-hiu’-zhi"-e and E-no*’-do?-a-bi.
E-no™-do®-a-bi, One-only-seen-by-all. Refers to the sun, one of
the life symbols of the gens. Daughter of Tsi’-zhu-ho™-ga and
Gthe-do"’-¢o"-wi?.
E-no”’-do"-a-bi. Daughter of No*-be-’¢i and Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi.
E-no’’-do"-a-bi. Daughter of Gthe-do"’-mo®-ge and Mi’-tse-xi.
E-no"’-do®-a-bi. Daughter of O-tho’-xa-wa-the and Xu-tha’-da-
wi".
Gthe-do™-wi", Hawk-woman. (Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi name.) Daugh-
ter of Pa’-hiu-cka and Mi’-do"-a-bi. (In Mo”’-thi"-ka-ga-xe
gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Gthe-do®’-wi?. Daughter of Ni’-ka-zhu-e of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Hi’-ga-mo?-ge, Eagle-down. Refers to the use of the eagle down in
the tribal ceremonies.
Hi’-ga-mo"-ge. Daughter of Mi-da’-i"-ga and Do®’-a-bi.
Hi’-ga-mo"-ge. Daughter of O-tho’-xa-wa-the and Xu-tha’-da-
wi".
Hi®’-i-ki-a-bi, Eagle-down. Refers to the eagle, a symbol of long life.
Wife of Gthi’-kshe of the Mi-k’i" gens.
Hi*’-i-ki-a-bi. Daughter of Mi-da’-1"-ga and Mo"’¢i-tse-x1.
LA FLESCHE]
Hi"’-i-ki-a-bi.
xe-a-gthe.
Hi’-i-ki-a-bi.
Hi"’-i-ki-a-bi.
Hi”’-i-ki-a-bi.
Hi?’-i-ki-a-bi.
gens.
Hi"’-i-ki-a-bi.
gens.
I’/-ga-mo®-ge, same as Hi’-ga-mo"-ge.
Mi’-do®-a-bi.
]’-ga-mo*-ge.
CHILD-NAMING RITE 151
Granddaughter of Wa-ko?’-da-hi-o®-be, wife of Mo-
Daughter of Tsi’-zhu-ho"-ga and Gthe-do®’-co"-wi".
Wife of Tse-do’-a-to"-ga of the Tho’-xe gens.
Daughter of Mi-da-i"-ga and Do?’-a-bi.
Wife of Wa-ko®’-da-tsi-e of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
Wife of Xu-tha’-wa-to"-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no®
Daughter of Pa-hiu’-cka and
Wife of John Lookout of the Ho*’-ga gens.
J’-ni-a-bi, Protector.
Refers to the duty of this gens to protect those
who flee to the house of refuge, in the keeping of this gens, for pro-
tection.
Daughter of Pa-ho™-ga-ga-xthi and Xu-tha’-da-wi?.
J’-ni-a-bi, Annie Daniels.
T’-ni-a-bi.
I’-ni-a-bi.
T’-ni-a-bi.
T’-ni-a-bi.
Mo*’-ci-tse-xi,
Daughter of Btho’-ga-hi-ge.
Daughter of Mi-da’-i"-ga and Do?’-a-bi.
Wife of A’-hiu-cka of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Daughter of Xu-tha’-zhu-dse and Ho®’-ga-wi?.
Sacred-arrow-shaft. Wife of Mo*-shi-ta-mo?-i".
(This is an I*-¢tho”’-ga name.)
Mo*’-¢i-tse-xi.
Mo"’-¢i-tse-xi.
gens.
Mo®’-ci-tse-x1.
Mo*’-ci-tse-x1.
Mo*’-ci-tse-xi.
gens.
Mo?’-ci-tse-xi.
Mo*’-zho®-dsi-i-ta.
Co®-ci-gthe.
Mo?-zho"’-dsi-i-ta.
da-wi".
Mo?*-zho"’-dsi-i-ta.
shta-ge.
Mo*-zho®’-dsi-i-ta.
Pa-hiu’-thi-sho?.
ki-da.
Wa-¢a’-a-ba.
Wa-ca’-be-wi",
(Meaning obscure.)
Wife of Wa-sho’-she of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Wife of Gi’-thi-ko™-bi of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge
Daughter of Mo"’-ce-no®-p’1".
Wife of Ho’’-mo"-ca of the O’-po® gens.
Wife of O-tha’-ha-mo™-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no”
Daughter of O-ki’-ea and Mi-tse’-xi-ho"-ga.
Born-on-the-earth. Daughter of Pi-¢i’
and
Daughter of Wa-ce’-to"-zhi"-ga and Xu-tha’-
Wife of Wa-zhi®’-wa-xa of the Po®’-ka Wa-
Wife of Co™-dse-u’-gthi® or We’-1"-ga-xe.
(Meaning obscure.) Daughter of Mo"-zho?-a’-
Daughter of Mo®’-ce-no?-p’i”.
Black-bear-woman. Daughter of No®-be’-ci and
Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi.
Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge, Woman-chief.
Wa-k’o’-ga-hi-ge.
gens.
(Not a gentile name.)
Wife of Xu-tha/-xtsi of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge
152 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Daisy Ware. Daughter of Ha-xi"-u’-mi-zhe and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Wa-zha’-xe-i" (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Tse-do’-ga-i"-dse of the
Tse-do’-ga-i"-dse gens.
Wa-zha’-xe-i". Wife of Mi’-she-tsi-the of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle-woman. Daughter of Pa-hiu’-cka and
Mi’-do®-a-bi.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Go®-dse’-ko"-ha of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Wa-xthi’-zhi of the I"-gtho®’-ga gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wit. Wife of No®’-ka-to-ho of the Ni/-ka-wa-ko®-da-gi
gens. (Daughter of Sho®’-ge-mo?-i".)
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Po"’-ka-zhi?-ga of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Ho-wa’-¢a-e and Ni’-ka-a-¢a.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Daughter of To’’-wo"-ga-xe and Co"-ci’-gthe.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Daughter of No®’-ko"-ce-wi" of the Ho”’-ga gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Ni’-wa-the.
Xu-tha’-da-wi", Augustine Crow.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Ni’-ka-wa-da-i"-ga of the Mi-k’i” gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Mo®-zho?-a’-ki-da and Ho®-be’-do-ka.
Xu-tha’-da-wi?. Daughter of Mi-da’-i"-ga and Do"’-a-bi.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Ha-xi"-u’mi-zhe and Ho?-be’-do-ka.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Wa-ni’-e-to" and Wa’-ko"-ca-mo"-i?.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Daughter of Ni’-wa-the and I"’-be-zho*-ka.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Wife of Ko’-zhi-ci-gthe of the Pot’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Tho®’-dse-to?-ga of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Daughter of To’-thi-xtho-dse and Pa’-xpi-co™-dse.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of Ga-hi’-ge-no™-zhi" of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Wife of A’-ki-da-zhi"-ga of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Tsn-po’-Gca IX-psr GENS
MALE
Ho"-ga-ha-bi, Taken-for-a-Ho"’-ga. Refers to a mythical story in
which it is said that the Wa-zha’-zhe mistook the Tsi’-zhu for the
Ho”’-ga on their first meeting.
Ho’’-ga-ha-bi. Son of Tse-do’-ga-i"-dse and Wa-zha’-xe-i".
Tse-do’-ga-i"-dse, Buffalo-bull-face. Refers to the description given
by the tribal messenger of the first buffalo he found. Husband of
Wa-zha’-xe-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-pa-u’-thi"-ga, Holder-of-the-buffalo-head. Refers to the butcher-
ing of the first buffalo found.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 153
Wa’-ki-a-shke, Tied-together. Refers to the tying of two pieces of
meat by the hunter for convenience of carrying.
Wa-to-ge’, Active. Husband of I’-ni-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Wa-zha’-a-ki-pa, Met-the-Wa-zha’-zhe. Son of Wa-to-ge’ and
I’-ni-a-bi.
Xu-tha’-wa-ko"-da, Mysterious-eagle. Son of Ho™-be’-do-ka of the
Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
FEMALE
Gia’-co"-wi". (Meaning obscure.) Daughter of Ho™-be’-do-ka of
the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle-woman. Daughter of Ho®-be’-do-ka of
the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi". Daughter of Tse-do’-ga-i"-dse and Wa-zha’-xe-i".
Tse THoX’-Ka GENS
(Only one of this gens survives)
Tse’-mi-tse-xi, Sacred-buffalo-woman. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of
the Omaha tribe.) Wife of Xu-tha’-pa of the Ho"’-ga gens.
M1-K’1X’ Gens
Special kinship terms and personal names of the first three sons
and the first three daughters in a family of the Mi-k’i’, Sun-carrier
gens, as given by E-hiu’-gthe, a member of the gens.
SONS
I*-gtho”’. Ho®’-ga-ha-bi, Mistaken-for-a-Ho’’-ga.
Ksho"-ga. Gthe-do"’-ga-xe, Hawk-maker.
Ka’-zhi®-ga. Mi’-hi-the, Sun-down; also, Mi’-hi-the-zhi"-ga,
Little-sun-down.
whore
DAUGHTERS
Mi’-na. Xu-tha’-da-wi®, Good-eagle-woman.
Wi’-he. Mi’-do®-a-bi, Sun-that-is-looked-at.
Ci’-ge or A-ci-ga. Mi-k’i?’-wi", Mi-k’1"’-woman.
WOnwre
OTHER NAMES
MALE
George. Son of Mi’-hi-the and Wa-ko"’-da-tho®-be.
Gthe-do"-a-xe, Hawk-maker.
Gthe-do"’-wa-ko", Mystery-hawk. Son of I’-to"-mo®-i" and Wa-to"-
1’-Ga-e.
Gthi’-kshe, The returned. Refers to the new moon. Husband of
Hi’’-i-ki-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
19078°—28-, 11
154 THE OSAGE TRIBE [pTH. ANN. 43
Ho”’-ga-ha-bi, Mistaken-for-a-Ho”’-ga.
Ho”’-ga-ha-bi. Son of Mi-ka’-k’e-zhi"-ga and Mo?’-btho™-ba.
Ho"’-ga-ha-bi. Son of Mi’-hi-the and Wa-ko®’-da-hi-tho?-be.
Ho”’-ga-ha-bi. Son of Mi-tho-to"’-mo"-i"-zhi"-ga and Pa-hiu’-e-ce.
Ho”’-i-ka-zhi. (Meaning obscure.) Son of Mi-ka’-k’e-zhi"-ga and
Mo"-btho®-ba.
I’-gi-a-ba-zhi, Lost. Refers to the waning of the moon. Son of
I’-to"-mo™-i" and Wa-to”’-i-¢a-e.
I’-to"-mo"-i". (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Wa-to"’-i-ga-e of
the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
John. Son of Mi’-hi-the and Wa-ko®’-da-hi-tho®-be.
Mi’-hi-the, Sunset. Refers to the sun, one of the life symbols of this
gens. Husband of Wa-ko®’-da-hi-tho™-be of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no®
gens.
Mi-ka’-k’e-zhi®-ga, Little-star. Husband of Mo?’-btho®-ba of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gens.
Mi-k’i®’-wa-da-i?-ga, | Playful-Mi-k’i". Husband of Wa-xthe’-
tho®-ba of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Mi-k’i®’-wa-da-i"-ga. Also E-hiu-gthe, Elm-creek, given to him in
honor of his father, who was killed in battle on a creek by that
name. Also Be-ga-xa-zhi, Never-beaten. Husband of Xu-tha’-
da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Mi-tho-to’’-mo?-i"-zhi"-ga, Young-mid-day. Refers to the sun, one
of the life symbols of this gens. Husband of Pa-hiu’-e-ce.
To'-i"-kshe, Moon-returned-to-sight. Refers to the new moon.
Son of Mi-k’i"-wa-da-i"-ga and Wa-xthe-tho"-ba.
Wa-zha’-a-ki-pa, Met-the-Wa-zha’-zhe. Refers to the first meeting
of the Tsi’-zhu and the Wa-zha’-zhe divisions. Son of Mi-tho’-
to™-mo?-i? and Wa-to™-1-ca-e.
Wa-zhi"-ga-tha-gthi®, Good-bird.
Wa’-zho"-gi-the, Met-them-by-chance. (Hall Good.)
Zho®-1’-ni-tha, Clings-to-tree-for-safety. Also Ka’-xe-a-gtho", Crow-
head-dress.
FEMALE
Do"’-a-bi, Looked-upon. Refers to the sun, one of the life symbols
of the gens. Daughter of I’-to"-mo"-1" and Wa-to"’-i-ga-e.
Mi’-do"-a-bi, Sun-looked-upon. Wife of Pa-hiu’-cka of the Tsi’zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Mi’-do®-a-bi. Daughter of Mi-k’i"’-wa-da-i"-ga and Wa-xthe’-
tho™-ba.
Mi’-ga-sho®-i", Sun-that-travels. (In the Ho®’-ga gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Daughter of Mi-tho’-to"-mo™-i" and Wa-to"’-i-¢a-e.
Mo’’-ci-tse-xi, Sacred-arrow-shaft.
Mo"’-ci-tse-xi. Wife of Mi-da’-i*-ga of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
~
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 155
Ni’-ka, Person. Wife of Kshi’-zhi of the Ho"’-ga‘gens.
Wa’-tse-wi®, Star-woman. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Wife of Sho®-ge-mo*-i" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-xthe’-tho™-ba, Two-standards. Wife of Gthe-mo”’-zhi"-ga of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi", Good-eagle-woman. Wife of Mo"-ge-ga-be of the
O’-po® gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi®. Wife of I*-shta’-mo*-ce of the I*-gtho"’-ga gens.
Xu-tha’-da-wi. Wife of O-tho’-xa-wa-the of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge.
Ho’ [-n1-KA-sSuI-GA (NIGHT-PEOPLE)
Special kinship terms and personal names of the first three sons and
the first three daughters in a fanily of the Ho™ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens, as
given by Ni’-ka-tho"-ba, a member of the gens.
SONS
1. I™-gtho™”. Ho*-mo?-i", Moves-in-the-night.
Kshon’-ga. Tsi’-zhu-u-thu-ha-ge, Last-in-the-order-of-the-Tsi’-
zhu.
3. Ka’-zhi®-ga. Ho'ga-i-ta-zhi, Not-of-the-Ho™-ga. Also Ho?’-ba-
hiu, Day-comes.
bo
DAUGHTERS
_
Mi’-na. Mji’-tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite.
2. Wi’-he. Ho?-wa’-k’u, Night-woman.
3. Ci’-ge or A-gi®’-ga, E-no*’-do®-a-bi, Only-one-that-is-seen.
OTHER NAMES
Mae
Cit’-dse-thi"-ge, No-tail. Refers to the red black bear, the symbol
of the Black bear gens of the Tsi’-zhu division. (Hayes Little-
bear.)
Ho”’-ba-hiu, Day-comes. Refers to the passing of night, the life:
symbol of this gens. Husband of Ho®-be’-do-ka of the Ta’ I-ni-
ka-shi-ga gens.
Ho"-ba-hiu. Husband of Co®-ci’-gthe of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Ho’ -ga-a-ka-zhi. (Meaning obscure.) Son of Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-
xi, wife of No®-be-ci.
Ho" -ga-a-ka-zhi. Son of Tho-ta-a-ga of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi
gens, wife of Ki’-mo®-ho® of the O’-po® gens.
Ho”’’-mo"-i", Traveling-night. (In the I®-ke’-ga-be gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Son of Ni’-ka-tho®-ba.
Ho”’-mo™-i". (Andrew Jackson.)
Ni’-ka-a-ki-ba-no", Runs-to-meet-men. Also E’-zhi-ga-xthi, Slew-
the-wrong-man. (War name.) Husband of Gthe-do®’-wi-tse-xi
of the Ni-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens.
156 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Ni’-ka-tho"-ba, Two-men.
Pe’-dse-mo”-1", Fire-walker. Refers to the finding of the red bear,
the life symbol of this gens. He was found walking in the night,
a light like that of fire shining from his breast. Husband of
We’-tsi"-thu-ga of the Ho’’-ga U-ta-no®-dsi gens.
Sho’-dse, Smoke. Refers to the duty of this gens to light the cere-
monial pipe. Son of Ni’-ka-a-ki-ba-no" and Gthe-do®-wi"-tse-xi.
We’-ga-ba-zhi. (Meaning obscure.) Son of Ni/-ka-a-ki-ba-no® and
Gthe-do®’-wi"-tse-xi.
Xo"-dse-u-mo?-i", Walks-among-cedars. Refers to the habit of the
bears. Husband of Xu-tha’-wi" of the Ho"’-ga gens.
FEMALE
E-no"’-a-bi, Only-one-seen-by-all. Refers to the sun. Wife of
A-hiu-zhi"-e of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ho”’-do"-wa-k’u, Woman-of-the-night.
Mi-do’’-be, Sees-the-sun. Daughter of Ni’-ka-a-ki-ba-no" and Mi’-
tse-xi, Mi’-na-the-favorite. (In I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Wife of Tha-ciu’-e of the I’-ba-tse gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Wife of Gthe-do”’-mo"-ce of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Daughter of Tho’-ta-a-ca of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko™-da-gi
gens, wife of Ki’-mo"-ho® of the O’-po® gens.
Mi’-tse-xi. Wife of Thi-hi’-bi of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Ni’-ka-shi-tsi-the. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Chi-zhe’-wa-the of
the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Wa-ca’-be-wi", Black-bear-woman. Refers to the symbol of the
Black Bear gens of the Tsi’-zhu division. (Lucy H. Bangs.)
The following are special kinship terms and personal names of the
first three sons and the first three daughters in a family of this gens,
as given by Ho®-mo?-i", a member. This man told the following
story of the origin of this gens: 1
When the Ho” [-ni-ka-shi-ga, People of the Night, were made they
had fire. They wandered about upon the earth, but saw no people.
At the beginning of day, when night had passed, they suddenly came
upon the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no®, a warlike people. The Ho” I-ni-ka-shi-ga
offered their services to these strangers, which were accepted. The
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no" gave to the Ho™ I-ni-ka-shi-ga the office of Sho’-ka,
which carried with it the duty of filling the ceremonial pipe and light-
ing it with the mystic fire of the People of the Night.
SONS
1. I"-gtho". Ho?’-mo?-i", Traveling-night.
2. Ksho?’-ga’. Sho’-dse, Smoke. Referring to the sacred fire.
3. Ka’-zhi"-ga. Ta-ko®’-i"-ge, No-sinews. The black bear are said
to have no sinew.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 157
DAUGHTERS
. Mi’-na. Mi’-na-the-favorite.
Wa-ca’-be-wi®, Black-bear-woman.
Ci’-ge. E-no"-do"-a-bi, Seen-by-all. All living creatures see
the sun.
(EE ST a
OTHER NAMES
MALE
Ci-gthe’-wa-thi-ta, Crosses-trail. The bear in his wanderings crosses
the trails of other animals.
Ci-the’-dse-xo-dse, Gray-heels.
Da’-ko?-mo"-1", Walks-as-in-fire-light.
Ho"’-ga-thi-ka-zhi. (Meaning obscure.)
Ho*-gthi’, Night-has-returned.
Mo?-ko®’, Medicine.
O-ko"’-dsi-wa-shko", Struggles-by-himself. No one to help him
fight.
O-pa’-stse-dse, Long-body.
Pa-ci’, Brown-nose.
Sha’-ge-btha-cka, Flat-hands.
Tho’-to®-gthi-no®-zhi", Stands-upright.
Wa-¢a’-e-wa-ko"-da-gi, Mysterious-bear.
Wa-¢a’-e-zhi"-ga, Little-bear.
Wa-shi"’-shto"-ga, Soft-fat.
Wa-xa’-xa-do", Shagey-hair.
Xo’-ga-hi"-e-go", Hair-like-badger’s.
FEMALE
Ho*-wa’-k’u, Night-woman.
Mi’-zho"-cka. (Meaning obscure.)
Ni’-ka-shi-tsi-the, Person-passes-by.
Wa-xthe’-tho"-ba, Two-standards.
N1i/-Ka-Wa-kON-pa-Gi (MEN or MystTERY)
Special kinship terms and personal names of the first three sons and
first three daughters in a family of this gens. The thunder is the
life symbol of this gens.
SONS
1. I-gtho"’. Gthe-do"’-tse-ga, New-hawk. Refers to the reconse-
cration of the hawk, the symbol of courage of the warrior. Also
Gthe-do®-xo-e, Gray-hawk. Refers to the grayish appearance
of the hawk when it is painted afresh at a ceremony.
2. Ksho’’-ga. Gthe-do"-cka, White-hawk. Refers to the whitish
appearance of the hawk when freshly painted.
158 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
3. Ka’-zhi"-ga. Ni-u"’-tsi-gthe, Rumbling-in-the-distance. Refers
to the low rumbling of the thunder in an approaching storm.
Also Hu’-to®-mo®-i", Roars-as-he-comes.
DAUGHTERS
1. Mi’-na. Gthe-do’-mi-tse-ga, New-hawk-woman. Refers to the
reconsecration of the symbolic hawk.
2. Wi’-he. Tho’-ta-a-ga. (Meaning obscure.)
3. Ci’-ge. Gthe-do®’-wit-zhi"-ga, Little-hawk-woman. Refers to
the smallest of the hawks.
OTHER NAMES
Mate
A’-gthi-he-the, Returns-to-his-place. Refers to the returning of the
symbolic hawk to its place after a ceremony.
A’-ki-da-ga-hi-ge, Chief-protector. Title of one of the protectors of
the chiefs.
Ba’-ciu-to"-ga, Big-hail.
Ce’-ca-gi-da, Returns-trotting.
Gthe-do’-cka, White-hawk. (Ksho®-ga name.) Son of No?’-ka-
to-ho and Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Gthe-do”-gka. Husband of Mi’-ga-sho"-i" of the Po"’-ka Wa-
shta-ge gens.
Gthe-do’-cgka. Son of Gthe-do®’-cka and Mi’-ga-sho"-i".
Gthe-do’-¢gka. Son of We-to?’-ha-i"-ga and Ho"-be’-do-ka.
Gthe-do"’-gka. Son of No?’-pe-wa-the and Ho?’-ga-wi".
Gthe-do?’-tse-ga, New-hawk. (["-gtho"’ name.)
Gthe-do"’-tsi-e, Hawk-passing-by. Refers to a hawk attacking its
prey. Son of To’’-wo?-ga-she and Xu-tha’-da-wi".
Gthi-no"’-zhi", Returns-and-stands. Refers to the return of the
war-hawk after a suecessful attack upon the enemy.
Ixe-no®’-xu-xe, Cracks-the-turtle-with-his-foot.
Ke’-tha-mo®-i", Clear-day-approaching. Refers to the oncoming of
the clear sky after a thunderstorm.
Iki-xi’-tha-ba-zhi, Self-confident. Refers to the warlike spirit of this
gens.
Mi-ka’-wa-da-i"-ga, Playful-raccoon.
Mi-ka’-zhi"-ga, Little-raccoon.
Mi-tsiu’-zhi"-ga, Little-grizzly-bear.
Mo"-ge’-ci, Yellow-breast. A swallow. A bird that is closely asso-
ciated with thunderstorms.
Mo?-xpi’-mo"-i", Traveling-cloud. (In the I?-shta’-go"-da gens of
the Omaha tribe.)
Ni-zhiu’-ca-ge, Violent-rain.
Ni-zhiu’-mo®-i", Traveling-rain.
Ni-zhiu’-to™-ga, Big-rain.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 159
No*’-ka-to-ho, Blue-back. Refers to the sacred hawk whose back
is painted blue. (In the I"-gthe’-zhi-de gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Also, Mi-ka’-zhi"-ga. Refers to the raccoon-skin robe of this
gens used in ceremonies. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
No'-pe-wa-the, Fear-inspiring. Refers to the fear inspired by the
thunder. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha tribe.) Hus-
band of Ho®-ga-wi" of the O’-po® gens.
O-pa’-the-e. (Meaning obscure.) Saucy-calf thinks it is a valor
name.
Pa-thi®’-wa-xpa-thi*®, Poor-Pawnee. Refers to the killing of a half-
starved Pawnee by an Osage.
Pratt, Charles. Son of No"’-pe-wa-the and Ho"-ga-wi?.
Sha’-wa-bi", Bloody-hands. Refers to the talons of a hawk.
Shi-tho®’-dse-we-tsi", Strikes-with-the-knee.
To"-wo-ga-she, Taker-of-towns. This man has the office of re-
newing of the sacred hawks. Husband of Xu-tha’-da-wi" of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-no® gens.
Wa-hiu’-ga-xthi, Strikes-the-bones. Valor name.
Wa’-thu-da-ce, Crashing-sound. Refers to the thunder.
We’-to®-ha-i"-ge. (Meaning obscure.) Husband of Ho®-be’-do-ka
of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens.
Wa-xo’-be-zhi"-ga, Little-shrine. Refers to the small portable shrine
containing the hawk and other symbolic articles.
Wa-zhi?’-ni-ka, Bird-man.
Xo’-ka, Initiator. (Not gentile name.) Husband of Gtho™-zho?-ba
of the O’-po® gens.
Xo?’-dse-u-mo*-i", Dwell-among-the-cedars. The thunder and the
lightning are said to live among the cedars.
Xu-e’-gi-da, Comes-roaring. Refers to the coming of the storm
with roaring winds.
Xu-e’-no"-zhi", Stands-soughing. Refers to the murmuring of the
cedar tree as the wind passes through its branches.
Zho”’-ga-xthi, Tree-killer. Refers to the habit of the lightning of
striking trees.
Zho"’-u-thi-stse-ge, Tree-splitter. Kefers to the splitting of a tree
by lightning.
FEMALE
Gthe-do’’-go"-wi", White-hawk-woman. Refers to the white paint
put upon some of the sacred hawks. Wife of Tsi’-zhu-ho"-ga of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Gthe-do"’-mi-tse-xi, Hawk-Mi-na-the-favorite.
Gthe-do’’-mi-tse-xi. Wife of Zhi"-ga’-wa-cga of the Ho®’-ga gens.
Gthe-do"’-mi-tse-xi. Wife of Pi’-zhi-to®-ga of the Tho’-xe gens.
Gthe-do”’-mi-tse-xi. Daughter of No®’-pe-wa-the and Ho”-ga-wi?.
160 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Gthe-do"’-win, Hawk-woman. Refers to the sacred hawks. (In
the Mo” -thi"-ka-ga-xe gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Gthe-do"’-wi"-tse-xi, Hawk-Mi-na-the favorite. (In the Ta-pa’ of
the Omaha tribe.) Daughter of We-to®’-ha-i"-ga and Ho®-be’-
do-ka.
I’"’-sho"-ba. (Meaning obscure.) Daughter of Mo*’-¢i-tse-xi of
the I"-gtho"’-ga gens.
Mi"-tsiu’-xa-ge. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Mo*-ha-u-gthi" of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tho-ta’-a-ga. (Meaning obscure.) (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the
Omaha tribe.) Daughter of Wa’-ko"-ga-mo"-i" of the Pon’-ka
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tho-ta’-ta-ca. Daughter of Ki-xi’-tha-ba-zhi and Mi’-co®-i".
Tho’-ta-a-ga. Wife of Ki’-mo®-ho® of the O’-po® gens.
Wa’-dsi-u-hi-zhi. (Meaning obscure.) Wife of Btho’-ga-hi-ge of
the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
- Xo"’-dse-wi", Cedar-woman. The cedar is a tree that is closely
associated with thunder.
Xo’-ta-wi®, Blackbird-woman. The blackbird is one of the war
symbols of the Ni’-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens. Daughter of Wa’-
ko®-ca-mo"-i" of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
THOo’-xE GENS
Special kinship terms and personal names of the first three sons
and the first three daughters in a family of the Tho’-xe gens, as given
by Saucy-calf.
SONS
1. ["-gtho"’. Ko"-cge-wa-e. (Meaning obscure.)
Ksho"’-ga. Hi"-ba’-sda, Sheds-his-hair. Refers to the shedding
of hair by the buffalo. .
3. Ka’-zhi"-ga. Tse-zhi"’-ho"-ga, Sacred-calf.
bo
DAUGHTERS
1. Mina. Do?’-a-bi, Gazed-upon. Also Tho’-xe-wi", Tho’-xe-
woman.
Wi’-he. Pa-hiu’-thi-sho", Shaggy-head.
3. Ci’-ge, or A-ci?’-ga. Tse-mi’-ci, Brown-buffalo-woman. Also
Bo®-gi’-da, The-lowing-herd. Also Tse-mi’-xtsi, Real-buffalo-
woman.
tN
OTHER NAMES
MALE
A’-ga-ha-mo?-i", Walks-outside. Refers to the bulls, that are in
the habit of walking outside of the herd.
A’-ga-zho", Bushy. Refers to the bushy hair on the front legs of
the buffalo bull.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 161
A’-hi"-u-ha-zhi-hi, Red-forelegs. Refers to the reddish-brown legs
of the buffalo.
Gi-ha’, Soles. Refers to the footprints of the buffalo. (In the
Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Ci-ha’, Son of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga and Gia’-¢o"-ba.
Git’-dse-co-ta, Slender-tail. Refers to the slender tail of the buffalo.
Git’-dse-wa-ko"-da, Mystic-tail. Refers to the scalps attached to
the tail of the sacred hawk.
Git’-dse-wa-ko"-da. Son of Tse’-ce-to"-ga and Wa/-ko"-ca-mo™-1".
Cit’-dse-wa-ko"-da. Son of No®’-ba-mo?-thi" and Xu-tha’-mi-
tse-Xx1.
Cit’-dse-wa-ko"-da. Son of Mi’-ga-sho"-i", wife of Mo®’-zhi-
¢ka-k’i"-ga-xthi.
Ci"’-dse-zhi®-ga, Little-tail. Refers to the tail of the buffalo.
Ci’-to"-ga, Big-feet. Refers to the great size of the buffalo’s feet.
(In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Da’-ba-dsi®, Swollen. Refers to the wounded buffalo found dead in
a state of decomposition.
Do’-ba-mo?-thi", Walk-by-fours. Refers to the habit of the bulls of
walking by fours. (In the In-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Husband of Mi’-ho"-ga of the Tsi-’zhu Wa-no” gens.
Do’-ba-mo?-thi®. Son of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga and Gia’-go"-ba.
Fletcher, Francis. Son of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga and Mi’-¢o"-e.
Ga-dsi®’-¢thi-tho", Crosses. Refers to the hungry calf that runs in
front of its mother to stop her. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
Gthe-do®’-stse-dse, Long-hawk. Refers to the long scalp locks
attached to the sacred hawks. Son of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga and Gia’-
co"-ba.
He-ba’-to®-he, Stubby-horns. Refers to the old bull who had worn
his horns down to stumps.
Hiu’-gthe-to"-ga, Big-legs. Refers to the great size of the legs of the
buffalo bull.
Hi*-¢i’-mo*-i", Brown-hair-walker. Refers to the brown color of the
calf. Also Ci-ha, Soles.
I’-hi®-u-ba-do", Pointed-beard. Refers to the beard of the buffalo.
I’-shka-da-bi, Playful. Refers to the sport afforded the hunter by
the herds of buffalo. (In the I"-ke’-ca-be gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
I-tha’-no"-ga, Head-them-off. Refers to the heading off of the
buffalo trying to escape the hunter.
I’-wa-shko", Dependable. Valor name. A man returned from the
warpath discouraged. On approaching the village he heard the
Herald singing his praises. He went back, attacked the enemy,
and won a big victory. Also Sho™-ha-u-ki-pa-tse, Wolf-robe. He
thought a great deal of this robe, but when he attacked the enemy
he threw it away and lost it. These two names the warrior won in
this fight.
162 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 43
Ki-no’’-do", Springs-forth. Valor name. Also Tse-mo"’-gi-u-e.
(Meaning obscure.) Son of Mi’-ho"-ga of the Tsi-’zhu Wa-no”
gens.
Louis. Son of Pa-ci’-do-ba and Mi’-co?-e.
Mi"’-dse-ko", Bow-string. The bow-string is made of buffalo sinew
and is of great value to the hunter and warrior. Son of Tse-do’-
a-to™-ga and Hi"’-i-ki-a-bi.
Mo®-ga’-shu-dse or Mo"-ga’-shu-e, Dust-makers. Refers to the dust
raised by the herds of buffalo. Also Pe’-zhe-u-tha-ha, Grass-
clings-to-him. Husband of Wa-to"’-i-ca-e of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Mo™i"’-gthe-do", Walks-home. Son of Tse-do’-a-to™-ga and Hi®-i-
ki-a-bi.
Mo*-zho"’-u-ga-sho", Wanderer. Refers to the buffalo that roams
over the land.
Ni-ga’-xu-e, Koaring-waters. Refers to the waters disturbed by a
herd of buffalo crossing a stream. (In the I"-ke’-Ga-be gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
No™-ba’-mo*-thi", Two-walking. Refers to two buffalo walking side
by side. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha tribe.) Husband
of Xu-tha’-mi-tse-xi of the Ho”’-ga gens.
No"’-ka-a-ba-zha-ta, Straddles-the-back. Refers to the packing of
the buffalo meat on the back of the horse by the hunter.
No" -pe-wa-the, Fear-inspiring. This name is used by both this and
the Ni-ka-wa-ko"-da-gi gens. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
No™-zhi"’-tsi-e, Rises-suddenly. Refers to the alertness of the
buffalo.
O”’-be-cu-zhi"-ga, Small-hips. Refers to the smallness of the hips of
the buffalo.
Pa-ci-do-ba, Four-hills. Refers to the descent of a herd of buffalo
from a hilltop in four lines. (In the Ko®’-ce gens of the Omaha
tribe.) Husband of Wa-zha’-zhe-mi-tse-xi of the Ta’ I-ni-ka-shi-ga
gens.
Pa-¢i’-do-ba. Husband of Mi’-co"-e of the Ho"’-ga gens.
Pa’-ta-hi™-shku-e, Hairy-head. Refers to the hairy head of the
buffalo.
Pe’-zhe-a-tse, Grass-eater. Refers to the eating of grass by the
buffalo.
Pi’-zhi-gthi-no"-zhi", Returns-to-fight. Refers to the enraged bull
standing to fight the hunter.
Pi’-zhi-to"-ga, Big-bad-one. Refers to the big bull that is always
ready to fight. Husband of Gthe-do"’-mi-tse-xi of the Ni-’ka-wa-
ko"-da-gi gens.
Pi’-zhi-to"-ga, Husband of Mary of the O’-po® gens.
LA FLESCHE] CHILD-NAMING RITE 163
Sha’-be-no"-zhi", Stands-dark. The lone buffalo standing still
against the horizon. (In the Ho"’-ga gens of the Omaha tribe.)
The’-ce-xa-ga, Rough-tongue. The tongue of the buffalo is rough.
Thi-xa’-ba-zhi, Not-chased. Refers to the little calf the hunter
allows to escape.
Thi-xa’-bi-a-ki-zhi®, Thinks-himself-chased. Refers to the fleeing
of a buffalo even when he is not pursued by the hunter.
Tho*’-dse-to"-ga, Big-heart.
Tho’-xe-ga-hi-ge, Tho-xe-chief.
Tho’-xe-wa-ko"-da, The-mystic-Tho-xe.
Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga, Young-Tho-xe. Also Wa-to®’-i®-ki-the, Comes-to-
view. (A Mi-k’i?’ name.) Refers to the new moon. Husband of
Mi’-co"-e of the Wa-ca’-be gens.
Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga. Husband of Gia’-co"-ba of the Po™’-ka Wa-shta-ge
gens.
Tho’-xe-wa-da-i"-ga, Mischievous-Tho-xe.
Tse’-ce-to"-ga, Big-belly. Refers to the great size of the bull.
Husband of Wa’-ko"-ga-mo"-i" of the Po®’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-ci®’-dse, Buffalo-tail. (The name of a gens in the Omaha tribe.)
Tse-do’-a-mo"-i", Walking-bull.
Tse-do’-a-to"-ga, Big-bull. Husband of Hi®’-i-ki-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-do’-a-zhi"-ga, Little-bull. (In the Tse-ci"’-dse gens of the
Omaha tribe.)
Tse-do’-ga, Buffalo-bull. (In the Ho"’-ga gens of the Omaha tribe.)
Tse-mo”’-gi-the. (Meaning obscure.)
Tse-pa’-zhi®-ga, Little-buffalo-head. Husband of Wa-¢a’-be-wa-k’u
of the Wa-¢a’-be gens.
Tse’-thi-tsi, Buffalo-ribs. (In the Tha’-ta-da gens of the Omaha
tribe.)
Tse-zhi"’-ga-wa-da-i"-ga, Playful-calf. Refers to the playfulness of
the buffalo calf. Akso Xa-ge’-wa-the, Makes-them-weep. (In the
IKko"’-ce gens of the Omaha tribe.)
U-ga’-ha-xpa, Bushy-head.
U-ko"’-dsi-no"-zhi", Stands-alone. Refers to the solitary buffalo that
stands alone, apart from the herd.
U-mi’-zhe, Bedding. Refers to the use of the buffalo hide for
bedding.
U-ki’-pa-to", Rolls-himself. Refers to the rolling of the buffalo on
the ground. (In the I"-gthe’-zhi-de gens of the Omaha tribe.)
U-tha’-ga-bi, Famed. Valor name.
Wa-no"’-ge, Stampede. Refers to the stampeding of a buffalo herd.
Wa/’-stse-ge, Strip-of-meat.
Wa’-u-wi-ci, Jumper. Refers to the leaps of the buffalo when
charging on the hunter.
We’-zhi-u-gi-pi, Trench-full. Refers to the fullness of the fire trench
used in jerking meat.
164 THE OSAGE TRIBE [eTH. ANN. 43
FEMALE
Bo*-giu’-da, Lowing. Refers to the lowing of the herd as heard in
the distance.
Bo*-giu’-da, same as above. Daughter of Tse-do’-a-to"-ga, this
gens, and Hi"’i-ki-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Bo*-giu-da, same as above. Wife of Ko"’-cge-ho"-ga of the Ho"-ga
U-ta-no"-dsi gens.
Do"’-a-bi, Gazed-upon. Name applied to first daughter.
Do"-a-bi, same as above. Wife of Mi’-da-i"-ga of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
Do"-a-bi, same as above. Wife of Wa-zhi"’-ga-ca-be of the Tsi’-zhu
Wa-shta-ge gens.
I’-to"-mo"™-i", meaning uncertain. A Mi’k’i" name. Daughter of
Tho’-xe-zhi*-ga, this gens, and Mi’-¢i"-e of the Wa-ca’-be gens.
I’-to"-wo"-gtho"-bi, One-for-whom-villages-are-built. Daughter of
Tse-pa’-zhi"-ga, this gens, and Wa-¢a’-be wa-k’o of the Wa-ca-be
gens.
Kki’-o, wounded. Wife of Ni’-ka-i-ci-wa-the of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-no"
gens.
Ni’-ka-a-ga, meaning uncertain.
Ni’-ka-a-ca, wife of Ho-wa’-ca-e of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Ni’-ko"-a-ca, daughter of Tse-ce-to"-ga, this gens, and Wa/’-ko"
mo"-i" of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Pa-hiu’-thi-sho", Shaggy-head. Name of second daughter in the gens,
Pa-hiu’-thi-sho", same as above. Daughter of Pa-ci’-do-ba, this
gens, and Mi’-co"-e of the Ho®-ga gens.
Tho’-xe-wi", Tho’-xe-woman.
Tse-co"’-wi", White-buffalo-woman. Wife of To®’-wo®-i-hi of the
Tsi-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens. Appears in Ho®’-ga gens of Omaha
tribe.
Tse-co"’-wi", same as above. Daughter of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga, this
gens, and Gia’-co"-ba of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse’-ho™-ga-wi", Sacred-buffalo-woman. Daughter of Tse-do-a-
to™-ga, this gens, and Hi?’-1-ki-a-bi of the Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-i’/-ko"-tha, meaning uncertain.
Tse-mi’-¢i, Brown-buffalo-woman. Name of third daughter in gens.
Tse-mi’-ci, daughter of Hi"-¢i’-mo*-i", this gens.
Tse-mi-¢i, same as above. Daughter of Tho’-xe-zhi"-ga, this gens,
and Gia’-co"-ba of the Po"’-ka Wa-shta-ge gens.
Tse-wi’-ho"-ga, Buffalo-sacred-cow. Wife of Ho®’-ga-tha-ghti® of
the Ho®’-ga gens.
Tse-mi’-xtsi, Red-buffalo-woman. Wife of Tsi’-zhu-zhit-ga of the
Tsi’-zhu Wa-shta-ge gens.
Wa-shi"-wi", Fat-woman. Daughter of Pa-ci’-do-ba, this gens, and
Mi-co"-e of the Ho*’-ga gens.
WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE
BY
FRANK G. SPECK
The texts are published with the permission of the Division
of Anthropology, National Museum of Canada
165
ti | ; Tie £84) 4 entep ; em
T«y,
a eas [aif Ir ‘we Weatogue at (iia eed a Viger) ib
oe an / A 7
Per an’ niu ae) AD Dia rtiece Bf [aan '-90t GN 1,
ene. pe) DUN kine ot tie Ta iu, Wattage fen
MP rivec(y (Ae Ds abyy Wit at fi oN -cé-o"-we of tie Hat ga
brde-s allel tases > :
i t Layali pet Nae anes) dat fits 1! cageadany
i] poll an) @& alave Vile ou Piet t= be os. af Min {hy
Wash leave a) ,
Dia *‘om bi eaiid ne abe Wie oP Waw ki vane Me ae Tei -ahi
W fea) bust ru
naiieeinaes ~— argh BIE OA GSR
“4°%. bhi rear rivil Sti ~ tinm. wafer, til tovdtedyy « Solana bewtanione wail @ ;
é: = =>
6 bantedly ik Oneal darkly Adumet ‘Dare ite ney 0 geet _
: - (aolralsianst wth) thik
setae Weer Doak abet aT
\eersldmeevnrTé den) ccxumqerrem thy oruil heal athe
/ i. ae Porth ns cone
AWTAAT AM LAL
SANE dee il Oy eile ead aii one au rit A aces,
1p)
(ZI6L) MOONAMVM SO YSxHVAdS LSVI SHL ‘SNNLdSN SIOONVWHS
€L 3LV1d LYOd35Y IVANNY GYIHL-ALYOS
}
ADOTONHLA NVOIYAWY 40 Nvaung
WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE
By Frank G. Speck
INTRODUCTION
It is one of the laments of ethnology that the smaller tribes of the
northern coast of New England faded from the scene of history
before we were able to grasp the content of their languages and
culture. At this late day practically all have dwindled below the
power of retaining the memory of their own institutions—their link
with the past. Nevertheless, some few groups along the coast have
maintained existence in one form or another down to the present.
In regions somewhat more remote, the tribes of the Wabanaki group,
hovering within the shelter of the northeastern wilderness, success-
fully struggled through the trials of the transition period, preserved
their oral inheritance, and even, to a considerable degree, the
practices of their early culture. Here on native soil still dwell
the Penobscot and Passamaquoddy. On the western and southern
boundaries of Maine the Wabanaki bands escaped extinction only
by fleeing to Canada, where their descendants now live at the
village of St. Francis. Of the tribal names included in this group,
however, one in particular, the Wawenock, has long been reckoned
among the obsolete, though several times the suggestion had
appeared in print that the Indians residing at Becancour, Province
of Quebec, might be its survivors. In 1912 my interest in possi-
bilities of the sort culminated in the intention to follow up this
source myself. The results were extremely gratifying, for during
the winter’s visit traces were uncovered of those eternal values of
native language and tradition, which happily were still preserved
in the memory of Francois Neptune (pl. 13), one of the Wawenock
men. My object in the following pages is to present part of the
literary material obtained from him, to which I have prefixed a
sketch of the tribe’s history.
The proper name of the tribe is, however, Wali'na’kiak, ‘People of
the Bay country.”’' The term is current among the Wawenock sur-
vivors of to-day, as well as among their neighbors and former allies,
the affiliated tribes originally from southern Maine, which now
constitute the St. Francis Abenaki.
1J. A. Maurault, Histoire des Abenakis, Quebec, 1866, p. vu, gives Solinak as the native name of
Becancour, offering his idea of its meaning as ‘“‘river which makes many detours.”
19078°—28——12 169
170 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE (ETH. ANN. 43
Notwithstanding the fact that we have nowhere any definite
information on the exact boundaries of the Wawenock in their old
home, it is evident from Penobscot sources that the Wawenock ter-
ritory began where the Penobscot family claims” ended, a short
distance west of the waters of Penobscot Bay. This would give the
Wawenock the environs of St. George’s Harbor and River, and all
the intervening coast as far as the mouth of Kennebec River, since
the latter is mentioned as their western boundary. A difficulty con-
fronts us, however, when we try to determine how far northward into
the interior the Wawenock claims extended. From geographical
considerations, since the region which is typical of the coast extends
inland about 30 or 40 miles, we might infer that the hunting grounds
of the tribe extended at least as far. The additional fact that the
Penobscot territory spread out westward as we go toward the interior,
and that they knew the Norridgewock and Aroosaguntacook as their
immediate western neighbors, would then leave the general tract
from the headwaters of St. Georges, Medomac, Damariscotta and
Sheepscot Rivers and Togus Stream, all east of the Kennebec River,
and southward to the coast, to be regarded as Wawenock territory.
The Wawenock have been already definitely assigned to the Sheep-
scot and Pemaquid,’ which would seem to have been at about the
center of their habitat. That their territory was also known as
Sagadahock (Sankede’tak, Penobscot) is shown by a statement giving
different local names to parts of the Kennebec River—names which
corresponded more or less to the names of local bands—as follows:
“Aransoak, Orantsoak,t Kennebec River from the lake (Moosehead
Lake) to Norridgewock. Below Skowhegan it was called Canebas or
Kenebas * to Merrymeeting Bay, thence to the sea, Sagadahock.”’ °
2 These were the Penobscot families of Mitchell (Lobster) and Susup (Crab), who held the immediate
shores and surroundings of Penobscot Bay.
3 Maine Historical Society Collections, Vol. IV, p. 96, 1858. “The Abnaquies occupied country between
Penobscot Bay and Piscataquis River and were divided into four principal tribes, viz, (1) the Sokokis on
the Saco River, (2) the Anasagunticook on the Androscoggin, (3) the Carribas or Kenabes on the Kennebec,
(4) the Wawenocks on the Sheepscot, Pemaquid, etc.”
4 Norridgewock, Nale’djowak, ‘“‘ Rapids up the river” (Penobscot); Nawedzwa’ki (St. Francis Abenaki) ;
Nawi’‘djawak (Malecite), Nashwaak River, N. B.; and alsowhat may be evidently another form of the
name Newichewanock in New Hampshire. The proper name for the bandis Naladjwa’kiak (Penobscot),
Nawadzowakia’k (St. Francis). A. E. Kendall (Travels through the Northern Partsof the United States
in 1807-8, Vol. III, N. Y., 1809) gives the term as “‘ Nanrantawacs’’ (p. 52), which he says implies “‘still
water between two places at which the current is rapid.’ J. D. Prince (Some Passamaquoddy Docu-
ments, Annals New York Academy of Science, XI, no. 15, 1898, p. 376) translates nanrantsouack as
“stretch of still water.”
5 Kwuni'begw ‘Long water’ (Penobscot). The form of the proper name would be Kwun‘i'begwiak
“people of the long water,’ but we do not encounter this in the documents. Maurault (op. cit., p.1v and
89) has an interesting and very probable opinion on this term. He suggests as an origin Kanibesek, “qui
conduit au lac,’ chaque année au temps de la grande chasse de l’hiver les Canibas se rendaient en grande
nombre au “lac A loriginal”” (Moosehead Lake) en suivant la rivitre Kénébec. C’est pour cela qu’ils
appelaient cette rivicre ‘le chemin qui conduit au lac.”
6 Sankade’tak, ‘where the river flows out’? (Penobscot). See also Father Rasles (Jesuit Relations,
1716-27, vol. 67, p. 197), Sankderank. Kendall, who traveled this country in 1807 (E. A. Kendall, op. cit.,
pp. 143-144), gives the same names Schunkadarunk and Zaughe’darankiac and translates them correctly
as “mouth of the river” and “people of the mouth of the river.’’ Maurauli (op. cit., p. 77) differs from
others in giving the form “sakkadaguk” A l’endroit 6u le terrain est plat et uni.’ The proper name
Sankedelawiak, “people of where the river flows out,” is known among the Penobscot to-day and has
been frequently used by authors in referring to Indians at the mouth of the Kennebee and Androscoggin
Rivers, or better, as Kendall states, to “‘the people of the common mouth of Kennebec and Amariscoggin,
that is the Sagahoc of the early colonists.’’ (Kendall, op. cit., vol. 1, p. 144.)
SPECK] INTRODUCTION 171
Bearing upon this is the fact that part of the St. Francis band
residing near Durham, Province of Quebec, until recently preserved
the local name kwon‘a’’mwiak, “long point people.” This has been
thought to be possibly connected with the term just given. Joseph
Laurent™ assigns the same name (Kwanahdémoik) to Durham and
gives the meaning “where the turn of the river makes a long point.’’
It is evidently, however, a later name acquired by these St. Francis
families after they had settled at Durham.
In ancient times the tribes on the coast of Maine extended into the
interior, but were more or less locally identified with the mouths of the
rivers and the large bays. The Wawenock were then located south-
west of the Penobscot, whose proper territory on the coast only sur-
rounded Penobscot Bay. According to tradition among the Penobscot,
their nearest relatives, the Wawenock, as we shall henceforth call them
on preferred authority,’ are definitely remembered as Wali ’naki ak,
“People of the bay country,”’ because they were located on the shores
and in the country back of what is now known as Sagadahoc.
This country lies southwest of Penobscot Bay and includes a number
of smaller bays from St. George’s Bay, in Knox County, westward
to the mouth of the Kennebec River, embracing Lincoln and part of
Sagadahoc Counties. The Penobscot also refer to the inhabitants
of this region as Sankedeta’wiak, ‘‘ People of the mouth of the river”
(Sagadahoc), the term being evidently another name for the Wawe-
nock. At the present time, not having held any contact with the
Wawenock since their removal to Canada early in the eighteenth
century, they know the tribe only by name. There is some evidence,
however, in one of the family names, Neptune, which occurs among
both the Penobscot and Wawenock, that during this period some of
the latter may have joined the Penobscot or vice versa.
From these sources we can derive a fairly definite idea of the
Wawenock habitat and also two of the tribal synonyms.’ Sagada-
hoe seems to have been a commonly used designation for both the
country and people.
In the matter of the first European contact with the tribe it is
probable that Captain Waymouth in 1609, when he encountered
the Indians while riding at anchor off the coast of Maine, in what
6a New Familiar Abenakis and English Dialogues, Quebec, 1884, p. 210.
7 Various spellings for the tribal name have been given at different times by different authors, occasion.
ally even in the same work. Among these occur such forms as Weweenock, Wewoonock, Wewenock,
Wewonock; the differences being evidently due to illegible handwriting in the manuscripts and to the
usual whims of orthography.
8 It seems a bit strange in passing along over the literature of this region to note that Maurault, who seems
to have known Wabanaki history and ethnology very well, did not mention anything of the term Wawe-
nock in his chapter on the establishment of the Abenaki at Becancour. (Maurault, op. cit.,chap.7.) He
does, however, say that the Indians at Becancour were Abenaki and Sokokis who came previously from
Damisokantik, which term he correctly derives from Namesokantsik, ‘‘place where there are many fish,’’
later changed to Megantic, the present name of a large lake near the Canadian boundary. It may be re-
marked that tradition supports this assertion, for the Wawenock informant, Francois Neptune, says that
his grandmother knew that some of her people came from there, and that the families at Becancour formerly
had hunting grounds there.
We WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [ETH. ANN. 13
is now thought to be George’s Harbor, encountered men of the
Wawenock. The chances are, however, about even that they were
Wawenock or Penobscot. We may assume in either case, neverthe-
less, that some of the descriptions, which the scribe of the expedition,
James Rosier, left us, refer to the Wawenock, because subsequently
during his sojourn in the neighborhood he met a great many natives,
concerning some of whom he has given considerable information.®
Subsequent historical literature contains nothing, so far as I could
find, until about a century later when the Wabanaki tribes of Maine
had become hostile to the English colonists in Massachusetts. Father
Rasles, the Jesuit missionary who took charge of a mission in 1690,
founded at Norridgewock several years before, mentions the tribe as
the Warinakiens.’” An estimate for this year states that the Sheepscot
(a local name for the Wawenock) had 150 men and the Pemaquid
100." The Wawenock were one of the tribes to be represented in
the mission at Norridgewock, which was some 50 miles from the
heart of their country.” During this period the Wawenock appear
to have gradually drifted northward toward the interior, probably in
order to associate more closely with the Christian proselytes of the
Norridgewock and Aroosaguntacook.'
Mention is made of a withdrawal of some of the Indians in 1713 to
Becancour, Province of Quebec, which probably refers to the Wawe-
nock.'* Another notice, dated 1717, gives under the name of Wawe-
nock, a total of 15 men; the same source stating that in 1726 those at
“‘Sheepeut”’ numbered 3 and at ‘‘Pemaquid” 10.%
As regards the mission at Norridgewock, Father Rasles ‘was
accused of attaching the tribes so warmly to the French cause that
they soon became regarded as dangerous enemies of the English
colonists. In 1724 an expedition was sent against the Norridgewock,
which resulted in the destruction of their village, the dispersion of the
tribe, and the death of Rasles.!®
Much has been written, both by English and French historians,
showing that Father Rasles was murdered and mutilated by the
English in this unfortunate massacre,” but another version of the
°A True Relation of the Voyage of Captain George Waymouth (1609), By James Rosier, p. 67 et seq.
(Early English and French Voyages (1534-1608) in Original Narratives of Early American History.)
10 Mass. Hist. Soc. Colls., 2d ser., Vol. VIII, p. 263 (1819).
11 New England Historical and Genealogical Register, 1866, p. 9.
12 Rasles, in a letter to his brother written at Norridgewock in 1723 (Jesuit Relations, 1716-1727, vol. 67,
pp. 183-195), speaks of a tribe of ‘‘ Amalingans,’’ who evidently lived near the sea, whom heconverted. Isit
possible that he meant the ‘‘ Warinakiens ’’?
13 That the Indians at the mouth of Kennebec River were not always on the best of terms with the bands
up river appears from a reference in Jesuit Relations for 1652, quoted by Maurault (op. cit., p. 8), saying that
the latter had been on the point of declaring war on them.
14 Handbook of American Indians, Bull. 30, Bur. Amer. Ethn., part 1, p. 881.
18 New England Historical and Genealogical Register, 1866, p. 9.
16 Handbook of American Indians, Bull. 30, Bur. Amer. Ethn., part 2, p. 83.
17 The original account of this event is by Father de la Chasse, Quebec, 1724, ef. Jesuit Relations, 1716-1727,
vol. 67, pp. 231-238. Maurault (op. cit., pp. 403-404) also gives an account of the same based on Charlevoix,
Histoire Général de la Nouvelle France, vol. iv, pp. 120-121, and Bancroft, History of the United States,
vol. ii, p. 122, and Chiétien Le Clereq, “First Establishment of the Faith in New France,’’ translated
by J. G. Shea, New York, 1881.
SPECK] INTRODUCTION 173
affair is related by the Wawenock informant. In this it is claimed
that Rasles secretly betrayed the mission to the English.'®
After this unfortunate event the Wawenock who still dwelt there
moved from Norridgewock with their relatives, the Aroosagunta-
cook ® allies, who became known thereafter as the St. Francis Abe-
naki. The Wawenock never became so thoroughly incorporated
with the St. Francis Indians as to lose their identity as did the other
bands from southern Maine. They did, however, share in the
general term Abenaki, and were designated in later accounts as the
Abenaki of Becancour.
According to their own traditions of the removal,” the Wawenock
informant says, they reached the St. Lawrence River opposite the
mouth of St. Maurice River, having probably come down the St.
Francis River from the south. The place is known in Wawenock
as Noda’wangank, “Place of the dance.” The exiles, who were
of course obliged to recognize the territorial hunting rights of the
Algonquin proprietors,” are said to have asked if they could hunt
with them. In response, it is claimed, the Algonquin gave the
Abenaki a concession extending 2 leagues above Three Rivers, down
to the St. Lawrence to the mouth of a river on the south side where
there is an island called Matasy’, a corruption of the name of the
Seigneur Montesson who held the title to it.2* There the Wawenock
separated from the Abenaki allies and located on what is now Becan-
cour River. Maurault * says that in the move of 1679 the Sokoki
(Sako’ki'ak ‘‘Saco River people’) in part settled at Becancour.”
18 The legend runs as follows: When the English came to Norridgewock the French priest sold the Indians
to the English. The English gave him a bag of gold and they promised that he should not be killed when
the attack was made. On that day he called the Indians into the church, but one of the old women (the
Malecite call her Pukdji’/nskwes’) warned them not to go, asshe had had a presentiment of trouble. Her
folks riduculed her, saying that she was silly with old age. When they had gathered in the church the
English attacked and the old woman was the only one to escape, taking with her her grandchild on a cradle
board and swimming Kennebec River. The rest of the people were killed. - During the massacre one of the
Indians tomahawked or shot Rasles in revenge. The same Story, strange to say, is well known among the
Penobscot and the Malecite. Among the Penobscot there are supposed descendants of this grandchild,
whose name was Bamzi', according to an historical legend.
19 The original form of this term is alsiga’ntegwi'ak, for which the following three meanings, depending
upon the translation of the first two syllables, have been assigned by different authorities. The Indians
of St. Francis, the Aroosaguntacook themselves, suggest in explanation (1) ‘‘ people of the river abounding
in grass,’ deriving the first part of the term from a’lsial, “river grasses,’’ and -gan, ‘‘abundance of,’’ and
(2) “‘ people of the river abounding in shells,” from als, ‘‘ mollusk shell.’’ The related Penobscot generally
render the name (3) ‘‘ people of the empty house river,’’ taking alsigan to mean ‘‘empty house.” There
seems to be on etymological grounds about equal reason for all the suggestions, so far as can be shown.
Different writers, according to their extent of knowledge or opinion on the matter, have favored one or
the other of these interpretations. For instance, Maurault (op. cit., pp. 272-273 and p. vm) inclines to
interpretation (1). Prof. J. D. Prince (American Anthropologist, n. s. Vol. IV, p. 17 (1902)) favors the
third, and quotes Gill (Notes sur les Vieux Manuscrits Abenakis, Montreal, 1866, p. 13) as showing the
same opinion. The second interpretation receives favor from Joseph Laurent (Lola), ‘‘ New Familiar
Abenakis and English Dialogues,’’ Quebec, 1884, p. 206.
* Maurault (op. cit., p. 284) states that the Indians first began their settlement at Becancour as early
as 1680.
1 Our informant, Franc¢ois Neptune, says that the site is near the railroad bridge at Three Rivers.
23 Maurault (op. cit., pp. 109-112) speaks of friendly relations existing between the Algonquins and the
Wabanaki tribes as early as 1613.
*% Maurault (op. cit., p. 290) mentions the same and has something to say about the identity of the
owner of the name.
*% Op. cit., p. 174.
% Kendall (op. cit., pp. 143-144) also states that Sakokiak settled at Becancour.
174 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [ETH. ANN. 43
They evidently played a considerable part in the Indian wars that
devastated southern Maine at this time, and in 1726, when the first
serious attempt was made by the Massachusetts government to
secure peace, the Wawenock receive frequent mention in the records
of the proceedings. At the treaty of Falmouth, Casco Bay, in 1726,
before Gov. W. Dummer, of Massachusetts, “‘ Wenemovet answered
that they had full power to act for them (the Norridgewock) and for
the Wewenocks and for the ‘Arresuguntenecks’ and (St.) Frangois.”’ ”
In speaking of Governor Dummer’s treaty, the “ Norridgwocks,
St. Frangois, and Wowenock Indians” are again mentioned as being
in Canada, whither the bulk of the allies must have moved by this
year (1726).** Also Loron,” a Penobscot chief, explained to the
Governor how he was entitled to make peace for the ‘‘ Norrigwock,
St. Frangois, and Wowenocks,’’ who were not present at the treaty,
by reason of having received a wampum belt from them empowering
the Penobscot to speak in their behalf.*° Loron also said that the
Norridgewock Indians were scattered among the ‘‘Arresaguntecook”’
Wewonock or St. Francois tribes.*! It is interesting to observe the
names of some of the native treaty delegates in these accounts
because some of them have survived in the tribe until the present day,
as we shall see later. They also have some ethnological value. It
seems that, owing to the absence of some of the tribes from the occa-
sion of the first treaty in 1726, it became necessary to hold another
the following year to ratify it. Accordingly in the conference of
that year (1727) held again at Falmouth, the following sachems sub-
scribed to the ratification of the treaty made through the Penobscot
in the year preceding. ‘‘Toxeus,” Sagamore of Nerridgawock,
Ausummowett,* Sagamore of Arresaguntacook, Woosszurraboonet,**
Sagamore of Wowenock” are mentioned.® Later again we learn of
“Memmadgeen and. Woosszaurraboonet, Captains and Councillors,
two of the chiefs of the Wowenock Tribe and delegated by them,
accompanied by Auwemmonett, the chief sachem’s son, Wenerramett,
Paterramett,® Saawerramet, Quinoise,* chiefs and others of the said
tribe of Wowenock.”” The conference was attended by ‘40 Nerridga-
*# Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th ser., Vol. V, 353 (1861).
28 Tbid., p. 365.
2 This is from the French Laurent, its Indian form being Lola among the St. Francis and Penobscot,
where it is still a family surname.
30 Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll., 4th ser., Vol. V (1861), pp. 386, 387.
31 Ibid., p. 390.
32 Toxus (Taksu’s) was until lately represented among the family patronyms of the St. Francis people.
33 This name may be the same as Wasimemet, Wasawdnemet, which still survives as a family name at
St. Francis, where it is thought to mean, “He talks against some one.”
% For a supposition as to the later identity of the name among the Wawenock themselves, see p. 176 of
this paper.
35 Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vol. mi (1853), p. 411.
36 See also p. 176.
% Maine Hist. Soc Coll., vol. m (1853), p. 412. Possibly the French rendering of Kwun‘a’was,
“Long Hair,’’ a personal name in Penobscot mythology (F. G. Speck, Penobscot Transformer ‘Texts,
International Journal of American Linguistics, vol. 1, no. 3, 1918, p. 188).
SPECK] INTRODUCTION 175
wocks and 15 Wawenocks.” * The fact that these tribal groups were
fairly independent politically is shown by their desire to have ‘‘sepa-
rate seals of the treaty,’ one for each tribe. Some more Wawe-
nock personal names were given by Quinoise, one of the above-men-
tioned delegates, when he enumerated Indians whom he knew held
some English captives. They were Wauhaway, Acteon, Omboro-
wess, Maneerhowhaw, Pier, Sungehaugundo, some of whom were
St. Frangois, some Wawenocks and some Scattacooks (from Con-
necticut).*®
But the peace did not last long and war again broke out between
the English and Wabanaki tribes. Another treaty was consummated
at Falmouth in 1749. In this compact, which finally brought an end
to the Indian troubles in southern Maine, the ‘“Arresuguntoocooks
and Weweenocks”’ were represented by ‘‘Sawwaramet, Aussaado,
Waannunga, Sauquish, Wareedeon, Wawawnunka.* From _ this
time on the Abenaki relinquished their attempts to retain their claims
in Maine and retired to Canada, where the Wawenock came into pos-
session of land at Beeancour on Becancour River, while the Nor-
ridgewock and Aroosaguntacook, together with survivors of the other
smaller tribes, settled permanently about 30 miles away at St.
Francis, on St. Francis River. Maurault in 1866 * asserted that
only 10 families remained at Becancour, though they were of purer
blood than the Abenaki at St. Francis. He says that in 1708 the
Indians at Becancour numbered 500, having come from Lake
Megantic, with others from the Androscoggin and Chaudiere Rivers.
The number probably included Sokoki who had joined them in 1679
(see p. 178).
Although the Indians forming the St. Francis village and the
Wawenock had many interests in common they remained inde-
pendent of each other, not only in dialect but in political respects, in
having their own reservations, chiefs, and administration, both reli-
gious and civil. The same conditions hold to-day. At St. Francis
the Wawenock from Becancour are regarded as friendly strangers.
This brings us down to recent times. Politically the Wawenock
have now about lost their name, being known in occasional reports
as the Abenaki of Becancour. In 1910 they numbered 26, includ-
ing absentees, upon their reservation of 13524 acres. Most of them
have scattered, some having gone to the French towns, while I
38 Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vol. mt (1853), p. 413.
89 Ibid., p. 449. Among these names, Acteon for Attean (Etienne), Omborowess for Amblowess (Am-
broise), and Pier for Piel (Pierre) are recognizable as present day Wabanaki family names. The name
Oinborowess was a Wawenock patronym. (See p. 176.)
40 Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., Vol. IV, p. 164 (1856).
41 Maurault, op. cit., pp. 288 and 294.
42 In 1914 when I visited them they numbered 23.
176 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE (ETH. ANN. 43
encountered several families who have migrated to Lake St. John
and live with the Montagnais as hunters and trappers.”
The following are the family names of the tribe. Some are still
in existence (marked *); others have recently become extinct.
Pabi-wel® ma’t___ “He is thought small.’’ The family name of the grand-
mother of Frangois Neptune, our informant. This name
may be the original of ‘‘Paterramett’’ mentioned in the
treaty of 1727 (cf. p. 174).
*Metsalabale’t____ ‘‘Lost his Breath’”’ (?) This name is undoubtedly the original
of ‘‘ Wooszurraboonet”’ of 1727 (cf. p. 174).
Sogalaine 2. e=— “Tt rains.”
Sezawegwu’n____ ‘“‘ Feather in the hair.”
Mekwas:a’k_____ “Red stain.”
Abolowe’s:_ ____- French ‘‘ Ambroise.”” The same as ‘‘Omborowess”’ in 1727
(cf. p. 175).
F ODE es = French, (St.) Urbain.
*Nepta’n__-__-_- Neptune, doubtful origin. This is also a Penobscot family
name.
Nicola eee Nicholas, also a Penobscot family name.
So far as can be said at present the material culture of the Wawe-
nock was practically identical with that of the Penobscot and St.
Francis Abenaki. Not much of this is preserved by the survivors at
the present day. The tribe, however, still keeps its organization
under a chief. In the traditions of the Wabanaki Confederacy, as
far as we know them, the Wawenock are not mentioned, though they
had been represented in the alliance at an earlier time.
As for social organization no knowledge is preserved of the family
hunting territories, for it seems that at Becancour hunting has not
43 In traveling among the Montagnais of the Province of Quebec I have encountered some of the dis-
persed Wawenock families and descendants from whom the following information was secured.
In about 1870 Charles Neptune and his sister of Becancour, in company with some Abenaki from St.
Francis (Aimable Gille, Obomsawin family), and relatives, came to Lake St. John by way of Chicoutimi.
They migrated to Metabetchouan by canoe from Chicoutimi, and settled near the Hudson Bay Co.’s post,
long since abandoned. Here they appropriated hunting territories with the permission of the Montagnais.
Charles Neptune died in 1907. He spoke the Wawenock language. Six sons and three daughters survived
him, his wife having been a Canadian. Their descendants are now living among the Montagnais at Lake
St.John, under the family names of Neptune, du Chéne, and Phillippe. Another Wawenock from Becan-
cour, Louis Philip, lives at Lake St. John. His father came from Lake Megantic on the border between
Maine and the Province of Quebec. He was probably the last Wawenock to have been born in Maine.
Philip has descendants at Lake St. John. He knows a few words and expressions which indicate the dialect
of his father to have been really Wawenock. Ofthe 23 Wawenock descendants at Lake St. John, as enu-
merated by Noah Neptune in 1915, none know anything distinctive of their ancestral language or
customs.
Again on the lower St. Lawrence there are Wawenock descendants. At Tadousac and Chicoutimi, the
Nicola families have become admitted to land rights with the Montagnais of these places. At Escoumains
is another named Jacques. Four children of old Joseph Nicola who migrated many years ago from Trois
Rivieéres, and settled also at Chicoutimi, also have numerous offspring by either Montagnais or Canadian
wives. Possibly these emigrants came to the Saguenay with the ancestors of the Gille, Neptune, and
Phillippe families at Lake St. John. At Tadousac, Joseph Nicolar remembered the text of a Wawenock
song which his father used to sing. This is given with the other texts in this paper (see p. 197).
I should add, that with few exceptions among the older people, these Wawenock descendants have be-
come so merged either with the Canadian or the Montagnais that they know almost nothing of their own
people. In the family names, however, we can see the survival of influences which began in Maine when the
ancestors of the Wawenock were close to the Penobscot with whom they have some family names in
common,
SPECK] INTRODUCTION IZ
been a practicable occupation for several generations. Neither
dances nor ceremonies have been performed within the memory of
the old people, so we only have the names of several dances which
are remembered through tradition. The term alnak‘ hadi’n denotes
the common dance (Penobscot alnaba’gan) performed as a part of the
marriage ceremony which, like that of the Penobscot, is proposed by
means of wampum. Several strings of wampum, which were given
to the parents of his grandmother by her husband when he proposed
marriage, were fortunately obtained from Francois Neptune. Naw-
adowe", “‘song and dance” (Penobscot, Nawa’dawe), was a war dance
in which the men carried tomahawks, and skogogwoga’n, ‘‘snake
dance,’”’ was similar to the Penobscot ma‘tagi’posi’, ‘moving in a
serpentine manner.”
In the field of folk lore, medicinal lore and shamanism much still
remains to be done with the informant. The culture hero and
transformer Gluskabe’, ‘‘the Deceiver,’ is the same as that of the
Penobscot, and shares generally the same characteristics. A com-
parative study of the transformer (Gluskap) cycle in Wabanaki
mythology is being prepared by the writer, so it does not seem
essential to refer just now to cognate elements in the mythology of the
other tribes of the group.
Within the last generation the Wawenock dialect has gone com-
pletely out of use. Most of the survivors are half-breeds and speak
French. The only person I found who knows the dialect is Francois
Neptune, supposedly a full blood, in his sixties (1914), the oldest
man at Becancour, whose acquaintance I had the good fortune to
make in 1914 during a trip of reconnaissance among the Abenaki in
company with Mr. Henry Masta of this tribe.** Neptune’s interest
in his dialect, which he knew to be on the verge of extinction, made
work with him quite easy, although the state of his health prevented
our doing more at the time. The following few myths in text will,
I think, enable us to form some idea of its intermediate position
between Penobscot and St. Francis Abenaki when more of the texts
already collected in both of these dialects are published.*® It seems
hardly necessary to remark that, in the scanty material on this region
so far available in print, there exists absolutely nothing in the Wawe-
nock dialect.
‘1 It might be added that Mr. Masta has given considerable time to the study of his people, and he is
quite satisfied as to the identity of the Abenaki of Becancour with the Wawenock of early Maine history.
48 Comparative linguistic and mythological material in Penobscot, which the Wawenock most closely
resembles may be found in the writer’s “‘ Penobscot Transformer Texts,’”’ International Journal of Ameri-
can Linguistics, vol. I, no. 3, 1918, while Doctor Michelson has given the position of Penobscot among the
eastern Algonkian dialects in his Preliminary Report on the Linguistic Classification of Algonquian
Tribes, Twenty-eighth Ann. Rep. Bur. Amer. Ethn., 1913, pp. 280-288.
PHONETIC NOTE
Although closely related with the Penobscot and the St. Francis
dialects, Wawenock has some distinctive qualities of its own. The
list of sounds is as follows:
p, b, m are normal as in English.
n,1 alveolar-dental in position.
1 alveolar-dental lateral surd.
t,d_ alveolar-dentals, somewhat indeterminate in quality.
k,g medial palatals, indeterminate in quality. k'¥ is k followed by
aspiration and lip closure; g¥ also occurs.!
te affricative medial surd.
dj affricative medial sonant.
s,Z in position same as in English, indeterminate in sonant quality.
nN palatal nasal, like ng of English sing.
h, w, y asin English.
a,i,o,u normal, medium length.
e open, as ein English met.
e long, between e and 4d, as in North German bdr.
iv long closed vowel like English ee.
2 longer than 0, almost like au in English taut.
a short a, like uw of English but.
2 short obscure vowel of uncertain quality.
, denotes nasalized vowels (g, a, 6).
‘ denotes aspiration following sound.
denotes lengthened vowel or consonant.
primary stress.
‘ secondary stress.
Two stop consonants coming together have a slight vocalic pause,
sometimes amounting to 2, between them.
The vowels e, 7, a, 0, wu before stops have a tendency to show a
slight aspiration following them. This quality, however, is hardly
noticeable in Wawenock in comparison with Penobscot or Malecite.
Where words differ in spelling in different places it is because they
were recorded as they were pronounced each time.
Wawenock appears to have been intermediate dialectically as
well as geographically between Penobscot and St. Francis Abenaki
(Aroosaguntacook and Norridgewock). In phonetic make-up it
has the predominating e, e, vowel where in St. Francis a and in Penob-
scot e occurs, though resembling Penobscot more. Wawenock
Gluskabe, St. Francis Gulskeba’, Penobscot Gluske’be; Wawenock
be’nam, St. Francis p‘ha’nam, Penobscot p‘he’nam ‘‘ woman.”
The dental quality of the alveolar consonants (n, ¢, d, 1) is something
of an individuality to Wawenock. It is totally foreign to Penobscot
and the dialects eastward, while the St. Francis pronunciation
1 This results from the loss of a vowel.
178
SPECK] PHONETIC NOTE 179
shows it in ft, d, and the affricatives. Wawenock, like St. Francis
Abenaki, has the final syllable stress. Like St. Francis it also lacks
the distinct aspiration following vowels preceding stops and affri-
catives so noticeable in Penobscot. Syntactically Wawenock uses
more independent word forms than Penobscot but it is not quite
so analytic as the St. Francis dialect. In vocabulary Wawenock
employs some nouns and verbs which are found in Penobscot
and not in St. Francis and vice versa—perhaps more of the former.
Modal and adverbial forms are more like those of St. Francis.
There is nothing in grammar, so far as I could ascertain, that is
really distinct from both the two related dialects; consequently
the intermediate position of the dialect seems well established.
Its intermediate complexion has led to an anomalous classification
among the Indians themselves. The Penobscot associate Wawe-
nock with the St. Francis dialect, while the latter reciprocate by
classing it with Penobscot. Asa final consideration it might be added
that intercourse with the St. Francis people has been too irregular to
have influenced the idiom in recent years, hence the intermediary
characteristics of the dialect seem genuine properties, not of a kind
acquired since the migration of the tribe from its old home in Maine.
GLUSKABE’ THE TRANSFORMER
A
GLUSKaBe’ CREATES HIMSELF AND COMPETES WITH THE CREATOR
yuwe’dji’ madjabe'gasit‘ Gluskebe’ nenawa’ debe'Idak
From this is the beginning GlusKabe. Then he “The Owner’!
wa‘wali bade ntami‘sencbal’ ninawayu’ kr peyana’k
when he made first man then now of earth left over,
evzavhe’t yulil sengba’l’. niwudji’ nitcithusiin Gluskebe’
when he made this man from that he created himself Gluskabe
yu kr peyangz'k ki'yu’ giz beg hadezu‘ ni wet'e’k
this earth left over this earth which had been sprinkled, that is why
mliksane’o ni‘ waida’ Gluskebe’ kizi'n'sgwi teiwoli hozu'
he was so strong so well Gluskabe was able to form himself;
negani’’ uba’bmedabi'n ni‘ debelda’k’ umalhinawe'n
then he moved about in a sitting position; then ‘The Owner’ was astonished;
niudite’n ‘toni’ weda't'e yugedayi'n’ niudi'tegun "‘a’ida’
then he said, “How happened now here you be?” Then he said, “Well!
ni'wodjr nidjvhosin ki’'yu peyenome’n nta’mi — se’nabe
because I formed myself from this earth left over from first man
gizih'at”’ ni udi'‘tagun debe'ldamli' dji'l “oama’dj'i'
that you Then he was told his ‘‘Owner,”’ “Very
made.”
komalhintato"”’ udi''fsgul “nomalhi''ntato’ e’ligizi begihaliha'n.”
you are wonderful.” He was told “T am wonderful because you sprinkled me.”’
nega’ ni udi'tiegu'n “negadji' kiuse’nena‘ nikwebi'’”’
Then he was told “Accordingly we shall roam about now.”
ni'we'djr mandyji' hi di't ni woda'kwaynk'i‘na wadjuwa'l'
So they left then they went up hill a mountain,
nigizi’ uski''djiwe' wadjo’k nebla’ tqlawe’’ ubma’taw9' bina’
then after they reached the top of the mountain while so they gazed about open eyed
tant’ ‘lanawage’ owew!l waniwi’ ni una’mi tona’ nebos'a'l'
so far round about they could see lakes,
si bua'l' st biwi"' abazi'a'l' mesi' ‘wi el'‘ka’mige’k — ki
rivers, and trees all how the land lay, the
earth.
ni'debe'lda'k udi'lean "kinayu' — eliimalhi'ntatowg’ msi''wi
Then “The Owner” said, “Behold here how wonderful is my work, all
O45 5 , 2 ' Ls : TL ew O5 Ne
nel zi dehe’damon? pe’mkamige'k sobe’k’. si bua’‘l
I created by my wish of mind the existing world, ocean, rivers,
si bui'nabo’s‘a'l'”’ § ni udi ‘tan Gluskaba'l' “ki aba’
river lakes.” Then he said to Gluskabe, “What might
you
nogedli‘bogwatu'n?’’ niudlihezittemogu’n yuli‘l Gluska‘ba’l'
have caused to be created?” Then finally he replied this Gluskabe,
“nda'ba nindli' 'begwa tawu'n * ninawa’ ke'gwi'ba
“Oan not I cause anything to be created yet something
perhaps
1 The “‘Owner”’ of the Universe, synonymous with God.
2 A common concept among the Indians; freely “‘by wishing a thing into existence.”
8 Or si'bi'wi’’ nebo’s‘a‘l‘ “also lakes.”’
4 Denoting more “to make complete.”
180
SPECK] GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER 181
giziuli'tawu'n” ni‘udi'tan ‘‘a‘ida ngizitheba’ ka'salamsae‘n.”’
I can make?”’ Then he said, “Well! Ican make him perhaps the wind.”
ni‘debelda’k udi'‘tan ‘nega’ wulithya’ tanegedli'bagwatu'n si biwi''
Then ‘‘The Owner” said, “Then make it what you can do even
ta’ni godotsani'‘n.” negela’ ni'uliha’n gosolamsenu'l' madje'lamsa'n
according to your power.” Then then he made the wind. The wind rose
surely him
nl gwikwaskwaiwi’ alomigoslamse’n ni'askwa’ elomi'goslamsa’k
then sufficiently the wind coming up and then so hard it blew
ni abazi‘a’k alomi' «be'djogelke’ elamso'genc:’. ni debe'Idak
then the trees torn out by the roots blew over. Then “The Owner’’
udi' ‘tan Gluskgba'l' “‘teba't* gizi nami tu’n elsani‘a’n
said to Gluskabe “Enough! I have seen how powerful you are
tet'a’ter eli bogwatowe’n.”’ nivdabe'ldak uditdamo’n ‘“nega’‘ni‘a
and now what you can do.” Then ‘‘The Owner” said, “Now, I
qzidaiwr' noliha'n kozolamse’n’” negeta’ ni'‘ma’djegaslamsa‘n
in return I will make him the wind.” Then surely the wind rose
cczi' daiwi'' ni edudlamsa'k alni‘gelna’ kwi'hidi't' niga
in return then it blew so (?) then
ni edudlamsa’k ni wodu kskadobelamsoge'n wa Gluskebe’
it blew so then it blew his hair all tangled up on his head that Gluskabe
nigadawi'’ e’nawipte'nk' wodepkwana'l’ nimziwi'’ me'tlamsa'n
then he wanted to smoothe it down his head of hair then all it blew off,
ninda'teama wodoepkwana'l’ nimsi’wi me’tlamsa'n — ni't'a'tei’
then not his head of hair all it blew off and now
ume’tebegozi’n notlo’kega‘n.
ends my story.
,
B
THE TURTLE INSULTS THE CHIEF OF THE BIRDS; GLUSKABE HELPS HIM
TO ESCAPE, MOUNTAINS ARE CREATED; AND AGAIN TURTLE ESCAPES
BY GETTING HIS CAPTORS TO THROW HIM INTO THE WATER, BUT IS
FINALLY KILLED
Negawa'ida pemi zo’ bek'*ke’t Gluskebe’ niuni' ‘ten
So well then as he wandered by the ocean Gluskabe then he killed
podebal’ niugizitnte’n podeba'l’ niungdji'’ wa’wandokewa'n
a whale; then when he had killed the whale then he went to inform
wusa’stza'l' toloba’ = niudi'‘lana = ‘‘ naba’tei‘eli"’ podebe’”’
his uncle turtle, then he told him “Great fortune! killed a whale’
niwusasi'za'l’ udi'logun “negatci’ gedjip'toneng’ podebaiya’.”
Then his uncle he was told “and now we will go and get it whale meat.”
negela’ niunedjina’ niwodlosena’ sobegu’k' ni‘ bayehedi''t
So then they went; then they came to the ocean; when they arrived
wabodebe'ls ‘ik ni wednaemna’ kesi'teweldamohodi'‘t
where the whale lay then they took as much as they wished;
ni gizi’'wikwu'nemohodi''t nitbla’ pali'wi'' obunemona’ ni'wadoloba’
then when they took it fora while to one side they put it then that turtle
edudji'‘weheme't si'psa’ gesikigi''t msi'wi' wski'tkami'k'™
called them together the birds various kinds all in the world;
negan‘i'’ sckhedowoldihidi't ne’bogwatci’ nan‘e’mkami'gi pode’
then they came flying then on account of it the ground shook
stbiwi' woda’'s‘ot'ekawewa'l' ki'sosa‘l'’ ni ubedji'dowuldenc
and fairly covering up by flocking the sun then they all came flying
182 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [pTH. ANN. 43
msi’ wi’ ni umi'tsoldi'’n taneba* wik “habalank
all they all ate since they were invited to the feast
ni wa’ galu’® sangema’ niyu' wawl wunl wi’ yu’
then that eagle chief and here near around here
ebita’‘ida tolobe’ ni'’wa tolobe’ wikwu’namen unos'ekwa'k'¥
where he sat turtle that turtle took his knife
then
ni wotemy ‘kteies’e@‘n koltuwal’ yu'lil sangema'l", ni wa’
then cut off his rear the eagle this chief. Then
sangama’ ndawawama'ls'wi'' gizi'tomi'‘ketci'azama'k niyuli’l
chief did not feel it when his rear was cut off then this
etrak'angotci'l' keptin® niudite’n sangoma'l' “ni aweni’
his second chief captain then said to the chief, “ And who
eli hogowe'n kamames‘ani’ pona'lgebona’”’ ni’ umoskwe'ldamonc*
has done so to you belittling you we are allinsulted.”’ Then they all became angry
niugi’zolomana’ toloba’l’ wedjintahedi't nivgiste’ ta lawe’’
then they planned what to turtle so as to kill him and then accordingly
to do
unaskasi' ng’ negawa’ tolobe' nl wikwune'n yuhi’
they attacked him and that turtle then he took these
awi'p‘hona’ niude«ba’sahozin ebogwa'te ida‘'k ‘nalogwa’
feathers and fanned himself on account of it said “wing
wodc'bas'ehwana'l‘,’ nalogwa’ wodc:’basehwa'nal *” niyu’
his fan wing his fan!’” Then
nalogwa’ wodeba’s’ ehwa'nak ni wa’ Gluskebe’ udi'te’n
(with) wing he fanned himself then that Gluskabe said
wuza'sizal' “keba'laloke’ eli'talawei'' a‘ida temi’k‘otci'as‘a’t
to his uncle “vou have done wrongly so doing well, cutting his rear off
sangema’ nide’bene’ konaskae'ngen’ enc” niudr ‘lan
the chief and soon they will attack us.’’ Then he said,
“ni djina’wa dani‘ kodlada’kanena‘?” ni'udi' ‘tan pla wa'ses’enolitu'n
“On account of it what shall we do?”’ Then he said “In the meantime I will
build a nest
yu abaz‘i’k.” nigeta’ uwoli'tu'n wazes‘e’ niuditte’n yuli'l wuza’si‘zal’
here in the tree.” Accordingly he built a nest. Then he said to this his uncle,
“teespigwo'dawe'”’ ni‘gela’ tolebe’ ogwa'gwedji'spigwodawe *
“You shin up.’’ Forthwith turtle tried to shin up
ni'ndate’gone’ ugizi'spigwe'dawe’n nirudi’damon “madji'te’
and he was not able to shin up, then he said, “Dull
, Pee One ty e700 Ong] . ' Oe 08 = ,
ewagwa'nhekasia'n’. ni wa Gluakebe ni weni malwene’n
are my heel claws.” Then Gluskabe took hold of him
toleba'l’ ni wodebake'n wa’zos'a'k niel'zi waz'es'e'k
turtle and tossed him into the nest and when he was in the nest
ebi' hi di’t ni ubedji‘dedlawe'r bagi damo'n nebi'’
they sat down, then he felt like to void water,
nido'lobe udi'‘damen “aida! eli gadawi' ‘bagi da‘k
that turtle he said, “Lol how am I going to void
nebi''?”’ niudr ‘togul* Gluskeba'’l ‘ne’ zr djiketer ewr *
water?” Then he was told Gluskabe “Lean your rear
waz'es'e'k.” ni geta’ ali m1‘ teowe'n nob! amok ai‘ wi.
from the nest.” Accordingly he urinated water ronnie down
elow .
5 Given as “eagle”? by Neptune, but, in Penobscot, Newell Lyon identified this with the extinct ‘‘auk.’’
6 A secondary chief, from English ‘ captain.’’
7 In a monotonous singsong tone.
SPECK] GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER 183
ni we’ wala‘n yugi’/k nope’sawe'n'owa'k ni ke’ptin — elabi’’t
Then they discovered it these warriors Then the captain looking
spomo’k niuna’mithe’n — toleaba’l’ wazoas'e’k ni wedji’’
up also saw the turtle in the nest, so then
pi’ ‘bmama™k ni’ weze’'nkheledji'ni‘te'n niyu’ udi'damo’n
he shot an arrow then he made him fall down and out. Then here he said,
“madj1' djo’’s wele’*mk'1"‘te” madjidj9’s wole’mki'‘te”
“Bad stooping coward Bad stooping coward.”
niye’nama to’leabe pa’gasik kik nite udelitweni'te’n
Then there turtle falling on the ground right away disappeared.
ni gwi”lawasoldi‘n ninda mska)wi'’ ni wa’ gepti’n
Then they all searched for him but not could find him. Then the captain
pabmigwilawaes'i’t nivuna’mi‘tun se’skidju’ — we’lamkat’e'k
went about hunting him still and saw a bark basket upside down
niuda’kskamen niumoskawana’ toleba’l’ ni’ga teapoloma’n
and he kicked it over and found turtle. Then he held a trial
(over turtle)
nit’a’tei’ elomi gi zloma’n wedji'’ —metci'ne’t'. nigepti’n
and at once it was decided that he should die. Then the captain
udidamo’n ‘‘tanedjinawa’ kdlithe’neng'?” niwa’ — eta’k‘ozi't
said, “How then shall we do with you?” Then second chief
ni'udi'dame’n “Kkgagu’sktahe'n edji'’”’ niwa tolabe’’
said, “We will cut him to pieces.” Then turtle
wodi'damoa/’n ‘nda’ nia ni tegowa’n.” ni'udi'damona’
said, “Not me it will kill.” Then they said
“negatcer’ kome’t'kasesan’eng’.” niv'udi'dame’n mi‘’na_ tolobe’
“Then will we burn him.” Then he said again turtle,
“nda nin nilgowe’n” ni'udi'damona’ “negatei’
“Not me it will kill.” Then they said “Then will
ba’skedjibala‘n” nivwa’ tolobe’ udidamo’n mi’na “ni'n
drown him.” Then that turtle said again, “Me
nitegu’n” nega’t'e we’djinimi'p‘hame'k* ni‘‘lenasi’n aida’
will be killed.” Immediately they grabbed him to kill him, Well!
nobe’stzak niwedji’ cbodjigelke’t'ek vuki'’ edudna’s‘ima'k 8
in a little lake that is why it is torn and furrowed this earth where they dragged him
wa tolobe’ male’mit'e yu nobes'a’k ni'wedjau’paken’¢'
that turtle at last here in the pond. Then they threw him into
the water.
ni wodali' mi’ ele dji' ni gadata’n niyu’ ones’ € be name’n
Then he sank back down and belly up. Then here he riled it up with his paws
nobi’ = nigizi'’ ~—s pe’gowi'azas'ko’ = ni'wedji’ ~— node’ dabewi'n
the water; then after it became real muddy so he poked his head out
nebi’/k niuge’galowe'n “oho < > kilowa,wa’n
of the water. Then he cried out “Oho< >u you all
keda’kiwe’ kentlgone’ niv’niia’ ndaki’ ndan‘i'tegowa’n”
your land kills you but I my land does not kill me!”
nist’ ’psak nnoda’wanc' kedwi tei ba’gotces'i''t tolobe’’
Then the ducks heard him his noise of screeching turtle.
nega’t'e ugwi Idasoldi'ne’ yu’ gilk nope’usewi'‘n'owak
Then at once they rushed for him these warriors
ni moegena’n owa’ aweni’ netewikgmogwi't' nimskawa’n
Then they chose that one who was expert diver they found.
mode’welé’ nivuga’mkolitawe’n yulil’ ni’soda eli: gamogwi’t
The loon dove down for him this one second time as he dove
§ This accounts for the mountain ridges and valleys of to-day.
184 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE JeTH. ANN. 43
nsode’waiye’ niumoskawe’n toleba’l' nivwodji'’kpana'sehidi't
the third time then he found turtle. Thereupon they threw him ashore
malami’’ kvk nega’ wa’ sogwask ‘taha’n tolobe’
at last upon the ground then that one they knocked him dead turtle.
niume’tebegesi'n ndatlo’kaga‘n.
Then here ends my story.
C
nigawa Gluskebe’ wedji'madjele’nt sobegu’k ni'wuno’soteg-
And then that Gluskable went away to the ocean then he followed
wetekamoe’n malami’ — ktci'daba’kwani'gana’k ° ni‘ wedji"’
a river up at last to the great divide. Thence
kalapo’wele‘nt mozu’l’ niwa’ mu's~ medjele’nt man‘ /iwi'
he started up a moose and that moose started off among
siburku'k teka’ Pan’aw9’’mp'skao‘k lagwewi'’. ni'wewyla’n
the rivers in direction of Penobscot River Valley toward. Then she knew
Pukodji/nskwes’u'!? ni gi'zi we’dolama‘k |! owa’ aida
Pukedjinskwessu and she could sense it. that one well
mode’olanuskwe’ nrugadawi'’gak‘hi'kihe'n Gluskeba’I* ni
sorceress. Then she wanted to tease Gluskabe. Then
ugadawi’‘kelape’wala'‘n mozu’/l' wadji'/ndagi‘zinle'nk'” ni'wa’
she wanted to start up the moose so that not he could kill it. That
Gluskezbe’ we wedahama’n yuli’l Pukodji’nskwes'uwal'
Gluskabe knew her this Pudedjisdwessu
elvgak‘hi ki hogo't ni udli'’dahame'n “e’begwatcindatci.’
how she was teasing him, then he thought “on account of it not also
kona’mihiv*’ yu pemi'la’” nigela’ ~—sni'wa’ —suba’bmigwil-
you will see me here passing by.” Accordingly that searched all
awabi'n Pukodji’‘nskwes'u’ tani ba’went"' udlinami he’n
about to see him Pudedjinskessu how if anybody she could see.
nige’noewanda* wi br wr unami tu’n eli’ dj lakwes inli‘t
But not except she saw how the tracks
udangama’ pemsege’k niclawi’ uno’sawep'tasi‘n neganowa’
of his snowshoes on the ledge. For a long time she followed the tracks then that
Gluskgba'l’ wase'smi'wanihalel’ wzami''wite wudli'’dahamgun
Giuskabe she lost his tracks because it was willed
ni’ wedjinda’ p'skengo’k ni'wa’ Gluskebe’ madebele’nt si'bu’'k
that not she could find him. Then that Gluskabe went down to the rivers
niwanamthe’n mozu'l yu'lil noso’kawa'‘nt ni‘ubitbma'n ni‘a‘ida
Then he saw the moose this he was following. Then he shot it well then
niugibitle’n mu’s_ nigi‘zi’’ elemigiptesi’k ni‘udlo’s‘e‘n ne’ga
it fell moose then after he fell and lay down then he went and
ubes't halen ni giz p's hale’nt el'zi'p kwedji'te’nt ni u-
he skinned it and after he had skinned it when he had taken out then
la'gezia'l’. uge’dnome'n — ni‘udla’kewan ude'miza'l* ni'‘yu
his intestines he took then he threw them to his dog and here
edeli‘ntama’k mus niv- muzi'ketci’ Jewrtezu’ — si'biwi'’
where he was killed moose that moose buttocks is called and
9 Said by the informant to have been the ridge dividing the waters flowing into the St. Lawrence from
those flowing southward into the Atlantic.
10 A mythical character common to the Malecite, Passamaquoddy, Penobscot, and Wawenock. She is
described as having a figure like a “‘jug,’”’ who lives alone in the remote forests.
1 A common concept among the Wabanaki, ‘‘to know a thing by intuition.”
SPECK] GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER 185
yu el'ta’gihazi'k wula’gezial’ wa mu's_ nite liw9biga'k
here as it stretched out his intestines that moose right away became white
tet'atei'dji’ eska’mii wo'bige’n tagagi'wi metka’migege’.
and now forever white until at the end.
ndatlokanga'n tage’gebegoasi*t nimsi'wi''.
My story as far as it goes all.
D
GLUSKABE BECOMES ANGRY AT THE BIRCH TREE AND MARKS IT FOR
LIFE
w9' wi git notlo‘kanga‘n wa Gluskabe’ niganiyu’
Here camps my story that Gluskabe also here
babmi‘zobe'k'"ke't nimetcele’ uda'Inola‘k'Y” nigizi''yume't'-
wandering by the ocean then started out with his man’s boat and when he had
kak wudu' Tl niudli''dehgzi‘n pla nda’tewoli‘n ni‘gela’
worn it out his canoe then he thought for awhile, I will build a canoe and so
niugwilauhe’n maskwe’muzi'a'l' wela’k'’woseli't niugi’ptahe’n
he searched for a birch tree straight one then he cut it down
nierzi'erbile’nt waba‘'zi" ne'lewe’ uzaligi‘tahogu'l’ awekadji'
and when he had felled it that tree almost it nearly fell on him hardly
ugi‘ zi’ ‘wadji' 'bulcwe'n ni udli dahame'n “nda’ter mina’
he could escape. Then he thought “Never again
konil'ke'u!” ~—nip'skg'tagwan wikwonemoe’n ni‘uses'am‘ha’n
you will kill!’’ (anybody) That branch he took and he switched it
yuli'l maskwe’muzia'l’ ni’t'e elidjirla’kwusi'k woas‘ase’mhiga'n
this birch tree at once over its entire length it was switched
tet'a'ter'djr’ eska’m1 wewi'nangwa't kweni'’ pmauzwi''n'owi' ‘kek
and now forever it is known while people are living
skitkami’k'” nivumetebegezi'n notlo kenga'n.
on the earth. And there ends my story.
12 Some kind of a hollowed-out canoe.
19078°—28——13,
GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER
FREE TRANSLATION
Here begins Gluskabe. When the Owner made the first man then
when the first man was made Gluskabe created himself out of the
left-over material, out of this earth left over, this earth sprinkled.!
That is why Gluskabe was so strong. Well, this Gluskabe was able
to create himself. Then he moved about in a sitting position.
Upon seeing this the Owner was astonished and he said, ‘How hap-
pened you to be here?” and Gluskabe told him, ‘Well, because I
formed myself from the waste pieces of earth out of which you made
the first man.’’ Then the Owner told him, ‘You are indeed a very
wonderful man.” And Gluskabe answered, ‘‘T am a wonderful man,
because you sprinkled me, and on account of being so near to you.”
Then Owner said to him, ‘So, then, you and I shall roam about from
now on.” Accordingly, they started out. They went up a hill,
they went up a mountain, and when they got on top of the moun-
tain, when they began to gaze all around with open eyes, so great a
distance around could they see the lakes, the rivers, and the trees,
and all the lay of the land of the country. Then the Owner said,
“Took at this; behold such is my wonderful work, all created by my
wish of mine. The earth, the water, the ocean, the rivers, the basins,
the lakes.’’ Then he said to Gluskabe, ‘‘ What might you have brought
into existence?’’ Then he answered him, this Gluskabe. ‘I can not
bring a thing into existence, but, then, one thing maybe I can accom-
plish.”’ Then he said, “Well, I could perhaps do one thing, make the
wind.’ Then said the Owner, “Well, then, make it; whatever you can
do, according to how powerful you are.’’ Then, accordingly, he made
the wind. It began to blow. Then it increased so strong, the rising
wind, and then it blew harder until those trees were torn out by the
roots and blown over. Then said the Owner to Gluskabe, “That is
enough; I have seen your power, even what you can do.” Then
said the Owner, “Now, I for my part. I will make a wind.”’ Then,
accordingly, it commenced to blow in return. Then it blew so hard
that they could not hold on where they were standing(?); and it
blew so hard that the hair on the head of Gluskabe became all
tangled up. Then when he tried to smooth it out, the hair of his
head, all of it blew off and the head of hair that he had was all blown
off by the wind. That is the end of this story.
1 The Owner here corresponds to the Creator. The sprinkling evidently refers to the Roman Catholic
idea of holy water.
186
SPECK] GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER 187
B
Well, then, as he wandered along the shore of the ocean, Gluskabe
killed a whale and when he had killed the whale he went to inform
his uncle, the Turtle. Then he said to him, ‘Great luck! Killed a
whale.” So he told his uncle, ‘And also we will go and get it, the
whale meat.’’ So accordingly they went, went to the ocean; and
when they arrived there where the whale lay they took as much of it
as they wanted; and when they had taken it they placed it to one
side for a while and that Turtle called together the birds, as many
kinds as there were in all the world, and they came along flying in
droves. On account of their number the ground fairly shook and,
moreover, they fairly covered up the sun by their numbers. Then
they all came flying together and ate because they were invited to
the feast. Then the Eagle was the chief of the birds, and close by
here where he sat was the Turtle. Then that Turtle took out his
knife and he cut the buttocks off from the Eagle, this chief. Even
then the chief did not feel that his buttocks had been cut off. Then
this man, the second chief, a captain, said to his chief, ‘‘Who then
has done such a deed to you, belittling you? We are all insulted.”
Then they all became angry and they laid a plan what to do to the
Turtle so as to kill him. Thereupon, immediately they (prepared to)
attack him. Then the Turtle took the feathers of the bird and
fanned himself, for which he said, ‘‘ Wing is his fan, wing is his fan,”
because he was using a wing as a fan. Then Gluskabe said to his
uncle, “By so doing you have done wrong, indeed, cutting the but—
tocks of the chief. For soon they will attack us.’’ Then he said,
“On account of it, what shall we do?’”’ So he said, ‘‘In the mean-
while I will build a nest in this tree.’ Then Gluskabe built a nest.
and he said to his uncle, ‘You shin up the tree.’ Then the Turtle
tried to shin up, but he was not able to do it; not able to shin up; so
he said, “Dull are my heel claws.”’ Then Gluskabe took hold of
him, the Turtle, and he tossed him up into the nest. And when they
were in the nest they sat down to pass off water. Then the Turtle
said, “How am I going to urinate up here?’ Then Gluskabe said to
him, “Extend your buttocks over the edge of the nest.” Then,
accordingly, Turtle urinated water, which ran down below. Now
the warriors discovered it (where Gluskabe and his uncle were
hiding) and their captain looked up and he saw Turtle in the nest.
Thereupon, he shot an arrow at him and brought him down. Then
he said, ‘““Bad stooping coward, bad stooping coward.” But where
the Turtle fell on the ground there he disappeared, and they made a
search for him but could not find him. And the captain hunted all
about. Soon he saw a bark vessel upside down. Then he kicked it
over, and found the Turtle. Thereupon they held a council over
him and it was decided that he should die. Then said the captain,
188 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [eTH. ANN. 43
“What, then, shall we do with you?” The second chief spoke and
said, ‘‘We shall have to cut him up in pieces.” Then said the Turtle,
“Not me; that will not kill me.” Then he said (the captain),
“Then we shallburn him up.”’ Then again said the Turtle, ‘Not me;
that will not kill me.’”’? Then they all said, ‘‘Then we shall drown
him.” Then that Turtle said again, “That will kill me.” Imme-
diately they grabbed him to kill him. Well, in a little lake they were
going to throw him. From the place where they dragged him the
earth was torn up and furrowed, where they hauled him. But at
last, here in the lake, they threw him into the water, that Turtle;
then he sank, his back down and belly up, like a dead animal. But
he riled up the water with his paws, and then when it was all muddy
he poked his head out of his shell from the water and then he cried
out, ‘Oh ho! as for you all, your earth kills you, but as for me my
land does not kill me.’”’ Then the birds heard him, that Turtle, by
the noise of his screeching, and they rushed upon him, these warriors,
and they chose one that was an expert diver. They selected the
loon. Then this one dove down for him. When he had done this
the second and the third time he found the Turtle. And thereupon
they threw him ashore out upon the ground, and they knocked him
dead, the Turtle, and that is the end of my story.
C
Then Gluskabe went away from there to the ocean. And he
followed a river up as far as the great divide (the frontier between
New England and Canada). There he started up a moose and this
moose started to make away among the rivers in the direction of
Penobscot Valley. Pukdjinskwessu knew that he was coming, for she
could sense it, being a magic woman. Then she wanted to plague
Gluskabe, for she wanted to scare away from him the moose so that he
could not killhim. But that Gluskabe knew it, that Pukdjinskwessu,
how she wanted to plague him. So he thought, ‘‘On account of this,
you will not see me passing by.’”’ Accordingly, that Pukdjinskwessu
wandered all about to see if she could find out whether any-
one had gone by. But she could see nothing except how the
tracks of his snowshoes were left on the bare ledge. For a long time
she followed the tracks, but at last she lost the tracks of Gluskabe,
because he commanded, in his mind, that she could not find him.
Then Gluskabe went down to a river, and he saw the very moose he
was following; and he shot at it, and there it fell, the moose. And
while he was falling he went up and skinned it, and after he had
skinned it he took out its intestines. Then he threw them to his
dog. He threw them where the moose was killed. That is now
called ‘“‘moose buttocks” by the people. And as the intestines of
that moose were stretched out there they showed white underneath
SPECK] GLUSKABE THE TRANSFORMER 189
the water. And even now and forever until the end of the world,
they will be white.*, That is as far as my story goes.
D
Here camps my story of that Gluskabe. Then wandering about
the ocean he started in a canoe and when he had worn this out, his
canoe, he thought “I shall stop until I build another canoe.”? And
accordingly he looked for a birch tree, a straight one. Then he cut
it down, and when it fell down, that tree, apparently it nearly fell
upon him. He had difficulty in being able to run away from under
it. So he thought, ‘‘ Never again will you fall on and kill anybody.”
That big branch he took hold of it and switched this birch tree right
away along its whole length. He kept on switching it and now it
will forever be marked while there are people living in the world.
This is the end of my story.’
? Neptune stated that Gluskabe threw the moose’s head toa place which became known as “ Musedap,”
“Moosehead,”’ but he did not know where this was. This is also the native name of Moosehead Lake,
which may have been the place indicated in the story. (Cf. Jos. Laurent, New Familiar Abenakis and
English Dialogues, Quebec, 1884, p. 216, and Maurault, op. cit. p. IV.) Gov. Newell Lyon, of the Penob-
scot tribe, added that this is probably the upper end of Islesboro (formerly Long Island) in Penobscot Bay.
This still has the name We'ni‘enganik “Has a head” in the Malecite language, probably having been
named by some Malecite. At Castine Head, where the lighthouse is now, is a place called Mado’/ngamas,
“Old homely snowshoe.”” The Indians claim that this is where Pukdjinskwessu gave up her chase, the
same story occurring in the Penobscot. In several large crevices in the ledge here are the marks of two
snowshoes, one a regular one, the other a woman’s shoe, short and round.
* The ‘‘eyes”’ in the bark of the white birch are the blisters caused by Gluskabe’s switching. Such an
explanation is very common in northern and northeastern Algonkian mythology. (Cf. S.'T. Rand, Legends
of the Micmacs, p. 67, and F. G. Speck, Myths and Folk-Lore of the Temiskaming Algonquin and Tima-
gami Ojibwa, Memoir Anth , Series No. 8, Geological Survey of Canada, p. 83.)
HOW A HUNTER ENCOUNTERED BMULF’, VISITED HIS
COUNTRY, AND OBTAINED A BOON
Niga’ be’segwoda’ = alnebe’ ~=kiwadi'eli'‘n nda'tama ke'gwi
And once aman went hunting not anything
namitowi nigayu’ pe’mose't sibu’k’ ni’obe'dji'gada‘dusami'n
he could see and soon he came to a river then he grew thirsty
nspi'wi.’ . bawadjir’ qdabi't niyu’§ gizi'’ abi't’ niyu’
at the same because of it he sat down and here after he sat here
time down
ugada’wes’emi'n nigella’ ni‘’yu. udli’dapsidoda‘man yunabi'k
he was going to drink and so here here stooped down here water
lagwi wi'‘ niyu’’ nobi''k weda'liina'mi hen aweni'li’/1'
toward and here in the there he saw somebody
water
elowe'gwi'na’ pmauzewtl’'n’u'k li’neng*zu' ndaganowa’
like really a human being resembling but not that
wo'we'lmewi'a'l’ — aweni wa’ ke‘nowagi zi’ una’ nodamoena'l
he knew him who that but that he had heard of him
niaweni’ eligi’t’ sak’hiiwa’ bmule’ negani'’ wudji'am‘ki’n
that one was like behold, Bmule’. Then he got up
ni wone'djigentlgzin u'wa alnebe’ ni‘gi'zi''getlezi't’ nivyu''
then he went and hid himself that man and after he hid then
de'dabi nawe'n yuli’l wi'debal’ ! deni dji'wodla‘dake'n
as he noticed him this his friend what was he going to do
ni'gewa’ bmule’ ni'wodji.’pengdawe'n iyu'’ abazi''k ni‘gat‘e’
then that. Bmule’ Then he climbed here in a tree at once
elvnawe'nt = yulil = alngba'l’—eli'talasomi't’ = yw’ sl bu’k
it appeared like this man as he saw lying here in the river
ni agema’ egoma’t’ ater’ ost dai‘ wi’ ogado”semi'n niyu’
that one where he also in his turn he was going to drink, then
Wi ze@wl ‘mani'‘m ” ge’ lada‘k ni wikwonomo’n niyu'ki'k
his gold in his mouth and he took it out and here on the
ground
ubo’nemen niwa‘Inebe’ er zi ne'mitank el gadonoa’k
he lay it then that man when he saw it where he hid it
Vyuwodo'nak niyuwedli'dahezi'n nedji'komodone'n nigela’ nivyu'
here in his mouth and he thought to go and steal it. So accordingly then
moadjeg’zi'n walnabe’ abak’skadai'wi'' wadjinda’ wewo'la’nk
he started to crawl that man flat on his belly so that not he would know it
yulil’ wideba'l = nigen'i"' evaibe'sudjrwi' — pedji' gwozi''t
this his friend then when he had come near coming crawling
nigiegrvmiwi’ uwikwonome’n wizewi'mani’ —ni'wa'gizos‘ami''t
slyly he took it the gold. Then when he had drunk
wabmule’ elgbi’t ni nde tame’ unami''towe'n wi'zce’wimani'‘m
that Bmule’ looking there not, he saw it his gold.
niyu' ga’dagidehezin ni'wedli'dehnzi'n ‘‘eliikeamo’danama'’k’.”
Then he began to think about it and he concluded. “So it is stolen from me.”
ni ganowowa’ bmule’ mode’olono ogwa’ nigan'’
And then that Bmule’ was a magician it was said and then
4 Used in a somewhat humorous sense
2 Lit. “yellow money,’’ mani’, ‘‘money”’ borrowed during early English contact.
190
SPECK] HOW A HUNTER ENCOUNTERED BMULE’ 191
yu'te ni’ no'lomitwi'' udli’gelosiin ni‘udi‘damo'n ‘“‘ni'dabe’
right there that abroad he spoke aloud and he said, “My friend,
kmi‘‘lin’oba ni = newi'zewi''mani'‘m kityandaba’ __ ke’gwiv
give me, do, that my gold you can not anything
kdla'wakek'towe’n ni nia’ pma’uzowanga'n. ni‘ sitbiwi'
you make use of it that mine life. Now also
ndaba’ nzi'p'kingi‘zi'teani‘ta‘n'tame’. a'yage'ntedji'' nabi''wi-
can not I very long can stop anywhere. Pray unless that soon
mi‘liane’ ni'mi'‘li‘ane’ kule‘lomogwawi'n nowedji"’
you give it to me and if you give it to me you will have good luck for that
kemes’e'ltodji* =mani’ medjiimitwi'’ anda’ nadi‘e’lawanga‘n
you will have an abun- money always not hunting
dance
kone ‘nodahamo’.”’ niudi'tegu'n yulil a'Incba'l’ ni"
you will lack.’”’ Then he was told this man “Now
gade’ badji‘mile'n kowizawi''mani'm ni'genowa’ moza‘k
I will give you back your gold but then don’t
pa'tewuli'k‘a'te”’ ni‘uditogu’n “nda'‘ba’ keba'tewol'o"
cheat me.” And he was told “Can not cheat you
ni'gede'kse’gazi'yane' niga’ a‘ida tes'%dewa npes'kwano'k
if not you are afraid of me and well mount upon my back
ni‘geze’ngelebadjin pi''t'adjii kose'lgbane’.”’ ni‘gela’ walnabe’
and hold tight for exceedingly we will go fast.” Forthwith that man
udes' ¢dawa'n uba’s'kwano'k yuli'l' bmula'l’ ni'‘wa
mounted his back of this Bmule’. Then
ume’djele‘n ktei'’modeolonu' ni'goda'k e'dudji'ela‘nt*
he went away the great magician even so traveling
wabmule’ pek‘i'‘lgbegwa'simogi* ni‘gi''zii Ss met’ki'wi'k ~~ wa’
that Bmule’ could rise in the air. Then when totheend ~~ there
obe'djilen iyu’ ede'li bezwo'got bmulaiki' liwi'tezu’.
he came here there he brought him to Bmule”’s country as it is called.
ktaha’‘n'dwi' = madeolenowa'‘k alyidi'’t ma’‘ow? baskwe"’
Great magic shamans are there together just at noon.
payedi''t yugi'k modeolonowa’k ma’owl gau'Idowak
They came these shamans together they slept.
niyuli'l bmula'l’ pezwogo't nite yuki'k ubu’nogu'n
Then this Bmule’ bringing him right there to this country he was put down
ni ude'tegu'l “vudala‘di‘eli* tomakwa’k si bi wi''
and it was said to him, “Here hunt beavers also
wunoegi gwa'k ni kwi' wi zedji’n wi biwi'' ngeda’mkip‘o'de 3
otters so hurry and get ready just at one o’clock
kda'tewr ayl''n ni gi'za'di‘eli ane’ ni gabos'l ha‘dasi'n
you must stay and after you have hunted you skin them
nabawi"’ ni‘t’atei’’ ko'‘labekheda‘mon komade’ganoma'‘k
quickly and then at once bundle them up well your hides
ni‘ni‘ebla’ tek'a’ ndatewi 'los‘e* nda‘ba sipki wi’
until then there I must go it will not be long time
nidjinebaya’n esmadji’ to ku'ldewi'a'k ktci'modeolonowa’k
and I will come before will they wake up great shamans
nodji‘kemadja'lele’n mina’ wa'donala'’n” ni‘gela’ ni‘gat‘e’
so I will earry you back again , (to) where I got you.” Accordingly at once
wa yulil’. wi deba'l’ ela’gaki'mgo't = ni'wi' hwi'zedji’n
that this his friend as he was told then he hurried
3 Literally ‘‘once move (sun)”’ referring to division of portions of the day.
192 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [pTH. ANN. 43
nigat'e’ nunadie'‘lowgme'n wunogi'gwa' si'bi'wi'’ tama‘kwa’
and at onee then he hunted and packed them otters also beavers.
nigi'zini'teni'' kipke" teha'nt niyu’ bo’'s'thada's'i'tan
After he had killed he cut off some meat and then he skinned them
nabinangwa’t kini’ eliwizake’k niga’ w9labek*heda’mon
quickly it seemed very much he hurried and then he bundled them up well
umadegoanoma’ nigra’ kizadji't elidohazi't ‘“‘kivzie't’o’
his hides and after he was ready he thought, “Tt is after
nahoen'i'’ negwode'mki pode agelat'e’.”’ niga’‘nowa
now about one o’clock surely.’’ And then he
wodli dohezi'n “ni dabe’ nowa’nelomu'k'’”’ ni ganowanda’
thought, * “my friend said what was true.” And then not
tenetu'l’. la’k'Vhe ki'' wedji baya'nt yuli'l’ wi de«ba'l
did not know how far he came from this his friend
wos'a’miwi'te nd’at‘egone’ kizidjanabiwi'‘ wa ayagant‘e’
because also not he could stop that since
we’dji wi’ metantde’ spome'k* sala’kiwis ni unodamo'n
always traveling in the air. Suddenly then he heard
sankhi'mama'ntkamt ‘gip‘ode'k eli dahezit ebogwatce' t’o’
coming out earth trembling, thinking on account of it
gadime't kami‘ge’ e’dudji'sek'pa‘tanewa'k saki''yulil’ wi'deba'l’
the world was about to end so much it was noisy, but behold this his friend
sankhe'l@li't niga’t'e pedji'godahirt wa bmule’ niudi‘damen
coming along out and then came jumping that Bmule’. Then said
wa aida bmule' “nabawt'’ tes1’gedahi‘n nbo’skwana'k
that well Bmule’ “Quickly jump upon my back
gizina‘’ni medeolenowa’k amku'Idowa'k.” ni‘gela’ ni'wa’
it is already time the shamans wake up.” Accordingly then he
udes‘i'‘godahi'n po’s' kwana'k. yuli'l wi deba'l' se'wl' yu’
jumped upon his back this his friend with here
umadegonoma’ tanlawe't kiza'dieli‘t niwa’ ome'djelan
his hides as much as he had hunted. Then he started off
bmule’’ nitater’ talawe'l e'dudjila'nt pek iwi’ ‘bi wi''
Bmule’ and then like so fast going only just
lambi'gwa'‘hasi'de’ ni‘gi'zi'' obesogu’n wa'da nogo'te’p ntami’
he imagined it then after he warmed up his belly and his head first
nenigan'i'’ = gi'zi'be’swogo’t nitudi'‘lgun ‘“‘nd’atei. = mi‘na’
there as formerly when he brought him then he was told “Not ever again
kone'na’mi hodi'‘p‘ona‘ kenowadji’’ kodaskamt''
we will see each other but also you forever
wule’lamogwewin nowedji’ kwenc’wozi'a‘'n”’ ni t'atei'’
will have good fortune and so you will live long.” And here
notlo“kanga‘n ume'tgbegas'i'n.
my story is ended.
HOW A HUNTER ENCOUNTERED BMULE’, VISITED HIS
COUNTRY AND OBTAINED A BOON !
FREE TRANSLATION
Once there was a man who went hunting but he could not find any-
thing. Soon he came to a river and as he had become thirsty, he
sat down and after he had sat down, he was about to drink. While
he stooped down toward the water, there in the water he saw some
one’s reflection really resembling a human being, but one whom he
did not know but of whom he had heard. Behold he was like Bmule’,
and at once the man got up and hid himself and after he had hidden,
he watched to see what the other, his friend Bmule’, would do. Then
he climbed into a tree. Then the other, whose reflection he had
seen in the water while lying on his face, that one in his turn was
about to come down and drink. He had a piece of gold in his mouth
and he took it out and laid it on the ground. Then the man, when
he saw where Bmule’ had hidden it after taking it from his mouth,
thought that he would go and steal it. Accordingly, the man started
to crawl flat on his belly so that his friend would not see him, and
when he came near, crawling slyly along, he took the gold. °
Then when Bmule’ had finished drinking, returning for his gold,
behold he could not find it and, thinking about it, he reached a con-
clusion. ‘So it is evidently stolen from me.” Now that Bmule’
1A St. Francis Abenaki tale, given by C. G. Leland and J. D. Prince (Kuloskap The Master, New York
1902, p. 236),rather closely follows this narrative, though in the St. Francis story ‘‘P’mula’’ gives magic
eyerings of a snake to the hunter.
Pamu’la seems to be known locally among the western Wabanaki. To the St. Francis Abenaki he is a
bird-like monster which flies from one end of the world to the other in one day. He can hear the merest
mention of his name if anyone calls him. (Cf. Maurault, op. cit., p. 574.) In Penobscot mythology,
Pomu’le, ‘Comes flying,” is believed to heed the appeal of men. Once a year he flies across the sky, pro-
pelling himself with bull-roarers, giving three cries; one at the horizon; one at the zenith, and one at the other
horizon. He may be stopped by an ascending column of smoke and will then grant supplications for aid.
The concept is interesting as an element of religious and social fabric among related western Algonkian.
Among the Algonquin and Ojibwa of Ontario, the creature is known under the name Pa*’guk‘ (Timiskam-
ing) (ef. F. G@. Speck, Myths and Folk-Lore of the Timiskaming, Algonquin, and Timagami Ojibwa,
Memoir 70, Anthropological Series No. 9, Geological Survey of Canada, 1915, p. 22) and Pa‘’gak (Tima-
gami) (ibid., p. 81). The beliefs regarding him are similar to those of the Wabanaki; though the Timagami
believe his appearance to be an omen of death. With the Menomini “Parkas is a flying skeleton. . . cor-
responding to the western Ojibway Pigik” (A. B. Skinner, Social Life and Ceremonial Bundles of the
Menomini Indians, Anthropological Papers of the American Museum of Natural History (1913), Vol.
XI, pt. 1, p. 83).
On the northern plains, however, among the Plains Ojibwa, “ Pigik, a skeleton being with glaring eyes
which is sometimes seen flitting through the air,” is the dream patron of a cannibal cult (Windigokan),
the members of which perform in a mask costume and blow on whistles. The functions of the society are
to heal disease and to exorcise demons. Taboo associations have become centered about the society. (A.
B. Skinner, Political Organization, Cults, and Ceremonies of the Plains Ojibway and Plains Cree Indians,
ibid., Vol. XI, Part VI, pp. 500-505.) The Plains Cree had the same society (Skinner, ibid., p. 528-529)
and so do the Assiniboine (R. H. Lowie, The Assiniboine, ibid., Vol. IV, Part I (1909), pp. 62-66), who also
designate the dance by a cognate term Wi*tgo’gax. This series of cases makes me feel that we have here
a case of more recent elaboration from a common Algonkian idea, the result of a tendency toward socializa-
tion on the Plains, where the cannibal cult evolving out of the flying-head conception has taken on the
characteristics of the crazy dance of the Arapaho, Gros Ventre and the others of this region.
193
194 WAWENOCK MYTH TEXTS FROM MAINE [ETH. ANN. 43
was a sorcerer, and so right there he spoke aloud into the air and said,
“My friend, please do give me back that, my gold, for you can not
make any use of it. That is my life. Moreover, I can not stay
long in any one place. Pray do give it back to me quickly and if
you give it to me you will have good luck, for that you will always
have an abundance of money and you will not lack in hunting.”’
Then the man spoke to him and said, ‘‘Then I will give you back
your gold, but then don’t cheat me.’’ And he, Bmule’, said, ‘I
can not cheat you. If you are afraid of me so now mount upon my
back and hold tight to me for very fast we shall go.” Accordingly
the man mounted upon the back of Bmule’ and the great magician
started off traveling so fast, because that Bmule’ could even rise in the
air, and then they came to the end where he brought him, Bmule’’s
country, as it is called. Great magicians lived there. Just at noon
time these magicians assembled at that place and slept together.
Then this Bmule’ bringing him right to this country put him down
and said to him, ‘‘Here you may hunt beavers and otters. So hurry
and get ready. Just until 1 o’clock you can stay, and after you have
hunted, skin your game quickly and bundle up your hides. Until
then I must go somewheres. It shall not be fora long time and I
shall come back before the great magicians wake up, and carry you
back again to the place where I got you.’’ Accordingly at once the
man did as his friend told him and he hurried on with it and he
hunted beavers and otters and after he had killed them he cut off
some meat and skinned them, quickly he proceeded with haste and
then bundled up his hides, and after he was ready he thought to
himself, “It must now be about 1 o’clock surely.”” And he thought
again, “My friend said what was true.”” But he did not know how
far his friend had to come from, forasmuch as he could not stop
anywhere since he was always traveling in the air. Suddenly then
a great trembling he heard arise from the earth and he thought on
account of so much disturbance that the world was about to come
to an end. But behold it was this his friend coming along. Then
Bmule’ came bounding up and Bmule’ said, ‘Quickly jump upon
my back, it is already time for the magicians to wake up.’ Ac-
cordingly then the man jumped upon his friend’s back with his
hides that he had secured, and Bmule’ started off going so fast that
one could only imagine it. Then he brought him to where he had
been formerly. After he had warmed up his belly and his head,
he said, “Never again will we see each other, but nevertheless you
will forever have good fortune and besides you will live long.” And
here my story is ended.
THE ORIGIN AND USE OF WAMPUM
Tantawe'i aida’ dane’dudjii bodawa'zitma'k'* — ni‘nawa’
Accordingly well then whenever they held a council then there
utaine’ mede'olinowa‘k ni‘dani‘’ ekwampsa‘'nohidit yu'gik
there were shamans and how according as they.were strong these
mode'olinowa’‘k niuda'li wewela'n awenl"’ mliksani‘da’
shamans there they were known who is powerful.
nigizi'’ bodawazi'ma’k’ ni‘ube’s'kweletamane’ ni'udam‘hadi'n
And after they councilled then they lighted up their pipes and all smoked.
ni'wa’ ktcii mode'olinu’ gesta’ pkwudetema’nt niwo'be'bir’
And this great shaman each time he drew upon his pipe this wampum
so’gahazo’ wudji’ wudona’k! wgbrga’k niiwa’ mede’olinu'
fell out from his mouth (if) they are white then that shaman
tebe’bwiwi' edutsani't niwecbebiim ebas‘iiwi'' we" bi''gon
medium so powerful this his wampum half white
si bi'wi"' ebas'l'wi"' elwe’mkwi'go'n ni'wa’ nodas ‘anit
and half reddish then this least powerful
mede'olinu’ nelowe’’ mkazewi go'n w2 bebi’n ninawa’
shaman almost blackish the wampum. And then
yugi'’k mede’olinowa'k tanyu’gedji seko''sidji'k ni‘gi'gedji’
of these shamans how this one will win the other ones
peme Itodetci" we babi’ ki'zi' wode’mhadi hi‘di'da*
having the most wampum after they have all smoked
mode'olinuwa'k ni'te‘lawe'l kadawi'' — wolas'tewe'dihi'di'de*
shamans. Then whenever they want to make a treaty
yugi’k nivzokami'gesowa‘k niwotambe’nkek'tona’ w9'bebi''
these two nations then they exchange in payment wampum
nile’mpskahgzu' kedegwabizun ni‘dale’mpskohezu’ — ni‘zno’l
beads worked into a belt designed into two
woldji‘a'l’ elidantawei’ — gizi'‘wolo's'tawe‘dohi'di't nda’tema
hands meaning as they have agreed to the treaty no (more)
madcbe’k® nda’teii gadona'lditwi'a'k nivaskami'wi'’ ni‘a’tei’
fighting and not hunting one another forever And that
nimsi'wi'’.
is all.
1The narrator added that some old woiman would catch the beads in a receptacle as they fell from the
magician’s mouth,
195
THE ORIGIN AND USE OF WAMPUM
FREE TRANSLATION
Accordingly, then, whenever they held a council there were sha-
mans there. And according to their strength among these shamans
it was known who was the most powerful. After they held their
council they lighted their pipes and smoked. In the case of an
exceedingly great shaman every time he drew upon his pipe, wampum
fell from his mouth. If the wampum was white, then it denoted
that the shaman was of medium power. If the wampum was half
white and half reddish it denoted the least powerful shaman. But
if, in the case of a shaman, his wampum was almost black, then he
would win over these shamans, the others who had the most wampum,
after the shamans had smoked their pipes. And so whenever these
two nations wanted to make a treaty they gave wampum to each
other as a payment, the beads woven into a belt designed with two
hands, meaning that they had agreed to the treaty and would fight
no more and forever would not hunt one another down again. And
that is all.
196
.
WAWENOCK DRINKING SONG
In the following text, obtained at Tadousac from Joseph Nicolar,
a Wawenock descendant affiliated with the Montagnais, we have a
type of song common among the Penobscot and the other Wabanaki
tribes and known as “‘Lonesome songs.” Owing to his unfamiliarity
with the language the informant has used some forms which are not
very clear.
ni' te be si’s tan wedo sa’n
My little friend whence comest thou,
, ,
net‘e’ tala’gwiv wi’ gwe no’ da nqQ’
In that direction “Long town’’?!
nii te be si’s tan wedo sa’n
My little friend whence comest thou,
di wa’ di> no’ pam se’ gwe no’ da nq’
Lonesome(?) ledge “Long town’’?
Nis yibeg De sles eae swell: “sits
My little friend his little navel
nii te be si’s kami’li'titn
My little friend give me some
bu tai’ a lip san bet gwe ng’ da _ no’
Bottle fill up please “Long town’ (?)
di-wa’di' ta’ wit wi’ gwe no’ da _ no’
Lonesome “Long town” (?)
1 For the want of a better explanation it seems that the song refers to some place called ‘“‘Long Town’”’
(gwenodana’, “‘long-town’’), probably in Canada. The expression gwe ng da ng may, however, be a
verse ending having a value similar to Kuwenodinu, “It islong O,’’ occurring in a Passamaquoddy song
recorded by Professor Prince. (Cf. The Morphology of the Passamaquoddy Language of Maine, Proceedings
of the American Philosophical Society, Vol. LIII, No. 213 (1914), pp. 115-116-117.) In still another Passa-
maquoddy song given by Leland and Prince (Kuloskap, The Master, pp. 308-309), thereis an untranslated
stanza ending anigowanotenu. These independent occurrences of the burden in question seem to attest
1o its antiquity in the Northeast.
197
ry i, Alla Wve .
a cord, gel, ah el f
Fda Linny, ayo wate Stith
mia nam Ror sam Pape Woo
sii) a) May pa Surin Ore ‘die lt) 20
rity Ole tly SP nea
i io Got mi iwe a af range OMI
hw! Niel Ty reed) a Dt Seah:
ey Nites ee ari abe) Wiaiy ai ohn
, ‘ had wi al No peri oe een
ay iy 81 "yi Uae ( aah
TOCAATTIC TR oe 5 ate ‘eg ' : ua ih Ais
ellie’ Aa fae a)! OY) eee) MAP ew, we PET) ely
Sits, Vipera, tien tay by 2: ie uy ehh
1b i ini ree a iy at py’, phe a { ij Awd
i lecall Yo ah “pa eR Mia |
Oh Mawey gaol ak pe a
i ‘yo ab ‘wit ee Siw bee Sed Saat
ee) ee Hout! nds
“aren't! jeu! tng COLT ATT, OF eevghoy gorau) Ceeed Gropmes Ut mafic freA ere & % Joow AAT nT &
kt SOmerreT dant py EO cay ytterrdte ath uitinn huh cfetinieny wate” ,Sntddoveny
Hehe Chat Mime t eat otros OO ne ar et olor ay tale ele quived pally wey
eee wnt erly te Leauge ttt ALO ernment mde Diegaludi The hy A Gel ae) ed Tate
ogee wet iran (Eb ed GT bey Lota eee URC) ee eee Qeitiqomet yt) lobe A ail
1G taiomerntigrus Charade Set roto OAT an Goetet bout roel wat oneiy grtoe Uhh
Heeike ot fee (ecg ot ped yl) Wo pontine ters 6 Hilarity iia Gti Osan
Oe ln Boden Re
wus
Ne
NATIVE TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF
CONNECTICUT
A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY
BY
FRANK G. SPECK
199
MQ 2PORIAIG AVA Saat AVITAV.
TUDITOAV LOD
YAAIC TOUDSS-YAOTHOM A
ya
WOa92 2 AVAAT
CONTENTS
Moheran=bequotitexte==> so--5 S3see—=90- 2 =o eee ee ee en
Ethnic composition of the Mohegan-Pequot____--__----_-------------
Moheranspopulation=ss=—= ses == ho = ee en ee ee
Estimates of the population of the Pequot proper__-_-_------_-----------
Affinities of Mohegan-Pequot with Hudson River Mahican___________--
herribalmamerandisynonyims!==——-— 9s eee ee ae
Comparative survey of certain culture features______________----------
Remarksvonithe lifeioh Mans? shielding" 252255 22 ose ae oe eee
Phonetic motes se 328 SSP ae na) ae eae Se ae See se a a Se oe a sas eee
Diary Tors ViTre= Wielding === Sheree en 2 Pe eee eee eee ee See
APPENDIX
Geographical names and legends at Mohegan_----_--------------------
An addendum to Mohegan-Pequot folklore____---------_-------------
Mohegan medicinal practices, weather-lore, and superstition, by Gladys
sTamtaqiid Peon meses = = ee Oe a ene ee ee eee
Folk tales:
Captainekiddvandithe pirates! = 25 = ss 22 eee
penunderiromethe cleatisky = sas sees ae ee oe ee ee
Theswater-tight basket. 2-- 2a =— ote - se Sees a See tess
Peter sky changed! tova mocks: = Sao ons 2 sess See eee
ThestoryzouOldy Chickenss- Sees as eae ae eee
The Mohawks deceived at the Devil’s Den____-_------------------
The sachem’s daughter taken by the Mohawks_------------------
Rersonalimamess: ise ee a jie Seen Ke Se ee See ae sees ee
hRenarks onvprammaticalimateriales. ===) os == —- 2-2 eee eee ee
[Linc xe se See eee a ey ee ee ee he ee es J 2 ee oe ee
19078°—28——14 201
Ne
|
V
SPR TY)
Ale howp lagna
dpo"l -awerte VF “wilt Je Hon tari Hig hsol
a jiulralagad Miguiela yA
pete fou ahd to maitaliqie old Io aetneniiall
' whit) dilw dope -aguahine Ww wed tie
wptonith line anian lid ad TP
arto) anirtte ibePeany td AMET | aN ania)
acne on ta ol a!) oe paafiedl
: Sua |
miloht inh he erattl
Misitoht 1s Sool Dive wera lhiqarpin
nahi! Jodo tf tonatolt 68 oovtaetiiua A
(A Weta ve eno Loni inedold
Hoa ble prig T”
tavint Hi
otieala wht hee SCF waite)
wails aft por teh
drei! Triehiowt aw ial
it A ut Dowdle Gh watt
alot LK Yo eave wa'T’
La titetd in ba aol adveeiloal The &
whi Veh Hotes yeleloal ol roadoyge wT
ewe thane
wits Mob ineuneiwy Ya ashrjonh fl
xolhiul
: eS "POG |
14.
16.
LT.
18.
19.
20.
26.
ILLUSTRATIONS
PLATES
Fidelia A. H. Fielding, the last speaker of the Mohegan-Pequot lan-
guage, taken September, 1902, at Mohegan, Conn., during the
annual Mohegan “wigwam”” festival. -.......-.-_.._--_-_-.-_-.
. Dutch map of about 1614, the earliest source showing the location of
the Mohegan and neighboring tribes____.____._________________-
a, Mohegan carved wooden mortar and stone pestle (Museum of the
American Indian, Heye Foundation); b, carved Pequot wooden
mortar from Stonington, Conn.; c, Nehantic wooden mortar (from
old Nehantic reservation at Black Point near East Lyme, Conn.) -_~
a, Mohegan man pounding parched corn in wooden mortar; 6, Charles
Mathews (Nehantic-Mohegan) and old stone washbasin; c, Edwin
Fowler and another of the old stone washbasins at the Fielding
NO MES ECS CM eee ores ee ane gE re ne ee ee ee ee Serraino
Mrs. Henry Mathews (Mercy Nonsuch), a full-blood Nehantie (De-
cember, 1912). The beaded pouch is a specimen of her handiwork.
(Photograph by M. R. Harrington.) (Full face and profile) ______-
Siota A. Nonsuch, Nehantie (two views). (Photograph by W. Vivian
(Gineiyoyovel lnc os Ls tek ai aie ay el Bale ais eS Se ee ©
Map showing distribution of tribes and dialects in Connecticut and
adjoining regions. (Based on classification of Eastern Algonkian
dialects by John R. Swanton and Truman Michelson, Twenty-
eighth Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., 1913)____._____-__-______
. a, Betsy Nonsuch, Nehantie (from old daguerreotype); b, c, John
Nonsuch, Nehantie (from old daguerreotype) at two periods of life_
2. a, Burril Fielding; b, Lemuel M. Fielding; c, Doris Fowler; d, Loretta
iRieldin es ale NTO he ren eee ee ete, eee ee er ate ere
. a, Lester Skeesucks in costume (from an old daguerreotype); b, Gladys
Tantaquidgeon gathering herbs; c, Mrs. Frances (Olney) Hart, of
Narragansett-Mohegan descent; d, Lewis Dolbeare, Nehantic-Mo-
. a, Gladys Tantaquidgeon (Mohegan) in costume; b, group of Mohegan
at the annual ‘“‘wig wam”’ festival (August, 1920); c, scene inside
the “wigwam: at thevannual festival. . 2-2-2 - 322225 252-2252
. a, Adeline (Mathews) Dolbeare, Nehantic-Mohegan; 6, Cynthia
Fowler, Mohegan; c, Ella (Mathews) Avery, Nehantic-Mohegan;
d, Delana (Mathews) Skeesucks, Nehantic-Mohegan___________-
a, Doris and Beatrice Fowler and Winifred Tantaquidgeon; b, Cort-
land Fowler, Harold and Winifred Tantaquidgeon; c, Mary (Field-
ing) Story; d, Harold Tantaquidgeon and sisters, all Mohegan___
. a, Hannah (Hoscutt) Dolbeare; b, Moses and Frances Fielding, all
IN Ghepantssse< =e = Sek SoS ee ee ae en oe he
8. a, Phoebe (Fielding) Fowler; b, Emma (Fielding) Baker; c, John
Tantaquidgeon; d, Burril Fielding, all Mohegan_---__-----_-_----
. a, Cynthia Fowler; b, Rachel Fielding; c, Amy Cooper; d, Emma
(Bielding)) Baker: all. Mohegane.-22522" s22-225_ 222 2222 sts 8
. a, b, Charles Mathews (full face and profile), Nehantic-Mohegan;
c, d, J. R. Skeesucks (two views), Nehantic-Mohegan__-__--------
216
bo
pe
for]
204 ILLUSTRATIONS
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Part of United States Geological Survey chart (Norwich sheet), show-
ing location of Mohegan settlement and neighborhood, with leg-
endary, places indicated) by, mumberss-= === =a == == =
Group of Mohegan in costume gathered near the site of Uncas Fort
at Shantok point. (Photograph by R. L. French)------_--_-____
a, View of ruins of stone fort on Mohegan Hill, looking north. Bowl-
ders forming part of ancient wall are shown still in place (1921)
(No. 1 on chart); 6, View of same ruins looking east. The inclosure
on the rock outcrop is known in Mohegan tradition as the ‘‘kitchen”’
and woments quarters\of (helo) Gutorts = =e = eee eee ee eee
a, Mohegan Chapel on Mohegan Hill, on site of old village (No. 2 on
chart); b, Scene at the “wigwam” (1920), ox team bringing supplies;
c, Scene at erection of the “wigwam”’ in 1902, showing skeleton of the
structure, crotched posts and stringers__.-_-_.--_----__________
a, View from the top of Lantern Hill, a landmark in the Pequot country
overlooking one of the small lakes bordering the Pequot reserva-
tion. The girls in the photograph are Mohegan; b, Winter view
across country from Mohegan Chapel (No. 2 on chart)_-_-_______
Scene at “‘wigwam”’ (1909), showing size, construction, doorway,
and group of participants, most of them Mohegan_--_-__-_--_-----
a, View of legendary Papoose Rock at Mohegan near Thames River,
looking north (1921) (No. 8 on chart); 6, ‘‘ Devil’s Footprint” in
bowlder just back of Mohegan Chapel (1921) (No. 3 on chart)____
a, Scene on Mohegan Hill, old Indian path near Mohegan Chapel (No. 2
on chart); b, Mohegan burying ground at Shantok Point (No. 9 on
(UO Bee are eo ee rice ne eee ee eae
a, A landmark in the old Nehantie country. The cave shelter near
Niantic (East Lyme) where tradition says the Iroquois besieged the
Nehantic. The boy in the entrance is a Mohegan; b, The landing
place on the old Nehantic reservation at Crescent Beach, near East
Lyme, looking north toward wigwam sites and site of Indian
SHeGligales Lin @olkoyafll) ita ee Sa ee Oe See ae Bee ees
a, Scene looking north on the Housatonic River from Seatticook reser-
vation; b, Scene in the gorge of the Housatonic near Milford, in the
OLE ScathiGooK COUNTY: a aoe aaa ee ape eee ce a
Page
252
252
252
252
252
258
258
258
NATIVE TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT
A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY
By Frank G. Speck
MOHEGAN-PEQUOT TEXTS
Some years ago, after the death of Fidelia A. H. Fielding (pl. 14), the
last Indian who retained the ability to speak the Mohegan language,
I practically concluded that the last morsel of obtainable linguistic
and ethnological material concerning this important and little-known
group of Algonkian had been secured and published. With such an
impression in mind, in 1905 I turned over to Prof. J. D. Prince the
last of my Mohegan papers, as my attention then became diverted
to other fields. This material consisted of a personal diary written
in Mohegan-Pequot by Mrs. Fielding. The preservation of these
inscriptions would have provided a welcome addition to the scanty
text material up until that time in existence, but the papers were
soon after unfortunately destroyed in a conflagration which consumed
much of Professor Prince’s library. And so it remained for us to
lament the passing of the last Mohegan opportunity. Mrs. Fielding
died in 1908, having been for some years in.such a condition as to
make investigation an impossibility. Fortune, however, turned a
favorable aspect. Another collection of texts in the form of a diary,
some essays, and memorandums were found among Mrs. Fielding’s
posthumous belongings by her stepson, John Fielding. This manu-
script was generously placed in my hands by John. It possesses
more substance than that which was lost, as I remember it, being
far more copious and having a wider range of thought and expression.
In consequence of such a favorable event I became stimulated
recently to revisit the southern New England field, and to spend some
time in residence at the old Mohegan village gathering notes on the
new morsel and searching for more refreshing knowledge in the old
atmosphere. The first results are accordingly submitted. The
almost miraculous recovery of these words in an obsolete language
permits a hope, perhaps not too optimistic, that still more, and
perhaps something in other eastern dialects, may come to light through
the hands of several of the investigators whose eyes and thoughts
are turning with interest to the eastern remnants.
In a number of papers, some of which were prepared in collabora-
tion with Professor Prince, the Mohegan-Pequot subject matter was
205
206 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
presented to readers. But those articles suffered a great disadvan-
tage through appearing in various scientific and semipopular journals
over too wide a period of time.’ In consequence, the status of this
dialect among the others of its group was never satisfactorily
defined, and ethnological comparisons among the eastern Algonkian
were never extended over the southern New England group as they
should have been if all the information available had been at first
properly assembled.? The full account of this information would
otherwise, I believe, have merited more serious attention; some
deductions in culture could even have been drawn. Now, with the
whole Mohegan-Pequot matter as much as possible in mind, and the
neighboring eastern types of dialect and custom in view, I have been
bold enough in this paper to make a few points of classification and
to define the group among its relatives as it deserves.
ETHNIC COMPOSITION OF THE MOHEGAN-PEQUOT
In the history of the American colonies the Mohegan Indians
played an important réle. In literature they have been made re-
nowned, but unfortunately no attention was ever paid to their internal
qualities of language and culture, things which stand for so much
more in the understanding of a people’s place in the world of human
development. For almost a century they have been regarded as so
completely civilized that their language and native customs have
even faded from memory. Hale, as did several other writers, com-
pletely overlooked the fact that within 15 years of his time of writing
individuals lived in most of the contemporary New England com-
munities who knew words and sentences in their native Algonkian
dialects, even if they could not converse in them consecutively. He
believed that none of the Indians of Mashpee, of Gay Head, or of
Middleboro, the remnants of the Nauset and Wampanoag tribes,
none of the Narragansett of Rhode Island, none of the Mohegan,
1 (a) The Modern Pequots and their Language. J. D. Prince and F. G. Speck. Amer. Anthrop., vol. 5,
No. 2 (1903).
(b) Glossary of the Mohegan-Pequot Language. J.D. Prince and F.G.Speck. Amer. Anthrop., vol. 6,
No. 1 (1904).
(c) A Modern Mohegan-Pequot Text. F.G.Speck. Amer. Anthrop., vol. 6, No. 4 (1904).
(d) Dying American Speech-Echoes from Connecticut. J. D. Prince and F. G. Speck. Proceedings
Amer. Phil. Soc., vol. xm, No. 174 (1904) .
(e) A Mohegan-Pequot Witchcraft Tale. F.@.Speck. Jour. Amer. Folk-Lore, vol. xvi, No. 61 (1903).
(f) The Name Chahnameed. J.D. Prince. Ibid.
(g) Some Mohegan-Pequot Legends. F.G. Speck. Jour. Amer. Folk-Lore, vol. xvi (1904).
(hk) Remnants of the Nekantics. F.G. Speck. Southern Workman, February, 1918.
(i) Notes of the Mohegan and Niantic Indians. F.G. Speck. Anthropological Papers of Amer. Mus.
Nat. Hist., N. Y., vol. 11 (1909).
(j) Decorative Art of the Indian Tribes of Connecticut. F.G.Speck. Anthropological Series of Geolog-
ical Survey of Canada, No. 10 (1915).
(k) Medicine Practices of the Northeastern Algonkians. F.G.Speck. Proceedings of the Nineteenth
Congress of Americanists, Washington, 1915. Washington, 1917.
2Jn his Preliminary Report on the Linguistic Classification of Algonquian Languages, Twenty-eighth
Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn. (1912), Dr. Truman Michelson hesitated to classify Mohegan and Pequot
definitely.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 207
Pequot, and Nehantic remaining in Connecticut, nor any Scatticook
in the western part of the same State, remembered anything of their
native tongues. That he was not correctly informed on _ these
interesting vitalities of aboriginal life appeared evident when, through
patience and fortunate circumstances, matter was described and
published concerning the language, while some indications appeared
of a latent knowledge of old customs and beliefs illustrated by actual
ethnological specimens. At Mohegan there lived at this time at
least one who, as we have shown, had some systematic knowledge of
a New England Indian language. A body of other information on
customs could then, and some still can be, harvested from the de-
scendants of these same interesting groups.
First appearing as an organized tribe under the celebrated leader,
Unceas, the Mohegan gradually assumed the prominence of a great
political factor in southern New England. Although the name
Morhicans (Mohegan) is given a place on a map of the region dating
from 1614 (pl. 15), their ancestry was chiefly Pequot, evidenced by
many sources, Uncas himself having been one of the sachems of that
nation. How they gradually developed a separate nationality, which
was emphasized by the part they took in aiding the English to accom-
plish the extermination of the Pequot and later the Narragansett, is
generally well known. They absorbed control of the Nipmuck north
of them and the Tunxis and other tribes westward across the Con-
necticut River.!. Only one tribe, the Nehantie (Niantic), their
neighbors on the shores of Long Island Sound between the Niantic
and the Connecticut Rivers, was, it seems, affected favorably by the
Mohegan expansion. They became finally absorbed by the latter
sometime after 1850. The composite character of the historic
Mohegan is well shown by a review of the descent of the various
families constituting the tribe, which shows that practically all of the
tribes in the surrounding territory contributed more or less to the
erowth of the Mohegan community. It naturally follows that the
material and mental life of the Mohegan should be regarded as some-
thing of a blend of the minor ethnological types represented among
the peoples inhabiting this immediate region.
The Pequot should undoubtedly be classed as the nation contrib-
uting most in blood to the composition of the Mohegan, since their
language remained the mother speech. After the tragic extermina-
tion of this tribe in 1636 the exiles were distributed more or less as
slaves among the Mohegan and Narragansett. De Forest has com-
piled the references in colonial documents showing the large number
of those which came into the hands of Uncas. This increase aug-
1 De Forest, History of the Indians of Connecticut, 1851, pp. 182, 254-258, and 376, gives an account of the
expansion of the Mohegan under Uncas, covering the territories of the Nipmuck, Tunxis, and Hammon-
asset. The Tunxis residing at Farmington on Connecticut River and the Hammonasset on the western
shore of the mouth of the river were by early authors assigned to the Mattabesec (Wappinger) group.
208 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
mented the numbers and power of the Mohegan to such an extent
that in speaking of the language and ethnology of the tribe it seems
proper to adopt the hyphenated term Mohegan-Pequot. So far as
information is available we have no means of estimating the actual
proportion of Pequot blood prior to 1861. In that year, however, a
body of commissioners published a report on the land holdings of
the tribe and submitted a census of the individuals, with the state-
ment of their tribal ancestry evidently based on information given
by the Indians themselves. Among the 79 individuals listed as
Mohegan, 16 asserted themselves to be of Pequot descent, rang-
ing from one-half to one-eighth.2 It should be recalled that two
bands of Pequot were established in Connecticut in colonial times
just across the Thames River, not much more than 12 miles distant
from the Mohegan village. Nevertheless, the intermarriages between
the two people in recent times have amounted to nothing, owing to
a traditional dislike between them arising from the part played by
the Mohegan in aiding the English to effect their downfall. The
Pequot, for their part, have continued a separate existence on their
side of the river to this day.’
It may be worth while adding a word or two in corroboration of
historical testimony as to the linguistic and ethnological affinity of
the two groups. A comparison of two modern Mohegan glossaries
with the actual Pequot terms collected by President Stiles at Groton,
Conn., more than a century and a half ago,‘ shows the two to have
been as close in phonetics and lexicon as, one might say, British and
American; a comparison which seems to hold in many respects
between the people in general with almost amusing consistency.
The linked cultural identity of the real Pequot and the Mohegan-
Pequot permits us from the standpoint of our Mohegan information
to assign classification to a rather wide area in eastern Connecticut,
a considerable help in filling up the gaps in the culture areas of this
little-known region.
The Mohegan-Pequot have undoubtedly assimilated some Narra-
gansett blood, but to what extent it would be impossible to say
beyond quoting the previously mentioned report of 1861, which
designated Narragansett descent to three individuals among the
Mohegan at fhat time. Among the present-day members of the
?T have included under this listing four whose Pequot ancestry was not specified, though it should have
been, since their parents were so designated.
§ An old original Pequot wooden corn mortar (pl. 16, 0) obtained in 1920 from Nathaniel Latham, of
Stonington, shows the characteristic scalloped base which appears as a feature in the mortar construction
of this immediate group of tribes. This elaborated feature does not occur in the mortars of the Massa-
chusetts bands. The latter have plain straight sides.
4This vocabulary was taken down in 1764. The forms recorded therein show practically no deviation
from the Mohegan given here, even after the wide lapse of 158 years; rather remarkable nonchangeability
for languages which have lived only in oral form.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 14
FIDELIA A. H. FIELDING, THE LAST SPEAKER
OF THE MOHEGAN-PEQUOT LANGUAGE,
TAKEN SEPTEMBER, 1902, AT MOHEGAN,
CONN., DURING THE ANNUAL MOHEGAN
"WIGWAM” FESTIVAL
Sadlul ONIYOSHDIAN AGNV
NVSSHOW SHI AO NOILVOOT SHL SNIMOHS 30XNOS LS3SINTYVA SHL ‘v19l LNOGVY AO dVW HOLNa
Resrp29 )) SS Ye j
_ cmmbninecee' Sv) VASNI YY
Q /v0aNNaS
ve ‘
a
Mts00 ai gol
Z T SS Xs a
71h aA gg / ao 0S agin 7 a : ~ \ Snapper uryn JS Bee
renee om mh (ENG:
Sa
deg ;
(ork gor / pa Ng
Sedan] jhe tans ne borsalsy NCO VAOYWS.mesmage *
K_prenbritrsena hecag aqua te bleh, aha
we Zory|tog GS RU (JeaG wemrapar 05% 1/ a
\ oS \ A, : l
St 3lW1d LYOd3SeY TVANNY GHYIHL-ALYOS ASOIONHLA NVOIYAWY 40 Nvaydna
ras
“op
t=
CNNOO ‘SWA1 LSVa YVSN ‘LNIOd 4OV1E LV NOILVAUSSSY OILNVHSN G10 WOYS) YVLHOW
N3SGOOM OLLNVHSN °° !;NNOO ‘NOLONINOLS WOYS YVLHOW NA3GOOM LONOAd GSAHVO '@ *(NOILVGONNOSA
SASH 'NVIGNI NVOIYSWV SHL 40 WNASNW) 31LSad 3NOLS GNV YVLYOW NS3GOOM GaAk8VO NVOSHOW ‘D
ADOIONHLA NVOIMAWY 4O NVvVaYN
91 3LV1d LYOd3aY IWANNV GYIHL-ALYOS
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 17
a, MOHEGAN MAN POUNDING PARCHED CORN IN
WOODEN MORTAR; 6, CHARLES MATHEWS
(NEHANTIC-MOHEGAN) AND OLD STONE WASH-
BASIN; «, EDWIN FOWLER AND ANOTHER OF THE
OLD STONE WASHBASINS AT THE FIELDING
HOMESTEAD
(9tyoud pue vovy [[Ny) (uoywuuey] “yyy Aq ydesF0.0qq4)
MYOMIGNVH YAH AO NAWIO3dS V SI HONOd
G30vsd SHL (216) ‘YASINS0R0) OILNVHAN GOO18-11N4 V ‘(HONSNON AOYHAW) SMSHLVA AYNSH ‘SY
8lL 3ALV1d LYOd5yY IVANNY GHIHL-ALYO4 ADOTIONHL
1 NVOIYAWYV 40 Nvayna
(eddeq) wetata “MM Aq ydeisojoyq)
(SM3AIA OML) OILNVYHAN ‘HONSNON ‘V VLOIS
61 3LV1d LYOd3Y TVANNYV GYIHL-ALYOS ASOIONHLA NVOIYAWY JO NvayHna
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 209
tribe the Tantaquidgeon ° family recognizes the same in part. Dia-
lectic or other influence from this source, however, may be regarded
as negligible.
Among the minor tribes whose local culture and dialect were evi-
dently rather closely related to the Narragansett were the Western
Nehantic.° They deserve particular notice. The location of this
small tribe has already been given. With the decline of this band
its descendants seemed to have turned toward Mohegan as a refuge.
Until recently there were several individuals of pure Nehantic blood
(see pls. 18, 19, 21) living there who had removed from their proper
habitat on Long Island Sound near East Lyme. Four of the present
inhabitants of Mohegan are therefore one-half Nehantic, and some of
these have children there. In 1861 there were six of this classifica-
tion. The culture contribution of this small group can, however,
have been very insignificant, even if it differed at all from that of the
Mohegan residents. The Nehantic have been regarded also as an
offshoot of the Narragansett.’
Immigrants from the Tunxis tribe were at times accorded a haven
at Mohegan, as their declining numbers left them a prey to the en-
croachments of the whites. The Tunxis, a small nation, occupied a
neighborhood on the Connecticut River near the site of Hartford.
Just what their dialectic peculiarities may have been we have no
record to show, beyond several assertions that they belonged to the
Mattabesec or Wappinger confederation, which extended from the
fHludson to the Connecticut south of the latitude of Poughkeepsie.
They are reputed to have been later subject to Uncas. After the
Revolution some of them joined the Stockbridge Mahican. One of
the Tunxis descendants persisted at Mohegan until within about 30
years ago. This was an old woman, Pually Mossuck, who died about
1895, leaving some scattered offspring, Caroline and David Jones and
Mary Taylor. The name Mossuck was noted by De Forest as
occurring in his time (1852), borne by an old man living in Litchfield.*
In 1804 some of them still held land in Farmington under the care of
an overseer.
5 This name is given as ‘‘Tantiquieson, a Moheague captain,”’ in Winthrop’s Journal, 11, 380-381, quoted
by Drake, Biography and History of the Indians, ete. (1837), Book II, p. 69. De Forest (History of the
Indians of Connecticut, p. 191) also refers to one of Uncas’s captains of this name.
6 Since the account of Nehantic ethnological survivals was published in 1909 (Speck, ref. (h) and (i), p. 206
of this paper) two additional facts concerning the band havecometohand. Oneisthe word wakedjana’k,
remembered by Mrs. Skeesuck as an expression often used by her mother (Mercy Nonsuch), a full-blood
Nehantic woman who died in 1913. This means, ‘‘Oh my goodness!” and corresponds to Mrs. Fielding’s
Mohegan exclamation wai’kodja’mank‘, ‘‘Ohmy!”’ Next we traced an old wooden corn mortar (pl. 16, c)
which had been taken from the Nehantic reservation at East Lyme and had fallen into the hands of white
people. It had presumably belonged to the Wawkeet family of Nehantic. In form, and in the peculiarity
of the scalloped carved base and handles at the sides, this interesting mortar is identical with those used at
Mohegan (pls. 16, a; 17, a).
7 W. Hubbard, A Narrative of the Indian Wars in New England, etc., 1607-1677, p.49. Stockbridge,
1803.
§ De Forest, History of the Indians of Connecticut, p. 375
210 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
One, at least, of the tribes of eastern Long Island contributed
individuals to the Mohegan nation. At the present day the Fowler
family is of remote paternal Montauk descent. We should, I think,
hesitate in classifying the Montauk and its affiliated tribes inhabiting
the eastern portion of Long Island intimately with the Mohegan-
Pequot, since we have so little information on the dialectic and
culture properties of the Long Islanders. The inhabitants of the
eastern portion of the island differed, however, from those of the
western portion, an assumption fairly well founded through historical
and archeological contributions by various writers.° Since, how-
ever, the Montauk and their allies were in close political and com-
mercial contact with the Pequot and Mohegan-Pequot, it may be,
I presume, fairly safe to assume that something more than mere
social relations existed between the two groups.’ The eastern Long
Island group under consideration, however, according to Michelson,
fell within the confines of the larger Massachusetts-N arragansett-
Pequot dialectic division.'!
To properly understand the composite character of the southern
New England tribes, especially those nearest the Hudson River
and the New York State boundary, it is necessary to revert for a
moment to the question of Iroquois influence. The early accounts
of the region are replete with reference to the constant friction
between the two stocks, the Iroquois, as usual, the aggressors, as
successful in their cultural conquest as they were in their political
invasion. There seems to have been no retreat for the tribes border-
ing on Long Island Sound as far as Cape Cod. It was therefore
inevitable that the institutions and manufactures of the Algonkian
should have been modified by contact with the more advanced
Iroquois. We may even remark the survival of such an influence
in the decadent ethnological characteristics of the southern New
England peoples as they are revealed to us in the local records and
in modern survivals. In architecture, implements, ceramics, basketry,
beaded and quilled embroidery, costuming, and decorative designs
the testimony is abundant for similar properties existing in both
®R. P. Bolton, New York City in Indian Possession, Indian Notes and Monographs, Museum of the
American Indian (Heye Foundation), vol. 11, No. 7 (1920), p. 271, gives evidence from historical sources,
chiefly land deeds, showing affiliations of the western Long Island tribes with the Delaware subtribes
rather than with those of eastern Long Island. A. B. Skinner, Archaeological Investigations on Man-
hattan Island, ibid., vol. 11, No. 6 (1920), p. 212, summarizes the convincing archaeological evidence for a
similar conclusion. (Cf. also R. B. Dixon, Proceedings of American Antiquarian Society, April, 1914, p. 9.)
M. R. Harrington’s unpublished material on Long Island ethnology shows also that a difference appears
in a careful study of the two sections of the island.
10 De Forest has much to say concerning Long Island and Connecticut Indian commerce and similarity.
Mrs. Fielding related several folk tales referring to social intercourse between the two. (Cf. Speck, ref.
Gi), p. 197.) Drake discusses the same (op. cit., Book IT, p. 101)
1! Michelson, map with Preliminary Report on Linguistic Classification of Algonquian Tribes, Twenty-
eighth Ann. Rept. Bur. Amer. Ethn, (1912). W. W. Tooker in several papers exaphasized the similarity
of Montauk with Massachusetts.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY PA
areas, the Iroquois evidently somewhere responsible. The ceremonial
functions of wampum, clan inheritance, some elements of medicinal
superstitions and folklore likewise reflect a similar influence.”
The ethnological content of Mohegan-Pequot culture is therefore
valuable to the ethnologist, because it represents what was charac-
teristic of a large area in southern New England stretching from
Narragansett Bay to the Connecticut River and north approximately
to the Massachusetts line, specifically embracing at least three prom-
inent tribal groups, the original Pequot, the western Nehantic, and
the later Mohegan-Pequot. On the map (pl. 20) I have undertaken
to outline the determinable groups. It is most fortunate, accordingly,
that the Mohegan maintained themselves for so long a time and
fulfilled the function of conserving the type dialect of the area until
at least some specimens of it, such as they are, could have reached the
hands of investigators. They have preserved for us the only possible
existing source of information on the life of this immediate group.
The remaining Pequot in Connecticut have become hopelessly
deculturated, while the Long Island remnants lost their language
before records of it were made. West of the Connecticut River the
one band at Seatticook, which remained fairly intact until recently,
belonged outside of this group with the lower Hudson River group
of Wappinger, so falling into classification as an intermediate between
the Mohegan-Pequot of southern New England and the Mahican
or perhaps the Munsee dialects.
The other southeastern New England subdivisions, the Narragan-
sett and Massachusetts (Natick), were more fortunate in receiving
attention from the early missionaries, only the Nauset and Wam-
panoag having been specifically overlooked by the recorders of native
life and language of early times. Practically all of these groups,
however, are still represented by more or less segregated bands of
descendants in Rhode Island and Massachusetts, from whom some
very fragmentary but, nevertheless, helpful contributions may be
hoped for.
A further note concerning the southern New England Indians will
remind us that in 1788 many of the Mohegan, Pequot, Narragansett,
Tunxis, Montauk, and some Wampanoag withdrew, combined under
the name of Brotherton Indians under the leadership of Samson
Occum, a converted Mohegan, and settled among the Oneida, in
oughby, Pottery of the New England Indians, Putnam Anniversary Volume 1909, p. 97; G. H. Perkins,
Aboriginal Remains in Champlain Valley, American Anthropologist, n. s. vol. 11 (1909), p. 607; A. B
Skinner, Archeological Investigations on Manhattan Island; Indian Notes and Monographs, Museum
of the American Indian (Heye Foundation) (1920), vol. 11, Iv, 6, pp. 153, 210; R. B. Dixon, The Myth-
ology of the Central and Eastern Algonkins; Journal of American Folk-Lore (1909), No. LXXXII;
The Early Migrations of the Indians of New England, Proceedings of American Antiquarian Society,
April, 1914; De Forest, History of the Indians of Connecticut (1857), pp. 65-66, 289, etc.; and the writer’s
Decorative Art and Basketry of the Indian Tribes of Connecticut; Geological Survey of Canada, Anthro-
pological Series, No. 10 (1915).
Zi, TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [eTH. ANN. 43
New York. Later, with the Oneida in 1833, they moved to Wis-
consin, where they now continue to exist as a band numbering about
200 souls. Considerable light may still be thrown on the southern
New England area by a detailed study of the composite exiled band,
and this is a particularly urgent need at present.'
MOHEGAN POPULATION
It may not be out of place to present here for the historian and
sociologist a series of estimates of the population of-the Mohegan at
different periods, to show incidentally how a small native community
has withstood annihilation for almost two centuries, although sur-
rounded by an aggressive and growing European population.2 The
small tribe has shown a remarkable tenacity, despite progressive
dilution of blood, an illustration of the occasional persistency of
small racial bodies within larger ones.
1704. “150 warriors” (estimated total 750 by De Forest, op. cit., p. 316).
1743. “100-120 men”’ (estimated 400—500 by De Forest, op. cit., p. 346).
1774. 206 New London and Montville, 61 Norwich, 21 Lebanon, 28 Colchester,
i 30 Preston; total, 346. (De Forest, p. 474, quoting Mass. Hist. Soe.
Coll., vol. x, p. 118.)
1782. 135 (History of Montville, Conn., Baker).
1786. The removal took place to the Oneida country, under Samson Occom,
and the formation of the Brotherton band, which later removed to
Wisconsin.
1797. ‘‘Supposed to be 400” (statement by Kendall, see 1807, below).
1804. 84 (Mooney, in Handbook of Amer. Inds., Bull. 30, Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
article Mohegan).
1807. 69 ‘fon their lands” (E. A. Kendall, Travels through North America, etc.,
1807-8. N. Y. (1809), p. 301).
1822-1825. 300 (Mooney, op. cit., probably from census, Jedidiah Morse).
1832. 350 (ibid.).
1848. 125 (De Forest, p. 488). 25-30 full bloods, about 60 on the reservation.
1860. 85 (60 on reservation, 25 residing elsewhere). This is an accurate census
by commissioners appointed by the State. (Rep. of Committee on the
Mohegan Lands, Hartford, 1861, p. 4.)
1902. ‘About 100” (Speck, ref. i, 1909, p. 185), including those scattered
through eastern Connecticut. These were enumerated by name.
1910. 22 (U. 8. Census 1910, Ind. Pop. in U. 8., p. 116). Evidently lessened
through the claim of some of the Indians who passed as whites. The
enumerations for the eastern tribes are, however, generally worthless
in this census.
1920. 122 (enumeration of the Mohegan Association); 31 at Mohegan; 73 in
Norwich, New London, and neighboring Connecticut towns; 18
scattered.
1Since the above was written a collection of texts and linguistic material has been obtained from this
group by Dr. Truman Michelson for the Bureau of American Ethnology.
2 Hubbard (Narrative of Ind. Wars in New Engl. (1803) p. 52) remarked on the Mohegan being less
numerous but more warlike than the Narragansett.
BUREA
MAP
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 20
KX. 4x.
x eX,
x KOKI KOK a Peg
Va Bgl ty tg Py: * x RKC
x, OKOKER COKE KEE OR IRI COKE
OK KOK ERK AIG KEIR
Kea *
x K
OK KOK OK Ks *
x Ke eh) KEK KOKO KARR ERRNO
x. 4 >, OOOO
gi alate fe sett ARR
©,
YQ
2
QL
2
x2
22
2
OY
3 PX Be5
OX KO
SOUTHERN NEW ENGLAND
CULTURE AREAS
Showing location.of Mohegan-Pequot Dialectic
Boundaries, neighboring dialects and their affinities.
Y Dialects eastofConn. | @) Location of villages
__-- Approx. dialectic A River (Mohegan-Pequot) of Indian survivors
boundaries. L Dialects (Nipmuck) into recent times
sesveee PEQUOT-Mohegan bdys.
SJ N Dialects (Mass-Wampanoag-
\CHOGUE So: ale ence cas NS Dialects (Meet hati uncertain)
ee Sete SARKOCED " aivad por “7A BC Blocks of territory Claimed by Mohegans Free Dialects westof Conn.River and on
SIE aT MMe Kn AS SEPATUCK™ in three tracts after deathof Uncasabout 683 Long Island (Wappinger-Mattabesec)
MAP SHOWING DISTRIBUTION OF TRIBES AND DIALECTS IN CONNECTICUT AND ADJOINING REGIONS. (BASED ON CLASSIFICATION OF Ree
AMER. E on I
ALGONKIAN DIALECTS BY JOHN R. SWANTON AND TRUMAN MICHELSON, TWENTY-EIGHTH ANN. REPT. BUR.
Onegai
wit Male dh a AMONG 9 Pale
Let CS aa rea B70 AAO LAMA A MONTE! S aviwone sAM
OE MOe sar AMOR CVA MOT MAW (A UMOUYS 2TOSIAIG Yoo
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY Zils
The latest phase of Mohegan history is the formation of the
Mohegan Indian Association at Mohegan in 1920. The leading
members of the band founded this association to preserve the in-
tegrity of the tribe and to effect certain aims along social and legal
lines. Forty-nine of the Mohegan are enrolled, the officers being
Lemuel M. Fielding, chief (pl. 22, 6); Everett M. Fielding, assistant
chief; Albert E. Fielding, treasurer; Gladys Tantaquidgeon (pls. 23, 6;
24, a), secretary; Mrs. Edith Grey, Miss Mary V. Morgan, Mr.
Julian Harris, and Mrs. Hattie Morgan, councillors.
ESTIMATES OF THE POPULATION OF THE PEQUOT
PROPER
About 3,000 before the Pequot war is the estimate given by early
writers.
1637-38. After the destruction of the Pequot, ‘350 warriors, about 1,250 souls,”
New Haven and Long Island (Mooney, article Pequot, Handbook
of American Indians); 200 warriors, portioned out among friendly
tribes, “about 700 in all’ (‘about 100 warriors to Mohegan, 80 to
Narragansett, 20 to Niantic’’).
1655. Survivors granted two reservations in Connecticut, Mushantuxet (Led-
yard) and Groton.
1674. 1,500 on both reservations (Mooney, op. cit.).
1731. 164 (De Forest, op. cit., p. 427).
1749. 38 Groton band (De Forest, op. cit., p. 432).
1762. 176 (30 families) Groton band (De Forest, op. cit., p. 487); 140 Mush-
antuxet (Ledyard) (Mooney, op. cit.).
1774. 186 Groton band
1776. 151 Mushantuxet |
ma a Bear Kraken) (De Forest, op. cit., p. 482 et seq.).
1848 Ve persons, 3 families, Stonington
* \48 persons, Ledyard
1902. “Less than a score’”’ (C. P. Thresher.’)
1907. ‘About 25” (near Ledyard) (Handbook of American Indians).
1910. 66 (49 in Connecticut, 17 in Massachusetts) (United States Indian Census,
p. 75).
AFFINITIES OF MOHEGAN-PEQUOT WITH HUDSON RIVER
MAHICAN
Having now proceeded toward establishing the boundary limits of
the dialects of the specific Pequot type, we may denote the area by
marking it in an inclosure on a chart of New England showing forth-
with its classification as a member of the Massachusetts-N arragansett
2? Homes and Haunts of the Pequots. New England Magazine, 1902, p. 753.
214 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
division. On the west, across the Connecticut River, were located,!
the so-called Quiripi or 7 dialects, embracing the Mattabesec or
Wappinger confederates, and these extended across Long Island
Sound over the eastern portion of Long Island; on the north Nipmuck,
supposed to have been an / dialect,? and a branch of the Pennacook,
on the northeast Massachusetts, and farther to the east Wampanoag
and Narragansett, the last three of the n type. This gives us five of
the noteworthy variant divisions of the southern New England group,
the dialects fairly uniform in lexicon, but varying phonetically
through r, y, J, and n forms as just indicated.
The affiliations of the larger southern New England group may
now be considered. In spite of the meagerness of detailed and
accurate information, we have some general matter offering points of
contrast with neighboring types, northward in the better-known
Wabanaki and westward in the slightly known Delaware and
Mahican area. These permit us at least to draw out a certain
sense of directional relationships. Upon a second glance the rela-
tionship of the whole southern New England group falls more closely
1 The dialects of Shinnecock and Poosepatuck, or Uncachogue, were mutually intelligible and belonged
also to ther type, as is shown by a vocabulary taken by Thomas Jefferson in 1794 at the Poosepatuck reser-
vation near Mastic. At that time three old women and one girl spoke the language. The original manu-
script in the archives of the American Philosophical Society was examined. It shows a close lexical resem-
blance to Mohegan-Pequot. From the terms given, which unfortunately do not include many verbal
forms, we may show the variation to be only a phonetic one, as follows: Mohegan-Pequot y (Mass.-Narr.
n) (iy=i')=Long Island r, between vowels. Examples:
English Uncachogue
star arraqusac anoqs (Natick)
dog arrum anum (Natick) .
he is handsome woreeco wi'’go (Moh.—Peq.)
good woreecan wigan (Moh.-Peq.)
wuneegan (Natick-Narr.)
fish operamac pi’’yamag (Moh.-Peq.)
fire ruht, yuht wi'yat, yut (Moh.-Peq.)
Other points in Long Island Uncachogue, though based on only a few examples, are: Animate plural
ending, -ank, corresponding to Moh.—Peq. ag; inanimate plural ending, -nus, Moh —Peq. -wne (-unsh).
M. R. Harrington (Journal of American Folk-Lore, Vol. XVI, p. 39) in 1903 gives a Shinnecock vocabulary,
but it does not afford a key to grammatical features.
On the mainland in western Connecticut we have the r forms identical with those of eastern Long Island,
as follows, in the Naugatuck vocabulary given by De Forest (History of the Indians of Connecticut, p. 491)
and Scatticook (Prince and Speck (1903), ref. d).
parched corn rutig (Scatticook) yokeg (Moh—Peq.)
nuhkik (Mass.—Narr.)
snake (diminutive) skukaris (Seatticook) skuksis (Moh.—Peq.)
man rinh (Naugatuck) inn (Moh.—Peq.)
nnin (Mass.—Narr.)
fire ru-u-tah (Naugatuck) (see above)
rut (Seatticook)
On the basis of the above tables, and the statement of Roger Williams that the northern Indians used r, it
appears that the Wappinger-Mattabesee dialects, all having r forms (see below, footnote 2 of this page)
extended from the Connecticut River Valley in Massachusetts southward through western Connecticut
and across to Long Island, covering the central and eastern portion of the island. Hence, the southern
New England dialectic group extended from the western boundary of Connecticut, including Long Island,
and east to Massachusetts Bay.
2? The Indian Grammar Begun, John Eliot (1666), Old South Leaflets no. 52, p.4. ‘‘We Massachusetts
pronounce the n. The Nipmuck Indians pronounce 1, and the Northern Indians pronounce ther. As
instance: we say anum, Nipmuck alum, northern arum, a dog. Soin most words.”
ePEcK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 215
with the Delaware and Mahican-Wappinger, both in speech and in
habits, than with the Wabanaki. Doctor Michelson, referring to
dialect, assents to this probability in his painstaking study of
Algonkian languages. He says: “Pequot and Mohican (Mahican)
are not closely related, though . . . Mohican is more closely related
to Pequot than it is to Delaware-Munsee,”’* and adds orally, ‘as
will be elaborated later.”
His conclusion in reference to Natick and Pequot is based largely
upon phonetic values and upon his analysis of the pronominal
features. There is an additional dialectic mark which is worth con-
sideration as bearing upon the point.
The locatives in -k and -g in Mohegan-Pequot show that it coin-
cides in this particular respect with the Wappinger-Mahican division
on the west rather than with the Massachusetts-Narragansett on the
east. The peculiarity is exhibited in many place names throughout
central and western Connecticut to the Hudson River ending in -k
or-g, while eastward in Rhode Island and Massachusetts the place
names, many of them dialectic cognates with the Connecticut terms,
end in locative -t.
A small vocabulary in De Forest’s History of the Indians of Connec-
ticut provides a little comparative material from the Naugatuck
language, spoken in western Connecticut on the Naugatuck River,
an eastern affluent of the Housatonic. These terms evidently rep-
resent the dialect of the Paugusset tribe and conform in several cases
to the phonetics (r in place of n, J, y) of the Wappinger-Mattabesec
as spoken at Scatticook. They, too, show a close analogy with
Mohegan-Pequot in lexicon, allowing for characteristic 7 equiva-
lents, and some differences in word usage from Massachusetts-
Narragansett, at least to the general extent that we are accustomed
to find in comparing dialects which conform to certain groupings.
Bear, Naugatuck awaususo, M.-P. awasus, contrasts with Massa-
chusetts mashq; man, Naugatuck rink (rin), M.-P. 7n; woman,
Naugatuck wenih (winai), M.-P. winais (denunciative); night,
Naugatuck toofka (misprint for toopka) M.-P. dupka; fire, Naugatuck
ru uh tah, M.-P. yut. This all points a hint as to the intermediate
position of Mohegan-Pequot between its nearest relative, the Mahican-
Wappinger, and Massachusetts-Narragansett. In consequence, not
forgetting, however, that our material covering other desirable points
is so meager, we may venture an indication on the chart of the
relationship.
We are led to it, moreover, from a consideration of the dialectic
graduations toward the Delaware and Mahican-Wappinger divisions,
which link the Massachusetts and eastern Connecticut dialects with
the Hudson River dialects through the intermediate 7 dialects
? Michelson, International Journal of American Linguistics, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 56-47 (1917).
216 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
(Quiripi group *). A word or two on this interesting and little-known
division may be added here, to repeat what Professor Prince noted
concerning some words and phrases rescued at the last moment from
one of the Seatticook Indians living in 1903 on the Housatonic River.°
He assigned to the New England dialect a closer affinity with the
Mahican, a view which has since received support from Doctor
Michelson. The band at Scatticook was composed of fugitives from
the Pequot, Narragansett, Wampanoag, and other eastern bands,
from about 1736 on, seeking refuge with the tribes west of the Con-
necticut River, which were then more remote from contact with the
whites. We see, accordingly, how the southern New England tribes
felt about their own affinities, always turning westward toward the
Hudson rather than northward to the country inhabited by the Waba-
naki. Between the two a completely unfamiliar culture setting,
different historical associations, more widely separated speech, even
open hostility, marked the Wabanaki and the southern New England
group as the offshoots of different waves of Algonkian migration to-
ward the Atlantic coast. Turning to historical matters, it seems
proper now to refer to the opinions of the natives themselves con-
cerning their former migration, opinions which in spite of Doctor
Lowie’s scepticism on the value of native historical traditions, may be
repeated in a sympathetic spirit, since in this case they substantiate
the inclination of internal evidence.
Migration Legend.—In one of the previous papers ® on Mohegan-
Pequot I mentioned Mrs. Fielding’s tradition that her people had
originally come from the Hudson, moving eastward toward the
Connecticut, then following down this river to Long Island
Sound. Another recently recovered document corroborates her
belief and shows that it was widely known among these Indians.
The document referred to I shall quote im full from its source,
Mrs. Emma Baker (pls. 28, 6; 29, d), one of the oldest Mohegan
women, often consulted on ethnological and historical matters
before she died several years ago. ‘‘When a child of 7 years,
my great-great-aunt used to take my sister, brother, cousin, and
myself on the hill near where the church now stands, point to
the northwest, and tell us that was the way that her folks
came, and that we must never forget it, away to the hills of
Taughannick, and after that for several years she used to impress
upon our minds that it was something that we must not forget.”
Still another version of the eastern migration tale finds place in the
4 Trom a statement in Hubbard’s Narrative of Indian Wars in New England, etc., Stockbridge (1803),
p. 244, it may be inferred that the Pocomtuck on Connecticut River, near the location of Springfield, were
closely allied to the Stockbridge Mahican. At their dispersal in 1676 by Major Talcot they fled to Stock-
bridge. Hubbard says they were separate from the Nipmuck. A recent paper by A. B. Skinner, Notes
on Mahikan Ethnology, Bulletin, vol. 2, no. 3, 1925, Public Museum of Milwaukee, furnishes some in-
teresting ethnological information on the Stockpridge Indians.
6 Prince and Speck, ref. d (1994), p. 347.
6 Prince and Speck, ref. a, p. 193; also Speck, refs. g and i, p. 184.
341 SO SGOIYSd OML LV (AdALOZYYSANSDVA ‘ ;
G10 WOUYs) OILNVHAN ‘HONSNON NHOP ‘9 ‘¢ *(SdALOBZYYSNDVG G10 WOH) OILNVHAN ‘'HONSNON ASLAG
q Dd
1@ 3ALW1d 1LYOd3aY TIVANNYV GHYIHL-ALYOS ADOTONHLA NVOIYAWY 40 NV3aYNG
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 22
a, BURRIL FIELDING; 6, LEMUEL M. FIELDING; c, DORIS FOWLER;
d, LORETTA FIELDING. ALL MOHEGAN
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 23
a, LESTER SKEESUCKS IN COSTUME (FROM AN OLD DAGUERREO-
TYPE); 6, GLADYS TANTAQUIDGEON GATHERING HERBS; ec,
MRS. FRANCES (OLNEY) HART, OF NARRAGANSETT-MOHEGAN
DESCENT; ¢d, LEWIS DOLBEARE, NEHANTIC-MOHEGAN
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 24
a, GLADYS TANTAQUIDGEON (MOHEGAN) IN_ COS-
TUME; 6, GROUP OF MOHEGAN AT THE ANNUAL
“WIGWAM” FESTIVAL (AUGUST, 1920); ¢, SCENE IN-
SIDE THE “WIGWAM” AT THE ANNUAL FESTIVAL
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 25
a, ADELINE (MATHEWS) DOLBEARE, NEHANTIC-MOHEGAN; 6,
CYNTHIA FOWLER, MOHEGAN; c¢, ELLA (MATHEWS) AVERY,
NEHANTIC-MOHEGAN; 4d, DELANA (MATHEWS) SKEESUCKS,
NEHANTIC-MOHEGAN
NVDSHOW WIV ‘SYaLsiS GNV NOSSGCING
-VLNVL GIOUVH ‘P !AYOLS (DNIGTAIS) AYVA 9° *NOSDCINOVLNVL GSYsINIM GNV Q1048VH
‘43qTMO4 GNVILYOO ‘¢ ‘NOADGINOVLNVL GSYSINIM GNV YaIMOS FO0ldLVaa GNV sl1duoaq
o
D
P
ADOIONHL]A NVOIYAWY 4O NVvadn|
9% ALV1d LYOdSY IWANNY GHIHL-ALYOs
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 27
a
» HANNAH (HOSCUTT) DOLBEARE 6, MOSES
AND FRANCES FIELDING. ALL MOHEGAN
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 28
ec a
a, PHOEBE (FIELDING) FOWLER; 6, EMMA (FIELDING) BAKER;
c, JOHN TANTAQUIDGEON; d, BURRIL FIELDING. ALL
MOHEGAN
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 217
memory of Lemuel Fielding, a Mohegan, whose father had it from his
father and grandfather, whose lives together cover a span of almost
a century and a half. It asserts that the people came eastward over
a desert, then traversed ‘“‘the great fresh water,’ and finally, driven
by the attacks of the Mohawk, crossed to the eastern side of the
Connecticut, where they made their homes. We might admit that,
collectively and in conjunction with the other evidence, there is some
little weight in the force of this testimony.
The question arises in one’s mind, whence came the Mohegan and
Pequot invaders into the region where they were found in 1614? A
glance at the distribution map shows another aspect of the situation
favorable to the assumption of an irruptive tribal movement, coming
from the north and dividing the Nehantic on Long Island Sound
coast into the well-known eastern and western bands. Historians in
general seem to accept this explanation,’ since it was given by the
Narragansett and Nehantic as the cause of their constant hostility
toward the Pequot during the seventeenth century.
Our reasons for considering the Nehantic and Narragansett as
being closely related come from several sources. The geographical
contiguity and political relationships of the two groups argue some-
thing positive toward the idea that these two people were original
occupants of the coastwise strip of territory before the incursion of
the Mohegan and Pequot. Several references in early documents
mention the Nehantic as having formerly possessed the coast from
Connecticut River eastward to the Wecapaug, and extending inland
some 25 miles. The two bands of Nehantic in later times were con-
sequently the divided portions of the original body. As inhabitants
of the coast contiguous on the east with the Narragansett, their
dialectic and culture status may be assumed to have closely resembled
that of the Narragansett. The few Nehantic culture survivals and
native terms do not furnish denial but a mild affirmative of the matter.
Politically their early unity is betrayed by the knowledge that they
had chiefs in common, and are frequently mentioned together as
combined units whose fortunes were affected by their common aggres-
sors, the Pequot.’ Later the eastern Nehantic became incorporated
with the Narragansett, acquiring even a seemingly dominant position
7 Substantially accepted by De Forest as authentic (De Forest, op. cit., pp. 60-61).
§ Ninigret (Nenekunat, as Roger Williams wrote it) Was primarily sachem of the Nehantic, whom Drake
refers to as ‘‘a tribe of the Narragansetts whose principal residence Was at Wekapaug, now Westerly, in
Rhode Island.” (S. G. Drake, Biography and History of the Indians of North America, 1837, Book II,
p. 67.) Hubbard also stated that the Nehantic were an offshoot of the Narragansett (Hubbard, op. cit.,
p. 49). Miantonomoh in 1642 also referred to the Nehantic as of ‘“‘his own flesh and blood, being allied by
continual intermarriages.’’ The two tribes were united in their hostility to the Mohegan in 1644. In
1647 (ibid. p. 70) the two are again mentioned as one body. The successors of Ninigret, who inherited the
chieftaincy of the Narragansett down to about 1812, when George Ninigret, ‘‘the last crowned King,” died,
were constantly recorded as Nehantic chiefs. (Drake, op. cit., p. 83, quoting Hazard, 11, 152. Some of
Drake’s information (1837) Was obtained from unpublished manuscript of Rev. Wm. Ely. He also relies
upon Collections of Mass. Hist. Soc., LX, 83.)
19078°—28——15
218 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
there, while the western portion of the tribe remained independent
until it came finally to be linked with and absorbed by the Mohegan.
The attitude of the Mohegan and Pequot together toward neighbor-
ing peoples, except the English, seems to have been one of almost
constant hostility. With the English of Connecticut, after the
destruction of the Pequot in 1636, the Mohegan allied themselves—a
coalition between invaders. With the Narragansett they never
appear to have been at peace from the first notices we encounter in
1634 through the whole historic period. The quarrel against the
Narragansett was maintained throughout by the Mohegan after the
Pequot had been dispersed by the English. Under Uncas the control
over frontier tribes on the north toward the Massachusetts border
line, and on the west across Connecticut River, was continued.
Few of the land transfers along Long Island Sound as far as the
Quinnipiac of New Haven were permitted without the consent and
signature of the Mohegan sachem. So much for the reasons why
the broken line is marked on the chart to indicate the dominions
controlled by the Pequot and Mohegan.
One other consideration has a bearing upon the question of the sup-
posed Pequot-Mohegan invasion. Thename Pequot isgiven the mean-
ing ‘“‘destroyers,”’ derived by Trumbull from Paquatauog,? which if
correct is a deviation from the usual practice among the New England
tribes, who carried names which were, in general, geographical.
The reason is obvious in view of the indications just outlined.
Most of the older authorities concur in stating that the Pequot
were invaders. Our summarized testimony comes from the Hub-
bard narrative, which relates how the Pequot, being ‘‘a more fierce,
cruel, and warlike people than the rest of the Indians, came down out
of the more inland parts of the continent and by force seized upon
one of the goodliest places near the sea and became a terror to all
their neighbors.” '° Drake adds ‘‘the time of their migration was
unknown. They made all the other tribes stand in awe.’”’ Gookin,
writing in 1656, spoke of the warlike character and political conquests
of the Pequots, and adds an opinion on their migration.
Yet, even with some knowledge now of the Pequot and Mohegan
dialects, we can not trace earlier habitat through the identities of
speech either among the Delaware, the Mahican, or elsewhere—
unless it be in that little-known region of the upper Connecticut
River in central Massachusetts—since Mahican is not sufficiently
closer, for instance, to Mohegan-Pequot than it is to Massachusetts
(Natick). Otherwise failing to trace Mohegan-Pequot to an earlier
home, we are left to regard the possibility of its having formed a local
group in Connecticut, or in the interior of Massachusetts somewhere,
which expanded and broadened its territory to an extent which in the
eyes of its neighbors practically amounted to an invasion. In such
®J. Trumbull, Indian Names in Connecticut (1881), p. 50.
10 Quoted in Drake, op. cit., Book II, p. 101.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 219
a case the migration traditions we meet with applying to the Mohegan-
Pequot may be relics of an earlier age and might perhaps concern all
the southern New England Algonkian, who, it may be conceded,
undoubtedly did at some time migrate into the coast lands from the
westward; turning toward which region now we find lies in the
direction of their nearest dialectic and cultural affinities, the region
of the Hudson.
The local Mohegan migration legend may be even a reflection of
the general eastern Algonkian migration belief which finds its expres-
sion in the Walam Olum" of the Delaware. To proceed a step
farther in tracing the evidence, we may even cite the passage in this
much-discussed, but evidently authentic, national legend. It says
“Wapanand tumewand waplowaan,” which is translated by
Brinton’s authorities as ‘the Easterners and the Wolves go north-
east,’ and identified in his notes as the “Wapings,’’ Wappinger
(Wappinger-Mattabesee group of western Connecticut), and Minsi.!”
The passage concerned may, it seems probable, refer to the occasion
when the Delaware eastward migration bifurcated in the Hudson
River region, if in the text Wapanand denotes the Wappinger, and
“wolves” denotes the Mahican by one of their synonyms. The
denotations, however, are far from clear. (‘‘The Easterners and those
who were wolves went northeast” is the correct translation of the
passage in Delaware, as I have learned in a recent study of the Walam
Olum text, conducted under the authorization of the Pennsylvania
Historical Commission, with the aid of James Webber, a Delaware
ex-chief, as informant.)
As valid as the theory of eastern Algonkian migration has come to
be regarded by ethnologists, no one has, so far as I am aware, at-
tempted to give a date for the New England migration legend except
Doctor Dixon.” He thinks that the bands of southwestern New
England were the most recent comers and were affiliated with the
Lenapé, and that the latter arrived on the coast as late as the end
of the fifteenth century. This, however, I judge might be placed
somewhat earlier.
The question of the identity of the population which antedated
the recent historic tribes in the coast regions does not concern us
here, since the present inquiry bears only upon the contemporary
Indians, but the assumption of earlier waves of Algonkian migra-
tion having entered the whole northeastern region represents, as
Doctor Dixon outlines it, the concurrence of general opinion.
THE TRIBAL NAME AND SYNONYMS
A few secondary matters concerning identity arise from the material
at hand which seem to deserve a word or two of comment. It will
be noticed that Mrs. Fielding uses the term Mohi'’ks to denote her
11 The Lenape and their Legends, D. G. Brinton, pp. 208-209.
12 Brinton, op. cit., p. 232.
1 R. B. Dixon, Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society, April, 1914, p. 11.
220 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
tribe. That this is a proper native appellation is likewise shown by
the occurrence of the term Moheges in the Pequot vocabulary col-
lected so long ago by President Stiles.! It was evidently a primary
tribal synonym, the meaning of which may be, as writers have
frequently taken it to be, ‘‘wolf,’”’ an animal listed as mucks in the
Stiles vocabulary. The ordinary term Mohegan has itself caused
some discussion as to its origin and application. The occurrence of
the synonymous tribal name, Mahican, on the upper Hudson has
unavoidably led to some confusion of the two peoples. They were,
beyond doubt, two somewhat distinct groups having those connec-
tions which arose through being neighboring divisions of the eastern
middle Algonkian. Cases of name similarity like this strike our
attention frequently in other parts of the Algonkian region. Whether
or not the Mohegan consciously acquired their name from the
older group on the Hudson we should not be so sure, though in a
former paper I perhaps unwisely implied as much. The name
Mahican,? coming from the original of the same form, probably
means “wolf,’’ while Mohegan develops from Mohigannewuk, which
may, like the other synonym, mean the same, though we have no such
translation applied to it. This form of the tribal name, modified
somewhat, ‘‘Mmooyauhegunnewuck,”’ however, occurs in a native
document drawn up by the Mohegan in 1786.5 De Forest (op. cit.,
p. 448) publishes a similar petition of 1749 and spells the word
“Moyanhegunnewog,”’ making an evident error in n for uw. Since
these names were written by the Indians themselves, or at least
dictated by them, they should be regarded as reliable synonyms. 24 ki'lu’na (Pen.).
Good#22-2 Ef Eesuee Witpanss5, Sab 28 wunnegen-_-___--- uli’gon.
Spoons *ses2ee" aee | giya’m’an____.---| kena’m, kuna’m,
kunna’m.
LByeeiWol eo ya’ catwang_------- nashauonk-------- nasawoga’n.
Parched corn flotr_| yo’kiig_.-_--.--_- nokik« === see =
evs strong———= ===2! TONS Kas ee er meniki2 == == moli’’kigu.
5
Yesterday___------ Wawa eyicey giles Seen wunnunkwi_-_-~--- wla’ngwe.
Hejgives2222-¢ se Miya Sst Ioelae ee Soa eases mi’‘lau.
Hines S25 = Berea WaWA WAG Bae oe ae pgs eg ee
Ti Nooksicleary nices|\awisyion fwad ee | ae ee eee ee | uli’ ‘nangwat.
? © |
Rain. == 2esee ee ZUVCOVaANe = eee =| SOkAN OD ssa == | zo’glan.
Roneiess= === SVL VOX 1 ee ae ene evens seen wi la‘lo.
Heithinks. 522 2148 (a) yewteml = £2) anantamls2- 2252 — | —la’Idamen.
ithinkses2 2 eee nataiya’tam _-_ ~~~ | nuttenantamun____| ndela’Idaman.
Hejworkss = 22 eee= Pio AVAL = = ae | anakausu --------- alo’ kazu.
Helgiviess== se aa= rman eto) (rant rat——)) || ap ee | mil —.
Hen: = ees IOC see a a eat eM Ons he ee |
a4 | | .
Sores eee SURW ag Oc eee ee | ee ee siwaldamen, re-
| pent.
5 oa || nepanna (Narr.)_- -
Hiv ne an ae vale) of: WA een es Ue E ‘ : )
| napanna Wat) a
Here, there-_------ yudar’,nivdal’ -=--=|{--cs-—=2---5—-— >= | yuda’li, ni‘da’li.
He wishes it______-_ tea ntams. ee | ahechewontam _____ (Pen.) etewe’ld-
| | amon.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 283
The substitution of y for r and ¢ is also shown by the treatment.
of English loan words.
Tateeeene- = yats. broomesss==.=— bityu’m.
blanket--—--~-~ = biya’ngat. Tigo ty ee ee bi‘yaita.
plates ==s--<=4 bivyo’ ti’. breakfast______ bityo’djapas.
From Mrs. Fielding’s verbal forms, which are by no means com-
plete, a tabulation of pronominal elements is as follows:
Mouercan-Prquot PRONOMINAL TABLES
Indicative mood, personal prefixes and terminations of the verb; as exhibited in the
extant material
Singular I thou, you
Iminansitiye= a eee Nowe lie ee | ga-
1G ee Boe ae a Se ee eed SO ey AL Eee Se barre ee ga=ni'®
Wewexclusivemrctas 2s 2 Ree ee ee es es ae
Usain CLUSI coe Serene es ee ne es | ee ee See eee |
ANS = 53 See ee ee en S| ee See ee
NAOT a eee ne ene creme ee (ee ee ae eee are
? Oe ane fe or Re
shinee a = See, ee eer | Ve owe
[SACO Wee ene |
Behera (UTI a be) ee ee | ee ees |
Them, it (inanimate) ---._------ Co ee |
| |
Plural he (animate) | it (inanimate) they (animate) | they (inanimate)
ied |-O nazar =VOu yl) === Oi eee ae |
Intransitive__-..._.__- -¢ (sh)
ont ae oe a -wak, -wag__||
Mees Beeston 2 2 2h WO O11) Oem Rone bas ers Seen |e eee
Usvexclusives=2— == 5" | es | ae ee | ee ae
WSN GU Sly comers ann | meee es Sytem | Pee oe eee ame
AU everr = Sok ee eee Se Se eae Fare See || Cones Sor apy em BoP ee Se ee
(0) bE ee eee Ba-On gests | fase |e ee
; wo=0Wwa----|
Hime soe eae | WPA (2 ot ni ME!
Po aa ee |
Them (animate)_______ WOOP a aes |e oe WO-Wag ___
; : WO CL pees
It (inanimate) __--____- a | Poot Su8 Saks wo=nau-- _-
Them (inanimate) —____ WO=QCi2eaae|-ssaoeseseos|Lcessnesecese
J '
A short list of Mohegan stems and morphological elements, with
examples of their use from the texts and previously published lexical
material, will prove serviceable for purposes of comparison.
-wang denotes the abstract noun. It is usually used with verbs
in the third personal form (a). In another sense it does service as
a verbal noun termination, ‘‘that which is so and so,” or ‘that.
which does so and so” (b); and then passes over into an instru-
284 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
mental ending which is normally -ig. (c). (Mass.-Narr. (a, b)
-waonk, -d0onk; Wabanaki (a, b), -wangan, (c) -igan.)
(a) gamu’duwang_-------- theft.
mol ke wan oe eee strength.
Wi Zowal ges e ae name.
Vel CA Wiel) Cae breath.
Mite wwe) ee ee food.
natai’namang--------- my help.
yao’'tamwang-_____----- thought.
lavdesuwan tees oe e= reading.
wu’skasuwang- ------- writing.
wi'ya’mowang- ------- health.
(b)) ga’ ckatcang-=-==2=--~— ‘that which passes over’; a supernatural mani-
festation resembling the ‘‘will-o’-the-wisp.”
Dontiwndwange= = =e = knife.
dadkwal) Ste ee corn mortar.
kwoldian gis = sea ea= throat.
(c), bal ckispe se = 222s aes gun (‘that which explodes’’).
bumbatceeeeae= === binding strip on a basket (“runner’’ (?)).
gw msn fee pestle (‘long stone implement”’).
WILLS] Wilt 2 a book (‘‘written’’).
-d functions apparently as a participial ending. (Mass.-Narr.
-d, -t, Wabanaki, -t.)
WA Cly cut 0; ee having; when they have.
Skemodis as = aaa an aa finding; when he finds.
Wiy amr amMod es] === ——=s=— feeling well; when one feels well.
deipkaudl-eat ose bes sue it being night; when it is night.
Sure corn Ue ee being good; anything good.
Mo, pudweesu ae oes eee = dying; when they die.
ail wad wee ee oe ee == being; things are so and so.
LiwaGte fee ee vole ose saying; as he says.
mi ibcuds ee ae es eating; thing to be eaten.
Mot cka wade == = ene = looking for him; when you look for him.
bizyund 5 eee eee coming; when he comes here.
Doidamades=s=== === a= hearing; when one hears it.
WOU OGe = a> = Set abeermbr rey ee knowing; when we know.
SD LON e <2 = eee ee ee staying; place where he is staying.
WUStOGL =< See = See making it.
yagwane’ngwad_______---- looking as though; appearing as.
Wis Von Swag. == es === looking well; favorable.
zu’ ganangwad __---------- looking like rain.
wi yonangwad_____-_---_- looking like favorable weather.
gitizakod! = 222 2.22256 __.. daytime; it being day.
guspkwad. 2) = 25-22 soo cloudy day; it being a shut-in day.
sheaynami:des. == ee excessive eating; a proper name of the Mohegan-
Pequot trickster in mythology.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 285
-ian, -iwn, -ian,) subjunctive, pronominal termination, used evi-
-yan, -yun, -yan dently for first and second personal forms.
tekwa/dican. ===. ---222 when drunk; literally, ‘““‘when hit” (takwa’).!
wombu’nsi‘yan_________-- if I live in the morning.
ROSA DANS = = eee eee if you are tired.
Masa PULA eee when you will die; if you should die.
da’bi gami*’teiyan_-_-___--- can you eat it?
madama’moyan________--- when I do not feel well.
Vomdoytines === === when I am hungry.
WOLOM See eee ee ee es as (he) can know.
nugataiye’na___-_-------- how may you be? a formal salutation.
There are a number of verbal forms showing a -mo element, which
can not well be explained from this material itself.
Vr SUC OPTI G5 ee ee ee growing; are plenty; abound.
batkeamo n= === == =n it broke away (referring to rain clouds).
MISS VAeKOM Ones ae ee that is ever so.
Mayda mOns ere I was hungry; I kept getting hungry.
yomdamose= = tsa= 2 asa being hungry.
WinyaumeMOn—==—- anon feeling (feels) well.
DistiCO°M Osea eae ene coming; comes.
Owinksumossee a= ae oe he whistles; whistling.
Mp ending. (Mass.-Narr. -(a)e ((a) sh); Wabanaki
-C, no correspondent; Mahican -n.)
Papa Cee ee close it; shut (the door)
LOW CLS te ae ee Oe go out.
atau se eee ee get up.
biggyianc?-Se ss ae seees |
biiyacteee ee ene fp come
Gyo dewitss2= === ee hurry up.
Madan sass. soe eee ae sit down.
awa gilt Cs run.
Pagane Se = ae aa eee, put it down.
OL a boY jo ee Se ee place it.
SN aCe eee a ee sit down.
katwick c= 362 ae he go to sleep.
Te Cae a ae ee en say it.
hei
ee WOMG CMe Saas EHS oe | wash (yourself).
gichitect=.--=-— 2 J
odancee aes ee ee take off.
sisnancG_s 2 Sane ele hs carry it.
Gyjunyaity. cca ee warm yourself.
ASC Oc Cee = ees ee ee look at it.
MOO ClG 0 Cease go after; go seek.
kewanbGuam Cee == a taste it.
Bap wi Cee eee. oa come in.
yundja names === == /=-- = open it.
Makan Cas See a pick it.
1 An interesting correspondence is Penobscot, taga’m@zi, literally “hit yourself,’ which means ‘‘take a
drink.”
286 TRIBES AND DIALECTS OF CONNECTICUT [ETH. ANN. 43
(a) desiderative, (b) intensive prefix denoting good,
favorable. ((b) =Mass.-Narr. wuni-; Wab. uli-; (a)
Moh.-Peq. wi'’gi-—=Wab. wi'qi.)
Wir tales som. aoe eee it is good.
WIPO sete Le ee he is good.
Wwivtkteu,s 22 228s i he is handsome.
WidktomesceWe 522 eee he loves.
Wi gina) wes eee see I like to see him.
Wan oitagacrn ee I wish to hit him.
Wiig antes <2 ees it is light.
Wis yarvmos = eee ee ee to feel well.
Win Vanan Swed eee ae it looks clear.
RWIS ECU acres ee ee ee he laughs.
Wile aba Cse ae = ae eee well cooked.
Wiksabaigadss == aaa sweating.
WichmuUn als ees eee ee it is true, indeed.
Wirt wOusaneee aes ae ee good day (salutation).
-ac, -c, inanimate plural suffix. (Mass.-Narr. -sh, Wab. -al.)
gi Zakade: = ee see se == see days.
meakasancehs sos tee feet moccasins.
Skane Sees % ase ees SS bones.
riiinilolyQn = Sa se Ls ___. baskets.
Kandiic esas eee eee legs.
Padsignceees—=sssoa See arms
WiGyiicMeehse = Ass aa hands.
Wolmancs see sees eggs
mis ’71s7oN CMe a ae a twos
SANCEUS* a3 ee ee esses stones.
Vill Cees Se sae eee. these (inanimate).
WE VAG. == a eee things.
Witco;Rwance—- = =a hairy.
madwie fabae ss ae (things) not cooked.
-ag, -nag, animate plural suffix.
PaUsane lee ee cows.
gitttesag ey fea eee is cattle.
djintsag=ss=-— eee = birds.
MOK Capsa sae ee hens.
ivnapessa = eee eee ee men.
MohiMksisna gas Mohegans.
-san.(i) denotes prostrate position. (Mass.-Narr. -sin; Wab.
-3s'in.
nizame’ksen______________ T lie down.
MISO/SaD = ee T am tired.
Gavksanst=. == Serer to fall down.
backaco/san__________-_-_- to fall down.
be’ckgzi'ti'd’’san_________- (Nehantic) to fall down.
SPECK] A MOHEGAN-PEQUOT DIARY 287
-77, an element which terminates independent forms, verbal aux-
iliaries, adverbs, and adjectives. It functions as an inanimate pro-
nominal form. (Similar in the neighboring and in the Wabanaki
dialects.)
teamMteis. ->= == eee must; it is necessary.
SU4mi+ 22 2 ee eee = because.
Oca mi. See eee too much; it is excessive.
Kol djl se eee eee already; it has become.
Waldjl? ee eee ed so that; in order that.
Osi bien n= cans beyable:
bapki eos es cease perhaps; maybe.
MstOgn eee always.
CONE ee ee so much. (French tant.)
CCIW es aoe eee = a ee nearly.
Rataiwirees= oo eee eS about to; going to; will.
Gites eo. 2 - eo se eS has; finished.
MNO Wie aS eS going to; motion toward.
Matanwireee soe see eee S much; very.
WiUUbel sss S22 See from.
nds 1eee a ee then; conjunction.
Mid aie hoe a See there; then
VWudaiia== 8 ees eee oe here; now.
Goda se 8. ete ee where.
Mantel nea ee eee it is big.
Maite eee ee eee as {it is] bad.
djaitcii = aes ere mo eae half; partly.
dja-, tca- | intensive element with a derogative sense. (Mass.
tce- *} chah; Wab. -dja- (-dje-), objurgative.)
Meaimamitd === glutton; excessive eater. (The Mohegan-Pequot
mythological trickster.)
tee/nambai’ckudu___------ he is very bad; no good!
waikadja’mank_______-_-- oh, my gracious! (Exclamation of sudden sur-
prise.)
wa’ kedjana*k____._______- (Nehantic) pshaw! Corresponds to the preceding.
Fs
> ot ee
= + eee FS
liane Ged. ee a> tee ;
taal @ i, vo a) omit aa eee eer LG
pein “ue Lunt ad di} (Saal nanan na Mga
Sriilre Sule -Uittey {Met ee
BMY” seme ovliegowstire driw Jaxnsld avisasial hai 7
~ Coveting [lit (she) with le sania
baie jemelolt, 97) ovine oot aesivip ....-~ ae
low (sepadede) lavtprtodiye
: a ewan otunt apere'gh ed co Ss - abuso
«yp? ore h hare be Prd lates tlh ; er. ee eed Apa nee
font
ery it OY Mtr vege) bine (alteeiish) .—...<---ahelsibaaee
vag Wass VeN : We,
PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES
WITH TEXTS AND SONGS
BY
J. P. HARRINGTON and HELEN H. ROBERTS
_PALAOTS 2a aaah Zinta io
eOviNe GAA CTKAT HYW . a. |
Ad
_ re .
STANHOM PHO ine LOTOVIARAI AOL 5S
CONTENTS
Iintrodirehioneees a= ae Sete coe ee ee ee
Children’s stories:
MaopietailliBoy, and his! wife—-— ------._ 922 =. 2
Sengerepove’éna Fights with the Sun________-__----_--
The Old Giant steals Sengerepove’éna’s wife__________-
The Old Giantess and the Brother and Sister Fawns____
IAG bDabyaisestolenlbyean Owless ss oss sees == eee eee
The Sphynx Moth and the Old Coyote______-_--------
Koyowixolapaneretches fires. == == ee
The Turkeys and the great flood _---------------=----
ihevoricinofithe:scalpyhousees 2 229s = ee) eee
‘hessunkenvestuiam were se cae oe ee aes Seer eae eee eee
The Old Coyote Woman and the Crow visit each other_-
The Old Coyote Woman, Jackrabbit, and Bluejay grind
LOC ete Ls eee eee ee ee ee ee ee
The Old Coyote and the three gourds____--_----------
The Cricketjandithe Coyote:__-_-------.=-_-=25---=---
Folkways:
No.
No.
Bi cth Customs sae ee eae ere nee see cee aes a ee
Dea thecusto ms es eae eee oe ee
hokenstoi Gea theese pes os oe ee Re ee
PACMISIN Ter plretedenO terms ae ee a a ee
uimbin pethewnorsesemee aa = snes = eer ee
Ra thlesn ales ase meee ene epee yer ee ae
LIST OF SONGS
ine lravelinossongiof the Mliges= ==) sss sees= anes es
De leoviersOne Ol athon hl ieeeemene =e oe eee ers oe ne
3. Song of the Elf as he is packed along__________-___
AmSonrwotethedulivin ther tires. =. eee ee eee
Page
293.
296
312
322
330
338
342
348
350
354
354
358
360
362
364
370
370
372
374
376
380
382
388
388
392
392
394
394
396
396
303
307
341
343
292
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
oF
10. The Bluejay’s grinding song
11. Deer summoning song
ILLUSTRATIONS
. Song of the two Dove Maiden Sisters as they become
Stas ios sok Bek 2 do Se
. Song of the wizards as Koyowixelapan enters their
estufa
. Crying song of the grandmother as she seeks
Koyowixelapan
. Song of the wizards as they make Koyowixetapan
an. old .woman= Aue 4h: {yi aiilent ott sr ora
The Jackrabbit’s grinding song
Analysis of Picuris songs, by Helen H. Roberts__--___-__----
Puate 43. General view of Piwweltha (Picuris)
ILLUSTRATIONS
Puatr 44. The contest between Sengerepove’éna and the
KicurE Os he seicuriss phone mises = see eee
FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 43
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
GENERAL VIEW OF PIWWELTHA (PICUR
1S)
ie
PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES, WITH TEXTS
AND SONGS
By Joun P. Harrineton
INTRODUCTION
Among the Indians of the little Tiwa village of Picurfs,! which lies
hidden among the mountains of northern New Mexico, the Earth is
believed to sleep for about a month at the time of the winter solstice;
that is the period for telling ancient myths. Some of the prettiest
of these myths constitute the bulk of the present volume of texts.
They are dictated by Rosendo Vargas ? just as he heard them told
by his grandfather and others within the adobe walls of the home
village when a boy ‘‘while the Earth was sleeping.”” They have
all the savor of the New Mexican mountains and well illustrate the
versatility of the language, which is capable of expressing the most
intricate and poetic thought.
Characters which figure largely in the myths are the members of
the family of cannibalistic Giants, the Elf (a youthful dwarf who has
the strength of a man and goes about clad only in a breechclout),
Fish Maiden, Sengerepove’éna (the Tewa hunter-adventurer), Shell
Hat, the Sun, the Moon, the Morning Star, the Corn Maidens of
the cardinal colors, the Butterflies of the cardinal colors, Magpietail
Boy, Old Beaver, Old Wolf, Old Coyote, Old Coyote Woman, the
brother and sister Fawns, the Dove Maidens, Big Nostril, the Snakes,
and several others. Most of the stories end with a good moral
teaching or some explanation of nature, and then ‘‘You have a
tail”? “—which means that it is your turn to tell a story. The songs
which accompany the myths, charmingly rendered by Mr. Vargas,
constitute one of the most pleasing features of the collection and
have been transcribed by Miss Helen H. Roberts.
The dialect of Picuris and the markedly divergent Taos dialect
make up the Northern Tiwa as contrasted with the Southern Tiwa
or Isletefo. For further information on the classification of the
Tanoan languages see my ‘Introductory Paper on the Tiwa
Language, Dialect of Taos, New Mexico,” in American Anthropol-
ogist, n. s., vol. 12, pp. 11-48, 1910.
1 Native form Piwweltha; for a view of the pueblo see Plate 43.
* Indian name Phithoxomene (shortened familiarly to Thoxon),
Feather-bunch Flying (phi- from phi’ine, feather-bunch, Spanish
plumero; thexomene, that which flies or floats along in the air, from
thexome-, to fly along, -ne, agentive).
3 See footnote, p. 312.
293
294 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
At the end of the volume a number of nonmythological textlets
dealing with folkways and an Our Father version, all from the same
informant, have been added. The texts were originally prepared
with interlinear translation, but this has been omitted because of the
cost of printing, although I believe that the including of interlinear
Fic. 9.—The Picuris phonems
translation best subserves the purpose for which such texts are
published.
Grateful acknowledgment is due especially to Dr. J. Walter Fewkes,
Chief of the Bureau of American Ethnology, for his sympathetic
support of these studies. The warmest thanks are also given to
Rosendo Vargas, the narrator, and Miss Helen H. Roberts, who
transcribed the songs with painstaking accuracy.
Tn ee i
; Wil sib |
pare _— a 7) Sm
iG, ive! te ole oe wk: Pe
- i we _ nial ate Aisa
£ Lipo neti: manny
ang eri) soya ‘ wy ergot ht
est Tipibalh are: apnea rane:
= ath ie 1 rae eauimyT gui vag
powell he (+ Nonrtll GTMER anemia tit
ua Nat 40 y : Ju @ mom mes gp en Ih
a) al sertaniny eae r sbOQ@e sactingt idle
PF. =n ap) Mien rep rr, r= WN Boag eel
_ wi .° r etre
mie 5 ny ett oe ; 4 3 70 @haltunas >
pie oetities vat Theor betes 69% wy onsen
ate ve j Ais ~1) i), ee. 1° cle An _ i Suto 7 mah?
araity pr airy o- wii chit =) abi item Us f slower :
ae isn oe Hil vgn 91D om an pt sete alent”: |
meets <9 SAK antral, eemwtl” appa aloe abit ng
apileg dapen Pf jude atel ipilew Hye ran, year pang Ponpedsoriat
Rae OL, eet Art ese eee mapa tpaations nid eat
-
a
rears 5 ily berg os vee ws) Sar Ce, 20 eoraheey
7 Frvivy« Teaih ae ae, dliveni', died ore i r a ares Fini we) a Lip)
es bile 7 ey, Ip oe Aireryyn ~~ aa a i PT, eis M Tix. i
- “ st = « poy tisha Pair! / uae ra ip ta Bae i” Easy wT ia?
Sy ey ry ved ‘ow oat ire ber et 7 x — i‘, a epab L 1] a} - -
SAS SPUN? | OF Fr Akers n os J ya Pag bth
ie Sibtis ss ern ne Higa Paptd, | vals, “aah af BerSiatis tilling
eee sarily oni am gat! 5. sD abidal Stati atl ieaviir Wale
= Wonk 1 iit
es ce Ayo Piola hi aihre’s afi is eon wn) ne he mart.
Ai) Se stip, ge pepehta ee Nii iw went
4 af Ve: ee ae malik? o JAP 7
- v baat bY eel o's” et ia om ya pm pee i
A Seti ob} faster
ae
_
_ >
:
aay
>
*
®
3,
eat S
* 47 aoe
CHILDREN’S STORIES
Magapierait Boy anp His Wire
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen! wa tatha Piwweltha ’ifaiths.
Thapa ‘Kwiatciaxwe’outco? han ’atiuphil “Itsolekwin® ’antho.
*Ttsolekwin Tcahone* ’an ’anawia. Hele yin phonna Yawatcoke’ai 4
’inatotaki. Mentcoho ’Iisolekwin nowai tcihokwil Teahone
ititcetamempiu mehu. Kwiatciaxwe’outco winatcitse’epa men
tholane tcipiu’aihen tcdkwil ’atiume’e wi tcuta wéwe thdtha
‘awan’e ’anakatcatiame. ’Itsolekwin tholan’aihen nanopupuhen wa
hupho’ai Teahone intdtakin’au Teadhene ’an fitcemehu.
Hepuxennen nopikkialen thottha wanhu, han hepuxennen hiaulon
hatta ’opeyomen wanhu. Howen ’asantho’e Kwiatciaxwe’autco
nathia’ai tcitso’epa teuta ’atiutsammenna ’anakatcatiame. Wi
teokwil ’ameme’e nowai ’anakatca.
Mentcoho wepa Kwiatciaxwe’sutco wétan tohu: ‘“Xomma teannoi
tiyaitcipiupo, xomma tcokwil’a ’antiulane nowai ’osowalehu. Teannoi
tihotci, kwipamotha takii’aihen - taitcipiawetci. Yon thanate
?owolekenna kéwatta he taimetci wa tcoho men’auxen.
Mentcoho tcitai nowiane thdlkemmen ’atiulane pa mekiahen
?ommiahu. ‘‘’(ntotene, teukwe ’akuhan hatta ’akukenna nawan.”’
Kwiatciaxwe’outco men matci’apiawehu, han tohu: ‘Hoxui, ’antiu-
lane, hatta nathia’aiyo tatci’amai,hokeyo hatta takthe.”” Ho tomen
makui. Kwipdmotha kui matcipiawemen. Natcihala’amhu.
’dhiulane, ’Itsolekwin, mollon mapexia’anhu. Leuten nanan
potcutei nakenkupupu’an, “Itsolekwin ’ikenkwelpen. Mentcoho
Kwiatciaxwe’sutco ’ahulane ’o’ommiamen totalia: ‘Molle, hatta
*eheno ’aponhu.”” Kwiatciaxwe’sutco teutei két‘a *anapopu’e tope.
‘Tt is customary to begin a Picuris myth with the words: Nakuthe
nakutheke (ten) tcexamen (or with the emphatic repetition of
nakuthe omitted), “long ago, long ago therefore accordingly,”’
which may be freely rendered as ‘‘Long ago then”’ or ‘Once upon a
time.”
? One of the Corn Maidens of the cardinal colors; ep. White Corn
Woman, wife of Sengerepove’éna, pp. 313, 323.
3 One of the secret societies of Picuris.
4For the Picuris place names the writer has in preparation a
separate treatise.
296
CHILDREN’S STORIES
MaaGpietait Boy anp His WIFE
Once upon a time the people were dwelling at Picuris Pueblo.
And Magpietail Boy and his wife, Yellow Corn Woman, dwelt there.
Yellow Corn Woman belonged to the Society of Wizards. Down
below at Yawatcoke’ai they had their estufa. Yellow Corn Woman
went there every night where the Wizards were doing their sacred
ceremonies. Magpietail Boy liked to sleep so much that he did not
know where his wife went in the evenings nor at what time of the
night she returned. As soon as it got dark, Yellow Corn Woman
went over to where the Wizards had their estufa, to take part in their
sacred ceremonies. At times she would come home after midnight,
and at other times she would come home when it was already day-
light, in the early morning. But her husband, Magpietail Boy, was
such a sleepyhead that he did not know at what time his wife came
home; neither did he know where she was going every night.
But one time he said to himself, “Suppose I do not sleep to-night,
in order to see where it is that my wife is going out to nightly. To-
night I will follow her. When I lie down in bed this evening I will
pretend that I am asleep. As soon as she goes out of the house I
will follow right behind her wherever she goes.”
And that evening, after his wife had given him his supper, she said
to him: ‘‘My husband, you must be lying down, for the time has
come for you to sleep.’”’ Magpietail Boy made believe that he was
very sleepy and said: “All right, my wife. I am really very sleepy,
so now I am going to lie down.’”’ And so saying, he lay down. He
was lying in bed pretending that he was asleep. He was snoring
away.
His wife, Yellow Corn Woman, began to hurry to get ready to
leave. Shortly somebody knocked at the door. Yellow Corn
Woman opened the door. And Magpietail Boy heard someone
telling his wife, ‘Hurry. You are the only one who is late.” Mag-
19078°—28——20 297
298 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Wetan tohu: “Halan ’antutho’e Tceahene ’anotitcetahu. Howen
teanngi tihotci. Tcannei henaikdteatci.”” Mentcoho ’Itsolekwin
kowen ’am@pia’aihen tcilekd’aihen thonate ’owole. ’Owalekenna
Kwiatciaxwe’outco maxwiwehen mapai’aihen ’aiumemen kewatta
me.
‘Ttsolekwin tonon pijlamon hallan mehu. Patholia’epa phanhui
pathswen hou’auteta ’okoppeyo. Memenwaita wa Tecahone ’ittd-
takin’ai wan. Kwiatciaxwe’sutco ’atiuthe’e momen naphiatseteu-
kitha ’atson. ‘““Yohoyo men nowai yontei Huene ’anthd’e ’ehu,
Tcahone ’an titcetahu, howen yohui he taixetaitci.”” Ho tomen yin
*elaputha ° maxeniai ’o’elatophialiakeliannatha ® matai.
Totaphalta ’omom’aixen Tcahone ’ingphiatsetsuki. Leuten thapa
imatuixia’amhu. Wel ’iutcewemen, wel ’iuphaithomen, wel ’iutato-
thomen, wel ’iuxothemen, han wel wi pin’ai ’imatomen. Mentcoho
toman ’imapiahu. ’*Imapiakemehen ’ittonwia’epa ’i’ommiahu: “Ta
xomma_ hatta ’inatui’antci.” Ho tomen mentcoho totaxwilen
ipimiakweyotokui. Mentcoho ’ituitahu. Miakweyotoma ’iwilemen
wéewe tanen tsenpiu ‘ilolhu. ’Ittonwia’epa ’i’emmiahu: “Halan
yoho pu’au kiyanalataitutco’eyo tcihu. Xomma kén’au wem’a
kopowole.”’ Mentcoho wen kén’aukwil ’opowale. Yin ’otaulosian’au
napematcian wowe totapiu tsen. ‘‘Teutsi yin kén’au wi hele
wainalataitcimeko,”’ tén’ome.
Mentcoho wéwe ’ituitahu, wéwe miakoyotoma ’iwilemen wéwe
tsempiu 7“ilolhu. Miakoyotoma ’iyaxwiletiame. ‘Halo teu’ohen
maluwe,’’ tonene tohu, ‘‘hewen yoho kiyatutco’e hewi tcihu. Hokeyo
ho kinatuikotiame. Xomma Lékayene ’ixwia’antci. Tcitsiyo wi
nowen nainan ’opeyo.”’ Mentcoho Lékauene ’ixwia’an: “‘Lékauene,
’axwia’an ’e’e ’anolawiako, eyo wi nanowernainan hou’aute ’in’one
wenno kapotiahu. ’Eyo ’anolawia. Yoho nalataiene kiyatiitco’e
pw’au kitcimeko kinatuikotiame. Hokeyo konotcikkeyo ’axwia’anhu.”
“Hu hu,’ Lékquene tomehen kén’aukwil ’othalwole, yin té’au
han taulo’au malaimatcia’aihen, teohele wa nalataimon. Hatta
totapiu natalatsotehen yin ’ela’ai ’o’elatokelianna’ai kalxaixwetcane.
®Ela-, roof-hole, N. M. Span. coye.
°°’ Klatophia-, roof-hole sticks, i. e., the sticks used for closing the
roof-hole, piled beside the roof-hole when the latter is open.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 299
pietail Boy recognized the person’s voice that was speaking outside.
He said to himself, ‘‘I believe my wife is doing ceremonies with the
Wizards, but I will follow her to-night. To-night I shall know.”
Yellow Corn Woman, dressed up well, her hair well combed, went
out of the house. As soon as she had gone out, Magpietail Boy got
out of bed, dressed up, and followed his wife.
Yellow Corn Woman went southwest, walking fast as she went
along the trail. As the moon was shining, her moccasins looked
white as snow, as she came to the estufa of the Wizards. Magpie-
tail Boy watched his wife as she entered a place which was brightly
lighted. ‘“‘I see that this is the place where this wife of mine has
been coming every night, doing ceremonies with the Wizards. But
I will hide myself under here.’’ As he said thus he hid himself near
the roof-hole. He put himself under the roof-hole sticks.
When he looked into the estufa the Wizards had it lighted up.
Shortly they began to prepare themselves for the ceremony. Some
took their eyes out, some took their noses off, some took their ears
off, some took their legs off, and some even cut themselves in two.
They were all fixing themselves in various ways. After they were
finished dressing, they were told by their leader, ‘‘ Now let us start
our ceremony.” As he said thus they put a rainbow across the
estufa. Then they began to do their ceremony. As they tried to
climb the rainbow, they would fall back again. Their leader said to
them, ‘‘I believe there is a person near who is not our equal. Sup-
pose that one of you go out to see.’ And one of them went out to
look. He looked around among the bushes, but he could not see
anything, so he went back into the estufa again. ‘‘There is not a
human being outside,” he told the leader.
Then they again started to do their ceremony. They began to
climb the rainbow. Again they fell back. They could not climb
the rainbow. “Stop for a moment,” said the leader. ‘‘There must
be some human being near who is not our equal. That is the reason
that we have failed in doing our ceremony. Suppose we call the
Screech Owl, for he is the only one who can see, even in the dark.”
Then they called the Screech Owl. ‘Screech Owl, we have called
you because you are the chief of the night, since you are the only one
that can see in the dark. You can even see a little ant very far in the
dark. You are the chief of the night. There is a human being
near who is not our equal, and that is the reason we have failed to
do our ceremony. So that is why we have called you here.” ‘Hu,
hu,’’ said the Screech Owl as he flew outside. He lighted around in
the weeds and bushes there, but he could not see a human being.
And as he was going into the estufa to report that he had not seen
anything, he noticed there at the roof-hole the tail of a wolf hide
sticking out through the roof-hole sticks. He then went into the
300. PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Tatama tsen’aiten Tedhone ’’omen: “‘Hu hu, teutoi hele kon’au
tiyanalataimon. Howenko yon ’o’elatokelian’aiyo teutai kalxai-
xwetcane, hu hu,’’ tomehen ’otholwole.
Lakquene kalxaitopukenna ’Itsolekwin piwewan. ‘‘Thapa metco
’ansottho’e yo wia,” wétan tohu. ‘‘Xomma wem’a kétha mapotcan,
*aixen hele mataitham’an’an teaikwil matsotetci,” *ittonwia’e tohu.
Mentcoho wen kén’aukwil ’opowéle. ’Ela’ai ‘omomen ’élanq’ai
teutsi wen tdiene 9’akalxai’e’aihenno ’elatona’ai xetai. Tcihuite
wotciahen totapiu tsetia, tonene ’entha kalia. ‘Ha, Kwiatcia-
xwe’outco, heyo tcutai ’anldwiathakin’au ’awdnhu?’”’ Howen Kwia-
teiaxwe’eutco hewatome, wa ’aliu’en’ai takiahen. Mentcoho hatta
nopikkialen nanq’epa ’owatcekwelpettiame, tcl’amai’epa. Hétcuwen
‘aliuths’e = ’opawiama 7ipéxekkui. Mentcoho tcipiu. Teahone
iutuiphal’aihen yin kia’au ’anapathanmentapiatcia. Mentcoho tcihui
’anatcikatean takia.
Thopiaken hiaulotta tciwapuixen tannanan’au kwilpa ’antse-
pe’aihen pathanxweu’ai kui. ‘‘Heyo hatta yonate teat tawoletci,’’
wétan tohu. Wi maxwikkewenno ’anathiame, pdthanxweu’emg
waikuitcitten *1uwia’epa kwilpahen ’omomen kui.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 301
estufa and said to the Wizards: ‘‘Hu, hu. I have not seen a human
being outside, but there is the tail of a wolf skin sticking out from
under the roof-hole sticks,’’? And saying ‘“‘Hu, hu,” he flew out.
As soon as the Screech Owl mentioned the wolf skin Yellow Corn
Woman realized who it was. ‘‘That must be my husband then,”
she said to herself. ‘‘Let one of you go out to see. If you should
find anybody, bring him in,” said the leader. And one of them went
out to look. As he looked around the roof-hole, there was indeed a
person under the roof-hole, covered with a wolf skin and hidden
under the roof-hole sticks. He was taken out of there, was carried
into the estufa, and was brought to where the leader was sitting.
“‘Ah, how is it that you come about my precinct?” But Magpietail
Boy did not say anything. He was then taken over and seated where
his wife was seated. As it was then after midnight, he could hardly
keep his eyes open. He finally laid his head on his wife’s lap and
went to sleep. After the Wizards had finished their ceremony, they
made a ridge-bench in the arroyo. He was then put there while
he was still asleep.
When he awoke early the next morning he was lying face up in a
strange place on the cliff bench. ‘‘ How am I going to get out of this
place, now?” he said to himself. It was even impossible for him to
turn over. Since the cliff bench on which he was lying was only
wide enough for him to lie on, he could only look upward as he lay
there.
302
PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Mentcoho Yoimane wa Pethon’ai’ the. ‘Xemma teathoi wa
tonen pakwil he taiteiwametci,’’ tomen mentcoho me. Memen
mentcoho tceatahu:
7“ Teer Home.”
No. 1
TRAVELING SONG OF THE ELF
Ci ’ai wetala
°C ’ai wetala
Wetala hoaea holiuliuho
Wetala
Wetala haaea holiuliu
Hahe’a heaea ’ai
Haneya haneya.
Ci ’ai wetala
Ci ’ai wetala
Wetala heasa holiuliuho
Wetala
Wetala hoaea holiuliu
Hahe’a hoaaa ’ai
Haneya haneya.
di ’ai wetala
7d ’ai wetala
Wetala haaea holiuliu
Hahe’a hoaaaa ’ai
Haneya haneya.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 303
Now at Pethontha there dwelt an Elf. ‘‘1 believe I will go for a
walk down southwest to the river to-day.”’ As he said thus, he
started out. Going along he sang:
NO. 1. TRAVELING SONG OF THE ELF
A Transcription by Helen H. rinay
7
tea a
a
’Ai ’ai we-ta-la oF ‘ai we-ta-la we- ta - ins hoa - 9a a
& Cc
a
SS Spree enter ce
et 6 # »
li- u- li- u-ho-o we- meee we-ta -la hoa-va Ho -
24 2s eS ae
Baz Seg Sass
-o -o oe eo -o
li- u-li-u_ ha- eee Teas emee ha-ne- ya
A’
: SN
pay a ANTS
—t-# = — asf
xv Nees
ha-ne-ya ‘Ai ’ai we-ta-la ai ‘ai we-ta-la we-ta-la
EE i A, ane = i = |
$- “N OD e ae
FZ ~~ p’ oe i -
hoa - 0a ee eae ho - 0 en. we - ta - es
[D ae a 3} 2 |
ee =e = = ne i iB = He AA
zt * p’ “se #38 os eo oe
hea -va Ho-li-u-li-u ha-he-’a hoa-o - a-ai ha-ne-ya
=
x’ SS
ha-ne-ya ’Ai ’ai we-ta-la ‘ai ’ai we-ta-la we-ta-la
Cc”
SERS = Ne He =
a nF alg ome Ss if
hea-ea Ho-li-u-li-u hae’a hoa-o-a-’ai ha-ne-ya ha-ne-ya.
304 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
Yin Kwiatciaxwe’eutco kuikoV’aukwil tcatamen tedhu. Mentcoho
Kwiatciaxwe’outco ndnate matoheme: “‘Tcutei yin kon’au kanatea-
pomene’e ’atewe xa’a yonate maiwoi.” Yoimane totalia yin nato-
ponpiu pome. Pathan’ai ’okoiwolexen Kwiatciaxwe’outco ‘ipa-
thanxweukun’ai than. “C1, Kwiatciaxwe’outco, heyo tcutai ’e yoho
’atahu?”’ Kwiatciaxwe’outco pa ’emmia: ‘Yoimane, yonate mai-
heme.” ‘Halo yin ténoon pakwil tamemeko wen kwoalene ’an kana-
naxianako, halo leutenno tasomiletci.”” Ho tomehen Yoimane tonon
pakwil me. Tcdtamen mehu:
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 305
As he sang, he passed right above where Magpietail Boy was lying,
and Magpietail Boy cried from below: ‘‘Whoever you are that is
singing along, stop, and get me out of this place.’ The Elf heard
the cry and went to see the place where it sounded. As he peeped
into the cliff, he saw Magpietail Boy lying on the cliff bench. “Ah,
Magpietail Boy, what are you doing here?’ Magpietail Boy said
to him: ‘Elf, get me out of this place.” ‘You will have to wait,
for I am going down southwest to the river, since I am paying court-
ship to a maiden, but I will return shortly.” As he said thus, the
Elf went down southwest to the river. He went along singing:
PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN, 43
No. 2
LOVE SONG OF THE ELF 8
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
’Eraiya’ehyo ’aihyo wiroheyo.
Hate pam’one
Hate pam’one
Tcakwil ’a’eje
’Amaxttcetei
*Eraiya’ehyo ’aihyo wiroheyo.
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’ehe’a ’eraihyo’ero
’Eraiya’ehyo ’aihyo wiroheyo
Hate pam’one
Hate pam’one
Kamantceltcisa
Todpiu ’anmetei
’Eraiya’ehyo ’aihyo wiroheyo.
8 The prose equivalent of the words of this song which have mean-
ing is as follows:
Hati pam’one,
Tcakwil ’a’eye
’Amaxutcetci.
Hati pam’one,
Kamantceltcisa
Topiu ’anmetei.
[English translation]
Dear little flower,
Come hither,
That I may embrace thee!
Dear little flower,
Let us be married,
Come, let us go to the Pueblo.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 307
NO. 2. LOVE SONG OF THE ELF
Tr. A
a. go = 76,80 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
— 9 » — #—
2 e
Saeed tae
a
- ’e-he-’a ’e-rai - aoe ya - ’e- he -’a ’e-rai -
nN
Ee, st mics =e i =e == os ew
Bee: Pe a rt ae aoa . |
iy -’e-ro Ya - ’e - he - ’a ’e-ra- i-hyo-’e - ro ya -
Boeere SSS ape ===
=y Sea.
c
Npeciel ery - pee ro ’E - rai-ya~e-hyo’ai-hyo wi-ro -
=
Sa See F = Bees = =e
he- e - yo Ha - a-te-e poe am - 'o - ne re
==
oat = . ase = H e = ‘= |
a - te - e pa-am - ’o - ne Tea - ites @ - -
on = Ce
= a 25 ME ——— |
== == Sa, el et Se
c
Gyo AS 3 - @- ma - xu - - teel - tei “E -
oA TaN OL RY
: $—t ——Nre t Se —e =
Boba = === ae
ey al
rai - ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyo wi-ro - he-e - yo Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai-
B
- {-9—# ° =
o Se es ae ee eee = a a
aa te == Sa ae aie
a
hyo -’e-ro ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai - hyo - ’e-ro Ya-
A & S
“2 TI ==——
5 See ee re ee ees eee |
— Ea a yo —
’e -he - ’a’e-ra-i - hyo-’e-ro ya -’e - he- ’a ’e-ra-i-
Cc aN Tox
5S Se
a) as! one eect
ck )
hyo - ’e - ro "E - rai- ya- ’e-hyo’ai-hyo wi - ro-
LN a ip
a Spe= =
,
’
he -e - yo Ha - a- te-e pa-am - ’o - ne ha-
308 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES [erH. ANN. 43
Ya’eheya ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’eheya ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’eheya ’eraihyo’ero
Ya’eheya ’eraihyo’ero
*Eraiya’ehyo ’aihyo wiroheyo.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 309
@ > tet= elspa -iam=or = ne rape - ma - an tee- el -
rai-ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he-e-yo Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai
B
EO FERS EET) Nee
2
os er Peay
‘a ’e-rai - hyo - ’e- ro Ya -
’e-he - ’a ’e-ra- i - hyo-’e-ro ya - ’e- he-’a ’e-ra-i -
Qa
yee SSeS ae ae ee ss 6
Be eee ee eee
hyo-’e-ro ’E - rai - ya’e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he - e- yo.
PROSE
Hati pam’one, Dear little flower,
Tcakwil ’a’eye Come hither,
’Amayitcetci. That I may embrace thee
Hati pam’one, Dear little flower,
Kamantceltcisa Mayst thou be my wife,
Tdpiu ’anmetci. May we go to the pueblo.
310 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Pakwil memen Pod’opeye pawaitha tukkuitha wan. ‘’QAthokowa,
Po’opeyo,” tohu. ‘Teaikwil ’a’eye,’ Psa’opeyo pa ’ommia. Yoimane
tcihokwil me’aiten wipai ’antcitcelai. Mentcoho Pd’opeyo waitia-
menta faxatciahu. “Hatta pana ’anaxwinna tatsonhe.’’ Han
Yoimane tohu: ‘“’CAHeuw’ohen kanatethiape?” Pod’opeyo thapa
mentecoho tohu: “Na pakén’au tiyaitotcikeko, hoke’e hatta wéwe
tatsonheko.’”’ Yoimane mentcoho Pd’opeyo pakétha ’atewethiame’epa
tome.
Memen ‘ipakuatilikittha wan’aiten pannu ’onapakuaxshaketen wa
Kwiatciaxwe’sutcopiu me. Teitha wan’aiten Kwiatciaxwe’outco
?ome: ‘’Cixen tcano yinate koxwoletantci, ’aixen wem’a yonne
Ppannu pdkuaxo’ene ’anatcele’an, hokeyo wennenno konatolehe.
kopohaxwatce’an yinate kowawolepo.” “Taxui kowenno, tasotcel-
huiantci.”” Haihen mentcoho ’anapakuaxe’ophitcia. Howenko
natcele wéwe wen ’anq’ophitcia. Thapa tcitoi natcele pateunnawia’e
’?an@’ophitcia. Thapa natecele. Hatta Joimane pa lammiahu ’9mmi-
amen: ‘“Tcano ’ahurantei yonteai yo han philian.” ‘Ha, tatatci.’’
Kwiatciaxwe’outco tohu. Mentcoho winnawia’e ’anq’ophiitcia.
Natcele. ‘Howe yina ’aitaiwen, hohenno ’ononawia’an,” Yoimane
pa ’ommiahu. Kwiatciaxwe’outxo lamewehen mo’aihen hewaitomen
kui. Yoimane thapa wen napdkuaxetcane. ‘“‘Teano wiwinakke
*atiakwia’oememe. Yontoiyo philia, hatta ’anatcele’an yinate ’awoipo.’
Yoimane tomen ’anaphiliawiapu’e n@’dphui. Howenko mentcoho
Kwiatciaxwe’eutco ’anatceltia. ‘“Taxui,’’ Yoimane tohu, “‘yintei yin
-akuip@’ano na@aukwil ’ana’ophitei.’”’ Yin hewai’ommian na@’dphui-
’aihen, leuten pdkua’eme ’i’stcapisi’e kwilpa ’iwilehu, yokwe waima-
kwil wa kota pathaxen. ‘‘Tcano han,” Yoimane pa ’ommiahu,
“vyimpei pakua’emo 7ikimmakwillo ’awilehen kowoletei.’”? Kwia-
tciaxwe’autco mentcoho ’owsle. ‘Tsenoho mautan,’ Yoima’ome.
Thapa he kém’anken ’anapipu’e thapa he yina taitiapu’e Yoimane
?ommia. ‘Hoxui,”’ Yoimane tohu. Yin ‘ilakonkuipiu ’amme’aihen
Yoimane lapipithan, ho’aihen Kwiatciaxwe’outco ’awitcia, ’ommi-
amen: ‘‘Yontei ptpine yo tecatthotanen katiulane ’ anakuiwiatha
’akiitei. Yontei payo kdokemmiatci. Hokeyo kathoppiu ’ametci,
howenko he ’ayatiw’oemepo. He ’ayawélo’ampe. Yonteai ptipine
pa’aihenno han,” ho Yoimane pa ’?ommiamehen theppiu me.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES oil
As he went along, he came to where Fish Maiden was basking beside
the river. ‘Good morning, Fish Maiden,” he said. ‘‘Come over this
way,” said the Fish Maiden to him. The Elf went over and they both
sat down to talk. As the Fish Maiden was getting dry, her mouth
began to open. “I must be going back into the water where |
belong.” The Elf said: “Could you not stand it a little while
longer?”’ The Fish Maiden said: “I do not stay outside of the water
so very long. That is the reason that I am already about to go back
in.” Because the Fish Maiden did not want to stay outside the
water, the Elf went away angry.
As he went he came to a tall spruce tree and there he picked five
spruce cones, and went over to where Magpietail Boy was. As he
came to the place, he said to Magpietail Boy: ‘‘I now perhaps might
help you to get out of there, if you can catch one of the five spruce
cones. So I am going to drop them to you, one at a time. If you
miss all of them, you will not get out of there.” “Very well, indeed,
I will try my best to catch them.’’ And so the Elf dropped one of
the spruce cones, but he did not catch it. He dropped him another,
but he did not catch this one either. He dropped him the third one,
but he did not catch it either. Now the Elf began to scare him by
saying: ‘““You must do your best, for this one is the last.’”’ “Yes, I
will,” said Magpietail Boy. He then dropped him the fourth one.
He did not catch it. ‘‘Then you can stay there; that is all I had,”
the Elf said to him. Magpietail Boy said nothing, but looked very
frightened as he was lying there. The Elf then took out another
spruce cone. ‘Now, this time I am not telling you a lie. That is
the last. If you do not catch this one, I can not get you out of there.”
As the Elf said thus, he dropped the last one that he had. But
Magpietail Boy caught this one somehow. ‘All right,’ said the EIf.
“You must drop this right straight down from where you are lying.”
Then he dropped it, as he was told, and shortly there came up a
spruce tree loaded with branches, right beside him, until it reached
up to the bench. “Now,” said the Elf, “‘you must climb this spruce
tree and get out.”” Then Magpietail Boy came out. ‘’Thank you
for helping me,” he said to the Elf. He then told the Elf just what
had happened to him that night and how he had gotten in there.
“Very well,” said the Elf. Then they went over to where there
was a fallen tree. The Elf found a woodworm and gave it to Magpie-
tail Boy, telling him: ‘You must put this worm by your wife’s bed
to-night. This will fix her. So you must go home, but you must
not tell your wife. You must not try to quarrel with her. This
worm will do enough to her.” As the Elf told him that, he went to
his home.
ile PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Thottha wan’aiten piawen kiaten matai. ’Qhulane pa ’ona-
kalteanniahen ’okdlehen hatta nodwian nanq’epa wipaita ’ankel.
Wa ’atiulane kuiketha pipine mentcoho kui. Pipine yin tikaipiu
*Itsolekwin ’atson. Mentcoho tcikuitha thina ’onapohataipu’e
?onahanniahen piu. Tcihuite Kwiatciaxwe’autco wétan kodwen
thotahu.
Kaxweki.®
SENGEREPOVE’ENA' FicHts WITH THE SUN
Nakuthe nakutheke teexamen Pakouphal’ai ’itaitho. Tcexamen
Sengerepove’éna ’atiuphil wésen ’anan’d’ophil ’antho. Sengere-
pove’éna winavo tedwia. Hohenno ‘Vowd’anhu. thdpai ’otcdws-
lemen *ipekalhu.
Tcexamen wepa ’otcdwole. Hele ’iyapathame. Thdmo’an wi
tcimen wi pe’ine wen ’owamon. Mentcoho tohan’epa ’ildxwekokkui-
tha matoiwatai. ‘‘Howen hexetci hele piyapethame tcatthoi?”
tohu. Xwelkdlehen tcexamen nathattsahu, tomen ‘‘Xa yokwe péne
winoipa mdie’e ’owawoleme wepahen tisothan’dphutcipu.”’ Menteco-
ho waiwitomepun péne men winoipa maie’e ’owale. Tcexamen
nathattoipoki. Halo xwelwatcemen, mentcoho Péne pa td’amia:
“Wayo ’ampuiene miyathappo.”’ Sengerepove’éna ’anathaxxwoiki-
waita lame’e. Péne wa ’ampiu ’ame. ‘‘Wayo,” Péene pa ’ommia,
“sikakamaiteitei. Teatthoi’aite pannutholayo kolupiatci, pannu yo
kotumepiatei. Teinne tumo’ene kokamehen ’axiawiatci. Yontai
Thodlene pa, ’anwahutciame’epa, konopeyo’amiame’epayo, *apun-
?amiahe. Hokeyo pannutholo napuimenno teaikwil wéwe kan’dphillo
’wetci. Yohuiyo thdlene ’anman’dteotci. Yohuiyo manpun’antei.
Hohenng ’a’ometci’e ’annawia. Hokeyo sonhuiyo ’atatci.’”’ Tcexa-
men Sengerepove’éna ’apun’aite mawenehen thappiu mapesai.
° “You have a tail,” translated into Spanish as ‘‘Tienes cola” or
“Tienes una cola.’’ Cp. Isl. Kahwikieim, ‘“‘You have a tail” or
Ta kahwikieim, “Now you have a tail,” ete. The narrator says this
to the one whom he wants to have tell the next story.
‘From Tewa Séngiripévi’é’nt (séngiri- as in various words of
greeting, of meaning obscure to the Tewa in this name; pévi, flower;
’*@ nti, youth). The stories in which Sengerepove’éna figures are felt
by the Indians to be as characteristically Picuris as any of the others,
yet the hero bears a Tewa name, lives at the Tewa village of San
Juan, and the Tewa tell similar myths about him.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 313
When Magpietail Boy arrived home, he sat down very quiet.
His wife brought him something to eat, and after he had eaten, since
it was already night, they both went to bed. And he laid the worm
above where his wife slept. The worm entered Yellow Corn Woman
at her navel. While she was sleeping it ate up all her entrails and
she died. And after that Magpietail Boy lived happily, alone.
You have a tail.
SENGEREPOVE’ENA Ficuts WiTH THE SUN
Once upon a time the people were dwelling at San Juan Pueblo.
And Sengerepove’éna dwelt there with his wife and two children.
Sengerepove’éna was a great hunter. That was the only way he fed
his children. Every day he went out hunting and brought deer.
Once he went out hunting and could not find any deer. All day
he walked. Not a track of deer could he see. And as he was tired
he sat down to rest on a log. ‘But why do I not find any deer
to-day?”’ he said. He took his bow. He drew his bow, saying:
“Would that a four-horned deer might come out. I could shoot
him at once and knock him down.”’ Then exactly as he said, a four-
horned deer came out. He aimed. But while he was drawing his
bow, the Deer spoke to him. ‘‘My friend, do not shoot me.”
Sengerepove’éna, still drawing his bow, sat frightened. The Deer
went to where he was sitting. ‘‘My friend,’’ said the Deer to him,
“let me talk to you. Within five days from to-day you must make
arrows. You must also make five quivers. When you finish these
quivers you must be ready. This Sun that is helping us to live and
giving us light is about to make war on you. That is why within
five days you must come this way again, with your children. Here
you will meet with the Sun. Here you will have a fight. That is all
that I have to tell you. You must act like a man.” Then Sengere-
pove’éna got up from where he was sitting and started home.
He was not bringing any deer. ‘Much as he has been hunting,
he never has come home from hunting without a deer,’”’ the people
said when they saw him coming from hunting. “Sengerepove’éna
is not bringing a deer this time,” the people said as they saw him.
19078°—28——21
314 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Wi hele waip@huimen wihutcun wi tcétcimen wiwepan’ayo pépen
theppiu watcdkwiwammepu. ‘Tdi’ene pa momiamen ’emmiahu:
“Sengerepove’éna tcappa hele waipekalme,” tai’ene pa waimomia-
menta ’9mmiahu. Mentcoho thottha wan’aiten tumothoikuiaiten
mapinelai. ‘‘Lotene,” ’alulane pa ’9mmiahu, ‘‘heyo tcatthoi hele
’ayapthon? He’ayo halan kanawia. Wihutcone kowitcdwdlemen,
wiwepan’ayo pépen ’awammepu.”’ ’Onqkalsiatciahen makaltai.
Tcowetcon pdtcuwen’ahen ’onanitcehen mawene. ‘‘(ntiulane,”
liw’ome, “yin tatcétcimen’au tiwiPéthanhen tciteai Pene payo
tatai’amia hanko tatcitci’amiamen ta’ommia xq tcatthei’aite pannu-
thole napuimen Tholene pa, yontai kiupeyo’amianepayo tapun’amiahe.
Thapa ta’9ammia xq teatthoi’aite pannuthole napuimenne, tumg’ene
pannu yo tapiatci tapemetci tupa. Hatta pannuthelo napuimenng
yon tcatthoi Pene pa tato’amian’au wo tametci, tcihoyo xa Tholene
’ankan’dtcotci, teihoyo kampun’antci. Hokeyo ’exenng ’axia’antci.
Thapa yonne wésen ’o’0’ane ’ixia’antci.”’
Tcexamen yonne pannuthole Sengerepove’éna tupiakehenng tahu.
Wittholo napuimen’au newian Sengerepove’éna pannu tumo’ene
?otupeme’aihen ’oxiakélia. Xa tohu: ‘‘thonnayo mentcoho naso-
katcatci xeomma fo’a ’amasolaiya, Tholene’a thahe nq’a, xeomma po’a
solaisonwia.”’
Tcexamen thdpiaken nakemg’dwehen nananta, ’imaxwiwe
*jutheakkalehen. Tcexamen Sengerepove’éna mapuppiahu. Mapa-
lephokehen tu’au mathoitenten’amhen. Tcexamen tohu: ‘“Tahan,
’anan’d’one, teohe ’annasopitci, ’anliuthe’e, ’aixen hekian tamel’-
amia’an thahe tahdtia’an, yenne wésen ’o’d’one na kanantho’e wa
’anantantolelétotheppiu ’ihttci. Tcihoyo masothdtci. ’Kwen payo
madsowda’amiatci.”
Mentcoho ’ime wa Péne pa td’amiamepun’au ’iwdn’aihen wa
hupuikwil settilene thapa ’amapuppia’aihen, xwepuna wen ’an-
tciuxweki’aihen, paphutha ’atapolki’aihen, ’owele. Tcexamen
hou’auteta ’anxwaithanhu. Piasai taitciau’ohen wel’ene ’anhai-
kalhu. Piasai ’angihaikalmenta ’antumotialdlehu. Howenko wel-
’ene ‘anawameme, piasai taipitha ’anhaikalhu. Mentcoho wennehen
?ongtumaphihu. Hewenko wel’ene ’anawameme. Hatta laiptitha
yo ’anwanhu. Mentcoho wésen patcu’ahenng ’anantuphihu. Lai-
putha ’anhgikal, kewan ’anantuwiapu’e ’anphiliathan. Tcan’ehan
mampa ’antcel, tciho ’anxotcelmen. Mentcoho Sengerepove’éna
*Sphutcia. ’Ophutcaiten Tholene tciwatcehen Sengerepove’éna
’anketewia. ’Ankotewiakenna mentcoho wésen ’d’one ’anantanto-
telétothoppiu ’ankiam@tco’aihen ’anxwilldle. Mentcoho Tholene
pa kiane kolia, wa papemakwil theammakwil Sengerepove’éna
’ampeéphil thapa ’olia.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 315
When he reached home he put his quiver away. He sat down very
sad. ‘‘My husband,” said his wife, “‘why did you not kill a deer
to-day? There must be something the matter with you. As long
as you have been going out hunting, you never have come back without
a deer.’’ She placed something to eat, and he sat down to eat.
He put something into his mouth two or three times and got up.
““My wife,” said he to the woman, “while I was hunting, just as I
was about to shoot a Deer, that Deer spoke to me and began to talk
to me, telling me that five days from to-day the Sun that is giving us
light is going to make war on me. He also told me that within five
days from to-day I must make five quivers and fill them with arrows.
And the Deer told me to go to the same place I saw him to-day five
days from to-day and that there the Sun and I will meet, and there
we will have a fight. So you also must get ready. You must also
have the two children ready.”’
Then Sengerepove’éna did nothing but make arrows during the
five days, and the night of the fourth day Sengerepove’éng had five
quivers ready, filled with arrows. He said: ‘‘We shall see in the
morning who is the braver; we shall see who is more of a man, the
Sun or I.”
Before daylight the next day they got up and ate breakfast. Then
Sengerepove’éna put his war paint on. He painted his face with
red, his body with white in blotches. ‘‘Come on, let us go, my dear
ones, no matter what happens tome. My wife, if I should be injured
in any way or killed, you must take these two children that we have
to where their grandfather and grandmother live. There you may
live. They will take care of you.”
Then they started out and when they reached the place where the
Deer had spoken a tall man came out in the northeast, he also being
in war paint, with an eagle feather at the back of his head and with a
shining ornament on his forehead. Then they began to shoot at each
other from a distance. They came closer to each other in a short
time. As they began to get closer, they were emptying their quivers.
But they could not hit each other. They were getting nearer.
Now each had only one quiver left. But they could not hit each
other. They were still getting nearer. Now each had only two or
three arrows left. They still got nearer. Each shot his last arrow.
They began to have a hand-to-hand fight. There they wrestled.
And then Sengerepove’éna was thrown down. When he was thrown
down the Sun took out his knife and severed Sengerepove’énq’s neck.
As soon as his neck was severed the two children left their mother
and ran away to their grandparents. Then the Sun took their
mother up to the heaven where he lives. The Sun also took
Sengerepove’énq’s head with him.
316 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
?0’0’one tcexamen ’anantantotelétothen’au ’anwan Tcexamen tciho
’anthe. ’Anqilaitaupiatciamenta teynehen ’apantantotelétotci’ahu
tcoho =’anankiatan’e’e. ’Anantantoleléto’ene pa ’an’ommiahu:
‘°(Qnan’o’d’one, hatta witcun’anwennoe mapanakiatanmopo.”’ Hanko
’o’d’one ’antohu: ‘‘Howen na wa teoho ’apankiatantan’auxan he
?aninomehu.” Tantoleléto’ene pa ’an’emmiahu: ‘“’(nan’o’d’one,
tcun’antci teutei ’e mapankiatanthatci. Thodlene yon peketa
mammome’e theppiu’e ‘isohul.”” ’O’d’one ’antohu: ‘‘Howen ’apan-
than’auxen he ’aninOmehu.”’ ‘‘Taxui,’”’ teexamen ’anantantotene pa
?an’ommiahu, “yin nakin’au mame’aihenno manpisVilatetci. Ho-
wenne yin Tholene pa manantanhotiapun’auhenng manamepa, wi
tcihowenno mana’itatepo!”’
Mentcoho ’o0’6’one ’antcihakehen nakippiu ’an’ilateme. Mentcoho
wen tohu: ‘‘Howen hexetci kanantantotene pa wa kanantanhotia-
pun’au ’an’ilatetci’e wamiaume. Howen tcihokwil he ’animetci,
tciho he ’aniilatetci.”” Mentcoho tcihokwil ’amme. Wa ’anan-
tanhotiapun’au ’anwan’aihen, ’an’ilathan. Mentcoho wen matesai,
wen ‘’itatey, teexamen ’ila’ene pa ’an’ommia: ‘‘’Qnan’d’one, heyo
teutei maitutehu?” ’O’6’one tamewehen ’ammoyo’aihen ’ananthep-
piu ’amme. ’Q(ntantole’oeme: ‘Tantote, hele hiapa ’ila’ene pa ’ohe
’?an’ommia: ‘’anan’d’one, heyo hexeyo tcutsi maitutehu?’”’ Tanlo-
tene pa ’an’ommia: ‘‘ Hantca’a hojo mapan’ememen hokeyo tcihokwil
mapanpetea’mmen, tcan yon wem_ hokwillo man’ilatemetci.”
?0’0’one wéwe ’antcihakehen ’an’ilateme. Nakin’au ’anwdan’aiten
?an’ilatehu. ’an’ittamahutcehen wéwe ’anantantolene tha ’anhui.
“Taxui,’ tcexamen ’anantantolene pa ’an’ommia, ‘‘teang mo-
ponnopuhaxwantopiatci. Mopennokementenne manpuhaxwantohui-
men mansokiatanndmetci. Wa mannotcimen’au yonne manso-
wipetci.”’ Tcexamen ’anantanlolene ’opuhaxwantokemehen ’an-
elehen ’ankiatannome.
Tcoho patcu witthole’a pi’ai ’ammemen X@lote hatta Xahula
’?an ’anthen’au ’anwdn. Xdane pa ’an’ommia: “’O’d’one, tco-
kwilo manmehu?” ‘’Qnkiatanndmehu,” ’o’d’one ’apanX@’ome.
“Taxui,’ Xdane ’antohu. Wipaita ’antatexwiltowotcehen ’o’d’one
?onowitcia ’an’oammiamen: ‘f Yonne manwipetci wa mankiatanndtei-
men’au. Hoike nawia’an’an yenne yo mamphotci.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 317
The children reached their grandparents’ home. There they lived.
As they grew older they often asked their grandparents where their
parents were. Their grandparents said to them: ‘‘My little children,
you will never see your parents again.’”’ Then the children said:
“But anyway we are going to look for our parents until we can find
them.’’ Their grandparents said to them: ‘My little children, you
will never find your parents. The Sun whom you see above the clouds
has taken them to his home.”’ The children said: ‘‘But we are going
to look for them until we find them.” ‘Very well,” said their
grandfather, “go into the woods and cut plenty of willow trees.
But you must not go to or cut the willows where the Sun killed your
father.”’
Then the children took their knives and went to the woods to cut
willows. One of them said: ‘‘Why does not our grandfather want us
to cut the willows where our father was killed? We will go there
anyway and get the willows there.”’ They went there. When they
came to the place where their father was killed, they found willows.
And one of them began to cut them. The willow tree said to them:
“My children, why are you cutting my flesh?”’ The children looked
frightened, but they went home and told their grandfather. ‘‘Grand-
father, the willows spoke to us and told us, ‘Why are you cutting my
flesh?’”’ Their grandfather said to them: “I have told you not to
go there. Now you can go this other way to cut willows.” Then
the two children took their knives again and went to cut willows.
When they came to the woods they began to cut willows. They took
the willows in their arms and carried them to their grandfather.
“Very well,” said their grandfather, “now J shall make shinny
sticks for you. When I finish your shinny sticks you can take them
and go to look for your parents. While you are looking for your
parents you will need them.”’ The grandfather finished the shinny
sticks and they put them on their backs and went to look for their
parents.
They were on the road about three or four days. They came to
the home of Old Male Woodrat and Old Female Woodrat. The
Woodrats said to them: ‘Little children, where are you going?”’
“We are going to look for our parents,” said the boys to the Wood-
rats. ‘‘Very well,” said the Woodrats. And each took two little
sticks from his ears and gave one to each of the boys, saying to them,
“You will need this where you are hunting for your parents. If
there should be any betting, you could rub them on yourselves.”
318 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
’70’0’one ’amme. ’Ammemen Lotapathsene? ’ithon’ai ’anwan.
“Teokwillo, ’o’d’one, mammehu?” Lolapathosne pa ’an’ommia.
“Wa ’ankiatanndmehu,” ’o’d’one ’apanhLolapaths’ome. ‘Taxui,”’
Lolapdthoone pa ’an’ommia, “yonne toipatdeene mapanhuimen wa
mankkiatanndtcimen’au mansowipetci.”” ’Apanthoihakehen ’amme.
’Admmemen wa Lolaphon’ene ’ithon’au ’anwan. Lolaphon’ene pa
’?an’ommia: “Tcokwillo, ’o’d’one, mammehu?” “’QAnkiatannd-
mehu,” ’o’d’one ’apanLolaphon’ome. ‘‘Taxui,” tcexamen Lola-
phon’ene pa ’an’ommia, “yonne thoiphon’ene mapanhuimén wa
mankiatanndtcimen’au mansowipetci.”” ’O’d’one ’apanthoiphonha-
kehen ’amme.
’dmmemen Lolatsolene ’ithon’au ’anwan. Lolatsolene pa ’an-
?emmia: “Teokwillo, ’o’6’one, mammehu?” “’Qnkiatannomehu,”
’o’d’one ’apanLolatsol’ome. ‘‘Taxui,’’ Lolatsolene pa ’an’ommia,
“yonne mapanthgitsolhuimen mankiatanndtcimen’au, yonne manso-
wipetci.”” ’O’O’one ’apanthoitsolhakehen ’amme.
*Ammemen wa Lolatcal’ene *ithon’au ’anwan Lolatcal’ene pa
’?an’ommia: ‘“Teokwillo, ’o’d’one, mammehu?” “’Qnkiatanno-
mehu,” ’o’d’one ’apanLolatca’ome. ‘‘Taxui,’’ teexamen Lola-
tcal’ene pa ’an’ommia, “yonne thoitcal’ene mapanhuimen wa mankia-
tanndtcimen’au mansowipetci.”” ’O’d’one ’apanthoitcalhakehen
7amme.
*dmmemen mentcoho tcutei Tholtdiene kakehui mo’e ’en’ai
’anwan. “Tcokwillo, ’o’d’one, mammehu?” Tholfaiene pa ’an’-
oemmia. “’Ankiatannogmehu,” ’o’d’one ’antohu. ‘‘Taxui,” Tholtai-
ene pa’an’ommia. ‘‘ Komananthoiwia patohewen, phonwen, tsolwen
"imoya’e?”’ ’O’O’one ’antohu: ‘Kananwia.” ‘‘kowen,’’ Tholtaiene
pa ’an’ommia, “yinne thdjene pa maukipdhokehen wa Tholene thoppiu
mapan’dleteci.”” ‘“Kdwenno, nayo kokithoi’antci he ’amiaumemma.”’
“Taxui,”’ theltaiene tohu, ‘““péemo pathewenno mapphotci, hatta
tamo’emg han xo’ene ’an tsolwen, hay yon pi’au pathelwen, hax
haxwe’ene pdthowen, kota phonwen. Ho maithoi’amehenne
tatholxiamotxi.”” “Taxui,” ’o’d’one ’antohu, “He ’aimiaumeko
na ’atheiphotei.” ’Apanthoiwdtcehen wa Tholtdiene tomemma
* The butterflies of various colors are encountered by Sengere-
pove’éna in the order in which the cardinal directions and their colors
are mentioned in Picuris ceremonies: tapupa, northeast (patho-,
white); ts’opa, northwest (phon-, black); tanon, southwest (tsol-,
yellow); takwepa, southeast (teal-, blue). To these is sometimes
added: pimma, east; literally, in the middle (paxe-, gray); cp. p. 354.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 319
Then the little boys went. As they went they came to the home of
the White Butterflies. ‘‘Where are you going, little boys?’ the
White Butterflies said to them. ‘‘We are going to look for our
parents,” said the little boys to the White Butterflies. ‘‘ Very well,’
said the White Butterflies, ‘‘if you take this white paint, where you
are going to look for your parents you may need it.”” They took the
white paint and went.
As they went, they came to the home of the Black Butterflies.
The Black Butterflies said to them: ‘‘Where are you going, little
boys?” ‘We are going to look for our parents,”’ said the little boys
to the Black Butterflies. ‘Very well,’ said the Black Butterflies,
“if you take this black paint, where you are going to look for your
parents you may need it.’”’ The little boys took the black paint and
went.
As they went, they came to the home of the Yellow Butterflies.
The Yellow Butterflies said to them: ‘‘Where are you going, little
boys?” “We are going to look for our parents,” the little boys said
to the Yellow Butterflies. ‘‘Very well,” said the Yellow Butterflies
to the boys, ‘“‘if you take this yellow paint, where you are going to
look for your parents you may need it.” The little boys took the
yellow paint and went.
As they went, they came to the home of the Blue Butterflies. The
Blue Butterflies said to them: ‘“‘Where are you going, little boys?”
“We are going to look for our parents,’’ said the little boys to the
Blue Butterflies. ‘Very well,” said the Blue Butterflies, “if you
take this blue paint, where you are going to look for your parents
you may need it.’’ The little boys took the blue paint and went.
As they went, they came to where there was a certain Flying
Creature which looked like a crow. ‘‘Where are you going, little
boys?” the Flying Creature said to them. ‘We are going to look
for our parents,” said the little boys. ‘‘Very well,’ said the Flying
Creature, ‘‘have you any white, black, and yellow paint?” The
little boys said, ‘‘We have.” ‘Good,” said the Flying Creature,
“if you can paint my feathers I will take you up to where the Sun
lives.” “Good. We will paint your feathers any way you wish.”
“Very well,” said the Flying Creature, ‘‘you can paint my head white
and my bill and legs yellow, and here on my breast white, and the
tail white, and black at the end. After you paint me as I have told
you, I will be ready to fly.’ “Very well,” the little boys said, ‘we
will paint you any way you wish.” They took out their paint and
painted the Flying Creature as he had told them. After they
finished painting him, he was called by them the Eagle. That is the
320 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES JETH. ANN. 43
‘anthoiphohu. ’Qmphophalehen Tciuene ’anxaya. Hokeyo Tciuene
ho’imoyo. “Taxui,’”’ Tciuene tohu, ‘yon tonna mantai. Kwalwenno
manteceltci, na tathelkolhe. Takdlekennayo mantcekweltci. Mana-
mopo mapan’omen maxen.” ‘Taxui,”’ ’o’d’one ’antohu.
Tciutonna ’anlaketen Teiuene makol. Piasai kwilpa wilehu,
piasai laikepa namulmatcia. Tcexame mala. ‘“Teang han
mantcekwelpon,” ’0’6’one ’an’ommia.
’Untcekwelpotexen tan napadman’au ’an’e. ‘“‘Teano han, ’o’d’one,
Tholene ’apawian’au wo mapankal. Watei (namatopemen) natho-
pathokittha yo manankia’e, Tholene ’akwinwia’eyo wia. Hatta
manantamene ’ampewia’e wa Thodpiapdxeline thdtha yo 7ikui.
Thepai hiaulon Thapiapaxelane manantamene ’ampewia’epajo puha-
ftahu. Hokeyo thonna hiaulon nananne wa puhatadmempiu mam-
metci. Napi’ayo ’anape’a howenko manapipo. Hewen mantci-
’alian’an manatoxepipe. ’CAixen mampuha’awia’an mampuhathiatei.
Howenko manant@mene ’ampéwia’e mapanaxwampo. ’Umpu-
haxwantowia’etenno mapanxwantci. Teoteketten ’atenno ’opu-
haxwantowia. Philian ’awia’e mapanthouko Thopiapaxoldne
piuketci. Piukethayo manantdmene ’ampéwia’e mapankolehenng
wewe tcaikwil man’etci, yoho taixiatcimewen.”’
’?O’d’one Tciuene pa ’anai’ommia ’amme. Hiaulon tcexamen
napiai ’antotalia. ‘Yino han Thodpiapdxeline kanantamene
?anpéwia’epa puhatahu,” ’o’d’one ’antohu, ‘“‘taxui, ’an’dtcometci.
Tciuene pa ’anai’ommiapunten ’antapuhen kanfiahanetci.”” Mentco-
ho wa Thopiapdaxolane ’anapompiu ’amme. Wa tcimen’au ’anwdn-
’aiten Thopiapdxolane pa ’an’ommia: ‘‘’9utco’d’one, heyo teune ’e
yoho manwanhu? Na teutsi hele yoho ’ananqlataiwamme, witciutco-
one wenno yoho ’anawamme. Tcano wipaita mapanhanetci.” ‘Pa
yoho ’antcihu,” ’o’d’one ’antohu. ‘Taxui,” Thopiapaxetine tohu,
“vompol manantadmene ’anpéwia’epayo, thepai tapuhatahu. Yoho
mankiatannodtcimen nanq’an ’ipuhatdci manantadmene ’ampéwia’epa.
Tcutai ’oléme’eyo ’ansopéwiatci.”’
Mentcoho ’ipuhatahu. ’O’d’one ’ampuhaxwantcikomaixen Thopi-
apdxoldne ’opuhaxwantowia’ehenno ’anxwanhu. Philian ’anwiapu’e
?anthowian Thopiapaxoldne piuken. ‘‘Takanléme,”’ ’0’d’one ’antohu.
“Yimpoi kananta@mene ’ampéwia’e ’apanhuimenten wa Tciuene
kananxia’empiu ’ammetci.’”’ ’Qpanpékolehen ’amme wa Tciuene
xia’entha ’anwdan.
“Heyo, ’o’d’one, manannapu?” Tciuene pa ’an’ommia. ‘“K6-
wen,” ’o’d’one ’antohu. ‘“‘Kanant@mene ’ampéwia’eyo kantéme.”’
“Taxui,”’ Tciuene tohu, “tean’ehan manankiane mankolme’aihenng
wathate manmaiaihenno wéwe patha mapilouetci patcuta. Tho-
ton’aihen wa manankia’etha mametci, tcitei nang’etenng Thdlene
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES aval
reason the Eagle looks that way. ‘‘Very well,” said the Eagle, ‘‘sit
on my back. Hold on tight, I am about to fly. As soon as I fly,
close your eyes. You must not look until I tell you.”’ ‘Very well,”
said the little boys.
They sat on the Eagle’s back and the Eagle flew. He ascended
higher and higher and kept circling. Then he lighted. “Now you
can open your eyes,” he said to the little boys.
When they opened their eyes they were in a strange-looking land.
“Now, little boys, I have brought you to the Sun’s land. Over there
where that white house is your mother is staying. She is now the
Sun’s wife, and your father’s head is at the Morning Star’s house.
Every morning the Morning Star plays shinny with your father’s
head. So you must go early to-morrow morning to the place where
he is playing shinny. He makes a fierce noise, but you must not
fear him. Should he ask you any questions, you must not fear to
answer him. If he should ask you to play shinny, you must be
willing to play shinny with him. But you must not hit your father’s
head. You must only try to hit his shinny sticks. He has only
about ten shinny sticks. When you break his last shinny stick the
Morning Star will drop dead. When he drops dead you must take
your father’s head and come here again. I will be waiting here.”
The little children went as the Eagle had told them. Early in the
morning they heard a fierce noise. ‘‘There is the Morning Star playing
shinny with our father’s head,” said the little children; “‘indeed, let
us go and meet him. We will do as the Eagle told us, and will win.”
They went where the Morning Star was making the noise. When
they came to where the Morning Star was the Morning Star said to
them: ‘Little boys, why do you come here? There is no creature
that comes around where I am; not even a little bird comes around
here. Now I shall eat you both up.” ‘We are around here, any-
how,’ the little boys said. ‘Very well,’ said the Morning Star,
“this is your father’s head, and I play shinny with it every morning.
If you are around here looking for your parents, let us play shinny
with your father’s head. Whoever wins shall have the head.”
Then they began to play shinny. The little children, instead of
hitting the shinny ball, were hitting the Morning Star’s shinny
sticks. When his last shinny stick was broken, the Morning Star
dropped dead. ‘‘We win,” said the little boys. ‘Our father’s head
we shall take over to where the Eagle is waiting for us.’’ So they
took the head and came to where the Eagle was waiting.
“How did you make out, little boys?” said the Eagle to them.
“Well,” said the little boys, “we have won our father’s head.”
“Very well,” said the Eagle, “now you may go and get your mother.
When you bring her back here I will take you down again to the
earth. You must go to where your mother is staying after it gets
322 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
matcikuhu. Tcikuitha yinne talexwilto’ene Xd@ane pa mantommi-
apu’e mampdapholehen watciwapo, hanko mankiamatei teaikwil.”
“Ho,” teexamen ’o’d’one ’antohu, ‘‘thotan’aihenng wa kanankia-
theppiu ’ansometci.”’
Tholken’aihen mentcoho ’amme. Phalta ’antson’aihen Tholene
’antcithan. Xatdlexwiltopa ’anpapholehen Thédlene iqitcipiu.
’(nkiahémehen wa Tciuene xia’epuppiu ’anhui.
““Heyo, ’o’0’one, manannapu?”’ Tciuene pa ’an’emmia. ‘‘Kowen,”
’0’0’one ’antohu. ‘‘Taxui,” Tciuene tohu, “patcuta yon tonna
mimalai, takolekennayo miupehatcepaxemetci, miwatcekwelpapa
patha tatakenmaxen.” Tcexamen Tciuton’ai ’imalakehen Tciuene
makol. Wa namulmatcia’aihen, patha matai. ‘Tcanohan,”
Tciuene tohu, ‘wa matheppiu mata@mene ’ampéwia’e mapihuimen
mametci. Wa mathenna mawan’aiten yompei péemo wa nanenan’au
mapikutci. Mapiyamopo pannuthela napuimen. ’Cixen hanko
matamene wéwe ’atupiatcetci.”
’O’d’one ’anankiaphil ’inthoppiu patcuta ime. ’Itthonna ’iwan-
’aiten ’anantamene ’ampéwia’e wa Tciuene pa ’anai’omiapun nowen
nanan’ai ’ipikui. Pannuthols napuimen wa ’ipipékuipun’au ’iumom-
‘aixen Sengerepove’éna tsdpe waiwimepun ’imon’aihen ’ithan.
Tcihuite kowehenno ’itho’an.
Kaxweki.
Tur OLp Giant STEALS SENGEREPOVE’ENA’S WIFE
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen pakeuphal’ai ’itaitho. Thapa
Sengerepove’éna hatta ’Ipathdkwin ’aliulano ’antho. Mentcoho
Sengerepove’éna tcdwia. Tedkehen fahu. Thepai ’otcdwelemen,
ipekalhu. Hatta ’atiulane piakakehen paikwiu tahu.
Mentcoho wepa Sengerepove’éna ’otcdwale. ’Ipathdkwin paikwiu
piakame. ’Onapia’amentha mentcoho Takololote ’awan. ‘‘Heyo
‘atahu?” Takolone pa’ommia. “Tanapia’ahu,” ’Ipathdkwin tohu.
“Taxui, yon tdmoloma ’atsen xui,’ Takoléne tohu. “Hatta
7anthonmakwil tamemeko. Tcakken hatta ’ansatcdkwiwakkeko,”’
*Ipathdkwin tohu. ‘Yon fomoloma ’atsan, me ’a’emehu. ’?Afson’an
na ’akdlehen yo ’ataitci,’’ Takoline tohu. ‘ ’Anthoppiu hatta
tamemeko. Hatta teakken ’ansotho’e tedkwiwakkeko,” ’Ipathdkwin
tohu. Mentcoho Takolone pa kéliahen tamolotha takiahen thoppiu
mapesal.
Sengerepove’éna tedkwiwan’aixen ’atiuthe’e thattha wa’e. ‘‘Howen
hexetci ’anhutho’e tcan wakwoenwileme? Xomma wa_ faikwiu
taipoteutei.’”’ Ho tomenphil wa paikwiukwil polou. Wa ma@’dkettha
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES o2o
dark, for that is the only time that the Sun goes to sleep. While he
is asleep you must spit the earsticks that the Woodrats gave you on
him and he will not wake up, and then you must bring your mother
here.’ ‘All right,’’ said the little boys, “‘as soon as it grows dark we
shall go over to where our mother is living.”’
When it got dark, they went. When they entered the room they
found the Sun asleep. They spit on him with the earsticks of the
Woodrats. The Sun fell fast asleep. They took their mother out
and carried her to where the Eagle was waiting for them.
“How did you make out, little boys?”’ said the Eagle. ‘‘ Well,”
said the little boys. ‘‘Very well,’ said the Eagle, “the three of you
sit on my back, close your eyes as soon as I fly, do not open your
eyes until I land on the ground.’”’ Then they got on the back of the
Eagle, and the Eagle flew. He circled around and landed on the
ground. ‘Now,’ said the Eagle, ‘‘you can take your father’s head
home. When you reach home you must put your father’s head in a
dark place. Don’t look at it for five days. By that time your
father will turn to flesh again.”
The little children and their mother went home. When they
reached home they put their father’s head in a dark place, as the
Eagle had told them. After five days they looked where they had
put the head and they found Sengerepove’énq as he had looked before.
They lived happily ever afterward.
You have a tail.
Tue Oxtp Grant STEALS SENGEREPOVE’ENQ’S WIFE
Once upon a time at San Juan the people dwelt. And also
Sengerepove’éna and White Corn Woman, his wife, dwelt there.
Sengerepove’éna was a hunter. He did nothing but hunt. He
went out hunting every day and brought deer.'| And his wife did
nothing but wash clothes down at the river.
And once Sengerepove’éna went out hunting. White Corn Woman
went to the river to wash clothes. While she was washing her clothes
the Old Giant came to her. ‘‘What are you doing?” said the Giant
to her. ‘I am washing clothes,’”’ said White Corn Woman. ‘Very
well, get into this packbasket then,” said the Giant. ‘I am already
starting home. My husband comes home from hunting at this time,”
said White Corn Woman. ‘‘Get into this packbasket, I said. If you
do not get in I will take you and put you in myself,” said the Giant.
“Tam already starting home. My husband comes home from hunt-
ing at this time,’’ said White Corn Woman. Then the Giant took
her and put her into the packbasket and started for his home.
When Sengerepove’éna returned from hunting his wife was not at
home. ‘But why is it that my wife does not come up from the river
'For deer-summoning song used by Sengerepove’éna and other
Picuris deer hunters see p. 397.
324 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
wandkettha wan’aixen, hota ’antipatukkiwaita hota ’ongpiatiakwan-
waita nang. ‘‘Howen tcokwiltci ’antiume?”’ Sengerepove’énag tohu.
Yiho tcimen mentcoho Takolone ’ithan. ‘‘Howen yontai tailine
pahe taiutemmia. Howen wa tikou’auxen he tihotci.”” Lumo’-
elehen mentcoho Takoldne ’ihon.
Memen Xa@lole hax Xahi’o ’an ’anthen’ai wan. ‘“‘Sengerepove’éna,
tcokwillo ’amehu?’”’ Xdane pa’ommia. ‘Taliukolmehu, Takolotote
pa tahulemmayo.” ‘’Q, yokweyo teomen tcatthei. ‘Taithune
taihiihu,’ me ’emmiameko yokwe memen.”’ Xa@lote hatta Xaliula pa
wennen talexwiltoteommiahen. ‘’Aixen hoikenan@’an yene payo
’apaholtci,’”” Xatote *°ommia. Thapa X@lole xwelmotcanehen thapa
xwellommia ’9mmiamen, ‘‘Yontsi xwelene ’aixen hoikenana’an’an
’ahuimen.”’
Memen thapa Lolapathoene ’ithen’au wan. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna,
teokwillo ’amehu,”’ Lolapathoone pa ’ommia. Sengerepove’éna
tohu: “Takoldtole pa tatiutemmayo tatiukolmehu.” “’Amatci.
‘Tdithune taihtihu ’ ’ommiameko yohui teomen.”” Lolapathoane pa
xolenpathomekiahen talalpdthoone ’an. ’Okalehen mentcoho wéwe
maTakold’ihonpesai.
Mentcoho Sengerepove’éna me. Memen Loldphon’ena ’ithen’ai
wan. ‘“‘Sengerepove’éna tcokwillo ’amehu?’’ Lolaphon’ene pa
?ommia. Sengerepove’éna tohu: ‘Takoldtole pa taiutemmayo tatiu-
kolmehu.” Lolaphon’ene “itohu: ‘“Yohui ‘taithune taihiihu
?ommiamenno tcdmen.’”’ Lolaphon’ene pa xelenphonmekiahen
talalphon’ene ’an. ’Okalehen mentcoho wéwe maTakold’ihonpesai.
Memen Lolatsolene ’ithen’ai wan. ‘“Sengerepove’éna, tcokwillo
’amehu?” Lolatsolene pa ’ommia. Sengerepove’éna tohu: ‘Tako-
lotole pa tatiulemmayo tatiukolmehu.” ’Qmatci. Yohui ‘taithune
taihtihu ’ ’ommiamenno tcomen,’’ Loldtsolene ’itohu. Xolentsol-
mekiahen hatta talaltsolene ’an. ’Okalehen wéwe Takolotole
*ihon.
Memen Wolitcal’ene ’ithen’ai wan. ‘‘Sengerepove’éng, tcokwillo
?amehu?” Lotateal’ene pa ’ommia. “Takoldtlote pa tahulemmayo
tatiukolehu.’”’ ‘’Qmatei Yehuiyo ‘taithune taihtihu ’ *9mmiamenne
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 325
early this time? I think I will go down to the river and see.”’ As
he said thus, he went down to the river to look. When he came to
her place of washing, the pot was still there and her clothes were still
hanging to dry as she had left them. ‘But where did my wife go?”
said Sengerepove’éna.
As he was walking around there he found a track of the Giant.
“T think this big person has stolen my wife. But anyhow I will
follow him until I catch up with him.” He put his quiver on his
back and started to follow the tracks of the Giant.
As he went he came to the home of Old Male Woodrat and Old
Female Woodrat. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, where are you going?” the
Woodrat said to him. “I am going to fetch my wife, because the
Old Giant has stolen my wife from me.” ‘‘ Yes, he was passing here
to-day. ‘The one greedy for people is taking a person,’ the people
called out to him as he was going by here.”” Old Male Woodrat and
Old Female Woodrat each gave him an earstick. ‘“‘In case of betting
you must spit on yourself with this,” Old Male Woodrat said. And
Old Male Woodrat took out a tobacco bag and also gave him a pipe
and told him: ‘‘ You may take this pipe in case of betting.”’
As he went he came to the home of the White Butterflies.
“Sengerepove’éna, where are you going?”’ said the White Butterflies
to him. Sengerepove’éna said: ‘‘The Old Giant has stolen my wife
and I am going to fetch her.” ‘‘You can bring her back. ‘The one
ereedy for people is taking a person,’ the people called out to him as
he passed here.’ The White Butterflies fed him white cornbread
and white boiled beans. After he had eaten he then set off again to
follow the tracks of the Giant.
Then Sengerepove’éna went on. As he went he came to the home
of the Black Butterflies. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, where are you going?”’
said the Black Butterflies to him. Sengerepove’éna said: ‘‘The
Old Giant has stolen my wife. I am going to fetch her back.’ The
Black Butterflies said: ‘‘‘The one greedy for people is taking a
person,’ the people said to him as he passed.’’ The Black Butter-
flies fed him black cornbread and black boiled beans. After he had
eaten he then set off again to follow the tracks of the Giant.
As he went he came to the home of the Yellow Butterflies.
“Sengerepove’éna, where are you going?’’ said the Yellow Butter-
flies to him. Sengerepove’éna said: ‘‘The Old Giant has stolen my
wife and I am going to fetch her.”” ‘“‘You can bring her. ‘The one
greedy for people is taking a person,’ the people said to him as he
passed,” said the Yellow Butterflies. He was fed yellow cornbread
and yellow boiled beans. After he had eaten he again started off to
follow the tracks of the Old Giant.
As he went, he came to the home of the Blue Butterflies. “‘Sen-
gerepove’éna, where are you going?” said the Blue Butterflies to
him. ‘The Old Giant has stolen my wife. I am going to fetch my
326 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
memen,”’ Lolateal’ene *itohu. Xolentcalmekiahen han talaltcal’ene
’ ’ S = S = a.
an. ’Okalehen wéwe Takolone ’ihon.
Hétcuwen Takolone thon’ai wan. Thonna fson’aixen, thonna
huthan. ‘’Qnhulane, heyo teutsi yoho ’atahu?”’ Hu’ome. ‘“Tako-
lone pa wa paikwiu ta’Gdmepun’aite tamolona tatakiahen tasomatciapu
teakwil. Takoléne yin ’anatotakimmayo ’e,’’ ’atiuthe’e pa ’emmia
“Taxui,” Sengerepove’éna tohu, “tatama yo taphotouhe, ’ajxia-
‘amewen. Tihon’aihenne kananthoppiu ’ametci.”’
Mentcoho Sengerepove’éna tdtapiu wa Takoléne taipiu tou.
Tson’aiten tcita Takoléne toiwaxenkutha than. ‘Heyo, Sengere-
pove’éna, teutei yoho ’anpakwen pakin’au ’atsonhu. Na tcutei wi
hele ’ananqalataiwanme yeho. Wi tciutco’one wenng yoho ’ana-
tsomme,” Takolone pa ’emmiahu. ‘‘Manhtulemaiko hokeyo tatiu-
kol’e,” Sengerepove’éna Takold’ome. ‘‘Taxui,’’ Takoléne tohu,
“kanhoi’antci, teutei ’oleme’eyo liuene ’awiatci.’”’ ‘‘Taxui,’’ Sengere-
pove’éna tohu.
Takolone tea’an xueltiliteanehen tohu: ‘‘Teutei yontai ’elamaxen
tatane xwelkopaxemopome’eyo ’otémetci.’”’ Ho tomen mentcoho
xwelphiatci. Tcexamen nakopaxemopiahu. Halo tatapin’ai ’anatse-
kopdxemowamenta ’axweltonphal.
Tean’ehan Sengerepove’éna ’anawdn. Xdane pa talexwilto temmia-
pu’e pa xwelpapholmehen lataihu. Maxotciakia’ohuihenno
’axwelwia. ‘‘Wu, hiapa ’e ’ahe. Lapuma kanaikepaxemowatei,
ho’ohen kasoxwelwia. Hiapa na wihitcu’an ’aniwianhe wipin’aiwen
?anawan. Tcano ’atutemetci.’’ Sengerepove’éna mentcoho xwelphia-
tce. Hatta nakepdxemopiahu. Piasai pin’ai ’anawahu. Leuten
napuimen ’@lamaxen ’anawan. ‘’Kyomen ’alaitutce natholen,”’
Takoldne pa ’ommiahu. ‘‘Howen halo miaittmeme. Tcang na-
kdteatci, teutei ?owawole’eyo tiuene ’awiatci.”’
Mentcoho Takoléne napho’aite ’ophal’aite tcilaumotcane, han
tohu: ‘’Teano yone pa ’atephaliatci. hokeyo tean ’eyo kanatsenwatei.
Tecutoi yon totamate ’owawole’eyo liuene ’awiatci. Hokeyo ’eyo yona
’atsottewetci.”’ ‘‘Taxui,’’ Sengerepove’éna tohu. Xa@ane pa tale-
xwiltotammia pu’epa wetanmapapholmehen. Takoldtote ’otcitouphia-
teehen kén’aukwil ’owole. Tawehui tcitouene tdtama ’otenhu.
“Teano Sengerepove’éna yinne pa tephaliatci. tcano ’anhuwiatci.”
Tciltsuene ’opohatepphal, Takolone tdtapiu tson. Tsen’aixen Senge-
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY FORTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 44
THE CONTEST BETWEEN SENGEREPOVE'ENA AND THE GIANT
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 327
wife.’ ‘You can bring her. ‘The one greedy for people is taking
a person,’ the people here said to him as he went,’’ said the Blue
Butterflies. He was fed blue cornbread and blue boiled beans.
After he had eaten he again followed the tracks of the Giant.
At last he came to the home of the Giant. As he entered the
house he found his own wife in the house. ‘“‘My wife, what are you
doing here?” he said to his wife. ‘While I was washing at the
river the Giant came and put me into his packbasket and brought
me here. The Giant is there in his estufa,’” said his wife to him.
“Very well,’ said Sengerepove’éna, “I will go down to the estufa
and you can be getting ready. After I kill him, we can go home.”
And then Sengerepove’éna went down into the estufa, in where
the Giant was. Entering there he found the Giant lying leaning
asleep. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, why are you entering here in my private
place? There is no living creature that comes around here. Not
even a little bird comes here,’ the Giant said to him. ‘Because
you have stolen my wife, that is the reason I have come to get her,”’
Sengerepove’éna said to the Giant. ‘‘Very well,” said the Giant,
“we will bet. The one that wins shall have the woman.” ‘‘ Very
well,” said Sengerepove’éna.
The Giant took out a long pipe and said: ‘‘The one that fills this
estufa to the top with a cloud of smoke from the pipe shall win.”
(Pl. 44.) As he said this, he lighted his pipe. Then he began to
make the cloud of smoke from his pipe. But before the smoke
reached halfway up the estufa his tobacco burned out from his pipe.
Now Sengerepove’énq’s turn came. He began to spit on his pipe
with the earsticks that the Old Woodrats had given him, and began
to put tobacco into it. His pipe was not larger than his little finger.
“Wu, you could not do half as well as I did. The smoke of your
pipe will never reach the ceiling, because your pipe is too small.
Even my pipe, large as it is, did not get half way. Now I am going
to win the woman from you.’ Sengerepove’éna then lighted his
pipe and began to make a cloud of smoke. Slowly it rose halfway.
In a short time it reached up to the roof-hole. ‘I think you must
have more power than I,’”’ said the Giant to him. ‘But you have
not defeated me yet. Now we shall see. Whoever comes out safe
shal! have the woman.”’
Then the Giant took a bag of obsidians from a shelf hole in the
wall and said: ‘“‘Now this will cut you to pieces. And so it will be
your turn this time. The one that comes out alive from this estufa
shall have the woman. You are to stay in here first.” ‘Very
well,” said Sengerepove’éna. He spit on himself with the earsticks
which the Old Woodrats had given him. The Old Giant started to
burn the obsidians and went outside. The obsidians began to
explode in the estufa like a gun. ‘‘Now those will cut Sengere-
328 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
repove’éng hota wa’jlia ’e. “Xomma ’eyo tean kanawan,” Sengere-
pove’éna Takolone ’omehu. ’Otcitouteanehen mentecoho ’ophia~
teehen kén’aukwil ’owale. Tawehui tcitsuene totama nateppo.
”
“Tahan ’ammetci,” liu’eme, “teano Takolone tcitsuene pate-
phalia.”” Mentecoho ’atiuphil ’amme.
‘dmmemen Lolateal’ene ’ithen’ai ’anwan. ‘“‘Heyo, Sengere-
pove’ena, “ahuhtihu han,” Lolateal’ene pa ’ommia. ‘“’,” Sen-
gerepove’éna tohu. “Mankwon’antci xui. Tut’ephalian howen
leutenno tuta yatiatci.”
Mentcoho ’amme, wa Loldtsolene ’ithen’ai ’anwan. “Sengere-
pove’éna, ’atuhtihu han?” “?(1,”” Sengerepove’éna tohu. “‘Man-
kwoen’antei xui. Tutephalia pynnopa hatta tutayatiahu,” Lotatso-
lene pa ’an’ommiamehen ’amme.
Wa Loldphen’ene ’ithon’ai ’anwan. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, ’aliuhiihu
han,’ Lolaphon’ene pa ’9mmia. “’Q,” Sengerepove’éna tohu.
“Makwon’antei xui. Tutephalia pynnopa hatta tutatcia,’”’ haihen
ho ’an’ommiamenten ’amme.
Wa _ Loldpathoone 7ithon’ai ’anwan. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, hatta
‘aliuhtihu han?” Lolapathoone pa’oemmia. ‘’Q,” Sengerepove’éna
tohu. ‘““Mankwon’antci xui. Tutephalia pynnepa hatta tutaya-
phalhan.”’ Ho ’an’ommiamenten ’amme.
Wa Xalole han Xah’o ’anthon’ai ’anwan. ‘“‘Sengerepove’éna,
‘ahuhiihu han,” Xdane pa ’emmia. ‘’A,” Sengerepove’éna tohu.
“Mankwon’antei xui. Tutephalia punnopa hatta tutayaphalko
hatta manhdpiahe.”” Ho ’an’ommiamenten ’amme.
Takolotole *itamolo’eletenno Sengerepove’éna ma’ixossai. Nate-
lia’epa, lelpaiwehen mo’aihen pi’au mehu.
Mentcoho Pakdiene xwia’an. Pakayene teuten ’awan. ‘‘Heyo,
Phutetala,'” Pakaiene pa ommia. “Hele ’axwia’anhu Sengere-
pove’ena pa taliukolalemmayo, xomma mannatel’antcike, wa ’antel-
xwiltlaken’au tikowehen titiukwetcike.”’ ‘‘Na nathia’ai tiyasotelho-
kenno, na tiyasopéephia.”’ Pakdiene tomehen matholkol.
' Proper name of the Old Giant, of obscure meaning, used by the
birds, ete., in addressing him.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 329
pove’éna to pieces. Now I shall have the woman.” After the
obsidians were all exploded, the Giant went into the estufa. But
when he went in Sengerepove’éna was still sitting there as if nothing
had happened. ‘‘ Now it is your turn,’”’ Sengerepove’éna said to the
Giant. He then took out the obsidians and set them afire, and
then went outside. The obsidians were exploding like a gun in the
estufa.
‘“Now let us go,’’ he said to his wife, “the Giant has now been
cut all to pieces by the obsidians.’’ With his wife he then set out.
As they went they came to the home of the Blue Butterflies.
‘““Sengerepove’éng, are you already taking your wife?” said the Blue
Butterflies to him. ‘‘Yes,’’ said Sengerepove’éna. ‘‘ You must hurry
then. His flesh was all cut to pieces but will all come together again
in a short time.”
And then they went and came to the home of the Yellow Butter-
flies. ‘“‘Sengerepove’énq, are you already taking you wife?” ‘‘Yes,”’
said Sengerepove’éna. ‘‘You must hurry then. His flesh was all
cut to pieces but is coming together again already,’’ the Yellow
Butterflies told them, and they went.
They came there to the home of the Black Butterflies. ‘“‘Sengere-
pove’éna, are you already taking your wife?’’said the Black Butter-
flies to him. ‘“‘Yes,’’ said Sengerepove’éna. ‘‘You must hurry then.
His flesh was all cut to pieces but has come together again already.”
And as they were told that they went.
They came there to the home of the White Butterflies. ‘‘Sengere-
pove’éna, are you already taking your wife?”’ said the White Butter-
flies to him. ‘Yes,’ said Sengerepove’éna. ‘‘ You must hurry then.
His flesh was all cut to pieces but has come together again already.”
And as they were told that they went.
They came there to the home of Old Male Woodrat and Old
Female Woodrat. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna, are you already taking your
wife?”’ the Woodrats said to him. ‘‘Yes,’’ said Sengerepove’éna.
“You must hurry then. His flesh was all cut to pieces but it has come
together and now he is coming tracking you.’”’ As they were told this
they went.
The Old Giant put his packbasket on his back and started to track
Sengerepove’éna. As it was hot, he was sweating as he went along
the road.
He then called a Buzzard. The Buzzard soon came to him.
“What is the matter, Phutetala?” said the Buzzard to him. ‘I
am calling you because Sengerepove’éna has stolen a pretty woman
from me, to see if you can make it hot, so that I can catch them
wherever they sit down to rest in the shade and take the woman
away from him.” ‘I do not like very much heat, as I am_bald-
headed.’’ As the Buzzard said this he flew away.
19078°—28——22
330 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [eTH. ANN. 43
Leuten mentcoho Pakdiene natelwai. Takolodne telpawehen
mg’aihen teoho pipiu mehu. ‘‘Tcutei Sengerepove’éng ’atiuphil
’anlelte’eyomen ’anwia,” tomen tonatha mapdatintai. Mentcoho
Sengerepove’éna ’aliuphil patinkowehen ’ammehu.
Leuten Takoléne Kakene xwia’an. Tonatha patin’entha Kakene
’awain. ‘‘Heyo, Phutetala,” Kakene pa ’oemmia. ‘‘Mannatelwiatci-
keyo ’axwia’anhu. Sengerepove’éna pa taltiukolatemmayo pihonhu.
*Cixen yin ’antolxwiltaken’au tikoutcike, tiliukwetcike.” ‘‘Na tiyai-
lolhokeko ’onokiwapapia’gn tey’ohen ’anamatholighankeko,”’ Kakene
tomen matholkol.
Leuten mentcoho Kdakene natolxwia’an. Mollon naphekwenme-
waita, teyten tolene maxwawe. Kwamphilo mentcoho tolhu.
Pa’iwehen Takoldne mo’aihen Pima mehu. Tsdputhata ’omele-
saitciamen matcepaxemehu. Nakwantialpupomenmakolmen mehu,
pa@’iwehen mo’aihen. Sengerepove’éna ’aliuphil patinkowehen pima
7ammehu. Mentcoho Takolone tolpa’iwehen mo’aihen pima memen
wétan tohu: “‘Sengerepove’éna mentcoho ’amalolxwinya’eyo wia, halo
piyaisokoume. Hatta howe tamilehe. Hexeyo pa’iwehen napa-
wehen yon pima nanan’ai tcutei tametci?’”? Mentcoho Takolone
wéwe thappiu mamile.
Sengerepove’éna ’anthon’ai ’anwdn’aiten tcikwete kowen ’antho-
tahu.
Hokeyo hatta Takolone wa Pakouphal’ai watainowake, hele telke
hatta pa’ike ’anathéwia’epa.
Kaxweki.
THE OLp GIANTESS AND THE BROTHER AND SISTER FAawns.
Nakuthe nakutheketen tcexamen Wethotapawa’an ! Takolo’oli’o
the. Tcexamen thopai ’otcewolemen hele tcune ’anathiame’e yin
tcimen’au ’onahdmen ’onakalhu, yenne wai piuene, kixwiu’ene,
tlakwene han wel tcune nakwetai’ene yin tcimen’au ’antceltiame’e.
Tcexamen wepa hipupa Pin’omakwil “ikel’e’ai Kui’aihen *itui-
kolehen mentcoho me. Wa PIn’o’au mentcoho tcimen, wésen
P@’o’d’one ’antcitiakeliatha ’ithan. Mentcoho piasai kiaten wa
’antcikeliapiu memen, hatta pttha wan, mentcoho ’ankel’e’an
kuipu’e pa Pe’o’d’one ’anmakiliahen ’antcélia. ‘Hele fo’éna,
piPe’otcel,” Takolo’oli’o wétan tehu, “teano ’antheppiu pihui’aihen
pikaltci.””, Menteoho Keltha ’elpai’aihen ’’é@lehen ’atheppiu me.
' “Pine Footlog.”’
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 331
In a little while the Buzzard called the heat. The Giant was
sweating as he went along the road. ‘‘Sengerepove’éna and his wife
must stand heat well,” said he as he sat down to rest from the heat
under a cottonwood tree. Sengerepove’éna and his wife were going
along feeling nice and cool.
After a while the Giant called a Crow. While he was sitting there
under the shade of the cottonwood tree the Crow came to him.
“What is the matter, Phutetala?”’ said the Crow to him. ‘T have
called you so that you can summon the rain. Sengerepove’éna has
stolen a pretty woman from me, and I am tracking them. I might
be able to catch him wherever they stop for shelter from the rain,
and take the woman away from him.” “TI do not like the rain,
because if my wings get wet I soon tire of flying,’ said the Crow, and
flew away.
In a little while the Crow called the rain. It began to get cloudy
and the rain soon began to pour. It rained, together with thunder.
The Giant was drenched as he went along the road. The lightning
struck in front of his face, and as it struck he closed his eyes. And
when he heard the noise of the thunder he jumped as he went along
there drenched. Sengerepove’éna and his wife were going along the
road feeling nice and cool. As the Old Giant went along the road
drenched he said to himself, ““Sengerepove’éna must stand rain well
for I have not been able to overtake him yet. I think I will turn
back again. Why am I going, drenched as I am, and with the roads
muddy?” And the Giant returned again to his home.
Sengerepove’éna and his wife arrived home and they lived happily
thereafter.
And this is why the Giant has never again come to San Juan to
look for more people, since he suffered so much from the heat and rain.
You have a tail.
Tue Oxtp GIANTESS AND THE BROTHER AND SISTER Fawns.
Long ago the Old Giantess lived at Wétholapawa’an. She went
out hunting every day and killed whatever she could out there and
brought it home, such as rabbits, chipmunks, tree squirrels, or what-
ever animals she could get while going about hunting.
Putting her shawl over her shoulders and taking her cane, she
once started for Pin’oma. While she was walking about at Pin’oma,
she found two little Fawns fast asleep. Going over slowly and
quietly toward where they were lying asleep, she approached them,
covered the young Fawns with the shawl which she had on her
shoulders, and caught them. ‘‘Hurrah! I have got the little
Fawns,” the Old Giantess said to herself, ‘‘now I shall take them
home and fatten them up and eat them.’ She wrapped them up
in her shawl, put them on her back, and carried them home.
332 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
*Cthettha wan’aihen thophalta ‘iP@’omatco’aihen ’antcihu.
‘Ikwelemekemen thepai thapa wel tcune hele ’angthiame’e
’imekemen. Hohen 7iwa@’anhu. Piasai Pe’d’one ’antaupiatciahu.
‘Anailaw’opiatciamenta yin tho’au ’ananatcautiahu. Takolo’oli’o
pa thopai ’kén’au ’anteiwahemmiamen, yiho ’an’epiatahu. Kwilpa
pilamon ’ammémen wéweta ’ammilehu. Piasai Takolo’oli’o pa
‘anaimekiamenta piasai ’an’ouhu. Tcexamen thopai Takolo’oh’o
pa ’an’ommiahu: ‘’O’d’one, halan hatta monowihope’okayahan.”
’Onohope’otsawiamen ho ’an’ommiahu. Tecexamen Pé@’o’d’one
wétan ’antohu: “Howe Takolo’ol’o thate ’ankwiltci, thapai
konowihopo’dkayq’e ’anso’ommiamenno, hoten tcoho ’antaxata-
kiahen ’ankalia.”” Mentcoho piasai Pe@’o’d’one ’ananapixokowiahu.
Wenho tcexamen ’antohu: ‘‘Thonnayo ’ankwiltci, hoten Takolo’oti’o
pa ’antakiahen ’anhannia.”
Mentcoho thdpahen Takolo’ot’o pa ketha ’anaihemmiaken
’?an’epiahemmia. “Teano ’ankwiltci. Yon kwilpa pilmakwil
’ammekemakwil ’ammemewaitayo kanamilepo.”’ Ho ’antomen
mentcoho ’amme. Pa’aya’oli’o mentcoho thapa yin pu’auta
tha’epa teexamen ’athonketceta teiwa’e. Mentcoho Pe’o’d’one
pilamon ’ammemen ’imomen tohu ‘“Takolo’oh’o po ’ansoPe’o-
xwimmemenno.” Takolo’oh’o talian wétan tohu: ‘‘Wa ko’aixen
’amme’aihen wéwe ’ammilekekohe.’””’ Mentcoho P@’o’d’one hatta
houpa Pima ’anwilehu. Pa’aya’oti’o thenkotcatate wéwe ’anapo:
“'Takolo’ot’o po ’ansoPe’oxwimmemenno.” Ho lteunehen teexamen
Pa’ayq@’ol’o ’anapotahu. ‘‘Tcowinayo,”’ 'Takolo’oti’o tomen,
ike’e’an kuiaihen ’ituikolehen thonketha ’owolehen, hatta houpa
*anPe’omehu: “Wiwina’e po ’anansoPe’oxwimmemenung.” Hato-
men tcexamen 71P@’ohon.
Pe’o’d’one ’ammemewaita Paxopsta pana ’anwdn. Mentcoho
Phoiphaltole! ’amphésalomakwialkur’aihen phitcino’entha ’anwdn.
“Heyo teune, ’o’d’one, tcokwillo manmehu?’”’ Phgiphallole pa
’an’ommia. ‘?’Cnkwilhu Takolo’oti’o pa thopai konohope’otsa-
wiamen ’anxotepiameko. Hokeyo maixeme.” ‘‘Taxui,” Phoi-
phaltote tohu, ‘‘yon phaiphalma mantsen.’”’? Mentcoho Pe@’o’d’one
phgaiphalma 7’antsen. Leuten nanan Talolo’oh’o telpawehen
mo’aihen Phaiphaltote phitcino’entha wan. ‘“Phogiphaltote,
‘ananPe’okwilmeko ho pihénhu, yoho mamamon?” Takolo’oh’o
‘More literally “Old Nostril” or “ Nostril Old Man.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES BED
After she brought the little Fawns home, she turned them loose
inside the house, and they walked about. She fed them with corn
mush and what else she could every morning. That is how she
nursed them. Little by little the young Fawns began to grow. As
they grew older, they got accustomed to the house. The Old
Giantess used to take them outside for pleasure every day, and they
played around there. They would walk up the road for a distance
and then return again. As the Old Giantess fed them, they slowly
grew larger. Every day the Old Giantess would say to them:
“Tittle ones, I believe your little kidneys are already pretty fat.’’
Thus she would say to them as she felt their little kidneys. And
the little Fawns said to each other: ‘Let us run away from the Old
Giantess, for she tells us every day that our little kidneys are already
fat, and is likely to roast us and eat us up.’’ In a short time the
little Fawns began to get more afraid. One night they said to each
other: ‘To-morrow we must run away, lest the Old Giantess roast
us and devour us.”
The next morning the Old Giantess gave them their breakfast
and took them outside to play as usual. ‘‘Now let us run away.
We will walk up the road where we usually go, but this time we will
go and will not return.’ As they said thus, they started off. The
Old Spider Woman, who happened to live near by, was sitting for
pleasure on the roof of her house. As she watched the little Fawns
going along the road, she said: ‘The little Fawns of the Old Giantess
are running away.”’ When the Old Giantess heard this, she said to
herself: ““They go as far as the top and then come back again.”
The little Fawns were already going quite a distance up the road.
Old Spider Woman was heard saying again from the top of her
house: ‘“‘The little Fawns of the Old Giantess are running away.”
Old Spider Woman kept repeating this every once in a while. ‘‘It
must be so,’”’ said the Old Giantess, as she put her shawl on her
shoulders, took her cane, went outside her house, and saw that her
Fawns were already quite a distance away. ‘“‘Sure enough, my
Fawns are running away.’ As she said thus, she followed the
Fawns.
The little Fawns went along and came to Paxepota on the river.
Going on, they came to where Big Nostril had his blanket spread
out and was looking for lice. ‘‘What is the matter, little ones?
Where are you going?”’ Big Nostril said to them. ‘‘We are running
away because the Old Giantess threatened to kill us, feeling our little
kidneys every day. So please hide us.” ‘‘Very well,” said Big
Nostril, ‘‘enter my nostrils.’”’ So the little Fawns went into his
nostrils. In a short time the Old Giantess came, all sweating, to
where Big Nostril was sitting hunting lice. “Big Nostril, I am
following my Fawns, who are running away from me. Have you
334 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 42
tohu. ‘‘Teutei yoho naphitcinekehen tatamekohe wi Pé’o’d’one
wen yoho ’anamaiwammeko.” ’lase, ‘iase. ‘‘Petcutai nawite’ai,
Phaiphaltole, wa’e ’anamisoPe’omehu.’’ Tcexamen P@’o’d’one
houpa ’ammehu. Takolo’oli’o telpawehen mo’aihen kewatta
thonhuihu.
Pe’o’d’one ’ammemewaita Tasotote' tapiatamentha ’anwan. Heyo
teune, ’0’5’one tcokwillo mammehu?” Taselolte pa wétce huikwilta
tatoimomen ’an’ommia. ‘’Qnkwilhu, Takolo’oli’o pa thopai kono-
hopo’otsdwiamen ’anxotepiameko hokeyo maixeme,” Pe’o’d’one
’antohu. ‘‘Taxui, yon tdalimma wipaita mantson.” Tcexamen
wipaita Pe’o’d’one ’antson. Leuten nanan Takolo’oti’o telpawehen
mo’aihen ’ikel’e’ankui’aihen Tasolole tapiamentha ? wan. ‘‘Tasotole,
yoho mamape’omon?”’ Takolo’oli’o tohu. ‘Na teutei tapiakehen
tatameko wi P@’0’d’one wen yoho piyaimomeko,” wétce huikwilta
tatoimomen tohu. ‘Tiu tiu take, tiv tiu take,” Tasolote tohu.
“Petcutai nawite’ai, Tdsotole, wa’e ’anamisoPe’omehu.”’ Tomen
Pe’o’d’one houpa Pima ’ammehu. Takolo’oti’o telpawehen mo’aihen
kéwatta 71P@’ohdnhu.
P@’0’d’one huiputa kwelna Patcane pakeitha tukkuitha ’anwan.
“Heyo tcune, ’o’d’one teokwillo mammehu?”’ Pdatcatote pa ’an-
emmia. ‘Takolo’ot’o pa thepai konghopa’dtsawiameko ’axotapia-
meko ’ankwilhu. Hokyo wa patiaukwema maihéme,”’ Pe’o’d’one
Patcatote ’an’ome. ‘‘Hoxui,’”’ Patcatote tohu, ‘‘man’elwan xui nayo
patiaukwepa mapansohémetci.’? Tcexamen Pe’o’d’one ’an’elwan-
niahen pdtiaukwepa ’anhemmiahen Patcalote pa ’an’ommia: ‘Wa
Kuhane’ai Pétcone *ithen’au wo manmetci. ’Hwen payo tcokwil
manso’sliatci.”” Ho Patcane pa ’an’ommiamehen Pé@’o’d’one ’amme.
Leuten nanan Takolo’oti’o telpawehen mo’aihen ’ankel’e’an kui-
‘aihen Patcalole pawaitha tukkuitha wan. ‘“‘Patcalole, yoho mama-
pe’omon?” “?’C, teattenno yokwe pa’an pihéme. Halo teau-
*ohenno ’ammehu.” ‘‘Taxui, na’e maihémen héu’au ’anamaxqitciat-
ta pitceltcikke,’ Takolo’oh’o tohu. ‘’Q’elwa xui,”’ Patcalote pa
?ommia. Ma’elwanehen pa’ai hemmiahu, papin’ai ’olaiwenna wam-
‘The more original meaning is ‘‘ Digging-stick Shaper Old Man.”
> The common meaning and the one here intended by the narrator
is ‘‘plow;” the more original meaning is ‘‘digging-stick.”’
° Representing the sound of hitting the plow as he shapes it.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 335
not seen them here?”’ said the Old Giantess. ‘‘ No Fawns have come
to me, as I am doing nothing but looking for lice.’ He sneezed.
“For pity’s sake, Big Nostril, my Fawns are going along over yon-
der.”” The little Fawns were going at quite a distance. The
Old Giantess, sweating, followed behind them.
As the little Fawns went along, they came to where Old Plow-
maker was making a plow. ‘‘What is the matter, little ones?
Where are you going?” the Old Plowmaker said as he looked at his
plow on both sides to see if it was true. ‘‘We are running away
because the Old Giantess threatened to kill us, feeling our little
kidneys every day. So please hide us,” said the little Fawns.
“Very well, both of you enter this crack in the plow.” So both of
the little Fawns entered. In a short time the Old Giantess came
along, all sweating, with her shawl on her shoulders, to where the
Old Plowmaker was making a plow. ‘‘Plowmaker, have you not
seen my Fawns around here?” said the Old Giantess. ‘IT am doing
nothing but making plows, and have not seen any little Fawns,’’ he
said, as he looked to see if the plow was true. ‘‘Tiy tiu take, tiu tiu
take,’’ went the Old Plowmaker. ‘‘For pity’s sake, Plowmaker, my
Fawns are going along over yonder,’’ said she. The little Fawns
were going at quite a distance along the road. The Old Giantess,
all sweating, again followed behind the Fawns.
The Fawns came to the dam where Beaver was lying basking
beside the water. ‘‘What is the matter, little ones? Where are you
going?” said the Old Beaver to them. ‘‘We are running away
because the Old Giantess threatened to kill us, feeling our little
kidneys every day. So please carry us across to the other side of
the river,” said the little Fawns to the Old Beaver. ‘Very well
then,” said the Old Beaver, ‘‘get on my back and I will take you
across the river.’ So the little Fawns got on his back and he carried
them across the river, and Old Beaver told them: ‘‘You must go
over to Kuhane’ai where the Snakes live. They will tell you where
to go.”’ As the Old Beaver told them thus, the Fawns went on. In
a short time the Old Giantess came, all sweating, with her shawl on
her shoulders, to where Old Beaver was basking beside the river.
“Old Beaver, have you not seen my Fawns around here?” “Yes,
I just carried them across the river. They are still going near.”
“Well then, carry me across also, so that I can catch them before
they get too far away from me,’ said the Old Giantess. ‘‘Get on
my back then,” said the Old Beaver. As she got on his back, he
started to carry her across. But as the Beaver came to the middle
of the river, where it was deeper, he turned himself upside down.
“Paxatamummun, p’axdlamummun,”’ went the Old Giantess as she
was sinking under the water and again emerging. But she finally
336 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
1”
men Pdatcane mamaxwin. Paxdlamummun, paxdlamummun,
Takolo’oh’o patsottiamen wéweta tcanniamen. Howen hétcuwen
pakoma paliawehen mo’aihen ’owole, tomen: ‘‘Petcutei nawite’ai
‘aisoloipuimewaita. Hatta houpa’e ’anamisoPe’oxaitciahu.” Ma-
patiatammehen wa P@’0’d’one wéwe ’ihon.
Pe’0’d’one ’anmemewaita Patcane pa ’anai’emmiapun wa Kuhane’ai
pétcone ’ithen’ai ’amme. “Inatotakikketha ’anwdn’aiten ’anwéne.
Pétcone totaphalta ’itcitalia kétha. Wen kétha po’alhemmia.
Wewe totaphalpiu tsen’aihen tohu: ‘“‘Wésen ’o’d’one hepa kétha
?anikwen.’”’ Tonene pa ’ommia: ‘’Itceattcatce xui. Hexeyo tcutoi
*iyatcettcatceme?’’ wéwe ’owolehen Pe@’o’d’one Pétcone ’intdtakimma
’antcottcaipia. ‘‘Mantsen, ’o’d’one,’’ Petcone pa ’an’ommia. Hai-
hen ’antson. ’Qntson’aixen Petcone totama ’ikwene. ‘‘Mantai,
’o’0’one, heyo yoho manta@wanhu?”’ P@’o’d’one ’aniai. ’Cntakehen
*apanPetco’omehu: ‘Takolo’oti’?o pa thdpai konghope’otsawiamen
’anxotepiameko, ’anxwimmemen’ai Patcalole pa pa’ai anhemmiahen
teaikwillo ’an’etcime ’an’emmiapuyo hokeyo yoho ’an’e.”’ ‘“ Hoxui,”’
Petcotdnene pa ’an’ommiahu. Ho halo tomen totakétha Takolo’oti’o
natcipo. Mentcoho lelpawehen mo’aihen ’@tatha wan. Wan’aiten
’anapo: “‘Phal’atte, yoho ’anamaPe’o’e?”” “(, yong ’an’e. ’Axai-
tson.”” ‘‘Ni’a, manhéme.”’ ‘’Axaitsen,’’ Petcone pa ’ommiahu.
Héteuwehen ’itho’ai matcuttai. Tsommen hatta wetten ’an’inthoton,
Petcone ’inthonatha kuipu’e nasauwa’an. Takolo’oli’o ‘‘’uluwia”’ ?
tomen ’o’ithoxwatcemen xwekwattiamen wilemen’ai, howen hétcu-
wep kétha ’owole. ’Qthoppiu mapesai. Yin ’oto’oxwekkelia’e ho-
‘itsetcome’eta malamemen, then’ai wan.
Hatta P@#o’d’one Péetcotonene pa ’an’o9mmiahu: “Teang han,
’o’d’one, wa pimmadkwil manannaxwippiu mame’aihen, tciho manpa-
Iekipiatci. Hokeyo ’e, ’autco’one, Pin’o’ai ’awan’aiten Kayaimakwil®
’ametci, tcihoyo ’e ’apdalekipiatci. Han ’e, ’opeyo’one, tcihuite
topunno ’ametci, tciho ’anapisian’au wo ’apalekipiatci.” Ho Petco-
ténene pa ’an’ommiamehen ’amme. ’Gmmemen ’ahtohu: ‘“Teano-
han wétan pIn’au ’anpinetcitei. Wipai ’an’sliatciko maixen ’anso-
tiletcaipia.”’
‘A word imitative of the sound made by a drowning person.
* Interjection of surprise.
5 Kayaipinene, Jicarita Mountain, literally ‘‘Greasy Mountain.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES Sol
reached the shore and came out of the water, all drenched, and she
said: ‘‘For pity’s sake! How annoying it is when one is trying to
do something to make a living. My Fawns are gradually getting
farther. away from me.’ She shook herself and again began to
follow the Fawns.
The Fawns went over to Kuhane’ai, where the Snakes lived, as the
Old Beaver had bidden them. They arrived outside the estufa and
stopped. The Snakes inside the estufa heard someone walking
outside. One of them was sent out of the estufa to look. Entering
the estufa again, he said: ‘‘There are two little ones standing outside.”
The leader said to him: ‘‘Let them come in then. Why do you
not tell them to come in?” The Snake then went out again and told
the Fawns to come into the estufa of the Snakes. ‘‘Come in, little
ones,’’ said the Snake to them. So they entered. When they went
in, the whole estufa was full of Snakes. ‘“‘Sit down, little ones. What
do you come here for?’”’ Then the little Fawns sat down. Having
sat down they told the Snakes: ‘““The Old Giantess felt our little
kidneys every day and threatened to kill us, and as we were running
away, Old Beaver carried us across the river and told us to come on
this way. That is the reason that we have come here.’ ‘Very
well,”’ said the Snake leader. No sooner had he said thus than the
Old Giantess was heard coming outside the estufa. Then she
arrived, all sweating, at the roof door. From there she spoke out:
“Insider, are not my Fawns in there?” ‘Yes, here they are. Come
in and get them.”’ ‘No, bring them out to me.’’ ‘‘Come in and get
them,” said the Snake to her. She finally started to climb down
the ladder. As she entered, she had only one more step to make
before reaching the floor of the estufa, when a Snake that was lying
beneath the ladder began to sound his rattle. ‘‘’Uluwia,” said the
Old Giantess as she was hanging, missing the steps, on her way back
up. But finally she got outside. She started home. Frightened by
all the sticks lying along the road that she stepped on, she came to
her home.
Said the leader of the Snakes to the little Fawns: ‘‘ Now, little ones,
you must go to the mountains, where you belong, and there you must
increase. When you, little boy, reach Pin’o’ai you must branch off
toward Jicarita Mountain, and there you must bring forth. And you,
little girl, must go northeast from there and bring forth there among
the mountains.’ As the leader of the Snakes told them thus, they
went. As they went on they said to each other: ‘ Now we are going
to be lonesome, alone in the mountains. Instead of sending us
together, he has told us to be separated.”’
338 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [pTH. ANN. 43
Wa Ptm’o’ai ’awan’aiten ’ankdkia’ammehen ’antile. Peson’one
Kayaimakwil me hatta Pé@tiu’one topun me. Pesen’one wétan
memen’ai ’am@alohammen pinetohu: ‘‘Teoho he’a nato’ai ’ampai’one
?anasoptihu. Petcone pa wipai ’an’sliatciko maixen ’ansotilia.”’
Ho tomen mehu. Thapa Pétiu’one wa ’ommiapuppiu memen wétan
talhu: ‘“‘Hoke, hoke, me me,”! tomen, ‘“tcohe’a ’ampapa’one
?anasopuihu. Petecone pa wipai ’an’sliatciko maixen ’ansotilia.”’
Wa ’ammen’au ’anwan’aiten tciho pin’au ampalekipiahu. Hokeyo
tciho ’onqpisian’au ’ipétho.
Kaxweki.
Tue Oxtp Giant STEALS THE ELF AND IS SLAIN
Nakuthe Nakutheke teexamen Kayaitha Yoimq’one tho. Tcexa-
men Takoldlote Phappittha the. Thopai “itaithon’au memen
7o’dtcelhu. Tdmolotha ’itakehenng theppiu ’ihuihu.
Tcexamen wepa Kayaimakwil me. Tcexamen Kayqikotha Yoima-
one than. ‘‘Heyo yoho ’atahu?” ‘He tiyatame,” teexamen yoimq’one
tohu. ‘‘Taxui, yon tomolotha ’atson.”’ ‘Hexe?” “Yon tsmolotha
’atson, mo’a’omehu. ’CAtsonhe’an ’akdlehenno ’ataitci.”” Tcexamen
kdliahen famolotha takia. Tcexamen Takoldtote theppiu mapesai.
Tcexamen Yoima’one tomolona ’anatcapo:
1 This is the way the Fawn Gul cried.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 339
When they came to Pin’o’ai they bade farewell to each other there
and then parted. The male Fawn went up toward Jicarita Moun-
tain and the female Fawn went northeast. As the male Fawn went
on alone he was tired out and sighed in his lonesomeness: ‘‘I wonder
how my poor little sister is getting along. Instead of the Snakes
sending us together they have parted us.’’ Thus he said as he went.
Also the female Fawn cried as she went along where she had been
told to go: ‘‘Hoke, hoke, me, me,” she said, ‘“‘I wonder how my older
brother is getting along. Instead of the Snakes sending us together
they have parted us.”
When they arrived at their destinations, they brought forth there
among the mountains. This is the reason that deer live there among
those mountains.
You have a tail.
Tue Oup GIANT STEALS THE ELF AND IS SLAIN
Once upon a time the Elf dwelt at Jicarita Mountain. And the
Old Giant dwelt at Phoppittha. Going every day to where the
people lived, he caught the children. Putting them into his pack
basket he took them to his home.
And once he went to Jicarita Mountain. On top of Jicarita Moun-
tain he found the Elf. ‘What are you doing here?” “TI am not
doing anything,” the Elf said. ‘Well, get into my _ basket.”
“Why?” “Get into my basket, I said to you. If you do not get
in I will take you and put you in.”’ Then he took him and put him
into the basket. Then the Old Giant headed for home. The Elf
sang in the basket:
340 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
No. 1
SONG OF THE ELF AS HE IS PACKED ALONG
Weselo weselo selo selo selo we’a
Me’e yehe yehehe
>Wahahaha
’Ehelowe.
Weselo weselo selo selo selo we’a
Me’e yehe yehehe
>Q’ahahaha
*Owitainatle’epa
Taso’@lhu teamenno sa.!
“Wiho ’a’elopo. Nathia’aiyo ’axal.’’ Tcexamen Takolitote hipa-
wehen mo’aihen mehu.
Thon’ai kaliaten Takoldtote loxan’epa mentcoho matoiwakui.
Tcexamen Yoimq@’one kétha ’owolehen na’omalotha nathan. ’(nq-
pheixammoa teipun’aite “iwalwotcehen ’o’opapholhu. Tcexamen
’o’o’ome: ‘’O’d’one, mamaxwiwe!”” Tcexamen wésen ’ikweno’slhui.
ES Se)
*CAkwekal’aiten joima’one kwephokiahu, tcan’ehan wéwe ’o’d’one
*Vopiateia.
Yoima’one Takolotote thoppiu tsen. Takoldtole telwapuixen phia-
ko’an. ‘Xomma_ teaikwil ’@’eye, ’6’one,”’ teexamen Yoima’one
?ommia. Momiamentenno Takoléne tohu: ‘‘Tcannoi na_ takalsi-
metci. Yontai wi na’d’okaya’eyo men wia.’”’ Mentcoho phiana
xdtakia. Yoim@’one phiapapholmehen phiana tson. Tcexamen
*’anatcapo:
‘Only the last two lines have meaning: ‘‘A person who is very
kind is carrying me on his back.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 341
NO. 3. SONG OF THE ELF AS HE IS PACKED ALONG
A
a ole 76 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
wert Say aS a
Bere 3-9 = Cae St Sa =e a ; cs
a — x
We -se-lo we -se-lo se-lo se-lo se-lo we-'a
Cc
= =, = 4 > es ~ A
Sate E 5 aed
it = a Z aie = 77 =F i | —
b bz c
Me-’e ye- he ye-he - he ‘A~a-ha-a-ha - ’e
==
= + aE
Sia es sear ag
a
ee - lo-we. We-se -lo we -se-lo sl se -lo an we-’a
oars = SS S= Paes (Be SS5a
SS: 2 ~ f 6
a pa = vi ay vy =
Meigs ye - he ¥e- he - ore - a-ha - ha
D
5 Nes |aa feats NesN=at =: =
cea foes Ali Ea
e oe H
=a @ soe (on a
’O - wi- t’a-i-ng - te - ’e-pa Tae “el - hu tea-men - sq.
TRANSLATION
Only the last two lines have meaning: ‘‘A person who is very
kind is packing me along.”
“Do not move so much. You are very heavy.” The Old Giant
was going along all sweating.
When he brought the Elf to his home, the Old Giant was tired out,
and lay down to take a nap. Then the Elf came out and found a
pile of bones. He had a medicine bag tied on his person, and took
the medicine out and spit it on the bones. Then he told the bones:
“Tittle children, get up!’’ Then he sent two of them to look for
pitch. After they brought the pitch, they put pitch all over the
Elf, and he turned the children again into bones.
The Elf went into the Old Giant’s house. When the Old Giant
woke up, he fixed the fire. ‘‘Let me see; come this way, little one,”
he said to the Elf. The Giant said as he looked at him: “To-night
I shall have a feast. This must be a very fat child.’ And he put
him in the fire to roast. The Elf, spitting on the fire, entered the fire.
Then he sang:
342 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
No. 2
SONG OF THE ELF IN THE FIRE
Weselo weselo selo selo selo we’a
Me’e yehe yehehe
>Q’ahahaha
*Ehelowewe
’Owitainate’epa
Na wilunna tasotakianna.?
“Teutai yontai ’d’otecawia’eyo men wia.’’ Mentcoho Takoldtote
wewe tcipiu. Takolotole tcikuitha Yoima’one tcekaltholpunhen
phianate ’owole. ’Iphianatcaitokolehen Takoldtote péxwanhon. Kén-
’aukwil ’owalehen wéwe ’o’opapholmehen ’0’6’one ’imaxwiwehu.
Tcexamen Yoima’one pa ’i’emmiahu: ‘‘Teane hatta Takolitote
mahaniamepw’epa mapinhon. Teano han mathoppiu piwepen
mametci, wa mathon’au na@to’ai mikkiat@mene ’ipine’en’au. Thapa
naxen hou’au wo tatha. Thapa ’anthon’au ’antétopine’e tcikwekwillo.
Thapa, na tamehu. MHokejo kokiameg. Matheppiu mametci.”
Tcexamen ’o’d’one 7iYoimatha’a’omehen ’ipehame.
Hokeyo hatta *iyaTakolithe.
Tue FAMINE
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen tatha Piwweltha ’ifaithe. Mentcoho
wepa ’ipeypiihu. Hele napia’au sollota nana. Tdai’ene ’inapeuthé-
wiahu. Piasai tdthate “iupeyxwiwwolehu. Phesalone han wel
ho’o’one “iun@’élehen wésennen fanu matenen ’iuweolehu. Pohatta
tenon ’imehu. Wel Pakeuphalpiu, Xaipapiu, Paqwatepiu ’ipeyxwim-
mehu. Mentcoho sdnene hal tHuene wel ’ipi’d’el’aihen haw wel
*ipixdteele’aihen ’imehu.
> Only the last two lines have meaning: ‘“‘A person who is very
kind has put me in a warm place.”’
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 343
NO. 4. SONG OF THE ELF IN THE FIRE
A Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
|
We-se-lo we-se-lo se-lo se-lo se-lo we-’a Me- ’e ye - he
Cc 1.
NC 2 : =[ao= Sassi
— o °,.—~ SSE
=) meet 2 oe arse ess oo Pee =|
ae Por =3VSE=S5 bat a
Zz bz
ye- he he A - a-ha - a-a ‘e - he -lo - we
we ’O-wi-t’a-i-ng-lo-’e-pa ng wi-tun -na ta-so - ta-ki-an- ng.
TRANSLATION
Only the last two lines have meaning: ‘‘A person who is very
kind has put me in a warm place.”
“T did not know that this child is indeed a singer.”” Again the Old
Giant went to sleep. While the Old Giant was asleep, the Elf
emerged from the fire, with sparks flying. He took the poker
stick and hit the Old Giant on the head and killed him. Going
outside and again spitting on the bones, the children began to rise up.
Then the Elf told them: “Now I have killed for you the Old Giant
who has been eating you up. And now you can go home without
fear to where in your homes your poor parents are thinking about
you. I also live far away. Also in my home my grandmother is
thinking about me. And I also am going thither. So I will bid you
good-by. You must go home.’’ Then the children thanked the
Elf. They all started out.
This is why there are no more giants.
Tue Famine
Long ago the people were dwelling at Picuris Pueblo. And once
there was a famine. The fields were all bare. The people were
suffering with hunger. A few at a time, they left the pueblo, because
of the famine. Carrying their blankets and other belongings which
they had, they began to go forth, two to five or six at a time. They
all went southwest. Some fled, on account of the famine, to San
Juan, Santa Clara, San Ildefonso. The men and women were some
carrying their babies on their backs, some leading them by the hand,
as they went.
344 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Wanne taikewan OMECUD Se Ge han wen sonene hatta ’antiuphil
7anwia. Tcexamen wésen ’anan’d’otho, ’opeyo’one han ’autco’one
’an. Mentcoho ’apan’dtcikelehen hele tho’au ’ononapelxowiapu’e.
*Unq@élehen ’apan’dtcimatco’aihen wa wel tai’ene ’imemenpiu
’amme.
’°O’d’one ~’antciwapuixen ’angnkiane ’anant@mene ’anatcime.
*Opeyo’one wippel hatta ’sutco’one malipelhen ’anwia’epa ’anké-
liaputate ’anxwiwehen ’antalhu. Kotcota ’anwilexen tatha taihui
nana, wiwem’ayo wataipotiame. ’Qnanapeukwen mentcoho ’opeyo-
’one yin napia’au tutholou’aihen hatta ’outco’one takweyo xaitou’aihen
’anphiatokehen ’apantitalehen ’ankalhu. Hohen tcexamen towen
?anwa’ahu. Piasai ’outco’one waitaupiatciamenta wa tcd’Omemen
tcétco’d’one, tciutcone, kixwiu’ene “ikalhu. Hohen ’anwa@’anhu.
Wailaitaupiatciamenta taihou’au nakeppiu memen piu’d’one, lakwene
hak ka’ene lipa’ihdme’e “ikalhu. Pélene ’owaimementa wailqi-
thankwiwiltiamenta Ppimma tcdOmemen ’ipekalhu. Hohen ’anwa-
7ammen ’antho.
Tcexamen ’opeyo’one wésen ’an’Hpiatso’otho. Thopai naphoma
*ophal’aite ’iwotcahen ’Epiatahu. Mentcoho wepa ’Epiatso’6’one
?antohu: ‘ Natou’ai yonne ’o’6’one hohen ’aniwa’anhu. Howe thenna
tuikwe Thona@’ai Halwaximmatcia! thon’ai ges Lins obialieo
Xomma hele ’owen’aihen ’antommiatci.”’
Thopaihen yin naphophalmate ’anwolehen wa thdna’ai Halwa-
ximmatcia ’atotakin’ai ’antou. Tcitha ’anwdGn’aiten totakétha
?anwéne yin Halwaximmatcia ’atotakimma. Tcexamen wésen talo-
’one @hawetcekweta’an’e. Tcexamen ’ankiwamathialemen ’antholhai-
hewai ’antahu. “Xomma hexeyo yinne wiho ’ankiwa’anhu.
Xomma kétha kopowole,’’ Halwaximmatcia ’6’ome. ’Q’okai’e tota-
kétha ’opowolexen ’Epiatse’d’one “elatha ’ankwen. Wéwe tota-
phalta tson’aihen tohu: ‘“‘Wésen ’o’d’one hepa kétha ’anikwen.”
“Tteatteatce, hexetciuko ’iyatcettcatce?” ’Hpiatso’d’one ’an tcen-
teaipiahen ’antsen.
’Cntson’aihen halwehen natotana halpanane han hallapunene
hatta tciu totane halwehenmo. Halwaximmatcia halwehen ’amapia,
*ahaltcottav’aihen, ’anhalxintai’aihen, ’ohaltcitotai’aihen, ’ohalphi-
losia’aihen ’anatdtakimma ’e. ‘‘Heyo, ’o’d’one, yon ’anpakwenpa-
wian’au manwanhu? Yoho teutai hele ’ananalataiwamen, wi tciu-
teo’one wen yoho wawanme,”’ Halwaximmatcia pa ’an’ommiahu,
halwehen xwelmo’e phiatcemen ho ’an’o9mmiamen. ‘’Q, yoho
kapakwepawian’au ’anwdnhu, naleu’ai wésen ’o’d’one ’anwa’amia-
me’epa hele ’anamakalwiako. ’Opeyone tuthetcan’aihenno hatta
' Archaic name probably meaning Shell Hat.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 345
Among those that went last were a man and his wife. They had
two children—a little girl and a little boy. Having put their chil-
dren to sleep, they carried away their household goods. Leaving
their children sleeping, they went with the rest of the people.
When the children woke up, the mother and father were nowhere
around. As the girl was only four years old and the boy six, they
got up from where they were lying and began to cry. When they
went up on the roof of their house, there was not a person around
the village, not one to be seen. They got hungry and the little
girl went down to the field and got some greens, and the little boy
went down and got some kindlings. They built a fire, boiled the
greens, and ate. In this way they subsisted for a long time. As
the little boy slowly grew, he went out hunting and brought mice,
birds, and chipmunks. Thus they subsisted. As he grew older,
going out farther into the woods, he brought home rabbits, squirrels,
and jackrabbits that he killed with his bow and arrows. As the years
went by and as he grew stronger to shoot, he went up to the mountains
to hunt and brought deer. Thus subsisting they dwelt.
The little girl had two Dolls. Every day she took them out of a
hole in the wall and played with them. One day the Dolls said:
“These two poor children have been living in this way. To-morrow
we will go down southeast below the Pueblo to where Shell Hat
lives, to supplicate him. Perhaps he may give us something.”
The next day the Dolls came forth from the hole in the wall and
went down below the Pueblo to Shell Hat’s estufa. When they
arrived there they stopped outside Shell Hat’s estufa. There were
two macaw birds seated, one at each side of the roof-hole. They
spread their wings and acted as if they were going to fly. ‘‘I wonder
why they are fluttering their wings so. You go out to see,’’ said
Shell Hat to his son. When his son went outside the estufa and
looked, there stood the Dolls at the roof-hole. He went back again
into the estufa and said: ‘‘There are two little children standing
outside.” ‘Tell them to come in. Why do not you tell them to
come in?”? The Dolls were told to come in, and they entered.
As they entered they saw that the estufa was all made of shell
There was shell floor, shell ceiling, and all of the estufa was of shell.
And there in his estufa was Shell Hat, all dressed in shell. He had
a shirt of shell, a hat of shell, leggings of shell, earrings of shell.
“What is the matter, little children, that you come to my sacred
precinct? No one comes here, not even a little bird,” said Shell Hat
to them, lighting his pipe of shell as he told them thus. ‘Yes, we
have come here to your sacred precinct because two poor little
children who are keeping us have no food to eat. The little girl
19078°—28——23
346 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [eTH. ANN. 43
’outco’one yiho hele ’anathiame’e ’onghdmenhenng ’anwa’anhu,
’anankiatamene pa wétan ’amatcgwiapuyo, hokeyo yohui ’anmiau-
fou,’”’ ’Epiatso’o’one Halwaximmatcia ’an’emehu. ‘‘Hoyo xuimen,”’
Halwaximmatcia tohu. Ho tomehen phalpiu tson’aihen ’onahémen
pannu ’ixo’one—pathdwen, phowwen tsolwen tcalwen, hap paxe-
wen—hatta taane pathdwen, phowwen, hap phaiwen moyo’e. Thapa
7antloammia ’an’ommiamen: ‘‘Yoneyo ’o’d’one mapan’ometci wa
phal’au newen nanan’au ’annataitei. ’Qnataketen tahan ’ankek-
kweltci, winthale yo tcita ’anamopo. Hatta pannuthels napui-
menng ’ankwelpottci..”. Ho ’Epiatse’d’one ’an’emmiamehen Hal-
waximmatcia ’antha’a’ammehen ’an’e.
’Opeyg’one naphophal’ai ’o’EKpiatso’ongn’aihen teoho hele ’iya-
than. Séphil thenna ’onematcia’aihen hele ’iyathan. ’Ainenten
*Epiatso’d’one ’antecapphal, Halwaximmatcia pa ’antommiapu’e
?ononaphiVaihen. ‘‘Yin Thdna’ai Halwaximmatcia thon’au wo
’?antcimen, yoneyo meonokoletcaipia. Xa yonneyo wa phal’au
nowen nanan’au mantaitei, howenko witholeyo tcita manamopoa.
Han pannuthela napuimen’au mammotci.’’ ’O’d’one ho ’an’om-
miamehen phal‘ainowen nanan’au ’anatai.
Wittholo napuimen’ai nowian ’o’d’one ’anatcipiume. Thdpiaken
*otholwolemen ’anxwiwehen phalpiu§ yinne’ ’ononataipuppiu
‘antson’aihen. ’Iine téman ’omoyo’e thapa taane pathowen,
phowwen, hap phaiwen moyo’e, lapunthateta peme. Tcixuite
’anmiaumenma ’ampaltamen kowen ’anthe.
Tcexamen wen Piwwelsdnene Khaipapiu mepu’e wepa tiw’omehu:
“He’a teoho wanne wésen ’o’d’one Tdtha ’anmatcowiapu’e ’anso-
watcihu thahe ’anasowdtcime’a. Xomma _ taipemetci.’”’ Ho
tOmehen mentcoho me. Memen wa Pdxenna ’owole. ’O’d’one
kotcota ’ampQ’e’epa momian ’antohu: “Wa phenna hepa teutai
wi tai’ehe.”” ’Gmmomen sonene ’ehewaita wa ’an’emmakwil
wile. Séphil ’imakowa’ammehen, sdnene ’onakaltcannaihen
’okalhu. Tcitsi nowiane tcitha ’athopiahen, thdpiaken ’o’d’one
pa wéwe Xaipadpiu han yin wem ho Tothate fai’ene ’i’en’au
xai’elhitcia. Sdnene wéwe me’aiten *ipeghataixwia’amenten Topiu
’imetci’e *V’ome. ‘Tai’ene hele ’iunapolxowia’e ’iung’élehen wéwe
Topakwil ’imapesai.
Tdtha ’iwan’aiten ’o’d’one pa ’amiamenten ’ananthenna ’itcen-
teaipiahu. ’Qnankiane hatta ’anantamene ’onenamotia’el thapa
‘anwan. Howen ’anan’o’d’one pa wi ’anatdi’amia, thahe ’ana-
tcettcaipia. “Iho ’ankwettamehen ’ongnamoha’el’aihen tdpun
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 347
goes out to pick greens and the little boy goes out to hunt and kills
whatever he can. That is the way that they have been subsisting,
their parents having left them. That is why we have come down
here to make a plea,” the Dolls said to Shell Hat. ‘Well, so it is,’”’
said Shell Hat. As he said thus he entered a room and brought out
with him five grains of corn—white, black, yellow, blue, and gray—
and also white, black, and red beans. And he gave them to them,
saying: “You must tell the little children to put these in a dark
room. After they have put them in there they must lock the door
tight. They must not look in there for four days. They must open
it on the fourth day.’’ As the Dolls were told thus, they sat there
thanking Shell Hat.
The little girl looked for her two little Dolls in the wall hole,
but did not find them. She looked all around the house, crying,
but could not find them. But they entered the house again all of a
sudden and had with them what Shell Hat had given them. ‘‘We
have been down below the Pueblo where Shell Hat lives, and he has
sent you these. He said that you must put these in a dark room,
but you must not look in there for four days. You must look on
the fifth day.’ When the children were told thus, they placed the
corn and beans in a dark room.
The night of the fourth day the children could hardly sleep.
The next morning as the sun was rising they got up and entered the
room in which the corn and beans were. It was filled clear to the
ceiling with corn of various colors, and white, black, and red beans.
From that time on they cooked the way they wanted to and lived
well.
One day one of the Picuris men who had gone to Santa Clara
said to his wife: ‘‘I wonder if those two children that were left at
the Pueblo are still living or not. Suppose I go and see.’’ So
saying, he started out. As he went along, he came to Pdaxenna.
As the children sat on top of their house looking, they saw him and
said: ‘‘Down southwest somebody is coming.’’ As they watched
the man coming, he came up to where they were sitting. They all
wept as they shook hands with each other, and food was set out for
him, and he ate. He slept there with them that night, and the next
morning they sent him back to Santa Clara and to the other places
where the people of Picuris were staying. The man went back
and, calling all the people, told them to go back to the Pueblo. The
people put what utensils they had on their backs and started for the
Pueblo again.
When they arrived at the Pueblo the children shook hands with
them and told them to come into their house. And their mother
and father, packing things on their backs, also arrived. But their
own children would not speak to them, nor did they tell them to
348 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
’anpesdl. Howen he ’ananapupupu’e thahe teokwil ’amme’e
nakdteatiapu.
Tcihuite tawan’e nanq’epa Piwwel’ene *iukdmen pisihe kalene
iuwia. Tcihuite kowen ’ithetahu.
Hokeyo Piwweltha teammaxen halo tai’ene *iukdmen he ’ing-
thiamemma ’imawa@’ammen ’itho.
Kaxweki.
Tue Two Dove MatIpeENn SISTERS AND THE DrovuTH
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen Tdtha Piwweltha wésen Kaipia-
’O’one ’anthe. Wel Piwwelkokwene Tsthate tcdke *imawa’amen
kokwene thepai pimmakwil ’iutcowalemen hat thdtanen ’ipipe’el-
7aihen ?iwanhu. Hak Kaipia’o’one ’owaipelwiamenta kakehen
’antahu. Tawanta “line teman ’omoyo’e hat tdane thapa teman
moyo’e akamen kowen ’ankalmen witcokewen ’anapine wel piwwelko-
kwehui ’antho. Thopai theketha halo ’otholwalementa wa napia’au
?ononakalsian’au ’ononaxwipphil’aihen ’anteatamen ’ammomiahu.
Mentcoho wenpil ’ampisi ’ikau. Hat t@ane ’an, mentcoho pélene
nathia’ai tia’epa hele watolmen hota ’ononakaltiasian, he ’antatci’e
’anathame. Yin toldsian’au hépuxennen themo’an ’anpatilaimen
Piwwelkokwene pa ’ammomiamen ’an’ommiahu: “Yinne Kaipia-
’0’one ’ononakaltiasia’aihen hota ’anipatin’e.
Han Kaipia’o’one ho Piwwelkokwene pa ’an’ommiatci’e ’anamiau-
men wepa wen Kaipia’one tehu: “Xomma Pak@iene ’anxwia’antei
’aihen ’ewen payo kananatolwiatcetci.”” Haihen tcexamen Pakdiene
’anxwia’an. Leuten Pakdiene ’ananwan. Pakdiene pa ’an’9mmia-
hu: ‘‘Heyo, ’o’d’one teutsi yontei télene tha ’anadkdmen maima’a-
’anhu.”’ Haihen Kaipia’o’one ’antohu: ‘’Axwia’anhu, xomma
mannalolwiatcike hota nate’ai kononakaltiasiako. Han Piwwelko-
kwene pa he’anatame pen patittha kekehenno ’antahu, ’an’9mmia-
meko.” Haihen Pakdiene pa ’an’ommia: ‘Na tiyailolhokkeko na
tholene’e ’antanwiako, hoke’e ’ewen wiama’e tawiaheko.”’ Ho
Pakdiene tomehen matholkol. “ Yintei Pakditote, pephayane, wime-
wen,” Kaipia’d’one ’antdhu.
‘‘Kakene yo ’axwia’antci.’’ Haihen mentcoho Kakene ’anxwia’an.
Leuten Kakene ’ananwan. ‘‘Heyo, ’o’d’one, pin’aute kowen tapatin-
’epun’aute maima’a’anhu?” Kakene pa ’an’emmia. Haihen Kai-
pia’o’one ’antohu: ‘’Axwia’amhu, xomma manatolwiatcike hota
nate’ai kononakaltiasiako. Han Piwwelkokwene pa yin ’anpatin-
’en’au ’an’ommiameko xa kanamamailia patikkehenng thomo’an
’antahu.’”’ Ho ’anKake’amemehen Kakene tohu: ‘Na pin’au napa-
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 349
come in. As they stood around there they finally put their packs
on their backs and went toward the east. But whatever became of
them or where they went to, nobody knew.
From that time on, it being spring, the Picuris people planted,
and food was plentiful. Thenceforth they lived nicely. So this
is the reason that the people at Picuris still plant and dwell, subsisting
as well as they can.
You have a tail.
Tue Two Dove MarIpeEN Sisters AND THE DrovutTH
Once upon a time there lived two little Doves at the Pueblo of
Picuris. Some of the Picuris youths at the Pueblo made their
living by going out hunting every day to the mountains, and returned
in the evening packing deer. And the two little Doves did nothing
but plant every year. They lived, planting corn and beans of
various colors in the spring, eating well and not thinking of hunting
as the youths of Picuris did. They were seen every day early
before sunrise in their fields where their crops were, having their
hoes with them, singing.
One year they planted much corn and beans, but as the year was
dry and there was no rain, their crops were drying up and they did
not know what to do. Sometimes they would sit in the shade of a
cottonwood tree all day, and the Picuris youths would look at them
and would say to them: ‘‘These two little Doves are doing nothing
but stay in the shade while their crops are drying up.”
As the two little Doves did not like to have the Picuris youths
talk to them thus, one day one of the Doves said: “I believe we
will call the Buzzard; perhaps he can call the rain for us.’ Then
they called the Buzzard. In a little while the Buzzard came to
them. The Buzzard said to them: ‘Little ones, why do you bother
me while I am having such a good time out in the heat?” Then
the little Doves said: ““We have called you, thinking you might
be able to summon the rain for us, for our poor crops are drying up,
and the Picuris youths tell us that we do nothing but just sit in
the shade.” Then the Buzzard said to them: “TI do not like the
rain, for the Sun is my father, so that is why I am going to take part
on his side.’’ As the Buzzard said thus, he flew away. ‘That old
bald-headed Buzzard, let him go,” said the two little Doves.
““Now we will call the Crow.’’ So then they called the Crow.
In a little while the Crow came to them. ‘‘Why, little ones, do
you disturb me here from the mountains where I have been sitting
in the shade so nicely?” said the Crow to them. The two little
Doves said: ‘We have called you, thinking that you might be able
to summon the rain for us, for our crops are drying up. And the
Picuris youths are saying to us, because we sit in the shade, that
350 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
tin’au kowehen ta’eko hdten tanatolwai’an ’onokiwapapia’an ’ana-
matholkitciko.” Ho tdmehen Kakene pimmakwil matholkol,
“‘Kakelole, maitiane, tcokwil miaumempiu wimewen,” Kaipia’d’one
?antoOmen pinewen ’ananthoppiu ’antson. ‘‘Tcannoj paikwiu ’antu-
kalowaihenng thonna hiaulotta Thopiapikketha' ’ammetci, tciho’e
Thopiapaxela’eutco thdko ’aihen ’ewen payo konoetamiatci.”
Tcitai nowiane fpaikwiu ’antukatou’aihen thopiaken hiaulotta
Thspiapimmakwil ’anme. Tcitha ’anwan’aiten Thopiapaxolane
’anatetakimma ’antsen. ‘‘Heyo, ’o’d’one, yon ’anatetakimma man-
wanhu? Tcano mapanha@netci.’”’ Haihen Kaipia’o’one Thapiapa-
xoline ’an’ome: “Yohoyo ’an’e, xomma manatolwiatciwai, hota
nate’ai kononakaltiasiako.”’ ‘‘Hoxui,”’ Thopiapaxettine pa ’an’omimia,
“teatthaiyo mapanannatolwiatci, ’0’d’one. Hokeyo he manapinepo.”
Ho ’an’ommiamenten wéwe ’ananthoppiu ’amme. 7’QAnanthottha
?anwanmen hatta ’ololpaxwanhu. Leuten mentcoho nathia’ai tolhu.
Wa ’ono’isiappiu ’amme’aihen patiawehen ’ammoyo’aihen anama-
pon’antcihu. Haihen ’antohu: “ Yone kalene kononasia’e Piwwel’ene
tcakkehen ’iyatatcike ’iutalanapetcike ’apantometci.”’ Ho ’anto-
mehen ’ankiwamathialemehen ’antholhai. Tcihuite Piwwel’ene
Kaipia’d’one ’ononakalsiapu’e *iunatala’ammen ’itho.
Hokeyo tcexamen Piwwel’ene ’owaipelwiamenta ’iunakal’ou’am’a,
mee
kaipia’o’d’one pa ’itammiapuyo.
Tur Two Dove Maren Ststers WHO BECAME STARS
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen Piwweltha ’itaithe. Tcexamen
wesen Kaipiakwol’d’one ’anantéto’dphil ’anthea. Tcexamen Piwwel-
kwol’ene ’iutelmen tsopaihiawehen ’imoyo’aihen ’itcihu. Tcexa-
men Kaipiakwol’d’one ’anantéto’dphil puitipiakehen ’itahu.
Tcexamen wepa ’anléto’d’eme: “Leto, tcexamen howen hexetci
na kanatelme wel Piwwelkwolhui? tsepaihiawehen ’imoyo’aihen
kéen’au Visotcthu. Han na pitipiakehen ’anitahu.” ‘’(nan’o-
?othe’e,”’ tcexamen ’ananléto’one pa ’an’ommia, “ho ’ayasotepa.”’
“Teannoi man’ixothotei, thennayo kantelhe,’’ teexamen Kaypia’o’one
*aléto’o’ome. Tholtan’aihen této’one séphil ’itealmolotcanehen
tcexamen ’ixophohu.
' Thopiapinene, ‘‘Morning Mountain.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 351
we are lazy, that we are doing nothing but sit in the shade all day.”
As they said thus to the Crow, said the Crow: “I am satisfied
sitting in the shade in the mountains; if I should call the rain, my
wings would get wet and I would not be able to fly; As he said thus,
the Crow flew away to the mountains. ‘‘That old lazy Crow, let
him go where he wants to,’ said the two little Doves, and sadly
they went to their house. ‘‘To-night we will go down to the river
to bathe, and early to-morrow morning we will go to the top of
Morning Mountain, for the Morning Star Boy lives there, and he
might be able to help us.”
That night they went down to the river to bathe, and started off
early the next morning to Morning Mountain. When they reached
there, they entered the estufa of the Morning Star. ‘‘ Why, little ones,
do you come to my estufa? Now Iam going to eat you up.” Then
the two little Doves told the Morning Star: ‘‘We have come here
to see if you could call the rain for us, for our poor crops are drying
up.” “Very well,” said the Morning Star to them, to-day I will
call the rain for you, little ones. Do not be sad about it.” When
they were told thus, they went back home again. As they were
reaching home, a few drops of rain began to fall. Then in a little
while it rained hard. They went over to where their corn was
growing. There they were drenched, but were feeling happy as
they walked about. And they said: ‘‘These crops that we have
we will give away to the Picuris people, so that they will not do so
much hunting, so that they may learn to work.’ As they said thus,
spreading their wings out they both flew away. From that time
the Picuris people lived cultivating the crops of the two little Doves.
So this is the reason that the people of Picuris grow crops every
year, because they were given them by the two little Doves.
Tue Two Dove Marpen Sisters Wuo BrecaMe STARS
Once upon a time the people dwelt at Picuris. And two Dove
Maidens dwelt there with their grandmother. The Picuris maidens
were grinding corn and were going about with their faces all powdered
up. The Dove Maidens and their grandmother did nothing but
make baskets.
Once they told their grandmother: ‘‘Grandmother, why do we
not grind corn like the rest of the Picuris maidens? With their
faces all powdered up, they are going about outside. And we do
nothing but make baskets.” ‘‘My dear children,” said the grand-
mother, ‘you must not say that.” ‘‘To-night get the corn ready,
for we are going to grind in the morning,” said the Dove Maidens
to their grandmother. When it got evening, the grandmother,
weeping, took out the tinaja and toasted some corn.
352 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH, ANN. 43
Thspiaken tcexamen Kaipiakwol’d’one ’antelxia’a. Tcexamen
‘ana ’an’ixosai’aihen ’antelhu. Tcexamen ’antcatahu:
No. 5
SONG OF THE DOVE MAIDEN SISTERS AS THEY BECOME STARS
Kuakesophinatetsa
Kuakosophinatatsa
*Ciwikiwapatohamehamehame
Kansotsa’otelhu.'
Tcexamen ’antelmen piasai ko’ai ko’ai ’anwilehu. ’(nantéto’one
nato’ai se’e. Tcexamen tohu: ‘’Qnanphiu’d’one, ho ’ayasotapo’a.
Mantelluwe!”” Tcexamen Kaipiakwol’d’one ’anatalapiame. Tce-
xamen ’antedtamen ’antelhu. Piasai Iqaike’ai ’anwilehu. Tcexa-
men ’anantéto’one se’e. Lapymmakwil ’antcohu. Piasai laikepa
’anwilehu. ‘‘’Qnanphiu’d’one,” tcexamen léto’one tohu, “ho ’aya-
sotapo’a. Tcaikwil manmile!’’ Tcexamen Kaipia’d’one ’ampo-
pa. Tcinneyo Kayaipittuikwe paxola’d’one ’ankwan.
Hokeyo teexamen kiyatantokanke nako, hokeyo teexamen Makiuto
Pautoke ? Kayqituikwe ’anannako.
Kaxweki.
1 The meaning of the words is obscure except that -telhu means
“she grinds.”
? Makiuto, the older sister, and Pautoke, the younger sister.
Girls pray to them when they want to be strong in grinding corn.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 353
The next morning the Dove Maidens got ready to grind. Pouring
the corn on the metate, they ground. And they sang:
NO. 5. SONG OF THE DOVE MAIDEN SISTERS AS THEY BECOME STARS
— 168 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
ae f= See Sigeciaere
K’u-a-k’a-so- phi-ng-to - ts’a Ku-a - k’a-so - phi- Seu - ts’g
Cc
eS aie oie ais retire a=s
"A - 1-wi-k’i-wa- p’a-lo -h “me ha-me - ha- me Kan - so -
q g- @
ae Saisie ae
ts’a-’o -tel - K’u-a-k’o-sa-phi-ng-ta - ts’
B N
oer ee See ==: =
a see res era ==
K’u -a- k’a -so- phi - ng -ta - "A - 1-wi- ki-wa- ee
a=.
a 2 S685
ha - me-ha-me-hg-me Kgn-so-ts’a-’o - tel
TRANSLATION
The meaning of the words is obscure except that -telhu means
“she grinds.”
As they ground, they rose slowly higher and higher. Their poor
grandmother sat weeping. Said she: ‘‘My dear children, you must
not do thus. Stop grinding!’”’ The Dove Maidens did not listen.
Singing, they ground. They rose slowly higher. Their grand-
mother sat weeping. They reached the ceiling. They rose slowly
higher. “My dear children,” their grandmother said, ‘““you must
not do thus. Come back here!” The Dove Maidens disappeared.
They are the two little stars above Jicarita Mountain.
This is the reason that it is well to obey one’s parents, and this
is the reason that Makiuto and Potoke are above Jicarita Mountain.
You have a tail.
354 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES [pTH. ANN. 43
Tur WoMAN AND THE WOLF
Nakutheke tcexamen Piwweltha ’itaithe. Tcexamen tiuene nanake-
mopupun’aite phaltahenno ’ingxwi.
Tcexamen wen tiuene nowian hele ’apawia. ’I[pamolokolehen Painon
paxailue. Kodlomate pataimen ’aKalwan. ‘‘Heyo ’atahu?” teexamen
?ommia. ‘‘Tipdtaihu,’”’ liuene Kal’ome. ‘“‘’Q’eltai xui,’’ teexamen
Kalene pa’ommia. ‘Hatta ’anthoammakwil tipa’olemeko,”’ tcexamen
huene tohu. ‘‘’Q’ellaime ’a’omehu howe’an yohotayo’ ahdnetci.”’
Liuene ’anapixowen ’ipdmolomatco’aihen Kalene ’an mq’ellai.
Tcexamen Kalene pa Hiuene pimmakwil ’oila. Pikkotha kaliahen,
tcexamen Kalene tdpupa, td’opa, tonon, takwetha! wel ’okal-
xwiawéle. Liuene mentcoho ’itautilikimmakwil wile.
*Asottho’e teexamen ’akwontiuwileme’epa thokotsitate malawia’an.
Leutenno sénene ‘iunaxelkdmphil ’iwan. Kaltote wa matehememe-
pun’aute wan’aihen tiuene tauketa yo ’e’an. Sdnene ’imanotilephale.
Mentcoho nopin’au wen sdnene pa liuene thamia. Hanko sdnene
matoheme. Wel ’iwan’aiten *ihuldwe wéwe thoppiu. Liuene sonene
pa tephaliahu.
Hokeyo tcexamen tiuene thotan’aihen phal’aute wétan ’iwawdleme
heten “ipitciko.
Tue ANTS
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen Komgithotha ? Pa’ayasiulane? ’itho.
Tciho hele ’imatciutecowanme hodke tcexamen piwepen ’ithetahu.
Tcokwil ’imiaumempiu pipen ’imemen wi totcolo’one wen ’imatho’epa
pu’au.
Mentcoho wepa ’ittonwia’epa ’i’emmiahu ’itayantha: ‘’anantai-
wia’e, tcathoVaite witthola napuimenne yon ’ithettha yontei paane
kikuttha ’iphdletci, wel tai’ene tinasenpiatci. Hokeyo hele tcutai
palene, konene, xixwauane han wel teutei mimapiatci’e miunotci.
Haihenno pohan tholtai’ene ’iyaixanemo yotha ’ipisen’autci.’’ Ho
’ittonwia’epa ’inawitciamehen ’itdhu: “‘Kowenne nana ho aito-
menng, tcathoVaite witthela napuimenne kimapholxia’antci.’’
Haihen tcitei nang’e Pa’ayasiulane ’imaxia’amhu. Yin ’ifaithon’au
pu’au hele ’ipeme’e ’awen ’imawia’e ’imasitcihu.
‘Boxing the compass in the ceremonial order; compare p. 318,
footnote.
2 “Needle Horn Pile.’’
> A species of black ant.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 355
THe WoMAN AND THE WOLF
Once upon a time the people were dwelling at Picuris. The
women, after it got dark, were to remain inside their houses.
And one woman in the night had no water. She took the water
jar and went down to Painon to get water. As she was pouring the
water with her gourd, a Wolf came to her. ‘What are you doing?”
he said. ‘I am pouring water,” the woman said to the Wolf. ‘Get
on my back, then,’”’ the Wolf said to her. “I am already about to
take the water to my house,’ said the woman. ‘Get on my back,
I said to you, or I will eat you up right here.’ The woman got
afraid, left the water jar, and got on the Wolf’s back.
And the Wolf took the woman up to the mountains. When he
had brought her to the mountain top, the Wolf went northeast,
northwest, southwest, and southeast, to call the other wolves. The
woman then climbed a tall pinyon tree.
Her husband, when his wife did not come up from below quickly,
yelled as a signal from the top of the house. And shortly men with
their weapons arrived.
When the Old Wolf arrived from his summoning [the other wolves],
the woman was sitting in the top of the pinyon tree.
The men all gathered for search. And then at about midnight one
man found the woman. Then the man gave a yell. After the rest
came they took the woman home again. The woman was scolded
very much by the men. And this is why the women, after it gets
dark, do not go forth from inside the houses alone, for something
might happen to them.
Tue ANTS
Once upon a time at Komaithotha dwelt the Ants. No birds
came around there, and so they lived without fear. They went
wherever they pleased without fear, for there was not even a little
Hummingbird around near where they lived.
One day their leader told them at a meeting: ‘“‘My people, in
four days from to-day we are going to dance here in this land of
ours; we will entertain the other people. So you must be looking
for such things as red paint, beads, war bonnets, and whatever dress
you may need. And we will call the flying animals of all kinds
here to look on.” As their leader instructed them thus, they said:
“Tt seems all right the way you say, we will get ready to dance four
days from to-day.”’ And the Ants were getting ready within that
time. They went around borrowing things from their neighbors
whom they knew.
356 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [eTH. ANN. 43
Hatta wittholo napuimen ’ittonwia’epa ’itaimia ’inatetakittha.
Haihen ’V’ommiahu: ‘’Qnantaiwia’e, thonnayo han thdene ’iphd-
letcinna kiwan. Hokeyo tholtai’ene ’iyaixanen kotenng yotha ’ithot-
tha kinsenwanhe. Hokeyo manaithiamenno matatci.”
Mentcoho thopiahen halo ’otsethol’owalementa Pa’ayasiulane
7intotakimma 7itatciahu. ’Itatciaphal’aihen pohan lutciu han
siutciu ‘ikdpia’aihen tetakétha ’iuwole. Yin lasian’au ’iupholmon-
‘aixen tholtai’ene ’iyaixanen koten ’i’e.
Halo tew’ohen ’ipholemen mentcoho pehan Tciuene tciho ’isen’epu’e
patha Pa’ayasiulane ’iphalemenpiu§ ’imahakehen ’ihapiume’epa
ipiP@’ayasiulakalhu. *Iha@wapuhen wa tcokwil ’itheppiu ’imatholhai.
Pa’oyasiulane ’ittonwia’epa ’i’?ommiahu: “‘Mima’dletci, ’anantaiwia’e,
pisiwenno kittaisenwia.”
Halo tsetophalmen thapa Xwephaimone ’isen’epun’aite ’imaha-
kehen Pa’ayasiulane ’ipholemenpiu tcexamen ’ipiPa’ayasiulakalhu.
*Thawapuhen wa ’itheppiu ‘imapohattholhai. Pa’ayasiulane ’itton-
wia’epa ’V’ommiahu: ’Anantaiwia’e, mima’dletci, pisiwenng kintai-
senwia.”’
Halo tsetophalmen Pakqiene ’isen’epun’aite Pa’ayasiulane ’iphole-
mepiu ’imahdkehen ‘ipiPa’ayasiulakalhu. “Thawapun wa ’ithoppiu
*imapehattholhai. Ha’an hatta teu’ohen Pa’ayasiulane ’ixwettciahu.
Howenko ’iyapholluweme. Laiwen’eyo ’ima’dlehu. ’Ittonwia’epa
7Vommiahu: “’Qnantaiwia’e, mima’dletci, halo pisiwenno yon kitfai-
senwia.”’
Halo tsetophalmen Pillelo’ene ’ipo’epun’aite Pa’ayasiulane ’iphole-
mepiu ’imahdkehen ’ipiPa’ayasiulakalhu. *Ihawapuhen wa ’ithoppiu
‘imapohattholhai. Hatta ha’an Pa’ayasiulane tcu’oten ’ixwettciahu.
Howenko nathia’ayo ’imaphol’dlehu. ’*Ittonwia’epa ’i’ommiahu:
‘’Qnantaiwia’e, mima’dletci, halo pisiwenng kittaisenwia.”’
Halo ho tsetophalmen Sdlene takoi’au ’isen’epun’aute wa
Pa’ayasiulane ’ipholemepuppiu ’imahakehen Pa’ayasiulane ’*iphmepu’e
tontciuta ’ipipohahane. Haihen Sdlene wa ’ithoppiu ’*imapohattholhai.
Hatta wel tholtai’ene tciho ’isen’epuw’e *imapohatthalhai. Hele
’iyaP@’ayasiulaphime’epa pohatta *itomen: ‘‘Howe naxen yinne wel
tholta’ene pa ’iyaPa’ayasiulaphiliako teokwilwen ’inometci.’’ Ho
tholtai’ene tciho ’isen’epu’e ’itomehen ’imapohaPa’ayasiulanokwéle.
Hokeyo tcexamen tciutcone halo teathsi maxen ‘iPa’ayasiulanotcihu,
hokeyo thapa tholtai’ene *iupa@’ayasiula’a, ho’e hanken ’ipikale’epa.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES Sol
On the fourth day the leader assembled them in their estufa.
And they then were told: ‘“‘My people, to-morrow the day arrives
on which we are to dance, so the flying animals of every kind are to
come here to our home to look on. And so you must all do your
best.”
The next morning as the sun was rising the Ants gathered in
their estufa. After they were all assembled, both men and women,
all dressed up nicely, emerged from the estufa. When they looked
around at the trees, there were birds of every kind sitting there.
They were only dancing a little while when all the Eagles, who
were sitting looking on, flew to the ground where the Ants were
dancing, and being hungry, began to eat the Ants up. After they
had enough, they flew away to their homes. The leader of the
Ants said to the people: ‘‘Dance your best, my people, for there are
many people looking on.”
When he had hardly finished saying thus, the Redtail Hawks,
from where they were sitting looking on, flew down to where the
Ants were dancing, and began to eat up the Ants. When they got
enough, they all flew away to their homes. The leader of the Ants
said to them: ‘““My people, dance your best, for there are many
people looking on.”
When he had hardly finished saying thus, the Buzzards, from
where they were sitting looking on, flew down to where the Ants
were dancing, and began to eat the Ants. When they got enough,
they all flew away to their homes. By that time there were very
few of the Ants left, but they would not quit dancing. They danced
all the more. Their leader said to them: ‘My people, dance your
best, for there are still many people looking on.”
When he had hardly finished saying thus, the Turkeys, from where
they were sitting looking on, flew down to where the Ants were
dancing, and began to eat the Ants up. When they got enough,
they all flew away to their homes. By that time there were but.
few of the Ants left. But they danced their best. Their leader
said to them: “My people, dance your best, for there are still many
people who are looking on.”’
When he had hardly finished saying thus, the Bluebirds, from
where they were sitting in the trees looking on, flew down to where
the Ants were dancing, and ate the Ants that were left, together
with their leader. And then the Bluebirds all flew away to their
homes.
And the other birds who were looking on flew away. Because
there were no more Ants left for them, they all said: ‘Since the
other birds have not left us any Ants, let us also go and look for
some.” When the birds who were sitting looking on said thus, they
all scattered to look for Ants.
So this is the reason that the birds to-day hunt around for ants,
and also the reason that birds like ants, because they ate the ants
at that time.
358 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Tur SANDHILL CRANES
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen wepa wa phekota phe’au Ka@iene
ithe. Tciho pho’aute ’ipadsomen thapa phe’auta ’iuletipiamen
tciho kowen ’ithotahu. Mentcoho wepa ’ittonwia’epa ’i’ommia:
“Xomma pdthayo ’itholoutci. Pdane pisiwenng tcokwil wen
*opakélia. Thapa tcihoyo pana pdone han paphdone thapa wel
tcune hele patai’ene ’iths. Thapa tdane tciho kiuletipiatcin’au
’opisisia. Patha ’iwan’aiten ’opakéliapiu ’iwan’aihenng tcihoyo
kiukokalmen itipiamen kowen ithatci.” Ho ’ittonwia’epa
7’ommiamehen, pohan K@iene ’ithia. Han ’ittonwia’e ’i’9mehu:
“Vine pohan pathate ’atome’e kdwenng nanawayo namia’a.
Hokeyo pehanng papiu ’ipemiahu.” Ho 7itdmehen papiu
*imatholhai.
Phekotate 7ithaltaumewaita Paxwi’oxwalpaxwitha imatai.
Tciho kowen ’iukalmen pdone pdaphoone thepai ’ipikalmen Ve.
Howen Kaiene wiho ’ipdsome’epa teuten paxwinate *ipghappahane
potciuta paphotciuta. ‘Howe wen fpapiu kimghaitci, yontoi
ry A>
paxwine wa xui pdatcelme,” ’ittonwia’epa ’’ommiahu.
Ho’aiten mentcoho Kayaipaxwipiu ’imahai. Teciho ’iwan’aihen
paxwiputha ’imalai. Tciho paxwi’au thapa pdene hatta paphoone
thapa wel fatai’ene tciho ’itho’e ’ipikalmen paxwipdane ’isomen
ithe. Teciho teuw’a kowen ’iukalmen 7’imiaupun koten pdaane
7isomen ‘ithe. Howen teuten pdxwinate pdane ’ihane potciuta
han pdphotciuta. Haihen ’ittonwia’epa ’V’ommiahu: ‘‘Howe wa
to’opa Thowelpaane kummayo tean kimghaitci, hele yontei paxwine
wahuipatcelmen.
Ho ’ittonwia’epa ’i’ommiamehen ta’opa Thowelpamakwil ’imghai.
Tciho ’iwan’aihen papu’ai ’imalai. Tciho pa’ai pone paphoone han
wel pdtai’ene pana ’itho’e ‘ipitcelmen kowen ’iukalmen_pisiwen
’isomen teu’a “ithe. Men wiho ‘ipdsome’epa teyten to’opate paane
potciu paphoteiu han hele teita pana thopu’e ’ihdnehen ’ittonwia’epa
’’ommiahu: ‘‘Tahowe wa totha Piwwelpatha’ kimahaitci. ”Cixen
tcihoyo pdane Iaihewia. Yontei Thowelpaane wahuitcelme.”’
Ho ’ittonwia’epa ’i’9ommiamehen topiu Piwweltha ’imahai. Tciho
iwan’aihen papu’ai *imalai. Tciho psone paphoone han wel patai-
ene pana ‘itho’e ‘ipitcelmen kowen ’iukdlmen tey’a kowen ’itho.
Tciho tey’a ’ithotamen mentcoho patciu paphotciu han hele tcita
*ipataithopu’e leuten ’iunapohahane. ‘‘Tqahowe Palapapiu * kimg-
haitci, yontoi Piwwelpadane wahuipdtcelmen he niyanawaihenne
yoho padane poene paphoone han wel patai’ene ’ipihane.
' Picuris River.
2 palapaane, “the Big River” (Sp. Rio Grande); also spoken of
as Pdane, ‘‘the River.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 359
THE SANDHILL CRANES
Once there lived a flock of Sandhill Cranes up in the clouds in
the sky. And they drank the water from the clouds, and also
built their nests upon the clouds, and lived well. Once their leader
said to them: “I believe we will go down to the earth. The earth
has many rivers in every direction. And in the water fishes, frogs,
and other water animals are living. And there are also many trees
where we could build our nests. When we reach the earth, going to
where the rivers are, we can live well, eating nicely and getting
fat.’ As their leader told them thus, all of the Sandhill Cranes
agreed. Then they said to their leader: ‘‘All that you have said
about the earth seems to be very good. So we all want to go to
the earth.’”’ As they said thus, they all flew toward the earth.
As they flew down from the clouds they lighted at P’axwi’oxwal
Spring. And they lived, eating well, eating fishes and frogs every
day. But the Sandhill Cranes, as they drank so much water, soon
drank all of the water from the spring, together with the fishes and
frogs. ‘‘We will fly to another river, as this spring does not hold
enough water,’’ their leader said to them.
Then they flew to the spring at Jicarita Mountain. When they
arrived they lighted at the spring. At the spring they lived, catching
fishes, frogs, and other water animals that lived there, and drinking
the water of the spring. There they lived for a while, eating well
and drinking as much as they wanted. But they soon drank all
the water from the spring, together with the fishes and frogs. Then
their leader said to them: ‘“Now we will fly northwest to where
the Taos River ' lies, for this spring does not contain enough water.”
As their leader told them thus, they flew northwest to the Taos
River. When they reached there they lighted near the river. And
they lived a while by the river, catching fishes, frogs and other
water animals that lived in the river, eating well and drinking much.
As they drank so much, in a short time drinking up all the water
of the Northwest’ River,’ together with the fishes and frogs and what-
ever else lived in the river, their leader said to them: ‘‘Now we will
fly to the river of Picuris village. There there may be more water.
This Taos River does not contain enough water.”
As their leader told them thus, they flew to the Picuris village.
When they reached there they lighted by the river. And they
lived well for a while, catching fishes, frogs, and whatever other
water animals lived there in the water. But living there for a while
they soon drank up all the water, together with the fishes, frogs,
and other water animals that lived there. ‘‘Now we will fly to
the Rio Grande, for this Picuris River does not contain enough
water, and like nothing we have drunk up all the water, fishes, frogs,
and other water animals.”’
1 Pueblo Creek. 2 Another Picuris name for Pueblo Creek.
360 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Ho ’ittonwia’epa “’ommiahen Palapapiu ’imahai. Wa Patapa’ai
*iwan’aihen tciho pdpu’au ’imalai. Tciho Palapapaane ’isomen han
posne paphoone han wel patai’ene tciho ’itho’e ’ipikalmen kowen
ithe. Pohan Kd@iene Iaikowen ’iwaipdsonapen ’isomen Patapa’aite
pdane ’imaxdnepolhu, thapa palapapdsesne han padphoone han wel
patai’ene tciho ’ithe’e ’imaxanepolhu. ‘‘ Yontsi paanejo men kwiwil-
*ewia, yohoyo howe kiunakwelthopiatci, yohoyo kiutetipiamen kima-
palekipiatci.” Ho ittonwia’epa ’i’ommiamehen tciho Kaiene
*imathopai.
Hokeyo tcexamen Palapa’ai ’iKagitho pisipawiako.
A Basy Is SToLen By AN Own
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen tdtha ’itaitho. Wen Huene nathia’ai
’a’0’okialpu’e tho. ’?O’one nowai falme’epa kiane he ‘antci’e
nathame. ’Owiséwatcdpiatciamen wa séxanthiame. Thomo’an
hatta nokwil falme’epa mentcoho wenno kiane pa kdteeta ’d’one
hemmiahen tcita matcowia.
Ketcota ’d’one ’anasépotamen mentcoho Kauene ’atalia. ’O’one
talmentha Kauene tholwan’aiten ’itcel’aite ’6’omalenkdlehen Paxo-
puta Kqduene nathia’ai hiuketa ’anathekkinna ’6’one hui. Tcita
kaVaiten hiuphallakuitha ’d’one matco. Thopai Kayene hele
’anathiame’e mekemen tcotcuthols’a ’6’one tcitha ’e.
Mentcoho wen tholanen sonene tapuppe pitamon tcdkwi’ehepu’e
tcthui Ka@uene thonpe’au tcdmen ’d’osétalia. Tcitha tey’a matala-
wene. Wa _ hiukota ’d’one ’anasépe. ‘‘Xomma_ taipowiletci wa
na’o’oséponpiu.”” Ho tdOmen tcexamen hiukopakwil wile. Kota
wan’aixen ’0’one hiu’an sé’e. Kolehen ’élehen thappiu hui.
Thottha wan’aiten wa ’d’one ’akiatheppiu hutcia. ’Qkiane ’q’6-
’owitciahen senene pa te’amiahu ’9mmiamen: ‘‘Heyo teutai kén’au
’a’dOsematcohu? Wa Ka@uene thonnayo tcatthotanen tatcdkwi’ehen-
’auteyo tithan. Tcihoteyo timai. Na tiyawia’an’an Kauene payo
kq’dhanniatcin.’? Ho sonene liv’emementen sonene ’athoppiu me.
Hokeyo tcexamen Tosthate Huene kén’au wétan ’ipiya’osematcoke,
hoten Kdauene pa wa ’ithappiu ’o0’6’one *ihitciatciko.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 361
As their leader told them thus, they flew to the Rio Grande.
When they reached the Rio Grande they lighted near the river.
They drank the water of the Rio Grande and ate the fishes, frogs,
and other water animals that lived there, and lived well. All the
Sandhill Cranes did their very best to drink up the water, but could
not finish drinking the water of the Rio Grande, neither could they
finish eating up the Rio Grande fishes, frogs, and other water animals
that lived there. ‘This river must be very strong, so here we will
make our headquarters, here we will build our nests and increase
in number.” When their leader told them thus, they made their
homes there.
So this is the reason that there are Sandhill Cranes living on the
Rio Grande, because there is plenty of water.
A Bay 1s StoLeEN BY AN OwL
Once there lived people at the Pueblo. And there also dwelt
there a certain woman who had a baby that cried a great deal.
As the baby cried every night, the mother did not know what to do
with it. Soothing songs were sung to it, but the baby would not
stop crying. It cried day and night, and one day the mother took
the baby out upon the roof and left it there.
As the child cried continually on the roof, it was heard by an Owl.
The Owl came flying to where the baby was crying and picked it up
in his claws and carried it to Paxeputa, up on some very high rocks
where the Owl dwelt. When he brought the baby to his home, he
laid it on a flat rock. Every day the Owl would feed the baby
whatever he could, and the baby stayed there several days.
One evening a man was coming home from hunting from the north-
east, and as he was passing along the trail opposite the Owl’s home, he
heard a baby cry. There he stood to listen for a while. The baby
sounded crying up on the top of the rock. ‘I believe I will go up
toward where the baby sounds crying and see.’’ As he said thus, he
climbed to the top of the rocks. When he reached the top, the baby
sat on the rock, crying. He took it, put it on his back, and carried
it home.
When he reached home, he took the baby over to where its mother
lived. He handed the child to its mother and scolded her, telling
her: “‘Why do you leave the baby outside, crying? I found it at
the home of the Owl this evening as I was returning home from
hunting. I brought it from there. If it were not for me, your
child could have been eaten by the Owl.” As the man said thus to
the woman, he went home.
So this is the reason that the women at Pueblo no longer leave
their babies crying outside alone, lest the Owls might take the babies
to their homes.
19078° —28-——24
362 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [RTH. ANN. 43
Tue SpHynx Motu anp THE OxLp CoyotTE
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen Tatha Phopokene ’ateto’ophil
?anthe. Mentcoho Phodpokene nathia’ai xowewia; taithate hele
wen nahowehu. Thapa teto’otekanwia; tcokwil ’qleto’one pa
tcaipiamempiu wa toxephil mehu.
Tcexamen wepa ’aleto’one pa ’emmiahu: “’an’dkai’e, tceannoi
konaphipai’aihen hukwe Kan’jnai! hiaulotta konahttci. Tcihoyo
Piwwelkokwene wi Piwwelkwol’ene wen ’iunaphihuimen ’iname-
lemehu. Hokeyo thonna hiaulotta konaphi’élehen tcihui ’aname-
lemetci.”” Tcexamen Phopokene ’aleto’one pa wai’o9mmiapun
phipiatahu.
Thopiaken halo ke’owehen nananta ’onaphi’élehen hukwe
Kan’impiu§ me. Tcihokwil napiapippiu memen Toxwiatote
tedtcimepun’aute owolia. ‘’(Atheakowa, tcokwilo ’amehu?”
Phopokene ’9ommia Toxwialote pa. “Wa hukwe Kan’in’ai he
tamehu,”’ Phdpokene tohu. ‘Hele tciuko yintsi ’a’élhuihu?”’
Toxwialote Phopokene ’ome. Haihen Phodpokene tohu: Leto-
piu’one he tvélhuihu hukwe Kan’in’ai.’”’ Haihen Toxwiatote
tohu: ‘“‘Haloxui yohui mamaxiatewe, naxen notateto’okolmehe.”’
Ho Toxwialole Phdpokene ’emementen wa Tciuthemakwil ?
matolia’ophui wa ’ateto’o’empiu. Tciho wan’aiten ’omenom’aiten
wa ’ateto’one phalta thotselmepunna® fsen. Haihen teto’o’ome:
“Leto, yontei mona ’atson!”’ ’*Qleto’one watcetthiame. ‘‘Yoma
’atson mo’a’omehu.”’ Toxwialote teto’o’omehu. Howen ’ateto’one
watcetthiame. Toxwiatote tohu: ‘‘ Yontha ’atson’an phianatcaitopata
’apexwattehen yon motha ’ataitci.”” Ho Toxwiatole teotcuwen’a
leto’o’ememen mentcoho ’anama’akwen ’iphianatcaitokolehen
komotha ’ikiputhate ’ateto’one thdtcel’eputthate pexwan’ophui’aihen
motha takehen ’élehen wa Phodpokane ’axiawiaputtha Leto’o’ékal.
“Teanohan wipaita wa hukwe Kan’in’ai ’apanteto’o’dhutci,”’
tcexamen Toxwiatolte Phodpokene ’omehu. Hoxui tcexamen
Phopokene tohu.
Haihen wipaita wa hukwe Ka@n’in’ai ’anpesai. Tcihui pi’ai
’antcimen Kan’in’ai ’anwain. Tcitha nahiuwiatha Phopokene
nawelmehen ’onaphikélhu. Toxwialote Phopokene mom’aihen teto-
piuw’one maixen phiine hiunatha ’onak@hu. Haihen Toxwiatole
wétan tohu: ‘‘Yontai Phopokene pa taliakwia’9mmia. Letopiu’one
“At the Buffalo Track.”
> Tciuthopinene, ‘Eagle Pile Mountain.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 363
Tue Spoynx MorH AND THE Oxtp CoyoTE
There once lived at Picuris Pueblo a Sphynx Moth and his grand-
mother. The Sphynx Moth was a great believer; he believed every-
thing concerning the customs of the people. And he was very obe-
dient to his grandmother; he would go wherever his grandmother
would tell him, without talking back.
Once his grandmother said to him: ‘‘My grandson, you must
make plumeros! to-night and take them to Kan’in’ai, to the south-
east, early to-morrow morning. The Picuris youths and even Picu-
ris maidens take their plumeros there and supplicate. So early to-
morrow morning you must carry these plumeros and go there to
supplicate.”’ So that night the Sphynx Moth made plumeros the
way his grandmother had told him.
Early the next morning, carrying the plumeros, he set out for
Kan’in’ai, to the southeast. As he went along through the fields,
he met Old Coyote, who was hunting around. ‘‘Good morning,
where are you going?”’ the Old Coyote said to the Sphynx Moth.
“T am going over southeast to Kan’in’ai,” said the Sphynx Moth.
_ “What is it that you are carrying?” said the Old Coyote to the Sphynx
Moth. Then the Sphynx Moth said: “I am carrying my dead
grandmother over southeast to Kan’in’ai.’”’ Then the Old Coyote
said: “Then wait here for me, for | am going to get my grandmother.”’
As Old Coyote told the Sphynx Moth thus, he ran toward Tciu-
thotha where his own grandmother was. When he arrived there he
hunted for a bag and went inside the house where his grandmother
was toasting corn meal. And he said to his grandmother: ‘‘Grand-
mother, get into this bag!’”’ But the grandmother would not get
into it. ‘Get in here, I tell you,’”’ said Old Coyote to his grand-
mother. But his grandmother would not get in. The Old Coyote
said: “If you do not get in, I will hit you on the head with a fire
poker and then put you in this bag.’’ The Old Coyote told his grand-
mother thus several times, but he soon got disgusted and, taking the
fire poker which ‘was lying by the fireplace, he struck his grand-
mother, where she was sitting toasting the corn meal, and then put-
ting her into the bag and carrying her, he brought his grandmother
over to where the Sphynx Moth was waiting for him. ‘‘ Now we
shall both take our grandmothers over southeast to Kan’in’ai,” said
the Old Coyote to the Sphynx Moth. The Sphynx Moth assented.
Then they both started off to Kan’in’ai, to the southeast. As
they went along talking on the road they reached Kan’in’ai. There
in a rocky place the Sphynx Moth dug, and laid his plumeros. When
the Old Coyote noticed what the Sphynx Moth was doing, he dis-
covered that instead of a dead grandmother it was plumeros that he
' Spanish: feather bunches.
364 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
yo yin motha ’ataimaixen phiine he yin hiunq’ai ’onqitaihu. Tecan
watha tcimentha tamexa’a tisiupulatiyetci.” Ho tomen mentcoho
Phopokene talia’epa mathelkol. Haihen Toxwiatote nathia’ai tamiau-
men tohu: ‘“‘LiaPhopokeliyane pa ’ewen wian’e tisoleto’ohon.”
Phopokene makdlekenna popai’epa han Toxwialole henq’antci’e
nathame. Wéwe letopiu’élehen wa ’athoppiu mapesai. Talmen
pitamon mehu.
Wa thoppuw’au wanmen mentcoho yin ’an’o’epiatcimepun’aute
’ansétalian teexamen wel’ene ’itohu: ‘‘ Howen hexetci kitamene wiho
’amapo? Pilamon tea’ehe. Xomma pehan_ ’i’otcometci.” Ho
7itomen Toxwia’o’d’one itan’otcome. ’lotcon’aihen 7itci’ahu:
“Kitamene, heyo wiho kamapo? Hexeyo wiho heoixen kanatcape-
*ehe?”” Haihen ’ita@mene pa ’l’ommia: ‘‘’Qnan’d’one, *anatcipo-
’*eheketci sekehe ’anapo’ehe. Watsi Phopokeliyane wina’eho tiso-
tetopexwanhon, ’ewen pa tatiakwia’emmiapuyo. ’*Qnnakdtca’an’an
’annathiatiameputtha tatisoliuetcipu.” Ho ’ittamene pa Toxwia-
’o’d’one *’ommiamehen thapa ’imapehasephile. Toxwiatole phalpiu ©
teto’dtsattehen wa kemo’ai thotcel’epun’ai wéwe takiamen ’othdtcalto-
witcamen waiwan ’ommiamen: “Hatta teano han, teto, koths-
tsolphale!”” Tcihui takemen wéweta ’ankommen mentcoho hateuwen
Toxwialole ’alaitakkwen ’iphianatcaitokolehen wéwe teto’opexwa-
tehen wiwinakke hotcike. Haihen ’élehen wa kiapiu kahui.
Hokeyo toxwia’ene teathoi ’iunape, teun’ankenne yontoi talane
’iunapemupuyo; hokeyo tcexamen toxwia’ene hewen wel nakwetait-
hole ’iunape.
Kaxweki.
KoyowrxakEaApaAN! Ferercues Fire
Nakutheke tcexamen Piwweltha ’itaithe. Thapa Koyowixolapan
’aléto’ophil ’antho.
Tcexamen wepa ’anlaxaitcimepun’aute ’anwdn’aihen ’anamaphia-
wa. ‘‘Xomma yin kén’au kophianowole,’’ Koyowixolapan ’ateto’one
pa ’ommia. Mentcoho Koyowixolapan ’ophianowole. Mentcoho
yin kia’ai Patopona’ai? naphiatsetouki. ‘‘Xomma watha ’ophai-
mentha he taiphiakoltoutci,’ tohu. Mentcoho tou. Tcitha wan-
’aihen Tedxone totama ’iphdlehu ’itcatamen:
' The etymology of the name is obscure.
* Under the Aqueduct-Log.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 365
was laying under a rock. And the Old Coyote said to himself:
“This Sphynx Moth has told me a lie. Instead of having a dead
grandmother in his bag, he is putting the plumeros under the rock.
Now, I will go over there where he is and bite him.’’ As the Sphynx
Moth heard him saying thus, he flew away. Then the Old Coyote
was very angry, and he said to himself: ‘“‘That accursed Sphynx
Moth, it is on account of him that I have killed my grandmother.”’
As the Sphynx Moth disappeared as soon as he flew, the Old Coyote
did not know what to do. Again he packed his grandmother on
his back, and started for home. He was crying as he went along the
road.
As he reached home, his children heard him crying from where
they were playing, and said to each other: “But why is it that our
father isso happy? He is coming along the road singing. Let us all
go to meet him.” As they said thus, the little Coyotes went to meet
their father. When they met him, they asked him: ‘Our father,
why are you so happy? Why are you coming along singing so
loud?” Then their father told them: ‘My children, I am not
coming along singing, but I am coming along crying. It is on account
of that accursed Sphynx Moth that I have killed my grandmother
by hitting her on the head, because he told me a lie. If I had known
this, I would have bitten him while I had a chance.’ As their
father told the little Coyotes thus, they all joined erying. The Old
Coyote carried his grandmother into the house and set her down
again at the fireplace where she had sat toasting corn meal, and
gave her the corn meal toasting sticks and told her, although she
was dead: ‘‘Now, grandmother, finish toasting your corn meal!”’
As he would set her down she would topple over again, and at last
the Old Coyote got more angry, and he took the fire poker and struck
his grandmother again on the head, to be sure that she had been
killed. Then he put her on his back and took her to the arroyo to
bury her.
So this is the reason that coyotes nowadays are smart, because
they learned this kind of work long ago; this is the reason that the
coyotes are smarter than any other four-footed animal.
You have a tail.
Koyowrxatarpan Fetcues Fire
Once upon a time the people were dwelling at Picurfs. And
there also lived Koyowixolapan with her grandmother.
One time when they came home from going around wood-gathering,
their fire had gone out. ‘You must go outside to look for fire,”
said Koyowixolapan’s grandmother to her. Then Koyowixolapan
went out to look for fire. There was a bright light down in the
arroyo at Patopona’ai. ‘‘I believe I will go down where the bright
light is to get fire,’ she said. Then she went down. When she
arrived there, the Wizards were dancing inside the estufa, and they
sang:
366 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
No. 1
SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS KOYOWJX9EAPAN ENTERS THEIR ESTUFA
Henai’anena ’anena
Henai’ane’ena henai’anena
Henai’ane’ena henanena
Henai’ane’enq. :
Henai’anena ’anena
Henai’ane’ena henai’anena
Henai’ane’ena henanena
Henai’ane’ena.
Mentcoho Koyowixelapan totaphalpiu tsen. Tson’aiten Tcaxone
pa phalphiltcaipia. Mentcoho mapholphile.
*(eto’one wa kwonwileme’epa ’anaxelhu. Tohu: ‘‘Howen tco-
kwiltci Koyowixelapan me? Xomma tainowoletci,’’ tOmen nome.
Notcimen’au talmen mehu:
No. 2
CRYING SONG OF THE GRANDMOTHER AS SHE SEEKS KOYOW]X9LAPAN
Koyowixolapan
Koyowjxelapan
?Gwinoke hayuwi mehu mehu.?
* Hayuwi is a mere filler; the other words mean: “ Koyowixetapan,
I am going along seeking you.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 367
NO. 6. SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS KOYOWIX@UEAPAN ENTERS THEIR
ESTUFA
A Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
a. e- age
zi tae wieaize. Eid be erd bes pol eeieaiee
He-nai-’ a-ne-n@-@ ’a-ne - ng- he = na - ’a - ne-’e-ng nena
Der TRL AB Bas Aa sate ald
‘a-ne - ng He -nai - - ne-’e-ng Hens - ne-ng ae nai -
iA
A
2S
1 2 &
‘a - ne-’e-ng He - ae na-@ ’a-ne - ng he -
Ee: ee EES pe
- - ne Te-ng He-nei-'a-ne ug fie eae =
pas 3 1 te elsedg els. =]
ne - e-ng He - -na - ne-ng - nai - a - ne-’e-ng.
Koyowixolapan then went into the estufa. As she went in, she
was asked by the Wizards to join in the dance. She then joined in
the dance.
Because she did not return soon, her grandmother began to get
uneasy about her. She said: “But where did Koyowixslapan go?
I believe I will go out and look for her,’’ she said, and went out. As
she went about searching, she went crying:
NTO;
NO. 7. CRYING SONG OF THE GRANDMOTHER AS SHE SEEKS
KOYOW[XULAPAN
z Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
a. a8 a A :
prises LeaePe! res ems eee
Ko-yo-wi - xo-la - - pan Ko-yo-wi - xo-la~ -
B =——
SaaS Sy
pan "Ai - wi - ie - ke ha-yu-wi me - hu me - bu.
TRANSLATION
Hajuwi has no meaning; the other words mean: ‘‘ Koyowixetapan,
I am going along seeking you.”
368 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Mentcoho wa Tcaxone ’ingphiatsetoukippiu me. Tcitha ’iphole-
mentha wan’aihen ’éta’aite phalpiu matogheme: ‘Phal’atte, yoho
Koyowixelapan ’ana’e?”” Tco wetcon patcue’a toOmen Tcaxone pa
’amatdlapiatciame. Koyowixelapan ’inpintai’aihen ’itcdtamen ’iphsd-
lehu:
No. 3
THE SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS THEY MAKE KOYOW[X9EAPAN AN OLD
WOMAN
Mimatalapiape Mimatalapiape
Talapiapo Talapiapo
Henai’ane’ena Henai’ane’ena
Mimatalapiapo Mimatalapiape
Henai’ane’ena Henai’ane’ena
Hananena Hananena
Henai’ane’eng. Henai’ane’ena
Halo ’iphaltamen tonene Koyowixolapan ’ateto’one ’afalia’epa
’’vome halo matuwe. ’Vemaiten tcexamen ’ipholluwe. Wa ’dla’ai
Koyowixotapan ’aleto’one ’anapo: ‘ Phal’atte, yoho Koyowixolapan
’ana’e?”” ‘°C, yono ’e ’akoltsen,’’? Tcdxene pa ’ommiahu. ‘“Ne’a,
manhéme!”’ tohu: ’Ittonwia’epa ’i’emmia: ‘‘Mapinhéme, hatta
nato’ai wi tula’owia.”” Mentcoho ’ahémmiahen ’ananthoppiu ’amme.
Hokeyo teexamen kwol’ene nowian ’innaphiang’al’awiake Tcadxone
pa ’itceliatciko.
Kaxweki.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 369
She then went over to where the Wizards had their place all lighted
up. When she arrived where they were dancing she called inside
through the roof-hole: “Insider, is not my Koyowixetapan here?”’
She repeated this two or three times, but the Wizards would pay no
attention to her. Koyowixeltapan was dancing with them as they
sang:
NO. 8. SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS THEY MAKE KOYOW[XUELAPAN AN OLD
WOMAN
a. ale —69 or g about 208 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
oe ae + }e—e 2
Era! —— ° it iP hee 10-De= be» » 9 ==
bx = IZ bp Lai teeta t — Fi 2
3 SS SS ae
Mi - ma-t’a- la-pi-a- po t’a-la-pi-a-po he - nai-’a-ne-’e-na
Se
PDs, = a a [be ° Be bs—_»——__e —__»—_3__> |
y—y ¥#—F = - a
y aes ys
Mi isi lia aad he - sce anaes Tr
2: me - Qe gies —= .
* of eat rani oe oo ==f{3 5 e
“oA 74 y 7 Z
Ha - na-ne- aa - nai-’a-ne-’e-na. Mi-ma-t’a- la - pi-a- po
be—e fall be—e
A eo
EnGael eet ee ee aaa a
Sa = 7 2 2s
t’a-la- pi-a-~po he - nai-’a-ne-’e-na Mi - ma-t’a-la-pi-a-po he-
Cc
Sie Ae HO=5e ==
25 he —o—e- o==i[ peo =e {fio oe eo ==}
SS eee
nai-’a-ne-’e-ng Ha-na-ne-ng he - nai -’a-ne -’e-n@.
As they were dancing, the leader heard the voice of Koyowixolapan’s
grandmother, and told them to stop. As they were told thus, they
stopped dancing. There at the roof hole Koyowixotapan’s grand-
mother was heard saying: ‘Insider, is not my Koyowixotapan
here?” “Yes, she is here. Come down and get her!” said the
Wizards to her. ‘No, bring her out for me!’ she said. Their
leader said to them: ‘‘Take her out, for she, poor one, is now very
old.”” When they brought her out, they both went to their home.
So this is the reason that the girls are not permitted to go out to
look for fire in the evening, lest the Wizards might catch them.
You have a tail.
370 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [eTH. ANN. 43
Tue TURKEYS AND THE GREAT FLOOD
Nakutheke tcexamen Ko’omapittha Pillelo’ene ’ithe. Mentcoho
wepa tcutei thelfaiene pa ’inatalakalia wa Maxwalapittha! teiu
*iyainankwetholtaithon iwiletci’e, tolpa | napakemmiahe’epa,
’anathia’epa patha natol’altouwehe’epa.
Hatta thoone ’imetci’e wan. Pohan tecutcone wa Ko’omapittha
ithopu’e *imehu Maxwalapippiu. Tcexamen wésen Pillelo’ene
?anapai’ophil tcihokwil ’imapesai ’anpai’oxatcile’aihen. Hatta
pu’au *iwdnmen ’ananpai’one ’amalohanmen talhu. ‘‘’(mapiatei,
kananfai’one,” ’anpapaane pa ’ommiahu. ’QUmaitohanmenta
talmen mehu. “’(talpo, kananpaij’one, hatta Maxwalatha
iwl’owdnhe,”’ ’ommiamen ’anpapaane pa ’imehu.
Mentcoho héteuwen Maxwalapikketha 7’iwan. ’Iwan’aihen
pikketha nakwetai’ene hatta tholtai’ene ’iyaiwiatta ’’e. Nathia’ai
folme’epa hatta pikkothaxen padwanhu. Wel tcutcone takei’au
7imalaimen, hatta wi Maxwalapinketha pawanhen natolpe.
Hokeyo tcexamen Pillelo’ene xwexane’ai pathowen ’inkimoyo
*ipaxalapaxav’epa. Thapa hokeyo wel tholfai’ene thapa wel
nankwetav’ene telawen ’imoye, wa Maxwalatha ’itolxwinwileputtha
*ipdxalapdxar’epa.
Kaxweki.
THe ORIGIN OF THE ScaLtp House
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen Tdtha ’ifaithe. Thapa td’opa
Thowelma ’itaitho. Tsthate tcexamen Thowel’ene ’an ’imapun-
?amme’epa, tholan’aihen thophal’au pohan ’*iwaiphaimen ’i’e, Thowel-
ene nowian ’iwakkepuyo.
Mentcoho wen Piwwelsonene ’amayapu’e timo ’élehen xwelkolehen
tholtane halo watholketta ts’opa Thowel’ene ’ithamma me. Tciho
wan’aihen ’onatholesian’au nanoputci’e maxialai. Teihui xia’en
Thowel’o’d’one nanopuimen ’i’epiatamen ’innape: “Tahan phalpiu
i1tsonya hoten Wila’ene pa ’itcelama.” ?
Mentcoho nanopupunhen natsonthokittha wan’aihen phalpiu tson.
Tcexamen wen Huene hen ’a’omaxuphil’aihen ’e. Sonene teiwotcehen
liuene koteu. ’“Ipékolehen wéwe Tspakwil maxwilesai. Memen wa
' Maxwalapinene, Pueblo Peak.
* A Taos sentence in Pic. pronunciation, =Pic. Tahan phalpiu
1tsettci hoten ‘‘ Wila’ene”’ pa ’itcelama.
€ Y
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES Oval
THe TurRKEYS AND THE GREAT FLOOD
Once upon a time there lived some Turkeys at Ko’oma Mountain.
And one time there came a certain bird to tell them that all four-
footed and flying animals must go up Pueblo Peak, since the whole
earth was to be covered by rain, it being that the Power was to
send rain to the earth.
Then the day arrived for them to go. All the birds that lived at
Ko’oma Mountain went to Pueblo Peak. And two Turkeys started
to go there with their little brother, leading their little brother by
the hand. As they got near, their little brother was growing tired
and began to cry. ‘‘Keep on, our little brother,” said his older
brothers to him. As he grew tired he went along crying. ‘‘Do not
ery, our little brother, we shall now soon reach Pueblo Peak,” said
his older brothers to him as they went along.
They finally came to the top of Pueblo Peak. When they reached
the top, four-footed and flying animals of every kind were already
there. Since it was raining hard, the water was almost reaching the
top. Some of the birds were sitting on top of the trees and just as
the water was about to reach the top of Pueblo Peak it stopped
raining.
So this is the reason why the Turkeys have their feathers white at
the end of the tail, because they were touched by the foam of the
water. And this is also the reason why some of the flying animals
and four-footed animals are spotted, because as they ascended,
fleeing from the rain, their feathers were touched by the foam of
the water.
You have a tail.
Tue ORIGIN OF THE ScaLtp House
Once upon a time people were living at the Pueblo. Also people
were living up northwest at Taos. As the Picuris people were at
war with the Taos, the people were all inside their houses without
lights as soon as it got dark, for the Taos used to come around at
night.
Now a certain Picuris man put his quiver on his back and took
his bow and started off in the evening, before sunset, up northwest
for where the Taos lived. When he arrived there he sat inside an
old house, waiting for it to get dark. As he sat there waiting, and
as it was getting dark, he heard the Taos children who were playing
say: “Now we must go inside, for the Picuris might catch us.”
When it grew dark, he went into the first house he came to. There
was only one woman there, who was holding a child in her arms.
372 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Paxwinowia’ai' waimmen tsempiu mapomaxolehen Thoawel’ene
‘ithettha ’innaphiatsetcihu. Wel pitamen wa ’epuppiu naphiatse’ehe.
Tolliawen sonene Topiu mamapiahu. Wa Petcothakko’ai 2 ’owolehen
tcihuite matokwen toheme. Tdthate sonene ’itokwentalian Iu’ene,
tauene, han wel teune ’iunahelkanwia’e ’iunghakehen ’imakwoen’anhu
wa petcotho pinketha. Kotha ’iwaGn’aixen sonene ’anThowelliupée-
phil’aihen ’ithan Tcitha ’iphiatakehen ’ixonphalehu.
*Tuphelphal’aihen Tspiu *ipipelowe. “‘Xomma ’inafexaithapiatci;
’aixen yiho ’ipunme’an wel kiupexaikal’an kiuxwewantcuke,”’ wel
sonene ’itohu. Tcexamen thopiaketta ’inapexaithopai.
Hokeyo teexamen Tdtha wa ’ipuntcipun’aute iupexaikal’eyo tcitha
?oxwekwan tcathoimahen.
Tue SuNKEN EstTura
’Qnan’d’one, halo teun’anken ’ewai wa Totha ta’d’owian, ’anan-
léto’ene pa, ’anantalotene pa, wi ’anankiatdmene pa wen, ’oyo
’anamatcitiake’an, xq waitcun’an halo Tstha Piwweltha taipa
*inahuiken ho’e hele wen titcepa ’itakepuyo, mentcoho xa wen
tawan tai’ene *ipattelmen yin Koppui. Halo tcanwen’e tcihokwil
’atcOmen ’anamomen nasanwaita’e naisona. Halan teoho wétcotte
ho’an’aihen wéwe pannuwette’ayo tcitei totatha ’ikatai. Hat tcinne
ikata’eneyo ’iwia sonene hal fiuene ’an ’itcatdmepu’e. Howen
*itaipokotcopu’e pdieneyo iwia’an, hat tean kwol’eneyo ’ipi’omehu,
howen tcinne kwol’d’one tcun’aken titcepa ’ipattelmepu’e hohenng
*’ommiake’an. Metco tcipa pohan tai’ene ’imakopia’an.
Hokeyo, ’anan’d’one, halo tean Tadtha totene ’itho’e *ito’a xa
nathia’ayo ’aihewiatiatci tcitha koneene, philo’one haw wel tcitha
*onakatav’epa. Manakdatea kitcepaihia papaane yonne tcun’an
pelxone nathia’ayo ’iunaxon’amhu teathei. Hokeyo na Tatha he
tamiaumema ’ana@’dwiame’an wel’a tcepaihia’ene ’onoxweltamiatcike,
piawehenno tcitoi tatane taxwelmetci. Hohenno tcitei Tathate
totane thate mapi’omehu, hohen’e ’annakatcako. Hokeyo ho mapi-
yai’omen pétha manataitci, ’aixen tcun’an yinne teal lotene 7itcd-
punhan ’e manakole manawiatcikke.
“At Night Lake,” the site of the present town of Taos.
* Meaning ‘‘ Above the Home of the Snakes.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 31o
The man took out his sword and severed the woman’s neck. He took
the head and started up toward Picuris again. As he went along
and came to Paxwinowia’ai he turned and looked back, and torches
were flashing around where the Taos lived. Some of the lights
were coming along the roads by which he had come. The man ran
his best toward Picuris. When he got out to Petcothake’ai he
gave a war whoop. The men of Picuris, when they heard the war
whoop, took the arrows, guns, and whatever weapons they had,
and hurried toward the top of Petcothoko’ai Mountain. When they
reached the top, they found the man with the head of the Taos
woman. They built a fire at the top and had a war-dance.
When they finished dancing, they took the head down to the
Pueblo. ‘‘Let us build a scalp house; we might happen to go to
war and bring more scalps, and could hang them up,” some of the
men said. And so they built a scalp house the very next day.
So this is the reason that scalps which were brought by men who
went to war are hanging at the Pueblo to this day.
Tue SunKeN Estura
My children, long ago when I was a child like you at the Pueblo,
my grandparents and even my parents used to tell me like this,
that a long time ago, when at Picuris Pueblo they still used to carry
on by native custom and do everything by ceremony, one spring
the people were grinding flowers at Koppui. Even to this time
you can see the place as you pass by, as it is sunken. Perhaps
there may be some 250 people buried in that estufa. Among those
buried there are the men and women who were singing. The
prettiest looking of all were the pdiene (literally, ‘‘grinders’’), whom
they nowadays call kwol’ene (maidens). But these girls ground flowers
long ago in ceremony, and that is why they were so called. I suppose
that all the people that were in there were dressed up nicely.
So that is the reason, my children, that the old men at the Pueblo
still talk about it, that one might get rich with beads, earrings, and
many other things that are buried there. You know that our
palefaced brothers value ancient articles much. If I were to have
my own way and were to be permitted at the Pueblo, I would get some
of the palefaces to help me dig that place; I would gladly go to dig
that estufa. That is all I have to say to you about that estufa at
the Pueblo, for that is all I know. So put the impression in your
head as I have told you, so that when these old people have passed
away you can take their place and have this story to tell.
374 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [pTH. ANN. 43
THe Oxtp CoyrotrE WomMAN AnD THE Crow! Visir Eacu OTHER
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen wa ‘Tauxatho’ai? Kakene tha.
Han Toxwiat’o ’an’dphil ’Q’ai * the. Wepa Toxwiati’o ’i’o’omehu:
“Thonnayo wa Tauxatho’ai ’ampiiene Kakene thon’aiyo tataiwamehu.
Hokeyo kwon’ai miyakwaxxepo.”’ Thopiahen Toxwial’o matcilemen
makopiamehen mentcoho Kakene theppiu teiwame.
Kakene thon’au wan’aiten Kakene pa tcottcaipia. Toxwiah’o
phalta tson’aihen Kakene nathia’ai ’anatheko. Panane tcexamen
nathia’ai patcihui ’anapate. Toxwiah’o panatha tcimen wakwéne-
tiame, nathia’ai napato’epa. Tciho leltcimen matakehen Kakene
’antcihu. Haihen Toxwial’o Kakene tci’al: ‘‘’Qmpiiene, howen
he’antci wiho kanapdnapatetia?’”’ Haihen Kakene tohu: ‘Pen
tinapatsottehen panatha timawialehen haihen panamo’au talalemen
hohe ’annap@napatotia.” Haihen Toxwiane tohu: ‘‘Taxui naxen
teatthotanen ’antheppiu tame’aihen ’angn’d’one pinapdapiatcatcehen
thophalta tinapatsettehen tailoletci, ’e kanaipanapateta naxen
*anapanapatetiatcike.”’
Tcihui ’antdmen ’antcitci’en tcexamen Toxwiati’o tohu: ‘“‘Howen
hele toiwakaliatci’e naiwipe. ’Qnawisepen wapei yin komotha
‘iphianateaitok’e tcaikwil manma!” Kakene Toxwiati’o ’ome.
Toxwiati’o pa Kakene ’anphianatcaitomatciahen mapheaixwansai.
Miyaiphgixwanmenta phaimate pisiwen ’ataulolhu. Philama ’atau-
pen’aihen Toxwiah’o ’akalsiatcia. Toxwiati’o peutia’o’ewia’epa
xaitcuta faukalhu. Thotanen toxwiati’o tohu: ‘Hatta ’antheppiu
tamehe. Thonna tholammenng ’e ’ateiwametci ’antheppiu.”’ Hai-
hen mentcoho Toxwiati’o theppiu me.
Wan’aiten 7i’6’o9mehu: ‘‘’Qnan’d’one, ’ampiiene Kakene ’aya-
kwénetiameno ’anapanapdats. Hokeyo naxeng ho tanapanapate-
’amhe. Hokeyo yin kétha manapapiatci teatta, hele Kakene thonna
tholamen teaikwil toiwa’eheko. ’Ewen ’anaip@napdten ’annapana-
thamiate’eyo na tamiahu.” Toxwia’d’one ’imanapapiatalasai.
‘Old Coyote Woman and Crow are old women. Cp. the story
starting p. 376, in which Jackrabbit and Bluejay are old women,
grinding companions of Old Coyote Woman.
* Mutilated placename form for Tauxqithe’ai, “at Pinyon Cone
Pile.”
3 Meaning ‘At the Salt.”
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 375
Tue O_tp Coyote WoMAN AND THE Crow Visit Eacu OTHER
Once there dwelt a Crow at Tauxatho’ai. And the Old Coyote
Woman together with her young ones dwelt at ’Q’ai. Once the Old
Coyote Woman said to her children: ‘‘To-morrow I am going for a
visit to Tauxatho’ai, where my friend the Crow lives. And so do
not expect me to return soon.’”’? The next day the Old Coyote
Woman combed her hair and dressed up nicely, and then went for
a visit to the home of the Crow.
When she arrived at the home of the Crow, she was told to come
in. When the Old Coyote Woman went inside, the Crow’s house
was very beautiful. The floor was very sleek, like ice. As the Old
Coyote Woman walked about on the floor, she could not keep her
feet because it was so very sleek. As she rolled about she sat down
and she and the Crow talked together. Then the Old Coyote
Woman asked the Crow: ‘‘ My friend, how did your floor get so sleek?”
Then the Crow said: “I just brought some mud in, spread it on the
floor, and then I rolled all over the floor, and thus my floor got sleek.”
Then the Old Coyote Woman said: ‘Very well, I too, when I go
home this evening, will ask my children to make mud, and I will
take it into the house and I will roll, so that my floor will get as
sleek as yours.”
As they sat there talking thus, the Old Coyote Woman said: ‘‘We
ought to have something to eat while visiting.” ‘‘Quite so, bring
me over that fire poker lying by the fireplace,” said the Crow to
the Old Coyote Woman. The Old Coyote Woman brought the fire
poker to the Crow, and she began to whip herself on the nose. As
she whipped herself on the nose, a quantity of pinyon nuts dropped
out of her nose. After she had filled a basket with pinyon nuts she
set it for the Old Coyote Woman to eat. As the Old Coyote Woman
was voracious, she ate the pinyon nuts shell and all. In the evening
the Old Coyote Woman said: ‘‘Now I must be going home. To-
morrow evening you must come over for a visit to my house.” Then
the Old Coyote Woman went back to her home.
When she reached home she told her children: ‘‘My children, the
floor of my friend the Crow is so sleek that I could not keep my
feet. So I too am going to make my floor smooth like that. So
you make mud outdoors right now, since the Crow is coming here
for a visit to-morrow evening. I want her to find my floor as sleek
as hers.” The little Coyotes started to work making mud. When
376 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
*Inapakemehen phalpiu ’inapatsettehen panatha ’imawialehu.
*Imawialephalehen Toxwiati’o malaletcdne. Napawehen mo’aihen
malslemen tcoho wisuin’a ’anapdtetiame. Htitcu’aita’o ’itcel’in’aihen
’anapanana. Tcano Kakene tilametci. ’KHwen ’anaipana patettayo
tean na ’annapdata.
Wewe thotammen tcexamen Kakene Toxwiah’o thotta teiwame.
Tcitha wan’aiten Toxwiah’o pa ’ommiahu: ‘’(tson, ’atson! Pen
mannapanamoi!’”’ Kakene tsen’aiten napdnamon’aixen hiteu’aita
tedta Toxwiati’o matcel’ene tate’ene, xwene, tu’ene, wi’ine ’o’in.
Kakene so’oketa makeppiawemen tohu: ‘‘Toxwiah’o, he’antci
wiho kanapdnapatetia?’”’ Haihen Toxwiali’o pa ’emmia: ‘Tals-
lemen talalemen.’’ Haihen wipaita ’antcitcelai.
Lewa ’antcimen mentcoho Kakene Toxwiali’o ’ome: “‘Toxwiali’o,
hele toiwakaliatei’e naiwipe.’”’ Haihen Toxwial’o tohu: ‘Taxui
wapei phianatcaito’eme kometha 7iki’e teaikwil ’ima.’”’ Haihen
Kakene ‘iphianatcaito mai’aihen Toxwiali’o maphegixwansai.
Maphgixwammen tduene ’atcantcikomaixen ’q@’eneta ’antcanhu.
“Faihoixen ’axwan!’”? Kakene pa ’oemmiahu. Haihen Toxwiali’o
laihoixen maxwanhu. Mentcoho laiwen pheinate ’an’atcanhu.
Howenko miyaphgixwantuweme. Hétcuwen men Toxwiah’o wetan
maphgixwanhon. Piukuitha Kakene ’anapiamen tohu: ‘‘Tox-
wiah’o hdta wa pdxekkwiallane nawai taitciwayo ’anamia’q’an.”
Ho Kakene tomen mentcoho Toxwiah’o ’otcéxewia’e ’okalehen
matholkol.
Hokeyo tcexamen kakene ’iutcexo’a.
Kaxweki.
Oxip Coyote WomMAN, JACKRABBIT, AND BLuEJAY GRIND TOGETHER
Nakutheke teexamen Kopui Kane hatta Tsiauene ’an ’anthe.
Mentcoho wepa ’antohu: ‘‘Thonayo kanteltci.”” Thopiahen ’ana
’an’Ixosai’aihen ’antelhu. Kane tcexamen ’otelmen tcadtahu:
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES BN
they finished the mud, they carried it inside and spread it on the
floor. When they finished spreading it, the Old Coyote Woman
started to roll. All muddy, she rolled around, but it did not get
sleek at all. The floor was imprinted with her large claws. ‘‘Now
I will surprise the Crow. My floor is just as sleek as hers.”
So the next evening the Crow went to the Old Coyote Woman’s
home for a visit. When she arrived the Old Coyote Woman said to
her: ‘‘Come in! Come in! Just look at my floor!’’ As the Crow
entered and saw the floor, there were large and plain imprints of
the claws, the ears, the tail, the hips, the teeth of the Old Coyote
Woman. The Crow made herself fall, just for fun, and said: ‘Old
Coyote Woman, how did it happen that your floor got so sleek?”
Then the Old Coyote Woman told her: ‘Just by rolling over and
over.” Then they both sat down together to talk.
After they sat talking a while, the Crow said to the Old Coyote
Woman: “Old Coyote Woman, we ought to have something to eat
while visiting.’ Then the Old Coyote Woman said: ‘‘Very well,
bring me over that fire poker which is lying by the fireplace.”’ Then
the Crow brought the fire poker and the Old Coyote Woman began
to whip herself with it on the nose. As she whipped herself on the
nose, it began to bleed, instead of pinyon nuts coming out. ‘Whip
yourself harder,’ said the Crow to her. Then the Old Coyote
Woman began to whip herself harder. Then her nose began to bleed
more. Butshe would not stop whipping herself on the nose. Finally
the Old Coyote Woman killed herself by whipping herself on the
nose. As she lay dead, the Crow said, laughing: ‘‘The thus easily
fooled Old Coyote Woman thought that she would do the same as
I.” As the Crow said thus, she ate the Old Coyote Woman’s eye-
balls, and then flew away.
So this is the reason that crows are fond of eyeballs.
You have a tail.
Oxtp Coyrotre WomAN, JACKRABBIT, AND BLuEJAY GRIND TOGETHER
Once upon a time there lived at Kopui a Jackrabbit and a Blue-
jay. Once they said to each other: ‘‘To-morrow let us grind.”
So the next morning they put their shelled corn on their metates
and began to grind. The Jackrabbit sang as she ground:
19078°—28
25
378 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
No. 1
THE JACKRABBIT’S GRINDING SONG
Katotia’atanphowanphewan
Piu’one toliatoliateyahehe.
Katolia’atanphowanphowan
Piu’one toliatoliateyahehe.?
Thapa Tsiauene ’otelmen tcatahu:
No. 2
THE BLUEJAY’S GRINDING SONG
Tcetsexemotce’oxeuxeu
Tautauwileketce’oxeumotsiautsiau.
Tcetsexemotce’oxeuxeu
Tautauwileketce’oxeumotsiautsiau.?
1 The words have no meaning.
*The words have no meaning, but the syllables tsiautsiau are
understood to mean ‘‘bluejay, bluejay;”’ cp. tsiauene, bluejay.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 379
NO. 9. THE JACKRABBIT’S GRINDING SONG
Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
Wa-to-li-a-’g-tan - pho-wan-pho-wan piu-’o - ne to-h-a-to-li-a-
iN
— Mn
33-9 — = || 3-9 —_»— 9 0— 82 |13-0—_0—_0—_9 —Dp
Eee Paes Z| Sa aaese et =a ae ae -|
a
te- ya-he - he Iq-to-h - a-’a-tan - pho-wan-pho-wan piu -’o-ne
=) 2? = SS —— ° so =|
ry ‘
COMP =e tien al=nitO) bes de ee) obey — oe - he.
TRANSLATION
The words have no meaning that is understood.
Also the Bluejay sang as she ground:
NO. 10. THE BLUEJAY’S GRINDING SONG
= ey 63 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
==. = “If: =" :
—9e 9 4 eS
Ie iat
mig aT! a7 ev.
ee ts’e-xe-mg - tce-’o-xe-u-xe-U tau -ta-u-wi-le - ke -
A’
, , 4
Sra N F Tr “—o te
Ej tir =e = - Noy = N oT Rom t e
| a id a —t + ; at E 4 =
¢ ae =the oe rel . v
tee -’0 - xe -y-mo_ - tsi-au- ts’/i- au Tce - ts’e-xe-mo -
=,9—9 Se ==\oae
te ‘a e —— || oe °
: ba {
——— BF == ae ee
tee - ’o - xe - YU - xe - U tau - ta- u - wi -le - ke -
; iad NS ia i
seytt fe : ive: 2 |
ge == SS eas
tee, =|, 0) = xel= bye mo), =p etsiei=.aue =) its = saul
TRANSLATION
The words have no meaning but the syllables tsiautsiau are under-
stood to mean ‘‘bluejay, bluejay’’; cp. tsiauene, bluejay.
380 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
Mentcoho Toxwiali’o yin teoho tcétcimen’aute teatalia. ‘“Tcdtei
howen natcakolapo? Xomma@ yin naponpiu he taimetci.” Ho
tomehen tcexamen natcdponpiu me. Wa Kane hatta Tsiauene
‘’antelmentha wan’aiten tohu: “‘Heyo mantelhu?” “‘Ha’a, kan-
telhu.”’ Tsiauene pa ’ommia, ‘‘’exen ’a’ixoxaime xa’a ’aphile.”’
Ho ’oemmiamenten Toxwiali’o wa Tciuthgmakwil* ’ixoxaime.
Thon’au wan’aiten yin ’ohosian’au hoxethokiahen putina sai’aihen
*iputihokitcehen wa Kane han Tsiauene ’antelmenpiu makwon’ammen
me. Tcitha wan’aiten tohu: ‘“Teano ti’ixokal; teang tatelphiletci.
Kane Tsiauene ’an ’apanpitihoxomon Toxwiane ’an’emehu: ‘Na
hox’one yon ’a’an ’anaitelkeko hele ’a’ene ’otsultcan’aihen ’owaipe-
keko.”’ Ho ’emmian wéwe kétha hoxepetehen wéewe Tciuthopiu me.
Thon’au wan’aihen ’alai’ixokétcowiapu’e putina sai’aihen ’iputihe-
kiteehen wéwe wa Kane hatta Tsiauene ’antelmempiu makwon’ammen
me. Teitha wan’aiten Kane pa ’emmiahu: ‘“Tecano koteltei; yinne
ixokdtco’eyo kawia.”” Ho Toxwiati’o ’ommiamehen ’ana ’ixosai’aihen
patcuta *iutelhu.
*Tutelmen Toxwiali’o Kane pa ’ommiahu: ‘‘Xomme tcan kimapo-
hatelmapiatei, xomma teutsi’a sotaitelkwiwil. Hokeyo kiutcekwele-
henno kiuteltci.”’ Toewiah’o tohu: ‘Taxui.” Mentcoho pohan
’imatelmapiahu. Toxwiati’?o mentecoho malaitelmapai Kane pa
hatta Tsiauene pa’an ’apin’ai wia’epa ’ahiupata pe’ai xwantiahen
hotia.
Hokeyo tcexamen telke nawia.
Tue O_p Coyore AND THE THREE GouRDS
Nakutheke teexamen Kepui patcun Koloone ’ithe. Mentcoho
wepa ’iuphalmate kétha ’iuluwwole. ’Hun’en thapa Toxwialole
’Venpe’a ’ophalthate ’oluwwole. ‘‘Toxwialole ’iyaisiameme; ’aixen
teaikwil kixon’e’an kiuphalpiu ’isoxwittsettci,’”’ Koloone 7itghu.
*Ttun’enthate Toxwialole ’isiamehu. ‘‘Toxwiatole, tcdtiatone, kotte
pamo, kwelamo!’’ Toxwiatole tun’enthate taliahen Kéoloone
*Vvomehu: “Ho maisiameme’an watha tame xa’a mapipghasiypu-
latiuetci.” “Toxwialole, teatiatone, kettle pamo, kwelamg!” Ko-
loone ’itghu. ‘‘Riate! Ho mai’omeme’an watha tame xa’a mapi-
3 Tciutho’ai, ‘‘at the Eagle Pile.”
HARRINGTON) CHILDREN’S STORIES 381
Then Old Coyote Woman, who was hunting around there, heard
the song. ‘‘But where must this beautiful singing be coming from?
I believe I will go to where it sounds from.’’ As she said thus, she
went over to where it sounded from. When she arrived where the
Jackrabbit and the Bluejay were grinding, she said: ‘Are you
grinding?”’ ‘Yes, we are grinding,”’ said the Bluejay to her, ‘“‘go
and get your shelled corn and join us.”’
As they told her thus, she went up to Tciuthoma to get the shelled
corn. When she reached home she went to where there were cedar
trees and picked some cedar berries and putting them in her shallow
basket and putting the basket on her head, she went hurrying along
to where the Jackrabbit and the Bluejay were grinding. When she
arrived there she said: ‘“‘Now I have brought the shelled corn; now
I shall join in grinding.””’ When the Jackrabbit and the Bluejay
saw the shallow basket of cedar berries, they said to the Coyote:
“We do not grind cedar berries here on our metates, because it
makes the metates look brown and it will not come off.”’ As they
told her thus, she went outside again and threw the cedar berries
away and went back to Tciuthoma.
When she arrived home she put the best shelled corn that she
had in the basket, put it on her head, and again went hurrying
along to where the Jackrabbit and the Bluejay were grinding. When
she arrived there, the Jackrabbit said to her: ‘‘Now you may grind;
that shelled corn that you have is very good.”’ As the Old Coyote
Woman was told thus, she put the shelled corn on a metate and the
three of them ground.
As they ground, the Jackrabbit said to the Old Coyote Woman:
“This time let us grind with all our strength to see who is the strongest
to grind. So we will close our eyes and grind.’ The Old Coyote
Woman said: ‘Very well.’”’ Then they all started to grind with all
their might. As the Old Coyote Woman was grinding with all her
might, the Jackrabbit and the Bluejay hit her on the head with
their handstones, as she was grinding in the middle, and killed her.
So that is the reason that people grind.
Tue Oxtp Coyote AND THE THREE GOURDS
Long ago three Gourds were living at Kepui. Once they came out
of their hole to bask. As they sat basking, Old Coyote also came
out of his hole to bask just opposite. ‘‘Let us call the Old Coyote
names; if he should come after us, we will flee into our hole,” said
the Gourds. So they started to call Old Coyote names, from where
they were basking. ‘‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-
out moccasins, pitch mouth!” As the Old Coyote heard the Gourds
from where he was basking, he said to them: “If you keep calling
me names I will go over there and bite every one of you.” ‘Old
382 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES (ETH. ANN. 43
pohasiypulatiuetci.”” Howenko Koloone Toxwialole ’amatalapiatcia-
me. ‘‘Toxwialole, tedtiatone, ketle pamo, kwelame!” Koloone
pa ’ommiahu. Mentcoho Toxwialote ’alaiteakwen wa Koloone
*itun’epuppiu xomme. Mentcoho Koloone ’iuphalpiu ’ixwittson.
Tcexamen Toxwialote phalma maxwelsai. Nawelmen mentcoho
wen Kolone kou. “Po payo ‘Toxwiatote, tcdtiaténe, kettle pamoa,
kwelamo ’ ta’9mmiamen?”’ Kodlone Toxwialote pa tei’alia. ‘Yin
nathatai’epa,’”’ Kolone tohu. Ho tomehen madwin’ophui.
Toxwialole nawelmen thapa wen Kolone keu. ‘Po payo ‘toxwia-
tole, tcdtatdne, polle pamo, kwelamo’ ta’ommiame?” Toxwiatote
Kolone tei’al. ‘‘Yin nanatai’epa,”’ Kdlone tohu. Ho tomen maxwin-
*ophui.
Toxwialole nawelmen phulian Kolone phalma taipu’e kou. ‘‘Po
payo ‘toxwiatole, teatiatone, katte pamo, kwelamo’ ta’ommiamen?”
Toxwiatote Kolone tei’al. ‘‘Yin nathatai’epa,’ Kodlone tohu. Ho
tomen maxwin’ophul.
Toxwialole wéwe nawelmen hiuene Kodlohui mo’e than. ‘Po
payo ‘toxwiatole, tcatiatone, kette pamo, kwelamo ’ ta’9mmiamen?”’
hiuene tei’alia Toxwialole pa. Hiuene ’awdtai’epa he waitomen kui.
Wewe Toxwiatote pa hiuene tci’alia: ‘‘Po payo ‘toxwiatole, tcatiatone,
kolte pamo, kwelamo’ ta’ommiamen?” Hiuene hele ’awatai’epa
he waitomen kui. ‘“‘He miya’ome’an yonthata ’asiuputatiuetci,”
Toxwialole hiuene ’omehu. Howen hiuene he waitomen kui.
Toxwialole tedtcuwa’a tcitei tahen tci’alia. Hatta he watome’epa
Toxwiatole ’atakwen mentcoho hiuene Kdlohui ’anamia’apu’e Hue.
Mentcoho ’opohawithou. Tcitha lew’a wihel se’e’aihen thappiu me.
Hoheyo teexamen toxwia’ene ’ipiyakdlotiueke.
Tur CRICKET AND THE CoyoTE
Nakuthe nakutheke tcexamen hukwe Kan’in’ai! Paitcelkone
tho. Han Toxwiane Teiuxwetho’ai? the. Wen tho Toxwiane
wétan tohu: ‘“Xomma teatthoi hukwe Kd@n’inpiu he _ taiteiwa-
metci, xomma hele’a tciho tisothatci.”
1 Meaning ‘“‘at the Buffalo Tracks.”
* Meaning ‘‘at Eagle Tail Pile.”’
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 383
Coyote, unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-out moccasins, pitch mouth!”
said the Gourds. “Shut up! If you keep calling me that, I will go
over there and bite every one of you.’’ But the Gourds would not
listen to Old Coyote. ‘‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-
out moccasins, pitch mouth!”’ said the Gourds to him. Finally the
Old Coyote got real mad and went after them where they were
basking. Then the Gourds fled into their hole.
Then the Old Coyote began to dig into the hole. As he dug he
reached one of the Gourds. ‘‘Who was it that called me ‘Old Coyote,
unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-out moccasins, pitch mouth?’’’ the
Old Coyote asked the Gourd. ‘One that is below,” said the Gourd.
As he said thus, away he fled.
As the Old Coyote dug he reached another Gourd. ‘‘Who was it
that called me ‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-out moc-
casins, pitch mouth?’’’ the Old Coyote asked the Gourd. ‘One
that is below,’ said the Gourd. As he said thus, away he fled.
As the Old Coyote dug he reached the last Gourd that was in the
hole. ‘‘Who was it that called me ‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful hunter,
wet worn-out moccasins, pitch mouth?’” the Old Coyote asked
the Gourd. ‘One that is below,” said the Gourd. As he said thus,
away he fled.
The Old Coyote, again digging, found a stone that looked like a
Gourd. ‘‘Who was it that called me ‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful
hunter, wet worn-out moccasins, pitch mouth?’” the Old Coyote
asked the stone. As the stone had no life in it, it lay without speak-
ing. Again the Old Coyote asked the stone: ‘‘Who was it that
called me ‘Old Coyote, unsuccessful hunter, wet worn-out mocca-
sins, pitch mouth?’’”’ As the stone had no life in it, it lay without
speaking. ‘Why do you not answer me? I will bite you here on
the spot,” said the Old Coyote to the stone. But the stone lay there
and said nothing. The Old Coyote asked the same question several
times. As it could not answer, the Old Coyote grew angry and bit
the stone, thinking it was a Gourd. He then broke all his teeth.
He sat there a while, crying from the ache of his teeth, and went
home.
So this is the reason that the coyotes do not bite gourds any more.
Tue CrIcKET AND THE COYOTE
Once upon a time the Cricket dwelt southeast at Kan’in’ai and the
Coyote dwelt at Tcuxwetho’ai. One day the Coyote said to him-
self: ‘I think to-day I will go for a walk down southeast to Kan-
’in’ai to see what I can find there.”
384 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
Thokke hiaulotta ’othekkalehen mentcoho hukwe Ka@n’inpiu
me. KGn’jn’ai wain’aixen mentcoho Paitcelkone piwaitha tukkuitha
wan. Tcihokwil tegmen mentcoho Paitcelko’itsetco. Paitcelkone
pa Toxwiane ’ommia: ‘““Hexeyo ’e kowato’amme?” Hatta
Toxwiane tohu: ‘‘Na ho ’itaimoyo’e piyatai’anke.” ‘‘Taxuiho,”’
Paitcelkone tohu, “kanhoi’antei xui xomma@ teutei’a ’ansolaitai-
kwiwil.”” ‘‘Hoxui,’’ Toxwiane Paitcelko’o9me, ‘‘thennayo xui
yona’ai pd’ai kimaso’dtcotci.” ‘‘Taxui,’ Paitcelkone tohu,
“thonnayo wéwe kansomotci.”” Mentcoho Toxwiane thommakwil
me.
Tcitoi nowiane Paitcelkone ’antaiwia’e ’ixwia’an. Kakkaphoyone,
Pimele’ene, Tsolmolene thapa hele wel Pimele’ene *iukiwasia’e
*ipohaxwia’an. Thapa Toxwiane hota men tahu. Tcitei nowiane
nakwetai’ene yin Pin’au ‘itho’e Kal’ene, Xentane, Xentselane,
Ksone hat tciu wel homaxotdai’ene *iyaiwiatta *ixwia’an.
Thospiaken ’othol’owalemen Toxwiane ’antaiwanhu. 7*Ipohak-
kwanphal’aiten ’V’omehu: “’(nantaiwia’e, yin hukwe Kan’in’ai
huxen tatoiwatcimen’au Paitcelkone pa _ tahoi’amia. Hokeyo
teattho1 mapixwia’anhu.” ‘‘Hoxui,’”’ xa wel homaxone ‘itohu,
“teatthoiyo Paitcelkone ’anasokdtcatci.’”’ Ho’aiten Toxwiane
matsometaketen Kda@n’inpiu ime.
Pa’an *iwan’aiten Toxwiane tohu: “Halo yohui maixiawiawen
xomma na Paitcelkone tapoteahe.” Mentcoho patiaukwepa tcan.
Paitcelkone thon’ai wan’aihen, Paitcelkone xiawia hatta. ‘“’(xia-
mo?” Toxwiane Paitcelko’ome. ‘‘Hatta tamo,”’ Paitcelkone
tohu; yohuyo xui kqlaitaikwiwil’e ’q’eltcanetci.” ‘‘Hoxui,” Toxwia-
ne tomehen Paliaukwepa ’antaixiataitha wéwe tcan. ‘‘Taxui
han,” Toxwiane ’itai’ome, ‘‘nayo xui tatsontcantci, xomma tcohe
’annasoputci.’”’? Mentcoho tean. Paitcelkone then’ai wan’aiten.
Paitcelkone pa ’anpohapiimele’salhemmia. Tcexamen pimeliahu,
tceta, talo’au, amo’au, tumo’au. Wel ’iliwemen howenko wi hele
?owatantiame. Pda’ai wdn’aixen mapa’dphui manqa’opemen, wéwe
?owolemen’ai ptimele’ene pa ptimeliamen hétcuwen ’antaixia’en’ai
wan. Xa tohu: “Hele Paitcelkone ’antaiwia’e ndthia’aiyo ’ixol-
kanpisi.
“Taxui, xomma nayo tean tametci,’ Xenlane tohu. Mentcoho
me. Paitcelkone then’au wakko wéwe Paitcelkone ’iptimele’alheme.
Thapa Toxwiane wai ’amiaputta pimeliahu, tce’au, tate’au, tamo’au,
tumg’au. Xenlane wel ’itiwemen wel mampa ’imgtemen wa papiu
toliamehu. Pa’an wdn’aiten manq’opehu. Patate wai teannia-
menta Pimele’ene pa pimeliahu. Pdanate ’owoleten wa ’antaixia-
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 385
Early in the morning he ate his breakfast and then went to Kan-
*in’ai. Then arriving at Kan’in’ai he came to where the Cricket was
lying basking beside the road. As he passed there, he stepped on
the Cricket. The Cricket said to the Coyote: ‘‘Why do you not
speak?” The Coyote said: ‘‘I do not speak to such looking people
as that.’ ‘Very well,” said the Cricket, ‘‘we will make a bet then
to see whose people are the strongest.’ ‘‘ Very well,” said the Coyote
to the Cricket, ‘‘we will meet to-morrow then down by the river.”
“Very well,” said the Cricket, ‘‘we shall see each other again to-
morrow.” Then the Coyote went home.
That night the Cricket called his people. All the Bumble Bees,
White-striped Bees, Honey Bees, and other winged stingers he
called. And the Coyote was doing the same. That night he called
all the four-footed animals that live in the mountains—the Wolves,
the Mountain lions, the Wildeats, the Bears, and other beasts of
prey that there are.
The next day as the sun was rising the Coyote’s people began to
come. After all of them had arrived he said to them: ‘My people,
over southeast at Kan’in’ai, where I went for a walk yesterday, the
Cricket asked me to bet. That is why I am calling you to-day.”
“Very well,” said the other beasts of prey, “‘we will show the Cricket
to-day.” Then the Coyote started ahead of the rest, and they went
to Kan’in’ai.
When they came to the Picuris River, the Coyote said: ‘‘ Wait
here. I am going across the river to see the Cricket.”’ He then
went across the river. Arriving at the Cricket’s home, the Cricket
was already waiting for him. ‘‘Are you ready?” said the Coyote
to the Cricket. ‘Yes, I am ready,” said the Cricket; ‘“‘you are to
send your best man here.”’ ‘‘Very well,” said the Coyote, and then
went back across the river to where his people were waiting. ‘‘ Very
well,” said the Coyote to his people, ‘‘I will go over first, to see what
is going to happen to me.”? Then he went across. When he arrived
at the Cricket’s home, the Cricket turned all the Bees loose on him.
He was stung by the Bees in his eyes, ears, mouth, and all over his
body. He bit some of them, but that did not help him any. When
he came to the river he plunged into the water and dived, but when
he emerged the Bees stung him again. At last he arrived where his
people were waiting, and said: ‘‘The Cricket’s people are well sup-
plied with weapons.”
“Very well, I will go this time,” said the Mountain lion. Then he
went. When he arrived at the home of the Cricket, all the Bees
were turned loose again. He was stung the way the Coyote had been,
in the eyes, ears, mouth, and all over his body. The Mountain lion
bit some of them and hit others with his paws, and ran toward the
river. When he arrived at the river, he plunged in. When he
386 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
*empiu me, hele ’itai’9mehu: ‘’Qnataiwia’e, men Paitcelkone payo
’tlemmia. ’Ewenng ’antaitaikwiwil. Hiapa na wihitcun ’onowi-
wisian, wihitcun ’onowimatcelsian, Pimele’ene pa tleutiya’amia.
Hokeyo hatta, ’anantaiwia’e, mathoppiu mametci. Wa Pimele’ene
ithon’au mamepe. Hokeyo wa mathoppiu mapohametci.” Ho
Xenlane pa ’i’9emmiamehen pohan nakwetai’ene ’ithappiu ’ime.
Hokeyo tcexamen pimele’ene ’iuptimelehal.
Kaxweki.
HARRINGTON] CHILDREN’S STORIES 387
emerged from the water the Bees stung him again. When he came
out of the water he went to where his people were waiting and said
to his people: ‘“‘My people, the Cricket has defeated us. His people
are stronger. Although I have many teeth, although I have many
claws, I did not last very long among the Bees. And so now, my
people, you must all go to your homes. Do not go over to where the
Bees live. You must go to your homes.” As the Mountain lion
told them thus, they all went to their homes.
And this is why it hurts when bees sting you.
You have a tail.
FOLKWAYS
Birtu Customs
Tathate Huene ’o’dsai teutesi ’d’one ’antitewia’epayo xqimiahu.
Xaimiamentha yon ’6’one ’anxawiatha ’amate’otsikiahu. Haihenno
’akiane kuimayo kitciahu. T’ine tsolwen mo’eyo ’6’owaima kiitciahu.
Yontei ‘ine yo ’d’one ’akiawia pdtcuwettetholonmaxe. Liuene
’o’dsai’aite patcuwentethaloyo miyaxwiweme, ’a’d’ophillo kui. Tcitoi
nana’e pdlum’ene henno sohu thapa kdlene ’ewen wétan ’onapia-
teiahu.
Hatta pdtceuwentetholo nawdn tiuene kuithate maxwiwehu haihen
makoparaihenno ’d’okolehen Thopiapikkotha! pakemehu. Thoppu-
lehuimen teiho xiatcone ’imeketcikke teitha, wan’aihen ’onamelemen
’a’0’otha’emiauke. ’Clixen ’d’one ’opeyone wia’an’an kiane telke,
paltake han wel tiuene tala’ene ’take’eyo ’onamelehu. ’Cixen
autcone wia’an’an yawiake, teake, wilke haw wel sanene tala’ene
itake’eyo ’onameliahu. Haihenno kiane wéwe theppiu mehu.
Hanko “tine ’6’one waipa ’akiakuipu’e ’axatcihen ’apotiahu. Hatta
ha’an “tine ’0’one thate wakiawia han; ha’an Huene ’6’one siatciapu-
eyo wikiane wia.
Hoyo Tosthate Huene ’innq’osiamo.
Deatu Customs
Tosthate tai’ene ’ihalpianna taikdane payo ’ik@mia’a. Howen
tean taikdane tetin’aken ’iyaitakepun tcan *iyatame, teépaihiakaane
tai’ene’au “iaiwan’aite. Howenko wan tcutannen halo taik@ane
‘inatu’am’a. Tothate tai’ene pohan 7ipépako 7ilaihalpianna
*ipiuhewai ’innamia’an wa Kthanetha ‘iutapiakaxwia’slhui’aihenno
hatta ftdpiakane taihollene ’anathokittha wan’aihenno taihollene
hele holt@pu’e tapiakane ’omehu. Howenko halo hol thapa wel
tav’ene pa ’okatecdpiatciahu, ’aixen watcike. Hatta piumentha
thahe wipiuphal teuta ’inathiapunna wel tai’ene pa ’onaphi-
piatciahen manna ’onawitciahen hatta ’anphonpa’ekitciahen yon
tsona haihenno ’anpiuteapiatciahu. ’Ix@e ‘“pikuitcaamo.”
Yompoi tcdamo ’ampiatciahu wa tonon ’ipdsiatciathoppiu tholene
kemmempiu pine pa hitciatcikke.
' Thspiapinene, ‘‘ Morning Mountain.”
388
FOLKWAYS
Birra Cusroms
When a woman of Picuris bears a child whoever cuts the child’s
navel cord names the child. While the child is being named, a string
is tied to its wrist. And then it is laid where its mother is lying.
An ear of yellow corn is laid beside the child. This ear of corn
becomes the child’s mother for 30 days. The woman does not get
up for 30 days after she gives birth to the child, but lies along with
her child. And during this time she drinks only warm water, and
food is made for her apart.
At the end of the 30 days the woman gets up from her lying and
dresses up nicely and makes an excursion to the top of Thopiapittha.
She takes along sacred meal to give to the fetishes there, and arriving
there she prays for her child. If the child is a girl, the mother prays
that she may grind, cook, and do well the other kinds of work that
women do. And if the child is a boy, she prays that he may be
brave, a hunter, a runner, and do well the other kinds of work that
men do. Then the mother goes back to her house. And then the
ear of corn which lay as a mother by the side of the child is taken out
of there and thrown away. From then on the ear of corn is no longer
the child’s mother; from then on the woman who bore the child is
the real mother.
Thus the Picuris women bear children.
DeratH Customs
When the people of the Pueblo are sick they are doctored by
native medicine men. Nowadays the Indian medicine men are
not as active as they used to be long ago, since the white doctors
have come more among the people. But at times the Indian
medicine men still perform their ceremonies. Since the people of
the Pueblo are ail Christians, if they should get very sick and think
that they are going to die, they usually send for the priest at Penasco;
and when the priest arrives at the home of the sick person, the sick
person confesses to the priest. But still some of the Indians sing
their medicine songs to a sick person for his recovery. When a
person is dying, or even already dead, or whenever they can get
around to it, the people make a plumero for him, giving it into his
hands, and put a strip of black mica on his face, and then a death
song is sung to him. It is called ‘‘making the road song.” This
song is sung to him so that the road will lead him southwest toward
where the sun sets.
389
390. PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [eTH. ANN. 43
Tcipei piutecdamo ’ankemmiahenno pétha kitciahenno paso-
teaipiahu. ‘Tdai’ene wennen ti’oma ’ippatai’aihen wésen maxo’ene
jupdtaimen haihen piuene ’anldmowiama ’ipdtoltaimen, wepannen
iyaitaimenta tcinne wel pdxwine ‘iupiahu yin Td’au ’onaipissian
mo’au ’osia’e. Piuene lamona ’aipdsiatciamenta padxwine wennen
juxdyamen 7itomen: ‘‘Tcihote paxwinate pdane ’asoi!’”’ Pohan
tai’ene tcita ’i’e’epa sotcaipiahen thapa panapittha kitciahenno
pépdane ’innaiwianngo tcitha matcowiahu. Panapittha nowian
kui waikui wétcepatayo ’okayaphiaphaihu. Pohan ’antaiwia’e
9°99 ono
senliuphil teita ’i’e’e ’ipépatcatahu nokwil.
Hatta thspiaken kahitciamen yon waima ’othoxotsikkiahu, hele
teutai kalhokkepu’e. Tcan’ehan halo kuithate wa ’elwiatta wen
sonene he ’Gdmo’e ’ohophil’aihen tson’aihen hatta kuiputthate koliamen
tcitai sonene ’ohophillo wa piuene kuiputtha kén’aukwil natcilemewai
na’ammen titcetcatamen suiten ’owolehu. Tcihuite tonon tcoho
wésen mila’a naponhuihu wa tholkemmempiu. Tothate fai’ene
’inahowehu xa wa tonon tholkemmempiu wo tai’ene ’ipiu’e ’ithomehu.
Yontei tiene ’inaxa piuponene. Tcitai sonene napiuponhuipu’e
witthaloyo ’athen’aute hou’au ’owawolemen ’anathiame’an. Thapa
piuene ’aliahen pohan fai’ene ’dtciu piuene kuitha ’itson’e paikwiu
’itukamehu.
Tcihuite tcune ’imiaume’e wa piuene thattha wittholoyo ’i’e.
Piuene ’alaimo’e tiulane thahe lolene’a thahe tcinne ’amawia’an
tcutei ’alaimo’eyo wa piutha malgihu. Tcithate wittholoyo miya-
weneme. Witthalayo tcitha ’’e. Tholane ’iwakaletta ’ipdlasetahu,
Han nowian tcitai piuthate ’imatcime wel tcune hele yin natcopu’e
’innapupu’eyo ’imatcihu. Hokeyo ’innapiamenng han *itgmen he
napupuwaihen ’i’e. Hatta witthole napipune teitei nOWwiane tai’ene
’inaihowemen piuene modsatonate ’owolehu, haihen wa_ tongn
tholkemmempiu pasiatciane ’ithoppiu mehu. Howen piu’aite wittho-
loyo mé@satoma xa ’etci. Hatta pannutholo napuimen thekke
’otholwolementa watai ssnene napiuponhoipu’e ’anwalkowian tson-
‘aihenno. Tecinne tai’ene ’iwalpapholiahu tcitei sonene ’1’9memen:
“anantaiwia’e, yontei piuene hatta pdasiatciane “ithoppiu me.
Hokeyo he mapinepo. Manakowianng matheppiu mametci. Haihen
HARRINGTON] FOLKWAYS 391
When they finish singing this song to him, he is laid face up and
is told to drink water. The people one at a time pour water into a
pottery dish, dipping two fingers in, and then put a few drops at a
time into the dead person’s mouth, each time representing different
springs of the mountains about the Pueblo. As the water is put
into the dead person’s mouth, they name one spring each time,
saying: “Drink from such and such a spring!” After all the people
who are present there have told him to drink the water, he is then
laid, face up, in the middle of the floor, and is left there according
to the custom of the Catholics. As the person lies during the night
in the middle of the floor, candles are lighted on both sides of where
he is lying. All of his relatives, men and women, that are there,
sing Christian hymns all through the night.
And the next morning as he is taken out for burial, a bag of lunch
is tied on his side, of the food that he used to like. Then, before he
is carried from where he is lying, a man who is no kin to him comes
in with cedar sprigs, and as the dead person is taken from where he
is lying, the man with the cedar sprigs pretends that he is sweeping
out death, singing a sacred song softly as he goes outside. From
there he goes southwest for about 2 miles to throw death away toward
where the sun sets. The people of the Pueblo believe that all the
people who die go southwest, toward where the sun sets, to live.
This ceremony is called the throwing away of death. The man
that threw death away is not supposed to go out very far from his
house, if he can help it, for four days. After the dead person has
been buried, all the people, with children and all who have been in
where the dead person was lying, are to go down to the river to
bathe.
After that, those who wish may stay at the dead person’s house
for the next four days. The dead person’s nearest relative, wife or
husband, or if he has not either, his next nearest, sits at the place
where he died. From there he or she does not get up for four days.
They remain there for four days. In the evening, before they eat
their supper, they all pray together. And in the evening they do
not talk about the person who has just died, but of what has hap-
pened to them in the past. So they sit around and talk as if nothing
had happened. According to the belief of the people, the dead goes
out of the church on the evening of the fourth day, and goes south-
west toward where the sun sets, where the home of the dead is.
For four days after dying it is supposed to remain in the church.
And early on the fifth day, as the sun is rising, the man who threw
death away comes back in with good medicine. And the people
are sprinkled with this medicine by the man, he saying to them:
“My people, this dead person has already gone to the home of the
dead. So you must not think any more about it. You must all go
to your houses with good feeling. And then you must lead a good
392 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
kowenng waane mghiitci.”’ Ho piuene ’antaiwia’e ’i’9mmiamehenng
’itheppiu kowen ’ipinemehu. Yontoiyo.
Tothate tai’ene ‘innawia wem’a “ittaipiu’an.
Toxens or Dratu
Teiin’aken halo ’antanlolene kokwewiaken wepa yin teoho Namolo-
pu’au ’ewen haw wésen sonene hiaulon halo natsepathemen pilamon
’imemen yin paxeldaxottsen’an. Yin péken’aitennoe phiatsethalputenno
yin teopun. Hanko wen sonene topun: ‘ Hénen ’annapimmiamekoho
yintoi paxeline yokwe kitcg.”’ Teoho wempa’a napuimen tcitoi
sonene piu’an.
Wepa ’antaniotene ’an tapuipe pilamon ’an’ehe halo tsetholkemmen
phepa’s’ame wa tonoipe kotewen ‘ikui’an. ’Cntantolene tcitai
imonko ta’9mmian: ‘“Halan ponen Tothate faipiuheko ho yimpoi
*iphepa’skui.”” Thapa wempa napuimenno wen Todthate fai’ene
piu’an.
Thapa Tathate tai’ene phal’au ’itciutcotsen’an’an ’ito’anen xa
nako, xa hénenng tcita thona ’ithe’e wen’a ’anapuhe. Hokeyo tai’ene
hele teutsi tciutcone phalta ’itsen’an’an ’itecaxou’amiahu ’ito’a.
Wepa teotcupel nanan halo tciakia’ohen tawiaken wa kithenna
tciutcone tsen’an. Tcitei tciutcone tea@’ang ’anpéwia’an thapa
lamo’emo ’antili’an, tuna tciakia’ohen han xwe’ene follon’ohen
wia’an. Kithonna tholtson ’itcelehenne ’iphiakui’an. Tcihuite wiho
towen nanqpu ’antantotene piupu’e.
A MIsInTERPRETED NoTE
Xuniupane ’otsonthatsen pélene wen tetalo’aihen wéwe win halan
nanq’an howen kdowen ’annahuikatca wa Totha halo tapoone Halpa-
nate! ’iyawammen mentcoho Tothate taponapewene wepa wen
sonene ’atalatatci’e yin ’okan’au miaumen hele tawiane ’anats-
*opiatcia. Haihen ’ana’olhitcia wem’a topone pa. Lawiane ’anato’-
owitcia, thapa ’owatapo wi ’owatopia nipe’epa mentcoho wen sonene
*otdponadpewai ’anamia’apu’e ’anatohiitcia xomma nathatcikke
xomma he natome’e. Tdane sonene namotci’e ’anakdlian. Thapa
*owahuitdponipe’epa tasne namophalehen lawiane ’9mehu: ‘’Oyo
tdponapewene ’anata’otohu, xa thenna pehan kiatamene Halpana
7in’dtopa’e’e wa ’Embudo wa _ tcipilaitha hele xa yothate ’d’one
Halpana ’itspo’e’e thenna pin’auken teipi taitha *iwadnheko ’ixai-
foutei.”’ Ho lawiane yontai sonene pa ’ommiamehen ’athoppiu me-
1 Halpaane (‘‘Shell Water’’), (1) Santa Fe Creek, (2) Santa Fe City.
HARRINGTON] FOLKWAYS 393
life.” As the dead person’s people are told thus, they all go to their
houses with good feeling.
This is the custom of the people of the Pueblo when one of their
people dies.
Tokens or Deatu
Long ago when my grandfather was yet young, once he and two
other men were going along the road near Nambé early in the morning
just before it got daylight. And there was a shooting star. It
passed over their heads, sparkling. Then one of the men said:
“Something wrong must be thought of me as the star has passed
right over our heads.” Then in about one month this man died.
Once my grandfather and I were coming from the northeast along
the road just before the sun set, and there was a straight strip of
cloud lying to the southwest. When my grandfather saw this he
said to me: ‘Perhaps somebody from the Pueblo is going to die;
and that is the reason that the strip of cloud is lying there.’”’ And
in one month a person from the Pueblo died.
Also the people say at the Pueblo that when a bird flies into a
house it is bad, that something is going to happen to one of the
members of the house which the bird goes into. So the people say
that whenever a bird enters their house it is a bad token. Once
many years ago, when I was still small, a bird flew into our house.
This bird had a very big head, and also a very long beak, a small
body, and a short tail. When it flew into our house we caught it
and burned it up. And it was not very long after that that my
grandfather died.
A MISINTERPRETED Note
I believe it was in the month of June, in the year 1904, but do
not remember well, that at the Pueblo when the children had not
yet returned from Santa Fe, the teacher at Picuris wanted the men
to work for her in her garden, and so she wrote a note to the gover-
nor. And the note was sent to him by one of the pupils. The note
was handed to the governor, and as he could neither read nor write,
he took the note to a man who thought he was able to read it, to
find out what the note said. The note was brought to the man by
whom it was to be read. Since he did not hardly know how to read,
after he got through glancing over the note he said to the governor:
“This is how the teacher’s note says, that you are to inform all the
parents whose children are in school at Santa Fe to go down to the
station at Embudo to get them, for the children who are in Santa
Fe are to arrive at the station to-morrow noon.’”’ The governor,
being told thus by this man, went back to his house and went up
on top of the roof and shouted announcement, as it is the custom of
people at the Pueblo to do when anything is going to happen or any-
19078°—28——26
394 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
‘aihen kdtcata wilehen malawia’an, Tsthate fai’ene ’inaiwian hénen
napuhenna thahe hénen ’itahenna. Matawia’ammen fai’ene ’1’ome-
men teune Halpdna ’in’6tapo’e’e tcipitaina wa ’Embudona ’i’dxai-
foutci’e. Tai’ene Tothate ’italiakenna kiatamene ’imaxia’anhu.
Thopiaken wa tcipilaina ’ixialou. Teco wétcote mila’aihen nana-
’epa wiho ’inakwattepu. Wa tcipitaina tcita tey’a ’ixia’en tcipine
wan, howen topoone teitai tcipina ’iyawan. Haihen kiatamene
pinephil wéwe Topiu ’imamile. Hantca’a, tai’ene, hoyo wanfpene
pa ’anqitalapiatciatei.
HuntTInG THE Horses
Totha tawanta ftai’ene *iukaphalehen wel ’imiaume’e hipupa
pimmakwil ’ipikdwayo’sl’a, ’ittipiatcikke tciho pin’au tékdtco’e
ikalmen. Tcihoyo pelmo’au hota ’inmatcetcihu. Hatta naphatco-
wammen tdi’ene pin’au ’inkdwayotcimme’e ’ixaiwile’a ’iunakalhaimen
*ipitala’antcikke.
Yontoi men nanq’eyo na wenphatco wen ’ampiiene’an kananka-
wayotho’e ’annowilen. Pin’au ’antcimen kanahuithoxo’ole’epa
thoxone kannahdnen ’ampiiene tithdxoxai’allawen wa Totha.
Thoxoxaitow’aiten na pdtcuthaleyo yin fin’au ’otcune tcalwen
’o’dmoyo’e tapdximemen takalmen tatho’an. Hepuxennen tilakwe-
homen ’anatGwewia’epa. ’(npiiene ’onathdxo’olen’aite pdtcuthoale
napuimenne ’apankadwayothan’an. Haihenno kananthoppiu ’apanto-
wen.
RATTLESNAKES
Tstha pin’au petcone hele ’iyathe. Howenko pa’au taulosian’au
pisiwenno ‘ithe. Na ’anndkateadtculéman pétcone tciho ’itho’e,
halan na tapine wentenhenno ’imoyo’e ’itho.
Wel tai’ene Toatha 7ito’a xa pelta patholianna “’iwaliweke.
Howen ’annakatca@wina nanqa’e wenpel thdtane teutei tatalian
how au paitcelkohui ’anapo’e. Hanko wem’a ’ampiiene titci’an’an
hele’a ’anasopo’an. Hanko ta’ommian xa pé@tconeyo ’anapo’an.
He tomepu’e tanahowemen ta’ommian: “’Qnahdweme’an wipaita
wa ’anapontha ’anpometci.”’ Hanko ’anme’an. Teitha ’anwdn-
’aitenno patholia’epa petcone hiuphallake’ai maxilkui’an. Pinna
kwilpa ’annatsauwateane’aihen tcitei tsauwane nawayomen tco
wesen mila’ayo nataliamen. Thapa ’ampiiene pa ta’o9mmian xa
itaikwolwia’e ’ipiwia’a. Hanko tanathan’an xa pé@tcone wétce-
kwillo ’iunatsauwapolho’anen, ’atala’amiatcikke kuipu’au ’awan-
me’an han *ipikwoltaiwiatcikke.
HARRINGTON] FOLKWAYS 395
thing has been done. So he shouted announcement, telling the
parents whose children are in school at Santa Fe to go down to
the station at Embudo to get their children. When the people of
the Pueblo heard that, the parents began to get ready.
And the next morning they went down to the station to wait.
As the distance is only about 20 miles it did not take them so long
to reach there. They waited at the station and the train arrived,
but the school children did not come on that train. The parents
returned to the Pueblo again, disappointed. And so, people, that
is how an uneducated person will make trouble for us.
Huntine THE Horses
In the springtime at Picuris when the people are through planting
some of them take their horses to the mountains so that they can get
fat by eating good grass in the mountains. There they turn them
loose allsummer. And when fall approaches those Indians that have
their horses in the mountains go there to get them so that they can
work them when they are harvesting.
It was on one of these occasions that a friend of mine and I went
up to look for our horses. While we were up in the mountains we
ate up all our lunch, as we did not take very much; and I sent my
friend down to the Pueblo for more lunch. When he went down to
get lunch I lived for three days up in the mountains just by boiling
and eating some of the green herbs that grow there. Once in a while
I would kill a squirrel with my gun. It was about three days after
my friend brought more lunch that we found our horses. Then we
took them down home again.
RATTLESNAKES
At Picuris there are no rattlesnakes in the mountains. But many
of them live on the plains where there are many taulone bushes. I
do not know how many different kinds of rattlesnakes live there,
but believe there is only one kind.
Some of the Indians at the Pueblo say that the rattlesnakes do
not bite in the summer when the moon shines. But I do know this
for sure: One summer evening I heard something at a distance which
sounded like a cricket. Then I asked one of my friends what it was
that made that noise. Then he told me that it was a rattlesnake
that made that noise. I did not believe what he said, and then he
told me: ‘If you do not believe what I say, we will go together to
where the sound comes from and see.”” Then we went. As we
reached there, with the moon shining, the snake lay coiled on a flat
rock. Its rattle stuck up in the center, and when it shook the
rattle it could be heard for about 2 miles away. My friend told
me that this is how they call their mates. That time I discovered
that the snake can use its rattle in two ways, to warn you when you
get too near where it is lying, and also to call its mate.
396 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIFS [eTH. ANN. 43
Tue BurraLors
Tothate fai’ene tein’akken wa Tuiputha pa’au ’ikattcomeke’an
kanene hanken pisiwen tciho ’ithe’epa. Wihalo ha’an ’ampapatotene
kokwewiakenwenno kdnene Idiheyo ‘ithoke’an. ’Qnnaisowikdtca
toke’e xa pin’au wai tausianno Tuiputha pa@’au ’ikakin ’imon’agn.
Naitame wiho tewoten teinne pathdene teokwil ’ime’e. Halan
tduene ’onatsokkennayo pohan ’iphalian.
Tai’ene *ito’a xa kanene fpin’au witcun’anwenno “iyathepu, wa
pa@au kdsehui *iekalmehenno ’ithoke’an. Halan hokeyo kdene
yin palapapu’au “iyathowapu.
Hatta tean kaxxaiene ’owahuiwia wi kanmaqi’ene wen thohe hele
kanene thate ’onawiapu’e. Piasaiyo hatta teinne xen ’onapaiphalhu.
Tein’anken ftai’ene *ikapphdlemen 7iuxai’ekepu’e thahe titce’au
‘jupalhokepu’e thahe thaphalta pdna’au ’iuptkeliakepu’e hatta tean
tetutenno napona.
Tue “Our FatuHer”’
Kitamene papetha ’e’e, titcewenno xa kaxamotci. Kalawiathowia’e
xa ’etci. Kiuthopaipakowia’e mails teathei. Hol’ene maunagpai’antei
wane “ihel’amiame’e pa tiunaipai’amen. Kinawamen’au miyataipo,
howen maiwatcanetci nakiannen’aute. [’Hyo hele kanglawiathowia
han kanathia’e han kanak6tci’e, tein’awen.] ’*Gmen.
HARRINGTON] FOLKWAYS 397
Tue BurraLors
The Picuris Indians used to go buffalo hunting among the plains
of Mora, as the buffaloes were then plentiful there. As late as the
time when my uncle was a young man, the buffaloes existed in great
abundance. I still remember him saying that he once saw them on
the plains of Mora as thick as the pinyon trees that grow in the moun-
tains. It seems strange that these animals should disappear so
quickly. I suppose after guns were introduced they were all killed off.
The Indians say that the buffaloes never lived in the mountains,
but they used to live on the plains, eating the grass there like cows.
I believe that this is the reason that the buffaloes never lived near
the Rio Grande.
Nowadays the buffalo hides are very scarce, and also the horns
of the buffalo and anything else pertaining to the buffalo. These,
also, are beginning to be forgotten. The hides which the Indians
used in former times to put over them when they danced the buffalo
dance, and those that they used in their ceremonial dances, and those
that they used to spread as mats on their floors, are nowadays
very rarely seen.
The following song was used by Sengerepove’énq (see p. 323) and
is still used by Picuris hunters for bringing deer by magical means
within shooting range.
NO. 11. DEER SUMMONING SONG
A
a = 152 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
Tis WS = eae ane
= pl2 s—_9—e—9 : | 9 —s—e—e =| | =P =|
7b? = jf Pause
Panes tf eas i
’Ea-tci ‘en-tei law - paw ’en- tei ’en- tei law - paw.
A
: “A” +s
b= 9 —~ =p a ss =i ————
wr: hed D @ o— 0 —_ 9 ba —e— + Pause
Sas Se Fe ce oc fe ee ee
‘En - tei ’en - tei law - paw ‘en -tei ’en - tei law- paw.
A:A: Dal :8:
Dips eS Sa a a
bp a oe == Sf st ie er Pause =]
Ds F SS SS SS SS See
‘En - tei ’en-tci law - paw ’en-tei ’en -tci law - paw.
TRANSLATION
The meaning is obscure with the exception of ’entci, he will come.
i-
Pt
oie Cn ATE
AV re Re ee
} TAA ol a ee
: ie lin Hina Yate loci! raids anturg 261 Ly asospy ra
Hiv fA VAY aps a art dTNNT Gat Up < a
Me oT ri) mee MUTE GT pee Satna ahd marhern a
yal oe
ide Fit irate ae ipl iokaent paid ab ect ae |p voile 2
7 UT ars i? _
Ginyu ty welae’ Hite” ry ol SAY in ef ab A oa .
ent | ihn NY aiid
eri eR aie iy ibid ATO i yeaa g
“hanial St Leute ye bee LAAT,
Pvt) Thee a) taloeas eoalt al let oath Cat
a TA petra Thaalj, od eee ay morte al baie
a sid vale
Pyaiahel ed abi rive wid
err)
staat saree “dt
love COG) San) Bad'h rolfveastt let wi ‘Tatalt iy nite, gical .
Tina
Mt acts ta Aadertiols palin ad wyhbaverthewbatey |
Lay asia
is
ae) TA Aah
cswahays wh oi erin ei nrare tin
‘ eam id ie Ship ate m» Tdi) ie) Cie - wat
f- a Sa
&
| rad » © 7
bs vO! ¢
Til i tte
ae wedo al tony mt eg: 7
mt ome
#. ay ish = ay wet FD THe pe! By oa
a Pat
a
: 4 Ee) ie: 2 a7 : Na which is
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 423
soon to come or it may be a case of sharpening the curve between
d> and f as No. 27 would indicate. At any rate it is another example
of a modified subdominant, which in No. 28 in relation to the ab imme-
diately following it becomes a tone which would be the mediant
with db as the tonic. The raised dp in the first measure of the C
phrase of No. 8 is probably a case of smoothing the downward curve;
the ds’s of the second measure again are a clear example of the
sharping tendency. In No. 27 the first note of the third measure
probably illustrates the smoothing process but the sharped c’s are
comparable to the d’s of No. 8, just discussed. The instability of the
principal tones of the scale affects judgment regarding the ephemeral
tones. I can only recommend a comparison of the songs, which will
give some idea of the difficulties of the problem.
No. 6 appears to be a more stable version of the song than No. 8
and its other renditions, 27 and 28. Here the tendency to acuate
cugves is evident throughout. It is clearer from No. 6 and its other
two renditions that the distinctions between major and minor thirds
which appear continually at different levels and in different situations
throughout the song is very difficult for this singer. The second
measure of No. 23, showing the depressed peak of the curve between
the two g’s, probably explains the cs’s of the first measure in Nos. 8
and 28.
In No. 5 (p. 353) the depressed eb in the third measure of the C
phrase appears to have been affected by the long series of lower
notes preceding it and the drop to the dp’s in the next measure. In
other words, the peak of true eb seems to have been gained with
difficulty and the tendency to attenuation of the curve is observed,
as also in the fourth measure of the B phrase. These two inter-
mediate pitches are therefore probably to be discounted as main
scale tones in the table where they appear as lowered g and lowered f.
Both of the sharped pitches in the final measure of the A phrases of
No. 21 (the other rendition of No. 5, p. 353) are probably due to
smoothing downward melodic curves.
Comparable to Group IJ, except that the principal tone occupies a
middle position just as in the songs of Group III, are the scales of
Group IV which are derived from Songs 3 and 4 and their other
renditions, Nos. 18, 19 and 20. They are more limited in tonal con-
tent than those of Group IT, although their range covers an octave.
The presence of eb as a prominent or structural tone forming a minor
third with the tonic, rather than the prominence of ef which would
create a major third, makes them minor, although the major third
is not entirely lost sight of, as its infrequent use proves. It is inter-
esting to observe the low beginnings of the songs the scales of which
form Group IV in contrast to the high initial notes in the songs of
Group III where the tonic also occupies a middle position in the scale.
424 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES (ETH, ANN. 43
The fifth group represents the scales of two songs, Nos. 9 and 11
(pp. 379, 397), and the other renditions of No. 9, Nos. 29 and 30
(pp. 442, 443), which are exceedingly limited in range. The longest
scale, that of No. 29, covers only a very little more than a perfect
fourth. These scales are quite different from all the others, aside
from their limited range, in that the tonic lies at the top of the range
and the songs begin with it but end on a tone a minor third below.
Another peculiarity is that the only prominent tone intervening
between the tonic and the minor third below it tends definitely to
be the minor seventh rather than the major seventh or leading tone,
although it is somewhat uncertain, as the cluster of minutely graded
pitches about it show. The one “altered”’ pitch in No. 9 is clearly
a slighting of the trough between the f’s, since ep would be the normal
tone here, as its presence elsewhere in the song indicates. This tone
is the slightly flat 6 in the table.
The sharp initial tone of No. 29 (p. 442) is harder to explain than
the flatter beginning of the second A phrase, which is likely due to
the pull of the two previous notes. The depressed e# in the last
measure of both A phrases is strictly comparable to the depressed e5
in No. 9 and in the table of scales is also represented as a slightly
flat b. In the next to the last measure of No. 29 the somewhat
lowered pitches may be anticipations of the approaching end and the
low closing tone. Practically all of No. 30, which in tonal content
consists mainly of the tonic, is sung sharp. The true f# is heard only
in the final measure of each A phrase and is probably true at these
points because of a downward pull of the melody in the midst of
which it forms a peak.
The limitations of No. 11 (p. 397) have already heen mentioned.
It is worth noting that the two identical measures of the second
A end with a slight rise in pitch, while the measures of the A’s pre-
ceding and following do not. This extra tone in the second A
phrase adds a third to the two principal tones of which the call is
chiefly composed and figures as 6) in the transposed scale of
the table.
To summarize briefly the situation as revealed by the scales, it is
seen that two classifications of scales may be made. One considers
the position of the principal tone in relation to its setting in the
tonal content of the song, and by this classification there are three
types of scales found, one exhibited in Groups I and II, another in
Groups III and IV, and a third in Group V._ The second classifica-
tion takes into consideration only the intervalic relationships of the
tones to one another and to the principal tone or tonic as a funda-
mental, and under this classification three main types of scales are
also derived. The first, regardless of the location of the tonal content
of the song above, below or around the tonic, is exhibited in Groups I
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 425
and III and is strongly major in tonality. The second is exhibited
in Groups II and IV and is strongly minor in tonality or a mixture
of major and minor in which the latter predominates. The third is
exemplified in Group V, and is neither major nor minor because of
the position of the tonic as the upper tone and the presence of what
stands in relation to it as a minor seventh. This variety of scales
prevents drawing any conclusion as to the prevailing scale for
Picuris myth songs, if such might be found to exist by examining a
large number of distinct songs. The most that can be said is that
both major and minor tonalities are known to the Picuris; that
the myth songs examined divide according to them in about equal
proportion; and that the intermediate pitches not infrequently occur-
ring between the diatonic steps of which both major and minor
scales are formed, are not, as far as the evidence points at present,
structurally important in the scale, but more or less ephemeral tones
in the songs. The presence of these ephemeral tones in most melodic
situations is to be accounted for by the direction in which the voice
is moving in upward or downward curves, controlled, it may be, by
certain psychological conditions in the two opposite tendencies of
smoothing and acuation, which for the most part do not manifest
themselves together in the course of a single song.
I have said nothing about the large curve which each melody
describes in its entirety, nor of the possibility of these large curves
proving a common basis by which to classify the songs as a group.
Unfortunately the limit of time imposed in preparing this analytical
discussion, so that it could accompany the first part of the paper
which was already in press, prevents further investigation of the
songs along other lines of analysis. The position of the beginning
and ending tones of the song in relation to the general levels as
shown in the tables make clear the point that the curves which the
melodies describe are radically different.
19078°—28 28
426 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES (ETH. ANN. 43
ADDITIONAL RENDITIONS
NO. 12. TRAVELING SONG OF THE ELF
A Transcription by Helen H. ees
BT NEES Ss
’
‘ai we-ta-la a ‘ai ~we-ta- la we-ta - la hoa-oa i
: c =F f= ; Sear SN f N ==
Bs a = o a = 3-6 ee See me
rf
y
li-u-l-u-ho-o we -ta-la we -ta-la hoa- va Ho -
ae | : — iB ==
= = + ~~ - + = Sh
Peete ly SS
Zz
li-u-li-u ha-he ‘a hea-2-a-ai ha-ne-ya ha-ne- ya’
f= 80 B
ae ~~ 4 ——e
= o oe 3 4-8 @ e—3 My
Se ee ee ae
au a’ Sg b
"Ai ’ai we-ta- la ’al ’ai we-ta-la we-ta-la hoa-aa Ho-
Q aq
aa aN Ss =P =R=E === fe ea
= 4 ; + — = ee]
Pe
ae oe CI tae b’
y.
li- u- li- u-ho-o we-ta- la we - ta - la hea -9a Ho-
, ,
22s Sb Saeed eS eee ase
Se SS a Pe Ss BSS NNN
ee ee Se er Co eet ee es Soeeae
Z
li-u-li-u ha-he ’a ‘ais Mee a ’ai ha-ne- ya ha-ne-ya
A eer Rn Ce
Sa NS = >
aaa = =P
at == es = ——s =" oS ==
a x S
Ai ’ai we - ta-la ‘ai ’ai we-ta-la we-ta-la hea - aa Ho-
=e SN iN = at aS
4 i aN
ae eee erento a
li-u-li-u-ha-he qa - a-a al ha-ne-ya ha-ne-ya.
ROBERTS| ANALYSIS OF SONGS 427
NO. 15
A Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
C80 eM B
: mn Ce- = =
Bees pe ea a ae.
{ - 7 -#—-— CES = 4
a’ -6-7-6-7-6-})
ho Noe ane = ~
Ai ai we-ta-la ai ’ai we-ta-la We -ta-la hoa-va He =
“4 A A
ete =p = 4] —
= gg at a a ——— a =
a 3° re
li- u-li - u- ho -o eerie We - ta-la hoa - 9a ae
A’
Tr _ . Te Ty.
a ae ————
Sais a Sas eae sH4a—R-8 hs
pep nieel: (oer eee erate
Zz
li-u-li-u ha-he’a hoa-o-a-ai Ha-ne-ya ha-ne-ya-a’ *Ai’ai
B’
¥
septs 2 a aoe AEST NR a
22g igezie ee ee eee Ate te Ses
7 a x’ -@- -o- = Bul b” @ La
We-ta-la - a ‘ai’ai we-ta-la We-ta-la hoa-eaaHo-li-u-li-u-
(e
Tete —— os E a1> =
saute =a E S
= $2 —o 5 ae == — oT — ee
oe 6-9 6 oe -& "py
oe -6y so
ho-o We-ta-la we-ta-la hoa -0a Ho -li- u-li-u
iar Sn ie ae
CEs peers (Sees eet oeeeet eee
Ce -
ha-he ‘a hoa-d-a-ai ha-ne-ya hane-ya-a ha-ne-ya.
428 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
NO. 14
A Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
d. ¢—80 (84 on repeat’ 4
— ant
i De Stas ee r ee ee eer
= 2 = (ae 3-f i eo @ == = Naat
2a ee ee E = =< ae
1. ’Ai ‘ai we-ta-la ‘ai ’ai we-ta-la We-ta-la haa-aa Ho-
2.’Ai ’ai we-ta-la ‘ai ‘ai we-ta-la We-ta-la hoa-aa Ho-
3. Ai ’ai we-ta-la ’ai ‘ai we-ta-la We-ta-la hea-sa Ho -
a— 84 Cc
[Pings iS = Se SS SS
es y? a ae =
li-u-li- u-ho-o we-ta-la We-ta - la hoa -ea Ho-
li-u-l-u-ho-o we-ta - la We-ta - la hea -0a Ho-
li- u-li- u-ho-o we-ta - la We-ia-la hoa - oa =
| 1 and2.| | 3.
SNSRGaN
Pats
Z
li-u-li-u ha-he ‘a
= Bee eee
hoa-o-a’ai ha-ne-ya ha-ne-ya-a.
li-u-li-u ha-he ’a hoa-o-a’ai ha-ne-ya ha-ne-ya -a.
li-u-li-u ha-he ’a hoa-o-a’ai ha-ne-ya
=
ha- ne-ya.
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 429
NO. 15. LOVE SONG OF THE ELF
IA
: Pranseription by Helen H. :
b. _— 76 ees woe to G¥ minor) Ease ae ae aan
x OMA
- 6 oe > oe
—— i ; N de. ==tN = + = @
7 s -——4 = i =e ELE 3 5 |
= 7
a ; :
Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e - rai - hyo - ’e - ro va -’e -he-’a ’e-rai-
B NK.
— Na} Ce ia = =5 reg = a
[D e- 9 = “ESS ee =| —e A} x} de eo
7—G vi y-% okt = a
hyo - ’e- ro Ya-’e - he - ’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-’e - ro ya -
defect in record
Ebi iee iene eae ee
7
c
’e- he - ’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-e-ro ’E - coe ‘ai- hyo wi - ro -
A’ a
5554 =a int ye" a e 3. hE N=
Ze ro oe =[=atawe atta == ele = ee =
S- Ty a’ = al al’
he - yo-o Ha - a-te-e pa-am - ’o - ne _ ha-
B’
SS = See SS i
Os aS Se ee ee ee ee er oa
at i ee
a-te-e pa-am-’o - ne Tea-a - kwil - ’a -
2S a Alte =e
— $=.
a =e ==
‘ee - ye 44 “ma - xu = 3 = ft « tce - e - tei 1b -
aa UN UN II A” e p A .
: =e Nt ait oes, °———
SS ee
pnd
“Es
a — ee
rai - ya~e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he-yo-o Ya - ‘e - he-’a ’e-rai-
ri IBM
os? Ss Sf Neer SE Tt Saat El woe sees Nese i
Ep eas. o= 0 iE —— se iE SS oe eee |
== Z. a SS 0—Z Pa
a’ ; b
hyo -’e-ro ya - ’e- he- ’a ’e-rai - hyo- ’e-ro Ya-
= —~—*S - : ~—A
2 a iB S| a
{ al ao =, rd a fic oe *e- 8
4 cv ra oe 4 py ———s
a bee 7
’e - he - ’a ‘ce -ra-i - hyo-’e-ro ya - ’e - he - ’a ’e-ra-i-
ey oe
eS Wes Bae ee
‘pa
hyo -’e - ro 73 - rai-ya-’¢ acon ‘al-hyo wi-ro - he-yo-o Ha-
430. PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
B”
~
“4,48 —— 2 9 & @ jar? eee Nw =
Bere res =e! i ziPe ree ae ipo 6
joy te
a-te-e pa-am - ’o - ne se a-te-epa-am - ’o - ne Kgq-
TS 7 NS ey amen b =
angie ° Creer ere bas = oif4* ———
= a 6 o—~ || -4—e—_ . Zee e =
sae aan © oo TE ———
@-mg@- an - tcel - tei -i-sg@ t? - 92 - pi-u ’an -
: Cc” 1 cae YX TR Ill A”
fe tea etett= 3-1 AE et
= ie J = i 5 | so ove @ c=: o—e coo are
c
me-e-tcl’E - rai-ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he-yo-o Ya-
ee = e222
inl 3 — == H4——~ oe.
cyan
’e - he-’a ’e-rai - hyo - ’e-ro ya - ’e- he-’a ’e-rai-
B
N- EP —poT ——N
SE =
stp ea as 6 (4 | #6 to Ie
Satan : =e 6—e b
hyo-e’-ro Ya - ’e- he- ’a ’e- ra-i hyo-’e -ro ya-
Cc
S| a _ SE el
ae = SSS 5 El ———
Pe ade 7s * = 4
c
’e - he - ’a ’e - ra-i = hyo - ’e - ro 'E -
BLY ae Se eee eee
Tai - ya -’e-hyo’ai - hyo wi - ro - he - ooo
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 431
NO. 16
ey _ 76 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
SSS ae oe SS
= = = : f
eS aera Bee
a a
Ya - ’e -he-’a ’e-rai - hyo- ’e- ro ya-’e- he-’a ’e-rai -
B
————— ‘S s
SS
= —4—% . v—F a ic
hyo - ’e - ro Ya-’e - he -’a ’e-ra -i-hyo-’e - ro ya -
Cc GI EN BS
SS SSS <= =e
=e St os een eran Sara
c
‘e- he-’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-’e-ro’E - rai-ya- ae ’ai-hyo wi-ro -
A’
oD, NS == tr a
a, Se ee sowie oy lee e- 0 » e 2 |
=e ; Yoav; ;
a a
he - yo- 0 Ha - a-te-e paam - ’o - ne ha-
~s—e B —
‘Oe4 ° SSS
sea a=2ee == = Sie Se ee Sees
7 4 7 v
a - te -e pa-am -’o - ne Tea -a - kwil ‘a
: —— —— Cc
3) 2S SS SS
a N+] = —
2255. pth i ee
Cc
Ce aye @ - mae = = xu = - tee-e - tei ’K-
a Yow™~ Il AY?
St Bt re a a
bet ee oo 8s =a =o[4e4 E 22.
— —— oS
— wu
rai - ya~e-hyo’ai-hyo wi-ro - he-yo-o Ya - ’e- he- ‘a ’e-rai
a-te - e pa-am-
Leaner Se
— o <—
Sys SS pS
: es ee Bi ie = es = = z
; a
hyo- ’e-ro ya - ’e - he-’a ’e-rai - hyo-’e-ro Ya -
’o - ne ha - a - te-e@ pa-am - ’o - ne Ka -
=e ee SSS re es
eS Sa ie a rae
= —# ¥ if = at CE Fe ia vA or
er 5
’e-he - ’a ’e-ra-i - hyo’e-ro ya - ’e- he-’a ’e-ra-i -
q-ma - an- teel - tci-i-sa te - 9%9-pi-u an -
, Cc EEO VAN aN
Sp =e a Hie. a |
ee s_ a ey ‘3— —- o e , a J
c
hyo - ’e - ro E - rai - ya -’e - hyo ’ai- hyo wi - ro-
me - e- tei *E - rai - ya-’e- hyo ’ai- hyo wi - ro-
.
432 PICUR{S CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
III A”
SS SS Se
= nee (3 es f
pleeeror tee eee ieaaae
== ——s o
he - yo - 0-o Ha he - yo- 0-0 Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai-
B’
Sait SN==at Spy 89 ° t 4
nS {= _ S| DiS |
Foes 3 c= a “lat ra ae ee =
a
hyo - ’e-ro ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai - hyo - ’e-ro Ya-
a
N t=! N
94 S- A == Bt SS
2 3 —8—e= Ne SS St Se
[ cas eas rae BIS er Foes Pim eae
’e -he-’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-’e-ro ya - ’e -he - ’a ’e-ra-i -
=. N Cc aE LEX VAS are ae
ere == iF SSS Pune a =I
24 Ze ed =e c=. =
hyo-’e-ro ’E = rai-ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he-yo-0o-o.
ROBERTS) ANALYSIS OF SONGS 433
NO. 17
raed 46 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
. —— i |
_, o—e— o - Ko orend
SS SS eS
74a 7 ee eee Ee )
a a’
Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai - hyo-’e-ro ya - ’e - he-’a ’e-rai -
B
oY Ne i a ee
See [st e950 N eae
iv A ‘ + 1 g os 6
hyo-’e-ro Ya - ’e - he- ’a ’e- ra -i-hyo -’e- ro ya-
iS € ile Ss aN OS
pp SS Si eee —
SSs= 42 oo ER ae r a
c
‘e -he - ’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-~e-ro ’E - rai -ya-’e-hyo ’ai-hyo wi - ro -
a ee =
4 fs 2 7 a eat wo SN SNe
Bi eee! eee rere
Se e 7 TrPaTi
a a
he - e --yo Ha - a -te-e pa-am - ’o - ne ha-
B’
= ae Se
e 6 o c S—\—} N \—-———-
z = a NI e N }
a
ra = 6 Pa = een J
a-te-e pa-am ’o - ne _ Tea-a - kwil ‘q =
Cc
S
So 5S Sas aa ee a ee
4" 2 fF a
ey = 4ye: a) — me - - xu - - tice tc Bi
ae ae an Sees NS TA’ gultns
iT ro = |i? 4 | _ ae
@ or oe) aD =
Bae ness BS Fae =
—S a!
rai-ya-'e-hyo’ai-hyowi-ro - he -e- yo Ya - ’e-he-’a ’e-rai -
defective BR’
aT -h1y-9 —9 6 F —
a [4 i, a Perea Ss |
aye a ee it eal pv: ae feet Sor LU
Be J—% Ti + 4 -—H BE 4 a
hyo -’e-ro ya - ’e - he- a ’e-rai - hyo-’e-ro Ya-
NN 3T- ; ; ——fs
Pa Se eee ae
—— ee
’e - he -’a ’e-ra-i - hyo-’e-ro ya - ’e- he-’a ‘e-ra -i-
aS (oy NS ; as SS NOW
Fro | a See ns eee! 6 ey or Glo ee ee #|
4 a = a =i rome @ Co Qe oo Po
aa a
hyo-’e-ro ’E - rai-ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyo wi- ro - he-e - yo
IN
yg 9p 8p pg
po: a ip E FE a 2 a |
a a
Ha - a - te - e pa-am - ’o - - ne ha -
434 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
eS ey QT aaa! Sha Neat
ss Pe ee eee ee
—+ S b a — y~ ——— a
a-te-e pa-am - ’o - ne Ka - q@- mg - gn-tce-el
’e-he-’a ’e-rai-
B”
— Bie ~ = =5
b’
’e-rai - hyo -’e-ro Ya-
NE
ya - ’e-he - ’a ’e-ra-i-
= ————— Sar as
c
hyo-’e-ro ’E - rai-ya-’e-hyo’ai-hyo wi-ro - he - e = yo.
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 435
NO. 18. SONG OF THE ELF AS HE IS PACKED ALONG
A
b. Jee 76 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
rR FC a eS a NE Se DY ED Seo Ss sl
Di te 2S ane ae ee 2 EH 2 = 7 HH =
o - : o
a — x y
We - se - lo ks -se-lo se-lo se-lo se-lo we -'a
i
iz N
a: ,_* _|@ —» —» @ SRSSNa Es
== ta o t = @ + 5
ape 2 zis = Sy seals |
zi
Me -’e ye-e-he-he ye-he - he
4 : N N 2
a SL eS Se BE SS = a =Na= Nees
= ae ie f=@=9 — = ON
foie oP -— ote a |
bz c a ~
"A-’a-ha-a-ha - ha ’e - he - lo-we We - so- lo
a re Fe sito iz ==) :
—HeR—s —s— t i =f
pp: *4-#- = 2 FEES EE Lele B= = Z 7 v=i=
we-se-lo se-lo se-lo se-lo we-’a Me -’e ye-e-he
C- D
cre ant al EC Yom
zeytg-° ee ff? vee 2
ere fae eS
Zz bz d
ye-he - _ he ‘A-’a-ha-a-ha - - ha ’O - wi -
: a 4 x
2 h5—h—k hee Neo TN SS s=
Sa a et a oe Ha ae re
Vater ie:. ie —
t'a-i-n@-le-’e-pa Ta-so-’él- hu tca-men-no S@
436 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES (ETH, ANN. 43
NO. 19
ee oe by Helen H. Roberte.
We - se - lo we-se-lo se-lo se- lo se-lo we-’a
By: (
5 ee ae
Ee SSS SS SS SSS
b Z b2
Me - ’e ye - he ye-he - - he i - 7a - ha -
A
NS ee Ngee Nee N=]
Fee ae a ae SSP Se
c a =
a-ha - ha ’e - he - lo - we We -se - lo
| a 5
Se ee a E =J
Cp pee eee ey ee ro =
x y
we-se -lo se- lo se- lo ee -lo we-’a Me - ’e
= Soh pont
se D= oe ES = SS : = bes = 4
[a laerae Se Sa
Zz
ye - he ye-he - _ he AS a-ha - a-ha - ha
D
i oo = Ss |
b-p4-2 2 ee e (qe ee =
d e
’O - wi- t’a-i-n@-te-’e-pa Ta-so-’él - hu tca-men-no sq
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 437
NO. 20. SONG OF THE ELF IN THE FIRE
b. J—76 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
ay a TI a a | t
2 ee ee ee ee ee l- =
—— t eo.
a x y
We-se - lo we-se-lo se-lo se- lo se-lo we-’a
B,
r=" = . == ~S, = fk
zu == Se eaat otz zt So
b
Me - ’e ye - he onthe - he ee a- ha-a-a—
oS ptt
7a aS Se
c x
ha ’e - he - lo - we We- se - lo we -se-lo se-
B’
SSS — = ——t a =:
Sy SSS Sse
D === SS = @ —— = i=
y b’
lo se - lo se-lo we-’a Me - ’e ye - he
C- D
i ra =a == 4
= a ee ae a a
bz d
ye-he - 7A - - - ha ’O - wi -
Pie =e — =e lee
tla-i-ng- lo-’e-pa ne wi-tun-na ta-so-ta-ki-an - ng.
438 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
NO. 21. SONG OF THE TWO DOVE MAIDEN SISTERS WHO BECAME STARS
6. — ues Pasa Oe by Helen H. Roberts.
aa -a - ee sa - a -ng-ta - o Ku-a #5 so - ies
to - tsg ’“A- i-wi-ki-i-wa-p’a Piet me - hg - me -
aa iia
Bierce erate eres 2
ha@- me Kan-so-ts’a-’o - tel u. Ku - a - k’a-s0-
phi - ng - ta - ts’¢ K’u -a- k’a- sa - phi - ng -
=>
2S A SSS S5— == ==
o Cad =
Te ea p’a -lo- ha - me -
ea SSS]
ha - me- ha-me Kgn - so-ts’a-’o - tel - - hu
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 439
NO. 22. SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS KOYOW[X9EAPAN ENTERS THEIR
ESTUFA
A
b. ¢. = 200 ptio aaa H. Roberts.
fees ee ee es Ze Sa:
= eee 8
1 2 3
He -nai-’a- ne-na@ - @ ’a-ne - ng he - nai - ’a
B
ef as == Sse ° aes
=e RE
4
ne-’e -ng@ He-nai-’a - ne - ng ie Sera
Cc
ORI ee RS Ise eS]
ne -’e-n@ Hoe - ne-na he - nai ‘a ne -’e-n@
INR ~ ww AS A
ae @_. 92
248 2 = be e
SS Se eS
v
i 2
Sos ee ae, Caen 8 NC Hs - nai -
EEE Ee Sie ee
‘a ce ne- a - n@ He - nai -’a -ne = nq he - nai ‘a -
pa =e a SRS
ne -’e- ng Hee na - ne-ng ‘ - nai Q@ - ne-’e-ng.
440 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
. 23
See nm by Helen H. Roberts.
Sima pa =a 5 a AS Te ie
3
Hee nai -’a - ne eee - - ne ng he - nai
aS eiasa tee | =
a it)
ne - ’e - ne He-nai-’a- ne - nq fe - nai
poor eieirerert SSE Sea
ne - ’e-ng@ Bh na - ne-n@ i nai ‘a - ne- ’e-ng
Ebae ront ; = = 5 fie. a3 aS
1 2 3
hes =n Ole Ce
He-nai--a -ne-ng -q@ ’a-ne° - ng
4 B Pe PR ay
Se a oe me
ne - ’e “Res He - nai-’a - ne - nai ‘a
es TERR z A : fe =
ne - ’e-nq@ nae na - ne-ng i. =Ndly |g) nese na.
NO. 24. CRYING SONG OF THE GRANDMOTHER AS SHE SEEKS KOYOW-
IXDEAPAN
n by Helen H. Rober
b. de : A
eee, ae ce >t mere peo arate 4-9 = =
Ko-yo-wi - xe-la - pan Ko-yo-wi - xe-la -
i ie See ee
pan ’Ai- wi-ng-ke ha-yu-wi me- hu me - hu.
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 441
NO. 25
A
C. o =! A Transcription by Helen H. Roberta.
pe ——P se H[3-2 {ee a= s
ease aa ——=
Ko-yo-wi - xo-la - pan Ko-yo-wi - xo-la~ -
By
SS SS
pan *Ai-wi-no -ke ha-yu-wi me- hu me - hu.
NO. 26
d. P| — 104 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts
53-4 # =—S=S iE =
pee 5 Saris == aa
Ko-yo-wi - xo-la - - pan Ko-yo- wi - xo-la -
B = «
= = 5 fn i
Pa —— = — =|
pan *Ai - wi- ng-ke ha-yu-wi me - hu me - hu.
NO. 27. SONG OF THE WIZARDS AS THEY MAKE KOYOWIX9LAPAN AN
OLD WOMAN
A
b. d= = about 200 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
Wid? Aw
H ae sees == —- o 07 = Nees
vals fF FS 7 5 60 a Sg a et eee
Mi- ma-t’a-la - pi- a- po t’a-la-pi-a-po he - nai-’a-ne-’e-ng
B Cc A iA,
Ta ee a re Neher
oes S25 5 os opr a = [fo e ae |
Mi - ma-t’a -la - pi- a- po he - nai-’a-ne -’e-n@ Ha - na-ne-ng he -
A
—+——* NN be—e—"——P-» ee
eee ee ee
x? a as x = - yy 1: aa
nai-’a-ne-’e-nq@ Mi-ma-t'a-la- pi- a-po t’a-la-pi-a- po he-
B
A) Ness lesen == —@ 2 3 IS
4 e a
i —— — a |
va va —¥ -
nai - ’a -ne - ’e- ng Mi - ma-t’a - la - pi - a- po he -
Cc . a Ne
aaa ane New| scene] Nias Nie ge es Nee ee NN
22 == SS =| 1 ee as ==3[|
— Ke} 8 a
nai -’a-re-’e-n@ Ha-na-ne-ng he - na@i-’a-ne- ’e-ng.
1, On the repeat the d is true.
19078°—28 29
442 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [BTH. ANN. 43
NO. 28
A
Cc. 2 — about 200 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
pa Se ees 2
a3 = -be—» ——
eS —— SS
geese t'a - la - pi - a - po he*-
10 oh — :
2 — ae =
Mi- ma-t’a - la- pi- a- po _ he -
a =P |P0 ==
nai-’a-ne -’e-ng@ Ha-na-ne-ng@ he - nai-’a-ne - e’-ng.
ay ye 2k
ae jy? the —o 1-7 Pe
ee aa
ase pa gu aac hime heim he -
Sales = —§
f i —— ° ——
[PRS (SS i= ;
nai - ’a- ne - ’e- n@ Mi -ma-t’a-la-pi- a-po he -
= he —e— oe Ge ole o BZ a= Sa
ee eee eee a |
nai - ’a-ne-’e-ng@ Ha-na-ne-ng he - nai-’a-ne -’e-ng.
NO. 29. THE JACKRABBIT’S GRINDING SONG
A
b. d= Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
= ——— a
r 4 eo #2
Ere ye 2S S22 ee eee
Ka - to -h-a-’a- tan - pho-wan-pho-wan piu- ’o - ne
N N
= a = — an
2- o— 9-0 — “33 -He o - oe 6»
EzLe=ee SS
D 7 v
a
to - -a-to-li-a - te - ya-he - he K’a - to- li- a -’a - tan-
a 8 A x
= a) + ooo 0 eo 3h. =
ee Lae: 23 ieee
pho-wan-pho-wan piu-’o-ne to-li-a-to-li-a - te - ya-he - he.
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 443
NO. 30
A
c the 76 Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
FE PP, ? , , , , , , ,
ord = ro Tasty
i428 a ae er e— 13 soe ® o
aaa ae ==
a —oeee ee
Ka -to-li-a-’qa-tan - pho-wan-pho-wan piu - ’o - ne
to-h-a-to-li-a - te
"4 Ze. - PP
sel |
BiSaae eee
= a
pho-wan-pho-wan piu-’o-ne to-li-a-to-li-a - te- ya-he-he.
NO. 31. THE BLUEJAY’S GRINDING SONG
A
bd. je= Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
2 La?
Sh aah S oy a oe a
73,0 = =a 2 See tT +} ani
eae So ee 0 ee
b
Tee -ts’e-xe-mo - tce-’o- ae ieee so tau-ta - u-wi - le - ke-
pag Sap srieeas =e =
tce - ’o- xe - y- mo -ts’i-au-ts’i-au Tee -ts’e-xe-mo - tce-’0-xe-u-xe- U
eee eae eee eee
aa yy
tau -ta -u - wi - le - ke-tce-’o - xe- U-mo - ts’i-au - ts’i-au.
444 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES [ETH. ANN. 43
NO. 32
Tes Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
— 63 -
re Saas eres SS ——
ee 4 saibag ———— pale = 6 set
— iw el a
b
Tee - ts’e-xe-mg - tce-’o0-xe -y- xe- YU tau-ta - u-wi- le - ke -
Q Q A’ la
paca NS =a e-°
SaaS a ae ==
a
tee-’o-xe-y-mo-ts’i-au-ts’i-au Tce-ts’e-xe-mo - tce-’o-xe- u-xe-U
- N S
OrFy6 N e oS =
SSS ae ee eee
tau - tau-wi - le - ke- tce- ’o- xe - y - mo-ts’i-au - ts’i-au.
xT
NO. 33
\A Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
d. 4, pe _
all Give
2ey6 ed o_o Sat ‘=e |
ae: Iebpee Cse ee
a
Tce-ts'e-xe-mo - tce-’o-xe - U-xe- U tau-ta-u- wi-le-ke-
os
9 Ss a
Hye} so Nas{o—7® : a
a ———— oe a
a’
tee -’o-xe - y- mo-ts’i-au-ts’i-au Tee-ts’e-xe-mo - tee -’0- xe - u-xe- YU
7H e -— aS =
Pe ge atte P|
HS S 4 iy @ Z a @ =
tau - tau-wi-le - ke-tce - ’o - xe - y- mo-ts'l-au - ts’i- au.
NO. 34
A
e Ors 63 ee in Transcription by Helen H. Roberts.
ee eee & ra =
a2 =: Lae eee
a Peralta ei o ® ® |
east 2S ee
Tce-ts’e-xe-mg - tce-’o-xe- U-xe- U tau-ta -u -wi - le - ke -
ING
pet |g Sn Ra: = : = “10° =~
tce -’o - ise ee ALG ee oe Tee- ts’e-xe-mg - tce-’o-xe - U -
A 2 aN —N a i
Sees os Sea
-wi-le-ke - tce-’o-xe- y-mo-ts’i-au - ts’-au.
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 445
Seales of the Songs
Group I
Sere Se He. push oe ie oak
SS SEE
bt te
92 sii 32 849k 35
iv 2 a
. ae he 22 & 7 wf wt
phe = ;
= |S tt ae
3 92 bb 9 qa ok yo
ee
: bt = =
Ba 213 2% & +
= ===
: SS |
c nti. G 4 rm
HH PP a |
b te
b 16 5 10
———— ee
.
b 4 6b 4 145
————
b e
GroupI
, 6 re es 2 2 44s Siu
_———— s Sega
g b F te
1 4 on q io 113 4 34 1
21 ==
ee |
> te a
7) jel el re 1s 55 240 63
28 > = =
=== PT Tr :
— — ; :
A sae
= = = ;
te
1'This note was written enharmonically as a> for uniformity with the other scales, although as a strict
transposition of No. 8 it should be 92.
446 PICURIS CHILDREN’S STORIES
(ETH. ANN. 43
3 24 “4 © % 21
4 26 2S 594 wo ;
—— SS SS SSS
Group IL :
ost 42 4 1% a wm 5
2
=a ———— == a
rs 1a ky 1% 1% am of
i pan
b t e
eo ks ra at 20 uk 2 2h, %
= a = —— :
b t f rs
as 1 ok ak hoop aioe nos
ti
2 13 4 3 ie Baw
to
ee ee
93 4 4b 7) FSS ey Yee 2
———
2 1 13)672 4 17 (3 4 3h
22
CO he We} FN 4 i 2 ene en nH
a o
p 26) SS
Shqip zieesrs 20 26
= ee
GroupIZ F
q thoes 1 4 ok 5
ip = 3 =!
= —=T- t fe
a Tk, Span sh 2 rt
— — ——
q aa pS) eres 32
16 =
—— = SS ae se
ROBERTS] ANALYSIS OF SONGS 447
q if 8 4 3
SSS po
i ok 1% st i Hi
— s
SS SS ———
Group
13 4% 2
—= 2 :
wh th Yu 5 1
29
(— == :
a ee
SS
3 6 uw
_———— |
: e
te
~s
f
tule
t
i
>
"a ‘
7
IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY
SECOND PART
WITH INTRODUCTION AND NOTES
BY
J. N. B. HEWITT
=
YOOIOMEOD” ZALOUGOME —
THA GOA
24TOY GVA YoOrrowdorrvl Wriw
va ,
PTI LE
CONTENTS
Introduction__--._-------=-
My Gs See op eee eee at em a ne nee ame eee. Em
The myth of the Earth-grasper-_---.------------ Spee sos ee sss lessse
INotesttio: ino quoiank Cosmolopysesss =a) see oe eee ee
Onondaga text and interlinear translation________________--_---------
Me hod yaat kay ew Co eee ieee oe ee ee ee er So oee eee
Page
453
464
470
608
612
792
821
2T VAT FO
ee
hab ye | yee oo hatin
bon ; net eet 5 a so - nt esos nye
ove a a ae, ee rogue odt te fia aT
RGA -nle aide da wesde eae Je eee csolonma? ain pot mia
ore : Pee _.. Etec i mannliotal Seaham
Day are ea Soe —— vera Bald Petey ed
1h oo ees ; c—-enenvh seek eden: Sneak pee _. ObaL
ii} i
nhs
TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY
SECOND PART
WITH INTRODUCTION AND NOTES2
By J. N. B. Hewirtr
INTRODUCTION
The accompanying text was recorded in 1900, on the Grand River
Reservation of the Six Nations of the Iroquois, from the dictation of
the Seneca Federal chief, John Arthur Gibson, who was in addition
a priest of the religion of his ancestors. At the time the record
was made he had been completely blind for 26 years. The text was
recorded partly by hand and partly by the typewriter. It is one of
the longest known texts dealing with the myths of the genesis, the
cosmic metamorphoses, of primitive Iroquois thinking. Naturally
there are varying versions of the several incidents related in the text;
but in the main events of the myth the several variants agree. The
subject matter of the text is the phenomena of the environment of
the ancestors of the Iroquois. It is not strange after contact with
European explorers and missionaries for over 300 years that the
text would have some foreign elements; but these are readily de-
tected because of the difference in the psychologic premises of the
Amerindian and the European peoples. It is due the memory of
Mr. Gibson to say that his viewpoint was dominantly that of his
ancestors.
At the close of the Revolutionary War in America the tribes of the
Iroquois which had espoused the cause of Great Britain removed to
lands assigned them by the Crown of Great Britain in the Province
of Ontario. With the exception of the Mohawk tribe, all the other
tribes were divided into at least two parts, and one of these parts of
each several tribe remained within the State of New York. Natu-
rally such a disruption of tribal and social organizations led to a
period of confusion. Many of the leaders, both in civil and military
affairs, had lost their lives in that war. The chiefs of the portion of
the Onondaga tribe which removed to Canada were the first to take
measures for establishing the Federal and other tribal organizations
among their people who had taken up their residence in the Dominion
of Canada. One of these, who was a very old man when Mr. Gib-
son was first installed as a Federal chief, noted that Mr. Gibson
* The first part was published in the Twenty-first Annual Report of the Bureau of American
Ethnology. *
453
454 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
was seriously interested in knowing the customs, traditions, and
religion of his ancestors, and so he decided to go out of his way in
instructing young Mr. Gibson. When this old man realized that
life was drawing to a close he requested his faithful pupil, Mr. Gibson,
to succeed him as the leader and teacher of his people in their social,
political, and religious activities in the Onondaga Council House
where he officiated. This Mr. Gibson agreed to do, an agreement
resulting in making Mr. Gibson, a Seneca, virtually an Onondaga
chief and priest at all times except in Federal councils.
The fact that at the time of his death Mr. Gibson was by far the
best-posted man living in all that related to Iroquoian mythology,
civil institutions, and the rituals of their Condoling Council, shows
how well he had been instructed by his departed patron. This wide
knowledge of the customs, institutions, and religion of his ancestors
made Mr. Gibson a valuable assistant counselor of the Canadian
Department of Indian Affairs. This department very frequently
called upon Mr. Gibson to settle disputes between members not only
of his own tribe but between those also of other tribes, in which he was
very successful. His ideas of right and wrong were derived largely
from the teachings of his ancestors. He had a living and profound
reverence for the merciful care of his Creator.’ The Iroquois have
seven great annual festivals which are fundamentally assemblies for
thanksgiving. So it was not strange to hear Mr. Gibson, after more
than 26 years of total blindness, not only at mealtime but at other
times, thank his God for the bounties he enjoyed and for the beautiful
sunshine and beauties of nature, which he had not seen for all those
years.
The Onondaga were an important tribe of the League of the Iro-
quois, and when first known they dwelt on the mountain, lake, and
creek bearing their name, in the present State of New York, and their
territory extended northward to Lake Ontario and southward perhaps
to the waters of the Susquehanna River. On the east their lands
abutted on those of the Oneida, and on the west those of the Cayuga
and Seneca.
Their principal village, which was also the capital of the Confedera-
tion, was called Onondaga, and later Onondaga Castle. This village
was situated on Indian Hill, in the present town of Pompey, Onondaga
County, N. Y., and in 1677 it contained more than 140 long lodges or
long houses of the well-known type peculiar to the Iroquois. This
village was situated here from before 1654 to 1681. Later it was
removed to Butternut Creek, where the palisaded fort was burned in
1696. In 1720 it was again removed to Onondaga Creek, and the
present reservation of the portion of that tribe living in Onondaga is
in that valley, being a few miles south of Onondaga Lake.
rm : mee
See note on p. 608.
HEWITT] INTRODUCTION 455
It is learned from the writings of Champlain that in 1622 the
Montagnais, the Etchemin, and the Hurons had been engaged for a
long period of time in an effort to establish peace between themselves
and the five tribes of the Iroquois, and that previously to that time
there had always been some serious obstacle to the consummation
of such an agreement on account of the fixed distrust which each
side had of the good faith of the other. They importuned Champlain
himself to aid them in establishing a firm and durable peace, and they
insistently begged him to give them his advice on this matter, which
they promised faithfully to follow. Champlain was assured by them
that they were then exhausted and weary of the wars which they had
waged against each other for more than 50 years, and that on account
of their strong desire for revenge for the murder of their kin and
friends their ancestors had never previously thought of establishing
peace. This last statement, it may be, fixes approximately the epoch
of that historic feud mentioned in the Jesuit Relation for 1660 (Chap,
11) and by Perrot, in which the five Iroquois tribes on one side,
and the Huron and Algonquian tribes on the Ottawa and St. Lawrence
Rivers on the other, were inveterate enemies, although this period
of strife may have been but a renewal and a widening of a still earlier
quarrel.
Cartier learned from the two Iroquoian tribes and their allies
dwelling on the St. Lawrence in 1535 that they had been continually
tormented by enemies dwelling to the southward, called Toudamani,
etce., probably identical with the Tsonnontouan or the Seneca, a
name then meaning ‘“‘upper Iroquois,’ who continually waged war
on them.
The Onondaga sent in September, 1655, a delegation of 18 persons
to Quebec for the purpose of conferring with Governor de Lauson
and with the Algonkin and the Hurons. At this conference the
Onondaga spokesman employed 24 wampum belts in his address.
The first 8 were delivered to the Hurons and the Algonkin, whose
leading chiefs were there, as presents; each wampum belt had its own
particular name on such an occasion. The Onondaga delegates
professed to speak for the “four upper Iroquois nations,” namely,
the Seneca, the Cayuga, the Oneida, and the Onondaga, thus leaving
only the Mohawk, the “lower Iroquois,” out of this peace conference;
nevertheless the Onondaga speaker promised to urge the Mohawk
to change their attitude and to join in the establishment of peace.
The Onondaga also asked for priests to dwell among them and for
French soldiers to aid them in their war against the Erie. The
Onondaga in May, 1657, nearly 10 years after the expulsion of the
Hurons from their motherland, sought by the giving of numerous
presents and by covert threats of war to induce the Hurons, who
had fled to the vicinity of Quebec, to remove from their country and
456 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
to form with the Onondaga a single people. The Mohawk and the
Seneca were also interested in this affair on their own account.
Finally these Hurons were virtually forced to acquiesce in these per-
sistent demands of the Iroquois tribes.
The Onondaga in 1686 were at war with the Cherermons (Shawnee?).
But in 1688 French influence was very strong among the Onondaga,
and the Onondaga were regarded as the chief among the Iroquois
tribes. The Onondaga, with the Mohawk, the Oneida. the Cayuga,
and the Seneca, in 1682 entered into a treaty of peace with the com-
missioners from the Colony of Maryland, who contracted not only
for the white settlers but also for the Piscataway Indians.
Early in 1647 a troop of Huron warriors defeated a band of Onon-
daga which was approaching the Huron country, the Onondaga chief
being killed and a number of the warriors taken prisoners. Annen-
raes, a man of character and authority among the Onondaga, was
among the latter. He learned in the following spring that those
Hurons who had been disappointed because he had not been burned
at the stake intended to kill him. To some of his Huron friends he
related what he had heard, and that he had resolved to escape to his
own country. The leading Huron chiefs, all their council having
heard of his resolution and of the reason for making it, concluded to
aid him in his resolve, trusting that he would render them some
valuable service in return. So, giving him some valuable presents
and sufficient provisions, they sent him off secretly by night. Hav-
ing crossed Lake Ontario, he unexpectedly came upon 300 Onondaga
who were engaged in making canoes to cross the lake in order to
revenge his death, as they believed that he had been killed by the
Hurons, and who awaited the arrival of 800 Seneca and Cayuga
reenforcements. These countrymen regarded Annenraes as one
arisen from the dead. With great astuteness he succeeded in per-
suading the 300 Onondaga to give up all thought of war for that of
peace, whereupon these Onondaga, without awaiting longer the
expected reenforcements, returned to Onondaga, where a tribal
council was held. After due deliberation it was their resolve to
send an embassy with suitable presents to the Hurons for the purpose
of undertaking negotiations for peace.
One of the chiefs of this embassy, and its spokesman, was by birth
a Huron, named Soidnes, who after his adoption among the Iroquois
had become so naturalized that it was said of him that ‘‘ No Iroquois
had done more massacres in these (Huron) countries, nor blows
more wicked than he.’? Now Annenraes was accompanied by three
adopted Hurons who had not long been captives at Onondaga. The
embassy, having arrived at St. Ignace July 9, 1647, found the Hurons
divided as to the expediency of accepting the Onondaga proposals,
and so their tribe, the Hurons, justly fearing the duplicity of the
gEWITT] INTRODUCTION 457
enemy, even though bearing presents, hesitated to open negotiations.
But the Rock tribe and many other villages desired the conclusion of
peace in the hope that thereby a number of their kin, then captive at
Onondaga, would be returned to them. So, after many councils and
conferences, it was found expedient by the Hurons to send an
embassy to Onondaga in order the better to conclude this matter.
For presents the Hurons took valuable furs, while the Onondaga
Iroquois used belts of wampum. The Huron embassy was well
received at Onondaga, at which place a month was spent in holding
councils. Finally the Onondaga resolved to send back a second
embassy, headed by Skanawati (Scandaouati), a Federal chieftain 60
years of age, who was to be accompanied by 2 other Onondaga and
by 15 Huron captives. One of the Huron embassy remained as a hos-
tage at Onondaga. This embassy was 30 days on the way, although
it was in fact only 10 days’ journey. Jean Baptiste, the returning
Huron delegate, brought back seven wampum belts of the largest
kind, each composed of 3,000 to 4,000 beads. By these belts the
Onondaga sought to confirm the peace, assuring the Hurons that they
could hope for the delivery of at least 100 more of their captive kin.
The Onondaga sought this peace not only because the Hurons had
spared the life of Annenraes, but also to thwart the Mohawk in their
attempts to dominate policies of the League and to hold in check the
Mohawk, who had become insolent from their victories and so were
overbearing even to their allies, and who might become too much so
should the Hurons fail at this time to unite all their forces against
them, and further because of fear of the active power of the Conestoga.
The Cayuga and the Oneida showed deep interest in this Onondaga
project of peace, but on the other hand the Seneca would not listen
to it, and the Mohawk were still more adverse to it, as they were
envious of what had been accomplished by the Onondaga. So, at
the end of the winter of 1647-48 the Seneca and the Mohawk sent
strong forces to assail the Huron village of St. Ignace.
The character of some of the chief men and statesmen of the
Onondaga appears in the following incident: Early in 1648 the
Hurons resolved to send another embassy to Onondaga. This
embassy consisted of six men, accompanied by one of the three
Onondaga ambassadors then officially in their country, the other two,
including Skanawati, the head of the Onondaga embassy, and the
firekeeper of the Federal council, remaining as hostages. The new
Huron embassy was unfortunate, for its members were captured
and killed by a force of more than 100 Mohawk and Seneca who had
lurked about the borders of the Huron country. The Onondaga
accompanying this embassy was spared, and the two Hurons suc-
ceeded in escaping. When this distressing information reached the
ears of Skanawati early in April, this proud Onondaga ambassador,
19078°—28 30
458 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
who had remained with the Hurons as a hostage, suddenly disap-
peared. Naturally the Hurons suspected that he had stealthily
fled away, but a few days after his disappearance his corpse was dis-
covered in the forest lying on a bed of fir branches, where he had,
from chagrin, taken his own life by cutting his throat. In order to
exonerate themselves the Hurons notified his companion, who ex-
plained that the cause of Skanawati’s despair was the shame he felt
at the contempt for the sacredness of his person shown by the Seneca
and the Mohawk in going to the Huron country and slaughtering
the Huron people while his own life was in pledge for the keeping of
the faith of his people. Of such men was the great Federal Council
of the Iroquois composed.
The Onondaga and the Cayuga and the Oneida had good reason
for fearing the Conestoga, for the Jesuit Relation for 1647-48 relates
that in a single village of the latter people there were at that date
1,300 men capable of bearing arms, indicating a population of more
than 4,500 for this village alone. Through two trusted messengers
the Conestoga chiefs at that time informed the Hurons that if they
failed in ability to defend themselves they should send them word by
an embassy. The Huron Federal Council greedily seized this
opportunity of obtaining aid by sending on this mission four Christian
Indians and fourso-called “‘infidels,’’ headed by one Charles Ondaaion-
diont. This mission reached Conestoga early in June, 1647. This
Huron delegation conveyed to their Conestoga friends the gloomy
information that they themselves had come from a land of ghosts
(souls), where war and the fear of their enemies had spread destruc-
tion everywhere, where the fields were covered with blood and the
lodges were filled with corpses, and that they themselves had re-
maining only enough life to enable them to come imploring their
friends to save their country, which was rapidly drawing toward its
end. This moving and laconic address moved the Conestoga to send
an embassy to urge upon the Iroquois the advantage of making a
lasting peace with their Huron enemies. Jean Baptiste, a Huron
ambassador mentioned above, being at Onondaga at the end of the
summer, learned that this embassy of the Conestoga had reached the
Iroquois country, for he had even seen some of the Conestoga presents.
The object of the Conestoga was to establish a firm peace between
the Hurons on the one hand and the Onondaga, the Oneida, the
Cayuga, and, if possible, the Seneca, on the other, and to renew the
war against the Mohawk, should they still refuse to become parties
to it. It thus appears that the Conestoga did not fear the Mohawk.
It is learned from the Jesuit Relation for 1660 that about the year
1600 the Algonquian tribes had greatly humbled the Mohawk, and
that after the Mohawk had regained somewhat their former standing
the Conestoga, in a war lasting more than 10 years, had very nearly
HEWITT] INTRODUCTION 459
exterminated the Mohawk, who since, however, had partially re-
covered from that defeat.
The Onondaga dwelling on the Grand River Grant (reservation),
Ontario, Canada, have nine clans, namely: The Wolf, the Snapping
Turtle, the Bear, the Deer, the Eel, the Beaver, the Sharp-shinned
Hawk (erroneously Ball), the Plover (Snipe), and the Pigeon Hawk
clans. The Wolf, the Beaver, the Plover, the Sharp-shinned Hawk,
the Pigeon Hawk, and the Snapping Turtle clans have each only
one Federal chiefship; the Beaver and the Eel clans have each two
Federal chiefships; while the Deer clan has three. The reason for
this marked difference in the quotas of Federal chiefships belonging to
the several clans is not definitely known, but it may be due to the
adoption of alien groups of persons who already possessed chiefship
titles.
In Federal, ceremonial, and social assemblies the Onondaga, by
right of membership therein, take their places with the tribal phratry
of the “‘Three Brothers,” of which the Mohawk and the Seneca are
the two other members; but in the Federal Council, in which sit the
Federal representatives of all the five (latterly six) Iroquois tribes,
the Onondaga tribe itself constitutes, in function at least, a tribal
phratry, while the Mohawk and the Seneca together form a second,
and the Oneida and the Cayuga originally, and the Tuscarora
latterly, a third tribal phratry.
The Federal Council is organized on the basis of these three tribal
phratries. Functions of the Onondaga phratry in the Federal Council
are in many respects similar to those of a judge holding court with
a jury. These three phratries in session in council occupy fixed or
prescribed positions with relation to an actual or symbolic council
fire. On one side of this fire are seated the Federal representatives
of the phartries of the Three Brothers. On the opposite side are
seated the phratry of the Younger Brothers.
A question coming before the Federal Council is discussed first
by the phratry of the ‘‘Three Brothers,’’ namely, first by the
Mohawk by themselves and then by the Seneca by themselves;
then the matter is returned to the Mohawk, who then refer it across
the actual or symbolic fire to the Oneida, who in turn discuss it by
themselves and then refer it to the Cayuga, who discuss it by them-
selves, and latterly, to the Tuscarora, who discuss it by themselves,
and who then refer the matter back to the speaker of the Oneida,
who refers it back across the fire to the Mohawk speaker, who refers
it in turn to the Onondaga phratry for confirmation or rejection, or,
in case of error, returns it for correction to the Mohawk speaker for
resubmission for correction. The confirmation of a common opinion
or of one among two or more different opinions submitted by the
discussing phratries by the Onondaga makes that the decree of the
460 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
Council. In refusing to confirm an opinion the Onondaga must show
that it is in conflict with established custom or with public policy;
when two or more conflicting opinions are rejected by the Onondaga
they may suggest to the two phratries a course by which they may
be able to reach a common opinion; but the Onondaga may confirm
either of two differing opinions submitted to them. Each Federal
chief has the right to discuss and argue the question before the
Council, either for or against its adoption by the Council, in a speech
or speeches addressed to the entire body of counsellors and to the
public.
With the exception of two important bodies or kindreds of the
Seneca, the Onondaga were the last of the five tribes originally
forming the League of the Iroquois to accept fully the principles of
the universal peace proposed by Dekanawida and Hiawatha.
The site of the former chief town of the Onondaga, with the name
Onondaga, was shifted at different times from place to place in central
New York. Within its limits formerly lay the unquenched brands
of the Great Council Fire of the League of the Iroquois. During the
war of the American Revolution General Washington found it neces-
sary to send a punitive army under General Sullivan to chastise the
Iroquois tribes for their cruel and bloody work in pursuance of their
close alliance with Great Britain. The chastisement was so ruthless,
and so thoroughly demonstrated by the total destruction of more than
40 Iroquois villages and the growing crops surrounding them, that
the integrity of the League was disrupted and the scattered remnants °
forced to seek shelter in Canada and elsewhere under the protection
of the British Government. Finally, on the Grand River in Ontario,
Canada, the brands of the Great Council Fire of the League were
rekindled by the allied portions of all the tribes of the Six Nations;
and here that fire is still? burning. The portions of the tribes which
elected to remain in New York relighted a fire at Onondaga and sought
to reestablish the ancient form of their government there in order to
formulate united action on questions affecting their common interests;
but this attempt was only partly successful, since the seat of govern-
ment had forever departed. The establishment at Onondaga of the
seat of Federal power by the founders of the League of the Iroquois
made Onondaga not only one of the most important and widely
known towns of the Iroquois tribes but also of North America north
of Mexico. At the zenith of the power of the Iroquois it was the
capital of a government whose dominion extended from the Hudson
River on the east to the Falls of the Ohio and Lake Michigan on
the west, and from the Ottawa River and Lake Simcoe on the north
to the Potomac River on the south and the Ohio on the southwest.
See note on p. 608.
HEWITT] INTRODUCTION 461
Around the Great Council Fire of the League of the Iroquois at
Onondaga, with punctilious observance of the parliamentary pro-
prieties recognized in Indian diplomacy and statecraft, and with a
decorum that would add grace to many legislative assemblies of the
white man, the Federal senators of the Iroquois tribes devised plans,
formulated policies, and defined principles of government and political
action which not only strengthened their state and promoted their
common welfare but also deeply affected the contemporary history
of the whites in North America. To this body of half-clad Federal
chieftains were repeatedly made overtures of peace and friendship
by two of the most powerful kingdoms of Europe, whose statesmen
often awaited with apprehension the decision of this senate of North
American savages.
The sites of the village of Onondaga with their approximate dates
are thus identified by Clark, Beauchamp, and others, and listed by
Beauchamp in the notes to his map (Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed., Lr, 294,
1899): In 1600 the site was probably about 2 miles west of Cazenovia
and east of West Limestone Creek, Madison County, N. Y. Two
sites of towns are accredited to 1620, the one about 24% miles south-
west and the other 1 mile south of Delphi, Onondaga County, N. Y.
The site of 1630 was nearly 2 miles northwest of Delphi; that of 1640
was about 1 mile south of Pompey Center, Onondaga County, on
the east bank of West Limestone Creek; that of 1655, in which was
established the mission of St. Jean Baptiste, was about 2 miles south
of the present Manlius, in the same county, on what is called Indian
Hill; the Jesuit Relation for 1658 states that this town was large and
was called ‘““Onnontaghe ... because it was on a mountain.”
This town, with its site, is probably the same as that visited by
Greenhalgh in 1677 and described as large, unpalisaded, consisting
of about 140 lodges, and situated on a very large hill, the bank on
either side extending at least 2 miles, all cleared land and planted with
corn. Greenhalgh learned that there was another village of 24 lodges
situated 2 miles westward. He estimated the Onondaga warriors
at about 350. The site of 1696 was 1 mile south of Jamesville, east
of Butternut Creek, Onondaga County. Count Frontenac burned
this town in 1696. The site of 1743 was east of the creek and north
of the present reservation in Onondaga County, while that of 1756
was west of the creek. The site of 1779 was that of one of the three
towns plundered and burned in April by the troops of Col. Van
Schaick; they were situated within 2 miles of one another and con-
tained 30 to 50 lodges.
The mission of Saincte Marie de Gannentaa was founded in 1655
on the shore of Lake Onondaga, 12 miles north of the mission of St.
Jean Baptiste; it was also called Saincte Marie du Lac de Gannentaa.
To this mission village, which was abandoned in 1658, the Jesuits
462 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN, 43
brought five small cannon. For the use of this mission the French
Governor Lauson, April 12, 1656, granted to the Jesuit Mathers “10
leagues of space in every direction, to wit, 10 leagues of front and 10
leagues in depth, and in the place where they shall choose to establish
themselves in the country of the Upper Iroquois called Onondagero-
nons, be it in the town or near the town of Onondage, or at Gan-
nentae . . . the said place to the extent of 10 leagues square is to be
possessed by the said reverend Jesuit Fathers, their successors and
assigns, in freehold forever.”’ This grant was made evidently without
the knowledge or the consent of the Onondaga and without any com-
pensation or emolument to them, a course of procedure quite in con-
trast with that of the Dutch and the English colonists in New York,
but, on the other hand, in close accord with the policy of Governor
Winthrop, of Massachusetts, tersely expressed in the formula that
“Tf we leave them sufficient for their use we may lawfully take the
rest, there being more than enough for them and us.”” This doctrine
was embodied into law by the General Court of Massachusetts in
1633, justifying its action by Biblical citations.
From the Jesuit Relations it is learned that under the operation
of the principle of conferring citizenship by adoption into some
definite stream of kinship common to the Iroquois state, there were
colonized at Onondaga in 1658 persons and families from at least
seven different alien tribes.
According to the same authority (Thwaites ed., uxv1, 203, 1900)
the Jesuit missions to the Onondaga and the Seneca were abandoned
in 1709, and in 1711 a French expedition built a blockhouse at
Onondaga 241% feet long and 18 feet wide, which Peter Schuyler
ordered destroyed along with other building material, as ‘‘there was
other wood ready to build a chappell.””. (In N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
V, 249, 1855.) Father Jean de Lamberville (Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed.,
Lxil, 1900) wrote of the Onondaga village of 1682 the following
interesting facts: ‘I found on my arrival the Iroquois of this town
occupied in transporting their corn, their effects, and their lodges to
a situation 2 leagues from their former dwelling place, where they
have been for 19 years. They made this change in order to have
nearer to them the convenience of firewood and fields more fertile
than those they abandoned.” This was probably the town visited
by Greenhalgh in 1677.
The League of the Iroquois had no chief magistrate or so-called
head chief. Each tribal council was composed of both Federal and
tribal chiefs, one of whom, usually a Federal chief, was the Fire-
keeper, like a speaker of a modern assembly, among whose duties it
was to open and close the sessions of the Council by an appropriate
and largely prescribed address. There were in each tribal council
chiefs whose office was not hereditary, but who through merit had
HEWITT] INTRODUCTION 463
been installed like other chiefs as chiefs of their tribe. At their
death their office ceased. In every tribe there were able men who
many times had as much if not more power than any member of the
council. Sometimes these men have been called head chiefs of their
respective tribes. After attaining this preeminence it was custom-
ary to install them as merit chiefs. Another name for this class of
chiefs was Pine-tree chiefs. In the original organization of the
League Council the last chief in the Onondaga list, Skanawati, was
made the Fire-keeper of the Federal Council. He was also given the
office of Chief Warrior, which made him the civil head of the warlike
activities of the League, and he alone of the 47 original Federal chiefs
had served in a double capacity, first as a Federal chief, and second,
virtually as a secretary of war. Hence it is said that his body was
divided in twain.
But at a later date two important groups of Seneca people were
persuaded to join the League of the Iroquois. Each group was under
the leadership of a very strong personality. These two men agreed
to join the League with their peoples on condition that they together
perform the functions of a modern secretary of state and secretary
of war, respectively. This naturally stripped Skanawati of his posi-
tion as Chief Warrior in the League. By the adhesion of these two
chiefs the Federal Council then numbered 49, and this number was
never changed, although the Tuscarora, the Nanticoke, the Tutelo,
and the Delaware were later adopted into the League as separate
tribes, and such of them as had chiefs were permitted to be repre-
sented in the Federal Council by their tribal chiefs.
The original constitution of the League recognized Federal women
chiefs, who had an equal official standing with the men chiefs, and
they had also the same right to attend the sessions of the Federal
Council; but these women chiefs did not always exercise this right
of attending the sessions of the Federal Council, but such kinship
groups as had women chiefs also provided them with spokesmen or
orators, who were the most noted speakers in their respective groups.
MYTHS
The myths of the Iroquoian peoples deal with three great mythic
cosmic periods. A race of gigantic anthropic beings dwelt in the
first—man-beings, let them be called—more ancient, and possessed
of more potent orenda® than man, and though possessed with
superior ability to perform the great elemental functions, character-
izing differently the things represented by them, nevertheless
they had the form, mien, and mind of man, their creator, for
unconsciously man did create the gods, the great primal beings of
cosmic time, the controllers or directors or impersonators of the
objects and phenomena of nature, in his own image. To these man-
beings, therefore, were unconsciously imputed the thought, manners,
customs, habits, and social organization of man, their creator.
Notwithstanding this fact, man regarded these beings as uncreated,
eternal, and immortal; for by a curious paradox man, mistaking his
own mental functions, his metaphors, for realities, explained his own
existence, his wisdom, and his activities as the divine product of
the creations of his own inchoate mind. The dwelling place of these
first great primal beings, which was characterized by flora and fauna,
respectively, identical with the plant and animal life appearing later
on the earth, was conceived to have been on the upper surface of
the visible sky, which was regarded as a solid plane. Here dwelt
these first beings in peace and contentment for a very long period of
time; no one knows or ever knew the length of this first cosmic period
of tranquil existence. But the time came when an event occurred
which resulted in a metamorphosis in the state and aspect of celes-
tial and earthly things; in fact, the seeming had to become or to
assume the real, and so came to pass the cataclysmic change of things
of the first period into that now seen on the earth and in the sky, and
the close of this period of strife and turmoil was the dawn of the gods
of these myths. Into the sunless and moonless skyland, lighted
only by the snowy white flowers of the great tree of light, standing
high near the lodge of De‘hao™hwéfdjiawa’’kho” (“He the Earth-
holder’), the presiding chief of that realm, jealousy crept. This
chief, reputed to be invincible to sorcery, took a young wife by
betrothal in fulfillment of a vision of his soul. The name of the
young woman was Awé™ha’i‘, ‘Mature Flowers,” or ‘‘ Mature
(i. e., fertile) Earth.” Through the crafty machinations of the
Fire Dragon of the White Body, the consuming jealousy of the aged
presiding chief was kindled against his young spouse. Unfortu-
See note on p. 608,
464
HEWITT) MYTHS 465
nately for her welfare, she, by inhaling the breath of her spouse
before the completion of their antenuptial ordeals, became partheno-
genetically gravid. The betrothed husband, not knowing the cause
or source of her condition, questioned her chastity, and with reluc-
tance resolved within himself to expel from his lodge and land his sus-
pected but innocent spouse, and because of inherent inability to aid
him, to change or transform at the same time the nature of all the
man-beings who were his neighbors and associates. The disturbed
state of his mind caused him to have another vision of his soul. In
fulfilment of the requirements of this vision he caused the tree of
light, then standing over the supposed aperture through which the
sun now shines, to be uprooted, whereby there was formed an abyss
into the empyrean of this world. By craft he succeeded in thrusting
his unsuspecting young spouse into this abyss.
Some versions of this genesis myth say that this event occurred
after Awe™ha’i‘ had given birth to a daughter, which by this occur-
rence was reconceived and to which she again gave birth on this
earth.
In like manner the man-beings, the Corn, the Bean, the Sun-
flower, the Tobacco, the Deer, the Wolf, the Bear, the Beaver, and
all their kinds he transformed into the forms and sizes and with
the habits by which they are known to-day on earth, and then cast
them down into the abyss. Only the Ancients, the so-called Elder
Brothers, of these things remained in the skyland. Then the rage of
De‘hao™hwéfdjiawa’’kho™ subsided and he had the tree of light
replaced. This great cataclysmic change was brought about because
none could divine a cure for his illness (jealousy) by “‘ searching for
his dream-word.’”’ These events brought about the establishment of
the second cosmical period.
The expelled bride, Awe™ha’i‘, while floating through cosmic space
or the upper sky was seen in her descent by the waterfowl and water
animals of the primal sea, who were likewise man-beings, and who at
once set themselves the task of providing a habitation for her.
Some versions of the genesis myth assert that the waterfowl of the
larger kinds flew up to meet her and to bring her slowly down as
she rested on their united backs. While this was being done the
best divers among the water animals brought up from the depths of
the sea some wet earth, which was carefully placed on the carapace
of the Great Turtle, also a man-being, who had previously volun-
teered to uphold the resting place which was being prepared for the
woman. This wet earth at once began to expand in size in all direc-
tions, and on it Awe™ha’i‘ was gently placed. At once she began
to walk about the tiny earth, and by this action she caused it to
continue to grow in size; she even took handfuls of the earth and
scattered it in all directions, which likewise caused it to continue to
466 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
expand until it had grown so large that she could no longer see its
bounds. Then shrubs, red willow, grasses, and other vegetation
began to appear.
In the fullness of time she gave birth to a daughter. After attain-
ing womanhood this daughter was courted by various man-beings and
other beings disguised in the assumed shape of fine-looking young men.
But, by her mother’s advice, she rejected the suit of all until a young
man of the race of the Great Turtle sought her to wife. He was
accepted and bidden to the lodge of her mother. At twilight he
came to the lodge bearing two, some say three, arrows, of which one
was tipped with a flint point. As the young woman lay down he
passed two of the arrows, including the flint-tipped one, over her
body; others say that he placed them in the wall of the lodge just
above her body. He at once departed and said that he would return
the next day. At twilight he returned, and taking his arrows at
once withdrew, saying that he would not again return.
In due time the young woman gave birth to twins, one of whom
caused her death by violently bursting through her armpit. The
name of the culprit twin was O‘ha’aé’, and that of his brother, the
elder, was De‘haé“hiyawa’’kho™. Awe™ha‘i‘, the grandmother,
being greatly enraged by the death of her daughter, asked the twins
which of the twain had committed this act. O‘ha’a’ quickly replied
and accused his innocent brother. So, seizing the supposed culprit,
the grandmother cast him far away among the shrubbery. He did
not die there, but grew rapidly to manhood. His grandmother
hated him bitterly, but was very fond of O‘ha’a’. In time De‘ha陑-
hiyawi’’kho” was taught by his father how to build a lodge, to
kindle fire, and to plant and cultivate the ground, his father giving
him bean, melon, squash, tobacco, and corn seed. He gave his son
likewise the third arrow, it is said, by which he must destroy the Great
Water Serpent, the Fire Dragon of the White Body, when it should
begin to destroy the things he was to create and cause to grow.
De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho”™ then toiled at his tasks, forming the various
kinds of animals and birds and making various varieties of useful
trees, shrubs, and plants. In all this work his grandmother and his
twin brother sought to thwart him by all manner of devices, but by
the timely counsel of his father he was able to defeat their efforts.
De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ labored to prepare the earth for man, the
human being, whom later he was to create. For ease of transit for
man De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ had made the rivers and streams with
double currents, the one current running upstream and the other
running downstream; but his brother changed this well-intentioned
device by putting falls and cascades in the rivers and streams. The
grandmother, seeing that De‘haé™hiyawd’’kho™ had _ produced
great ears of perfect corn, immediately blighted them and said,
HEWITT] MYTHS 467
“You desire the human beings you are about to make to be too happy
and too well provided with necessaries.”” Notwithstanding the op-
position of his brother and his grandmother to his work for the welfare
of human beings, he in large measure thwarted all their schemes.
Finally the grandmother, who had exhausted all her methods of
opposition, challenged her grandson, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™, to a
game of the bowl and plum pits, the prize of the winner to be the
rulership of the phenomena, processes, and the flora and fauna of
the earth. The grandson willingly accepted the challenge. In accord-
ance with custom, 10 days were allowed the contestants to prepare
for the struggle of their powerful orendas.* At the end of this time
the grandmother came to the lodge of her grandson, bringing her
bowl and plum pits. He said he would use her bowl, but not her
plum pits, as these were something alive and under the control of
the mind of the grandmother, or the user. The plum pits in this
game serve as dice. The dice of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ were the
tops of the heads of chickadees, who had responded to his call for
aid. He took six of the tops of the heads, and they remained magi-
cally alive. When he and his grandmother were ready De‘haé™-
hiyawa’’kho™ called in a loud voice, ‘‘All you whose bodies I have
formed, do you now put forth to the uttermost your orenda, in order
that we may conquer in this struggle, so that you may live!”’” Then,
when it came his turn to shake the bowl, he exclaimed, “‘ Now, verily,
shall appear the good or ill fortune of all the things that I have
done or made!”’ But the grandmother failed to score, while De‘haé-
“hiyawa’’kho™ made the highest score possible at one shake of the
bowl, and so won the government and rulership of all living things.
Finally this great bet between De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ and_ his
redoubtable grandmother is dramatized and played at the annual
New Year festival and also at the annual harvest festival or in-
gathering of crops. The two coordinate sides of tribal organiza-
tion play against each other. At this great bet one of the sides,
occupying the east side of the gaming mat, represents the side of
the Master of Life, De‘haé™hiyawa’’hko™. But the two sides alter-
nate in taking this eastern position. The late chief priest, Henry
Stevens, of the Seneca Cattaraugas Reservation in New York, being
asked whether it was more lucky to occupy the eastern side or not,
replied, “‘I was on that side last year and we got beat bad.”
De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ was an imaginary man-being of the cos-
mogonic philosophy of the Iroquoian and other American myth-
ologies. He was, in brief, the symbolic embodiment or personifica-
tion of all earthly life, floral and faunal. The wise men of the elder
time attributed to him the formation or creation and conservation
of life and the living things in normal and beneficent bodies and
See note on p. 608,
468 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
things in terrestrial nature. His peculiar character as one of the
great primal earth powers of the second great cosmical period of the
genesis myth is best defined in terms of the manifestations and the
activities of the various forms of floral and faunal life, reproduction,
germination, budding, and growth, on the earth. His parentage
was noble, although seemingly not definitely fixed. This interpre-
tation and definition of the mythic concept embodied in the domi-
nant character of De‘haé™hiyaw4’’hko”™ is given here as that which
most satisfactorily accounts for the motives and activities mani-
fested in his life, notwithstanding the fact that he has been connected
in an indefinite way with the sun or light and the sky by such well-
known writers as Lafitau, Charlevoix, Le Jeune, Brinton, and others.
These writers were probably misled by regarding the derivation of
the name as conclusive evidence of the reason for its imposition on
him. In the most definite of the cosmic mythical traditions of the
Iroquois people De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ was a twin brother of O‘ha’a’,
although other and perhaps earlier and more primitive accounts
made him a quadruplet along with his brother mentioned above, the
number four being probably suggested, however, by the well-nigh
universal cult of the four quarters.
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ has been erroneously identified by different
authorities with Hiawatha, one of the founders of the League of the
Iroquois and a Federal chief of its first council; with Agreskwe
(Aregwé"s’kwa’, ‘The Reason or Cause for Absence’), the Iroquoian
war god; and with Agatkonchoria, ‘““Mask-Face,”’ the Mohawk name
of a society whose members are professed exorcists of disease, deriv-
ing their authority from Hadu’i’’ (Onondaga) or Shagodiidwe’’gowa
(Seneca), the primal man-being of disease and a contemporary of
De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™. Megapolensis gives Athzoockuatoriaho as
another Mohawk epithet of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”. The meaning
of this term is not known.
One of the most important and significant of the final labors of
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” on this earth was in winning his great victory
in a contest of orendas over the hunchback man-being Hadu’’’, the
unborn primal being Disease and Death, and whose forfeiture of life
by his defeat was redeemed by his promise to aid mankind by curing,
on certain conditions, diseases arising from the infection of the earth
with the malign potency of the body of Hadu’i” by his having first
wandered over it. To this event the important masked-face societies
of exorcists of disease among the Iroquoian tribes owe their origin,
At the festival of the New Year the members of these societies essay
to exorcise and banish disease and death-causing agencies from the
several communities.
The great and most important festival of the New Year among
the Iroquoian tribes, in accordance with their ancient faith and
HEWITT] MYTHS 469
customs, and at which is burned a male and a female dog, pure
white in color, as bearers of thanksgivings of the people, is held in
honor of De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™ for his works, blessings, and good-
ness, which have been enjoyed by the people during the year.
In going from place to place on the earth doing his work one day
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ found that all the animals, seemingly, which
he had formed had disappeared. Not at once suspecting the cause,
he went in many directions seeking them. While thus unsuccess-
fully engaged a bird informed him that they were virtually held
captive in a vast cavern in-a rock cliff, wherein his brother had con-
cealed them. Having discovered the place, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”
removed the rock that closed the mouth of the cavern and at once
ordered the captive animals and the birds to come forth. While
the creatures were thus issuing in obedience to the command of their
maker, O‘ha’a’ and his grandmother, noticing that the animals were
again becoming plentiful about them, and divining the cause, hastened
to the mouth of the cavern and at once closed it with the great rock.
The few creatures which did not have the opportunity to escape
became changed somewhat in their natures, which thereafter were
wholly evil, uncanny, monstrous, and otkon.’
Seemingly this incident of the concealment of the animals is a
figurative statement of the annual forced hibernation of certain
animals and reptiles and the migration of certain birds, and also
shows that De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho"’ possessed the power of changing
the seasons by bringing back the summer. Since all game animals
were intended to serve for the perpetual sustenance of human beings,
then about to be formed, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ enjoined on them
the duty of permitting themselves to be taken or killed, provided
that human beings in killing them should do it with dispatch and that
they should not be killed in sport. In furtherance of this injunction
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ questioned some of the animals to learn in
what manner their posterity would defend themselves against human
beings. The bear, for example, replied that his posterity would
flee to escape; thereupon De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ stuck the bear’s
legs full of fat and meat in order to make him slow and clumsy in
running. The deer answered that his posterity would stand and
not flee and would instead bite human beings who hunted them;
then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ twisted out the teeth of the deer’s
upper jaw, thus rendering his bite comparatively harmless. A
similar change was made in the buffalo and the elk.
See note on p. 608.
THE MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER
[i. e., of De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™]
Thus verily it came to pass in ancient times. This is the manner
in which the earth formed itself and became in this place. Here in
this very place was the home of a kindred group who were at all times
few in number, and they had no one who had mystic power who could
have been able to outmagic the orenda of whatever kind of thing or
being might put in an appearance on the earth. Always, then, also
it was so with them that one would think they were very destitute.
That was the cause then that the Elder One decided to make the
attempt to do in the manner of the saying of the time that if one is
down-fended that one has mystic power and can not fail in anything,
because indeed one is a wizard. He himself, De‘haé™hyondyé‘so"k,
the Elder Man in his kindred group, had two sisters’ children. One
of the children was a man child and the other was a woman child in
her turn. And that came to pass that the Elder Man said, “That
verily so it is, is the custom from early times, and then you two
children, of whom I am your uncle (mother’s brother), that then I
make a rule for you two, and that is that I will conceal your persons
during the period of your youthhood. Never shall a human being
see you until the time that you two grow to manhood and woman-
hood, and not until then shall you two mingle among people.”
Then he concealed their bodies, the old man saying, “ And that
state to which I give you up is called by the name down-fended.
And that signifies that you two shall possess goodness of mind and
that then you two shall not have any stain on you of evil. That
then shall take place with regard to my life. We shall not again see
one another, and the reason that this shall come to pass is that
there is a matter outstanding of ill omen toward me. That then
shall take place when I will die that my body shall lie at the top of
the very highest tree; thereon shall my body lie. Then no one
dwelling in this place will be able to enchant me.
“That moreover shall be that whichever one of these you two
persons, of whom I am your mother’s brother, will feel the need
perhaps of hearing my voice again, it will be possible that that shall
take place.”
Then the smaller of these two children, the woman child, she
began to weep, saying, “In what manner of way shall I do to see
thee again, my mother’s brother? Not very well, poor me, can I be
able to climb the place where you shall be?”’
At that time the Elder Man said, “ Thou shalt be able indeed if
thou shalt be a good child.” At that time they separated.
470
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 471
Then this Elder Man told his young sister, saying, ‘‘ Now I have
completed the matter relating to your children. Now then to thee
I leave the entire matter. Thou must treat thy children well and
kindly. That shall come to pass should your manner of doing be
remiss in the care of your children that a very important matter
will come to pass about the lives of these two. Verily that is coming
to pass that we shall be separated one from another, and also we
shall not see one another again. Not also shall we converse together
again. That until the time shall come that the unfulfilled matter
which is to come to pass here upon the earth, then and only then
you will hear my voice again, until the time shall have come.”
At that time the Elder Man became ill, and then it was not long
until he died. At that time Elder Woman said, ‘‘What manner of
thing shall we do in this thing that has befallen us?” At that time
then her son, the down-fended, said, ‘‘I verily, perhaps, so shall do
as he has ordered. That verily he said, ‘On the top of the tree
shall lie my body.’ ”’
Then the Elder Woman set to work making the casing (coffin),
and bark was the kind of thing out of which she made it, wherein
they did enclose his body. Then when she completed her task
they took up his body and they placed it in the casing of bark. At
this time, then, the Elder Woman said, “Now verily I have com-
pleted what was needful for your (two) uncle. Now verily the time
has come that we shall separate. Now it will be impossible for us
to converse again.’’ Then this male youth, the down-fended, took
up this casing, placing it on his shoulder, and then he started and
went toward the place where stood the very tallest pine tree. As
soon as he arrived there he climbed it. At the very top of the tree
he placed the casing with the body. Now as to the Elder Woman,
she watched what was taking place. Then verily she became greatly
astonished at what she saw. Then at that time this male youth
descended.
Then at this time verily she concealed again his body. She again
put him in the place where he was accustomed to abide.
Then during the time that the Elder Woman dwelled by herself
she was surprised that a man came in the lodge and said, ‘ Whither
have they your family gone?”’ Then this Elder Woman replied,
“They all are absent.’’ Then this man answered, saying, ‘“‘ What I
am coming to do, you know, is a matter of ill omen; that is, he our
chief, the Owner of the Standing Tree, has sent me. I have come to
say that it has become necessary to him that all the people dwelling
here should receive the notice that it might either be possible that
one should ‘seek his word,’ or next to that that one should ‘ dis-
cover his word.’ That then verily thou shalt tell when thy family
will return. That is also needful that everyone should receive a
472 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
revelation and that it is certain that it is unknown what will come
to pass if that should take place, it may be, that no one should reveal
his word to him. We two, I say, know that they have begun to
visit him.”
Then at this time the Elder Woman spoke, saying, ‘“‘ I do not know
what thing, perhaps, I should do. With regard to our Elder Man,
he is at the tree top; and regarding my children, they are still down-
fended.”’ Then the strange man said, “‘There, you know, perhaps it
is proper that they will be included in the thing that is desired by
the Owner of the Standing Tree.” At this time, then, the man
departed.
Tt was not long when the child, the daughter of the head of this
family, began to weep. Now verily the Elder Woman asked, saying,
“What kind of thing do you desire?” Then this girl child did not
answer. Then this Elder Woman now began designating customarily
various things and saying, “Is that the thing that thou desirest to
see? ”’
It was a very long time that it was impossible for the girl child to
cease from her weeping. At that time, then, the Elder Woman now
spoke, saying, ‘‘It may be perhaps that thou desirest to see again thy
uncle?’ Then at that time the girl child ceased from her weeping.
Then the Elder Woman spoke, saying, “‘Exceedingly is it difficult.
Not, verily, am I myself able to carry thy body up.”’ Then the male
child said, “I verily will do the kind of thing that is needful to be
done.”
Then at that time he took up the person of the girl child and he
climbed to the very place where her uncle was fastened to the tree
top.
They two arrived at the place where lay the case, and then the
girl child looked on her deceased uncle and she became contented in
her mind. At that time, then, they two descended again.
It was not a very long time after when this man again came there
and said, “‘ Now it is indeed that you and your offspring are the only
ones who have not yet visited the place where Hodi’‘he’® is giving his
feast, and so now verily it is very necessary that some one from among
you should visit that place. It is possible still that he who is giving
the feast might be pleased mentally.”’
Then this Elder Woman said, ‘“‘ Who are the persons severally who
have visited that place?”’ Then this man replied, ‘‘That I suppose
would be good that thou shouldst go there. Then what took place
would be definite. Thou then could converse together with him
who is giving the feast.’? Then this Elder Woman said, “Truly,
just that also will come to pass.’’ Then the man said, ‘‘Thou and I
verily too will go together.”” Then they two went to his home.
And so when they two arrived at his home, then the man said,
“Now, do thou know, I have brought her person here for whom
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 473
thou didst send me, for that thou desirest that her offspring should
come and be present at thy feast?’’ Then this Hodi’‘he’ said,
“Now verily all, as many as dwell here, have paid a visit here. So
then not one of thy family has yet paid a visit to this place. It is
possible, I think, that you and they have the power to give the answer
to the workings of my mind.”
Then this woman said, ‘‘What persons then are they whom you
say have visited this place?’’ Then this Hoda’‘he’ said, “TI believe
now that all persons have been here. Now verily those who have
been here are the Sun (the globe of day) and the Moon (the globe of
night) and the Star and the Tree and the Bush and the Grass and
the Animals and the Birds (flyers) and those who run about over
the earth and the Springs of Water and the Flowing Waters and the
Light and the Clouds and the Corn and the Squash and the Tobacco
and the Night and the Daylight and the Thunders and the Water
and the Meteor or Fire Dragon and the Blue Sky and the Air. And
that is the reason I think all have now come. There is verily only
one still lacking. The Wind has not yet visited this place, of all
those who have been here. And I desire that that perhaps should
come to pass that one should reveal to me my word. I intend prob-
ably that I will thrust through the ground all the things which this
place holds, and this shall take place because now, it is known, verily
they have failed to aid me here in this world.
“Tt is probable, now, it will be possible that it will aid the others,
the new things that will sprout up of all those things which have life
which are not subject to the lethal powers of the earth.
“That then will come to pass here on this earth. All shall be
changed, new things in their turn will sprout up.” Then this woman
replied, ‘I suppose that it will not be long when the time will come
if, as you know, it may be done in turn, that my several offspring
should seek to reveal thy word. I have two children, and the only
thing is that they are still small children.”’
Then this Hodi’‘he’ spoke, saying, “Just so, too, it will be all right.
I will verily wait.”’ Then he continued and he again gave utterance
to his voice, saying, “‘Look thou verily at the space of time that
this standing tree still has; now verily all its blossoms are in bloom,
and until the time comes that these blossoms fall off, that is the term
when this my feast will come to an end. And the only thing that
keeps things in good order is that those who are enjoying themselves
give diversion to my mind.”
Then the woman said, ‘Now then I will return to my home,
That then shall come to pass. Truly, I suppose, my two children
shall make the attempt when I think that the time has come.”
Then, of course, she went home.
19078°—28——31
A74. IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Then when she returned to the place where stood their lodge, then
verily she heard these two down-fended ones talking together. The
male person was saying, “‘ Now our uncle needs thee up there. Now
then go thither.’ Then his sister said, ‘‘Knowest thou then what
our uncle desires?’”’ At that time this male person spoke, saying,
“T do know. It is good, too, that thou thyself should hear when
he utters his word. Now then, go thou thither at once.” ,
Then verily she went out of the lodge and she went thither to the
place where stood the tree at the top of which he lay. And when she
arrived at the top of the tree, at the place where lay the bark coffin,
then she said, ‘Is it true that thou hast need of me?’”’ Then he
replied, saying, ‘It is true. I need thee. And the reason is that the
time has now arrived for the unfulfilled matter concerning thy person.
Now then I will tell thee what will come to pass. Now then thou
shalt depart from here. Thither verily then thou shalt go to the
place where stands the lodge of him who is giving the feast, whose
name is Hodi’‘he’. As is known, the flowers of his standing tree
give the light of day to the people who dwell in that place. Then
when thou hast arrived there thou shalt say, ‘Now then I have
arrived.’
“Then the man will say, ‘From what place hast thou come?’
Thou wilt reply, ‘I verily started from the place where my uncle has
a standing tree.’ Then he will say, ‘What kind of thing then brings
thy body?’ Thou wilt say, ‘Only that brings my body which is the
cause that thou art giving a feast.’ Then he will ask thee, he will
say indeed, ‘What kind of thing then art thou named?’ Thou wilt
say, ‘I verily am the one whom they call Awé™ha’1‘ (Mature Flowers)’.
Then he will say, ‘I am thankful. Now verily has been fulfilled the
thing for which I am giving the feast. Now then thou shalt bear
away with thee all those things which I shall cause to pass through the
cround (out of the world).’ I will then tell thee one other thing,
and that is that you must give particular attention when he will
say, ‘Here verily is thy mat (couch).’ At that time he will say, as
is well known, ‘That then will be the first thing, that thou shalt
prepare food for me, thou wilt make mush; chestnuts will be its
material.’ That then when thou shalt make mush for him it will
sputter and it will stick to your body. Do not then give utterance
to words should it by any means be too hot. And when the mush
will be cooked he will call to him his two dogs, his servants, and they
two will lick over thy body repeatedly and they will wipe away the
mush. Do thou have the uttermost courage. Do not give utterance
to a word. If it so be that thou wilt be able not to cry out, then
thou wilt have passed through that ordeal.
“The second thing that is a serious matter is when he will say
that, ‘I have dreamed. Verily, indeed, I was aware that they
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 475
uprooted the tree, my standing tree, the one bearing mature flowers.
Verily, indeed, I was aware that there shall my wife and I seat
ourselves at the place where the earth was broken through, even
where they had uprooted the tree. Verily, indeed, I was aware
that therein the feet of my wife hung.’ That, then, I will tell thee,
do not thou falter at all when it thus comes to pass.” At that time,
then, the maiden descended.
When she reentered the place where her brother was abiding she
said, ‘‘Now the time has come for me to depart. Thither shall I
go to the place where Hodi’‘he’ has his feast.’? Then this young
man said, ‘““To do thus is also all right. And that, I believe, will
come to pass, that thou shalt depart from the earth which is here
present. That then shall come to pass, that at whatever time thou
wilt remember me thou wilt customarily say ‘ De‘hado™hwéfdjiyén’-
do™s.’* That then as to that shall come to pass. As to that, habitu-
ally all shall become aware of it when thou wilt remember me.”
Then at that time they two separated.
Then at that time the maiden departed. The time was not long
before she arrived there at the place where stood the lodge of
Hoda’‘he’, who was giving a feast. Then, of course, she looked
about and she then saw that his standing tree was a mass of blossoms,
and then she saw there a large body of people assembled. Then at
that time she went into the lodge. At that time then she said,
“Now behold I have arrived.’”’ Then he, the owner of the lodge,
said, “From what place didst thou come?” Then this girl said, ‘It
is I, verily, who departed from that place where the tree of my
mother’s brother stands.” Then this owner of the lodge said,
“What manner of thing then urged along thy body that thou hast
arrived?’ Then the girl said, “That merely was my purpose in
coming here was the feast which you are giving.’’ Then the owner
of the lodge said, ‘What manner of thing then art thou named?”
Then the girl replied, saying, ‘‘I am indeed the one whom people
call Awé™ha’i‘.”” Then this owner of the lodge said, “I am thankful
that now thou hast arrived. Now then that is accomplished for
which I gave the feast. Now then that has become a thing of the
past. And now many persons have paid a visit to the place where
stands my tree. And that then shall be, that now thou shalt take
all away with thee, for have I not now thrust through the ground all
the things that this place held, the things that take a place here?
And that then as to those things all shall now be changed (meta-
morphosed). Both shall become new again, those things on the
earth present here shall become new again, for is not this my stand-
ing tree now bearing a mass of dead flowers?”’
Then he assigned her a mat for a bed, and said, ‘‘This mat spread
here verily is thy mat for a bed. Now it has been a long time that
See note on p. 609.
476 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
I have been expecting thee to arrive here.’”’ Then verily she seated
herself in the place designated by him.
Then the owner of the lodge said, “That then now I tell thee,
that I desire that thou shouldst prepare food, that thou shouldst
then prepare mush. The material shall be chestnuts. That then
when the food will be cooked for thee, thou and I will eat together
when we eat.”
Then he said, ‘‘Now verily thou must begin it.’”” Then she said,
“Where then is what I will use?”” He spoke and said, ‘‘Si’‘hagwa‘.
Yonder is a doorway and there beyond the door li all that thou
shalt use.’ Then she entered the place he designated.
Now then she got a pot and she hung the pot (over the fire). And
she put water into it. And then when the water became hot, then
she cut chestnuts and then she grated them and the meal which she
made she put into the water. Then at that time it commenced to
sputter, and the hot mush stuck to her body all over. She was
burned indeed now and she did not falter. Then when the mush
was cooked for her then she removed the kettle from the fire and
said, ‘‘Now verily the food is cooked for thee.’”’ Then the owner of
the lodge said, ““‘What thing is the cause that those things appear on
thy body?” Then the girl said, ‘‘That verily was caused thus by
my having prepared food.’’ Then the owner of the lodge said,
“Verily it will be possible that it will be removed by my servants,
the dogs, by their licking it off of thee.” Then Awé™hai‘ said, ‘Let
it also happen thus.’’ At that time he bade his servants, the dogs,
to come. So now they two animals came into the lodge, and then
she saw that they two were frightfully large. Then verily they
licked her body, and it was so painful that one would think that
just a little she winced. Then they two removed all the mush that
had fallen repeatedly on her body. At that time the owner of the
lodge said, “I am thankful that now thou hast accomplished the
matter.”
Then verily they two took food.
And then when they two finished eating, the lodge owner said,
“Verily thou didst see a large body of people assembled on the field;
and as is well known they are about to amuse themselves; they will
play at lacrosse ball. Verily they will give diversion to my mind.
That then shall come to pass that so long as they shall be assembled
here do not thou converse together with anyone; if it shall be that
some one will address words to you, it will not be good that it so
come to pass.”
At that time then they played lacrosse ball on the field. And then
during the time that they were at play different ones there came there
and addressed words to her and the girl was not moved to make reply.
Then at the time when the affair was over then verily all dispersed.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 477
Then this known man again heralded the matter, saying, ‘‘To-
morrow still again you will return here.”
Then when morning came then again a large body of people as-
sembled. At that time again they amused themselves. They
played at lacrosse ball.
Then during the time that they were playing this owner of the
lodge, Hoda’‘he’, said (to the girl), ‘‘Thou shouldst go to bring water
from the spring yonder.” Then she took up that in which she would
bring the water. Of course she passed the place where were many
persons. In a very short while she arrived at the place where there
was a cliff. Just there she saw the outflowing water. Then she
dipped up the water and then started back. Then as she had come
perhaps one-half of the distance back, then one man of the persons
who were at play came there to the place where the girl was walking
and he said, ‘‘Wouldst thou consent then that I should drink what
thou art carrying?’”’ Then verily she gave to him and then he drank
the water. When he finished drinking the water, then he gave the
rest back to her, and he said, ‘‘I am thankful.”” Then the girl
replied, saying, “So be it.”’ At that time then she threw away the
water that she had been carrying and went back and dipped up
again there fresh water.
Then again she started homeward. When she had reentered her
lodge, then the owner of the lodge said, ‘‘ Verily thou didst do then
the kind of thing that I had forbidden you. I said verily, do not thou
reply to anyone soever who will address words to thee.’ Then
this girl, she who is a woman, said, ‘‘Now I also will not do thus
another time.’’ Then this man said, ‘‘I will then tell thee that thing.
That verily thy mother has not yet made a visit here, that she should
confirm what has taken place since you came here. Perhaps then
it will suffice for good that thou shouldst return there and tell (thy
mother) that there is only one condition upon whach what you have
promised will become valid. That now thou will not do this again
another time in that you made a mistake.’’ At that time then the
girl said, ‘‘Thus too also I will do. I will just go back there where
abides my mother.’”’ Then she returned home.
When she arrived she said, ‘‘ Behold, I come to tell what has come
to pass in the place where I live. And that is that I went to dip up
water at the place of the flowing spring and then when I dipped it
up then verily I started back home. Then as I was on my way back,
at the place where they were playing lacrosse ball one man then
came there and asked for water. Then I gave it to him. That
then when he drank the water he gave me back the water and he
said, ‘I am thankful.’ At that time then I replied and said, ‘So
be it.’ That then when I got back the bucket I threw the water
away right there, and then I went and dipped up other water. That
478 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
then when I returned home the owner of the lodge said, ‘Thou hast
not accomplished what I said, that thou do not utter a word should
anyone soever address words to thee.’ And right after this he said,
‘That there is only one way thou canst make amends, and that is that
thou shalt go back to the place whence thou didst come and tell thy
mother that she has not yet verily paid a visit to this place and that
not yet also has she confirmed thy living here in this place.’”’
Then the Elder Woman said, ‘Certainly, indeed, I have delayed
too long. Now, as to that, I have prepared that by which I shall
confirm the matter. Now, as to that, here lies a basket of bread
mixed with huckleberries. Now then I will go there to the place
where stands the lodge of him who is named Hodi’‘he’ that I may
give satisfaction to his mind. Verily his mind has become aggrieved.
That then perhaps shall come to pass. Verily thou shalt continue
to abide here. I, so weak, will make a visit there first.”’ Then at
that time she bore with a forehead strap a basket of bread, marriage
bread, and she then departed.
When then she arrived at the place where stood the lodge of
Hoda’‘he’, then the Elder Woman said, ‘“‘ Now behold, I have arrived.
Now also I bring the thing that confirms the matter, now then I
agree to it that my daughter, Awé™hai‘, now lives together with
thee.’ And then she set down the basket in front of the place where
Hodi’‘he’ sat.
Then the lodge owner took out the marriage bread and he said,
“Now verily the matter has been adjusted. Now the public have
been awaiting this a long while. For that, as is the custom, all will
share it by eating.” Then he said, ‘“‘Then I will tell thee that thy
daughter verily goes about from place to place’ once thou didst depart.
That then when thou returnest there thou shalt tell her that she shall
depart thence. That then will come to pass. Verily she shall make
a straight course hither, that she do not anywhere stand before she
arrives here.’”? At that time he said, ‘‘Now then I will tell thee
that now I will prepare for thee a burden of dried meat, which thou
shalt bear away with thee. That too when thou carriest this back
into thy lodge, then all thy people shall share it by eating. So then
at that time verily the minds of all will be pleased.”
Then at that time verily the dried meat he placed in her basket,
and it all was dried meat. When this basket was filled he said,
“Now verily thou must return home. When then thou hast re-
turned to the place whence thou didst depart, then verily thy daugh-
ter must depart thence. Now as to that nothing remains unsettled.
Everything is peaceful.”’
Now then the Elder Woman again bore a basket by the forehead
strap. Then she departed for home. When she returned she said,
“My daughter, Awé™hai‘, now behold this, I have settled the whole
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 479
matter. Now then verily thou must at once depart hence, going to
the place where stands the lodge of thy husband, Hodi’‘he’.”” Then
the girl departed.
Now verily she traveled along all alone. Then when she had not
gone very far there stood a man—one might think it was her husband.
He said, ‘‘Art thou now on thy way back home? Behold this, I
have come to meet thee on the way.’ She did not stop and the girl
did not make answer. Then when she looked up he transformed
himself. He became a fox.’ She looked there until it ran away
yonder. Now again she had not gone very far when verily again
another man she saw standing there beside the road. Then again
he said, ‘‘Now thou and I have met. For behold, I have come to
meet thee on the way.’’ Again she did not stop. Also she did not
make answer. Then again she looked and she saw him transform
himself. This one became a wolf again. There she kept on looking
until it ran away yonder. Thus it was she continued to travel con-
tinually. Now again she had not gone very far when she was sur-
prised to see a man coming toward her along the path. And this
one she recognized, this one now coming was the owner of the lodge
to which she was then going. Now verily they met and then the
man said, ““At home I became anxious that thou shouldst again
return there, and that is the reason I have come to meet thee.”
Again she did not stop and again she did not make answer. Then
again she looked and she saw there that he transformed himself, and
as to that one he became again a bear. She saw him run away
yonder. There it disappeared.
Then when she arrived home again she at once said, ‘“‘ Now, behold
this, I have returned.’”’ At that time the owner of the lodge said,
“T am thankful that now thou hast passed through the ordeal.”
Now verily at that time she remained there for some time. It was
the custom that when again they lay down to sleep that there when
they lay down that they placed their feet sole to sole, that there
when they arose to a sitting posture what they kept breathing
met and commingled. .
Suddenly then her body gave evidence that she would become a
mother. When the time was near at hand when she would become
possessed of a child, then the owner of the lodge said, “I have dreamed
a dream. So then verily I desire that the people should seek!° my
word. And the reason for this action is that the kind of thing of
which my soul has visions should become manifest. For, as is well
known, it is a specified dream.”
Then at that time verily he gave a feast to the inhabitants. Now
then it began that they sought for his word. The time was long
and perhaps all, men and women and game animals, made the attempt.
Owing to evil influences it was not possible to give satisfaction to
See note on p. 609.
480 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
his mind. So, at that time the Fire Dragon (Meteor), whose body
was white, arrived there and said, ‘Let me in my turn make the
attempt to find thy word. That then verily is not a certain matter
that thy life may have seen us (the need) that we should uproot thy
standing tree, Tooth (Tiger Lily)?’ Then at that time he who was
giving the feast said, “I am thankful. Now has been fulfilled the
suggestions of my dream. Now then I will tell you (pl.). Verily I
thought that I saw it come to pass that they did uproot my standing
tree; that there then it came to pass that there was made an opening
through the ground. Verily I thought that I saw that I and my
wife there at the edge of the chasm (broken ground) sat down
together, her feet verily hanging down into the chasm. At that
time then we two ate food at the edge of the chasm of the broken
earth. This is the character of my dream. I saw all the things that
shall come to pass.”
Then at that time a large body of men were assembled there, and
said, ““Come, under the circumstances, then let the suggestions of
the dream of our chief be undertaken.”
Then at that time the men severally grasped it and then uprooted
the standing tree of Hodi’‘he’ (the tree that stood for Hodi’‘he’),
and that came to pass, it left an opening through the ground, there
was made a chasm through the earth. At that time then the men
said, ‘‘Now verily we have fulfilled the requirements of what
caused our chief to dream.’’ Then this owner of the lodge said,
“Now verily all that which is of Fate has come to pass. Now
verily the flowers of the tree that stood for me have withered.
Now then all that the earth at present here contains shall change,
all verily shall become new. All things shall be metamorphosed.”
Then he said, “‘Now then verily we two, my wife, will eat together
at the edge of the chasm.”
Then at that time she herself, Aw陓hai‘, verily brought and set in
order the food beside the place of the broken earth. Now then she
seated herself there and she said, “‘ Now all that thy dream suggests
has been fulfilled.”
Then that one seated himself there and he said, ‘“‘ Now all kinds of
things that are ordered are fulfilled. Now then thou and I shall
eat together, and this too is ordained. That then when it will come
to;pass thus that those things which will have become low they will
think of this place.”
Then at that time he stood up and said, ‘‘Now then thou dost
depart from the earth present here.”’ And then at that time he
thrust her and then her body fell there into the place where the earth
was broken. And there verily in the chasm she disappeared (was
drowned). Then the men set up the tree of light again.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 481
Now then on the way as her body was floating down there she
saw the Fire Dragon, whose Body was White, who seized her body
in flight and said, “‘Dost thou then travel? Art thou departing from
home? I will aid you then in all things in which I am able to do so.
Verily that will be in accordance with the measure of the power
which I possess, so that thou shouldst continue to live when thou
arrivest below. And the reason that this shall come to pass is that
verily thy former husband accused me of the things for which he
cast thee down. I am bringing with me then that upon which thou
shalt live when thou dost arrive below.”
Then at that time she saw that he held corn and meat, both dried.
At that time verily she received both. Then at that time he said,
*‘T will accompany thee and I will turn back at one-half the distance
to the place whither thou goest.”’
Then verily she passed on. Not very long after and not much
farther did she go when the other one said, ‘So far only on the way
am I able to be of assistance to thee. And then thou bearest with
thee power, if it will be possible that safely thou pass through this
ordeal. Not as to that will the time be long when it will become
again as it was in the place whence thou didst depart.’’ Then at
that time the woman thanked him (by nodding her head) and then
that one, the man,'! went back.
Now verily the man passed on. And so there were there below
many Ducks of all kinds. So then a man,” a Duck, there present,
and who was at all times looking upward, suddenly now he cried out,
he said, ‘It would seem that a Man Being is falling down from
above.” Then at that time Hahowen (Loon) he cried out, saying,
“Come, now, do ye rise up, do ye go to meet her, so that gently she
will come to stand here when her body arrives here.”’
Then at that time the Ducks of all kinds flew and they raised
themselves upward and there, high above, they met her; and the
Ducks joined their bodies together severally and at that time thereon
she seated herself on their united bodies. Then verily slowly down-
ward they returned. When again they alighted below it continued
that they went about with their bodies joined together, floating about,
and thereon the woman sat, going about.
Then at that time Hahowen (Loon) shouted, saying, “Now all to-
gether come hither.’’ Then at that time all assembled in one place.
At that time Hahowen spoke, saying, ‘‘ Now verily we are assembled,
we who were the first * to arrive here. Now then verily it becomes
necessary that we should give assistance to her who is of the second
arrival here. Now then will become manifest what is the extent of
the power of each one of us, in order that by all means verily the
woman should continue to live. He, Dehaenhyagahaa," verily was
See note on p. 609.
482 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
the first one who was able to see her while her body floated down
hither. Now then let some one perhaps plan how we should do that
this woman should continue to live. In what place shall we place
her to abide?”’
Then at that time the various kinds of Ducks made the attempt.
Verily they were not able to devise a suitable plan. Then Hahowen
said, ‘‘You in your turn who are able to travel about in the depths
of the water will make an attempt. It may be, in turn, you might
discover what you should devise that could keep her body from
sinking.”” Then at that time all made attempts. Then Hanohgye
(Muskrat) said, ‘“‘I will fetch earth from the bottom of the water.
That then shall come to pass. If it so be I am able to bring back
with me earth, then we shall be fortunate. For is it not well known
that she verily bears with her (creative) power?”
At that time then Hanohgye dove down into the water. The time
was long. Then his body came to the surface. He was already long
dead. At that time Hahowen said, ‘Now, do ye seek out what
thing came to pass that he is not alive.”’
Then Nagayahgih (Beaver) said, “‘ Let me, too, verily, perhaps, vol-
unteer.”” Now, then he searched Hanohgye (and he found) that he
held earth in both paws, and in his mouth the earth was packed full.
Then Nagayahgih then said, ‘What thing shall we do? For, behold
this, this one whose body has come to the surface brings earth.”
Then at that time Hahowen said, ‘‘Come, then, now let some one
volunteer to hold up this earth so that verily it will be possible that
thereon we may be able to place this woman.”
Then Nagayahgih said, “T will be the first to make the attempt.”
Then at that time they took care of all the earth that Hanohgye
brought back, and they placed it on the back of Nagayahgih.
In a very short while after he cried out, saying, “It seems, perhaps,
that I am not able to do it, because it is excessively heavy.’’ Then
at that time they took off the earth. Then he, Hanyadengona
(Great Turtle), in turn spoke, saying, ‘‘I, perhaps, then, will now
make the attempt.’ Then at that time they who were at work
placed the earth on his back. Then at that time this Hanyadengona
said, ‘Then also it is all right, I will be able to uphold it. That then
will come to pass. If it so be that the earth will grow in size, thus,
too, will I also continue to increase in size in the time henceforth.”
Then at that time Hahowen said, ‘Now, verily, perhaps we who
came on ahead have done all that is possible.’ Then at that time
they placed the woman thereon. Then Hahowen said, ‘‘ Now,
verily, I suppose we have arranged thy affairs, thou whose body
has stopped here.’”’ Then at that time the large body of mutual
helpers who arranged her affairs went away.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 483
Then this thing whereon the woman abode now began to continue
to grow. Just as the earth had reached or attained a suitable size,
she then gave birth to a child. The child was a woman child. Then
verily she there cared for her. And then the child continued to
grow rapidly.
It was not a long time verily before her daughter became a maiden.
That came to pass. Now, verily, customarily she went about from
place to place; she went about examining carefully the size of the
earth where they two women lived. She was surprised then at seeing
a man there watching her. Then he said, ‘Wilt thou not consent
that thou and I should marry? It seems verily that thou art seeking
for somebody.”
Then at that time she looked him over carefully; she saw him and
saw that his raiment was yellow in color. Then at that time she
spoke, saying, “Not verily of my own will should I answer you any-
thing. I will then tell my mother first. It is she verily who shall will
it.’ At that time then she turned about and then they went home.
Then when she reached the place where her mother abode she said,
“T saw, behold, a man standing far away yonder. He asked verily
that he and I should marry.” At that time the Elder Woman spoke,
saying, “What thing didst thou answer?”? Then at that time the
maiden said, ‘‘I said that my mother verily will decide what thing I
will reply to thee.’ Then the Elder Woman said, ‘Thou didst do
right in the way you did it. What then did he look like and what
kind of raiment then did the man have whom thou didst see’”’? The
maiden said, ‘‘He was handsome and his raiment was yellow.”
The Elder Woman said, “I will not consent to it. Go back then
there and say, ‘My mother does not consent to the thing for which
you ask,’’”’ Then at that time verily the maiden went back there.
When she arrived there again at that place where the man was stand-
ing she said, ““My mother did not consent.” Then the man now
said, “‘ Not, too, is my mind affronted.”’ And then he turned around
and departed. Now, the maiden looked and saw him transform him-
self there. He was not a human being; he became again a Fox. At
that time then the maiden returned to her home.
A few days after then she again went to travel about. She went
along examining things on the shore of the water. While she was
moving along she was surprised to see a man sitting there on a rock.
Then that one said, “It seems, perhaps, that thou art looking for a
companion. Wouldst thou then consent that thou and I should
marry?’’ Then the maiden said, “‘My mother verily must decide.
I will go back to tell her then first what thing thou art asking of
me.’ Then she looked at him. She saw then that his raiment was
of gray color and that his face was striped with black. Then at that
time verily she returned home. When she reached home she imme-
484 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
diately said, “I saw, behold, a man sitting far yonder. And so he
asks that he and I should marry.’ Then the woman said, ‘‘ What
then didst thou say?’’ Then the maiden said, “I said, ‘My mother
verily will decide that.’”? Then the Elder Woman said,‘‘In that also
thou didst right in what you did. What then was the kind of rai-
ment the man wore whom thou didst see?’’ The maiden said in
reply, ‘‘His raiment was gray in color, and verily his face was striped
with black.’ Then the Elder Woman said, “I will not consent to
that. Then do thou go back there and say thou, ‘Not, she says, she
will consent to the thing for which thou didst ask.’’” Then the
maiden returned to that place where the man sat. When she reached
there she said, ‘My mother did not consent that thou and I should
marry.” Then the man said, ‘Not verily, perhaps, has anything
gone amiss in what has taken place.” At that time then he turned
around and then he transformed himself. She looked and saw he
became again a Raccoon. Then at that time the maiden returned
home.
A few days after the maiden again went out to fetch wood. Then
there where she obtained the wood she verily made herself a bundle.
Just as she had finished her bundle then there arrived a man,” and
he said, ‘‘Wouldst thou consent that it be I, that we two should
marry?’’ Then at that time she looked at him and she saw that his
body was dirty and that his mantle had long scallops all around it.
Then said she, ‘‘I will not decide. I will go to tell my mother, verily,
first; she will verily decide that.’”’ Then at that time she took up
the bundle of wood and departed homeward. When she returned
home she said, “I saw, behold, a man standing far yonder. Truly
his body was dirty and the flaps were broad on his leggings, and his
mantle had deep scallops all around, and he said, ‘Let thou and I
marry.’ ”’
At that time then the Elder Woman said, ‘‘What did you say in
your positive statement?’’ Then the maiden spoke, saying, “I
said, ‘My mother verily will decide the matter about which thou art
speaking.’’’? At that time the Elder Woman said, ‘“‘My daughter,
IT am thankful that verily thou didst accomplish the matter. For
verily, that man, as is well known, is immune (invulnerable).
Now then I confirm the matter that you two shall marry. Now
then verily invite him to come.’ Then at that time the maiden
returned to the place where the man was standing. Then when she
again arrived there she said, ‘‘My mother confirmed the matter
about which thou art asking. Now then I invite you tocome. Now
then thou wilt go there to the place where my mother and I abide.”
Then the man said, ‘‘Not, perhaps, it should thus come to pass that
immediately I should accompany thee home. I will first go and
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 485
return from the place whence I started (my home). Until I will
complete my preparations there just then I will go to visit the lodge
of you two. I will tell thee then that I shall not settle down there
where the lodge of you two stands, you, mother and daughter. I
will only go there and return when I go there.’’ Then at that time
the maiden returned from that place. When she returned the Elder
Woman said, ‘‘ What thing has come to pass that he does not accom-
pany thee?”” Then the maiden said, ‘‘He returned home. There,
it is said, he will first pay a visit to the place whence he started. As
soon as, it is said, he will complete his preparations, then he will
come hither. Not, it is said, he will settle down here. Just, it is
said, he will only pay a visit here.”
Then the Elder Woman said, ‘‘That verily I have kept saying,
it is well known that he is immune (invulnerable).’’*® At that time
then verily they two awaited the time when he should come. Just
then when it was growing dark then they two went to lie down to
sleep. Just after they had lain down then he came in and he said,
“Here, now, behold, I have arrived. Then I will tell thee what shall
come to pass. That I will leave here my arrows to lie here during the
night. Tomorrow, early in the morning, I shall come for them.”
Then at that time she saw that he held two arrows, one having a
flint point and the other having no attached point. Then at that
time he repeatedly straightened the arrow which had no attached
point. Then at that time there as she lay he laid them on her body,
he laid the two arrows side by side. Then at that time he said,
“Thus let them be during the night. Do thou not undo them until
I come again and I myself will undo them.’’ Then at that time he
left the lodge and then returned home.
Then when tomorrow came, early in the morning then he returned
and then removed the two arrows and then returned home. Then
at that time the maiden was verily happy. After the lapse of a
certain time she became aware that now her life was different. Now
the Elder Woman said, ““We two have good fortune. For that
verily thou wilt have a child in the near future.”
The time was not long when it was very evident from her appear-
ance that she was about to be a mother. Then she was ‘surprised
that she heard two male persons conversing within her body. One
kept saying, ‘What things wilt thou do when thou goest about here
in the place where thou and I shall be born?”’ Then this other
person said, ‘I will cause human beings to dwell as peoples; game
animals also, they also I will cause to dwell as groups of beings, and
I will create that by which human beings shall live and that by which
game animals shall live here on this earth, and as many things as
See note on p. 609.
486 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
grow shall bear fruit, and those things shall make glad the mind of
human beings who will dwell as people here on the earth.”’
Then at that time again she heard the other person say, ‘‘Now
then I will ask thee what things wilt thou do when thou and I are
born?” Then this other person said, ‘‘I will make the attempt too,
even” me, also to do thus as even thou art about todo. If I should
not be able to do thus, I will make the attempt in some other way.
Tt must be that I too will have something to say on this earth.”
Then at that time she heard them talking together. One of the
male persons kept saying, ‘‘What thing will come to pass, for now,
behold, the time has come that thou and I will go forth hence. Who
shall take the lead?’’ At that time then she heard the other male
person say, ‘‘Do thou just take the lead; now as to me, I will just
go straight through here; here verily there are light spots showing
through. I myself will go forth that way.’’ Then she heard the
other male person say, ‘It will not result in good that thou shouldst
do thus as is thy intention. Verily thou wilt kill in that way our
mother.”’ Then she heard him say, ‘‘Now as to even me, I will go
forth.’’ Now then that one was born. It was not a long time after
that the other male person came forth through her armpit. Then
at that time as she gave birth to the children she herself died. Then
the Elder Woman took up the two male children and also attended
to them. Under the couch she placed them. Then at that time
she gave attention to the flesh body of her late daughter. And there
in the entrance of the bark shelter of the two women, there she laid
the flesh body of her late daughter. At that time the Elder Woman
said, ‘“‘At the end of 10 days then she will arise again.”” Her children
then were all right and they were large in size.
These two male children continued to grow very rapidly. In a
few days it was already possible for them to converse with the Elder
Woman, their grandmother. Then this Elder Woman said, ‘‘Do
you two know from whence you two have come? Also, to what
place will you two go at what time soever you two will depart from
this place?”
Then one of the male persons replied and said, ‘‘I myself know the
place whence we have come. And that is verily from the sky, from
the earth situated on the upper side of it. I myself then will not
forget that. I myself will continue to grasp with both hands the
place whence I came. So that when the time will come when I shall
depart from this place I shall just go back there to the place whence
we started.”
At that time his grandmother said, ‘It is true, verily, that you
know the entire matter. And that then verily I will name you
De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ (he grasps the sky with both hands). And
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 487
the reason that thus it shall come to pass is that thy mind is as
certain about this matter as it was when you had just departed
thence.”
Then the other male person in his turn was asked, in that she said,
“How is thy mind (concerning this)?’’ Then at that time verily he
replied, saying, “I myself am not thinking about the places along
which I came. Not also am I thinking of the place whence I started,
nor in turn whither I should go should I depart from this place. It
is thus sufficient that my mind is satisfied that I have arrived in this
place. By and by, it is known, verily it will become exceedingly
delightful (here). As to myself, I trust in the thing my father gave
me.’’ Then the Elder Woman said, “What kind of thing then is it
in which you trust and which thing thy father gave thee?’”’ Then
he said, ‘‘That verily is the arrow’ which has a point attached to it.
For that verily, perhaps, he intended that I should use for defending
myself. And that is the reason that I myself am not thinking of any
other place.” Then the Elder Woman said, “Then, verily, I call
thee O‘ha’a’ (Flint).”’"’ [This originally was crystal ice.]
Then in a few days she heard the two male twins conversing.
O‘ha’a’ was saying, ‘‘Dost thou know where the mother of us two
goes about?” De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “I know. Verily she
only sleeps.”
Then at that time O‘ha’d’ asked his grandmother, saying, ‘‘Is it
true that the mother of us two is asleep?’”’ His grandmother spoke,
saying, “It is certain, indeed. She will awake again, too, when it
will be time.” Then O‘ha’i’ said, “It is very necessary for me that
quickly I should see the mother of us two.”” Then the Elder Woman
said, “‘Thou wilt see her, it is known, when she will again arise.”
Then O‘ha’a’ proceeded, saying, “It must needs be, as is known,
that thou shalt tell me. That will please my mind that I myself
shall see my mother.”
Then at that time the Elder Woman thought that perhaps nothing
would go wrong should that come to pass that truly he should see
his mother. So then she showed him. Then when he saw his mother
lying there he said, ‘Come, do thou who liest here arise again.
What thing is the reason that thou sleepest here?”
She did not stir at all. Then O‘ha’a’ said, ‘What thing will we
do with this woman sleeping?’”’ Then his grandmother spoke, say-
ing, ‘“‘It will only remain thus. Soon, as is known, she will again
arise.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “As to even me, my
mind is such that it matters not to me that she continue to sleep until
the time come that she will again arise.”
Then O'ha’&’ said, ‘I myself will just wait also a short while. If
it so be that my mind will become anxious that she should again
See note on p. 609.
488 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
arise, then also it matters not that she continue to sleep always.”
Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now I myself will
just go wandering about. I will go to divert my mind.” Then at
that time he went out to go about from place to place.
The Elder Woman made a difference between her grandsons sever-
ally in her love for them. She loved O‘ha’a&’ exceedingly. And she
did not verily love De‘ha陓hiyawa’”’kho™.
As soon as De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” went out the Elder Woman said,
“T have some provisions indeed, and now a small quantity indeed is
left. That, however, it will suffice that thou and I shall continue to
live; so then thou alone shall eat. And the reason that this shall
come to pass is that, behold, the quantity is small, the quantity of
our provisions is now small. I do not know whence I should obtain
any other when it will become exhausted. Verily, indeed, our situa-
tion is becoming more and more grave.”’
Then O‘ha’i’ said, “Tt must needs be that I will make the attempt
in that I will go to seek for that upon which thou and I shall live.”
At that time then his grandmother said, ‘It shall be that not until
thy brother go out that thou and I shall eat together, and that then
customarily the amount of it which is too much for us, that he will
have to eat when again he returns.”” Then O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘Are you
not able then to make for me what people use, that I may use it to
hunt? For, so be it, at the present time, quite soon, animals of what-
ever shape they may be may go about.’’ Then his grandmother
sald, ‘A bow then I will make for thee and a good arrow.” Then
verily she made for him a bow and an arrow. As soon as she com-
pleted the task she then said, ‘‘Do not thou lend it to thy brother.”
Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawi’/’hko™ returned. And he saw
that his brother had a bow, and then he said, ‘Whence hast thou thy
bow?” Then O‘ha’a’ said, “‘My grandmother verily made it for me
and she gave it to me.”’ Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
spoke, saying, ‘‘My grandmother, would you listen should I ask that
thou also make for me a bow and arrow?” Then his grandmother
said, ‘That is sufficient that you two will possesss one between
you.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘So be it.’ And he did
not say anything else.
In a few days then O'ha’i’ attached a flint to the end of his arrow.
And when he finished the task he said, ‘‘ Now then I will awaken the
mother of us two; now verily it is a long time during which she has
been asleep.’”’ At that time then he went there fo the place where she
lay and thus he said, ‘‘Now do thou arise. If thou dost not arise I
will thrust thee through with my arrow.”” Now then he shook her
for a long time. Now then verily he thrust her through with his
arrow. Not again did she awake. Then at that time, in its turn,
he cut her throat, and he used his arrow to do it. And he laid the
HEWITT) MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 489
head some distance away. It was at this time now that De‘haé*-
‘hiyawa’’kho™ verily became aware of it, and he said, ‘“‘ Now verily
thou hast destroyed the mother of us two. It was she, verily, who
took the lead in establishing herself in a home here on the earth, and
in the next place then she has taken the lead in departing from this
earth and going there to the place whence she departed. And that,
then, in the days ahead, her name shall be Ga‘hénde’‘so*k [she who
habitually leads]. And then thus it shall continue to be here on the
earth as it has (just) come to pass; that a woman who came from
above and visited this place, and in turn she went back to the place
whence she departed.”
After the expiration of a suitable time then De‘haé™hiyawi’’-
kho™ said, ‘‘Oh, grandmother, it is not good in what you did in that
verily thou didst make a difference between him and me; verily thou
didst not consent that I should possess a bow and an arrow also.”
At that time then the Elder Woman said, ‘‘ Now I will indeed make
one for thee also.”’ Now then she began to make the bow and the
arrow. When she completed her task she said, ‘“‘Now it has come
to pass thus as thy mind desirest. And then it shall come to pass
thus only once. If thou dost lose it I will not make thee another.”
Now then she gave to him the bow and the arrow also. Then
De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ received them and gave thanks and he said,
“T am thankful.”
Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ began to travel from
place to place. His grandmother was averse to the association of the
two brothers, and it was not permitted that they should eat together
when again they two took food. Then when they had become young
men De‘haé™hiyawé’’kho™ then daily went about from place to
place along the shore of the lake. Customarily he went around it a
few times, when again he would return to the place where stood their
lodge.
Suddenly then he saw a bird which he did not know, flying by the
place where stood their bark lodge, there alongside of it it passed by.
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ hastened himself to get his bow and his
arrow, and then he took them and went out of the lodge, and then he
also saw that there not far away it was perched. Thither then he
went and while he was still far away it flew away. Along the edge
of the lake it went. Then at that time he cut across lots. Now
then he was surprised that it was perched there. He moved up
closer as it eyed him with surprise. Now then he shot at it and
missed it. Now as to that it flew, away. Now as to himself he
watched his arrow to see where it went. Not far away it there fell
in the water. Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa4’’kho™ was grieved
in his mind, and now he resolved, “I must recover my arrow, for
19078°—28——32
490 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH, ANN. 43
verily my grandmother will not make another one for me.” Now
at that time verily he waded into the water; moved along some dis-
tance and then he disappeared on account of the depth of the water,
and then he was surprised that there was no more water in the direc-
tion whither he was going. Now then he saw there a standing lodge,
and that smoke was also arising from it. Now then he went thither.
He arrived there then and he saw a man sitting there.
Then the owner of the lodge said, ‘‘For a long time now I have
watched thee with my eyes, for that I needed that thou and I should
see each other. I myself then brought thee so that thou hast arrived
here. That then caused me to bring thee that thy grandmother
verily does not respect thee, that then is the reason I brought thee,
that now verily the time has come that thou shalt begin to do the
work which is for thee to do. That then in the first place I will
tell thee that a grave thing has come to pass in that thou and thy
brother have developed differences in mind.
“Many things in number then in the first place I will give thee
on which thou shalt continue to live, for verily thy grandmother
deprives thee of them. Here they lie then and do thou bear them
away with thee, and thou wilt prepare food for thyself of them when
thou dost return to the place whence thou shalt spit it to roast; and
that then when it will be done then at that time thou shalt eat it.
And that then when they two, O‘ha’i’ and his evil-minded grand-
mother, from constant spying on you shall become aware that now
thou thyself too hast come into possession of provisions, they two
will ask you for some, as is well known. At that time thou wilt
say, ‘As soon as, first, it will grow, only then thou shalt decide how
much is necessary for thee to eat.’’ Then, in turn, he said at that
time, ‘‘Now then I will tell thee, thou wilt be able, behold, to make
for thyself such things as thou shalt need. Thou wilt fail in nothing;
all kinds of things will come to pass as thou dost decide.”’
At that time then he said, “If it so be that thou wilt lack anything
thou must come back here again. No matter when it may be thou
wilt find me present in this place.’’ At that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho™ said, ‘“Now I will return home.’”’ Then at that time he re-
ceived seed, and then at once he departed again.
When he had returned to the place where stood his bark lodge,
then again his grandmother gave him the food which was their
leavings. Now then De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘Now I will ask-
thee, my grandmother, what is the reason that so it is that never
have we eaten together and that thou always givest to me dry things to
eat?” Then at that time his grandmother answered, saying, ‘‘That
verily is the reason that thus it is that we have nothing, I customarily
find only bits of old food.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 49]
Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘“‘Oh, grandmother,
do thou know that I must begin; now verily I will work at the works
which are for me to do.’’ Then his grandmother said, “Verily in
the first place thou wilt make for thyself some place where thou shalt
continue to abide when thou dost begin thy work.”” Then De‘haé™-
hiyawai’’kho™ answered, saying, ‘Certainly, of course, perhaps it
will so come to pass.’’ At that time he went out. He went thither
to the other side of the island; there in that place he put up his
bark shelter. Now then he began his work. He made the grass.
The first thing was the sunflower which he planted there beside his
lodge, and then said, ‘‘That will continue to be a sign for the coming
uterine families when soon human beings will establish themselves
here on the earth.”
Then at that time he made another thing, and that was red willow,
and he said, ‘‘Here I have planted a medicine which then shall be
the eldest one of all those that shall continue to grow here on the
earth.”
At that time then he made another thing; that was the straw-
berry plant. And he said, ‘‘There then I have planted it on the
earth, which shall bear close to the surface of the ground what will
be called berries.”
Then at that time he made another thing. ‘A shrub,” he said,
“T plant there on the earth, which shall be called thimbleberry,
and it will bear constantly what shall be called berry.”
Now again he said another thing, “I will plant here on the earth
what shall be called mulberry (long berry) and it will continue to
bear what shall be called berry.”
Now again he said another thing, ‘‘Now then again I plant here
on the earth that which shall be called huckleberry, and it will con-
tinue to bear what shall be called berry.”’
Then at that time he said another thing, “I plant here on the
earth the apple,” the large fruit as it shall be called, and it shall
continue to bear fruit.’
Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Now then I will
rest for awhile. Verily I shall prepare food. As soon as I am
through eating just then again I will begin again to do my unfinished
work.”
Then at that time he kindled a fire. Now then verily he spitted
his corn for roasting. Then the wind spread an appetizing odor.
Then at that time O‘ha’4’ was there out of doors going about where
stood their lodge. Now then verily he smelled the appetizing odor.
He learned that the wind was blowing from the direction where was
the bark shelter of De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™.
See note on p. 609.
492 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Then verily he went indoors, then he hastened to do it, and said,
“Oh, grandmother, something is going on at the place where stands
my brother’s bark shelter. Truly the wind brings an appetizing
odor from that direction.”
Then his grandmother said, “Do thou go there. Go seek out what
is going on there.” At that time O‘ha’d’ started and went thither
to the place where was the bark shelter of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™.
Then when he arrived there he was surprised that De‘haé™hiyaw4’’-
kho”™ was preparing food for himself.
He looked, and it would seem that streams of fatness and drippings
of oil also (came from the corn), and then he said, ‘‘ What thing hast
thou prepared for food for thyself?”
Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Of that verily have I prepared
food on which human beings who shall dwell on this earth here
shall continue to live.” Then O‘ha’a’ said, “‘Wouldst thou not
consent to spare me some?”’ Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ answered
and said, “‘It is still not time that it should thus come to pass. Soon,
however, of course, it will become plentiful, and only then verily there
will be time for anyone soever to eat it who shall haye need.”
So then at that time O‘ha’a’ went out and there 1 he out of doors
he stood and he looked all around repeatedly. He saw that all
those things which grow of themselves were a mass of flowers. He
saw ashrub of a beautiful color and then he said, ‘What kind of
thing is this growing here?”’
De‘hae™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke, saying, ‘That verily which you
saw is what I have planted now, and that will grow here on this
earth. Soon indeed it will bear what is called fruit.
Then at that time O‘ha’a’ departed. When he returned into their
lodge he said, “‘Oh, grandmother, an astonishing thing is going on at
the place where I have been. He has prepared food for himself
which drips oil and from which streams fatness, and it has an ap-
petizing odor also. I begged of him to spare me some of that for
which I was asking. At that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ answered,
saying, ‘The time is still inopportune. Before long that thing may
come to pass in that way; verily, just as soon as it will become plenti-
ful.’ That there was growing alongside of his lodge a plant which
was in full bloom which also was of a beautiful color and of a pleasant
odor. I asked him what kind of thing was this that grew there.
‘That verily which you just saw I have planted it that it will grow
here on the earth, and in the next place soon it will now put forth
what is called fruit.’”” Then his grandmother said, “Thou shalt be
on the watch. As soon as thou dost become aware that then again
he will be preparing food, then thou shalt then inform me and then
thou and I will go thither and I myself too will see what kind of thing
is taking place there.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 493
Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’‘kho™ went to visit verily the
strange man his father in his lodge. When he arrived there the
owner of the lodge said, ‘Verily the disposition of thy grandmother
is malevolent. She will attempt, it is known, to spoil for thee what
now thou hast commenced to make, what kind of things the earth
here present shall contain. So I will tell thee what way thou shalt
act (in this matter). That when O‘ha’&’ will visit thy lodge that
thou shalt say, ‘Wouldst thou not consent that thou and I should
exchange for this corn that which thou shouldst take from the sub-
stance of thy life and that thou shouldst give it me?’ Then he will
say, ‘What thing dost thou mean?’ Then thou wilt say, ‘That,
verily, I mean the flint.’ Then at that time he will say, as is
known, ‘Is it that thou meanest the thing that is attached to the end
of my arrow?’ Then thou wilt say, ‘That thing I mean which is
contained in thy body.’ Then at that time he will say, ‘Certainly
it shall come to pass thus.’ So thou shalt watch it come forth from
out of his mouth. As soon then as thou see’st it thou wilt seize it
verily and thou shalt pull it until thou think’st that perhaps it is
just as long as that which is fastened to the end of the arrow; so long
shall it be when thou shalt say, ‘Do thou break it here.’ If it so be
that he will say, ‘Just also break it thyself,’ do not thou consent
that thou shouldst break it off. It must be that he himself shall
break it off. Then at that time thou shalt receive it. That only
will make it possible that thou wilt be successful in what thou shalt
be doing, that he will not be able to spoil whatever thing thou wilt
make and he himself will not be able also to do just as thou art making
things. But nevertheless he will attempt to do those things and to
take control. He will not be able to do anything else when thou
thyself shalt possess what constitutes the substance of his life.”
Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ again departed there-
from, and verily he returned again to the place where stood his bark
lodge. Then again De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ set to work and he said,
“Here I will plant that which by itself shall be the first which my
grandmother will see when she comes here.”
Then he made it and he said, ‘‘Here then shall stand the shrub
which will be called the great fruit.”** Then at that time he said,
“Now I will rest; I will again prepare food before anything else.”’
Then at that time he again roasted ears of corn. Then O‘ha’i’
again scented an odor and at once he went thither. He did not tell
his grandmother.
When he arrived there he said, “Behold, wouldst thou consent
that I myself, too, might eat of the food which thou hast prepared?
One would think truly, perhaps, it would taste good.””, Now De‘haé™-
hiyawa’’kho™ said, “It will be possible that the thing which you
See note on p. 609.
494 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
desire shall come to pass, if thou shalt do thus the thing that I myself
require, that verily thou shouldst give to me thy life, that thou
shouldst give to me the flint (=the power to freeze living things).
O‘ha’i’ replying said, ‘‘Dost thou mean that thing which is
attached to the end of my arrow?” De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”’ reply-
ing said, “It is another thing, verily. Verily I mean that thing
which is contained in thy body; that is the thing which I demand
that thou shouldst give to me.”
Then O‘ha’i’ said, “Just that, too, shall come to pass.’”? And now
then he opened wide his mouth and now out of his mouth came
forth alethal weapon. It appeared like flint. Now De‘haé™hiyawa’-
‘kho”™ grasped it and he pulled on it and said, ‘‘Here perhaps is the
place where it should be broken off.”” Then O*‘ha’i’ said, ““Come,
therefore, do thou break it off.’’
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho", spoke, saying, ‘‘Thou indeed ownest thy
life. So thou thyself shalt break it off and thou thyself also shalt
give it to me. Then and not before will the act be a discharge.”’
Then O‘ha’i’ indeed broke it off and gave it to him and said, ‘“‘ Now
the thing which thou desirest has come to pass.”
At that time then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™’ said, ‘Now I accept it.
Now, then, I myself, too, will give thee the thing for which thou didst
ask.” At that time then he plucked off from his roast two grains of
corn and he said, “‘One thou wilt eat; one, as to it, the grandmother
of us two will eat.”” Now he received the two grains and he departed
homeward. When he reached the place whence he had started he
said, “Oh, grandmother, it had not been possible that I should
have told thee. Now again I have been there where stands the
lodge of my brother. So now I bring back the kind of food that he
has prepared in the place where I have visited.’’ Then he gave her
one grain of corn and he said, “That, it is said, thou thyself shalt eat;
one, too, I myself will eat.”
Then the old woman received it and she ate it and said, ‘‘Do thou
thyself eat it at once. This tastes good indeed.” Then O‘ha’a’ in
his turn ate it. So at that time the old woman said, ‘‘ Did it taste
good to thee?’’ He replied, saying, “It tastes exceedingly good.”
His grandmother said the same thing also. Then at that time she
said, ‘Thou wilt tell me at the time when again thou dost notice
that he will again prepare food for himself. Then verily by all
means I will go there.’ Then O‘ha’a’ said, “Just that too shall
come to pass that thou dost desire.”
Now what De‘haé™hiyawa’”’kho” had planted produced fruit.
Now, too, he formed the bodies of the bluebird and robin and pine
martin, and he said, ‘‘Now I have finished your bodies. And I
have planted things for the purpose that ye shall breed here on the
earth; thus it is suitable that ye shall produce offspring.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 495
Then at that time he let them go, all, and there were two individuals
each, one individual male and one individual female. At that time
they flew and now also they sang. Now O‘ha’i’ heard them talking
together thither in all manner of tongues, and they all had beautiful
voices.
Then O‘ha’a’ said, ““Oh, grandmother, something is going on in
the direction of the place where stands the lodge of my brother.
Truly in that place there are loud sounds; they have fine voices.”
His grandmother said, ‘“‘There very soon thou and I shall go; thou
and I will go to see what is taking place there.”
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said in his turn, ‘‘ Verily I will make
the body of the thing which shall be called the deer.’’ So then he
made its body; and next to it the moose and the buffalo; all two
bodies apiece, one male and one female. Then he said, ‘Now I
have completed your bodies. SoI planted things for the purpose
that ye shall breed here on the earth.’’ So then he let them go and
they ran away .
Now again De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”™ said another thing, ‘So now
I will make that which shall be called passenger pigeon.’’ So then
he made it; he made several bodies. They were two in number, one
body was male and the other body female.
Then De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, “‘ Now again I will make another
thing and that is what shall be called a porcupine.’’ Thus too he
made two flesh bodies; one was male and the other was female.
Then again he said another thing. ‘‘ Now in its turn J will make
that which shall be called wild turkey.’’ Thus too he made two
bodies, one male and the other female, and then he said, ‘‘It is I
who finished your bodies. I have planted things for the purpose that
you shall breed your families here on the earth.”
At that time then he let them go and so they flew away.
Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Now in turn I
will make those things which shall have the habit of climbing and
which will inhabit dry lands; so then I will make that which will be
called a bear.”’ Now verily he worked and he made two flesh bodies;
one was male and the other was female.
Now again De‘haé™hiyawa4’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now I will make in its
turn what shall be called raccoon.’’ And then he made two flesh
bodies; one body was male and the other body was female in its turn.
Now again De‘hae™hiyawa’’kho™ said another thing, “I will make
another thing which shall be called beaver.’’ So at that time he
made two bodies, one male and one female. As soon as he had com-
pleted them he then said, ‘‘I myself verily have completed your bodies.
I have planted things for the purpose of having you breed your families
here on the earth.”” And now he let them go and then in their turn
they went away.
496 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Then at that time this one said, ‘‘ Now first I will rest,’ and then
he returned home. Then verily he again prepared food for himself.
Then again O‘ha’ié’ scented an exceedingly sweet odor. Now he
scented all the various kinds of odors. At this time too he scented
the ripened fruits of the various shrubs planted by De‘ha陓hiyawi’’-
kho™. Now at that time that one returned again to the lodge where
they two dwelt together and said, “‘Oh, grandmother, it is a wonder-
ful matter; I have scented all kinds of sweet odors. It would seem
now, does it not, that again my brother is preparing there food for
himself?” Then at that time the old woman said, ‘Now, verily,
let us two go to that place; let us two go to see just what kind of
thing is going on there.”’
So now they two started. They arrived at the place where De‘-
haé™hiyawa”’kho™ went about. She was surprised that what was
going on was as wonderful as reported. All the various kinds of
fruits were growing and only sweet odors were borne about by the
wind.
She saw that just beside the door of the lodge of De‘ha陓hiyawi’’-
kho™ there grew a sunflower, and that is that thing by which day-
light was given to that place; and standing nearby there stood a
shrub bearing fruit covered with drops of syrup—raspberries. Now
at that time they two entered the lodge. There she saw him roasting
something. Verily the fatness thereof flowed down in streamlets.
So then she said, ‘“‘Who is it who has made this thing such as it is
outside?”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied, saying, “It is I, verily, who
have done this. I have just commenced it.’”” Now his grandmother
replied, saying, ‘“‘Then would it be possible that thou shouldst share
us two some of it that we two should eat thereof?”
De‘ha陓hiyawé’’kho™ spoke and said, “It will be possible. But
it will also not be possible as to that one tree standing yonder, of
one kind among all those which I have that one customarily eats.’
Now at that time he plucked off grains of corn from his roasting ears,
and he gave each one. So then as to them they two ate.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Let us go out.”
So then they went out. Now verily they severally stood there and
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ then said, “‘This was the first thing that I
planted and that is called sunflower.’’ So then they passed on.
They had not gone very far when he said again, ‘‘I have planted this
which is called red willow.”
Now at that time again they passed on. They had not gone very
far when again he said, ‘‘I have planted this which is called red
raspberry.’’ And now he plucked off berries and gave one to each.
Now again they passed on. Now again he had not gone very far
when he, De‘ha陓hiyaw4’’kho™, said, ‘I have planted this which is
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 497
called thimbleberry,’’ and then he plucked off the fruit and gave one
to each.
Then again they passed on. Now again De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho”
said, ‘‘This growing here is called mulberry,” and so then again he
plucked off one berry apiece and gave to the two standing there.
Now at that time he said, ‘‘Let us now go back.” So now then
they turned back, and when they had gone back about one-half way
then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, “This which I have planted here
is called huckleberry. Thus then it shall continue to be here on the
earth that there will be differences in the times at which they will
ripen. This huckleberry will continue to ripen about midway of
the season of the ripening of all kinds of fruits.”
Then at that time they returned to the side of the lodge. As soon
as they had arrived there De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘This tree
standing here which I planted is called the great fruit (modern name
for apple).’’ So now he plucked off two apples, giving one to each. So
at that time they two ate. Then his grandmother said, “Extremely
wonderful and pleasing to the mind is what you have done. Wouldst
thou not consent that one and I should take back with us a small
quantity?”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘It is not possible that it thus
should come to pass. The reason is because I have just planted them.
Soon, however, they will become abundant. At that time it will
just be possible for the thing to take place for which thou dost ask.”
Then she said, ‘‘Who then has brought about that kind of thing,
those game animals making sounds and having fine voices?’”? Now
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘‘I verily so have done;
verily it is all my own labor.’’ Then his grandmother said, ‘‘ Who
then will use all the things which you have now completed?’’ Then
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Just they also shall use them who soon
will populate this earth and who have the bodies of mankind.”
Then his grandmother said, ‘‘Now one and I will return home,”
and then they two departed.
When they two returned to the place where stood their bark
shelter then the Old Woman said, ‘‘ Extremely wonderful is what has
been done where we two have been. Truly, indeed, has been ful-
filled his saying, ‘I will make what things are necessary.’”’
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ spoke and said, “Oh, grandmother; I
will be able, it is known, to do the same things.”
It was not a long time after when they heard a loud sound ap-
proaching. As soon as they two heard it they two went out-of-doors,
and then the Old Woman said, “‘ Now, verily, thou and I will see that
kind of thing in action.” So then they two stood out-of-doors.
They two were surprised that there ran severally a number of
animals, and they were many having the body of deer, and they
passed by.
498 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
Just after this again other animals severally ran by. There were
many raccoons and they passed by. Just after then again other
animals ran by; there were many buffalo and they passed by. Just
after they had passed then again other animals came running toward
them, and these were many bear, and they passed by.
Just then again other animals came running toward them, and
they were many elk and they passed by. Just after then again
other animals came running toward them, and these were many por-
cupines and they passed by. Then they two looked and saw many
animals flying about and there was a great noise made by their
flying and their talking.
Then at that time the Old Woman said, “Extremely wonderful is
what has come to pass. Now verily it has been accomplished now
that those beings whose bodies De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ formed have
multiplied their kinds.”’
Now at that time O‘ha’ii’ said, ‘I will go to the place where stands
the lodge of my brother. I will speak directly, and I will ask him
from what place has he the kind of thing, it may be, from which he
has made all the things he has now finished. All kinds of fruit
which he has planted, all kinds of animals also, all of whose bodies
he has completed. If he will tell me what I ask him I shall make
(them) too myself, because, indeed, he is stingy in not giving us two
very much.
“So I will make things just like those which he has planted in
places. So that will cause it that thou and I ourselves will have an
abundance.”” Then at that time O‘ha’i’ started out and went out-of-
doors. It was not long when he arrived at the place where stood
the bark lodge of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”’, his brother.
Just as soon as he stepped inside of the lodge he said, ‘‘In visiting
thy lodge I come seeking this thing. I desire that thou shouldst
tell me what kind of thing thou didst employ in making as many
kinds of things as thou hast now planted and the various kinds of
game animals whose bodies thou hast completed.”” Then at that
time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied, saying, “(I say) that indeed
this earth is alive, be it known, so therefrom I took up earth by which
I made all the things I have planted and I have finished living bodies,
so that is the reason all they are severally alive and that in their
bodies severally they will die, that earth they will become again, not
as to their lives.
“So thus too is it in regard to the game animals, that concerning
them too I took up earth and made them thereby, so that is the
reason they all are alive and they will die in their bodies, not as to
their lives, verily.”
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ learned (about what he asked) and so
then he said, ‘That is all that brought me here.” Then De‘haé™-
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 499
hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘I myself in turn will ask thee what kind of
thing then would kill thee?”’ At that time then O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘The
only thing that I myself fear is flint stone and the horns of the deer
kind. It is known that these two things which I have told thee are
able to kill me.”’
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘That only is the sum of what
I have that I thought I should ask of thee.”” Then O‘ha’ié’ went
home.
Now as soon as he arrived where stood the lodge of the two, then
he said, ‘Oh, grandmother, it has come to pass in accordance with
my desires. It has now been revealed to me what kind of things he
uses in making the things he has planted and the game animals.
That, it is said, he used earth to make them.”” Then his grandmother
said, ‘‘What kind of thing dost thou think of the many things that
he has told thee?’”? Then O‘ha’i’ answered and said, ‘“‘My opinion
is just this: I believe that perhaps all the things which he has now
completed is a great work. So I think that perhaps it would be an
easy matter for me to conceal” the game animals so all would then
be under our own jurisdiction.”
Then the old woman said, ‘“‘What thing wilt thou do that thou
wilt be able to conceal the bodies of the game animals?’ Then
O‘ha’a’ said, “In the earth I will shut them up. Yonder near by,
near a mountain, there inside verily I will shut them up.”
Then his grandmother said, ‘‘ Now as to myself I shall say nothing
more.” Now at that time O‘ha’i&’ went out and he went there to the
place where there was a mountain cliff. There he set to work and
there he completed a cavern for himself. Now at that time he
gathered together the bodies”’ of the game animals, driving them all
there. So therein he drove their bodies in the place where he had made
himself a cavern inside of the mountain cliff. So as soon then as all
had entered he placed a rock over the place where was the opening
into the earth. Then at that time he said, “‘Now I have shut them
all in. So only that is the amount of my work. Now I myself have
brought all under my control. Only there will I myself continue to
get what my grandmother and I will continue to live upon.’”’ And
then he went home. As soon as he arrived there he said, “Oh,
grandmother, now as to them I have shut in all the game animals.
So now thou thyself wilt decide the time customarily that thou
standest in need of meat. Only wilt thou customarily tell me, then
at that time I will fetch it.”
His grandmother said, ‘It is to be extremely thankful that now
verily thou and I have obtained provisions abundantly.”
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ again went there to the place where
stood the lodge of his brother. So he arrived there and then he was
See note on p. 609.
500 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
suddenly surprised that De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ was making for him-
self many arrows. Then O‘ha’i’ said, “For what purpose art thou
going to use the extremely many arrows which thou now hast?”’
Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ answered, saying, ‘For
that purpose verily I am making myself ready that just there soon
now the game animals will in truth become abundant here.”” Then
O‘ha’ ii’ said, ‘‘Whence then is the place from which they shall come,
as you continue to say that the game animals will become abundant?
I myself do not see that the game animals go about anywhere.”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke saying, ‘‘It must be the fact that,
as is known, in some place all those that habitually go about on dry
upland go from place to place.” Now at that time then O*ha’a’
went home.
As soon as he returned to the place where the bark lodge of the
two stood, he said, “Oh, grandmother, I visited the place where
De‘ha陓hiyawi’’kho™ abides, and there I saw him making many
arrows for himself. He is preparing himself, he says, ‘For soon now
the game animals will become abundant.’”’
Some time thereafter the Old Woman spoke, saying, ‘‘ Just now also
thou shouldst fetch meat, for now it has verily become exhausted
for us.” Now then O‘ha’a’ started out and went there to the place
where was the cave. As soon as he arrived there he then moved
away the rock lying there with which he had closed up the (mouth
of the) cave; so then he entered therein and there inside he killed a
game animal. Then at that time he came forth again and then he
fixed it again, he again closed up the (mouth of the) cave. Then at
that time he went home bearing by the forehead strap a deer. As
soon then as he returned he said, ‘‘Oh, grandmother, now verily the
wish thou didst express has been fulfilled.”’
The Old Woman replied, “It is for us to be extremely thankful.
Verily, the game animals have now become most convenient to us.”
Thus it continued to be for some length of time.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ became aware that the
game animals did not go about any more in any place. So then
again he went there to the place where stood the lodge of the man
whose name is Hao™hwéidjiyawa‘k’ho™.2* As soon as De‘haé™-
hiyawi’’kho”™ arrived there he said, ‘I do not know what thing, it
may be, has happened to, has befallen, the bodies of the animals, the
game animals; all those whose bodies I finished do not in any place
go about.” Then at that time the man, Hao™“hwéidjiyawa’k’ho”,
said, ‘I know the place where they abide away. They are shut in,
indeed; there is a cave in the earth and there away they abide. It
is that thy brother, O‘ha’a’, who has outwitted thee. So now I
will tell thee of the place where away abide the game animals. That
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 501
is the place where stands the lodge of them, thy dear grandmother,
there beyond directly it there stands a mountain and there inside of
it he has made himself a cave and there he has shut them in, so there
they remain. And he has stopped up the place by which they
entered with a rock which he placed over the place, the opening of
the cave.
“So thou shalt do thus and it will result in good that thou shalt
watch O‘ha’a’, thy brother.
“Thou shalt go there the day after to-morrow. Let it not be that
he become aware of it. A short distance therefrom thou shalt con-
ceal thyself. Let it not be that he will see thee. At that time, it is
known, he will again come for meat of the game animals. So thou
wilt see what he will do when he uncovers the mouth of the cave.
Thou wilt see when he enters into the cave. Thou wilt see him also
when he comes forth and again covers over the mouth of the cave,
and when he bears with the forehead strap the body of the game
animal. Now as soon as thou wilt think that now perhaps he has
returned to the lodge of them thou in turn wilt uncover the mouth
of the cave. So at that time then thou wilt enter it and therefrom
thou shalt drive out the bodies of the game animals.’”’ Now at that
time De‘haé™hiyawa’’hko™’ returned to his home.
When the time came which Hao™hwéndjiyawa’k’ho™ appointed,
then De‘ha陓hiyawi’’kho™ started out and he carried with him
every one of his arrows. There aside he went around along the shore
of the lake.
He arrived there where stood the mountain, and there aside he
seated himself. Not a long time did he sit there when he saw him,
for now O‘ha’i’ came toward him. While he walked along he stopped
there where lay the great rock. So he was looking about him; it
would seem to be that he was careful that no one should see him.
Then at that time he grasped the great rock and raised it on edge
and laid it aside, and now entered into the cavern. De‘haé™hiyawa’-
‘*kho™ only kept still, and there verily he watched him in the way
he did to be able to enter therein.
It was a long time before he came forth again, and he bore on his
back by the forehead strap a porcupine. When again he placed
the body on his back he said, ‘‘Some manner of thing perhaps is the
reason that it thus befell me. With great difficulty did I kill the
game animal, and almost did it kill me myself.’’ Now at that time
he again drew back the rock and again covered the mouth of the
cave, and then he again bore the body by means of the forehead
strap and then went home.
Now just as soon as he disappeared in the distance then De‘haé™-
hiyawi’’kho™ said, “So now verily I in my turn should go to the
place where the game animals go about.”’ So now he went there to
502 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH. ANN. 43
the place where lay the great rock. While going along he just picked
up the rock and laid it aside and then there he entered into the cave
and then drove thence the game animals. So now all came forth.
So now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘‘I myself, behold
this, completed your bodies. Verily it has not resulted in good that
you did not become wild. That caused what befell your bodies,
that it was possible that he could shut you in. So now I make an
order that so it shall be in the time which shall be wherein your
co-uterine kinships persist, as long as the earth shall continue here
you shall be wild then after this. So verily, in turn, one will cus-
tomarily exert one’s self to the utmost before one shall see you.
Ye will be free and it will be by your own exertions that ye shall
continue to live.”
Now at this time they dispersed and all fled away. Now then he
shot a deer, and there in its body did the arrow become fixed, so
now he said, ‘Do thou run; do thou go there to the place where is
the doorway of the old woman, my grandmother.”’
Now verily it ran, and just there at the doorway, outside thereof,
there its body fell down, making a great noise; its hoofs made a great
noise. Verily the old woman heard it, so now she quickly arose and
she said, ‘“‘Behold this, what kind of thing has come to pass?”’ Now
at that time she stood outside of the door and she looked and she
was surprised that there lay a dead deer, even with the arrow fixed
in its side. So then she said, “Listen, O‘ha’a’; do thou look at a
thing so wonderful, for now a game animal has visited our lodge.”
Then O‘ha’a’ looked and he recognized the arrow which was fixed
in it as one belonging to his brother. Nothing did he say. So now
he returned into the lodge. And so his dear grandmother followed
him closely.
Now again De‘ha陓hiyawa”’kho™ shot and his arrow became
fixed in the body of a raccoon. So now he said, “‘Do thou run. Go
there to the place where stands the bark lodge of my dear” grand-
mother.” Now at that time it ran and its body fell just beside the
very doorway.
Now again he shot another arrow and the arrow became fixed in
the body of a buffalo; so now again he said, “‘Do thourun. Go there
to the place where stands the bark lodge of my dear grandmother.”
And now it too ran and its body too fell beside the lodge where
his dear grandmother had her fire kindled.
Now at that time again he shot another arrow, and the arrow in
its turn became fixed in the body of a bear; so now he said, ‘ Do thou
run. Go there to the place where stands the lodge of my dear grand-
mother.”’
Now verily it ran, and its body fell there beside the doorway.
See note on p. 609,
HEWITT) MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 503
Now then again De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho" shot another arrow, and
the arrow became fixed in the body of a moose. So then he said,
“Do thou run. Do thou go there to the place where stands the
lodge of my dear grandmother.” Now at that time it ran, and there
beside the lodge its body fell.
Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ again shot another arrow,
and the arrow became fixed in the body of a wild duck. So now
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Do thou fly. Go there to the place
where stands the lodge of my dear grandmother,” So now it flew,
and its body fell there beside the lodge.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now, perhaps,
that is verily sufficient.’”’ So now he started away and he went
there to the place where stood the lodge of his grandmother.
As soon as he entered his grandmother said, ‘‘A wonderful thing
has taken place. And that is that thy brother has been away to
hunt game. Look thou at the kind of body that he has killed and
brought back.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ looked and_ said,
“That verily is what is called a porcupine. Verily O‘ha’i’ has been
to the place where no kind of game goes about. Behold this, I myself
have been out hunting. Truly game animals abounded in the place
where I myself have been.”
Now again he spoke and said, ‘So now I will dress” the game, as
many as I have killed.” Now at that time he again went out-of-
doors. Now verily he began to skin them. He finished them; now
in turn he cut their bodies up, and when he finished he then hung up
the several pieces of meat, and the hanging pieces of meat extended
all around the lodge. Now at that time he brought the skins into
the lodge, and so he smoothed out each separate skin. Now he fas-
tened them severally. He usually fastened it against the bark side
of the lodge, and he went entirely around the inside of the lodge.
At that time he spread one skin over the place where his grand-
mother had her bed, and another, too, he laid there.
Now De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™ said, ““Oh, my dear grandmother, now
verily has been fulfilled the whole matter, the kind of thing verily I
promised. I have promised thee; so now I have completed it. So
thou shalt be the first that shall have pleasure of mind continuaily
from the kind of things that the earth here present will continue to
contain for that purpose. And human beings will be born here on
this earth, and they shall control the game in it, and their minds
shall be continually consoled by the things which the earth shall
continue to contain. So now I ordain that in the future time
when you two use up this which I have left here in the lodge of you
two, then verily you two shall help yourselves that you two shall
continue to think in peace.” .
See note on p. 609.
504 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
As soon as he finished his message then De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™
again went out-of-doors and again departed, and he went there to
the place where stood his bark lodge.
Not a long time after he had returnd then De‘ha陓hiyawi’’kho™
said, ‘‘Not, verily, perhaps, would it result in good that my brother
and I should be near together. Now verily he has revealed himself;
now he has distressed my mind in the things at which I am working.
So, perhaps, he and I must separate, for still, verily, I have matters
at which I will continue to work. So now thus verily, perhaps, I
shall do. So I will cut in two parts this floating island, so I will
thrust fresh water in the space between us, so he should not be able
at any time to cross the stream.”
Now at that time he went out and he started going to the shore of
water. He stood there at the very edge of the water, and now he
said, ‘‘ Now this earth shall be divided. So you, these Waters, I cause
you to volunteer that ye shall continue to be between, in the space
which is the distance these two earths shall continue to be apart.”
So now De‘ha陓hiyaw’’’kho™ started and went there; he passed
himself through the very middle of the floating island. Now at
that time the fresh Waters were following him. He arrived on the
opposite side of the island; then he said, ‘‘ Now verily I have com-
pleted it.” Now at that time the Waters desisted. Now at that
time De‘ha陓hiyawi’’kho™ said, “‘Now verily my brother and I
have become separated.’ So then he went home. In a very short
time he returned to the place where stood his lodge.
Some time afterwards O‘ha’i’ said, ““My dear grandmother, now
verily thou and I have still left only a small quantity of meat. So
now I will go hunting there, so thou and I will continue to have suf-
ficient other meat when the amount which De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
has given us will become exhausted.”” Now O‘ha’a’ went out-of-
doors; now verily he went to hunt.
Now O‘ha’a’ went about from place to place and he was not suc-
cessful in seeing agame animal. It was a long time; on every side
of the island did he go to and fro. He became very tired, and then
he saw game animals. Just as soon as they saw him they at once
fled away, and there he watched them as they plunged into the water.
Now at that time he first noticed the island floating on the other
side, whither the game animals went. He saw them when they there
went ashore.
At that time O‘ha’d’ was astonished by the thing that had come
to pass. Now verily he said, ‘Wait; let me go to tell De‘haé™hiy-
awi’’kho”. Not, perhaps, yet does he know the thing as it is, as I
saw it to-day.’’ Now then he departed. He knew verily in what
direction stood the lodge of his brother. So thither then did he go.
newrrt] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 505
Now verily he could not find it. Nowhere did he find his person.
Now at that time verily he began to travel over his floating island;
verily he did not find his person in the whole island. Some time
afterwards he went home.
As soon as he reached home again he said, ‘““Oh, my dear grand-
mother, an astonishing thing that came to pass in what I saw and
that I could not find the game animals. And I traveled about during
along time. JI went back and forth over nearly the whole of the
island which floats here before I saw the game animals. Just as
soon as they became aware that I was coming they at once fled
away, and there near by plunged into the water. Then at that
time I saw there that there is another floating island whither then
they went, and they landed from the water on that side. Now at
that time I returned thence, for I desired to tell De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho™ of the things that I had seen. I went toward the place where
his bark lodge stood. I sought for his person over the entire island.
I went back and forth over the whole of it; but nowhere does his
bark lodge still stand.”
Now the Old Woman spoke, saying, ‘‘ Now verily thou and I can
do nothing as to what has happened.”” Now O‘ha’&’ spoke and said
“Tt must needs be, too, that I myself shall now begin to make things.
I myself will be able, it is known, too, so to do in all the things as
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ has made.”
So now he said, ‘‘In the first place, perhaps, I shall begin with the
game animals small in size.’ Now at this time he made butterflies.
He finished them. So then he said, ‘“‘Now I have completed their
bodies, so now I will travel about on the earth present here.’’ Then
at that time they flew. Just after they had flown, just then a num-
ber of pigeons whose bodies De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ had made flew
along there. At that time O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘Those, verily, are the
things which my brother habitually calls pigeons; so I myself, too,
will make bodies like them.”
So now he began to form their bodies. When he completed them
he said, ““Now I have finished your bodies, so now I will travel
about on the earth present here.’’ He finished them before he became
aware that these apparently were covered with fur, and apparently
they possessed teeth. Now at that time they flew.
Now again O‘ha’&’ said another thing, ‘Perhaps, in the first
place, I will make that by which it shall be lighted, just as it is that
there is standing beside the lodge of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ what he
calls Sunflower.’ Then at that time he made it. Just beside his
lodge is the place where he said, ‘“‘Here shall grow the thing which I
have planted by which there shall be daylight, and it shall be
called Sunflower.”’
Now at that time he again said another thing, “I will make that
which shall be called the larger fruit (apple.)”’ Then verily he made
19078°—28——33
506 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
it. Also when he finished it he then said, ‘‘Here beside the lodge,
there it shall continue to grow; here is the place I planted it.’ As
soon as he had finished this he said, ‘‘I would that I be surprised by
the coming of my brother, so that he might see what kind of things
now I myself too have made. Just what kind of thing he would say
when he would see them. I will rest first until De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho” will arrive.’ So then he rested.
Not long afterwards he again saw there many kinds of small
animals severally flying along, and then he said, ‘This too I myself
will do. I will make them to be extremely many in number.”’ And
now at that time he made them. Just when he had finished them he
was surprised that De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ was coming toward him.
Now O‘ha’a’ made haste and spoke and said, ““Come, do you make
haste, now do you fly.”’ Now verily they flew and there was a great
noise. Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’’kho™ arrived there and
said, “At what kind of thing are you at work?” Then O*ha’a’
said, “I am resting this noon. I desire that thou shouldst see, in
the first place, all the things which I have now completed.”
De‘haé™hyawa’’kho™ replied and said, ““What kind of things
then are those beings that flew while I was coming yonder?” = O*ha’a’
said, “Do thou listen well to the great noise of their talking. Those
verily are the animals small in size which I have just completed.”
Then De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, “It is true, verily, that the
noise they are making by all their different languages is a great noise.
And verily they shall continually be called flies. It will be that they
will assist me. Some will become such that they will live upon game
animals.’”’ Now O‘ha’i’ laughed and said, “‘Let us go to examine
the Sunflower which, as is known, I have planted, and the large
fruit (apple).”’ So then they two went to the side of the lodge. Again
they two arrived beside the lodge, and then at that time O‘ha’a’
said, ‘“‘Here, verily, grows the Sunflower.”” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho”™ looked at it and said, ‘‘ Verily this plant standing here bears a
flower, a beautiful flower, so when it ripens it will be able to assist
me. That shall be by which the several kinds of small animals
shall live. Verily this plant growing here shall be called thistle.”
This time the mind of O‘ha’a’ was gratified. So then he said,
“Tn its turn thou wilt see the large fruit (apple) which I have planted.”
At that time they two went thither.
As soon as they two arrived there then O‘ha’d’ said, “Here verily
grows the large fruit (apple) which I have planted.’’ Then at that
time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “This is all right. This which
you have planted shall assist me. It will be that the game animals
shall live by it. So as to that it shall continue to be called thorn.”
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ was exceedingly pleased, and now he
said, ‘‘Let us two go to examine the bird which, as is known, I have
HEWITT MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 507
made.’ Now verily they two started. They arrived at the place
when O‘ha’i’ said, “‘Here verily do thou look. I myself completed
the body of this bird.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ looked and said,
“That is all right. There is no reason why they should not travel
about over the earth present here. Verily those things can do no
harm to anything. So they shall continue to be called butterfly.”
Now the mind of O‘ha’a&’ was gratified. Then again he said,
“Now only one thing is left that thou shalt see. Truly I believe that
I made a mistake in it, seemingly. Now as to them thou then shalt
decide what thing thou shalt do when thou seest them.
Then at that time they two started. When they arrived at the
shore of the lake there they two saw many beings. Then O‘ha’ii’
said, ‘Behold then these beings flying about are what I meant when
I told thee. As to them I believe that I have made pigeons.”’
Then De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™ looked at them and said, ‘Hither do
ye come.’”’ At once they came flying to the place where he stood.
So then he spoke and De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Verily, it is not
ordained that things having fur and having teeth should be in the
habit of flying about. For it would not result in any good that
ye commingle with those things which are covered with feathers
and fly by day. So that perhaps would result in good that ye
divide yourselves into two parts when all things have been com-
pleted. And it is known that it shall so come to pass that only for
a certain length of time there will be daylight on the earth present
here. Then at that time darkness will come over it, and after a
certain duration then again daylight shall come. So there those
beings which have feathers shall continue to go about during the time
that there shall be daylight; and when darkness comes over it then
as to them they shall keep still. And not until that time ye in your
turn shall travel about again. It is known that it would not be good
that in broad daylight those beings who are covered with fur should
fly about and should have teeth. So there in that place among the
trees ye shall dwell.” Now at that time O‘ha’i’ was astonished at
the kind of things that his brother said. Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho™ said, ‘Behold, I now go back home. So now thou in thy
turn shall come to visit my home. Thou shalt come to examine what
kind of things I myself am doing.’”’ Now at that time they two
separated, and then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ went home.
When he again returned to the place where his lodge stood he
then of course thought about many things; he thought that it would
be good that he should make what would be an orb here present,
which should light up the earth present here below. Now at that
time he started. He went thither to the place where stood the
house of Hao™“hwéfdjivawa’k’ho™.
When he arrived there he then said, “I have come to this place to
ask about my intention to make an orb of light to be present, which
508 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
should continue to give daylight to the earth present here below.”
Then Hao™hwéfdjiyawa’k’ho™ said, ““Now it is time. From the
place whence thy dear grandmother came, therein abides her elder
brother who has now made all his preparations, and he is watching
for her to remember him. So it will be correct that thou shouldst
assign him the duty to give daylight to it. Verily he having said,
‘It shall come to pass when one will remember me that the earth
shall quake.’ He also said when his younger sister departed, ‘I
will go to examine, some time or other, the place where thou shalt
continue to go to and fro. So thus it shall come to pass that it will
result in good that thou shouldst invite that one to come. So in this
way thou shalt do. Thou hast planted the plant whose branches are
red (red willow), and thou shalt cut off therefrom the young shoots
which have just sprouted out. These shall be two in number; and
so from one of these thou shalt scrape the bark and steep it for medi-
cine. Just as soon as the medicine is cooked thou shalt take it as an
emetic. Now, from the other one thou shalt scrape the bark and then
thou shalt cast it on the fire, and at that time thou shalt leap into it
when the smoke arises and thou shalt say, ‘Behold, now I go thither.
So that then (therefore), De‘hado™hwéndjiyén’do™s, thou and I
shall meet.’ So thus it shall come to pass that at one-half the dis-
tance, there at that distance you two shall meet. Now, at that time
thou shalt tell him what manner of thing is needful for thee. It is
known that he will be able to answer thee, for verily his power is
great.” At that time then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ returned home.
As soon as he had returned to the place where he had kindled fire,
then right away he went out again, going to seek the shoots of the
red willow. As soon as he saw them he cut off two of the shoots
and took them back with him. Then verily he scraped the bark
from the one and then he steeped it for medicine. As soon as the
medicine was cooked he at once took it as an emetic. At that time
he scraped the bark too from the other one, and then he cast it onto
the fire. So at that time smoke arose and now at that time he
leaped into the fire and he said, ‘Behold, now I go thither. Thou,
De‘hado™hwéndjiyén’do™s, and I will meet then.’”’ Now at that
time he departed and he went upward.
He had not gone very far when he was suddenly surprised that a
man was coming toward him there. Then verily they met and the
man said, “Now verily thou and I have met. Then what kind of
thing dost thou desire?’”’ Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ answered and
said, “That verily is that I lack some one who could aid me. I have
now completed all the things on the earth in their several modes of
action. I continue to lack something that should continue to give
as much light as the light given by the Sunflower. So I desire that
it should give daylight in the highest degree, for is it not known
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 509
that now the earth here present is large? Now, there are two floating
islands. I desire that, probably, it shall thus come to pass that I will
add still to these that there shall be four floating islands. So it is my
need that it should give daylight to the whole Hao™hwéfdjiy-
awa’k’ho™ sent me here.’’ Now, at that time the man replied and
said, ‘‘ Now, it is a long time during which I have watched for you to
remember me. It is known that I have had my eyes on what has
befallen thy person in the place where thou goest about. So now I
am fully prepared to do thus in the matter which has become a dif-
ficulty for thee. So thus it shall come to pass. So on the underside
of the sky present here, there in space I will attach my person, so
that thus it shall come to pass from a certain distance thence I
shall start and customarily I will return again to the place whence I
started. Thus customarily I shall rest myself. Thus it shall con-
tinue to be as long as the earth present here below shall endure, so
I myself will care for as many things as thou wilt leave on the earth
present here. I also will continue to warm the earth present here.”’
Now De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now thus has been fulfilled
the kind of thing I continued to need. So now the Sunflower which
I planted shall continue so, for verily as to that it shall continue to
be the measure of thy continuing approach when thou givest day-
light.”
At that time this man said, “‘I, as is known, have thy dear grand-
mother as my youngest sister, and that is the cause that now it is a
long time during which I have watched that she might remember me.
So it depends upon thee thyself what manner of things thou shalt do
in that verily thy brother beheaded thy mother, that only her head
lies in the place where thy dear grandmother abides. If thou shouldst
be pleased that thou shouldst assign her the duty that she too should
move, so that she and I would aid one another, if so be it be possible,
because verily the things which thy brother O‘ha’ié’ is doing are
matters for anxious thought. It is known that he will attempt to
make a mockery of all things, that thus he will do the kind of things
that he will see that thou art making.
“So then thou didst right in what you did in that you two separated
a small distance. It will cause him difficulties. Just that also is to
come to pass in the future, during the time the earth will continue
to be present, that he will attempt, it is known, to destroy thy rule.”
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘We verily perhaps in our own
two persons shall settle this whole matter. If so it be that he shall
do thus, do not thou thyself attach thy body until I myself will
speak thence; only then shalt thou do thus; only that will result in
good. So when thus it shall come to pass all people on the earth
present here below will become aware when thou shalt use the power
of thy name.”
510 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Then the man said, “That verily is what they customarily call
me, De‘hado™hwéndjiyén’do™s. So thus it shall come to be on the
earth present below when the end of things will be approaching in
the place in which thou hast assigned me duty, it shall be only when
the earth shall quake at which time all people shall name me.”
At that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘So thus it shall come to
pass in the place where thou and I have met. At that very place,
midway of thy appointed path,* there then thou shalt continue to
use it as a resting place when thou shalt be traveling at the midway.
Customarily thou shalt seat thyself for a short while. Fully again
thou shalt recover thy vigor, then usually of course thou shalt pass
on. So at that very place it shall be a fundamental thing for the
human beings who will be born and continue to live on the earth;
whatever kind of thing which in their thinking will be directed to thee
thyself shall customarily be placed there at the place where thou dost
customarily rest; that will cause it to continue always to be good in
what thou shalt answer them, for thou wilt have time to consider it.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Now verily that
kind of doing has been arranged and that matter will endure so long
as the earth continues to be here (written: ‘the earth will continue
to fly on’’). So the tribes of human beings living on the earth will
continue to say, ‘He, our Elder Brother,’ when customarily they
shall tell of thee. That is the cause that so it shall come to pass that
verily thou callest her ‘Younger Sister’ who was the first one to set
foot here below. Now at this time that earth * abidest here.” So
now he said, “‘Now then thou and I will separate. So tomorrow
then thou shalt come up over it (the horizon) for the first time,
and thou shalt also cause it to be daylight.”” Then at that time they
two separated.
When De‘haé™hiyawai’’kho™ again returned to the place where
stood his bark lodge, thus he said, ‘Now I will make what shall be
called human beings;* they will dwell here on this floating island.”’
So as soon as he ended speaking he began to make them, and he
made the body of a human being. He took up earth and he said,
“This earth which I have taken up is really alive. Thus also is it
as to the earth present here, and verily the body which I shall make
from that kind of thing shall continue to live.”
Then at that time he made the flesh of the human being. As soon
as he had completed it he then meditated and then said, ‘That
verily, perhaps, will result in good that thus it shall continue to be
that he shall have life as much as that is wherein I myself am alive.”
Now at that time he took a portion of his own life and he put it into
the inside of the body of the human being; so also he took a portion
of his own mind and he inclosed it in his head; so also he took a
See note on p. 609.
HEWITT MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER iti
portion of his own blood and he inclosed it inside of his flesh; so also
did he take a portion of his power to see and he inclosed it in his
head; so also he took a portion of his power to speak and he inclosed
it in the throat of the human being. Now at that time, too, he
placed his breath in the body of the human being. Just then the
human being came to life, i. e., the flesh, and he also arose and he
stood up on the earth here present.
Now De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now verily I myself have
completed thy body; now verily it is possible that thou dost stand
on the earth present here. So now behold what the earth present
here contains. I myself verily have completed all.
‘‘Now then I have made thee thyself master on the earth present
here and also over what it contains. It will continue to give comfort
to thy mind. I have planted human beings on the earth for the
purpose that they shall beautify the earth by cultivating it, and
dwell therein.”” Now he saw that he the Elder Brother came up over
it and caused it to be daylight on the earth here present and that
the daylight was beautiful and the light rays were beautiful, and
it was agreeably warm.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘““Do thou look at
that orb of light coming up over it, and that it is beautiful in causing
daylight to be on the earth and also it shall be an ever-present object
of thought, and also it shall continue to give pleasure to thy mind in
that it will continue to warm the days to come and next to them the
nights that shall come. That, too, thereby also all those things that
grow, also all the game animals, shall continue to live thereby on
the earth present here; all you who dwell here below on the earth
present here shall continue to live thereby.”
Now at that time he said, ‘‘So now thou shalt travel about on the
earth present here.’
Now at that time he said, ‘‘So thou wilt travel about on the earth
present here and thy opportunity to do so will last so long as that
thing at which you are looking causes it to be daylight, and when
the daylight will end darkness will fall over it. Now at that time
thou shalt rest so long as it continues to be dark; thus, too, it shall
come to be for the game animals, that they shall continue to rest
themselves from time to time. ;
“Now I have completed what shall continue into the future; thus
it shall continue to be during the time that the earth will continue
on.”’
At that time O‘ha’a’ and his grandmother now verily became
aware of what came to pass in that there came to be daylight. Now
verily also they two saw it come up over (the horizon), also that it
caused it to be daylight on the earth present here. At that time
O‘ha’ i’ said, ‘Now at once I will go there to the place where stands
512 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
the lodge of De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™,” and when he arrived there he
said, ‘Thou in thy turn will go back there again. For now it is time
because, it seems, now a most astonishing thing has taken place.
We have seen anew-fashioned thing. My brother is surely (doing
something). So now I myself go to see it.’ Then he started.
So then when he arrived there at the shore of the lake and he saw
that the other island floated so far away that it was then only slightly
visible, so now at that time O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘I will make myself a canoe,
verily, of course. Then and not before it will be possible that I
cross the water.’’ Now he carefully looked about. Near by there
grew a birch tree. Now at that time he stripped off the bark and he
made himself a canoe. As soon as he completed it then verily he
went aboard and he crossed the water.
When his canoe came to a stop then verily he disembarked. Now
at that time verily he saw a human being whom he did not know.
Then O'ha’a’ said, ““What place dost thou come from, thee whom I
have never at any time seen?”’
At that time the human being said, “I came to life in this place.”
O‘ha’iéi’? answered and said, ‘‘Who then completed thy body?”
Then the human being replied and said, ‘‘Here near by verily he
abides. So let us two go back there. Thou wilt verily see him who
finished my body.” Now O‘ha’a’ agreed to it and they two went
there to the place where stood the lodge of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™.
When they again arrived there O‘ha’’ said, ‘‘Is it thou who finished
the body of this human being whom I newly saw?” De‘haé™-
hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said, “I myself, verily, completed his
life.”
Now again O‘ha’i’ answered and said, “So then who is it that
caused it to be that at this time there is so much daylight?” De‘-
ha陓hiyawé’’kho™ replied and said, “It is, verily, he who is Elder
Brother to us has caused it thus to be.”’ Then O‘ha’d’ was greatly
astonished at the kind of things that he saw.
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ““So now verily let
us go to walk about. Thou wilt see the condition of the things now
growing which I have planted here on this earth.’ Now verily they
two started to walk about where all the various kinds of fruit were
growing. Just as soon as they looked at all these then verily cus-
tomarily they passed on. Now then, in turn, they two went to
examine the game animals. All the various kinds of game animals,
and they were many, went about from place to place. Now at that
time O‘ha’a&’ was astonished at the condition of the things which he
had seen. So now he said, ‘‘ Extremely rapidly have all those things
which thou hast planted become abundant and the game animals
have now become numerous. How didst thou accomplish this?”
Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, “This earth here
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER Hills
present, which was very small at the beginning, continues to in-
crease in size. Very soon now it will become extremely large. So
thus it was concerning these growing things, that they were few in
number at the beginning, and the game animals too were few in:
number at the beginning, and so too was it in regard to the human
beings. So shall it come to pass with all. They will increase in
size and all will become numerous.”
Now O‘ha’a’ said, “Now verily I will return home. Thou, in
turn, then, wilt again go to the place where stands the lodge of us
two, of my dear grandmother and me.”’
At that time O‘ha’i’ returned home. When he arrived there he
said, ‘‘Oh, grandmother, I have seen an astonishing thing at the
place where dwells De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™. I saw a human being
whose body he had evidently made; and I asked De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho™ who it is that has caused it so to be that there is bright day-
light. He said, ‘He it is, verily, who is Elder Brother to us.’” At
that time the old woman said, ‘“‘So verily now has been fulfilled
what my Elder Brother said when I departed from home, saying,
‘T will arrive there where thou shalt continue to be.’ He, verily,
whose name is De‘hado™hwéndjiyén’do™s,*” he, as is known,
is my Elder Brother. So verily he means me when he says he is
Elder Brother to us.”
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ said, “Now I myself too will make a
human being. When De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ will come I shall have
it completed.” And then he went out.
At that time he began and he worked and he made a human being
as he thought it was. Just as soon as he completed it he said, “Listen,
now do thou stand upright. Do thou walk also.”’ Now at that time
he leaped far yonder and he went into the water, and there verily he
immersed himself. So then in a short while he again thrust out his
head. At that time O‘ha’i’ said, ‘“Do thou come hither.” He
did not answer and neither did he move.
Then at that time O‘ha’i’ said, “Verily Ihave made a mistake. I
did not work correctly in forming his body. So still another will I
attempt again.’ Now at that time again he made another. When
he completed it he said, “Listen, do thou stand upright. Also do
thou walk.’? Now he rose and he walked and he climbed a tree
standing near by and he seated himself at the top. Then O‘ha’a’
looked at that and he meditated upon it; then again he said, “Surely
it seems, perhaps, that I made a mistake, for it seems, perhaps, one
would think he is too small and his tail is too long.’”’” Now then he
spoke and said, ‘‘Do thou descend therefrom at once.” He spoke
nothing therefrom. Then O‘ha’d’ said, “Now again I shall make
another. He shall be large as to himself, this time.”
See note on p. 609.
514 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
Now at this time verily he made another one. Just as soon as he
completed it he again said, “Listen, do thou stand upright. Do
thou walk also.’”’ Now he stood upright and O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘There
.thou shalt go from place to place on the earth present here.” Now
at that time he whose body he had made now walked. O‘ha’ii’
watched him and at that time he said, ‘‘ Now is it possible I have per-
haps done correctly? So now I will make in its turn another thing,
a game animal.”’
At that time he made that thing. As soon as he completed it he
said, “Listen, do thou stand up. Do thou also walk. Thou shalt
be called Deer.”’ At that time it stood upright and it now ran and
now it cried out. Now at that time again he made another. When
he completed it he said, “‘Come, now do thou arise and do thou walk.
Bear shall be thy name.”’
Then it arose and it walked away. At that time he now was sur-
prised that his brother, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™, was coming.
As soon as he arrived O‘ha’i’ said, ‘‘Now I myself in my turn will
show thee the kind of things which I have made.’ At that time they
two started walking. In a short time now they arrived on the lake
shore and then O‘ha’i’ said, ‘‘There, verily, is seated the human
being whose body I first made.’”’ Then De‘hae™hiyawa’’kho™
looked and saw him seated there at the edge of the water, and so
then he said, ‘‘What manner of thing art thou doing seated down
there?’’ Then it answered and cried out. Now he said, ‘‘Come, do
thou walk.”’ Now as to that it leaped and plunged into the water
out of sight. In a short while it stuck its head out. At that time
De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ said, ‘‘ Verily that thing is not a human being.
That thing will be called Hwa’én‘ (a kind of frog).”
Then O‘ha’i’ said, ‘‘I have made, as is known, another human
being.’”’ Now again they two went on. Not far away O‘ha’a’ then
said, ‘‘There verily, he sits up there.’ Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”
said, ‘‘That, verily, is not a human being. Verily he has a tail, and
fur grows on his body.’’ Now again he spoke and said, ‘‘ What man-
ner of thing art thou doing sitting up there?”’ Then he just cried out
from there and he wept. Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘A
monkey they shall call thee, because thou dost weep so easily.”
Then at that time again they two went on. At a short distance
away there sat a human being. So then O‘ha’dé’ said, ‘‘There,
verily, sits another human being whose body I finished.” As soon as
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ saw it he said, ‘‘What kind of thing art thou
doing here seated on the ground?”’ Then at that time he burst out
in a loud noise and he wept. Now De‘haé™hiyawa&’’kho”’ said,
“Verily it is not good in this that thou art making attempts to make
a human being. That which thou hast made is not correct. This
one whom I have seen has an extremely loud screech. So that one
shall be called the great monkey (ape).”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 515
Then at that time O‘ha’d’ said, “There are two still remaining
which I have left which I shall show to you.” So then they two went
on. Near by there the two animals went about. O‘ha’d’ said,
“This one here is called a deer, and that one is called a bear.”” Now
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”™ looked and spoke and said, “That is not in
fact a deer.’ Then at that time it sang, crying out loudly. Thus
too in the same manner did the other one.
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘This one here verily will be
called a wolf. Now the other, which thou sayest is a bear, shall be
called a grizzly bear.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Thou in turn shalt
go back there to-morrow. Our grandmother shall accompany thee
this time. Then at that time De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ went home.
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ also went home. It was not long before
he arrived there at the place where stood their lodge, and then he said,
“Oh, my dear grandmother, that has come to pass in regard to the
human being I made and the deer and the bear, that I showed them
to De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™, and he did not confirm them. Not, it is
said, did I make them correctly. So now my idea (opinion) con-
cerning all those beings whose bodies I have made is that yet (still)
I shall make the bodies also of beings different severally from these.
So thus it shall come to pass. In that direction shall I send them,
toward the place where floats the island of my brother. In that
direction (on that side) they will seek for their food. Verily they
will eat all those things which my brother has now completed. If it
so be that this turn of affairs will displease him, he and I will fight as a
last resort. So to-morrow thou and I shall go thither to the place
where stands the lodge of De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho”.” The old
woman right away replied and said, ‘“‘What thing shall thou and I
do that thou and I may cross the waters which occupy the space
between the two floating islands?”
Then O'ha’i’ said, ‘That verily is a thing that matters little. I .
myself will cause a bridge to float. I will have completed it within
the time that daylight shall come.’’ Then the old woman said,
“Tf so it be that thou wilt be able to cause a bridge to float, then and
not until then shall I agree to accompany thee.”
When it became evening then O‘ha’i’ said, “‘Now I will begin it,
now verily I will cause a bridge to float.*! As to thee, thou shalt then
be completely ready. The time that thou and I will start will be
governed only by the time that daylight shall come.’”’ So now he
went out. Now at that time he said, “Oh thou, Black Night, thou
hast that power which, if it were a human being, would complete the
bridge in the space lying between these two islands, during the length
See note on p. 609.
516 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
of the night. My grandmother and I shall cross the water to-
morrow.”
Now at that time it began to grow cold. It continued to increase
until near the coming of daylight. Now at that time De‘haé™-
hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘Indeed, I think that perhaps O‘ha’a’ will have
the power to spoil all those things which I have now planted. He it
is, verily, who has caused it to be so extremely cold on the earth
here present. Verily he augmented his power by means of the
darkness, and it shall not become warm during the length of the
night. So, perhaps, it is certainly necessary that I should assign
to some one the duty that when customarily it becomes dark on the
earth present here, one should have the care that it should not be-
come excessively cold, nor also excessively dark. So, perhaps, it
will be good after the time passes that my dear grandmother is to
come to visit, then, and only then, I shall act in the matter of the
Night here present.”
When it became day, early in the morning, then he was suddenly
surprised that now they two were coming, his dear grandmother and
his brother, O‘ha’&’, as they came crossing the waters. As soon as
they arrived at the place where De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ went about
he then said, “‘What thing did you two do to cross the waters?”’
Then at that time his grandmother said, “Verily, it was that
thy brother caused a bridge to float and thereon we two crossed the
waters.”
So when the Sun arose then at once it caused it to be warm (hot)
on the earth present here. At that time O‘ha’i’ was in a great hurry
and said, ‘‘It should be very soon that thou and I should recross the
waters. If itso be that it will be a long time that thou and I go about
here it will not be possible for us two to cross the waters.”
His grandmother replied and said, “Just he himself, whose lodge
it is, also shall set aside the time he will dismiss us two. Now verily
thou and I are visitors here.’”’ Then at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’-
kho™ said, ‘‘I will prepare food first, and now the fruit which I
have planted is ripe, so we will first eat together. As soon as we shall
be filled then at that time we shall walk about, and we will examine
severally all those things which the earth here present contains which
is new.”
Then at that time he brought corn and he roasted it, and it gave
out a pleasant odor when it became hot and when the fatness flowed
out of it. Now his grandmother said, ‘“‘ Wouldst thou agree to it that
T should pluck off a single grain that I myself at once should eat it?”’
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said, ‘That is not the
custom that so it should come to pass. Do thou wait until it is
cooked, and then when we shall be together we shall eat it. All
we together, it is known, have an equal right to it.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 517
The old woman replied and said, ‘‘At the same time it is a small
matter that thou shouldst spare me the undeveloped end.”’ De‘-
haé™hiyawa’”’kho™ said, ‘It is known that it is not a custom that so:
it should come to pass.’’ She persisted in the matter and said, ‘‘So
wouldst thou consent that one and I should take a small quantity
away with us when it is cooked?” He replied and said, “Verily
that is not the custom that so it should come to pass. It must be,
it is known, that we shall be together when we feed ourselves. That
is the cause that so it shall come to pass because verily all we, it is
known, have an equal right to it. So thus it shall continue to be here
on the earth present here. All we severally shall have an equal right
tovite?
Now at that time the old woman said, ‘Verily, it is an extremely
astonishing thing how stingy thou art.’’ And then she went thither
and there she took a stand beside the fire. Now verily she stood
beside the fire and she picked up a handful of ashes and she
threw them on his roasting corn. As quickly as she threw them
thereon and the ashes fell on it, then verily the appetizing odor ceased
and also the outflowing of the fatness, and now also she said, ‘‘Is it:
only human beings who shall be pleased? Is it not possible that L
myself should be pleased?”’
Now De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ said, ‘What you have done is not
good. Thou hast spoiled that which would give comfort to the
minds of the human beings who shall dwell here upon this earth.”’
When it was cooked they all together ate it. As soon as they had
finished eating then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”™ said, ‘‘Now we will go
out and that shall be first that we shall eat the fruit of the tree
standing close by.”’
Then they went out. There not far away they saw a growing
shrub which bore fruit which was slightly sweet, which were like
drops of syrup. Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “This growing
tree is called large fruit (apple). One each shall we pluck off and
then we shall eat it together.”
Now verily they plucked one off and then they ate the fruit. At
this time the old woman said, ‘‘Wouldst thou consent that I should
pluck off still another which one and I should take away with us?”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa”’kho™ said, ‘Verily that is not the custom
that so it should come to pass until the time of its ripening. Then at
that time it matters not that thou shouldst take it up. Thus too is
it that the game animals they will take up the fruit after that.”
Then the old woman turned herself around and she reentered the
lodge, and there took up a handful of ashes from the fire and came out
carrying the handful of ashes, and she took her stand beside the grow-
ing tree there and she cast the ashes there on the growing fruit and
at once it turned black all over and was covered over with ashes, and
518 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
then she said, ‘“‘Thou art very strong. Is it only that those peoples
who shall dwell here on this earth shall be pleased? Verily it is im-
possible that it please my mind. So the human beings who shall dwell
here shall continue to say when they speak of it, ‘It is the Sour Fruit.’
So not any one among the human beings shall again make use of it,
also the game animals.”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said, ‘‘I think perhaps
thou hast put forth too much power in doing injury to thy grand-
children. So now, perhaps, that is all; now perhaps it would not
be good that thou shouldst see all the things which I have planted
and the game animals.’”’ She replied and said, ““Now then one
and I will recross the water, so thus it shall come to pass that in ten
days I shall return again. So thus it shall come to pass that at that
time then all things shall be settled. And that shall be that thou
and I shall bet;*? so that it shall be that thou and I shall bet for all
the things which are here on the earth. If so it be that I overcome
thee, then I myself will control all those things which thou hast
completed. If it so be, verily, that thou wilt overcome me, then
verily I will not distress you in anything in the days that are coming
ahead, in all things at which thou art at work.”’
At that time De‘haé™hiyaw’’”’kho™ said, ‘‘Thus too shall it come
to pass just as you desire it.”’
During the time that they two were there O‘ha’a’ for his part
studied the human being who newly had come to life. Now at that
time he said, ‘Just what kind of thing didst thou do in making this
man who one would think has a life so exceedingly fine, and one would
think he is verily strong physically?”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘“‘The earth present
here is infantile, young in life, * and it continues to grow and it has the
power by which it puts forth its orenda. So it is thus with all those
things which are growing. They are young in life (infantile) and
they are continuing to grow and they have the power by which
they also put forth orenda. Thus too is it with regard to the game
animals. They are infantile (young in life) and they continue to
grow and they have the power to put forth orenda.
“So it is with regard to the life of the human being who first
stopped on the earth here present. Thus it is that one is infantile
and that one continues to grow and that one has the power to put
forth orenda thereby.”’
At that time O‘ha’i’ said, ‘‘Now too I have come to understand
the whole matter.”’ Now at that time then again he spoke and said,
“So now verily, perhaps, my grandmother and I will depart home-
ward.” Now at that time verily they two departed.
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 519
So when they arrived again at the shore of the water then there
was no more anywhere a floating bridge. Now the old woman said,
“What manner of thing shall we two do that thou and I may cross the
water? Now verily there is nowhere a floating bridge.”
Then O‘ha’a&’ spoke and said, ‘‘Now verily the time has come
when I shall make myself a canoe; very soon now, verily, I will have
completed it.’ So now he began to make himself a canoe. In a
very short time he had entirely completed it. Then he said, ‘‘Come,
now, my dear grandmother, do thou get aboard.” Now at that
time his grandmother and he got aboard. Now verily they two
recrossed the water. In a short time their canoe landed on the side
on which stood their lodge. When they two returned into the lodge
then O‘ha’a’ said, ‘‘Now verily thou and I have returned. So now
I shall make all manner of animals. Now I shall not again tell my
brother about it.”
Now at that time he set to work and worked rapidly. He at-
tempted to make the body of a game animal. He completed it and
then he said, ‘Come, do thou stand up. Do thou also walk.” It
did not succeed in standing up. It just dragged its body along and
went on. At that time O‘ha’é’ said, ‘Indeed I think, perhaps,
De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ has outwitted me. I will yet make another.”
Now at that time he again made another. And when he had
completed it then again he said, ‘‘Come, do thou stand upright and
do thou walk.”” Now again it did not succeed in standing upright.
Only that (was possible) it dragged its body along as it went. So
then he said, “It must needs be now that thus shall continue to
be the bodies of those I shall form. If it so be that they will become
numerous on the earth present here it does not matter that they go
into the water and cross over it and arrive there where floats the
island of my brother. I will even attempt also that by all means
they shall cause trouble continually.”’
Now at that time he began to make the bodies of a number of
animals. Just as fast as possible he kept on throwing their bodies
aside. Their bodies were in all manner of shapes. Now in a very
short while they became very numerous. Now at that time others
in turn whose bodies were extremely monstrous (ugly), now in turn
he made all the various kinds of such animals. |
As soon as they became numerous he then said, “‘To all you here
whose bodies I have formed I assign you a duty that if it so be ye
will be able to cross over the water ye shall go thither to yonder
floating island. At that place food is abundant. All manner of
things grow and game animals abound, human beings also, and it
matters not whether you eat up all those things which ye find there.”
Now at that time these beings traveled about. And they were
fierce in disposition. So some plunged into the water and some
520 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
crossed the body of water, and they landed on the farther side.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ became aware of this and
now he said, ‘“‘I do not think, perhaps, that it would result in good
that these beings should mingle with the game animals. So that,
perhaps, it will be good that I cause them all to recross the water.”’
And so then he drove them back and now verily all recrossed the
water. He too went thither, and when they came out of the water
he then drove as many of them as he saw going about there, some
crawling, and he drove all thither to the place where stood the moun-
tain in which was the cave in which were inclosed the game
animals which O‘ha’é’ had shut up. Into this place he drove all
their bodies. Now at that time he placed over it again the rock and
said, ‘“‘Now I myself in turn shut up all those things whose bodies
O‘ha’a’ has made. So what shall be if he will be able to release the
bodies of all, and also will be, if he should not be satisfied when he
becomes aware that all these beings are shut up?”’
Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now I shall just recross the
water,”’ and then he departed for home.
As soon as he had returned to the place where stood his lodge he
then said, “‘I think perhaps that the way in which I have completed
the human being is not good. It just seems that in his going about
that he is lonesome. It seems that in going from place to place he
stands repeatedly. So, perhaps, it will result in good should I make
yet one other human being so that there will be a pair.”
Now at that time he made another. As to that one, too, he made
her flesh from the earth. And when he had completed it he said,
“That, perhaps, will result in good that I make them alike. That
one, too, shall be like me in my bodily movements.’”’ Then at that
time he took a portion of his own life and he placed it in the body of
her whom he had just made; also he took a portion of his mind and
placed it in the head of her whose body he had just finished; also he
took a portion of his blood and placed it in the flesh of her whose
body he had just finished. Then at that time he took a portion
of his power to look around and to talk and placed them both in her
head which was part of her body. Then he put his breath into her
body as a part of it. So now verily she came to life. De‘haé™-
hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘‘Listen, do thou stand erect on the earth here
present.’ Just as soon as she stood upright he then said, “I myself
have completed thy body. I also have completed all the things
which the earth here present holds and upon which thou dost stand
at present. So now I ordain it, and I give thee control of all things.”
Now at that time he called to him the one whom he first formed.
When he returned there then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”™ said, ‘‘ Now
I have completed it. Verily I myself have completed both your
bodies. So now I ordain for you two that ye two shall marry.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 521
So thou whose body I first formed shalt continue to be visibly
stronger. Verily thou also shall continue to travel about constantly
over the earth here present. Also it shall be by thy hard toil that ye
two shall continue to have peaceful minds, ye two who have married.
So do not ever distress her mind.”’
Now at that time he said, ‘‘Now thou, in turn, whose body I
have just finished, shall have this duty. So I lay all these matters
before thee. It shall be entirely by thy hard toil that he whom
thou hast married shall breathe strongly (have vigor). In the next
place thou also shalt see what kind of suffering it is to have a human
being take form within thy body. So now I have placed before
thee all matters. So verily thou customarily shalt go to and fro
around the fire, so that he who has become thy aid in all the things
I have ordained for you two shall have a peaceful mind. Human
beings shall take form as to the bodies of you two. And the earth
shall be covered by the human beings who will dwell here. So now
I have ordained that you two shall have a difference in length of
days, so death will take place according to the number of days ye two
have. And ye two here unite in marriage during your natural lives.
So now I have mixed together the minds of you two and also the
blood of you two. So then ye two will see human beings take form
through your two bodies. And by means of the mind and also the
blood of you two they shall be bound together. So I ordain for you
two that you two shall have but one mind at all times. Do not you
two distress one the other’s mind during the days which are yours.
So verily that only shall separate you two which is death, by the
difference in the number of days you each have.
“So thus it shall continue to be in the future as to your posterity
that they shall continue to grow up, also they shall continue to
marry, and that shall continue, and when one grows up that one shall
marry only one person. Death only shall separate them severally.
And so my ordinances shall last as long as the earth here present
shall last. It shall continue to come to pass by them.’”’ Now at that
time he said, “‘Now I have completed all things.”
So what came to pass when O‘ha’i’ became aware that the fierce
animals whose bodies he had severally formed were not to be found
anywhere? Now at that time he sought for their bodies. He went
to and fro over the entire island. He saw nothing.
Now at that time he said, ‘I will go to look for them on that other
floating island. It may be possible, actually, at this time they are
going about there.”” Now verily he started and he crossed the water,
of course. When he arrived at the place where stood the lodge of
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ he said, ‘Hast not thou been aware from
time to time that the game animals whose bodies I formed have
19078°—28——34
22 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
arrived here? I can not find their bodies. They do not go about
from place to place whence I departed, so I come looking for their
bodies. I thought, it may be, that at this time they have come
hither to this place.”
Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Thou shouldst just only seek
for their bodies. Thou shouldst travel about over the entire island.
It must needs be, perhaps, that thou shouldst recognize those whose
bodies thou didst form, if it so be that they are going about here on
this island.”
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ started and he traveled about there.
He saw very many game animals of various kinds, which were
severally very numerous. Verily he did not see any whose bodies
he himself had made. Suddenly now he saw the two bodies of the
two human beings, so now he said, ‘‘So what manner of thing are
ye two doing going about here?”’
They two said, “Only that he who completed our two bodies
has verily left us here.” Then O‘ha’é’ was astonished and he care-
fully considered them in the manner in which they two were alive.
At that time then he went aside. When he again reached the place
where De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ abode he said, “I do not find con-
tinually the game animals whose bodies I formed. I have seen
nothing regarding the bodies which I came to seek. The only things
I saw were the two bodies of the two human beings. One was a
male and the other a female. I asked the two whence they two had
come and they two said, ‘He who completed our two bodies left us
here.’ So I thought I at this time should also make something which
should be like the state of being of the lives of the two whom I saw.
Verily, perhaps, thou hast nothing mentally against my making the
like?”’ Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, “So do thou
make one, if thou wilt use great care at this time, and that thou wilt
exactly copy the form of the body of the human being. If it so be
that thou dost exactly copy it, then verily it will be possible that
human beings shall inhabit the place where away thy island floats.
“So if it be so that they shall inhabit there, then just through the
middle our Elder Brother (the orb of daylight) shall habitually pass.”
Now at that time the mind of O‘ha’i’ was greatly pleased. And
so then he said, “So let it come to pass in this manner to-morrow
that thou shouldst go thither. Thou shouldst go to examine it and
thou shouldst aid me, and that thou and I should seek for the bodies
of the animals which I have made, whence they have gone.”’ Then
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “‘That too shall come to pass.”” Then
O‘ha’ ii’ said, ‘‘ Now also I will return home. Just as soon as I return
home then at once I will set to work so that the first thing which
thou wilt see when thou arrivest there will be the human being which
I will have completed.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER yas
When he returned to the place where stood their lodge he said,
‘Listen, my grandmother, an astonishing thing came to pass. I
crossed the water; I went seeking for those game animals whose
bodies I completed. I saw them nowhere. Just only did I see new
human beings, one a male and one also a female. I asked them
whence they two had come. They two named my brother. He it
is, they said, who left them there.
‘So I asked my brother that I myself also should make a human
being. He consented to it now, and he said, ‘Do thou make one.
Thou must do it carefully this time. Thou shalt copy exactly the
form of the body of the human being.’’’ Then his grandmother said,
“That, perhaps, will result in good. Certainly, thou shalt do thus
as he has bidden thee, for verily he has the power. Not surely,
would he verily be pleased that thou shouldst just half do it. It
may be, as is known, at this time something has come to pass which
is the cause that now thou dost not find the bodies of those things
which thou thyself hast completed severally.”
At that time O'ha’i’ said, ‘So now I will begin it. For behold I
have verily only a short time in which to doit. Just to-morrow then
verily he will come and he, my brother, will come to examine it.”
At that time he went out and went to the shore of the water.
When he arrived at the water’s edge he then said, ‘Of that, perhaps,
I myself will use to make a human being is this foam floating on the
water. So that it will be evident that they two, the human beings,
shall be different in the form and kind of their bodies.’”” Now at that
time he saw where the water fell there floated various patches formed
of hills of foam. So now then he took up the foam and from that
he formed the body and he put forth great care. As soon as he
had finished it he then attempted to cause it to live. He was not
able that it should thus come to pass. Then he said, “Just very
soon now, verily, my brother will come here. Without fail I will beg
him to aid me in causing it to come to life, because now I have verily
done very much work to bring about peace and he has agreed to let
me make a human being.”
Now then again he said, ‘“‘I will go to meet him. So when we two
meet I will tell him that I myself failed to cause the human being
which I formed to come to life. Without fail I will beg him then to
cause it to live; that he should do to it even as he has done to that
which he himself completed.”” So now he started.
He had not gone very far when there he was surprised to see that
now his brother was coming toward him. When they met, O‘ha’a’
then said, ‘‘Behold, I have come to meet thee; and the reason is that
I desire that thou shouldst aid me in causing to come to life the body
which I have completed; for as to that verily I have completed the
body of a human being.”
524 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™’ said, ‘““Even so it shall
come to pass. So, in what place lies that which thou sayest thou hast
completed?”’ Then at that time they two started. Just as soon as
they arrived at the edge of the water then O‘ha’i’ said, ‘Behold,
verily, there he lies who is not yet alive. And the reason that it lies
beside the water is because I made it out of the water. I desired that
it should be plainly evident that the two things from which we made
them should be different.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “In only one thing
will I aid thee in causing that to come to life. If it so be that thou
desire still to make another one thou wilt be able to do that. Only
that thou shalt take from some place on his body that thou shalt
mix them. Then thou wilt be able to cause it to come to life.”
Then at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘So that perhaps
will be possible that I will add to it so that he shall have that which
causes me to make bodily movements.’”’ Now at that time De‘haé"-
‘hiyawa’’kho™ took a portion of his life and he placed it in his body;
also he took a portion of his mind and he placed it in his head; also
he took a portion of his blood and he placed it in his flesh; also his
power to see, also his power to talk, of both of which he took portions
and placed them in his head; now at that time he placed his breath
in his body, now also he came to life; and now also he said, ‘‘Do
thou stand up.” At that time he stood up. At that time De‘haé?-
‘hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now verily I have fulfilled in doing so the
thing which thou asked me to do to aid thee. So what thing will
come to pass at some future day that close at hand all this which I
have given up in all my movements shall become hostile to me?”’
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ answered and said, ‘‘Let us two do thus
in this thing in which thou and I took part in causing to come to
life, that thou and I shall have an equal control over it; in that way
perhaps it will result in good that thou thyself shall have something
to say concerning the human beings who will dwell here.”’
Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘‘Let that also come
to pass. I agree to your idea.’”’ Now at that time O‘ha’i’ replied
and said, “Verily thou and I made no mistake in the bodily form of
the two which thou and I completed. It is evident, verily, that the
bodies of the two persons whom thou hast formed are alike; it is
just as evident, too, that he whom I have made has a like body. So
what kind of thing shall thou and I do? So what kind of thing
shall we continue to call him?”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ““‘That person also is one whom
I myself have completed, and verily he was the first person to become
alive on the earth present here. So we shall continue to call him
the human being.’”? (A modern expansion here says: ‘So we shall
continue to call that one a real (native) human being, whose body
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER §25
is reddish; behold this one which thou thyself hast made and in
which I aided thee we moreover shall continue to call him the ax
maker,* whose body is white.’’ This is the modern name of a
white person or European.)
At that time then O‘ha’’ said, ‘That too shall come to pass in
that way; I agree to that matter. So now verily I will be able to
make still another human being. Now verily thou hast given me
the task, and that I shall take only from any place on the body of
this white man whose body is white.”’ Then De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho”™
said, ‘‘ Verily I said that that is all that I myself shall assist thee.”
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ spoke and said, ‘‘Still there is also a single
matter which remains to me. And that is that verily the beings, the
game animals whose bodies I completed, have departed.’’ Then
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘So who then is it who made the moun-
tain standing yonder in the distance? So who is it also who made
that cavern into the earth there directly at the inside of that standing
mountain?”
Now at that time O‘ha’&’ was closely pressed and he became very
angry. At once he believed that he knew, it is possible, how it was.
So then he said, “I believe, as is known, that the game animals,
perhaps, made it thus.” Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and
said, “If it so be that the game animals have as much power as
that, then I certainly believe that they have done thus, made the
open cavern into the earth, and also that they are like those which
are lost and are abiding therein.”
Now at that time O‘ha’i’ said, “Let thou and me go thither.
Perhaps, it is known, that they are certainly abiding there at this
time.” At that time they two started. Now in a short time they
arrived beside the mountain, and then they saw a large rock lying
against it. Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘Here
verily is the place where the game animals have their cavern.”” Now
at that time he took up the rock and threw it aside. Now at that
time he was greatly surprised that only all kinds of monsters emerged
in large numbers. Now there they too watched them continue to come
forth. Now some came dragging their bodies along by crawling;
they severally had no teeth and they severally differed one from
another in the forms of their bodies and in their size; some were
small, some were large; in the next place it was very evident that
they were fiercely ill-humored and they severally showed their teeth
by snarling.
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “It would not result in good,
perhaps, that those things should associate with the human beings,
these beings whose bodies have these shapes. If at this time they
should see them (human beings) these would not continue to live,
so that, perhaps, is good that it matters not that those things should
continue to abide there inside of the earth.”
See note on p. 610.
526 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
Then O‘ha’i’ spoke and said, ‘‘If it be so that that will certainly
come to pass there are still other beings which thou hast not yet
seen which are extremely large. And verily they are still, perhaps,
therein; at all events there are yet nowhere truly large beings. So
now verily, perhaps, it shall thus come to pass that they will continue
to abide only therein.”
Then at that time O‘ha’&’ again took the rock and placed it over
the opening of the cavern. And then he said, ‘‘ Now verily, I sup-
pose, they themselves shall help themselves if it so be that it will
become necessary for them to come forth again.’”’? Now at that time
O‘ha’sa’ said, ‘Now verily thou and I have completed this, so now
let us go together to my grandmother’s place.’’ At that time they
two started.
As soon as they two arrived there again then O‘ha’i’ said, ‘Oh,
my dear grandmother, now one and I have completed it. All that
has been fulfilled which thou hast said. So now, at this time, the
matter rests with thee as to what thou desirest shall come to pass.”
At the time the old woman spoke and said, ‘‘That which is giving
me distress is the head of my daughter. Now verily it is a long time
that it has remained so, the head hanging to the wall of the lodge.”’
Now O‘ha’a’ said, “I think that her head should be fastened up
very high, so that human beings who soon will travel about here
upon the earth will look at it as a memorial that will continually
remind them of what has come to pass.”
Then his grandmother said, ‘That also will please my mind that
thus it shall be done.”
Then De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ said, ‘‘This is the way in which I
consider it, that, perhaps, it will result in good that we should cause
her to come to life again and also that we should remove her body
above, and that we should assign her the duty to give light to it and
that she should cause it to be hot here on the earth. She should
have her duty restricted to a certain place, and that is that when it
becomes dark then customarily she shall cause it to be light again
and also she shall cause it to be hot again during the night, and
that that will cause beings to be here on the earth and among all the
things that grow, and also among all the game animals and the
human beings, all shall be at peace during the nights to come. So
that will be an object of respect and it will continue to end, and
usually after three days then it shall again re-create itself. So that
shall guide all things that are going on here on the earth, and all
the human beings who newly come to stop here on the earth shall
govern themselves thereby.”
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ said, ‘I myself will not consent to that.
I myself am agreeing that it shall be fastened up high, and it would
be sufficient that human beings should look at it at fimes. So my
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 527
dear grandmother and I will become aware of it should it so be that
some one will play a trick upon her; if also one should rob us of the
head, so I will be prepared that at once I shall make a reply if it so
be that there will come a day when one will rob us of the head, and
that shall be that as far as I am able I shall watch constantly in the
days that come and the nights that come. If it so be that I become
aware that some one will play a trick with it I promise that at once
without fail I will destroy that person, no matter whether it be a
human being or a game animal.”’
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ spoke and said, ‘Now
verily all that shall come to pass at some future day is satisfactory
to your minds. So I will tell you that the way in which you two
arranged this will be of no aid to anyone whatsoever.
“So now that matter is still in abeyance with which thou, Elder
Woman, didst challenge me. Verily thou hast struck my doorpost by
way of challenge that thou and I should bet. Verily thou didst say
that thou and I will bet for this, that whosoever shall win shall con-
trol all the things which the earth present here contains. So now I
shall watch for it; so I will continue to be ready. Verily now the
night (date) which thou hast appointed has come, in that thou didst
say, ‘In 10 days’ time thou and I shall bet.’ So not until that shall
pass will I then add to, the things which I still lack in all the things
which remain which I have to do here on the earth.”
Now at that time his grandmother said, ‘“‘Now even I am also
ready. So now verily thou shalt continue to watch thence for one
and I will arrive there soon.’”’ Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’-
‘kho™ said, ‘Thus too it shall come to pass, so now I start home.”
So at that time he started home from there. As soon as he returned
to where stood his lodge of bark then he said, ‘‘Now the time has
come that I myself and you whose bodies I have severally completed,
without a single exception, face verily an ominous thing which is
coming to pass and has now brought our affairs to a crisis. To-
morrow the old woman, the dear grandmother of O‘ha’a’, will come,
and verily she comes seeking whatsoever things I have placed under
your control. Verily she desires that if it beso that she shall win and
overcome me, she verily desires that not a thing shall again grow
which you two human beings and the game animals live upon. She
desires to ruin all these things. Now, should that time come, verily
it will be distressing to all things whatsoever. There shall not be
anything upon which you two may live, also the game animals. So
thus it shall come to pass, if it be so that I myself win, that I myself
shall rule all the things, all that the earth present here contains so-
unchanged, in that event, the kind of things over which I myself gave
you contro! shall continue to be. In the next place, I shall yet add
528 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
to what I have done and that, perhaps, will result in good that only
for a certain length of time shall the various kinds of things which
I have planted grow. The reason that so it shall come to pass is
because verily continually they seek cause to ruin all of mine (for me).
“So perhaps it will result in good that two things shall take place
with regard to the coming days, and also with regard to the coming
nights; the first is that it will cause it to be hot on the earth present
here a certain length of time, so at that time and place shall they
continue to grow during the time that it shall cause it to be hot,
all those things that grow there. And when all will mature, then at
that time the air stirring about will be changed to other. That,
in its turn, it will cause it to be cold, and it shall continue for a cer-
tain length of time when the coming days will be cold, also the com-
ing nights; and as to that it will take place by means of it, and so
it shall continue to be as did O‘ha’é’ in causing the bridge to float,
and so it will continue to be that customarily it shall become hard
here on the earth, also the water, all will become hard.
“So this condition will last for a certain time, when all will become
mellow, it will melt, it will exhaust itself, and it will continue to
result in good that thus it shall continue to be, for thereby the earth
present here shall continue to live and also all things which grow,
also the game animals, also the human beings, at all times there will
be new manners of things. So it will result in good that there shall
be two modes of becoming in the coming days.
“Another thing also will result in good, that there shall be an
orb of light at night; so that they two shall aid each other, our Elder
Brother and our Grandmother. Soon the earth present here people
will say, ‘The orb of light pertaining to the day, our Elder Brother,
be the great warrior chief,’ and in the next place they will con-
tinue to say, ‘The light orb pertaining to the night, our Grand-
mother.’ So the several peoples dwelling on the earth here present
shall continue to hold in respect the two orbs of light; so the orb
pertaining to the night will continue to end, and it will continue to
change, and customarily it will disappear during three nights, then
at that time it will newly grow again, so that thereby all peoples will
continue to guide themselves and they will continue to have respect
for it, they who will continue to appear in the coming days.”
Now at that time he sat down there. It was not long that he
sat there when he was suddenly surprised that now his grandmother
and O‘ha’i’ were rapidly approaching. So now he said, “Now
verily they two are coming, my dear grandmother, Awe?’‘hai‘, and
‘my brother, O‘ha’i’; that verily they come seeking that now all
the things which I have made, without reserve, should be stripped
from my’ hand.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 529
“So now you, you two human beings, and you, game animals,
now you shall see what will come to pass when the two sides come
to grips, when our bodies will sway * to and fro rapidly, so you two
human beings will continue to have the story such as you two shall
see it; that will continue to be a saga, and the story will last as
long as the earth present here will last; also on the side of your com-
ing posterity, they will learn the story, and still other marvelous
things which shall happen in the future during the time the earth
shall continue to be, will come. I believe that perhaps O‘ha’d’ will
be able to do very much, he will do abnormal things repeatedly,
and so the coming posterity of you two will see many fearful things.”’
Now at that time his Grandmother and O‘ha’a’ arrived there.
Now at that time De‘hat™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Verily, now the
set time has come. On this day now will be manifested on which
side fate will decline and fall, either on the side of the welfare of
human beings and of the game animals or on that side, the side
of their destruction, wherein all persons and things will be destroyed.
So now we two shall begin.”
At that time his Grandmother said, ‘So thus it shall come to
pass. My own bowl and my pits shall thou and I use. We two will
throw (them).”’
At that time De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ replied and said, ‘Even
I also will decide what shall so come to pass. That is, that I will
agree to it that thou and I will use thy own bowl, and that even
also, as to that, I will use, in the next place, the pits which are mine.
As to thyself, thou shalt use, in the next place, those pits that belong
to thee; in the next place, this shall come to pass, only once shall thou
and I each throw the bowl; then at that time thy and my mind will
be satisfied when it will fall (in deciding) who it is who will be over-
thrown. Thou, it may be, shalt have the good fortune that toward
thee it will fall; possibly, it may be that I shall have the good for-
tune, that in that event it will fall toward me.”
Now at that time the old woman said, ‘Now art thou then pre-
pared with the pits which thou wilt use?’ Now at that time De'-
ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said, “Just at once I too will get
them.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ started, and there at a
short distance he stood and he said, ‘Come, do you come hither, you
chickadees. There shall be six of you.’”’ Many of them came to
him as a flock. Now he spoke and said, ‘‘Now, verily, the time
has come that I appeal to you that you shall assist me, and that is,
that my dear grandmother and I are going to bet. And we two
will lay down as the wager whatever grows of itself on the earth
here present, and in the next place the game animals, and in the
See note on p. 610.
530 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
next place the human beings wko come to stop on the earth. So
now I will use your heads.”
Now at that time they cried out and they sang; they perched
themselves along on his body. So then he began and he beheaded
them severally, six in number. Just then he returned to the place
where his grandmother went about. When he returned there he
said, “‘So now the matter will start. Thus it shall come to pass,
as is what thou desirest, that is, verily, when thou and I will throw,
- thou and I will throw the bowl only once each.” Now at that time
he sat down on the ground. Then the old woman said, ‘‘I, verily,
will be the first to throw the bowl.’”’ So at once then she threw the
bowl and that came to pass that her luck turned out badly for (the
throw) summed nothing whatever.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ““Come, do thou
take thy pits out of it. Now, verily, I at this time will place my
pits therein, now, until the fortune of whatever I have made will
become manifest.”
Now at that time he placed his pits in the bowl and it came to pass
in such wise that one would believe that they were alive, as it were.
They ran around backward and forward in the bowl. So now
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Listen, you whose bodies I have formed,
all now put forth your orenda that we together may win so that at
all events all you shall continue to live.” So then at once he threw
the bowl. Now at that time two things went together, there was
a loud noise, all the various kinds of animate life cried out, and all
things that grow on the earth. Then at that time his pits sang and
then they flew up, and they went up high there out of sight, and the
sound accompanied them. Now as to De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ and
his grandmother they put forth their orenda and they just rolled
about and they cried out repeatedly. Also he kept saying, ‘Let
there come a field.”” Also she kept saying on her part, “It kills
nothing. ”’
After the lapse of a sufficient time then they heard the birds
coming in the distance and now they were coming downward, now
they cried out continually in extremely loud sounds. Suddenly
now they again alighted there in the bowl, and he kept saying,
“Let there come a field.”” The old woman on her part kept saying,
“Let three come together.’’ It was a very long time that it was not
possible for them to be still; they just ran about to and fro. Sud-
denly they now became still, and all became black.
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Verily I have put down a
field. So now, my dear grandmother, I have answered your challenge.
Now verily it is a long time during which thou hast been distressed
(to know) what thing thou shouldst do that thou wouldst be able to
strip my hands of all those things which I have completed. So
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 531
now thy person has fallen away from the whole matter. Now
those persons who have newly come to life here on this earth present
here have now come into control of it. So it will come to pass thus
in regard to the future posterity of human beings. If it so be that
at some time they will tell of thee then this shall be thy name and
they will continue to say, ‘She, the Ancient of Body (the grand-
mother).’ And verily the reason that thus it shall come to pass is
that now everything has been stripped from thy hands, all the
things which have just newly started to grow on the earth, also all
those things which have grown up, also the game animals, also the
human beings. So now as to thyself it then shall come to pass that
thou shalt become a saga and that the human beings who will con-
tinue to dwell on this earth shall continue to relate it.”’
Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, “So now thou
whose body I first newly made, thy life is still in its infancy ** and so
thou shalt have the name, and people will continually say, ‘Sapling.’
So now as to the one who is one with thee, this shall be her name and
people will continue to say, ‘The Growing Flower.’ And the reason
that it shall come to pass that such shall be the names of you two
is that both your lives will endure as long as the earth will be present
here. Verily, it means that the growing bushes and the growing
trees and the growing grasses full of flowers and the growing trees
are infantile, so both are new and infantile. So now it so shall be
forever, always there shall be new things coming to life.
“So now we will give thanks that we have overcome for all time,
and that all we shall continue to be peacefully contented. So now
thou, Sapling, thou wilt be the first one to give thanks. Thou shalt
cry out three times and all shall repeat your words, and that means
that now we are all happy. So thus it shall come to pass that in the
future they shall continue to do thus, no matter for what purpose
people will rejoice.”
Now at that time Sapling cried out and he repeated it three times.
The sounds were extremely loud. Now in the next place all the
various kinds of game animals followed his voice and all cried out.
Now De‘haé™hiyaw’’’kho™ said, ‘‘Now every matter which
remained unsettled has been entirely adjusted.”
Now at that time he said, ‘‘So one more matter is left. Now you,
O‘ha’a’, and my dear grandmother, you two must at once give back
the head of my dead mother, for now verily I myself will control
everything.”
At that time O‘ha’a&’ replied and said, ‘Not yet, verily, have I
myself given up the head. So I myself do not yet agree to the matter
that now thou shouldst control everything. So thus it shall come
See note on p. 610.
La IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
to pass. Utterly wilt thou overthrow my power to do before it shall
so come to pass in accordance with thine own intentions.’
At that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Not, verily, have I
myself done thus that I should manifest wherein our two methods of
doing differ, that I myself am at work so that all of us should con-
tinue to be at peace in our minds.”
Now at that time the old woman said,‘‘ Perhaps it will not result
in good that you O‘ha’a’ should still contend. Now all that in
which thou and I usually would control has been lost. So now we
two will depart for home.’ Now at that time they two started
homeward.
Some time afterwards now as to them the two human beings had
issue. Then they two traveled about with their family. Now at
that time De‘haé™hiyawa’‘kho™ said, “Now I have decided the
matter that now thou shalt assist me, so that thy handiwork will
appear in time, in that I desire that now we will go to bring back the
head of my mother. So thus it shall come to pass. Thou shalt fully
prepare thyself. And thou shalt get red willow’ and thou shalt make
thyself medicine therewith. Verily thou shalt use it as an emetic.
When the Sun will not yet have arisen then thou shalt have used the
medicine thrice; in the next place, thou shalt continue to do this for
three days. Now at that time we will start. So thou and I will
divide between us our work. Thou, Sapling, dost possess this place.
So thus shalt thou do. Thou shalt travel about, thou shalt go over
every portion of the entire island. So if it so be that thou wilt see
the horn of a deer lying on the ground, thou shalt place it up high.
In the next place, if it so be that thou wilt also see a flint lying on
the ground, thou shalt take it up and customarily place it up high.
“As much as is possible for thee thou shalt do this with care and
thou shalt exhaustively do it. Do not let any be left lying on the
ground. That (work) alone if so thou shalt do, will enable us to
pass the crisis. We, it is known, will be able to ward off the power of
O‘ha’ ii’. And, it seems, truly, that he will be able to follow us back,
so there I myself too will go to the place where floats the island of
O‘ha’a’. To that I myself will direct my labor. I will go around
the island and all the horns which I will find I will place them up
high, and the flint which I will find I will place all up high.
“Only that will result in our passing through the crisis severally.
Thus, it is known, it will come to pass that when O‘ha’&’ will become
aware and see the horns, also the flint, placed up high, he will believe,
it is known, that seemingly now everyone has become hostile to him.
And, it is known, he will keep still and seat himself in the lodge. So
by the time that I return again all this work must be completed.”
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 533
Now at that time Sapling began to do the things which he had
assigned to him asa duty. Now too De‘haé™hi,awa’’kho™ started
and went there to the place where the floating island of O‘ha’i’ stood
out of the water.
When De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho™ arrived there he then traveled about.
Just as quickly as he found a horn he placed it up high; also did he
place up high all the flints which he saw.
Now at that time he went to the side of the lodge and there he
found exceedingly many, which covered the space around the lodge.
He then picked up all and placed them severally up high, and also
the flint rocks. When he completed the task then he looked about in
different places, and verily he saw there a tree standing hard by,
and there to the top of the tree the Head* was fastened. Then he
understood that it was not difficult for some one to be able to climb
the standing tree, and he saw there beside the tree O‘ha’i’ in ambush.
Now at that time he turned himself around and he went toward a
mountain standing in the distance, and so there he met a Man Being
and that one said, ‘‘Whence dost thou come?’”? Then De‘haé™-
hiyawd’’kho™ said, in speaking, ‘Yonder there floats an island; I
come from there$ verily I am going about examining what is taking
place on the earth.’’ Not long after then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
again spoke and said another thing, ‘‘Now verily thou hast asked
me, so now in my turn I ask thee whence then didst thou thyself
come?’ Now at that time the Man Being said, ‘‘I come from the
direction of the Sun’s setting, and I too am going about examining
the earth present here. It is known that I myself possess it; I myself
completed all.” *
Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘“‘What then art
thoucalled?”’ The Man Being replied, ‘‘Hadu’’i’, I myself am called.”
Now at that time the Man Being said, ‘“‘What manner of thing then
art thou thyself called?” De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said,
“Verily, I myself am called De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho”’. I completed
the bodies of human beings who live on the earth. So now I wish
dearly to see how much power thou thyself hast, in that thou dost
continue to say, ‘I myself have completed the earth present here.’ ”’
Now at that time Hadu’’i’ held a rattle which was made of the
shell of the great turtle, and now he shook his rattle to cause it to
give sounds; it made aloud sound. It was evident that all the various
kinds of animals which were traveling about were frightened.
Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ said, “I really believe,
seemingly, that I am not satisfied with it. That perhaps would
satisfy my mind to see that thou could’st cause the mountain standing
yonder in the distance to come hither, just to move itself hither.”’
See note on p. 610.
534 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Then Hadu’’i’ said, “It matters nothing so that thus it shall come
to pass.”
So then Hadu’’i’ said, ‘Come, any way, let us two face about.”
In fact they two now faced about, both faced one certain way. Now
at that time Hadu’’i’ said, ‘Come, do thou come hither, thou moun-
tain standing yonder, and thou shalt come close up to this place
where we two stand, at our backs.’’ Now at this time he addressed
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ and said, “Listen, thou and I shall stop
breathing as long as we can hold our breaths.”’
So then they two stopped breathing. When they two had held
their breaths as long as they could, then Hadu’’i’ said, “Come, now
let us two face about again.’”’ So at that time they two faced about
again and then they two saw that the mountain standing in the
distance had not changed its place but slightly.
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Now verily it
has become manifest that thou art not able to cause the mountain
standing yonder to move hither. So verily it is not thou who hast
finished the earth here present. So now I myself, at this time, will
attempt to c. use the mountain yonder to move hither. It must
needs be, perhaps, that the mountain standing yonder will move
itself hither when I speak thither if it so be that truly I myself have
completed the earth present here. So now let us two face about.”
When his voice died away in saying, ‘‘Do thou come hither, thou
mountain standing yonder. Here at our backs thou wilt adjoin
thyself,’ then they faced about. Now also he said, ‘Now let us
two hold our bresths. So it will be decided by the length of time
thou canst hold thy breath; that will decide it. So thus it shall come
to pass as to that, that I myself will say, ‘Now.’ Just then and not
before thou shalt look.”
Now at that time they two kept still while they held their breaths.
Just after so long a time then Hadu’’i’ became aware that some kind
of thing seemingly grazed against his back, so now he hastened and
turned around again, that is, he thought, ‘So, let me see what kind
of thing is this that is taking place.’’ So because he turned his
head quickly in turning himself around his face struck the mountain
edge there. Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘“Now, verily, wilt
thou and I face about again.”’ Now at that time they two faced
about again. And now, as to that, the mountain stood at that very
place—at their backs.
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ looked at Hadu’’’ and he saw that
his nose had become awry, also his mouth. At that time De‘haé™-
hiyawé’’kho™ said, ‘Listen, I myself am master here on this earth.
I myself have completed it.”
So at that time De‘haé™hiyaw4’’kho™ said, “What manner of
thing has come to pass? Seemingly, something, I believe, perhaps,
has happened to thee, because thy face has changed in appearance.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 535
Then Hadu’’i’ said, “It is certain, verily, thou hast great power
and thou wast able to cause the mountain standing yonder to move
hither, so that, verily, by reason of thy power this has befallen me
to-day. And I thought that I would see what manner of thing, any
way, grazed my shoulder, so then verily I turned around and I struck
my face against the mountain standing there, and verily, then it
became the truth to me that thou thyself hast finished the earth
present here, because verily thou wast able to control the standing
mountain.
“Tt is true indeed that thou art the Ruler on the earth present
here. It is true, verily, that thou hast formed and completed all the
things which it contains. So then I have resolved that at once I
humble myself low before thee. Thou shouldst have mercy on me
that I should continue to live humbly. I will be able then to give
thee aid in that thou continuest to say verily that the race of human
beings are about to settle on the earth present here; in that I will
give aid to mankind. Very soon hereafter human beings will be
vexed by visions.
“Tt is a fact that so it is that orenda (magic power) inheres in my
flesh.*° It has thus happened thereby that verily I have infected with
this orenda the earth present here. It is I verily who was the first
to wander to and fro on the earth present here. So that soon verily
it will be that human beings will be vexed by visions as they go to
and fro here on the earth. And verily the form of my body will be
imitated,*! also such as my face is when they will become ill, and in
the next place human beings will be bewitched as they go about from
place to place.
“So then thus it shall be in order that it may be possible that
human beings who are ill may recover. If perhaps they will make a
wooden form patterned after the shape of my face, and also after
the shape of my body. So then that is the reason that so it will
come to pass that it will be by the means of that that I continue
to say that without fail I will assist and aid thee in all that thou
hast completed among mankind.
“So that that will be the cause that they will recover health
when they are ill, that they shall continue to think in the greatest
contentment. So then this only shall continue to be in the days
that are coming. Now in the next place I am going to say another
thing. That I believe that I am able to continue to aid the human
beings whom thou hast severally formed. In the next place I believe
that O‘ha’a’, who hates thy purposes, will resort to all manner of
things in his attempts to scatter whatever things he will be able, to
destroy thy work, and that is that people shall become ill and people
shall suffer in mind, and it will result only in putting an end to the
See note on p. 610.
536 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH, ANN. 43
days of human beings. So then I will attempt to continue to aid
human beings without ceasing, I will continue to remove away
illness, that is if it so be that perhaps they still have’some remaining
days. So that it will continue to be possible that they will remember
me in that I should aid them. So they will continue to address me
in customarily saying, ‘My Dear Grandfather.’ And when custom-
arily they will tell of me then they will say, ‘Our Dear Grandfather’;
by that shall human beings continue to designate me. So then I
myself will continue to greet them by this that I will say, ‘My Dear
Grandchildren,’ when I will direct my words there toward mankind
who go about from place to place here on the earth.
“To thee I will verily refer the matter as to what manner of
thing thou wilt say shall come to pass. Now verily thou hast knowl-
edge of what has taken place in my mind.”
Now then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho®’ said, “I will confirm (by
accepting) thy desire that thou seekest to continue to aid mankind,
and in the next place the game animals. Just one thing I think
perhaps would not result in good, that thou shouldst reveal thyself
to them, if also thou shouldst reveal thy power, because, it may be,
as to that thou wouldst frighten them should they see thee and thy
manner of doing.
“So then that perhaps would result in good that in some place
thou shouldst continue to abide, (for) verily nothing can bar thy
sight and thou wilt continue to hear them fully when mankind will
speak of or to thee. Nothing verily is a bar to thee.”
Now at that time Hadu’’i’ was pleased and now he said, “TI accept
thy proposition. Now then I will tell thee what shall come to pass.
So then I humbly choose to abide there, indeed there verily I shall
dwell in the places where the ground is rough and there are stone
cliffs, there where there are tall rocks and also high banks. Then
no one will see me; there I will continue to abide as long as the earth
shall continue to be in this place. It is true, verily, perhaps, that it
would not result in good that the human beings whom thou hast
formed and I shouldst commingle, and in the next place the game
animals and all the kinds of things which grow on the earth. That
shall come to pass.
“So that then that will continue to be possible in the future as
the days come that I shall continue to greet human beings as ‘My
Dear Grandchildren.’ So then there is nothing to prevent that they
shall make something that shall resemble my humble body “” and
also my face.
“So then it will be possible that from a certain tree, whose life is
singularly hardy, and which verily is called basswood, shall be taken
the timber from which one shall make that which shall resemble
See note on p. 610.
ad
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER oe ‘
the form of my face to-day. So then they shall use that as a means
when again customarily they will call on me that I should repeatedly
blow upon one who isill. So then there is no objection that a human
being should impersonate me. So then surely one will cover the face
with that which is made to resemble the shape of my body, and that
will make it possible that they may go to the several lodges of the
people; then verily the members of the Society of Hadu’’i’ must
there impersonate me.
“As soon verily as they will arrive there then they shall begin, and
they shall blow repeatedly on the person who is ill, and it is well
known that that is just the same as if I myself had blown on that
one repeatedly. That verily shall control that they shall make
preparations when one turns toward me to beseech me to give aid
to one.
“So then native tobacco shall be one of the principal things there,
that verily they whom I greet as ‘My Dear Grandchildren’ will pledge
their words with it. So one will do when one speaks, that customarily
one shall hold in the hand that which I regard highly, native tobacco.
“So then usually one will cast the native tobacco on the fire, then
at that time verily smoke will arise therefrom. Then at that time
verily it will be possible that I myself shall draw in the smoke. So
then that shall be one of the principal things that one will continue to
use much as a means, and one will continue to impersonate me;
that then one must use the fire kindled by mankind, therefrom cus-
tomarily one will take up hot ashes, that one will use to blow repeat-
edly over the entire body of the person who is sick. Then at that
time the disease, sickness, will go away.
“Tn the next place that shall be one of the main things provided
when one will call upon me, and which I highly prize, parched corn
mush; so then usually one will prepare a kettle of it when the rite will
start that I will blow upon one repeatedly. So thus it shall continue
to be and no matter at what time (of the year). That will be able
to cause one, too, who is ill to recover health.”’
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™’ said, ‘‘Now verily thou
hast completed the arrangements according to thy mind as to thy
position on the earth present here. So there.’”’ Now at that time
they two separated.
Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ went home. When he arrived again
at the place where his brush lodge stood he said, and spoke to
Odéndonni’’a‘, “Now I have returned. Now the whole matter has
been arranged as to what will come to pass. So, now then let us two
go there to the place which I had appointed.”
19078°—28——35
538 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
Now at that time Odéfdonni’’a‘ said, “Now I too for my part
have completed all those things which thou didst request that I,
poor I,shoulddo. So now I am expecting it in that you said ‘As soon
as I return we shall depart.’ Now then too in my small way I am
ready.”’
Then De‘hae™“hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘“‘Let thee and me then make
ourselves a canoe, so that we may put the canoe in the water, and
verily some one must steer by means of the paddle.”’
Now at that time they two made a canoe for themselves. In a
very short time then they had finished the canoe. Then De‘haé-
‘hiyawa’’kho®” said, ‘““Come, do you come hither, all, every one
who thinks ‘Surely I will not fail in anything if it so be one should
pursue me.’”’
Now then verily the man beings began to arrive; and then Fox
arrived and said, “I, I will volunteer. I will steer by means of the
paddle.”” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” said, ‘“‘What manner of
thing then wilt thou do when we arrive?” Then Fox said, ‘It will
be I that will take up the Head when it falls to the ground and I will
flee at once.”’
Now then in a very short time different man beings severally
arrived there. Now again another man arrived there who is called
Fisher; now in his turn that one said, “I also will add my help
thereto.”’. Then De‘haé™hiyawa&’’kho™ said, ‘“‘What kind of thing
then wilt thou do when we will arrive there?’”’? Now Fisher answered
and said, ‘‘When he will come fleeing with the head, and as soon as he
brings it there to the lakeside, then I in turn will carry the head.
Along in the depths of the water I will pass. One shall not overtake
me.”
Then De‘haé“hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘ Not verily will the form of the
plan of you two succeed.”
At that time then another man arrived there. Then Beaver stood
there and said, ‘‘I also will add my help.” Then De‘haé™hiyaw4’-
*kho™ said, ‘‘What kind of thing then wilt thou do when we arrive
there?’’? At once he replied and said, ‘I will do this when we arrive
there, that is, ] will remain in the canoe. If it so be that it becomes
necessary I will cut down the tree, or also if it becomes necessary
to bring away the Head I will be able to do it, and I will not pass
through the depths of the water.”
Now at that time De‘ha陓hiyaw&’’kho” said, ‘‘Now verily
there has been found one who will be able to aid us. So now there is a
sufficient number of us.”” At that time then first one then another
spoke and kept saying, ‘‘I also will add my paddle.” Fox, also
Fisher, they both too said, ‘There too we humble ones will go.”
At that time then they got aboard the canoe and they departed.
As soon as they arrived at the place where the Sun island floated
then they two, De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ and Odéfdofni’’3‘, stood
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 539
at the top of the bank. He alone, Beaver, remained in the
canoe and he said, “So then I will remain here with the canoe. I
will keep on the watch that if you two have need that I aid you two
it will only be necessary that you two name me, and that will be
sufficient and at once I will arrive there.”
Now at that time every one answered and they said, ‘‘ We also are
ready. Verily all that is necessary is that you name us thence.”
So now these two were surprised that there they swam along with
their heads out of the water, and then there near by they landed,
and these were all manner of animals. Fisher was the first one to
ascend the bank and he seated himself at the top of the bank and also
said, ‘So here then I humbly will continue to sit and I will just con-
tinue to be ready if it so be that it will become necessary that [
should give aid.”’
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa”’kho™ addressed Odendonni’’a‘
saying, “‘Come, then, now therefore let us two start.’”’ Now at
that time they two departed. When they two arrived there
where stood the Tree of Light no one was going about there. Now at
that time Odéndonni’’a‘ said, “Now I will humbly attempt to climb
it.” So now he attempted to climb the standing tree. Only a
short distance had he gone when he was forced down, and there he
fell down and there he again stood. Now then he said, “It seems
perhaps that I am not able to climb it, because my feet do not by
any means grasp it.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Thus
verily is thy life new-born (infantile).“ So now it has become mani-
fest in what thy body as it is is still lacking. That verily is what
I think still to complete as to thy body. That verily is that I have
failed to complete thy feet as they are. If indeed I had not thought
that it may be possible perhaps sometime that thou shouldst need to
climb growing trees. So now I will repair the error. That verily
is what is lacking is that thy feet are not hollowed out (have no
instep).”’
Now at that time he said, ‘‘Hold up hither thy foot.”” Now Odéi-
donni’’a‘ held up his foot thither. Now at that time De‘haé™-
hiyawa”’kho”™ took hold of his foot and then pressed the middle
part of his foot inwardly, and then he said, ‘“‘ Now I have completed
all that in which I had failed in what I made. So now at once do
thou again stand. Come, hasten thyself and climb it. Now verily
in a very short time they two will arrive; I do not believe that thou
and I will have time for what we are about to do.” Now at that time
Odéndonni’’a‘ hastened and he climbed it. Most easily he ascended
rapidly. He arrived at the top of the tree, then verily he made haste
to detach the Head and took it off. At once he started back down
again, and he carried the Head in his arms on oneside. Verily he
See note on p. 610.
540 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
just came straight down quickly. In a very short while now he
again stood on the ground. Then Odéfdonni’’s‘ said, “It was very
hardly possible for me to succeed (to go through) and verily I just
stripped the entire length of the tree; I just came straight down.
Then thus it came to pass, beginning on my feet along my legs, along
my body just there also all the skin was taken off on the standing
tree; that too took place, verily the tree just shines, because I
came down so quickly. So now I have brought back what I fetched,
and that is the Head which was attached to the top of the standing
tree.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “That they shall
use for a tale among thy posterity in the future, and that is what
happened as to this tree. So it shall continue to be called the syca-
more.”
Now at that time, just then, they two arose, O‘ha‘i’ together with
his dear grandmother. At once she looked at the place where stood
the tree. She saw that the Head was no longer anywhere attached
to the top of it. At once she shouted and she wept. She said,
“Now, behold, they have taken from us the Head. Do thou hasten
thyself then.”’
Now at that time the animals of all kinds cried out; there was a
great noise. So now O‘ha’i’ understood what had now taken place
and he said, ‘‘Now verily that has come to pass which I have been
saying all the time, verily that something indeed is about to take place.
Because everywhere one is preparing that by which one should kill
me. Everywhere verily one has placed up high the deer horns and
flint stones. So then it is not I that am able in the least thing to
assist in the matter. So then do thou by thyself alone struggle for
it. Do thou follow them who have carried away the Head.”
Now at that time the Ancient Woman ran forward, she ran swiftly,
running there to the place where stood the tree. As soon as she
arrived there she was surprised that the tracks of the men were
there, and then she looked and saw they had gone toward the sun’s
setting. Now at that time then she ran swiftly. Now verily she
pursued them, the friends of De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™ and himself.
Now as to them, they just heard her running swiftly behind them.
In a very short time now she shouted at them, saying, “‘Do ye bring
back the Head.”
Now at that time Fox said, ‘“‘Behold, do thou hand it to me. Let
me carry away the Head. I am known to be swift-footed anyway.
She will not overtake me.’”? Then Odéfidofni’’a‘ said to him, “ Per-
haps I should not consent that thou shouldst carry away the Head,
because verily it is evident that thou art disparaging the matter, that
thou art deceitful (two-faced).”’
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 541
Then Black Squirrel said, ‘“‘Let me, perhaps, carry it away. When
I will bear the Head along I will go crossing over the tops of the trees
on high. She shall not again take from us the Head.”
Then Odéfdonni’’a‘ said, “It is all right, verily, if it so be that it
should become necessary. At that time then and not before ye may
assist us.”’
In ashort time then Odéndonni’’ai’ became aware that the Old
Woman was now running close to him; now at that time he put forth
his strength in running. Near by his friends ran along, also up
high, Black Squirrel and the Fisher, they ran along through the
treetops, exerting all the power they possessed to keep up with Odén-
dofini’’‘. Gradually the Old Woman ran closer and closer to them,
although they had gone far. Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’-
*kho™ said, “Behold, now put forth thy strength. Do thou take
courage.”” Now then they two together exerted their strength and
ran, both Odéndonni’’A‘ and De‘haé‘hiyawa’’kho”’.
They returned to the place where lay the canoe in which Beaver
remained, and at once they two got into the canoe. At that time
De‘haé“hiyawai’’kho™ said, “‘Now verily the time has come that
all of you should assist us two. Thou, Odéfidonfni’’a‘, must paddle
and thou also shalt steer it.’ At that time Otter ran up there and
he got aboard and said, “T also will assist. I humbly will paddle.”
Now another one came running up (it was Muskrat) and he got
aboard and said, “I also will assist. I will paddle humbly.”
Now at that time they turned their canoe about and now verily
they paddled with all their strength. Just a short distance away
were they going in their canoe when the Ancient Woman arrived at
the edge of the water. Exceedingly angry she was, and now she said,
“QOdéndonni’’i‘, take pity on me. Give back to me what ye are
carrying away, the Head.”’ But that one did not reply. Now at
that time she said, ‘Oh, Beaver, have pity on me. Do thou cause
it to return, thou verily art steering it.’ That one said nothing.
Now at that time she said, ‘“‘Oh, Otter, thou possibly shouldst have
pity on me. Do thou cause it to return back.’”’ He replied nothing.
Now verily at that time she said, ‘Oh, Muskrat, do thou have pity
on me, do thou cause it to return back.’ At that time he replied
and said, ‘So be it.” At that time De‘ha陓hiyawa&’’kho™ said,
“Now verily thou hast become culpable; now verily thou didst
make a mistake in that thou repliedst. Now then thou in the next
place shalt debark. So then thy humble self shall have no power to
do anything on the earth. At all times thy humble self shall go about
along the edge of the waters.’ Now at that time they cast the
Muskrat overboard.
Then Otter became frightened at what took place and then he
said, ‘‘Now I too will take myself out.’ Now De‘haé“hiyawa’-
542 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
‘kho™ said, ‘‘Thou verily shalt decide. It is known verily that no
one enlisted thee. At all times then thou shalt continue to be wild
and at all times thou shalt continue to hide thyself, and in the depths
of the waters thou shalt continue to go to and fro.”” So then at that
time he got overboard.
There, as to that one, they lost sight of the Ancient Woman, there
away she continued to cry out and there she went about weeping.
So then when their canoe stopped at the place from whence they
started then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “‘Now verily we have re-
turned. Now then thou, Beaver, thou hast accomplished very much
in the way of assistance in this matter. Now then I ordain it for
thee. Thou shalt continue to have (magic) power in that thou
shalt be able to control the water and the earth present here.
“Indeed, thou shalt decide in thy mind if, it may be, thou wilt
resolve to use it to make earth for thyself, or, it may be also, that thou
wilt desire to dam up the water for thyself, and indeed it shall come
to pass also exactly in accordance with the purpose of thy mind.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawi’’kho"’ spoke and said, ‘‘ Now
then I will remake it so that the flesh of my Mother shall become
whole again.’’» Now at that time verily he made it over, over again,
and he remade it by means of the air. When he finished it he said,
““Now I have again finished it. Now thy flesh body and also thy
power has become whole again; now thou hast received it ail again.
Verily it was my brother who caused the ruin to befall thee as the
first victim here on the earth; it is he also who has caused much ruin
to all that is contained in the earth present here. Still also much
more will he do wrong as long as the earth continues to endure.
““So now, my Mother, I ordain for thee that thou shalt have a duty,
and that the purpose of thy duty shall be that thou shalt attend to
the earth here present, also all kinds of grasses, some that habitually
put forth fruit; also the grown clumps of bushes, some habitually put
forth fruit; also the forests of all kinds of trees, some habitually
put forth fruit; also the many other things that habitually grow on
the earth here present, mankind and game animals.
“So then I assign thy duty to the time when it shall cause it to be
hot again, that it shall in a normal way become hot again; and it is
that one who will so do, the daytime Orb of Light that goes about.
It is He who is responsible for causing it to be light during the length
of the day, and He will cause it to be hot, which will begin when the
days shall change in kind, the time which is called early spring,
and there too next in order will begin to grow thence anew the various
species of things, which will begin when they put forth flowers, there
they will continue to grow until all shall reach maturity, when again
it will become cold on the earth. So you two will assist each other,
our Elder Brother, the daytime Orb of Light. At that place thoushalt
newirt] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 543
have thy duty when it will become dark on the earth, at that time
thou in thy turn wilt cause it to be hot and thou wilt cause it to be
light and thou shalt cause dew to fall. Also thou shalt continue
to assist thy grandchildren, as you address them, in mind, who will
continue to go about on the earth.”
Now at that time he took red willow and then he scraped off the
bark. Now at that time he said, ‘““Now then thou shalt depart.
So thus it is of thee, they will begin to say of thee on the side of the
Sun’s setting, they whom you address as grandchildren shall continue
to say, that there on that side they will see thee newly again, and thou
shalt slowly continue to draw nearer, and in the next place thou wilt
slowly increase in size and night after night thou wilt continue to
move along toward the place where goes about the Sun. So that
when thou wilt arise there then thy form will be complete as they
look at thee, so now from that side thou shalt start and just that
shall again come to pass, that slowly this way thou shalt continue to
move along and night after night thou wilt continue to grow less as
they look at thee. Thou wilt return verily to the place whence thou
shalt continue to depart, and it shall be that they shall not see thee
for three nights, and on the fourth night thou wilt again renew thyself.
The length of thy path shall be fixed. That is the cause that it will
be possible that they whom you address as grandchildren shall esteem
thee. They will watch thee in full view as thou continuest to draw
nearer. So then controlling themselves thereby, by the continuous
changes that will take place by the fact that there are two kinds of
days. So the summer will cause it to be warm during only a certain
period. In the next place, when that which is called winter shall
cause it to be cold again it too shall last for only a certain period.
So then that will come to pass. Thou shalt have charge when it will
become dark, thou customarily shalt cause it to be light and thy power
shall be such as to be able to cause it to be light and not too dark.
So thus it will continue to be that it will continue to help the human
beings who will go to and fro on the earth. That no matter by what
means darkness will befall one at some place it will be possible that
that person shall continue to travel, that it will be ight enough that
it will be possible for that one to return home with peace of mind.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”’ said, ‘‘Now the matter
has been completed. Now thou dost understand the entire matter.
Verily thou, you two, thou and the Sun, share the responsibility.
So then it shall be that they who dwell on the earth may address
their words to either of you. It shall be’so that to whichever one of
you two one will address their words one will say then, ‘O Sun, our
Elder Brother, the Great War Chief,’ and if they speak to thee they
will continue to say, ‘O our Grandmother, the Moon.’ So now I
leave it here on the earth, and there then I leave it beside the human
544 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
beings which shall be the principal thing that they will continue
to employ. I have designated it the Great Precious Smoke, the
Native Tobacco. Mankind will continue to use it no matter which
way they may face on the earth.
“Tf also that the world above is thougnt of, then that will be the
manner of doing, no matter about what thing they may be thinking,
no matter in which direction their mind may turn. Customarily
they must take up the native tobacco growing beside their bodies,
they will hold that when they shall speak, no matter in what
direction they may face it shall be held, then at that time they will
throw it into the fire they have kindled. That will become their
Word. So then it will continue to be so long as the world shall con-
tinue. That will continue to be used thus. So now with reference
to myself, I employ that which first grew here on the earth, the
red willow. So now I am ready to use that for thee. Now thou
shalt start, thither thou wilt go to the place where I have assigned
thy duty. So then no one will be able to defeat you two who have
become assistants to each other until I speak, no matter at what
time in the future. So in the next place I will make use of the red
willow.”
Now at that time he took what he had prepared. Now then he
cast it on the fire and then he said, “‘Thereon cast thy body; now
verily smoke is arising.”” Now verily she cast her body thereon.
Now the smoke arose, going up high. Now at that time De‘haé"-
‘hiyawa’’kho®’ said, ‘“Now verily Odéfdofini’’a‘ and she who is
thy mate, now you two must watch. Verily you two understand
all the matter that has come to pass. So that will come to pass that
at the end of three days ye two shall watch to see what will take
place. If it so be that thou, Awenhaniyonda, *® will notice that a
change will come over thy life, that thou shalt see the Moon, the
Grandmother of you two will commence to grow again, to grow anew,
and that shall be a sign for knowing it if thus it shall come to pass
that thou shalt see it thou shalt become aware that thy life has
become new,* so that will continue to be a sign that there will begin
to start the formation of new human beings, who will overflow the
earth as dwellers. At that very place it will begin wherein for the
first time ye two willsee the Moon, your Grandmother. So then never
will it disappoint the mind, it will last as long as the earth shall live,
also all the things that grow, also all the game animals, also the human
beings, also the stars. So now I leave it beside your bodies as a tale
and you two will have this matter in your continuing posterity. They
will learn all the matters which have taken place and which you two
saw. Also there are still left fearsome things which you will see in
the future.”
See note on p- 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 545
At that time Odéfidonni’’s‘ and Awenhaniyonda watched. Just
exactly three nights in number did they watch, when Awenhaniyonda
was surprised that a change came over her life, and now she said,
“Now verily that kind of thing has come which he promised us
would come to pass.’’ Now at that time Odéidoini’’a‘ looked about
him. Toward the west he was surprised to see the Moon present.
Now at that time he said, “‘ Well, let me go to tell the one who formed
our two bodies.”” Now at once he went thither. As soon as he arrived
he said, “Now verily has been fulfilled what thou didst promise us.
Now the life of Awenhaniyonda is different, and now also we two saw
anew the Moon newly present.’’ At that time De‘haé™hiyawa’-
‘kho™ said, ‘Now verily the matter has been completed. So they
two shall go together, the Moon and the life of human beings. And
they shall reckon thereby the births of human beings on the earth.
So now I will go to travel about. Now, you two shall be free to travel
from place to place. Moreover, it will thus come to pass. Verily,
have I given you two possession of this; the entire matter, moreover,
will continue to be thus, that you two will be above all the various
kinds of animals which travel about from place to place. You two
will be masters of them. Moreover, I will come to see you both and
you two will learn at times what will be my fortune in the future.
Indeed, I believe that it is certain, presumably, that my brother and
I will disagree when he and I see each other again. Moreover, you
two shall have it for a sign of this, and it is this, that when you two
will be surprised that unknown kinds of beasts will arrive here and
that they will abuse, slaughter and eat the flesh of things here; if
when you two see that come to pass you two shall at once know that
we two brothers have disagreed. When he will become angry he
will drive thence hither all those beings he himself has severally
completed, both those inhabiting on the land and in the water.
Moreover, when I arrive there I will try to have this state of things
continue peaceable. If it so be that I will be able to cause my Grand-
mother to leave, then I will remove her person elsewhere. For should
it be possible that this come to pass, then of course he and I will be
left alone. I think, presumably, it would then be desirable that he
and I should go elsewhere, for, presumably, it would not result in
good ‘that for a long time he and I should go about in this manner
upon the earth, for if it so be, then exceedingly much would be
destroyed.”’
Now at that time he departed, going thither to the other island.
He arrived there and then he was surprised that then all the various
kinds of animals moved about from place to place, and moreover it
was evident that they were all ugly and fierce. He arrived at the
place where the lodge of his grandmother stood and, moreover, he
learned that O‘ha’a’ (Flint) was not at home. Now at that time he
546 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
said, ““Oh, my grandmother, it is thee, indeed, I come to seek. I
think that now, presumably, that thou shouldst again go from here
to another place.’’ Now at that time she said, ‘‘Moreover, what
manner of thing will come to pass? O*‘ha’i’ (Flint) isnot at home. I
believe he would not be pleased should I have gone elsewhere when
he will return.”” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Do thou depart;
go thither to the place where my lodge stands. Thou wilt be abiding
there when I shall return there again. I, in reference to it, will be
remaining here, until I will again return. I it is who will converse
with him if it so be that he will ask whither thou hast gone.” Now
she said, ‘Indeed, presumably, I am not able to depart hence if it
be that he do not know the place whither I have gone. Indeed, now,
also his thoughts have begun to be troubled because that some one
has carried away elsewhere the Head of the mother of you two.”’
Then he said, ‘‘Do thou look yonder; verily the one of whom thou
art now speaking is looking hitherward.’’*” Moreover, now she looked
and just then the Moon arose, its rays bursting through the forest
When she looked she then said, ‘‘It is true, verily, that that one is the
Mother of you two, and now also my thoughts are again pleasant.
Indeed, I had intended that I too, personally, would go no matter
where, and also no matter where I should die.”” Then De‘haé"hi-
yawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Do thou depart. It will not now be long before
thou, too, personally wilt go above again. That too will come to
pass that thou personally wilt have a duty to perform and that thou
shalt assist her. Indeed, there is still lacking some one whom I
should appoint who should continue to attend to the things on the
earth here present. Indeed I, personally, do not desire to spoil
anything which my brother has severally made. Moreover, he and
I will not differ in anything, it matters not that I did not make it.”’
Now at that time she said, ‘That also would please my mind that
both your mind and that of your brother should agree.”’ He replied
and said, ‘That too is personally my wish. If it would be possible
so to be, or if it should not be, moreover, that it should be possible,
then things here also should not continue as they are.’
Now at that time she went out, and now, moreover, she departed.
She arrived at the place where the island is, and then she sought for
the persons of Odendonniha and also of Awenhaniyonda. She could
not find their persons, and so then she went to the place where stood
the lodge of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”. She arrived at the lodge and
found that there was nobody at home, and then she sat down there.
Not long afterwards then they two whom she sought returned.
Now at that time she said, ‘“‘T have just now arrived. I do not know
what manner of thing, presumably, is taking place whence I departed.
O‘ha’ a’ (Flint) is not at home, and De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ is the only
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 547
one abiding there. That also I did not know, what, presumably,
will come to pass when O‘ha’a’ (Flint) will again return. He is angry,
indeed, because some one has carried away elsewhere the Head. It
lay up high, and therefrom, moreover, some one took it off.”
Then Odendonniha said, ‘‘Oh, my Grandmother, continue thou to
have pleasant thoughts. I know about the whole matter as it took
place. Now, in reference to that one, she has now a duty to perform.
Do thou look above; there the Orb of Light is present, and in reference
to that, he has assigned to his Mother a most important duty to
perform.’’ Now at that time she looked and said, ‘‘It is true, verily,
that it is she who is looking thence.’’ Now at that time her mind
was satisfied.
Now they abode in one place, and they were watching for De‘haé™hi-
yawi’’kho™” to return. In reference to him, he abode at the place
where the lodge of O‘ha’a’ (Flint) and his grandmother stood.
Some days afterwards De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho” was troubled in his
mind because that he, O'ha’ii’, had not returned home. Then at that
time he went to seek his person. Traveling about over the entire
island, he did not find his person in any place. Then he was surprised
to see two male human beings going about there. Now at that time
he went there. He arrived at the place where they two went about,
and then he said, ‘‘Have you two not seen him whose lodge stands
hard by here?’’ The two male persons replied, ‘Just a moment ago
he was here; moreover, he asked who, presumably, is the person that
caused the Light Orb to go about at night, and what is, moreover, also
its duty.” Then De‘haé™hiyaw%’’kho™ said, ‘Verily, it is I that did
it. Its duty is to be respected and be a guide to the minds of human
beings. Verily, they will govern themselves by it. And also they
will number the days thereby, and also the human beings who will
be newly becoming such. Moreover, I ordain too for you two, that
you two will govern yourselves by this Orb of Light that ends custom-
arily, repeatedly. Moreover, they two will be in the habit of going
together, and, moreover, it will take place with reference to both
as is the condition of the body of Awenhaniyonda;* thus it will come
to pass concerning you two. When ye two will not see her again,
the nocturnal Orb of Light, it will be for the space of three days,
when again she will form herself anew, and then at that time thou
wilt notice that thy life has changed in condition; thou personally
too wilt become new again, and there in that place will be formed
what will be becoming a human being here on the earth. Moreover,
itis thereby that you two will number them when you two engender
an ohwachira® (uterine family), and which will form itself in connec-
tion with the bodies of you two; the earth will be covered over with
human beings who will be born.’”’ Now at that time he said, “ More-
See note on p. 610.
548 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY {ETH. ANN. 43
over, do not let your two minds be troubled. Do not let your minds
shrink from it, if it so be that you two will see that my brother and I
shall disagree. Now, indeed, it is plain that he and I will quarrel.
And the reason is that he desires that he shall control all things.
Moreover, I think that it should not thus come to pass. Now
I give you two possessory control over them. Now ye two will
travel about. Moreover, I will add to that which the island now
holds, if it so be that I will pass through the ordeal. Now, moreover,
I again go to seek his person.”’
Then at that time he again went to the place where the lodge
stood. While nearing the lodge he saw there a pile of flint stones,
and now at that time he took them up and carried them, and then
he entered the lodge. Then he looked about from place to place.
O‘ha’ i’ (Flint) was not yet at home. Then he (De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho?’)
placed the flint stones in the place where he (O‘ha’&’) was accus-
tomed to sit. Now at that time he again went out. Outside of the
door he there met O‘ha’é’ (Flint). Now at that time De‘haé™hiya-
wa’’kho™ said, ‘‘I have been inside of the lodge. No one is at home
and I have seen no one.”’ Then O‘ha’i’ (Flint) said, ‘‘ Moreover, is
not my Grandmother at home? She was at home, indeed, when I
departed.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘ Let us just go indoors.
Thou wilt see that no one is at home.” At that time then they two
again entered the lodge, and then he looked from place to place
seeking her person. He saw her in no place, and then he went there
to the place where he customarily sat, and he arrived there, and he
was surprised that thereon lay several flint stones, and then he re-
tired therefrom and stood again at the doorway and he said, “‘ Now,
verily, too, in reference to her, my Grandmother has turned against
me; now she has forsaken me. It matters not that one should kill
me, and also that one should make me a prisoner. And now all the
man beings have turned against me. It must needs be that now
I must defend myself. I will just attempt also to bring it about
that I shall control ever all things, no matter whether I shall become a
slave.’ Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘ Moreover, what manner
of things is done that thou shouldst think that now all have turned
against thee? Personally, my mind is not of that turn that thou
and I should contend in our affairs; personally, I am aiding thee; I
desire that it should be peaceable here upon the earth and on the
earth that exists above.”
Then O‘ha’a’ (Flint) said, ““Moreover, what manner of thing is the
reason then that it is thus here on the earth, that one has already
made such preparations that one should destroy me? Do thou look,
verily, how the place is where I am accustomed to sit, that there one
has laid several things that will be able to kill me. Moreover, it is
thus no matter in which direction I go, I continually see the things
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 549
which one has Jaid up high that will kill me. And that, too, is the reason
that now one has carried elsewhere the Head of our Mother and that
my Grandmother, too, has now gone elsewhere. Moreover, now I
will do nothing further in response; now I will defend myself to the
end that I should live; verily, there is no one who could assist me.
Moreover, if it so be that I will be able to continue to live, I, too,
personally, moreover, will not assist anyone, nor will I have pity
on anyone. It will please my mind that I will control all things; at
some future day to come, or also at some future night to come, I will
use both the Daylight and the Darkness.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™ said, ‘‘What manner of
thing is this here about which thou art disputing? There is nothing
wrong in this; everything is peaceable.”” O‘ha’ié’ (Flint) said in reply,
“Verily, I am not pleased that all people look to you in all things.
No one is antagonistic to thee. That is what I mean. I will only
be pleased when I will control everything, and that too it will thus
come to pass with regard to thee personally, that all persons will
then be antagonistic to thee.”
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Let the matter stand thus in
harmony. There is nothing wrong. No one is antagonistic to thee.”
O‘ha’a’ (Flint) replied and said, “‘ Indeed, I shall now do nothing more.
Now I have fully made up my mind, that nothing hereafter shall
cause me to desist, which is a cause that now I have lost all, my
Grandmother, and also my Mother.” Then De‘haé™hiyawa”’kho™
said, ‘‘What kind of thing is the reason that thy mind is sorely
vexed? Verily, thou didst kill our Mother, and now she has come
to life again; now also she will live for all future time, and, moreover,
that ‘still troubles thy mind. If it so be that thou didst kill her, it
will not be possible, also, for thee to see her at a short distance;
moreover, so it is thus that any one who will kill a human being shall
not be pardoned.”
Now at that time O‘ha’d’ (Flint), it seems, was exceedingly angry,
and so now he said, ‘‘Go to, let us two go out; let it be out of doors
that thou and I shall settle our affairs.” Now at that time they two
went out, and O'ha’d’ (Flint) said, “All those things whose bodies
I have formed, and that are alive, shall continue te have for food
all those beings whose bodies others have formed; and thus too will it:
be in regard to the human beings™ that I have made; that that, too,
will be, moreover, that the human beings that another, one other
has made, will continue to be their food; and that also the Daylight,
also the Darkness, also the Springs of water, severally, will overcome
them by magical power; and Disease will continue to wander about
employing habitually all manner of means; these, too, will overcome
them by magical power, and Mind or Thoughts will go about em-
See note on p. 610.
550 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [PTH. ANN. 43
ploying all manner of means; they too will overcome them by magical
power.”’ Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘Thou hast done wrong.
If it so be that thou desirest that that should cause the days of the
human beings to end, thou must at least begin with whomsoever it
may be that has thus done in making ali those things which thou
hast designated.’’ Now at that time O‘ha’a’ (Flint) spoke in reply
and said, “I have promised myself that, at all events, thou and I
must fight, if it so be that thou wilt become displeased with my way
of thinking.” De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ replied and said, “Verily, now,
thou hast turned the matter toward me by way of accusation, and
now also thou hast specified me. So, then, what manner of thing
shall thou and I do? What manner of thing shall thou and I use
when that which is in accordance with thy mind shall be set on
foot?”” Then O‘ha’i’ (Flint) said, “That, too, thou wilt use, thy
magic power upon which thou dependest so much boastingly. I
personally too will use my magic power.” Now at that time De
haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Moreover, I will not deceive thy mind.
I will use my magic potence, which is Daylight, and, moreover,
it will be certain that the light will be fine when thou and I will
settle our matter. Next to that I will use this mountain as my
magic potence.”” Now O‘ha’a’ (Flint) said, ‘TI will then use, verily,
the Night, and, verily, in that place where there is Darkness,
there thou and I will adjust our matter.” And then he sprang
forward, holding in his hand the arrow tipped with flint, and he
said, ‘‘Now I have already killed one person, and I used my arrow,
verily, and still another I will kill.” De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ caught
the dart, and so then they two now pulled it and they struggled for
it. Now at that time there was heard a sound which was loud, and
now also it began to be cloudy. And now also the wind grew in
power. Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ now let go of the
arrow, and he now plucked up the near-by mountain and cast it
over the place where O‘ha’i’ (Flint) stood, and it covered him over;
in a short time now he again got out and then fled, and now
De‘haé™hiyaw’i”’kho™ pursued him; they circled around the floating
island repeatedly. At that time De‘haé™hiyawad’’kho” continued
to take up the mountain repeatedly, which customarily he cast,
hitting O‘ha’a’ (Flint), and which customarily covered him over, but
in a short time he would again get out. Then it was that the moun-
tains severally became joined closed together. O*‘ha’é’ (Flint), as far
as he was concerned, threw back rocks. Customarily De‘haé™hiya-
wi’’kho™” caught them and then, next in order, customarily threw
them back; and so after a while the mountains became covered with
rocks; suddenly now the animals hid themselves, and now, also,
some of them fled away, and now too, O‘ha’i’ (Flint) attempted to
conceal himself in the different mountains repeatedly, but it was
HEWITT MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 551
not possible for him to be able to again conceal himself; and then
at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘“‘He-Shakes-the-Earth (the
Eerthquake),°*! now it has come time that thou shouldst aid me. Now,
verily, it lightens over the earth over which thou hast care.”” Now
at that time there began to be many sounds on the earth, and now
also there began to be movements which increased in force, and
after a while now the earth and the world began to quake. Now
at that time O‘ha’d’ (Flint) said, ‘‘ Now that is sufficient, the number
of powers” thou hast exhibited. Now then I surrender. Now then
I givemyself up to thee. Verily it is true that thou hast magic
power (orenda). Moreover, now, I shall keep still. My mind will
now be the only individual thing that I shall retain.” Then
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘That, seemingly, too, shall come to pass.
It is true that thou shalt continue to live also. Seemingly thou shalt
not continue to be in this place. It must needs be that thou shalt
go elsewhere to that place where the other world is present.’’ Then
O‘ha’i’ (Flint) said, “Thus, seemingly, too, shall it come to pass, if
thou wilt consent that thou and I shall not be far apart.’”’ Then
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “So, then, here verily thou shalt continue
to abide, at least so long as thou wilt do nothing wrong. If it so
be that yet again it will thus come to pass in the future, what thou
hast already done to me, then at that time it will thus come to
pass that it will be necessary for me to confine your body, and I
will also tether thee.”
Now at that time O‘ha’a’ (Flint) said, ‘Now also I just give my-
self up. If it so be that it is true that thus it will come to pass,
whenever it may be, then, and not till then, will I again consider
what manner of thing will next in order come to pass after that
occurrence.” Now at that time again he spoke and said, ‘“‘So, then,
wouldst thou not then consent to a single matter which I will request
of thee, which is but a small matter, and that, as long as possible, I
should visit my home?”? Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Verily,
perhaps, it will thus come to pass. But also only until that time when
I will complete the handiwork of the matters that still remain for
me to do. I still have unfinished that which does not satisfy me in
what takes place customarily in reference to the night, because usu-
ally when the nocturnal Orb of Light blots herself out the darkness
becomes too heavy. So, then, I will make that which will aid her
and which will be called Stars. So, then, customarily they will be
able to cause it to be light when again the nocturnal Orb of Light
(Moon) does not again cause it to be light. Next to that I will make
that which will have powers sufficient to have a duty to perform both
by day and also by night, to which, moreover, will be called the
Day-Bringer (The Morning Star). Moreover, when thou wilt see
See note on p. 610.
552 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
the star which will be alone in its greatness, then the night will change,
and then they two will exchange themselves, and a new daylight
again be on the earth here present. When thou seest the large Star
then thou shalt depart and thither thou shalt go to the place where
my lodge is, and so then I will be expecting thee.”
As soon as he again arrived at his lodge then his Grandmother said,
“What manner of thing has come to pass, because we were so much
beset with lightning during the length of the night? And that when
the diurnal Light Orb arose that next in order the earth did quake.
I thought, presumably, now some one of you two brothers has been
destroyed.” Now at that time De‘haé“hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Oh, my
grandmother, now that matter which had been unsettled here on
earth is past. So then I will only tell thee that which has befallen
us both. It is true that, very nearly, one of us had been killed. So
then that has now gone by. There is now nothing wrong, and also
we are both alive. Now then thou hast accomplished thy duty here
below on the earth present here. So then thou wilt now depart
again (go home). Thou shalt again go there to the place whence
thou didst come. And that thou, personally, wilt have just the
same body of flesh when thou arrivest again at the place whence
thou didst depart as thou hadst then. And next in order thou wilt
direct thyself straight to the place where thou didst acquire thought
(reason). So then at the end of 10 days, then thou must watch
thence, when we two will again return there, if it so be that it will be
possible that my brother and I shall not again disagree.” Now
again he spoke and said, ‘‘Now, then, thou shalt be prepared; soon
now I will be ready.”’ Now at that time he went out and he got
red willows, and he then scraped off the bark from them, and at that
time he threw the bark on the fire, and then he said, “Oh, my Grand-
mother, now hereon cast thy body. Now thou shalt take up thy
return journey. And so when I again arrive at the place thou shalt
be there, and there, as to that, I will make that on which the earth
here present will continue to live. So then thou and they will aid
one another, and it shall be that the fresh water shall be in the habit
of coming from above. Then at all times the earth here present
will continue to be new.”
Verily, at this time, she cast herself thereon, and then as far as
concerned her, she flew upward (on the smoke).
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’ ’kho™ said, ‘You two who were
the first to come to life are seeing that she of the Ancient Body has
now departed for home. So then that is established which took
place as you two saw it come to pass, and that only will be still possible
on the earth, that only the Word and also only the Mind will be able
to go on high, and next to that native tobacco shall one cast usually
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 553
on the fire, and the smoke will arise and then one shall speak, and
so therewith will it conjoin itself and go on high. It is equally good,
it is just the same, if one in person stand there in the place whence
one will direct the Word; only that far will it be able to be done in
the days that are to come.’ (Persons will not go up any more in
the smoke.)
Now at that time he said, ‘‘So then I will now tell you two that I
will now make stars to be fixed in different places on the visible sky.
So then that will start from this time (place), and next in order, in
the future, one who will fulfill his or her duty (matter), one who will
always have been an upright person and who will not have been
guilty of any evil, when such an one will exhaust the number of days
allotted them here, when such an one will depart hence, that will be
possible that they who will be looking up to the sky from the earth
here present shall still be able to see them again, and that even to
that extent that when one shall arrive there that one will mingle
himself or herself with the stars present there in many places. So
then so long as the earth shall continue to exist will they (stars) thus
continue to increase in numbers. And in the next place, the time
will come when no one will be alive on the earth who will be able to
count, in full, the number of stars present on the visible sky. So
then I will make one that shall be the first. That shall be the first
one on which they who have human bodies will look, also they who
have animal bodies. To some of the game animals, too, will it thus
come to pass, that if it so be that they will be able to accomplish
their duty (matter) here upon the earth, that shall be possible that
they will become visible too as stars fixed to the sky.”’
Now at that time he departed and went there to the place where
He-Holds-the-Earth-by-His-Hands* has his lodge. When he arrived
there he said, ‘‘That is the only reason that I have come here, and
that is that there is still one thing which I still will have to make
here on the earth. Verily I am troubled to know what thing, pre-
sumably, should be done of the two matters that I have been con-
sidering. One is that I am thinking that, perhaps, I should make a
new star which shall be called He-the-Day-Bringer (The Morning
Star). The other is that I think that perhaps I should appoint thee
to be the one whom they should name He-the-Day-Bringer (The
Morning Star). And the reason that I have desired that this should
come to pass is that verily no one here upon the earth has ever yet
seen thee. So then that would cause it that now thou shouldst show
thyself, that one should see thee there in the place where again
forms itself the daylight that will cause the earth again to be light.
And the reason that it shall continue thus to be is that thou didst
See note on p. 610.
19078°—28——36
554 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
furnish all the mind (the thought) for all the matters at which I
worked here on this earth here below. So then you shall assist one
another, all you who move about up above and who attend to the
whole of my handiwork.’”’ Now at that time De‘hao™hwéndjiyawa’-
kho™ replied and said, ‘All is correct in the manner in which thou
hast considered it. Now, then, I will volunteer so that in truth it
will thus come to pass. Now, then, I will tell thee that now thou
thyself hast personally fulfilled all that was needful, that thou hast
done all things that were needful to be done. So then I will tell
thee one other thing, and that is that when thy brother shall come
here only that will result in good that you two shall keep together,
that continuously thou must watch him. The next thing, that when
thou wilt go elsewhere from the earth here present, do thou not
consent if so it be that he will say, ‘Let me, personally, go about here
upon the earth.’ Do thou not consent to that. Indeed it would
not result in good should that thus come to pass; actually he desires
that by all means possible that he will be revenged in the matter;
he means by that that he desires to destroy all that thou hast com-
pleted; so then it will result in good if by all means thou wilt insist
that you two, thou and he, will go together when you depart hence.
Presumably, if it so be that when you two will set your feet again in
the other world above, if it so be that still he will attempt again to
harm you in some way, then thou wilt be able to control that; and
the next thing is, that when you two depart from here the way will
be plainly visible. There will be a pathway (the Milky Way);° and
next in order it will be plain that your two minds will differ, in that
the path will be divided. So then that will always be visible in the
sky, and it will always stand revealed to be seen by those who will
severally dwell here upon the earth when it will become night, and
at that time, and when they look, they will see the path (the Milky
Way) very plainly; so then thus will it continue so long as the earth
will last.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Verily now the
matter has been adjusted as to what shall take place. Now, then,
I confirm the matter; the whole matter will thus come to pass, and
that by itself will become the very last one. So then I now turn
over to thy®® care that matter; when the day will be dawning thou
shalt show thyself for a short time only. There will be opportunity
for the human beings that dwell upon the earth to see thee. Thou
habitually shalt be the first one to see all that I have completed.
Secondly, on the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun) shall depend its
duration, and he, it shall be, will attend to all that I have finished so
long as he will cause it to be light. They two shall follow the one
the other, he and the nocturnal Orb of Light (the Moon). When it
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 29
becomes dark on the earth, then next in order she will overlook again
all that I have finished; and she also shall attend to it so long as it
will be dark; so then this shall continue on, and there shall not be
in any place any interval; and there shall, too, be no end to it; it
shall always continue to be thus for the length of time that all I
have completed here will last. So then I now will again depart for
home. I have invited my Brother so soon as he sees the large star,
the Day-Bringer (the Morning Star), then at once he will start
thence and he will arrive in the place where my lodge is. Then will
become manifest what he intends to do. I have thought, presum-
ably, it would be good that I will specify the matter that I will remove
all those things whose bodies he finished; (for) some of them have
power to break up my handiwork, and so they will destroy those
whose bodies I have finished. So then they will cause no manner of
trouble to the minds of those who will be traveling from place to
place. Some have such potence that if one will just only see them
then that sight will be able to overmatch one magically. So then
they will continue ever to remain among the mountains. So then
they will continue in this state so long as the earth continues to be;
so they will be until the time will be when in the future only will
end the durability of my handiwork here spread out. Not before
that time will they again be able to leave the earth.
“So then I will appoint those then with the duty of attending to
it, so that at all times the days and also the nights will continue to
be new, and all those things too that grow, and also the several
streams of water, that they will never fail, grow less in power, and
that also they shall wash the earth here present; so then that at all
times they (the people) will be contented in mind. So then it will be
they who will continue to be able to keep those beings confined so
that they (the beings) shall not again leave” the earth. And so, too,
the human beings will be in the habit of saying, ‘Hadiwefinodadie’s’
(They, the Thunderers’”’), and then they will be in the habit of
coming from the sun setting; and so there, at the distance where the
clouds will be in the habit of passing, above that there will they be in
the habit of moving from place to place; so then they will continue
to have power, and that, too, will thus continue so long as the earth
will continue to be.”
At that time He-Holds-the-Earth-by-his-Hands spoke and said,
“All your thoughts (ideas) are good; so then, presumably, they
will net leng be disturbed when they will hear their voices when
they will come, causing the sky to resound.”
Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “Now, verily, thou
and I have completed the matters referring to this earth here. Now
then I again return to my home.”
See note on p. 610.
556 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
When he again arrived home he said, ‘I charge you two to watch
during the night that will soon come upon us, at the time when the
day is about to come, when you two will see arise a very large star.
Then you two will see that which will be continually a token to you
both that the day is about to come forth; and then you two will
continue to call it the Day-Bringer (the Morning Star). Indeed,
when you two will see that, then the time will have arrived that my
brother will come here; and now without recourse he and I shall
settle the matter and also we shall end the matter.”
Now at that time they retired for the night. Now Odendonniha
said, ‘‘ Now, verily, the time has come when I will watch for it.””, And
seeing the large star arise from beyond the horizon he said, ‘‘Do you
look; that is the first time that the large star has showed itself.” Now
again he spoke and said, “‘Verily it is true that at once it is plain,
that now the daylight is coming on.” Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”
said, ‘‘ Now all things have ended in a crisis for us. By and by, soon,
O‘ha’ a’? (Flint) will come. Now then you two will learn the
matter. You two will listen to what he will say.”
Just after that O‘ha’a’ (Flint) came in and then said, “I promised
that so soon as I saw the Large Star that I would at once come here.
Now then I have arrived.”’ Now at that time De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”
said, ‘‘Now the time has arrived, and now also it is without recourse
that thou and I will end the matter (controversy). So then, in the
first place, I will ask thee a question and thou shalt answer me, and
then Odendonniha and Awenhaniyonda will hear the answer. So then
they two will know what matter will come to pass when thou and
I shall end the whole matter (controversy). Now then I will tell
thee what I think (desire), and it may be that you would consent to it,
that in the earth and in the water all those things whose bodies thou
hast made should continue to remain. Some are not fit to mingle
among human beings.”” Then at that time O‘ha’i’ (Flint) replied,
saying, ‘I would confirm the proposition if thou wouldst agree to the
matter for me, that thus it would come to pass that I, personally,
should continue to remain here on the earth.” Then De‘haé™hi-
yawa’’kho”™ said, “It should not thus come to pass. Indeed, the
reason that my mind is thus made up to confine (segregate) the
bodies of all those things which have not good dispositions is that,
indeed, thou and I will go elsewhere from the earth here present.’’
Now at that time O'ha’a’ (Flint) said, ‘‘ Now also I will confirm the
matter for you if the human beings dwelling on that island whence
I departed shall continue to be independent.’’ Now at that time
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘Indeed, it will thus come to pass. Those
whose bodies are human in form shall be independent; it shall come
to pass in like manner with regard to the game animals, at least as
many of them as have no evil traits shall continue to be independent.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 557
Then at that time he again spoke and said, ‘“‘So then now we two,
personally, will depart from this earth present here below. Now thou
and I will go to that place where our Grandmother again abides.”’
Now at that time O‘ha’d’ (Flint) said, “‘I would just make a request
of thee that thou and I should yet once more travel about over the
whole island. Verily, just after thou and I arrived here there was
nothing that had been done. And what during the time that thou and
I didst travel about, and also all the things at which thou and I did
work and did finish, we,will view again. So then they will verily be
in the habit of telling stories about them, and they will also serve to
cause them to remember us habitually.”” Now De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
said, “It shall just so come to pass; I agree to the matter.”
Now at that time they two went to travel about. And when they
two returned again then De‘haé"‘hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘‘ Moreover, now
you two must watch with care, thou Odendonniha and thou too
Awenhaniyonda, when I will go home then you two shall think of me.
So then I have left beside your bodies native tobacco of the Great
Precious Smoke. Do you two not forget it when your two minds will
turn toward that place where my body will be present. So then you
two will make your Word of that habitually; indeed, I will hear fully
at once and also I will see fully at once where you will continue to
move about. So then it is likewise with all those whom I have com-
missioned with duties, they will all hear fully at once if one will
direct his or her Word to the place where their bodies severally shall
be. And, in the next place, there will be nothing that will obstruct
them from having their eyes fixed upon the earth here present. So
it will come to pass in the future, at some future day, when you two
shall continue to go about with your ohwachira (family) that then
again I will come here.”” Now at that time he said, “Now, then,
you two must watch carefully as he and I will leave footprints. There
shall be a path, and it shall be clearly in view, whither he and I will
have gone again. When it will become dark on the earth the course
of the path will be fully visible. So then that will continue to be
the path for those dwelling here; so that when customarily the
time will have arrived, and their number of days will have been
filled, that that will be the path that they will take when they will
again be going to the other world present there. So then there in
that place you shall again see me personally. So then one thing you
will continue to watch, when you will hear toward the west those who
utter their voices from place to place sing, that you will continue to
say that always without change they will come thence habitually;
and it will thus continue to be so long as the earth will continue to
be present here. So then you will now continue to have it as a token
that whenever you will be surprised to see that they who utter their
voices from place to place will come from the eastward, then you will
558 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
know at once that then, indeed, the earth here present will have
neared its end.’”’ Now at that time he again spoke and said, ‘‘ Now,
then, I leave this entire matter to you two; this matter shall continue
and your future posterity will learn the matter. Let them never
forget it. Now, then, my brother and I raise ourselves (fly) upward.
So then you must have only that for a sign, that whenever you will
see the pathway above divided, then you will know then that, indeed,
two kinds of mind have come into being in the world above, and on
the earth here below and also among human beings.”’ Now at that
time they two departed homeward.
Not long after the two brothers had gone the people heard a loud
sound in the sky, beginning at the west and going toward the east.
Then Odendonniha spoke and said, “‘ Now, verily, presumably they
two have arrived there. That, verily, is the reason that thou and
I hear this loud noise in the sky; that, verily, thou and I have heard
the voice of our Grandsires, they who utter their voices from place
to place (the Thunderers). Now, then, verily, let us greet them
thankfully.” Now at that time he cast native tobacco on the fire.
When that passed, then it became dark and then they two saw on
the sky, very plainly, the pathway there. Then again Odendonniha
said, ‘‘Now, verily, thou and I have seen all those things fulfilled
which he who finished our bodies (our Creator) has done for us.
All has been fulfilled. Now, then, there is still our responsibility
in all the things which he has left in-our charge. Now, then, thou
and I will fulfill our duties; we will do thus in all things forever.”
Odendonniha and Awenhaniyonda now began to engender offspring.
And also when they were numerous, then in a short time there became
numerous ohwachira (families). And so likewise now there was a
very large body of people living. And they all knew the matter that
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ had promised to come when the people would
become numerous. Then it was thus that all the people were watch-
ing for him to come back. There was, as it were, absolute silence;
they had no ceremony which they should have been performing,
also no business that they should have been attending to; every-
thing was just neglected, all was silent; they traveled about with
their ohwachira (families); it was so that one would think they only
went about, standing in different places. This condition lasted for
some time, when they were surprised that it was noised about that
just now the name De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™” was heard, and that now
he had returned. Now at that time many sought him, desiring to
see him. It was a long time that they sought him before they
found him. So then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho"™, when they saw him, said,
“T promised in that I said that I would come again when I would
see that people severally go about with their ohwachira (families)
here upon the earth. So then the matter has now been fulfilled;
HEWITT MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 559
it has thus come to pass. So then I will now tell it; now, moreover,
it will be revealed to you, the entire assembly will now learn the
matter as it is, and as I see it; now the matter has been fulfilled
that now human beings travel about from place to place. And that
now, in the next place, they severally go about with their ohwachira
(families). So then it is thus, as I see it, that it seems that every-
thing is just neglected, that the human beings merely stand around
from place to place. So then that is the cause that now, at the
present time, I have returned.
“So then now every one of you must give strict attention. And,
indeed, all you who live upon the earth share it equally; in the next
place, the matter will continue thus in the future; and then they
shall regard it as important; so then I, myself, too will regard as an
important matter, what J will leave here on the earth, the
Four Ceremonies, or Rituals. You shall continue to keep those
customs, and the ceremony shall continue to be observed. So
then I now bestow-and I now ordain for you that you shall now,
then, continue from time to time to assemble yourselves, and it shall
begin at this time; and that for which you shall be in the habit of
assembling yourselves is the sum of the manifold things that grow,
upon which you live. So then you shall have the custom that custom-
arily the first time that you again see the new fruitage of that upon
which you live, you shall then take that which is first seen, which shall
be collected and placed in a certain (appointed) place; then you human
beings shall, too, assemble yourselves, the whole body of people
must assemble. So then when they shall be assembled it shall thus
come to pass. So then I ordain for you that you shall, in the first
place, mutually rejoice yourselves; in the next place, that you shall
mutually congratulate one another that so many persons do again
see the new; and that shall be the first thing that they shall swallow
again, that upon which you live; so then when you will have ended
mutually congratulating one another, then you shall give thanks to
me next in order. So then I leave (establish) the Four Ceremonies,
or Ritual Matters, which shall continue before you. I have pat-
terned it after the Ceremony as it is being carried on in the place
where the Earth, which you call the Sky, is. And it is actually so,
that the pleasure with which those on the upper side of the sky
rejoice is most important. So then I patterned therefrom because
I desired that the ceremonies that will be going on here on earth,
on the under side of the sky, shall be the same as those; the cere-
monies that shall continue to be carried on here are, then, that which
is called the Great Feather (Dance); the next, that which is called
the Skin-covered (Drum); the next, that which is called the Chants,
and the next, that which is called the Grand Bet, or They Strike
Bowls; then, too, these ceremonies, Four in number, shall be carried
560 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
on at certain appointed times. So then the first shall be when the
season will change, so soon as all that upon which you live will mature,
at that place and time will be marked the occasion for the Grand
Pleasure, which shall be called the Sharing of the Grand Foods.
Then customarily all the things, though small in quantity, all the
kinds of things upon which you live, shall be collected from all the
several families of the people; and cooked things shall be gathered;
and, next in order, the flesh of game, that also shall be present.
Now at that time the ceremony, the Great Feather (Dance), shall
start. So then it will come to pass thus that all persons shall rejoice;
they must keep thinking, ‘I am thankful that I am still alive and in
good health, and that I have again seen that on which we live;
that I also have again seen the performance of the Ceremony that
he ordained for us.’ And in the next place one shall say, ‘I thank
thee repeatedly, thou who hast formed my body, thou that abidest
in the sky. Iam thankful that it was still possible for me to perform
the ceremony which thou hast ordained for us.’ Thus, then, will you
who live upon the earth continue to do. Customarily you must per-
form all the ceremonies, and you shall make a circuit of the fire. So
then you shall habitually make a circuit of the fire in one certain
direction. Do not ever let anyone make a circuit of it in the opposite
direction; and, in the next place, do not even let it be that the left
side of the body be on the outside (of the circle). When one makes
a circuit of it the right side of the body shall be on the outside of the
cirele. And all persons shall make a circuit of the place where the
two who shall sing will sit. So then the feather headdress shall be
the principal thing. It is that that you will be in the habit of using,
and then it will be evident what kind of persons you are. And also
when the Four Ceremonies will have past all should be happy.
Now, another time is when the condition of the earth, and also of the
days, will be changed, when it will again be cold, and when one will
say, ‘It is wintertime.’ So then at that time will the matter of the
Four Ceremonies be again marked; the game animals in their form
of life, and upon which you live, shall be one of the principal things.**
Verily it is even so, that the game animals change themselves; that
when customarily it again becomes warm and the spring season
comes upon the earth, they two customarily come together, that is
that then the lives of the game animals become weaker; as soon
customarily as the summer season ends and the earth again becomes
cold, then they two again go together customarily, when again their
meat becomes fine; the lives of the game animals become new again;
so then that is the reason that it shall continue thus to be, so that
when the life of the game animals becomes new again, then cus-
tomarily one will fell their bodies, and it is the meat thereof that will
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 561
be employed to form the assembly, and that too on which you live,
and these customarily shall be placed together. So now customarily
when they shall have assembled themselves, the first thing shall be
the Greatly Prized Ceremony, it will be called Ganonhwaiwih;
so then the place where lies what supports you, the fires of the several
firesides (ohwachiras), shall become important places, and then one
will customarily set his or her hands to the fire; and the fire which
has become ashes one will customarily take up and stir. So then cus-
tomarily one will speak and say, ‘I am thankful that I am alive in
health. Now, the time has come in which the ceremony Ganon-
hwaiwih is marked. So then now do thou, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
who livest in the sky, do thou continue to listen. Now, I thank
thee that it still has been possible for me again to see the place where
thou hast set the ceremony.’ Then at that time one will lament, one
will sing, and then one will begin to dip up the ashes with a paddle,
and then one will tip it and the ashes will fall, and then one’s voice
will habitually accompany that action, and all will rejoice; so then,
when all those who are alive on the earth will have performed the
entire ceremony, then at that time the minds will just unite into a
unity; and then at this place, when that will become the principal
thing, you will then use as a means that which will be called Trussed
Things (the white dogs). So then I, personally, will continue to
greatly prize that ceremony; and customarily all the peoples of the
earth, being of my father’s clansmen,” will satisfy (answer) my word;
so then the dog whose body is purely white will customarily be
the principal thing; there shall be no black spot on it; with that
they shall habitually again dress my person; that shall symbolize
habitually the form and kind of my raiment. So then customarily
it shall be by established rule that shall come the appointment of
him who will cast its body on the fire, and in the next place the
native tobacco. So then, when he will direct his words toward that,
then he will say, ‘This day is present; do thou who abidest in
the sky, thence continue to listen; now thou dost see clearly how
many persons there are who have come to stand at the place where
thy father’s clansmen have kindled a fire to thee. Now, more-
over, do thou continue to listen thence; now they who are alive upon
the earth will speak. And they will speak with one voice unani-
mously; and they have formed their Word of that thing which thou
dost highly prize, the Trussed Thing (white dog); all peoples on the
earth have satisfied (answered) thy word. Now, therefore, thither
goes the thing thou dost highly prize, the thing which thou didst
intend that they who are alive upon the earth shall continue to ob-
serve; now all the manifold orders of those who are alive with one
voice unanimously have performed their duty to thee; now they
See note on p. 610.
562 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
thank thee repeatedly that it was still possible for so many persons
again to see what kind of thing is the Lamentation Ceremony,“
which thou hast ordained for us. So then we beseech thee that this
body of persons should continue thus undiminished, so that all of us
should again see it when the season will again change and it will again
become warm on the earth. We beseech thee that thou shouldst
send thence the game animals of all sizes, some whose bodies are
small and also some whose bodies are large. Now, another thing;
they again beseech thee that they should see grow again anew and
naturally the provision which thou hast provided for us, and that that
should mature and ripen on which we live, and also that by which
our children live. Now, again, another thing; now, again, we
beseech thee in reference to all those things that grow and that bear
fruit, the various kinds which thou hast planted for us, for thy
father’s clansmen ask thee that they all should again see them grow
and see them when again all come to maturity. Now, again, another
thing; thy father’s clansmen beseech thee that still again thou
shouldst send thence the persons of those whose lives are small,
infants, that they should stand consecutively on the earth here
present, so that the purpose of thy mind should be fulfilled, in that
thou didst intend that it should continue to be thus that persons
should continue to be born anew; and so then that is what one con-
tinues to beseech thee for that one should see it thus come to pass.
Now, then, to thee who dwellest in the sky one has committed the
whole matter. Now, again, another thing; now with one voice all
the persons that still are, the children to the last one, who still remain
upon the earth, then beseech thee that still unchanged this assembly
should again see that period wherein the ceremony is marked, and
the time will also arrive wherein thou hast placed the ceremony, the
matters thou hast placed before us. So then they make their word
of the native tobacco which thou hast left to us. Now, again,
another thing; so then with a single voice all those who still remain
upon the earth shall turn their faces thither. So then all the various
orders of you who have administrative duties to perform, duties
appointed you by the former of our bodies, do you continue to listen.
So then that is the first thing; to thee, Our Mother, whereon we
stand, this earth here present, we give thanks; next to this we encour-
age thee, so that thy mind should be firm, that thus it should continue
to be, so that we should continue to think in peace day after day
and also night after night.
“Now, then, again, another thing; now do thou, our Elder Brother,
the diurnal Light Orb (the Sun) going about on the visible sky, thence
continue to listen. Now, then, thou wilt continue to know that all
those whose persons remain alive have made rulable preparations to
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 563
thank thee repeatedly with one voice. Now, in the next place, they
have made rulable preparation to do it, and have encouraged thy
mind that thy mind should remain firm for so long a time as he who
formed our bodies has appointed thy administrative duty.
“Now, again, another thing; thou next, the nocturnal Orb of Light
(the Moon), our Grandmother, and now also the Stars on the sky in
many places, now then do you know that every one of those whose
persons remain alive have made rulable preparation to thank you
now with one voice? Now, our Grandmother, they thank thee
repeatedly, and also the Stars fixed on the sky in many places; and
next they have made rulable preparation to encourage your minds,
and that thus it should continue for so long a time as one has
appointed your overseeing duty. Now, again, another thing; now
do you thence continue to listen, our Grandsires, whose voices are
uttered from place to place, who are in the habit of coming from the
west; and whom he has appointed to protect us who are alive upon
the earth day after day, and also night after night. Now, then,
every one whose body remains alive has now made rulable prepara-
tion to thank you now repeatedly, with one voice. That, in the next
place, they now encourage your minds that thus it should continue
to be that your mind should be firm for so long a time as he who
formed our bodies appointed your overseeing duty.
““Now, then, we wrap up into a single body, as it were, all the
various grades of those of you to whom he has appointed overseeing
duties here on the earth—here also all the grasses that grow, the
growing shrubs, the growing trees, and the several springs of water,
and the several running springs, the several streams of water, and
the several running waters, and the air that moves (the wind); this
also, the present day, and also the present night, and the several
fixed Orbs of Light, and the several Stars fixed on the sky, and you
who habitually come from the west; and now also, you who have
completed our bodies and also all those things which we have indi-
cated, now, moreover, we thank you all repeatedly.
‘Now, then, another thing; then, next in order, thou De‘haé™hiya-
wa’’kho"’, do thou continue to listen thence; thou wilt continue to
know that now it is the ceremony will be performed by us who are
alive on earth, even the Four Ceremonies. So then thou wilt see it
clearly, when the ceremonies will start wherein thou wilt be the
principal person, when they will thank thee repeatedly. To-mor-
row, early in the morning, the ceremony, the highly prized ceremonial
dance, the Great Feather (Dance), will start; the songs of it will be
repeated thrice. And, on the day after to-morrow, will then start
the ceremony Onehowih (Skin-covered Drums), and next they will
select one who will speak and who will give thanks repeatedly. He
will begin with all those things that are contained in the earth that
564 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
give satisfaction to your (the people’s) minds, and also all the various
orders of those to whom he has appointed overseeing duties, and he
also will be among them when he will give thanks repeatedly. Now,
again, another thing; the Ceremony of Chanting (Andonwa’) will
start. This ceremony rests entirely with each of you individually,
if you will desire that he should perform this ceremony he will tell of
the extent of his handiwork, and he will thank it repeatedly, and he
will also continue to thank him repeatedly. Now, again, another
thing; when the Ceremony of the Great Betting will start you must
employ therein what is of your utmost toil, whatever thing of what
you are in the habit of using, you will spare that, and with that they
will lay wagers one against another; that will be the principal thing,
and that, then, will keep up the strength of the noise when the cere-
mony will be in progress, when my father’s clansmen who are alive
upon the earth will be amusing my mind. So then all that I have
ordained shall be the means of doing, and then they shall be greatly
prized matters. So then this shall come to pass when customarily
they will assemble; the first is, that you severally greet one another
repeatedly; and the next, the earth here present, also all things that
are growing, also the animals, also the several springs of water, all
these you shall continue to thank, and the present day, and also the
present night, also the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun), also the noc-
turnal Orb of Light (the Moon), also the Thunderers, all these beings
customarily you shall continue to thank repeatedly; then at that
time you shall thank me repeatedly. So now another thing; now
there where the several ohwachira (families) are, where the several
bark shelters are, and where they have severally kindled fires, that
will be that she, the most ancient one, shall be in the habit of doing
so in the ohwachira (family), and that she will have the duty to per-
form, that she will continue to give thanks repeatedly, as often as
she shall again see the new dawn of daylight, the new day; she shall
say customarily, ‘We greet one another repeatedly, that again we
see that a new day has come upon us. Now, then, we will unite our
minds to give thanks repeatedly.’ Now she shall say, ‘We thank
thee, our Mother, the Earth, repeatedly. We also thank repeatedly
all that grows upon which we live. We also thank repeatedly you,
these animals whom one who has formed our bodies has left you and
us in one place. Now you, the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun), our
Elder Brother, we thank repeatedly. Now thou, this nocturnal Orb
of Light (the Moon), our Grandmother, we thank thee repeatedly.
Now you, our Grandsires, you Thunderers, who are in the habit of
coming from the west, now then we, our whole ohwachira (uterine
family), with one voice thank thee repeatedly that still our number
is full and that we are living in peace and health, and that again we
see the new day here present. Now, then, to thee, who hast made
REWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 565
all those things and persons whom we have mentioned and to whom
thou hast severally appointed overseeing duties, and hast also com-
pleted our lives, to thee, who abidest in the sky, we give thanks now,
repeatedly, so then we beseech thee also that we may travel about
from place to place in peace where thy handiwork is spread out, and
that we should continue to think in peace so long as the daylight
shall continue. Now, then, we beseech thee that we all may pass
through the day in peace, and that again we shall see it when it shall
become dark again and it will be night on the earth; that in like
manner it shall come to pass to us who have adjoining lodges (our
neighbors) severally, to us who have adjoining fires, the severally
extant ohwachira (uterine families), that all of us should pass
through the day in peace, and that thus it should continue to be,
that all should continue to think in peace during the day.’
“So then when it becomes dark (ornight) one will act in like manner,
and that, verily, one shall say, ‘I am thankful that we have passed
through the day in peace; we now have made appointed preparation
to greet one another repeatedly, for that, verily, it was still possible
that we, undiminished in number, again see that it is night again on
the earth. Now, then, we thank thee repeatedly, our Mother, the
Earth. We are thankful that undiminished in number we have
traveled about in peace during the day. Now you upon whom we
live, we thank you all repeatedly that it was possible that we passed
through the day in peace. Now you animals, whom with us he
who formed our bodies has placed in one certain place, we thank
you all repeatedly that it was possible that we passed through the
day in peace. Now thou, our Elder Brother, the diurnal Orb of
Light (the Sun), we thank thee repeatedly that it was possible that
we passed through the day in peace. Now thou, our Grandmother,
the nocturnal Orb of Light, we have made rulable preparation, and
so we thank thee repeatedly that it was possible that we passed
through the day in peace, and that now night has befallen us.
““ Now you, our Grandsires, you Thunderers, whose habit is to come
from the west, you who protect us, so many of us as he who com-
pleted our bodies has left in one place, now, then, we thank you
repeatedly that still again all of us passed through the day in peace.
“ “Now, then, thou who hast formed our lives, also all the things
which we have mentioned, and also all those to whom thou hast
appointed overseeing duties for our protection, now, then, we have
made rulable preparation, and so with united voice we thank thee
repeatedly, thou who abidest where the sky is present. The con-
trol of the whole matter is left with thee. Now, then, we beseech
thee that when our bodies become still that we will rest during the
length of the night; and that then we pray thee that we should
pass through the night in peace, that all should be peace to us all,
566 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH, ANN. 43
and that thou shouldst do in like manner to us who severally have
adjoining lodges, us who are neighbors, that we should not be dimin-
ished in number when we should again see the daylight come again
upon the earth.’
“Thus it will continue to be day by day, night by night. Do you
not ever forget that this shall continue in this manner so long as the
ohwachira (kinship groups) will continue to exist, and also so long
as the earth will continue to be. :
“Now, again, another thing; it shall be the duty of all persons
that they shall possess the power to be happy, also that they shall
be in the habit of giving thanks when they will continue seeing that
all my handiwork serves to please the minds of the children, even to
the least, and that you all have an equal right to it.
“Now, again, another thing; that when you persons individually
go traveling where fires are severally kindled, at your several fire-
sides, and also on the several paths whereon human beings are in
the fixed habit of traveling, then it shall continue so to be that
wherever or whenever, by day or by night, that one arrives at
another’s fireside, if it so be that it is just becoming day, he will
make rulable preparation and he will say, ‘I am thankful that thou
and I are alive in peace as a new day has dawned upon us all.’ At
that time, then, he will start forward and then they two will stroke
each other’s body repeatedly, and also should he stroke the body of
a woman he will say, ‘I greet thee repeatedly. I am thankful that
thou and I see and greet each other alive and in peace. Now, then,
thou and I do greet with thanksgiving Him who has formed our
bodies.’ Now at that time the other person will say, ‘ Verily, indeed,
I am truly thankful that thou and I-are so fortunate as to see each
other alive and in peace.’
“Now, again, another thing; should it be that when the day will
have grown one-half that the same two persons meet again, they
shall observe the same manner of procedure; they two will stroke
each other’s bodies repeatedly, and then one will say, ‘I am thankful
that thou and I have again met in peace. Now the day has again
gone to the middle station; now, then, thou and I greet with thanks-
giving him who has formed our bodies.’ Then the other one will
say, ‘Indeed, verily, it is pleasant; I am thankful that it was possible
that thou and I have again met in peace.’
“Then they two will separate, and should it be that these same
two persons meet again when it becomes dark, they two shall again
greet each other, stroking each other’s bodies repeatedly, and one of
them will say, ‘I am thankful that thou and I have passed through
the day in peace, for verily now the night has fallen on us. Now,
then, thou and I make rulable preparation to greet with thanksgiving
Him who has formed our bodies.’ Then the other person will answer
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 567
and say, ‘Indeed, verily, it is pleasant that thou and I have again
met and that we are alive and in peace. Now, then, we two beseech
Him who has formed our bodies that he should have pity on us, that
there should be peace and health during the night, so that still again
thou and I should see the dawning of a new day.’ ”’
Then De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, “All of you have an equal right
to this which I have ordained. You will continue to comfort one
another, and also you will greet one another with thanksgiving when
you will be in the habit of visiting one another’s lodges; that may be
that you will habitually visit one another’s firesides, and also that
you will severally travel about on the several paths and you will cus-
tomarily meet one another, that shall always be the principal thing,
that happiness of life shall be the foremost matter, that you shall
greet one another with thanksgiving; me also you shall be in the
habit of greeting with thanksgiving. So then it will affect us all
alike in that we shall all habitually have peace of mind, day after
day and night after night. So then do you not ever forget this in
the future days that are coming one after another; indeed, a grave
thing will actually come to pass if it so be that you will forget peace.
You would not continue to live if it so be that so it would come to
pass that you will forget it, also your children would not continue
to live; so then that is the cause that I have laid it down, and also
bestowed it. Now you will attend to one another as to your minds
(your thinking) here on the earth, and the reason that I have done
this is that, indeed, the time is coming nearer and nearer when my
brother and I will disagree.
“And I believe that He, too, will try to let loose on the earth that
which will kill human beings; and that, then, is the reason that I
have left all things among men upon which they should continue
to live. Now, then, it will thus come to pass in the days that are
to come, that the time will arrive when there will be divisions be-
tween individual minds; also among the various ohwachira (kin-
ship groups) there will be nothing but contentions, that they will
continually dispute one with another; and it will thus come to pass
that they will see the time when it may be that they will forget hap-
piness, also peace, and also when they will forget my person; at the
end of that time will it begin that people will be opposed one to
another, and now also will they destroy one another; now also fellow-
hood (ties of blood) among persons will die out; and then you will see
that manifested, that the path on the sky (Milky Way) will divide,
and also when it thus comes to pass then at once there will begin to
be two minds (divided minds) among men here on the earth.”
At that time he said, ‘Now, then, I have finished this subject;
and now also I will depart for home. I will plainly hear, then, how-
ever, when one will speak to me. That, then, shall come to pass,
568 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
that, still again, I will come again at some future day, that will be
provided that, if it so be, that I will pass through that ordeal in
peace, and that still, it may be, that I will again be fortunate in that
I will control all things; for, indeed, my brother by all means will
attempt now to give himself the control of the whole of my handi-
work.”’ Now at that time he again departed for home.
Then Odendonniha set on foot all the instructions of De‘haé™hiya-
wa’’kho™. So then all persons prized the matter, that they severally
traveled about in peace from place to place. And when that on
which they lived grew up anew, then they began to assemble them-
selves together; and then the ceremony started in accordance with
the orders of De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”. When they were all assembled,
even to the least infant, then Odendonniha stood up and spoke,
saying, ‘‘Now, then, we shall bring forward the Ceremony which he
has ordained for us. He said, verily, that now people shall continue
to assemble; and so at this time of day, and also this number of people
of us, who are kin severally, have had our minds brought together
into one place. Now, then, we make rulable preparations and we
do it with one mind. We ourselves, then, will begin; we now greet
one another repeatedly with thanksgiving that so many of us have
assembled in this certain place. Now, then, with one voice we now
direct our words to the place where lies that on which we live. Now,
then, we will begin; we will now make rulable preparations for her
person, our Grandmother, this Earth here present, whereon we
travel about from place to place; for that she will care for all those
things which He who finished our bodies has completed; so then that
is the reason that we are greeting her with thanksgiving repeatedly,
that she is rightly fulfilling her duty in the manner in which He
ordered it.
“Now, another thing; now the grasses that grow, beginning from
the surface of the ground and going upward, differ among themselves;
some put forth (bear) fruit, by which satisfaction is given to our
minds.
“Now, again, another thing; in the next place the bushes that
grow, which, too, in like manner differ among themselves; some put
forth (bear) fruit, which gives satisfaction to our minds.
‘Now, again, another thing; in the next place the trees that grow,
which, too, in like manner differ among themselves; some put forth
(bear) fruit, which gives satisfaction to our minds.
‘Now, again, another thing; in the next place the several springs
of water, in the next place the several streams of water, in the next
place the several flowing streams of water; now, then, we make
rulable preparation and we greet with thanksgiving repeatedly all
the various orders of things we have designated; for, verily, they
live life in full, and besides he who formed our bodies placed them
and us together in one place.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 569
“Now, again, another thing; in the next place the animals whose
bodies he has put forth and which travel about from place to place,
they too in like manner differ among themselves; some are small in
size and travel about near our bodies, some with outstretched wings
travel about just over our heads from place to place, and in the next
place they make sounds, having fine voices; some have large bodies
and they severally travel about from place to place in the forest.
Now, then, we make rulable preparation and greet with thanksgiving
all those we have mentioned, and that he who formed our bodies
left us and them in one place; and that, then, is the reason that we
greet them repeatedly with thanksgiving that they, too, are severally
living peacefully.
“Now, again, another thing; in the next place now this present
day, this time of day, and such also is the kind of light, which our
Elder Brother, the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun), causes to be, and
we esteem the daylight with which he causes the entire world to be
lighted, and he causes the many islands to be light, and also he causes
them to be warm; that, then, is the cause that there is peace and
health on the earth, and also among all things that grow, and also
among those things that are alive, the animals and also among us
human beings, for day after day he attends to us all. Now, then, we
make rulable preparation and we greet with thanksgiving repeatedly
our Elder Brother, the dirunal Orb of Light (the Sun).
“Now, again, another thing; now we will turn ourselves in the
direction of our Grandmother, the nocturnal Orb of Light (the Moon);
now also toward the Stars severally present, and also toward the
Sky present to us. He who formed our bodies intended that it
should habitually become dark on the earth, and so then he ap-
pointed her to cause it to be light only when it is night; and that at
her will she will be charged with causing dew to fall on all that
grows, and that therein all the wild plants and animals will continue
to grow, and that in the next place we who live upon the earth govern
ourselves by the endings of the planet which we esteem; now, then,
all greet repeatedly with thanksgiving the nocturnal Orb of Light
(the Moon) and also the Stars severally present, and also the Sky
present to us, whereby our minds are caused to be satisfied; and that
is the reason that we continue to greet them with thanksgiving.
“Now, again, another thing; in the next place are our Grand-
fathers, the Thunderers, whose custom is to come from the westward,
and who protect us day after day and also night after night. That
also they will care for the earth here present now, and also for all
that it contains, and also we ourselves, human beings, and that in
the next place they cause mist to fall on the earth, and that also
they customarily cause the waters to be fresh. Now, then, we make
rulable preparation and we have done to them what is fitting, and
now we greet them all with thanksgiving repeatedly.
19078°—28 37
570 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH, ANN. 43
“Now, again, another thing; now He made all the things which
we have named and He appointed duties to them, and that is just
the reason that we continue to think in peace. Now, then, we make
rulable preparation and with thanksgiving we greet Him who has
made our bodies and who dwells in the sky.
“Now, then, we end our words, and now we have fulfilled the
Ceremony which He has ordained for us. Now, then, the Ceremony
for which we are assembled will start. Now, then, we will greet one
another repeatedly with thanksgiving. Now, then, the songs of the
Great Feather Dance will start.”
Now at that time the ceremony started and all were happy, even
to the least of the children, all were contented in their minds.
And when the time came that the Sun was at midsky, then the
Ceremony came to a standstill. Now at that time Odendonniha
again stood up and said, “ Now, verily, we have completed the Cere-
mony with which we customarily greet with thanksgiving Him who
completed the earth, and also all that grows, and also the animals,
and also the pools of water, and also the diurnat Orb of Light to whom
He has given a duty to perform, and also the nocturnal Orb of Light
(the Moon), also our Grandfathers, the Thunderers, who habitually
come from the westward. Now, then, we make rulable preparations
and so we bring all those whom we have designated into one body,
and now, then, we again thank them repeatedly that now we have
completed the Ceremony by which we customarily give thanks.
Now, then, we human beings, as many of us as have completed the
Ceremony in this certain place, all think in peace.
“Now, then, we make rulable preparation and we now again greet
with thanksgiving repeatedly Him who has made our bodies. Now
we have completed the Ceremony. Now, too, we personally make
rulable preparation and so we greet one another with thanksgiving
repeatedly.”
Then Odendonniha said, ‘‘Now we began at the beginning, and
we have performed one of the ceremonies which He has ordained for
us. So then as is the Ceremony that was performed, such will it
continue to be performed in the future, and also the kind of words of
thanksgiving that we spoke, and also the kind of songs that we used,
and also the words we used in greeting one another repeatedly with
thanksgiving; indeed, we began from the place whereon we stand and
we carried it upward, and we ended the matter where He abides who
formed our bodies and who completed all things. So then it will
continue thus to be that people will employ for it the same kind of
words that we spoke this day. So then they will perform it in this
manner in the future.”
Now at that time Odendonniha said, ‘““The matter that He has
ordained for us, verily, says that we all have an equal right to it.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER Oval
Now, then, verily, it becomes the duty of us all highly to prize this
Ceremony, and next that we must push the matter; that the number
of fixed Ceremonies shall be performed at the seasonal times He has
severally indicated for them.”
At that time they did thus and they esteemed the Ceremony; and
they kept following the matter as De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ ordained it.
For some time, indeed, they were all of one mind in what they did,
when they were surprised that when they retired for the night they
then saw there visible in the sky the path (the Milky Way) and that
the pathway was plainly divided. It was not long after that they
could not agree in their minds. Now also they took opposite sides
of matters, they contended about matters; in so doing they turned
the matter in all possible wrong ways that they knew, but all kept
only saying, ‘‘This, indeed, is the form of the matter (Ceremony).”
Now seemingly the minds broke up. Now, then, they could not
agree. Now it was not possible for them to accomplish anything in
attempting to perform the Four Ceremonies.
And there Odendonniha told it, saying, ‘‘De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™
promised it, saying, ‘Verily, do you not forget to love one another;
also pleasure, also peace, also the Four Ceremonies.’ And next he
said, ‘If it so be that you will forget them you can not continue to
live; and that next when you shall see that in the visible sky the path-
way there will be very plain, and that, too, it will be divided,
and all human beings will see it when at night it will be plainly
visible, and that along the pathway (the Milky Way) it will be
divided. And that, too, at that time there shall begin to be, too,
among human beings two antagonistic (conditions of) mind. And
that, then, we will see that it has thus come to pass as He has told
us. Verily, so then we will fail in reasoning in our mind, then
we will lack in our esteem for the ceremonies which He has left us
and told us the manner in which we should perform them day after
day and night after night. So then it is necessary that all of you
should continue to take courage, and that you should continue to urge
the observance of all the ceremonies which He has ordained for us.”
So then, although Odendonniha preached there, yet it was not possible
for them again to achieve good results and they could not work
harmoniously together again. It was thus day after day and night
after night among the people of one individual ohwachira (family),
there were contentions among themselves.
It continued thus for some time, and then at the end of it there
began to occur peculiar happenings among the people. It became
frequent that one would disappear; now also it began to be that one
would kill a human being; now also the Orb of Light underwent an
unnatural change (an eclipse) and the Orb of Light disappeared; now,
then, there began to be in the several ohwachira (families) no peace;
Oe IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
some of the children were lost, and it was not known what happened
to them, or also whither, perhaps, one went; and now, indeed, the
time had become so critical that the elder women (the mothers)
severally wept.
Now at the end of that period they just heard a loud noise that
sounded in the direction of the west, and now also the Thunderers
sung thence, and now also wind began to blow and it was very strong,
and now, then, also it rained and lightened repeatedly. For three
days without change it continued to rain, and then the people became
fearful, saying, ‘“‘Now, verily, presumably something will come to
befall the earth.”” After a while it ceased raining. It was not long
after when they saw a beautiful color, one that they took to be a ray
of light, in appearance; it started below and went upward, and at
a long distance there again it came down, and there it rested upon
the earth. There were a few colors of it which they, perhaps, did
not know. Never had they seen anything like it before.
Then they said, ‘Let us question Odendonniha. He, presumably,
will be able to tell what kind of thing it is that is the cause that this
has come to pass, which we have never seen before, and of which also
no one has ever told us that it would happen.”
Then they departed and they did seek for the person of Oden-
donniha, and so then when they saw him in his bark shelter they
said, ‘‘What does that betoken (know) (of what is it a sign), that
thing which starting from below goes upward and far away, it there
again takes its course downward and there again rests upon the earth,
and which also has a fine color?”
Then Odendonniha said, ‘‘ Verily, the reason that that has thus
come to pass is that this is caused by the fact that we have not
fulfilled what De‘haé™ hiyawa’’kho” has ordained for us. Now, then,
I believe that he is somewhere about here, and so, then, I believe that
he has returned. Verily that he has promised to come back.”’
Then the human beings said, “‘ By all means, then, verily, we shall,
perhaps, see him again.”’
Not long after that De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ arrived there. They did
not know him. Now at that time he said, “I come here for the
purpose of having you desist from that which has come to you, that
ye are at strife one with another. So then it will thus come to pass:
I will make new the matter; in the first place I will tell you that now
there have alighted upon the earth two minds (modes of thought),
and also two modes in the lives of human beings. Now, verily, ye
saw what came to pass; ye disagreed severally in your minds, and all
your minds were divided by others; now also you saw that the path
which came in the sky has divided itself, and has become a path on
the sky; now, then, that signifies and it is a sign that now, beginning
here and continuing for the future, it will thus come to pass that
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 573
there shall continue to be discords among the minds of those who will
have human bodies here upon the earth. Also that skyward the
path will divide itself by forking for them. So then you shall continue
to note by that which has come to pass that now you have seen that
my power is manifest in a Rainbow on the earth present here. All
persons shall continue to guide themselves by it; that is, if the
Rainbow will stand forth so will the earth here present continue to
exist, and also all things that are growing thereon, also the animals,
also all those to whom I have appointed overseeing duties. So then
when, verily, you will see it thus come to pass that in the sky ye will
see a Rainbow stand forth, coming out of the place of the sunrise
and going along through the middle of the sky and resting again in
the west, when you will see it thus come to pass, then at that time
will the earth present here come to an end, also all that it contains,
also your protection by those who move about above from place to
place. Then all decrees will come to an end. So then I will tell
you that I have bestowed the duty to the persons, the Thunderers,
who are in the habit of coming from the west, which they will continue
to keep and which they will also continue to carry about with them,
and that then you will continue to guide yourselves by it on the earth,
that then they, the Thunderers, will travel about from place to place.
Now also they will again wash off the earth. All will again become
new. Now all my handiwork here will receive renewed life. You
will see then customarily the Rainbow stand forth on the earth here.
“So then it will thus continue to be so long as all my handiwork
will continue in operation, and also all of my ordinances.
“Now, then, I tell you that, verily, there had been a day when I
was here on the earth. That, also, there in that very place my power
grew of itself, and that, next, I used the bow and also the arrow here
on the earth. There, in that very place, grows that of which it was
made, and that, next, there that was the first to succeed in growing
which succeeded in being able to cause it to be daylight, the Sunflower,
verily, it is of a yellow cclor. And the next was the Red Willow,
that was the first to be able to grow on the earth. And now, in refer-
ence to the game animals the Great Bluebird was the first to make
(beget) its life. So then, three was the number of colors which were
the first to beget themselves here on the earth. So then, that is the
cause then that thereby you shall continue to take for a sign how
long the matter will continue to be, for so long ye shall continue to
see it, and thereby the earth shall live, and also the sky. So then,
customarily, when ye will see it, you will continue to call it Rainbow
that is present. That here where the Thunderers are in the habit
of traveling, coming from the west and going from place to place,
there will be the place where that Rainbow will be in the habit of show-
" ing itself; so then by that ye shall continue to remember me as long
574 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
as your ohwachira (families) will thus continue, and as long as the
light orbs will be present in the sky, and as long as you will habitually
hear the voice of your Grandfathers, the Thunderers.
“Now, then, I will renew it again, and so I will also supplement the
Four Ceremonies which I gave. In this manner, then, at the present
time, will you again do it in the days to come. So then, when the
season changes, and the spring season starts, then you will begin,
when you will again see wild strawberries, the small kind, again
mature, when it will have put forth berries, so then, thus you will do.
Then you should get berries, they shall be gathered, and then, at
that time, you, the entire community, the old women, also all the
children, who are alive, must be of the number, shall assemble your-
selves. So then, when all will be assembled, then a drink shall be
made of the berries; and the first thing done will be, that the expressed
juice of the berry shall make a circuit of the assembly. So then,
you shall choose two persons who shall make the circuit of the assem-
bly and who shall divide the juice of the berries into portions (to
every one); those whom you shall choose shall be those whose lives
are new, one person shall be a male and the other a female. So then,
they two shall have grown to that age when he will have just grown
up to that point when his voice begins to change (age of puberty),
and, in reference to the girl, she will have grown up to that point
when she shall have just, for the first time, had to deny herself certain
things.
“So then, when they two will divide up the berry juice, you shall
use one thing only when you shall dip it up; so then, one shall do thus
when one will dip up the juice of the fruit, that one shall hold it,
and at that time, one shall speak and say, ‘I greet you with thanks-
giving repeatedly, all you whom we are in the habit of greeting with
thanksgiving. You also we greet repeatedly with thanksgiving, all
you of various ranks to whom He has appointed overseeing duties.
Now, then, we greet Thee who dwellest in the sky repeatedly, with
thanksgiving, that still again we saw that which Thou hast
planted for us again bore fruitage. Now, then, I greet Thee repeat-
edly with thanksgiving that now again I shall swallow the drink.’
Then, at that time, one shall drink the juice of the fruit. And, it is
the duty of each one of you, all, even to the least child, to speak;
should it so be that one is not able to speak, then all that is necessary
will be that one shall speak specifically, saying, ‘I am thankful that
still again I shall drink it. I greet repeatedly with thanksgiving Him
who has completed our bodies.’ It is just the same whether this is
all that it is possible for one to do; if it so be that that one is not
able to talk, let that one only think repeatedly, saying, ‘I am
thankful that I am alive in peace. Now, anew, I will drink it
See note on p. 610.
HEWITT MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 575
again. Now, then, I greet Thee repeatedly with thanksgiving who
formed my body and who dwellest in the sky.’
“Thus shall you be in the habit of doing this again. So then,
customarily, when all will have drunk the juice of the fruit, then at
that time the Ceremony of the Great Feather Dance shall take place.
Customarily, all shall stand up and shall make a circuit of the Fire
and shall share in promoting the Ceremony. All shall continue to be
happy, thinking, I am thankful that I am alive in peace. Now again
I see the time and place where He has placed the Ceremony among
the ceremonies which He has marked out, that still it is possible that
IT am able to take part in the Ceremony. Now, then, I greet Thee
repeatedly with thanksgiving who dwellest in the sky. Thou hast
completed our lives.’”’ So, thus you shall again do this again in the
future days; and, in the next place, when raspberries begin to ripen
then there, again, at that time shall the Ceremony be observed.
“And, in reference to that, the same thing shall come to pass, and
you shall act in the same way. And, when you again see that it has
put forth fruit again, you will get it and collect it, and then, the
whole community shall assemble themselves, and then, one shall
prepare the juice of this fruit. So then, they two will be exactly the
same, and you shall act exactly the same in this ceremony that will
start as was done in that for the strawberries.”
Then He said, ‘‘Some of those whose fruit will ripen after this, also
the mulberry, will be transferred and they shall be joined with that
Ceremony which will take place when they shall gather the Highly
Prized Food for the Harvest Festival.
“So then, customarily, there, when the great dance of the Four
Ceremonies will take place, then, customarily, one shall prepare at
that time the drink of the juice of the mulberry fruit. So then, cus-
tomarily, that will be the first thing, that it make a circuit of the
assembly, and all must drink of it and all also shall continue to utter
repeatedly thanksgivings. Now, at that time, the Ceremony shall
start, and then, that, too, the juice of the fruit shall have been pre-
pared and then it will continue to be placed in the midst of the
assembly, that then, when they shall continue going about in a
circuit, performing the Ceremony, then each individual shall have the
right and duty to do it, should one think, ‘Let me dip up the liquid
and drink it,’ it will be possible to do so, and, then, too, as to that,
one shall make rulable preparation when one dips up the liquid, that
one shall say, then, ‘Repeatedly, with thanksgiving, I greet you all.
I greet Him who has completed our faculties.’ Thus, then, will you
‘continue to do it over again, in the future. Now, then, I will deliver
one more new thing, and then, thereby will it continue to be good,
and they (females) will be together mutual assistants,” all who habitu-
See note on p. 610.
576 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
ally put forth fruit. So then, I have assigned to a certain kind of
tree the duty that it shall exude customarily a sap which shall be called
sugar. It is that, then, customarily, that shall be put into it, when
one shall prepare the juice of the fruit (as a drink). It is that, then,
that I have appointed to this duty what will be called the Maple
(tree). So then, this matter will be marked at the time and place
when the days are beginning to be warm again, and also the earth.
At that time, it will then be possible that it shall exude sap which
will become sugar; that, then, too, will result in good that, in this
instance as well, that you shall do the same thing, that you shall
continue to utter thanksgivings when you will again see it, and then
you will again drink it anew. So then, that shall be called the Gath-
ering of One’s Sugar. So then, you shall just do exactly the same as
in the Ceremony that you shall perform, that shall be called the
Gathering of One’s Fruit. So then, now, there is only one thing
left, and that is, that I will yet visit this earth again. Now, then,
I have placed in the midst of you a very important matter, love, that
you shall continue to love one another’s interests, so that there always
will be peace. Now, then, I depart home again.”’
Now, at that time, He just disappeared again. No one knew the
place whither De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho” went.
And, then, they made use of the things, as means, the things such
as He severally ordained them, and they performed these Ceremonies
in the order in which they were marked (placed) and all highly loved
these Ceremonies.
For some time the Ceremonies were carried on correctly, and then
again, there began to be disagreements among the people; and now,
also, they disputed among themselves, and next, they resorted to all
means and methods in their disputes to win, and every one also said,
“JT indeed, am doing this in the right, correct way. I, then, will
control it (do as I please).’’ Thus it was day after day, and also
night after night. The next thing it now became frequent that where
they traveled about from place to place in the forest, hunting game,
that there, then, they habitually saw those animals which they did
not know. These were ugly; and now, then, these began to slaughter
them; now, then, it was not usually well for them to go away a long
distance, for, without an exception, customarily, a certain number of
them were killed by these monsters, if it so be that they went travel-
ing even a short distance away. More and more numerous they
were now, all kinds of things befalling the inhabitants. Now, also,
only few in number were the persons who still carried on the Cere-
monies which De‘haé“hiyawa’’’kho” had ordained. Now, also, it ”
began to be that one just died in their village, where before they had
not known of such a thing coming to pass. Now, then, these hap-
penings came to pass more frequently. Now the continuing grief of
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER Didids
mind of the people became plain. For some time it continued thus,
that they never had peace of mind day by day and also night by
night; now, also, the time came that the Four Ceremonies had ceased
to be performed. Then, they were surprised that now again De‘ha陑-
hiyaw4’’kho”’ returned.
Now at that time He said, “I am come to make only a short stay
and also this will be the last time that I set foot here upon the earth;
and it will continue to be thus after this, that the people dwelling on
the earth will know only my name. So then, now, indeed, it shall
be a very trying task for one, should one desire to see me again. So
then, I will deliver up that by which your flesh and also your mind
shall continue to live. Now, then, I have come again, and so I
will thoroughly complete and settle the entire matter. As to that,
then, the matter will rest with the human beings after the time that
what has been ordained will change. And, the reason that it will
thus come to pass is, that the time will then, actually, begin in which
my brother will let loose his work here upon the earth and also in the
minds of human beings. He will endeavor to spoil all the kinds of
things which I have ordained. Also, he will attempt to destroy all
those things which I have completed and which are contained in the
world. So then, it will result in good if you continue highly to prize
the Four Ceremonies, and, in the next place, that you love one another,
you who travel about in one place. Do you not forget love, also
peace. You must also always remember Me day after day and also
night after night. Now, then, I will again depart for home.”’ Now,
at that time, He departed.
So then, among the inhabitants it was so that now many were to
be found who knew the history of what took place at the beginning
on the earth here present and also of what will come to pass in the
future. Now, also, many were to be found who customarily entered
sweat lodges to forecast the future. Now also, increasingly many
were to be found who became ill. Now, also, increasingly many
were to be found of the adult persons and of the children who died.
Now, also, increasingly many were to be found whose lives were
changed and who became insane. Now, also, increasingly many
were to be found who were liars and who reviled one another by gossip.
Now, also, there were increasingly many to be found in the families
(ohwachira) of the inhabitants who gave discontent. Now, also,
increasingly many were to be found who antagonized one another
and, now, then, who killed one another. Now, it was so that there
were none among the neighbor firesides that respected one another,
and also there they did not any more respect those who travel about
over the main paths. Now also, it was not possible for them to
accomplish anything in their assemblies, and now, then, also, the
Four Ceremonies had ceased to be performed. and thus it was day
578 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
after day and night after night; now, only that which vexed the mind
was in progress. And now, also, it had reached that point where the
women and also the children did nothing but weep. And now, it
had even reached that point where there was nothing but fear day after
day and also night after night. And, at that period, they just noticed
that it seemed that the amount of fruit that grew had become less.
It was thus that season after season they noticed customarily that
what grew became less and less in quantity. Now, at that time, they
were surprised that it was now reported that some one had seen
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ and that He was then among the inhabitants.
Not long afterwards, then truly, De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ was seen by
them. At that period it commenced, one would think, that what
was going on among the inhabitants lessened in force, and that,
one would think, that all minds had quieted down.
Now, at that time, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ said, ‘““Now, then, all
persons must assemble. It is necessary that all should know the
matter which I come to relate.”
Now, at that time, the whole body of people assembled themselves,
the adults and also the children. Now, at that time, De‘haé™hi-
yawa’’kho™ said,‘‘ Now, then, I will tell you the whole matter. Now,
you must begin individually to look out for yourselves when each one
has grown up. Now, as to your children, you shall look after them
and you shall aid with the mind. And, now, it has become a duty
that the minds of the people shall be severally instructed. Now,
verily, you saw what came to pass day after day and also night after
night. All manner of things that could give sorrow and anxiety to
the mind were on foot among the several firesides (ohwachira) and
also in the places where people severally travel on the several main
paths. You, human beings, do not love one another at all. You
are, verily, not aware of the kind of thing that is the cause that it has
thus come to pass. And that is that my brother has caused this.
He pursues his work in accordance with his evil mind; and he desires,
‘T will spoil everything; I, also, will control everything; and also I
will destroy everything.’ He means all that I have completed.
Now, then, the first thing that I will deliver to you is that I will say,
you must again cease it now, that you do not now respect one
another. So then you will again take up love, also peace, here on
the earth. So then, you will be able so to do, that you will love
one another. That, then, I will now tell you. Now, there have
actually come to be two paths: one is for the human being who has
fulfilled the Ceremonies, who is a good person, who has love and also
peace; so then, they, when their allotted number of days here on
the earth will become exhausted, will depart hence again, will take
that path which, then, keeps its course to the other earth on the
upper side of the sky; there, then, in that place one will arrive,
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 579
wherein one shall find happiness; there, also, is the place where the
Four Ceremonies are being continuously performed. Now, the other
(path) is that, I believe, for those who have not ceased, who have
not forsaken, that which is wrong, the handiwork of my brother
who has the evil mind, and that, I think, one will continue to hold,
when one has exhausted one’s allotted number of days. ‘There,
then, too, that one will travel along the path that forks, on this
side thereof, and thither one will go and there that one will arrive
where stands the lodge of my brother. In that place itself one will
see forever that which is ruinous. So then, you human beings who
travel about on the earth have a duty to perform, and it shall, then,
be through great strivings that you will pass, in order that you shall
continue to live on the earth and also in the sky. If you fail in
mind you shall perish on the earth, also in the place of ruin. So
then, that one who fails in this matter will die twice. So then, now
it will continue thus to be, so long as the earth continues to be.
Now, we can do nothing to thwart what has thus come to pass.
Now, then, I will bestow that whereby you shall continue to live.
You will be in the habit of calling that thing medicine. And, the
reason that I do so is that now, indeed, there will travel about
here over the earth what is called Disease, malign by nature, and
faceless. That, then, indeed, has the power to cause the days of
some of you, human beings, to end for you; also, it will thus come
to pass that no matter at what age one may be it will thus break
off my handiwork. Now, he has completed that, my brother is
the one who has caused it to be. So, then, that is the reason that
I deliver at the side of your persons, Medicine, that it may in some
small way prove to be a preventive; some, also, it shall cause again
to go about in peace, that other days will still become theirs.
“Now, then, you will get one each of all the various kinds of
grasses, also of all shrubs, also of all trees, and you shall lay them all
here beside me.”’ Now, at that time they truly did thus. Now,
they collected one each of all the kinds of grasses that grow, also,
one each of all the kinds of shrubs that grow, also, one each of all
the kinds of trees that grow. Now, at that time, they collected them
all together and placed them before De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™, and now
they said, ‘“‘Now we have fulfilled the matter; and this is all that we
can personally do. Now we have placed them in front of Thee.”’
Now, at that time, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” arose, and he spoke and
said, “‘ Now, then, the matter rests with all, each one. Now, you must
pay attention; all of you, verily, know the various kinds and also
their several names. That, then, shall come to pass; I will take up
one and will hold it up high where all of you will see it, and then I
will begin to ask questions. That, then, will come to pass; one will,
See note on p. 610.
580 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
then, speak, customarily, and will declare it, if it so be that he or she
knows it correctly.”’
Now, at that time, He took up one and holding it up high then
asked, saying, ‘What is the name of this one?” Now, at that time,
they replied; there were found only a few persons who knew it and
who correctly named it. Now, at that time, He said, “This shall be
for medicine, and this will continue to be an aid to the human beings.
So, then, that wiil be able to counteract a few in number of the kinds
of disease.”” That next that there were only a very few persons who
truly knew them and who remembered their names correctly. Thus,
then, it will come to pass in the future, that there will be only a few
certain persons who will ever know the medicine that will aid one.”
Now, at that time, He began again to ask questions, and He exhausted
the number of kinds, and those who knew them correctly told Him
so. Now, also, He told them all the things of which these would be
able to cure them. Now, at that time, He said, ‘Now, I have com-
pleted this matter. So then, it came to pass that only a few persons
were found who knew correctly all the kinds of things that grow, so
then, in the next place, the responsibility rests with them to give their
attention to the medicine. Now, also, they shall begin to continue
to give aid to the human beings both in the flesh and in the mind.
So then, it is already prepared and there lies the native tobacco beside
your bodies; so then, both are equally responsible, and it will be
possible that, in whichever direction one will be drawn, that one
shall become ill; now, verily, that one will take up native tobacco for
a thank-offering; then, one will take up the native tobacco, and now,
at that time, one shall use that as a thank-offering, turning toward
the place where abides the person who understands medicine, and
when one arrives there one shall say, ‘I beseech thee that thou shouldst
aid me; a serious thing is drawn toward me, it is sickness. Now,
then, I choose thee to aid me.’ Now, at that time, one will deliver
what one bears‘and one will say, ‘Here les that with which I make
(pledge) my word. Now, I depend upon thee.’ Now, at that time,
that one will accept it, and then will depart, going thither to the
place where grows the medicine. So then, when one will see that
growing which one knows will aid a person who is ill, then there beside
it one will stand, at the place where it grows, and now, then, one
will say, ‘Thou here art selected in that one has put dependence on
thee, that thou shouldst aid the ill person whose body lies supine
yonder, a human being.’ Now, at that time, one will name the per-
son, and one will say, ‘ Here, then, is the thank-offering that one makes,
that we should aid that one.’ Now having, then, that with which
one has made one’s word, one will cast there the native tobacco, and
just then, and not before, shall one take up the medicine. ‘Then,
one will carry it back, and when one will arrive home again, then one
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 581
shall say, ‘Now, I have brought in the medicine. Now, then, thou
and I ask that the medicine should aid thee.’
“Now, at that time, one will say, ‘Thou who abidest in the sky
continue to listen. Thou, verily, hast completed all things. Now,
then, one and I pray Thee that it should aid her (or him) so that
would be the cause that she (or he) would travel about again in peace
over the earth. Now, then, the matter rests with Thee, what Thy
mind will do. Thou, verily, didst complete our lives.’ So, thus it
shall continue to be, thus you shall continue to do in the future, the
days to come and also the nights to come. Now, again, another
thing; now, then, f will deliver that by which you shall continue to
live. So then, now shall begin that which will become hard labor
for you. So then, you shall put your hands to them, you shall care
for them when the time comes that the soil of the earth shall again
become hot. So, when that time will, customarily, come, then you
shall customarily place them in the ground; and there shall be the
three kinds of that on which you shall live; one shall be called Corn;
and the next shall be called the Bean; and the next shall be called the
Native (Original) Squash. So then, when the time comes in which
you should place it in the ground you shall then plant it; and, then,
when you shall finish this then the people shall assemble and you
shall give thanks repeatedly, and for this purpose you shall make
use of the preliminary Ceremony of your usual custom. Now, at
that time, the Ceremony of the Great Feather Dance will take place.
You shall continue greeting one another repeatedly with thanks-
giving, and me also you shall continue to greet repeatedly with
thanksgiving. So then, when it will have sprouted and will have
come forth out of the ground then you shall begin to care for it.
Do you not spoil it in attending to it. Thus, again, next in order,
you shall do when you have finished this task. The people shall
assemble themselves and you shall employ all the Ceremonies which
you are accustomed to use. So then, when there is putting forth of
beans, these shall be gotten, these be gathered, and a kettle of these
cooked shall set there, and that will support the entire body of
assembled people; then one shall be chosen by unanimous voice, and
he shall speak. When he will speak he shall follow the prescribed
course, beginning with the matters such as they are in the preliminary
Ceremony of thanksgiving; he will begin below with the manifold
things that give pleasure to your minds, and he shall carry his dis-
course upward to the manifold persons who assist you and protect
you. Now, then, also, you will continue to greet me with thanksgiv-
ing, that now you will again newly partake of them. That shall be
the first, so then, the Ceremony of the Great Feather Dance shall
start and all persons shall continue to be happy. Everyone shall
continue to be greeting with thanksgiving, repeatedly. Me, too,
582 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
shall one greet with thanksgiving, repeatedly. Now, all shall take
part in the Ceremony, and shall continue to go around the Fire. So
then, when this passes, then you shall divide it up into equal portions,
and all shall share alike in what one swallows, the adults and the
children as well. So then, the same thing shall be done when the
corn upon which you live puts forth grains and when the native
squash puts forth fruitage. So, then, as to that, these shall be com-
bined then wherein the Ceremony is marked when you shall again see
all kinds of things, who are Sisters, one to another, upon whom you
live, at that place, verily, where the ceremony is marked wherein you
shall collect for yourselves the Grand Food. Now, at that place and
time, the great rejoicing of the Four Ceremonies shall be performed.
Now, then, I have completed the entire matter in the things which I
have severally ordered that you personally shall have as customs
here on the earth. So then, whoever it may be that shall be able
to continue to esteem greatly the Ceremony and, in the next place,
who shall continue to have love for others, also peace, when that one
shall exhaust the allotted number of days of one’s life here on the
earth, that one then will depart and will take that path that leads
upward to the world present on the upper side of the sky; there
that one will arrive, in that place where De‘haé"hiyawa’’kho™’, who
finished the faculties of our bodies, abides, and where lies that which
has the power to please the mind, and which shall never end; so then,
there in that place, the Grand Rejoicing of the Four Ceremonies is
being performed; so then, whoever it may be that will be able to
arrive there shall see joy; but in reference to that, death is not found
there; not also is it found there that one should become ill, not also
is it found there that one should struggle hard for that by which one
can continue to live, also it is not found there that one should become
sorrowful in mind, or in the next place, that which could cause one
to be sorrowful in mind, and, in that place, there is found only that
which can give pleasure to the mind. So then, that has no end any-
where, and that shall never change, and that shall always continue
to be thus. Verily, all the kinds of fruits, also all the kinds of flowers,
also all the kinds of animals, also all the dwellers in the sky whom
you have never seen on the earth (are there). So then, when one
shall arrive there after departing from the earth, one shall become
possessed of all these joys, and that condition shall continue to
give pleasure to one’s mind, forever.
‘Now, another thing; now, I will tell you, human beings, the kind
of path you have. Verily, I have kept saying that there are two
minds (kinds of mind). One deals with those things which I have
ordained, and which one shall continue to use in things pertaining
to the mind now, then the other with those things which my brother
See note on p, 611.
.
Hewitt] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 583
has severally ordained, and which one employs in reference to the
mind; so then, that shall come to pass for that one who uses, as a
means, that which is not right, and who has not love for persons,
and not for peace; and, so then, when that one exhausts his or her
allotted number of days on the earth, that one will depart, then, that
one will take the path that leads to the place where my brother
abides and that one will arrive at the place where his lodge is, and,
then, that one will see great suffering, and next, that one will be
famished, and that one shall greatly suffer forever, and that one shall
share the fate of my brother. Indeed, he is not now at liberty;
I have confined him, and I have kindled for him a fire, and for this
purpose I used his anger; it is plainly manifold times hotter than the
heat of the fire which you have. So then, it shall never go out, and
the reason of it is that now he is contending for it and he desires that
he shall control all minds among human beings, who dwell upon the
earth. So then, now, I have told you both things which will come to
pass. Whichever one will choose, one must obey it. Now, then, I
will tell you that, in so far as I am concerned, I shall not come once
more. Now, verily, I have finished my three visits here. So then,
now, I deliver in the midst of you my commandment. That shall
govern the actions of the people, day after day and also night after
night. So then, at some uncertain future time, it may be, that still
again it will thus come to pass that you will forget love of persons,
also peace. So then, the next time, I will send another person who
shall aid you human beings dwelling upon the earth. He will aid
me also. So then, only twice shall it be repeated that it will so come
to pass, that I shall send one to you to aid you in mind, so that you
might continue to live. When the third comes, then you will see
what shall come to pass upon the earth. So then, in reference to that,
that will commence far from the climax that you will notice that all
things upon which you live will gradually decrease in quantity, all
things that grow on the earth shall all grow less in power, and shall
grow less in quantity, and finally shall come to the point when it
shall come to pass that nothing more can grow, and the like thing
shall come to pass in regard to the animals, beginning with the small
animals that fly about, they shall continue to diminish in numbers
until the time shall come when you will be surprised that you will see no
more of them; and the same thing shall come to pass with regard to
the large animals upon which you live, they shall continue to decrease
in numbers until that time shall arrive when you will be surprised that
you will see no more of them; after this period, then just only mys-
terious things shall occur day after day, and also, night after night,
also on the earth; so then, awe-inspiring things shall come to pass
in succession, the earth shall quake (and) now, also, those things shall
584 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
come forth out of the earth, which now abide within the earth, and
which are proof against offending orenda, and which have the power
to outmatch the orenda (magic power) of human beings. So, then,.
all that I have told you shall thus come to pass, (since) I believe that
he will be able to seduce the minds of all human beings; verily, it is
my brother who will do this thus, and then all will become spoiled,
will become destitute on the earth, and also all that it contains,
and also the way in which human beings live, he will spoil everything,
even to the mind, will becorrupt. Now, then, I willdepart home again.
So, then, all the things which I have ordained shall continue to remain
here. They belong to you. So then, I will now fix my path on the
earth, so, then, in the place where my path will have ended there,
in that place, you shall find Corn and Beans, and, next to these,
native Squashes. So then, when you find these and, also, when they
shall mature, you must care well for them; do not waste them;
those things, indeed, are sufficiently able to care for you and your
posterity in the future. So then, thus you shall do when you shall
find them. You shall take suitable care in dividing them up into
portions, and each family (ohwachira) of the several existing fam-
ilies (ohwachira) shall share alike. So then it is these Three Sisters,
and, verily, you shall continue to live upon corn, also upon beans,
also upon native squashes. So then, you shall continue to do thus,
that is, you shall continue to say, ‘Oh, our mothers,’ and the reason
that you shall thus continue to say, is that, indeed, they will all care
for you to the end that your breath shall continue to be strong, and,
next, that you shall possess physical strength, and, also, that your
minds shall be normal, and, in the next place, that the children shall
continue to make use thereof,so that they shall have normally strong
breathing powers, while they continue to grow until they grow up
and then will have normal physical strength, also normal minds;
so then, our Mothers on the earth, will attend to all these on equal
terms; from that source comes it that you continue to grow up
rightly. In this respect it is like your Mother, Awenhaniyondah; it
is from that source that it came that your lives rightly continue to
grow, also the corn, also the beans, also the native squashes, your
Mothers; thence will it continue to come that you will continue
growing. So then, it will thus come to pass that I will fix my path.
Such a path, then, shall continue to be the path followed by human
beings. So then, they shall follow my path. The first shall be that
you shall choose two persons whose lives shall be new (young); they
two will have grown to that point, where he will just have begun to
change his voice, having just grown to maturity; and she also shall
have grown to that point when she has just commenced to deny
herself certain things, having newly arrived at maturity. So then,
you shall commission them to go there to the place whither I will
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 585
have gone; when they two shall have arrived where my path will
have ended in a mound of earth thereon they two will see growing
a Corn Plant, a Bean Plant, and a native Squash Plant, symbols of
your lives; at that time, then, the woman shall stand on the west
of them, and then the man shall stand on the east side of them;
now, at that time, he shall speak and he shall say, ‘Oh, our Mothers,
now we two have arrived. We two have been sent here by your chil-
dren. Now, then, be it known to you, we come to bring you with us.
Now, among our people you, too, will continue to abide. Now, then,
verily, we whom He who completed the works of our bodies left
together upon the earth, shall commingle together.’
“At that time, then, the woman shall be the first, she shall take
the first that stands growing which is called Corn, and, next, the sec-
ond one that stands growing which is called Bean; at that time,
then, the man shall take that which stands growing beside his body,
which is called Native Squash. So, then, when they two will have
taken them up they two shall understand then all as to the mean-
ing of the opened earth (the grave). So, then, in reference to that,
thus will it ever be with you human beings when one of you shall
depart again from this earth. That there, customarily, at that dis-
tance shall one’s path end, at the place where the ground will be
opened. But that, then, in so far as that is concerned, you human
beings who come afterwards shall continue keeping it in good order.
Thus, then, too, you, customarily, at that distance, shall reach the
end of the path, there where the ground shall be opened for one.
The next thing is that you are responsible for carefully preserving
it thus in the days that are coming ahead. Indeed, in reference
to that, it is not infrequent that it shall continue thus to be, that
you shall continue to be separating yourselves, one from another,
one will continually be departing from this earth, who will then be
in the lead of all those, when they shall exhaust their allotted number
of days, will ever continue taking the lead; for, indeed, verily, it
is so that you have a different number of days, and in the next
place, there are differences in the rapidity with which persons shall
depart; and, indeed, thus it is, that your file is straight and turned
toward the certain place whither you are going, the place where
your days shall end. That, then, is the reason that now the matter
rests as to what you will do with you, at the place and time, it is in
order, it shall be performed thereby, that you shall make (do) it,
in whatsoever place it may be that it shall so happen that there
will be a loss out of one of the firesides (ohwachira). Now, then,
there where you are I now leave (the task) that you shall care
for yourselves mutually, you shall amend the matter just as well
as you know how to do it, so that it may result in such good, that
the minds of as many persons as shall come later, successively,
19078°—28——38
586 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
in time, whose persons will be spared, should live. Now, then, I,
personally, have completed the matter. I have now established all
things by which the world of living things shall continue to live, also
all that grows thereon, also all the living animals, also all the human
beings who are alive, also the Pools of water, also the Four Cere-
monies, also the Love of persons, also Peace, also the Days, also the
Nights, also the person of our Elder Brother, the Sun (diurnal Orb
of Light) that moves about the sky, also your Grandmother, the
Moon (nocturnal Orb of Light), also the Sky that is present, also
those who habitually come from the west, your Grandfathers,
the Thunderers, who range about above the place whereby pass the
clouds, also the Wind that moves about, also the Medicine, these
are in number the things over which you are masters, they shall
continue ever to aid you, by these your flesh bodies shall ever continue
to live, also your minds, both the Day present and the Night present,
also the Earth present below, also the Earth present above the visible
sky. That, then, I hide from you, the ending of your days; no one,
then, shall know the number of his or her days; that, also, I hide
from you, the place whither I shall have gone, until, then, custom-
arily, one’s days will end upon the earth, just then only one shall
see the place, the path, whither I shall have gone. So then, in re-
gard to myself, there shall nothing ever obstruct itself in the space
between us. So then, I myself will have my eyes fixed clearly upon
you, in what manner you will ever continue to range about; so then,
I myself also will have my eyes fixed on your ways of thinking; in
the next place, I myself will hear fully, if one, it may be, will think
of me, if, it may be, one shall greet me with thanksgiving, repeatedly
if, it may be, that one shall ask something of me. Now, I leave the
whole matter. Now, then, you shall have your eyes fixed on the place
whither I go.”
Now, at that time, De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ went elsewhere. They
kept their eyes fixed on him as he went away. And, as they kept
their eyes fixed on him, they lost sight of him as he went from them.
Now, at that time, all the people dwelling there marveled at the
matter, now, also, they regarded with respect all that He had spoken
to them, also, all the things which He had promised them would
come to pass. Now, at that time, they, the Elder Men, said, ‘That
presumably, is good that we should attend to this matter, that we
should do this in accordance with rulable conventions. That, verily,
it so came to pass that now we understood the whole matter in the
way He ordered it, now, verily, De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”™ told it to us.
Verily, He said, ‘Now, the matter rests with you to give attention
to all the things to the end that you shall continue to dwell in
peace.’ So then, presumably, it will be the first thing for us to do to
attempt to choose two young persons who shall follow the path along
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 587
which He has gone to see what there is there. He said, verily, ‘One
shall follow my tracks; at the place where my tracks will end there
they two shall see growing that upon which you will continue to live,
the Corn, and next the Bean, and next the Native Squash. So
then, it is now time that they two should go to see if it be so, verily,
that they two shall truly see them, then, verily, they two should
bring them back, so that we could see the new things by which we
shall continue to live.’”’
Now, at that time, they decided for themselves that they would
seek for a male person who was just beginning to change his voice,
that is, a youth. When they had found him, they asked him whether
he would be able to follow the path along which De‘haé™hiyawa’-
‘kho” had gone away. At that time, then, the youth said, “TI will
volunteer to do thus, if it so be, that what De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho”
ordained, elected my person.”’ At that time, then, they sought for
a maiden. So then, when they found one, then, at that time, they
said, ‘‘Behold, here thou hast been elevated by what one has ordained
to be done. So, then, thou must go together with him, who has
already volunteered that you two should follow the path along which
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ has gone away. You two shall go to see what
thing has been done at the place where his path ended. Thee it is,
in person, He has chosen. So then, He has ordered that she, the
female human being, shall be the first to take up the Corn and the
Bean, that the male human being, for his part, shall take up the
Native Squash. So then, that shall come to pass which De‘haé™hi-
yawi’’kho™ had ordered.” At that time, then, the maiden said,
“Thus, seemingly, also, shall it come to pass, if it so be that what has
been ordered elected my person; thus, seemingly, too, shall I do.”
At that time, then, the Elder Ones said, ‘‘ Now, verily, we are for-
tunate in that we have found the persons, and that both are willing
truly to do as De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ has ordained us to do. Now, then,
you two who have volunteered, must pay strict attention, when they,
the Elder Ones, severally shall speak; so then, they unanimously have
made rulable preparation now to greet you two with thanksgiving,
repeatedly, because the minds of you two are not stubborn (and
uncivil). Your two persons were found to carry into effect the things
that De‘haé“hiyawi’’kho™” has ordained for us todo. So then, now
you two shall start and you two shall follow His path. You must go
along on His path. So then, it shall come to pass that, at whatsoever
distance away His tracks end, there you two must look carefully, if it
so be, that you two may see something growing there which you two
have never known, and which, also, you two have never seen; at that
time, then thou, the warrior, must take thy stand on the east side of
the place where is growing the new thing that thou wilt see. At that
time, then, she, the human being, must take her stand on the west
588 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
side® of it. So then, thou who standest on the east side of it, must be
the first to speak and thou shalt say, ‘Behold this now, we two have
arrived here. They who have sent us are severally your children. So,
then, we have come to invite you to our home. So, then, now, you
shall go to that place where dwell your children. Such is that which
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” has ordained.’ When thou endest thy speak-
ing, then, at that time, she must pluck up that which is called Corn
and next that which is called Bean. At that time, then, thou, next in
order, must pluck up that which is called Native Squash; at that
time, then, you two must consider well the characteristic situation of
the place whence you two shall take them. At that time, then, you .
two shall turn back again and start thence for home. So then, we
shall be expecting you, all, the entire body of the people, will be
assembled, they, the Elder Ones, also the children; so then, all will
see them when you two shall bring them back here.”’ At that time,
then, the two young persons departed. Now, they two saw quite
plainly His tracks along as He went westward. So then, at that time,
they two followed His tracks. On His tracks thither they two went.
Not far away, there, His tracks, indeed, ended, and there, indeed,
grew three kinds of things, which they two had never seen anywhere,
thus to be as were these which they two saw. At that time, then,
the male human being addressed the female human being, saying,
“Now, verily, we two have arrived at the place which was indicated
to us by those who have sent us, and now, also, we two see the new
things; we have never seen other things thus to be; so then, verily,
presumably, these things growing here are the things we seek. Now,
then, thou must stand on the western side of it.”” At that time, now,
she started and there on the west side of the place where they were
growing the maiden took her stand. At that, time, now, the youth
said, ‘‘Now, we two have arrived. Behold, we two have been sent
here by your several children, and behold, we two have come for you.
And now, then, we shall return home together, and now, then, you
shall go there to the place where dwell your children.”” At that time,
then, he spoke again and said, ‘Now, do thou take up them; thou,
verily, shalt be the first to do it.’ Now, at that time, she took up the
Corn plant and also the Bean plant, and, at that time, then he him-
self, verily, next in order, took up the Native Squash, and now he
said, ‘‘ Now, verily, the matter is accomplished—we have taken them
up. Now, then, do thou look at the place, as it is, where they all
grew.”’ At that time, then, they both looked and they saw that it
was just such a place as that wherein it would seem, a human being,
presumably, lies; just as tall as he is, so long it is, and it projected
upward; it would seem to be a heap of earth. It is plain that it
extended toward the west and toward the east; and thus it is, that
See note on p. 611.
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 589
they understood that; it would seem, that there, indeed, one would
think, presumably, that He lies thereunder, His head lying toward
the west and His feet lying toward the east; and His mound of earth
was just the size and width of the body of aman. At that time, now,
he said, “‘ Now, verily, we two understand it all, verily, they instructed
us thus that as much as possible we must scrutinize the place. Now,
then, we have examined it as much as possible, the features of the
place we have seen. Now, verily, it is plain that here He has ended
the tracks which thou and I have followed. Now, also, we two saw
all those things which thou and I had never seen before, and now,
then, thou and I must depart homeward.”
At that time, now, they two departed. When they two arrived
home where they dwelt, they two saw a large body of people assem-
bled, watching for their two persons to return, they whom they had
sent to follow the tracks of De‘haé™hiyawaé’’kho™. So, then, when
they two returned, at that time, then, the Elder Ones made rulable
preparation, and one spoke, greeting them repeatedly with thanks-
giving, and the speaker said, ‘‘I was chosen to speak, and to proclaim
the words of the entire body of the people, that now you two persons
have again returned, who in accordance with rulable preparation
were chosen by them; the entire body of the people chose you two
to follow the path whither De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho™ had again gone away.
And that is, indeed, that the whole matter they left entirely to
you two persons; that when you two should arrive there, at the
place where His tracks end, if it so be that you two should see some-
thing growing, you two must take up and you two must examine
the features of the place where His tracks end. And that, indeed,
verily, He promised that there in that place one would see three
different kinds of things. So, then, now, such is the body of people
who have assembled themselves, and all are expecting to hear the
matter and to learn the matter as it was when you two saw it, and
to see what kind of things you two bring, if it so be, you two bring
with you the new things He has delivered (to us) by which we must
continue to live. So, then, we have completed the matter, so then,
we shall all equally hear when you two will tell the narration. Go
to, what was the fortune of you two?”
At that time, then, they, the two young persons, said, ‘Truly,
it shall thus come to pass, that now we two will tell the narration
of the cast of our fortune.” At that time, then, he said, ‘‘When
we two started away, just at the distance to which one may see,
at that distance, it began that we two could see that His tracks
went on ahead. Not far away, then, there we two saw that His
tracks ended. Then, we two saw growing there three kinds of things;
at that time, then, there on the west side the woman took her stand,
and I myself stood on the east side of them. At that time, now,
590 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
I spoke, I said, ‘Now, we two have arrived; we two have been sent
here by your children. Now, then, we come to bring you home
with us. Now, then, you shall go hence to the place where dwell
your children,’ At that time, then, she took up two kinds. I,
myself, took up one kind. At that time, then, we two looked at
the place where they had grown, and there, then, we saw the ground
heaped up; it appeared just as if, as we understood it, one would
think, it is where a male human being, perhaps, lies supine inside,
and it seemed then that westward lies His head and that eastward
lie His feet, and it appeared thus that there His tracks ended only
where the ground was heaped up. So, then, that which we took
up we bring back with us. So, then, she brings back two things
and I bring back one thing. Now, then, verily, you shall see them,
when we two deliver them into your midst, the things we two bring
back. Now, then, that is all that we two have been able to do in
what you have commissioned us hence to do.”
At that time, then, they two delivered them. The two things
which she had brought she delivered before the Elder Ones and she
said, “It is this which I first took up.” Then the Elder Ones said,
“That, verily, is what He said is called Corn.” Then she said, “Now,
again, another thing; this is the second thing that I took up.” Now,
again, they looked at it and they said, “‘That, verily, He said is called
the Bean.” At that time, now, just then, the male human having
placed before them what he had and said, “This, verily, is the third
thing and which I took up.” At that time, then, they, the Elder
Ones, said, ‘‘That, verily, is what He said is called the Native Squash.”
At that time, now, he replied and said, ‘‘ Now, we two have fulfilled
all the matters with which you charged us. Now, then, we have
finished the narration.’”’ At that time, then, they, the Elder Ones,
said, ‘Now, as to that, we have heard of all the good fortune that
befell you two, also of what things you two saw. Now, then, we all
have seen the aspect of the things you two have brought back.
They, verily, are the new things which De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ has
delivered. He intended that we shall live by them. You two, then,
were given much trouble in going after these things in the place
where they first grew up on this earth. So then, we now begin with
you two. We, now, this entire body of people, have made rulable
preparations with one voice, and, now, you two must ever know that
we have made rulable preparations to greet you two repeatedly with
thanksgiving, that now you two have accomplished the task of
bringing Our Mothers here; verily, thereon, shall continue to live
the adult ones, and also the children. Verily, now, with one voice,
we together offer thanksgiving repeatedly, that now He has provided
us with provisions. So then, now, we shall come along the path
(of ritual) such as it was ordained for us by Him. So, then, we shall
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 591
begin with that. Now, as many persons as we are in number now
have made rulable preparations and now, then, we greet one another
with thanksgiving, repeatedly. We were, indeed, the first to see
the new provisions which One has provided for us. Now, then, we
have devoted especial care to our Mothers by whom we live, the
Corn, also the Bean, and also the Native Squash. That, verily, is
the reason that now we shall greet one with thanksgiving, repeatedly,
is that now we shall be one with them so long as our kindreds (ohwa-
chira) continue to exist in the future. Now, then, too, we will
direct our words toward our Mother, the Earth here present, also
to all the kinds of grasses that grow thereon, also to the several
kinds of bushes that grow thereon, also to the several trees that
grow thereon, also to the several springs of water, also to the animals
of whatsoever kind they may be. Now, then, we will direct our
words to those who are in the habit of moving about above. In the
first place is our Elder Brother, the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun),
also our Grandmother, the nocturnal Orb of Light (the Moon), also
the Stars fixed severally in the sky, also our Grandsires, the Thun-
derers, who habitually come from the west; now, also, the bestirring
Wind; now, too, we have devoted especial care to them, now we
greet repeatedly with thanksgivings all the various orders of assist-
ants appointed by the One who has formed our natures. And the
entire matter rests with them continually to care for us, day by day,
and also night by night. That, then, we now have unanimity (a
single mind), (and) now we make rulable preparations to greet now
with thanksgivings, repeatedly, Him who has completed our natures,
and who also completed all the things which we have mentioned.
And that, too, He who finished our bodies has gone to the place
above the sky, and who has said, verily, ‘‘I will completely hear it,
when, customarily, one will speak of or to me.’ In the next place,
He said, ‘“‘I shall see clearly things here below on the earth.”’ And,
then, that is the reason that we greet Him repeatedly with thanks-
givings that now we have seen what kind of things He has given us,
by which He has ordained that we should live, and which, at the
present time, among us, in the very midst of us, lie, which we
greet by the term of address, our Mothers. Now, then, verily, in
reference to that, this is the number of words of thanksgiving.
“Now, then, we shall confirm the matter by means of the Great
Feather Dance. That, verily, is the reason that thus we shall do is
that just now for the first time have we seen the Three Sisters, our
Mothers, by whom we shall continue to live.” Then, the Great
Feather Dance was performed. All persons stood up and made
a circuit of the Fire, the adult ones, and also the children, all were
happy. So then every one kept saying, ‘I am thankful that now
De‘haé“hiyawa’’kho™” has provided us with provisions.’”? When
592 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
they had performed the ceremony, then, at that time, the Elder Ones
said, ‘“‘So then, now, that must be considered; what manner of thing
shall we do with these things which have alighted in the midst of us.
Is it, that we shall portion them, verily?”’ At that time, one there
present said, ‘I, personally, in considering this matter as it is, believe
that, perhaps, we all as one have an equal right to them. So then,
presumably, that will result in good that we as one shall all just
assist one another,” when we place them in the ground, that next,
when they will grow up, we as one will just assist one another in
attending to them in one place, and that next, when they will mature
we as one will assist one another to harvest them. So then, it will
thus come to pass that, at the time, when we shall have it in abun-
dance, then, and not till then, shall we divide them up severally.”” At
that time, then, the Elder Ones considered the matter. At some time
after they decided that, truly, it should thus come to pass that they
only as one should assist one another. At that time, then, they
worked in this manner.
Very early spring came, then, at that time, the entire body of people
assembled themselves; then they, the Elder Ones, said, ‘“‘That, pre-
sumably, shall be the first thing, of which we shall seek aid, is the
Great Gamble (Bet). They upon whom we continue to live, our
Mothers, the Corn, also the Bean, and also the Native Squash, will
be the chief personages therein. Verily indeed, we shall bet the fruit
pits for them. So then, until after we shall have accomplished this
matter, then we shall place them in the ground. Thus we shall then
do as De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho™ has ordered it.’”’ At that time, now,
again, another person said, ‘“‘That, verily, presumably, will truly
result in good, that we shall do thus. So then, we shall make use of
that which happened in the days that have been in the past, when
De‘haé™hiyawa’’kho” and his Grandmother, the Sere-Flower, bet
together. They two wagered all that which grows upon the earth
here present. So then, verily, it will thus come to pass that we shall
contend with our mothers, the several women.”’
At that time, now, they the Elder Ones, agreed to the matter, that
it thus should come to pass. Now, then, at that time, they severally
made their preparations and they did bet; the male human beings
overcome their opponents. At that time now, they said, ‘Thus, then
it shall come to pass, when these anniversaries recur. Customarily,
that will be the first thing to be done, the Great Gamble shall be per-
formed. So then, our Mothers upon whom we live, every one of the
sisters, shall become the chief persons.”
At that time, now, they began to plant them. When they had fin-
ished the work of placing them al! in the ground, then they again
assembled themselves. And the ceremony of the Great Feather
See notes on p. 611.
BEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 593
Dance started, and then, verily, they offered up thanksgivings for
having finished planting their fields.
When those things which they had planted sprouted up, then again,
a large body of the people worked, they stirred up the earth. And
when they had completed this task then again, a large body of people
assembled themselves. At that time, then, they, the Elder Ones, said,
‘Now, verily, we have seen that those things upon which we live have
sprouted up. So, then, all those persons of us who have seen them
now greet one another with thanksgivings repeatedly. So then, we,
also, greet with thanksgivings, repeatedly, all those to whom duties
were assigned by Him-who-completed-them. Verily, these shall
attend to all these things, so that we should be fortunate in seeing
those things, upon which we live, grow to maturity. Now, too, we
shall greet with thanksgivings repeatedly Him who has formed our
bodies. Now, then, the ceremony of the Great Feather Dance which
He has ordained for us will be performed.”
At that time, then, the ceremony started, and all the persons took
an active part in it; they made a circuit of the fire, the adult ones
and also the children, all were happy. When it had passed, at that
time, then, the Elder Ones said, ‘‘ Now, verily, we have carried out the
ceremony in such manner as De‘haé“hiyawa’’kho™ ordered it. Now,
then, it shall continue to be thus, in the future, when the times, cus-
tomarily, in which people complete their works, recur.”” At that time,
then, the Elder Ones said, “‘Now, verily, as to that these shall be
included in that ceremony visible, but still distant, which, verily, He
called the Gathering Together of the Grand Food (Harvest Festival).
There, verily, in that place, then, shall our Mothers, upon whom we
live, the Corn, also the Bean, also the Native Squash, be included.
So then, it shall thus continue to be, in the future, as the ceremonies
recur which He, who formed our natures, has marked and ordained
for us.”’
At that time, now, it was so that it was at close intervals that a
person died; so then, now, thus they did do; they made a hole in
the ground, and there, customarily, in it they placed the flesh body,
then, customarily, they covered it again with earth. Thus it con-
tinued to be for some time, when it became frequent that, among the
families (ohwachira) one, customarily, who was not at all sick died
suddenly, as if broken off. It was, indeed, the same with the adults
as it was also with the children; now there was a growing number
who were not contented in their minds, and it was thus day after day
and, also, night after night; they just kept going about weeping.
The cause that it was thus was that they continued to lose per-
sons from their families (ohwachira), and now, also, the rites of the
Four Ceremonies were becoming less and less fully performed; now,
there were many, indeed, who paid no more attention to the Four
Ceremonies.
594 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
At that time, now, the Elder Ones said, ‘‘ Now, let the entire body
of people assemble themselves together. Now, we shall consider the
matters in relation to what is now befalling us. Verily, it is pre-
sumably not good that it should be a long time that it continue thus
that we merely keep our eyes fixed upon them. Now, verily, that
has thus befallen us, that everywhere people with lamenting voices
go about, they go about weeping.”
At that time, now, the entire body of people assembled. Now
they, the Elder Ones, chose a person who would now speak. He
should speak of that which seemingly was necessary to be done.
At that time, now, he arose and said, ‘‘He who completed our
natures has made this day such as it is, as to the kind of light it has.
He intended that those who have human bodies should ever esteem
it. So, then, we have now at this time assembled ourselves. We
have assembled ourselves for the purpose of considering this con-
dition which has befallen us. Now, verily, it is often that we who
are associated together are being separated. It is also frequent that
we see one going about from place to place pitying one’s self, going
about uttering cries, and going about from place to place weeping;
it is entirely thus in the several families (ohwachira), it is thus,
verily, evident what manner of thing is the cause of what has thus
come to pass. That, verily, is the handiwork, the result, of persons
being lost from the number of each family (ohwachira). So, then,
now, we who are here assembled wish that some one, whcever it may
be, might devise a course of action which we should pursue that
would result in good, and also that that condition would cease, in
which are too many among us who are not contented in their
minds, going about bewailing their lot, day after day and also
night after night.”
So, then, now, the Elder Ones made formal preparations and
placed the subject before the assembled people and they said, ‘“‘ Now,
verily, every one is equally responsible in this matter, and it matters
not who it may be who may devise a plan; or, also, let any one of our
mothers propose a plan; or, also, you, the youths, you young people;
or, also, you, children, let someone of you be found to form a plan if,
also, one should even propose an idea which we could carry out that
we may live; also that our children may live, and also, our grand-
children should continue to live, that the future days may be theirs.”’
At that time, then, they considered the situation for a long time.
They held several sessions in which it was not possible for them to
accomplish their purpose. They failed to find anything to do that
would result in good. Now, a male human being, one with the body
of a youth, who ever had very little to say, who was an upright and
good person now stood up and said, ‘Now, then, I have decided
that I myself should attempt to suggest a proposition as to what we
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 595
should do. Verily, the handiwork of Him who formed our natures
is marvelously grand, His power is also great, His mercy is also
great, and all that He has done is also altogether good. So, then,
I shall begin with telling what are my thoughts. Verily, the Earth
here present rightly has life; in the next place, beginning at the very
surface of the ground grasses grow, differing among themselves in
kind, and all differing among themselves in form; and in the next
place, all are severally charged with exclusive duties, each one having
a certain duty to perform, and all are alive. Thus, too, are they,
the several shrubs that grow; they differ among themselves in form
and they are of different kinds also, and they also are all alive; thus,
too, so are they, are the several growing trees; they are severally
different in kind and differ among themselves in size also, and they,
too, are all alive. Thus, too, so are they, the animals that fly about;
they differ in size and they also differ in their kinds, and they too
are all alive; thus, too, so are they, all the animals that run about,
they differ in kinds and also as to their size, and they also are all alive.
Thus, too, so it is, are those things upon which we live; they differ
among themselves in size and also as to their kinds, and they also
are alive; thus, then, too, so is it, are the several pools of water, they
severally differ among themselves as to kind; some are flowing
streams of water, and some also are flowing springs of water, they all
are alive; and thus, too, it is, as to all those whom He has charged
with the task of protecting us; the diurnal Orb of Light (Sun) and in
the next place the nocturnal Orb of Light (Moon), and next to these
the several Stars fixed in the sky, and next to these our Grandfathers,
the Thunderers, who habitually come from the west, and next to
these the Wind that stirs the air on the earth; these all differ
among themselves as to size and they differ as to kinds, also as to
the nature of the things with which they are severally charged they
differ among themselves, and these also, are all alive; so then,
do you consider in what manner exist all the things which He has
completed; He thus made them to differ in kind and that causes
everything to be good, and they are all charged with different duties
to perform; and in the next place, He has placed us in control over
all these, so then, thereby our flesh and also our minds shall live.
So then, so it is, we will understand that, verily, these have differing
clans, that, in the next place, they severally have titles, that they
severally are called by names; that next, He has made some to be
medicines and He has mixed them severally together; some will con-
tinue to aid the human beings whoever it may be who will have such
luck as to become ill; so then, it is so, that if one employs himself
with it, it will aid one, and one will be contented in mind, and also
one will go about in peace. So then, now, look, we, human beings,
are placed under like conditions. So then, we should imitate those
596 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
things which we have had mentioned to-day in the ways in which
He formed them, verily, the time has now come when we should
form clans which should exist. The reason that we should thus do,
is that now, verily, we have become numerous, so then, we should
now apportion the body of people; and that, then, that there should
be only a certain number of clans, that they should continue to call
themselves brothers and cousins in the days that are to come in the
future and that that should be used to follow this course so long as
our uterine families (ohwachira) continue to exist. So then, there
it should become the chief means, among those we shall employ in
what is now befalling us in that we are more widely separating our-
selves one from another. So then, thus it should continue to be,
where it will cause one to lose out of the respective uterine families
(ohwachira). That the entire Sisterhood should have that one thing
befall it, and that, at that time, the mind of the opposite Sisterhood
of people would be virgin and then they, this entire Sisterhood,
shall arise and they all shall go thither to the place where one has
been lost to one. Now, they shall utter words which are mellow,
they shall repeatedly cheer up their minds and they shall encourage
their minds, that their minds should not be carried away thereby;
and that shall result in good, that they should become settled (com-
forted) whose persons have become enshrouded in darkness.
“So then, you Elder Ones have your responsible duty to consider
this matter fully, whether you will choose that it shall be like them, in
that they shall be different one from another, as are those things
which I have mentioned; it is, verily, evident that there are clans
(kindreds) of grasses, also of shrubs, also of trees, also of game. Now,
then, you have learned all the things, as they are, on which I person-
ally have meditated. Now, then, I personally have been able to pro-
pose something for us to do only to this point. So now then the whole
matter rests with you.”
At that time, now, they, the Elder Ones, and also the entire body
of people, marveled at the kind of ideas which he (the young man)
had put forth. At that time, now, they, exercising serious care, con-
sidered the matter, repeatedly. After the lapse of some time, they
arrived at an agreement that they would accept the proposition, and
they confirmed the matter in the manner in which he set it forth, that
the entire body of people should be divided into parts, that there
should be divers clans.
So then, this custom shall be in vogue; no matter in which Sisterhood
of kindreds the loss may occur, the minds of the other Sisterhood will
then be prime and shall be responsible for the entire matter; they shall
carefully attend to all those things which must take place there; so
then, it shall be their duty to speak, they shall encourage the minds of
See note on p. 611.
HEWITT) MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 597
those who still remain alive in the several uterine families (ohwa-
chira); the reason that it shall thus come to pass is that then their
minds will slowly become settled again.
At that time, they then said, ‘‘What thing, then, shall we proceed
to do to make it possible that there shall be clans?’”’ Now, again, the
Elder Ones considered the matter, repeatedly; they attempted to
supplement (or expand) the proposition, such as it was proposed by the
Young Man. It was a very long time; they held several sessions in
the discussion of this matter. They did not succeed in forming a sys-
tem wherein divers clans should exist. At that time, the Elder Ones
said, ‘‘Now, verily, we personally have failed to do the work which
was given us, to study out all that was lacking in the propositions
such as they were evolved by the Young Man. So then, perhaps, it
would result in good that we give back to him the matter, so then we
should again give to him alone the whole matter. Then he himself
should complete all the things which are still lacking. Verily, it is
now manifest in the midst of us, that he possesses much thinking
power. So then it would perhaps result in good, should we fully
deliver up the matter to him. Now we will turn over to him all the
power in the matter. Now, he himself will complete the task.’’
At that time, now, they invited the Young Man, and now they, the
Elder Ones, said, ‘‘ Now behold this, thence it has come, through cus-
tomary sanctions, that we have agreed together to invite thee; and
the reason is, that now we have failed to expand the outline of the
matter beyond the place where thou didst close thy expressed ideas.
So then, we now return all that which thou hadst given us. So then,
we give back to thee the whole matter. Now, we give it up to thee.
Now, then, thou wilt arrange what shall be done in what thou sayest
that there must be divers clans in existence. Now, then, we give up
the executive power. Now, then, thou wilt fully complete the matter
henceforward.”’ At that time, the Young Man said, “‘It is true, verily,
that it is necessary that this matter should be completed. Indeed,
verily, it is a fact that there is something lacking when day after day
there exists an unadjusted thing, also night after night there exists an
unadjusted matter, we are separating one from another, continually,
here upon the earth. And that, then, is the cause that the imperfect
thing shall be attended to. It is true, then, that in the manner in
which you have fixed it, it shall come to pass. So then, to-morrow,
when the sun will be in mid-sky, then, the entire body of people must
assemble themselves together; at that time I shall attempt to have it
so come to pass that I shall arrange matters, so that there shall be in
existence divers clans. So then, it will come to pass that the part
made up of the persons of the female sex will be the principal one
in this matter. Verily, there is the place that controls in the birth of
new human beings here upon the earth. So then, she who is the Eldest
598 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
One in each several uterine family (ohwachira) shall lead hither her
entire uterine family (ohwachira). Indeed, it shall be, that we will
depart hence when the people will be assembled, we will go thither to
the place where flows along a stream of water, and there, in that place,
we shall separate the body of people. So then, on the next day
thereafter, the sun will not yet have risen, when it shall thus come to
pass that all that still remains incomplete shall be accomplished.”
At that time, now, they, the Elder Ones, said, ‘That, seemingly
also, shall come to pass.”? At that time, now, they proclaimed this
matter. Now, all the inhabitants were notified of what was to come
to pass. All marveled at the thing which was to come to pass.
At that time, then, they all began to make their preparations,
the elder women, and also the children, all were ready when the
next day came, then all the people, without an exception, who dwelt
there, assembled themselves. When the sun reached mid-sky, at
that time, then, the Young Man said, “Now, verily, you have all
assembled yourselves; now the time for it has arrived, what was
unanimously decided, that with customary sanctions you charged
me with the whole matter. So then, I shall now take my stand in
front. We shall now depart, and you must follow me, and we will
go as far as the place where the river presents itself.”’
At that time, now, they departed. Now, along at the front the
Young Man went, the large body of people following him along,
moving along grouped in their uterine families (ohwachira). So
then, when it became evening, they arrived at the place where the
river flowed along; the large body of people stood there alongside
the river. They did not know what thing, it might be, they would
have to do to cross the river. There was nowhere a floating log
whereon they might cross the river. Now, at that time, they had
their eyes fixed on the Young Man there as he descended the bank.
There he went, just at the water’s edge stood a very tall tree, whereon,
then, there was looped a vine of the grape. At that time, now, the
Young Man placed his hands thereon and said, ‘‘ Now, the time has
arrived, this evening. Thou, verily, De‘ha陓hiyawa’’kho”, has
chosen to divide this body of people.” At that time, now, he pulled on
the vine of the grape and threw it to the opposite side of the river
where it became fixed. At that time, now, he said, ‘Now, we will
cross the stream. Now, verily, the time has arrived in which we
shall divide the body of the people. So then, we will camp here.
So then, when the day will begin to dawn to be daylight for us, all
must watch. So then, thus it shall come to pass; just before the
daylight will have fully dawned, she, the most elderly one in each
uterine family (ohwachira) shall then go to fetch fresh water to be
used when she will prepare food; so then when she dips up the water
she must notice carefully what kind of thing she will see, so then,
HEWITT) MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 599
she must by no means forget it. I, then, will come hither early in
the morning.”’ At that time, now, he said, ‘‘Now, then, you must
follow me when we shall cross the stream.”’
At that time, now, they started; he went thither to the place
where floated across the stream the vine of the grape, so then, the
body of people followed him as they started crossing the stream.
So then, in just one way they kept crossing the stream one by one,
as fast as possible. Now, then, the sun went down, while there were
still many who were waiting their turn to cross the river. Suddenly,
they two went together, when the sun set then the floating vine of the
grape upon which they were crossing became detached. So then,
some were still traveling along in crossing the stream, when the
vine turned off a little and floating downstream to the opposite side
of the river, became attached there; now all those who were left
could do nothing, they had not yet crossed the stream. At that time,
now, they prepared camps for themselves on both sides of the stream;
they kindled fires. The camps extended quite a distance along either
shore of the river. Now, the body of people marveled exceedingly
at what had come to pass. Now at that time they, the Elder Ones,
assembled when it became dark, and now they said, “‘Now, verily,
we must watch the Young Man. What, then, it may be, he will
do when the morrow comes on us. It seems, verily, that a mar-
velous matter has come to pass in what we have seen. Now, to-day,
it is true, he divided the body of people; he succeeded now in that
the people have camps on both sides of the river.”’
At that time, now, they severally went to sleep; but they, the
Eldest Ones, watched and they said, ‘‘By all means, we must see
what manner of thing he will do.”” Now they watched him.
So then, when day dawned, then, verily, all severally arose. And
at once they made themselves ready. Now, she, the Eldest in each
several uterine family (ohwachira), being ready, watched for the day-
light to become full. So then, when it became daylight, all hastened
to fetch water from the flowing stream. So then, the Young Man now
started, and next, the Eldest Ones followed him. Moreover, it
came to pass that, as the place where the several camps ended,
there abode the most Ancient One, and there he began. He entered
the nearest lodge and then he said, ‘‘I am thankful that the day has
dawned in peace.” At that time then she, the Eldest, replied, saying,
“Now, verily, I think it is true. I am thankful’? At that time he
said, ‘‘Now, moreover, I will ask thee what kind of thing hast thou
seen since thou arose? What kind of thing, also, didst thou see that
was marvelous?’ At that time, she said, ‘‘That, verily, has come to
pass since I arose. I went to dip water at the river where the water
flows along. Moreover, when I dipped the water then I saw there
just near by a deer standing. At that time I thence departed. I
600 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
returned home and then I prepared food, which my children will eat
and also my grandchildren.”
At that time he said, ‘‘That, verily, which thou didst see is a game
animal. He who completed our nature has finished its body, and,
moreover, that is your kind of clan. And people will continue to
call thee by the name, Deer clan. Wherein thou didst dip the water
out of the flowing stream, verily, the water flows in a certain
direction; thus, moreover, will it come to pass soon when the sun
departs and arises that it will go in a certain direction; thus, too, will
it come to pass in your ohwachira that they will esteem it so much
that they will continue to say, the Deer is our kind of clan.”’ At that
time, he went elsewhere.
He arrived at the place where another Ancient, a woman, abode.
Now again he said, “‘I am thankful that the day has come upon us
in peace,” Then she said, “Verily, | am truly thankful, indeed.”’
At that time he said, ‘‘What manner of thing hast thou done since
thou arose? What kind of thing, also, didst thou see that was mar-
velous?””? Then she said, “I went to dip water from the flowing
stream; and, moreover, when I dipped up the water I was surprised
that there near by me stood a bear. That, moreover, I then departed
thence, and I returned and then prepared food that we, my children
and also my grandchildren, should eat.’’ At that time he said, “It
is true, verily, that it came to pass that indeed thou didst see a game
animal. And that, too, was one whose body He who finished our
natures formed. Moreover, then, your kind of clan is the Bear; and
that will be what people will be in the habit of calling thy clan and thy
ohwachira in the future. And thy grandchildren will continue to say,
the Bear is our kind of clan. And, moreover, you will be brothers
and sisters to that ohwachira I just passed by whose kind of clan is
the Deer.”
Now at that time he went elsewhere. He arrived at the place
where another Ancient, a woman, abode. And now again he said,
am thankful that the day has come upon us in peace.”’ At that time
she replied, saying, “Verily, I am truly thankful, indeed.” At that
time he said, ‘‘What manner of thing hast thou done since thou arose?
What kind of marvelous thing also didst thou see?”? Then she said,
“T went to dip water from the flowing stream. Moreover, when I
dipped up the water I was surprised that along the sand hard by ran
a Sandpiper.”’ At that time he said, ‘‘That, verily, which thou didst
see is a small game animal, and that thy kind of clan is the Sandpiper.
And, moreover, so thou personally wilt continue to be called, and
the posterity of thy ohwachira, and thy grandchildren too, and you
and they will continue to say, ‘the Sandpiper is our kind of clan.’
And, moreover, you will be brothers and sisters to the ohwachira I
have just passed, whose kinds of clans respectively are the Deer and
the Bear.”
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 601
At that tyme he went elsewhere. He now arrived at the place
where another Ancient, a woman, abode, and he said, “I am thankful
that the day has come upon us in peace.”’ At that time she replied,
“Verily, I am thankful, indeed.’”’ Then he said, “What manner of
thing hast thou done since thou arose? What kind of marvelous
thing didst thou also see?’”’ She said, ‘I went to dip water from the
flowing stream, and when I dipped up the water I saw an eel going
along in the depths of the water.’’ Then he said, ‘‘Then thou art
of the Eel kind of clan. And that is what thy children and also thy
grandchildren shall continue to say, ‘We are of the Hel kind of clan.’
And, moreover, you will be brothers and sisters to the ohwachira
which I have just passed, the first being the Deer kind of clan, the
second ohwachira the Bear clan, and the third the Sandpiper kind of
clan. Moreover, that is the size of your Sisterhood or Brotherhood
of clans; you consist of these four. But there is still left one thing,
moreover, that matters not, for by and by it will be completed, and
there on the other side of the river. Indeed, now the time has
arrived which we still have, in which the whole matter will be com-
pleted before the sun rises. Moreover, it is now time that I should
recross the stream, because, indeed, on the other side of the river
there are kindled fires and there are ohwachira. That matter is still
necessary for me to arrange, into what units their fires shall severally
be grouped.”
At that time he departed, and they, the Ancient Ones, followed
him. They arrived at the shore of the river, and he again pulled up
the grapevine. And he again cast it and it went across the river.
At that time he went thither across and they followed him; all crossed
the river and he arrived at the place where the other people had their
camps. Then he said, ‘‘I am glad that the dawn has come upon us
in peace.’’ And she, the Most Ancient One, said, ‘‘Verily, I am, it
seems that I am truly thankful.’ At that time he said, ‘“‘ What man-
ner of thing hast thou done since thou arose? And what kind of
wonderful thing hast thou seen?’”’ Then she said, ‘“‘I went to dip
water from the flowing stream. And, moreover, when I dipped up
the water I turned around and there I saw a wolf running along
there.” He replied, “Verily, thou personally art, and thy offspring
are of the Wolf kind of clan. That, moreover, will be what thou
wilt be called by thy children in the future, as thy ohwachira con-
tinues to exist, and they and thy grandchildren also will continue to
say, ‘We are of the Wolf kind of clan.’ ”
Now at that time he went elsewhere. Now he arrived at the place
where another Ancient One, » woman, abode, and he said, “I am
thankful that the day has come upon us in peace.”” Now she replied,
“Indeed, it is truly so; I am thankful.’’ He now said, ‘‘ What man-
ner of thing hast thou done since thou arose? What marvelous
19078°—28——38
602 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
thing also hast thou seen?’ She said, “‘That, verily, Iswent to dip
water from the flowing stream. When I dipped up the water I saw
a beaver going along near by.”’ At that time he said, ‘‘Thou, verily,
art of the Beaver kind of clan. And thus, moreover, thou shalt be
called in the future, in thy ohwachira as it continues to exist and also
thy grandchildren will continue to say, ‘We are of the Beaver kind
of clan.’ ”
Now at that time he went elsewhere to another ohwachira. Hay-
ing arrived there he said to the Ancient One of the ohwachira, ‘‘ What
manner of thing hast thou done since thou arose? What marvelous
thing hast thou seen?’ She replied, “Verily, I went to dip water
from the flowing stream. Moreover, when I dipped up the water I
was surprised to see the great turtle going along there.’”’ He now
said, “Thou, personally, art of the Great Turtle kind of clan. Thus,
verily, thou shalt be called in the future, in thy ohwachira as it con-
tinues to exist, and thy grandchildren also will continue to say, ‘We
are of the Great Turtle kind of clan.’ And, moreover, you are Sister
clans in your series.’’
Then he went elsewhere. He arrived where another ohwachira
was and he said to the Ancient, the eldest woman of it, “‘IT am thank-
ful that the day has come upon us in peace.’’ Now the Most Ancient
One said, ‘Indeed, verily, it is so, and I am thankful for it.” He
replied, “‘ What manner of thing hast thou done since thou hast arisen,
and what wonderful thing hast thou seen?” She said, ‘‘That, verily,
I have been out to dip water from the flowing stream. Moreover,
when I dipped up the water from the stream I was surprised that
there he, the small bear, walked along in the mud, and the people are
in the habit of calling him cub bear.’”’? At that time he said, ‘ Now
it has gone amiss. And that, verily, is the reason that it is thus come
to pass, that now the sun has arisen and the matter is still unfinished.
That, verily, has come to pass that now there are two Ancient Ones
who have seen a bear. And that on the other side of the river there
is an ohwachira, moreover, who is of the Bear kind of clan. Now
here on this side of the river there is a Cub Bear kind of clan,
and the only odds is that this is small in size; thus, moreover, it shall
continue to be for a while, then afterwards it may be reconsidered.
I believe it right that you two make only one group, whichever
clan will cross over the fire to the opposite Sisterhood. Moreover,
thou art of the Small Bear kind of clan; and that thou shalt continue
to be called in the future, as thy ohwachira continues to exist; and
also thy grandchildren will continue to say, ‘We are of the Cub Bear
kind of clan.’ ”
At that time he said, “‘Now this is what I have been able to do.
Moreover, you and the ohwachira I have passed are Brothers and
Sisters. Verily, the first ohwachira is composed of those of the Wolf
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 603
kind of clan. And the second ohwachira is made up of the Beaver kind
of clan. And the ohwachira that is on this side (of them) are those
of the Turtle kind of clan. Now you three together and thou, have
your fires next to each other, and this one is of the Small Bear,
the Cub Bear kind of clan. And that, moreover, is the number of
clans on your side of the fire, who are Brothers and Sisters in series,
and that, then, is the size of your Sisterhood. And you who are on
this side of the river, and they who are on the other side, will have
the Council Fire between you, because you two have had the river
between you; moreover, you two will greet one another by the kin-
ship term, ‘We are Cousins.’ And it matters not from which side
of the Council Fire one may speak, one shall verily say, ‘Our Cousins. ’
Moreover, that custom shall continue to be thus, that you two shall
have only an equal right to it, and you shall be equally responsible
for its observances, and that verily shall be the course of procedure
in the future.”’
Now at that time he said, “Verily, you Ancient Ones are now
charged with this matter. Now cause the entire body of the peoples
to assemble. And now that course of procedure will take place,
that you two who now have the river between you, you Two Cousins,
shall have the Council Fire between you. TI still have a matter of a
few words to impart to you. And it is needful that you both who
have the Council Fire between you should together hear it.”
Now at that time they, the Ancient Ones, selected a place where
the entire body of the peoples should assemble. Now they who were
on the other side of the river started thence, and every one crossed
th« river, also all the children. Now all the people assembled them-
selves at the chosen place, and at once the Ancient Ones followed the
course of procedure of grouping the people in accordance with the
relationship of the clans, placing those of a common Sisterhood on one
side of the designated Council Fire. All the Ancient Ones and also
the children were thus grouped. At that time the Ancient Ones
said, ‘‘ Now we have completed all our preparations. Now, moreover,
the matter remains with you in that you have said, ‘I have still a
matter.’ Now, moreover, thou shouldst tell what kind of thing still
remains to you.”’
At that time the Young Man stood up and said, “Moreover, the
first thing for you to do will be for you to consider what shall be done
in that there has been named two Bear kinds of clans, one on the
other side of the Council Fire and one also on this side of the Council
Fire. And, moreover, you shall declare the decision, verily, as to
which of the two clans must cross over the Council Fire.”
At that time they considered the matter in council, and finally
they said, ‘‘Verily, it is in this matter that a Bear ohwachira exists.
Customarily the Ancient One (the Mother) continually travels
604 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
about from place to place, and that, moreover, the babies (cubs)
in so far as they are concerned continually remain at home. And,
moreover, it should result in good that she, the Ancient One, shall
recross the Council Fire. And, moreover, that on one certain side
of the Council Fire there shall the ohwachira of the Bear kind of
clans abide.’’ At that side then he said, “‘ You did rightly in what
you have done. Now, moreover, in the next place do you cause
that one to recross the Council Fire.’’ At that time they caused
that ohwachira of the Bear kind of clan to recross the Council Fire.
Now at that time they, the Ancient Ones, said, ‘‘Now, we have
completed the matter. What thing, moreover, shall come to pass
with regard to a single ohwachira on the other side of the river,
whom you failed to visit?’’ Now at that time the Young Man
said, “‘Go to, then; let her, the Ancient One, come hither.”” Now
at that time she came there and she took her stand beside him.
Now he said, ‘Is it thou who standest here whose person I forgot,
and I did not visit the place where thy ohwachira is?” Now she
said, ‘Verily, it is I. We, too, humbly were expecting thee to
arrive there, and we became anxious in our minds.”’ Now he said,
“What manner of thing didst thou do when thou didst arise when it
became day?”’ Now she said, ‘That, verily, when it became light
I went to dip water from the flowing stream. When I dipped up the
water then I returned thence. And when I was coming along near
by the place where we have our fire kindled, then there, sitting on the
top of a piece of timber whereon was fixed a case, there I saw a sharp-
shinned hawk.”’ Now he said, “‘Then, verily, thou art of the Sharp-
shinned Hawk kind of clan; moreover, that will be what people will
call thee and thy clan in the future, as thy ohwachira continues to
exist, and also thy grandchildren will continue to say, ‘We are of the
Sharp-shinned Hawk kind of clan.’ Now, then, the matter is com-
pleted. Moreover, it is now necessary that you all together give
attention to all things. Do you not forget what things you will
hear that I will speak. Indeed, you, Ancient Ones, are equally
charged with this matter; also it is needful that your children must
learn about the entire matter. Moreover, I will begin with you who
have come from the other side of the river.
“Tn the first place, then, you who are of the Deer kind of clan, do
you never forget that clanship shall follow the ohwachira, and that
the women in their persons shall be rulers thereof. And the reason
that it shall thus come to pass is, indeed, that there in that place, in
the persons of the women, shall continue to be born (shall form
themselves continually) the human beings who are going to pause
a while here upon earth, And, moreover, you must give names to
all, and that all members of your ohwachira shall continue to have
names.
Hewitt] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 605
““Now you of the Sandpiper kind of clan. Thus, too, shall you
do everything therein; the women, through their persons, shall
control, shall be the chief rulers therein; and in the next place all
must have names.
“Now you who are of the Eel kind of clan. Thus, too, you shall
do; make the women in their persons to be the chief persons in your
clan. And in the next place you must give all persons names, so
that all may continue to acquire names.
“Now you who are of the Sharp-shinned Hawk kind of clan. Thus,
too, shall you do, making the women through their persons the
ruling persons (in the clan). In the next place you shall give names
to all, so that all may continue to have names.
““And then, moreover, you four clans shall be Sisters one to another;
that, moreover, is the size of your Sisterhood on your side of the
Council Fire.
“So now you who passed on this side of the river. You, more-
over, in the first place who are of the Wolf kind of clan. You, too,
moreover, shall make thus the women in their persons to be the
rulers (in your ohwachira); and, moreover, you shall give names to
all, so that all may continue to acquire names.
‘““Now you who are of the Beaver kind of clan. Thus, too, you
shall do; you shall make the women in their persons the chief persons
in your clan. In the next place you must give names to all, so that
all may continue to acquire names.
“Now you who are of the Great Turtle kind of clan. Thus, too,
you must do; you must make the women in their persons to be the
chief persons in your clan; also you shall give names to all, so that
all may continue to acquire names.
“Now you who are of the Bear kind of clan; thus, too, you shall
do; you must make the women in their persons to be the chief per-
sons in your clan; and you shall give names to all, so that all may
continue to acquire names.
« “Moreover, you yourselves, five clans in number, are a Sister-
hood on your side of the Council Fire. And, moreover, now you will
know how many clans there are on each side of the Council Fire.
Moreover, you shall greet one another by the kinship term, Our
Cousins. Moreover, you shall continue to say, ‘Our Cousins.’
Moreover, this custom shall begin here and will go forward in the
direction in which your ohwachira continue to exist. And all the
matters with which you are charged shall follow the course in accord-
ance with your having the Council Fire between you two.
“In the first place is what De‘haé“hyaw&’’kho™” has done in
establishing the Four Ceremonies; and next to this the interpolated
ceremonies; the next pertain to the ending of our days here on this
earth. Moreover, now this is all that I am able to do. Moreover, the
606 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
matter which we, you and J, have arranged is so durable that it will
last as long as our ohwachira shall continue to exist; and in the next
place, so long will it last as the earth shall endure; next it will last
so long as the grasses grow; and also so Jong as the shrubs and also
the trees shall continue to grow, and also so long as the ohwachira of
the animals endure; and also so long as the streams of water shall
continue to move their waters, also so long as the springs of water
flow, alsoso long as the diurnal Orb of Light (the Sun) takes his jour-
neys, and also the nocturnal Orb of Light continues to follow its
course; also so long as the Stars shall be fixed on the sky, also so long
as the Thunderers will be in the habit of coming from the west; and
also so long as the Winds will move the air about upon the earth.
‘““Now, then, I myself do place the whole matter before your two
bodies, you Cousins. That, then, is what I have been able to do.
Now, I have finished arranging your affairs.”
Now at that time they, the Ancient Ones, considered all the mat-
ters which the Young Man had done. Even the several manners in
which he did these marvelous things from the time that he began
doing them, from the time when he proposed these ideas as to what
should be done; also the manner in which he did classify the several
matters, and finally the manner in which he combined all in an organic
whole, when he said, ‘“‘Now I have completed all things.’”’ Then,
they, the Ancient Ones, said, “Verily, we shall not, presumably, see
still another person who will be able to do the things which he has
done for us. Thereby shall our flesh continue to live, also our
minds. And thereby also shall the several minds of our several
ohwachira be governed in action in the future, as long as our ohwa-
chira continue to exist. And then he has now delivered back to us
the plenary power which we had given him. Now, verily, we Cousins,
who have between us the Council Fire, hear it equally. Now,
verily, he has addressed us, saying, ‘Now, the entire matter I lay
within the body of your people. Now, I have finished it. That is
as much as I have been able to do.’ Thus, verily, we believe, is what
he did. Now, then, our Cousins, you shall learn what bas taken
place in the minds of us, on our part, who constitute our Sisterhood,
and with one voice we say, ‘That we do thank the Young Man for
the most important work that he has done for us.’”’
Now at that time they who were on the other side of the Council
Tire considered the matter and confirmed the proposition, and then
they replied, saying, “‘We on our side, with the united voice of our
entire Sisterhood of clans, think with combined interests, that it is
truly a good act that we should thank him. Then, moreover, in the
next place, we must at once complete this matter. And perhaps it
would be good that what we will continue to say when we speak of this
Young Man should be recognizable. And so we who are of the
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 607
Wolf clan, and also our Sister clans in series, say that in the first place
we will call him by the name of Ho’nigo™“heowa’né™. And the reason
that we will continue to say this is that, verily, no one else was able to
do those things which he has done for us. And that our grandchildren
will keep them in reverence. And, moreover, we shall confirm the
matter by the Ceremony of Adonwa (Chanting); and the next thing to
do is that we shall shout thrice and we will greet him repeatedly with
thanksgivings for completing the work that will enable us to think
and to live in peace for the future, the end of which we do not presum-
ably know. ”
Now at that time all confirmed these propositions, and then they
caused the Young Man to stand in the midst of the assembly. Now at
that time the Eldest Man of the Wolf kind of clan stood up and said,
“This Young Man standing here has completed the entire system of
rules which will govern the assembly of people present here. And,
moreover, should the mind of anyone, no matter who it may be, that
will resolve to speak of him, that person shall customarily call him
Ho’nigo™heowa’né™, His-Mind-is-Great. Moreover, it is not a cer-
tain thing that he shall continue traveling about for a long time on the
earth; and it may be that it will thus come to pass that some kind of
subject will indicate (require) him, it may be necessarily, perhaps,
then one, verily, shall say at once, ‘Now let His-Mind-is-Great learn
about this thing here.’ Thus one shall do. Now, then, all keep in
remembrance His-Mind-is-Great, I said.’
Now at that time he, the Wolf, said, ‘‘Now, then, I confirm what
matters His-Mind-is-Great has done for us. Now, then, I will chant.”’
Now at that time he sang, and now the entire body of people uttered
the vocal accompaniment, “hiu, hiu.” And when he had finished
the song the most aged man of the Deer kind of clan again arose and
said, ‘‘ Now, since in his place my Cousin has confirmed the matter,
now then I, too, will confirm the proposition. And then I will greet with
repeated thanksgivings His-Mind-is-Great (Ho’nigo™“heowa’né™) for
what he has done for us. And also I will greet him with repeated
thanksgivings whose power is great and who completed our natures,
Shongwadeyennuk’da. And presumably it is he, verily, who gave the
mind and also the power. And now we, all of us, have obtained
peace and health. Now then I will confirm the proposition, and I
will chant the Adonwa.” Now at that time he sang, and the entire
body of people uttered the vocal accompaniment “hiu, hiu,” and
also the women rhythmically clapped theirhands. He finished the song
and then he said, ‘‘Now, then, let all stand up, and that act means
that all confirm the matter; and also let all hold up the hands, and the
reason for this is that we shall thus do because there is the chief
place, the sky is where he who completed our natures, Shongwade-
yennuk’da, abides. And, moreover, when you and I stand up then
will we all shout thrice.”
608 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Now at that time the entire assembly of people, the Ancient Ones,
and also the children all stood up, and all also held their arms upward.
Now at that time the entire assembly of people, too, shouted; thrice
did they repeat it. Then they sat down again, and now he said,
“Now the whole matter is finished.”
Now at that time they again dispersed, and they again recrossed the
river. At that time Ho’nigo™heowa’né™, i. e., His-Mind-is-Great,
said, “‘Thus it shall continue to be in the future, that there shall
always be tribes of people on either side of the river.”’
NOTES TO IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY
Nortr 1.—Chief John Arthur Gibson believed firmly in the great Creative Beings of the myths of Iroquoian
Cosmology. Of these, one was the Creator of human life and the life of all good beings and animals, who is
sometimes called the Master of Life or the Maker of Life.
NOTE 2.—Since this was written the Canadian Government abrogated the old League Government by
chiefs on the Grand River Grant, Ontario, Canada, in the autumn of 1924, substituting therefor an elective
council, each member of which is elected by the suffrages of the adult male residents of the district in which
the candidate may live.
Note 3.—Orenda. The Iroquois name of the fictive force, principle, or magic power which was assumed
by the inchoate reasoning of primitive man to be inherent in every body and being of nature and in every
personified attribute, property, or activity, belonging to each of these and conceived to be the active cause
or force, or dynamic energy, involved in every operation or phenomenon of nature, in any manner affecting
or controlling the welfare of man. This hypothetie principle was conceived to be immaterial, occult,
impersonal, mysterious in mode of action, limited in function and efficiency, and not at all omnipotent,
local and not omnipresent, and ever embodied or immanent in some object, although it was believed that
it could be transferred, attracted, acquired, increased, suppressed, or enthralled by the orenda of occult
ritualistic formulas endowed with more potency. This postulation of a purely fictitious force or dynamic
energy must needs have been made by primitive man to explain the activities of life and nature, the latter
being conceived to be composed of living beings, for the concept of force or energy as an attribute or property
of matter had not yet been formed, hence the modern doctrine of the conservation of energy was unknown
to primitive thought. As all the bodies of the environment of primitive man were regarded by him as
endowed with life, mind, and volition, he inferred that his relations with these environing objects were
directly dependent on the caprice of these beings. So to obtain his needs man must gain the good will of
each one of a thousand controlling minds by prayer, sacrifice, some acceptable offering, or propitiatory act,
in order to influence the exercise in his behalf of the orenda or magic power which he believed was controlled
by the particular being invoked. Thus it came that the possession of orenda or magic power is the dis-
tinctive characteristic of all the gods, and these gods in earlier time were all the bodies and beings of nature
in any manner affecting the weal or woe of man. So primitive man interpreted the activities of nature
to be due to the struggle of one orenda against another, put forth by the beings or bodies of his environment,
the former possessing orenda and the latter life, mind, and orenda only by virtue of his own imputation of
these things to lifeless objects. In the stress of life, coming into contact or more or less close relation with
certain bodies of his environment, more frequently and in a more decided manner than with the other
environing bodies, and learning to feel from these relations that these bodies through ‘the exercise of their
orenda controlled the conditions of his welfare and in like manner shaped his ill fare,”” man gradually came
to regard these bodies as the masters, the arbiters, the gods, of the conditions of his environment, whose aid,
good will, and even existence were absolutely necessary to his well-being and to the preservation of his life.
In the cosmogonic legends, the sum of the operations of this hypothetic magie power constitutes the story
of the phenomena of nature and the biography of the gods, in all the planes of human culture. From the
least to the greatest, there are incomparable differences in strength, function, and scope of action among the
orendas, or magic powers, exercised by any group of such fictitious beings. Therefore it is not remarkable
to find in many legends that for specifie purposes man may sometimes possess weapons whose orenda is
superior to that possessed by some of the primal beings of his cosmology. It is likewise found that the
number of purposes for which a given orenda may be efficient varies widely.
Consult Powell, introd. to Cushing’s Zuni Folk Tales, 1901; Hewitt in Am. Anthrop., Iv, 33-46, 1902.
Note 4.—See Note 3.
Nore 5.—Otkon. The common Iroquois descriptive epithet and name applied to any object or being
which performs its functions and exercises its assumed magic power or orenda (q. Vv.) in such manner as to
be not only inimical to human welfare, but hostile to and destructive of human life; it is the name in com-
mon use for all ferocious and monstrous beings, animals, and persons, especially such as are not normal in
size, power, and cunning, or such things in which there is marked incongruity between these properties of
beings. The term is often applied to fétishes and to similar things. As a qualifier it is equivalent to the
English mysterious, monstrous, devilish, or rather demoniac; but as a noun, or name, to monster, demon,
Hewitt] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 609
devil, goblin, wicch, wizard. The term has found a peculiar use in a translation of the Gospels by one Joseph
Onasakenrat into the Iroquois tongue (Montreal, 1880), where it is employed to translate Spirit and Holy
Spirit; this is done also in a Mohawk Catechism by the Abbé F. Piquet (Paris, 1926). In both it is made
the equivalent of the English “spirit,” and in both works Holy Spirit or Holy Ghost is rendered Rotkon,
“he, a human being, is an otkon,” i. e., “‘a demon, or spirit,” modified either by Roiatatokenti, ‘“‘his body is
holy,” or by Ronikonratokenti, ‘his mind is holy.’’ The initial o- in otkon is a pronominal affix, denotive
of number, person, and gender, and meaning here the singular number, third person, and zoic gender.
When the term is to be used with reference to persons or anthropic beings, the affix changes to ro-, ago-,
hovina-, or konna-, signifying, respectively, ‘‘he,” ‘‘one,” ‘‘they (masculine),’’ and additionally to every
one of these last definitions, the anthropic gender. So that Rotkon denotes ‘“‘he, a human being, is an
otkon,” i.e., a demon or spirit. In grammatic form the term otkon is an adjective or attributive; its correct
nominal form requires the suffix -tcera’, -tsera’, or -tcha’, according to dialect, denoting state of being; whence
otkontcera’, etc., usually written otkonsera’, is formed; by Missionary influence, the latter modified by the
attributive —ksé7 ‘‘ bad,” ‘‘evil,”’ ‘“‘ wicked,” ‘‘ugly,”’ is the common name for the Devil of Christian
belief. The following are some of the forms of this term found in the Jesuit Relations (Thwaites ed.); ocki,
okhi, oki, onkaqui (pl.), oqui, oski, otkis; and in Lafitau’s Mceurs des Sauvages Ameriquains, 1724, okki and
otkon occur. Preceded by an expression denoting ‘‘ verily” the term otkon is used as an expletive, or, per-
haps, mild curse.
Nore 6.—I. e., He who has a Standing Tree, so named from the fact that the Great Tree whose flowers
supplied the light of that world stood in his dooryard.
Norte 7.—Literally, He who causes the Earth to quake, or briefly, He the Earthquake.
Note 8.—He accuses the daughter of leading a wayward life in the absence of her mother.
Nore 9.—This was one of his disguises.
Norte 10.—This consisted in an attempt by those challenged to divine the dream of the challenger with
its interpretation. It was understood that failure to achieve this task brought severe penalties, even
the death of the challenged.
Norte 11.—This referred to the Meteor Man Being, sometimes called the Fire Dragon.
Norte 12.—This refers to the Bittern Man Being, one of the creative First People.
Nore 13.—These were the Man Beings of the upper world who were cast out ahead of this Woman Man
Being. Man Being must be taken to mean one of the First People who were mythic or poetic human
beings.
Norte 14.—Literally, He who keeps looking at the sky, referring to a characteristic pose of the Bittern.
Note 15.—This was the Turtle Man Being.
Nove 16.—By “immune” is meant the power inherent in the person to resist and disregard all attacks
by sorcery or by other occult means.
Norte 17.—This is a peculiar deprecative form of the pronoun.
Nortr¥ 18.—This flint-pointed arrow typifies the piercing power and effect of the extreme cold of winter.
Norte 19.—Consult the article Tawiskaron in the Handbook of American Indians, Bull. 30, Bur. Amer.
Ethn., for a lexical demonstration of this statement.
Note 20.—The use of the word ‘“‘apple’’ does not necessarily detract from the value of the stery, for
the account was dealing with the best known fruits and berries; fine, large fruit would render the native
term as well.
NOTE 21.—See Note 20.
Nove 22.—This, of course, refers to the hibernation of the animals, etc., in the time of winter, which
naturally hibernate to avoid coming under the sway of the Winter God.
Norte 23.—This use of the term “‘bodies”’ is an idiomatic expression.
Nore 24.—I. e., He who holds the Earth dually (by the two hands).
Nore 25.—This is merely a figure of irony.
Norte 26.—This is done in order to show his grandmother the proper method of dressing each different
kind of game animal.
Note 27.—This refers to the apparent standstill of the Sun at high noon. This is sometimes called his
resting place.
Nore 28.—This denotes the sky world whence came all things on this earth through change and meta-
morphosis. The race of the First People—the Ancients of Days—were transformed into the objects anc
phenomena of this earth.
Note 29.—The name for the First People in Iroquoian speech is their only word signifying human being.
So that in ordinary usage it has two very different meanings: One designating an ordinary human being,
and the other one of the poetic beings of primal time—one of the First People.
Norte 30.—This name literally means He who causes the Earth to quake. He was therefore a personi-
fication of the Earthquake.
Norte 31.—This “ bridge”’ or float was the production of O‘ha‘ii’. But hesought to blame it on the Dark-
ness of Night. The power to freeze over the surface of water was one of the Winter God’s weapons. Hence
the great anxiety shown by O‘ha’d’ when the Sun caused the air to be hot, as appears in the fourth para-
graph following this one. Portions of this ‘‘bridge”’ or float appear in literature as ‘“‘stone’’ canoes, and
also as flint canoes. 3
NOTE 32.—This great poetic bet or gamble is faithfully commemorated in the great Havrest Festival as
well as in the New Year Ceremony of the various Iroquoian tribes. It is a memorial celebrating the
victory of the Life God in his great struggle to keep control of the food supply of the earth.
610 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
Norte 33.—This application of the term ‘‘infantile’’ or ‘‘young’’ to the Earth is merely to show imma-
turity in methods of functioning.
Norte 34.—A common name for a white person signifies literally ‘‘ax-maker,’’ but of course without im-
plying that the person is actually an ‘‘ax-maker.’’ The name was first applied to a French person, for the
French were the first to introduce hatchets among the Iroquoian tribes. Hence, any one who resembles a
French person in race and color.
Norte 35.—This is a vivid and most striking picture of the mental struggle between the two mighty con-
testants: the Master of Life on the one hand and the Inert Earth on the other.
NOTE 36.—See Note 33.
Norte 37.—The red willow is still a shrub of great use among the Iroquoian tribes for medical purposes.
Norte 38.—This was his mother’s head which his brother, O‘ha’i’, had cut off, and which he and his
grandmother sought to purloin for their own uses.
Norte 39.—This Man Being was the Master of the Winds (or the Moving Air), and so he could say that
he had done creative work on the earth as evidenced in the power of the wind to disturb the surface of the
earth by hurricanes, whirlwinds, etc.
Norte 40.—See Note 3.
Note 41.—This refers to the making and the use of likenesses of this Man Being and his kind by the
native medical fraternity in their practices. These likenesses are commonly called masks by writers, al-
though it is plain that masking (concealment) is not in any sense the purpose of these things.
Nore 42.—These likenesses are usually only of the head and face, although the entire body should be rep-
resented, for these beings are all hunchbacks. See Note 41.
Note 43.—See Note 33.
Norte 44.—It may be conjectured that this idea of the head being fastened to a tree top was suggested by
the fact that in the southing of the Sun in winter it is made to appear much among the treetops in the
morning and evening.
Norte 45.—I. e., Attached Flower or Flower in Bloom.
Norte 46.—That is, the dawn of a new life in her conception.
Note 47.—He referred to the Moon into which he had transformed his mother.
Norte 48.—Referring to the seeming connection between certain functions of the woman’s body and the
phases of the moon.
Norte 49.—A uterine family or ohwachira is composed of the descendants of a woman, including the
offspring of her daughters but not of her sons.
Norte 50.—O‘ha‘ti’ of Flint wishes the Beings he has created to destroy those created by the Master of
Life.
Note 51.—I. e., De*hado"hwéndjyén’do='s= he causes the earth to quake.
Norte 52.—This is seemingly a reference to the sounds and distrubances accompanying the breaking up
of winter.
Norte 53.—I. e., De‘hao»‘hwéndjyawa’k’ho»’ =he holds the earth dually (by his two hands).
Note 4.—I. e., T‘héndé*hawit ha’ = He who brings the day with him.
Note 55.—I. e., O‘hnio’da’.
NoTE 56.—See Note 54.
Note 57.—This statement rests on the belief that certain interior parts of the earth are used as a habitat
by many nondescript and harmful beings which are kept there through fear of the Thunderers who are
charged with the protection of mankind from these vicious creatures by killing them when they emerge
from their lairs.
Nove 58.—I. e., the fresh flesh of game animals must be provided as a form of sacrifice.
Norte 59.—This is a figurative expression referring to the fact that his father, the Great Turtle, was of
this earth, i. e., of the second order of things. So that earthly men are therefore his father’s clansmen.
Norte 60.—Modern usage is satisfied with only one dog. Ancient custom required two, one male and
one female.
Note 61.—In this ritual the Master of Life or Life God chants his Death Song, bemoaning the imminent
death of all living things (at the beginning of winter) as expressions of his own life.
Nore 62.—I. e., the fast of the catamenial period and the use of special utensils and means of caring for
the patient.
Nore 63.—This expresses the belief that there exists a mystic community of function between child-
bearing women and fruit-bearing trees and plants.
Note 64.—The general Iroquoian word rendered into English by the word ‘‘medicine” is the term
“onno=’kwi’t.’’ An analysis of the word shows the native theory as to the source of one class of mental
and physical ailments. Diseases are roughly grouped in three broad catagories: (1) those which are due
to natural causes and which therefore may be cured by simple natural means; (2) those which are psychic,
having their inception in the vengefulness of the guardian spirit of the patient, when it is chagrined and
provoked to rebel against the patient when he fails to supply the soul with the object or objects the guardian
spirit has revealed to him by dream or vision as needed for the welfare of his mind and hody; these ailments
may be cured by simply supplying the things suggested by the guardian spirit; and (3) those which are
artificial or caused by the occult arts of sorcery or witchcraft working through spells and charms, and
which must be cured by the removal from the mind and body of these causes of disease through other and
more powerful sorcerers. In archaic use the name for medicine is also the name of the mind or soul. It
HEWITT] MYTH OF THE EARTH-GRASPER 611
is derived from a verb-stem meaning to beg, to crave; as a noun it is the agent of the begging, craving, as
well as the object of the begging, craving. The agent of the begging, etc., is the soul, and the cause of the
craving, ete., is the thing desired by the guardian spirit for the welfare of the body and mind.
Norte 65.—I. e., The Great Harvest Festival.
Norte 66.—Because the current of life flows westward, so to receive life she must face this current of life.
This is a fine touch of mystic symbolism.
Note 67.—This suggestion deals with communal agriculture and gardening.
Note 68.—See Note 32.
Nore 69.—That is, a loss by the death of a person.
ONONDAGA TEXT AND INTERLINEAR TRANSLATION
Ne’t‘ho‘ nofiwe’ néfigé™ha’ hodigwé™ha’ tea’ ni‘hadi‘hwadjia’
There place (where) this, these they are a group wherein so their ohwachira (is)
(as) arge
niie’ ne’t‘ho‘ niio‘t ne’ diiotgont ni‘hefnadi‘ha‘ dé’se’ hiid‘ songa’
that thus soitis that continually, so they (are) in small and not anyone
always, number
de’hodiié™” ne’ a‘ho’s‘hasdé™s‘haiénidak, diotgont di’ ne’t‘ho‘
they have that he should possess occult potency, always, con- moreover thus
tinually
niio‘t ne’ aiénd’ wa’honnidé™t‘he’. Na gai‘honnia‘ha’ oné™
so it is that it wouldseem they are stricken with That it causes the matter now
poverty.
wivhei’ 6 gade’niéndé™ ne’t‘ho’ négied’? tea’ uofdo"k gé"s
he resolved I will attempt thus so I will doit wherein one says OR ate
arily
dién‘ha’ewad’ deienoido” go’s‘hasdé™s‘haié” dé™se’ hid‘ sté™
if (so it be) one (is) down-warded one possesses occult potency and not anything
de’agonowé"k; agwis g@"s godia’datgo™.
one ever fails to do; indeed, customarily one’s body (is) otkon.
Ne’ hao™hwa’i‘ De‘haé™hiondie‘so™k (T‘haé™hiondie‘so™k),
That (it is) he himself (it is) He Tosses Skies About
? >)
hokstén’i‘ tea’ ni‘hadi‘hwadjia’ naie’ ne’ degeni‘ — hnino’sé"
he, the ADeient wherein so their ohwachira (is) that (it that two (in num- he uncle to them
ne (as) large is) ber) two;
s‘haid’dada‘ ne’ de‘hniksi’a‘ hénhewe‘, tcieia’daidaS ne’ na’
he, one person that they, two children he, a human (is), she, one person that ue
(that)
agongwe'.
she, a human (is).
Nadie’ ne’ ne’t‘ho’ nwa’awé"™ha’ tea’ héfigwe‘ ne’ hokstén’a'
That (itis) that thus so it happened wherein he, a human that he, the Ancient
(as) (is) One
wi’hé™hén’, ‘“Ndie’ hiid’ tea’ niio‘t tea’ oil‘hwadadie’ nadie’ di’
he said, “That (it is) verily as so it is as it isa custom (itisa that more-
(wherein) (wherein) standing usage) (itis) over
néngé™ de‘sniksa’a‘, i’ gnino’’sé" naie’ di’ wa’gni‘hwis’a‘s,
this (it is) ye, two, children, I Lyour two uncle that (it more- I decree the matter to
(am) is) over you both
naie’ néngé™ha’ é@®eniid’da‘se‘da’ tea’ né"iofnis‘he’ néngé™
that (it this (it is) I will conceal the bodies (wherein) — so it will be long this (it is)
is) of you both as (in time)
dé™sniksa’aks. Hid’ hwéndo™ t‘hayetchiigé™ ne’ ongwe‘ tea’
ye both will be chil- Not ever (when) oneshould see youtwo that a seer (where-
dren. in) as
nigé™* é"teyadodiagd’, t‘ho‘ge’ ha‘sd’ oné™ &é"tciadawénnie’
So it is far ye two will grow to at that (time) just then, now ye two will mingle
maturity, only then,
ongwe‘ne‘.”’
among humans.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné"* wa’s‘hagodiia’da‘se‘da’, i‘hado"k ne’ hokstén’a’,
At that (time) now he concealed their bodies, he said that he, the Ancient
ne,
“Naye’ ne’ gand’do™gwi‘ ne’ deyenoido™ tea’ nofiwef wa’gyatga’k.
“That (it that one designates it by that one is down-ward- where- place I leave you two.
is) it ed in (where)
612
aaa
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 613
Naye’ gén’da’ é"sniyéidadk ne’ ga’nigo™hiio’, hua‘ t‘haes-
That (itis) it means ye two will have that (it) good minds, not ye two
nii‘hwak ne’ wa‘hetké™’. Nadie’ di’ tea’ né"iawé™ha’ tea’ gon‘he’
be guilty that it (is) evil. That more- as so it will happen where- Iam alive
over (where- in (as)
in)
nv’a‘’. HiidS t‘hofsedwadatgé™; nadie’ diioi‘hwa’ ne’t‘ho’ né"ya-
1 Not again we will see one another; _—_ that it (is) reason thus so it
wée™ha’, naie’ se’ odei‘hwade’ ne’ deyo’nigofi‘hat ne’ I’ge‘
will happen, that actually it is unsettled that it is inimical that to me
matter (1)
higwadi‘. Ndye’ di’ tea’ né"yawé™hd’ ne’ oné™ é"gi‘heya’,
side of it That (it is) more- as so it will happen that time (now) I will die
(towards). over (wherein)
naye’ ne’ ne’t‘ho‘ é"ga‘ha’k ne’ agieé™’da’ ne’ awé™hwa’d! gaé™hes
that that there it will lie on it that my flesh that it is alone it is tall tree
(it is)
gaé™hagé™hiada’, ne‘t‘ho’ @%ga‘ha’k ne’ agieé™da’. Hud‘ di’
top of tree it, tree extends there it willlieonit that my flesh. Not more-
over
songa’ t‘haiegwenidi‘ ha’daiofgieéinio™ ne’ t‘honé™ enagie’.
anyone can one be able one could abuse me occulty that here one (iney)
well.
Naie’ di’ sof gw’ nofwa‘ho’dé™ néngé™ de‘sniya’dage‘, I’
That it more- who ever kind of person this ye two persons I
is over
enino’sé® = d@"iagodo™hwéndjio‘s gi’s‘hé™* ofsaiongwéfna‘henga’,
I your two uncle it will become necessary for one it may be again one will hear my words,
(am)
é"wado”™ ne’t‘ho’ né"yawé™ha’.”’
it will be thus so it will come to pass.
possible
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ néngé™ de‘hniksa’d‘ na’ ne’ agofigwe‘, gostwi‘,
At that (time) now thus they twochildren the that she,ahuman — she younger
(that) (is), (smaller) (is),
wa’dio™séfit‘hwa’, wa’a‘hén’, “ Nofwa‘ho’dé”’ né"giedi’ é"sgongé™.
she wept, she said, “What kind of thing sol willdoit again roles see
thee.
Hua‘ ni’a° tihakewenii‘ agia’t‘hé™ tea’ nofiwe’ hé™se’sek?”
Not T alone I could be able to I should climb it wherein place thou will continue
do it to be?”
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ hokstén’d‘ wa’hé™hén’, “ E"sgwenid’ se’ ganio’
At that now that he, the Ancient he said, “Thou wilt beable actu- ifit beso
(time) One to do it ally
ne’ &seksa’diiok.’”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’t‘hofidekha‘sia’. Naie’
that thou wilt be a good child.”” At that (time) now they separated. That (it is)
di’ néfig陓ha‘ hénewe' wa’s‘hagot‘hoié™” ne’ ho’gé” wa’hé™hen’,
moreover this (itis) he, a human he told her that his younger he said,
sister
“Oné"™ wa’khei@inénda’nha’ ne’ de‘hniksa’&. Oné™ di Is
“Now I have any obligation that they two children. Now moreover thou
to them
ol‘hwagwegi‘ wa goni‘hwage‘héi‘has. E™s‘heiadiéinofinid’ ne’
(it) whole matter I have piled (the) matters to thee. Thou wilt care well for them that
et‘hiksa’a‘. Nadie’ ne’ tca’ niiawé™se’ doga’t é™seyéfniio’khe’
our children. That (it is) that as soitisto happen if soit be thy manner of doing will
(wherein) be good
tea’ dé™s‘he‘snie’nha’ — naie’ ne’ é"yol‘howa‘nha’ tea’
wherein thou wilt care or them that (it is) that it will become a great matter as
né"Mawé™ha’ tea’ de‘hnonhe’. Nadie’ se’ ni’ tea’ niiawé™se’
soit will happen wherein they twolive. That (itis) actually the (I) wherein so it is to happen
614 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
dé"dwadekha‘sia’, hiidi‘ oni’ t‘ha’dofsedwadatgé”, hid‘ o‘ni’
we will separate one from not also again we shall see one another, not also
another
t‘ha’dofisedwat‘haé™. Nadie’ ne’ tea’ nigé™ oné™ é"ga‘he’g
again we shall converse with That (itis) that wherein soitisfar (now) time it will bring it
one another. (it will be time)
niie’ ne’ odei‘hwade’ tea’ niiawé™se’ ne’ t‘honé® io‘hwéfdjiade’,
that (it that it is an unfilled as so it is to that this (it) earth is present,
is) matter (wherein) happen
t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ha‘sd’ 6"tegwawénna‘héfga’ tea’ nigé™ oné™
at that now just then, ye will again hear my voice wherein so it is time
(time) not before, far (now)
y (3 , ”
é"ga‘he’g.
it will bring it’’(it will be time).’’
T‘ho‘ge’ oné® wa‘honé™hwakdé™” ne’ — hokstén’a‘. Hiia‘
At that (time) now it him caused to be ill that he, the Ancient One. Not
de’oi‘hwis‘he’if oné"* wa’hé™heid’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™’ néfige™ha‘
it was one matter time (now) he died. At that (time) now this
gokstén’a’ wa’dthén’, “Hot nofwa‘ho’dé” né"dwaied’ tea
she, the Ancient she said, “What kind of thing so will we doit wherein
One
nwa’ ongwaid’dawé™ha’?”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ hofwi‘hawa‘ ne
so it has happened to us (to our At that now that her offspring (male) that
bodies)?” (time)
de‘hanofido™ wa’hé™hén’, “I’ hiia’ off ne’t‘ho’ né"gied’ tea’
he, the downwarded he said, wey verily it seems thus so I will do it as
(wherein)
niiot tea’ hoi‘hwi‘sé’i‘, naie’ hid’ hawéfi’ “Gaé™hagé™hiada’
So it is as he decried the that itis verily he said “At the top of the tree
(wherein) matter
hé"ga‘ha’k ne’ agieé’’da’.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ gokstén’a’ oné™
it will lie on it that my flesh.” At that (time) now that she, ee Ancient now
ne
wa’agoio’dé™ha’, wa’e‘séinid’ tea’ nofwe é™honwaia’dondak.
she worked, she made it wherein the place they will place his body in it.
Nadie’ ne’ ga‘so™di’ nadie’ wa’e‘ho™séinia’da’. Nadie’ di’ ne’
that (it that (it) bark that (it is) sie used it to make case. That (it more- that
is) is) over
oné™ wa’eiénnénda’nhd’, t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hofwaia’da‘gwa’ ne’t‘ho‘
now she fulfilled her duty to it at that now they took up his body there
(finished it) (time)
wa’honwaia’dondak. Oné™ di’ wa’dathén’, “Oné™ wa’heiéninén-
they put his body in it. Now moreover she said, “Now I fulfilled my duty
da’nha’ ne’ se‘snino’sé". Oné"™ wa’ga‘he’g dé"dwadekha‘sia’.
to him that your (two) Now it is time (it has we shall separate from one
uncle. wrought it) another.
Oné™ hid tthofisawado™ dofsedwat‘haéni’. Tho‘ge’ néfigé™ ne’
Now not again it will be again we will converse At that (time) this that
possible together.’”
haksa’a‘ ne’ de‘hanoiido™ oné™ wa’t‘ha‘gwa’ néfgé™ ne’ ga‘ho™si’
he, the child that he is downwarded now he took it up this that (it) case
ha‘né™saé’ge’ wa’ha‘hé™ t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’ha‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho‘
on his shoulder he laid it at that (time) now he departed there
nhwa’he’ tea’ nofiwe’ tgi‘he’ ne’ ao™hwa’d’ ga陓hes o‘hne‘da’.
he went wherein place there (it) that it is alone (it) tree is tall (it) pine.
tree stands
Tho‘ge‘ ne’t‘ho! wa’had’t'hé™, agwas ga陓hagé™hiadad’ ne’t‘ho‘
“At that there he climbed it, just (it) tree top of (it) these
(time)
,
’
d
HEWITT} ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 615
wa’ha‘hé™ ne’ ga‘ho™sa’. Oné™ ne’ na’ ne’ gokstéi’a‘ deiega‘ha’
he laid it on that (it) case (burial). Now that the that she, the Ancient she had her
(that) One eyes fixed on it
tea’ nwa’awé™ha’, oné™ wa’agoi‘hwane‘higwa’ tea’ niiot tea’
as so it happened, now she marveled at the matter as So, it is as
(wherein)
wa ontgat‘hwa’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ donda‘ha‘gwe‘hné™ da’ néfigé" ne’
she saw it. Ag what now again he descended it this that
haksa’a‘.
he (is) a child,
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ sa‘honwaid’da‘se‘da’, ne’t‘ho’ hon‘sa‘hoiwé"’dén’
At that (time) now again she concealed his body, there again she placed him
tea’ nofwe‘ ni‘hadiénidakhwa’.
wherein place he habitually abides.
Naie’ di’ tea’ nwa’ofnis‘he’ ne’ gao™hwa’a’ (e’défi’) ne’
That (it more- wherein so it lasted that she, all alone she abode that
is) over
gokstén’a‘ wa’ondiéi’ ha’gwi’ da‘haio” ne’ héngwe' dé"’se’
she, the Ancient she was surprised he entered that he, a human and
One (is)
wahé™hén’, ‘Gaef‘ na’ nhe‘honenon‘ ne’ sa‘hwadjii’?”” T‘ho‘ge‘
he said, “Where the they have gone that they ohwachira?”’ At that
that (time)
wa’i‘hén’ néngé™ ne’ gokstén’a‘ “ Hila‘ de’hénni’dén’ ne’ gagwegi'.”’
she said this (itis) that she, une Ancient ‘‘Not theyabide (athome) that it (is) all.’”’
ne,
T‘ho‘ge’ néngé* héigwe‘ wa’hé™hén’, ‘‘Naie’ ne’ né"* gandwé”’
At that this (it is) he (is) a he said, “Thatisit that this (is) it is vital (se-
(time) human rious) (grave)
tea’ niwagadieé™hadye’; nadie’ ne’ hage‘nhd’i‘hadie’ ne’
wherein so I do it coming; that (it is) the he ordered me corning the
s‘hedwagowané™ hodié‘he’. Nadie’ ne’ agat‘hoya‘héfidie’ tea’
Our chief he has a Stand- That that I come telling it wherein
ing Tree. (it is)
wa’t‘hodo“hwéndjios ne’ gagwegi’ alagoddgé™'s tea’ endgee’, naie’
it became necessary for him that all it would be mani- wherein they dwell, that
fested to (them) one (it is)
ne’ he‘he’ doga’t ’o™ké"’ agagwenia’ alongwéfnowé™ nha’. Niaie’
that hedesires ifso it be soon, by it would be able one would find his word. That
it and by to do it (it is)
di’? é™sat‘hoia’ ne’ oné™ &™s‘hadiio™ ne’ sa‘hwadjia’. Nadie’ ne’
more- thou wilt that time they willreturn that they ohwachira. That that
over tell it (it is)
deiodo™hwéndjio‘hwi‘ gagwegi‘ aiagowénnalénda’nha’, naie’ se’
5 5D D> )
it is necessary all they should obtain the word, that Actu-
(it is) ally
hiid‘ de’oiéndet tea’ né™’iawé™ha’ doga’t nadie’ gi’s‘hé™ ne’ hua‘
not itis knowable wherein so it will happen ifitsobe that possibly that not
(as) (it is)
t‘ha‘hoiwawénnowé™nha‘. Naie’ gwa’ o’ nadie’ oné™ diio‘siwa?
they should find his word. That (itis) just too that now it has begun
oné™ — hadigwat‘hwa'‘s.’”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ gokstén’a‘
now they are making trips.”’ At that (time) now that she, the Ancient
One,
= vm y v y vm? see, 5 v~
daiewénnitgé™ nha’ wa’d‘hén’, “Huds de’wagéfino™do™ hot
her voice came forth she said, “Not I do know it wha
nofwa‘ho’dé™ of’ nagied’. Nadie’ ne’ s‘hagwakstén’tché’ nadie’ ne’
kind of thing possi- so I should That that our Ancient One that (it is) that
bly do. (it is)
7
bd
616 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH, ANN. 43
na’ ne’ hodén‘ho‘ha’; né™ ne’ khe‘hawds‘ho™a‘ de‘hninoido™”
the that he has topped the this that my offspring individually they are down-
(that) tree with himself; warded
ne’niie’.’’ T*ho‘ge’ ne’ héfigwe' wa’hé™hén’, “Ne’t‘ho’ se’ of’
that it is.” At that time that he (is) a human he said, “Thus actu- pre-
ally sum-
ably
nadie’ ha’degaiei’ é™hodiid’daé™ tea’ nofiwa‘ho’dé™ hodei‘hwade’
that it is quite fit it willinelude them wherein kind of thing he has matter to do
(as)
ne’ Hoda‘he’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ sa‘ha‘dendid’ néigé™ ne’ héigwe'.
that He has a standing At that now he again departed this (itis) that he (is) a
Tree.”’ (time) human,
Hii’ néngé™ de’oi‘hwis‘he’ii néngé™ ne’ eksd’d’ oné™
Not this (itis) it was along matter (time) this (it is) that she, achild (is) now
wa'dio™séit‘hwa’. Oné™ ne’ gokstén’&' wa’el‘hwanéfdo”,
she wept. Now that she, the Ancient One she asked question(s),
wa'ihén’, ‘Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ de‘sado™hwéfdjionik?” T‘ho‘ge‘
she said, ‘What kind of thing thou dost need it?”’ At that (time)
néngé™ eksa’i‘ hiia‘ de’diagodadi‘. T‘ho‘ge’ nénigé™ ne’
this (it is) she, a child (is) not she spoke inreply. At that (time) this (it is) that
ate mw ~né d Fa Per EY) shed | 22 nam BNa 5? n’
gokstén’a’ oné alon‘sawé™ oia’ ’o™ké™ gé"s hetcyagona’do™,
she, the An- now she began other in turn duty there she designated it,
cient One
iyondo™k ‘Naie’-khé™’ desado™hwéfdjionnik a‘satgat‘hwa’?”’
she kept saying, “That is it thou dost need it thou shouldst see it?”
Wa’gai‘hwis‘he’ hiii‘ de’awet aiofini‘hé” ne’ deio™sént‘hwa‘s
It was a long matter not it was possible she should cease that she is weeping
(time)
ne’ eksi’a‘. T*ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ gokstéi’a’ oné™ wa’a‘héen’,
that she, achild (is), At that (time) now that she, the Ancient One now she said,
“Naie’ nige’ of de‘sado‘hwéfdjionik ne’ hidno’sé" ofsa‘hesgé"’.”’
“That (it soIbe- pre- thou desirest it that thy uncle again thou shouldst.
is) lieve sum- see him.”
ably
’
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ eski’i‘ wa’ofni‘hé™ tea’ deio™séit‘hwia's.
At that (time) now that she, the child she ceased it where she is weeping,
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ gokstéi’a‘ wa’d‘héi’, ‘“Nig陓hé” ne’ ganowé”,
At that (time) that she, the Ancient One she said, “ Exceedingly that it is difficult
(perplexing);
,
?
hiia’’ hi/id’ t‘hakgwenid‘ ne’ IT’ agonid’dawé™hit.” T‘ho‘ge‘
not verily Ishould be able to doit that I Tshould carry thy body up.”” At that (time)
ne’ héfigwe’ ne’ hiaksi’i’ wa’hé™hén’, “I’ hua’ ne’t‘ho'
that he, a human that he, the child, he said, “Titis verily thus
né"eiei’ tea’ nonwa‘ho’dé™” deiodo“hwéndjio‘hwi‘.”” T*ho‘ge'
so I will do it where kind of matter it is necessary.” At that (time)
oné™ wa’tchagoid’da‘gwd’ dé™’se’ oné™ wa’had’t‘hé”. Wa‘hnio™
now he took up her body and now he climbed it. They two arrived
tea’ nigé™ tea’ tga‘ho™sd‘ha’ dé&™se’ oné™ wa’ontgat‘hwa’ ne’
where soit is dis- where there (it) case lies up- and now she saw that
tant on it
gond’sé"-ké"ha’. Agwas skéfino™ saioiné™dofnio™. T*ho'ge‘
her father—it was. Very (it) is calm, quiet. again she mused. At that (time)
oné™ da‘hia‘ewené™ da’.
now they two descended.
Hiid‘ de’gai‘hwis oné™ he’ sa‘hdio” néigé™ ne’ héfigwe‘ dé"’se’
Not it(is)alongmatter now again again ui ar- this (itis) that he,a human, and
rive
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 617
,
wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Oné™ ne™ ne’ is géhgwa’ tciswadadéni’ ne
he said, “Now that this ye only still ye are left that
(here)
sa‘hwa‘djia’ ’a‘so™ t‘haeswagwat‘hwa’ tea’ nonwe‘ t‘hodé™nioda’
thy ohwachira cali) ye have made a trip there where place he is giving a feast
sti
ne’ Hodii‘he’. Nadie’ di’ oné™ deiodo™hwéndjio‘hwi‘ ne’ tgagonda’
that He was a Stand- That (it more- now it is necessary that without fail
ing Tree. is) over
songa’ haiegwat‘hwa’ tea’ nidjio™. Doga’t se’ "o™ké™
some one oneshould makeatripthere where so many ye are If actually next in
in number, order
a‘ho’nigo™hiio’khe’ ne’ hodé™nioda’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ néfigé™ ne’
his mind should be appeased that he is giving a feast.’ At that (time) this (it is) that
goksten’a‘ wa’ a ‘hén’, “Son nofwa‘ho’dé™s‘ho™ ne’t‘ho‘
she, the Ancient One she said, “Who kind of persons several there
he‘hodigwat‘hwif oné™?” T‘ho‘ge’ = néigé™ ne’ héngwe‘
there they have made a trip now?” At that (time) this (it is) that he, a human
wa’hé™hén’, ‘‘Na’ie’ on’ oiane’ ne’ Is ne’t‘ho’ ha‘se’.
he said, ““That (itis) presumably it is good that thou there thither thou
shouldst go,
niiawé™ha’, is di’ t*haesnit‘haén’ ne’
?
Agwas odogé™1' tea
Very it is definite where soit wouldcome thou more- ye two could converse that
to pass, over together
hodé™nioda’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ néngé™ ne’ gokstéi’a’ wa’a‘hén’,
he is giving the feast.” At that (time) now this (it is) that she, Ancient she said,
ne
“Dogé™s gwa’ of” ne’t‘ho’ né"iawé™ha’.” T*ho‘ge’ oné™
“Tt is true just also thus so it will come to pass.’’ At that (time) now
wa hé™hén’ ne’ hénhgwe‘', ‘“Hé"tcitne‘da‘ewa’ gwa’ o’ hia’.”
he said that he,ahuman, ‘“Thouand I will go back together just too verily.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ sa‘hia‘déndia’.
At that (time) now again they two departed.
Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ hofisa‘hniio™ oné™ ne’ héfigwe* wa’hé™hén’,
That (it more- that time thereagaintheytwo now that he, a human he said
is) over arrived
“Oné™ ne’’né™, wa’kheid’dinio’da’ ndaie’ ne’ hesge‘nha’i‘,
“SNow lo, here, I have brought her body here that it is that hence thou hast
sent me,
defsado™“hwéndjionik ne’ go‘hwadjii’ ofda‘héfine’ a‘hadua’da’nha’
thou desirest it that her ohwachira they ae come they should be present
ere
tea’ sadé™nioda’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ néngé™ ne’ Hodi‘he’ wa’hé™hén’,
where thou art giving a feast.” At that this (it is) that He Has a Stand- he said,
(time) ing Tree
“Oné™ hid’? gagwegi’ t‘honé™ wa’hadigwat‘hwa’ tea’ niio®
“Now verily all here they have paid visits as (where) soit
: much
enagée’. Da, is di’ ne’ sa‘hwadjié’ ’a‘so™ de’djiongwe’daida‘
they dwell. So, thou more- that thy ohwachira still (not) a single person
over
de’agogwat‘hwi' ne’ t‘honé™. Diéhi‘ha’gwa’ gi‘s‘hé™ is swagwenio™
DUS 5 D
(not) one has paida _ _— that here. If it so be it may be ye ye are able to do it
visit
aeswai‘hwa’sigwi’ tca’ nigaie‘hd’ ne’ ag’nigo™ha’.”” T*ho‘ge‘
ye should answer it (the where so it acts that my mind.” At that
matter) (time)
néngé™ ne’ agofgwe’ wa’a‘hén’, “Sof di’ nofiwa‘ho’dé™ ne’
this (it is) that she, a human, she said, “Who more- kind of person that
over
19078°—28——40
618 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
i‘sado™k oné® hodigwat‘hwi‘.”” T‘ho‘ge’ néfigé™ha‘ ne’ Hodi‘he’
thouartsaying now they have paid a visit.” At that this it is that He Has a
(time) Standing Tree
wahé™hén’, ‘Naie’ ne’ gé‘he’ oné™ wa’t‘honte’s‘da’ oné™ ne’
he said, “That that I think now they have exhausted now that
(it is) their numbers
t‘honé™ héine’sgwa’. Oné™ hodigwat‘hwi‘ ne’ E"dekha’ Gai‘gwa’,
here they have been. Now they are paid visits that daylight Orb
ere
dé™se’ A‘sonekha’ Wé™hni’da’, dé se’ ne’ Odjisdifno‘gwa’,
and night (it) planet is present, and that (it) Star,
dé"’se’ néngé™ Odéndonni‘, dé™se’ néig陓ha’ Ot‘hondonni‘,
and this Grown Trees, and this (it is) Grown Bushes,
dé"’se’ ne’ Odéfnu‘géfni', dé"’se’ ne’ Gondiio’, dése’ ne’
and that Grown Grasses, and that they are animals, and that
Gondidie’s, dé"’se’ ne’ Gondidikhe’s tea’ o™hwéndjiade’, dé?’se’
r) ?
They fly about, and that they run about where (it) earth is present, and
ne’ O‘hnegitgén‘ho™. Naie’ diioi‘hwa’ gé‘he’ oné™ gagwegi‘
that (it) water comes forth in That it is the reason I think now all
diverse places. (it is)
agwas’ nadie’ géfigwad’ ’a‘so™ odadéfi‘, ndaie’ ne’ ’a‘so™
very that it is only still it remains, that it is that still (not)
de’hogwat‘hwi‘ ne’ Owiide’, naie’ tea’ niio™ oné™ hodigwat‘hwr.
he has paid a visit that (It) Wind, that where so it is now they have paid a visit.
(it is) many
Nadie’ ne’ na’ ne’ gé‘he’ nadie’ ’ofi‘ ne’t‘ho’ néMiawé™ha’ ne’ oné™
That (it that the that Ithink that (it pre- thus soit willcometo that time
is) that is) sum- pass
ably
e’s‘hé™ éofigwéinowé™ nha’ gé‘he’ naie’ on‘ ne
it may be one will find my word I think that (itis) presumably that
&eo™hwéndjiofgo‘da’, nadie’ diioi‘hwa’ ne’t‘ho’ né"iawé™ha’ tea’
I will cause it to pass through the that it is the reason thus so it will come to pass as
earth (out of it), (it is)
oné™ se’ hiid’ wa’ondwé™ ne’ awagiénawd’s ne’ t‘honé™
now actually, verily, it failed that it should aid me that here '
o“hwéfdjiade’. Dogi’t se’ ’o™ké™ agagwénia’ aiagoiénawa’s
(it) earth is present. If actually soon it steal be able it would aid one
to do it
?
ne’ oid’ 7a’se’ donidawadonnid’. Nadie’ di tea’ né™iawé™ha’ ne’
that (it) other (it) thence it would grow. That (it more- where so it will come to that
new is) over pass
t‘honé™ o™hwéndjiade’ dé"watdeni’, ’A’se’ 0’ na’ dé"dwadojinia’.”
here (it) earth is present it will change (it)new too the thence it will grow (make
itself, that itself).’”
y ne
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ néfigé™ ne’ agoigwe’ wa’ad‘hén’, “Hiia‘ ‘on
At that now that this (itis) that she, a human she said, “Not pre-
(time) sum-
ably
bf
de’gidi‘hwis oné™ hé"ga‘he’g doga’t se o™ke” awado™
itisalong matter time it is it will arrive if actually soon it would be
possible
‘
ste
aie‘sawénni‘sak ne’ khe‘hawa‘s‘ho™a‘. Degeni‘ dewagwidié™’,
one should seek thy word that my offspring. Two I have children
naie’ dé™se’ géfigwd’ de‘hniksa’d‘ ’a‘so™.” T‘ho'ge’ néngé™ ne’
that (it and only they two (are) yet.” At that (time) this (it is) that
is) children
Hodii‘he’ wa’hé™hén’, “ Ne’t‘ho‘ gwd’ o’ ha’degaiei’, E"géino™’&’.”
He Has a he said, “‘ “There (it is) just too it is quite enough. I will wait.”
Standing Tree
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 619
T‘ho‘ge’ sa‘hawénnitgé™ nha’, i‘hado™k, “Satgat‘hwa4‘ hiid’ tea’
At that he again spoke, he said, “Do thou look verily, where
(time)
niionakd®’ ’a‘so™ néngé™had’ gi‘he’, oné™ awé™ha‘hagi‘, naie’
so large it has still this (it is) (it) isa now it is full of flowers, that it
room standing tree, is
tea’ migé™ néngé™ hé"wawé™hé™nhad’ ne’t‘ho’ nigé™ oné™
where so it is dis- this there its flowers will fall off there so it is dis- time
tant tant
hé"wado’kdé™ néngé™ hagadé"™nioda’. Nadie’ géigwa’ oianén’wi'
there it will end this Tam giving a feast. That (it only it is good for it
is)
dé™hong’nigo™hiwéniek tea’ honnadé"tgado”’.” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
they divert my mind where they are enjoying themselves.’”’ At that (time) that
agofigwe’ oné™ wa’d‘hén’, “Oné™ gwd’ o‘ni’ é"sga‘déndia’. Nadie
she,ahuman now she said, “Now just also I will again depart. That (it
is
di’ tea’ = néMiawé™ha’, dogé™s on’ é™hiade’niéidé™ ne’
more- where so it will come topass. Itis true presumably they two will attempt it that
over
khe‘hawds‘ho™ a‘ ne’ oné™ é"geai’ oné™ wa’ga‘he’s.” T‘ho‘ge‘
my offspring that time I will judge now it has arrived (is At that
time).”’ (time)
oné™ saio™ déndia’.
now again she departed.
Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ honsaieio™ tea’ nonwe‘ hodino™saié™’
That (it more- that time there again she where place this lodge stands
is) over arrived
oné™ got‘honde’ de‘hodit‘ha’ ne’ de‘hninofido™. I‘hado™k ne’
Now she heard it they two that they two are down- He said that
conversed worded.
héngweS “Oné™ det‘hiado™hwéfdjiofnik s‘hednino’sé*. Oné™ di’
he,ahuman “Now there he needs thee our two uncle. Now more-
over
ne’t‘ho’ wa’se‘.”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ de‘hiade™hnondi’ wa’a‘hén’,
there do thou go.” At that now that his sister she said,
(time)
“Sénno™ do”-khé™nofwa‘ho’dé™ he‘he’ ne’ s‘hednino’sé"?”’ T‘ho‘ge,
“Thou knowest—dost thou kind of thing he thinks that our two uncle?” At tae
ime
néngé® ne’ héfigwe’ wa’hé™hén’, “Agéino™do™”. Naie’ gwa’
this (it is) that he, a human he said, “T know it. That it is just
o‘ni’ oiane’ ne’ is &é™sat‘hofdek ne’ oné™ é*t‘hawéfnitgé™ nha’.
also itisgood that thou thou wilt hear it that time he will speak.
Oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho’ wa’se‘ oné™.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’eiagé™ nha’,
Now, more- there do thou now.” At that now she went out,
over, go (time)
ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’é™ tea’ nofiwe’ tgi‘he’. Nate’ ne’ oné™ wa’eio®,
there she went where place it lay up That that now she arrived
there. (it is) there
gaé™hagé™hiada’ tea’ nonwe‘ ga‘ho™si‘hi’, t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’a‘hén’,
at the top of the tree where place (it) case lay upon it, at ae now she said,
“Dogé™s-khé™ desgado“hwéndjionnik?”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™
“Tt is true—is it thou needst me?” At that now
(time)
da‘hadadia’, wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Dogé™s degofiado™hwéndjionnik.
he replied, he said, “Tt is true I need thee.
Naie’ diioi‘hwi’ tea’ oné™ hwa’ga‘he’e tea’ nofiwa‘ho’dé™
That itis the reason where now it has arrived where kind of thing
(it is) (is time) (as)
bs
620 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN’ 43
odei‘hwade’ tea’ sid’dide’. Nadie’ di’ oné™ é"gofiat‘hoié™ tea’
(it) matter is where thy body is That more- now I will tell thee where-
unsettled present (it is) over as
né"iawe™ha’. Oné™ di’? é™sa‘défidia’. Ne’t‘ho’ hé™se’ tea’
so it will come to Now more- thou wilt depart. ‘There thou wilt go where
pass, over
nonwe‘ t‘hono™saié™ ne’ hodé™nioda’ ne’ Hodia‘he’ awé™ha‘hagi‘,
place his lodge stands that heis givinga feast that He Has ‘3 Stand- It is full of flowers,
ing Tree
naie’ deio‘hat‘he’da‘gwi‘ tca’ nonwe‘ hadinagee’. Nadie’ di’ ne’
that it lights it thereby where place they dwell. That more- that
(it is) (it is) over
oné™ hé™sio™ é™si‘hén’, “Oné™ wi, ’o10™, i T‘ho‘ge‘ 陓hé™hén’,
(now) there thou —_ thou wilt say, “Now Ihavearrived.” Atthat time he will say,
time arrivest
“Gaén nofi(we‘) nofida‘se’?” Esi‘hén’, “T’ hid’ ne’t‘ho‘
CC stor) place dost thou come?”” | Thou wilt say, Gay verily there
wha
daga‘déndiaé’ tea’ nofwe' t‘hodi‘he’ ne’ gno”sé.”” T‘ho‘ge,
thence I departed where place there he has a that my uncle.” At that
standing tree (time)
é“hé™hén’, “Hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™ said’dine’?” Esi‘hén’, “Naie,
he will say, “What kind of thing brings thy body Thou wilt say, “That,
here?” (it is)
gwa’ oni’ agia’dine’ tea’ sadé™nidda’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
just also it brings my body where thou art givingafeast. At that (time) Now
é™hiai‘hwanéfido™, 陓hé™héh’, ne’ tea’t‘ho’ ‘Hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™
he will ask thee, * he will say, that next, “What kind of thing
di’ siatci’. En si‘héf’, ‘I’ hid’ ne’ Awé™hai‘ ofigiast‘ha’.’
more- thou art Thou wilt say, ‘I’it verily, that Itisa Sear (Ripe) one calls me,
over, called. is, Flower
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ é“hée™hén’, ‘Niawé™ha’. Oné™ hid’
ae thet Now he will say, ‘Tam thankful.’ Now verily
1me
’
wa’gal‘hwaiei’khe’ tea’ nofiwa‘hodé’” agadé™nioda‘gwi’. Oné™
(it) matter has been fulfilled where kind of thing Tam giving a feast Now
for which.
di’ gagwegi‘ is hé™s‘hawi‘da’ tea’ niio™ ne’ &¢o™hwéndjiofigo‘da’.’
more- all thou hence thouwilt where soitis that I willcause them topassthrough
over carry it much the earth.
Sgada‘ di’ é"gofiat‘hoié’, naie’ é™%séYnigo™hd4é™” ne’ oné?,
I
One thing, more- will tell thee, that it thou wilt beware of it that time
over, is
evhemhen’, ‘Thoné™ sanakdd’.’ E™hé™héi’ ne’ tca’t‘ho‘, ‘Naie’
he will say, ‘Here (is) thy bed, aa. Thou wilt say that next, “That it
IS
di’ é"dwadieé™da’ ne’ é™sgekhofinié™, &6™skdjisgofnié™ ne’
more- it will be the first thing that thou wilt prepare food thou wilt make mush that
over for me, for me,
o‘heid’da’.’ Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ &陓hesdjisgonnié™ &"wa‘didoigwi’,
(it) Chestnut.” That it more- that time thou wilt make mush it will splutter,
is over (now) for hi
sia’di’gef 0a’ khe’ ‘a‘gwif di’ 陓sawéfniteé"k diéa‘ha’ew’
on thy body it will adhere Do not more- it will cause thee to ery if it so be
ONS out.
swa’djik o’dai‘hé™’. Dé’se’ ne’ oné™ Sgadjisewaik 6™hé™hnok
Excessively it is hot. And that time (it) mush will be he will send for (it)
cooked (living th.)
ne’ hotchené™’s‘ho™ ne’ dji‘ha&‘ degiid’dage‘, nadie’ dé"gaganént ne’
that his several slaves that dogs they aretwo bodies thatit they two will lick that
it
(in number) is
sid’di’ge‘s‘ho”’ hé™sgaigewa’ ne’ odjisgwit’. Agwas
along on thy body it will wipe it off that (it) mush, Very much
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 621
é™sé™nigo™ha‘ni‘da’. ’A‘gwi‘ é™sawénna’da’. Dién‘ha’gwi’
thou must have fortitude. Do not thou give up, do not If, it so be
thou surrender.
é™sewenid’ hid‘ tihe‘sawénnu‘da‘ t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ dé sadongo‘da’.
thou wilt be able not thou wilt utter a word at that now thou wilt pass through
to do it time it.
Degéni‘ wadof’t‘ha’. Nadie’ e’ gandwé™, ndie’ ne’ 陓hé™hén’,
Two it forms it. That it again it is very that (it that he will say,
is grave; is)
‘Ongei‘sén‘diksé™ha’. Agwas én’ tea’ agéiino™do”™
I have dreamed. Very I thought where I knew it
wa hadiéndédagwa’ ne’ agadii‘he’ ne’ awé™hai‘. Agwas 6n’ tea’
they pulled up the standing that Ihaveastand- that its flowers are Very I where
tree ing tree dead. thought
agéhno™do™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’agiadié’’ tea odo™hwéndjiia’gi‘ tea’
I knew it there we two sat down where (it) earth is broken off where
,
nohwe' hodiéfidodagwén‘. Agwas_ efi tea’ = agéfino™do™
place they pulled up the Very I where I knew it
standing tree. thought
ha’deiago‘si’dé’dofinyo™k ha’gohwa‘ ne’ deiagni‘.’ Nadie’ di’
hence her feet hung severally inside that one and I That more
are one. (it is) over
é"goniat‘hoié™ ’a‘owl' é™sawénna’da’ ne’ oné™ ne’t‘ho‘
I will tell thee do not thou wilt give that time thus
up, surrender (there)
né"awe™ha’.”” Tho‘ge’ oné™ dondaio™gwe‘ne™ da’.
so it will come At that now thence she descended.
to pass.”” (time)
Nadie’ ne’ oné™ hofisdieio” tea’ nofwef hé™’dén’ ne’
That (it that (time) there she entered where place he abides that
is)
de‘hiad陓hnoidé’ oné™ wa’d‘hén’, “Oné™ ne’ ni’ wa’ga‘he’g
her brother now she said, “Now that the it has arrived
i (it is time)
oné™ 6"ga‘déidia’. Ne’t‘ho ‘hé"ge’ tea’ nonwe‘ t‘hodé™niodd’ ne’
now I will depart. There I will go where place there he givesa feast that
Hodii‘he’.” T‘ho‘ge* néngé™ ne’ héigwe‘ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“ Ne’t‘ho‘
He has a Stand- At that this (itis) that he, a human he said, “Thus,
ing Tree.” (time) (There,)
gwa’ o‘ni’ ha’degaiei’, nadie’ gi’s‘hé™ ne’ é™sa‘déndid’ ne’ téhoné™
just also it is correct, that (it I believe, that thou wilt depart that here
is),
o™hwéndjiade’. Naie’ di’ tea’ né"iawé™ha’ ne’ hwénido™ gwa’
(it) earth is present. That (it more- where soit willcometo that whenever just
is) over pass
é™sga‘ha’nha’ 6™si‘hén’ gé%s, ‘De‘hado™hwéndjiéido™s.’ Naie’
D> ’
thou wilt remember thou wilt say custom- He, The Earthquake. That (it
me arily is)
di’ ne’ tea’ né"awén‘hd’ gagwegi’ na’ gé"s S%ontdoga’ ne’
more- the where soit will come to all the custom- one will be the
over that pass that arily aware of it
oné™ T’ 8%scea‘ha’nhi’.”
time I thou wilt remember me.””
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’o™déndia’. Hwi’eio™ tea’ nofiwe‘ hono™saié”’
At that now she departed. There she where place his lodge stands
(time) arrived
ne’ hodé™niodaé’, dé"’se’ oné™ wa’ontgit‘hwa’ awé™ha‘hagis ne’
that he is giving a feast and now she looked, saw, it is full of flowers that
hoda‘he’, de™’se’ oné™ wa’ontgit‘hwa’ géndio‘gowané™ goid’daie’i‘.
his standing and now she saw (it) large body of they are assembled.
tree, people
622 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
vm
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’eio” gano™sgofwa‘, t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ di’ wa’a‘hén’,
At that now she entered in the lodge, At that now moreover she said,
(time) (time)
“Oné™ ne’? né™ wa’gio™’.” Wa’hé™héi’ ne’ hono™saié”’,
“Now that here I have arrived.” He said that he has the lodge,
“Gaén’ non(we') nonda‘se’?”? Tho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ eksa’gona‘
“Where place thence thou didst At that now that she, the maid
come?”’ (time)
waahén’, ‘I’ hiid’ ne’t‘ho’ daga‘défdia’ tea’ nonwe‘ t‘hodié‘he’
she said, CHT verily there thence I departed where __ place there he has a stand-
ing tree
ne’ gno’’sé".”” T*ho‘ge’ néngé" ne’ hono™saié™ wa’hé™hén’, “ Hot
that my uncle.” At thet this (itis) that he has the lodge he said, “What
(time)
nonwa‘ho’dé™ di’ saia’dine’ tea’ t‘honé™ wa’sio™?” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
kind of thing more- it bringsthy where here thou hast At that that
over body arrived?” (time)
eksa’gond’ oné™ wa’d‘hén’, ‘Nadie’ gwa’ oni’ genié’de’ ne’
she, the maid now she said, “That (it just also I come to seek it that
is)
sadé™nidda’.”’” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ hono™saié’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Het
thou art giving a At that that he has a lodge he said “What
feast.” (time)
nonwa‘ho’dé” di’ siatei‘?”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ daiei‘hwa’sigwa’
kind of thing more- thou art At that now she replied
over named?’’ (time)
wa’d‘hén’, “I’ hiid’ ne’ Awe™hai‘ ongiast‘ha’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
she said, it verily that Sere (Ripe) Flower they call me At that now
it is) habitually.” (time)
néngé™ hono™saié™” wa’hé™hén’, “Niawé™ha’ tea’ oné™ wa’sio™.
this (itis) he has the lodge he said, “T am thankful where now thou has
arrived.
Oné™ di’ naie’ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’ tea’ nofiwa‘ho’dé” agadé™ nioda‘gwi‘
Now more- that (it) matter has been where kind of thing Iam giving a feast
over (it is) fulfilled for which.
Oné™ di’? wa’wadongo‘da’. Nadie’ ne’ i‘sowd’ wa’egwat‘hwa’ tea’
Now, more- it has passed That that itis much they have paid where
over, (has ended). (it is) visits here
nonwe‘ niwagadi‘he’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ Is oné™ gagwegi‘ hé™s‘hawi‘da’,
place just I havea That more- that thou now all hence thou wilt bear
standing tree. (it is), over, it with thee,
se’-khé™ oné™ @"go™hwéndjiongo‘da’ tea’ nio™ ne’ t‘honé‘ niiodieé™.
for-is it now I will put them through the as soitis that here so it is done.
earth much
Naie’ di’ oné™ dé™swatdéni’ dedjiaé™ ’a‘se’ 6™swado™ ne’ ha’gonwa‘
That more- now it will again change both new it willagain that inside
over become (beneath)
hé"wakhaun‘k dé"’se’ ne’ t‘honé™ o™hwéndjidde’ ’a‘se’ é™swado™,
hence I will have and that here (it) earth is present new it will again
borne them become,
se’-khé™ néngé™® agadi‘he’ oné™ awé™hai’ ne’ awé™ha‘hagi‘.”
for-it is this (it is) my standing now its flowers are that it (is) full of
tree sere (ripe) flowers.”
T’ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’s‘hagonakdot‘ha‘s, wa’hé™hén’, “Né™ hiid’
At that now he gave her a place, he said, “ Here verily
(time
gandkdo™ ne’ Is sanakd&’. Oné™ gai‘hwis tchigo™nigo™h’’ ne’
one has seta that thou thy mat it is. Now, it is a long I have watched for that
mat matter (time) thee
t‘honé™ aa‘sio™.”’ Tho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho! wa’ondiéh’. T*ho‘ge‘ oné™
here thou shouldst At that now there she seated herself. At that now
arrive.” (time) (time)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 623
ne’ hono™saié™ wa’hé™hén’, “Naie’ di’ oné™ &*gofiat‘hoié™ naie’
that he has a lodge he said, “That more- now I will tell thee that
(it is), over, (it is)
ne’ ge‘he’ é™sekhofnia’, nidie’ di’ é™s-
that I desire thou wilt prepare food, that (it more- thou
is) over
kdjisgonnié™’ ne’ o‘heia’da’, nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ &"sakhwais dé-
make mush forme that (it) chestnut, that more- that now (it) food will be thou
(itis) over cooked for thee
diadoft ne’ oné™ é"diadekhonnia’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’a‘hén’,
andIwilleat that now thou and I will feed At that now she said
together ourselves.” (time)
“Gaén‘ di’??’’ Tho‘ge’ wa’hé™hé™, “Sithdagwa ga‘nhoga‘héfda’
“Where, more- At that he said, ““Y onder-wards (it) is a doorway
over?” (time)
ne’t‘ho’ igaié" gagwegi tea’ nio™ é™sesdi’.’”’ T‘ho‘ge‘
there it lies all where so it is thou wilt use At that
much it? (time)
oné™ hwa’eio™ tea’ nofwe‘ ni‘hona’do™, oné™ di’ wa’egwa
now hence she where place just he indicated it, now more- she got it
entered over
ne’ ganad’djia’ dé"’se’ wa’end’djid‘haéh’, oné™ di’ wa’e‘hnegaéi
that (it) pot and she hung the pot, now more- she put water into it.
over
Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’o‘hnegadai‘hé™ha’, t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™
That more- that now (it) water became hot, at that now
(it is) over (time)
ne’ o‘heid’d&’ hwa’egwa’, oné™ wa’egedd’ ne’t‘ho’ wa’a’gok
that (it) chestnut hence she got it now she scraped it there she put it
in it.
ot‘he’tcha’ dfini‘. Ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ dawad‘sawé™ wa’wa‘dadofigwi’,
(it) meal shemadeit. At that (time) now it began it spluttered,
eia’di’ge‘s‘ho™ wa’owd’néndak ne’ odjisgwa’. Wa’e’skoida’nha’
along on her body it adhered that (it) mush. She was burned (scalded)
dé"’se’ goda’nigo™ha‘ni‘di‘. Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’agodjisgwais
and she hardened her mind. That (itis) more- that now (it) mush was cooked
over for her
- né
t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’ena’djianiiondaigwa’ dé"’se’ wa’d‘hén’, ‘“Oné™
at that now she unhung the pot and she said. “Now
(time)
ongekhwais.”” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ hono™saié” wa’hé™hén’, “Hot
eo is cooked At that (time) that he has the lodge he said, “What
‘or me.””
nonwa‘ho’dé™ diioi‘wa’ t‘hogé™ha‘ niiot ow’ sid’di’ge‘?”’ T‘ho‘ge
kind of nee itis the reason this (it is) soitis it adheres onthy body?” At that
toit (time)
ne’ eksa’gond‘ wa’a‘hén’, ‘‘Naie’ hia’ ne’t‘ho’ nwa’gaied’ ne’
that she, the maid she said, “That (itis) verily thus so it did it that
agekhonni‘na’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ hono™saié™” wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’
I was preparing food.”” At that (time) that he has the lodge he said, “That (it is)
hid’ 6"wado™ é6™swaddgewa’ ne’ agetchené™” nadie’ ae‘saganént.”
verily it will be it will again be that my slave(s) that (it is) they should
possible wiped off lick thee.’’
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ Awé™ha’ié wa’d‘hén’, ‘“‘Ne’t‘ho’ gw’ o
tee Now that Sere (Ripe) Flower she said, “Thus just, even, too
time
niilawe™ha‘.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™hno"k. Wa’oftgat‘hwa’
so let it cometopass.” At that (time) now he called them. She saw
deyodeno™hiani‘di‘ degigowané"’s. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’agoganént,
it is terrible they two are large. At that (time) now they licked her,
’
‘
,
624 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
nadie’ ne’ ne’t‘ho’ nigé™ niiono™hwakde’ ne’ aiénd’ ostwi‘hd,
that that thus (there) so it is far so it is painful that it would it is a little
(it is) seem
gwd’ oné™ dediagofino™do™. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ dagas’a‘da’. T‘ho‘ge‘
even now it compels her (to utter). At that (time) now it removed it all. At that
(just) (time)
oné™ wa’hé™hén’ ne’ hono™saié™’, ‘Niawé™ha‘’ tea’ oné™
now he said that he has the lodge “T am thankful where now
wa’ tchei‘héngo‘da’.”” T‘ho‘ge oné™ wa‘hiadekhofinia’. Naie,
thou hast put the matter At that (time) now they too feel themselves. That
through.” (it is)
di’ ne’ oné™ wa’hnikhwénda’nhd’ wa’hé™hén’ ne’ hono™saié”,
more- that now they finished eating he said that he has the lodge,
over
““Naie’ hiid’ ne’ wa’satgat‘hwa’ gé"dio‘gowané™ ne’ ga‘héfida’ge’,
“That verily that thou did it see (it) is alarge assembly that on the field
(it is)
naie’ ne’ tea’t‘ho’ ondé"tgado™ne”’, d陓ho"sdji‘gwa’egwi’;
that that actually they are about to amuse they will play at ball; ti
(it is) themselves,
é"yonk’nigo™heia’. Nadie’ di’ tea’ né"iawé™ha’; nadie’ tea
they will amuse me, That (itis) more- where so it will come that (it is) where
over to pass;
né“ionni‘s‘he’ é"iagodei‘hwik ’A‘gwif songa’ dé™snit‘haé™; doga’t
so it will last they will be assembled do not some one yettwowillconverse; if it so be
se’ songa’ 6™e‘sawénna’nha’, hid‘ de’oiane’ tea’ néawé™hd’.”’
indeed some one one will speak to thee, not it is good where so it will come
0 pass.
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™, oné™ ne’ na’ wa’t‘ho"sdji‘gwa’egwa’. Naie’
At that (time) now, now that the that they played at ball, That (it is)
di’ tea’ nwa’ofni‘s‘he’ hofiné™’nofyé”, oa’ gé"s ne’t‘ho’ saicio™
more- where so it lasted they are playing, other custom- there again one
over (it is) arily would come
ofdadwéfinaa’séhk, hiia’ de’awet dofdaiofdadia’. Nadie’ di’ nigé™
one repeatedly spoke to her, not it was possible she should reply. That (itis) more- SON is
over ar
oné™ wa’gai‘hwénda’nha’ oné™ dofsdioidogwa’. T‘ho‘geS néngé™
now (it) matter came to an end now again they dispersed. Then this (it is)
ne’ hénegwe' oné™ he’ dofda‘hai‘hofina‘d’’, wa’hé™hén’,
that he, a human now again thence he exhorted, he said,
“Ho hé™ nha’ ’a‘so™ he’ dé®diswe’.”’
“Tt will be day still again thence ye will come.”
Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’o‘hé™nhi’ oné™ he’ sa‘hodiid’daieik
That (it is) more- that now it became day now again again they assembled
over
gé"dio‘gowané™. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ he’ sa‘hofné™nonié”’, wa’t‘hons-
(it) body large (is). eh ve now again again they played, they played
ime.
?
dji‘gwa’egwi’.
at ball.
Naie’ di’? tea’ nigai‘hwis hofné™nonié™’ t‘ho‘ge oné™
That moreover where so (it) matter they played at that (time) now
(it is) (is) long
néngé™’ ne’ hono™saié’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘A‘sedji陓ha’ sigé™has
this (it is) that he has the lodge he said, “Thou shouldest go yonder (it is)
to fetch water
diio‘hnegitgén‘hwi‘.”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’e‘hwa’ ne’
(it) water comes forth.” At that (time) now she took it with her that
é"die‘hnegaa‘gwa’. Ne’t‘ho‘ néngé"’ wa’diiondongo‘da’ tea’ nofiwe‘
there she will put water in it. There this (it is) she passed by where place
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 625
gotga’de’. Hwa’eio™ tca’ nonwe‘ deganedodadye’, wa’ontgat‘hwa’
theyaremany. Thereshe arrived where place it—acelivity extends along she saw it
(foot of the hill),
ne’t‘ho‘ gwa’ diio‘hnegitgé™ i‘. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’edjié™da’ oné™
there just there it—water is At that (time) now she dipped it now
coming forth.
di’ dofidaio™défdia’. Tea’ dewa‘séino™ hon’ tea’ nigé™
more- thence she departed. Where (as) it isthe middle presumably where so it is far
over
na’dediagawenon‘ t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ s‘haia’dida‘ ne’ honné™ nonié™ha’
back she has come at that time now he is one person that they are playing
ne’t‘ho‘ nofida‘he’ tea’ nofwe‘ iyé™ wa’hé™hén’, “ A‘sat‘hofidat-khé™
there he came there where place she walks he said, ““Thou wouldst consent
to it wouldst thou
akhnegi‘hi’ ne’ s‘hawi’?”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ da‘hofio™ dé™’se’ oné"
I should drink that thou art At that now she gave it to and now
the water earrying?”’ (time) him
wa/ha‘hnegi‘ha’. Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’ha‘hnegakhwénda’nha’
he drank the water. Gen moreover that time (now) he finished eating the water
it is)
dofida‘s‘hagao™, wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Niawé™ha‘.” T*ho‘ge’ oné™
he gave it back to her he said, “Tam thankful.’”’ At that (time) now
daionidadia’, wa’a‘hén’, “Nio‘.” T‘ho‘ge’ wa’ago‘hnegondi’ ne’
she no ete spoke she said, “So be it.” At that (time) she poured away the water that
ack,
e‘hawina’, saiofikdd, dé"’se’ sdietci陓da’ ‘a‘se’ oid’. T*ho‘ge‘
she had been she went back, and again she dipped it new itisother. At that (time)
carrying,
oné™ he’ daio™déndia’. Nadie’ ne’ oné"™ honsaieio”’ t‘ho‘ge,
now again thence she departed. Thatitis that now again there she at that
(time) arrived (time)
néngé™ ne’ hono™saié™” wa’hé™hén’, “ Hiid‘ hid’ ne’t‘ho‘ de’saieé™
this (itis) that he has the lodge he said, “Not (it is), verily, thus thou hast done
tea’ agé™® hid’, “’A‘ewi' é"tchadadia’ ne’ som gwa’ nonwa‘ho’dé”
where Isaid verily, “Do not thou wilt speak that who just kind of thing
back (soever)
é"e‘sawénna’nha’.”’ T’ho‘ge’ néngé™ ne’ eksi’gond‘ agoigwe‘
one will address words to thee.’’ At that (time) this (it is) that she, the maid, she, the human,
wa’A‘hén’, “Oné™ gwa’ o‘ni’ hiia‘ ne’t‘ho‘ t‘hofsagied‘ ne’ oi&’.’’
she said, “Now just also not thus again I will do that it is
other.’”
T‘ho‘ge‘ néngé™ ne’ héngwe‘ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Naie’ di’ é*goniat‘hoié™.
At that this (it is) that he,a human he said, “That more- I will tell thee.
(time) (it is) over
Nadie’ hua’ ne’ ’a‘so™ de’agogwat‘hwi‘ ne’ sand‘ha’ ne’
That (itis), verily, that still (not) she has made a trip (here) that thy mother that
alei‘hwa‘hni‘da’ tea’ nwa’onni‘s‘he’ di‘saio™. Nadie’ di’ ’on‘
she should confirm the where so it has lapsed thou hast arrived That more- _ pre-
matter here. (it is) over sum-
ably
é"ioianénkhe’ ne’t‘ho‘ hé"tche’, 6" s‘heiat‘hoié™ nadie’ géhigwa’ skada‘
it will become good there ea than thou wilt tell her that (it is) only one (it is)
wilt go,
onakdoda’ ne’ oi‘hwa’ge‘ €"wado” tea’ wa’sei‘hwis’&’ oné™ hid‘
it has room that it-matter-on it will become where thou hast promised now not
it is valid
ne’ oid’ ne’t‘ho‘ t‘hofisa‘siei’ oi8’ tea’ nwe’saiéfiinawé™ha’.”’
that it is other thus again thusthou itisother where as thou hast acted (done).”’
wilt do
626 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
Ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ eksa’gond‘ wa’a‘hén’, ‘Ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ o’
At that (time) now that she, the maid she said, “Thus just too
né*gieii’. Ne’t‘ho’ hé"sge’ tea’ die’défi’ ne’ agno‘ha’.”
so I will do it. ‘There again I will go where coer ae that my mother.’?
abides
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ sadio™déndia’. Ne’ oné™ hofsaieio” wa’a‘hén’,
At that (time) now again she departed. That time there again she she said,
(now) arrived
“Naie’ ne’ né™ sgat‘hdia‘ne’ tea’ nwa’awé™ha’ tea’ nofwe‘
“That (itis) that thishere again Pea to where so it happened where the place
tell it
heei’dén’. Naie’ ne’ wa’gedjié™ ha’ tea’ nohwe‘
there I abide. That (it is) that I went to bring water where the place
diio‘hnegitgén‘hwi‘, nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’gedjié™da’ oné™
there it water comes forth, that more- that time (now) I dipped the water now
(it is) over
dondaga‘défdia’. Ne’t‘ho‘ di’ isge’ tea’ nofiwe‘ de‘hofnasdji‘gwa’e,
thence again I departed. There —more- erala where the place they are playing at ball,
over
walked
s‘haid’dada‘ di’ ne’t‘ho’ nofida‘he’ wa‘hakhnega’negé”’, t‘ho‘ge‘
he, one person moreover, there thence be came he begged of me the water, at that
(time)
da‘heio™, nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ wa’ha‘hnegi‘ha’ dofida‘hago™ tea’
Igaveittohim, that more- that time he drank the water thence again he where
(itis) over (now) gave me it
ga‘hnega’, t‘ho‘ge‘ wa’hé™hén’, ‘‘Niawé™ha‘.’”’ T‘ho‘ge’ one"
it water, At that he said, “T am thankful.’ At that (time) now
(time)
dagadadii’, wa’gi‘hén’, ‘“Nio‘.”” Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ sagiend’
I spoke back, I said, “So be it.’” That more- that time again I took
(it is) over (now) it
ne’t‘ho! gwi’ hofigadi’ ne’ o‘hneganos, dé"’se’ ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oid’
there just I threw it that it-water fresh, and at that (time) is
other
honsagedjié™ di’. Naie’ di’ ne’ oné"S honsaigio™ nadie’ néngé™ha‘
hence again I went to That more- that now there I again that this (it is)
dip water (itis) over returned (it is)
wa'hé™hén’, ‘Hid’ de’sai‘hwaieisdi‘ tea’ agé™, “’a‘gwi'
he said, “Not (it is) thou didst fulfill it where I said, “do not
é"tewéhnitgé™ nha‘ ne’ @™esawénna’nha’.”’ Naie’ gwa’t‘ho‘
thou wilt speak back that one will address thee. That (it is) next
wahé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ géfigwa’ onakdodd’ ne’t‘ho’ hé"tche’
he said, “That (it is) only it has room there there again
thou wilt go
é™s‘heyat‘hoyé™ ne’ sand‘ha’ ’a‘so™ hiya’ t‘honé™ t‘hayegwat‘ hwi’
thou wilt tell her that they mother stillnot verily here she has made a trip,
’a‘so™ oni’ de’agoi‘hwa‘hni‘di‘ tea’ t‘honé™ si’dén’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘
still not also she has confirmed the matter wherein here thou dust abide.’ At that (time)
oné™ ne’ goksten’a‘ wa’a‘hen’, “Dogé™s hia’ ongiad’das‘haié™ha’.
now that she, the ancient One _ she said, “Ttis true verily I have delayed too long.
Oné™ ne’ naie’ ageiénnénda’ii &gei‘hwa‘hni‘da’. Oné™
Now that that (it is) I have completed it I will confirm the matter. Now
(I have made it ready).
ne’ na’ née" ga’a‘shié™ ofhai‘gwa’ o‘hiadji’ degayesdi‘.
that the (that) here, (it) basket lies (it) bread huckleberries one mingled with it.
Oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho’ hé"ge’ ofisa‘he’nigo™ha‘séfnia’, nadie’ hiia’
Now moreover there I will go hence again I will satisfy his mind, that (it is) verily
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 627
wa’wa‘hetgé™nha’ ne’ ho’nigo™hi’. Nadie’ di’ on’ tea’
it became spoiled that his mind. That (itis) moreover presumably as
né"iawe™ha’, é™si’déidak. Hyde’ ne’t‘ho’ hé"kgwat‘hwa’.”
so it will happen, thou wilt continue First there I will make a trip hence.”
to abide (remain).
T‘ho‘geS oné™ wa’ont’A‘sige‘dat dé™se’ wa’o™dénidia’. Nadie’
At that (time) now She bore the basket by means and she departed. That
of the forehead strap (it is)
ne’ oné™ hwa’eio” tea’ nonwe’ hono™saié”’ ne’ Hodi‘he’ oné™
that now she arrived wherein the place his lodge lies, that HehasaStand- now
there ing Tree
ne’ gokstéi’aéé wa’a‘hén’, “Oné™ wi’gio™. Oné™ di’ khawi’,
that She, the she said, “Now I have arrived, Now more- I bring it,
Ancient One over
oné™ di’ é"gei‘hwa‘hni‘dé’ ne’ khe‘hawa‘ oné™ gadogé™ sni’dén’,”’
now more- I will confirm the matter that my girl-child now in one place ye two abide.”
over (together)
t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’e’a‘siié™ o‘héndo™higwa‘ tea’ hatgoda’.
At that now there she laid the basket frontwards wherein he sat.
(time)
T‘ho‘gef oné™ ne’ hono™saié’ wa’hada‘gwa? ne’ o‘hiidi‘gwa’
At that now that his lodge lies he took it out that (it) bread
(time) (he owns the lodge)
dé"se’ wa’h陓hén’, “Oné™ hiik’ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’. Oné™
and he said, “Now verily (it) matter is fulfilled. Now
gai‘hwis sie’nigo"hé’ ne’ gé"dyo‘gwa’. Nadie’ se’ ne’ gagwegi‘
it (is) along they expected it that the (it) body That actu- that (it) all
matter (time) people, of persons. (itis) ally
hé"iagoné™ da.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ di’
they will swallow it.” At that (time) now he said, “That (it is) more-
over
é"goniat‘hoié™, nadie’ ne’ s‘he‘hawa‘ ne’t‘ho’ hiid’ hetcié™’s tea’
I will tell thee, that that they offspring there verily again there she where
(it is) moves about in
da‘sa‘déndix’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ hé"tcio” t‘ho‘ge’ oné™
thence thou didst That more- that now there thou wilt at that time now
depart. (it is) over (time) again arrive
dé"dio™ déndia’. Naie’ di’ tea’ néMawé™*hi’. Agwas
fo]
she will depart thence. That (itis) more- wherein so it will happen Just
over (as) (be done).
dé"diontdagwai‘sia’da’, ’a‘gwi' katkd’ daieda’nha’.” Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘
she will come directly, donot any where she should stop.” At that (time)
oné™ wa hé™hén’, “Oné™ di’ = &"goniat‘hoyé”, oné"
now he said, “Now moreover I will tell thee, now
é"gofhe‘nofnié™, hé*tchiwa’, naie’ ne’ oo’ nis néngé™ha‘
I will make a bundle thou wilt take that (itis) that too the thou this (it is)
for thee, it home,
? ?
~?
hé"tchio™da’, t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ gagwegiS hé™iagoné™dd ne’ sofigwe’di’.
thou wilt have taken at that now all they will swallow it that thy people
it home there, (time)
Da, oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™, oné™ gagwegi’ &"ago’nigo™hiio’khe’.”
So, now at that (time) now, now all they will be pleased.””
T‘ho‘ge oné™ ne’ o’wa‘hi’ wa’hofidak ne’ ga’i‘siigofiwa‘, naie’
At that now _ that meat he putitinit that in the basket, that
(time) (it is)
ne’ o’wa‘hithé™, nadie’ néngé™ha’ ne’ oné™ wa’ga’d‘seik wa’-
that it is dried meat, that this (it is) that now it filled the basket he
(it is)
hé™hén’, “Oné™ e"tcha‘déndia’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ hé"tchio”’
said, “Now again thou wilt That more- that now again thou wilt
depart. (itis) over reach home
628 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ dédio™dendiad’ ne’ s‘he‘hawa‘, oné™ ne’ na’
or thet now she will depart thence that thy child, now that ( Ha
i that
hiia‘sté™’ de’djiodieé™, gagwegi‘ oiane’.”
not anything again it is done, all it is good.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ saiont’d‘sige‘dat, dé™se’ oné™ saio™déndia’.
At that now again she caused the basket and now again she departed.
(time) to be borne on her back by
the forehead strap,
vom
Naie’ ne’ oné™ hofsaieio™” wa’a‘hén’, “Gon‘hawa‘, oné™ gagwegi‘
That that now there she again she said, “My child, now all
(it is) arrived
sagel‘hwa‘sénnia’. Oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho’ hé"tche’.” T*ho‘ge’ oné™
again I have adjusted Now more- _ there again thou wilt At that now
the matter. over go hence.” (time)
saio™déndia’. Hua‘ ’ino™ t*he’agawenofi‘ oné™ gwa’ néig陓has
again she departed. Not far she had gone time just this (it is)
ne’t‘ho‘ hada’ ne’ héigwe‘, wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™-khé™ tcisat‘ha‘hine’,
there he stood that he (is) a he said, “Now is it thou art again
human, traveling back,
nadie’ ne’ ne™ degofiadiéd‘da‘ne’.”” Hiid‘ t‘ha’deiagoda’i‘, hiid‘ o’
that that this I come to meet thee.’’ Not she stopt, Not too
(it is)
de’diiagodadi‘. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’ofitgat‘hwi’, do™sa‘hatdeni’,
she spoke in reply. At tht (time) Now she looked, he transformed himself,
ské™hnaksé” sawado”™.
a Fox again it became.
Deiegii‘hi’ né™hiewa‘ nhwa’gadakhe’. Hiid‘ de’ino™
She had her yonder direction thither it ran. Not far (it is)
eyes on it
t‘he’agawenon’ oné™ he’ oi8’ sa‘hofwagé™ ne’t‘ho’ hada’
she had gone now again other again she saw him there he was
standing
o‘ha‘hakda’; t‘ho‘ge’ he’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ wa’didiadia’nhi’.
beside the at that again now he said, “Now thou and I meet
pathway; (time) each other.
?
wove
Is ne’ né™ degoniadéa‘da‘ne’.” Hua‘ e’ da’deiagoda’i‘, hiid‘ o‘ni’
Thou that here I come to meet thee.” Not again she did stop, not also
de’diagodadi‘. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ he’ wa’ofitgat‘hwa’ oné™ he’
did she speak in reply. At that (time) now again she saw it now again
dofisa‘hatdeni’. T‘ha‘hiofini’ ne’ na’ sawado”’. Deiega‘hi’ né“higwi'’
again he transformed Wolf that the again it She had her yonder direction
himself. that became. eyes on it
nhwa’gadakhe’. Hiia‘ ino™ t‘he’agawenofi‘ oné™ wa’onhdyé™ha’ gwd’
thither it ran. Not far she had gone time she was surprised
(it is) (now)
da‘he’ ha‘hada’ge‘s‘ho™”, wa’hofwayéfde’nha4’, nadie’ oné™ da‘he’
he is along on the pathway, she recognized him, that now he is
coming (it is) coming
ne’ t‘hono™saié™ tea’ nohwe‘ saiagawe‘di‘hadie’. Wa’t‘hiadaa’nha’,
that he owns the lodge wherein place again she is going towards. They two met,
t‘ho‘ge oné™ wa’hé"hén’, ‘Dawak’nigo™ga‘hé™ha’ hojisa‘sio™.
at that now he said, “Thence, my mind became troubled again thou shouldst
(time) arrive home.
Naie’ gai‘honnii‘ha’ dofdagoniadéa‘da‘na’.”’ Hiik‘ he’ da’deiagoda’i‘
That it causes it I come to meet thee.” Not again she stopped
(it is) \
dé™’se’ haii‘ o’ dediagodadi‘. T‘ho‘ge’ he’ oné™ wa’ofitgat‘hwa’
and not too she spoke in reply. At that(time) again now she saw it
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 629
dofsa‘hatdeni’, O‘gwai' sawado™. Deiega‘ha’ n陓haigwa‘’
again it transformed a Bear again it became. She had her eyes yonder direction
itself, on it
sagadakhe’. Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™ hofsaieio™, wa’d‘hén’, “Oné™
again it ran. That more- that now again she arrived she said, “Now
(it is) over home,
sagio”.” Tho‘gef ne’ hono™’saié™ wa’hé"hén’, ‘ Niiawé™ha‘,
again I have At that that he has the lodge he said, “T am thankful,
returned.” (time)
wa’tchadonfgo‘da’.”’
thou didst pass through it.’”’
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ e’dén’ gaéi‘gwa’’ nwa’gai‘hwis‘he’. Nadie’
At that now there she remained certain so it (was) long time. That
(time) (somewhat) (it is)
gé"s ne’ oné™ he’ wa’honnida’k nadie’ gé"s ne’ oné™ wa’hénnidagén’
custom-that time again they slept that custom- that now they lay down
arily (now) (itis) arily (time)
wi’ t‘hiad‘si’daik, nadie’ gé"s ne’ oné™ wa’hiatgé™hd’ nadie’ ne’ tca’
they two placed their that custom- that time they two arose; that that where
feet together, arily (it is) in
hiadonie’s dedjiaé™ degiaddiii’s. Dyén‘ha’egws’ oné™
they two breathed both they two met habitually. After a while time
habitually (now)
wa’agoia’daiéfidet‘he’ ne’ é"lagoksai’daiéfida’nha’. Nadie’ ne’ oné™
her body became noticeable that she will become possessed of a child. That that time
(it is)
ol hwakda’ oné™ é™agowidiéida’nha’’ oné™ ne’ hono™saié™
it (is) beside the now she will become possessed of a child now that he has the lodge
matter (time)
wa’ hé™hén’, “Ongii‘sé™diksén‘ha’. Naie’ di’ ge‘he’ aloigwéfni‘sak ;
he said, “T have dreamed a dream. That more- I desire one (they) should seek to
(it is) over it find my word;
nadie’ se’ ne’ deioi‘sé™ didogé™di‘.”” T*ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hadé™niodé™,
that soit that it is a designated dream.” At that now he made a feast,
(it is) is (time)
oné™ di’ wa’hofhwawénni‘sak. Wa’gai‘hwis‘he’ gagwegi‘ hon‘
now besides they sought to find his word. It (is) a long matter (time) all presume
ably
wa’honde’niéidé™ ne’ hénnongwe‘ dé"’se’ ne’ gondiio’. Hiia‘
they attempted it that they are humans and that they are Not
animals. (at all)
de’awet onda‘ho’nigo™hiio’khe’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ Ga‘ha‘syéndiet‘ha’
it is‘possible it could cause his mind to be At that now that It-Meteor (It casts light)
satisfied. (time)
Owii‘he’sda’ Ni‘haia’do’dé™ wa’hé™hén’, “I’ ’o™ké™ gade’niéidé™
it (is) white Such his body (is) he said, eer next in let me attempt it
kind of (it is) order
agonwénni‘sak. Hus‘ de’oi‘hwadogé™ naie’ daioga‘hi’ik ne’
I should seek to find Not it (is) a certain matter that its eyes touched it — that
thy word. (at all) (it is)
sadon‘he‘sé’ ne’ aiagwaéndodagwa’ ne’ sadéidoda’ ne’ Ono’djia’?”’
thy life that we should pull up the that thou didst set up that Tooth?’”
standing tree for thyself Tiger Lily
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ hodé™niod&’ wa‘hé™héa’, ‘Niiawé™ha‘. Oné™
At that now that he is giving the feast he said, “JT am thankful. Now
(time)
wa’gii‘hwayei’khe’ tea’ nigaie‘hd’ ne’ agei‘sé™da’. Oné™ di’
(it) matter, is fulfilled wherein so it acts that my dream. Now besides
(manifests itself)
é"gwat‘hoié’. Agwas éf’ tea’ agéino’do” wa’hadiéidodagwa’
I will tell you (plural). Just I thought wherein I knew it they pulled ne ue standing
re
,
?
630 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ema ANN ds
ne’ agadéndoda’ agwas wa’wado™hwéndjiawet‘ha’. Agwas én’
that I set tree standing just (it) earth tore itself open. Just I
for myself thought
tea’ agéhno™do™ LT’ dé”se’ ne’ deiagni‘ ne’t‘ho’ wa’agiadié™ tea’
where- I knew it I and that we two there we two seated wherein
in are one ourselves
odo™hwéndjiia’gi’, agwas ha’deyago‘si’dé’do"k o‘sadagonwi‘,
(it) earth broke itself off, just her feet hung down into the cavern,
ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ é"agiadekhofnia’ o‘sadagé™ hiada’ tea’
at that (time) now we two will feed ourselves at the edge of the cavern wherein
odo™hwéndjiia’gi’. Ne’t‘ho' niwagei‘sé™do’dé™; wa’gatgat‘hw2’
(it) earth broke itself off. Thus so my dream (is), kind of I saw it
oi‘hwagwegi tea’ néMawé™ha’.”’
(it) matter (is) wherein so it will come to pass.”
whole
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ héfinofgwe' gédio‘gowané™ hodiia’daie’%‘,
At that (time) now that they (are) humans (it) body large (is) they are assembled,
wahénni‘hén’, “Hau’ gi’si‘, oné™ wadei‘hwa‘défidia‘ tea’
they said, “Come, then, therefore, now let the matter start where
nigaie‘had’ ne’ sai‘sén‘da’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’hadiéidodagwi’
so it acts as that thy dream.” At that (time) now they pulled up the standing tree
ne’ hodénidoda’, wa’dio™hwéndjiofigo‘da’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
that he has set up for himself a tree, it made a passage through the earth. At that (time) now
wa’héfni‘héh’ ne’ héfinofgwe‘, ‘Oné™ wa’agwai‘hwaieisd&’ tea’
they said that they, humans, “Now we have fulfilled the matter where (as)
wr? ,
nonwa‘ho’dé” _ sai‘séii‘doiidakhw3’. Tho‘geS néfigé ne
kind of thing it causes thee to have dreams.” At that (time) this (it is) that
hono™saié™’, wa’hé"hén’, “Oné™ hid’ gagweei‘ ne’t‘ho! nwa’awe™hi’
he has a lodge he said, “Now _ verily all thus so it has come to pass
ne’ gai‘hwis’a‘sa’. Oné™ wa'wawé™haik ne’ agadé‘heda‘ewa’.
that it-matter is ordained. Now, it-flowers are sere (ripe) that I have had a standing tree.
Oné™ di’ gagwegi‘ dé"watdeni’ tca’ niga‘hw&’ ne’ t‘honé™
Now, moreover all it will change itself where asmuchasit holds that here
x ne n? 9)
o“hwéndjiide’, gagwegi’ ’a‘se’ é™swado™, T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
it-earth is present, all (itis) new again it will become.” At that time now
wa hé™hén’, “Oné™ di’ hia’ é"1agiiadekhoninia’ ne’ ofsadag陓hiada’.””
he said, “Now, more- verily, one and I will feed that at the edge of the cavern.”
over, ourselves
Tho‘ge’ oné™ gao™hwi’ ne’ Awé™hai‘ oné™ hwa’egwi’, dé"’se’
At that (time) now she, herself that Sere (Ripe) Flower now she got and
ne’t‘ho’ wa’ege‘héfi’ ne’ gakhwa’ akda’a‘ tea’ nofiwe‘
there she piled them that it-food nearby where the place
odo™hwéndjia’gi‘; oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho! wa’ondié” dese’ wa’ii‘hén’,
it-earth is broken through; now, moreover, there shesat herself down and she said,
“Oné™ gagwegi’ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’ tca’ nigaie‘ha’ ne’ sai‘séi‘da’.”
“Now, all it-matter has been fulfilled as so it acts that thy dream.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’hadiéi’ dé’se’ wa’hé™hén’, Onée™
At that now there he sat down and he said, “Now
gcagwegii wa’tga‘hén’nha’ tea’ nofwa‘ho’dé™ odei‘hwade’. Oné™
all it is filled as, where, kind of thing it-matter unsettled Now,
(to be done).
di’ nadie’ dé"diadoft ne’ gai‘hwis’a‘si’. Naie’ di’ ne’ oné™
more- that (itis) thouandIwill that it-matter is ordained. That (it is) more- that now
over eat together over
ne’t‘ho’ néTiawé™ha’ ne’ he‘da’ge‘ @"o0do"k ne’ t‘honé™
thus so it has come to that downward, it will have that here
pass beneath, become
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 631
é"diéino™donnio™”.” Ttho‘ge’ oné™ dofsa‘hada’nha’ dé?’se’
thou and I at think repeat- At that (time) now again he stood up and
edly.”
wa hé™hén’, “Oné™ wa’sa‘déndia’,”’ oné™ di’ wa’tchago‘tciaé™ dé™se’
he said, “Now — thou dost depart,” Now more- he shoved her and
over
oné™ ~~ -wa’eiad’dé™ nha’ tea’ o‘sadagonwa‘ tea’ nofiwe‘
now her body fell where it-cavern-in where the place
odo™hwéndjiia'gi’. T*ho‘ge’ oné™ dofnda‘hadiéidddé™.
it-earth is broken through. At that (time) now they again reset up the tree.
Naie’ di’ tea’ nigé™ ne’ oné™ wa’eid’dofdie’ ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™
That (itis) more- where soitis far that time (now) hence her body is at that (time) now
over in flight
wa hofiwagé™ ne’ Owi‘he’sd&’ Ni‘haid’do’dé™ ne’ Ga‘ha‘syéndiet‘ha’.
she saw him that it is white so his body is kind of that It casts flames (Fire-
Dragon).
Nadie’ wa’tchagoia’dano™nhagwa’, dé™se’ wa’hé™hén’, “One
Bae he caught her body (as it was in flight), and he said, “Now,
it is)
sat‘ha‘hine’. E®gofid’dage‘nha’ di’ tea’ niio™ é"kewénia’. Naie’
thou art traveling I will aid thee more- as soitis Iwill be ableto That (it is)
(art on thy way). over (where) much do it.
é*dioianén‘hwa’ tea’ niwage’s‘hasdé™s‘haié™ ne’ tgagonda’ a‘son‘hek
it will follow its course as so (much) I have power that byall means than shouldst
(where) be alive
ne’ oné™ he‘da’ge’ hé™sio™. Nadie’ diioi‘hwa&’ tea’ ne’t‘ho‘
that time (now) below therethouwilt arrive. That (itis) it is the reason fee (as) thus
(where)
né"awé™ha’ tea’ nadie’ hiidé’ I’ hagei‘hwas ne’ da‘hiaid’dé™ da’.
soit will come to where that (itis) verily I heaccuses meof that he cast thy body down.
the matter
Khawi’ di’ nadie’ &™son‘he‘ewik ne’ oné™ he™sio™ ne’ he‘da’ge‘.”
Iamcarry- more- that thouwiltliveon which that time therethou wilt that below.”
ing it over (it is) (now) arrive
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’ofitgat‘hwa’ ne’ oné™h’ dé"’se’ ne’ o’wa‘hi’
At that now she saw it that it-corn and that it-meat
(time)
dedjiaé™ ofhé™ ~ha‘hwa’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’eiena’. Oné™
both it is dry (dried) he held it. At that (time) now she took it. Now
di’? wa’hé™hén’, ‘“E®g¢of’déithna’ tea’ dewa‘séino™ nigé™
? = to}
more- he said, “T will accompany thee where it is the middle so it is distant
over
hé*kewat‘hwa’ tea’ nigé™ Is’i‘ wa’se’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™, oné™
I will make a trip where soitis thou per- thither thou At that (time) now, now
distant sonally art going.”
wa’ondongo‘da’. Hiidié de’ino™ nigé™ t‘he’agawenon oné™
she passed on. Not it isfar soit is distant she had gone now
ne’ na’ wa’hé™héa’, “T’honé™ géfigwd’ nigé™ nwa’kgwenia’
that the that he said, “Here (it is) only so it is distant so I am able to do it
wa’gonia’dage‘nhi’. Nadie’ di’ nadie’ ne’ s‘hawi’ ne’ ga’s‘hasdé"™sa’,
I aided thee. That more- that that thouart that it-potence,
(itis) over (it is) carrying it power
dyén‘ha’’gwi’ @"wado™ skéfino”™ t‘ha’dé™sadongo‘da’. Hiia‘
5D 5
if so it be it will be possible in weal thou wilt pass through it. Not
na’ de’gai‘hwis oné™ ne’t‘ho’ né"djiiawé™hd’ tea’ niiot tea’
the it is a long matter now thus so again it will come to pass as soitis where
(that) (where)
nofwe’ da‘sa‘déndia’.”” TSho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ na’ sa‘hakda’.
the place thence thou didst At that (time) now that the he turned back,
depart.” that
632 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Oné™ wa’ofdongo‘da’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ he‘da’ge’ onatga’de’
Now she passed on. That (it is) more- that below, beneath, they are
ver numerous
ne’ sowék h&’diiodi’sige‘’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ s‘haia’daida’ haid’da’
that ducks every they are kinds That (it is) more- that he is one person his body is
in number over present
nadie’ ne’ diiotgont he’tgé™ ha’de‘haga‘ha’. Dién‘hi’ewi’ oné™
that that always upwards he has his eyes fixed, After a while now
(it is)
wa’t‘ho‘héne‘da’, wa’ hé™hén’, “ Ajéna’ ongwe‘ he’tgé",
he shouted, he said, “Tt seems a human being above
daieiai’dondie’.”” TSho‘gef oné™ ne’ Ha‘howé™ wa’t‘ho‘héne‘da’,
thence Te body is At that (time) now that Loon he shouted,
falling.’’
wa’hé™hén’, ‘‘Djiat‘hadat, deietchiia’daa‘da‘, skénno™a’ déie’-
he said, “Do ye mount upwards, do ye meet her body slowly she
wy
déndin’ha’.” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ sowék wa’ tgondidé”’, wa’gont‘hadat
will alight.” At that now that duck(s) they flew, they raised them-
(time) selves,
he’tg陑 ne’t‘ho‘ wa’ tchagofinadaa‘da, nadie’ ne’ wa’tgondiia’dikha‘ho”
above there they met her, iat that they joined together their bodies
10 1S.
ne’ sowék, ne’t‘ho‘ge’ one™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’ondié™. Oné™ skéfino™ a‘
that duck(s), at that (time) now there she seated herself. Now slowly
he‘da’ge‘ hof‘sagofine’. Naie’ ne’ oné™ don‘sagonni’déida’nha’
down thence Sreta they That (it is) that now there again they alighted
went.
he‘dage‘ ne’t‘ho‘ niio‘di‘hadie’s, degondiia’dakha‘ho™ odi’sgo’gi‘ne’s,
below there thus soitremained moving their bodies severally joined they floated going from
about, place to place,
ne’t‘ho’ di’ etgodadie’s. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ Ha‘howé™ oné?,
there more-_ she sat going from At that now that Loon now
over place to place. (time)
wa’ t‘ho‘héne‘da’, wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ gaie’ nohdasne‘ gagweet.”” Tho'ge‘
he shouted he said, “Now hither thence do ye all.’” At that (time)
come
oné™ wa’hodiia’daieik gagwegi’. Oné™ ne’ Ha‘howé™ wa’hé™hén’,
now they assembled all. Now that Loon he said,
“Oné™ wa/ofigwaid’daieik, ne’ I’ diofigwadieé™di’ ongwaio™
“Now we have assembled, that we there we were the first we arrived
ne’ t‘honé™. Oné™ di’? wa’dwado™hwéfdjiok aiet‘hiia’dage‘nha
that here. Now morevoer it has become necessary we should aid her
ne’ degeni‘ ofido™t‘ha’ wa’eio”. Oné™ di’? é€"wadoda‘sia’ dod
that two (if is) she becomes she arrived. Now moreover it will manifest itself how
niiohewa’s‘hasdé™sa’s tea’ nidiio™ ne’ tgagofdd’ aiagon‘hek.
so our potence (is) large where so we number that by all means peehoul deen
Naie’ hiid’ dawadieé™ di’ wa’hai‘hwagwenia’ ne’ De‘haé™hiaga‘ha’
That verily it was the first he was able to do the that He looks at the sky, has
(it is) matter his eyes fixed on the sky
naie’ wa’s‘hagogé™ tchon—daieia’dondie’. Oné™ di’ sofiga’
ee he saw her while her body was falling hither. Now moreover someone
(it is,
thé™nigo™hedé™ hot né"dwaiedi’ 6%agon‘hek. Gaén‘ nofwe‘
let him devise a plan what so we will do she ie continue Where (it is) the place
ive,
nériet‘hi’dén’.” Tho‘gef oné™ wa’hofide’niéndé™ ne’ sowek-s‘ho™ a‘.
we will place her.’’ At that (time) now they attempted it that ducks-severally.
Hid’ de’hodigwenio™ a‘hon’nigo™hedé™ nha’. T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
Not they are able to to do it they should find an idea (mind). At that (time) that
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 633
Ha‘howé™ wa’hé™hén’, “Is o™ké™ &é™swade’niéndé™” ne’
Loon he said, “Thou next in turn ye will attempt it that
swagwenio™ ganohwagonwa de‘swadawéniek. Doga’t ’o™ké™
ye are able to doit in the depths (of water) ye continue to travel about. If next in turn
ae‘swatchénni’ hot naeswaiei’ ne’ aiagoid’dagadat.”
ye would find it how soyeshould doit that it should support her body.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’honde’niéndé™. Naie’ di’ ne’ Hano’gie‘
At that (time) now they attempted to do it. That (it is) moreover that Muskrat
wahé™hén’, “TI & gegwi‘ha’ ne’ o‘he‘da’ ganohwagonwii‘.
he said, “TI Iwill beabletogoforit that it-earth in the depths (of the water) ,
Naie’ di’ tea’ néMiawé™ha’. Dién‘ha’ewa’ &*kewenid’ dé*tkhawi’
That more- (where) so it will come to If it so be I will be able to thence I will
(it is) over as pass. o it bring it
é"iongwadiéa’s‘hwiio’khe’; ~—se’-khé™ ~e‘hawi’ ~~ se’—shhii&’—s nae’
it will render our luck good (pro- for-is it (not) she bears it actu- verily that (it is)
Pitious) ; with her ally
ne’ ga’s‘hasdé™sii’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne‘ Hano’gie’ wa’ha‘don-
that Be Doane’ (peel At that (time) now that Muskrat he dove (into
power).
wek. Wa’gai‘hwis‘he’. Oné™ gw’ sa‘hadia’da’eaiad‘ewd’
the It was a long matter. Now just again his body floated
water).
hawé™heya’stci‘hwe™. T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ Ha‘howé™ wa’hé™hén’,
he had already died. At that (time) that Loon he Said,
“Oné™ snikdo™ hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ nwaé’awé™ha’ tea’ hid‘
“Now do ye examine it what kind of thing so it came to pass where not
de’s‘hon‘he’.”” T‘ho‘gef ne’ Naga@ia’gi’ wa’hé™hén’, “T’ gwa’
he is again alive.” At that (time) that Beaver he said, ap just
o © ha’ ’onS gat‘hongaii’k.”’ Oné™ di’ wa‘hakdo” ne’
too verily presumably I will volunteer.” Now, moreover he examined it that
Hano’gie‘ dedjiaé™ hé™niogaé™hwa’ ne’ o‘he‘di’
Muskrat both he held pawful that it-earth
dé™’se’ ha‘sagonwa‘ tea’ nheionowé™ iS dega‘hén’ ne’ o‘he‘da’.
and in his mouth where it is as much as it is full that it-earth.
possible
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ Nagdaia’gi’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Hot nofwa‘ho’dé”
At that (time) that Beaver now he said, “What kind of thing
né"dwaieidi’ nadie’ ne’ né™ o‘he‘da’ ha‘hawi’ néngé™ ha‘ sa‘hayia’-
So we will do it ee that this it-earth he bears it this (it is) again his body
it is
da’gad‘ewi’?” Tho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ Ha‘howé™ wa’hé™nén’, “Hau’,
has floated?”’ At that (time) now that Loon he said, “Well,
oné™ songa’ hat‘hongaia’k nadie’ néngé™ha dé™ha‘gwa’dad’ ne’
now some one let him volunteer that (itis) this (it is) he will hold it up that
o‘he‘dd’ tea’ é"wado™ ne’t‘ho‘ éet‘hi’dén’ ne’ agofgwe‘.”’ T‘ho‘ge‘
it-earth where it will become there we will place her that she,a human (is).’’ ears
m
ne’ Nagaid’gi’ wa’hé™hén’, “I’ tgadieé™da‘ agade’niéndé™.”
that Beaver he said, OBt I will be the first I should attempt it.””
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ tea’ niio™ ha‘hawi’ ne’ Hano’gie‘ oné™ wa’hondeién-
At that now as so it is he bears it that Muskrat now they arranged it
(time) (where) much
nonnid’ ne’ o‘he‘da’, nadie’ ne’ oné® has‘ho‘ne‘ da‘hadi‘hén’ ne’
according to that it-earth, that (itis) that now on his back they placed it onit that
their skill
Nagaia’gi’. Niioi‘hwagwa‘ha‘ oné"* wa’hé™hén’, “Hua’ hé”
Beaver. So it-matter (is) short time he said, “Not I think
19078°—28——41
634 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
of’ t‘hakgwenidé swa’djik dé"’gi‘ oksde’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ sa‘hadi-
presum- I should be able because excessively it is At that now again they
ably to do it heavy.” (time)
hii‘gw’ ne’ o‘he‘da’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ nadie’ ’o™ké™ ne’ Hania‘dé™ gona‘
took itoff that it-earth. At that (time) now that (it is) mext in that He, Turtle Great (is)
order
wa’ hawénnitgé’ nha’ wa’hé™hén’, “T’ Von’ é"gade’niéndé™.”
he spoke he said, “T presumably I will attempt to do it.’’
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’hadi‘héf’ tea’ has‘ho‘ne‘ ne’ o‘he‘da’.
At that now there they placed it on it where on his back that it-earth,
(time)
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ néngé™ha‘ ne’ Hania‘dé™ gona‘ wa’hé™hén’, “Ne’t‘ho‘
At that now this (it is) that He, Turtle Great (is) he said, “There
(time)
ews’ o‘ni’ ha’degaiei’ é"*kgwenid’. Naie’ di’ tca’ néMawé™ha’.
just also it is enough I will be able to That (it is) more- where so it will come to
do it. over pass.
Diéi‘ha’ews’ 6"wadodiaka’ ne’ o‘he‘da’ ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ o’ nia,
If so it be it will grow in size that it-earth thus just too I per-
sonally
né"iawé™hi’ tea’ di’ né"iododi‘hadie’ ne’t‘ho‘ o’ ni’a‘ né"wagadddi‘-
so it will come to where move- so it will be growing thus, too, I per- so I will be growing.
pass over sonally
hadie’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ Ha‘howé™ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ hiid’
in size.” At that (time) now that Loon he said, “Now verily
‘on’ ne’t‘ho‘ nwe’dwagwenia’ ne’ diongwadat‘hénde‘di‘.” T‘ho‘ge‘
presum- there so we have been able to that we came as the first ones,” At that
ably do it (time)
oné™ ne’t‘ho’ oné™ wa’s‘hagoni’dén’ ne’ agohgwe‘. Oné™ ne
now there now they placed her that she, a human Now, that
(is).
Ha‘howé™ wa’he™hén’, “Oné™ wa’ewaiéinéfida’nha’,’”’ dé’se’
Loon he said, “Now we have finished our preparations and
for thee,’’
,
oné™ akda’a‘ nhofsa‘héfine’.
now elsewhere there again they went.
T‘ho‘ge’ néfigé™ha’ tea’ nonwe‘ niie’déi’ oné™ wa’wa‘siwé™
At that (time) this (it is) where the place thereshe abides now it began
ododi‘hadie’. Agwas t‘ho‘djik oné™* tea’ niio™hwéidjid’ oné™
it continued to Very “about right’? now where so it-earth (is) large now
grow.
wa’agoksa’diénda’nha’, ndie’ ne’ agofigwe‘ ne’ eksi’a‘. T*ho‘ge‘
she brought forth a child, that that she,ahuman, that she, a child, At that
(it is) is is. (time)
oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ deiago‘snye’ o‘snowe’ gododi‘hadie’. Hid‘ de’gai‘hwis
now there she attends toit it (is) rapid shecontinues togrow. Not _ it-matter is long
oné™ eksa’da‘se’a‘ wa’wado™ ne’ ofdat‘hawi‘. Nadie’ di’ tea’
now she, a maid, (is) it became that her offspring. That more- where
(it is) over
nwa’awe"ha’. Oné™ hid’ gé"s deiagodawénnie‘, gokdonniondie’s
so it came to pass. Now verily custom- she wanders about, she goes about examining
arily things
tea’ nio™hwéndjid’ tea’ nigninagee’. Wa’ ofdyén‘ha’gwa’
where so it-earth is large where there they two inhabit. She was surprised
ne‘t‘ho’ hada’ ne’ héfigwe’. Oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Hid~khe™
there he was that he,a human, is. Now he said, “Not-is it
standing
t‘ha‘sat‘hondat aioigniniakhe’? Aiéna’ sadongwe’di‘saks?” T‘ho‘ge‘
thou shouldst con- thou and I should It seems thou art looking for a At that
sent to it marry? person for yourself?” (time)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 635
oné™ wa’hofiwatgat‘hwa’ wa’egé™ dji’tgwa’ niio‘t ne’ ho‘séfnid’di‘,
now she looked at him she saw (it) yellow soitis that heis dressed with it
T‘ho‘gef oné™ wa’a‘hén’, “Hiid‘ t‘hoidagénno™do™. E™skheiat‘hoié”
At that now she said, “Not I will will it. I will first tell her
(time)
di’ hide’ ne’ agno‘ha’, niaie’ é&"diéino™do™.’ T*ho‘ge‘
more- first that my mother, that (it is) she will will it.” At that
over (time)
oné™ saio™déndia’. Ne’ oné™ hofisdieio™ wa’ai‘hén’, “Wa’hegé”
now again she departed. That time there seein she she said, “T saw him
arrive
ne’ héfgwe‘ si‘ nofwe‘ t‘hada&’. Hada‘héido"k daiohgniniakhe’.”
that he,a human, yon- the place there he is He is asking it he and I should marry.”
der standing.
T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ gokstéii’a‘ wa’a‘hén’, “Hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™ di’ wa’si‘hén’?’
At that that she, the she said, “What kind of thing more- thou didst say?’”
(time) Ancient One over
Wa’ehén’, egwa’ on “Gnotha’ é*diéno™do.” T‘ho‘ge‘
I said, just also, “My mother she will will it.” At that (time
ne’ Gokstén’a‘,wa’a‘hén’,““N aie’ gwa’ o‘ni’ da‘si‘hwaieit tea’ nwa’sied’.””
that she, the Ancient _ she said, “That just also thou didst fulfill (where) so thou didst
One (it is) the matter as do it.
Hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™ di’ ni‘haia’do’dé™ dé"’se’ hot nohwa‘ho’dén™ di’
What kind of thing more- such kind of body and what kind of thing more-
over (is) his over
ni‘hone’no’dé™ ne’ wa’hesgé™?”? Wa‘a‘hén’ ne’ eksa’di‘se’A‘,
such is his kind of that thou sawest him?” She said that she, the maiden,
raiment
“Hoia’dayé™sdié dé™se’ odji’tgwa’ ni‘hane’no’dé™.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
“His body is fine-looking and it-yellow (is) so his raiment (is) kind of.” At that that
(time)
Gokstén’a’ wa’d‘hén’, “Hid! gwa’ o’ t‘hagei‘hwa‘hni‘da‘. Ne’t‘ho‘
she, uae Ancient she said, “Not just too Iwill conse it (confirm There
ne it).
honsa‘se‘, €™si‘hén’ di’ ‘Hiid‘ de’agogaie™i'.’”’ T*ho‘ge’ ne’
thence again thouwiltsay more- “Not she consented to it’.”” At that (time) that
do thou go, over,
eksa’da‘se’i‘ ne’t‘ho‘ hofisaié™. Ne’ oné™ hofisdieio™ tea’ nonwe‘
she, the maiden there thence again That time thence again she where the place
she went. arrived
t‘hadd’ wa’d‘hén’, ‘Hila’ de’agogaié™i‘.””. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ — dofisa‘-
there he is she said, “Not she consented to it.’’ At that (time) now he again
standing
hatga‘hadeni’, dé™se’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Hild’ gw’ o’ naie’ sté™”
turned about, and he said, “Not just. too that (it is) Buy:
thing
dewak’nigo™he’dé™.”’ Oné™ wa’ontgat‘hwa’ donsa‘hatdeni’, hiid‘
I have kind of mind (about it).”’ Now she saw he again transformed not
himself
na’ ofigwes de’gé™, ské™hnadksé™ sawado™”. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
(as ) a human being it is, Fox again it became. At that (time) now
that
siio™déndia’. Doga’a‘ niwéfidige’ oné™ he’ dof‘sdiioidawéinye‘sa’,
againshewenthome. Few (itis) somanydaysin now again again she went to travel about
number
gokdonfiniondie’s tea’ nigé™ niyot‘hnego’kdadie’. Wa’ondyén’ha’gwa’
she went examining where soit is it-water-ends-along. She was surprised
severally far
ne’t‘ho’ gw’ hatgod&’ ne’ héfigwe‘, oné™ ne’ na’ wa’hé™hén’,
there just he sat that he, a human, now that the that he said,
“Nien? sa’dongwe’di‘saks. A‘sat‘hofidat-khé™ ne’
“Tt seems thou art looking for a person. Thou shouldst consent—wouldst thou that
636 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
alongniniakhe’?”’ Wa’ shen’, “Gno‘ha’ é*diéino™do™,.
thou and I should marry?” She said, “My mother, she will will it.
E*sgat‘hoidi‘na’ di’ hide’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’honwatgat‘hwa’
I will again go to tell moreover first in At that (time) now she looked at him
her order.””
wa’egé™ deio’gé™hia’ gi‘ ni‘hane’no’dé™ dé"’se’
she saw it it (is) gray such his kind of raiment (is) and
hotgo’djiofinia‘han’ o‘sofida’ niio‘t. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ saio™déndia’.
he has painted himself (face it-black (is) soitis. At that (time) now again she departed.
and body)
Ne’ oné™ hofisdieio” wa’ad‘hén’, ‘wa’hegé™” ne’ héngwe‘, si‘
That time there again she she said, - “T saw him that he, a human, is, yon-
arrived der
nonwe’ t‘hatgoda’. Hada‘héido"k aiofgniniakhe’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’
the place there he is He is asking he and I should marry.’”’ At that (time) that
sitting.
gvokstén’s’ wa’d‘hén’, “Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ di wa’si‘hén’?” T‘ho‘ge‘
she, the Ancient she said, “What kind of thing more- thoudidst say?” At that
One over (time)
ne’ eksa’da‘se“i‘ wa’d‘hén’, ‘“Wa’gi‘héf’, gno‘ha’ nie’
that she, the maiden, she said, “T said, my mother that (it is)
m9)
é"diéino™do™.” T*ho‘ge’ ne’ Gokstén’a‘ wa’a‘hén’, ‘Nadie’ gwa’
she will will it.” At that that she, the Ancient she said, “That (itis) just
(time) One
oni’ ~— da‘si‘hwaieit tea’ nwi’siei’. Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ di’
also _ thous didst fulfill the matter as so thou didst doit. What kind of thing more-
over
ni‘hane’no’dé™ ne’ wa’hesgé"™?”? Wa’ad‘hén’ tea’ daiei‘hwa’sigwa’,
such his raiment (is) that thous didst see him?” She said where she replied,
kind of
“Deio’gé™ hia’ gi ni‘hane’no’dé™ dé™se’ —hotgo’djionnia‘han’
It (is) gray such his raiment (is) kind of and he has painted his (face and body(
o‘sonda’ niio‘t.”” T*ho‘geS oné™ ne’ gokstén’a&’ wa’a‘hén’, “Hiia‘
it-black (is) soitis.”’ Atthat (time) now that she, ae Ancient she said, “Not
ne
gw’ oni’ t‘hagei‘hwa‘hni‘da‘’. Ne’t‘ho’ di’ hofisa‘se’ dé"’se’
just also I will consent to it. There moreover there again and
go thou
é“si‘hén’, ‘Hild’ iagé™” t*hayei‘hwa‘hnida*‘.’ ” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne
thou wilt say, ‘Not, one says she will consent to it.’ ”” At that (time) that
eksa’di‘se’S‘ ne’t‘ho’ hon‘saié™ tea’ t‘hatgoda’. Hofisaieio™ dé"’se’
she, the maiden there there again she where there he is There again she and
went sitting. arrived
wa’i‘hén’, “Hiid’ de’agoi‘hwa‘hni‘dié ne’ agno‘ha’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘
she said, “Not she consented to it that my mother.” At that (time)
ne’ héigwe’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Hild’ hiid’ on’ sté™ de’odieé™ tea’
that he, a human, he said, “Not (itis), verily, presum- any- it is done where
ably thing
nwi’awé™ha’.”” Tho‘ge’ oné™ dofi‘sa‘hatga‘hadeni’ dé™se’ oné™
,
so it has come to pass.’’ At that now he formed himself again and now
(time)
di’ dofi‘sa‘hatdeni’. Djo’ediga’k wa’wado™”. T‘ho‘ge oné™ he’
more- he again transformed Raccoon it became. At that (time) now again
over himself.
salo™ défdia’.
again she went home.
Do gw’ niwéidiage’ oné™ he’ sdieiagé™ nha’ wa’eiéidigwa‘ha’.
Some just so many it—days now again again she went out she went to bring wood
(How (are) in number (fuel).
many)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 637
Naie’ di’ tea’ nonwe‘ hwa’eiéidagwa’ wa’oft‘he‘nofinia’. Agwas
That more- where the place there she got the wood she made herself a bundle Very
(it is) over (fuel) of it. (Just as
oné™ wa’o"t‘he‘nis’’’ oné™ gw’ wa'hdio” ne’ héfgwe'
now she finished her bundle now just he arrived that he, (is) a
human,
wa hé™hén’ di’, “A‘sat‘honidat-khé™ ne’ I’ agé*k adiofigniniakhe’?”’
he said more- ‘Thou shouldst con- wouldst that I it would be thou and I should
over, sent to it thou marry?”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hofiwatgat‘hwa’ tea’ ne’t‘ho’ niio‘t ne’
At that now she looked at him where thus (there) so it is that
(time)
hodia’datgi’ dé™’se’ ne’ ho‘hii’ ~—ono’sga‘hedji’s_ deiot‘hwa-
his body is filthy and that he has it as it (is) long-pointed it goes all
(ugly) : a cover scallops fringed
da‘se’di‘. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’d‘hén’, “Huds ni’ tthon-
about it. At that now she said, “Not, the (1) Iwill
(time)
dagéfino™do".‘ E*kheiat‘hoié"’ ne’ agno‘ha’, nadie’ é"diéino™do™.”
will it. I will tell her that my mother, that She will will it.”
(it is)
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ saiont‘he‘nage‘dat, dé"’se’ oné"* saio™déndia’. Ne’
At that Now again she put the bundle on and now again she departed. That
(time) her back bearing by the
forehead strap”’
oné™ honfsaieio™ wa’a‘hén’, “Wa’hegé™ ne’ héngwe‘ si nonwe' t‘hada’.
time there she again * she said, “Tsaw him that he, a human yon- the places there he is
arrived der standing.
Dogé"s hodiad’datgi’ dé™’se’ dega‘hwa‘sdwané"’s ne’ ho‘sénnia’di‘
Truly his body (is) and it has wide-edged seams that he is dressed
filthy (ugly) with it
dé"se’ ne’ ho‘hii’ ono’sga‘hedji’s deiot‘hwada‘se’di‘, i‘hado"k
and that he has it its scallops (are) long it goes all about it, he says
as a cover
aiofigniniakhe’.”” T‘ho‘-ge‘ ne’ = gokstén’a‘ —s wa’a‘hén’, ““Hot
he and I should marry.” At that that she, the An- she said, “What
(time) cient One
nofwa‘ho’dé™ wa’si‘hén’?’”? T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ eksa’da‘se’a’ wa’a‘hén’,
kind of thing thou didst say?’’ At that that she, the maiden she said,
(time)
“Wa’gihén’, gno‘ha’ naie’ é"diéhino™do”’.”” T*ho‘ge‘ ne’ Gokstén’a‘
“T said, mymother that she will it will.” At that that she, the An-
(it is) (time) cient One
waihén’, ‘“Gon‘hawia‘, wa’siihwagwenia’ hii’. Nadie’ hia’
she said, “My offspring, thou didst accomplish verily. That verily
the matter (it is)
t‘hogé™ha‘ héngwe‘ nadie’ ne’ tea’t‘ho’ hiya‘ de’hogé™hé™. Oné"
that (it is) he, the that that So it is not he is ordinary person Now
human (it) is) (has power).
di’ wa’gei‘hwa‘hni‘da’. Oné"™ di’ wa’hedji‘hno’k.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
more Taccept, confirm, the Now, more- go thou and fetch him.” At that now
over matter. over (time)
, ,
ne’t‘ho’ nhofisaié™ tea’ nofwe’ t’hada’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™
there thither again where the place there he is That more- that now
she goes standing. (it is) over
hofisaieio™ wa’s‘hén’, “Wa’ei‘hwa‘hni‘da’ ne’ agno‘ha’. Oné™ di’
) D
there again she she said, “She confirmed, accepted that my mother. Now more
arrived the matter over
gofi‘hno"kse’, oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho’ hé™se’ tea’ nonwe* diiagni’dén’.”
I come to fetch thee, Now more- there thou wilt where the place she and I abide.”
over go
638 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
Tho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™héi’ ne’ héngwe‘, ‘Hiya’ hoi‘ ne’t‘ho‘
At that now she said that he, a “Not presum- thus
(time) human, ably
t‘hdiawé™ ha‘ ne’ gondadie’ onsedne’. Naie’ hide’ ne’ hé"skewat‘hwa’
it should occur that itisinstant again thou That first in that again I will make
(at once) and I should (it is) order a trip there
go together.
tea’ nonwe’ dwaga‘déndion’. Tea’ nigé™ é"vadadeiéinénida’nha’
where the place thence I have departed. Where so it is I will finish my preparations
distant
t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ hé"ge’, hé"gnino™sowé™’nha’. Naie’ di’
At that now there I will go, there I will find the lodge That more-
(time) of you two. (it is) over
é"goniat*hoié™ ne’ hiid‘ ne’t‘ho‘ t‘hagadié™ tea’ noiwe* disnino™saié™.
I will tell thee that not there I will remain where the place there ye two have
a lodge.
Génews’ hé*kewat‘hwa’ ne’ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ hé®ge’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
Only I will make a trip that time there I will go.” At that Now
siio™ déndid’ dé™’se’ ne’ on&" hofisaieio™” ne’ Gokstén’a wa’a‘hén’,
again she departed and that time there again she that she, the An- she said,”
arrived cient One
“Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ nwa’awé™ha’ hiya‘ de’djisne’?”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’
“What kind of thing so it occurred not ye two came At that that
together?”’ (time)
eksa’da‘se’i‘ wa’d‘hén’, ‘“Sa‘ha‘déidia’. Ne’t‘ho’ iagé™” hide’
she, the maiden she said, “ Again he went There one first in
home. a said, order
hé"s‘hagwat‘hwi’ tea’ nofwe' t*ho‘défidio™. Ganio’ iagé™
again he will make a trip where the place thence he departed. So soon as, one says,
é™hadadeiénnénda’nha’ t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ de"t‘he’. Hiya‘ iagé™’ t‘honé™
he will complete his preparations At that Now he will Not, one here
(time) come says,
hither.
t‘ha‘hadié™. Agwasiagé™ naie’ géngwa’ ne’ t‘honé™ é™“hagwat‘hwa’.”
he should stay. Just, one says, ee only that here he will make a trip.”
it is)
T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ Gokstéfi’a‘ wa’i‘hén’, ‘“Naie’ hiid’ tchi-gado"k hiya‘
At that that she, the An- she said, “That verily while I am saying not
(time) cient One (it is)
tea’t‘ho’ de’hogé™hé™. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ gni’nigo™ha’ hwéido™ gwa’
actually he is an ordinary At that Now they two (fem.) when just
person. (time) watched for it
陓hayo™. Agwas di’ oné™ deio’gas oné™ wa’giéino™hwet‘ha’.
5 5
he will arrive. Just moie- now it is grow- now they two (fem.) retired
over ing dark for the night.
Hi‘sa’ gw’ wa’ofinidagéh’ oné™ gwa’ da‘haio™ dé™se’ wa’hé™hén’,
Not long just she lay down Now just he came in and he said.
(time)
“Oné™ wa’gio™. Niie’ di’ é*gofiat‘hoyé™ tea’ néMawé™hi’. Naie’
“Now T have ar- That more- I will tell thee where so it will come That
rived. (it is) over to pass. (it is)
ne’ Sgatga’k tchoné™ &"eaiéndadk ne’ akhesga’ tea’ niwa‘sondis.
that I will leave it here it will remain that my arrow as soit night (is) long.
E%o‘hé’ nha’ 6™ge‘djik dé"tgegwa‘he’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ wa’ontgat*hwa’
It will become day early in the I will come for it.” At that she saw it
morning (time)
degeni‘ ne’ ga‘hesga’ ha‘hwa’, sgad&i wa‘hae‘ha’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’
two (itis) that it-arrow he held it, one(itis) it has a flint- At that now that
point. (time)
vy)
hiid’ st®™ de’o‘ha’ wa’hadagwai‘siongwa’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ tea’ edagi’
not any- it has as he straightened out repeatedly. At that now where she lay
thing a point (time)
,
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 639
eid’di’ge’ ne’t‘ho’ wa’ha‘hén’, wa’t‘haidinegén’ ne’ ga‘hesga’. T‘ho‘ge‘
> ? So D t=) to}
on her body there he laid it on it, he laid the two that it-arrow, At that
together (time)
oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Ne’t‘ho’ né™io‘dik tea’ niwa‘sofdis. ’A‘gwi'
Now he said, “Thus so it will be as so it-night (is) Do not
long.
hé"tega’teid’ tea’ nigé™ 1? détge’, oné™ I’ &*kea’teia’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘
thou again re- where soitis I ILwillcome, time I I will remove it.” At that
move it distant (time)
oné™ sa‘ha‘déndia’. Naie’ di ne’ oné™ wa’o‘he®’nha’ éni’ge‘djik
now again he departed. That more- that time it became day early in the
(itis) over morning
oné™ he’ sd‘haio™’ dé™’se’ oné™ sa‘ha‘higwa’ ne’ ga‘hesga’,
now again again bear. and _ none again he took it off that it-arrow,
rive
oné™ di’ sa‘ha‘déndia’.
now, more- again he departed.
over
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ eksa’da‘se’a‘ oné™ wa’oftdogd’ tea’ oné™
ay now that she, the maiden now she noticed it where now
time)
gwd’ oi4’ niio‘t tea’ agon‘he’. Oné™ ne’ na’ ne’ Gokstén’a*‘
just itother soitis where she is alive. Now that the that she, the An-
(is) (that) cient One
wa a‘hén’, “Wa ongiadaa’s‘hwiyo ’khe’. Naie’ hia’
she said, “We have good fortune. That verily
(it is)
énsaksa’dayénda’nha’.” Hid’ de’oi‘hwis‘he’if oné™ isowa’ oné™
thou wild bear a child.” Not it-matter is long time much now
(it is)
goid’daiénidet tea’ goks&’daiéfida’se’. Oné™ got‘honde’ t‘hodit‘ha’
her body (is) where _ she is going to bear a child. Now she heard it they talked
noticeable together there
eid’dagonwa‘, i‘hado"k, ‘Hot nofiwa‘ho’dé"’ né™sadiedi’ ne
in her body, he said, “What kind of thing so thou wilt do that
with thyself
oné™ dé™sadawéfnie’ ne’ t‘honé™ tca’ nofwe’ né"diéinagidt?”
time thou wilt travel that here where the place thou and I will be
born (inhabit)?”’
Tho‘ge’ = néngé™ has s‘haia’dada‘ wa hé™hén’, “Ongwe'
At that this (it is) he, one person he said, “Man,
(time) Humans,
é"kheiéfinagiisda’, gofdiio’ o‘ni’, naie’ o‘ni’ é*kheiéinagiiiisd’’
I will cause them to dwell, they, ani- also, that also I will cause them to]
mals, (it is) (inhabitat) be born
dé"’se’ &"ge‘séinidi’ ne’ @"iagon‘he‘gwik ne’ ofigwe‘ dé"’se’ ne’
and I will make it that one will live habit- that man, and that
ually by it humans,
gofidiio’ 6"gofinon‘he‘gwik tea’ o™hwéndjiade’ dé"’se’ tea’ niio™
they, ani- they will live habitu- where it-earth (is) present and where soitis
mals ally by it much
éjodonnik @"ganiiont‘hak, nadie’ é"iago’nigo™hiiosda‘gwik ne’
it will be it will bear habitually, that it will make one’s mind that
grown up (it is) contented by it
ohgwe' éofinagidit tea’ o™hwéndjidde’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné
man, they will (inhabit) where it-earth (is) present,”’ At that now
humans, be born (time)
got‘honde’ wa'hé™hén’, “Oné™ di’ é*gofia‘héndo™ hot
she heard it he said, “Now, more- I will ask thee what
over,
nonhwa‘ho’dé™ nis né™sadiedi’ ne’ oné™ &"diéinagiait?’’ Tho‘ge‘
kind of thing the sothou wiltdo that time thou and I will be born At that
thou with thyself (inhabit)?”’ (time)
pT
?
,
640 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH. ANN. 43
ne’ s‘haia’dadaié wa’hé™hén’, “E"gade’niéhdé™ 0’ ni’a’ ne’t‘ho‘
that he, one person he said, “T will try it too the I per- thus
sonally
o’ ni’i‘ né"gied’ tca’ ne’ nis’&‘ ni‘sied‘ne’. Doga’t hiya‘
too thel so I will where that the thou so thou art If not
person- do it person- about to
ally ally do it.
t‘hakgwenia‘ ne’t‘ho‘ nagiedé’ 014’ gwa’ o‘ni’ né"tgei‘hwaiei’da’.
I should be able thus so Hshould it-other just also so I will attempt it.
o it (is)
Tgagonda’ o’ ni’ é"wagel‘hwayéndak ne’ o“hwéndjia’ge’.”’ T’ho‘ge‘
By too the I will have a matter that on the earth.” At that
I (time)
oné™ got‘honde’ det‘hodit‘ha’ i‘hado"k, “Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™”
now she heard it they too con- he says, “What kind of thing
versed thence
né"yawé™ha’. Oné™ ne’ né™ wa’ga‘he’g oné™ é"dniyagé™ nha’.
so it will happen. Now that here it has arrived now thou and I will
(is time) emerge hence.
Sof nofwa‘ho’dé” é6™ha‘hént?” T‘ho‘ge’ di’ oné™ got‘hofide’
Who kind of thing he will take the At that besides now she heard it
lead?’’ (time)
s‘hayé’dada‘ wa’hé™hén’, “Is gwa’ o‘ni’ é@"s‘hént. Nén‘
that he one person (is) he said, “Thou just also thou wilt Here
take the lead.
sw?
ne’ I’ tihoné™ nia géfigwa’ t‘ha’dé"kdogé™di’, t‘honé™
that I here I per- only I will go direct, here
son-
ally
deyo‘hat‘he‘hénk. Ne’t‘ho’ ne’ ni’i‘ nofiwe’ é"giagé™da‘k.”
it is light in places. There that I per- place I will use it to
sonally emerge.””
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ s‘haya’dada‘ got‘hofide’ wa’hé™hén’, “Hiya‘ naye’
At that that he (is) one person she heard it he said, “Not (at that
(time) all)
t‘hayoyanén‘ha’ ne’t‘ho‘ na‘sied’ tea’ nisa’nigo™he’dé™. E™s‘heyo’
it would become good thus so thou as so thy mind (is) kind of. Thou wilt
shouldst do kill her
na’ ne’ et‘hino‘ha’.”” Oné™ di’ got‘honide’ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™
the that our (two) Now besides _ she heard it he said, “Now
(that) mother.”
ewa’ o’ ni’a’ hé"giagé™nhd’.”? Tho‘ge’ oné™, oné™ ne’ na’
fon] to} t=} fo} ?
just too I per- I will emerge.” At that now, now that the
sonally (time) that
wa‘héfinagiéit. Hiya’ de’oi‘hwis‘he’if oné™ gwa’ e‘nho™dagonwa‘
he was born. Not it (is) long time now just in her armpit
(matter)
ne’t‘ho‘ nofwe‘ da‘hayagé™nha’ s‘haya’dada‘. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
there place he emerged he (is) one Then now
person.
ne’ wa’agoksa’dayéfda’nha’ oné™ ne’ naye’ wa’ai‘heya’. T‘ho‘ge‘
that she became possessed offspring now _ that. that she died. At that
(it is) (time)
ne’ Gokstén’a’ oné™ wa’t‘hofiwadiya’da‘gwi’ ne’ de‘hniksa’a‘,
that she, the An- now she took up the bodies that they two male
cient One, children
wa’t‘hoiwadi‘snye’nha’, ganakdagohiwa‘ hagwadi‘ wa’hoiwénni’dén’.
she cared for them, under the mat side of it she placed them.
T*ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ ofdat‘hawa‘ goyeé™da’ wa’die‘syne’nhi’. Tea’
At thet now that her offspring her flesh she cared for it. Wherein
ime)
hagwadi‘ hedjio‘sgofida’ tea’ nonwe‘ niionadasgwi‘hi’ ne’t‘ho‘
side of it it has another stoop wherein place they have a bark lodge there
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 641
’ 5]
ne’ na’ nonwe’ hwa’eié”’ ne’ oieé’dd’ ne’ go‘hawa‘-ké™ha’.
that the the place there she that it-flesh that her offspring-it was.
that laid it
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ Gokstén’aé wa’d‘hén’, “Was‘hé™ niwéfdige’ oné™
At that that she, the Ancient she said, “Ten so many days now
(time) One are in number
é"djiontg陓ha’. Ha’degayei’ oné™ dé™hnigowané"ks ne’
again she will arise. It is quite sufficient time they two (masc.) will be that
- large
goksa’da’s‘ho™’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ — néngé™ de‘hniksa’3‘ o‘snowe’
her children.” At that this (it is) they two it rapid (is)
(time) children
honnadodi‘hadie’. Doga’a‘ niwéidage‘ oné™ tche’gwi’ wa’wado™
they kept increasing in Few (are) so many days now already it was possible
size. (are) in number
wa’t‘hadit‘haé™ ne’ Gokstéi’a‘ ne’ hodi‘sdda‘. T‘ho‘ge’ néfigé™ ne’
they conversed that she,the Ancient that their grand- At that this (itis) that
One mother. (time)
Gokstén’a’ wa’a‘hén’, “Tciéino™do"’-khé™ gaéit non’ (wes)
she, the Ancient she said, “ve two know it-do ye whence the place
One
nidi‘snenof, gaéi‘ o‘ni’ nofwe’ hé"dji‘sne’ ne’ hwéndo™ gwa’ ne’
thence ye two whence also the place thither yetwo that when just that
came, will go
oné™ hé"djidjia‘déndia’?” T‘ho‘ge‘ néngé™ ne’ s‘haia’dada‘ da‘hadadia’
now hence again ye two will At that this (it is) that he, one person thence he sopke
depart?” (time)
wa’hé™hén’, “Agéfino™do” ni’d tea’ nonwe‘ nidiiohgwenon‘.
he said, “T know it the I where the place thence we have come.
personally
Nadie’ hiid’ tea’ gaé™hiade’ he’tgé™ hagwadi‘ ne’t‘ho‘
That verily where it-sky (is) present above side of it there
(it is)
diio™hwéndjiade’. Hua‘ di’ n’ t‘hawak’nigo™hé™h2’,
there it-earth (is) present. Not more- the I I should forget it,
over
é"gienawa’kho"k ni’ tea’ nonwe’ dwage‘di‘. Nadie’ ne’ oné™
I will hold it severally theI where the place thence I came. ae that (time)
it is)
hé"ga‘he’g 6™sga‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ oni’ hé"sge’ tea’ nonwe‘
5 tod
it will arrive (it again I will depart there just also there I will where the place
will be time) again go
diiongwa‘déndion’.”” T*ho‘ge‘ ne’ ho‘sod&‘ wa’ahén’, ‘ Dogé's
thence we have departed.” At that that his grand- she said, “Truly,
(time) mother
hiid’ séino™do™ olfhwagweet'. Naie’ di’ hua’ ne’
5 5
verily, thou knowest it it-matters entire That more- verily that
(whole). (it is) over
é*gonna’do™gwa’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ (De‘ha陓hiawa’kho®’). Naie’
I will use it to name thee He holds the sky in (two places). aes
it is)
diioi‘hwa’ ne’t‘ho’ né"iawé™ha’ tea’ gadogé™ nis niio‘t ne’
5 5
it is the reason thus so it will come to where it is constant the so it is that
pass thou
sa’nigo™ha’ tea’ niio‘t ne’ ha‘sd’ tehof-daga‘déndia’.”” T*ho‘ge‘
thy mind where soitis that just now (while) thence I departed.” At that
(time)
oné™, ne’ s‘haid’dada‘ nadie’ o™ké™ wa‘honiwa‘hénido™. wa’a‘hén,
now that he, one person that next in she asked him, she said,
(it is) turn ‘
“Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ nis’df niio‘t ne’ sa’nigo™ha’?” T‘ho‘ge‘
“What kind of thing the thou soitis that they mind?” At that
personally (time)
642 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
da‘hadadia’ wa’hé™hén’, “Has ni’a’ naie’ de’géino™donnio™k
he replied he said, “Not the I that I am thinking about it
personally (it is)
tea’ nonwe’ nidwagenon‘. Hid’ oni’ na’ de’géfino™donnio™k
where _ the place thence I have Not also the I do think repeatedly.
come. that
gaéh’ nonwef nho™sage’ ne’ ofisaga‘déndia’. Ne’t‘ho’ ha’degaiei’
where place thither again I that again I should depart There just it (is) right
should go hence. c
dwak’nigo™hio’ tea’ nofwe’ agio™. Gé™djik se’ hiyd’ oné™
my mind is satisfied wherein place I have By and by really verily now
arrived. (soon)
heio‘he‘ dé"io’nigo™hiéwénia’t‘he’. Naie’ ne’ ni’ agadwénnoda‘ewi'
utmost it will become amusing to the mind. That that the I have speech by it
(it is)
ne’ g’ni‘ha’ hagawi‘.” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ Gokstéi’a’ wa’a‘hén’.
that my father he gave it to At that that she, the Ancient she said,
me:)” (time) One
b}
“Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ ne’ sadwéfinoda‘ewi' ne’ hid’ni‘ha’ hiawi‘?”
“What kind of thing that thou has speech by it that thy father he gave it to
thee?”
T‘ho‘ge’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Naye’ hiya’ ne’ ga‘hesea’ wat‘hid‘hide‘ha’.
At that he said, “That verily that (it) arrow it has flint-point,
(time) (it is)
Naye’ @"gesda’ é"gadya’dage'nha’ naye’ gai‘honnia‘hi’ hiya‘
That I will use it I will defend myself, that it caused it not
(it is)) (it is)
ni’a° katka’ _t‘he’géino™donnyo™k ne’ éfi‘ nonwe‘.”’ T*ho‘ge‘
the I anywhere I think of it repeatedly that — else- place,” At that
person- where time
ally
ne’ Gokstén’a‘ wa’a‘hén’, “‘ Naye’ di’ hiya’ nis’4‘ wa’gofina’do™gwa’
that she, the Ancient she said, “That’ besides verily the thou I designate thee by it
One (it is) personally
O‘haa’.”” Ttho‘ge’ oné™ doga’a‘ niwéfdage’ oné™ got‘honde’
Flint,” At that now a few so many days now she heard it
time in number
de‘hodit‘ha’ ne’ de‘hnikhé™’, i‘hado"k ne’ Ohad’,
they covered that they two are he kept saying that Flint
twins,
“Séino™do"’-khé™ nis gaéi‘ ne’ et‘hino‘ha’?’” T*‘ho‘ge‘ ne’
thou knowest-dost thou the where that our (two) mother?” At that that
thou (is) (time)
T‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Agéfino™do®’. Goda’wi' hiya’
He-holds-the-sky he said, “T know it. she sleeps verily
géiigwa’.”’ T*ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ O‘had’ wa’s‘hago‘héido™ ne’
only.” At that now that Flint he asked her that
(time)
ho‘sodaé‘ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Dogé"s-khé™ god&’wi' ne’ akhino‘hi’?”
his grand- he said, “Tt is true-is it she sleeps that our mother?’
mother
Wa’ai‘hén’, “Dodgé"s ne’ tea’t‘ho’. E*teyeyek gwi’ o’ niaie’
She said, “Tt is true. that actually, She will again just too that
awake (one)
ne’ oné™ 6"ga‘he’g.” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ O‘had’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’,
that time it will arrive At that that Flint now he said,
(now) (be time),’’ (time)
“Dewagado™hwéndjionnik o‘snowe’ akhegé™ ne’ akhino‘ha’.”
“Tt is necessary for me quickly (it is I should see that our mother.’’
swift) her
,
Wa’a‘hén’ ne’ gokstéi’s', ‘“H™s‘hegé” se’ na’ ne’ oné™
She said that she, the Ancient “Thou wilt see her really the that time
One, that
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 643
é"djiontgé™ha’.” — T*ho‘ge‘ ne’ Ohad’ ‘da‘hai‘hwa‘hégwii’
again she will arise.” At that that Flint he insisted on it
(time)
wa hé™hén’, “Tgagonda’ se’ é"sgat‘hoyé™ naye é"wak’nigo™hiyo’khe’
he said, “Atallevents really thou wilt tell me that it will satisfy my mind
(it is)
ne’ I’ 6"khegé™’.” T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ Gokstéf’a’ wa’éna’ hiya‘ hon‘
that I I will see her.” At that now that she,the Ancient she thought not pre-
(time) One sum-
ably
sté™” de’odieé™ dogé"s ne’t‘ho’ nayawé™ha’ a‘s‘hagogé™ ne
any- it it done it is true thus soit would come to he should see her that
thing pass
hono‘ha’; t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hofiwana’do"s. Ndaye’ di’ ne’ oné™
his mother; at that now she showed it to him. That besides that time
time (it is)
wahatgat‘hwi’ tea’ edagii’ tiho‘ge’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Sa‘satgé™ha'
he saw it wherein she lay eeebee he said, “Do thou arise
ime
néngée" sidagi’. Hot nofwa‘ho’dé” diyoi‘hwa’ — t‘honé*‘
this (it is) thou art What kind of thing it is reason here
)
,
sénda’wi'?” Hiya sté’ nofwa‘ho’dé™ de’agodoya‘hén’, t‘ho‘ge‘
thou art asleep?” Not any- kind of thing she moved herself at that
thing time
ne’ O‘haa’ wa’hé™hén’ “Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ né"dwayea’ néngé™
that Flint he said, “What kind of thing so we will do this (it is)
goda’wi'?” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ ho‘soda‘ wa’a‘hén’, ‘‘Ne’t‘ho’ géfigwa’
she is asleep?” Atthattime that his grand- she said, “Thus only
mother
né"yo‘dik, gé™djik se’ naye’ é"djiontgé™ha’.” T‘ho‘geS oné™
so it will con- by and by really that (it she will again arise.”’ At that now
tinue to be, is) time
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gii wa’hé™hén’, “Naye’ ne’ nia‘ ne’t‘ho'
that He-Holds-the-Sky he said, “That that the I thus
(it is) personally
niwak’nigo™he’dé™ awe’hadie' goda’wik tea’ nigé™ hé®ga‘he’g
so is my mind formed it matters not lethercontinue wherein — soit is it will arrive
to sleep distant (be time)
é"djiontgé™ha’.” T*ho‘ge’ ne’ O‘haa’ wa’hé™hén’, “Egéino™ a’
she again will arise.” At that that Flint he said, “T will wait
(time)
gwi’? o‘ni’ da’dji‘hwa’; dyéi‘ha’gwa’ é"wak’nigo™ga‘hé™ha’
just, also, a short while, if it so be I will tire of waiting (become
anxious in mind)
oF
ofsayontgé™ha’ oné™ gwd’ oni’ awe’hadie' é"yagoda’wik
again I should see her now, just, also it matters not she will continue
to sleep
diiotgont.” T*ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé™hén’,
always.” At that now that He-Holds-the-Sky he said,
(time)
“Oné™ owH’ 0’ ni’dé Se¢adawénye'si’, dé"gé’nigo™hawéiya’da’,”’
“Now just too I per- I will go to travel, I will divert my mind thereby.’”’
sonally
oné™ di’ wa‘hayagé™nha’ wa’t‘hadawéfye'si’,
now besides he went out he went to travel.
Naye’ ne’ Gokstén’a&‘ deyagodi‘ha’di‘ tea’ ni‘hofiwadinowé"khwa’
That that she,the Ancient She prefers one over wherein so she loves them
(it is) One the other
ne’ hofiwanade’s‘ho™ a’. Ne’ O*‘haa’ naye’ heyo‘he‘ i‘sowa’
that her grandchildren. ‘That Flint that to the utmost much (it
(it is) is)
644 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
hoiwanowé"khwa’ oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ hia’ hia’ naye’
she loves him now that He-Holds-the-Sky not verily that
(it is)
de’honwanowé"khwa’. Ganio’ wa’hayagé™ nha’ ne’ Thaé™hiawa’egi'
she loves him. As soon as he went out that He-Holds-the-Sky
oné™ wa’d‘héfi’ ne’ Gokstén’s‘’, ‘“Agadé"na’tchiiyé™ tcea’t‘ho‘,
now she said that she, the Ancient “T have provisions in truth,
One,
oné™ dé"’se’ nitcioi‘hwa’s‘ teiodadéni‘; ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ o’ ha’degaiei’
now and it is but a small it is still left; thus seem- too full sufficient
matter ingly
é"tnon‘hek; nadie’ di’ ne’ so™hwa’a’ gé"s é™sadekhonnii’; naye’
thou and I will |that besides that thou alone custom- thou wilt eat; that
live; (it is) arily (it is)
diio‘hwi’ ne’t‘ho’ néMawé"™hd’ oné™ ne’? né™ niteyo™ha‘
it is reason thus so it will come to now that this so it amount is
pass small
teyofigiadé"na’tchiyé™. Hiya‘ de’wagéino™“do™” gaén’ —nofwe*
thou and I still have provisions. Not I do know where place
hofi‘sagegwa’ ne’ oné™ hé"wate’d‘da’.”” Tho‘ge‘ ne’ O*haa’
again I could get it that time it will become Then that Flint
exhausted,”
wa’ hé™hén’, “Dyogondo™ é"cade’niéndé”” é"ge‘sak ne’
he said, “By all means I will it attempt I will seek it that
é"tnon‘he‘gwik.”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ ho‘soda’ wa’a‘hén’, “Tca’
thou and I will live At that now that his grand- she said, “As
thereby.” (time) mother
gé"s nigé™ é™hayagé’nha’ ne’ detciad陓hnonda’ t‘ho‘ge’ oné™
custom- so it is he will go out that ye two are brothers at that now
arily far time
gé"s 6"diadekhonnid’, tea’ di’? gé"s niyo™ é®yongni’s‘hénnia’
custom- thou and I will eat, where- be- custom- s0 it is it will overmaster us
arily in sides arily amount
naye’ gé"s naye’ é™hadekhofnia’ oné™ he’ 6"s‘hayo™.” T“ho‘ge*
that custom- that he will eat it time again he will return.” At that
(it is) arily (it is) (time)
ne’ Ohad’? wa’hé™hén’, “Hiya-khé™ t‘hasgweniad‘ a‘sge‘séinié"’
that Flint he said,’”’ “Not-is it thou art able to thou shouldst make
do it it for me
ne’ agadowast‘hak, doga’t ’o™ké™ gé™djik gwa’t‘ho‘ dé"gondawénnye’
that I would useit to hunt, if next by and by soon they will range about
sté” gw’ nwa’gaya’do’dé"?” T’ho‘ge’ ne’ ho‘soda‘ wa’a‘hén’,
some- seem- such it has kind of body?” At that that his grand- ‘she said,
thing ingly (time) mother
“Aénna’ S"gof‘séinié’” dé™’se’ ga‘hesga’.”
“A bow I will make for thee and an arrow.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa‘honwa‘séinié™” ne’ a’éfina’ dé™’se’ ga‘hesga’.
et now she made it for him that a bow and an arrow.
Ganio’ wa’eiéninéida’nha’ wa’s‘hén’, “’A‘gwif 6™he‘séfini‘ha‘dé™ ne’
Assoonas she finished it she said, “Forbear it, thou wilt lend it to him that
detcyadé™hnonda’.”’ T‘ho‘geS oné™ sa‘hayo™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’el’,
ye two are brothers.”’ At that now he returned “that He-Holds-the-Sky,
(time)
wa’hatgat‘hwa ne‘ a’énna’ hoyé™ ne’ de‘hiadé™hnonda’ dé"’se’ oné™
he saw it that a bow he has it that they two are brothers and now
wathé™hén’, “Gaén’ nofida‘s‘hiwad’ ne’ sa’éfina’?’” T’ho‘ge’ ne’
he said, “Where didst thou get it that thy bow?” At that (time) that
O‘haii’ =wa’hé"™hén’, ‘ Ksoda‘ha’ hiya’ wa’ofgwé”.” T‘ho‘ge‘
Flint he said, “My grandmother verily she gave it to me.’’ At that (time)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 645
oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ wa’hé™hén’, “Ksoda‘ha‘,
now that He-Holds-the-Sky he said, “O, my grandmother,
A‘sat‘hondat-khé™ IT’ oni’ A‘sge‘s@finié™ ne’ a’éfina’ dé"’se’
wouldst thou consent to it I also thou shouldst make that a bow and
it for me
ne’ ga‘he‘sga’?”’ Wa’d‘hén’ ne’ hosoda‘ha‘, ‘‘Ne’t‘ho’ ha’degayei’
that an arrow?”’ She said that his grandmother, “That it is quite sufficient
sgadi‘ géfigwa’ é6™sniyéiddk.” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ Thaé™hiawa’gi‘
one, it is, only ye two will have it.’’ At that (time) that He-Holds-the-Sky
hiya’ sté™ de’s‘hawén‘.
not anything again he said.
Doga’a’ niwéfidage’ oné™ ne’ O‘haii® oné™ wa’ho‘haé”’ ne’
Few so many days in now that Flint now he fastened tothe — that
number end of it
hohesga’ ne’ o‘hai’. Naye’ ne’ oné™ wa‘hayéfinéfida’nha’ oné™
his arrow __ that a flint. That itis that none he finished it now
wa hé™hén’, “Oné™ é"skheye‘da’ ne’ et‘hino‘ha’ oné™ hiya’
he said, “Now I will again awaken that our mother now verily
gai‘hwis tchiyagoda’wi‘.”’ Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ nhwa’he’
it (is) a long she has been sleeping At that (time) now there thither he went
time (matter) already.”
tea’ nofwe‘ diyedagi’ dé™se’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™,
wherein place there she is lying and now he said, “Now
sa‘satgé™ha‘. Doga’t hiya hofisa‘satg陓ha’ nadye’ gwd’ o‘ni’
do thou get up again. If not again thou wilt arise that (it is) just also
akhesga’ dé gofi‘hwa’esdi’.” Oné™ ~—s di’_—s wa’s‘hagaoya‘hén’
my arrow I will pierce thee with it.” Now besides he shook her
wa’gai‘hwis‘he’, oné™ di’ wa’tchago‘hwa’esda’ ne’ ho‘hesga’,
it was a long time, now __ besides he pierced her through that his arrow,
hiya’ e’ de’djyagoyé’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ 'o™gé" wa’s‘hago‘ho’ gia’k
not again did she again At that (time) now next he cut her head off
awaken.
ne’ ho‘hesga’ wa’hasda’, né™* haigwadi‘ wa’hayé™ ne’ ono” wa’.
that his arrow he used it, this side of it he laid it that (it) head.
Ne’t‘ho’ niwat‘hawi oné™ wa‘hatdoga’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
There it was bearing itself now he noticed it that He-Holds-the-Sky
(it was the time)
dé"se’ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ hiya’ wa’sei‘hwa‘do™da’ ne
bf
and he said, “Now verily thou hast destroyed it that
et‘hino‘ha’, nadye’ diiago‘héfido™ ne’ t‘honé™ o™hwéndjii’ge‘
our mother, that thence she came ahead _ that here on earth
gonagiidi‘, nadie’ gwa’t‘ho’ saie‘héit ne’ t‘honé™ o™hwéndjia’ge‘
she settled her- that (it is) she again went that here on earth
self, ahead
sayo™déndia’ ne’t‘ho’ nho™sayé™ tea’ nofhwe' dyago‘déndion‘.
again she departed there thither again wherein place thence she departed.
she goes
Naye’ di’ naye’ ne’ o‘héfido™ wa’wéndadéniondie’ ne’t‘ho‘
That (itis) besides that (itis) that ahead (infuture) thither days severally appear thus
né"ago‘sénno’dé"k Ga‘héfide‘so"k. Naye’ di’ ne’t‘ho’ né*io‘dik
so will her name be kind of She is the Leader, That besides thus so it will eon-
the Head One. tinue to be
ne’ t‘honé™ o™hwéfndjidade’ tea’ nwa’awé™ha’, naie’ ne’ he’tgé™
that here (it) earth is present as so it came to pass, that (itis) that above
daié™da’ t*honé™ wa’egwat‘hwa’ ne’t‘ho’ gwa’t‘ho’ nho™saié”
thence she here she made a trip there in turn she goes
did come
tea’ nonwe‘ diiago‘défdion‘.”
wherein place thence she departed.”
646 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ ‘T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ wa’hé™hén’, “Hiyi',
At that (time) now that he said, “Not,
ksoda‘hi‘, de’oyane’ tea’ nwa’siea’, naye’ hiya’ ne’ wa’tcdi‘ha’di’,
O my grand- it is good as sothoudidst that (it verily that thou didst prefer one
mother, do it, is) to the other
=) ,
hiya’ ni’ de’sagayé" if ne’ awagyéfiddk o’ ni’ ne’ a’éfina’.”
not theI thoudidst consent that I should have it too thel that a bow.”
Tho‘ge’ oné™ wa’d‘héi’, “Oné™ gwd’ o‘ni’ é@*gofi‘séfinié™,”
At that now she said, “Now just also I will make it for thee,”
(time)
oné™ di’ wa’o™sawé™ ne’ wa’e‘sénnia’ ne’ a’éfina’ dé"’se’ ne’
now besides she began that she made it that a bow and that
ga‘hesga’. Ne’ oné™ wa’ofidyénino’kdé™ oné™ wa’ d‘hén’,
(it) arrow. That now, time, she finished her task time (it is) she said,
“Oné™ ne’t‘ho’ nwa’awé™ha’ tea’ nisa’nigo™he’dé™, ndye’ di’
“Now thus so it has come to pass as so thy mind (is) kind of, that besides
géigwa’ sgadd‘ ne’t‘ho’ né"yawé™ha’, doga’t é™sa‘do™, hiya‘
only one (it is) thus so it will come to pass, if thou wilt lose it, not
ne’ oya’ t‘hofisagon‘sefinié™.”” Oné™ da‘hofiyo™ ne’ a’éfina’
that other again will I make it for thee.”’ Now she gave it to him that (it) bow
ga‘hesga’ o‘ni’. Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ da‘haiena’ dé"’se’
(it) arrow also. Now that He-Holds-the-Sky he received it and
wa’t‘hadéino™hén’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nyawé™ha‘.” Tho‘ge’ oné™
he expressed his thanks he said, “T am thankful.” At that (time) now
dawa‘sawé™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gii de‘hodawéfinye‘’. Hiya‘
he began that He-Holds-the-Sky he roamed about. Not
de’eno™hwe’s ne’ ho‘soda‘ ne’ a‘hne’sek ne’ de‘hiadé™hondii’
she liked it that his grand- that they twoshould that they two (are) brothers
mother accociate
dé™se’ hiya’ de’awet da‘hondoft ne’ oné™ he’ wa‘hiadekhonnia’.
and not it is possible theyshouldeat that time again they two ate.
together
v nt
Naye’ di’ ne’ oné de‘hniksa’da‘se’a‘, naye’ di’ o‘hé™séik
That (it besides that now they two were lads that besides daily
is)
ganyadakdondie’ i‘he’s ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘. Doga’as gés
along the edge of the lake he habitually that He-Holds-the-Sky. Very few custom-
went arily
nwa’t‘hat‘hwadase’ oné" he’ gets hofisa‘hayo™ tea’
so many he went around it time (it is) again customarily thither again he wherein
would arrive
t‘hodino™saié™. Dién‘ha’gwaé’ oné™ wa’hagé™ hiya’ de’hayéndei,
their lodge stands. After awhile now he saw it not he knew it
ne’t‘ho’ gadie’ tea’ nofwes hofinadasgwa‘ha’ akdondie’
there it flew along wherein place they had put up bark-shelter . nearby
for themselves
wa wadongo‘'da’, oné™ ne’ T’haé™hiawa’gi’ wa’t‘ho’nofiwaya‘he™ha’
it passed by, time that he hastened
wa’hagwa’ ne’ ho’éfina’ dé™se’ ne’ ho‘gesga’, dé’se’
he got them that his bow and that his arrow, and
wa’ha‘hwa’ ~~ wa’hayagé™ nha’ dé"’se’ oni’? = wa’ hatgat‘hwa’
he bore them he went out and also he saw it
hiya’ de’ino™ ne’t‘ho! gwa’ tgatgoda’. Ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’he’; ’a‘so?,
not far there just there it sat. There thither he went; still
ino™ da‘he’ oné™ wa’wade’gwa’, ganyadakdofdie’ nhwa’we’.
far there he was time it fled, along the edge of the lake thither it went,
coming
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 647
T‘he‘ge’ oné™ gwa’ t‘ha’t‘hadogé™da’, oné™ di’ wa’hadyén‘ha’gwi’
At that now just he kept straight ahead, now besides he was surprised
(time)
ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ gatgoda’. Dosgé™ha‘ wa’hatgwi'da’ dyén‘ha”’ ews’
there just it sat. Nearer he moved nevertheless
de‘hoga‘ha’, oné™ di’ wa‘ha’agwa’ dé"se’ sa‘hat’wa‘da’. Oné™ ne’
it had its eyes fixed time besides he shot and he missed it, Now _ that
on him,
w) “ne
na’ wa’wade’gwa’ oné™ ne’ hao™hwa’ de‘haga‘haé’ ne’ ho‘hesga’
the it fled time that he himself he watched it that his arrow
that
tea’ nhwa’we’. Ino™hagé™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’o’nha’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
where- thither it went. Not far there it fell in (the water). At that now
in (time)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ wa‘ho’nigo™hihetgé™ nha’ dé™’se’ oné™ wa’heii’
he grieved over it and now he desired it
tgagondé’ hé"sgegwa’ ne’ akhesga’, hiya‘ hiya’ ne’ oyii’
it must be again I wili get it that my arrow, not verily that other
t‘hofsayonge‘séinié™ ne’ ksoda‘ha‘, t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hade’skok,
again she will make it for me that my grandmother, at that now he waded
(time) (in the water)
wa’ha‘déndia’ agwas tea’ nigé™ oné™ wa’ha‘do™
he moved ahead just wherein so it is far time he disappeared
tea’ niyo‘hnodes wa’hadyén‘hi’gwa’ hiya’ gwa’ de’o‘hnego’
wherein soit was deep he was surprised not just it contained water
tea’ hagwa’ nhwa’hawenofhadie’, oné™ di’ wa’hatgat‘hwa’
wherein direction thither he was going, time besides he saw it
ne’t‘ho’ gwa’ tgano™saié™ dioié’gwaieda’ o‘ni’, oné™ di’ ne’t‘ho‘
there just there.(it) lodge stood there (it)smokearose also, time besides there
nhwa’he’. Wa’haio™ wa’hatgat‘hwa’ ne’t‘ho’ gwd’ hatgoda’
thither he went. He arrived there he saw there just he sat
ne’ hénigwe‘. T‘ho‘geS ne’ hono™saié™” wa’hé™hén’, ‘Onnis’i'
that he is a human. At that that he owns lodge he said, “Tt is a long
(time) time
oné™ tea’ degofiga‘hidie’s, .dewagado™hwéndjiohnik gé"s ne’
now wherein I had my eyes on thee as I desired it custom- that
thou went about arily
daediadatgé™. I’ di’ wa’gon‘hno"k tea’ t‘honé™ wa’sio™. Naye’
thou andIshouldsee I more- I sent for thee wherein here thou didst arrive. That
3°
each other. over (it is)
daioi‘hwa’khe’ hwa’gon‘hno"k swa’djik hia’ hia‘
it caused it I sent for thee because (too much) verily not
de’esanowé™ khwi’ ne’ sa‘soda‘ha‘ nadie’ di’ diioi‘hwa’
she respects thee that thy grandmother that (it is) more- it is the reason
over
hwa’gon‘hno"k tea’ oné™ hid’ wa’ga‘the’e oné™ é"tcha‘sawé”’
> D t=) ’
{ sent for thee wherein now verily it is time ae has now thou wilt begin,
arrived)
é"saio’dé™ha’ tea’ ~—s nofiwa‘ho’dé"’ —_ sadei‘hwade’. Naye’ di
thou wilt work wherein kind of thing thou hast to do matter. That more-
(it is) over
diiodieé™dii @"goniat‘hoié™ agwas ganowé™ tea’ nwa’awé™ha’
it is the first I will tell thee very it is grave wherein so it happened
tea’ wa disni’nigo™hadi‘hé™ ha’ ne’ dedjiadé™ hnondi’.
wherein your (two) minds disagreed that ye two are brothers.
Ne’t‘ho’ di’ niio™ @"dwadieé™da’ @"tgonio™ ne’ &™son‘he‘gwik,
‘There more- it is so it will be the first I will give it thee that thou wilt subsist on it,
over much
648 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
nadie’ hii&’ ne’ esano™sda‘sek ne’ sa‘soda‘ha‘. Né™ igaié™”
that (it verily that she begrudges thee that thy grandmother. Here it lies
is) habitually
di’ na’ hé"tchawa’ dé"’se’ nadie’ 6™sadadekhonnié™ ne’ oné™
more- the thou wilt take it and that (itis) thou wilt prepare it for thy food that time
over that with thee
hé"tcyo” tca’ nofiwe‘ di‘sa‘defdion’. Nadie’ di’ ne’
again thou ar- wherein place thence thou didst depart. That moreover that
rivest home
é™sade’djié™héndé”, nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ éngaik
thou wilt roast ears of green corn, that (itis) | moreover that now it will be
cooked
oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ é&™sadekhofinid’; ndaie’ di’ ne’ oné™
time at that (time) thou wilt eat it; that (it is) more- that time
over
陓hiatdoga’ tea’ oné™ oo’ nis’d° we’sadéfina’tchaiéida’nha’
they two will wherein now too thou person- thou hast acquired provisions
notice it ally
é™hiya’negé™ tea’t‘ho‘, é™si‘hén’, ‘Ganyo’
they two will beg it of thee actually, thou wilt say, If (so soon as)
hide’ &"wadonniad’ oné hia‘si’ &é™séino™do™ naye’ do niyo™
first it will produce time not before thou wilt will it that how so it is
itself (grow) (now) (think it) (it is) amount,
is much,
de‘sado™“hwéndjionnik a‘sek.’’’ T‘ho‘gef o™ké™ ~— wa’hé™hén’,
thou desirest it thou shouldst At that next in order he said,
eat.’ ”’ (time)
“Oné di’ é"goniat‘hoié™ é™sgwenid’ ne’ né™ &™se‘séfinid’ is
“Now more- I will tell thee thou wilt be able that this here, thou wilt makeit thou
over to do it
tea’ niio‘t tea’ dé™sado™hwéfdjio‘s. Hiya‘ sté™ t‘he‘sanowé”,
where- soit is wherein thou wilt need it. Not- any- thou wilt fail to do it
in thing
gagwegi ne’t‘ho’ né"yawé™ha’ tca’ nofiwa‘ho’dé™” dé™sai‘-
all thus so it will come to pass wherein kind of thing thou wilt
hwayénda’s.” Tho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™hén‘’, “Dyéfi‘ha’gwa’ sté”
conclude (the) At that (time) now he said,” “Tf it so be anything
matter.”
é*di‘sado’kt‘ha‘s dé"tche’ ganyo’ gwd’ hwéndo™ t*honé™
it will be looking to thee thou walt come as soon as just when (time) here
thence
é™soia’datchénni’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei wa’hé™ hen’,
thou wilt find my body.”’ At that (time) that he said,
“Oné™ ew? o'ni’ @"sga‘défidia’.”” Tho‘ge’ one™ wa’hdaiena’
“Now just also I will again depart.” At that (time) now he took it
ne’ oné™h§’ dé™se’ oné™ sa‘ha‘déndia’.
that (it) corn and now he again departed.
Naie’ ne’ oné™ hofisa‘haio™” oné™ he’ ne’ ho‘soda‘
That (itis) that now again there he arrived now again that his grand-
mother
wa‘hohwakhwanonda’ ne’ hodi’s‘hénnia’i‘, oné™ di’? wa’hé™hén’
she gave him food that it had overmastered now moreover he said
them (is left over),
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’el‘, “ E"gofia‘héndo™, ksoda‘ha‘, hot nofiwa‘ho’dé”
that “T will ask thee, O, my grand- what kind of thing
mother,
dioi‘hwa’ tea’ ne’t‘ho' niio‘t hiid’ hwéndo™ t‘ha’deiohgwadondi‘
it is the reason wherein thus so it is not ever we have eaten together
dé"se’ diiotgofit nadie’ ne’ o‘hé™ ne’ wa’sgnonda’’ ne’
and always that (itis) that it is dry that thou givest mea portion that
é"gadekhonnia’?”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ ho‘soda‘ daiei‘hwa’sigwa’
I will eat it?” At that time now that his grandmother she replied
Re 0% | nia liergelk,
“That (it is), one says, thethou thou wilteatit, one, too, theI personally I uals
eat it.
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ gokstéi’a’ oné"* wa’eiena’, gofdadie’ wa’ek,
At that that she, the Ancient now she took it, at once she ate it,
(time) One
wa'i‘hén’, ‘“TI’sek 0’ nis’a‘ gofidadie’, oga’wi' ne’ né™.”’
she said, “Do thou too, the thou at once, it tastes good that this.”
eat it, personally
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ O‘had’ ne’ 0’ ni’ —-wa’hek, one
At that that Flint that, too, the that he ate it, Now
(time)
di’ ne gokstén’ a‘ wa’ a‘hen’, “ We’saga’wha’-khé™?”
moreover that she, the Ancient One she said, “Tt tasted good to thee—did it?”
5699
Da‘hai‘hwa’sigw&’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Wa’o’siihesda’ tea’ oga’wi',
He replied he said, “Tt is exceeding where it has a
pleasant taste,"’
?
nadie’ o’ nadie’ wa’d‘hén’ ne’ ho‘soda. Oné™ wa’d‘hén’,
oe too that (it is) she said that his grandmother. Now she said,
it is
“EB seathoié™ ’o™ké™ oné™ he’ &™satdoga’ &™s‘hadadekhonnié™,
“Thou wilt tell nextinturn time again thou wilt notice it he will prepare food for himself
oné™ tgagondi ne’t‘ho’ hé"ge’.” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ O*haa’
time it must be there thither I will go.” At that (time) that Flint
wahé™hén’, ‘“Ne’t‘hoS gwi’’ 0” né™awé™ha’.”
he said, “Thus then too so it will come to pass.”
”
?
656 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Oné™ ne’ T’haé™hiawa’gi’ hoiéit‘hwif oné™ wa’wada‘hiofnia’.
Now that the Life God he has planted now it bore fruitage.
Oné™ di’ t‘ho‘ge’ wa‘haia’donnid’ djién‘hiogeif dé™se’ djisgi’gi’,
Now more- at that he made its body blue bird and robin,
over (time)
dé™se’ gané™dia’ksewa’ dé™’se’ wa’hé™hén’, Oné™ wa’gwaid’dis’3’,
and pine grosbeak and he said, “Now Thave finished your
bodies,
nile’ wa’giéht‘hwa‘da’ t‘honé™ &™swéiinagddit tea’ o™hwéfidjiade’,
that (itis) I planted it for it here ye will dwell where it earth is present,
ne’t‘ho! —ha’degayei’ = dé™swat‘hwadjua’k.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
there it is full sufficient ye will produce ohwachiras.”’ At that (time) now
wa's‘hagotga’k, gagwegi’ degniid’dige‘s‘ho™, sgdia’dadé‘ gadjina‘
he let them all go, all they are two bodies each it-body one (is) it-male (is)
dé"se’ sgiia’dadas ne’ gé™hé™. Ne’t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’tgofididé”
and it-body one (is) that it-female (is). At that (time) now they flew
dé’se’ oné™ o‘ni’ wa’gondéfinode™. Oné™ ne’ O‘had’ hot‘honde’
and now also they sang. Now that Flint he heard it
diiodit‘ha’ nwa’tgondiwénnige’ dé™se’ gofidiwéfniio’s. T‘ho‘ge‘
there they (zoic) every their voices in number and their (zoic) voices At that
are talking (are) fine. (time)
wwhé™hén’, ‘Ksodahi‘, sté’ gwa’ nidiiodyeé™ tea’ hagwadi‘
he said, “Oh, my some- apparently thence itis doing where towards
grandmother, thing
t‘hono™saié™” ne’ deiagiadé™hnofidi’. Dogé"s tgai’sdowané™
there his lode that he and I are brothers. Truly, there it-noise (is) great
stands
gofidiwéiniio’s.”’ Wa’d‘hén’ ne’ ho‘soda‘, ‘“Ké™djik ne’t‘ho‘ :
their ote) voices (are) She said that his grandmother, “By and by there
n0,??
hé"dne’, @"dnikdo™hna’ sté” gwa’ nidiiodieé™.”’
thence thou thou and I will go something apparently thence it is taking
and I will go, to see it place.”
Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ oné™ ’o™ké™ wa’hé™hén’, “Naie’
Now that now next in order he said, “That (it is)
é*gia’donnid’ ne’ skénnofido™ S"gaiadjik,’ oné™ = di’
I will make its body that deer it will be named,’”’ Now moreover
wa‘haid’donnia’, nadie’ gwa’tho’ ne’ djogaiga’k dé"’se’ ne’
he made its body, that (itis) next in turn that elk and that
degeia’’gi’, gagwe’gi’ degniad’dige‘hadie’, sgada&‘s‘ho” gadji’na‘
buffalo, it all they (zoic) two bodies (are) in it one each it-male (is)
mumber, each
dé™se’ sgada‘s‘ho” gé™hé™. Oné™ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Oné™
and it-one each it-female (is), Now he said,” Now
wa’ewaid’dis’4’. Oné™ di’ na’ wa’giéit‘hwi‘da’ dé™swat‘hwadjiia’k’
I have complete your Now more- the I planted it for it ye will produce ohwachira
bodies. over that
tea’ o™hwéndjiade’,”’ oné™ gagwegi’ wa’s‘hagotga’k, oné™ ne
where it-earth (is) present,” Now it-all he let them go, now that
na’ wa’tgond‘dat.
the they ran.
that
Oné™ he’ oi8’ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ di’ &8ge‘sénnii’ naie’ ne’
Now again it-other he said, “Now moreover I will makeit that (itis) that
(is)
djio‘hé @*gaiadjik.”” Oné™ di’ wa’ha‘sénnid’ wa’haia’donnis‘hén’,
pigeon __ it will be called,’’ Now more- he made it, he made its bodies several,
over
b ?
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 657
degniid’dage‘, sgaid’dida‘ gadjina‘’ dé™se’ seaid’dadas gehen.
two it-two-bodies it-body one (is) it-male (is) and it body one (is) it female (is)
are in number,
T‘ho‘ge’ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ he’ oid’ nadie’ &ge‘séinid’, nate’
At that (time) he said, “Now again it-other that I will make it, that
(is) (it. is) (it is)
ne’ nofiniagal’i’ €"gaiadjik.”” Ne’t‘ho‘ o’ ndaie’ degniiad’dage‘
that partridge (pheasant) it will be called.” Thus, too that (it is) two-it-two-bodies
(are) in number
wa’ha‘sénnia’, gadjina’ gé™hé™ of’ni’.
he made it, it-male it-female also.
Oné™ he’ oid’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Naie’ ’o™ké™ @"ge‘séfinid’, nadie’
Now again it-other he said, “That (itis) next in I will make it, that
turn (it is)
ne’ neda‘hé™hwa’ 6"gdiadjik.”” Ne’t‘ho’ o’ naie’ degniia’dage‘
that wild turkey it will be called.” Thus, too, that two-it-two-bodies
(it is) (are) in number
wa’ha‘séfinia’, dé™’se’ oné™ wa’hé™héen’, “TI? wa’gwaii’dis’a’,
he made it, and Now he said, “T (it is) Ihave made your bodies,
naie’ wa'gichithwa‘di’ dé™swat‘hwadjiia’k t‘honé™ tea’
aoa I planted it for it Ye will produce Ohwachiras here where
1t Is,
o™hwéndjiade’.” Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’s‘hagotga’k, oné™ di’
it-earth (is) present.” At that (time) now he let them go, now more
over
wa’tgondidé™.
they flew. ~
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Naie’ ’o™ké™ &"ge‘séfinid’ nadie’
At that (time) Now he said, “That (it is) mext in I will make it that
order (it is)
ne’ na’ é"gondia’t‘hé™hak, ne’ ao™hwéndjiat‘hé™ee’ &"gofne’sck,
that the they (zoic) will be in the that it-earth-dry-at the place of they will continue
that habit of climbing, to be,
naie’ di’ é"ge‘séfinid’ ne’ o'gwai’ 6 °¢aiadjik.”” Oné™ hiid’
that more- I will make it that bear it will be called.” Now verily
(it is) over
wa’hoio’dé™ha’ wa’ha‘séfnia’ degniid’daige’, gadjinad’ gé™hé™ oni’.
he worked at it he made it two they two (zoic)- _it-male (is) _it-female (is) also.
bodies (are) in number,
Oné™ he’ oid’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Djo’edga’k ’o™ké™ égaiddjik
Now, again it-other he said, “raccoon next in order it will be called
é"ge‘sénnia’,’’ dé™’se’ oné™ wa’ha‘sénnid’ degniia’dage‘, seaia’dada'
I will make it,” and now he made it two they two (zoic) _ one it-body (is)
bodies (are in number,
gadjina’ sgaid’dada’ gé™hé™.
it-male (is) one it-body (is) it-female (is.).
Oné™ he’ oi8’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Ndie’ e’ €"ge‘sénnid’ ne’ onhe’di’
Now again it-other he said, “That again Iwillmakeit that porcupine
(is) (it is)
é"gaiadjik,” t‘ho‘ge’ di’ oné™ wa’ha‘stinid’ deeniia’daig’, sga’da‘
it will be called,’’ Atthat more- Now he made it two it-two (zoic) one it (is)
(time) over bodies (are),
gadjina‘ sgadaé gé™her. Wa’ haiénnénda’nha’ t‘ho‘ge’ oné™
it-male (is) one it (is) it-female (is). He completed his handiwork At that (time) Now
wahé™hén’, “1” wa’gwaid’dis’’’. Nadie’ wa’giént‘hwa‘di’ ne’
he Said, oh E I have ST ag your That (it is) I planted it for that that
bodies.
dé™swat‘hwadjiia’k t‘honé™ tea’ o™hwéndjiade’,” oné™ di?
ye will break forth into here the where it-earth (is), present,” Now more-
ohwachiras over
658 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
wa’s‘hagotga’k dé"’se’ oné™ ne’ na’ wa’gon‘déndia’. T‘ho‘ge*
he let them go and now that the that they departed. At that
(time)
oné™ néigé™ wa’hé™hén’, “Ndaie’ hia’e’ 6"gadonwis‘hé™’.”’
now this it is he said, “That first in I willrest myself.’’
(it is) order
Oné™ — sa‘hadadekhonnié™” dé™se’ oné™ he’ ne’ Ohad’
Now again he prepared food for himself and , now again that Flint
wa’hos‘hwa’ wé™siiga’wi' heio‘he’’; oné™ ha’deio™ tea’ niwé™se’dé™
he smelled it it-smell (is) it is utmost; Now everyone the so it-odor (is)
pleasant where kind of
ne’ wa’hos‘hwa’; nadie’ wa’hos‘hwi’ oné™ o’ naie’ wa’wa‘hidik
that he smelled it that (it is) he smelled it Now, too, that (itis) it-fruit has ripened
ne’ ho‘hondaiéit‘hwa‘ho™ ne’. T‘haé™hiawa’gi’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’
that he has planted trees severally that Atthat (time) now that
na’ hofisa‘haio™ tea’ t‘hnino™saié™ dé™se’ wa’hé™hén’, “Ksoda‘ha‘,
the there again he where they two lodge have and he said, “O, my grand-
that arrived mother,
ol‘hwane‘hégwat ha&’deio™ wé™siiga’wi’s ofige‘s‘hwa.’ Aiéna’
it-matter marvelous (is), everyone it-odors pleasant (are) IT smelled them. It seems
oné™ here ’on’ he’ det‘hodadekhonniéfni‘ ne’ deiagiadé™hnondi’.”
now, I believe, pre- again there he has prepared food for that he and I are brothers.’”’
sum- himself
~ Iu Iwihyee?
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ gokstéi’a' wa’d‘héi’, ‘“Oné™ gw’ 0’
At that Now that she, the Ancient she said, “Now. too
(time) One
hiid’ ne’t‘hoS hedne‘, nikdo™hna hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™ né™ agwas
verily there thither let us let us two go to what kind of thing the, this (is) just
two go, view it
nidiiodieé™.”’ Oné™ di’? wa’hia‘déndiad’. Wa’hniio™ tea’ nofnwe‘
so there it is done. Now, moreover they two departed. There ey two where the place
arrive
ni‘he’s ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’el’. Wa’ondiéi’ ha’gwa’ ne’t‘ho’ gwa’
there he that She was surprised suddenly there even
goes about
niioi‘hwane‘higwat tea’ nilodieé™, ha’dio‘hiage‘ odofinif géigwa’
so it-matter marvelous (is) where _ so it is done, every it-fruit in it grows only
number (is)
wé"™siga’wi' deioiwénie’. Wa’oftgat‘hwa’ agwas ga‘nho‘hwakda&
jrordoe pleasant it stirs the air. She saw just it doorway beside
is
tea’ nonweS hono™saié™” ne’ T‘ha陓hiawa’gi’ ne’t‘ho’ o‘nhioda’
where the place his lodge lies that there it stands (as a
plant)
od’ wé"™sa’, nadie’ deio‘hat‘he’da‘ewi ne’t‘ho‘ nofiwe‘, dé"’se’ dosgé™ha‘
it sunflower, res it uses it to cause it to be there the place, and near by
it is) ig
degiade’ ne’t‘ho’ o‘hoidoda’’ oda&‘hiofini‘ agwas diios‘hesdodofnio™
they two are there it-bush stands it bears its fruit just there it-syrup stands out
apart in places
na‘kwénda‘kwa‘ne‘ o‘s‘hesda. T‘ho‘gef oné™ wa’hniio”
bee (honey) syrup. At that (time) now they two entered
gano™sgonwa‘’. Wa/’ontgat*hwa‘ hode’djié™hénda’, agwas
it lodge in. She saw it he is roasting corn-ears, just
ochnaidhény’, oné™ di? wa’d‘hén’, ‘Som nonwa‘ho’dé’ ne’t‘ho‘
it-fatness flows down now more over she said, “Who kind of thing thus
severally,
nliagoieé™ néngé™ nilodieé™ isde‘?” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne
so one has done it this (it is) so it is done out of doors?” At that time that
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 659
T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ da‘hai‘hwa’sigwa’ wa’hé™hén’, “I hiid’ ne’t‘ho‘
he replied he said, ooh verily thus
niwagieé™ ha‘si’ dwaga‘siwi’.”’ Daiofidadi#’ ~~ wa’ a‘hén’
so I have done it just now I have begun it.’”’ She spoke she said
ne’ ho‘soda‘, “Awado™ di’-khé™ ne’ a‘seninonda’,
that his grandmother, “Would it be more- would that thou shouldst share
possible over, it it with us two,
alagiadekhofinid’?”’ Da‘hawéinitgé™’nha’ ne’ Thaé™hiawa’ei‘
one and I should eat it?” He spoke that
wa hé™hén’, ‘HE "wado™. Mia’ gwa’ oni’ t‘hawado™ ne’
he said, “Tt will be possible, Not just also. it would be possible that
si’ nofiwef ne’ sgad&‘ ne’ djiodi’seidi‘ tea’ niio™ oné™
yonder the place that one it is that one it-specie(is) where soitismany now
agié” ne’ tyeks.” Tho‘gef oné™ wa’hané™hodagwi’ tea’
T have it that one eats At that (time) now he shelled off a grain of corn where
customarily.”
hode’djié™hénda, sgada‘s‘tho” da‘s‘hagao™, oné™ di’ ne’ na
he is roasting corn-ears one it is each he gave it them, now more- that the
over that
wa’hnek. T‘ho‘gef oné™ ne’ T*haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé™hén’,
they two ate it. At that (time) now that he said,
“Hedwaiagé™nha‘.”’ Oné™ di’ wav’hadiiigé™ nha’. Tho‘ge‘
“Let us go out.” Now moreover they went out. At that (time)
oné™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’t‘hadida’séi dé"se’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ oné™
now there they severally came to stand and now
wa’hé™hén’, “Néngé™ ha‘ dwagadieé™ dif agiént‘hwif nie’
he said, “This (it is) I was the first I planted it that (it is)
ne’ od wé™s&’ gaiadji‘,”’ oné™ ~—s dis wa’hofdongo‘da’ = Hii‘
that it-sunflower it is called,” now more-over they passed on. Not
de’ino™ nhe‘hofnenon oné™ he’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Naie’ néngé™ha‘
it is far they had gone now again he said, “That (it is) this (it is)
agiént‘hwi' naie’ ne’ tkwé™da’ —_niio’éfino’dé" gaiadji‘.”
I planted it that (it is) that (it is) red so it-rod kind of (is) it is called.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ he’ wa’ hondongo‘da’. Hiias de’ino™
At that (time) now again they passed on, Not is is far
nhe‘honnenoh oné™ sa‘hé™hén’, “Néngé™ ha agiént‘hwif
they had gone now again he said, “This (it is) I have planted it
o‘hofiidadekha‘gwa’ gaiadji‘,”’ oné™ di’? wa’haniiondagwi’ ne’
it strawberry it is called,” now moreover he plucked it that
o‘hia’ sgadi‘s‘ho™” da‘s‘hagao™. Oné™ he’ wa’hondongo‘di’.
it-fruit one it is each he gave it to one. Now again they passed on.
Oné™ he’ hia’ de’ino™ nhe‘hofnenoh oné™ wa’hé™hén’,
Now again not (it is) far there they had gone now he said,
“Néngé™ agiéit‘hwif na’djio‘gwa’ = gaiadji‘,”’ — oné™_—t‘ho‘ge‘
“This (it is) I have planted it red raspberry it is called,” now at that time
wa hanuohidagwa’ ne’ o‘hia’, sgada‘s‘ho™ da‘s‘hagao™. Oné™
he plucked it that it-fruit, one it is each he gave it to one. Now
he’ ~—- wa’hofidofigo‘da’. Oné™ he’ ~~ wa’hé™héi’, “Nem
again they passed on. Now again he said, “This
o‘hniod®’ — s‘ha‘hies_ gaiadji‘,” oné™ di’ he’ — sgada‘s‘ho™
it stands (as it-fruit-long it is called,” now moreover again one it is each
a plant) (mulberry)
wa’haniondagwaé’ _dé"’se’ da‘s‘hagao™. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
he plucked it and he gave it to one. At that (time) now
wa hé™hén’, ‘Djidwakda! oné™.” Da oné™ di’ sa‘hofkda’,
he said, “Let us go back again now.” So, now, Inoreover again they
went back,
660 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
dé’se’ tea’ dewa‘séino™ tea’ mnigé™ nhe‘s‘hofinenon’ oné™
and where it is middle where soitisdistant thither they had gone now
wa hé™hén’ ne’ Tha陓hiawa’eit, “Né™ agiéit‘hwif o‘hiadji’
he said that “This (here) Ihave planted it it-huckleberry
gaiadji‘. Ne’t‘ho’ di’ né"io‘dik ne’ t*honé™ o™hwéndjiade’:
it is called. Thus, moreover, so it will that here it-earth (is present)
continue to be
deiodi‘ha‘hén’ tea’ migé™ é"watchis’a‘sek néngé™ o‘hiadji’
they are severally where so it is distant it will be in the this (it is) it-huckleberry
different (one from habit of maturing
another)
nadie’ s‘ha’dewa‘séfino™ nofiwe’ tea’ niiodi’seige‘ ne’t‘ho‘ ne’
that (itis) just it is (the) middle the place where so many it-kinds there that
(are) in number
,
na’ nonwe' né®watchis’a‘sek.”’
the the place it will be in the habit of
that maturing.”
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ gano™sadkda’ nhofisa‘héfine’, ganio’ ne’t‘ho‘
At that (time) now it-lodge beside thither again they went, so soon as there
nohwe* wa’hadiio” oné™ wa’ hé™hén’, “Néngé"
the place they arrived Now he said, “This (it is)
o‘hofidodd’ = agiént‘hwi — swa‘hiona’ gaiadji‘,” oné™ di’
it-bush stands I have planted it it-fruit (is) large it is called,” now moreover
wa haniioidagwa‘ho”, da‘s‘hagao™” sgada‘s‘ho™’, t‘ho‘ge’ — di
he plucked it several, he gave it to them one it is each, at that (time) more-
over
wa’hnek. T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ ho‘sodé& wa’a‘hén’, ‘“Nigé™hé™”
they too ate (it), At that (time) that his grandmother she said, “Exceedingly
ol‘hwane‘higwat, o’nigo™hio‘t tea’ ni‘saieé™. Hiia‘-khé™
it-matter marvelous (is), it is pleasing where so thou hast done it. Not-is it
t‘haesigaié™hi‘ ne’ hofisdiagni‘hwa’ ostwi‘ha‘?” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
thou shouldst be that hence again one and I it is small At that that
willing to do it should take it (quantity) ?” (time)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ wa’hé™hén’, “Aids tihawddo™ ne’t‘ho’ nadiawé™ha’.
he said, “Not it would be thus so it should come
possible to pass
Naie’ diioi‘hw&’ swa’djik ha‘sa’ gwa’ wa’giéit‘hwa’. Ké™djik
res it is reason because just now likely I planted it. By and by
it is
ne’ naie’ oné™ éotga’dé™ha’. Ne’t‘ho‘ge’ ha‘s&é’ awado”™’ tea’
that that now it will become At that (time) just now it would be where
(it is) abundant, possible
nohwa‘ho’dé™ wa’sada‘héndo™.” T*ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’d‘hén’, “Son
kind of thing thou didst ask it.” At that now she said, “Who
(time)
di’ na’ nofiwa‘ho’dé” ne’t‘ho’ nitagoieé™ t‘hoigé™ ne’ gondii’
more- the kind of thing thus so one has that (itis) that they (zoic)
over that (there) done it are animals
onnadei’sdaa’ = gofidiwéfniio’s?”” Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
they produce their (zoic) voices Now the
sounds are fine?’’
da‘hawénnitgé™nha’ wa’hé™hén’, “T’ hid’ ne’t‘ho’ niwagieé™,
he spoke he said, Gag verily thus solLhave done it,
IT’ agio’dé™sda’.”” Oné™ ne’ ho‘sodé! wa’d‘hén’, ‘sof di’
1 my work (it is),”’ Now the his grand- she said, “Who more-
mother over
nofiwa‘ho’dé™” esd’ tea’ niio™ oné™ saio’dé™y‘?” T*ho‘ge'
kind of thing one will where soitis now thou hast At that
use it much worked?” (time)
newrtt] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 661
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ gwd’ o‘ni’ é"iesdi’
the he said, “That likely also one will
(it is) use it
ne’ tthoné™ o™hwéndjidde’ ké™djik @ofndgidit ne’ ofgwe‘
the here it earth (is) present by and by one will dwell the human (s)
nwa’eid’do’dé™.”’ T*‘ho‘ge’ ne’ ho‘soda’ wa’a‘hén’, “Oné™ gwa’
such one’s body (is) At that the his grand- she said, “Now likely
kind of.” (time) mother
’ ”?
o’ &"tciagia‘déndia’,”’ dé™se’ oné™ sa‘hia‘déndid’.
too one and I will depart and now again they two
again,” departed.
Nadie’ ne’ oné™ sa‘hniio™ tea’ nofwe’ det‘hninaddsgwi‘hi’
That the time again they where the place there their two bark-shelter (is)
(it is) two reached
oné™ ne’ gokstén’a’ wa’d‘hén’, “Nigé™hé” oi‘hwane‘higwat
time the she, the An- she said, “Exceedingly it matter (is)
cient One marvelous
tea’ niyodieé™ tea’ nofwe' hedne’sgwa’. Dogé"s — hiia’
where so it is done where the place there thou and Truly, verily
I have been.
wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’ tea’ hawén‘, ‘I’ é"ge‘séfniad’ tea’ nofwa‘ho’dé™
it-matter has been fulfilled where he said, AE I will make it where kind of thing
?
deiodo™hwéndjio‘hwi‘.’’’? Oné™ ne’ O‘haad’ wa’hawéfnitgé™ nha’
it is necessary.’”’ Now, the Flint he spoke
wa hé™hén’, ‘ Ksoda‘ha‘, é"kgwenia’ se’ o’ ni’i‘ ne’t‘ho’ né*gied’.”’
he said, “Oh, my grand- Iwill be able indeed too the I thus so I will doit.
mother, to do it per-
sonally
Hiix’ de’oi‘hwis‘he’ii oné™ gwa’ honnat‘hofde’ o‘gai’i‘ o‘gdionde’.
Not it-matter long (is) now belike they heard it it is loud it-sound went
sound along.
Ganio’ wa’hni‘héiga’ oné™ wa’hnitagé™ nha’ dé"’se’ oné™ wa’a‘hén’
Sosoon as they two heard it now they two went out and now she said
ne’ gokstén’a‘, “Ediatgat‘hwa’ hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™ agwas
the, the Ancient “Thou and I what kind of thing just
One, will see it
nondaiodieé™ hadie’,”’ oné™ di’ dsde‘ wa’t‘hnida’nha’. Wa’hiadién‘ha’
thence it comes taking place,” now more- out of they two stood. He was surprised
over doors
gw’ ne’t‘ho’ gofdidakhenofidie’, ofnatga’de’ skéfinondo”’
just there they (zoic) severally were they (are) deer
running, numerous
nwa’gaid’do’dé™ dé"’se’ wa’gondongo‘da’. Ha‘sa’ gwi’ oné™
so their body kind of (is) and they (zoic) passed by. Justthen seemingly time
he’ oid’ ne’t‘ho’ sgofdidakhenofdie’ djogaaéga’k ofnatga’de’
again it there again they (zoic) severally elks they (zoic) are
other were running numerous
(is)
dé"’se’ wa’gondongo‘da’. Ha‘si’ gwa’ oné™ he’ oid’ ne’t‘ho‘
and they (zoic) passed by. Just then seem- time again it-other there
ingly (is)
gondidakhenondie’ degeia’gi’ ofnatga’de’ dé"’se’ wa’gondongo‘da’.
they (zoic) ran severally buffalo they (zoic) and they passed by.
are many
Ha‘sa’? gwa’ ofinadofgo‘di‘ oné™ he’ oid’ dagofididakhenondie’
Just then seem- they (zoic) have now again it-other thence they (zoic) came
ingly, passed by (is) running severally
o‘gwai’ onnatgd’de’, wa’gofidofgo‘da’ o’ na’ ne’. Ha‘sa’ gwa’
it-bear they (zoic) are they (zoic) passed by too the that. Just then seem-
numerous, that ingly
oné™ he’ oid’ ne’t‘ho’ gondidakhenondie’ djo’ediga’k ofnatga’de’.
now again it-other there they (zoic) are severally raccoons they (zoic) are
(is) running numerous.
662 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
Ha‘sa’ gw’ wa’gondongo‘da’ oné™ he’ 014’ ne’t‘ho‘ gondidakhenofdie’
Just then seem- they (zoic) passed by home again it- there they (zoic) ran along
ingly other severally
(is)
o‘nhe’da’, wa’gotidongo‘da’. Oné™ wa’hiatgat‘hwa’ nadie’ gwd’ ne’
it-poreu- they (zoic) passed by. Now, they (two) saw it that seem- that
pine(s), (it is) ingly
ofnatga’de’ gondidienofdie’s, ofinatga’de’ dé™se’ gai’sdowané™.
they (zoic) are they (zoic) fly about they (zoic) are and it-sound (is) great.
numerous severally, numerous
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ gokstén’a’ wa’a‘hén’, “ Nigé™hé” oi‘hwane‘higwat
At that now the she-the An- she said, “Exceedingly —_it-matter marvelous (is)
(time) cient One
tea’ nwa’dwé™ ha’. Oné™ hiid’ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’ wa’tgont‘hwadjiia’k
D>
as so it has come Now verily it-matter (is) fulfilled they engendered ohwachira
0 pass.
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ haid’di‘sa’i‘.”’ T*ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ O*‘haa’
the he finished their At that now the Flint
bodies,” (time)
wa hé™hén’, ‘“Ne’t‘ho’ hé"ge’ tea’ téhono™saié™” ne’ deiagia-
he said, “There hence I where __ there his lodge lies the one and
re will go Tare
dé"hnondi’. E™heid‘héndo™ cabin‘ nonwe' da‘ha‘hwa’
brother(s). T will ask him where the place thence he obtained it
nonwa‘ho‘dé™ on‘ wa‘ha‘sénnia’da’ tea’ niio™ oné™
kind of thing presumably he used it to make it where (as) so it is much now
hoiéinénda’y’. Ha’deio‘hiage’ hoiéfit‘hwi‘, ha’ tgondiio’da‘ge‘
he has completed it. Every it-fruit is in number, - he has planted it, Every they animals (are)
in number
o‘ni’ haia’di‘sa’i‘; diéi‘ha’ gwd’ 陓hagat‘hoié™ ne’ nofwa‘ho’dé™
also he formed their if likely he will tell it to me the kind of thing
bodies;
é"kheia‘hénido™ é"ge‘sénniad’ o’ ni’a‘, swa’djik hiid’ hono™sde’
I will ask him I will make it too the I per- too much verily he prizes it
sonally, (because)
ne’ i‘sowa’ a‘s‘hofigninoida’. E"ge‘sefinid’ di’ agwds niaie’
the much he should give it to us two. I will make it moreover just (pat,
1U 1S,
sha’gada‘ tea’ nio‘t ~=ne’ _—hoiéfit‘hwa‘ho™. Nadie’ di’
even it is one as, where, so it is that he has planted them severally. That more-
(it is) over
galhonnia‘ha’ oné™ oo’ nia @iongnigd’dé™ha’.” T‘ho‘ge‘
it makes the matter now too the I per- thou and I will have an At that
sonally abundance.” (time)
oné™ ne’ Ochaa’? wa’ha‘déidia’? wa’haiagé™ nha’. Hiia‘
now the Flint he departed he went out. Not
de’ol‘hwis‘he’if oné™ ~hwa’hdio™ tea’ ~— t‘hodasgwA‘hi’ ne’
it-matter long (is) (time) there he arrived where _ there his bark shelter (is) the
T‘haé™hiawa’gi’, ne’ de‘hiadé™hnondii’. Ganio’ ongie‘
the they two are brothers. As soon as indoors
wa’t‘hasgwa’séf’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ ne’ né™ genié™ de’
he set his feet time he said, “That (itis) the here Icome to seek it
wa’gonno™sowé™nha’, ge‘he’ dsgat‘hoié’ hot nonwa‘ho’dé”
I visit thy lodge, I desire thou shouldst tell me what kind of thing
wa’se‘sénnia’da’ tea’ niio™ niodi’seiige‘ saént‘hwi‘ho™
thou usest it to make it where so it is much so many it-kinds in thou hast planted
number (are) them severally
dé™’se’ ne’ gofdiio’ tea’ niiodi’seige’ sia’disi’i‘?”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné"
and the they ani- where somanyit-kindsin thou didst finish At that now
mals number (are) their bodies?’’ (time)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 663
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi da‘hai‘hwa’siigwa’ wa’hé™hén’, —“‘ Naie’
the he replied he said, “That
(it is)
hid’ néng陓 o™hwéndjiade’ on‘he’ dé"’se’ &é"gé™heid’, ne’t‘ho,
verily this (it is) it-earth (is) present it is alive and it will die, there
di’ dewage‘kwé™ ne’ o‘he‘da’, ndie’ age‘séninia’di‘ tea’ niio™
more- I took it up the it-earth that (it is) I used it to make it as so it is
over (ground) much
agiént‘hwit dé™’se’ gid’di‘sa’i', nadie’ di’ gdi‘honniad‘ha’ gofnon‘he’
I have planted and I made their that more- it makes the matter they (zoic) are
bodies, (it is) over alive
dé"’se’ &"gofini‘heia’, o‘he‘da’ di’ 6"swadg™”. Ne’t‘ho‘ di’ o’
and they (zoic) will die, it-earth more- again it will These more- too
(ground) over become. over
na’ nio‘t ne’ gojidiio’, naie’, o’ na’ o‘he‘da’ dewage‘kwé™,
the so it is the they (zoic) that (itis) too the it-earth I have taken it up,
that animals are, that
naie’ age‘sénnia’di‘, nadie’ di’ gai‘honnid‘ha’ gagwegi‘ gofinon‘henio™
that (it Iused it to make it that (it more- it makes the it-all (whole) they (zoic) are
is) is) over matter severally alive
dé”’se’ é"gonni‘heid’, o‘he‘di’ é"swado”™.”” T‘ho‘ge‘
and they (zoic) will die, it-earth again it will become.’’ At that (time)
oné™ ne’ O‘haad’ wa‘ho’nigo™haiénda‘nha’, wa’hé™hén’, ‘Ne’t‘ho‘
now the Flint he understood it, he said, “Thus,
gwi’? 0’ niio™ agid’dine’.” Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
seem- too, soitis much it brings my body.” Now the
ingly,
wahé™hén’, “T’ ’o™ké™ €"¢onia‘héido™ hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ di’
he said, “T next in order I will ask thee what kind of thing more-
over
nis aesaio’?” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ O‘hai’ wa’hé™hén’, “Ndaie’ ne’ ni’
the it should kill At that the Flint he said, “That (it is) the the
thou thee?” (time) I
ao™hwa’i° kdagwds ne’ o‘had’ onénid’ dé"’se’ ne’ ona’ga’.
it-alone (is) I fear it the flint it-rock and the it-horn.
Naie’ se’ ne’ 6"gagwenii’ &"wageio’ néngé™ — degeni‘
That (it indeed the it will be able it will kill me this (it is) two (it is)
is) to do it
wa’gofiiat‘hoyé™.” Oné™ ne’ ‘T‘haé™hiawa’el wa’hé™hén’,
I have told thee.” Now the he said,
“Ne’t‘ho’ géngw&’ ne’ ni’ niio™ agei‘hwaié™ ne’ wa’gei’
“Thus only the the I so it is I have matter I the I desired it
much
agoni‘hwanénido™.” Oné™ ne’ O‘had’ sa‘ha‘déndia’.
I should ask thee.” Now the Flint again he deported.
Ganio’ —hofisaé‘haio” tea’ nonwe‘ det‘hnino™saié®’ oné™
So soon as there again he arrived where the place there their BG lodge now
stands
wahé™hén’, ‘“Ksoda‘tha', oné™ ne’t‘ho’ nwa’awé™ha’ — tea
he said, “Oh my grandfather, now thus so it came to pass where
niwak’nigo™he’dé™. Oné™ €"kdogé"s tea’ nonwa‘ho’dé”
so my mind (is) kind of, form of. Now it has come to me where kind of thing
ha‘sénnid’t‘ha’ ne’ hoiénit‘hwa‘ho™ dé™se’ ne’ gofidiio’; naie’,
he used it to make it the he planted it severally and the they (z.) are that (it
animals; is),
iagé™, o‘he‘da’ ha‘sénnia’t‘ha’.”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ ho‘soda‘ wa’a‘hén’,
one says, it-earth he uses it to make it.” At that the his grand- she said,
(time) mother
“Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ wa’seii’? tea’ vnonwa‘ho’dé™ wa’hiat‘hoié”’
“What kind of thing thou didst where kind of thing he told thee
think
664 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
ne’ dedjiadé™hnonda’?” O‘chad’ da‘hai‘hwa’sigwd’ wa’hé™hén’,
the he and thou are brothers?”’ Flint he replied he said,
“Naie’ gwi’ o’ tea’ niwak’nigo™he’dé™, ge‘he’ gaio’dé™seowané™
“That (it seem- too where so my mind (is) kind of, I think it it work (is) great
is) ingly form of,
hon’ tea’ niio™ oné™ hoiéfinéfidai’. Ge‘he’ di’ naie’
presum- where soit is much now he has completed it. I think it more- that (it
ably over is)
‘on’ wadie‘si’ge’ ne’ akheid’da‘se‘di’ géfigwd’ ne’ gofdiyo’,
presum- it is easy the I should conceal only the they (z.)
ably their bodies are animals,
gagweei’ di’ nadie’ I’ é6"dnii‘hwagwe’niio’khe’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’
it all more- that we thou and I will become possessed of it.” At that the
over (it is) (time)
gokstén’a’ wa’a‘hén’, ‘Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ né™sied’ ne’ é"sewenia’
she, os Ancient she said, “What kind of thing so ‘do wilt the thou wilt be able
One 0 it
é™s‘heia’da‘se‘da’ ne’ gofidio’?”” T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ O‘haad’ wa’hé™hén’
thou wilt conceal the they (z.) are At that the Flint he said,
their bodies animals?’’ (time)
“O™hwéfdjiagonwa‘ é"khe‘nhodo™ ne’ t‘honé™ gwa’t‘ho‘ dosgé™ha‘
“Tt-earth-inside-in I will shut them the here just near-by
ononda‘haé’ ne’t‘ho’ ha’goiwa‘ ne’t‘ho! é*khe‘nhodo™.” T‘ho‘ge‘
it-mountain there inside there I will shut them At that
stands (anthropic).’” (time)
ne’ ho‘soda‘ wa’a&‘hén’, “Oné™ ne’ ni’&* hid‘ sté” tthofisagi‘hén’.’”’
the his grand- she said, “Now the the I not anything again I will say it.”
mother person
ally
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’haiagé™ nha’ ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’he’ tea’ nofiwe‘
At that now he went out there thither he where the place
(time) went
ononda‘hiadie’, ne’t‘ho’ wa’hoio’dé™ha’, wa’hades‘hoiwis’a’, t‘ho‘ge‘
it-mountain stands there he worked, he finished a cavern at that
along, for himself, (time)
oné™ wa’s‘hagoid’dae‘ga’ ne’ gofdiio’ gagwegi’ da‘s‘hagodoii’,
now he collected their bodies the they (are) it all hither he drove their
animals bodies,
ne’t‘ho’ wa’s‘hagoia’dinio’da’ tea’ nofiwe‘ hode‘s‘honionni’ tea’
there he caused their bodies to enter where the place he has made for himself where
a cavern
onondas‘hi’ ha’gonwa’. Ganio’ oné™ gagwegi‘ wa’gofdiio™”
it-mountain inside of it. So soon as time it-all they entered it
stands
,
oné™ da‘ha‘hén’ onénid’ tea’ nofwe’ ao™hwéndjiaga‘hénda’.
now he laid it on it-rock where the place it-earth (is) opened.
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Oné™ wa’khe‘nhodo™. Ne’t‘ho‘
At that now he said, “Now T have shut them Thus,
(time) (anthropic) up. there,
di’ nia’ géfigwa’ niio™ €"gio’dé™ha’ oné™ gaowegii |’
more- thel only so it is I worked now it-whole I
over Weta much
y
wa’gei‘hwagwe’niio’khe’. Ne’t‘ho’ géi
I gained control of the matter. There
wi nia’ hé"ceewi‘sek
y the I there I will be in the
person- habit of getting it
ally
ne’ @"jagnon‘he‘gwik ne’ ksod&‘ha‘,” dé™se’ oné™ sa‘ha‘déndia’.
the one and he ill continue to the my grandmother,” and now again he departed.
ive on it
Ganio’ hofisa‘haio” wa’hé™héh’, “Ksoda‘ha‘, oné™ ne’ nadie’
So soon as there again he arrived he said, “Oh, my grand- now the that
mother, (it is)
or
5
onl
ee
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 665
wa’khe‘nhodo™ ne’ gondiio’. Oné™ di’ is é*tchéfino™do™ tea’
I have shut them the they (zoic) sNow more- thou thou wilt will it where
(anthrop.) up (are) animals. over
niwat‘hawi’ gé"s dé™sado™hwéfdjio‘s ne’ o’wa'ha’, génigwa’
it bears itself custom- it will become needful to thee the it-meat, only
there (it is time) arily
gé"s 6 "sgat‘hoié™ oné™ é"gegwa‘ha’.”’ Ne’ ho‘soda‘ wa’a‘hén’,
custom- thou wilt tell me time I will go after it.” The his grand- she said,
arily (it is) mother
“Genhée” niawé™ha‘, oné™ hid’ ofgiadé"na’tchiga’dé™ha’.”
“Exceedingly it is thankable, now verily thou and I have an abundance
of provisions.”
Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ O‘haé’ ne’t‘ho’ nhof‘sa‘he’ tea ’ nofwe*
At that (time) now the Flint there again he went where the place
t‘hodasgwa‘hi’ ne’ de‘hiadé™hnondiéaé’. Wa’haio™ dé”’se’ oné™
there his bark the his brother. He entered and now
shelter (is)
wa hadyén‘ha’ gwd’ dogé"s hat‘hesgaéninia‘hénk ne’ T‘haé*hiawa’ei‘.
he was surprised just it is true he is making for himself arrows the
Oné™ ne’ O'had’ wa’hé™hén’, “Hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ sesda‘ne’
Now the Flint he said, “What kind of thing thou are going
to use it
nigé™hé™” sd‘hesgaga’de’ oné™?” ‘Tho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ T‘haé™-
exceedingly thou has many arrows now?” At that (time) now the
hiawa’gi‘ da‘hai‘hwa’sigwi’ wa’ hé™hén’, “Naie’ hid’
he replied he said, “That verily
(it is)
gadadeiéinénda’s ké™djik gwa’t‘ho’ oné™ dogé"s é"ganagén‘ha’
Iam preparing myself by and by soon now it is true it will become
abundant
ne’ gaio’.” Oné™ ne’ Othai’ da&‘hé™hén’, “Gaéi’ di’ nonwe‘
the game.” Now the Flint he said “Where more- the place
in reply, over
né"tgofine’ tea’ ifsado"k é°ganagéf‘ha’ ne’ gaio’. Hid‘ ni’a,
thence they (z.) where thou art saying it will become the game. Not thel
will come abundant person-
ally
gatka’ de’kgé™ha’ awe’sek ne’ gaio’?” T*ho‘geS ne’
anywhere I see it it aoe going the game?”’ At that (time) the
about
ee)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ di‘hawénnitgé™’ nha’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Tgagofda’ se’
he spoke in reply he said, “Tt must be (so), i
eed,
gaéh’ gwd’ nonwe‘ nigofine’s tca’ niio™ ne’ ao™hwéndjiat‘hé” ge
where just the place there they (z.) where so it is the it-earth dry at
go about many
degondawéniek.” Oné™ ne’t‘ho’ niwat‘hawi’ oné™ ne’ O‘haii’
they (z.) continue to Now there there it bears itself now the Flint
go about.” (is time)
si‘ha‘déndia’.
again he departed.
Ne’ oné™ hofss‘haio™ tea’ nofwe' t‘hninadasgwa‘hi’
The time there again he where the place their (two) bark shelter
arrived stands
wa hé™hén’, “Ksoda‘ha‘, wa'kewat‘hwi’ tea’ = t"hé ’dén’
he said, “‘Oh, my grand- I made a trip where there he abides
mother,
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei’, wa’gatgat‘hwa’ hat‘hesgaénnia‘hénk,.
the I saw it he is making arrows for
himself,
hadadei@inénda’s, iagé™, 6 °ganagén‘ha’ ne’ gaio’.”
he is preparing himself, it is said, it will become plentiful the game.”
19078°—28——_43
666 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Do gw’ nwa’onnis‘he’ oné™ ne’ gokstén’a’ daiiewéninitgé™ nha’
How like so it was long now the she, the Ancient she spoke
(it is) (time) One
wa'athen’, “Oné™ ewa’ oni’ a‘segwa‘ha’ ne’ o’wa‘ha’, oné™
she said, “Now like also thou shouldst go the it-meat, now
(it is) after it
wa’ofigiate’a‘dé™.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’ O‘haa’ wa’ha‘dénidia’
it has wholly gone.” At that now the Flint he departed
(time)
ne’t‘ho! nhwa’he’ tca’ nofiwe‘ diio‘sdde’. Ganio’ ne’t‘ho’ nofwe‘
there thither he where theplace_ there it-cavern so soon as there the place.
went exists.
wa’haio™ oné™ wa’ha‘gwi’da’ ne’ ganéfiaié™” ne’ hodji‘heda‘gwi‘
he arrived now he removed it the it-rock lies the he closed it thereby
tea’ ofsade’, oné™ di’ wa’haio™ dé™se’ ne’t‘ho’ ha’gofiwi‘ wa’haio’
where it-cavern now more- he entered it and there inside he killed it
exists, over
ne’ gaio’, dé™se’ oné™ di’ dofida‘haiagé’nha’, dé™se’ oné™
the it-game, and now more- thence he he came out, and now
over
si‘hadeiénnonnia’, sa‘hadji‘hedé’ tea’ o‘sade’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
he made it good again, again he blocked it up where it-cavern At that now
(is), (time)
si‘ha‘déndia’, hoid’dage‘de’ ne’ skéfnofdo™”. Oné™ honsa‘haio™”
again he departed, he bore with the the deer. Now again he arrived
forehead strap home
its body
wa hén‘hén’, “Ksoda‘ha‘, oneé™ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’ tea’
he said, “Oh, my grand- now it-matter is fulfilled where
mother,
nohwa‘ho’dé™ de‘sado™hwéndjiofinik.”’ Dondaiei‘hwa’siigwi’
kind of thing thou needest it.”” She replied
ne’ gokstén’s’ wa’d‘hén’, “Gée"hé” niawé™ha’. Wadiesa’ge‘
the she, the Ancient she said, “Exceedingly, it is gratifying. It is easy
One.
hii’ wa’ofgiado™s ne’ gaio’.”’ Ne’t‘ho’ nio‘t gaéi’ gwa’
verily it became for us two the game.” Thus so it is where (like
> d (it is)
nwa’gal‘hwis‘he’.
so it-matter (is) long.
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa’hatdogd’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ hid’ gwa’
At that now he noticed it the not seem-
(time) ingly
gatga’ de’sgofine’s ne’ gofidiio’. Oné™ di’ he’ ne’t‘ho’ nhonsa‘he’
anywhere again they(z.) go the they (z.) are Now more- again’ there thither again he
about usually animals. over went
tea’ nohwe’ tihono™saié™ ne’ héfgwe', Hao™hwéfdjiawa’kho”
where the place there his lodge lies the he, a human, He-holds-earth-severally
is,
ni‘ho‘séfino’dé™. Ganio’ ne’t‘ho‘ wa’haio™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
such his name kind of (is). Sosoonas there he entered the
oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Hiid’ de’wagénno™do™ hot nofiwa‘ho’dé™”
now he said, “Not I know it what kind of thing
‘on’ nwa’awé™ha’, nwd’odiya’dawé™ha’, hid’ gatga’ de’sgofne’s
pre- so it came to pass, so it befell their(z.) bodies, not anywhere they (z.) again
sum- go about
ably customarily
ne’ gondiio’ tea’ niio™ oné gia’di‘sai’y.”’ Ttho‘gef oné™ ne’
the they (z.) are where _ soit is now I their (z.) bodies At that now the
animals much have completed.” (time)
(many)
héngwe', Hao™hwéndjiawa’kho™, wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Agéino™do™
he-human, He-holds-earth-severally, he said, “T know it
eal res
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 667
yams
tea’ nofiwe‘ hegofini’déi’. Godi‘nhodo™ tea’t‘ho’ o“hwéfidjiagonwa*
where the place there they (z.) abide. They (z.) are shut up actually it-earth-in
o‘sade’. Naie’ ne’ dedjiadé™ hnonda’ O‘haai’ naie’
it-cavern. That the ye two (he and thou) are Flint, that
(it is) c brothers (it is)
wa’t‘hiaeiéfinio™. Egofiat‘hoié™ tea’ nofwe‘ tgonni’déi’ ne’
he has juggled thee. I will tell thee where _ the place there ee! (z.) the
abide
gondiio’. Tea’ nofiwes t‘honaddsgwi‘hi’ ne’ sad‘soda‘ha‘ ne’t‘ho‘
Bey Aig? are Where _ the place there their bark shelter is the thy grandmother there
sii hagwadi‘ ha’deiodogé™di‘ diionond&‘hié’ ne’t‘ho’ ha’gonwa*
farther _ side of it it is directly opposite, it-mountain stands there inside
ahead, straight away,
hode‘s‘honionni‘, ne’t‘ho’ di’ gofini’dén’ t*hodji‘heda’ tea’ nonwe*
he has made himself a there more- they (z.) abide he has closed it where the place
cavern, over up
diiodiio™ da‘gwi‘, onénid’ t‘ho‘ha’ tea’ nofwe‘ o‘s‘hofwe’. Naie’
there they entered it-rock he has where the place it-hollow is. That
thereby, placed it (it is)
over it
di’ tea’ né™siei’ nadie’ énioianéfikhe’ ne’ 陓he‘sé™’nigo™haié™ ne’
more- where so thou wilt that it will become good the thou wilt watch him the
over do it (it is) g
Ocha’. Nadie’ ne’ oi3’ @"tciio‘hé’ nha’ ne’t‘ho’ nhé™se’. ’A‘gwi'
Flint. That the it-other it will again be day there thither thou Do not
(it is) wilt go. _ (that)
陓hatdoga’. Dosgé™ha’ nigé™ ne’t‘ho’ é™sada‘se‘di’. ’A‘gwi'
he will notice, be Close by so it is there thou wilt hide thyself. Do not
aware ol, it. distant (that)
é™hiagé™. T*ho‘ge’ tea’t‘ho’ oné™ he’ é"s‘ha’wa‘hagwa‘ha’ ne’
he will see thee. tt inet actually time again again he will go after meat the
time
gaio’, dé™hesga‘ha’k di’ tea’ né™haied’ ne’ oné™ é™hago‘héngwa’
it-game, thou will have thine more- where sohewilldoit the time he will uncover it
eyes on him over
tea’ o‘sade’. Dé"sea‘hi’k ne’ oné™ hé™hadio™ o‘sadagoiwa‘;
where it-cavern is. Thou will have fixed the time thither he it-cavern in;
thine eyes on it will enter
dé™hesga“ha’k oni’ oné™ dé"t‘hdiagéVhnd’ dé"’se’ 6"s‘hago‘hénk
thou wilt have thine Also time thence he will come and he will again cover
eyes on him forth it
tea’ oidde’ dé™se’ 6™hatge‘dat ne’ gaio’ oia’da’. Ganio’ oné™
where __it-cave and hewillbearitwith the it-game its body. So soon as now
(hole) is the forehead strap
é™sei’ oné™ hon‘ hes‘hoio™ tea’ t‘honaddsgwa‘ha’ oné™ is ’o™ké™”
thou wilt time presum- there he has where there their bark shelter time thou next
think ably returned stands
&"tego‘héngwi’ tea’ nofiwe’ o‘sade’, t‘ho‘ge’ di’ oné™ hé™sio™”
again thou wilt uncover where the place it-cave is, at that more- time there thou
it (time) over wilt enter
dé"tcheia’ditgé"k ne’ gondiio’.” Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
thence thou wilt drive their the they (z.) are Now the
bodies out animals.”
si‘ha‘déndia’.
again he departed.
Naie’ ne’ oné™ hwa’ga‘he’g tca’ nofiwe’ ni‘hona’do™ ne’
That (it is) the time there it arrived where the place there*he Bad indi- the
cate
Hao™hwéfdjiawa’kho™ t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’ De‘haé™hiawa’kho”
He-holds-earth-severally at that (time) now the Life God
668 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
wa’ha‘déndia’, hwa’hds’a‘da’ hwa’ha‘hwa’ tea’ niio™ hohesgaié™’.
he departed, hence he took all hence he carried it where soit _ he has arrows.
muc’
Né™ hagwadi ganiadakdofdie, hagwa‘ hwa’hat‘hwada‘se’da’.
This side of it it-lake (sea) along way hence he went around.
Wavhaio™ tea’ ononda‘ha’ akdi’a ne’t‘ho’ wa’hadiéh’. Hid‘
He arrived there where it-mountain stands aside of it there he sat down. Not
de’aofinis‘he’ii oné™ wa’hogé™ di‘he’ ne’ O‘haa’. Tei‘he’
it is long time he saw him he comes the Flint. As he goes
gw’ ne’t‘ho’ wa’t‘hada’nha’ tea’ nofiwe’ ganéfiaié’. Onér
like (it is) there he stood where the place it rock lies. Now
di’ wa’t‘hatgi‘dofnio"k ne’t‘ho’ niio‘t aiéna’ ha’nigo™ha’ ne’
more- he looked about thus so it is it would he was watching the
over seem
hia’ songa’ tha‘hoiwagé™. T‘ho‘geS oné™ da‘haiend’ tea’
not any one he should see him. At that (time) now he laid hold ofit | where
ganéniaié™ dé’se’ da‘hagetcewa’ dé™se’ né™ hiagwa*
it-rock lies and he raised it up on edge and this way
wa’haié™, oné™ di’ wa’haio” osadagonwa‘. T‘hi‘hodieé™
he laid it, now moreover he entered it-cavern-in. Just he is still
géngwi? ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ de‘hoga‘hia’ tea’ nwa’haiea’
only the he had his eyes on him where so he did it
oné™ he‘hoyo™. Wa’gai‘hwis‘he’ oné™ gwd’ dondaihaiagé™ nha’
time there he has entered. It-matter is long now just thence he came forth
hoid’dage‘de’ on‘he’da’. Na’ ne’ oné™ he’tgé™ hagwadi‘ sa‘hahén’
he bore the body porcupine. That the time above side of it again he laid it
withthe forehead
strap
vay
ne’ oid’da’ wa’hé™hén’, “Ste” gw’ nofwa‘ho’dé" ’on‘ diioi‘hwa’
the it-body he said, “Some- like kind of thing pre- it is the reason
thing (it is) sum-
ably
tea’ ne’t‘ho’ nofgia’dawé™ha’, sé™ge’ t‘ha’geiio’ ne’ gaio’ dé"’se’
where there, thus, so my body it befell, hardly Tcould kill it the it-game and
oo
wa'djik’a’ [T’ de’wagelio’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ honsa‘hadiiéidé™ ne’
nearly, almost, I it killed me.”’ At that (time) now there again he drew back it the
onéiid’ dé"’se’ oné™ sdi‘hago‘hénk tea’ nonwe‘ o‘sdde’, oné™
it-rock and time again he covered it where the place it-cave-is, now
di) s&‘hadia’dige‘dat dé™se’ oné™ — s&‘ha‘déndia’.
more- again he bore the body with and now again he departed.
over the forehead strap
Ganio’ oné™ hofisd‘ha‘do” oné™ ne’ T*haé™hiawa’gi*
So soon as now there again he disappearedj now the
wahé™héen’, “Oné™ di’? hid’ T ’o™%ké™ ne’t‘ho’ hofi‘sage‘’ tea’
he said, “Now more- verily I next in order there there again let where
over me go
nonwe’ tgofine’s ne’ gofdiio’;”? oné™ di‘ ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’he’ tca’
the place there they (z.) the they (z.) are now more- there he went where
go about animals;"’ over
nohwe’ ganéniaié™. Tchi‘he’ gwd’ wa’t‘ha‘gwa’ ne’ onéniad’,
the place it-rock lies. As he went like, he took it up the it-rock,
akda’a’ hwa’haié™’, oné™ di’ hwa’hdio™ o‘sadagonwa‘, dé"’se’
aside there he laid it, now more- there he entered it-cavern-in, and
‘over
donda‘s‘hagodoia’ ne’ gondiio’, oné™ di’ dagofidiiagé™ nha’
thence again he drove the they (z.) are now moreover thence they (z.) came out
them (anth.) animals,
gagweel’. Oné™ di’? ne’ T‘haé*‘hiawa’gif wa’hawénnitgé’nha’,
it-whole (it-all). Now moreover the he spoke,
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 669
wa hé™hén’, “T’ ne’ né™ gwaid’di‘sa’i’. Hida‘ hiid’ de’oianén’hwi'
he said, eey the de) I formed your bodies. Not verily it turned out well
it is
tea’ hid’ de’swén’da‘dén’i’. Naie’ gai‘honnia‘ha’ ne’ t‘ho‘
where not ye wild are. That (it is) it matter makes (it causes it) thus
nwe’swaya’dawé™ha’ = wa’gagwenid’ ~—wa’etchi‘nhodo™. Oné™
so it befell your persons it was able to do it one has shut you up. Now,
di) wa’gwai‘hwis’&‘s_ tea’ né™io‘dik ne’ o‘hénido™ hagwa‘
more- I ordain for you where soit willcontinue the for head -wards
over, to be (direction)
é®ca‘hawi‘dd’ tea’ we’swi‘hwadjiidadie’ tea’ né"yonnis‘he’ ne
it will bear it where hence your (pl.) ohwachira will where so it will endure the
(its course will be) continue to be
t‘honé™ é"Iio™hwéndjiadek &"swé"'da‘dén ik di’ oné";
here it-earth will continue to be present ye shall continue moreover now;
to be wild
agwis di’ 7o™ké™ gts éMeé™hiagé™’-dji‘hwa’ onée™
just moreover nextinorder customarily one will be thoroughly fatigued time
ha‘sd’ é"yetchigé™. E"swadadwénniyoks dé™se’ is
just then one will see you (pl.). Ye will continue to be free and ye
swat™hiagé™sa’ 6 "géik tea’ é"djio‘n‘hek.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
your striving it will be where ye will keep alive.” At that (time) now
wa’tgohdogwa’ wa’gonde’gwi’?. Oné™ di’ wa‘ha’agwi’ ne
they dispersed they fled. Now, moreover he shot the
skéfinofdo™, dé®’se’ wa’ga‘hesgaeda’nha’ gaid’di’ge‘, oné™ di’
deer, and it-arrow became fixed in its body, now more-
over
wa’hé™hén’, ‘Desai‘dat, ne’t‘ho‘ wa’se‘ tea’ diiagode‘nhoga‘hénda’
he said, “Do thou run, there dothou go where there her doorway (is)
ne’ gokstén’a‘ aksoda‘ha‘’.”’ Oné™ hiis’ wa’dwad‘dat, agwas
the she, the Ancient my grandmother.” Now verily it ran, just
One
?
n
ne’t‘ho’ tea’ ga‘nhoga‘hénda’, Asde‘ hagwadi‘, —_ne’t‘ho‘
there where it-doorway (is), out of doors side of it, there
wa’gaid’diené’nha’ o‘gai’i‘, wa’diaun‘hofinidgae‘ha’. Got‘honde’
its body fell it is loud, it-earth resounded. She heard it
ne’ = gokstén’a‘, dondaiedé"sdi’ dé"’se’ wa’d‘hén’, ‘Hot
the she, the Ancient one, she stood up suddenly and she said, “What
nonwa‘ho’dé™ né™ nwdé’awé™ha?” Oné™ asde’ wa’dieda’nha’
kind of thing this so it has come to pass?” Nasy out of doors, she stood
dé"’se’ wa’ofitgat‘hwa’, oné™ ne’t‘ho’ wa’ondyén‘h’ gw’ ne’t‘ho‘
and she saw it, now there she was surprised seemingly there
gé"dagi’ skéfinonido™-gé™ha’, agwds ga‘hesgaeda’ ga‘s‘hwa’ge‘,
it lay deer it used to be, just it-arrow protrudes in its side,
oné™ di’ wa’a‘hén’, ‘O‘haa’, satgat‘hwa‘ nuoi‘hwane‘higwat
now moreover she said, “Flint, do thou look so it-matter (is) marvelous
wa ofgnino™sowé™ nha’ ne’ — gaiio’.”’ Tho‘ge‘ ne’ O‘haa’
it has visited our (two) lodge the game.’”’ At that (time) the Flint
wahatgat‘hwi’ dé™se’ s&‘haiénde’nha’ ne’ de‘hiadé™hnonda’
he looked and he re-knew it (recognized it) the his brother
ho‘hesga’. Hua‘ sté™ de’hawé™, dé™se’ oné™ di’ hofsa‘haio™
his arrow (it is). Not any thing he said, and now more- he again reenter-
over ed it
gano™sgoniwa‘, s‘hoiwa‘hnondidie’ gwa't‘ho’ di’ ne’ ho‘soda'.
it-lodge-in, she followed closely moreover the his grand-
mother.
’
Oné™ he’ ne’ T‘ha陓hiawa’gif sd‘ha’agwa’ dé’se’ djogaiga’k
Now again the again he shot and elk
670 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
wa’ga‘hesgaeda’nha’ gaia’di’ge‘, oné™ di’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘ Desai‘dat,
it arrowed became fixed its body in, now more- he said, “Do thou run,
over
ne’t‘ho’ hwa’se‘ tea’ diiagodasgwi‘hi’ ne’ ksoda‘ha‘.” T‘ho‘ge‘
there do thou go where there her bark shelter (is) the my grandmother.’ At that
(time)
oné™ wa’dwaid‘dat, agwds tea’ ga‘nhoga‘hénida’ akda’a‘ ne’t‘ho‘
Now it ran, just where it-doorway (is) nearby there
wa’gaid’diené’nha’; oné™ he’ oid’ sa‘ha’agwa’ degeia’gi’
its body fell; Now again it-other again he shot buffalo
(is)
wa ga‘hesgaeda’nha’ gaid’di’ge‘, oné™ di’ he’ wa’hé™hén’,
it-arrow became fixed its body in, Now more- again he said,”
over
“Desai‘dat, ne’t‘ho’ wa’se’ tca’ nofiwe’ diiagodasgwa‘hié’ ne
“Do thou run, there do thou go where the place there her bark shelter (is) the
ksoda&‘ha‘,”’ oné™* o’ nadie’ wa’dwai‘dat, dé’se’ ne’t‘ho’ o’ niaie’
my grand- Now too that it ran, and there too that
mother,” (is it) (it is)
hwa’gaid’dien@’nha’ § gano™sdkda’; i t‘ho‘ge oné™ he’ oi’
thither its body fell beside the lodge; At that Now again it oth-
(time) er (is)
si‘ha’agwi’, o‘gwai’ ’o™%ké" wa’ga‘nhioda’nha’ ne’ gaid’di’ge
again he shot, bear next in order it-dart became fixed the in its body
’
vn
ne’ ga‘hesea’, oné™ di’ wa’hé™héi’, ‘Desaii‘dat, ne’t‘ho’ wa’se‘
the it-arrow, Now more- he said, “Do thou run, there do thou go
over
tea’ nofwe‘ diiagono™saié” ne’ ksoda‘ha‘.” Oné™ wa’dwai‘dat
where _ the place there her lodge lies the my grandmother. Now it ran
ne’t‘ho’ ga‘nho‘hwaikda&’ ne’t‘ho’ wa’gaid’diené’ nha’. T‘ho‘ge‘
there beside the door there its body fell. At that (time)
oné™ he’ oi’ ne’ T‘ha陓hiawa’el’ sa‘ha’agwa&’ djo’eiiga’k
Now again it oth- the again he shot raccoon
eris ‘
wa’ga‘hnioda’nha’ ne’ ga‘hesgii’ ne’ gaid’di’ge‘, oné™ di’
it-dart became fixed the it-arrow the its body on, Now more-
over
v~?
wa hé™hén’, ““Desaii‘dat; ne’t‘ho’ wa’se‘ tea’ nofwe‘ diiagono™-
he said, “Do thou run, there dothou where _ the place there her lodge
go
saie” ne’ ksod&‘ha‘;”? T‘ho‘ge’ oné™* wa’dwai‘dat dé"’se’ ne’t‘ho‘
lies the my grandmother.” At that now it ran and there
(time)
gano™sikda’ wa’gaid’diené’nha’. Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ he’ oid’
beside the lodge its body fell. At that (time) Now again it oth-
er (is)
wathivagwi’ ned&‘hé“hwi! wa’gahesgaeda’nhi’ gaid’di’ge‘. Oné™
he shot it wild turkey it-arrow become fixed its body on, Now
di’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé™hén’, ‘Desai‘dat, ne’t‘ho! wa’se‘
more- the he said, “Do thou run, there do thou go
over
tea’ nofiwe’ diiagono™saié™” ne’ ksoda‘ha‘;” oné™’ di’ wa’dwai‘dat
where theplace there her lodge lies the mygrandmother.’””’ Now more- it ran
over
,
ne’t‘ho! ga‘nho‘hwakda&’ wa’gaid’diené’nha’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne
there it-doorway beside its body fell. At that Now the
(time)
Tihaé™hiawa’ei’ wa’hé™hén’. “Oné™ hon’ ne’t‘ho’ ha’degaiei’.”’
he said,” Now, pre- there it is quite enough.”
sum-
ably
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 671
Oné™ di’ wa’ha‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho‘ nhwa’he’ tca’ nofwe‘ t‘hodino™saié”’
Now, more- he started there he went where the place their lodge lies
over
ne’ ho‘sodd‘. Ganio’ wa’haio” oné™ ne’ ho‘soda’ wa’s‘hén’,
the his grand- So soon as he entered Now the his grand- she said,
mother, mother
“Oi‘hwane‘higwat tca’ nwa’awe™hi’. Nadie’ ne’ detciadé“hnondiia
“Tt matter (is) marvelous where so it came to pass, That the thy brother
(it is)
hodoit‘ho™na’ ne’ gaio’. Satgat‘hwa‘ nigaidi’do’d@“ ne
he has been to hunt the game. Do thou look such its body is the
kind of
haiohadiena’.”” Tho‘ge' ne? T‘ha陓hiawa’gi‘ wa’hatgat‘hwa’
he brought it back At that the he looked at it
killed.” (time)
wa hé™hén’, ‘“Naie’ hii’ ne’ ga‘nhe’d4’ gaiddji‘. Nadie’ hiid’
he said, “That verily the porcupine it is called. That verily
(it is) (it is)
ne’t‘ho’ nofiwe‘ he‘he’sgwd’ ne’ O‘hai’ tca’ nonwe‘ ne’ hid‘
there the place he has been the Flint where the place the not
sté” de’tgofine’s ne’ gaio’. Né™ ne’ |’ agadoit‘ho™na’. Dégé*s
any- there they (z) the game. Here, the I I have been away Truly
thing go about This, to hunt.
ni’i‘ gadio’danagee’ tca’ nofwe‘ hege’sgwa’.”’” Oné™ he’
Thel (it) game (is) where the place there I have Now, again
person- plentiful been.”
ally
vn y
dofida‘hawénnitg?’ nha’ wa’ hé“hen “One™ di’ dége‘snie’nha’ ne’
(S ? to}
thence again he spoke, he said,” Now, more- I will dress the
over
?
gio’ tea’ niio™ wa’gid’diené™da’.” Tho‘ge oné™ hofisaé‘haiagé™ nhii’
game where soit is I felled their bodies.’’ At that Now hence again he went out
much time
dé’se’ oné% da‘ha‘sawé” wa’haié™séfiewa’, wa’has’a‘da’,
and now he began it he skinned it severally, he exhausted them
oné™ ’o™]ké" wa’t‘ha’wa‘ha‘hi‘da’, wa’has’4‘da’, oné oe’
, ?
Now next he quartered the meat, he exhausted it, now next
wa‘ha’wa‘hiniiondé” agwas deiono™sada‘se’di‘ ga’wa‘hiniiondo™.
he hung up (the) meat severally just it encircled the lodge it-meat hung severally.
T‘ho‘ge‘ oné* ne’ gane‘hwd’ oné™% wa’haio’da’ gano™sgonwi‘,
At that now the it-hide(s) now he brought them in it lodge-in,
time
oné™ di’ wa’hadagwai‘siofigwa‘ho” ne’ gane‘hwa’s‘ho" a‘,
Now more- he spread them out severally the it-skin-s,
over
wa’ hanéndakda’ gés_ gé™sa’ge‘, wa’t‘hat‘hwada‘se’ tea’ nigano"’sa’.
he attached it cus- side of he encircled it where so it lodge
tom- lodge on (is) large.
arily
T‘ho‘ge’ sgadi‘ ne’t‘ho’ wa’h陓sowé” tea’ nofiwe’ gotnakdo”
At that one there he spread it where the place her mat is
(time) (it is)
ne’ ho‘soda‘ ne’ o’ sgadd‘ ne’t‘ho’ wa’haié’. Oné% ne
the his grand- the too one there he laid it. Now the
mother (it is)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ wa’ h陓hén’, “ Ksoda‘ha‘, oné™ hia’ wa’gai‘hwaiei’khe’
he said, “Oh, my grand- Now verily it-matter is fulfilled
mother,
?
wove
oi hwagwegi‘ tea’ nofwa‘ho’dé” agei‘hwi‘sa’i‘, — goni‘hwis’énni‘.
it-matter whole where kind of thing I have promised, I promised thee.
672 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Onée™ di’ wa’geiéfinéfida’nha’. Is di’ é@tchadieé™da’ naie’
Now more- my handiwork is ended. Those more- thou wilt be the first that
over over (it is)
“sa’nigo™hiiosdi‘ewi’? tea’ nofiwa‘ho’dé” @ga‘hwi’k tea’
5S 5
it will content thy mind where kind of thing it will contain it where
o“hwéndjiade’. Degeni‘ wado™t‘ha’; naie’ ne’ ofigwe’ éionndgat
it earth is present. Two it makes itself; that the humans they will come
(it is) to dwell
tea’ o™hwéndjiade’ nadie’ @ieid’dagwe’niio’khe’, —naie’
where it-earth is present that they will come into possession of it, that
(it is) (it is)
@jago’nigo™hiiosda‘gwik tea’ niio™ &ga‘hwa’k tea’ o™hwéndyjidae’.
it will content their minds thereby where soit is it will contain where it earth is present.
muc!
Oné™ di’ wa’gei‘hwis’&’ ne’ o‘héido™ hé*ga‘hawi‘dé’ tea’ nigé™
Now more- I ordain it the ahead, thither it will bearit where soitis
over (future), far
hé"tciado’kdé” néngé“ha’ wa’gatga’k t‘honé™ — snino™sgofwi‘
ye two will exhaust it this (it is) I left it here in your two lodge
oné™ is @djiadadienawa’s ne’ skéfino” é&"tciéino™dofnio™hek.”
Now, you yetwowill help yourselves the (it) peaceful ye two will think thoughts
time, repeatedly.”
Ganio’ wa’hai‘ho’kdé” oné™ ne’ T‘ha陓hiawa’gi‘ sa‘haiagé’nhi’,
So soon as he finished the now the again he went out,
latter
si‘ha‘déndia’, dé’se’ hon‘sa‘haio” tea’ nofiwe’ tihodasgwa‘hi’.
again he departed, and there again he where the peace there his bark
arrived lodge (is).
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Huds hid’ ’on’ t*haioianéi’khe‘
At that (time) now he said, “Not verily presum- it will result in
ably good
ne’ dosg陓ha‘ daiagiadek ne’ deiagiadé™hnofdaé’. Oné™ hiik’
the near (it is) oneandI should the one and I are brothers. Now verily
keep apart
wi’hadoda‘sia’ wa’t‘hak’nigo™haéf’ tea’ nofiwa‘ho’dé™ agio’dadie’.
he has shown himself he has disturbed the mind where kind of thing Iam working along.
Naie’ di’ ’on‘ oidne’ ne’ dé™agiadekha’, A‘so™ hiidi’ i‘sowd’
That more- presum- it-good the one and I will separate still verily much
(it is) over ably is by a mete, (it is)
agadei‘hwade’ é"wagio’dé™ha’. Ne’t‘ho’ oné™ di’ hiid’ ’on‘
I have unfinished I will work. Thus now moreover verily presum-
matter ably
né"gied’. Déreii’k di’ néngé™ tea’ ga‘hwe‘no’, niaie’ di’ ne
soI willdoit. I will divide more-_ this (it is) where _it-island floats, that more- the
it in two over (it is) over
o‘hneganos 6"gawet‘hak tea’ na’dé"giadait. Hua‘ di’ t‘ha‘hagwenia‘
it-water fresh Iwill placeit where as much they two Not more- he will be able to
between will be apart. over 0 it
ne’ ganio’ gwd’ hwéndo™ da‘haia‘hia’k.” T‘ho‘geS oné?,
the at any seemingly when he should cross the stream.’”’ At that (time) now
withaiagé™ nha’ dé™se’ wa’ha‘déndig’ dé™se’ agwds tea’
he went out and he went and just where
diiot‘hnego’kdi’ ~~ ne’t‘ho‘ ~=wa’t‘hada’nha’s- dé™se’—s oné™ ~— di’
there it itself water ends there he stood and now more
’
wahé™hén’, “Nadie? néngé™ o™hwéfdjidde’ dé °wadekha‘sid’,
he said, “That (it is) this (it is) it-earth (is) present it will separate itself,
is di’ néngé™ o‘hneganos wa’gwa‘hofgaia’k ne’t‘ho’ nonwe‘
thou more- this (it is) it-water fresh (is) T appoint you (pl.) there the place
over
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 673
é™swadawet' hak tea’ nigé™ na’dé"giadek néngé™ha’ o“hwéndjiade’.”’
ye will intervene where soitis as much they two this (it is) it-earth (is) present.”
far will be apart
Oné™ di’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ oné™ wa’ha‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’he’
now more- the now he started there he went
over
tea’ dewa‘séfino™s‘ho™ nwa’haiei’da’ tea’ ga‘hwe‘no’. T‘ho‘ge‘
where it is middle along thither he steered where it-island floats. At that (time)
é" ho‘hnondidie’ ne’ o‘hneganos, de"’se’ ne’ oné™ hwa’hiio™
?
one
now it followed him the it water fresh, and the time there he arrived
én‘-hdgwa’ nwi’ga‘hwe‘nadi’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ hia’
opposite-wards there it-island side of now he said, “Now verily
wi’geiéinénda’nha’.” Tho‘ge’ oné™ wa’tgonnotga’k ne’ o‘hneganos
I have finished its fabrication.’’ eM now they (z.) passed through the _ it-water fresh
tea’ ga‘hwe‘no’, oné™ ne’t‘ho’ niwat‘hawi’ wa’hé™héi’ ne’
where it-island floats, now there it bears itself he said the
(it is time)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei‘, “Oné™ hid’ wa’diagiadekhd’ ne’ deiagiadé™-
“Now verily one and I have a bond- the one and I are
mark between us
hnondi’,” dé™se’ oné™ di’ sa‘ha‘déndia’. Niioi‘hwagwa‘ha‘
brothers,”’ and now moreover again he departed. It-matter (is) short
oné™ hofsa‘haio™ tea’ t‘hoddsgwa‘hi’.
now there again he where there his bark-
arrived shelter (is) .
Gaéi‘ gwd’ nwa’ofishe’ oné™ ne’ O‘had’ wa’hé™hén’,
Where seem- so it lasted now the Flint he said,
ingly
“Ksodi‘haé oné™ hid’? niio™ha’ teyofigni’wihaié™. Oné™
“Oh, my grand- now verily it is little still one and I have meat Now,
mother
di’ oid’ é"sgadoit‘ha’, ha’ degaiei’ di’ oid? a‘se’
more- it oth- again I will go it isenough more- it-oth- new
over er (is) to hunt, over er (is) (it is)
é"djiongni’wa‘haiéndak ne’ oné™ hé"wate’a‘dai’ ne’ niio™ ne’
again thou and I will have meat the time it will be exhausted _ the so it the
muc
T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘ s‘fhongninondé™.”” = Oné™ ne’ O‘haiai’
he shared it with Now the Flint
us two.”
wa hadiagé™ nha’, oné‘ wi’ hadoat’ha’.
he went out, now he went to hunt.
De‘hodawénie‘hadie’s hiid‘ de’awet a‘hagé™ ne’ gaio’.
He went traveling about not it could be he suould the game.
see i
Waonnis‘he’ @ff gé"s is‘he’ tea’ niga‘hwe‘na’ oné™ gwa’
It was along time else- custom- again where so it-island now seem.
where arily he goes (is) large ingly
wa’hagé™. Ganio’ gwd’ wa’hogé™” gofidadie’ wa’gofde’gwa’
he saw it. So soonas cee it saw him, at once they (z.) fled
ingly
gé"s. De‘hagi‘ha’ gé"s wa’gonde’skok. Oné™ t‘ho‘ge’ ha‘sa’
Custom- He had his custom- they (z.) plunged Now at that just then
arily. eyes on it arily into the water. (time)
wa hatdogs’ oi8 oni’ tga‘hwe‘no’ ne’t‘ho’ nhagwa’ nhwa’gonne”’
he noticed it it oth- also there it island there -wards thither they
er (is) floats (z.) went.
hi’de‘haga‘hi’ oné™ hwa’goni‘sogwa’. Ne’t‘ho! — niga‘hawi’
hence he had his time there they landed. There so it bare
eyes on them it (time)
674 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY fem ENG
oné™ ne’ Ohad’ wa’hoi‘hwane‘hagwaé tea’ mnwa’awé™ha’,
now the Flint he marveled at the matter where so it came to pass,
oné™ wa'hé™hén’, “Do heiat‘hoiéfini‘hi’ ne’ T‘ha陓hiawa’ei'.
now he said, “Goto, let me go to tell him the
Hiid’ hon‘ ’a‘so™ de’hono™do” tca’ niio‘t tea’ wa’gatgat‘hwa’.’
Not pre- yet he knows it where so it is where I saw it.”
sum-
ably
Oné™ tho‘ge‘ wa’ha‘déndii’, hono™do™ tea’ hagwadi‘
Now at that’ he started, he knows it where side of it
(time)
t‘hone™saié™ ne’ de‘hiad陓hnonda’, ne’t‘ho’ nhigwa‘ nhwa’he’,
there his lodge lies the his brother, there thitherwards thither he
went.
Wa’hoie‘hwa’, hiid’ gated’ de’hoia’dattchéfinyon’. T*ho‘ge‘ oné™
He lost it, not anywhere he found his person. At that now
(time)
donda‘ha‘sawé™” wa’ t‘hadawénnie’. Hua‘ gated’
he began at the beginning he traveled about. Not anywhere
de’hoid’dattchéfinyofi’ tea’ niga‘hwe‘na’. Gaéfigwa’ nwi’ofinis‘he’
he found his person where so alae (is) Somewhat so it lasted
arge.
oné™ sd‘ha‘déndii’?. Ganio’ hofsa‘haio” oné™ wa’hé™hén’,
now again he departed. So soon as there again he now he said,
arrived
“Ksoda‘ha‘, oi‘ hwane‘higwat tea’ nwa’awé™ha’ tea’ wa’gatgat‘hwa’
SOs ae grand-it-matter (is) marvelous where soit came to pass where T saw it
mother,
ne’ wa’gid’daie‘hwa’ ne’ gondiio’. Wa’ofnis‘he’ wa’tgadawéfinie’,
the I lost their bodies the they are It was a long time I traveled about,
animals.
t‘ho’ ha‘ gagwegi‘ t‘hofidage‘da’ tea’ niga‘hwe‘na’ tea’ ga‘hwe‘no’
nearly it-whole I went over where so it-island where _ it-island floats
it repeatedly is large
oné™ ha‘si’? gwd’ wa’kgé™ ne’ gaio’. Ganio’ gw’ wa’gofitdoga’
now justthen seem- I saw it the it-an- Sosoonas seem- they (z.) noticed it
ingly imals ingly
tea’ dage’ gofidadie’ wa’gofide’gwi’ dése’ wa’gofide’skok.
where Tam at once they fled and they plunged into
coming the water.
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’gatgat‘hwa’ oi8’ e’ detga‘hwe‘no’ ne’t‘ho‘ di’
At that now I saw it it- again there it-island there more-
(time) other floats over
nwha’gofne’, ne’t‘ho’ hagwadi‘ hofsagoni‘sogwa’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
thither they went, there side of it there again they landed. re that now
time)
dondaga‘défdia’, wa’geii’ é™heiat‘hoié™” ne’ Thaé™hiawa’el tea’
thence I departed, I thought I will tell him the where
nofiwa‘ho’dé™ wa’gatgat‘hwa’. Ne’t‘ho’ nhwi’ge’ tea’ hagwa‘
kind of thing I saw it. There thither I went where directionof
t‘hodaisgwa‘hé’ hud‘ gated’ de’s‘hodasewa‘hi’. Wa’heii’di‘sik
there his bark not anywhere his bark lodge is, T sought for his
lodge (is) person
tca’ niga‘hwe‘na’ gagwegi’ t‘hofidage‘da’.”” Oné™ ne’ gokstén’a‘
where so it-island it-whole I went over it Now the she, the Anci-
(is) large repeatedly.”” ent One
daiewénnitgé™ nha’, wa’a‘hén’, “Oné™ hiid’ hiya’ sté™ thaedniied‘
she spoke in reply, she said, “Now verily not any- so thou and I
thing should do
tea’ =nwa’awé™ha’.”” Oné™ ne’ Ohad’ da‘hawénnitgé’ nha’
where so it came to pass.” Now the Flint he spoke in reply
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 675
wahé™hen’, “Diogondo™ o’ ni’d* oné™ &"tga‘sawé” 6"ge‘séiinid’.
he said, “Tt must needs be too thelI now I will begin I will make it.
person-
¥ ally
E"kegwenia’ se’ o’ ni’a‘ ne’t‘ho’ né*giedi’ tea’ niio™ ho‘séini‘
I will be able indeed too thel thus sol willdoit where so it is he has made
nf person- many them
ally
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei’.”” Oné™ di’? wa’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ ’of' hiae’
the Now more- he said, “That pre- inthe
over (it is) sum- first
ably place
é"teadieé di’ ne nigofidiio’da’s’a‘.”’ T‘ho‘ge‘ one",
I will first do the just they—are small At that now
animals.” (time)
wi ha‘sénnid’ hanawé™. Wa’haiénnenda’nha’ oné™ di wa’ he™hén’ ,
he made it butterfly. He finished its nature now more- he said,
over
?
“Oné™ wa’gwaid’dis’a’. Oné™ di’ dé"swadawénnie’ tea’
“Now Icompleted your bodies. Now more- ye will range about where
over
o™hwéndjiide’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’tgondidé™. Ha‘si’ gwit’
it-earth is present.’’ At that Now they (z.) flew. Just then, seem-
(time) ingly
deiodidé™ oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ gondidienofidie’ ne’ djio‘ha ne
they flew now there they (z.) flew along the pigeons the
Thaé™hiawa’gi’ haid’disi’i’. Ttho‘ge’ ne’ Ohad’ wa’ hé™hén’
5 5 ,
he formed their At that the Flint he said,
bodies. (time)
“Naie’ hid’? tihogé™ djio‘ha hdaiast‘ha’ ne’ deiagiadé™hnondié’
aes verily that (it is) pigeon he calls them the one and I are brothers
it is)
nadie’ di’ o’ nai @ge‘séinid’? ne’t‘ho’ né*gaii’do’dé"k.”
that more- too the I I will make it thus so its body kind of will be.”
it is over person-
ally
Oné™ di’ wi’ ha‘sawé™ wa‘haia’donnia’. Ne’ one™
Now more- he began it he made (their) bodies. The time
over
wi’haiénnénda’nha’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Oné™ wa’gwaia’dis’3’.
he completed their natures time he said, “Now I have made your bodies.
Oné™ dy’ dé™swadawénnie’ tea’ ee
,
o™hwéndjiade’.
Now more- ye will range about} where it-earth is present.”
over
Wa’ haiénnénda’nhi’ oné™ wi‘hatdogi’ tea’ aiéia’ ogo™nhodi’
He completed their nature time he noticed it where it would it is furry, cov-
seem ered with fur,
dé”’se’ degano’djiodi’, t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ wa tgondidé”’.
and it is fixed with teeth, at that now they flew.
(time)
Oné™ he’ oid’ wa’hé™hén’ ne’ Ochaa’, “Naie’ ’on‘ hide’
Now again it-other he said the Flint, “That (itis) pre- in the
sum- first
ably place
é"ge‘séfinia’ ne’ déio‘hat‘he’da‘gwik tea’ niio‘t ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
I will make it the it will cause it to be light where soitis the
thereby
hono™sakda’ o‘hniod&’ ne’ of’we™sd’ haiast‘ha’.”” Tho‘ge’ oné‘
his lodge beside it grows the sunflower he calls it.” At that (time) now
wi‘ha‘s@inia’. Agwas hono™sikda’ ne’t‘ho! nofiwe' wa’hé™hén’,
he made it. Just his lodge beside there the place he said,
“Thoné™ &jo‘hniodak wa’giéit‘hwd’ naie’ dé"io‘hat‘he’da‘gwik
“Here it will I planted it that (it is) it will cause it to be light by it
?
676 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH. ANN. 43
ov we™sd’ 6"ediadjik.”” Oné™ he’ oi&’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘ H"ge‘séfinid’
it-sunflower it will be called.” Now again it-other he said, “T will make it
swa‘hiona’ é"ediadjik.” T’ho'ge’ , oné™ wa‘ha‘sénnia’ |
it-large fruit it will be called.’’ At that (time) now he made it,
wi‘haiénnénda nha’ = =o‘ni’, oné™ di’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘T‘honé™
he completed it also, DOW moreover he said, “Here
gano™sikda’ ne’t‘ho’ nofiwe‘ éio‘hniodak, wa’giént‘hwa’.”’ Ganio’
beside it-lodge there the place it will stand, growing, I have planted it.” So soon as
wa haiénnénda’ nha’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “Agadién‘ha’ gwa’ onda‘he’
he completed it now he said, “Would I were seeming- he is coming
surprised ly just, again
ne’ deiagiadé™hnonda’, a‘hatgat‘hwa’ tea’ nofwa‘ho’dé™ oné™
the one and I are brothers, he should see it where kind of thing now
,
o mn’ wa’ge‘sénnia’. Sté™ ew? nonhwa‘ho’dé” ache hen’
too thel I made it. Something seemingly, kind of thing he would say
ne’ oné™ d‘hatgat‘hwa’. E™gadofwis‘hén’ di’ hide’ tea’ nigé™
the time he would see it. I will rest moreover first where soit is far
’
é™haio® ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’el’.”’ Oné™ di’ wa‘hadonwis‘hén’.
he willarrive the Now moreover he rested.
Hid‘ de’aonnis‘he’if oné™ he’ wia’hatgat‘hwa’ onatga’de’
Not it was long now again he saw they are many
gondidienondie’ gofdiio’s‘ho™ a! dé™se’ oné™ wa’ hé™hén’,
they (z.) severally they (z.) (are) birds and now he said,
flew along
“Ne’t‘ho’ o’ ni’a‘ né"giei’, é"ge‘séfinid’ heio‘he‘ ni’i‘ é"iotga’dek.”’
“Thus too the I soI will do, I will make it utmost the I they (z.) will be
person- (mine) per- numerous.”
ally . sonally
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’haséfinid’. Agwis oné™ wa’ haiéninénida’nha’
At that now he made (them). Just time he completed it
(time)
oné™ wi’hadién‘ha’ gwd’ oné™ da‘he’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’el‘, oné™
time he was surprised seem- time he is the now
ingly coming
dv’ = wi’t‘ho’nohwaid‘hé™ha’ wa‘hawénnitgé’nha’ wa’ hé™hén’,
more- excitedly he hastened he spoke he said,
over
“Desni’nonwaid h陓ha’ desnidé™.”’ Oné™ hid’ wa’tgondidé™
“Do ye hasten do ye fly.”’ Now verily they (z.) flew
gai’sdowané™. Ne’t‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ ne’t‘ho' wa’haio” ne’
it (is) a great sound. At that (time) now there he arrived the
T‘haé™hiawa’gi’ dé"’se’ wa’hé™hén’, “Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ saio’de’?”
and he said, “What kind of thing thou art
working?”
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ Ohad’ wa’hé™hén’, “ Agadofwis‘hén’ tea‘tho’. Ge‘he’
At that the Flint he said, “T am resting actually. I desire it
(time)
é™satgat‘hwa’ hide’ tea’ niio™ oné™ ageiénnénda i.” Da‘hai‘hwa’sigwa
thou wilt first where soitis now I have completed it.” He replied
see it much
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™” di’ na’
the He-holds-sky he said, “What kind of thing more- those
over
wi’tgondidé™ si‘ nofiwe’ tchofidage’?” Wai’hé™hén’ ne’ O*haad’,
they (z.) flew yon- the place still I was coming?’’ He said the Flint,
der
“Sada‘ho™siiosda tea’ nigdi’sdowané™ odit‘ha’. Naie’ hia’
“Do thou hearken well where so it-sound they (are) That verily
(is) great talking. (it is)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 677
ha‘si’? gwd’ wa’geiéfinéfida’nha’ ne’ nigondiio’di’s’a‘.”” Tho‘ge‘
just seem- I have finished (them) the so they (z.) are small At that
now ingly animals (birds).’’ (time)
ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Dodgé"s hid’ gai’sdownané™
the He-holds-sky he said, “Ttis true verily, it-sound (is) great
ha’tgondiwénnage’ onnadei’sda’. Naie’ hiid’ otché™ da’ é"gaiadjik.
every their (z.) voice are they (z.) are mak- That — verily (it) fly it will be called.
in number ing sounds. (it is)
E"gagwenia’ @"wagienaw4a’s, odia’k ne’ gofidiio’ 6"wado™ naie’
It will be able it will aid me, some the they are it will do that (it is)
animals
é"gonnon‘he‘gwik.”” Oné™ ne’ O‘haad’ wa‘hao™ wes‘ha’, wa’hé™héen’,
they (z.) will live thereby.” Now the Flint he laughed, he said,
“Dnikdo™na‘’ agiéit‘hwi‘ tea’t‘ho’ of’wé™sa’ dé™se’ swa‘hion
“Let us two go tosee it I have planted actually it-sunflower and it is large fruit.”
Oné™ di’? gano™sdkda’ nhon‘sa‘hne’. SaA‘hniio™ tea’ gano™sdkda’
Now more- besidethelodge again they two went. Again they where beside the lodge
over two arrived
x»
a.
ttho‘gef oné™ ne’ Othaa’? wa’hé™héen’, “Ne hiid’ o‘hniodad’ ne’
at that now the Flint he said, “Here verily it stands the
(time) (it is) growing
of’ we™si’.”” Ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gii wa’hatgat‘hwai’ wa’hé™hén’,
it-sunflower.”’ The Life God he saw it he said,
“Naie’ hid’ néngé™ o‘hniod&’ nadie’ ne’’ awé™hiyos awé™honda’.
“That verily this (it is) it stands, that the its flower (is) it bears flower.
(t is) growing (it is) fine
Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ @*®watchis’i’ 6"wado™ é®wagid’dage‘nha’.
That more- the time it will be ripe it will do it will aid one.
(it is) over
Nadie’ é"gofdon‘hesda’ ne’ nigofdiio’da’s’a‘s‘ho™ a‘. Naie’ hia’
That they (z.) will live the so they (z.) are small birds. That verily
(it is) thereby (it is)
néng陓ha‘ o‘hnioda’ naie’ éeiast‘hak o‘hwi’kda’.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
this (it is) it stands, that one will call it thistle.’’ At that now
growing (it is) habitually (time)
ne’ O‘haa’ wa‘ho’nigo™hiio’khe’, oné™ di’? wa’hé™hén’, ‘ Naie’
the Flint his mind was pleased, now more- he said, “That
over (it is)
om™kée™ @™satgat‘hwaé’ agiént‘hwi’ ne’ swa‘hiona’’.”” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™
next in thou wilt see it I have plant- the it is large fruit.”” At that now
order ed it (time)
ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’hne’. Ganio’ wi’hniio™ oné™ ne’ Ohad’ wa’hé™hén’s
there he went. Sosoonas they two time the Flint he said,
arrived
“Ne hid’ o‘hniodd’ ne’ agiéit‘hwi‘.” T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ ne’
“Here verily its stands the I have plant- At that now the
growing ed it.” (time)
T‘haé™hiawa’ei' wa’ hé™hén’, “ Ne’t‘ho‘ ha’degaiei’ néngé™ saiént‘hwi' ;
Life God he said, “There just it is this (it is) thou hast
right, correct planted it;
é °wagid’dage‘nha’; é"wado™ 6"gofdon‘hesd&’ ne’ gondiio’. Naie’”
it will aid me; it will do they (z.) will live the they (z.) are That
(fit for) thereon animals. (it is)
di’ na’ @"gdiadjik djiga‘he‘des.”’ T‘ho‘gef oné™ ne’ O‘haa
more- the it will be called thorn.” At that now the Flint
over that (time)
heio‘he’ wi’hatchénnofniad’ dé"’se’ oné™ wa’hé™hén’, “ Nikdo™na‘
)
utmost he is pleased and now he said, “Let us are go to
see i
nadie’ ne’ tca’t‘ho’ age‘séfini‘ ne’ gaio’a’.”” Oné™ wa‘hia‘déndia”
that the actually Ihave madeit the it-bird.” Now they two started.
(it is)
678 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
Wi’hniio™ ne’t‘ho’ nonwef oné™ ne’ Ohad’ wa’hé™hén’, “Ne
They two there the place time the Flint he said, “Here
arrived
hiid’ satgat‘hwa' J’ gid’di‘si’i‘.”” Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gi‘
verily do thou look I I made its body.” Now the Life God
at it
wiv’hatgat‘hwa’? dé™se’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Ne’t‘ho’ ha’degaiei’; hia‘
he looked and he said,” There just it is right, not
correct;
?
ste” de’odieé™ dé"gofdawénnie’ tea’ o™hwéfdjidde’. Hua‘
any- it matters they (z.) will range where it-earth (is) present. Not
thing about
hiikx’ na’ st®é” t*hofisagofidei‘hwat’wa‘da’. Nadie’ di’ na’ hanaiwé™
D
verily the any- they (z.) would do mischief. That more’ the butterfly
, that thing (itis) over that
e"gdiadjik.”” Oné™ ne’ Othad’ wai‘ho’nigo™hiio’khe’ dé"’se’
it will be called.” Now the Flint his mind is pleased and
oné™ he’ wa’hé™hén’, ‘“Oné™ sgadaié géhewi’ saiodadén’k.
now again he said, “Now one (it is) only again it remains.
Naie’ &é™satgat‘hwi’. Agwis ge‘he’ age‘nhi’y‘ gi’s‘hé™. One"
That thou wilt see it. Positively Ibelieve I blundered methinks. Now
(it is)
di’ na’ is @™séino™do™ hot nonwa‘ho’dé™ né™siei’ ne’ oné™
more- the thou thou wilt will it what kind of thing so thou wilt the time
over that do it
é™satgat‘hwa’.” Tho‘gef oné™ wi’hia‘déndia’. Wa’hniio” ganiadakda’
thou wilt see it.’’ At that now they two departed. They two beside the
time ® arrived lake (sea)
ne’t‘ho! gw’ onatgi’de’. Oné™ ne’ O‘haa’ wa’ hé™hén’, “ Naie’ ne’
there seem- _ they (z.) are Now the Flint he said,”’ That the
ingly numerous, (it is)
né™ néngé™ha’ gondidienofdie’s, naie’ gida’ ne’ gofiat‘hoiénnik.
here this (it is) they (z.) are flying about, that Imean the I am telling thee of
(it is) (it is) them.
Naie’ ne’ ge‘he’ djio‘hd‘ ne’ tea’ age‘séfini’.” T‘ho‘ge’ ne’
That the I think pigeons the where I made it At that the
(it is) (them).”’ (time)
Tihaé™hiawa’gii oné™ wia’hatgat‘hwa’ wa’hé™hén’, “Gae’
He holds sky now, he saw it he said,” Hither
then,
nondaswe‘.”’ Gofdadie’ ne’t‘ho‘ dofdagofdidie’ tea’ hada’,
do ye come.” At once there thereto they (z.) flew where he stood,
oné™ di’ da‘hawénnitgé’ nha’ wa’hé™hén’, “ Hid‘ hua’ de’gai‘hwi‘sa'i‘
now more- he spoke he said, “Not verily one has ordained
over the matter
agadie’sek ne’ ogo™nhodi’ dé"se’ ne’ degano’djiodé’. Hua‘
it ee fly the it is furry and the it is fixed with teeth. Not
about
habitually
di’ t‘haioyanéi’khe’ t‘haeswadiesda’ ne’ gofidi‘hi’da’ ne’ gofididie’s.
more- it will result in good ye should commingle the they are cov- the they (z.) fly
over ered with about
feathers
Naie’ di’ on’ @%oianén’khe’ dé"swadekha‘sid’ ne’ oné™* gagwegi‘
That more-pre- it will result in good. ye will separate one the time it whole
(it is) over sum- from another
ably
é"wadeiéfinénda nha’. Nadie’ se’ tea’ néTiawé™had’ ne’ gadogé™
it will be accomplished. That in- where so it will come the it certain (is)
(itis) deed, to pass
géfiiwa’ tea’ néonnis‘he’ déio‘hat‘hé™ha’ tea’ o™hwéndjiade’
it-only where so it will last it will be light where it earth is present
wewitt] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 679
t‘ho‘ge’ oné™ é*diio’gak, gadogé™ o’ na’ tea’ né"gagasdé™ hi’
At that now it will become it certain (is) too the where so it will endure
(time) dark, that
oné™ he’ dé"diio‘hat‘he™ha’. Ne’t‘ho’ di’ nofwef na’dé™ionnada-
time again again it will become light. There more- the place only they will
over
wénniek ne’ gondi‘ha’da’ tea’ né"gagasd陓ha’ déio‘hat‘he’dik.
range about the they (z.) where so it will endure it will cause it to
habitually feathered be light.
Nadie’ ne’ oné™ é"diio’gak oné™ ne’ na’ t*hénigofidied’ t‘ho‘ge‘ nis
That the time it pa eons time the the just they (z.) will at that the
(it is) ar’ that be quiet time ye
hii‘ss’ is’o™ké™ dé"djiswadawénie’. Hid‘ se’ de’oiane’ ne’ aiedie’sek
just then you next in ye again will range about. Not in- it (is) good the one should fly
order deed about habit-
ually
ne’ é"diio’ge‘ ne’ ogo™nhoda’ tea’ agon‘he’ dé"’se’ ne’ deieno’djiodi’.
the indaylight the itis furred where one lives and the one has teeth.
Ne’t‘ho’ di’ nis’&‘ nofwe’ gaéidigoiwa‘ nofiwe’ né"swanageek.”’
There more- the ye the place in the tree(s) the place just ye will abide
over person- habituaily.””
ally
Tho‘ge oné™ ne’ Othad’ wi’hoi‘hwane‘higwa’ tea’ nonwi‘ho’dé™
At that now the Flint he marveled at where kind of thing
(time) the matter
wihé™hén’ ne’ de‘hiad陓hnofdai’. Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei‘
he said the they two are brothers. Now the He-beholds-sky
wi’hé™hén’, “Oné™ é%sod‘défidia’. Oné™ di’? is ’o™ke
he said, “Now T again will depart. Now, more- thou next
over,
é"teenada‘héf’se‘ha’. E™sekdo™na’ tea’ ne’ ni’d° nofwa‘ho’dé”
thou wilt again come to Thou wilt gotosee where the the I kind of thing
visit my home. person-
ally
agio’de’.”” T‘ho‘gef oné™ dojfisa‘hiadekha‘sii’ dese’ ne’t‘ho‘ge‘
Tam working At that now again they two separated and at that
(at it).’”” (time) one from the other (time)
oné™ sd‘hadéndid’ ne’ Thaé™hiawa’gi.‘
now again, he the He-holds-sky.
departed
Hofsi‘haio™” tea’ tthodisgwa‘hi’ oné™ wa’hénno™donnio™,
There ae he where there his bark shelter (is) time he thought repeatedly,
arrive
as) mn? x14) c: , ~ne Cae cig zn al- at)
wi’hea naie olane one age ‘senna agai‘ewak, ndaie
he resolved that (itis). itis good LOW I should make it it-light-orb should that
be present, (it is)
daga‘hat‘he’di’ ne’ he‘da’ge’ o™hwéfdjidde’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™
it swale it to be the below it-earth (is) present. At that (time) now
ight
wi ha‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho’ nhwi’he’ tea’ nofwes tihono™saié™’ ne’
he started there thither he where the place there his lodge lies the
went
Hao™hwéndjiawa’kho”. Nadie’ ne’ oné™ wahaio™” oné™
He-holds-earth severally. That (it is) the (time) he arrived ae
(then)
wi’hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ dagada‘héido™ne’ ne’ ge‘he’ age‘sénnia’
he said, “That (it is) I come to ask it the Idesireit I should make it
agaii‘gwak, mnaie’ daio‘hat‘he’dik tea’ he‘da’ge‘ o™hwénfdjiade’.”
it-light orb should that it should cause it to where below it-earth is present.”
be present (it is) be light
T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ Hao™hwéfidjiawa’kho” wa’hé™héi’, ‘“Oné™
At that (time) the He-holds-earth-severally he said, “Now
680 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH, ANN: 43
hwa’ga‘he’g; nadie’ ne’ tca’ diiago‘défidio™ ne’ sa‘soda‘ha‘ niie’
it has arrived; that (itis) the where just she departed the thy grandmother that
thence (it is)
ne’t‘ho! t‘hé™’dén’ ne’ ho‘tcia’ oné™ hodadeiéfinénday', ha’nigo™hii’
there there he the her elder Tow he has prepared himself, he is expecting
remained brother
ne’ a‘honwa‘ha’nha’, nadie’ di’ hé"gaiéik nadie’ a‘he‘sei‘hoidé™,
the she should ask his aid, that more- it will be right that thou shouldst charge
(it is) over (will do) (it is) him with a duty,
nadie’ da‘ha‘hat‘he’d&. Hawén’ hna’, ‘Nae’ tea’ néMawé™hi’
that he should cause it to He said verily, “That (it | where soit willcome to pass
(it is) be light. is) as
ne’ i? 6onga‘ha’nha’ dé"yao™hwéndjiéndo"k.” Hawén' o‘ni’,
the I one will ask my aid it-earth will quake.” He said also,
“Ne’ oné™ tchondaio™déidia’ ne’ s‘hago’gé™” é"gekdo™na’
“The time just she departed thence the his younger sister I will go to see it
hwéndo™ gwa’ tea’ nofwef &™se’sek.’”’ Ne’t‘ho’ di’ né™iawé™hi’;
sometime seem- where the place thou wilt be.’’ Thus more- so it will come to
ingly over pass;
nadie’ €olanéf’khe’ ne’ é™he‘si‘hno"k. Naie’ di’ tea’ né*siei’.
that it willresult in good the thou wilt go after him. That more- as so thou wilt
(it is) (it is) over (where) 0 it.
Naie’ ne’ saiént‘hwi‘ ne’ tkwé"da’ niio’éfino’dé™, nadie’ 6™sid’k
That the thou hast planted the red (it is) so its rod (is) kind of, that thou wilt
(it is) (it is) sever it
ne’ ha‘sa’ ig陑 daiodonni‘hadie’ oda’énnonni’a‘, naie’ ne’ degénik,
the justthen itis thence it is growing it has formed itself that the it will be two
(sprouting) into rods, (it is) in number,
vnt.ya
sgada‘ di’ nadie’ é™sa‘gaiigewd’ naie’ é™séino™gwa’tchée’. Ganio’
oneitis more- that thou wilt scrape off that thou wilt steep it as medicine. So soon as
over (it is) the bark from it (it is)
é"wénno™ewa’tchaik naie’ ésastea’. Oné™ ne’ sgada‘
it-medicine will be cooked that (itis) thou wilt vomit. Now the one it is
é™si‘oaiigewa’ t‘ho‘ge‘ odjisda’ ge‘ é™sadi’ t‘ho‘ge‘
thou wilt scrape off at that (time) on fire thou wilt cast it at that
the bark from it (time)
ha’dé™sénna’sgondy’ ne’ oné™ "eas" gwaedé™, E™si‘hén’, ‘Wa’ee’,
hence thou wilt keep (therein) the time it will set up smoke, thou wilt say, ‘Hence I go-
De‘hado™hwéndjiéido™s. Dé"diiadaéa’nha’ di’.’ Naie’ di’ tea’
He-shakes-earth habitually. Thou and I will meet more- That more- where
over.’ (it is) over
néMawe™ ha’ tea dewa‘sénino™ nigé™. ne’t‘ho’ nigé™
so it will come to where it is (the) middle so it is far _ there so it is far
pass
ha’ dé"djiadéa’nha’. T‘ho‘ge‘ oné™ é™he‘sat‘hoié” tea’
just there ye two will meet. At that (time) now thou wilt tell him where
}
nohwa‘ho’dé™ —_de‘sado™ hwéndjionnik, nadie’ ne tea’ tho‘
kind of thing thou it requirest, that (it is) the actually
é™hagwenia’ é™hiai‘hwa’sigwas, nadie’ hid’ ho’s‘hasdé™seowané™.”
he will be able he will answer thee, that verily his power (is) great.’’
(it is)
Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gif sa&‘ha‘déndia’.
’
Time the He-holds-sky again he departed.
Hofsa‘haio” oné™ gofdadie’ wa’haid’k ne’ tgwé™da’
Back again he arrived time at once he cut it the red (it is)
niio’énno’dé™, degeni‘ nigi’éinage’ dé™se’ oné™ wa’ha‘gaigewa’
so its rods are kind of, two it is so it-rods in num- and now he scraped off of it the
ber (are) bark
dé™se’ wa’ hénno™gwi’tche’. Ganio’ ~—- wa’ wéfino™ gwa’ tchiik
and he steeped medicine. So soon as it-medicine (was) cooked
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 681
gondadie’ wa’hastga’. T‘ho‘ge‘ ne’ sgadi‘ oné™ o’ na’
at once he vomited. At that (time) the one (it Is) time too ee
that
wi’ha‘gaigewa’ dé’se’ oné™ di’ odjisdai’ge’ wi’hodi’. Oné™ di’
he seraped off of it the and now more- on fire he cast it. Now, more-
bark over over,
hiid’ wa’ gaié™ gwaedé™ oné™ di’ t‘ho‘ge’ wa’t‘hénna’sgondi’, dé’se’
verily, it set up smoke now more- at that he leaped (therein), and
over (time)
wihé™hén’, “Wa’ge’, De‘hado™hwéndjiéndo™s. Dé"diiadia’nha’
he said, “Hence I go, He-shakes-earth habitually. Thou and I will meet
di’. T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ wa’ha‘déndia’, he’tgé™’ nhwa’he’. Ha‘
’ 5
more- At that (time) now he started, above thither he went. Not
ino™ t‘he’hawenon’ oné™ wi’vhadiéi‘ha’ gw’ ne’t‘ho’ da‘he’
far hence he had gone time he was surprised seemingly there he came
ne’ héngwe’. Wa't‘hiaddé’nhd’ dé"’se’ wa’hé™hén’ ne’ héfigwe',
the he, a human, is. They two met and he said the he, a human,
is,
“Oné™ hid’ wa’didiadéa’nha’. Hot nofwa‘ho’dé™ se‘he’?”
“Now verily thou and I have met. What kind of thing dost thou
desire?’’
Da‘hai‘hwa’sigwi’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gii wa’hé™hén’, ‘Naie’ hiid’
He replied the He-holds-sky he said, “That (it verily
is)
dwagado’kdanik songa’ aiofigiendwi’s. Oné™ ne’ naie’ gagwegi‘
T lack it some one one should aid me. Now the that it is it-whole
ageiénnénda'i’ ne’ o™hwéndjiad’ge’. Naie’ dwagado’kdanik tea’
I have finished it the on earth. ‘That (it is) T lack it where
ni’deio‘hat‘hek ne’ od’ wé"™sa’ deio‘hat‘he’di‘. Naie’ di’ ge‘he’
such as it is light the sunflower it causes it to be light. That (it more- Ithinkit
is) over
heio‘he‘ daio‘hat‘he’dik, se’-khé™’ oné™ gowané™ tea
utmost it Stowe it to be indeed, is it time it great (is) where
ight,
o™hwéndyjiade’. Oné™ degeni‘ dega‘hwe‘no’. Naie’ ne’
it-earth (is) present. Now two it (is) two it-island(s) float. That (it is) the
ce‘he’ naie’ gi’s‘hen ne’t‘ho‘ né“awé™ ha’ ne
I think that (it is) methinks thus so it will come to pass the
é"soiesda’ = ’A‘so™, nadie’ ne’ gaiel‘ né"ga‘hwe‘nodak.
I will add to it yet, that (it is) the four so it-island(s) will be floating.
Naie’ di’ déwagado™hwéndjionnik ne’ gagwegi‘ daga‘hat‘he’da’.
That more- I need it the it-whole it should cause it to
(it is) over be light.
Naie’ di’ da‘hagadéfnie‘di’ ne’ Hao™hwéidjiawa’kho™.”’
That (it moreover thence he sent me the He-holds-earth severally.”’
is)
T‘ho‘ge’ oné™ da‘hai‘hwa’sigwi’ ne’ héigwe' wa’hé™hén’,
7)
,
At that (time) now he replied the he, a human, is he said,
“Oné" onnis’i‘ tchi-g’nigo™ha’ ne’ a‘sgia’da’nha’. Dekga‘hi’
“Now it is long thence I have been the thou shouldst seek I see,
(time) expecting my aid.
se’ tea’ nwe’said’dawé™hai’ tea’ nofiwe' he‘se’s. One™
in- where, so it befell thy person where the place there thou art. Now
deed, as
di’ agadadeiéinénda’ié ne’t‘ho’ né*giei’ tea’ nonwa‘ho’dé™
more- I have prepared myself thus so I will do where kind of thing
over
19078°—28——_44
682 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
we’sadé"nowé™gwé™. Thoné™ di’? né™iawé™hi’. Nadie’ di’ ne’
it has given thee difficulty. Here more- soit will come to That more- the
over pass. (it is) over
he‘da’ge’ nwa’wadi‘ ne’ t*honé™ o™hwéfdjiade’ ne’t‘ho’ nofwe‘
below such side of it the here it-earth (is) present there the place
@eadiad’danéndakdy’. Naie’ di’ tca’ né@iaw陓h3’. Gadogé™
I will attach my person. That more- where soit willcometo pass. It is certain,
j (itis) over definite
tea’ nigé™ é"tga‘déndia’ ne’t‘ho’ gé"s hé"sgio™ tea’ nonwe‘
where soit is far thence I will start there custom- again I will where the place
arily return
dwaga‘déndion’. Oné™ 8s @"eadonwis‘hén’. Nadie’ ne’t‘ho‘
there I started. Now eee IT will rest. That (it is) thus
arily
né"io‘dik tea’ né"gagasdé™ha’ ne’ he‘di’ge‘ o™hwéndjiade’.
soit will con- where so it wilt endure the below it-earth is present. I
tinue to be
di’ dé"gesnie’nha’ tea’ niio™ &™satga’k tea’ o™hwéidjiade’. TT’
more: I will attend to it where so quay thou wilt leave where it-earth is present. I
e wh
oni’? 6"waga’dai‘ha’dik.”” Oné™ ne’ Tihaé™hiawa’ei’ wi’hé™hén’,
also I will cause it to be warm.” Now the He-holds-sky he said,
“Oné™ ne’t‘ho‘ nwa’awé™ha’ tea’ nonhwa‘ho’dé”
“Now thus so it has come to pass where kind of thing
déwagado™ hwéndjionnik. Oné™ di’ ne’ of’ wé™sd’ agiéit‘hwi'
I need it. Now OTE: the sunflower I have planted it
naie’ ne’ ne’t‘ho’ né"io‘dik, nadie’ é"lode’niéndé*s‘hénda‘ewik
that (it the thus soit willcon- that (it is) it will be a guide to it
is) tinue to be,
tea’ né"satgénisdi‘hadie’ ne’ dé™se‘hat‘he’da’.”’ T‘ho‘ge’ néngé™ha‘
where so thou wilt be drawing the thou wilt causeit to be light.” At that this (it is)
nearer gradually (time)
ne’ héfigwe’ wa’hé™hén’, “TT ne’ tea’t‘ho’ khe’gé™k‘ ne’
the he, a human, is he said, HA the actually Tam (the) the
elder brother
si‘soda‘ha’. Naie’ gai‘hofnii‘ha’ ofnis’i’ oné™ tchi-g’nigo™hi’
thy grandmother. That (it is) it causes it it isa long now thence I have been
(time) expecting it
ne’ alonga‘ha’nhd’. Nadie’ di’ is gai‘hwaiéida‘ewi' hot
the she should remember me. That (itis) more- thou it matter rests therewith what
over
nofwa‘ho’dé™ né™sieai’, naie’ hiid’ ne’ sano‘ha’ s‘hagonyaii’gi’ ne’
kind of thing sothou wilt do, that verily the thy mother he cut off her head the
(it is)
dedjiadé™hnondaé’. Naie’ géigwa’ ne’ ono™wa’ ne’t*ho! igaié™
one and thou art brothers. That (it is) only the it-head there it lies
tea’ nofiwe‘ le’déf’ ne’ sd&‘soda‘ha’. Doga’t a‘sno™hwe’nha’ ne’
where theplace sheabides the thy grandmother. If thou wouldst like it the
ii‘s‘hei‘hofidé™” he’tge™ o’ na’ dofdaioitgwi'da’, daiagniiena’,
thou wouldst charge above too the that thence she would move one and I would
her with a duty herself, co-work,
diéi‘ha’ gw’? awado”, swa’djik hid’ diio’nigo™hat tea’
if seemingly it would do because verily it troubles the mind where
ni‘hadie‘hi’ ne’ dedjiad陓hnondii’, ne’ O‘haid’. Naie’ ne’
so he is doing the one and thou art brothers, the Flint. That (itis) the
tea’t‘ho’ é™hade’niéndé?, gcagweei' é™hiand’geé™, ne’t*ho‘
actually he will attempt it it-whole he will imitate thee, thus
n陓haiedi’ tea’ nofiwai‘ho’dé’ é™hatgat‘hwi’ é™se‘séinia’.
so he will do it where kind of thing he will see it thou wilt make it.
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 683
DA‘sieit di’ nadie’ tea’ nwi’sied’ tea’ wi’dedjiadekha’ ostwi‘hi‘.
Thou didst more- that where sothoudidst where yetwo separated by a it is a littic.
right over (it is) do it mete
E™hoio’dadé™. Nadie’ gwa’ o‘ni’ niiawé™se’ ne’ o‘héido™ hagwa‘
It will cause him delay. That seem- also soit willecome the ahead- wards
(it is) ingly to pass
tea’ néionnis‘he’ é™io™“hwéndjiondie’, &™hade’niénidé™ tea’ tho‘
where so it is long (time) it-earth will continue to be, he will attempt actually
dé™hiaiéfnia’k.” Oné™ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’ei’ wi’hé™hén’, “1
he will destroy thy labor.’’ Now the He-holds-sky he said, it
hid’ Von’ na’ ha’deiagnia’dif déMagnii‘hodai‘sii’. Diéi‘hi’
verily presum- the we two exclusively we two will settle the matter. If
ably that
gwa’ ne’t‘ho’ né™haied’, ’a‘gwif ne’ nis’d‘ aesaid’danéfidak tea
seem- thus so he will do it do not the thethou, thou shouldst affixthy where
ingly personally person
nigé™ I’ dé"tgadadia’ oné™ ha‘ss’ ne’t‘ho’ né™sied’. Na’
soitisfar I thence will speak time just then thus so thou wilt do it. ahs
that
é"loianéf’khe’. Nadie’ di’ ne’ oné™ ne’t‘ho’ né"iawé™hi’ gagwegi‘
it will result in good. That more- the time thus so it will come it-whole, all,
(itis) over to pass
é™ontdogd’ ne’ he‘di’ge‘ o™hwéfdjidde’ ne’ &™sesda’ tea’
one (they) will the below it-earth is present the thou wilt useit where,
notice it as
ni‘si‘séfno’dé™.”’
so thy name is kind of.”
T‘ho‘ge’ ne’ héfigwef wa’ hé™hén’, ‘Nadie’ hid’ ne
’
‘
’
At that time the he, a human, is he said, “That (it is) verily the
De‘hado™hwéndjiéido™s ofigidst‘ha’. Naie’ di’ ne’t‘ho‘
He-shakes-earth-habitually one uses it to That (it is) more- thus
name me. over
né™iawé™ha’ ne’ _—_—he‘da’ge‘ = diio™ hwéjidiade’ ~—s ne’—s oné"*
so it will come to the below it earth is present the time
pass
ohwagé™hiada’ hé"iodo™“hadie’ tea’ nofweS nwa’sgei‘hondé™”
it-matter end of (near the) itf{will be becoming where the place there thou hast given
mea duty to perform
dosgé™haf @¢a6"k S%ao™hwéfidjioida’kda’, oné™ t‘ho‘ges
near it will set them it will cause earth tojquake, Now at that
severally apart time
gagwegii J’ élongids‘ho™.”
it-whole, all I one will name me.”
T‘ho‘gef ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’gii wa’hé™hén’, “Ne’t‘ho’ di’
At that the He-holds-sky he said, “Thus more-
(time) over
né“awé™hs’ tea’ nofiwe’ na&’deiofgiad’’i‘, ne’t‘ho’ nofiwe‘ tea’
soit willcometo where the place just thou and I have met, there the place where
pass
dewii‘séfino™ tea’ né™sa‘ha‘hedjik ne’t‘ho di’ —_ nofiwe‘
it is between the two where thy path will be in length there moreover the place
é™sidonwi‘s‘héndakhwak ne’ oné™ tea’ dewa‘séfino™
thou wilt bein the habit ofusing it to rest the time where it is between the two
né™sat‘ha‘hine’. Niioi‘hwagw&‘ha’ gé"s &™saidié™. Ha’degaiei’
there thou wilt be on Just it-matter (is) short custom- thou wilt seat Just it will be
thy path. arily thyself, enough
ha’dé"djisaiéidé’sek oné™ he’ gé"s &™sadofigo‘da’. Ne’t‘ho‘
just thou wilt be becoming rested time again Cae thou wilt pass by. There
arily
684 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
di’ nonwef né"gaid’dagwéfnioks ne’ o™hwéndjia’ge’ &é™iagon‘hek
more- the place there it will be a chief matter the it-earth-on They will be
over living
ne’ ongwe éofnagit. Sté” ewa’ nofwa‘ho’dé™” ne’ is
the humans they will dwell Any- seem- king of thing the thou
(be born). thing ingly
dériesaid’dadogé™ da’ é™ieséfino™dofnio™s, ne’t‘ho’ nofiwe’ ge"s
on will direct himself to thee one will think repeatedly of thee, there the place custom-
arily
eee” tea’ nonweS 6™sadonwis‘héndakhwak. Na’ye’!
one willlay it where the place thou wilt be in the habit of resting thyself. That it is
@gai‘honnya’ diyot’goit @"yoya’nek ted’? dé™s’hei‘hwi/’sigwi‘s,
will it—the matter it always willit (be) good where wilt thou —the matter take up for
cause them (make answer),
é™sanakdd’dak ne’’ dé™sya’dowe’‘di’.”
wilt thou time have the wilt thou it consider.
O’né™ ttho’‘ge’ ne’ T‘haé™hiawa’’’gif wa’ h陑hén’, ‘“O’ne™
’
Now at that time the he said, “Now
hi’ya’ wa’wadeyéfinénda’’nha’; ne’’t‘ho! nigai‘hwadgas’de’ ne”
of course it—matter has adjusted itself; there so far it matter endures the
tea’ né™yonnishe’ t*ho’né™ é"yo™hwéndjiya’dek (written:
place so will it last this (here) will it—earth continue to be?
é"yo™hwéndjyon’dye’). Na’ye’ di’ ne’ @"yondo™‘hek né”
—will progress along). That (thing) so the will one say, will one the
2 then keep saying
o™hwéndjiya’’ge’ @"yendgé’nyonk, ne’? S‘hagwd’‘djid’, ne’’
it—earth—on will one dwell severally as tribes the Our Eldest Brother, the
o’/né™ Is’ gé"s’ "yesat‘ho’ya’. Na’ye’ gai‘hofinya’‘hd’ ne’’t‘ho‘
none thou custom- will one thee talk That it causes (the) matter there (thus)
arily about. (thing)
vniwe
né"yaw6"’ha’ na’ye’ hiya’ ne” Is’ Sthe’’gé™ a’ diyagodyeé™ ‘di
so it will come to that (thing) of the thou She thy youngest thence she the first (was)
pass course Sister (is)
he‘da’’ ge‘ ha’deyagoskwa’’sia’. O’né™ ’0"’‘e8™ diyo™ hwéndjiya’de’.”
earth—on there she stepped. Now next there it—earth extant (is)—other
earth.”
O/ne™ di” wa’ hé™*hen’, “O’ns™ di” d&"djidyadekhasyx’.
Now, then, he it said, “Now then will thou—I again separate?
Na’ye’ di’ @®yo‘hé?’’nha’ o/né™ 78/‘se’ dé"tchadawé?‘hat,
That (thing) then will it to-morrow be. Now newly wilt thou ezain come over it
thence.
dé™se’ é™si’dai‘ha’’di’, dé”’se’ dé™se‘hat‘he’’dd’ o/‘ni’.”
and shalt thou—it cause to be hot and thence shalt thou it cause also.””
to be light
T‘ho’‘gef o/né™ sd‘hyadekha’‘syi’.
At that time now again they two (masc.) separated.
Ne” o/né™ hofsa‘ha’yo” ne” Thaé™hiawd’’ei‘ tea”
The now there again he arrived the the place
non’we' t‘hoddsgwa’‘haé’ t‘ho’‘gef o/né™ wi’hé?’‘hén’, ‘O’né™
where there his bark-roof at that time now he said, “Now
overhung
é"ge‘sénnya’ ne’ on’gwe' @*gaya’djik; @"yofinagit’ ne” t‘hd’né™
will I—it make the pees will it be named; shall they dwell the this (here)
eing
gai‘hwe’‘no’.”” Ganyo”’ di’? wa’hai‘ho”’kdé™ o/né™ wa’ha‘sa’wé”
it—island floats.” As soon as then he ended his statement now he—it began
1A slight change in the method of recording the text is used here to emphasize a slight dialectic
change in pronunciation of the words. Accents also are employed.
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 685
wivha‘sén/nyd’, na’ye’ ne’ wa‘hoya’dofi’nya’ ne” of’gwe';
he—it made that thing the he—his—body made the human being;
o‘he’‘di’? wa’t‘ha’‘gwa’ dé’se’ wihé’‘hén’, ‘ Néfigé™’ha‘
ie exand he—it took up and he—it said, “This it is
soil)
wi’ tge’‘ew! ne’’ o‘he’‘da’ na’ye’ ne” on’‘he’-of’we‘, ne’’t‘ho‘
I—it up—take the it—ground that the it is living—really, thus (there)
(soil) (thing)
oni’ ni’yo‘t ne” o™hwéndjiya’de’ tho’né™, na’ye’ ne’”’ na’ye’
also so it is the it—earth stands forth this here, that thing the that thing
hi‘yi’? &®yon/‘hek ne’ oyi’’dd, ne’ na’ye’ nonwa‘ho’’dé™
of course shall it continu- the its body the that thing kind of thing
ing alive
&"ce‘sénnya’’da’.”’
will I—it make with.”
T‘ho’‘geS o/né™ wa’ha‘séi’nyd’ ne’ oyeé"’da’ ne’’ on’gwet.
At that time now did he it make the it flesh the human being.
Ganyo” wa’hayénnénda’’nha’ o/né™ wa’'t‘hayd’dowe‘da’‘hén’
As soon as did he-it finish now did he-it take counsul over it
v¢
dé"”’se’ o/né™ wa’ hé™’hén’, “Na’ye’ hi’ya’ ’on’’ é"yoyanén’k’he’
and now did he-it say, “That (it is) of course perhaps et it result in good
na’ye’ ne’’t‘ho né"yo“‘dik tea” é“hadon‘het ted’’ ne” nia‘ ni’yo‘t
that (itis) thus (there) soit will be wherein will he become alive wherein the ‘so it is_
ted’ gon’‘he’.””. O/né™ ne’t‘ho’’-gef o/né™ na’ye’ da‘had’gwi’
wherein I live, am living.” Now there (time) at that now that (it is) thence he-it took
hodon‘he’‘si’ dé®’’se’ ne’’t‘ho’ haya’digon’wa‘ ne’”’ hén’gwe‘
the his own life and there (it is) his body in the he human
being (is)
wi’hon’dak, na’ye’ di’ o/’‘ni’ ne” ho’nigo™da’‘si’ na’ye’ o’‘ni’
did he-it insert that then also the his thinking mind that (it is) also
: (so Easy)
da‘haa’gwi’? dé™’se’ ne’’t‘ho’ hono™wagon’wa! wa’hon’dak,
thence he-it took and therein his head in did he-it put in,
na’ye’ di” o’‘ni’ ne” hotkwé"/‘si’ na’ye’ da&‘had’gwa’ dé"’’se’
that (itis) then also the his blood that it is thence did he-it take and
(so then)
ne’’t‘ho’ hayeé™dagon’wa' wa’hon’dak, na’ye’ di’ o’‘ni’ tea”
therein his flesh in did he-it introduce, thatitis so, so also wherein
then, then,
ni‘yo‘t ted’? de‘hated‘dof’nyo™k na’ye’ da‘haa’gwa’ dé”’’se
so it is wherein two his eyes turns in succession that it is thence he-it took and
(his sight)
ne’t‘ho’ hono™wa’’ge’ wia’hon’dak, na’ye’ di’ o’‘ni’ tea”
)
there he head-on (in) did he-it install, that it is then also the
whereby
hadadya’’t‘ha’ na’ye’ da‘had’gwa’ dé’se’ na’ye’ ne’’t‘ho‘
he self to talk causes that it is then he-it took and that it is therein
hi‘sigon’wii ne” hen’gwe’ wia’hon’dak. T‘ho’‘geS o’né™ 0”
his mouth-in the he human did he-it install. At that time now too
being (is)
na’ye’ ne” wa’hadofwi‘séi’dak ne’’ hayd’digon’wa‘ ne” hén’gwet.
thatitis the did he-his breath install the his body in the he human
being (is).
O’/né™ hi’‘si’ wa’hadon‘’het ne’ hén’gwe‘, ne’? oyeé"’da’,
Now just then did he come to life the he human being the it-flesh
(not before) (is),
dé"’’se’ da‘hatgé"“ha’ o’‘ni’, dé&°’’se’ wa’t‘hada’’nha’ ne’’ tca’”’
and thence he arose also, and did he stand the the where
o™hewéndjiya’de’.
it-earth extant is.
686 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
O’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa'hé?’‘hén’, “Oné™ hi’yd’
Now the did he say, “Now in fact
I” wa’gotyi’dis’’a’. O’ne™ hi’ya’ wa’gagwe’nya’ ne’’ wa’teda’’-
I did I thy body finish. Now in fact did it sueceed the didst thou stand
nha’ ted” o™hwéfidjiya’de’. Satgat’‘hwa di”, o’né™ tei”
where it-earth extant (is). Do thou look then, now therein
niga“hwi’ tei” o™hwéfdjiya’de,’ I’ hi’y# gagwe’gi‘ ageyéi-
_ so much therein it-earth extant is, I indeed it entire have I-it
it contains
nénda’’i'.
finished.
O’né™ di” Is’ wa’gofiya’digwéfniyos’da’ ne’ ted’ o™hwéf-
Now sothen, thou do I-thy person put in control over it the where it-earth
djiya’de’ ted” o’ni’ niga’‘hwa’. Is’, é™sd’nigo™“hiyo‘sda’‘ewik.
extant is where also so much it contains. Thou, will it-thy mind give comfort to (it)
continually,
Na’ye’ wa’gyént‘hwa’‘da’ tea”? o™hwéfidjiyade’ ne’ of’gwes
That it is did I-it plant for where it-earth extant is the human
being (s)
dé"yo™hwéndjiyo‘'ea’‘da’ é"yonnigit’.” Ttho’‘ge o/né™ wa’hat-
shall they earth overspread shall they it in habit.’”’ At that time now did he
gat’“‘hwd’ o/né™ gwi’’ da‘hadawé™’‘hat dé"’’se’ wa’t‘ha‘hat‘he’’da’
look now just thence he came over and did he-it to be light canoe
(the horizon)
ted’? o™hwéfdjiya’de’, na’ye’ ne’’ deyo‘hat‘he‘sei’yo’ dé"’’se’
where it-earth extant is, that it is the it-light beautiful (is) and
odé™hai’yo’ dé’se’ ne’t‘ho’‘djik ne’ ted’? niyo’dai’‘héf‘.
its beam(s) beautiful and just right (just there) the where so it hot is.
(are)
O’né™ ne’’t‘ho‘ge’ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’eif wa’hé"’‘hén’, ‘“Sat-
Now there-at the did he say, “Do
gat’‘hwa‘ t‘ho’gé™ dawadaéad‘gwawé"‘hat, na’ye’ ne’’ deyo‘Kat‘he‘-
thou look that it is thence it-orb of light came over, thatitis the it-light beautiful is
sei’yo‘ ne”’ tea” wa’tea‘hat‘he’’di’ teai’”” o™hwéiidjiya’de’. Na’ye’
the where did it-it to be light, canoe where it-earth extant is. That it is
di’ &™sa’nigo™hida’‘ewik, na’ye’ oni’ &"sa’nigo™hiyo‘sda’/‘gwik
sens Shall thy mind it keep reverently, that it is also shall thy mind-it, to be pleased
so then,
tea’ 8™yo’dai‘ha’’dik ne” tea’ 8 wéndadé’nyonk na’ye’
where shall it-it keep warm the where will it-day be in succession that it is
gwi’’t‘ho’ &"wa‘sofidadé’nyonk. Na’ye’ 0” na’ye’ é"yon‘he’‘gwik
next there will it-night be in succession. That itis too that it is shall it live thereby
ne’’ ted’ o™hwéndjiyade’ o’‘ni’ ted’”’ ni’yo™, odof’ni‘, oni’ ne”
the where it-earth extant is also where somany they themselves also the
they are have grown,
gondi’yd’, na’ye’ gagwe’gi’ é™djyon‘he’‘gwik ne’ t‘ho’né™*
they game (are), that it is it entire (is), ye shall live by the here
he‘da’’ge o™hwéfdjiya’de’ swanagé’nyo”™.”
earth-on (below) it-earth extant is you dwell severally as tribes.’’
Tho‘ge’ o/né™ wa’hé™’‘hén’, “One™ di’ dé™sadawén/nye’
At that time now did he say, “Now then shalt thou travel about
ne” tei’ o™hwéndjia’de’, ne’ t‘ho! négai‘hwis’‘he’ sanakdo’da’
the where it-earth extant is, there so shall it-matter last thou opportunity
to do it hast
ted’? né™yonnis’‘he’ dé"yo‘hat‘he’’dik t‘hogé™’‘ha’ desga’‘ha’,
where so shall it endure shall it-it to be light, cause that it is two thy eyes rest
on it
na’ye’ ne’ o/né™ 6®wado’k’dé™ ted’ deyo‘hat’‘hek é"dwa‘-
that it is the now will it-itself end where it light is shall thence
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 687
sonide?®’’nha’ t‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ 6™sadonwis’‘hén’ tei’? n&®yonnis’‘he’
it-night fall at that time now shalt thou rest thy-self where so will it last
dé"yo’gas’dik; ne’’t‘ho’ 0” na’ye’ né"yawé"’‘ha’ ne’’ gojfidi’yd’
will it dark be kept; there (thus) too thatitis sowillitcometo pass, the they game are
na’ye’ ne’ é"gondonwis‘hén’‘hak.
that it is the will they themselves rest successively.
O’né™ wa’geyénnénda’’nha’ ne’ hé"yoi‘hwida’dye’, ne’’t‘ho‘
Now have I-it finished the hence will it-matter continue on, there thus
FN)9,
né"yo!’dik tedi’’ = né"yonnis’‘he’ é"yo™hwéndjiyon’dye’.
so will it continue to be where so will it endure (last), will it-earth keep going on.”
T‘ho’‘ge ne’ O*‘ha’a’ dé"’’se’ ne” ho‘sd’da‘ o/né™ hi’yit’
At that time the Winter God and the his grandmother now verily
wi’hyatdd’gd’ tea’ nwa’awé"’‘ha’ ne” ted” wa’dyo‘hat‘hé®’‘hi’.
did they two become where so did it come to pass where did it become light.
aware
O’né™ hi’yi’ oni’ wa’hni’gé®” dawadawé‘hit, o/‘ni’ ne
Now verily also did they two it see thence did it come over (did rise), also the
wa’ tga‘hat‘he’’da’ tea’? o™hwéndjiya’de’. T‘ho’‘ge’ ne’ O‘ha’a’
did it-it to be light canoe = where it-earth extant is. At that time the Winter God
wi hé"’‘hén’, “Oné™ ogofida’dye’ ne’’t‘ho’ hé’ge’ ted’’ non’ wet
did he say, “Now straightway forthwith thither, there, hence I willgo where the place
”) so) ens? ’
t‘hono™sa’yé” ne De‘haé™hiawa’’gi dé”’’se’ ne’? o’né™
there his lodge the and the now,
ne’’t‘ho‘ he‘hoyo™s’’if hawéf’‘, “Is’ o%‘¢é™ ne’’t‘ho’ hé"tc’he’.
there these he arrived he said “Thou in thy turn there there wilt thou
again go.
O'né™ di” hwa’githe’e’ swa’’djik 6f’’, o’né™ oi‘hwane‘hi’/gwit
Now then, here did it arrive too much it seems, Now it matter of wonder (is)
so then, (it is time) (because)
ted’? nwa’awé?’‘ha’. Oi‘hwadse’”’ we’dyatgat’‘hwa’. Sté”’ gowa”’
Where so did it happen. It matter new (is) did we two, thou-l, see. Something just
nonwa‘ho’’dé™ ni‘hadye’‘ha’ ne’ deyagyadé™hnon’da’. O’né™
kind of thing so he is doing they two we, he-I, are brothers. Now
di” 178 wa’gekdo™‘hna’.”” O/né™ wa’ha‘dén’dya’.
sothen I thither I-it, to view go.” Now did he start.
O’né™ di” ne’’t‘ho’ = hwa’ha’yo™ ganyadak’dé’ dé*’’se’
Now so then there there did he arrive it-lake beside and
wihatgat’‘hwi’ o/né™ ostwi’‘ha’ gwi”’ hedjiyd’gé™t tea’? nigé’
did he look now itsmall very (is) just thither still it where soitdistant
visible (is) (is)
tgi‘hwe’‘no’. T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ di” wa’h陑héf’ ne’ O*'ha’s?,
thereit-island floats. At that time now so then did he say the Winter God
E*gat‘honyon’nya hi’ya’ ’on’‘ C
4)
on’‘, o/né™ hi’‘sd’ 6"wa’do", dé*giya’-
“ Will T it-canoe for salt make verily perhaps, now not before willit be possible will I it
‘hyv’k.” O/né™ wa’t‘hatga‘don/nyo"k. Ne’’t‘ho’ gw” gii’‘he’
stream cross.” Now did he his-eyes cast about. There just it-tree stands
ne’ ganadjie‘ewa’. T‘ho’’ge’ o/né™ wa’hane’‘ha’ dé"’’se’
the it-birch. At that time now did he bark peel off and
wi’hat‘hofiyon’nya’. Ganyo” wa’hayéinéada’’nha’ o/né™ hi’ya’
did he self canoe make for. As soon as did he it complete now in fact
wihadi/dak dé"’se’ wa’t‘haya’‘hya’k.
did he self embark and did he stream cross.
Ne” o/né™ wa’ha‘honwa’di’nha’ o’né™ hi’ya’ wa’hadida’‘gwa’.
The now did his canoe arrive at the now in fact did he self take out.
landing place
Tho’ge’ o’né™ hi’yd’ wi’ho’gs™ ne’ héii’gwe‘, hiya’‘
At that time now in fact did he-him see the he human being (is), not
688 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
de’hoyéndé’i.. T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’? O*tha’i? wa’hé"’‘hen’, ‘Ga’én‘
any he-him knows. At that time the Winter God did he say, “Whence
non’we‘ nojidi‘senon’‘, nigé™’‘hé™ hiya’’ hwén’do™ de’gon’gé™?
the place thence thou hast so it is not ever any I-thee have
come, astonishing seen???
T‘ho’‘geS’ ne” héf’gweo wa’hé?‘hén’, “T‘*ho’né non’we'
At that time the he human being did he say, “Here (is) the place
agadon‘hé’di‘.”” Da‘hawénnitgé”’’nha’ ne’? O‘ha’a’ wa’hé"’‘hén’,
did I come to life.” Thence his word(s) came forth the Winter God did he say,
“Son’! di’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé™ esaya’dis’#7i°?”” O’né™ da‘hai‘hwa’-
“Who then person kind of one-thy body completed?” Now thence he question
si/ewa’ ne” héf’gweo wa’hé?‘hén’, “T‘ho’né™ gwi’’t‘ho’ hi’ya’
took up the he human being did he say, “Here (is) hard by as you
(replied) know
hé»’dén’. Ne’’t‘ho’ di’? nhedji’dene‘. E™hes’gé™ hi’yi’ ne”’
he abides. There then hence let us two Wilt thou-him see in fact the
again go.
hagya’dis’’471.”,. O’né™ ne” Ocha’a’ wa’hat‘hofi’dat, o/né™
he-my body completed.” Now the Winter God did he hear (willingly), now
ne’’t‘ho’ nhofisa’‘hne’ tea’? non’we t‘hoddaddsgwa’‘ha’ ne’’
there thither again they twowent where the place there he his roof has put up the
De‘haé™hiawa’’ei.
Ne’ o’né™ hofsa‘hni’yo” o’né™ ne’”’ O‘ha’a’ wa’hé?‘hén’,
« The now thereagaintheytwoarrived now the Winter God did he say,
“Ts-khé™’* he‘sya’dis’’a’1' néfgé™’ ‘ha’ on’gwet ’a’‘se’ wa’hé’gé"’?”
“Ts it thou thou his body hast this (thisitis) | human being new did him I see?”
completed
Di‘hai‘hwa’si/ewa’? ne” De‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hé”hén’, “1’’
Thence he question took up the Life God did he say, “T (itis)
hi/yai’ ageyénnénda’’i‘ ne’ ted’’ hon’‘he’.”
in fact I it completed the where he is alive.’”
O’né™ he” da‘hawéfinitgé’’nha’ ne” Otha/a’ wa’hé™’‘hén’,
Now again thence his word came forth the did he say,
“Son di” nofiwa‘ho’dé™” ni” ne’’t‘ho’ nwa’eye’é’ nén’eé™
“Who then person kind of that there (thus) so did one-it do this it is
'oM‘o8™ =swi/’djik deyo‘hat’‘hek?”’ Da‘hai‘hwa’si’gwa’ ne
at this time too much it is light?”’ Thence he question took up the
De‘haé™hiawa’’ei‘ wa’hé"’‘hén’, “Na’ye’ hi’ya’ ne
Life God did he say, “That (it is) in truth the
S‘hedwa’‘djy? (?S‘hedwa’‘djiya’) na’ye’ ne’’t‘ho’ nwa’haye’a’.”
Our Eldest Brother (Our Eldest Brother) that it is thus (there) so did he it do.”
Tho’‘ge’ ne” O*ha’a? o’né™ wa’hoi‘hwane‘hé’gwa’ tea
At that time the now did him (the) matter astonish where
nonwi‘ho’dé™ wa’hatgat’‘hwa’.
thing kind of did he it see.
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gi da‘hawéfnitgé’’’nhd’ dé"’’se’
At that time the thence his word came forth and
wi’ hé?’‘hén’, One! diy? hi’y’ dedwadawénnye’‘sa‘.
5 did he say, “Now then of course let us go for a stroll.
H™satgat’‘hwa’ ted” ni’yo‘t o/né™ odon/ni‘ tea’? nofiwa‘ho’’dé™”
Wilt thou it see where so it is now it itself grows where thing kind of
agyént’‘hwif ne” tc&’”’ o™hwéfidjiya’de’.” O’né™ hi’ya’
I it have planted the where it earth extant (is).’’ Now, in fact,
wi’ t‘hyadawén/nye’ ted’ nof’wes odi‘hyon’ni‘ ne’’ nhwa’dyo’‘-
did they two take a stroll where the place it-fruit is growing the as many as
”)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 689
hydge’. Ganyo” gagwe’gi‘ tcd’’ ni’yo™ wa’hyatgat’‘hwa’ o’né™
fruits number. As soon as it entire (all) where soit numbers’ did they two (it) see now
hi/yi’ bs’ wa hyadongo’‘di’. O’ne™ na’ye’ JoRcem
asyouknow usually did they two pass on. Now that it is in turn
wivhyikdo™‘hna’ ne’ ~~ gondi’yd’. Na’ye’ _ne”’ gagwe’ gi
did they two to see the they game animals That it is the it entire (is)
(them) went (are).
wa’tgofidawén’nye’ ne’’ nhwa’tgofidiyo’’dige’ ofnatga’’de’.
did they (an.) stroll about the as many as they game animals number they are numerous.
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne” Otha’a’ wa’hoi‘hwaine‘hi’egwa’ ted” ni’yo‘t
Then now the did him (the) matter astonish where so it is
tei’? wi’hatgat’hwi’. O/né™ di’ wa’héhén’, “Nigé™”“hée”
where did he-it see. Now then did he say, “Unmatched (it is)
o‘snd/we’ = wa’otga’dé"”‘ha’ tea’ ni’yo™ =o/né™ ~— sayéinit’‘hwi‘
it rapid (is) did they numerous where so many they now thou hast planted
become number
dé*’’se’ ne’ gofidi’yd’ o’né™ ofnatga’’de’ wa’wa’do™. Hot’’
and the theygameanimals now they many are did it become. What
nonwii‘ho’’dé™ ne’ nwa’’sye’i’?” Ttho’‘ges ne’”’ De‘haé™hiawa’’ei‘
thing kind of the so didst thou it do?” Then the
di‘hawénnitgé’’hnd’ = =wi’h陑hén’, “Nén’gé™ o™hwéndjya’de’
thence his word came forth (spoke) did he say, “This is it-earth extant is
niwa’a‘ ne’ ted” diyo’‘siwa’ na’ye’ ne’’ ododi‘ha’dye’.
so its size the where these it began that it is the it growing kept on.
small (is)
Ger’ djik a’’t‘ho! o/né™ heyo‘he’’ é"gdwa’‘nha’. Ne’’t‘ho‘
>
Soon nearly it utmost (is) will it large become. The there
di” ni’yo‘t nén’gé™ odof’nis niyo™’ha‘’ ne’’ diyo’‘siwa’ dé®’’se’
sothen soit is this it is ithas grown somanythey' the there it began and
number few
ne” gondi’yd’ niyo" ‘hd o” na’ ne’ ted’ diyo’‘sdiwi’ dé
fo)
the they, game sotheyfew(are) too the the where there it began and
animals (are) those
’)
ne on’gwe' ne’’t‘ho’ 0” ni’yo‘t. Gagwe’gi‘ _ne’’t‘ho‘
the human being the there too so it is. It entire is the there
né"yawé"’‘ha’. Na’ye’ ne’”’ &"wadodia’gi’ dé"’’se’ é*yotga’dé"’‘ha’
so will it happen. That itis the will it grow up and will it numerous become
gagwe’gl'.”’
it entire (is).”’
O’né™ ne” O'ha’a’? wh"hé’‘hén’, “O’né™ hi’ya’ é"sea‘dén’diya’.
”) nrg e’
Now the did he say, “Now in fact willagain I start home.
Is’ ’o"‘o8™ di” ne’’t‘ho’ hé"te’he’ ne” tea’? non’we niyongnino™
Thou inturn’ then the there thither again the where the place just we-two
wilt thou go
sa/yé” ne” ksoda’‘ha‘.”’
odge lies the my grandmother.”
Tho’ge’ o/né™ si‘ha‘déi’dy#’ ne’? O*ha’a’. Ne’ o’ne™
Them now Again he started (—went the The now,
home) time,
honsa‘ha’yo” = wa’hé™hén’, “Ksoda’‘ha‘, ol‘hwane‘hi’/ewat
there again he arrived did he say, “Oh, my grandmother, it-matter amazing is
wa’ gatgat’‘hwa’ ted’ nof’we' t‘hanage’e’ ne’’ De‘ha陓hiawa’’gi*.
did I-it see where the place there he dwells the
Wi’he’gé” of’gwe’ na’ye’ ne” ’A’se’ hofwaya’dis’’a&’if dé"’’se’
I-him saw human being that it is the it new (is) he his body finished and
wivheya‘hén’do” ne’ De‘haé“hiawa’’ei‘, ‘Son’’ nofwa‘ho’’dé”
did I-him ask the ‘Who person kind of
690 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
ne’’t‘ho’ nwa’eye’é’ swa’’djik deyo‘hat’‘hek’. Wi’he"‘hén’,
the there so did one do too much it light is. Did he-it say,
‘Na’ye’ hi’ya’ ne” S‘hedwa‘djiya’’.” T‘ho’ge’ wi’a/‘héi’ ne”
‘That it is in fact the Our Eldest Brother.’ ” Then did she say the
gokstén’’a‘, “Na’ye’ di” hi’y o/né* wi’gai‘hwayei’’khe’
she the dear old “That it is then of a truth now did it-matter come to pass
person,
tchon-daga‘dén’dya’ hawéni’’ ne’ kdji’& ne’’t‘ho’ hé’gyo™
when-thence I started,’ he it spoke the my Elder the there there will I
Brother arrive
ne” tea” non’ we‘ hé™se’’sek. Na’ye’ hi/yi’ ne”’
the when the place there wilt thou be That it is indeed the
going to and fro.
De‘hado™hwéndjiyén’do™%s haya’dji‘, na’ye’ ne” ted’’t‘hos
He-Earth-Shakes he is named, that it is the when
kdji’’ a‘. Na’ye’ di” hi’ya’ ho’da’ ne”’ i‘ha’dotk
my Elder That, it is so then of course he-him the he keeps saying
Brother (is). means
S‘hedwa/‘djy3’.”
Our Elder Brother.”
T‘ho’‘geS o/né* ne” O‘ha’s’? wa’hé’‘hén’, “O’né™ 0” ni’’a‘
At that time now the did he it say, “Now too
&ge‘séi/nyd’ ne’ of/ewe'. O’ne wageyénnénda’’ik ne’
will I-it make , the human being. Now will have I-it finished the
o’né™ = =dé"t’‘he’ ne” De‘ha陓hiawa’’gi‘,”’ dé ’’se’ o/né™
Now there he will the,’”’ and now
=when) come
wa’haydgé’"nha’.
did he go out.
T‘ho’‘ge o/né% wa’ha‘sa’wé” wa’hoyo’dé’‘ha’ na’ye’ ne”
At that time Now did he it begin did he set to work that it is the
wi/ha‘séfi/nyd#’ ne’ ofi’gwe’ ne” tei’ hono®’‘do”. Ganyo”’
did he it make the human being the where he-it knew, As soon as
(=as he thought).
wihayéhnénda’’nha’ = o’né™*wa’hé ‘hen’, ““Hate’gwi', o0/né"
did he it complete now did he say, S Lo, Now
desda’’nha‘. Sa‘déndya‘ On mite T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’/né™ si’‘
do thou stand up. Do thou walk also.”’ At that time now yonder
wa’t‘hénna’sgon’di’? awé’’ee® haigwa’di‘ nhwi’’he’, ne’’t‘ho‘
did he himself cast (—leap) water-in toward thither did he go, the there
hi’y&’? wa’ha‘don’wek, na’ye’ di’ niyoi‘hwigwa/‘hi‘ o/né?
of course did he himself submerge that it is then so it-matter short (is) now
si‘ha‘donwé’ewa’. Tho’‘geS ne” O‘ha’a’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Ga’e’
again he came to the surface. At that time the did he say, “Hither
na’donda’se’.””’ Hiya’ de’t‘hoda’di‘, hiyad’’ o’‘ni’ de’hodoya’‘hén’,
thence do thou come.”’ Not thence did he speak, not also any he self moved.
Ttho’‘gef o/né™ ne’ Otha’a’ wai’hé"hén’, “Ofge‘nhi’’ea’
Then now the did he say, “Tt caused me to err.
hi’y’. Hiya’’ de’dwagyeik’di‘ (not de’dwagyeis’di‘) tea”
in fact. Not did I-it do right where
wi heyaé’don’nya’. O’y? 7 a/‘so™— di” dd tgade’nyén’dé”’.””
did I-his body make. Other still, more, eee will I-it again attempt.”
Ne’’t‘ho‘ge‘ o/né hé’’ o’y&’ s&‘ha‘sén’nyi’. Ne” o/né™
That time at now again it other (is) again he-it make. The now (time)
wi’ hadyéfno’k’dé” wa hé”’‘hén’, “Hate’ewi'! desda’’nhia‘,
did he his task complete did he say, “Attend! do thou stand up,
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 691
si‘dén’dya‘ o’ni’.” O’n’™ da‘hatgé™ ‘ha’ dé"’se’ wa’ha‘dén’dyd’
do thou walk also.”” Now thence he arose and did he walk
ne’’t‘ho’ dosgé’‘ha‘ gi’‘he’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’ha’a’’t‘hé”, na’ye’ ne’’
the there nearby it-tree the there did he-it climb, that it is the
stands
he’tgé"’* ne’’t‘ho’ wi’ha’dyé’. T*ho’‘geS ne’? O‘ha’é’ ne’t‘ho‘
up high the ae did he seat himself. At that time the the there
de‘haga/‘ha’ héino™don’nyo™k; t*‘ho’‘geS one" hé” wa’hé"’‘hén’,
two his eyes rested he was thinking; at that time now again did he say,
“Aowis’ 60’, of’', ofige‘nhi’ga’, swa’’djik, 6f’’, of’’ ayéfh’a’
“Just Ithink, perhaps, it-me toerr caused, too much Ithink, perhaps, one might
(=because) think
ni‘ha’’s dé ’’se’ hédé"’’es. Ones di” ~~ wa’hada’dyi’
so his size and his tail long (is). Now then did he speak
small (is)
wi’hée’‘hén’, ‘“Dondasa‘gwe‘hné” ‘dis —hya’e’.” Hiya’ sté”’
did he say, “Thence do thou descend first in order.” Not no Some:
ing
de’t‘hoda’di‘. T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’? O‘tha’a’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “O’ya’ he”
any thence he spoke. then the did “Tt other again
7o" os" = Ge ‘SEN’/nya’. E™hagowa’n@ks ne” ng” ne”
in turn will I-it make. Well he very large be the that one the
on’ fren. ”
in turn.”
Tho’‘ge’ o’né* hi’yi’ he” o’yd’ sa&‘ha‘séi’nyd’. Ganyo’
Then now in faet again it other again he it made. As soon as
gagwe’gi‘ wa hayénnénda’ nha’ o/né™ he”’ wa’ he?‘hén’,
it entire (is) did he-it complete now again did he say,
“Hate’gwi'! desda’’nha'‘, sa‘dén’dya‘ Oenin 4 O’ne"s
“ Behold! do thou stand up, do thou walk also.”” Now
wi’t‘hada/’nhx’ = d&"”’se’ ne’? Otha’a’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho‘
did he stand up and the did he say, “The there
dé“sadawén’nye’ ne’ tea” o“hwéndjiya’de’. a T ‘ho’ ‘ge‘
shalt thou travel about the where it-earth extant is.’ At that time
o/né™ hofiwaya’dis’i’i' o/né wa’ha‘dén’dya’. De‘haga’‘ha’
now the he-his body has com- now did he start walking. Two his eyes rested
pleted (on him)
ne” O*‘ha’a’?, o/n& tthoge’ wi’hé’‘héi’, “O’ne he’
the now at that time did he say, “Now is it
’of’’ dagye’it. O’né™ di’ o’ya’ ne’ ’o™‘gé” é&ge'séi’nya’
per- did I-it do Now then _it other the in turn will I-it make
haps right.
ne”’ ga yo’. ”?
the it game-animal
(is).””
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ Tae wiha‘sén’nya’. Ganyo”’
Then now the that did he-it make. As soon as
wihayéinéada’ nha’ gagwe’gié o/né™ wa’he‘hén’, “Hate’gwi'!
did he (the) task complete it entire now did he say, “Behold!
desda’’nha‘, si‘déi’dya‘ oni’, Skéfnofi’do” é™sya’djik.”
do thou stand up, do thou walk also. Deer wilt thou be
named.”
Tho’‘ge® one wa’tgada/’nhd’ d8”’se’ o’né — wa’dwaa’‘dat
Then now did it stand up and now did it run
dé”’se’ o/n&"* wi’dyo‘héiie’‘did’?. T*ho’‘ge‘ o’né™% hé” o’ya’
and now did it cry out. Then now again it other
si‘ha‘sén’nya’.
agein he-it made.
Ne”’ o’né™ wihayénnénd’’ nha’ o’/né"
The now did he (the) task complete now
692 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH ANN. 43
wa’he’’‘hén’, “Hau’’! o/né™ satgé’ ‘ha’ dé’’se’ sa‘dén’dyd'.
did he say, “Come! now do thou thyself and do thou go.
raise
vim
O‘ewa’i né"sd‘séino’’dé"k.”’
Bear such will thy name be in
kind.”
T‘ho’‘geé o’né“ dawatgé"’ ‘hi’ dé ”’se’ wa’wa‘dén’dyd’.
Then now thence did it itself and did it go.
raise
Tho’‘gef o’né"* = wa’hadyéfi’‘ha’ewi? = =0/nd™—s d/‘he’ ~— ne”
Then now was he himself surprised now thence he the
comes
de‘hyadé"hnon’daad’, ne’? De‘ha陓hiawa’’ei‘.
two they brothers are, the
Ganyo” wa’ha’yo” o/né™ ne’ O‘ha’a’? wa’hé?’‘hén’, ‘O’née™
As soon as did he arrive now the did he say, “Now
I” ’or’‘gé" 6"gonnd’’do™s ted’? nofiwa‘ho’’dé™ age‘sén’ni‘.”’
i in turn will I-thee show where thing kind of have I made.”
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ wa’hya‘déi’dya’. Niyoi‘hwigwa’‘ha‘ o’/né™
Then now did they two go. So it-matter short very now
ganyadak’da’ hwa’hni’yo”, o/né™ ne” O‘ha’a&’ wa’hé®’‘hén’,
it lake beside there they two arrived, now the Winter God did he say,
“Ne hi’ya’ hatgo’da’ ne’ diyodyeé™’‘di‘ heyi’don’ni‘ ne’”’
“Here of course he sits the there it (the) first was I his body made the
on’gwe’.” O/né™ ne”? De‘haé™hiawa’’gi’ wai’hatgat/“‘hwa ne’
human being.” Now the Life God did he it look at the
tea’ ot‘hnego’k’da’ ne’’t‘ho’ hatgd’da’, o/né™ di” wa’hé’‘hén’,
where it water’s edge the there he sits, now then did he say,
“Hot’ nofwa‘ho’’dé™ ni‘sadye’‘hi’ ne’’ he‘di’’ge‘ setgo’da’?”
“What thing kind of so thou art doing the ground-on thou sittest?”’
Tho“ge’ dawada’dya’ gwi” = wa’dyo‘héne’‘da’. O’né™
Then thence did it speak just only did it utter a ery, Now
wi’ hé™’‘hén’, Seta. si‘dén’dya‘.”’ Omen ne/a) ana
did he say, “Come, do thou walk.” Now the that one
wa’dwénna’sewa’/‘ewa’ awé?”’oe =hagwa’di‘ —_ ho’wa‘don’wek.
did it leap water-in towards thither it-itself plunded.
Niyor‘hwagwa’‘ha‘ o/né™ sawa‘dofwe’gwa’. Ne’’t‘ho’ nigi‘ha’wi’
So it-matter very short now again it its head. The there so it time (is)
o’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’eif wi’hé‘hén’, “Hiya’’ hi’yd’
now the did he say, “Not indeed
ni’ on’gweo de’gén’. Hwa’éi’ nai” 6"gaya/djik.”
the that human being any it is. Spring Frog the that will it be named.”
T‘ho’‘ge ne” O‘ha’a’ o/né™ wa’h陑hén’, “O’ya’ ne” tei’’t‘hos
Then the now did he say, “Tt other the
swage‘séf’nié ne” on’gwe'.” =O/né™ =e” wa’hya‘dén’dyi’.
again I-it have made the human being.”’ Now again did they two walked on.
Dosgé™ ‘ha’ nigé"’S o’né™ ne” Ocha’a’? wa’hé"‘hén’, “Né®’‘, hi’ya’,
Near very soit far (is) now the did he say, “Here,
he’t’gé™ hatgo’da’.”’ T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne”’ De‘haé™hiawi’’gi‘
up high he sits.’” Then the
wi’ hé?’‘hén’, “Hiya” hi’ya’ imesh on’gwe' de” gén‘.
did he say, “No indeed the that human being any it is.
Héndé"’’e’da’ hi’y&’? =dé"”’se’ ogo™nhd’dd’ ne” haya’di’’ge‘.”
He tailed (is) indeed and it-fur has grown the his body on.”
O’né™ he”’ da‘hawéfnitgé”’ nha’ wa hé"’‘hén’, “Hot?
Now again thence his voice came forth did he speak, “What
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 693
’ wry
noiwa‘ho’’dé™ ni‘sadye’‘ha’ ne’’ tei’ he’t’gé™ hesetgo’da’?”’
thing kind of so thou art doing the where up high there thou sittest?’’
T‘ho’‘ge’ gwi” t*ha’t‘ho‘héne’‘da’, na’ye’ ne’”’ wa’t‘ha‘sefit’‘hwa’.
then just only thence he cried out, that it is the did he weep.
O’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawai’’gii wi’h陑hén’, ‘Gadji’k’daks
Now the did he say, “Tt vermin eats
(=monkey)
énye‘sayas’t‘hak, swa’’djik sadji’’danén‘.” T*ho”ge o/né™ he’”’
will one thee continue to toomuch thou weepest so easily.”’ Then now again
name, (=because)
wi’ hyadongo’‘da’. Dosgé™ ‘ha’ —niyo’we’~—ne’’t‘ho’ —s gwa”’
did they two pass on. Near very so it distant (is) the there just
hatgo’da’ ne’’ of/gwe‘, o’né™ di” ne’ Otha’a’ wa’h陑hé”,
he sat (is sitting) the human being, now then the did he say ,
“Ne hi’y&’ he’ hatgo’d&d’ hey&’dis’’a’i' ne” ofi’gwe'.”’
“Here, (is) indeed again he is sitting I-his body completed the human being.’”
Ganyo”’ ne”’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gi‘ wi’hatgat’‘hwa’ o/né™
As soon as the did he it look at now
va)
wihée'hén’, ‘Hot’ nofwi‘ho’dé” néngé ‘ha’ ni‘sadye’‘ha’
did he say, “What thing kind of this it is so thou are doing
ne’ he‘da’’ge‘ setgo’da’?” T*ho’‘geS o’né™ wa’t‘hadei’sdané’ga’,
the earth on thou sittest?’” Then now did he burst into great noise,
wi’ tha‘s‘hént’‘hwi’. O’né™ ne’”’ De‘haé™hiawa’’eif wa’ hé"’‘hén’,
did he weep. Now the did he say,
“Hiya’’ hi’y#’ de’oya’ne’ ted’ sade’nyéidé™ ‘hi’ ’&‘se‘séh’nyd’
“No in fact any it good (is) where thou are making attempts shouldst thou it make
,) 1 <4)
ne” of/gwe’. Hiya’‘ de’tgaye’i’ ne” sa&‘sén’ni’. Nefgé™’ ‘ha’
the human being. Not any it correct is the thou it hast made. This it is
VAs
wi’he’gé"” heyohe’’ na’ye’ hodji’dowa’né™. Na’ye’ di” na
did I-him see it exceeding (is) that it is his erying great (is). That it is then the that
é™haya’djik ne’ gadji’kdaks’gona*‘.”’
will he be named the it vermin-eater great (=the ape).”’
Tho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne’ O‘ha’d’ wa’hé‘hén’, “Dégeni’‘
Then now the did he say, “Two it is
agadadén’‘se’ na’ye’ 6"gonnii’’do™s.”” O’né™ di” wa’hya‘dén’dya’.
did it-me leave to _ that it is will I-thee show.” Now then did they two walk on.
Dosgé"’‘ha’ ne’’t‘ho! gw” i’gene’s. Wa’h陑hén’ ne” O*ha’a’,
Near very the there just they two (anim.) Did he say the
go about.
“Néng陓hi’ sgaya’’dida’ skéfinon’do” gaya’dji‘, o’né™ ne
“This it is one it (anim.) body (is) Deer it is called,” now the
sgaya’’didd’ ogwaii n&’”’ ne” gaya’dji‘.” O’né™ ne
one it (anim.) Bear the that the it is called,’”’ Now the
body (is)
De‘haé™hiawi’’gii wi’hatgat’‘hwa’ dé™’’se’ o’né™ wa’hada’dya’
did he-it look at and now did he speak
wihé‘hén’, “Hiyd’’ de’tgayé’i’ ne’ skéfnofi’do™.” ‘T*ho’‘ge‘
did he say, “Not any it correct (is) the Deer.” At that time
o’né™ wi’ wadéiind’dé™, na’ye’ ne’ wa’dyo‘héne’‘da’. Ne’’t‘ho‘
now did it sing, that it is the did it cry out. The there
o” na” nwai’gaye’é’ ne” sgaya’’ dada’.
too the that so did it do the one it (=anim.) body.
O’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’h陑hén’, “Na’ye’ hiya’
Now the did he say, “That it is of course
néngé’“ha’ ot‘ha‘hyon’ni’ é"gaya’djik. O/’né™ ne’”’ sgaya’’dada*
this it is Wolf will it be named. Now the one it-(anim.) body (is)
bs ‘
4/‘so®
694. IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
ne’ i‘sa’do"k o’‘gwa’i‘ na’ye’ ne” na” ne’ gaya’gwa’‘he‘
the thou it sayest Bear that it is the the that the grizzly bear
é"gaya’ djik.”’
shall it be named.”
T‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’gii wa’hé"’‘hen’, ‘Is’
Then now the did he say, “Thou
7on‘oé™ ne’’t‘ho’ hé"tc’he’ ne’’t‘ho‘ ne’ 8®yo‘hé®’’nhi’.
in turn the there thither shalt the there the will it tomorrow be.
again thou go
E™sne’”’ ’o"‘gé™ né” et‘hi‘so’da‘.”” T*‘ho’‘ge* o’né™ si‘ha‘dén’dya’
Will you in turn the sheourgrandmother At that time now again he started
two go is.” (=went home)
ne’ De‘haé™hiawa’’ei'.
the Life God
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ ne” O‘ha’ a’ 0” ~~ sa‘ha‘dén’dyi’.
Then now the Winter God too again he started walk-
ing (went home).
Niyot‘hwigwa’‘hi‘ o’né™ hofisa‘ha’yo™ tea” noi’ we‘
So it-matter short very (is) now there again he arrived where the place
t‘hodino™sa’yé™ o/né™ di” wa’h陑hén’, “Ksodi/‘ha‘, na’ye’
there they lodge have now then did he say, “Oh, my grandmother, that it is
ted” nwa’awé"’‘ha’ ne’ ted’ on’gwe' age‘sén’ni‘ dé"’’se’ ne’’
where soit didcometopass the where human being have I made and the
skéfinon’do™ dé"”’se’ — ne” ofgwa'i’ na’ye’ di” ne
deer and the bear that it is then the
De‘haé™hiawa’gif wa’hend’’do™s, hiya’ — de’ hoi‘hwA‘hni’‘di‘.
did him (them) show to, not any he it-matter confirmed.
Hiya’, ya'gée™, de’dwagyei’‘di‘. Na’ye’ di” tea”
Not, it is said, any did I-it do correctly. The that then where
niwak’nigo™he’’dé™ tei” ni’yo™ o/né™ gyd’dis’s’i' ’&/‘so™
such it-my mind in kind is where so Many now Tits-body have still (others)
it numbers finished
n/é
)
oni’ é"sgyd’’dof’nyd’ na’ye’ ne’ t‘higadé’nyo™”. Na’ye’
also will again its body make that it is the just it-different (is) That it is
severally.
di” tea’? né"yawé"’‘ha’. Ne’’t‘tho’ hagwa’di‘ hé"gadéinye’‘di’
then where _ so will it come to pass. The there thither side hence will I-it send
tea?’ hagwa’‘ t‘hot‘hwe’‘no’ ne”’ deyagyadé™hnon’da’.
where towards there he his island has afloat the two-he and I brothers are.
Ne’’t‘ho’ haigwa’di‘ hé"gofidekhwi’‘sak. Na’ye’ hi’yi’ &"g¢on’nek
The there that side there will they (zoic.) hunt That itis in fact will they it eat
for their food.
4)
tea” ni’yo™ o/né™ hoyénnénda’’ié ne’ deyagyadé™hnonda’.
where so they now he (them) has finished the two-he and I brothers are.
many are
Dyén’‘hagwa’ é™hoi‘hwa‘het’gé"s 8"yagyadei’yo’ ~— géi’gwit’.
If it so be will him it-matter vex will he-I fight (kill only (asa
each other) last resort).
Na’ye’ di” &"yo‘hé"’nha&’ ne’’t‘ho’ hé*’dne’ ted’’ t‘hono™sa’yé”
That itis then will it tomorrow the there hence will where there his lodge stands
become you-I go
ne’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gi‘.” Ogonda’dye’ dayei‘hwi’sa’gwa’ ne
the Right away thence she answered the
gokstén’’a‘ wa’a/hén’, ‘Hot’ nofiwi‘ho’’dé™ né"dniye’’’ ne’”’
she elder one (is) did she say, “What thing kind of so will thou-I it do the
dé"dniya’‘hya’k tea’? na’degya’de’ tei’? dega‘hwe’‘no’?”’
: : Dd 5
will thou-I stream cross where so far two they where two it island afloat is?”
apart are
2p)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 695
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne’ O‘ha’a’ wa’hé"‘hén’, ‘“Hiyd/‘ nd” hi’yd’ sté2”’
Then the did he say, “Not the that infact anything
de’gai’‘hwaa’. I” 6"gas’ko’k. E™wageyéfinénda”ik ted’ nigé’‘
any it matters. I will I bridge Will have I it completed where so it far is
cause to float
é"yohé’’nhi’.” ss T*ho’‘ge‘ ne”’ gokstén’’a‘ wis “hén’,
will it morning become.” Then the she elder one (is) did she say,
“Dyén"‘ha’gwi’ € "sewe’nyd’ ne’ &™sas’ko’k t‘ho’‘ge’ o0/né™
“Tf soit be wilt thou it be the wilt thou bridge at that time now
able to do cause to float
ha’‘sai’ @®¢at‘hofidat ne” hé"’dne’.”’
not before will I agree to it the hence will
thou-I go.”
Ne” o’né™ o’gas’’&' wa’wa'do™ o’né™ ne” O'ha’a’? wa’hé™’‘hén’,
The now it evening did it become now the did he say,
darkness
y
“O’né™ dé"ted‘sa’wé™, o/né™ hi’yd’ S"¢as’ko’k. Na’ye’ ne’ ne”
“Now will I it begin, now in fact will I-bridge That itis the the
cause to float.
Is’ ™sadeyéfnénda’’ik ~—di’’. Agwas’ na’ye’ — géfi’ewd’
Thou wilt thou thy preparations so then. Just that it is only
have finished
@wade’nyéfidé's’da’ ne” o/né™ dé"yo‘hat‘hé"’ ‘ha’ = o’/né™
will it itself govern by the now will it light become now
é"dya‘dén’dya’.” O/né™ di” wa’hayagé”’ nha’.
will thou-I start.” Now so then did he go out.
Tho“ge’ o/né™ wa’hér‘hén’, “Nén’eé™ Deyoda‘sondai’gi‘,
Then now did he say, “This it is It Black Darkness Is
ne’’t‘ho’ nis&’s‘hasdé"’‘sia’ ne” of/gwef a’gé"k awasewi'sd”’ik
the there so thy strength great (is) the human should it be would one a bridge
beings have completed
ted’? niwa‘son’dis ne” tea’ na’degya’de’ nén’gé™ dega‘hwe’‘no’.
where soit night long (is) the where as two they far this it is two it island
apart (are) afloat are
y) ”)
Dé"yagniya’hya’k ne’”’ ksoda/‘ha‘ ne’ @®yo‘hé®”’nha’.
fo)
Two will one-I stream cross the mygrandmother the will it daylight become
(tomorrow).”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ dawa‘sa’wé” wa’gana’nos’da’. Dayotgé™i‘ha’dye’
ey,
Then now thence it began did it to be cold cause it. Thence it became so more
and more
ne’ o/né™ tho’‘ha’ é@"yo‘hé"’’nha’. Ne’’t‘ho‘-gef o’né™ ne”
the now near very will it daylight become. The there-at now the
De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’ hé™’‘hén’, “Agwas’, éf’’, ’on’’ é“hagwe’nya’
Life God did he say, “Verily, I per- will he able be
believe, haps,
ne’ O*ha’a’ &™hakhetgé?’‘dé™” ne’’ tca’’ ni’yo™ o/né™
the Winter God will he it spoil for me the where so many now
it numbers
agyéht’‘hwit. Na’ye’ hi’yi’ ne’’t‘ho’ nwa’haye’é’ swa’djik’
g) nyi J
have I (them) That it is indeed the there so did he it do too much
planted.
onid’’no‘ ne”’ ted’”’ o™hwéndjiya’de’. Na’ye’ hi’ yi’
it cold is the where it-earth extant (is). That ii is indeed
wi’hade’s‘hasdé™sénnya’’di’ tei’ deyo’’gais dé"’se’ hiya’® sté"”’
did he his power make thereof where it dies is and not anything
t‘hofsawadai‘ha’’da’ ted’? niwad‘son’dis (niwa‘son’des?). Na’ye’
thence again it-it to be warm, where so it night long (is) That it is,
cause
di”, on’, tgagon’da’ deyodo™hwéndjiyo’‘hwif ne’’ — son’ga’
then, perhaps, it sure (is) it necessary (is) the some one
696 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
akhei‘hon’dé™ ne’’ o’né™ gé"s’ 6"diyo’’gak tcd’”’ o™hwéndjiya’de’,
should I-one * the now usually will it night where it-earth extant is,
commission become
na’ye’ ayo"steis’da’ ne’’ hiya’ t‘hayo’sihes’da’ t‘hagand’nos’di’,
that it is should one it the no thence it excessive thence it it to be cold,
attend to become cause,
hiya’ o’‘ni’ t‘hayo’sihes’da’ da’dayo’gis’t‘he’t. Na’ye’, di’’, ’on’‘,
not also thence it excessive thence it-it, to be night, That it is, so per-
become cause. then, haps,
oya’ne’ tea” nigé"’ é"wadofgo’‘da’ ne’”’ ksod&’‘ha‘ dayenada’‘he’,
it good is where soit is far will it pass by the my grandmother thence she to
visit comes,
t‘ho’‘ge o’né™ ha’s&’ na’ye’ t‘ho’né™ né eye's’? ne” tcd’?
then now not before that it is here this so will I-it do the where
wia‘sofida’de’ oi‘hwa’’ge‘.”’
it night present (is) it-matter on.”’
Na’ye’ ne” o/né™ wi’o‘hé?’nha’ 6’ ee’djik o/né wi’hadyén’!
That itis the now did it daylight become early in morning now did it surprise him
ha’gwa’? = o/né™% = da/‘hne’ ne” _—iho‘sod&/‘hi‘ = d&"’’se’ — ne”
suddenly now thence they two the his grandmother and the
were coming
de‘hiyade™hnon’ dia’ ne”’ O‘ha’a’, na’ye’ ne”’
two they brothers are the that it is the
donda‘hodiya‘hya’’githa’dye’. Ganyo’’ wi’hni’yo” tc” noi/we'
thence they stream crossing came. As soon as did they two arrive where the place
ni“‘he’s ne’ De‘haé“‘hiawa’’gii — o/né™ dizzy ene ni”
where he the now, So then, the the
walked that
about
wi hé"‘hén’, ‘Hot’ nonwa‘ho’’dé”’ nwe’sniye’ ai’ tea”
did he say, “What thing kind of so did you two do where
wi’disniya’‘hya’k?”
did you two stream it cross?”
T‘ho”“ge’ o’né* ne” ho‘so’d& wa’a’‘hén’, ‘“Na’ye’ hi’yi’ ne”
Then now the his grandmother did she say, “That it is in fact the
dedjiyadé™ hnon’ dai’ na’ye’ wi’has’ko’k, ne’’t‘ho‘
two you brothers are that it is did he the bridge the there
(=thy brother) to float, come
wa’diyagniya’‘hya’k.”’
did he-I stream cross
Na’ye’ di’ ne” o/né™ dagai‘ewitgé’’’nha’ o’né* ogonda’dye’
That it is nee the now thence it-light orb came out now at once
en
wa’ wadai‘ha’’da’ ne” tea” o“hwéndjiya’de’. T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’’ O'ha’ii’
did it-it to be hot, cause the where it—earth extant is. At that time the
o/né™ de‘ho’nowaya’/‘hé™s dé’’se’ wi’hé’‘hén’, ‘ Ayo‘snowé?’’nha‘
now his back boils (=he and did he say, “Should it in haste
is in a great hurry)
ne” dofsedniya’‘hya#’k. Dyéfi'‘hi’ewas’? S*yofinis’he’ t*hd’né™
the hence again thou—I If it so be will it long time be here this
stream should cross.
édne’’sek hiya’’ t‘haednigwe’nya’ dofisedniya’‘hya’k.”’
will thou—I be not any thou—I would be able hence again than—I stream
could corss.”’
Dayonda’dy#’ ne” ho‘so’d a! wi/a"‘hén’, ‘Hao®’‘hwa’ gwa”’
Thence she spoke the his grandmother did she say, “He himself
o/ ‘ni’ &t‘hénno™ ‘do’ ne”’ hono™sa’yé™ tea” niger’
also will he forethink (=he the he lodge owns where so it dis-
will will it) tant (is)
HEWITT ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 697
tchongyat’ga’k. O’né™ hi’ya’ t‘ho’né™ ongni’yo™.”’ T‘ho’‘ge
will again he-us Now in fact here this (=in thou-I are visitors.” At that time
two dismiss. this place
oné™ ne” Dethaé“hiawa’’gii wi’ hé’‘hén’, “ E"gekhoni’/nya’
now the did he say, “Will I food prepare
hiya’e’ dé"’’se’ o’né™ o‘hya’if ne” agyént’‘hwi‘, @*dwadekhon’nya’
first in and now it-fruit ripe the have I-it planted, will we (together)-it eat
order (is)
di” ~~ hiya’e’. Ganyo” @yongwa‘da’’nha’ t‘ho’‘gef — one"
then first in As soon as will we be filled then now
order.
dé"dwadawén’nye’, na’ye’ ne’? ®dwakdof/nyo™ ne’’ ted’ ni’yo™
will we stroll about, that itis the will we (them) examine the where so many
it numbers
ga‘hwa’ ne” ’a’‘se’ ne” t‘ho’né™ o™hwéndjiya’de’.”’
it contains the it new (is) the here this it-earth extant is.’’
Tho’‘gef o’né™% = hwa’ha’gwa’ ne’ oné"’‘ha’— dé"”’se’— on &™
Then now thence he-it got the it-maize and now
wa hade’djiyé“hén’dé”. Na’ye’ ne’? wé™sigai’’wii ne’ o/né"
did he-it roast. That it is the its odor appetizing (is) the now
wi’o'dal‘hé‘ha’ dé”’se’ o’né™ wa’o‘hnaya‘hé'’‘ha’. O/ne™ ne”
it became hot and now its fatness exuded. Now the
ho‘so’daé so wa’a/hén’, = “’&‘sat‘hon’dat-khé"’ = ne” sei’ dai‘ha‘
his grand- did she say, “Wouldst thou—it listen the one it only
mother to, would you,
agné™hoda’gwa’ ne’”’ ogonda’dye’ ni’’a‘ agadekhon’nya’?” O’/ne™
might I-grain of corn the at once I would I-it eat?” Now
pluck off
ne” De‘haé“hiawa’’gif da‘hai‘hwa’si’gwa’ wa’he®‘hén’, ‘Hiya’
the thence he (the) question took did he say, “Not
up (=replied)
na’’ de’oi‘hwa’’ge! ne’ ne’’t‘ho’ nayawé’‘ha’. Sénnof’’s' tei’
the any it-matter on (is) the thethere, thus so it should come to Do thou wait. where
that rulable * pass.
nigé’’ @"ga’ik, tiho’‘ge’ o’/né™ 6"dwagwe’gik &@dwadekhon’/nya’.
so far it is eh icooe then now will we be together will we eat together.
Dwagwe’gi‘, se’’, s‘ha’dedwaya’dagwénni’yo’.”
We yhals, entire equally we-it have possession of.’’
Dayonda’dya’ ne” gokstén’’a° wa’a‘hén’, ‘Tchi-gai‘hwa’’a‘ ne”’
Thence she spoke the she, the Elderone, did she say, “The least ey small the
is
ogo™sé?’'da’ a‘sgadwénde”“dé"?”” Wa’ he hén‘ne” De‘haé“hiawa’’ei‘,
it-nib of ear of shouldst thou-it spare?”’ Did he say the
corn
“Hiya”, se’’, de’oi‘hwa’’ ges ne’’t‘ho‘ nayawe"’‘hd’.”’
“Not, of course, any it-matter (is) on the there, thus, so should it come to ~*
the rule 5 pass.”
Dayei‘hwia‘he’gwi’ wa’a/‘hén’, “A‘sat‘hon’dat di’’-khé" ne”
Thence she it-matter did she say, “ Wouldst thou-it, then—would you the
pressed, listen to
hofsayagni’‘hwa’ ostwi‘ha’ ne” o/né™ @ea/ik?” Dathada’dya’
hence Benlwe Exe ittake itsmall very (is) the now will it be cooked?” Thence he spoke
ome
wihe’‘hén’, ‘Hiya’ hi’ya’ de’oi‘hwa’’ge‘ ne’ ne’’t‘ho‘
did he say, “Not in fact any it rule-on is the the there
nayawe’‘ha’. Tgagon’da’, se’ dwagwe’gik ne” ted” dédwa’dont;
so should it come to It needs be of will we be together the where will we eat to-
pass, course gether
19078°—28——45
698 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN, 43
na’ye’ gai‘hoinya”‘hé’ ne” ne’’t‘ho’ n@yawé"’ha’ = swa’djik
that it is it-it-matter causes the the there so will it come to pass much too
(=because)
hi'yi’? gagwe’gi‘, se” s‘ha’dedwayé’dagwéini/yo’. Ne’’t‘ho’ di”
of course it-entire (is), of equally we possess it. The there then
course,
né"yo’ ‘dil ne”’ t‘ho’ne™ o“hwéndjiya’’ge‘, gagwe’ oi
so will it be the here this it earth-on, it entire (is)
s‘ha’d@"yeya’digwénni’yoks.”’
equally will one possess (them) severally.”’
Tho’‘ge' o’né™ ne’’ gokstéf’’&! wa’a/hén’, “Nigé™’‘hér’
Then now the she elder one did she say, “So it excessive is
oi‘hwane‘hi’gwat hi’ya’ sano"s’de’,” dé”’’se’ o’né™ hwa’o™dén/dya?
it-matter amazing (is) itisso thou-it ae spar- and now thither did she walk
ing of,”’
dé"’’se’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’dyeda’’nh&’ ne’’ ted’’ odek’ha’, ne’’t‘ho,
and the there did she stand take the where it is burning, the there
nhwa’’é"’. O/né™ hiya’ odjisdak’da’ wa’dyedi’ nha’ dé’’se’
thither she went. Now it is so it-fire beside did she take her stand and
o/né™ wa’dyoh’nyoga/‘egwad’ ne’’ o’gé"‘hai’ dé®’’se’ ne’’t‘ho!
now did she handful take up the it ashes and the there
wr)
hw4’ago’di’ ne’’ tc&’’ hode’djiyéfi’‘hé"’. Na’ye’ ne’’ toa’’
thither did the where he it is roasting. That itis the where
she it cast
niyo‘sno’we’ ne’’t‘ho‘ hwa’ago’di’ dé®’’se’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’ga‘ha/’nha’
so it rapid is the there nea she- and the there did it fall
ne o’gé""hai’ o’né™ hi’y4’ wa’wénnihé"’ ne tea!’
the it-ashes now it is so did it cease the where
wé™sigd’’ wif dé™’’se’ oni’ tedi’’ o‘hnaya‘hé"’i‘hnd’, o/né™
it odor pleasant and also where its-fat did flow down, now
oni’ wi’a"‘hén’, “On’gwe'-khé"™ gén’ewa’ 6"yago’nigon‘hi’yok?
also did she say, “Human beings only (ones) will their minds contented be?
are (they)
Hiyi’’ ni’’a‘ de’d’do™ awak’nigon‘hiyos’da’?”
Not I any it pos- could it-my mind content?”
humble sible is
O’né™ ne’’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hé"’‘hén’, “Hiya’’ de’oya’ne’
Now the did he say, “Not any it good (is
tea’’ nwa’sye’i’. Wa’s‘hetgé"’‘da’ ne’’ ayago’nigon‘hiyosda’‘gwi’
where so didst thou Didst thou it spoil the should it-their-mind content thereby
it do.
’) ~ o”
ne’’ t‘ho’né™ o™hwéndjiya’’geo é"yenagé’nyonk ne’’ of’gwe'.
the here this it-earth-on will they as tribes the human
dwell severally beings.”
Ne’? o/né™ =wa’ga’ik t‘ho’‘gef o’né™ ~=wa’hofidekhofi’ny3’
The now did it cook then now did they good make (eat food)
hadigwe’gi‘. Ganyo’’ wa’hadikhwénda’ nha’ o/né™ ne”’
they As soon as did they food finish with now the
De‘haé™hiawi’ gi‘ wi her ‘hén’, “O'née’! hé"dwayageé”’’nha’
did he say, “Now hence will we go out.
(of doors)
dé"”’se’ na’ye’ 6*dwadyeé"’‘da’ é"dwa"‘hyak ne’’ t{ho’né™ gwa’’t‘ho‘
and that it is willit first be will we fruit eat the here this just here
(this)
7)
‘)
o‘honidd’da’.”’
it-bush stands.”
HEWITT ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 699
T‘ho’‘gef o’né™ wa’hadiyagé”’ nha’. Ne’’t‘ho’ dosgé?’‘ha‘
Then now did they go out (of doors). The there near very
wi’hadi’gé"’ o‘hondd’da&’ na’ye’ ne’’ od&‘hyon’ni’ owinonwe"’’da’
did they-it see it-bush stands that the it-fruit self it-sugar (sap substance)
has made
ostwi‘ha‘, diyos‘hesdodon/nyo”’ ni’yo‘t. O’née™ ne’’
it little (is), just it drops of sweetness so it is. Now the
bears (all over)
De‘haé™hiaw’a’gi’ wa’hé"’‘hén’, “Néngé™’ ha‘ ¢i/‘he’ swa‘hyon’nai’
did he say, “This itis it-tree again it-fruit large
stands (is) (apple)
gaya’ dji‘. Sgada’‘s‘ho"’ 6"dwaniyonda’gwai’ na’ye’ —o/né™
it is called. One apiece will we it pluck ; that it is now
é"dwa’/‘hyak.” *
will we fruit eat.”’
O'né™ = hi’y&’ wa’hadiniyonda’gwi’ dé ’se’ o/né™ wa’hon‘-
Now in fact did they (them) pluck and now did they fruit eat.
hyak (?wa’hof’‘hyak). O’né™ ne’’ gokstéfi’’a’ wa’a/‘hén’,
Now the she elder one did she say,
“ASat‘hon’dat—khé"”* ’4’‘so™ ofisagniyonda’gwi’ na’ye’ ne’’
“Wouldst thou it listen— still more should again I-one pluck that it is the
wouldst thou
hofsayagni’‘hwa’?”” T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hé™ ‘hén’,
hence again we two it At that time the did he say,
take back?”’
“Miya’’ hi’ya’ de’oi‘hwa’’ge’ ted’’ ne’’t‘ho’ nayawé"’‘ha’ ted’’
“Not in fact any it-matter where the here soit should happen where
(rule) (is)
nigé’’ a/o™hwa’ &"wa’sé"’ nha’, t‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ hiya’ star’
so it dis- it itself will it drop off, at that time now not anything
tant is
de’odyé’é™ ne’”’ d陓se‘gwi’. Ne’’t‘ho’ o’’ n&’’ ni’yo‘t ne’’
any it is done the wilt thou it The there too the so it is the
take up. that
gofidi’yo’, . ne’’t‘ho’ ni’gé™ o/né™ ha’‘si’? dé 2gondi’‘ewa’.”
they (zoic.) the there so it far is now then but shall they it take up.”
game animals (are), not before
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne’’ gokstén’’’‘ dofsayontga‘hadé’ni’, na’ye’ ne”
Then the she elder one thence again she herself that it is the
Inert Earth turned around,
hofisaye’yo"’ dé"’’se’ odjisdak’di’ =wa’dyo’nyoga’‘gwa’ ne’
hence again she and it-fire beside did she (a) handful the
entered indoors take up
o’gé™ ‘ha’, o’nyogaé™ha’wi’ dondayeyagé"’ nha’ dé"’’se’ ne’’t‘ho‘
it-ashes, she (the) handful went thence she came forth and the there
bearing
wi’ dyeda’ ’nha&’ ne’’ tcd’’ gii’‘he’ akdi’’h‘ ttho’‘ge’ o’/né™ ne’’
did she take her stand the where it-tree nearby then now the
stands
o’gé"“ha’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’agd’di’ ne’’ tea’’ odahyofi’ni‘, agwas’
it ashes the there did she (them) the where _ it-its fruit has made, very
cast
ewa’’ dawd‘sondé™” nha’ gwa’’ daga‘hé’’ nha’, gwa’’ tthigér’*
just thence did it-blackness fell just thence it full was, just there it is
(is plain)
wa’o’gé™ha’ nha’, t‘ho’‘geS o/né™ wi’a’/‘hén’, “Agwas’ sano"s’de’.
did it-ashes soil it, then now did she say, “Very much thou it prizest.
Na’ye’—khé™ gen’gwa’ é"yago’nigon‘hi’yo’khe’ ne’’ t‘ho’né"™
That it is—is it is Just will it -their mind (s)comfort the here this
700 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
o“hwéndjiya’de’ é"yenagé’nyonk. iva’ “nia “devo'do™
it-earth extant (is) will they dwell in Not I any it able is
different sites. humble
awak ’nigon‘hiyo’’khe’. Na’ye’ di’’ é"yondo™’‘hek ne’’ of’gwe‘
would it-my mind content. That itis then willthey saying keep the Hear
eing
ne’’ t‘ho’né™ é6"yendge’ek ne’’ t*hogé?’‘ha’ é*yont‘hd’ya’ ne’’
the here this will they con- the here it is will they it tell the
tinue to dwell about
o‘hyadji’wa’gé™, Hiya’ di’’ son’ga’ t‘hofisayes’di’ ne’’
it-fruit sour (is). Not then any one thence again one- the
it should use
on’gwe’ o/‘ni’ ne’’ gofdi’yd’.”’
human also the they game ani- ‘
being mals are.”’
T‘ho’‘ges o’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gi‘ di‘hada’dya‘ wai’hé™hén’’,
Then now the thence he spoke did he say,
“Ksoda‘ha’’, o’né™ hé?”’ ’on’’ swa’’djik w4&’sade’send’‘d3’
“Oh, my grand- now maybe, perhaps too much didst thou thy vigor put
mother, forth
wi’s‘hegaéfi’nya’ ne’ sadei’’tcha’. O’né™ di’ ‘on’, ne’’t‘hos
dist thou-them do the thy grand-children. Now then, perhaps, the there
damage to
gén’ewa’, o/né™ hiya’, ’on’’, tihayoyanén’’khe’ ne’’ gagwe’gi‘
only, now not, perhaps, would it-in good result, the it entire (=all)
A‘satgat’‘Shwa’ ted’ ni’yo™ o’né™ agyént’hwi' dé’se’ ne’”’
shouldst thou it see where so it many now have I (them) planted and the
gondi’yo’.”” Dayei‘hwa’sa’gwa’, wa’a’‘hén’, “O’né™, gwa’’ o/ni’
they game animals Thence she replied, did she say, “Now, just also
are.
dé"djiyagniya”‘hya’k. Na’ye’ di’ tedi’”’ né"yawé"’‘ha’. Na’ye’ ne”
shall one-I-stream cross again. That itis then where soit willcometopass. Thatitis the
wishé™ niwéfidige’’ o’né™ he’ dé"t’ge’. Tho’né™ di”
ten (itis) so many it days number now again hence will I come. Here this then (so)
né"yawen ‘ha’. Na’ye’ ne’ o/’né™ t‘ho’‘gef — gagwe’gi‘
so will it come to pass. That it is the now at that time _ it-entire (=all) is
é"wadeyénnénda’’nha’. Na’ye’ ne’”’ na’ye’ ne’”’ dé"dni’yén’; na’ye’
will it-itself adjust (=settle). Thatitis the thatitis the shall thou-I cast lots; that it is
di’ dé"dniyénda’‘ewi’ ne” t*ho’né™ ted’ niyodye’é™ ne’”’ ted”
so shall thou-Icastlotsforwhat the here this where so it-it has done the where
then (=all things)
o™hwéndjiya’de’. Dyén’‘ha’gwi’ 6"gon’ne’‘ha’ o’né™ gagwe’gis I”
it-earth extant is. Ifso it be will I-thee overcome now it-entire(=all)is I
dé"tgénno™ “do” ne’ tei” ni’yo™ o/né™ sayénnénda’’i‘.
will I-it rule, control the where so many they now thou hast completed
number (them).
Dyén'‘hi’gwa’ hi’ya’ ni’a‘ é"sgadé™ neha’ t‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™ hi’ya’
If so it be of course I humble wilt thou-me overcome then now of course
hiya’‘ ster” da’dofsagon’nigon‘ha’én’ ne”’ o‘héndo™
not anything any hence again I-the mind would vex the it ahead is
wi’ wendadenyon’dye’ tea’”’ nonwa‘ho’’dé™ sayo’da’dye’.”’
hence it-day(s) will come where thing kind of thou-it keep working at.””
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gii wa’hé?‘hén’, ‘“Ne’’t‘ho’ gwa
At that time the Life God did he say, “The there (thus) just
oni’ né"yawé?’‘hi’ ne” ted” nisd’nigon‘he’’dé™,”
also so shall it come to pass the where such as thy mind has expressed.”
Na’ye’ ne” tcd’’ nwa’ofnis’‘he’ de‘hni’yo™ na’ye’ ne’”’ n&”’
That it is the where so it lasted (=so long as) two they had that it is the the
entered that
y)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 701
ne” O‘ha’é’ de‘hoya’dowe‘da’‘hénk ne’ héf’gwe' ne” ’a’‘se’
the he-him kept studying the he human being the it new (is)
hodon‘he’di‘. T‘ho’‘geS o/né™ wi’hé"’‘hén’, “Hot’ nofwa‘ho’’dé”
he came to life. At that time now did he say, “What thing kind of
nisaye’é™ ne” ted’”’ (wa’)se‘sén’/nya’ néngé™’ ‘ha’ hén’gwe‘, swa’’djik’
so thou-it the where did thou-it make this it is he human too much (for)
worked being (is),
dé™ei'hé™ ayén’i’ hon‘hi’yo‘ dé"’’se’ ayén’a’ hoya’da‘hni’i‘ hi’ya’?”’
plainly one would his life fine (is) and one would his body strong (is) as you
suppose suppose know?”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’ei! di‘hawénnitgé"’ nha’ wa’ hér’‘hen’,
At that time the thence his voice came forth did he say,
“Odonni’’ié ne” ted’ o™hwéndjiya’de’ dé"’se’ ododi‘ha’dye’
“Tt infantile is the where it-earth extant (is) and it growing keeps on
dé"”’se’ o’s‘hasdé™si’yé™ na’ye’ ne’ wadéfinoda’‘gwa’. Ne’’t‘ho‘
and it power possesses that it is the it orenda puts forth by. The there
di” ni’yo‘t te’” ni’yon‘ odon’ni‘ odonni’’i‘ dé"’’se’ ofinadodi‘ha’dye’
so soitis where so many it itself has it infantile (is) and they growing keep on
then it numbers made
(=grown)
dé™se’ odi’s‘hasdé™sa’/yé™ na’ye’ ne’ gondéfinoda‘’gwa’ o’‘n’.
and they power possess that it is the they orenda put forth by also.
Ne’’t‘ho‘ 0” ni’yo‘t na” ne” gohdi’yd’, odofini’’a‘ dé"’”’se’ gofinon’‘he’
Thethere too soitis the the they are game it (=they) and they alive are
that animals infantile are
ofinadodi‘ha’dye’ dé®’’se’ —odi’s‘hasdé™sa’yé™ na’ye’ ne
they (anim.) growing keep and they (zoic) power have that it is the
gondénnoda’‘gwa’.
they (anim.) own orenda
put forth by.
Las
ny
Ne’’t‘ho’ di” ni’yo‘t ne’ diyodyeé™’‘di‘ ne’’ of’gwe‘ ne”
The there so then so it is the there it first was the human being the
t‘ho’né™ o™hwéndjiya’de’ deyagoda’’i' ne’’ ted’ agon’‘he’.
here this it-earth extant (is) one stops (on the way) the where one alive is.
Ne’’t‘ho’ ni’yo‘t agodonni’’s‘ dé™’se’ agododi‘ha’dye’ dé"’se’
The there so it is one infantile (is) and one growing keeps and
go’s‘hasdé™sa’yé® na’ye’ ne’’ yondéfinoda’‘gwa’.”’
one power possesses that itis the one orenda put forths by.”’
T‘ho’ge ne” O‘ha’a’? wa’h陑hén’, “O’né™ gwa’’ o/‘ni’
At that time the did he say, “Now just also
ohwigwe’gii &"g’nigon‘haiyénda’’nha’.”’” Ttho’‘gef o/né“ di”
it-matter entire (is) did I mind acquire (=understand).” At that time now then
he” da‘hawénnitgé’ nha nha’ wa’h陓hén’, “OMe di” hi’ya’
again, thence his word came forth did he say, “Now then of course
more,
be AG ,) ,
on’ hé"djiyagya‘dén’dya’ ne’ et‘hi‘so’da‘.””. Ttho’‘ge’ o0/né™
perhaps hence will one-I start the she our grandmother is.’ At that time now
(=return home)
hi’ya’ si‘hiya‘dén’dya’.
of course again they two departed.
Na’ye’ di’’ ne’’ o’/né™ hofsa‘hni’yo” ne’’ ganyadak’da’ o’né™
That it is then the now there again sey two the it-lake beside now
arrivec
ne” ni” hiya’ gat’ka’ de’swia‘sgo/‘hwi‘. O’né™ ne” gokstén’’a*
the the that not anywhere any yet it-bridge floats.” Now the she the elder one
wa’ a‘hén’, “Hot? nonwi‘ho’’dé™ né"djidniye’ ii’ ne”’
did she say, “What thing kind of will again we two do the
702 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
dé"djidniya’‘hya’k. O’né™ hi’ya’ hiya’’ gat’ka’ de’swi‘sgo’‘hwi‘?”
will again we two stream Now as you know not anywhere any yet it-bridge floats?”
across.
T‘ho’/‘ge’ ne’? Ocha’&’ o’né™ da‘hada’dya’ wa’ hé"’‘hén’, “O’né™,
Then the now thence he spoke did he say, “Now,
hiya’, wa’ ci‘he’k’ é"gat‘honyon’nya’. Gér’djik gwi’’t'tho‘
assuredly, it has arrived (=is time) will I-myself canoe make for. Soon very just here
’ 99
o/né™ hiya’ @®geyénnénda’’nha’.
now assuredly will I-it complete.”
O’né™ di” wa’ha‘sa’wé”, o’né™ wa’hat‘hofiyof’/nyd’. Na’ye’
Now so then did he-it begin, now did he-self canoe make for. That it is
ne” wa’dwakda’’a‘ o’né™ gagwe’gi’ wa’hayénnénda’’nha’, t‘ho’‘ge‘
the it a short while now it-entire (is) did he-it complete, then
o/né™ wa’hér’‘hén’, “Hau’’, o’né™, ksoda”‘ha‘, sadi’dak.”” T‘ho’‘ge‘
now did he say, “Come, now, oh, my do thou thyself Then
» grandmother, embark.”
o/né™ wa’ondi’dak ne”’ gokstén’’a*. O/né™ hi’ya’ dofsa‘hniya’‘hya’k.
now did she selfembark the she, the elder one. Now ofcourse hence again theyre stream
crossed,
Niyoi‘hwagwa’‘ha‘ — o’né™ honsa‘hni‘hoiwa’di’’nha’ tea”
Just it-matter short (is) now there again they two where
(=short while)
hagwa’ di‘ t‘hodino™sa’yé™. Ne” o’/né™ hofsa‘hni’/yo™
that side there they lodge possess. The now there again they two
entered
ne’”’ gano™sgofwad' o’né™ ne’ O‘ha’é’ wa’hé™’‘hén’,’ “Oné™
the it-lodge-in now the did he say, “Now
hi’y#’ sedni’yo™”. O/’nén‘ di’ @"ge‘séf’nya’ ha’tgayo’’dage‘.
as you again we two have Now then will Lit make the many it-game
know returned. animals number.
Ve.
Hiya’’ oé™ donsa‘heyat‘ho’yé™ ne” deyagyadé™hnon’dia’.”
Not now any again I-him do tell the two one-I brothers are
(=my brother).”’
T‘ho’‘ge! o/né™ wi’ t‘ho’nowaya‘hé"’‘ha’ wa’hoyo’dé"’‘ha’. Na’ye’
At that time now did his back voil (with his actions) did he-it work. That it is
ne”’ wi’hade’nyén’dé™ a‘haya’don’/nya’ ne”’ ga’yo’.
the did he it attempt would he its body make the it-game
animal,
Woa’hayénnénda’’nha’ tiho’‘ge’ o/né™ =o wa’hé?’‘hén’, =‘ Hau’’!
Did he-the task complete there at=then now did he say, “Come,
desda’’nha‘. Sa‘dén’dys‘. o/‘ni’.”” Na’ye’ ne” hiya’* de’s’do™
do thou stand up. Do thou walk also.” That it is the not any it able was
dagadi’’nha’. Gwa’’ t‘ha’wa’wadya’di’’se’k = wa’ wa‘dén’dyd’.
any it could stand. Just just did it-its own body drag along did it go.
Tho’ge’ ne” O‘ha’a’ wa’hé™’‘hén’, ‘“Agwas’, én’, ’on”’,
There-at =then the did he say, “Very much, I think, perhaps,
wi’t‘hagyeéi’nyo” ne” De‘haé™hiawaé’’gi‘. ’a&’‘so™ o’ya’
did he-me, confound by craft the Still it other
~) 19093)
é"ge‘sén/nya’.
will I-it make.”
T‘ho’ge’ o/né™ he” sa&‘ha‘séfi’nyd’? dé ’’se’ ne’ o’né™
Then now again again he it-made and the now
wivhayénnénda’ nha’ o/né™ he” wa’hér‘hén’, “Hau’’, desda’’nhas
did he (the) task complete now again did he say, “Come, dothou arise, stand
dé"’’se’ si‘dén/’dya‘.” O/né™ hé’”’ hiya’ de’s’do™ dagada’’nha’.
and do thou walk.” Now again not any it able was it
”)
Na’ye’ ne” gén’ewd’ wa’wadya’di’’se’k ted’? wa’wa‘dén’dya’.
That it is the only did it-its body drag where did it move.
OE aE eee
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 703
a e S » a, ‘ °
O/né™ di” wa’h陑hén’, “Diyogon’do™ o’né™ ne’’t‘ho’ né"yo’’ dik
Now then did he say, “Tt shall be now the there, thus so will it be
ne” @gya’don’nya’. Dyén’‘ha’gwi? = &"yotga’dé"’‘ha’ ne”’
the will I-its body make. If it so be will they become many the
o™hwéndjiya’’ge* awe’ha’dye‘ ne”’ awé?”’geo = hé"goii’ne’
it-earth on t matters not the water-in hence, will they
(zoic) go
dé"gondiya’‘hya’k ne’’t‘ho‘ hé"gondi’/yo™ tea” = non’ wes
will they (zoic) stream cross the there there will they (zoic) where the place
arrive
t‘hot‘hwe’‘no’ ne” deyagyadé™hnon’ daa’. E"gade’nyén’dé”
there his on island the two one-I brothers are=my brother. Will I-it attempt
oats
gwi”’ o/ fn’ ne”’ tgagon’di’ dé"gondi’nigon‘ha’én’
just also the it must needs be will they (zoic) mind vex
heyotgonda’‘gwi'.’
hence it (is) without stop.’’
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ da‘ha‘sa’wé™ wa’hayaé’donnia’‘hén’. Agwas’
At that time now thence he-it began did he-(their) bodies make severally. Very
ted’”’ ni‘ha‘sno’we’ né"’* ha’gwa‘ he‘ho’dye’s, na’ye’ ne’ hi’de’yo™
where so he is swift this way there he-it cast thatitis the the every it
severally, numbers
nigondiya’do’’dé"’s, Niyoi‘hwagwa’‘haS o/né™ ~— onnatea’’de’.
so their (zoic) bodies, kind So it-matter short (is) now they many were.
of were)
T‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™ o’ya’, ’o"‘gé™ heyo‘he’ o’né™ ofinadeyd’dat’gi’s,
At that time now itother(is), inturn itextreme (is) now they (zoic) monstrous are,
na’ye’ ’o"‘gé" wa’hayad’dofnya‘’hén’ ha’tgondiyo’’dage‘.
that it is in turn did he-its-body make several the seveNY they (zoic) number.
Ganyo” o/né™ wéa/ofinatga’d陑ha#’ o/né™ wa’hé?‘hén’,
As soon as now did they numerous become now did he say,
“Néngé™ ‘ha’ tei” ni’yo™ wa’ewaya’dis’’i’ na’ye’ wa’gwai’‘ho™,
“This it is where so eel did I-your body complete thatitis do I-you commission
it is you,
dyén’hi’hwi’ @6"swagwe’nya’ ne’ dé"swaya’‘hya’k ne’’t‘ho*
ifso it be will you-it be able to do the will you (the) stream cross the there
nhé®’‘swe’ sigé™’ ha‘ tga‘hwe’‘no’. Ne’’t‘ho‘ non’ we‘
thither will you go yonder it is there it-island floats. The there the place
tgakhwana’gee’. Ha’de’yo™ odon’ni‘ dé™’se’ gana’gee’ ne’”’
there it-food abundant (is). Theevery one it it grows and it-abundant (is) the
numbers
ga’yo’, on’gwet oni’, awe’ha’dye‘ ne’”’ gagwe’gi’ 6"swa’’d’ tea”
it-game human also it matters nothing the it-entire will you-it where
animal(s), beings devour
ni’yo™ ne’’t‘ho’ é6"swatchén’ni’.’
so many it the there will you (it) find.’
numbers
vas
T‘ho’‘gef o/né™ wa’tgondawén’nye’ ne’’ gofdi‘se’‘hé™. Na’ye
At that time now did they (zoic) stroll about the they (zoic) ill-tem- That it (is)
?
pered are.
di” ne” d’dyi’k wa’gofide’s’ko’k, d’dya’k wa’tgofidiya’‘hya4’k
the some did they (zoic) them- some did they (zoic) stream cross
‘tien selves swim,
én’ ha’gwa ne’’t‘ho’ wa’goni‘sd’gwi’. T*ho’‘ge’ o’né™ ne’”’
farther side the there did they (zoic) go ashore. At that time now the
De‘ha陓hiawa’’gif wa’hatdd’gd’ dé"’’se’ o’né™ = wa’hé™’‘hén’,
did he it become and now did he say,
aware of
704 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
. : v
“Hiyd’’ hee’ of’ d’ayoyanéi’’khe’ ne’’ dagofidiyes’da’
“Not (itis) I believe perhaps any would it result in good the there they (zoic)
themselves commingle
ne’? gondi’yo’. Na’ye’ di’, ’ofi’‘, oya’ne’ dé™skheya‘hya’’kdi’
the they (zoic) That it is so perhaps it good (is) will I-them (anthrop.) stream to
game animals are then, recross canoe
gagwe’gi‘,” dé™’se’ o’né™ di’ sa&‘hadd’ya’, o/né™ hi/yd’
it-entire (=all),” and now so then Poor ue (them) now of course
rove,
gagwe’gi’ dofsagofdiya’‘hya’k. Ne’’t‘ho’ o” na’ye’ nhwa’”’he’,
it-entire (=all) hence back they, (2oie) stream The there too thatitis thither did he go,
crossed.
na’ye’ ne”’ o/né™ hofisagona‘sdgwii’ t‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™
that it is the now there again they (zoic) then now
went ashore
x
wia’s‘hagodd’ya’ ne’ tea” ni’yo™ wa’ha’gé™ ne’’t‘ho’ gof/ne’s,
did he-them drive the where so they did he-them see the there they (zoic)
(in) many number went about,
o/dyi’k gofidiya’di’’se’s, gagwe’gi‘ ne’‘t‘ho’ wi’s‘hagodoyi’’dix’
some they (zoic) bodies it entire (=all) the there did he-them drive towards
dragged about,
ted’ nof’we! diyononda’‘héa’ ne’ tea’ diyo‘sa’de’ ted’’ non’we'
when the place thereit-mountainstands the where thereit-caveis where the place
godi‘nhodo"’‘kgwa’ ne’”’ O‘ha’é’ s‘hago‘nhodo™’ ‘gwa’ ne’’ gofidi’yo’.
they (zoic) had been the he-them to enclose uses it the they game ani-
enclosed mals are.
Ne’’t‘ho’ néngé"’ ‘ha’ wa’s‘hagodiya’dinyo"’da’ gagwe’gi‘. O’né™
The there this it is did he-their bodies to enter cause it-entire (=all). Now
ttho’‘ge’ —ne’’t‘ho’ ~—he’‘tgé™ = donda‘hanénya/‘hén’ = dé"”’se’
then the there on the top there did he-a rock place and
wi’hé"’‘hén’, “One® I” ’o‘oé™ sakhe‘nhd’do™” ne” tei”
did he say, “Now t in turn again I-them (anthrop.) the where
shut up
ni’yo™ haya’dis’#i‘ ne’ O‘ha’a’. Do’, gwa” &"k’ di” na”
so many he their bodies has the Winter God. What, just it will so the
they are finished be then that
é“hagwe’nyé’ gagwe’gi‘ &"s‘haya’dit’gé"k, dd’, gwi’”’ &"k’ o/‘ni’
willheit beabletodo _ it-entire (is) will again he its body what, just it en also
e
陓hano™hwe’’nhi’ ne’? o’né™ é™hatdd’gd’ ted” godi‘nhd’do”
will he it-wish to do the now will he-it be aware of where they (zoic) shut
(=when) in, are
gagwe’ol'.”’
it-entire (=all) is.””
T‘ho’‘gef o/né™ ne’ De‘haé™hiaw’’’gif wa’hé’‘hén’, “O’/né™
At that time now the Life God did he say, “Now
ew” oni’ § dé"sgya’/‘hya’k,”’ dé™’se’ o’né™ =sd‘ha‘dén’dyd’.
just also will I stream re-cross,” and now he went back home.
Ganyo”’ hofs&‘ha’yo™ tca’’ nofi’we' t‘hodaisewa’ ‘hid’ t*ho’‘ge‘
Assoonas there again he arrived where the place there he himself bark- then
cabin has raised
o/né™ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Hiya’* hé®’, ofS de’oya’ne’ ted’ ni’yo‘t
now did he say, “Not I think ppt any it good is where soit is
aps,
néengé’’ ‘ha’ ageyénnéfida’’ié ne” of’gwe'. Agwas’ ne’’t‘ho‘
this it is have I-its faculty com- the human being. Verily the there
pleted
ew
ni’yo't ne” ayén’a’ gwa”’ thiyodéndon’ni‘ ne”’ tea” dehodawén’nye’;
as itis the one may just just it lonely is the where he strolls about;
think,
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 705
ayén’a’ gwa’”’ t*hithada’’ne’s ne’”’ tcd’’ de‘hodawén’nye’. Na’ye’
one may just there just he stands the where he strolls about. That it is
think (and) goes
di” on’, é"yoyanén’khe’ ne’’ ’&/‘so™ sga’di‘ o’ya’ &"sge‘sén/nya’
then, _per- will it-good become the still one-it it other will again L-it
haps, (other) stands
,?
ne’ on’gwe‘, na’ye’ di’ dé"yogo"’dak.”
the human being, that it is so will they two be mated
then complementarily.”’
T‘ho’‘geé o’né% wéa’ha’‘séf’nyd’. Na’ye’ 0” na’ye’ ne
At that time now did he it make. That it is too that it is the
o‘he’‘da’ na’ye’ hi’yaé’ wa’ha‘stnnya’*da’ ne’ oyeé™’’da’. Na’ye’
it-earth thatitis of course did he it to make use the it-flesh. That it is
D
ne’? o/né™ wa’hayénnénda’’nha’ o/né wa’hé‘hén’, “Na’ye’
the now did he it finish now did he say, “That it is,
on’’, @yoyanéi’k’he’ na’ye’ ne’ s‘ha’d®gye’i’. Na’ye’ 0”
perhaps, will it good become that it is the alike will I-them That it is too
two, do to.
na’ye’*ne’’t‘ho’ n@yo’dik tei’? ne’? Ni” ni’yo‘t agadoya’/‘hénk
that it is the there so will it wherein the I so it is Tam in action
continue to be
(Pagadoya'’hén’). T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ di‘haad’/ewa’ ne
(I have made motions). There at, then now thence he-it the
took from
hodon‘he’‘sia’ dé"’’se’ ne’’t‘ho‘ wa’hon’dak ne’ eya’digon’wa'
his own life and the there did he-it put in the her body in
ne ha’‘s&’ ho‘sén’ni‘, o’ni’ ne” ho’nigof‘da’‘sia’ nai’ye’
the not long before he-it has des also the his mind that it is
onl’ =da‘haa’gwa’ na’ye’ wi’hon’dak ne’ gono”’ wagofi’/wi'
also thence he-it that (it is) did he-it put in the her (anthrop.) head in
took from
ne’ ha’‘s&’ s‘hagoya’donf’ni‘, o’‘ni’ ne’ hotkwé’‘sd’ na’ye’
the not long he-her body has made, also the his blood that it is
before
,)
0” da‘hai’gwa’ dé’’se’ ne’’t‘ho! wa’hon’daik ne’”’ eyeé’ digon’wi‘
too thence he-it and the there did he it put in the her body in
took from
y)
ne”’ ha’/‘si’ s‘hagoya’don/ni‘. T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne tea
the not long before he-her body has re Then, at that time the where
de‘hotga‘doinyo™‘hwif dé"’’se’ ne’ ted’? hadadya’’t'ha’ na’ye’
he was looking about and the where his power of speech, that it is
dedjiya’é" da‘haa’gwa’ dé"’’se’ ne’‘t‘ho‘ wa hon’dak
they two thence he-them and the there did he-it put in
(=both) took from
gono” wagon’wa ne’ tea’ gono™ waén’da’. T‘ho’‘geS o0/né"™
her head in the where her head is attached. Then now
wi’ hadonwi‘sén’dak eya’dagon’wa’. O/’née™ di”’ hi'y’
did he his breath insert her body in. Now so then of course
wiondon’‘het. Wa’hé’‘héf’ ne” De‘ha陓hiawai’’gi‘, ‘Hate’kwi‘!
did she alive become. Did he say the “Behold!
desda’’nha‘ ne’”’ tea’ o™hwéndjiya’de’.” Ganyo’’ wa’diyeda’’nha’
do thou stand up the where it-earth extant is.’’ As soon as did she stand up
o’né™ wi’ hée‘hén’, 7 Hs wa’gonya’dis’’a’. aa on’
now did he say, aod did I-thy body complete. I also
ageyénnénda’’i‘ ted’ ni’yo™ ga/‘hwa’ ne’’ ted’’ o™“hwéndjiya’de’
l-its organism where so many it it-it the where it-earth extant is
completed numbers contains
ne’ tei’ non’weo wa’teda’’nhda’ ne” ’o®’‘gé’. O/née™ di”
the where the place dost thou stand the to-day. Now so
7)
ae
9
a”)
n/)
sr)
706 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
wa’gel‘hwis’’A’ na’ye’ ne’’ gagwe’gi‘ Is’ wa’gonya’dagwéfiniyos’da’
do I-it-rule thatitis the it-entire (is) thou do I-the ruler over it, make
complete
ne”’ t‘ho’/né™.”’ T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’/né™ hofisa‘ho’‘hno"k ne”’
the here this.” At that time now thence again he-him called the
diyodyeé’‘di‘ hoya’dis’’a’i‘.
it first is he his body completed.
Na’ye’ ne” one ne’ttho® satha’yo” ttho“ge’ ne”
That it is the now there again he arrived then the
De‘haé“hiawa’’eif = wa’hé@’‘hén’, “One wa’geyénnéfida’’nhi’.
did he say, “Now l-its organization
have completed.
Dedjiya’e hi’ya’ 1 wa’gniya’dis’’a’. O’ne™ di”
Both as you know, I did I-your (two) bodies complete. Now so then
wa’enii‘hwis’’a‘s na’ye’ ne’? dé"djyadine’gé”. Is’ di’ ne”
do I-you two-a rule make that it is the shall you two marry, i. e., Thou so the the
join together side by side.
diyodyeé’ ‘dif gonya’dis’’a’if @yogénis’dik ne’ &s‘hwis’‘hek.
it first is I-thy body finished shall it be manifest the shalt thou strong be.
list, hi’ya’, oni’, dé“sadawén’nyek — diyot’gont ne”’
Thou, as you know, also, shalt thou keep traveling constantly the
teai’’ o™hwéndjiya’de’. Is’ o/’ni’ saé@“hyagé’‘sid’ 8” o&"k
where it-earth extant is. Thou also thy hard toil shall it be
ne”’ skén/no” dedjiya’é" é"djyénno™ donnyo™ ‘hek
the peaceful both shall you two be in your thoughts
ne”’ wa’dedjyadine’gé™’. a ‘owl' di’”’ hwén’do™
the you two have married. Do not so then. Ever
’a‘s‘he’nigon‘hia‘hetgé™’‘dé”.””
shouldst thou—her mind hurt.”
O’ne™ tiho’‘ge’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Is’ ’o%‘oé’ wa’goni‘hwis’’s‘s
Now then did he say, “Thou in turn do I-thee-a rule
make for
ne” ha‘’sa’ wéa’gonya’dis’’&’ (wa’gofiya’dis’’&’). Is’ di”
the recent did I-thy body complete Thou so then
wa’gonihwage‘hén’‘has. Oi‘hwagwe’gi‘ Is’ sa陓hiagé"’ ‘sid’ eek
do I-thee-duties charge with. It matter entire (is) thy thy hard toil shall it be
ne”’ é“haonwi‘sé‘hni’ik ne”’ wa’dedjyadiine’gé™. Na’ye’
the shall his breathing strong be the did you two marry. (=the one That it is
you married).
ewa’’t‘ho’ Is’ o/‘ni’ e™satgat’‘hwa’ ne’”’ ted” nigaé™hiagé™se’’dé™
just there, next thou also shalt thou it see the where such it-hard suffering
kind of (is)
ne’ @ wadon’nyd ne” of’gwe' ne” tea’ sya’da’de’. O’né™*
the shall it-itself make the human being the where thy body is. Now
di” oihwigwe’gi‘ Is’ wa’goni‘hwage‘hén’‘hds. Is’ hi’ya’ di”
sothen it-matter entire (is) thou do I charge thee with these duties. Thou, verily, so then
”?
dé“sadedjyé“hada’‘sek ne’ skéfi’no™ &™héfino™donnyo"’ ‘hek
shalt-thou-fire continue to go about the peaceful shall his thoughts continue to be
ne’ d陓sniye’nd’ ne’’ ted” nofiwa‘ho’’dé’ wa’gnii‘hwis’’a‘s.
the shall you two aid the where thing kind of I—you two charge
(each other) with duties.
Ne’’t‘ho’ @wadof’/nyd’ ne” on’gwe’ ne” tei” sniyad’da’de’.
There (it is) will it-itself make the human being the where your two bodies are-
Na’ye’ ne” déyo™hwéndjiyo‘ga’‘da’ ne” tei” Syonna’ iat
That it is the will they earth overspread the where will they dwell
ne’ = on’gwe‘. O’/né™ di” wéa’gnii‘hwis’’4‘s na’ye’ ne”
the human being(s). Now so then have I-you two rules, that it is the
finished for
|
|
U
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 707
wa’gié“hni‘sa‘di‘ha’’dé”’, na’ye’ di’ wadyed’da’‘ewa’ ted”
have I-you two-the days unequal that it is so then will it-itself-do by it where
(in number) made for,
“tl
nidjiyé™hni'sé‘yé™. Na’ye’ ne’’ heyotgonda’‘ewi‘ tea
so Many you two days have. That it is the thither it (=i.e., ceaselessly) where
goes direct
wa’ dedjyadiine’gé”’. Na’ye’ di” o/n®* ~~ wi’tgyes’d’ ne”
have you two married. That it is so then now have I-it mixed the
together
sni’nigon’ ‘ha’ dé"’’se’ o’‘ni’ ne’’ snitkwé?’‘si’. Na’ye’ di’ ne
your two mind(s) and also the your two blood (s). That itis sothen the
djiyatgdt’‘hwa’ ne” of’gwe' @"wadon’nya’ ne” ted”
shall you two it see the human being will it-itself make the where
(=grow)
de‘sniyi’dd’gé™. Na’ye’ dé"yonna‘sonda’‘ewik ne” gi’nigon’‘hi’
your two bodies between. That it is shall they be kept united by the it-mind
4)
dé”’se’ o’‘ni’ ne’”’ snitkwé’‘si’. Na’ye’ di’ wi’gnii‘hwis’’a‘s
and also the your two blood(s). That itis so then have I-you two rules
finished for,
sgi’nigon‘ha’da‘ eV eG" ne’ heyotgonda’‘ewi'. 8 ‘owi'
single it-mind (be) shall it be the henceforth ceaselessly. Do not
dé"djyat’nigon‘ha‘hetgé’‘dé” ne’’ nidjiy陓hni‘si’ge‘. Na’ye’ di”
shall you two your mind(s) vex the so you two days many have That it is so
in munber. then
hi’yd’ gén’ewa’ dé"dji‘snikha’‘sya’ ne’ Gé"™he’yo™ ne’ ted”
of course only shall it-you two separate the Death the where
na’dedjyé™hni‘sidi’‘hé™.
as much as your two days differ
n/é
)
?
in number.
Ne’‘t‘ho’ di” né*yo’dik ne’ o‘hén’do™ ha&’gwi' tei”
The there so then so will it he the ahead towards where
(=thus)
we’sni‘hwadjiida’dye’, na’ye’ ne’ hé"yondodia’‘sek — 0/‘ni’
hence your (two) uterine family that it is the shall they keep arriving also
persists, at adult age
dé"yondineg陑hik hé"yontgonda’‘ewik, na’ye’ ne’ sea’dit
shall they keep marrying shall it go on unceasingly, that it is the one it is
gén’ewa’ dé"yondiine’gé™ ne’’ o’/né™ é"yondodia’ga’. Gé™he‘yo™
only shall one marry the now will one grow to adult Death
(when) age.
gén’ewd’ dé"djyagokha‘syo™ ‘sek. Ne’’t‘ho’ di’ — nigagas’de’
alone, only, shall it-them, keep separating. The there sothen so it endures (long)
ne”’ wi gei‘hwis’’a’ ne”’ tea”’ nigai‘hwagas’de’ tex”?
the do I-rule(s) make the where so it-matter endures where
o™hwéndjiya’de’. Na’ye’ &"yodyei’di/ewik.” Ttho’‘ge’ o’né™,
it-earth extant is, That it is shall it-itself keep guiding.” At that time now
wi'hé‘hén’, “O'né™ oi‘hwagwe’gi’ wa'geyéhinénda’’nha’.”’
did he say, “Now it matter intire (is) have L-its organization finished.”
Na’ye’ di” ted” nwad’awé?‘ha’ ne’? o’né™ ne” O*tha’a’
That itis sothen where so it came to pass the now the
wi’ hatdd’ed’ ne”’ hiya’‘ gated’ de’sgon’ne’s ne”
did he-it become the not anywhere any again they the
aware of (zoic) go about
haya’dis’’i‘ho™ ne”’ gayo’dat’gi’s. T‘ho'‘ge‘ o’né™
he-their (zoic) bodies the it-game animals ugly. At that time none
finished severally
wihaya’di’‘sak. Gagwe’giS t‘honda‘he’‘da’ tea” niga‘hwe’‘na’.
did he their bodies seek. It-entire (place) thence did he walk over where so it-island.large (is)
Hiya’. sté°” de’ha’gé™,
Not anything any he it sees.
708 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Tho’‘ge’ o/né™ wa’hé?‘hén’, ‘“EH"gekdo™‘hnd’ t‘hogé’‘ha,
At that time now did he say, “Will Lit, to view, go that it is
ne”’ 0’ ya’ ted‘hwe’‘no’. Doga’’t, se”’, formant ne’’t‘ho‘
the itother there it-island floats. Probably, indeed, in turn, the there
hegofi’ne’s.”’ O’né™ hi’y#? = wiWha‘dén’dya’ na’ye’ ne”
there they (zoic) Now in fact did he start that it is the
go about.” :
wa’ t‘hayi/‘hya’k, hi’ya’. Ne’ o’né™ hwé’ha’yo™ tcd’”’ non’we'
did he it-stream cross, in fact. The uow there did he arrive where the place
ni‘fhono™sa’yé™ ne’ De‘haé™hiawa’’ei! wa’ hé"’hén’, “ Hiya’/‘—khé™
there his lodge stands the did he say, “Not—is it
”) 4)
de’satdd’gis ayodi’yoik ne’ t‘ho’né™ ne’ I” gya’dis’’a’if ne
any thou it be- might they (zoic) the here this the I T-its-body have the
come aware of have arrived finished
gondi’yo’? Sagya’daye’‘hwi’. Hiya’ dia’detgon’ne’s tcad”’
they (zoic) game Again, I their bodies miss. Not any there they (zoic) where
animals (are)? go about
non’wei daga‘dén’dya’. Gya’di‘saki‘ha’dye’ = di’. — Wai’ge’ ii’
the place thence I started. I-their bodies, to find, am coming so then, Did I think
do’g#’t ’o™‘gé™ thoné™ ha’gwa’ nidyoné’noi’‘.”’
it may be in turn here this towards thence they have come”
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hér’hén’, “’a‘sya’di’‘sak
Then the did he say, shouldst thou their
bodies seek
gén’ewi’. Da‘sadawén’nye’ ne” ted” niga‘hwe’‘na’. Tgagon’da’,
only. Se sa travel the where so it-island (is). It is not doubted,
’on’‘, 6"tcyéfide’’nhaé’ ne” Is’ sya’dis’ ai! dyén’‘ha’gwa’ ne’’t‘ho‘
per- shalt again thou it the Thou thou its body if it so be the there
haps, recognize completed
gon’ne’s ne” t‘ho’né™ ga‘hwe’‘ni’’ge‘.”
they (zoir) the here this it-island-on.””
go about
Tho’‘ges o/né™ ne” Otha’d’ wia’ha‘déi’dya’, ne’’t‘ho‘
Then now the did he start, the there
wi’t‘hadawén’nye’. Ne’’t‘ho! wi’ha’gé™” ofnatga’de’nyo™ ne”’
did there he travel about. The there did he it see they (zoic) numerous are, the
severally
gondi’yo’ nhwa’tgayo’’dage*. Hiya’ hi’ya’ de’ha’gé™ ne”
they (zoic) game _— every it-game animal in Not in fact any he it sees the
animals (are) number.
ha/o™hwa’ athaya’dis’#’ik. Dyéfi’‘hagwi’ o’né™ wa’s‘hago’gée”
he himself might he-its body have If it so be now did he-them see
finished.
de‘hniya’’dige’ ne” de‘hnofi’gwe‘, o’nén‘ di” wa’hé"’‘hén’, “ Hot’
two they two persons the twothey two human now so did he say, “What
in number beings are, then
nonwa‘ho’’dée” di’ nidjiyadye’‘hi’ ne” t‘ho’né™ i’‘sne’s?”’.
kind of thing so here you twoare doing the here this’ you two are
then going about?”’
Wihni‘hén’, ‘“Na’ye’ gwd” oni’ ne” s‘hofigniya’dis’’3’i‘
Did they two say, “That it is just also the he-our two bodies completed
na’ye’ hi’y#’, t‘ho’né™ s‘hofigyatg’’’wi‘.” T‘ho’‘ge’ ne” O*ha’a’
that it is as you here this he-us two left.” Then the
know,
o/né™ = wi’hoi‘hwane‘hi’egwi’ dé™’se’ wa’tchagoya’dowe‘da’*hén’
now did him-it matter astonish and did he-them study repeatedly
ne” ted’’ ni’yo‘t ne’”’ tcd’’ de‘hnon’‘he’. T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ akda” a‘
the where so itis the where two they live. Then now aside
elsewhere
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 709
nhofisa’‘he’. Na’ye’ ne’ o/né™ hofisd‘ha’yo™ tei’ non’we'
thither he went. That it is the now there he returned where the place
thé dén’ ne”’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gi‘ o/né™ wa hé™’‘hén’,
there he abode the now did he say,
“Wa'gya’daye“hwi’ heyotgoida“gwif ne’? = gondi’yo’ ine”
“Did L-its body miss thither it goes without re- the they (zoic) game the
course animals are
gya’dis’’a’i. Hiya’’ sté”’ de’g’gé™% ne” gya’di‘saki‘ha’dye’.
did I-its body finish. Not anything any I-it see the I-(its) body, to seek, am
going along.
’ de‘hniyi’’dage‘ ne’‘ de‘hnon’gwe',
Na’ye’ gén’gwa’ wa’g’gé™ ne’
That it is only did I it see the two they two bodies the two they two hu-
are man beings are
—s‘haya’’dada‘ hadji’na‘ dé"’’se’ djyeya’’dadas — e”“hé™.
—one he-body (is) he male (is) and one she body (is) she ema
is).
Wa’tkheya‘hén’do™ ga’éni‘ nof’we nit‘hne’non‘?” Wa’hni’‘hén’,
Did I-them ask whence the place there they two came?” Did they two say,
“S‘hongniya’di‘sa’’i‘ na’ye’ t‘ho’né™ s‘hongydtga’’wi'.” Wa’ge’a’
“He-our two bodies finished that it is here this he-us two left.” Did I think
di” I’, ’o®‘gé™, oni’ age‘séf’ni’ ne’’t‘ho’ nayo’‘dik tea’
rise i in turn, also did I-it make the there soshould it be where
en
ni’yo‘t ne’”’ ted’? de‘hnon’‘he’ ne’’ wa’gatgat’‘hwa’. Hiya’ hi’ya’
so it is the where twotheytwolive the did Lit see. Not in fact,
’on’‘, sté"”’ de’sa’nigofi‘he’’dé™ ne” age‘sén’nya’?”’ T*ho’‘ge o’né"
per- any- any thy mind be moved the should I-it make?” Then now
haps, thing
ne” De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hé‘hén’, “Se‘sén’nya’ di’, ganyo’’
the did he say, “Do thou it make then, as soon as
dé"tchadeyénnon’nya’? =o fgé™, = dé”’’se’ dé"tchye’it — tea”
thence wilt thou exert thy in turn, and shalt thou it cause where
utmost ability to fit
niyeya’do’’dé™ ne” on’gwe', Dyén”‘ha’gwa’ dé"tchye’it o’né™
so one’s body’s shape the human being, If it so be shalt thou it now
cause to fit
hi‘yd’ 6"®wa’do™” @"yofindgit’ ne’? of’gwe tcai’’ non’we
in fact. will it be possible will they inhabit the human beings where the place
di‘sat‘hwe’‘no’.
there thy own island
floats.
Na’ye’ di” ne” dyén’‘ha’gwa’ @yonnagit’ ne’’t‘ho’ di’’ ted’’
Thatitis then the if it so be will they the there so where
inhabit then
dewa‘sén/no™-s‘hon’’ é“hadongo‘da’‘gwak ne’”’ S‘hedwa’‘djiya’ ne”’
two it between-along will he pass habitually the He, our Elder the
Brother
E"dek’ha’ Gaa’‘gwa’.”’
Day light-be- It ‘Light Orb.”
longing to
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne” Ocha’a’? o’né™ wa’ho’nigon‘hiyo’’khe’,
At that time now the now did it-his mind satisfy,
dé?’se’ o/né™ di” w&hé™hén’, “Tho’né™ di” néyawé?”“ha’.
and now then did he say, “Here this no so will it come to pass.
then
Etyo‘h@’’nha’ —_ne’’t‘ho‘ had’‘se’. A‘sekdo®’‘hna’ dé®’’se’
To-morrow the there thither thou Shouldst thou-it and
shouldst go. to view, go
isgye’ndwa’s, na’ye’ ne’ onsedniya’di‘sak, ga’én‘ gwi’”
should thou-we aid, that it is the should again we two- where just
their bodies seek,
710 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
nheyofiné’non’ ne” gya’dis’’a’1' (?gya’di‘s4’’i‘).”” T*ho’‘ge’ ne”
there they have gone the I-their bodies At that time the
have finished.”’
De‘haé™hiawa’’el' wa’ hé™’‘hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho’ gwa” 0” né®yawé/™ha’.”
did he say, “The there just too so will it come to pass.’’
(=thus)
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne”’ Oh a’ 8’ wai’ hé?’‘hén’, Omer: gwa”’ o/‘ni’
Then the did he say, “Now just also
sigd‘dén’dya’. Ganyo’”’ gw” nhé"s’gyo™” o/né” gondi/dye’
back I start (=re- As soon as just there will T now at once.
turn home). arrive
é"wagyo'dé"’ ‘ha’. Na’ye’ di” é"dwadyeé"’‘di#’ 6satgat’’hwi’
will I set to work. That it is 2 will it the first be wilt thou it see
then
”)
ne o/né™ hé™’syo” é"wageyéhinénda”’ik ne on’gwe'.””
the now there wilt thou will I-its organism have the human being.”
arrive finish
”)
Tho’‘ge’ o/né™ sa‘ha‘dén’dya’.
At that time now he started homeward.
Na’ye’ ne” o’/né™ honsa‘ha’yo™ tea’ nofh’we' t‘hodino™sa’yé™”
That the now there again he where the place there their
returned lodge stands
oné™ = wi’hé‘hén’, “Hate’kwi‘! Ksoda’‘ha‘, oi‘hwane‘hi’ewat
Now did he say, “Behold! Oh, grand- it matter is astonishing
mother,
ws) ,)
tea nwa’’awé?’ ‘ha’. Na’ye’ ne dewagya‘hya’gi’‘hna’.
where so it has come to pass. That it is the did I-it-stream cross.
Na’ye’ ne’ gya’di‘sakho"™‘na” ne” I” gya’dis’a’i6 (gyi’di‘si’’1‘)
That the I-their bodies went to find the I I-(its) body
finished
ne’ gofidi’ys’. Hiya’ gat’ka&’ de’g’gé™. Agwas’, na’ye’
the the game ani- Not anywhere any I (it) Verily, that it is
mals are. saw.
gén’gwa’ wa'khe’gé™” ne” ’a’‘se’ ne’ ofi’gwe', s‘haya’’dada'
only did I-one see the reid the human being, one his body (is)
is)
hadji’na‘, djiyeya’’da‘da‘ o’‘ni’ e“hé™. Na’ye’ wa’kheyd‘hén’don’
he male (is), one her body (is) also she fe- That it is did I-one question
male (is).
ga’ én nidhofne’non‘. Na’ye’ wa’ honwana’’do™ ne”’
whence there they came. That it is did they-him point out the
deyagyadé™hnon’daa’. Na’’, ya’gé™, ne’’t‘ho’ s‘hagoted’/’wi'.
two one-I-brothers are (=my The it is said, the there he-them left.
brother). that,
Wivheya‘hén’do™ ne’ deyagyadé™hnon’dia’ di” I” o/‘ni’
Did I-him ask the my brother sothen, I also
age‘sén’nya’ ne’’ on’gwe’. Wa’hagei‘hwa‘ni’‘dé™ o’né™; na’ye’
might I-it make the human being. Did he-me-the thing agree to, for now; that it is
ne” wa’hé"’‘hén’. Se‘sén’nya’. Dé"tchadeyénnon’nya’ oes”.
the did ye say. Do thou it make. Thence wile thou-thy skill summon, in turn.
Dé"tchye’it tea’? niyeya’do’dé™ ne” of’gwe'.’” T‘ho’‘ge’ ne’’
Do thou it sight where so one’s body kind the human being.” Then the
of (is)
ho‘so’da‘ wa’ a‘hén’, “Na’ye’, on’§ é®yoyanén’’khe’. Dd’gé"s ne’’t‘ho‘
his grand- did she say, ‘That it is, per- will it good become. Truly the there
mother haps,
né™ ‘syed’ tea’? nonwa‘ho’’dé™ wa’hié®’‘has, ho’s‘hasdé™si’/yé™,
so wilt thou- where thing kind of did he-him bid- he power has,
it do to do,
hi’ya’. Hiya’, eis hes, hi/ya’ d’a‘hano™hwe’’nha’
as you Not, I believe, verily any would he-it like
know.
———
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION al.
ne“ se gwae’, ‘tha‘sye’a’.. Do’gs’t ise’ ’oR“eé’) usté™, gwit?’
the just anyway shouldst It may Ppossi- to-day some- just
thou-it do. be bly thing
niyawe?”’if na” gai‘honnya’‘ha’ o’né™ sd‘sya’daye’‘hwa’ ne”’
so it has hap- the it-the matter causes now again thou (their) the
pened, that bodies miss
is’ sya’dis’’&‘ho™.”’
thou thou (their) bodies hast
made severally.”
T‘ho’'ge‘ ne”’ O'ha’ a’ with 6’ “hén’, “OC/nen’s ai” é"ted‘sa/ we.
Then the did he say, “Now so will there I-it begin.
their
Na’ye’ ne” hi’ya& niwaknaékdé’’s' ne’ né’‘. Na’ye’ ne”
That it is the asyouknow somy time short (is) the this. That itis the
(i. @., room small is)
é*yo'hé’ nha’ =géi’ewa’ = on™ ~—hi’ya’—s dé" t’‘he’, o’né™
will it to-morrow be only now as you thence will now
know he come,
d@t‘hakdo™‘hne’ ne’ deyagyadé™hnon’dia’.”’
thence will come he-it, the my brother.”
to ew
T’ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ wa’hayagé’’’nha’ dé"’’se’ ganyadak’da’ nhwé’’he’.
Then now did he go out and it-lake-be- side thither did
he go.
Ne” o/né™ hwa’ha’yo™ tea” non’wet — ot‘hnego’kda’dye’
The now there did he arrive where the place it- water ends along
o’né™ di”? wa’hé™’‘hén’, “Na’ye’, ’on’’, Nia‘ @"ge‘séh’nyad’da’ ne”’
now so did he say, “That it is, per- I will I-it-to make use the
then haps, humble
on’gwe’ néngé’’‘hai’ ga‘hne’go’ yo‘hwé"’s’do’. Na’ye’ ne”’
human this it is it-liquid-water it-foam floats. That it is the
being
é"yoyénde’‘dik di” dé"gyatdi“hé"k ne” ted’ né®yeya’do’’dé"k
will it be known by it so will they two differ the where so will one’s body
then be in form
4) oy
ne on ‘owe’.
the human
being.”
T’ho’‘ge‘ o’/né™ wi hatgat’‘hwa’ tea” non’ we‘
Then now did he-it see where the place
hegd‘hnegayé™’‘t‘ha’ ne’’t‘ho‘ odo’da‘ha’dye’s ne’’t‘ho‘
there is-water strikes the there it-bubbles, float about the there
o‘sodjyo’da’? ne” o‘hwé"’s’da’. T‘ho’‘geS o’né™ di” na’ye’
it-pile up-stands the it-foam. Then now so then that it is
wi't‘ha’‘ewa’ ne’? o‘hwé"’s’da’ dé"’se’ na’ye’ wa’ha‘séinya’’di’
did he-it take up the it-foam and that it is did he-it, to make use it
ne” oya’’da’; na’ye’ ne” agwas’ da‘hadeyéfinof’nya’. Ganyo”’
the it-body; that it is the very thence he his skill put forth. As soon as
wivhayénnénda’’nha’ = t‘ho’ge’ o/né™ ~=— wa’hade’nyén’dé™ ne”
did he-its frame complete then now did he it tried the
awadon’‘het. Hiyd’‘ de’hogwe’nyon‘ ne’’t‘ho‘ nayawé‘ha’
should it come to life. Not any he-it,wasabletodo the there soshouldit come ee
Tho’‘geS wa’h陑hén’, “Gé’djik gwa’’t‘ho‘, hi’ya’, o’né™
Then did he say, “By and by soon, of course, now
é"t/‘he’ ne’ deyagyadé™hnon’dii’. Tgagon’da’ é™hei‘hwa’ne’gé™
will thence the my brother. It must be will I-him the question ask
he come
ne’ ’d‘hagye’ndwa’s na’ye’ ne” ‘d‘hon’‘hét, swa/’djik hi’ya’
the should he-me aid that it is the should he-it too much of course
cause to live (=because)
712 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
oné™ i‘sowi’ é@éngyo’dé ‘ha’ ne’ gw’ skéfi’no™ awa’do™
now it much (is) have I labored the just peaceful (it is) might it
become
dé*’’se’ hagei‘hwé‘ni‘’daini‘ ne’’ é"ge‘séfi’nya’ ne” of’gwe'.”
and he-me-the matter has the will I-it make the human being.’’
approved, for me
T‘ho’‘geé o’né™ he” wa’hé’hén’, ‘Dé™heyadaa’‘da‘nd’.
Then now again did he say, “Will I-him to meet go.
Na’ye’ di” ne” o’né™ dé"yagyadaéad’ nha’ &陓heyat‘ho’yé™ ted”
That itis so then the now will he-I meet will I-him tell where
ni’i‘ 6.ond’wé™ ne” awadon’het ne” of’/gwe' gya’dis’’a’i‘.
I have I-it failed the shouldit come tolife the human being I-body have
humble to do finished.
Tgagon’da’ é™hei‘hwa’ne’gé™” di’ ne’ a‘hon’‘het, na’ye’ ne”
It must be wil I-him, the matter ask sothen the should he-it that is the
cause to live,
s‘ha’da‘haye’’’ ne’ ha’o™ha’ (ha’o®’‘hwa’) ne’ hoyéfinénda’’i‘.”
alike he-it should doto the he himself the he-its organism has
completed.”
One di” wa’ ha‘déa’dy3’.
Now so then did he start moving.
Hiya’‘ de’i/no™ he‘hawé’non‘ o’/né™ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’hadyén’‘ha’ewa’
Not anyitfar(is) thither he has gone now the there did it-him surprise
o/né™ wa’hd’gé™” o/né™ da’‘he’ ne’ de‘hiadé™hnon’ dia’.
now did he-him see now thence he the my brother.
was coming
Ne” o/né™ wa’t‘hiyadéa’’nha’ t‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™ ne” O*‘ha’a’
The now did they two meet then now the
wi’hé’‘hén’, “ Degonyadaa’‘dai‘ne’ ne’ né"’‘; na’ye’ gai‘honnyaé’‘ha’
did he it say, “T-thee, to meet, come the this; that it is it-matter causes
(=is the reason)
na’ye’ ne” ge’‘he’ ’a‘sgye’niwa’s na’ye’ ne’’ ’a‘son’‘het ne”
that it is the I-it desire | shouldst thou me, aid that itis the shouldst thou the.
it make to live
4)
gya'dis’’87i‘; o’né™ ne” na”, hi’ya’, ageyéinénda’’i‘ ne” oya’’da’
I-body finished; now the the, as you l-its organism have the it-body
that, know, finished
ne” of’gwe'.”
the human being.”
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne’ De‘haé™hiawaé’’gif wa’hé"’‘hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho‘
At that time now the did he say, “‘The there
gwi’” o” né"yawé?’‘ha’. Ga/én‘, di”, non’we' tga’yé™ ne’”’
just too so will it come to pass. Whence, so then, the place there it lies the
isa’do"k sayénhnénda’’i‘?” T*ho’‘ge’ o/né™ wa’hiya‘dén’dyi’,
thou-it, keep thou-its organism hast At that time now did they two start walking.
saying finished?”
Ganyo”’ wia’hni’yo” ne’ ganyadak’da’ o’né™ ne’ O‘ha’a’
As soon as did they two arrive the it-lake-beside now the
wihé"‘hén’, “Ne, hi’ya’, hé"da’edi? (hiyas’ 74/‘son
did he say “Here it is, truly he lies supine not yet
de’hon“’he’. Na’ gai‘hofinya’‘ha’ ne’ o‘hnegak‘da’ iga’yé?”’
any he lives. The that it-matter causes the it-water beside it lies
na’ye’ ne” o‘hnegd’/nos ne’ ni” wa’ge‘sénnya’’da’. Na’ye’
that it is the it-fresh water the the [did I-itsorganism tomake, use it. That at is
ne’ wi’ge’i’ ne” é®yoyénde’‘dik ne” ted’? dé"gyatdi’‘hé"k
the did I it think the will it be easily recognized the wherein will they two differ in
form
, a4 9 89)2:
ne’ nonhwa‘ho’’dé™ we’dniséi’nya’.
the thing kind of did the two-it make.”
Hewitt) ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION T(t:
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne’”’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hé?’‘hén’, “Sga’da*
At that time now the did he say, “One it is
egw” oni’ &*gofiye’ndiwa’s ne’”’ ted’’ 6"gon’‘het. Dyéi’‘ha’gwa’
just also will I-thee aid the wherein will I-it cause If so it be
to live.
S™se’i? 78/‘so™ o/yd’ E*tce‘séfi/nyd’,- is’ na’ é"sgwe’nya’.
wilt thou still it over wilt again thou-it make, thou the that wilt thou be able
-it wish to do.
Ne’’t‘ho’ gén’gwi’ 8™si’gwi’ ga/éi' gw” nofi’we' tea”
There, thus, only wilt thou whence just the place where
choose
ni‘haya’’da’, na’ye’ ha’dé™syes’da’ o/né™ é"sewe’ nya’
there his body is that it is together wilt thou it mix now wilt thou-it be
present, able to do
é"wadon “het.”
will it come to life.
Ne’’t‘ho‘ge‘ o/né™ ne’? De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hé"’‘hén’,
At that time now the did he say,
“Na’ye’ di’, ’of’‘, @°wa’do™ ne’’ dé"tgyes’d&’ na’ye’ ne”
“That it is sothen, perhaps, will it the will I-it add to that it is the
é™ha’‘hwa’k di” ne”’ tea” ni’yo‘t ne”’ tea?
will he-it hold so then the where so it is the where
agadoya’‘hén’.” T‘ho’‘geé o/né™ ~— ne”? De‘haé™hiawa’’gi‘
I-self move successively.’’ Then now the
da‘hai/gwi’ ne” hodon‘he’‘sai’ dé"”’se’ wa’hon’dak ne’”’
pee eee took- the his own life and did he-it put-in the
rom
haya’dagon’wa‘; oni’ ne” ho’nigon’‘da’‘saa’ ne”’ t‘ho‘
his body in; also the his mind the there
da‘haa’/gwi’ dé®”’se’ wa’hon’dak ne”’ hono” wagon’ wi‘;
eae nee took- and did he-it put-in the his head-in;
rom
o’ ‘ni’ ne”’ hotkwé"’‘sa& nay? da‘hai’gwi’ dé"”’se’
also the his blood the that thence he-it took and
ne’’t‘ho' hwa’hon’dak ne” hayeé™dagon’wa' (hayeé"’’ge‘);
there there did he-it put in the his flesh-in (his flesh-on);
on’ ne” tc&’ de‘hatgd‘dof’nyo™s, oni ne’’ tca”
also the where two he looks about repeatedly, also the where
hadadya’’t‘ha’ = dedjiya’é" da‘hai’gwi’ ‘dé”’’se ne’’t‘ho‘
he-it-to speak causes both thence he-it took-from and there
hwa’hon’/dak ne’ hono™a’’ge‘ (?hono™ wagon’wa‘); t‘ho’‘ge‘
there did he-it the his head on (his head in); then
introduce
o/né™ wa’hadofwi‘sén’dak ne’ hayd’dagon’wa‘, o’né™ o’‘n’’
now did he his own breath put in the his body in, now also
wi’ hadon‘’het; o/né™ oni’ wi’hé"‘hén’, ‘“Desda’’nha‘.”’
did he alive become; now also did he say, “Do thou stand up.”
Ttho’‘geé = o/né—s WA’ t‘had&’’nha’. Tho’‘ge’ o’né™ ne”
Then now did he stand up. Then now the
De‘haé™hiawa’’ei! wa’hé"‘hén’, “O’né™, hi’ya’, wa’ gai‘hwayei’k’he’
did he say, “Now, of course, it-matter is fulfilled
ne’’t‘ho‘ nwa’gye’ i’ ne’? tea” nonwa‘ho’’dé”
the there so did I-it work the there thing kind of
de‘sado™hwéndjion’nik ne’’ agonye’naiwaé’s. Hot’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé”
dost thou it need the should I-thee aid. What thing kind of
19078°—28——46
714 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH, ANN. 43
di” né"yawé"’‘ha’ ne” ga’én’ gwd’ dé"diyo‘he’™’ik ne’ na’ye’
so so will it come to the where just there will it-daylight-be the that it is
then pass (=somewhere)
ewa’’t‘ho’ ne’ I” é"swagatgon’dé™ néngé ‘ha’ tead’’ ni’yo™
just there the I will again it-me this it is where so many
(=next) antagonize they
: number
dagit’ei’k ne” ted’ ni’yo‘t ne” ted” agadoya’/‘hén’?”
hence I (them) the where so it is the where do I myself move repeatedly?”
gave
T‘ho’‘geS o’né™ ne’? O‘ha’a’ da&‘hai‘hwa’si’gwi’ wa’hé?”‘hén’,
Then now the thence he the question did he say,
took up
“Tho'née™ ow’ o/ni’ nidniye’’é néngé"’ ‘ha’ wa’didniye’ni’
“There this just also so let us two do this it is did we two
each other did
ne” ted’ wa’hadon’‘het na’ye’ ne’”’ s‘ha’dé"dniya’dagwénni’yoks,
the where did he come to life that it is the equally shall we two it own,
na’’,’on’‘, é"yoyanén’k’he’ na’ye’ ne’”’ é"sai‘hwayén’daik o’’ nis’’a‘
the perhaps, will it-good-become that itis the wilt thou-something have too thou
that, (to say)
ne” t'ho’né™ é"yonnagit’ ne’ on’gwe’ nwa’eya’do’’dé™.”’
the here this will they be born the human beings such their bodies in kind(are).’’
T‘ho’‘gef ne’ De‘haé™hiawa’’gif wa’hada’dya’ wa’hé"’‘hén’,
Then the did he speak did he say,
“Ne’t‘ho! gw” oni’ né"yawé?‘ha’. Wi’ gei‘hwa‘ni’‘d3’
‘‘There, thus, just also so will it come to pass. Do I-it-matter confirm
ne” tea” nis&’nigo™he’’dé™.” T‘ho’‘ge o’né™ ne” O*tha’d’
the wherein so thy mind (is) in kind Then now the
(=idea).””
da‘hada’dyai’? wa’hé"’‘hén’, ‘Hiya’, hi’ya’, d’aedni’ne’a’gw3’
thence he spoke did he say, “Not, as you know, any we two it would
mistake,
ne’ ted” de‘hniya’do’’dé™ ne’”’ we’dniyénnénda’’nha’: oyén’dét
the where’ two their fee Podies (are) the did we two-it complete; it plain, is,
shape
hi’ya’ tea” s‘ha’de‘hniya’do’dé™ ne” s‘heya’di‘sa’’i‘, na’ye’
of course where alike their two bodies (are) in shape the thou-one’s body hast made, _ that it is
egwa’’t‘ho’ oyén’det 0” ni’”’ ted’”’ ni‘haya’do’’dé™ ne” age‘séf’ni‘.
just there it plain is too theI where so (as) his body kind the did I it make.
(=next) of (is)
Hot’ nofwa‘ho’’dé™ di’ dé"dniye’i’? Hot’ nonwa‘ho’’dé™”
whet thing kind of so then so will we two it work? What thing kind of
Ow
di’ é"yet‘hiyas’t‘hak?”’
so then will, one-we two keep naming?”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’? De‘haé™hiawa’’eio wa'hé>‘hén’, ‘“Na’ye’ gwa”’
Then the did he say, “That it is just
o’‘ni’ ne’ I” ageyéfnéida’’i‘, na’ye’, hi’ya’, diyodyeé*’‘di‘
also the I have I-it finished, that itis, asyouknow, it the first is
honnadon‘he’dif ne’ tea’? o™hwéndjiya’de’. Na’ye’ di”
they did become alive the where it-earth extant is. That itis sothen
é"yet‘hiyas’t‘hak ne’’ on’gwe‘.’”’ (A modern expansion here says:
will, one-we two keep the human being.”
naming
“Na’ye’ di”’ é"yet‘hiyas’ t‘hak ne”’ on’gwe'—honwe‘
“That it is so their will, one—we two keep naming the human being—real, native
tkwé™dai’go™ niyeyad’do’’dé™%; né’ ne’”’ is’ sa&‘sén’ni‘ ne’”’
it red full (is) so one’s body kind of (is); this the thou thou—it hast made _ the
ee
——
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 715
tea” i” wéa’gofiye’ndwi’s na’ye’ di” n&”’ gwi’’t‘ho‘
where I did I—thee aid that it is sothen the that just there
é"yet‘hiyds’t‘hak ne’’ ha’sén’ni’ owiithe’s’da&’ ni‘hayd’do’’dé™’’),
will, one—we two keep the he ax-maker is it-while (is) so his body kind of (is).”’
naming
T‘ho’‘geS o’né™ ne” O‘ha’a’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Ne” tho’ gwa”
Then now the did he say, “The there just
o” né"yawé"‘hi’; na’ye’ wa’gei‘hwa‘ni’‘da’. Na’ye’ di”
too so it will come to pass; that it is do 1-it—matter confirm. That itis so then
o’né™, hiya’, é"kgwe’nyd’ ne” ’a’‘so™ o’ya’ OS sge‘séi/nya’
now, of course, will I-it be able to do the still it-other is will again I—it make
ne” on’gwe'. O’né™ = hi’ya’, wa’sgei’‘ho™ ne’’t‘ho’ gén’gwa’
the human being. Now, of course, didst thou—me the there only
the matter give
y
dé"tea/ewas’ = =ga’éi-gwi’”’ = nofi’we‘ = ne’”’—s tea’ —s ni‘haya’’da’
thence will somewhere the place the where just his body’s size
I—it take
néngé’ ‘ha’ ne’? ha’séi’ni’, owiithe’’sda’ —_ ni‘haya’do’’dé™.”’
this it is the he ax-maker (is) it—white is so his body is kind of.”
Tho’‘ge’ ne” De‘haé“hiyawi’’gii wa’hé™hén’, “Na’ye’,
Then the did he say, “That it is,
hi/yi’ wi eihén’”’, ‘Ne’’‘t‘ho‘ gén’ewd’ TALS nigé”’*
of course did I say, The there only I so it far is
dwi’gohye’niwa’s.” _T*ho’‘geS o’né™ ne’ O'ha’a’ wa’hada’dya’,
did I—thee aid.” Then now the did he speak,
wi'hé"‘hén’, ‘“’A’‘so™ gwa’’ o’‘ni’ djioi’‘hwada agadadén’‘se‘.
did he say, “Still just also it—matter single (is) it—me is left.
Na’ye’, hi’y3’, gofnadiya’da’‘do% ne” gyda’di‘sé’”i‘ ne”
That, it is, of course, they are last (i. e., have Jost the I—its body finished the
their bodies
gondi’yo’.”’ T‘ho’‘ge’ ne” De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi‘ o’né™
they game animals Then the now
are.”
wihe""hén’, ‘Son’ di” nofwa‘ho’’dé™ go‘séi’nis si’gé™ ha
did he say, “Who then person kind of one—it has made yonder it is
diyononda’‘hii’? Son’, di’, o’‘ni’, ne’’t‘ho’ diyagoye’é™
it-mountain stands? Who, then, also, the there so one it has done
t‘hog陓‘ha’ deyo‘s‘hwéf’de’ ne’? o™hwéndjiyagon’wa' ne’’t‘ho‘
there it is it-valley (is) the it—earth in the there
deyodogé"’‘di‘ ha’gon’wa‘ t‘hogé"“‘ha‘ ne’ tea’? ononda’‘ha’?”’
it bears directly inside there it is the where it-mountain stands?”
Tho’‘geé o/né™ ne’ Ocha’i’ wa’t‘hodei‘ho’‘hak dé”’’se’
Then now the did his case critical become and
wi‘ho’da‘dén’‘ha’. Gondi’dye’ wivhe’i’, hono™’‘do™,
did it—him, fear cause. Right away did he think, he it knows,
nige’’-khé®”* tea’’ ni’yo‘t. O’né™ di” wa’hé?’‘hén’, “Ge'‘he’,
soisit isitnot where so it is. Now then did he say, “T believe,
possible,
se’, gofidi’yd’, ’on’’, ne’’t‘ho’ niyodiye’é™.” O’né™ ne”
in fact, they game perhaps, the there so they—it worked.” Now the
animals,
De‘haé™ hiyawa’’gi‘ da‘hawénnitgé?’ nha’ wa hé™hén’,
thence his voice came forth did he say,
“Dyétn’‘ha’’gwa’ ne’ gondi’yd’ ne’’t‘ho’ niyodi’s‘hasdé"’‘saa’
“Tf it so be the they the game the there so their power large (is)
animals (=thus)
na’ye’, gi’s‘hé™, dd’gé"s ne’’t‘ho’ niyodiye’é™ tea’ ne’’t‘ho*
that it is, it may be, it true is the there so they—it worked where the there
(=thus)
716 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
”) wr
ni’yo‘t deyo‘s‘hwén’de’ ne’? o™hwéndjiyagonh’wa‘, na’ye’ gwa
so it is it—valley is the it—earth in, that it is just
on’ = s‘ha’tgondiya’’dadi§ ne” onnadya’da/‘do™ ne’’t'ho‘
also the same their bodies are the they (zoic) are lost the there
hegonni’’déin’ ha’gon’wa'‘.”’
there they (zoic) inside.”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ ne’? Oha’a’ wa’hé™’‘hén’, ‘‘Ne’’t‘ho‘ he’dene‘.
Then now the did he say, “The there thither let us
two go.
Dogi’’t, se”, ot"céw do/’eé"s | ne@ttho® hesonni’dén’?”
It certain is indeed in turn, it true is the there there they (zoic) abide.’”
not,
Tho“ge! o/né™ wahiya‘dén’dya’. Niyoi‘hwagwa’‘ha‘ o/né™,
Then now did they two start. So it matter short (is) Now
ne’’t‘ho hwa’hni’yo™ onondak’da’ dé"’se’ o/né™ wa’hni’gé™”
the there there did they two it—mountain beside and now did they two it see
arrive
ne’’t‘ho‘ gwa”’ ganéhyayé”™ gona. O’né™ ne
the there just it rock Now the
De‘haé™hiyawa’’gif wa’hada’diyA wa’hé’‘hén’, “T*hd’/né™,
did he speak did he say, “Where this,
hi’ya’, nof’we’ ofinade‘s‘hon’we’ ne’’ gofidi’yd’.” T‘ho’‘ge‘
of course, the place they (zoic) themselves the they game animals Then
have caved are.”
oné™ donda‘ha‘ha‘gwi’ ne’’ onéi‘yd’ dé’’se’ ne”* hagwa’‘
now thence he-it took off the it-rock and this aside
hwa’ho’di’. T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’ne™ wi hadyén’‘ha”’ewa’
thither he-it cast. Then now did he become an aged
onnadya’dat’egi’s digondiyagé?’nha’, na’ye’ ne’”’ onnatgii’’de’
D> iD d DS
they (zoic) ugly in body thence they (zoic) came forth, that it is the they (zoic) many
were
ha’tgondiya’dage*. O’/né™ ne’’t‘ho‘ de‘hniga’‘ha’ ne”’
every their (zoic) bodies in Now the there they two looked on the
number (are).
”)
ne
dayodiyagé”™ i‘ha’dye’. O’né wa’ ondya’di’senon’dye’
SD ?
thence they (zoic) kept coming out. Now just their (zoic) bodies dragged along,
hiya’ da’degondi’nondd’d&’ dé"’’se’ wa’diyodi‘ha‘hén’dye’ ne’’
Not it is any they (zoic) have legs and did they (zoic) differ among the
themselves
wr)
tea’? nigondiya’do’’dé"s dé™’se’ ne’”’ ted’ nigof’na’s,
where _ so their (zoic) bodies shaped are and the where so they ee large
are)
o’dya’k nigonna’s’&’‘, o’dya’k gondigowané"’s; na’ye’ gwa’‘t‘ho,
it—some so they (zoic) small are, it—some they (zoic) large are; that it is just there
oyén’det gondi‘se’“hé™ dé"’se’ degondé’na‘ga’ wa’ ‘hénk.
it plain is they (zoic) ill-tem- and they (zoic) snarled continually.
pered are
”)
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne”? De‘haé™hiyawa’’eif wa’ hén”’hén’, “Hiya”, hon’
Then the did he say, not perhaps,
ni’ de’oya’ne’ dagondiyes’di’ ne’ of’gwe'; néngé?’‘has
the any it good is they (zoic) would the human beings this it is
those commingle
nigondiya’do’’dé”s. Dogii’’t ne” ’o"‘ké™ hiya’’ d’ayagon’‘hek
so their (zoic) bodies shaped are. If it be the today notitis any one would live
ne’ ayago’gé™, na’ye’ di’, ’on’’, na” oya’ne’ awe’ha’dye’ na”
the should it one see, thatitis, sothen, perhaps, the it good is it matters not the
that those
ne’’t‘ho’ o™hwéndjiyagon’wa‘ dondagofnidén’dak.”’
the there it—earth in there should they (zoic) remain.’’
HEWIT1] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 717
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne”’ O‘ha’ a’ wihada’dyi’ wi hé"’‘hén’,
Then the did he speak did he say,
“Dyén’‘ha”’gwi ni” dd’gé"s ne’’t‘ho’ né"yawé"’‘hi’, ’a’‘so™
“If it so be the that certainly the there so it will come to pass, still
ne’ ted’’t‘hoS heyo‘he’’ gondigd’wané"’s ne’’ ’a/‘so™ de’s’g&™, °
the where there it extreme is they (zoic) large are the still not thou-it seest,
’a/‘so™, hi’ya’, ’on’’, ha’gon’wad‘ tgofini’’dén’, na’ye’ gwi’”’ 0”
still, of course, perhaps, * inside there they (zoic) abide, that it is just too
gén’ewds’ ’a’‘so™ hiya’’ gat’gai’ ne’ dod’gé"s gondigd’wané"’s.
only still not it is anywhere the certainly they (zoic) large are.
O’né™ di” “hi’ya&’, ’of’‘, ne’’t‘ho’ né*yawé"‘hi’, ne’’t‘ho‘
Now then in fact, perhaps, thus so it will come to pass, there
gén’/ewds’ = 6 "tgonni’dén’dak.”’
only will they (zoic) continue to remain.”
T‘ho’‘gef o/né™ ne” O‘tha’a’ hofisa‘ha’gwd’ ne’ onén’ya’
Then now the thence again he too off the it rock
dé"’’se’ ne’’t‘ho’ donda&‘ha’‘hén’ ne’ ted’ ogai‘hén’di’ ne’”’
and the there there on he-it laid the where it opening the
deyo‘s‘hwén’de’, tho’ ‘ge‘ o’né™ wi’ hé"‘hén’,
o’‘ni’ ne” ted” nigya’do’dé™. Na’ye’ di’ na’ye, diyoi‘’hwa’
also the where such as my body is that so that just it the
shaped. it is then it is cause (is)
ne’’t‘ho! né"yawé"’‘ha’ na’ye’ ne” ne’’t‘ho’ €6"wadyea’da’‘gwa’
the thus so will it happen that the the there will it-itself do, thereby
(=there) it is
ne’ ted” iga’do"k tgagon’di’ @eofya’dage’‘nhi’ dé"’’se’
the where I-it keep at all events will I-thy body aid and
saying
®conye’ndwa’s ne’’ ted’ seyéfinddé’‘da’ ne” ongwe’‘ne‘.
will I-thee assist the where thy handiword is the human the
outspread beings-among.
Na’ye’ di” @teai‘hon’nya’ ne”’ edjiyon’do™ ne
That so will it-it be the the will again one the
it is then cause of recover health
—————————
—
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 737
4)
gono™hwak’danik, na’ye’ ne heyohe’‘ ne skéfi’no®,
one ill is, that it is the to the limit the peaceful
édjyénno™donnyo™‘hek. T‘ho’né™ di’” 'gén’gwa’ né"yo’‘dik ne
will again one keep on thinking. Here this ee only so will it be the
en
wi’wéndadenyon’dye’. Na’ye’ gwa’’t‘ho‘ ne” o’/ya’ o/né™ @ei‘hén’”’.
hence it-day stand out, several, That just here the it other now will I-it say.
onward. it is
”
Na’ye’ ne’ ge’‘he’ akgwe’nyo™ ne’ &kheya’dige’‘nhék ne”
That it is the T-it Table am the will I-their bodies keep the
think aiding
s‘heya’di‘s’&’‘ho” ne’’ ofi’gwe’. Na’ye’ gwi’’t‘ho’ ge’‘he’ na’ye’
thou their bodies severally the human That just here T-it that
hast finished beings. it is think it is
ne ha’deyon’’ = d@"t‘hai‘hwayea’’da’ ss ne’”’”—s Oa’ a’, ~~ ne”
the the all methods will he the matter devise the the
ya/nigon‘ha‘s‘hwa’@"s, na’ye’ ne’ 6™hade’nyéidé™’hd’ ne”
he-thy mind dislikes, that it is the will he-it attempt the
dé“hadogwa’‘di’ na’ye’ ne”? Sgagwe’nyd’ d@sayén’nya’k, na’ye’
will he-it scatter that the will it-able be will it-thy handiwork that
it is cut short, it is
é*yagono™hwak’dé” dé"’’se’ dé"yon’nigon‘ga’ya’ dé"’’se’
the will one ill become and will one suffer in mind and
ne’’t‘ho! heys’do’kt é@"yagodé™hni‘sei’kda’‘gwé” ne” on’gwet.
£ the there there it ends will it-one’s day its end cause the human being.
4) 4)
Na’ye’ di” @gade’nyéndé‘ha’ ne é"kheya’daige’‘nhé"k ne
That it is so will I-it attempt the will I-their bodies keep the
then aiding
on’gwe’ = hé"yontgonda’‘gwik, akda’’s° hé"wakhawi’‘dik ne”
human will it go on without ceasing, aside will I-it keep bearing the
beings
gano™hwakde’‘sid’, na’ye’ tgawéfni’yo’ ne dyén‘ha”’ewa’
it-sickness, that there it-the main the if it so be
it is thing is
so™ ga‘wé™hni‘si’yé’. Na’ye’ di’ &yogwe’nyohk ne” I’’
still one day(s) has. That it is so will it able continue the I
then to be
@yonga‘ha’’nhi’ ne”’ akheya’dage’‘nha’. Na’ye’ di”
will one-me recall the should I-one’s body aid. That it is Heo.
then
dé"yonkno™hén’‘khwak ne” gés’ @"ya‘hén”’, ‘Ksoda‘ha’.’ Na’ye’
will one-me continue to greet by it the eastern: will one say, ‘My Grandfather.’ That it is
arily
ne’? o/né™ gé"s’ ne” I’ Syongwat‘ho’ya’ t‘ho’ge’ @ya‘hén’’
the now custom- the I will one-me talk about then will one say,
aa
‘S‘hedwi‘so’di’; na’ye’ @yongni’do’‘khwak ne’”’ — ofi’gwe'.
‘Our Grandfather’; that will one-me designate, by it the human
it is beings.
Na’ye’ di’ ne” I” dé@kheno™hén’‘khwak na’ye’ ne’ égi‘héi’’,
That it is so the I will I-them, continue to greet, that the will I say,
then by it, it is
‘Kheyade’s‘hon’’a‘,’ ne” o/né™ ne’ t‘ho’ né"gadwéfnayeii’’da’
‘My dear grandchildren,’ the now the there will I-my word(s) direct
tea” on’ewe'ne’ t‘ho’né™ o™hwéndjiya’’ge’ deyagodawén’nye‘.
the where human beings- here-this it-earth-on do they travel around.
aman’
O’ne™ di” is’, hi’yS’, @goni‘hwagénis’dé” hot’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé”
Now so thou, of course, will I-thee, leave the what thing kind of
then matter to
e“sihen”’ ne”’ tei” né"yawen‘hi’. Ofnets yy hisys;
wilt thou say the where so Will it come to pass. Now, indeed,
4)
{yeh
”)
’)
y)
ere
a
738 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH, ANN. 43
wesa nigon ‘hiyénda’’nha’ ne”’ tea”’ nwa’awe? ‘ha’ ne”’
didst thou-it understand the where so did it happen the
ak’nigon’‘hi’.”’
my mind.”
T‘ho’‘ge' one" ne” De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi‘ wai’ hé“hén”’,
+ Then now the did he say,
“Ereerhwa‘ni’‘da’ ne” ted” nisi’nigofi‘he’’dé™ ne” tea” se’‘he’ ne”’
“Will I-the matter confirm the where so thy mind is the where thou the
(=agree to) desirest
a‘s‘heya’dage’“nhé"k ne’? of’gwe' nwa’eya’do’’dé”, na’ye’
wouldst thou-their bodies the human such one’s body is in form, that
keep. aiding being it is
gwa’’t‘ho’ ne’’ gofdi’yo’. Djiyoi’“hwada‘ gw” o’‘ni’ ne’”’ ge’‘he’,
just here the they game One subject (is) just also the I desire,
animals are.
hi’ya‘ gi’’s‘hé™, ne” d’ayoyanén”’khe na’ye’ ne”’ a‘s‘heyadodi’‘sya’s,
not it may be, the any it good would that the shouldst thou-them, show
become it is thy self, to,
dogi’’t o’‘ni’ a‘sodi/‘sy#’ ne” s&’s‘hasdé"’‘sia’, swa’djik’ ’of’ ne’’
if it be also shouldst thou- the thy power, too much perhaps, the
it show (=because),
ni” a‘s‘he’da‘dén’‘gwé” ne’’ ayesa’gé” dé’’se’ ni‘seyéfino’’dé™.
the shouldst thou-them make- the should one and such as thy manner of
that fearful thou see doing is.
Na’ye’ di’, ’on’‘, @yoyanén’’khe’ ne” ga’éi’ gw’ nof’wet
That it is sothen, perhaps, will it-good become the somewhere just the place
na‘si’dén’dak, hi’ya‘, hiy’&’, ne’”’ sté”’ d’aesadawé™da’‘dé” dé"’’se’
there shouldst thou not, ofcourse, the anything any would it-thee obstruct and
abide,
é“sat‘honde‘sdji‘hwé"k ne’”’ o/né™ is’ @yesat‘ho’ya’ ne” on’gwe'.
wilt thou-it most clearly hear the now thou _ will one-thee tell of the human
being.
,
Hiya’* sté”’ hi’ya de’sadawé?’‘das.”’
Not anything ofcourse any does it-thee obstruct.”
T‘ho’‘geS o/né™ ne” Hadu’’i’ wa’hatcéfinon’nya&’ dé"’’se’
Then now the was he plaesaed and
o/ne™ = wi’hehén’, “Wa’gye’nd’ ne” ted” nis&’nigoni‘he’’dé™.
now did he say, “T-it accept the where such thy mind (is) made up.
O’né™ di” Sgofiyat‘ho’yé” ne” tea” n@yawé’‘ha’. Na’ye’
Now so will I-thee tell the where so will it come to That
then pass. it is
di” na’ye’ ni’a’ wa’gi’gwd’ ne’’t‘ho’ nofi’we @ga’dyén’,
so that I I-it choose the there the place will I myself
then it is humble seat,
ne’’t‘ho! hi’ya’ @egna’gek ne” ted’? nof’wef odo™“hwéndjiyat’gi’s
the then of course will I abide the where the place it lands rugged are
ne’ dega‘st@“he’nyo™, ne’ tcd’’ non’we' dega‘sté“he’dji’s
the it-rock cliffs are severally, the where the place it-rock(s) tall are
dé”’’se’ o’‘ni’ deganede’dji’s. Hiya’’ di”, son’ga’, d’ayonk’gé”’;
and also it-mountains tall are. Not so some one, any one-me
then, would see;
ne’’t‘ho‘ @oi’dén/dak ne” tea” né"yonnis’‘he’ ne”
the there will I continue the where so will it endure the
to abide (last)
@yo™hwéndjiya’dek ne” t‘ho’né™. Dod’gés, hi’ya’, ’on’, hiya’
will it-earth continue extant the here this. True it is, of course, perhaps, not
d’ayoyanén’’khe’ ne’”’ d’ayagwadyes’da’ ne’ s‘heya’di‘sa’’1' ne’”’
any would it-good become the any should we mix the thou-one’s body hast the
together finished
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 739
of’gwe’, na’ye’ gwa’’t‘ho’ ne’ gondi’yo’ dé"”’se’ ted’ ni’yon‘
human that just there the they the game and where so many
being, it is (=next) animals they are
odon’ni‘ ne’ tea” o™hwéfdjiya’de’. Na’ye’ tei” néyawé’‘ha’.
they grow the where it-earth extant (is). that where so will it come to
it is pass.
Na’ye’ di” &"yorwe’nyonk ne”’ ohén’do™ ha’gwa‘
That it is so willit the power the it-ahead towards
then have todo
wi’wéndadenyon’dye’ ne’ kheyadé’s‘ho?’’3‘ dé*kheno™hén’‘khwak
thither it-day(s) stand severally the my dear grandchildren will I-them greet by it
ne” on’gwe‘. Hiya’ di’ sté”’ de’odye’&™ na’ye’ &“hadi‘sén/nya’
the human Not so anything anyitisdone that itis will they-it-make
beings. then
na’ye’ ne” dé"sgiyadye’@k ne” tei” ni’a’ nigyd’do’’dé™,
that it is the will they two resemble the where I such my body is
each other humble shaped,
o’‘ni’ ne” ted’ nikgo™so’’dé™.
also the where such my face is shaped.
Na’ye’ di’ ne” gaénidadd’gé™ ne” ao™hwa’’a' aon‘ha‘ni’i‘,
That it is ne the it-tree certain is the it-above its life strong,
en
na’ye’, hi’ya’, ne’ o‘ho’‘sia’ gaéfidaya’kji‘, na’ye’ @yogwe’nyonk
that it is in fact the bass-wood it-tree is called, that it is will it be able to do
ne“‘t'ho' @gaidé’ewénk na’ye’ @egd‘séhnya’’dik ne” o‘hwé"’’ea’
the there will e be taken that it is will it be made from it the it-wood(en)
rom
na’ye’ dé"sgiyadye’@k ne” I” tea” ni’yo‘t ne” ’o”‘gé” tea”
that itis will they two resemble the I where so it is the to-day where
keo™son’di’. Na’ye’ di” @yondyei’da’‘khwik ne” o0’/né™
T-a face have. That it is fs will one-it make use of, always the now
then
he” I” gé"s’ @yofgyaé’da’’nha’ ne” akheyaén’dat’‘ho™
again I custom- will one-my person the should I-one blow upon
arily approach repeatedly
ne”’ gono“hwikda’nik. Na’ye’ di’, hiya‘’ sté"”’ de’odye’é™ ne”’
the one is all. That it is so not some- anyitisdone the
then thing
on’gwe’ I” 8 ®yongadya’donda’‘eweé”. Na’ye’ di” gots’
human I will one-my person represent. That it is so custom-
being then arily
&yontgo™sd’‘e%’ ne’’ desgayeéfida’‘gwif ne’ I” nigya’do’’dé™,
will one-one’s face cover the one-it copied the I such my body is
shaped,
na’ye’ @gagwe’nya’ ne” tci’”’ gono™sayén’do™” gé"s’ nhé™hén’ne’;
that itis will it be able to the where one-lodge-has severally custom- thither will the ogy;
do it arily
tgagon’da’, hi’y&”’, ne’”’ hofidu’’)’ ne’’t‘ho’ é"yongadya’dofida’‘gwé”.
it must needs be, ofcourse, the ey the the there will one-my person represent.
*hadu’’’,
Ga’/nyo’, hi’yi? ne” ne’’i‘ho’ h陓hadi’yo” t‘ho’‘ge‘ o0’né™
As soon as infect the the there there will they then now
arrive
dét‘hon‘sa’we” ne” &yondadaé™dat”ho” ne’”’ gono“hwakda/nik,
will they begin the will they-one blow upon the one ill is,
repeatedly
na’ye’ tci’’t‘ho’ s‘ha’de’yo‘t ne’ I”? akheyaé”’dat’‘ho”. Na’ye’,
that it is the same alike it is the I should I blow upon one That it is
repeatedly.
hi’yi? tgawéfni’yo’ ne’ Syondeyéinof’ny&’ ne” o/né™ 1’’ge
in fact it is the chief thing the will one-one’s self prepare the now me-to
740 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
”)
hd/ewa! né"yofhdyed’’da’ ne’ o’né™ é"yongei‘hwa’ne’gé” ne’”’
towards will one-self face the now will one-me-the matter request the
akheya’dage’‘nha’.
should i-one’s body aid.
Na’ye’ di” na’ye’ ne’’t‘ho’ @gayaé’dagwéfni’yoks ne”
That it is aS that it is the there will it be a chief thing the
nen
oyeVews’on’we', na’ye’, hi’ya’, @yondwéinofnya’’t‘hak ne”
it-tobacco native, that it is in fact will one-it-as a pledge of this word the
kheyade’s‘ho"’”’a&‘ dekheno™hén’‘kwa’. Na’ye’ di” tea’ néyeye’ii’
my grandchildren I-them greet thereby. That it is where so will one-it do
then
ne” o/né™ Sdyewéhnitgé’’nhi’ na’ye’ gés’ S&ye‘hwi’k ne’’
the now will one one’s word utter that itis custom- will one-it hold the
arily
agel‘hwanowé"’ewl‘, ne’ oyé’gwa’on’we'.
I-it-matter reverence, the it-tobacco-native.
Na‘ye’ di’ g@s’ odjisda’’ge‘ hé"yago’di’ ne”? oyé’gwi’on’we',
Thatitis so custom- it-fire-on there will one- the it-tobacco-native,
then arily, it cast
o/né ttho’ge’ hi’yaé’ dé@tgayé’gwaé’dé” t'ho’ge’ o/né™,
now then of course thence will it-smoke arise then now,
hi’yd’, Swa’do” dé"tgyé’gwadiyén’dé”. Na’ye’ di” ®gayii’-
of course will it suffice thence will I-it-smoke draw. ‘That it is : ae will it-be
en
ponte = y ns 2 y ?
dagwénni’yoks na’ye’ ne” @yondyeii’da’‘khwak dé’’se’ ne’
one of the chief that it is the will one continue to use it and the
objects as a means
eyongadya’dofda”‘gwé”, na’ye’ di’ é"yes’d&’ ne’ tci’”’
will one my person represent, that it is fe will one-it use the where
then
godegd’’dif ne’ of’gwe‘, ne’’t‘ho’ gé's’ ha’dé"ye’‘gwi’ ne”
one-a fire has the human the there custom- thence will one-it the
kindled beings, arily take up
o’ge™“hadai’‘hén’, na’ye’ Syes’da’ ne” Myondonyaén’‘ho” na’ye’
it-ashes hot, that itis willone-ituse the will one-them scatter that it is
ne” ha’dé"yongo‘da‘gwa’ ne’ eyeé"’da’ ne’? gono™hwakda/nik
the just will one-it go over the one’s flesh the ‘one ill is
o/né™ = ne’t‘ho’‘ge‘ akd4’’3°hé"swe’‘da’ ne’? —- Ono™ sodai’no™
now at that time away hence again will the Sickness
it go
7)
4)
ne’ Gano™hwakde’ ‘sai’.
the It-Sickness.
Na’ye’ gwi’t‘ho’ @¢ayaé’dagwéfini’yoks ne’ o/né% J”
That it is just there will it be one of the chief things the now I
®yonga‘ha’’nha’ ne’? agei‘hwanowé"’‘ewi' ne’? awé™so"’ ‘ews’
will on-me remember the I-the thing have reverenced the corn meal
odjis’gwa’, na’ye’ di’ gé"s’ @yoritna’djya’yé” ne’ o/née™
it-mush, that it is so custom- will one-a pot set for the now
then, arily, one’s self
@wadei‘hwa‘dén’dya’ ne’ é&kheyadofiyaén’‘ho”. Ne’’t‘ho’ di’”’
will-it-the ceremony start the will I-one asperfe (with ashes.) The there ; ee
en
né"yo’dik ga’nyo’ gwa’’ niwat‘ha’wi’. Na/ye’ @gagwe’nyii’
so will it con- as soon as just so it is time. That it is willit beable to do
tinue to be .
ne’ €"djyof’do™” ne’’? gono™“hwakda/nik.’’
the will again one the one és all.”’
regain health
Vee
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 7Al
”) ws?
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ ne’? De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi’ wa’hé"’‘hei’, “O’né™
Then now the did he say, “Now
hi’yi’ wa’seyéfnénda’’nh&’ ne’ ted’”’ nisd’nigofi‘he’d陓 ne
in fact didst thou-it complete the where — such thy-mind is formed the
tei’”’ né"sanakdo’’d@k ne” ted’ o™hwéfdjiya’de’. Da, ne’’t‘ho‘.”
where _ so will thy position be the where it-earth extant. So, the there.”
T‘ho“ge o/né™, dofisa‘hiyadekha’ ‘sya’.
Then now hence again did they two
separate,
O’ne™ ne” De‘haé“hiyawa’’ei' sa‘ha‘dén’dya’. Ne’? o’né™
Now the again he started home. The now
hon‘sa‘ha’yo” ne” ted’ thodadasgwa’‘hédé’ o/né™ wa’he’“‘hen’,
there again he arrived the where there he has an upbuilt roof now did he say,
na’ye’ wi’honhwat’‘ho’yé” ne’ Odéfidonni’’&‘, “O’né™ sa’gyo”.
that it is did he-him tell the It. The Sapling, “Now I have
returned.
O’né™ oi‘ hwagwe’gi! wa’wadeyénnénda’ nha’ ne” tea” n&"-yawe"’‘ha’.
Now it-matter entire did it-itself complete the where so willit come
to pass.
Da’, o’né™ di” ne’’t‘ho’ hé"’dne’ tc&é’”’ nof’we' agei‘hwi‘sa’’1'.”
So, now so the there there will where the place I-it promised.”
then we two go
T’ho’‘ge* o’/né™ ne’ Odén’donni’a‘ wa’ hée’‘hén’, Ounce Ong
Then now the It, The Sapling, did he say, “Now too
ni’i‘ ageyénnénida’’i‘ ne’ ted’ ni’yon’ sai‘hwi‘sa”’i‘ ne’ tea”
I Lit have completed the where so many thou them ordered the where
humble it numbers
sfyyee ae ,)
n@cadye’i’? ne’ ni’’a’. Na’ye’ di’ o/né™ k’nigofi’‘hid’ ne” tci’”’
t=) J Do
so will I doin the Te That itis so now Iam watchful the where
work humble then
ise’ Ga’nyo’ dét’ge’ o/né* 6"dwa‘dé"dya’ (e"dwa‘dén’dii’).
thou As soon as T return now will we start.
hast
said,
Omer di“ so 2 snigaewarade saci.”
Now so too 1 I-myself have made
then humble ready.”
” way
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne De‘haé™hiyawa’’ gi‘ wa’ hé"’‘hén’,
Then the did he say,
“TDiyat‘hofyon’nya’ gwa’” o/ni’, na’ye’ di” é@dwa‘hoi’yok,
“Let us two-ourselves make just also, that it is ree will we embark in it,
en
”)
tgagon’da’ hi’ya’ ne’’ son’ga’ &“ha‘hongawé”’‘dat.”
it must needsbe, in fact the some one will he be a volunteer with
others.” e
O’ne" t‘ho’‘ge‘ wi’ hiyat‘hofivon’nya’. Niyoi‘hwagwa‘hi‘
Now then did they-for themselves make a So it’a short time was
canoe.
one ~=wa’hiyat‘honwi’‘si’. O’ne™ ne” De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi‘
now did they the canoe finish. Now the
wihe’‘hén’, “Hau”, ga’e’ nofida’‘swe‘, ne’’ tea’’ ni’yofi‘ ne
did he say, “Come, hither thence do you the where somanyitis the
come,
hehe’, gé"s’ hi’y& sté’’ d’awagno’wé”, dyéi”‘ha’gwa’
he desires, custom- not anything any would L-it fail if so it be,
arily, to do,
ayongya’da’’nha’.”
one-me would appeal to.”
’?
742 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né% hi’ya’ dawa‘sa’wé” wia’hadi’yo”; na’ye’
Then now in fact thence it began did they arrive; that it is
ne” wa’ha’yo” ne” Sk陓hnak’sé” dé ’’se’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “1”
the * did he arrive the u Fox (=Bad Skin) and did he say, Cat
Seat*honga’ya'k. EHeat‘hongawé"’‘dat.” De‘haé™hiyawa’’ei‘
will I volunteer. Will I be with the volunteers.”
wi’hé’‘hén’, ‘Hot’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé” di’, nis’’#‘, n陓sye’’’ ne
did he say, “What thing kind of so thou so wilt thou-it the
then do
o/né™ hé*dwa’yo”?” O/’né™ ne” Sk陓hnak’sé” wia’hé?’‘hé”,
now there will we arrive?” the Fox (=Bad Skin) did he say,
“Na’ye’ ne” mi” ne’ o/né™ he‘di’’ge’ @eayéfids’’nha’ ne
“That it is the the I the now on the ground will it alight the
Ono?’wa’ I” dé ge’‘ewa’ dé"”’se’ @@kdisewa’‘da’.”
it head I will-it-I take up and will I make up lost time
(in speed).””
O’née™ ttho’‘ge niyoi‘hwagwa’‘ha‘ t‘hi‘hadide’nyo” ne’’t‘ho‘
Now then so it was not long just they others are the there
wi’hadi’yo”. O’né™ hé’’ s‘haya’’dada‘ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’ha’yo”
did they arrive. Now again one other person the there did he arrive
na’ye’ ne” Skwa’yé™ haya’dji‘; ’o’né™, ’or‘ké’, ne” na”
that it is the Otter he is called; now, in turn, the Ane
a
wihe’“hén’, “I” o/ni’ ne’’t‘ho! é&khongawé’‘dat.” T‘ho’‘ge‘
did he say, ti3 f also there there will I volunteer beside the Then
others.”
ne” De‘ha陓hiyawa’’eif wa’hé’‘hén’, “Hot’ nonwa‘ho’’dé’ di”
the did he say, “What thing kind of so
then
nis’ n陓sye’ai’? ne” o/né™% ne’’t'tho’ hé*dwa’yo”?” O/’né™* ne”
the so wilt thou-it the now the then there will we arrive?”’ Now the
thou do
Skwa’yé™ da‘hai‘hwa’si’gwa’ dé ’’se’ wa’hé’‘hén’, “Ne” o’né™
Otter did he reply and did he say, “The now
dé"t‘hodisgwa‘di‘ha’dye’ ne’? Ono"’’wa’ dé"’’se’ ga’nyo’ ne’’t‘ho’
thence will he be comuie at top speed __ the it-head and as soon as the there
wit
iz)
”)
é“hayo?’”’da’ ne’’ ganyadak’da’ t‘ho’‘ge’ o’né* I” 7o?‘kev
will he-it bring the it-lake-beside then now I in turn
” “19
hé"s’khawa’ ne Ono” wa’. Ganonwigonwi’‘s‘ho” ni
willagain I-it carry the it-head. It is in the depths of the water the I
d@gadongo’‘da’, hiya’ d’ofsayonkha’’nha’.”’
there will I pass along, not any again would one overtake me.”
Tho’‘ge ne” De‘haé“hiyawa’’ei’ wia7hé’‘hén’, . ‘Hiya’,
Then the did he say, “Not,
hi’yi’, d’agagwe’nyad’ ne” ted’ nidi‘snii‘hwayed’’di‘.”
indeed, any it could do it the where so you suggest doing it.’’
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ hé”’ o’yaé’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’ha’yo”. Na’ye’ ne”’
Then now again it other the then did he arrive. That it is the
Nagaya’’er’ o/né™ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’t‘hada’’nh&’ dé’’se’ wa’ hé'’‘hén’,
Beaver now the there did he stand there and S) did he say,
“1” o/ni’ &khofigawé"’‘dat.” O’né™ ne” De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi‘
eT) also will I volunteer beside the Now the
others.”’
wi’ he’‘hén’, “Hot’ nofwa‘ho’’dé” di” nis’ n陓sye’éi’ ne
did he say, “What thing kind of sothen thethou sowilt thou-itdo the
o’/né™ ne’’t‘ho’ hé*dwa’yo”?” Ogondi’dye’ da‘hai‘hwa’si’gwa”
now the there there will we arrive?” Right away did he make reply
?
|, OE
it a ti we
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 743
dé’’se’ wa’hé’‘hén’, ““Na’ye’ ne” ni” ted’? n&gye’d’ ne’”’ o/né™
and did he say, eee the the I where sowilll-itdo the now
hé"dwa’yo”, na’ye’ ne’ G"gyd’’didak ne’ ga‘hofiwagon’wi'.
there will we arrive, that itis the sa T remain in it the it-canoe-in.
Dyén’‘ha’gwa’ = dé"wado™hwén’djiok I’ ne” nai” Seén/dyi’k
Ifit so be will it needful become I the the will it-the tree cut
that own,
doga’’t oni’ dé"°wado™hwén’djiok ne’? dondak’hawa’ ne’? Ono®’’wa’
nie also will it needful become the thence I-itshould the it-head
wring
@kewe’ny&’, na’ye’ ne’’ hiya’’ ganofiwagon’wa‘ d’agadofigo’‘da’.”
will L-it able to that, the > not it-depths of water in any I-it should pass
do, be, itis through.”
T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né™ ne” De‘ha陓hiyawa’’gif wa’’hé’‘hén’, “O’ne™
Then now the did he say, “Now
hi/yi’ wa’wade’tchéfni’ ne’”’ é“hagwe’nyi’ &™s‘hongniya’dage’ ‘nha’
in fact it has been found the will he able be will they-us two aid.
O’né™ di’ ne’’t‘ho’ ha’degaye’i’ ne’’ ted” nidyo™’.” T*ho’‘ge!
Now sothen the there just it suffices the where so many we are.” Then
o/né™ naye’’-djik t‘hot’/‘ha’ na’ye’ ne’ i‘ha’do*k, “I” o/‘ni’
now all around eee he is that it is the he is saying, Cat » also
talking
@khofigawé™ ‘dat.””, Ské™hnak’sé” o’‘ni’ ne” Skwa’yé™, na’ye’
will I volunteer with the others.” Fox also the Otter, that it is
4) 4) wr) » 99
o” ne” na” wa’hnihén’, ‘Ne’’t‘ho’ 0” ni’d‘ héya’ene’.
too the thethat did they two say, “The there too humble will we two go.”
we
T‘ho’‘geS o’né™ wa’hofidi’dak ne’ ga‘honwagon’wa‘s dé"’’se
Then now did they embark the it-canoe in and
o/né™ hofna‘dén’dyon’ (wa’hon‘dén’dya’).
now they departed.
Ga’nyo’ ~~ wa’hadi’yo” ne” tea” tea‘hwe’‘no’ o/nén
AAS soon as did they arrive the where there it-is-land now
wi’hiyadida’‘ewd’ ne’”’ De‘haé™hiyawa’’ei‘ dé”’’se’ ne”’
did they two debark the and the
Odéndonni’’a‘, dé"’se’ ne’ ted’ ganedag陓hiya’da’ ne’’t‘ho‘
Sapling and the where it-top of the bank the there
wi’t‘hnida’nhi’. Hao™hwi’’i' ne’ Nagaya’’ei’ tchi‘haya’’dada‘
did they two stood. He alone the Beaver the while he remained
aboard
ne ga‘honwagon’wa! dé"’se’ wi’hé’‘hén’, “Thane di”
the it-canoe-in _and did he say, “Here this so then
@wagat‘honwayén dak. E"k’nigonh’‘hi’k ne” dyén’‘ha’gwa’
will I-my canoe keep lying. Will I be on the lookout the if so it be
dédjiyado™“hwén’djio‘s ne” agniyi’dage’‘nha’ agwas’ na’ye’
will you two have need the should I-you two help verily that it is
gén’gwa’ dé@tcgniyas’‘hon’, ne’’t‘ho’ ha’degaye’l’, agwas’,
only (it is just) thence will you-me name, the there it suffices, verily,
ogonda’dye’ ne’’t‘ho’ hé"gyo"’.”
it right away the there there will I arrive.”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ naye’’-djik da‘hada’dya’ (da‘hofida’dya’) dé
Then now everywhere thence he spoke (thence they spoke and
wivhénni‘hén’, “1” o’‘ni’ ofgwadadeyéinéfida’’i. Agwas’, na’ye’
did they say, “We also we have made ourselves ready. Verily, that it is
eéh/ewi? détcewayas’‘hon’.” O’née™ di” wa’hiyadyén”‘ha’ewa’
only (it is just) thence will you name us.” Now so then did they become surprised
ne’’t‘ho‘ hodino™ waedon’dye’, ne’’t‘ho‘ di” gw’ t‘hd
the there their heads above the waters the there so then just there
moved along, (nearby)
)?
D1.
744 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
wi goni‘so’gwa’, ne’ nhwa’tgayo’’dage‘. Skwa’yé™ da‘hadyeé™’ ‘di’
did they come ashore, the all it-game animals are. Otter he the first was
wi’hanedo/dak dé"’’se’ ne’ ted’ ganedag陓hiya’da’ ne’’t‘ho‘
did he ascend the bank and the where it—top of the river—bank the there
r’ha’dyé” dé"’’se’ oni’ wa'hé’‘hén’, “T‘ho’né™, di”, ni’’a‘,
did he seat himself Mins also did he say, “Here this, so then, 1b
égetgo’dak dé"’’se’ agwas’ é"wagadadeyéfinénda’ ik dyén’‘ha’ewd?
will I keep sitting Rar fully will I myself have prepared ifit so be
déwado™hwén’djiok ne’ agye’ndiwi’s.”’
will it become necessary the should I—it aid.’”’
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né ne’ De‘ha陓hiyawa’’gi wa’howé?’‘has ne”
Then now the did he-him remark to the
Odéfidofini’’3‘, “Hau”, gi’sa‘, oné™, di’, diya‘dén’dya‘.”
The Sapling, “Come, therefore, now so then let us two start.”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ wia’hiya‘dén’dya’. Ne’ o’né™ hwa’hni’yo” ne”
Then now did they two start. The now theredidtheytwo the
arrive
te’ tga’‘he’ hiya’’ son’ga’ de’’djié’s. T*ho’‘ge‘ o/né* ne”
where thereit-tree not (itis) someone any still one Then now the
stands goes about.
Odéfidofni’ a! wa’hée’‘hén’, “One ni’3S S eade’nién’dé” ne’”’
It, The Sapling, did he say, “Now humble I will L-it attempt the
odd’ the.” O’ne™ di” wa’hade’nién’dé” ne” a‘hai’’t‘hé” ne’’
will Lit climb.” Now so then did he-it attempt the should he-it climb the
tea” gii/‘he’. Dosgé’*ha’ gwa’’ nigé’* nhe‘hawe’non‘ o’né™
wher? _ it-tree stands. Near it is just so far it is thither he had gone now
he‘da’’ge’ na’dofida’we’, ne’’t‘ho’ dofida‘haya’dé"’’nha’ he‘di’’ge‘
downward thence did it come, the there thence did his body fall ground-on
ne’’t‘ho‘ donsa‘hadé’’nha’. O/’/né™ di” wa’he”hén’, “Hiya’’
the unre there again did he stand, Now so then did he say, “Not,
hé’” ’on’’, d’akgwe’nya&’ ne” agéa’’t‘hé’, swi’’djik hiyi’‘ de’a’wet
it seems per- any I able to do the should T-itclimb, too (because) not any, it feas-
haps, it, am much it is ible is
agaye’na’ ne’ ga‘si’da’’ge’.” T*ho’‘ge’ ne’ De‘haé“hiyawi”’
could it-it grasp the my-feet-on.”’ Then the
wa’hée"’‘hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho‘, hi’ya’, ni’yo‘t ne’’ odofni’ x‘ ne” tei’
did he say, “The there in fact so it is the it infantile is the where
son’‘he’, O/’né™ di’? wa’gadogé"’‘ha’ ne’ ted’ nofwii‘ho’’dé”
thou art alive Now so then did it evident become the where thing
(+thy life).
*a/‘so™ diyodo’”’kd&’ ne’’ tc&’”’ ni’yo‘t ne’”’ sayeé’’’di’. Na’ye’
still it-it lacks the where so it is the thy seek That it is
hi’y&’ ’&’‘so™’ dwagnowé?”’i‘ ne” sayeé’’da’. Na’ye’ hi/yd’ ’&/‘so™
of course still there have I failed the thy flesh. That itis indeed still
dwagnowé"”’i‘ ne” tc&’”’ ni’yo't ne’ s&‘si’da”ge’. Hiyad’', se’”’
there have I failed the where So it is the thy feet-on. Not itis, in fact,
to do
de’ge‘he’‘gwi’ dé"wado™hwéfdjiyo’khe’’—khé"’‘, ho‘, hwéi’do™
any I desired thought, will it necessary become—will it, perhaps, whensoever
gwi”’ ne” aséai’thé” ne’ tca’’ odéndof’ni’. O’né™ di”
just the phouldz shout the where it-tree is growing. Now so then
clim
é"skdogé"s’da’ (for &"kdogé’s’di’). Na’ye’ hi’ya’, diyodo’kdas’’i‘
will I-it amend. That itis ofcourse there it-it has failed
ie hiya’ da’de‘sa‘si’dadi/‘ewén'.”’
he not it is any, two thy feet arches have.’’
HEWITT]
T‘ho’‘ge‘
Then
ne” Odéndonni’’a‘
the It, The Sapling,
De‘haé™hiyawa’’ei‘
o/né™
now
wa hée”’‘hén’,
did he say,
wi haad‘si’’dadat,
did he-his feet hold out,
wa haye’na’
did he-it seize
nhwi’ha’‘hwa’ ne”’
there did he-it bear the
o/né™ = wa’hé?”“hén’,
{now did he say,
ni/yon’ ne” dwagado’kda’’i
so much it did I-it-left un-
is finished
the
ogonda’dye’ dofisasda’’nha*.
right away again do thou stand up.
O’ne"™
Now
tea”
where
(a3 O’ne™
“Now
PIS
ha’gon’wi'
inwards
t‘ho’‘ge‘
then
4) tea’ >}
the where
O’ne™ di”
Now so
then
sia’ ther.
do thou it climb.
dé“hiyatge’‘ha’.
will they two arise.
ne
gi" djik
by and by
hi/yd’
in fact
TY;
Hiya’,
Not,
= PAG eS oS
gi’s‘hée™,
I believe,
4)
nidyadyeid’‘ne’.”’
so thou-I-it, are about
to do.””
o/né™* ne” Odéndonni’’s‘
now the
wi baa’ the’,
did he-it climb.
nonwi‘ho’’dé”
thing, kind of
T‘ho’‘ge‘
tea
Agwas’
Extrenely
o/ne™
now
dé?”’se’
ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION
“Da‘sai‘si’ dadat.”
“Do thou-thy best present.”
o/né™
Now
ha‘si’da’’ge‘ — dé"’’se’
his foot-on
de‘ha‘si’da’‘hé"
two his foot middle
ne
skénno?’’djik
t‘ho’‘ge‘
then the
o/ne™
now
~ ‘
non’we‘,
the place,
wi’ ceyénnénda’ nha’
did-I-its fabric furnish
tei” age‘sén’/ni‘.
where I-it-made.
Hau”
Come,
and
ff)
the
sa‘snd’wé"™
do thou hasten
o/nen
now
ewat’’ thos
just there
(=next)
d’a’dayofgniye’is ne”’
any, should it—us suffice the
for (=no time for)
wi’ t‘ho’nofwaya‘hé"’‘ha’
did he—hasten
o‘sno’we’
peaceful—most it-swift
he’ tg陓 nhwa”he’. Hwa’ha’yo” ne” tea” gaé“hagé™hiya’da’
up high thither did he There he arrived the where it-three-top (is)
go.
o/né™ hiya’ wa’t‘ho’nofiwaya‘hé?’‘ha’ o/né™ wa’hantyonda’gwa’
now, in fact did he make haste now did he it-unfasten
ne”’ Ono?’ wa’ dé"”’se’ wi’ha‘hi’ewa’. Ogondi’dye’
the it-head and did he-it, remove. Right away
donda‘ha‘gwe'né"’‘da’, na’ye’ s‘hanéfite‘haga’dif ha‘ha’wi’ ne”
thence did he come back, that, it is his arm on one side he-it bore the
Ono®’’wa’. Agwas’, gwi’”’ da‘hadagwa’i‘sy&’ na’ye’ ne’’
it-head. Verily, just thence he came straight that it is the
down
o‘snowii’dye’. Niyov‘hwagwa‘ha” one" he‘da’’ge‘
it-swift was in It was a short time now ground-on
moving.
ha’donsa‘hada’’nhd’.
T‘ho’‘ge’ ne’ Odéfdonni’’aé wa’ hé"’hén’,
there again did he stand. Then the did he say,
“Nigé” he” sén’/‘ges da’tgadongo’‘da’. Na’ye’ hi’yi’,
“Tt is extreme hardly any I-it did pass through. That it is, in fact,
agwas’ dago’‘sii’ ne” tci’”’ nigaéf’des, dakdagwai’‘sy&
verily thence did I- the where so it-tree longis, thence did I come
it strip straight
gén’owas’. Ne’’t‘ho’ di” nwa&”’awé"’‘ha’, na’ye’ ne’”’ ga‘si’da’’ge‘
only. The there ee so didit come to pass, that,itis the my foot-on
dawa‘sa’ we”, gnondi’ge’‘s‘ho”’ gyi’di’ge’‘s‘ho”” gwit’’ thos
there did it begin, my legs on-along, my body-on-along sr ore
x
19078°—28——48
746 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
oni’, gagwe’gi’ wa’tgé“hnagén’‘sia’ dé"’’se’ ne” tei’ gi’‘he’
also, it all did it—the skin strip off and the where it—three
stands
ne’’t‘ho‘ 0” na” nwa’ awé’‘ha’. Agwas’, gén’ewa’
the there too ihe so did it come to pass. Verily, only
thal
dedjyoéfidasdat’‘hek, = swa’djik’ dagadya’da‘sno’wat. O/né"™
does yet it tree glisten too much thence I-my body hastened . Now
(= because)
di’”’ sagyo"’’da’ ne”’ agegwa‘ho"’‘na’, na’ye’ ne
so again Lit the I-it went to fetch, that it is the
there brought back
caé™hagé™ hiya’ da’ tgano™ wa‘ha’‘ewa’.”’
it-tree top there it-head was attracted.””
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™ ne”’ De‘haé™hiyawa’’gi‘ wa hehe’,
Then now the did he say,
“Na’ye’ &yont‘hoya’’t‘hak ne’ tea’? higwi’! wa’s‘hwadjiida’dye’,
“That it is will one it use for story- the where towards hence they ohwachira con-
telling tinues on,
néngé’“‘ha‘ ga’‘he’ ne” tea” mnwa’awé?’hd’. Na’ye’ di”
this it is it—tree the where so did it come to pass. That it is so
stands then
@yeyas’t‘hak ne” g陓hné"s’gwa’.”
will one-it keep the it-cottonwood.”’
naming
T‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™, o’né gwa’’, wa’hiyatgé’ha’ ne’? O‘ha’d’
Then now now just did they two arrive the
(from sleep)
dé"’’se’ ne’ ho‘soda‘ha”. Gondadye’”’ wa’ontgat’‘hwi’ ne’”’
and the his grandmother. At once did she-it look at the
y)
ted” _ tga’*he’. Wa’e’gé” ne” hiya’ egwa gat’ed’
where there it tree Didshe-it see the not just anywhere
stands.
de’sgano™ wa ‘hai’. Gonda’dye’ wa’diyago‘héne’‘da’ dé"’’se
any still it-head rests up At once did she ery out and
(there).
wi’diyo™s‘hénthw2’, wa’a”‘hén’, “O’/ne™ ne”’ nén’!
did she wail, did she say, “Now the this
wa’diyonkhi’‘gwé"” ne’? Ono’wa’. Sadya’da‘sno’wat di’’.”’
did they—it—take, from us the it-head. Do thou make haste
n/é ”)
fee "9
Tho’‘ge’ o/né™ wa’diyodi‘hén’e‘da’ na’ye’ ne” gai’sdowa’né™
5 5
Then now did they (an.) ery out that it is the it-noise loud (is)
ne”’ nhwia’tgayo’’dage'‘. O’née™ di’”’ ne” O‘ha’ i’
the every it-game animal in Now sO the
number. then
o/né™ wa‘ho’nigofi‘hiyénda’’nha’ ne” tea’ oné nwa’awé’‘ha’
now did he-it understand the where now so it came to pass
dé’’se’ waihé"‘hén’, “O’né™, hi’ya’, ne’’t‘ho’ nwéa’awé?’‘ha’
and did he say, “Now in fact the there so did it come to pass
tchi-gado"k’ hi’ya’, sté°”’ gwd” niyawé"’‘se’, swa’’djik o’né™
I kept saying of course, some- just soit is about to too much now
thing happen, (= because),
naye’’djik wade‘sa’i‘ ne” I” ayofigei’yo’. Gagwe’gi‘
every where one has made the I ee ea It-entire (is)
ci.
hi’yi’, he’”’tgé" ga’‘haa’ ne” ond’’ga’ dé"’’se’ ne’ o‘ha’a’ onéfi’ya’
of course, up high one-it has the _it-horns() and the it-flint- it-stone.
put (stone)
Hiya’’, di’, ni” sté”’ d’akgwe’ny&’ heyoi‘hwas’twi' agye’nawa’s.
Not, so I some- any should I be able there it-matter least should I-it aid.
then thing to do (is)
”)
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 747
O’ne™ di ha’de‘syi’’dif — sasge/“nha‘. S‘he‘se’”’k ne”’
Now so the-thyself alone do thou-it strive Do thou-one the
then for. pursue
hwiv’hadi’‘hwi’ ne’? Ono?’’wa’.”’
hence they-it have the it-heard.”’
taken
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o/né™® ne’ eya’daigé’’‘dji‘ wa’dyond/‘dat ne’’t‘ho‘
Then now the she the old-bodied did she run (her heels the there
showed)
nhwa’edak’he’ ne’ te&” tgi’‘he’. Ga’nyo’ ne’’t‘ho’ hwi’e’yo™
thither did she run the where there it-tree As soon as the other there did she
stands. arrive
o/né’” wiondyén’‘ha’gwa’ ne’’t’ho’ hadiyandéa’nyo” dé’’se’
now was he surprised the there their tracks appeared around and
o/né™ wa’oftgat’“hwa’ ne” ha’dewadtchot’‘hwas hagwa’di‘
now did she look the to it-sun-set (is) (west) towards
nhe‘hofne’non’. T‘ho’‘ge’ o’né™ di” wa’dyona/‘dat. O/’/né™,
thither they went. Then now so did she run(=showed Now
then her heels).
hi’ya’, wa’hofwadi’‘se’k ne” De‘haé“hiyawa’’gif hofina’tchi’.
in fact did she-them pursue the they are friends.
O’né™ ne” o/né na” o/né gwi” honnat‘hon’de’ o’né™
Now the now the that now just they it heard now
dayedak’he’ _o‘snowii’dye’. Niyoi‘wagwa’‘ha‘ o/né" owt”
thence she comes it-swift is. It-a short time (is) now just
running
dofidayago‘héfe’‘da’, iyon’do"k, ‘“ Dofda‘swa’‘hwii‘ ne’”’? Ono®’”’wa’.”
thence did she cry out, she kept saying, “Thence aly you-it bring the it-head.”’
ack
T‘ho’‘ge o/né™ ne”? Ské"‘hnak’sé” wa’hé’‘hén’, Dd’, das’‘ha‘.
Then now the Fox (—Bad Skin) did she say, “Lo, thence do thou-
it me-give.
I” hek’haiwa‘ ne” Ono’wa’. Giyand’we’, se”, ni’a’. Hiya’!
I hence let me the it-head. ITamswiftof infact, I humble. Not, it is
bear it foot,
d’ofisayonkha’’nha’ ne” ni’’.””’ = T‘ho’“‘ge’ ne”? ~Odéndonni’’ a‘
can she-me overtake the the I.” Then the
wa’ honwe"’‘has, “Hiyd’’ hoi’‘, d’agat‘hon’dat ne” Is’ ha’‘s‘hawa’
did he-him say to, “Not perhaps, any should lit agreeto the thou hence shouldst
thou-it bear
ne’? Ono" wa’, swa’’djik, hi’ya’, oyén’det s’nigon‘ha’’t‘ha’, na’ye’
the it-head, too much of course it plain is thou-it dost ridicule, that it is
ne’ des’nigonhi’’sia’.”’
the thy-mind is double.”
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’? Djiokda’gi’? wi’hé"’‘hén’, “1” dé” hek’hiwd'.
Then the Gray Squirrel did he say, Chie then let me-it take.
He’tgé"’‘s‘ho™ ni” dégéf‘hiya’kho"’‘né’ ne” o/né* @kha’wi’ ne”
Up high along the L will I-the trees, go crossing the now will I-it be the
bearing
Ono"’wa’. Hiya’’ d’ofisayonkhi’‘khwa’ ne” Ono?’ wa’.”
it-head. Not any again they-it take from us the it-head.’’
Tho’‘ge’ ne”? Odéndonni’’ sé wa’hé’‘héen’, “Ne’’t‘hoS ha’degaye’i’
Then the did he say, ““The there it suffices
(thus)
ne” tea” nigé”, hi’yi’, dyén”ha’ewa’ dewado™hwén’djiok.
the where so far it is, in fact ifso it be will it become necessary.
Ne’’t‘hoge’ o/né™ ha/‘si’? @sewaye’ndiwa’s.”
At that time now not before will you-me help.”
Niyoi‘hwagwa‘ha’’ o/né™ ne’ Odéfidonni’ a’ wa’hatdd’ca’ ne”’
So it time short is now the did he-it notice the
748 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH, ANN. 43
y)
dosgé‘ha’ o/né™ nivedak’he’ ne gokstén’’a‘, —t‘ho’‘ge‘
near it is now here she is running the she old woman is, then
o/né da&‘ha‘ewis’hé” wa’t‘haa’‘dat. Ne’’t‘hof gwia’’t‘ho‘
now did he-his full force mat forth did be run. The there just there
hadidakhenon’dye’ ne’’ hofina’tchi’, he’tgé"’’ oni’ ne”? Djiokda’gi’
they ran aiplone severally the they friends are, up high also the Gray Squirrel
dé’’se’ ne” Skaya’nis de‘hadié“hiya’kho"’‘ne’ ne” ted”
and the Fisher they acrossed from tree to tree in the where
their flight
ni‘hodigwe’nyo™ t‘hofind‘gwis’‘hé’’ ne’’ a‘honwa‘hnondi’dye’ ne’”’
so as they able were they-their full peng the should they-him follow closely the
put fort!
Odéndonni’’a’. Hegagonda’‘gwif dosg陓ha‘ niyedak’he’ ne”
5 It is gradual near it is there she ran the
eya’ dage’dji‘, i’no™ ne” na” nhwa’héni’ne’. T‘ho’‘geS o/né™
she the ancient one, far the thethat there they were going. At that time now
ne” De‘ha陓hiyawa’’gi‘ wa’ her’ ‘hén’, “Hate’ewi‘, o/né™
the . did he say “Behold, now
da‘sa‘gwis’‘hé™. Djiya’go™.” O’né™ = di’”’_— de‘hnidjiya’é*
do thou use thy strength. Do thou have courage.” Now so then two they two are
da‘hiya‘gwis’‘hé” wa’t‘hiyad’‘dat, Odéfdonni’a‘ dé’’se’ ne”
did they two exert their did they two run, and the
strength
De‘ha陓hiyawé’’gi‘.
Hofsa‘hni’yo” ne” ted’ nofi’we' tga‘hofiwa’yé” ne” ted”
There again they two the where the place there it-canoe lies the where
returned
xr
t‘haya’’dada‘ ne” Nagaya’’gi’ o’né ogofda’dye’ sa‘hiyadi’dak
there he aboard is the Beaver now at once again they embarked
ne’ ga‘ hohwagon’wa‘. Tho’‘gef ne”? = De‘ha陓hiyawi”’
the it-canoe in. Then the
wi’he™‘héa’, “One” hi’ya’, hwa’ga‘he”’e gagwe’gi‘ ne”’ ted” nidjon’‘
did he say, “Now, in fact it time has ny it-all the where so many as}
you are
dagniya’dige’nha‘’. Is’ Odéidofini’’ a‘ &sea’we’ dé 1S Osan
do you-us two aid. Thou wilt thou paddle sia thou also
d@tchénnidéiwa’‘da’.”’ T‘ho’‘ge ne’’t‘ho‘ hadak’he’ ne”
wilt thou-it steer.” Then the-there he ran the
Skwa’yé™ dé"”’se’ wa’hadi’dak dé”’’se’ wa’hé™’‘hén’, “1” o/‘ni’
Otter and did he embark and did he say, oT also
Seye’nawa’s. Et"kga’we’ nia‘. O’né* o’yd’ e” s‘hadak’he’,
will I-it aid. Will I paddle ie? Now it other again again he ran,
Ano”’kyé™ ’o"‘ké™, dé°’’se’ wa’hadi’dak dé’’se’ wa’hé"‘hén’, “1”
Muskrat in turn, and did he embark and did he say, est
oni’ “gye’niwa’s. Etkga’we’ ni’a‘.”
also will I-it aid. Will T paddle fi?
T‘ho’‘gef o’né™ sa‘honit‘hofiwa‘ha’ewa’ dé ”’se’ o/né, hi’yi’,
Then now again their canoe they saaked off and now in fact
wi hadiga’we’ heyo‘he’‘ det‘hofina‘gwis’‘hé”. Agwas’, né”* gwi”
did they paddle to the limit did they toe strength put forth. Verily, this just
nigé”’‘ én’ daye’yo™ ne”’ tea”
Ds, e’
n/)
wa’hadi‘hofiyon’dye’ o’né
so ae itis there were they propelling the now there she arrived the where
canoe along
niyot‘hnego’kda’dye’ ne” eya’dagé"’‘dji‘, heyo‘he’’ gona’khwé"’’i‘,
there it-water’s pike along (=shore the she, the ancient bodied, to the limit she angry was,
along)
dé"”’se’ o/ne™ wi’a/*hén’, “Odéndonni’as‘, dagidén’a‘, dondas’‘ha*
and now did she say, st do rae pity, thence do thou
bring it
9
newitt] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 749
ne’ swa‘ha’wi’ ne’’ ono™’wa’.” Hiya’ de’t‘ho’didi‘ ne” na”.
the you (pl.) it are the it-head.”’ Not thence did he reply the the
bearing that.
O’né™ t‘ho’‘ge‘ wa’a’‘hén’, ‘“Nagaya’’gi’, dagidén’ ii‘, dofida‘sak’da’t,
Now then did she say, bs eg ae thou-me nites thence do thou it turn
back,
43
s’, hi’ya’, de‘séfinidéhwa’‘di‘.” Hiya’‘ ste"”’ de’ha’wéi' ne” na’’.
thou of course, thou-it art steering.” Not anything any he replied the the that.
O’né™ t‘ho’ge! wa’a’‘hefi’, “Skwa’yé™, is’ dé” a‘sgidéi’a’.
Now then did she say, ‘‘ “ Otter thou _ then, shouldst thou-
me pity.
Dofida‘sak’di’t.”” Hiya’* sté”’ de’ha’wén‘’. O’ne™ hi’yd’ t‘ho’‘ee!
J 5
Thence do thou it turn Not anything any he replied. Now in fact then
back.”
wi’a"“hén’, “Ano”’kyé™, dagidén’éi‘, dofda‘sak’da’t;” t‘ho’‘ge‘
did he say, “‘Muskrat, do thou me pity, thence do thou it turn back,” then
da‘hai‘hwa’sé’gwa’ © wa’hé’‘hén’, ‘“Niyo’.” T*ho’ge’ ne”
did he reply did he say, “so be it.” Then the
De‘ha陓hiyawa’’ei‘ wi’ he” ‘hén’, Omer: hi’ya’ is
did he say, “Now indeed, thou
we’sadei‘hwayén’‘ha‘s; o’né™ hi’yd’ sd&‘sadei‘hwat’wa'‘dai’ ne” tei”
has thee, guilt come upon; now indeed, didst thou the matter miss the where
(=make an error)
di‘sada’dyi’. O’né™ di’ nis’ gwi’’t‘ho’ @tcadida’‘ewa’. Hiv’
> >
thou didst reply. Now sothen pe just there wilt again thou be back. Not
thou
di’, nis’’a‘ d’aesdi‘hwagwe’nyonk ne” sté°”’ na‘sadye’a’ ne’’ tea”
so thou, any shouldst thou-to do, beable the anything so thou-it the where
then, wouldst do
o“hwéidjiya’de’. Diyot’goft nis’’a‘ o‘hnegakdon’dye’ &™se’’sek.”’
it-earth extant is. It always thou it-waterside along wilt thou continue
going around.”
”)
T‘ho’‘ge‘ o’né™ sa‘hofiwaya’dada’ ‘wei’ ne” Ano’’kyé™,
Then now again did he-his body unload the Muskrat.
T‘ho’‘hef ne’? Skwa’yé™* ~=wa‘ho’da‘dén’‘ha’—s ne”’—s tea”
Then the Otter he was frightened the where
nwa awe" ‘ha’ dé”’se’? o/né™ wa’hé’‘hén’, “O’ne* 0” ni’’s‘
so it came to pass and now did he say, “Now too I
@sgadida”‘gwa’ O’né™ ne”? De‘ha陓hiyawi’’ei! wa’hé’‘hén’, “Is’
will again I-myself Now the did he say,
debark.”’
hi’‘yi’ = &séfino®’‘don’. Hiya’ se” hi’y&’ nis’ — sofi’ga’
in fact wilt thou decide. Not in fact, indeed the thou some one
de’esa‘hoigaya’’gi‘. Diyot’gont, di” nis’’a‘ é“sé’da‘dén”’ik dé"”’se’
any, one-thee, a volunteer, has Always, so the thou wilt thou be and
made. then, afraid
diyot’gont &"sada‘se’‘dik na’ye’ ne’”’ anonwagon’wa‘
5 ’ D>
always wilt thou thyself keep hiding, that it is the it-water-depths in
dé“sadawénye’’t‘hak.”’ O’ne™ = di” wa’hadida‘’gwi’.
there, wilt thou-it make thy habitat.” Now so then gad he himself disembark.
Ne’’t‘ho’ ne”’ ni” hwa’hofina‘’do"’s ne’”’ eyd’dagé"’‘dji‘, ne’’t‘ho‘
The there the the there it-them disappeared to the she the ancient bodied, the there
i
that
dedyago‘héne’t‘ha’ dé’se’ ne’’ttho’ —deyo™s‘hént‘hwa’‘he’s.
there, hither she keeps crying out and the there she Bes about weeping.
Na’ye’ di’’ ne” o’/né™ sa‘hadi‘honwa’di’’nha’ ne” ted’? non’wes
That it is so the now again their canoe came to land the where the place
then
t‘hofina‘dén’dyo™ o/né* ne’ De‘ha陓hiyawé’’gif wa’hé"’‘héi’,
there they started from now the did he say,
750 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
“Oné™ hi’yd’ sedwa’yo”. | O’né™ di” is’ ne’? Nagaya’’gi’, i/‘sowd’
Now infact again we have Now so you the Beaver, it much is
returned. then (thou)
wi’seihwagwe’nya’ ne” ted’ wa’sye’ndwa’s, Omer Vidi?
didst thou-it accomplish the where didst thou-it aid. Now ' =
en
wi’ goni‘hwis’’a‘s. Ensi’s‘hasdé™sayén’dak, ni’ye’ ne”’
do I thee a commission Wilt thou strength have (=power), that it is the
give.
é“sagwe/nyofk ne’”’ dé"tchéfino"’‘do™ ne’’ o‘hne’ganos dé"’’se ne”
wilt thou be able the wilt thou-it water rule the it-fresh water and the
tea” o“hwéndjiya’de’.
where it-earth.
Agwas’, is’ é™séfno"’‘do” dd’ga’t, gi’’s‘hé™%, 6"se’i’
Verily, than wilt thou decide it if it be, T believe, wilt thou-
it wish
gado“hwéndjiyonnya’’da‘, dd’ga’t, gi’s‘hé™, o/ni’ &™se’i?
I-myself earth make for, with it, if it be, I believe, also wilt thou
it wish
gat‘hnegé’ewa’‘da’, agwas’ gwd’ o/ni’ ne’ tca’’ is’
I store water verily just also the where thou
nidi‘sa’nigofi‘ne’’dé™ ne’’t‘ho’ né"yawé?’‘ha’.”’
such as thy mind thinks the there so will it come to pass.’”
Thos ge; y) Omen ne” De‘ha陓hiyawa’’gif = wa’hada’dyi’
Then now the did he speak
wa’ hé’‘hén’, “O’née™ di” Ssge‘séi’nya’ na’ye’ ne’”’ &djyogwek’he’
did he say, ““‘Now so will again lit make thatitis the will again it be
hen whole
ne” goyeé?’d% ne’ akhind’hda’.” Tho’ge’ o/né hi’yd’
the her body the our mother.” Then now in fact
sa‘ha‘séf/nyi’, mna’ye’ ne’ aon’ya’ wi’ha‘séfi/nya’’di’. Ne’”’
again did he-it make, that it is the mist did he-it use to make it. The
o/né™ wa’hayénnénda’’nha’ on é™ wi’ he?’ ‘hén’, “O’/ne™
now did he-it complete now did he say, ““Now
sageyénnénda’’nha’. O’né™ sayogwek’he’ ne’’ sayeé"’d& o/‘ni’
again I-it have completed. Now again it whole is the thy flesh also
ne’ sa’s’hasdé"’‘sai’, o’né™ gagwe’gi’ sa‘sye’nd’. Na’ye’ hi’ya’
the thy power, now it-all aeain whourlt That it is in fact
ne”’ deyagyadé™hnoni’dii’ is’ da‘sadyeé"‘da’ wi’hyagaéi’nyd’ ne’”’
{the my brother thou _ thou the first wast did he-thee ruin the
t‘ho’né™ o™hwéfidjiya’’ge’, na’ye’ o/‘n1’ ne”’ i‘sowa’
here this it-earth-on, that it is also the it much
wi’hagaéh’nya’ ted” niga’/‘hwaé’ ne’”’ o™hwéfidjiya’de’. ’&’‘so™
did he-it ruin where so Hee it the it-earth extant is. Still
olds
on’ i’‘sowad’? = &“s‘hadei‘hwat’wa’‘di’ ~—s tea’? n€"yofninis’‘he’
also it much is will again he do wrong where so will it last (long)
&yo™hwéfdjiya’dek.”
will it-earth extant be.” A
O’/ne™ di” akn6’‘ha’ wi’ goni‘hwis’’A‘s na’ye’ ne”
Now ne my mother do I-thee commission that it is the
en
é“sadei‘hon’dé”, na’ye’ ne”’ 陓sadei‘honda’‘ewa’ ne”
wilt thou a task take up, that it is the wilt thou a task take up, for it the
dé“se‘snye’’nha’ ne’ tci” o™hwéndjiya’de’, o’ni’ ne”
wilt thou-it attend to the where it-earth extant is, also the
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION ail
odénnu‘gén’nié ha’de’yo™, o’dya’k ganiyont’‘ha’ ne” o‘hya’”’,
it-grasses grow all kinds, some it bears the it fruit,
oni’ ot‘hondoninya”hén’ o’dya’k ganiyont’hi’ ne” o‘hyd’,
also it shrubs grow, some it bears the it fruit,
oni’ ga’‘ho’dé’ na’ye’ ne” nhwi’teaén’dage‘, o’dya’k
also it-forest stands that it is the all it tree(s) in kind, some
ganiyont’‘ha’ ne’’ o’‘hya’, o’‘ni’ ne” t‘higade/nyo” ne’’t‘ho‘
it bears the it-fruit, also the just they are different the there
gondonnya”‘ha’ ne” tea” o™hwéndjiya’de’, ne” on’gwe' dé"’’se’
they keep growing the where it earth extant is, the human and
” = , beings
ne’ gofidi’yd’.
the they (an.) game
animals are.
Na’ye’ di’ ne’’t‘ho’ nofi’wet wa’goni‘hon’dé” ne” ted” non’we‘
That it is a the there the place do I-thee commission the where _ the place
then
o’/né™ §=e"swa'dai‘ha’’da’, Stgayei’khe’ ne” &djyo’dai‘hé"’‘ha’;
now will again it-it to be hot, will it be right the will it again be hot (warm);
cause,
na’ye’ ne” na” ne’’t‘ho’ né“haye’ié’ ne’ Endékha’ Gai‘gwadye’s,
that it is the ape the there so will he it do the Diurnal It-Sun goes about,
that
na’ye’ ne” na’ye’ gagwe’gi' gal‘hwayénda’‘ewi' ne
that it is the that it is it all it-matter rests with the
d陓ha‘hat‘he’’da’ ne” ted’? niwén’des dé’’se’ &*ha’daitha’da’
will he-it to be light cause the where so it day long and will he-it to be hot,
is cause
”
ne’’t‘ho’ dé"dwa‘sa’wé” ne” ted o’/né™ d陓swatde’ni’ ne
the there will there it begin the where now will again it-itself, the
change
tei” ni’yo‘t ne’ wénda’de’, géfigwide’‘djik ga’ya’dji‘, ne’’t‘ho‘
where so it is the it-day extant is, it-spring early it is called, the there
o” na” gwa’’t‘ho’ dé"dwa‘sa’wé” ne’ ted’? niyo‘hna’ne’di’
too the just there will it begin the where so it-fold is in number
that (next)
o/né™ dé"tgondon’nya’ 7a’/‘se’, dé*dwadyeé"’‘di’ dé"wawé™ha’yé”,
now thence they will grow up new, will it first be will the flowers have
ne’’t‘ho’ @"yofinadonni‘ha’dye’ ne’ ted’? nigé’! gagwe’gi‘
the there will they themselves continue the so far it is it all
growing
&"watchis’’4’ ne’ o’/né™ Ssgana’nos’da’ ne’ tea” o™hweéiidjiya’ge’.
will they ripen the now will again it-it to be where it-earth-on.
cold, cause
(232
,)
y)
bi
”)
)
Na’ye’ di’ dé@sniye’nd’, na’ye’ ne’ Ofgwa‘djiya’’s‘ho”’, ne’’
That it is so will you two co- that it is the Our Elder Brother, the
then labor,
Endek’ha’ Gai’‘gwa’.
Diurnal Tt Sun.
Ne”’t‘ho’ non’we' ne’ nis’ 6™sadei‘hon’dé” ne’ o/’né™
There the place the the thou wilt thou a task take up the now
@diyo’’gak ne” ted’? o™hwéndjiya’de’, t‘ho’‘ge’ is’ ’o/‘ge”
willit dark (night) the where it-earth extant is, then thou in turn
become
tea’ dai‘ha’’di’ dé"”’se’ dé™se‘hat‘he’’da’ dé"”’se’
wilt thou-it to be again and wilt thou-it be light, cause and
warm, cause
é“setchadén’‘t‘hak. Na’ye’ oo” ni’ 6™s‘heyenawaé’’sek ne”
wilt thou-dew to fall, cause. That is is also wilt thou-one keep helping the
G2 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
‘) ,)
gi’nigon’ ‘hi’ ne o™hwéndjiya’’ge’ déyagodawéi’yek ne
it-mind (is) the it earth-on will one to travel, continue
s‘heya’de’ dé"‘s‘heno™hén’‘khwak.”’
thy grand- wilt them-thou greet by it.’’
children
y)
T‘ho’“‘gef o’né™ hwa’ha’gwa’ ne’ tkwé’‘da’ niyo’éiino’’dé™
Then now did he-it get the it red (is) such its stem kind of is
dé"’’se’ o’né™ wa’ha‘gaige’wa’. T‘ho’‘ge’ o/né* wa’hé?’‘hén’,
and then did he-it-bark scrape off. Then now did he say, “
“One di’? 6"sa‘dén’did’. Na’ye’ dis mis as ne”’
“ Now so then wilt thou start going. That it is then the thou the
ha’dewatchot”“hwas hagwa’‘ é@"yofdo"’‘hek ne’’t‘ho‘ ha&gwadi’
there it immerses itself towards will one keep saying the there its side
go's’ 6"dwa‘sai’wé” ne” ase’ Syesatgat’‘hw& ne’’ s‘heyade’
custom- will it begin the it-new will one-three see the thy grand-
arily, children
dé"s‘heno™hén’‘khwak. Na’ye’ ne”’ skénno?’’a‘
wilt thou-them greet thereby, That it is the slowly
é"disatgénisdi‘ha’dye’. Na’ye’ egwa’’ttho’ ne” skénno?’’i‘
dD . DoD
wilt thence thou approach slowly. That it is just these the ‘ slowly
é"sadodi‘ha’dye’. Na’ye’ ne” o’ga‘ho"k ne’’t‘ho’ hagwi’*
wilt thou grow in size That it is the it-might become the there towards
gradually repeatedly
hé™satgwi'di‘ha’dye’ ted’? higewa’di‘ nit’‘he’s ne” Endeka”’
t=)
thither wilt thou be moving, where towards then he goes about the Diurnal
Gad‘gwa’dye’s. Na’ye’ di’’ ne’”’ o’né™ ne’’t‘ho’ hé’‘syo”’ t‘ho’‘ge‘
It-Sun goes about. That itis then the now the there there wilt thou then
arrive
o/né™ Stgayel’’khe’ ogwe’gi ne’’ @yesateat’‘hwi’, o/né™’
now will it be exact it-whole (is) the will one-three look at, now
di” ne’’t‘ho’ hagwa’di‘ dé"tca‘dén’dia’, ne’’t‘ho’ gwa’’t‘ho‘
so then the there towards thence wilt thou again start, the there just there
né*djiyawé’‘ha’, na’ye’ ne’ skéfno™’& né’* hagwa’'
so will again it come to that it is the slowly this direction
pass,
dé"disatgwi'di’ha’dye’. Na’ye’ ne’”’ o’ga”‘ho"k dé"diyodo’kda’dye’
thence wilt thou-thyself keep That it is the it-might comes thence will it grow towards
moving. repeatedly an end
ted’? ni’yo‘t ne” tca’’ de"yesaga’‘ha’k. Agwas’, ne’’t‘ho‘
where so it is the where will one’s ages rest on thee Verily, the there
hé’teyo” tei’ nofi’we' dé"tca‘défdiyo"’‘sek. Na’ye’ ne
there wilt thou where the place thence wilt thou keep starting from. That it is the
return
*a/‘sé"" niwa‘son’dage’ ne’”’ hiyd’‘ t‘honsayesa’gé’. Na’ye’ ne’”’
three so its night many the not any again one- thee would That it is the
number see.
gaye’if wado?’’t‘ha’ o/né™ hé” ’a/‘se’ dé"tceaidon/nya’. Gado’gé™
t=hoP 4 fo}
fourth it is again new thence wilt thou-again It certain is
start to grow.
ne” tea’ n陓saha‘he’djik, na’ye’ gai‘hofinya’‘ha’ @gagwe’nya’
”)
,
the where so will thy path long be, that it-the matter causes will it able be
ni’ye’ &vyago nigohhida’‘ewik ne”’ s‘heya’de’
that will it-one’s mind reverence the thy grand-children
dé™s‘heno™hén”’khwak. Gwi’’ t‘higé™tei‘hwé™ dé"ye‘saga”/‘ha’k
wilt thou-them greet thereby. Just it is in full sight will one-thee look at, ever
ne”’ tea” @satgénisdi'ha’dye’. Na’ye’ di”
the where wilt thou-thyself increasingly manifest. That then
é"yagode’nyéndé™s‘hénda’‘ewik —ne”’ tea’ dé"watdenyo?’‘sek
will one-them guide, thereby the where will it-itself, to change, continue
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION wos
ne’”’ ted’ degeni’’ né"yo’‘dik ne’ tci’’ wéfida’de’. Na’ye’ di’”’
the where two it is so will it be the where it-day it. That then
ne” gadd’gé™ gén’ewd’ n@gagis’dek ne” Swa’dai‘ha’’dd’ ne”
the it certain is only so (long) willit endure the will it-it to be hot, cause the
gagen‘nha’’ge = @*gaya/djik. Na’ye’ gwda’’t‘ho‘ ne” o/né*
it-summer-at will it be called. That it is just there (next) the ae
ésganad’nos’da’ gadd’gé" 0” na” ne’”’ né@gagiis’dek, na’ye’ ne”
will again it-it to be it certain is too the the so (long) will it endure, that it is the
eold, cause that
go‘sia’’ge’ Sgaya’djik. Na’ye’ di” tc&”’ né"yawé?”’ha’.
it-snow at will it be called. That it is So then, where so will it come to pass.
(=winter)
Ne’’t‘ho‘ non’we‘ é™sasdeis’dik ne’ 0’né™ &"yo’’gak (=dé"dyo’’gak),
The there the place will thou-it, have, the now will it dark
in charge (night) be,
is’ gé"s’ na’ye’ dé™se‘hat‘he’’da’, ne’’t‘ho’ nésa’s‘hasdé“si’’ks
thou custo- that it is wilt thou-it to be light, the there so, will thy power, large, be .
mnarily cause,
ne”’ &yogwe’nyo"k dé"yo‘hat‘he’’dik, hiya’‘ 1 ‘sowa’
the will it able be will it-it to be light, cause, not it is it much
t‘hofidayo’’gak. Na’ye di’, ne’’t‘ho’ né*yo’‘dik ’&’‘so™
thence it night become. That itis sothen, the there (thus) so will it be while
@yagoya’dige’nhé"k ne’? o™hwéfdjiyaé’’ge’ dé"yagodawén’nyek
will it-one’s body continue toaid the it-earth-on will one continue to travel
ne’? on’gwe‘. Na’ye’ ne” sté”’ gwa” détgdi‘hwayed’’da’ ga’éh
the human being(s). Thatitis the any- just will it matter devise some-
thing where
gw” non’we' dé"dyago”’gak &"yogwe’nyonk 7a’‘so™
just the place there will it-one become will it able be still
night on
®yont‘ha‘hi’né” ne’ tea’ na’dé"yo‘hat‘he’’dik gagwe’nya’
will one-their way pursue, the where so much will it-it to be light, cause will it able be
skén’no™” 6"yénno™donnyo™ ‘hek hé"teye’yo” tcd” noh’we*
peaceful will one keep on thinking there will one arrive where the place
niyei‘hwagwéfni’yo’.”
there one-possessions has.”
Tho’‘gef o’/né™ ne’ De‘ha陓hiyawa’’gif wahé’‘hén’, “O’née
At that time now the did he say, “Now
wa’ wadeyénnénda’ nha’. O’ne™ ol‘hwagwe’ gi‘
did it-itself become completed. Now . it matter entire
wesi’nigon‘haiyénda’ nha’. Na’ye’ hi’ya&’ wa’de‘sniye’nd’ ne’’
didst thou an understanding of it, obtain. That itis of course, do you ron co-hold the
Etdekha” Gaa’‘ewa’. Da’ na’ye’” di” ~—ne”’_— dedjiya’é™
Diurnal It-Sun. There that it is so then the they both
&yagowéfnnayén’dak ne’? ohwéfdjiya’’ge’ endge’e’. Na’ye’
will one-a word have (=right to the it-earth-on one dwells, That it is
speak)
teai’”’ né"yo’‘dik ne’ ga’éi gwa” niga’a’ tea’ sniyd’da’de’
where so will it be the somewhere just there it is where your two bodies are
né"yondwéinayed’’da’, na’ye’ di” é@"yondo"’‘hek E"dek’‘ha’
so will one-one’s words direct, that it is so then will one keep saying Diurnal
Gaii’‘gwa’, S‘hedwa’’djiya’ ne” Ho‘ské™ ige‘da‘go/na‘.
It-Sun, He, Our Elder Brother, the He, the Great Renee (= War-
Dyén”‘ha’hwi’ is’ @yesat‘ho’yi’ na’ye’ S"yondo™‘hek Akhi‘so’di‘,
If it so be thou will one-thee talk that it is will one-it keep Our Grandmother,
about saying
754 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
?A‘soni‘he’kha’ Wé™hni’’da’. O/’né™ di” S¢at’ga’k ne” t‘hd’né,
Nocturnal It-moon is present. Now sothen will I-it leave the here-this
o“hwéndjiya’’ge‘, ne’’t‘ho’ di” hégyé"” eya’dik’da’ ne’ on’gwet,
it earth-on, the there so then pete will I- their body beside the human being
it pu
na’ye’ Sgaya’digwénni’yoks, na’ye’ @yondyed’daik’hwak, na’ye’
that it is will it be one of the chief things, that it is will ones-it keep using as a that it is
means,
wi’ena’do" ‘ewa’ ne gayé”’ ewdno/we'sgwa’2d/na‘ ne
have I-it designated by it the it-tobacco-great precious (is) the
oyé’ewa”on’we'; na’ye’ é"yofdyed’dak’hwak ne’ of’gwe',
it-tobacco-native; that it is will one-it keep using, as a means the human beings,
ga’/éh_ gwa”’ nofi’we’ né"yondyed’’da’ ne” tea” o™hwéfdjiya’de’.
some- just the place will one-one’s self, face the where it-earth extant is.
where
Do’gi’t o’‘ni’ na’ye’ ne’’ he’t’‘gé diyo™hwéfdjiya’de’, na’ye’
If it be, also that itis the up high there it earth-extant is, that it is
di’ tc&’’ né"yeye’‘hak ne’’ sté”’’ gwa’’ nofiwi‘ho’’dé’
so where so will one-it keep the any- just thing kind of (is)
then doing thing
@yonno™don’nyo"’, ga’éi gwa’’ nof’wef n@gayei’’di’ ne?’
will one-it think repeatedly, some- just the peace so will it-its course the
where take
go’nigonh’‘ha’. Na’ye’ gé"s’ dé"ye’‘gw&’ ne’’ eyid’dak’dd’
one’s mind. That it is custom- will one-it take the one’s body beside
arily up
ne’’ oyé"’gwa’on’we', na’ye’ 陓ye’‘hwa’k ne’’ o/né™
it lies the it-tobacco native, that it is will one-it hold the now
(time)
@dyewénnitgé”’ nha’ ne’’ ga’eh gwa’’ nof’wes né"yondyed’’da’
will one-words utter the SOIns: just the place so will one-one’s self
where
h@yo‘héng#’ dik, t‘ho’‘ge’ o’/né™ ne’’ tea’’ godega’’di‘ ne’’t‘ho‘
will it audible be, then now the where one a fire has the there
kindled
hé"yago’di’. Na’ye’. ewéfi’nd’ &wa’do?’. Ne’’t‘ho' di’
will one-it cast. That it is one’s word will it become. The there
n/é ,) )
4)
4)
so
then
né"yo’‘dik ne’’ tead’’ nigagds’de’ ne’’ tca’’ o™hwéfdjiya’de’.
so will it be the where so long it endures the where it-earth extant is.
Na’ye’ ®&yodyea’da’‘gwik. Da! o’né™ ne’’ I’’, na’ye’ ne’’
that it is will it be done thereby. There! now the i, that it is the
ni’’ agadyed’da’‘ewif ne’’ diyodyeé"’di‘ odofinyd’s’’if ne’’
I did I-it make use of the it the first was it has grown the
t‘ho’né o™hwéndjiya’’gef ne’? ~— tkwé"’‘da’ ~— niyo’éfino’’dé™’.
here this it earth-on the it red (is) So it-rod(s) are in color.
O’né“ di’’ agade‘sa’’i na’ye’ ne’ Sgonyed’da/‘gwé?’.
Now ao : IT ready am that it is the will I thee, deal, thereby.
then bs
O’ne"™ é“sa‘dén’diad’, ne’ ’t‘ho‘ nhé?’‘se’ ~~ ted’’ non’‘we
Now wilt thou depart, the there thither wilt where the place
thou go
wa’goni‘hon’dé"’. Hiya’ di’’ sof’ga’ d’ayegwe’ny%’ ne’’
did I-thee commission. Not it is so someone any could one able to the
then do it, be
v=
d’ayetchiyeén’nyo”’ ne’’ wa’de‘sniye’ni’ ted’’ nigé’’ ne’? I’?
any one-you should overreach the did you eyost take in where sofaritis the T
charge
dé"tewénnitgé” nha’ ne ga’éh =gwa’”’ n&eé™ha’dye’. Na’ye’
will I the word utter the some- just as will things continue That it is
where on.
4)
”) )
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 755
di’ ni&’’ gwa’’t‘ho* sgadyei’da’‘ewa’ ne’’ tkwer’‘da’
so the just there will I it make the it-red (is)
then that use of
niyo’éfno’’dé"’.”’
such it-rod(s) are in color.”
T‘ho’‘ge o’né™ wa’ha’gwH’ ne’’ hode‘sa’’i'. O/’né* di?’
Then now did he-it take the he-it has pre- Now so
pared, then
odjisda’’ge‘ hwa’ho’di’, t‘ho’‘ge’ o/né wa’he’‘hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho‘
it-fire-on there did he it then now did he say, “The there
cast,
hwia’sadya’don‘di‘, o’né hi’yi’ wi’gayé’ewae’de’.” O’/ne™
thither do thou thy body now of course it-smoke arises.’” Now
cast,
hi’ya’ ne’’t‘ho’ wa’ondya’don’di’. O’né"’ wa’gayé’ewagete’gwa’
indeed the there did she-her body cast. Now it-smoke arises
he’’tké"’ nhwé’’we’. T‘ho’‘ge’ o’né’* ne” De‘haé™hiyawi’ ’gi‘
up high thither did it go. Then now the
wa’ he ‘héfi’, “O’né*, hi’ya’, Odéfdofni’’s‘ dé ’’se’ ne’’
did he say, “Now, of course, and the
dedjiyadine’gé™ o/né™ é@"djiyé’nigon‘ha’e"’. Oithwagwe’gis hi’ya’,
you two mates now will you two-your minds keep It-matter entire, of course,
are on it.
we’sni’nigof‘hayéfida’ nha’ ted’? nwa’awé"’‘ha’. Na’ye’ di’’
did you two-it comprehend where so did it come to pass That it is ee
en
tea né"yawe“ha’ ne’’ ’&’‘sé niwéfh’dige’ nigé’ ne’’
where so will it come to the three so—it days— so far it is the
pass ;: many, are
&djiyé’nigon‘hi’é”, dd’, gw’? neyawe’ ‘ha’. Dyén’‘ha’ewi’
will you two keep watching, what, just so it will come to pass. If it so be
ne’’ is’ Aw陓haniyof’déi’ é"satdd’ga’ o’yd’ né"yawé"’‘ha’ ne’’
the thou It, Flower Attached wiltthou-it notice it-other so will it act the
ted’’ son’‘he’, na’ye’ ne’’ é“satgat’“‘hwa’ ’&’‘se’ @"djyofidon’nys’
where thy life is, that itis the wilt thou-it see new it is will again ene herself
make
ne’’ ’A‘sof‘he’kha’ Weé"hni’’da’, ne’’ etchi‘so’da‘’. Na’ye’
the nocturnal it-moon is, the she, your two’s That it is
present grandmother,
@gayéndesda‘ewik dyén”‘ha’ewa’ ne’’t‘ho‘ né"yawe? ‘hi’
will it be recognized by it if it so be the there so will it happen
é“satgat‘hwa’, &‘satdd’gd’ ne’’ ’&’/‘se’ wa’do"’ tcd&’’ son’‘he’,
wilt thou it see, wilt thou it be- the new itis willit become where thoualiveart,
come aware of
na’ye’ di’’ &yode’nyéndé's’dik ne’’t‘ho’ nof’we’ é"wa‘sa’wé"’
4)
that it is ae will it-itself govern thereby the there the place will it begin
en
o/né™ S wa‘dén’dii’ ne’’ ’A’‘se’ 6 °wadofi’nyd’ ne’’ of’gwe',
now will it start the new it is will it grow the human
being,
ne’? dé@yo™hwéndjiyo‘ga’‘di’ yonna’git, ne’’t‘ho’ non’we
the will it-the earth overspread will they dwell, the there the place
@wa‘sa/we’ tei’? non’weo Swadyeé"’‘di’ ne’’ é"yetchi’gé"’
will it begin where the place will it-the first be the will you-her see
ne’’ ’A‘sonhe’kha’ Wé™hni’’da’, ne’’ etchi‘so’da‘. Hiyad’‘, di’,
the nocturnal it-moon is, the she your grand- Not, so
mother. then,
hwén’do™ d’awadé"’nigon‘ha’’d&’, ne’’t‘ho’ —nigai‘hwagas’de’
ever any should it annoy the mind, the there so long it matter endures
756 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
tea’’ né"yofnis’‘he’ é@yon’‘hek tea’’ o™hwéfdjihiya’de’, o/‘ni’
where so will it last long will it alive be where it-earth extant is, also
tea’’ ni’yon’ odon’ni‘, o’‘ni’, ne’’ gofdi’yd’, oni’ ne’’ on’gwe',
where so many they are also the they game also the human
they growing, animals, beings,
number
o’‘ni’ ted’’ gai‘gwaéii’nyo?’. O’né™ di’’ ne’’t‘ho’ w&’gat’gi’k
also where the light orbs in place. Now ee the there do I-it let go
then
wrt
ted’’ sniya’da’de’ ne’’ at‘hoya’‘sia’, na’ye’ ®sni‘hwayén’dak
where your two bodies are the tradition (legend) that it is will you two its story
ave,
ted”? hagwa’* we’sni‘hwadjiida’dye’, gagwe’gi‘ @yei‘hwayénde’’nha’
where side of there your (two) ohwachira it-all will one-the matter learn
persists,
tea” ni’yoni! nwaé’awé"’‘séh’ de®’’se’ ne’’ is’ we’djiyatgat’‘hw3’,
where so many so did it happen and the you did you two- them see,
they are repeatedly
*a/‘so™ o/ni’ odadén’i’ ne’’ odi‘hwadye’&’ é@djiyatgat‘hwa’‘ho”
still also it remains the they matters disturb- will you two see severally
ing are
,? ,)
”)
o‘hen’do™ hagwa’di‘.”’
the ahead towards.””
T‘ho’‘ge‘ ne’’ Odéfdofni’’a‘ dé"’’se’ ne
Then the and the
o/né™ ~— wa’hié"’nigoni‘ha’é"’. Agwas’, hw&’gaye’it a! t=} S o t=)
he said, “T the matter confirm as soon as just also
é“hogayé"’ha’, na’ye’ se’ hi’ya’ dyénhai’ewa’ 6“hat‘honga’ya’k
will he-it agree to, thatitis in of course if so it be he will volunteer
fact
tea’ @gat‘he’dik tca’’ hon‘’he’, t*ho’ge’ o/né @wa’do™
where will it [=he) be where he is alive, then now will it be able
pounded
&"s‘hagoya’dage‘’nha’.”’ T‘ho'’ge‘ o/ne™ wi’a‘hén’’ ne
will he-them aid.” Then now she said the
gokstén’’a‘, “Hate’kwi', é™sei‘hwa ‘ni’ da’-khé™’ ne
she, the old woman, “Behold, wilt thou-the matter, wilt the
agree to thou
tché™si’dén’dak? dyén’hi’egwa’ Ssagayé™’ha’, na’ye’ di’
after, thou wilt remain if so it be wilt thou-it agree to—, that it is so then
@gon‘séi’no”, na’ye’ di’ né"sa‘sénno’’de@k &yondo™’hek,
will L-thee, a name, that it is so then such will thy name be will they keep saying,
give,
“Dagaén’dai’, (=Wind Has Fallen=Thaw).” T‘ho‘’ge‘ ne’
“Thence It-Wind Then the
Came Down.
De‘ha陓hyd’wé's haongwe’’di’ hawén’’, ‘ Wa’gei‘hwa‘ni‘’di’,
his people (men) he said, “Did I-the matter agree to,
kheya’dage’’nha’.”” T‘ho‘ge‘ o’né™ wa’a‘hén’”’ ne’ gokstén’’a‘,
will I-their persons aid.” Then now she said the she, the old woman,
“O’'née™ wa'wadeyéfinénda‘’nhi’. Seai’hwada‘ we’dwa’do”.”’
“Now did it-matter become settled, One mine has it become we have become.”
ver
T‘ho!’ges o’né™ wa’ hé™hén’’, ne’ De‘hodya’’tgae’wée™, “O’ne"™ di
Then now he said, the now so then
da‘s‘he‘sniya’dinyo"’da‘.” (A dual for a _plural.)’” T‘ho‘’ge‘
thence do you-his person bring in.” Then
o/né™ gawéfi’ ne” gokstéfi’’a‘, ‘Hau’, o’né wa’eai‘hwa‘he’’g
now she said the she, theold woman, ‘‘Come, now it-time has arrived
tea’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé” — sai‘hwa‘ni‘di‘.’”’ Tho’’ge‘ o/n@™* ne
where thing, kind of thou the matter hast Then now the
confirmed.”’
De‘ha陓hyo’wé"s haofigwe’’da’ wa’ha’yo”’ tea’ heteyono™son’da’
his person there he entered where there another it lodge has
attached to it
”
tea” non’ we‘ t‘hén’’dén’ ne De‘hodya’’’tgae’wée™.
where the place there he abides the
Tho’ge’ o/né™ wa’he*hén’ ne” gano™sgon’wi' hén’’dén’,
Then now he said the it-lodge in he abides,
“Ne?” of’niga‘dd’da’. Ne’’t‘ho’ 6"sadi’dak, o’né™ dé™satde’ni’
“This it is it-mortar stands. The there wilt eon thyself now wilt thou change
put,
tea’ ni‘syeé’do’dé™.” Tho’ge’ o’né™ ne’’t‘ho! wa’hadi’dak,
where such thy flesh is.’” Then now the there did he himself place,
dé’’se’ ne’ De‘hodya’’tgae’wé™ o/né™ ne’’t‘ho’ nhwa’’he’
and the now the there there he went
dé"’se’ wa't‘ha’gwa’ ne’ hetgén’kha’ ga‘nigai‘’da’ wa’hat‘he’’da’
and he-it took up the upper it-mortar he-it, did pound
”
7
”
780 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN, 43
o’ny? 7&’sé* nwa’hayé’da’. Tiho’ge’ oné* wa’hé*hén’’
also, three so did many he pound. Then now he said,
“One wi’ dwatde’ni’ tea’’ ni‘syeé”’do’’dé™, o/ne™
“Now did it-itself change where such they body in shape now
as kind,
wi’wadeyéfinénda’nhi’.”” Ttho’ge o’né™ hofinat‘hof’de’ ne
did it-itself complete.”’ Then now they-it heard the
De‘hathyd’wé's hodyo’gwa’ ’asde’ higwadi‘ da‘hadwénno’dé”’
his troop out of towards thence he his voice uttered
doors
tea’ ni’yo‘t ne’ dagawéfnoda’dye’, géh’ewi’ ostwi’hi‘
where so it is the thence it comes thundering, ee it little less
nigawéfina’’a tea’ hofnat‘hon’de’. Wa’hénni‘hén’” ‘One
so its voice large is where they-it heard. They said, “Now
hi/ya’ dofida‘’he’ ne’ Dagaéi‘’da’ (= Daga‘s‘hwine’’di’ = Hot
indeed thence again he the
comes
Spring Wind).” Niyoi‘hwigwa‘ha’” o/né dofida‘ha’yo”. T‘ho‘’ge‘
So it short time now thence he entered Then
o/né™ wa’a‘hén’’ ne’ gokstén’’a‘, “O’né™ di’ @swa‘dén’dya’. O/né™
the she said the she, the old “Now so will you start away. Now
woman, then
edi‘swi‘sa’wé” é"djiswa‘he’dé"s’da’ tea’ niyodo™hwéndjiadyeé™
will you begin will again you-it wet where the activities of the earth
ne” he‘da’’ge‘ diyo™hwéfdjia’de’. Na’ye’ di’ é"ha’‘héft ne’
the below there it-earth stands. That itis sothen willhegoahead the
Daigaéfi’da’, na’ye’ di’ na’ ewa’’ tho‘ diyodyeé™di,
that it is sothen the that just there there it the first is
é“hofwaya’s‘ho” ne’ o™hwéfdyjia’ge’ ena’gee’ ne’ on’gwe'
will they-him name the it-earth they dwell the human
beings
@ya‘hén”’” hi’ya’, “O’ne daga陓da’ owiddai‘’hé®; o/né™ hi’yd’
will they say in fact “Now eine sends it-air warm is; now of course
own
daga‘s‘hwine‘’da’. O’ne™ di’ hi’yi’ dé"yoigwagé™nhon’di’.””
north it follows slopes. Now so then indeed will it-us, season open, fur.”’
Ne’ t‘ho! di’ né@*yo’dik tea’’ né"yonnis’‘he’ é"yo™“hwéndjia’dek,
The there so then so will it be where so long it will be will it-earth stand.
Na’ye’ gé"s’ ne” o/né™ géhewide'’djik na’ye’ &*dwadyeé” t‘hak,
Thatitis usually the now it-spring early very that it is will it continue to be the
first, customarily,
é“honwayis’‘ho” ne’ o™hwéfdjia’’ge’ t‘ho‘déi’dyon‘’. Na’ye’
will they-him name the it-earth on there he started from. That it is
hi’yd’ gé"s’ ne” @ya‘hén’, “O’né™ dagaéi‘’da’.” Hiya‘ di’
in fact eestor the will they say, “Now it wind sends,”’ Not so then
arily
hwéf’do™ t‘hayago’nigo™hé""ha’ tea’ niyon’ hé*sga‘he’’e
ever any would one it forget where so many it is will again it be
the time
dé"swatde’ni tea’ o™hwéndjia’de’ tea’ degyadek’hé™ ne’
will again it change where it-earth stands where two they separate the
itself are
go‘sii’’ge’ dé"’se’ ne’ gegén‘hi’’ge’, na’ye’ dé"s‘hadenyo"’sek
it-winter is and the it summer is, that it is will again he-it keep
changing
tea’’ wéfidadé’nyo™ dé™’se’ tea’ wa‘sondadé’nyo” né’ Dagaén‘da’.
where _it-days stand, many, and where it-nights stand, many the
O’née“ di’ @swa‘déi’dya’ "djietchi’dén’hnd’ o’né* ne
Now so then will you start will again you-them take nome now the
ns
”
uv
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 781
onkhinada‘hén’’se‘.”’ Tho’ge’ o/né wa’ont'hdo’ya’ d’yi’
one-our Village its visiting.’”’ Then now she-it told it other
wia‘hén’, ‘One Sewat‘ho’yé” I” ne’ né’ ne” swa/dotk
she said, “Now will I-you tell I the this is the you say
A‘so™hek’haa’ Wé™hni’’da’. Na’ye’ ne” ni’ hagei‘hofida’ ne’
nocturnal (=the it orb is. That it is the thel he-me has com- the
moon). missioned
swa/do"k T‘haé“hyawaé’’gi‘, na’ ne’ ’o™ké” Hawéfni’yo’,
you say the fate the present time He, the Disposer,
Na’ye’ hagei ‘honda’ gwi' ne” one &yo”’eak tea’
that it is he-me aS Secrais oad, the now willit become night where
orl
o™hwéndjia’de’ J’ ne’ na’ @sge‘hit‘he’’di’ dé’’se’
I
it-earth stands the the that will again I-it cause to and
be light
Goh’ dai hada’ tea’ o™hwéfidjia’de’ ne” hiya’ swa’’djik
will I-it cause to be hot where it-earth stands the not too much
t‘hagana’nos’d4’, na’’ gai‘honnya’ ‘hi’ gagwe’gif — skéf’no™
any it-it, se to, be the that it causes it all peaceful
cold,
t‘hé*gondodia’ea’ tea’ niyon’’ wadonnya‘’ha’ tea’’ o™hwéndjia’de’
thence will they (an.) grow where = many they grow where it-earth stands
they are
dé"’se’ oni’ ne” teyon’gwe! teyon‘the’gwif ne” he‘da’’ge“
and also the you, human beings, you-them live on the below
diyo™hwéndjia’de’ swana’gee’. Ne’’t‘ho’ nigai’‘hwis hagei‘hon’da’
there it-earth stands you inhabit. The there so it time long is he-me commissioned
tea’ né"yonnis’‘he’ =@"yo™hwéndjia’dek. Ne’ t‘ho! — ni’yo‘t
where so will it endure will it-earth stand. The there so it is
gagwe’gi’ tea’ ni’yon’ s‘hongwat‘hon’da’ ne’’t‘ho’ nigagis’de’
it all where so many he-us, has commissioned the there so it endures
they are long
tea nigai‘hwagas’de’ tea’ o™hwéndjia’de’, na’ye’ di’
where so it matter long endures where it-earth stands that itis so then
&gwat‘hd’yé” swéino™’do"k ne’ tceyon’gwe o™hwéndjiad’ge‘
will I-you tell will you-it know the you-emmans it-earth on
swana’gee’ na’ye’ néngé"’ha hénni’déh’ na’ye’ hi’ya’ ne
you dwell that it is this it is they abide that it is indeed the
swa’do"™k Hadiwéfinodadye’s, na’ye’ di’ @swéfno™’do"k tea’’
you say They, the Thunderers that itis so then will you-it know where
ni‘hoyeé™ ne’ hoyénnénda’’i’ ne’ swa’do"k Hawénni’yo’. Na’ye’
so bee has the he-it has prepared the you say He, the Disposer. That it is
made
hoi‘hwi‘si’’iS gado’gé™ tea’ hagwa’di‘ @t‘hénne‘daik’hwak, na’ye’
he-it ordered it certain where, towards will there they keep coming, that it is
ne’ ha’dewatchot’‘hwis tgai‘ewit’gé"’s hadgwadi‘ niyé™héfne’’sek.
the there it sats (=the west) there it (sun) rises towards thither will they keep
going.
”
Na’ye’ di’ @swade’nyéndés‘hén’dik ne o™hwéndjia’ge‘
Thatitis sothen will you yourselves guide, by that the it-earth on
teyon’‘he’ hwén’do™ gwa”’ ne’’t‘ho! nhé"yawe"’"ha’ @"swadyén” ha’ gwa
you live ever just the there there will it come to will you be surprised
pass
o/né gw” tegaifewit’e@’s hagwa’di' né"t‘hén’/ne’ ne
now just there it (sun) rises towards thence will they the
come
hadiwénnoda’dye’s, gonda’dye’ swe’? o0’né™ —_ nige’’-khé"
they, the thunderers, at once will you think now -is it
”
¢
uu
”
?
”
782 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
dosg陓hi‘ da’we’ o’né™ 6"s‘haga’’tcya’ tea’ yo™hwéridjia’de’.
Near it is it is coming now will again he take apart where it-earth stands.
”
Ne’t‘ho‘ se’ ni’yo‘t ne’ s‘hofgwai‘hon’da’ gadd’eé™ tea’
The there in fact so it is the he-us has commissioned it certain where
non’we' ni‘s‘hagoi‘hon’da’. Na’ye’ hi’ya’ ne’ E"dekha’ Gaa‘’ewaa’
the place there he-one has com- That itis of course the diurnal it-sun
missioned.
gado’gé™* tea” hagwa’di‘ t‘he‘dak’hwa’. Ne’’t‘ho’ 0” ni’’3‘
it certain where it side thence he comes by. The there also
ni‘yo‘t gadd’gé* o” ni” tea’ hagwadi‘ tge‘dak’hwa’. Hiya‘’
so it is it certain is too ti where it-side thence I come by. Not
hwén’do™ oy’ t‘hayawé"’’hd’ tea’ né"yonnis’‘he’
ever it-other any should it come to pass where so will it endure
&yo™hwéndjia’dek tea’ nigé"’ ha’o™ha’ o’ya’ né"s‘haye’é’
will it-earth stand where so far it is he himself it other so will again he
it arrange
ne’ hoyéfinénida’i’ ne’ swa’do"k Hawéfniyo’. Da’, o’né*
the he-it has arranged the you say He, the Disposer. There, now .
di’ @swa‘dén’dya’, d@"swadawén’nye’ di’ hya’e’ ne” t‘ho’né™
so then will you start, will you travel so then first the here this
he’’tg@é"’ o™hwéndjia’de’, gagwe’ei’ Sswatgat’‘hwa’ tea’ nigé™’
up high it-earth stands it entire will you-it see where so far it is
di’ dé"dis’we’ o/né @wagade‘si’ik ne’ héswa’‘hwi’ o’né™*
so will you come now will I be ready the hence you it will new
then take
é*djiswahe’dé"sd4/‘hnd’ ne’’ e‘da’’ge’ dyo™hwéndjia’de’. Na’ye’
will you again go to wet them the lower there it earth stands. That it is
di” néngé"’ha‘’ de‘swaga‘’hi’ agyo’’de’ gadyé™séninya’‘ha’ dd’gés
so then this it is you-it, areseeing I-itam working IL-myself, arobe, am true it is
making, for,
’ de‘swaga‘’hii’ swe’‘he’ hi’y3’
ne’ tca’’t‘ho’ na’ye’ hi’ya’ tca’
the at present time that it is in fact where you-it are seeing you-it indeed
believe
on’gwe' ono"khwe’’a’ dé’’se’ de‘swaga‘’hiéa’ na’ye’ gés’ ne’
human being it hair and you-it are eyeing that it is gusts the
arly
oné™ he’ si’ wa’’eyén’ na’ye’ ne’ agetche’né” he’is’a‘ dji’ha‘
now again yonder T-it laid thatitis the my slave cur small dog
na/ye’ gé"s’ sagagi’’tcydi’ agwas’, hi’yd’, gé"s’ t*ho‘ha‘
that it is, customarily again it undoes verily, indeed, customarily Nearly
ofsagis’a‘’da’ tea’’ ni’yon’ agyo’dén’’i’, na’ye’ di’ Sgwat‘hd’yé”
again it-it complete where so much L-it have worked, that itis so then will I-you tell
it is
na’ye’ ne” tca’’t‘ho’ tea’ ni’yo‘t ne” o™hwéfidjia’’ge’ gé"s’
that it is the at this time where so it is the it-earth-on eee
aruy
wa’ai‘hée’y4’? ne” of/gwe', da’, na’ye’ gé's’ sea’da‘ ne’
one died the human being, SO, thatitis customarily one itis the
gono"khwe’’éi’ —na’ye’ gers’ dawa‘dén’dyi’, Ie gers’
one’s hair that itis customarily thence it departs, I customarily
&oya’dowe”’ nha’. Na’ye’ gady陓séfinya’t‘ha’, na’ye’ di’
will it-my person come to. That it is I-myself, a robe, make, of that, that it is so then
wade’nyéndé"s’dif ne’ tea’ o™hwéndjia’’ge’ dé"yagoda’i‘ha’dye’
one guages it the where it earth on will one stop on the way
ne” on’gwef dé’se’ dé"dyago‘dénidyof‘ha’dye’. Ne’’t‘ho‘
the human being and thence will one be coming. The there
né"yodik tea’’ nigagis’de’ tea’? o™hwéndjia’de’. Na’ye’ di’
so will it be where soitendureslong where it-earth stands, That it is so
then
HEWITT ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 783
ne”’ o/né™ d陓hadé"s’da’ ne’? Hawéfini’yo’ tea” deyagoda’i‘ha’dye’
the now will he-it cause to the He, the Disposer where one stops on the way
stop
va aety y y Say eee
’a‘se’’ ne’ o™hwéndjia’ge’ ne’t‘ho’‘ge’ ha’si’ @gagwé’nya’
new (it is) the it earth stands the then not before will it able be
@eadye™sei’si’ ne’ agyo’’de’, na’ye’ @gai‘hwagwal'’sya’ tca’’
will I-my robe the T-it, am that it is will it vouch for where
complete working at
niyongwe’’dige‘ o™hwéndjia’’ge‘ hwi’egwat’ ‘hwa’ tea’’
so many they persons, it-earth on did they-it visit where
number
nwa’gagisdé“ha’ tea’ o™hwéndjia’de’.”
so did it become where it-earth exists.
enduring
T‘ho‘’ge‘ o/né™ honna‘déndyon‘ wa’t‘hondawénnye‘’si’,
5 A ?
Then now they started, did they go to travel
hadigwegi‘ha’dye’ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé"'s hodyo’gwi’. Na’ye’
they were companions on the his troop. That it is
the way
dawadyeé"’da’ ne’t‘ho’ haigwa’di‘ nhwa’héf’ne’ tea’ niga’i‘hwis’
it, the first was, the there towards thither they went where so it time long is
v~?
o/né™ =e’ t‘ho — tehi‘-hodinada’héa’ o’né™ ~— wa’ hontgat’‘hwa’
now the there while they were visiting now did they look
awéntga’de’ tea’ niyo™hwéndjio’dé™ tea’? —niyawéfinu’ ‘ges
it was pleasant where such it-earth isin kind ; where so-it-grass is tall
ne’’t‘ho’ nigaé’dé"s odof’ni‘ o‘hofidddekha‘’gwa’ o’hyd’ dé’"’se
the there so it is thick it grows it strawberries it fruit and
awé™ha‘hak’ho™, hiya‘’ hwéni’do™ de’hodi’gé™ tea’ niyawé™hi’yo’s,
it full of flowers is, not ever any they-it have where so it-flowers beautiful
severally, seen are,
dé”’’se’ odéndofni‘ awé™ha‘ha’ei na’ye’ ne”’ na’
and it trees grow it full of flowers is that it is the the
that
deyo‘hat‘he’da‘’gwi' tea’’ o™hwéndjia’de’. Oda‘hyon’ni‘
WA
it is light by means of that where it-earth stands. Fruits are growing
ha’deyo‘hya’ge‘; ne’’ hiid‘’ hwén’do™ de’hodi’gé™ tea’ o‘hadé’/nyo™
every kind it fruit is the not ever any they it have where it paths stand,
In number; seen severally
o‘ha‘hi’yo’s, — agwas’ na’ye’ gén’owds’ o‘ha‘hakdon’dye’
it-path(s) are fine, verily that it is only it path paths along
deyawén‘hayéndon’nyo™” dé"’se’ wa’s‘hagodi’gé™ ne’ ofn’gwe‘
two it flowers has many, severally hee they them saw the human
beings
deyagonadawén’nye’ deyodé™haén’da’ tea’’ ego™son’da’, hiya’
they are traveling around it shine’s around where one a face has, not
de’d’do™ dahadit‘ha’én’. T‘ho’’ge‘ wa’hontgat‘hwa’ ne’’t‘ho‘
any it was possible could they Then they looked the there
converse together.
ganada’yé” ena’gee’ gano™sayén’do™. T‘ho‘ge’ s‘haya’’dada‘
it-village lies they inhabit Elodes(G) le here and Then her a person, is,
nere.
wi’ hé"hén’, “Na’ye’ néngé™ hi’ gano™sa’yé™ ne’’t‘ho‘ e’dén’ ne”
he said, “That it is this it is it-lodge lies the there she the
abides
sano‘’ha’. (Na’ye’ wa‘hofiwé"’has ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé"s). Na’ye’
thy mother. That it is he- pe said to the That it is
ne” ’a&‘’so™ tchi-diyé"’’s ne’’ he‘da’’ge‘ diyo™hwéndjia’de’ ne’ 0/né™’
the while she went about the below it-earth stands the now
Ils
784 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
s‘honde‘swa‘déi’dya’. O/’né™ di’ tchi-di‘swa‘dén’dyon’ ha‘’sa’
thence you departed. Now while thence you departed just then
en
na’ye’ diyago‘dén’dyon’. T*ho’né™ di’ e’dén’, t‘ho’né™ ena’gee’
that it is thence she departed. Here this so she here this she dwells
then apices,
etchino™gwi’’s‘ho™ tca’’ ni’yori‘ goihwagwé’nyon teyagodat‘hewa’ di
your co-relations (co-kindred) where somany one-the matter were able one has forsaken evil
they are to do
tea’ nwa’gai‘hwis’‘he’ he’yé"’s he‘da’ge’ diyo™hwéfdjia’de’.”
where so it time long is there one below it-earth stands.
went about
T‘ho’’ge’ o/né™ det‘honna‘dén’dyon’ hofisa‘hadiyo™ tca’’ non’we'
Then now they departed thence again they where the place
returned
diye’’dén’ ne’ gokstén’’a‘ o’né™ hofnén‘, “O’né™ sayagwa’yo
theresheabides the she, the old now they ena “Now we have returned.”
woman
T‘ho’ge’ wi’a‘héf’ ne’ gokstéfi’a‘, “O’né™ gwa’’ agide‘s&
Then she said the she, the old Now just Tam ready.
woman,
O’né™ di’ gwd’’t‘ho’ swa‘dén’dyd’. Ne’‘t‘ho’ di’ hagwa’di‘
Now so just there do you start. The there so towards
then then SS.
hé*swat‘hwida’‘se’ —_tea’’ non’ we‘ t‘hén’’dén’ Ende’kha’
there will you go around it where the place there he abides Diurnal
» ae 3
Gaii‘gwa/dye’s. E™hoiwatgathwa’ 0” na’ye’.”” T‘ho‘’ge’ o’/né™
Sun. Will they-him see too __ that it is.” Then now
honna‘dén’dyon’. Hiya” de’i’no® ne’t‘ho gwa’’ gano™sa’yé™.
they aeparted. Not any it far is the there just it lodge lies.
Wai’ hénni’‘hén’, “Tho’né™ ne’ né™’ he‘ha‘défidyo"s ne”
They said, “Here this the ae hence he departs the
this
de‘ha‘hat‘he’’t‘ha’ ne’ e‘da’’ge’ diyo™hwéndjia’de’.” T‘ho‘’ge‘
he-it lights the pelows there it earth stands.” Then
o/né™ ——he‘hodi’yo". WHhonwa’gé™” hokhon’ni‘ odyjis’gwa
now there they arrived. They-him saw he food has it-mush is
prepared
o‘heya’’da’’ nofiwa‘ho’dé” T‘ho’’ge’ wa’héfni’‘hén’, “O’né™
it-chestnut thing, kind of. Then they said, “Now
ne” né"™’ agwat‘ha‘hi’ne’. Sayakhi’dén’‘hna’ ne” he‘da’’ge‘
the this we are on the way. We are taking them home the below
it is
diyo™hwéfdjia’de’. Na’ye’ di’ oi’hw&’ t‘ho’né™ hagwia'’
it-earth stands. That it is so it reason is here this side
then
wi’agwat‘hwadda’‘se’ tea’ wa’agwe’ii’ dé™swadat’gé T‘ho’‘ge‘
we went around where we thought will you one another see.” Then
wns
o’né™ t‘howéfnitgé™’i‘ ne’’ hono™sa’yé™ wa’hé™hén”’, “1” ne’
now he uttered his yond the he lodge owns he said, soL the
né"’ o/né™ wa'didwadat’gé™ swa’do"k Ho‘seé™ige‘da‘gd/ni‘,
the this now we see one another you say He, the Great War Chief,
S‘hagwa‘’teya’, Efdek’‘ha’ Gaia’‘gwa’. Agwas’ o/né™ agade‘si’’i‘
Our elder brother, Diurnal Sun. Verily now Tam ready
é"ga‘dén’dyda’. O’né™ ~~ tea’ ~—s deyo™ hwéndjia’hé™ haigwi‘’
will I depart. Now where it-earth’s middle side, direction
é"sgatgwi’’da’, agwas’ di’ ganyo” gwa’’ ne’’t‘ho’ hé™swagwat’‘hwii’
will again I move, verily so as soon as just the there there will you a tour make
then
n) 9
WA
?
en. ”
‘ ~~ ~ v~ y v
ttho’ge’ o’ne™ 6"gA‘dén’dyi’, o/né™ "se8’dai‘hi’’da’ tea’
then now will I start, Now will again I-it warm where
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 785
u
o™hwéndjia’de’.” T‘ho’geS o/né™ wavhénni‘hén’, “O’ne™ di
it-earth stands.” Then now they said, “Now =o
then
dwadongo’‘da‘.” Ttho‘’ge’ o’né™ honna‘dén’dyof’. Dosgé™ha‘
let us go on.” Then now they departed. Near it is
nigé™’ o/né™ wa’hénni‘hén’, “Ons hi’yd’? 8 3dwa‘sa’wé”’.
so far it is now they said, “Now in fact will we-it begin.
Na’ye’ di’ na” gwa’’t‘ho’ €"t‘hadyeé"’dd’ ne” Digaé™’di’.”
That it is so the just there will he be the first the Warm Spring
then that Wind
Tho'’gef o/né™ wa’hadwéfnd’dé™ o‘gai’’i‘, o/né™ = di’’-_— ne’
Then now did he sing his song it loud, is Now so the
then
De‘haé™hyod’/wé"s hodyo“’gwi’ ~~ wa’hontgat’ ‘hw? he‘da’’ ge‘
his troop they saw it below
diyo“hwéndjia’de’, o/né™ ony’ honnat‘hon’de’ ne’
there it-earth stands, now also they-it heard the
o™“hwéfdjia’’ge’ ena’gee’ wi’a‘hén’, “O/né™ géngwide'’djik
it-earth-on they dwell they said, Now it-spring early
wi’wa'do™. O’né™ hi’ yi’ dagaé™ da’ dé"’’se’ o’/né
it has become. Now in fact thence it wind and now
comes down
dawadwénno’dé™.”” —- T*ho‘’ge —o’/né™—s hofit‘ha‘hi/ne’, he’’tké",
there it sang.” Then now they were traveling, up high
de‘hadiga‘hi’dye’ e‘da’’ge‘ diyo™hwéndjia’de’ dé™’se’ o’né™
there-they-it eyed from below there it earth stands and now
along
ogénis’dif = o‘gai’’i_ —~—s hadiwéfinoda’dye’ dé”’se’ — ga‘hwis’‘he’
it is evident it loud is their voices resound along and it is strong
ostaindyon‘ha’dye’. Hiya’ de’i’no™ tthe’hofine’noi = o0’né™
it rained on the way. Not any it far is any they went now
wi’hondyén’ha’gwa’ o’né™ o™hwéndjia’’ge’ wa't‘hadida’’nha’.
they were surprised now it-earth on did they set foot.
Tho’’ge’ o/né™ ne” s‘haya’’dada! wa’hé"hén’, ‘“O’né™ ne’
Then now the he, a person, is he said, Now the
né™’ se‘swa’yo”. T*hd’né™ ne’’ né™’ he‘swa‘dén’dyon’. O’né™ di’
the again you have Here this the the hence you departed. Now so
this returned. this then
wa’gai‘hwayei’’khe’ sagway&’dinyo" da’. Da’, na’ye’ di’
it the matter has been again we have brought you ‘There, that it is so
fulfilled home. then
@ewat‘hd’yé” o/né™ ne” na’ gai‘hwis’ tea’ nwa’ofinis‘he’godo”’’tgé™
will we-you tell now the the itisalong where soit is long time one withdrew
that time
ne’ ena’gee’gwa’. E®djiswatchén’ni’ gwa”’ 0’’ na’ye’ tca’’ non’we'
the they dwelt(here). Will you-it find again just too thatitis where the place
hedjyena’gee’.”” Niyoi‘hwagwa‘ha’” o’né™ wa’hé"hén”’, “O’né™
there again they dwell. It a short time was now he said, “Now
di” dé"djidwadekha‘sy#’?. Na’ye’ di” tca’’ né"yawé™had’ ne”
so will again we separate. That it is where so will it take place the
then then
o‘héi’do™-hagwi’. Na’ye’ ne” I &sgwa‘ha’’nha’. Na’ye’
a-head-wards. That it is the us will you-us remember. That it is
di’ gids’ &8"swadyeii’da’ewd’ ne’ oyé™gwi’on’we’. Ne’’t‘ho‘
so custom- will you-it make use of the it-tobacco native. The there
then arily
ha’deyayer’ é"yonhewat‘honde‘sdji’hwé"k, sha’ dé"yawé"ha’
it suffices will we-it hear most clearly, alike will it come to pass
786 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [erH. ANN. 43
gén’ewd’ tea’ niyon’’ s‘hagoi‘hon’da’. Dyén’‘ha’ewa’ na’/ye’
only where so many he them has commis- If so it be that it is
they are sioned.
®yetchino™dof’nyo™, na’ye’ gaya’dagwefini’yo’ ne’ oyé’ewa’on’ wes
will you-them think of, that it is it a chief thing is the it-tobacco native
é"swadyea’dak’hwak. Na‘ye’ 6"swadwéfnofnya’’t‘hik ne
will you-it, continue to make use That it is will you-your word make with that the
of.
o™hwéfidjia’’ge’ tcyon’‘he’. Ne’’t‘ho' ne” te&’t‘ho’ ni’yo‘t
it-earth-on you live. The there the at this time so it is
tea’ hoi‘hwi‘sa’’i‘ ne’ hoyéfnéaida’’i‘ swa’do"k Hawénni’yo’
where he has decreed the he-it completed you say He, the Disposer.’’
T‘haé™hiawa’ei’.”’ Tho’’gef o’né™ = dofisa‘hondekha‘’sya’. O/né™
Then now there again they separated. Now
di’ sa‘hon‘dén’dya’ ne’’ Hadiwéfnoda’dye’s.
a again they started home the They, the Thunderers.
hen
”
T‘ho’ge’ oo” na’’ wa’hon‘déi’dya’ ne De‘haé™hy0’wé's
Then too the that they started the
hodyo’’gwa’. Wa’hoftgat’‘hwa’ tea’’ enagee’gwi’? o/né™ ne
his troop. They-it saw where they did inhabit now the
na’ye’ detcyot‘hofidaon’wes‘tci’hwé™ hwéni’do™ gwa’’ Voi’ na’
”
’on
that it is again it is fully overgrown with bushes ever just er- the
aps that
diyena’’gee’’owa’. Tho’ge’ omé™ wa’héini‘hén’, “O’né™ hi’ya’
there they did dwell. Then now they said, “Now in fact
‘on’ é6"dwadadya’dagen’‘ha’, é6"dwe‘sik’ha’ gaif'’ nofi’we‘
per. will we ourselves help, will we go to find it where * the place
aps
hes‘hadina’gee’.”” T‘ho‘’ge’ o/né™ wa’hon‘déndya’ tgai‘ewitgé?’s
there again they dwell.” Then DOW they started away at the sun rising
haigwa‘ nhwa’hén’ne’. Hiya&*’ de’i’no™ o/né™ wi’hadi’gé” ne’’t‘ho‘
towards there did they go. Not any it far is now they it saw the there
ewi’’ ena’ gee’. Wivhadi’yo” diyodyeé?’di‘ gano™sa’yé™,
just they dwell. They arrived it the first is it-lodge lies,
wihénni‘hén”’, “O’né™ sayagwa’yo™.” Wa'h陓hén’ ne
they said, “Now again we return.’’ He said the
hono™sayé™, “Gain nofi’we' heswe’’sgwi’. Eliya amity
he lodge owns, “Where the place there you have been. Not I
de’ewayénde’’i.” Wa’hé"hén’’ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé"s Hiya‘’-khé2’”
any I-you know.’’ He said the Not is it
hwén’do™ de’sat‘hofi’de’ sof’gaa’ ayofdo"’hek hofina‘défidyon‘
ever any thou-it heard some one kept saying they have departed
f‘a’/s6é™ niwds“hé"‘ ni‘hén’nadi‘, hofinadon‘hon’ni’ hodi‘sgé™ age’ da‘
three so tens so many they they were young men they were warriors
many numbered,
ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's dé™’se’ ne’ Gaé™hyakdon’dye’ na’ye’ ne’
the and the that isit the
hiyadeyo‘sigwéfini’yo’ wa’hiéinidyo‘gon’nya’ na’ye’ hofinidyo‘’gwa’
they two were the war leaders they two a troop formed that it is their troop
dé’’se’ ha’dewatchot’‘hwas higwa’di‘ nhe‘hofine’non‘.” T‘ho‘’ge‘
and there sun-setting towards there they went.”’ Then
ne’ hono™sa/yé™ wa’hé"hén’, Hiya’ ni’a’ de’gei‘hwayéinde’i‘
the he the lodge owns he said, Not I any I-the matter know
hwén’do™ ew’ ne’’t‘ho’ nayawé?’ik. Dd’ga’t se’ ’o™ké”
when just the there so it could have happened. If so in in
fact turn
”
neEwitT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 787
na’ye’ ei‘hwayénde’i’ t‘ho’né™ gwa’’t‘ho’ e’’dén’ gokstén’’a‘.”
thatitis she the matter knows help this just there she lives she, the old
woman.”’
T‘ho‘’ge‘ o’né™ hofnadongo‘di‘, Wa’hadi’yo™ tea’ nof’we'
Then now they passed on. They arrived where the place
” 7
niye’’dén’ ne’ goksténi’’a‘, o’né™ he’’ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's
there she abides the shetheold woman, now again, the
wi’hé"hén”’, ‘“Sei‘hwayéiide’i‘-khé"* ne’’t‘ho nayawé"’ik na’ie’
he said, “Knowest thou the matter—dost the there so might it have that
thou happened
ne” honna‘dén’dyon‘ 7a/s62° ‘niwas‘hé’ ni‘hén’nadi'‘
the they went away three so many it-tens so many they
numbered
hodi‘sgé™aige’di‘. De‘haé™hyd’wé"s dé"se’ Gaéni‘hyakdoni’dye‘
they warriors are. and
na’ye’ honfnidyo’‘gwa’. Ha’dewatchot’‘hwis nha‘honne’nonk?”
that itis their troop. To the sun-setting there they went?
O’né™ = =gawén’ ne’ gokstéi’a‘, “Do’eé"s ne’ tea’’t‘ho‘
Now she said the she, the old woman, “True it is the while
agat‘hon’de’ gé"s’ ne’ ksotd‘ha‘gé"’hi’ na’ye’, ya’gé™,
T-it heard eustom- the my grandmother dear that it is, it is said,
arily who was
tehiyeksi’’3‘, honna‘dén’dyon’ ’a‘sé™ niwas‘hé™’ ni‘hén’nady'
’ ,
while—she a child they went away ~- thirty so many it-tens so many they
was numbered,
hiya’ hwén’do™ de’s‘hodi’yo".” = T‘ho’’ge’ = 0/né"*—s gawén"”’,
not ever any again they returned.” Then now she said,
“Na’ye’ ‘on’ na” ol‘hwdgwe’gii hai‘hwayéfde’i‘ = t‘ho’né™
“That it is per- the it-matter entire he-it matter knows there this
haps that
gwa’’t‘ho’ dosgé™’ha‘ t‘hén’dén’. Na’ye’ ne’ na’ ogénis’di‘
just there near it is there he abides. That it is the thethat it notable is
onnis’’i‘ tchi-hon’‘he’.”” T‘ho’’ge’ o’né™ he” hofina‘déi’dyon‘.
itlongtimeis while-he is living.’’ Then now again they went on,
Wivhadi’yo™, dd’gé"s gw’ wi’hofwa’gé™ hokstén’’a‘, t‘ho‘’ge‘
They arrived, true it is just they-him saw he, the old man, then
ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's wa’hé™hén’, ‘‘Sei‘hwayén’dei‘-khé" nis’
the he said, “Knowest thou the matter— the
dost thou thou
ne’ hwén’do™ gwa’’ ne’’t‘ho’ nayawé"’ik ne’”’ a‘honna‘dén’dyonk
the ever just the there so might it have the might they have gone away
happened
’a/s6™* niwas’‘hén’ ni‘hén’nadi’ hodi‘sgé™age’da‘?” Wa’hé"héen’”’
three so many it-tens so many they they warriors are?’’ He said
number
ne” hokstén’’a‘, “Agwas’, dega‘’hén’, gei‘hwayéide’il’.. Na’ye’
the he, the old man, “Verily, it full is I-the matter know. That it is
tea’ niyawé"’I‘, na’ye’ ne’ né"’ ha’gwa‘ diyena’gee‘ewd’.
where soitcametopass, thatit is the the this direction they did dwell.
Ne’’t‘ho’ nof’we‘ ne’’t‘ho’ nidiyawé"’i’. ’A‘’sé" niwas‘hé"”’”
The there the peace the there so there it came to pass. Three so many it-tens
ni‘hén’nidi‘ ne’ agwas’ s‘ha’det‘hofinadd’di‘, a‘hya’k-ga‘’he’
so many they are the verily same they are aged, sixteen
ni‘honno‘seiya’’ei', hofinefinidyo‘gon’ni‘, na’ye’ ne” o0’né™
so many years they had lived, they a company formed, that, it is the now
s‘ha’hofinidyo‘ewi'‘si’ t‘ho'’ge’ o’né™ wa’s‘hagodiya’die’’ga’ ne’
as they the comapny coemplted then now they—them assembled the
céndyo‘gwagwe’gi. Na’ye’ di’ ne’ o/né™ wa’agoya’dayé@’ik
it-populace all. Thatitis sothen the now did they assemble
788 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ern ANN. 43
ttho’ge’ ne’ De‘haé™hyo’wé"s wa'hé"hén’, ‘“Na’ye’ di’’ ne’
then the he said, “That itis sothen the
o/né™ 6"swado’gé's, Omnes se memes wa agwade'’sa’.
now will you it learn, now the the this we have prepared
ourselves.
vine
Wai’agwat‘hoh’gaya@’k ’a‘’sé niwds’‘hé™ niyagyon’. Agwas’
We have volunteered three so many it-tens so many we are. Verily
wi’agwa‘ni’da’ wa’dyagwayes’da’ ne” ofigwa’nigo™’ha’. Agwas’
we made it firm we united them the our minds. Verily
b
iG
ne’t‘ho’ ni’yo‘t o/né™ seai’da’ géi’gwa’ ofigwanon’wa’éndd’,
the there so it is now one it is only we have on,
sga’di‘ oni’ agwayeé"’don’da’, sga’da‘ o‘’ni’ ofgwadon‘he‘’sida‘,
one it is also we have body, one it is also we have life,
sga’da‘ of/ni’ @dyagwatgwé™sa‘hi’nha’, O’né™ di’ wi’agwat’ga’k
one it is also will we shed our blood. Now so then we it let go
ne’ akhino™kwa’’s‘ho™ dé6™’se’ tea’ agyon’‘he’ wa’agwat’ga’k.
the our kindred and where our lives we it give up.
O’ne™ di’ S®yagwa‘dén’dya’, ha’dewatcho’t‘hwas hagwa’di‘
J% ’ D5
Now so there will we depart, to the sun-setting towards
Vinee ~ FROM 13’ ” ‘} ‘ ow GA , hé® owaows ay aie
né"yagwayea da, ne 't'ho agwe’ he nhe"yagwagwat hwa
thither will we direct ourselves, the there we desire there will we touch
tea nhé’we’s ne” gaai’owa’. IP onkhofigaya’’ei‘
where there it goes the it sun I they-me have appointed
dé”’’se’ deyagyadé™hnon’ dia’ hoiwadigowané™ 6r@6"k’,
and my brother their chiefs will it be.
Ongwader‘hwi'sai’’i‘ awe’ha’dye‘ hot’ né"yo‘’dik, do’ né"yodye’é"k,
We have made an agreement it matters not how so willit be, how so will it bein form,
wor
ne’t‘ho’ gwa’’ oni’ dé"yagwadongo’da’. Ongwat‘hongaya’’gi‘
the there just also will we-it go through. We have volunteered
na’ye’ ofgwal‘hwa‘ni‘da’gwi' tea” nofiwa‘ho’’dé”
that it is we have agreed on the matter by it where thing, kind of
ongwadel‘hwi‘si’’i‘.” T‘ho’ge‘, o’né™ hofna‘dén’dyon‘, hiya’
we have agreement made.’’ Then now they departed, not
hwén’do™ de’s‘hodi’yo™.”’ T‘ho‘’ge‘ o/né™ t‘ho’dadi‘
ever any they returned.”’ Then now he spoke
ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's, wa’hé"hén’, “Dd’ hon’ nigai‘hwis’
the he said, “Tow, perhaps, so it time long is
ne’’t‘ho’ nidiyawé™’1'?” Wa’hé"hén’”’ ne’’ hokstén’’a‘, “O’né™
the there so there it happened?’’ He said the he, the old man, “Now
wrod
’a‘’s6™ nwa’ondiya’di’’sa’.”” Tho“’geS oné™ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé"s
three so many times have persons Then now the
become old men.””
yVhE"hEeR’, “Son’’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé” ne’ hofwadigowa’né™
he said, “Who thing, kind of the they their chiefs were
tea’ hofina‘dén’dyon‘?” T‘ho’’ge’ ne’ hokstéi’a’ wa’hé™hén’,
where they departed?’’ Then the he, the old man he said,
“De‘haé™hyd’wé"s dé™’se’ Gaé™hyakdofi’dye’, na’ye’ agwas’
Lo and that it is verily
o‘hén’do™ wi’hya’do” ne” ’a‘sé™’ niwds‘hé™’ ni‘hén’nddi’.”’
it leaders they two became the three so many it-tens so many they are.’
T‘ho’ge’ o’né™ hawén‘ ne’ De‘haé™hyo’wé's, “I” ne’ né™.
Then now he said the SOT: the the this.
Omée™ ne” na’ deyagyadé™hnon’dii’ Gaé™hyakdo’idye’
Now the the that my brother
dé"’se’ Daga’dye’, ne’’t‘ho’ niya’gyoi sayagwa’yo”. I’’ ne’
and the there so many we are again we return. I the
né"’ ne’’t‘ho’ heyofigwa‘dén’dyon‘ tea’ non’we‘ diswanagee’’ewa’.”
the this the there there we started away where the place there you did dwell.”
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 789
”
T‘ho’ge’ o’né™ ne” hokstén’’a’ wa’hé"hén’’, “Hiya” hon‘ Is’
Then now the he, the old man he said, “Not perhaps thou
de’’gé™, swa’djik’ o’né™ onnis’’i‘ ne’’t‘ho’ nidiyawé"’i‘; swa’/djik
any it is, because now it is a long the there so there it because
(too much) time thus came to pass;
ayén’é’ ha‘’si’, ’on‘’ nis’ hi’deswayéfida’’i‘.”” T*ho’ge’ ne
it seems just now perhaps, ae at you are in middle age.’ Then the
thou
”
De‘haé™hyd’wé's wa’hé"hén’, “1” se’ s‘hi’agwaya’’dada‘ tea’
he said, “Tin fact Same our bodies are the where
honina‘dén’dyoni’. O’né™ di’’ sayagwa’yo™.” T*ho‘’ge’ ne’’
they departed. Now so then we have returned.” Then the
hokstén’’a‘ wa’hé"hén’, “Dod’ di’ swat‘ho’ya‘ son’ nonwa‘ho’’dé”
he, the old man he said, “How so then you-it tell who person, kind of
hofiwagowané"hna’ ne’t‘ho’’ge‘ o/né™ tce’swa‘dén’dya’?”
he-their chief was at that time now when you departed?”’
T‘ho‘’ge’ ne’ De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s wa’hé"hén’’, ‘“Daga‘hedon’dye’,
Then the he said, ne
na’ye’ hofwagowa’né™ ne’t‘ho’ge’ ~— tea’ agwa’dén/dya’.”’
that it is he-their chief was at that time where we departed.”
O’né™ ne” hokstéfi’a‘ wa’hé"hén’, “Na’ye’ gwa’’ oni’ dd’gé's.
Now the he, the old man he said, “That it is just also true it is.
Na’ye’ ne” tca’’t‘ho’ ksoda‘ha’-gé"’ha’. Na’ye’ gai‘hofnyad‘’ha’
That, itis the at that time my grandfather was. That it is it is the reason
ol‘hwagwe’gi‘ gei‘hwayénde’l’. O/’né" di” wa’gei‘hwagwefiniyo’sdi’,
eee com- I-the matter know. Now sothen I accept the report,
plete
Is’ o/né™ = se‘swa’yo™. O’né™ di’ é8™hodd’gé's ne
(thou) now you returned. Now so then will it-him a truth the
you become
s‘hagwagowa’né™. Thoné™ di’ @ swe dén’dik. O’né™
he-our chief. Here this so then will you remain. Now
hé"zadei‘hwanye’di’.” Tho’’ge’ o0’né™ —he‘hodogé™ se‘ ne’’
hence will I send the report.’’ Then now there he received the the
report
ha‘séfnowa’né™ nénge ha‘ nigai‘ho’’dé™. O’né™
he, the chief a this it is, such it-report kind of. Now
wi t‘hadei‘hogwa‘’da’, ofigwe’dagwe’gi‘ é"yontgénni’’sa’. Na’ye’
did he spread the report, all the people will they assemble. That it is
di’ ne’ o/né™ wa’o‘hé” nha’ o/né™ wa’agoya’dayé’ik. T‘ho‘’ge‘
so the now it was to-morrow now they assembled. Then
then
oné™ ne’t‘ho’ nhwa’hén’ne’ ne De‘haé™hyd’wé"s = dé"’se
now the there thither they went the and
hodyo“’gwi’, ne’’t‘ho wa’hadi’yo™”. Géfdyo‘gowa’né™ — of/ni’
his company there they arrived. It assembly large was also
wi‘hodiya’daye’ik. Tho’ge’ o/né™ ne’ ha‘séfinowa’né™
they did assemble. Then now the he, the chief
da‘ha‘sa’wé™ ne’ o/né™ wa’t‘hada’’nha’ na’ye’ wa’hawénnitgé"’da’
he began the now he stood up that it is he uttered the words
tea’ niyoi‘hwane‘ha’ewat tea’ nigdi‘ho’’dé"™ ne’ wa’hodidd’gé"s.
where so it-report was wonderful where such it-report was the it-they learned.
Ttho’ge! o/né™ wa’hé"hén’’, “O’né™ di’ wa’dyagwai‘hwa’es’da’
Then now he said “Now so then we matter choose
nonwa‘ho’dé™” nwi’awé"’ha’ tea’ mnigé®’ we’swagwat’‘hwa’.
thing, kind of so it came to pass where so far it is you a tour made.
O/né™ di’ gagwé’el' &*yagwai‘hwa‘hén’egd’.”” Tho’ge’ o/né™’ ne
Now sothen it all will we the report hear.”’ Then now the
”
”
790 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
De‘haé™hyd’wé"s det‘hoda’’1‘, det‘hoda’di‘, hawén‘, ‘“’A‘sé™’
he arose, he spoke, he said, “Three
niwas’‘hé™ niya’gyon’ ongwa‘dén’dyon’. ’A‘sé™’ di’ nidjia’eyon‘
so many it tens so we are we departed. Three sothen so many only
we are left
sayagwa’yo™. I’ hi’ya’ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's niwakséfino’’dé™.
we have returned. I in fact the such is my name.
Né"” hagwadi‘ hén’’dén’ deyagyadé™hnon’diad, Gaé™hyakdon’dye’
This direction he abides my brother
ne” na’ye’ ni‘ho‘séfno’dé™. Né"” oni’ hagwa’di‘ thé’ dén’
the that, it is such is his name. This also direction there he abides
Daga’dye’ na’’ ni‘ho‘séfno’dé™. Ne’’t‘ho! gén’gwa’ nidjia’eyon‘
the that such his name is. The there only so many still we
number
sayohgwa' dadé™k. Na’ye, di’ tea’ nwaé’awé™ha’ tea’ nigé?’
again we are left. That it is sothen where so did it come to pass where s0 far it is
wi’agwagwat ‘hw’ s‘haya’’dida‘ ne’’t‘ho‘ ne’ na’ tchit’‘he’s.
did we a circuit make he, a person, is the there the thethat still he remains.
Hiya‘’ di’ na’”’ de’a’wet donda‘’he’ ne” t‘hd’né™’ o™hwéndyjiade’.’’
Not sothen the any it is thencehecould the here this it-earth stands.’’
that possible come
Tho’’ge’ o’né" wa’hat‘hoya’ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé"s agwas’
Then now did he-it tell the verily
ne’’t‘ho‘ da‘ha‘sa’wé™ tea’ niyawé™’if o/né™ § s‘ha’hon‘dén’dya’.
the there there he it began where so it came to pass now where they started.
Gagwe’el’ tea’ nwa’awé™séh’ tea’ oni’ nofiwa‘ho’’dé™”
It entire where soit happened repeatedly where also thing, kind of
wa’hontgat’‘hw&’ agwas’ ne’’t‘ho‘ sa‘ho’k’dé™ tea’ nigé™’ ne’
they-them saw verily the there again he it finished where so far it is the
o/né™ sa‘hadi’yo”.” T‘ho’ge’ o’né™ sa‘ha’dyé”. O’né™ he”
now again they returned.”’ Then now again he sat down. Now again
donsa‘hada’’nha’ ne’ ha‘séfinowa’né™ wa’hé"hén’,
thence again he arose the he, the chief he said,
“Oi‘hwane‘ha’ewadt hiya’ tea’ nwa’awé™ha’. Gai‘hwis’ o’né™
“Tt is a wonderful message in fact where so it came to pass. It along time was now
tea’ nwi’onnis’‘he’ swa‘dén’dyon’. O’né™ di’ se‘swa’yo™.
where so it long endured you were away. Now so then again you have
returned.
Gai‘hwagweiini’yo’ hi’ya’. Hawéfini’yo’, da‘héfno™’do”’ tca’’
It is the truth indeed. He, the disposer, He willed it where
wi’gagwe nya’ se‘swa’yo™. O’né™ di’ = gayéfinénda’’1‘
it was able again you returned. Now so then it is ready
dé"dwadatno™héf’nyo”. Na’ye’ di’ tea’ né"yawé" ha’
will we greet one another. That it is so then where so will it come to pass
dé"swada’’nha’ ne’ ’a‘sé™’ nidjidjyo™’.. T‘ho‘’ge’ o’né™ I’
will you stand the three so still many you Then now I
number.
é"k’hént I” hi’yd’ ne’’t‘ho’ nofi’we’ nisk’da’ tcea’’ nof’we‘
will I lead I indeed the there the place there I stand where the place
ni‘hadadye’’sgwi’ ne’’ hofiwagowané™’hn&’ ne’’ ted’’”’-swa‘dén’dyd’.
there he occupied himself the he, their chief was the when-you started.
Na’ye’ tca’’ niwakséfino’’dé™ Dagi‘hedofi’dye’. Na’ye’ di’ tea’
That it is where such is my name Trees standing in vista. That it is sothen where
né"yawé"ha’ agwas’ dé"dwadadya’do‘stigwa‘ho™, na’ye’ ne’
so will it come to pass verily will we our bodies rule mutually, that it is the
gagwe’el’ eksd’s‘ho™’a‘ heyodo’kda’ dé"dwadatno™hén’.”’ T‘ho‘’ge‘
it all they, the children to the last one will we greet one another.’’ Then
o/né™ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's hofna’tchi’ o’né™ wa’t‘hadida’’nha’.
now the his friends now did they stand up.
,
HEWITT] ONONDAGA TEXT AND TRANSLATION 791
Ttho’’geS o’né™ ne’ ha‘séfinowa’né™ da‘ha‘dén’dya’ o/né™
Then now the he, the chief thence he started now
agwas’ wa’s‘hagodiya’do‘séhewi’ho™ gagwegi’ wa’tshagono™’hén’.
verily did he-their bodies rub (by way of greeting) it all did they-them greet.
severally
Tho’ge’ o’né™ gagwée’el’ ne’ héfnoh’gwe! dofda‘hadida’nhi’
Then now it all the they, the men thence they stood up
dé”’se’ ne’ gofnoii’gwe' dé"’se’ eksi’s‘ho?’’a‘ gagwe’el‘
and the they, the women and they, the children it-all
wa’t‘hoiwadino"™’hén’. Na’ye’ di’ ne’’o’né™ wi’ wadongo!’da’ ne’
did they them greet. That, it is i the now did it pass the
then
ha‘séhnowané™ wa’hé"hén’, “Ne’’t‘ho’ di’ né"yawé?’ha’ ne’’t‘ho‘
he, the chief he said, “The there sothen so will it come to the there
pass
né"yagwayed’ tea’ ni’yon’ wa’ofigwado’gé"s tea’’ né"yo’dik ne’
so will we-it do where so many it-us, have been revealed where so will it be the
they are to
o‘hén’do™ hagwa’. Na’ye’ di’ tca’’ né"swa’nigo™he’dé"k ne’
it future it-side. That it is sothen where so will your minds be the
ha‘sa’ seswa’yo” agwas-khé™ s‘ha’dedwai‘hwagwenni’yo’ tea’
just now again you returned verily-is it alike we are co-owners where
nonwa‘ho’dé™” ongwa’yé™ ne’ skéfino™ é"dwéfino™dofnyo"hek.
thing, kind of we-it have the peaceful will we keep thinking.
T‘ho’né™ hi’ya’ ena’gee’ o0’né™ hi’ya’ ~—ha’dofisedwadyesdi’.
Here this of course they dwell now in fact together thence again we them
have mixed.
Da’, o’né™ di” gayénnénda i‘ é*dwadéntea’do™ &"yongyo" wes‘ha’
There, now sothen it has Deen pre- will we-ourselves, amuse, will we be happy
pare
tea’ seswa’yo™. Na’ye’ di’ é"dwadyveé"d3’
where again you have returned. That it is so then will it be first
dé"hofstei‘gwi’é’ewa’ ne’’ hodiya’da‘ni’ié &yetchi’nigo™hé’yi’.
will they play lacross ball the they strong-bodied are will they-your minds amuse.
E"wadongo’da’, na’ye’ ’o™’ké" 6 wadii‘hwi‘déndya’ ne”
Will it pass . that it is in turn will it-the rite start the
djyo"ha’ oéf’na’. Ne’’t‘ho’ nigé™’ o’né™ dé™djidwadogwi’.”’
pigeon its song. The there so far it is now will again we disperse.’’
T‘ho’ge’ o’né™ ne’ De‘haé™hyd’wé's det‘hoda’’if wai’hé"hén’,
Then now the he arose he said,
“Oihwane‘higwat na’ye’ ne” ’a’sé™ nwda’ofdyd’di‘ss’ tea’
“Tt is a wonderful thing that it is the three so many they adults where
became
nwé’onnis’‘he’ ofgwa‘dén’dyon’. Na’ye’ di’ ongwadon‘hihéa’
so it time long was we were gone. That itis so then we are happy
ne’ djofgwa’yon‘.”’
the again we have returned.”
Tho'’ge’ o/né™ wi’ wadel‘hwa‘dén’dya’, wa’t‘hoiistci‘ewa’e’ewa’.
D 5 t=}
Then now did the rite start, did they play at lacross ball.
Wa’wadongo’da’ o’/né™ ‘or ‘ké™ djyo’héi o6f/na’ wa’t‘hon’tkwi’
It passed now in turn Pigeon Song they did it dance
géndyo‘gowa’né", géndyo‘ewagweeg!l‘, eksa’s‘ho®’’4‘ nigé”’*
it-assemblage large, it-assemblage, entire, they, the children so far it is
heyodo’’kda’.
to the last one.
Wa’wadongo’da’ o’né™ t‘ho‘’ge’ dofsayondo’gwi’. (Ne’‘t‘ho‘
It passed now then thence they dispersed. The there
niga’eais. )
so it tale is long.)
792 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY. [eTH. ANN. 43
DE‘HODYA’TKA’/EWE™!
(THAT IS, HE WHOSE BODY IS DIVIDED IN TWAIN)
A TRADITIONAL JOURNAL OF AN EXPEDITION TO THE SKYLAND
This is a Saga concerning the First People—the Ancient People—
the People of the Beginnings—who live now and who lived also when
the Earth was new, and, therefore, was young.
In the land of the Sunrise, at a place called Diyo‘hnyowa’né™
(i. e., There At the Great Lowland Cape), there was situated a village
of these First People, when the Earth was young.
There came a day when one of the young men, De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s
(i. e., He-Who-Cleaves-the-Sky-in-Twain), dwelling in the village at
Diyo‘hnyowa’né™ resolved to form an expedition to make a raid
westward into the distant regions through which passes the daily
path of the Sun.
So to promote his design De‘ha陓hy6’wé™s induced his friends to
prepare a great war feast, to which he invited all the First People
of that village. It being the custom of the country, he announced
to the public assembled there his purpose of leading a troop of war-
riors far into the west, following the path of the Sun and going beyond
the end of the earth to slaughter unknown men and to obtain the
scalps of alien peoples as tokens of their prowess and their courage
in warfare.
The feast having been prepared and the people having received
the notched sticks of invitation—white for the children and the
zeneral public, green for the young warriors and Women Chiefs, and
red for the Chiefs, Sorcerers, Elder Men, and the Elder Chiefs—all
then assembled in the long-lodge of public assembly. While the
cuests were enjoying the good things provided for their entertain-
nent, their host, De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s, arose in his place and in a set
speech announced his purpose to lead an expedition of a war party
into the west, even through the regions over which the Sun follows
his path, for the purpose of destroying and scalping all the alien
peoples whom they might find on their way thither.
In his address he urged the young men to volunteer to accompany
him and to share with him the hardships of his enterprise; but he
asked only for young men who had reached manhood’s estate, just
after maturing from the age of puberty. He further informed those
who would volunteer as members of his war party that they would have
to renounce their kith and kin, and even their lives; and that they
must also agree to observe strict adherence to a unanimity of pur-
1 The Onondaga Iroquoian text of this myth was dictated by the late Chief John Arthur Gibson, a Seneca
Federal Chief, in the winter of 1899, and recorded by J. N. B. Hewitt, on the Six Nations Land Grant on the
Grand River, Ontario, Canada, The accompanying interlinear and free translations were made by the
recorder in Washington, D. C. A free translation of a Seneca version of this myth was published in the
Thirty-second Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology,
aeiaa DE‘HODYA°TKA EWENé 793
pose, and also that they must agree to continue on the journey for-
ward no matter what the nature of forbidding obstacles in the way
might be; and that his own brother, Ga陓hyadkdon’dye’ (i. e., Along-
the-Edge-of-the-Sky, or The Horizon), had already volunteered to
accompany him, and that in the capacity of war chiefs, they two
would lead the party, should such a war party be formed to go.
In response to this appeal 28 young virile men besides the two
brothers volunteered to be members of the war party of the two
ambitious adventurers.
Having set a date for starting and a rendezvous for the assembling
of the troop, De‘haé“hyo’wé™s earnestly urged all the volunteers
to be ready to depart at the designated time.
The time for departure having arrived, De‘ha陓hyd/wé™s, by
messenger, notified all the volunteers that the time had come for
starting. Eagerly did the volunteers present themselves at the
rendezvous and having completed all other preparations they set out,
directing their course toward the Place of Sunset.
The minds of the two leaders were fixed on the place where the
Sun habitually sinks from view, so thither did they wend their way.
As these warriors traveled on they finally reached a place in which
they found the habitations of a people whom they did not know,
but these unoffending persons they ruthlessly killed and scalped.
After this bloody exploit they journeyed westward.
Having gone a short distance farther they suddenly came upon
the village of another people. At the dawn of day they attacked
these people, slaying all the males who did not escape in the dark-
ness, and having scalped the slain they passed on, following the
course of the Sun.
Having gone a day’s journey farther they came to the dwelling
place of a third people. At night these people also were attacked,
killed and scalped; all the males who did not escape them in the dark-
ness were massacred. In the morning the war party passed on.
These bloody exploits were repeated wherever they found a village
of people dwelling on the line of their march. This bloody work
continued for many moons.
It is said that after pursuing this course of conduct during a long
period of time the packs of scalps which they carried on their backs
grew so heavy as to hamper their movements. In their several
encounters a number of the band had been killed on their way. So
there came a time when many of those who remained alive complained
that the weight of the packs of scalps was becoming too great to be
borne.
These said, “‘It seems advisable now that we should store our packs
of scalps here in some secret place for safe-keeping until our return.”
19078°—28——51
794 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH ANN. 43
Finally, De‘haé"™hyo’we™s said, “It is probable also that we may
now soon see what we seek; namely, the scalp of all scalps. That
we might use to cover all those which we have. Moreover, this
kind of thing which we bear with us does not readily spoil.”
About this time they fell in with a person, a male Man Being,
whose towering stature reached one-half the height of the tallest
trees.
Then it was that Gaén‘hyakdon’dye’ (‘Along the Edge of the Sky,
i. e., The Horizon) said, “‘ Now, then, speaking inferentially, our good
fortune has brought about the fulfillment of the purpose of our expe-
dition, upon which we had agreed, namely, that we should see in our
hands a large quantity of scalps. Again, speaking inferentially, I
think that the next move to be made is to decide to kill this Man
Being whom we have met in this place. We shall then be possessed
of the large scalp about which my brother has already prophesied.
So let us attack him at once.’
So deploying they at once began to assault him by shooting their
arrows at him, and by striking him with their war-clubs and with their
stone hatchets; but they could not make any impression on him;
they failed to harm him in the least. _
At last the strange Man Being said to them, kindly, ‘‘What is it
that you desire to do? Do you imagine that you can kill me?’
Then they answered, ‘‘That is, indeed, our purpose, as it has been our
design in making our journey hither to kill all persons who might fall
in our way, no matter who they might be.”
To this frank admission of their purpose to kill him, this strange
Man Being replied, ‘‘The purpose for which you are banded together
is not good. And from this time forward you must utterly renounce
it and strictly desist from carrying it out. It is quite impossible for
you to killme. And I came to meet you here for the purpose of giv-
ing you this counsel.
“T watched you on your way to this place, and I saw with grief
that you killed many people. I want you to know that the reason
why I came to meet you is that you have now committed wrongs
enough on innocent people. And I want you to know that if you will
not cease from committing these wrongs you yourselves also shall
perish.”
Then De‘haé™hyd’wé"s replied, saying, ‘‘We are very thankful
to you for this good counsel, and we will try to abide by it. We will
pass beyond this point, as we have bound ourselves by a vow to at-
tempt to reach the place where the Sun habitually sinks from view—
to the spot where the Sun goes to and fro.’’ Then the strange Man
Being merely replied, ‘‘Do you then start on your journey.”’ And
while they listened to him with bowed heads he vanished from them;
they did not know nor see whither he went.
HEWITT] DE‘HODYA°TKA EWEN: 795
Then realizing that they were again alone they departed. They
traveled on for a long time, finally coming to a very large lake which
barred further progress ahead.
When seeing that there was apparently no means of crossing the
lake De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s said, “What thing is it that we should do
to cross over this lake?’? Thereupon, one of the band who seldom
uttered a word declared, ‘‘We have indeed made an agreement,
bound with a vow, that no matter what the circumstances or the obsta-
cles might be in our path, we would nevertheless advance through
them, as we have overcome what is past. Indeed, the time has now
come to fulfill our agreement.”
De‘ha陓hyo’wé™s then answered, saying, ‘Verily, it is even as
you have said. Come then, it is thou who must now take the lead.”
At once the man addressed took the lead. Alone he now went
upon the surface of the lake, walking upon the water. Thither he
went unflinchingly. Then, each in turn, the others in the band
followed in his wake. They crossed the lake safely.
Upon reaching the dry land on the farther shore of the lake, they
stood still, looking around and examining the new country. They
were surprised at seeing the visible sky rise and fall again, at re-
gular intervals. In their estimation it rose to the height of the tallest
pine tree known to them, before falling back. They saw, too, that
the place from which it rebounded was so smooth that it glistened.
While watching the rising and falling of the Sky, they beheld a
large number of pigeons flying out from the other side of the Sky,
and which after flying around for some time returned whence they
had come.
Then De‘haé™hyd’wé"™s said, “What manner of thing shall we
now do? To be sure, here seems to be, indeed, the end of the earth.
It is evident, indeed, that there is another country lying beyond this
sky-barrier which is thus continually rising and falling.”
Again that member of the band who was never in the habit of
speaking much said, ‘You are, of course, well aware of the require-
ment of the agreement by which we bound ourselves together betore
starting from home; did we not agree that no matter what might be
taking place, or what might be the obstacles in our way, never-
theless we should not recoil from going forward?
“Besides, you know, too, that those of us who still live number
five. Only five of our original number are still alive. Further-
more, the opportunity now presents itself for us to perform our vow
which we made; its fulfillment is now required of us; it is for us now
to act to redeem our mutual pledges.”
Then De‘haé™hyd’wé™s said, “Come, then, let us now secretly
store our burden of scalps here for safe-keeping until our return.”
796 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH ANN. 43
So, each man carefully concealed his bundle of scalps in such wise
that he could find it, should he ever be given the opportunity of
repassing that point.
When the packs of scalps were carefully secreted then De‘haé*-
hyd’wé™s addressing himself to the last speaker, said, ‘‘Now, then,
it is thou who must lead us in passing this obstacle that seemingly
bars our path. For our way, indeed, leads directly into that farther
country; we must pass so quickly under the sky as it rises that we
shall not be caught by it when it falls back.”
Then the man who had been addressed, reassuring himself, selected
a favorable starting point for his dash under the rising sky. Care-
fully timing the rising and falling of the sky he dashed forward as
swiftly as possible. His friends watched him rush onward until he
had disappeared on the farther side of the obstacle.
As the sky kept rising and falling the second man, making like dis-
positions, dashed forward, clearing the barrier as the first man had,
and disappeared on the other side. The third man and the fourth man
had like success in clearing this obstacle. The sky, however, did not
cease from rising and falling back onto its bed.
It was now the turn of the fifth and last man to tempt the peril of
attempting to pass under the sky. His four companions anxiously
watched him making ready to clear the danger which they had
safely passed.
The quartet did not see him start, but as the sky arose they saw
him running still far from the passage. But, just as he leaped, the
sky fell back, crushing him to death. He had miscalculated the
time and distance he had to run, and his career ended in that place.
Then De‘haé“hyd’wé™s said, “Let us be thankful that we
have been fortunate enough to pass this danger safely. We now
number only four. Only four of us have been spared to reach this
land. We are without our arms or other means of defense. We
know not whether we shall require them or not. So, now, verily,
I believe that we must at all events go forward. And, verily, it is
easily seen that we are now in a land which is quite different from
the other known to us.
“We see that the light of this land is unequaled in its brightness;
it is verily true, that the daylight of the land whence we started is
such that it is like the light of a starlight night as compared with
that of this land. And now, then, let us depart hence. We will
seek to find other human beings, if such there be, who may have a
settlement here.”’
Now, without further parleying they set forward. As they
traveled on they saw that the standing trees of all kinds were very
large, tall and fine looking, and that they severally were in full
bloom; and that these trees were of surpassing beauty. The trav-
Eee
EWITTl DE‘HODYA°TKA EWEN 797
elers were greatly surprised to learn that the flowers of these trees
were the sole source of the light of that world. They also noted
the fact that all the beasts and animals and birds possessed excep-
tionally fine bodies and attractive presence. They remarked, too,
that they had seen nothing, during their journey thither, so wonder-
ful and so strange.
They saw with astonishment the exuberance of the growing
grasses and plants, and among these they beheld in rich profusion
the fruited stalks of the strawberry plants, which were just as tall
as the grasses among which they grew. During their entire journey
thither they had not seen such large luscious berries growing.
Having gone some distance into the new country they were sur-
prised at seeing in the distance a great multitude of Man Beings who
were assembled on the heath, the playground of that people, they
appeared to the travelers to be at games of amusement.
Then De‘haé™hyo’wé™s said, ‘““What is to be done now, my
friends, seeing that we have now arrived at the dwelling place of
strange Man Beings, and that we have now no arms with which to
defend ourselves should these people living here attempt to do us
harm?”
Thereupon Gaé™hyakdon’dye’ spoke, saying, “‘We have, indeed,
made an agreement, as you know, that we would forsake our kindred
and our lives to accomplish the purpose of this expedition. You
know that each of us volunteered by “notching the rod” to carry
out that agreement. And now, if we are to die here, we can do
nothing to avoid such an end; we must not break our resolution
and compact to follow the path of the Sun to its end. Nevertheless,
the only thing that is certain, in the case of our death, is that our
careers would end here.”’
Then his brother, De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s, replied to him, saying,
“The matter stands even as you have stated it, so, then, let us go
forward to meet this people.” They then started, going thither
to the place where they saw the people assembled.
In a very short time they arrived at the place where the great
multitude was assembled. There, not far from the others, the
anxious travelers came to a standstill. Looking around them they
saw that the inhabitants of the village were in readiness to see a
game of lacrosse ball-play, and that the players were even then
standing in their accustomed places.
In a short time the game commenced, and the vast multitude
drew near to be spectators of it. As soon as the game was fairly
under way there arose a great tumult; there was shouting and loud
cries of excitement and approbation caused by the varying fortunes
of favorite players. The great multitude rejoiced, and the new
arrivals were greatly delighted with what they saw.
798 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
At this time one of the players exhibited great rudeness in his manner
of playing, for he struck right and left with his netted club without
regard to the other players who might be injured by his recklessness.
Then a person from the multitude went up to that player and said
. to him, ‘‘Do thou cease from acting so rudely; thy manner is too
violent, because one who rejoices does not act in this manner. So
do not act thus again.”
The players at once resumed the game, playing as they never had
played before. In a short time, however, the player who had been
cautioned to be more mild in his methods of play again exhibited his
violence toward his playmates.
Then the man who bad reprimanded him before went up to him
again and said, ‘‘ Assuredly, I forbade you acting so rude as youhave;
I told you not to act thus violently again. Yet, thou hast disregarded
my request. And so, now you shall, moreover, rest for a time.
You are too unkind and headstrong.”’
Thereupon, seizing the ball player by the nape of the neck and by
the legs and lifting him up bodily bore him from the field. Not far
therefrom stood a very large tree. Thither the man carried the ball
player, and having arrived beside the tree, and still carrying the
ball player, he cast the body headlong against the trunk of the tree.
Head foremost the body penetrated the tree trunk, the head coming
part way out on the opposite side of the tree, while his feet still
protruded on the other. Then the man quietly returned to the ball
ground, and the game was resumed; it was continued until one of
the sides had scored the requisite number of points to win the game,
and then the players again commingled with the multitude.
Then the man who had imprisoned the rude player in the tree
trunk went to that tree and released the prisoner and set him free
with an admonition to be more mild in his method of play in the
future. Upon his return to the multitude, he told them that it was
time for them to return to their several homes, and they dispersed.
It was then that this man who appeared to be one of the chief
men of the settlement came to the place where stood the traveling
company of De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s. As soon as he came up to them he
asked familiarly, ‘So you have arrived, have you?”
Replying De‘ha陓hyd’wé"'s said, ‘‘We have now arrived.”
It was then that the man said, ‘Assuredly, the reason that you
have arrived safely in this land is that one of your number began at
the very time of your departure from home to think, repeatedly
soliloquizing, ‘Oh, Thou Master of Life, Thou shouldst have pity
on us, so that we may pass through all the dangers which beset the
accomplishment of the purpose of our solemn agreement. But, if
it so be that we shall die on this earth, grant that we may also arrive
in that other land that is extant, where Thou Thyself abidest, Thou
SeTUre] DE‘HODYVTKA’ EWEN 799
Master of Life.’”? Every day, every night also, such was his mind
and prayer.
“Tt was that attitude of mind which was able to bring your persons
safely into this land—this elder country.
“So now, moreover, you have fully accomplished what I promised
you when I met you on your way hither.
“So now, let me ask you, who among you is individually willing
that I should restore his life—i. e., refit his being?”
Then one of the four travelers answered, saying, ‘I am just the
one that is willing; do you begin on me.’’ Then this Man Being
going forward to the place where stood a tree not far distant, reached
the tree and raising his arm to its full length seized the standing tree
and bent it down to the earth, and stripped the bark in one entire
piece from the trunk of the tree. Then placing this piece of bark
on the ground, he said to the volunteer, ‘‘ Now, do thou come hither
to me.”
Then the man who had consented to have his body and being
refitted, went forward to him, while his three companions intently
watched their host in what he was doing to their companion; and
they saw him begin his work. Then the host placed the man on
the outspread piece of bark. He took apart the flesh body of their
companion; he, too, unjointed severally all the joints of his skeleton,
laying each several bone aside. And then he took each of the bones,
and every one of the joints of the bones, and wiped it very carefully.
He soon completed his task of washing and cleaning them.
He then began to join together all the bones and all the portions of
flesh in their proper relations. And as soon as he had completed his
task he said to his guests, ‘‘ Now, I have refinished this work. What
is solely of the other world has been removed. For what is of ‘the
earth earthy’ is out of place here. Now, my friend, do thou arise
again.”’
Then the man whose body and being had been remodeled arose,
standing erect and casting his eyes around him. Then his host
said to him, ‘‘Like unto what is your life, as you now feel it? Do
you feel different from what you did before I remodeled your body
and being?”
To which the renewed man replied, ‘‘Its condition is indeed such
that it feels immeasurably more delightful, and I am happier than
before the change.”’
Then his host said to him, “If this be, indeed, true, attempt to
seize that deer standing yonder. If it so be that thou canst overtake
it, do thou seize it, also.”
So looking in the distance the deer was seen standing there.
Then when the remodeled man ran toward it, the deer at once fled in
terror. The man sped swiftly in pursuit of it. It had not gone
800 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
very far before he overtook it and seized it. He brought it back
to the place where his host stood, who said to him, “ Now, assuredly,
thy life has become a new thing—you have acquired the life of this
country.”
While they two were yet speaking another man of the troop of
De‘ha陓hyo’wé"s said, “TI, too, desire to have the same thing per-
formed on my body and life; thou must remake my life, and I want
it done now.”
His host directed him to lie down on the piece of bark as did the
other man; at once he proceeded in a manner similar to that followed
in the case of the first patient. It was not long before he was ready
to ask him to arise, having remade or refitted his life with new life
forces. Now the two men who had had their lives renewed felt that
they had acquired new life and that they were immeasurably more
delightful to have, and that the joy of living was refined.
Now the remaining two men, seeing how desirable was the change
brought about in the bodies and lives of the other two men by having
them remodeled, said, ‘‘we, too, wish to have the same thing per-
formed on our lives that was wrought in the bodies and lives of our
two companions. So we ask you that this be done for us, too.”’
Then the host of the troop of De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s proceeded to
renew and remodel the bodies and the lives of these two men. When
he had finished this task, he said to them, ‘‘Now, I have reformed
all your lives; I have finished everything that concerns and fits them
for this country. So we will now go to the lodge where you shall
remain as in your home while you are in this country.
So the troop of De‘haé“hyo’wé"s and their host started. They
walked leisurely along, noting the many strange things which
attracted their attention on every side. They had not gone very far,
however, before they reached a very large lodge, into which their
host led the party; therein they saw a very old woman, a Man
Being, who presided over it. Upon entering the lodge the host of
De‘ha陓hyod’‘wé™s and his friends said to the old woman, “‘ Now,
it is this matter. I have brought here those persons whom, I said,
would take up their abode here when they arrived in this country.
So now they shall remain with you under your care and keep.”
Then the aged woman who was the mistress of the lodge replied,
saying, “It shall be even as you have said it. These, my grand-
children, shall be one with me in this lodge.”
Then, the Man Being who had brought the visitors there said,
“Now furthermore, as to myself I will go forth. Make yourselves
at home,” and he at once left the lodge to attend to his other affairs.
Then, the mistress of the lodge who was very old said to her guests
to make them feel more at home, ‘‘I am now quite alone, you perceive,
in caring for the lodge, which is very large, as you see. The male
HEWITT] DESHODY.OTKA’ EWEN: SO1
persons who dwell here are absent hunting; they will soon return for
the night. I will now prepare something for you to eat,’’ and she at
once set before them what was ready cooked in the lodge.
When they first entered the lodge the band of De‘haé“hyd/wée"s
noticed that the old woman was busily at work; they saw that she
was engaged in making a mantle for herself; at intervals she held the
work up at arm’s length to note the effect of her labor. The visitors
also discovered the fact that human hair was the material out of
which the old woman was weaving her mantle.
They also saw that their aged hostess possessed a dwarf dog, which
reposed near by on her couch. They were astonished also when the
old woman left her work for a few moments, to see the dwarf dog
quickly arise and go over to the place where the old woman had left
her hair-work and begin to unravel quickly but stealthily all the work
that the old woman had in the meanwhile done on her mantle. But
when the dwarf dog had nearly unraveled all the work, the old woman
returned to take it up again and to continue her task.
While the visitors were eating what the old woman had set before
them the male members of the old woman’s household returned,
each bearing a bundle. Upon entering the lodge they said to the old
woman, “‘Now, we have returned. We were fortunate throughout
the entire expedition in the killing of much game.”
Then the mistress of the lodge said to the returned hunters, ‘‘ Verily,
be it known, that a short time ago, De‘haé“hyawa’’gi‘ brought to
this lodge the human beings, of’gwe', whom he said were coming to
this country and whom he said would abide in this lodge when they
would arrive. So they have arrived; these men here are they. So
talk with them and become acquainted with them.”
So the men who had just returned to their lodge drew near to the
visitors and conversed with them, saying, ‘“‘We are, indeed, thankful
that you have safely arrived here. It is now a long time that we have
kept watching you on your way hither. Moreover, be it known, that
we have now seen one another, and so we are greatly rejoiced.”
Then it was that they severally and mutually stroked the bodies of
one another, as was the custom on such occasions, and they greatly
rejoiced to become acquainted one with another.
Then the old woman began to prepare food for the returned
hunters. When the food was cooked, she called the men to eat,
saying, ‘‘ Now, of course, you will eat the food which I have prepared
for you.”’ And the men began to take their nourishment.
But the method they adopted for taking their sustenance was most
singular to the companions of De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s. So they intently
watched the hunters eat, for they did not eat the food set before them;
they merely absorbed the exhalations from the food, and it was the
odor or effluvium of the food that satisfied their hunger. When they
802 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [pTH. ANN. 43
had finished their meal, the old woman said to them, “‘It is now time,
perhaps, that you should go out to hunt game which our human
guests can eat, for, you know that they do not eat the same kind of
things that you do.”
So the hunters started out of the lodge to seek for game for their
guests. As soon as the men were gone the old woman put her hands
to the headrest of her couch and took therefrom a single grain of
corn and a single squash seed. Then she went to the end of the fire-
place and there she prepared in the ashes two small hills or beds, in
one of which she placed the grain of corn and in the other the squash
seed, and carefully covered them with rich dirt.
In a very short while the visitors looked and were greatly surprised
to see that the seeds had sprouted and had shot out of the ground
small plantlets, which were growing rapidly. Not very long after
this they saw the cornstalk put forth ears of corn and the squash
vine squashes, so in the short space of a few hours these plants had
supplied the old woman with ears of corn and squashes. These she
prepared and cooked.
Then the men who were out hunting returned to the lodge, bring-
ing with them the fine carcass of a deer which they had killed. At
once they set to work to skin it and to dress it. As soon as they had
finished this task the old woman set the venison, the corn, and the
squashes over the fire to cook. She set her kettles over the fire on
stone supports and promoted the cooking by putting hot stones into
them.
When these things were cooked she placed them on fine bowls of
bark and set these bowls before the visitors and bade them eat heartily.
So De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s and his friends ate their fill.
This now came to pass. The aged woman now, verily, said, “It is
now time, you will agree, I think, for you to go again to hunt.”
This remark she made to the male members of her family.
Then the visitors saw something very strange. They saw the old
woman take from under her couch a large quantity of corn husks.
She then went to what appeared to be an added lodge, or separate
room, and there pushed aside the door flap. In that room the visitors
saw what seemed to them a lake, which was round in figure. The
old woman then making a circuit of the lake, heaped the corn husks
around its edges.
When this task was finished she set the corn husks on fire and they
quickly burst into flames and the flames took up all the water of the
lake. Then she said to the men of her household, ‘“‘ Now, I have again
completed the preparations. Moreover, do you start now. And
this shall also take place. You must be careful. In the course of
your excursion you must not injure any person.”’ These words she
addressed to the men of her lodge. They then departed on their
usual trip over the land.
ee eee
HEWITT] DE‘HODY\’TKA EWE: 803
And it was so, that the companions of De‘haé“hyd’wé™s remained
in the lodge of the old woman during the entire time that they were
in that country.
Furthermore, it happened that when they took a stroll in the country
while the men of the lodge were absent, they came upon a spring of
water which formed a large pool. So one of the party taking his bow
and using it as a cane thrust it into the pool of water to see whether
he could find any living thing in it; but he saw nothing to attract his
attention. And so when they had returned to the lodge they again
stood their bows in the customary place in a corner of the room.
When the men of the lodge had returned home from their excursion
into the country, one of them said, ‘‘There is something in this lodge
that has the smell of game (i. e., something to be killed),’’ and he
at once began looking around from place to place.
Then the others after sniffing the air exclaimed, ‘It is true; there
is something in here that smells like a game animal,”’ and one went
over to the place where the bows belonging to the companions of
De‘haé™hyd’wé"™s werestanding. Takingone of the bows in his hand
he said, ‘‘It is, indeed, this bow that has the scent,’’ and turning to
De‘haé™hyd/wé™s said, “To what place have you been? What is
the place like where you touched something with this bow?”
In answering De‘haé™hyd’wé™s said, ‘Yonder, not far away,
you know, there is a cliff, and on the farther side of it there is a
spring of water, forming a deep pool.”
Thereupon the men of the lodge exclaimed, ‘‘Let us all go to that
place right away,’ and all started out of the lodge and they ran
swiftly to the spring. When they arrived there De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s
said to his companions, ‘There, in this spring and pool of water,
I thrust my bow to-rouse whatever might dwell in this pool.”
Then one of the men of the country said, “It is assuredly certain
that some mysterious creature abides herein. We shall see what it
is. Furthermore, do you, our friends, stand yonder, a little aloof,
and then you shall see the thing done, how we will kill it.”
Heeding this admonition, the companions of De‘haé™hyd’wé™s
drew back a short distance and watched the men of the country
make their dispositions to make the attack. They did not wait long
to see a wonderful phenomenon. For the men of the country at
once began their task. One touched with a rod the bottom of the
pool, whence flowed the spring of water. And now, too, there began
to be heard loud sounds, even such as are heard when the voicings
of Thunder fill the air with a deafening din. Such was the tumult
and confusion at this time that the now thoroughly frightened human
beings ran fleeing from the spot to seek safety. Then, also, there
were flashes of lightning followed by loud crashes and deep rumblings
of the thunder. This uproar continued for some time when suddenly
804. IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [eTH. ANN. 43
it ceased and one of the hosts of De‘haé™hyd’wé"s said, calling his
guests back, “Oh, come back. We have now killed this creature.”
Thereupon, when they had again assembled they departed, going
back to their lodge. When they reached the lodge they said to the
old woman, ‘‘ We have now killed that uncanny creature, that otkon.
Indeed, we do not know in what possible way it happened that this
creature took up its abode so very near this lodge. We had never
before noticed it. Perhaps it has been there a long time, since it
had become so large in size. We have, perhaps, barely escaped some
great misfortune.’’ The old woman replied, saying gratefully, ‘‘ What
a very remarkable matter it is, in which our visitors have been of
assistance to us,’’ and then in a moment she asked, ‘‘What is the
otkon? What is the figure and kind of thing you have so fortunately
killed?”” The men answered, “It is, indeed, the Great Blue Lizard,
which we have destroyed.’’ So they rested for the night.
The next morning the old woman said to the men of her lodge,
“Wor myself, I am thinking that it is time, the exact time of the
year, when you should again make mellow and dampen all the things
that grow on the earth. What do you say?”
Thereupon, one of the men replied, ‘‘It would seem well, perhaps,
that you should ask Him who is the principal one to be consulted
in regard to our duties in this matter. It is possible that He may
say, ‘It is now the proper time of the year in which you should
again make mellow and dampen all the things that severally grow
on the earth.’ ’’ And he ceased from talking with her.
Then the aged woman arose from her seat and gently pushing
aside the door flap hanging at the doorway leading to the adjoining
room said, “Do you not think that it is now, perhaps, the proper
time that the men should again make damp and mellow the things
that grow on the earth and the soil as well?”
Then the person addressed answered, saying, “For myself, I, too,
think that it is time, perhaps, for doing that about which you have
asked me. So let it be done as you wish.”
Then, allowing the door flap to fall back the old woman withdrew
to her own location in the lodge. And in order to make the needed
preparations for carrying out the purpose of her request she gathered
a quantity of corn husks and again entered the place in which the
lake of water was and she again heaped the corn husks along the edge
or shore of the lake. When she had placed the corn husks along the
entire circuit of the lake she set them on fire.
When the fire had become brisk and bright the old woman turned
to the men of the lodge and said to them, ‘‘I have now, again, made
the necessary preparations for the performance of your accustomed
task. And now, moreover, you had better start on your journey to
make all things that grow on the earth damp and mellow, and the soil
nee DE‘HODYA°TKA’ EWEN 805
as well. And this also shall be done; they who are visiting us shall
accompany you wherever you may go; and you must carefully keep
them from harm; and you must show them all things of interest along
your journey.”
Then, taking up their implements and weapons the men of the
lodge and their guests departed. During the course of their long
journey one of the hosts of De‘haé“hyd’wé™s and his men said, “‘ You
shall now see the things over which we have charge. He whom you
are wont to call Hawénni’yo’ (He The Ruler) is the person who has
charged us with all these matters; and we shall continue to have the
care of them as long as the earth endures—as long as it lasts. We
shall tend all those things which he has planted on the earth; we shall
habitually cause moisture (water) to fall on them, and we shall also
keep all the water in the several rivers on the earth fresh at all times;
and we shall also water all those things upon which you and your
people live, so that all things which he has made to be shall live and
shall not perish for the need of water. And you, you human beings,
shall then live in health and contentment. Such are our duties from
day to day.”
Then it was that De‘haé“hyd’wé™s and his party looking down
beneath saw another earth far below them. As they proceeded they
heard loud sounds; they were like the voicings of Thunder when he
approaches on earth; and now too there began to be bright flashes of
lightning, and then there began to be rain; and then they, the rain-
drops, fell to the lower earth.
As they moved onward they saw a huge serpent which had formi-
dable horns protruding from its head. Then one of the hosts of
De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s and his friends said, “Look at that thing, moving
along swiftly yonder. Itis known that were it to emerge permanently
from the interior of the earth it would bring great misfortune to the
things that dwell on the earth. In fact, it would bring to an end the
days of a large multitude of you human beings. And that it never
come forth permanently out of the ground is one of the duties with
which we are strictly charged.’’ Then, in a moment, the speaker
continued, ‘“‘Now, also, you shall see what will take place when we
kill it.
Having their attention thus called to it, the party of De‘haé™-
hyd’wé™s looking down saw on the lower earth a huge serpent having
formidable horns protruding from its head; it moved swiftly along the
ground. As they watched their hosts began to pursue it, and the
voice of the Thunder was exceedingly loud and the flashes of lightning
amazingly vivid.
Finally, the huge serpent was hit by its pursuers and it began to
flee from them; it sought unsuccessfully to hide beneath standing
trees, but these trees were struck and riven into splinters; and then
806 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH, ANN. 43
it fled to the mountains, seeking to conceal itself beneath their shelter;
but this was in vain, for it was repeatedly hit by the men of Thunder,
and finally, it was killed.
As an explanation of this phenomenon, the hosts of De‘ha陑-
hyo’wé™s and his friends, said,‘‘It is verily true that beneath the sur-
face of the ground whatever is otkon (i. e., malign by nature) moves to
and fro from place to place. It would, indeed, be most unfortunate
for us all should this species of being be permitted to travel from
place to place upon the earth. And so they are doomed to abide
beneath the surface of the ground in the interior of the earth.
“And now concerning the origin of these beings; it was he whom we
call O‘ha’&’ (The Ice-clad) that formed their bodies; and so too it
came to pass that he whom you call Hawéini’yo’ (i. e., the Disposer,
or Ruler) decided that so long as the earth endures these beings shall
abide under the surface of the earth. And, furthermore, we will say
that we ourselves believe that He who charged us with the performance
of this task of keeping them beneath the surface of the earth will
cause it to come to pass, perhaps when the earth is nearing its ending,
then, and not until then, that these beings shall be permitted to come
forth upon the earth. So is it, indeed, to come to pass that when the
event is not distant—the ending of the earth—He will bring to an
ending the duties with which we are severally charged to be performed
for the benefit of the things that live upon the earth.
“And not until then shall the waters which are held in their several
places become polluted; all other things shall likewise become old and
decayed upon the earth; and all things that grow out of the ground too
shall grow old and sear; indeed, all things shall become withered and
decayed. So, now let us turn back homeward.”
Then turning homeward the party retraced their steps. Upon
reentering their lodge the spokesman of the party said to the old
woman who presided over the lodgehold (household), ‘‘We have now
completed the task of making damp and mellow all things that grow
upon the face of the earth.”
Then, the aged matron of the lodge arising from her seat went into
the adjoining room of the lodge and said to the Person who occupied
that room ‘‘Now, they have, indeed, returned.”” Then the old
woman withdrew and resumed her accustomed seat.
In a short time the doorflap separating the adjoining room was
pushed aside and the Person—a Man Being (Hén’gwe‘)—thrust his
head through the doorway and asked the returned men, ‘‘Have you
now, indeed, completed the work? Have you made damp and mellow
all things that grow on the earth that is beneath this one?”
Then the men replied in unison, ‘‘ We have indeed accomplished our
task as we were charged to do.” And the Person from the adjoining
room said, “Now, moreover, you must rest until there shall be
Peel DE*HODYA°TKA’ EWEN: 807
another day; and then you shall again reecommence the performance of
the duties with which you are severally charged.”
This conversation supplied the opportunity of seeing the Person to
De‘ha陓hyo’wé™s and his party. They were convinced that he too
was Man; that he was, in fact, a Hén’gwe’. But they were sur-
prised, and even amazed, to see that one half of the body of this
strange Person was in all respects like that of a human being but that
the other half of his body was, in substance, crystal ice. They too, at
this moment, felt a breeze that was chilling, strike them from out of
that doorway; but at this moment, this strange Man Being withdrew,
and the doorflap concealed the room from their further gaze.
Then, the aged matron of the lodge addressing her guests, said,
“That Person whom you have just seen is, in fact, the Foremost
One, the Principal One, of all those who are charged with duties to
perform in the economy of the earth. And he is called by us De‘-
hodya’tga’ewé™ (i. e., He-Whose-Body-Is-Cleft-in-Twain); and He
is also named, Owi‘son’dyon (i. e., It Casts Ice or It Hails); and it
is this that you saw when He showed his face at the doorway, that
there at once came forth from Him a cold breeze. And so that act
will immediately cause the prospective days and the prospective
nights on the earth below to become cold and wintry. Moreover,
when the day again dawns (i. e., Next Year) He will again show
His face but the other side of his body, and immediately there will
blow hither a warming breeze.”
Then the members of the lodge said one to another, ‘‘We now have
paused in our labors in order to rest. Moreover, to-morrow it will
come to pass that we shall take you back to the place whence you
departed, for you have been here now many days. And this is, of
course, what you human beings call Springtime.”
Then all the members of the lodge fell asleep in their several
places. When morning came the doorflap separating the room from
the adjoining one was again thrust aside, and the strange Man
Being, De‘hodya’tga’ewé™, again showed his face and the other half
(the flesh side) of his body at the doorway, and He called out
aloud, ‘‘Now then, all you people, awake and arise; it is now time
to do so.”” Then all the sleepers awoke. And as they awoke from
sleep they severally outstretched their arms and_ bodies, loudly
yawning and uttering loud vociferations, as is the case on earth,
when the voice of Thunder is heard. There arose, too, a warm
breeze of wind, and then the men of the lodge went out.
It was but a short time after this that they reentered the lodge
and said to their guests, ‘You should accompany us on our intended
journey, so that you may see an otkon (a daimon) which inhabits
certain trees standing hard by the place whence we returned. It is,
indeed, now a long time that we have been making attempts to kill
808 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN, 43
and destroy this being, for it is possessed of very powerful orenda,
or magic power.”
Thereupon, De‘ha陓hyo’wé™s replied, “It is, of course, perhaps
true, that that should come to pass, that we accompany you to learn
what manner of being that may be.”
So, all the men of the lodge started on their journey, and went
directly to the place where the being, the otkon, had its lair. Havy-
ing gone a long distance, the men of Thunder finally said to their
guests, ‘There, indeed, is the place where we have kept saying,
‘an otkon abides.’ You must stand in yonder place, quite safely
removed from any danger from this being. And then you shall see
it as we shall cause it to come forth from its lair.”
Thereupon the party of De‘ha陑hyd’wé"s withdrew to the des-
ignated position. Then they saw one of their hosts go forward and
strike one of the trees several sharp blows with his club; then they
saw the being come forth from its lair, and they concluded that
it was what they themselves called a squirrel. But the Being, or
Squirrel, in turn, thrust its body only partly out of its hiding-place;
at once the Men of Thunder hurled their shots at it; there were loud
thunderings and the lightning flashes were vivid, and there arose a
great tumult and a terrific hurricane of wind.
But, in a short time, the Men of Thunder ceased for a moment,
having failed to hit the Being. At once the Squirrel, or Being,
quickly descended the tree on which it then was, and running to
another tree climbed it in an effort to escape its tormentors. But,
in a very short time, the Men of Thunder shivered this tree, and the
Squirrel fled back to the tree in which was its lair and it swiftly
climbed back into it. And the Men of Thunder said, ‘‘ Now, indeed,
you have seen what we call otkon (daimon). And the time is now,
indeed long, since we have been making vain efforts to destroy this
Being, this great Otkon.”
In replying De‘ha陓hyo’wé"s said, “It is now our turn; we will
now attempt to kill the Otkon.” But the Men of Thunder answered,
“We fear that the attempt will not result favorably; you may be
injured, for, indeed, this is an Otkon endued with power beyond
measure.”’
But De‘haé“hyo’wé™s assuringly replied, ““We know that we our-
selves can do this task.’”?’ Then the Men of Thunder replied, “If you
are determined to make the attempt, we will assist you, should you
fail in your attempt.”
At once one of the party of De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s went up to the tree in
which the Squirrel had its lair and tapped on it with his club. As
soon as he began to tap on the tree the Squirrel again thrust out its
head and half its body and gazed at the men. Then, De‘haé™hy-
o’we™s taking a knob-headed arrow from his quiver, shot at it, hitting
— DE*HODYA°TKA’ EWEN: 809
it fair in the head, and then the body of the Squirrel came tumbling
to the ground.
Thereupon the Men of Thunder took up the body of the Squirrel to
carry back with them and then with their guests they started for their
home. When they reached their lodge the Men of Thunder said to
the old woman, ‘‘ Now, in fact, our visitors, for their part, have killed
it—they have, indeed, killed the Otkon, which for a very long time
we have failed to kill.”
Answering this statement of the men of her lodge, the old woman
said, ‘‘I am indeed very thankful to receive this news. This then
shall be done; the skin of this Otkon shall belong to me, seeing that it
is so precious, and it shall be the robe of my couch.”’
And so De‘haé“hyod’wé"s set to work and carefully skinned the
Squirrel; and then he neatly prepared it and then he spread it on a
suitable frame to dry. When it had thoroughly dried De‘ha陓hy-
0’wé™s presented it to the old woman, assuring her that that was the
method his people employed in preserving the skins of animals. The
old woman received the skin with many thanks, for she felt that she
had come into possession of a skin which was very precious to her.
Then, addressing the men of her lodge she said, ‘‘They who are our
visitors are the ones who have accomplished this matter for us. So in
token of this the following shall come to pass; and that is, that one of
these persons, our visitors, shall remain here as one of us; he shall
become a co-worker with you, for the reason that he and his kindred
were able to accomplish that which you yourselves were unable to do.”
In giving assent to this proposition the men replied, ‘Let that, too,
be done; let Him who is foremost among us speak it, and it shall be
done.”’ The old woman replied, ‘‘That is even so; His consent is all
that is required to accomplish this desirable thing.’’ And she at once
arose from her seat, and going thence to the doorway leading to the
adjoining room, and pushing aside the door flap she said, ‘‘ Behold.
Will you confirm the proposition that one of the men visiting us shall
remain here as one of us, while his companions shall return hence to
their own homes? And the reason for this is, that he was able to kill
the Squirrel—the Otkon—and since the men who live in this lodge had
for so long a time failed to do it; I desire further that he shall at all
times assist them and that he shall be a co-worker with them.”
Answering the old woman, De‘hodyi’tga’ewé™ said, “I willingly
confirm this proposition, if it so be, that he himself is freely willing,
and, of course, that he will, perhaps, volunteer to have his life pounded
(ina mortar). It will then, as you know, be possible for him to help
them continually.”” And He ceased speaking.
Then the old woman returned to the group comprising the party
of De‘haé“hyo’wé™s and said to elect man, ‘‘Hatch’kwi‘ (Behold),
19078°—28 52
810 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [BTH. ANN. 43
wilt thou confirm the proposition that thou shalt remain here alone,
while your companions return to their own homes? If thou wilt
be willing to agree to this proposition, I will, furthermore, give thee
a new name, and this shall be the name by which they shall hereafter
habitually call thee, namely, Daga’é"‘da’ (i.e., The Thaw, or the
Warm Spring Wind).”
Thereupon, this member of the party of De‘ha陓hy6’wé"s replied,
“T willingly agree to this proposal; I am quite willing to be an assist-
ant to them in their work.’”’ And the old woman answering, said,
“T am much pleased that the matter is now settled. We, indeed,
have become of one opinion, having one purpose in view.”’
At this time De‘hodya’tgae’wé™ interrupted by saying, ‘‘Now,
then, do bring his person (body) into this room, and let him at once
be prepared for his duties.”
Then, the old woman addressing the visitor, who had consented to
remain, said, “Come. The time has now arrived for doing what you
have agreed to do for us, for doing what you require to fit yourself for
your new duties.”
Then the man who had consented to remain entered the room in
which abode De‘hodya’tgae’wé™. As soon as he had entered the
room De‘hodya’tgae’wé™ said to him, “Here stands the mortar.
Thou must place thyself in it. Now, verily, thou shalt change thy-
self, thy person, as to the kind of its flesh and thy life.”” Obeying his
instructor, the man at once placed himself in the mortar, that is,
in the hollowed end of the mortar wherein the grain was usually
pounded, and then De‘hodya’tgae’wé™ drew near and taking up
the pestle pounded him in the manner in which corn is pounded,
striking three several blows, and he then said to the visitor, ‘‘Thy
flesh has now changed in kind. The task is now accomplished. So
now you may sing to try your voice.”
The transformed man began to sing, and De‘ha陓hyo’wé"s and
his one remaining friend heard the singing, which sounded to them
exactly like the voice of approaching Thunder, only that its volume
was somewhat less, as they heard it. And they said, one to the other,
“Now, it is known that he, Daga’é‘da’, is approaching,” and,
shortly, their transformed friend re-entered the room.
In a short time thereafter the old woman said to the men of the
lodge, now including the newly transformed person, ‘Furthermore,
you shall now start on your journey, and you shall now begin again
to make mellow and wet anew all the things that are earth-products,
growing on the earth beneath. And this, moreover, shall be done.
Digaé"’da’ shall take the lead. And so it shall be he whom they
who dwell on the earth below shall name first in the Spring of the
year. Of course the human beings will say, ‘Now, the Warm Wind
of Spring has come down; now the hot spring wind blows again.
HEWITT] DE‘HODYA°TKA’ EWE: S11
And so now the spring season will come upon us.’ And it shall con-
tinue thus, moreover, so long as the earth shall stand, that it shall be
customary when the Spring season arrives for the human beings to
name him first, who came from the earth beneath. And it shall be
customary for them to say, ‘Now, the Warm Wind of Spring has
descended—the Spring Wind.’ And, verily, they shall never forget,
indeed, each several time it arrives—the interchange on the earth—
the line of demarcation between the snowtime and the summertime,
for Daiga’é"‘da’ shall continue to change the prospective days and the
prospective nights of the future time. Now, you men must start to
accompany a part of the way homeward those who have been visiting
us for so many days. But before they got started she resumed her
discourse, saying, “‘ Now | will tell you who are human beings of the
earth that it is even | whom you call the ‘Nocturnal Light-Orb’ (the
Moon). And He it is whom you and your ancestors have called
De‘haé“hyawa’’gi‘, and sometimes Hawénni’yo’ (the Master or
Ruler), who has commissioned me. And this is what He has com-
missioned me to do: When it becomes dark on the earth, then it is I
who shall cause it to be measurably light and to be warm on the
earth, so that it become not too cold nor too dark; so that all the
things that should grow, may grow unharmed on the earth, and also
all those things on which you, human beings, live, dwelling as you
do on the earth beneath. Until the time that the earth shall stand
no more He has commissioned me to act and to do my duty. Itis
thus with us all. He has commissioned us only for the time during
which the earth beneath shall stand, or endure. Moreover, I will
now impart to you the following information, so that you on’gwe‘
(human beings), living on the earth, shall know that they who abide
here in this place are, as you know, those whom you call ‘Hadi-
wénnoda’dye’s,’ (They Whose Voices Stand out from place to place),
the Thunderers; and so that you shall know that He who established
this world is One whom you call, De‘haé™hyawa’’gi‘ and also ‘Hawéii-
ni’yo’, or the Ruler, or the Disposer.
“Tt was He who decreed that these men shall customarily appear
to the lower world from a certain direction, and that is, from the west,
and that they shall move in the direction of the east.
“And so let this be a sign to you who dwell on the lower earth, that
when it so comes to pass that these Men of Thunder shall come from the
east, you shall know at once its meaning, and shall say one to another,
‘Now, it seems that the time is coming near at hand in the which
He will take to pieces the earth as it stands.’ Verily, such is the
strict manner in which He has commissioned us, charging us with
definite duties. It is well known that the diurnal Light Orb (the
Sun) customarily comes from one certain direction; in like manner,
it is also true of me, for I too must appear to the lower world from
812 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
one certain direction. And this obligation on our part is fixed; and
our coming shall never occur in a different manner as long as the
earth endures—at least until that day in the future when He him-
self whom you call sometimes Hawéfni’yo’ shail change and trans-
form what He himself has established.
“So now, moreover, the time has arrived for you to start for your
home; but, first, before you depart, you must stroll about this upper
world to see everything that may be beneficial to you and to your
people in the days to come; and by the time you will return from
this tour of inspection, I will have made ready what you shall take
with you, when you shall go again to make mellow and wet the earth
beneath. And this, too, upon which I am at work is something about
which I must tell you something. I am engaged in making myself
a mantle, and the material out of which I am weaving it is, indeed,
truly what you think it is—for it is human hair with which I am work-
ing. And you have observed as well, that each time I lay my work
aside for a moment, my small dwarf dog often undoes quite all that
IT have done. I will now tell you by what means I obtain the human
hair with which I am making myself a mantle.
“Tt is a fact, that when some human being dies on the earth
below, one hair from his or her head detaches itself and departs
thence, coming directly to me. And it is these hairs that I am using
in making my mantle.
“And this too serves as a sign to me that one has ceased to be on
the earth below, and that that person is traveling hither. And this
too shall endure as long as the earth beneath shall endure and have
form. Moreover, mark this well, that when He will cause the
expiring of human beings on the earth below to cease, it shall just
then and not before be possible for me to finish the mantle upon
which I am working; and that (the number of hairs in the mantle)
shall then bear witness to the number of persons who have visited
the earth below while it lasted. So now you may take a stroll.”
Then the men of the lodge and the entire party of De‘haé™hyd’wé"‘s
started out to view the notable things in the vicinity of the lodge.
They first went to that place where for the first time during their
visit they saw the beauty and pleasantness of that upper world; they
admired the strawberry plants, growing there and bearing luscious
berries, that were as tall as the high grasses among which they grew;
and they were also in bloom, for their bearing season was continuous;
and they saw too the growing trees full of rich blossoms; never before
had they seen such beautiful flowers, which supplied the light of that
upper world; and they saw the plants and the shrubs and bushes full
of fruits of all kinds, all growing luxuriantly; and never before had
they seen such fine paths leading in various directions; and they saw
along these paths the trees whose overhanging boughs and lower
ET] DE‘HODYA°TKA’ EWEN: 813
branches loaded with blossoms, made them seem like long bowers of
flowers, freighted with all manner of fragrance.
They also saw figures of human beings—on’gwe‘—promenading
along the paths from place to place, but they realized that their faces
were sights (or visions), and so it was not possible for them to hold
any conversation with them.
Farther along in their ramble they came to a village which was
inhabited, there being many lodges standing in different places in the
manner of a village of human beings.
In passing through the village one of the hosts, addressing De‘haé-
“hyd’wé™s, said, “In this lodge, standing here apart, thy mother
dwells. She was still on the earth below when you and your party
departed on this journey; but she started for this country soon after
you had departed therefrom. Here, also, dwell your relations—all
those who were able to observe the customs of their ancestors dur-
ing the time they dwelt on the earth below.”’
It was then that they returned to the place where the old woman
awaited their return, and on entering the lodge they said to her, ‘‘ We
have now returned from our ramble.’’ And the old woman answered,
“T have quite completed my preparations. And now, moreover, you
must start on your journey homeward and the men of the lodge will
accompany you a part of the way home. In going home, you must go
around by the place where abides the Light Orb (the Sun) that tray-
els by day. Let them see him too. And may your dreams foreshadow
your safe arrival home.”
Thereupon they departed from the lodge of the old woman. Not
far distant from the home of their hosts there stood a lodge. One of
their hosts told De‘ha陓hy6’wé™s and his friend that that was the
lodge of the Sun. They said, ‘‘Thence, he starts to give light to the
world beneath this one.”’
Having reached the lodge, they entered it and they saw the Sun
engaged in cooking chestnut meal mush. And then one of the men of
Thunder said, “‘We are now on our journey, accompanying these
human beings a part of their way home. We are taking these men
back to the earth below this one. And the reason that we have come
around this way is that we desired to have you and them see one
another.”
Then the Master of the lodge raised his voice and said to his visi-
tors, “It is I, indeed, who has met with you and it is I whom you
habitually call in your ceremonies, ‘Ho‘sgé™ige‘’dagoni‘, He-the-
Great-War-Chief, and our Elder Brother, the Diurnal Orb of Light.
And I have just completed my usual preparations for my journey
upon which I am about to start. Furthermore, just as soon as you
will depart hence, I will start on my journey to make the earth below
light and warm again.”
814 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
And, in a short time, the visitors having seen all that was interest-
ing in the lodge, said, ‘‘Let us now, moreover, go hence on our jour-
ney,” and they at once resumed their own course.
They had not gone very far when the Men of Thunder said, “It
is now time for us to begin. And, moreover, it shall be Diga’é"‘da’
who shall be the first one to act.”
Then Daga’é"‘da’, the former member of the party ef De‘ha-
hyd’ we™s (Light Rays?), began to sing in a loud voice and thus set
his orenda (mystic power) to work out his function. And then the
two human beings, who were to return to the earth below, saw it in
the distance beneath them, and they heard, too, the people dwelling on
the earth say, “‘Now the beginning of the Spring Season has come
upon us. Indeed, the Spring Wind is blowing warm and hot, and
now, too, the Thunders are singing thence, in the distance.”
Then the party moved on; and they looked down on the earth be-
low from above the sky and the clouds, and they saw the effect of
the singing of the Thunder Men. At this time, the voices of the
Thunder Men who were singing sounded loud and angry, as it were,
as they moved along the sky, and on the earth below fell torrents of
rain with great force, and they, too, saw the creeks and rivers swell
and overflow their banks.
They had not, seemingly, to the human beings of the party, gone
very far, when they were startled by their alighting on the earth below.
And then one of the Thunder Men said to them, ‘‘ Now, indeed, you
are again at your homes. Indeed you departed hence, and so now
we have fully discharged our obligation to bring you safely back to
your homes. So, moreover, we will now tell you something regarding
another matter. It is now a long time since the former inhabitants
of this country have withdrawn from here and have gone to another
settlement. You will, indeed, find them in the place where they are
now living.”
Having conducted them some distance on the ground, one of the
Men of Thunder said, ‘“‘Moreover, we will now separate one from
another. And, in the future, this, too, shall come to pass. And that
is, that you must keep us in remembrance. And, moreover, for this
purpose, you shall employ the Native Tobacco (i. e., Gayé’gwandwé-
"sowa dnd‘), making an offering thereby in words and in act. And
this shall be quite sufficient for the purpose, for we will hear the thanks-
giving and will accept the offering at once; and in like manner shall
it be done to all those, and only to those, who are charged by Him with
duties and important functions. If you should think of Him or of
Them, that is the chief and essential thing—the employment of Native
Tobacco by you in this important matter habitually. Such is the
method which you who still live on the earth here below must cus-
tomarily employ in forming your messages of thanksgiving, Verily,
HEWITT] DESHODYA°TKA EWEN 815
such is the regulation and decree ordained and promulgated by Him
whom you call De‘haé“hyawa’’gi‘, and familiarly as Hawénni’yo‘
(He, the Master). And these are the words which we thought it
necessary for you to hear before we separated one from another. So
may you have good dreams (1. e., good luck).”’
Then the two parties separated, the one from the other. And the
“Men of Thunder departed from the earth, going back into cloudland,
and so back to their own lodge.
In their turn, De‘ha陓hyd’wé"'s and his lone companion started from
the place where they had been left. They were not long in finding
the traces of the former home of their friends, and they found that
the place had become overgrown with trees which had grown large
and which stood thick; and one who was unacquainted with the facts
would be in doubt whether or not any person had ever lived in that
place before that time.
Then De‘haé"hyd’wé™s said to his companion, ‘Verily, it seems
that now we must depend on ourselves to find our people. We must,
therefore, now go to seek the place where they now dwell.” And
they started, directing their course eastward, toward the sunrise,
as they had been instructed.
At no great distance they saw the smoke from a village, and they
made their way to it. So, on entering the first lodge they reached,
De‘haé“hyo’wé"s said, ‘“We have now returned home.” In reply,
the master of the lodge said, “‘Whither did you go? And who are
you? As to myself, I do not know you.”
Answering him, De‘haé™hyo’wé"s said, “Have you not at any time
heard a tradition, that a number of men, thirty in all, started on a
journey following the path of the Sun?—a party formed by De‘-
haé"“hyd’wé™s and Ga陓hyakdon’dye’, two famous war-chiefs, of
men who had thoroughly habituated themselves to warlike exercises?
They undertook while going toward the sunsetting to kill and scalp
all the peoples whom they might encounter on their way.”
Then the master of the lodge said to them in reply, “I myself
know nothing of the matter about which you are speaking. When
such a thing may have taken place I do not know. It may be that
the old woman, living in yonder lodge, may, perhaps, for her part,
know about this matter. You should go over to consult her about it.”
Then De‘haé“hyd’wé"™s and his companion passed on, going to
the lodge pointed out to them. So entering the lodge in which the
old woman designated lived, De‘ha陓hyod’wé™s again said, ““Do you
know the circumstance in the history of your people that, in the long
ago, some men—-warriors, three times ten in number—went on an
expedition, from which they never returned; the party was formed
by two war chiefs, De‘haé“hyo/wé™s and Gaé“hyadkdon’dye’? They
went toward the sunsetting, following the path of the Sun.”
816 TROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY [ETH. ANN. 43
Answering these questions the old woman said, “It is indeed true
that such an event took place. I have heard my deceased grand-
mother customarily say that when she was still a child men to the
number of thirty started out on an expedition, but that they never
returned to their homes.”’ And then after some moments of thinking
she added, “‘ Probably the man who dwells yonder in that lodge, not
far away from here, remembers the whole matter, for he has been
living during an exceedingly long life; and so he probably is familiar
with the tradition about which you speak. So you had better visit
him and seek for further information from him.”
So De‘haé“hyd’wée™s and his companion again started on their
quest for some one who might know them. Reaching their new des-
tination they found the very old man, of whom the old woman had
spoken, and they asked him, ‘‘Do you remember an affair which took
place hitherto many years ago, in which warriors to the number of
thirty departed hence, going on an expedition along the path of the
Sun?”
After a few moments of reflection the old man replied, “I remember
the matter full well. This is what took place: There lived a people
yonder, at some distance from here; and there is where this affair
took place; there were a number of young men who had grown up
together, and they were all about 16 years of age; and thirty of these
young men organized themselves into a war-party, binding them-
selves together by means of an oath, or vow.
“And when they: had fully organized their troop, they caused the
people of the entire community to assemble at the Long-lodge of
public gatherings. And when the people were assembled in the
Long-lodge De‘ha陓hy6’wé™s arose and said, ‘‘ Now then, it shall be
made known to you who have assembled here that we have indeed
completed our preparations. We, young men, who are three tens
in number, have enlisted by ‘notching the stick’ to go out on an expe-
dition along the path of the Sun. We made the agreement strong,
for we commingled together our minds into unity; and so now it is
as if we had only a single head, only a single body of flesh, only a single
life, and we shall bleed as one person. Moreover, we now renounce
our kindred, and we also forswear our lives.
“Moreover, we will now depart from here. We will direct our
course toward the sunsetting, for we desire to make an excursion to
the place of sunsetting—to the place where the Diurnal Light Orb
customarily promenades to and fro. Our band have appointed me
.and my dear brother to be their chiefs to lead them. We, too, have
made a solemn vow that no matter what the situation confronting us,
no matter what will be transpiring ahead of us, we will nevertheless
pass onward in our journey.
“We have indeed enlisted in this matter seriously by ‘notching
the stick,’ and this is of course, as you well know, the pledge that
————— Se
Sea DE‘HODYA°TKA EWEN $17
each one of us will do what we have agreed to do one with another.
Then they departed from us, and they have never returned.”
Then, De‘haé“hyo’wée™s replying to the old man said, ‘‘How long
ago may it be since that event took place?” The old man answered,
“Tt is now three generations ago; that is, three generations have
passed away since that time.’ And then De‘ha陓hyo’wé"s asked,
“Who were the chiefs of those who departed?” And the old man
said, “‘De‘haé“hyd’wé"s and his brother, Gaé“hyakdon’dye’. These
two persons were chosen as the chiefs of the party.”
To which De‘haé"hyd’wé"s replied, ‘Verily, Grandsire, we are
the remaining members of that party—my brother, Ga陓hyak-
don’dye’, our friend, Daga’dye’, and I. So many of the number have
now returned home. It was, verily, our party that departed from
the place where your and my people formerly dwelt, at that place
yonder not far away.”’
But the old man, still doubting what he had ‘heard, said, ‘‘It is
probably not you who went away, because it appears from your youth-
ful aspect that you have just reached manhood, and that event
occurred a very long time ago.”’
De‘ha陓hyd’wé"s, however, answered, saying, ‘‘ Nevertheless, we
are the very persons who started, those of us who still are left alive.
We have now arrived home again.’”’ And the old man said, ‘If
possible, then, do tell me the name of the chief of our people when
you departed.”
De‘haé"‘hyowé™s quickly answered, ‘‘Dagi‘hidof’dye’ was the
name of the chief of our people at that time.’’ Now convinced of
what he had doubted, the old man answered, “That statement is,
indeed, also true. The fact that he was my grandfather is the
reason why I am so fully acquainted with that matter. And now I
submit that I am convinced that it is indeed you and your friends
who departed so many years ago, and that it is you who have returned
home. And as it is meet so to do, our present chief shall now be
made cognizant of this matter. So remain here in this lodge, and
I will now send him word of your return to await his pleasure.”
So the chief was made acquainted with the matter. He at once sent
out runners, giving notice to all the people to assemble immediately
in the Long-lodge of public meetings to hear something that was most
startling and important; he set the following day for the assembling
of the people.
So, when the morning of the next day dawned, all the people made
the necessary preparations to attend the great council and hurriedly
made their several ways to the assembly hall. De‘haé"‘hyd’wé"s
and his two companions also went there in company with their host,
the old man, whose grandfather was a former chief of his people.
818 IROQUOIAN COSMOLOGY (ETH. ANN. 43
The assemblage was large, for every one who could possibly leave
home attended in person.
When all were seated, the chief arose, and ceremoniously greeting
the newly arrived men, said, ‘“‘We have learned only a hint of what
occurred during your expedition, and we desire fervently to know
more of the events through which you have passed while you have
been absent. And so now we shall listen to the whole account. And
we will now listen to the leader of the party, De‘haé"‘hyd’wé™s.”
De‘haé“hyd’wé™s then arose amidst great silence and spoke only
briefly as follows: ‘‘There were thirty of us who started on the expe-
dition along the path of the sun; but there are only three of us who
have returned. It is I who bear the name De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s. On
this hand sits my brother, Ga陓hyakdon’dye’, for such is the name
that he bears; and on this hand sits our friend, Daga’dye’, for such
is the name that he bears; so many only are we who survive.
“And this, too, came to pass during the time of our expedition
along the path of the Sun, to the skyland. One of our number
remains there as an assistant to the people in that far-away land.
It is, moreover, quite impossible for him to return to this earth to
live again.”’
And then De‘haé™hyo’wé"™s related at great length all that had
occurred to him and his party from the time they had left their
homes until their return. He told of all things that had transpired
and all things that they had seen during their absence; these things
were recited in detail, completing the recital with their return home.
Then De‘ha陓hyd’wé™s resumed his seat.
The chief then said, ‘It was in fact a marvelous thing that was
done by this party. It is a very long time ago since you departed
from your homes. But, now, you have returned to them, numbering
only three persons. Of course, one of the most essential things
about this matter to be remembered is that De‘ha陓hyawi’’ei‘,
sometimes called Hawéfni’yo’, forewilled that you, and only you,
should be enabled to return home safely.
‘Furthermore, preparations have been made so that we may
now mutually and severally exchange greetings. And, further, then,
this shall be done. You, the surviving ones of the party, three
in number, will take a suitable position, and then I will take the
lead in a ceremonial greeting to you; for I of course stand in the
stead of the one who was the chief of the people when you departed;
my name is, indeed, Dagi‘hidof’dye’; and then we will do this:
we will mutually and severally stroke one another’s body in greeting.
This ceremony shall be for all persons, including our children—we
will all greet one another in this ceremonial manner; for such was
the custom of our fathers on such occasions,”
HEWITT] DE*HODYA°TKA’ EWEN: 819
So De‘haé™hyd’wé™s and his two friends arose and took suitable
positions to receive the greetings of the people. And the people
with the chief in the lead came forward and cordially stroked their
bodies according to the custom. All the men, all the women, and
all the children arose and greeted them.
When the ceremony was over the chief said, “This, too, shall be
done. We will do, in the future, all the things that we have to-day
learned should be done. And this, too, you shall know—you who
have just returned home—that you and we shall be equal in the
enjoyment and disposition of the things that we possess; so that
our minds and yours shall think in peace. Here, you know, dwell
the people, and now of course we again shall commingle and asso-
ciate together. So now, too, everything is ready for us to rejoice
and be happy, seeing that you have returned home in safety and
health.
“And the first thing to be done is to make merry by agame. They
whose bodies are strong will play at a game of lacrosse ball; and thus
shall they amuse your and our minds, that you may rejoice. When
that shall have passed, then we shall dance, beginning with the Song
of the Pigeons.
“And when that is passed, it will be time for us to disperse to
our homes. Thereupon, De‘haé™hyd’wé™s arose and said, “It is
indeed a marvelous matter to know that we have been absent from
our people during three generations. And that, too, that we are
rejoicing that we have, though much decreased in number, returned
to our homes. We are indeed very happy that we are again one
people with you.”
Then the young men went to the public gaming grounds and
there engaged in an exciting game of lacrosse ball. And when
this game was over, the people assembled in the Long-lodge of
public meetings and there they performed the ceremony of the Song
of the Pigeons. They danced all the songs of this ceremony, which
is quite long and exciting. Even the children danced to show
their pleasure at seeing the returned men. (This is the end of the
story.)
INDEX
ABENAKI INDIANS—
retirement of, to Canada---_..--.----_-- 175
territory occupied by 170
See also ABNAQUIES.
ABENAKI OF BECANCOUR, a synonym for
WiAWONOCKE = pope sese ase cen teen a= en 173
ABENAEI, St. FRANcis. See ST. FRANCIS
ABENAKI.
ABNAQUIES, tribes composing - ---_-_-------- 170
See also ABENAKI INDIANS.
ADORNMENT, fondness for, of the Osage______ 95
ALDER, SPECKLED, medicinal use of___--__-__ 265
ANALYSIS OF PICURIS SONGS- ------------- 399-425
ANASAGUNTICOOK, location of___------.------ 70
ANNENRAES, captivity of.-..-...------------ 456
ANTS, story about--_____- Reet Ne Ree he 355-357
APPROPRIATION FOR AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY - 1
ARCHEOLOGICAL WORK OF THE BUREAU----_- 144
AROOSAGUNTACOOK—
MMIGNELOMNO Lees ae eee nee ee ee ne ene 170
original form and meaning of the name__ 173
ASHBOW FAMILY, mention of_-.-.--.---_-_-- 224
AUSUMMOWETT, sagamore of Aroosagunta-
0 Rae ee ene pe eee ee 174
BAKER, EMMA, mention of___------------- 216, 224
Ba’-PO SUBGENS—
explanation of the name---_------.------ 59
ON iCeOleese seen noe ne ences en eens 91
origin story of----..-..----------------- "90
BECANCOUR—
Indians iresidingat-—-=-=--222-----.----= 169
native name for 169
origin of Indians at 171
BELIEFS, concerning remedies__ 7-270
BIRCH TREE, myth concerning_ 189
BIRTH CUSTOMS- -- ~ 389
BIRTH NAMES, origin of___-_---------- 32
BIson, symbolic hair cut representing. --____ 94-95
BLacK BEAR GENS—
personal names of-_-
symbolic hair cut of
BLACKBERRY, medicinal use of-_--__-______- 265
BLACKWELL, THOMAS, work of_________-___- 7
BLOODROOT, medicinal use of________--______ 264
IB TETANY SLOrVia DOU sao nen eee aa ea ane 377-381
BLUEWEED, medicinal use of-.-.-_-.__--.---- 266
BMULE—
miythconcerning2—=—- =) ~:~ = -=--22---- 193-194
various conceptions of-----__----__.----- 193
BOAS) RANZ,;DBaper DYs-soceeereeesaae cook 16
BOHEMY FAMILY, mention of---------.----.. 224
BONESET, medicinal use of.
Bow PEOPLE, wi’
BROTHERTON INDIANS, tribes composing.--. 211
BUFFALO ROBE, Symbolic, used in ceremony - 54
BUFFALOES, Story sboub.----------==------=- 397
BURDOCK, medicinal use of---.-------------- 266
Page
BURIALS—
atselden Pueblo! -= =<: -s.-csnsese-s------ 2-3
PADS ON San noes tena none anne eee eee 16
BUSHNELL, D.I., JR., bulletin by 16
CANADA DE LAS Uvas, expedition to___-___- 9
CANKER LETTUCE, medicinal use of___-----_- 264
CANNIBALCULT of the Plains Ojibwa____-___ 193
CAPE FOX VILLAGE, excavations at_-________ 13
OxeRmBAs; location\of=—-*- --22-------c2-0-=- 170
Catnip, medicinal use of- -_.-.---.---------- 266
CayvuGa, peace'treaty of--.-_--=-....2.--.<-. 456
CEDAR—
ailifeisymboll"==s-" 2. ——. === cee scce 60, 68
caremonialitise|Ofenss=- se ens nana 47, 48, 72
symbolism ‘of- 2222222 2ss--22-+---===0 48
CEREMONY—
A nO Stee nee no ne en sere sae conc ae ee 33-34
Ki’-no®, purpose of--- 36
of conducting the Xo’-ka_____--___--___- 67
of decorating the Xo’-ka_________________ 33-34
Wa-the’-the, the Sending._______________ 3840
CHERRY, WILD, medicinal use of-__-_----__-- 264
CHESTNUT LEAVES, medicinal use of--_---_-- 265
CHIEFS—
chosen from‘subgens-_._-_=_------------- 91
in the League of the Iroquois-_--_-_-_-__-_-_ 462
Cuinp, blessed by gentes---...-..-------.-_- 71-72
CHILD-NAMING CEREMONY, meaning of----__ 30
CHILD-NAMING RITUALS, importance of_______ 31
CHILD-NAMING WI’-GI-E_-___.---------------- 75-84
CxHoctaws, physical measurement of-____-__ 14
CHURCH, OLD MOHEGAN--.--------------- 254-255
Cr’-DSE-A-GTHE GENS, personal names of---_ 146
CLARK, Miss May S., work of 19
COLLECTIONS ACQUIRED BY THE BUREAU-_ ~~~ 18
Couns, H. B., JR.—
collection made by - ---------------------
CONANT, SAMUEL, assistance rendered by - -- 15
CONE-FLOWER SYMBOLIC HAIR CUT, subgentes
TOES Se eee ete rere re 91
CONESTOGA—
population of____-_---_- ine ae 458
Wwarof, On WMONSWK——--4)-) ae ean see eee 458
CONFERENCE AT FALMOUTH--_---_-------- 174-175
CONNECTICUT, native tribes and dialects
Ol eee moose reese eee eee 205-287
Connor, JAMES E., work of_____------------ 19
Cooper, AMY, mention of___.__----.-------- 224
COOPER FAMILY, mention of----------------- 224
CoorER, THEODORE, mention of-----_------ 233
CoRN—
Wilife'symMbols—2- = 2 2e- eee soe ae ae
ceremonial use of
symbolic planting of.
SyMDOlismOlosss se eee enn
See also MAIZE.
CORN FESTIVAL, modern survival of--__.__-- 255
821
822 INDEX
Page Page
CoRN HILLS, INDIAN, remains__.--_..-_-__- 256-257 | EVENING STAR, a sky deity___...._.._.-_-.. - 73,74
COUNCILS, TRIBAL, composition of___________ 462 | EXPEDITION TO THE SKYLAND, journal of___.. 792
CoYvotEsistory/abouts-— = >-9- a= —eee eee 383-387
Coyote, OLD, story about. 363-365, 377-381
CoyoTE WOMAN, OLD, story about -- 377-381
CRANES, story about-.----------_- _ 359-361
CRAZY DANCE, reference to______________-_-__ 193
Cricket) story abOUtss= san = eee 383-387
Crow, storyabout=-- == =< ees 375-377
CULTURE FEATURES ofsouthern New England
tribes: 2-2 === 23a55-senec <2 3-22 Ss ce 221-292
CULTURE HERO—
myths/concerming= == sees see eee ee 180-189
of the Wawenock___ SPS lets
CUSTOMS OF THE PICUR{S_______ -- 389-393
CUTCHEGUN ROCck, tradition of. 259
DANCES, TRADITIONAL, Of the Wawenock__-_ 177
DANDELION, medicinal use of__-__.-___-____- 266
DAUGHTERS, FIRST THREE, names for_-______ 31, 32
See also KINSHIP TERMS.
DD RADHTLOKENS| Ofeea= Jaina ne one eee 393
389-393
- 128-130
DEATH CUSTOMS__.-.---__-
DEER GENS, personal names of_
DEER-HEAD, a sky deity___-----_--- 74
DEKANAWIDA, peace proposed by___________ 460
DELAWARE INDIANS—
adopted into League of the Iroquois______ 463
connection of, with southern New Eng-
landitribes= =~ na nscconncen ee eeenane~ 214-215
DeENsMORE, Miss FRANCES, work of____----_ 10-11
DEvIL’s FooTrprIntT, legend of_______-
DIL1Lon, VINCE, acknowledgment to__
DirrPER, THE, a sky deity_____________
DIVINING ROD, use of 275
Dixon, Doctor, reference to_----------.-- 219, 223
DoG-staR—
asky deity -_- 7:
mention of____ 92
DOLBEARE, HANNAH, mention of__.--_--___- 224
DOUBLE-STAR, a sky deity__-_____ = 74
DOVES, TWO LITTLE, story about ~ 349-353
DREAMS, beliefs concerning_______ _ 274-275
DuMMER, Gov. W., treaty made by__-______- 174
Duntop, W. W. C., amulet sent by--_._.--- 18
IDWARKS; belief n= == se ease se se eee ee eee 261
Ear—
Delieficoncenning == sss =e ere 95
Ornamentsiw One eee an eae 95
EARLE, CHARLES T., collection made by____ 18
EARTH, represented by gems_______-_________ 30
EARTH-GRASPER, myth of the__ - 470-608
EARTH NAME WI’-GI-E
EARTH NAMES—
explanation iolese-s= == ase reese 48-49
lists of
EGBErTS, MR., casts made by-_ 18
ELDEN MOUNTAIN, excavation near___--_____ 2
ELDEN PUEBLO, described______- main ook
ELDER BARK, medicinal use of___ me Hao}
ELDER FLOWERS, medicinal use of_--________ 265
ELDER TREE, mythical story concerning-___- 59, 90
ELECAMPANE, medicinal use of__---__-___-_- 266
IEE; SCOry AD0UtS = 2.22 ee 339-343
ELK GENS, personal names of__________--__ 141-142
EnM, medicinal use.of< ==) <- --se--seeee a= 266
ESTUFA, SUNKEN, story about----_-_---_-.-- 373
ETCHEMIN, efforts of, to establish peace-__-_- 455
HC ACTATAPATINTIN Game ae es
FALMOUTH, CONFERENCE AT-_---
HAMINE SCORViaDOUbe em ecsse n= ae eee ee 343-349
FATHER AND CHILD, wi’-gi-e for benefit of... 60-67
FAWns, TWO, Story about._--.-_.._____..- 331-339
FEATHER—
red, symbolic tise\ofe. a=) =e ee 67
white, symbolic use ‘of_-------------__-__ 34
FEDERAL COUNCIL OF THE IROQUOIS_________ 459
FEES—
ceremonial sending of__---=------ 38-40
distribution fse-ee sso esse ae 68
FEWKES, J. WALTER—
acknowledgment to___-_--_-_- - 294
WOrkiof-n. -caene oe eae ene - 25
FIELDING, ALBERT E., mention of_-_________ 213
FIELDING, EVERETT M., mention of_-_______ 213
FIELDING, FIDELIA A. H.—
Gisry (of =25_- soe reer 205, 228-251
remarks on life of. 223-225
FIELDING, JOHN, Mohegan manuscript re-
ceived from =o os nas eae 205
FIELDING, LEMUEL, mention of__ BEG}
FIRE BUSH, medicinal use of_____ eco)
FIRE-KEEPER, Office of. 462
FISH PEOPLE, personal names of---_-______ 130-132
FLAGSTAFF, ARiZ., archeological work near__ 14
FLETCHER, Miss ALICE C.—
mention! Of2-224 2222-528 so saee ease eens 91
StOryCOnCernINg =o. o== a5 = —se= e 94-95
FLoop, story about___ el
HLORIDA, fossilu beds Of ssen asses ==== 14-15
FOLK-LORE, MOHEGAN-PEQUOT, addendum
lO. Mio ses lebensosocas sen soseea aaa ane eeee 260-263
INOLE: PALES! 2202 2255 2 aon na een a eean sy 245, 276-279
Foon, instruction concerning. -__--_-__---_.. 55
IROOTSTEP Wil- GER anen sae eee eee stasse= 37
FOREMAN, GRANT, collection presented by_- 18
FOSSIL BEDS OF FLORIDA, exploration of_____ 14-15
FOWKE, GERARD—
WOrk: Ofs-- == Saesisea=
FOWLER FAMILY, mention of__
“Fox FIRE,”’ belief concerning ______--_---__- 263
Fox InDIANS—
Papers! On! = == 255 -- neon ea nsec ns esos oa 15
researches among 6
GABAOOSA, GEORGE, Chippewa text by_____ 5
GENERAL SLOCUM, EXCURSION STEAMER, ref-
erence) to Durming Off 2s sseaenn sae ane eeee 237
GENTES—
child blessed hy) ee eee ee 71-72
distribution to, of fees_..._..._..-------- 68
list of, taking part in ceremony --_-______- 33,
3940, 45, 59-60
places of, in the lodge____---------_---_-- 36
SWilt=21-CSiTECILE Cs Dyanna es 68
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES____--___ - 253-259
Guosts, Mohegan belief in____ oo oce 262
GIBSON, CHIEF JOHN ARTHUR—
assistance rendered by, to Canadian De-
partment of Indian A ffairs____-________ 454
belief! ofi2- 3222 2825 -sose nase eres an eee 608
instructed by Onondaga chief___ 454
text dictated by 453
INDEX 823
Page Page
Giotey, J. W.— ILLUSTRATIONS, preparation of___....__.____- ily
collection made by.-...-........-------- 18 | INDIAN Corw FEILLS, described_ 256-257
Work Offos¢<. Senet s css a sce 14-15 | “INDIAN Posy,” medicinal use of__ See 265
Girt, DELANCEY, work of-..-=...---.-.=-s-- 10,17 | INDIAN SPRINGS, tradition concerning._______ 256
GINSENG, medicinal use of__.-_..------------ 266 | INDIGO, WILD, medicinal use of______________ 266
Grrts, hair dressing of__-_- = 94 | I*’-GTHO®’-GA GENS, personal names of-_____ 135-136
G usKapP, the culture hero_____ yd) See also PUMA GENS,
Gop, Wawenock synonym for 180 | IROQUOIS TRIBES—
Gops AND GODDESSES. See Sky DEITIES. ederal\Gouricil (ofsseee eee aeons ee 459
GOLDEN THREAD, medicinal use of___________ 265 festivals of, for thanksgiving_____________ 454
GORGET, SHELL, Symbolism of_______--______ 34, 95 Influence of, in southern New England_ 210-211
GOURDS, THREE, story about____-----_____ 381-383 lands'assigned|tot2-.---" "2 222-2 =2 ee 453
GRAMMAR, MOHEGAN-PEQUOT, material peace conference of 455
Ba a2OL—2R7, See also LEAGUE OF THE IROQUOIS.
GRANT MOUND, examination of_____- 15 | JACKRABBIT, story about_____.._____-____- 377-381
GRAPE LEAVES, medicinal use of___- 264 | JACQUES FAMILY, mention of_________________ 176
Grey, Mrs. EpitTH, mention of__ -- 213 | JEFFERSON, THOMAS, Vocabulary taken by__ 214
HAIDA VILLAGE, restoration of___ --- 12-13 | Jupp, NE M., bulletin by_____..__________ 16
HAIR cuT— KASAAN. See OLD KASAAN.
secording to enss se. a as ee 87-94 | KENABES, location of____._--.___-_.__--_--_- 170
QOmaha'totemic! <== "2-22 22-22 ssse-c5e 87 | KENNEBEC, forms of the name, with mean-
symbolic cone-flower________-_---------- 91 Ings S2es+ Beck ese ce 8 2 oe Se es 5 es 170
HAIR DRESSING, Symbolism of___-_---------- 54,55 | KENNEBEC RIVER, local names for__________- 170
HALLOWELL, A. I., referred to Soe 256) || MKGt-NO*{WI'-GI-R occ co cen ges a kaee re 96-97
HARDHACK, medicinal use of. E206), || (KINSHIP) TERMSS- 9222 enw me seca ee ee ole
HEARDING 1H. “Tt iworkiof <294-_2=5=222----- 12 124, 128, 130-131, 132, 133, 135, 136, 139, 146-147,
HARRINGTON, JOHN P.— ? 153, 155, 156-157, 157-158, 160.
bulletin by Kiva OF ELDEN PUEBLO 4
Work off 322 -=-25-= KRIEGER, H. W., work of 12
HARRIS, JULIAN, mention of____.-.---------- 213 | LA FLESCHE, FRANCIS, work of_-___-_-_____- +10
Hawk, hair cut representing_--__------------ 92 | LAKE, St. JOHN, Wawenock descendants at. 176
ALE WIT NEB WOorksOfe= te --=-2--- == 5-5 | LANpING, old name for Norwich__--__---_-- 231, 254
HIAWATHA— LANTERN HILL, reservation near__----------- 244
a founder of the League_______---_------- 468 | LATHAM, NATHANIEL, mortar obtained from. 208
peace proposed byi<===---2-=2--+--+--._- 460 | Lauson, GOVERNOR, grant made by, to
HO’ I-NI-KA-SHI-GA GENS, personal names OSULES 22 Sao ne ee cee sucesauacccteseee boo 462
Ofstess = so. See re ee et eae beet 130-132 | LEAGUE OF THE IROQUOIS—
How’ I-NI-KA-SHI-GA GENS, personal names change in government of____------------- 608
(1) ho a eee mere CERRO ECE PEERED 155-157 dominion of 460
Ho*’-GA DIVISION— government of___
£TOUPS | COMposing == se ae en a 45 GreatiGouncil! Fire of ==-<_2-22---- =.= 460
Mames Ofess2 2225 = So ssees2 =< so see coe 133-143 | LEARY, Miss ELLA, work of-_-_------------- 17-18
Hox’-GA GTHE-ZHE GENS, personal names LEFFINGWELL, CAPTAIN, Mohegan relieved
Of ae bee SN 136-139 ane ene acme se ccc ore ee eee ne 2 259
Hox’-GA U-TA-NO®-DSI GENS, personal names LEGENDS—
Olea sae eee cas = oe eased et ses 132-133 BtMONOGAN esees ccna cn ont saa 253-259
Hov’-GA U-THU-HA-GE GENS, personal names of Norridgewock mission 173
Ofc oa Se eee ts 8s eek Se 139-141 supported by archeology. 4
Hopi INDIANS— LENApPE, arrival of, on the coast_------------- 219
legends of, supported by archeology - ---- 4) | MOIBRARY, TCPOLlOn = 22s seen se ee ea ene 17-18
songs(of, recorded =~ —----==-3= 2252-242 5 | LIFE SYMBOLS—
Hops, medicinal use of__..-----.------------ 266 of the Hox’ga_ __- 45
HORSE-RADISH, medicinal use of__----------- 266 takin giofis. Soon. on sense cesenene ee ane 75-84
MORASES. Story abpoutean8 = 20 ee 395 | LIFE SYMBOLS WI’-GI-E____------------- 60-67, 73, 74
HOscUTT FAMILY, mention of_-_-___--- _ 224 | LirtLe CoLorapo, pottery from banks of--_- 3
HOUSE OF CEREMONY, symbolism of-_------- 30 | “LitrLe OLD MEN,” origin of-_------.------ 29-30
HOUSE OF MysTERY. See SACRED HOUSE. LITTLE ROCK OF THE MARSH. --.—--5-2.2-5_-5 88
HRDLICKA, ALES, sent to Seward Island, LonG ISLAND TRIBES, affiliations of_____---_- 210
PA Sie ee en eee eee ee 15 | LoRD’s PRAYER—
HUNTER, THE— Wioheoan: seen conan ee eee eee 251
myth Ofte seat os eso aS 193-194 IPICUTISs occa nee oo race eae aaa ae ee 396
Storypabouts.25=-- oe. 25 oe 313-323 | LoRoN—
HvurRons— a Penobscot chief.._.---.------ = 174
affiliated with Algonquian tribes__..----_ 455 origin of the name 174
efforts of, to establish peace 455 | Lowre, DocTor, reference to--- 216
peace negotiations of, With Onondaga__-. 457 | MAGPIETAIL Boy, story about _--
I’-BA-TSE GENS. See WIND GENS.
215
MAHICAN, relation of, to Pequot
824 INDEX
Page Page
Ma8Ican, Hudson River, affinities of, with Mornina Star, asky deity___-_.__.__________ 73
Mohegan-Pequot=-22--- -22- ees ee 213-219 | MORTAR, WOODEN—
MAHICAN-WAPPINGER INDIANS, connection Nehantic: -- ~~ =< 25 - ee ee 73, 74
prayers to 38
Moose, myth concerning-______-_-______- 188-189
MOoSEHEAD LAKE, native name of_________ 189
MorGan, Miss Mary V., mention of_-...._ 213
MorGan, Mrs. Harrie, mention of_________ 213
exterminated by English and Mohegan_-_ 207
related to Nehantic..____----=_--=-=--.<- 217
NATICK, missionaries recorders of____-------- 211
NAUGATUCK LANGUAGE, material from__--_- 215
NEHANTIC—
absorbed by Mohegan____.._---.------ 207, 209
division of 217
ethnological survivals of 209
habitatiofi === ses See peer 217
incorporated with Narragansett --___-_-- 217
Synonyms for. -=--22sse ee ane eee 221
NEPTUNE, FRANQOIS, informant, mentioned- 171,
173, 177
NEPTUNE FAMILY, information concerning-__ 176
NEW ENGLAND TRIBES—
combination of, as Brotherton Indians___ 211
extinction Ofsss see eee nee eee 168
See also NEW ENGLAND TRIBES, SOUTH-
ERN.
NEW ENGLAND TRIBES, SOUTHERN—
affiliations {of2= 222 cee ee 214-216
composite character of__._.------------ 210-211
culture of ef 6222)
migration of = (per.
INDEX 825
Page Page
NICHOLS, Mrs. FRANCES S., work of_______- 15,19 | PEACE GENS OF THE TsI’-2HU, chief chosen
NICOLA FAMILY, information concerning_-____ 176 frond 220 Os Re Ra ees ee 36
Ni-KA WA-KON-DA-GI GENS, office of_______ 93 | PEACE GENTES, prominent in child-naming
See also MEN OF MysTERY. rite__- 33
NINIGRET, a Nehantic sachem__-_______-____- 217 | PEACEMAKER GENS, hair cut of _- _ 89-90
NripMuck, absorbed by Mohegan---_________- 201 | PECAN ISLAND, LA., mounds of_- acs 14
NonsucH, MERCY, mention of__-_.._-------- 209 | PENOBSCOT FAMILIES, territory held by_____- 170
NORRIDGEWOCK— PENOBSCOT INDIANS—
expedition sent against ----..-_.___-...-- 172 peace made by, for absent tribes_________ 174
forms of the name, with meanings- 170 possible union of, with Wawenock______- 171
mention of_ 170 present Nome! Ole seas cease eae eee 169
mission at 172 | PENOBSCOT LINGUISTIC MATERIAL, reference
political independence of-----_-_-______- 175 177
INORWicH; old name for:.---=-=-----..--=-- 231,254 | PENNYROYAL, medicinal use of_- 265
NOTE, MISINTERPRETED, story about______- 393-395 | PEPPERGRASS, medicinal use of__ 265
OAK, WHITE, medicinal use of______-___-_-_-- 266 | PEPPERMINT, medicinal use of-__......-..__- 265
Occum, SAMSON, mention of_______-_-___-__- 211 | PEQuot InDIANS—
OccCUM FAMILY, mention of. 224 band of, at Seatticook 211
OyrBWA, PLAINS, cannibal cult of_ 193 extermination of. 207
OyrpWA INDIANS, researches among- linguistic affinity of, with Mohegan____ 208
OLD-AGE WI’-GI-E population (of-24s30 fee ase ae eee 213
OLD GIANT, story about- - 323-331, 339-343 proportion of, among Mohegan_ --- 207-208
OLD GIANTESS, story about- ---- 331-339 relation of, to Mahican--____ = ai
OLD KASAAN, restoration of__-_-_------------ 12-13 significance of the name 218
OmaAHA INDIANS, tribal custom of__-....--_- 94 SydlON VMs foresees ee eee 221
OMENS— 4 warlike character of__________ 218
ofsmisfortone, Picuriss--2-2--22-------0—- 393 | PHILIP FAMILY, information concerning--____ 176
See also SIGNS. PHONETIC NOTES! son soe aoe seen 178, 179, 226-227
ONDAAIONDIONT, CHARLES, mention of___--- 458 | PHRATRIES of the Iroquois tribes_---________ 459
OneEIDA INDIANS— Picuris, a Tiwa village_.________ - 293
peace treaty of. 456 | PINE, WHITE, medicinal use of________-._-___ 264
settlement among, of Brotherton In- Prre, official badge of the Sho’-ka_ __ 33, 59, 67
dians==2=.==-<-25-<< eee ee st beet ee 211-212 | Prpsiss—EWA, medicinal use of--____-_-.------ 265
ONION, medicinal use of--.__._._---------- 267,269 | PiscaTaAWAy INDIANS, represented at treaty of
ONONDAGA CASTLE, Capital of the Confeder- 456
ations =2--.355<. eae eS a ee 454 253
ONONDAGA TRIBE— 266
clansi0fs2eecs sana te ee ee ee ADO MIPLANTING LORE seeses a eee ae ces aa eee 271-272
organizations established by-- . 453 | PLEIADES, a sky deity 73, 74
peace delegation of___ _... 455 | PocomTuck, allied to Stockbridge Mahican__ 216
peace negotiations of, with the Huron-.. 457 | POLE STAR, asky deity..__.._-_--__--------- 74
peace treaty; Of 202 eS eee ees Jal 175 of the Grandmother 367, 440, 441
St. IGNACE, peace embassy at_______________ 456 ofitheJackrabbit=. ===) = ee 379, 442, 443
St. LAWRENCE RIVER, Wawenock descend- of the Wizards__ . 367, 369, 439, 440, 441, 442
ants On-=222 =~ 557-2 Aa ee et ee 176 Osage, Footstep=- = s.-=-==-.. = == (Saves 37
SAINTE MARIE DE GANNENTAA, mission of. 461-462 Picuris;analysisiof=---ssessee eee ae 399-425
SAMSON OCCUM, mention of____._______-____ 211 | Sons—
Sanpy DESERT, legend of-_-_.______________- 259 first three, names) for_....-.----__--.__-= 31-32
SARSAPARILLA, medicinal use of 266 Kinshipiterms forssessace = eae ee 31
SASSAFRAS, medicinal use of 266 See also KINSHIP TERMS.
SAUCY-CALF, mention of_____ eee 89 | SPEARMINT, medicinal use of___---_.___-_____ 265
ScaLEs of Picuris songs________- _ 414-425 | SpHynx Mor, story about 363-365
SCALP HOUSE, Story of origin of__ _ 371-3873 | SPICEWOOD LEAVES, medicinal use of_ Bey 265
SEARLES, STANLEY, work of__-_______-_____- 15-16 | SPIDER WEB, medicinal use of______ 29) 266
SEASONS, Observation of, by Osage___-_____- 29 | SPIKENARD, medicinal use of____ 265, 266
SENECA— SULLIVAN, GENERAL, punitive expedition of__ 460
League of the Iroquois joined by_______- 463 | SUMACH, UPLAND, medicinal use of___-_____- 265
pedce\tresty, ol- =~ naan 456 | SuN—
SHANTOK PoINtT— a lifeisymbolssa shot Pe ee ee ee 60, 68
described aisky: deity: 220222 o_o 73, 74
legend of---.-_-_- sae Sesh See 2 85 258 object /of prayers'to=-+_2.3 22S 38
SHANTUP POINT, See SHANTOK POIN SUPERSTITIONS of the Mohegan_ -- 264-276
SHEEPSCOT, local name for Wawenock.________ 172 | SWAN, WHITE, symbolism of_____..-.-.-____- 52-53
SHINNECOCK, dialect of._..-...2._.-.------_-- 214 | Swanton, JoHN R.—
SHON’-GE-MON-IN— Ppapersiby2=so22 soe en ee ee 16
childinamed\byc_c-_--2- 22 72 WOTK Of 22-2322 P se ee 6
recorderiof Osage riteie= 222 =a see 30 | SWEENEY, ALBERT E., resignation of. 19
ritual given\byaassetcs- eet Aas 59 | SWEET FERN, medicinal use of_______________ 264
SHOv’-GE-Mor-Ix, JOR— SYMBOLISM—
Acknowledgment to = 30 of birth names__-
Story/concerming ies seen ee yee 91 of buffalo robe___ ae
Signs— of decorating the Xo’-ka__
and\omens of luck 9) _—-_-0 022-2222 _- 272-274 of hair cutting -___
indicating changes in weather__________ 270-271 of hair dressing____
indicating death _---- = 42e— eee eee 393 | Ta’ I-NI-KA-SHI-GA, personal names of_
Strrus— ‘TANSY, medicinal use of-___---2_-- ---=-__-
Avskyidelty hess sess ee 74 | TANTAQUIDGEON FAMILY—
hair cut symbolizing__
SKANAWATI, account of___
descent offs. 22. 2 aeaann cess cecceea eee 204
INDEX 827
TANTAQUIDGEON, GLADYS— Page | Wampum— Page
assistance rendered by 260 belts of, used at peace conference________ 455
TOOMMOR Of) = see ak cae et oe Eee 213 myth concerning___ Le e196
petition in possession of---_-.__.....--_- 220 | WAPPINGER CONFEDERATION, extent of______ 209
TTEECOMWAS FAMILY, mention of___-.-_--..-.- 224 | WAPPINGER-MATTABESEC dialects, extent of. 214
‘TERMARCTOS, fossil remains of______- Seep 15 | WAR RITES, gentes custodians of_____________ 93
‘TERMS OF RELATIONSHIP, See KINSHIP TERMS. WARINAKIENS, asynonym for Wawenock.-_ 172
THO’-XE GENS— WART WEED, medicinal use of-___-_--_-__--- 265
OM 00 0 feee race ae ene ae nanan oe 93 | WASHINGTON, GENERAL, mention of 460
personal names of--- _ 160-163 | Wa-SHO’-SHE, ritual recorded by____---____- 44
symbolic hair cut of §3 92 | WaTER—
THREE-DEER, asky deity_--..._-----_------ 7: ailifeisymmboliss2==- see ee eee i
‘TOBACCO SMOKE, used for earache ---___.-__- 264 ceremonial use of
TONGASS, ALASKA, excavations at---_______- 13 symbolic:useiof-------
‘TOTEM POLES, restoration of, at Old Kasaan_ 13 | Wa’-TSE-GI-TSI, wi’-gi-e of the-________- as 51-52
TOUDAMANI, war waged by--.-_--.--------- 455 | WaA-TSE’-Mo2-1>—
TOXEwvs, sagamore of Norridgewock--_____-- 174 earth names given by_____--_---------__- 53
‘TRANSFORMER, myths concerning-- ------- 180-189 names given by____-- = 50
TREATY— Wa’-TSE-TSI GENS, wi’-gi-e______.___-_---___- 47
made by the Iroquois___--.-.------------ 456 | WaA’-TSE-TSI WA-SHTA-GE GENS. See PEACE
of Malmouths cteseeen ss aes ae aaes | TA GENS OF THE Hos-GaA.
TSE THON’-KA GENS, onlysurvivor of.__-_--_ 153 | WAWENOCK TRIBE—
TSE-DO’-GA I*-DSE GENS, personal names of_ 152-153 dialect of, now obsolete____._______..___- 177
‘Ts!/-ZHU DIVISION, personal names of--___- 144-163 family, names (Ofer ee ee 176
Tsl’-zHU WA-NON GENS— eradualdrittiofie: =. 25a tee 172
personalinames of: =—----=---2-2----se- Nabitatiof season eee ene 170-171
symbolic hair cut of_- history of__- --- 171-175
Ts!'-zHU WA-SHTA-GE GENS— location of__-__- - 170
personalinames of-2 =e 146-152 loss of the name-- _ 175
subgentes of. 91 materialiculture:ofe---- senses ee eee 176
See also PEACE GENS OF THE TSsI’-2HU. meaning of the name---_-_-_..-..-----.-- 169, 171
'TSONNONTOUAN, mention of____-..---------- 455 part taken by, in Indian wars-_--_-__-_-- 174
TucKER, Miss MAE W., work of------------ 6, 19 political independence of___ 175
TUNXIS TRIBE— population of 175
absorbed by Mohegan_---.....---------- 207 resent Survivors Of-------2=-s- sees = 169
account of 209 proper name of-_--_.___---- 169
TURQUOISE OBJECTS from Elden Pueblo_____ 3 removal of, to Becancour River____- 173
TURTLE, myth concerning-_-__._----------- 187-188 settlement of, on Becancour River-- 175
TUSCARORA, adopted into League of the Social organization Off -----2=02-=sees-—a-= 176
INOQUOIS = Hae ase eee neem se nee Ste ee 463 SYNONYMS for-ase- === Pee ecenteeion 171
TUTELO, adopted into League of the Iroquois. 463 | WAWKEET FAMILY, mention of___.-__-----_-- 209
UNCACHOGUE; dialect of_--..--------._.----- 214 | Wa-xTHI'-zHI—
Uncas— earthimamesigiveniby------------------== 52, 53
a Mohegan sachem recorder of Osage rite_--_.--..-.------.--- 30
ATIOH GOTO fae ere eet eee ae rituals described by - ------ 44
tradition concerning. --.-.---_-_.----.--- 259 | WAyYMOUTH, CAPTAIN, reference to__-------- 171
Uncas, MARTHA— WaA-ZHO’-I-GA-THE WI’-GI-E_________ 103-110, 113, 122
grandmother of Fidelia Fielding -_-__--__- 224 | WEARERS-OF-LOCKS. See (IN’-DSE-A-GTHE
BLOrysLold Dyes eee a 261 GENS.
UNCAS FAMILY, mention of__.._-------------- 224") (WEATHER LORE] 22222-2222 ~ case ena en ene 70-271
UncAS FORT— WEBBER, JAMES, aid rendered by----------- 219
Goserl bed: 22 eae eee see oe eee WEKAPAUG, a Narragansett village_-______-- 217
siege of. WENEMOVET, mention of______-_------------ 174
U’-NON WI'-GI-E. WENERRAMETT, a Wawenock at Falmouth
VARGAS, ROSENDO, myths dictated by____ 293, 294 conference
VILLAGE ISLAND, excavations at-----.-_--_-- 13 | WHIPPOORWILL, association of, with elves.__
WABANAKI GROUP— WY’-GI-ES—
culture Of 28 seen ancocnsssa > =~ 221-222 Chil d-namiing= 2s —-ses one ne a aa ae
present status of- eh 169 Marth) Nam62s2- 222 -2-o5 ee esaceeen-a==
relations of, with southern New England MOOS TC Dena a aren ene ee
Uri Des ee ee eee 216 i110 Dee fo eee eee ee eer
treaty of, with the English____ 175 most important
bribes Ofeamen a soe ene ae 221 Name-taking
Wa-CA’-BE GENS, personal names of_-______ 133, 135 ofthe! Bow peoples~--2-.c---==e-a—e
Wa-Kor’-pa, explanation of_.....-.-.-.-._-- 30 of the Red Eagle gens
828 INDEX
Page Page
Wr'-Gi-Es—Continued. WIND GENS, personal names of___-_-.---_-- 142-143
of the Wa’-tse-gi-tsi....... —.--.--------. 51-52 | WintTHROP, GOVERNOR, policy of_______-___- 462
of the Wa’-tse-tsi gens WITcHES, folk-tale of St 5245)
Old-ages:=-.2. 363%. 2.-t2e et ee WOLKE; story. abouts 22292 = eS aes Pe 355
origin, of the Tho’-xe gens. WOMEN, POSITION OF, in League of the Iro-
paraphrase of____-_-_-_--- QUois 2550-2 ES 228 2s et ee Be 463
relating to life symbols------_---------__ WoosszURRABOONET, sagamore of Wawe-
relating to symbolic hair cut_ 818 MO Che enn seen se ea seat aas eee eee 174
TightS}t0. 222 _=24-98- ee Se eee ee 44 | WyyYOUGHS FAMILY, mention of____ 224
Making of Bodless=---=---=sseee es eaeeeee 60-67 | Xo’-KaA—
Taking of Life Symbols___.-__-----.------- 73 ceremonial approach of, to sacred house__ 36-38
(UNO Be ae wean Joon oneeet sare Seen 101-103 ceremony of decorating-_-_-_._---_-.__-- 33-34
Wa-zho’-i-ga-the_ 103-110, 113-122 | Xv-THA’-Wa-TON-1y$—
Zha’-zhe Ki-fow - a9 322. ee 97-101, 110-113 wi’-gi-e recited by-..-.------.-.-.-.---_-- 73
WIGWAM FESTIVAL of the Mohegan__-____-_-- 255 wi’-gi-e recorded by_-----.-----.-.------ 84
WILDING, ANTHONY W., work of. ZHA’-ZHE KI-TON WI’-GI-E___-..--__-- 97-101, 110, 113
WILLIAMS, ROGER, reference to--....--..-_--
O
oe
Biss iy ol es
Gi os
Peis |
' 1& -
Z
ee
a,
Kase
HSONIAN INSTITUTION LI
“WIL
88 01453